Fitter Trade Chapter-wise Solved Papers Vol 1

Shared using Xodo PDF Reader and Editor
Telegram channel par judane ke liye Click kare

Youth Competition Times
ITI
FITTER TRADE
VOLUME-I
[English Medium]
Previous Years Chapterwise and
Sub-topicwise Objective Solved Papers
Useful for : RRB Loco Pilot Technician, ISRO, UPRVUNL, UPPCL, NPCIL, CRPF Tradesman, Metro
Maintainer, DMRC/LMRC/BMRC/JMRC, UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, Constable
Tradesman, BHEL, SAIL, DRDO, BARC, MES, IOCL, COAL, PGCIL, VIZAG Steel,
Mazagaon Dock Shipbuilders Ltd., Indian Ordian Factories, MP ITI TO
Chief Editor
A.K. Mahajan
Complied & Written By
Exam Expert Group
Editorial Office
12, Church Lane Prayagraj-211002
Mob. : 9415650134
Email : yctap12@gmail.com
website : www.yctbooks.com
 All rights reserved with Publisher
Publisher's Declaration
Edited and Published by A.K. Mahajan for YCT Publications Pvt. Ltd.
and printed by Laxmi Narayan Printing Press. In order to Publish the book,
full care has been taken by the Editor and the Publisher,
still your suggestions and queries are welcomed. Rs. : 695/-
In the event of any dispute, the judicial area will be Prayagraj.
Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join @ITI_Electrician_Exam
INDEX
Previous Years Exam Papers Analysis Chart ................................................................................................4-7
Trend Analysis of Pie Chart & Bar Graph ....................................................................................................... 8
Introduction : The Trade and Safety Means ----------------------------------------------------------------------------9-29
Importance of first Treatments ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------9
Industrial Accident and Safety ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 12
Symbols ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 25
Measurement and Systems of Units ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30-53
System of Units F.P.S., C.G.S. and M.K.S. ------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 30
Units of Angle Measurement and Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 49
Measuring Device and Tools -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54-148
Different Types of Rule------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 54
Marking Tool ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 57
Different Types of Calipers -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 77
Different Types of Tools ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 86
Combination Set, Try-Square -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------108
Different Types of Gauge ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------113
Micro Measuring Device ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 149-187
Micrometer---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------149
Vernier --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------168
Other Micro Measuring Device and Use ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------181
Forging ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 188-218
Forging and Types of Forging ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------188
Forging Tools-Hammer, Swage Block, Anvil and Other Tools ------------------------------------------------------195
Metallurgy ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 219-292
Property of Metal (Physical Property, Chemical Property, Mechanical Property ---------------------------------219
Metal Alloy --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------240
Ferrous and Non Ferrous Metal --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------255
Steel and Alloy Steel ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------275
Furnaces ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------287
Heat Treatment ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 293-337
Case Hardening and Method of Case Hardening ------------------------------------------------------------------------293
Annealing and Normalising -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------304
Hardening and Tempering---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------312
Ferrite, Cementite, Pearlite, Austenite, Martensite ----------------------------------------------------------------------322
Miscellaneous Question -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------325
Lathe Machine ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 338-519
The Part of Lathe Machine and their Work ------------------------------------------------------------------------------338
Lathe Cutting Tools and Angle ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------371
Work Holding and Work Supporting Devices and Used on Lathe Machine ---------------------------------------411
Operation Performed on Lathe Machine ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------438
Machine and Machine Operation ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------472
Grinding Wheel and Grinding Machine----------------------------------------------------------------------------- 520-548
Classification of Grinding ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------520
Bonds and Grite ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------536
Power Transmission ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------ 549-607
Types of Drive ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------549
Coupling and Pulleys of Types ---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------571
Classification of Gear --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------583
Fasteners -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 608-635
Classification of Fasterners -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------608
Locking Devices --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------625
Screw and Thread--------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 636-674
Classification of Thread -----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------636
Thread Angle and Formula --------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------659
Classification of Screw ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------669
Sheet Metal ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- 675-704
Classification of Sheet -------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------675
Joint of Sheet Metal ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------683
Type of Rivet and Rivet Joint ----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------691
Note : Welding, Interchangeability and Surface, Pipe and Pipe Fitting, Lapping and Honning, Die and Tap, Drilling and Boring,
Jig and Fixture, Reamer, File and Hacksaw, Vice, Cooling and Lubrication, Bearing, Automobile Engineering
Preventive Maintenance, Refrigeration and Airconditioning, Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines, Different Types
of Numerical Questions, Miscellaneous Questions Study Volume-II
2
ITI FITTER TRADE

Chapterwise Solved Papers
VOLUME -I
Introduction : The Trade and Safety Means
Measurement and Systems of Units
Measuring Device and Tools
Micro Measuring Device
Forging
Metallurgy
Heat Treatment
Lathe Machine
Grinding Wheel and Grinding Machine
Power Transmission
Fasteners
Screw and Thread
Sheet Metal
VOLUME - II
Welding
Interchangeability and Surface
Pipe and Pipe Fitting
Lapping and Honning
Die and Tap
Drilling and Boring
Jig and Fixture
Reamer
File and Hacksaw
Vice
Cooling and Lubrication
Bearing
Automobile Engineering
Preventive Maintenance
Refrigeration and Airconditioning
Fluid Mechanics and Hydraulic Machines
Different Types of Numerical Questions
Miscellaneous Questions
Technical Subject Fitter/Turner/Welder/Tubewell Mechanic/Machinist Trade

Importance for the safety and general precaution observed in the institute and in the section. Importance for the trade in the
development for the industrial economy for the country. What is the relavent instructions subject to the taught parchment to
made. Recreational, medical facilities and another extra curricular activities for the institute. All important guidance to be
given to the new comers to become familiar with the working for the Industrial Training Institute System included stores
procedures.
Safety accident prevention linear measurements its units dividers, calipers, hermaphrodite, calipers, hermaphrodite, center
punch, dot punch, your description and use's for the different types for the hammers, description, use and care for the 'v'
Blocks, marking off table.
Surface plate and auxiliary marking equipment, 'v' block, angle plates, parallel block, description types and use's, workshop
surface plate your use's accuracy, care and maintenance.
Physical properties for the engineering metal : color, weight, structure, conductivity, magnetic, fusibility specific gravity,
fusibility specific gravity. Mechanical properties: ductility, malleability hardness, brittleness, toughness, tenacity, elasticity.
Safety precaution to be observed in a sheet metal work-shop sheet and size. Commercial sizes and various types for the metal
sheet's coated and your use's as per ISI specifications.
Marking and measuring tools, Wing compass, Prick punch, tin man's square tools, snips, types and use's. Tin man's hammers
and mallets type- sheet metal tools, stakes-bench types, parts your use's. Soldering iron types, specifications, use's. Trammel,
description, parts, use's. Hand grooves specifications and use's.
Automobile Trade :
1. Main Parts of an Engine 2. Fuels of Engine
3. Fuel Supply system in Petrol engine & Carburettor 4. Fuel System of Diesel Engine
5. Ignition System & Spark Plug 6. Clutch
7. Tyre and Rim 8. Gear
9. Lubrication System 10. Rear Axle and Differential, Propeller Shaft
Refrigeration & Air Conditioning Trade :
1. Ideal Refrigeration Cycle 2. Tonns of Refrigeration
3. Refrigeration Effect 4. C.O.P. of Refrigeration
5. Vapour Absorption Cycle 6. Sensible Cooling
7. Sensible Heating 8. Humidification
9. Di-humidification
3
Previous Years Exam Papers of TG-2 Other

Technician Analysis Chart
S.L. Exam NAME EXAM DATE/TIME No. of Questions
Uttar Pradesh Rajya Vidyut Utpadan Nigam Limited (UPRVUNL)
1. UPRVUNL 22.12.2022 150
2. UPRVUNL 05.04.2021 150
3. UPRVUNL 09.11.2016 150
4. UPRVUNL 22.09.2015 150
5. UPRVUNL 09.05.2015 150
UPSSSC Asstt. Boring Technician & Tubewell Operator
6. UPSSSC Boring Technician 03.07.2022 30
7. UPSSSC Tubewell Operator 12.01.2019 60
8. UPSSSC Tubewell Operator 02.09.2018 60
9. UPSSSC Boring Technician 09.08.2015 30
10 UPSSSC Tracer 2015 30
Delhi Metro Rail Corporation (Maintainer)
11. DMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 21.02.2020 75
12. DMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 19.04.2018 (I-Shift) 75
13. DMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 19.04.2018 (II-Shift) 75
15. DMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 15.02.2017 (I-Shift) 75
16. DMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 15.02.2017 (II-Shift) 75
Noida, Lucknow, Jaipur & Bangalore Metro Rail Corporation
(NMRC/LMRC/JMRC/BMRC)
19. JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05.02.2021 55
20. NMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 15.09.2019 47
21. NMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 2017 80
22. LMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 16.03.2016 80
23. BMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 2016 50
ISRO (Technician-B)
24. ISRO Technician-B (Fitter) 21.10.2021 80
25. ISRO Technician-B (Turner) 14.07.2021 80
27. ISRO Technician-B (RAC) 03.11.2022 80
28. ISRO Technician-B (Machinist) 03.11.2022 80
29. ISRO VSSC Technician-B (Fitter) 14.07.2021 80
30. ISRO VSSC Technician-B (Turner) 14.07.2021 80
32. ISRO Technician-B (Fitter) 10.02.2019 (I-Shift) 80
33. ISRO Technician-B (Fitter) 10.02.2019 (II-Shift) 80
4

53. ISRO Technician-B (Plumber) 02.06.2019 80
56. ISRO Technician-B (Welder) 21.04.2018 80
59. ISRO Technician-B (Carpenter) 27.11.2016 60
60. ISRO Technician-B (Diesel Mechanic) 27.11.2016 60
61. ISRO Technician-B (Grinder) 27.11.2016 60
62. ISRO Technician-B (Motor Mechanic) 27.11.2016 60
RAILWAY RECRUITMENT BOARD ALP/Technician
63. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Fitter 23.01.2019 (III-Shift) 75
64. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Mechanic Motor 23.01.2019 (III-Shift) 75
Vehicle
65. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Fitter 21.01.2019 (I-Shift) 75
66. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Mechanic Diesel 08.02.2019 (II-Shift) 75
67. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) RAC 23.01.2019 (I-Shift) 75
68. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) 23.01.2019 (III-Shift) 75
69. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Heat Engine 08.02.2019 (II-Shift) 75
70. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Fitter 23.01.2019 (II-Shift) 75
71. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Mechanic Diesel 23.01.2019 (III-Shift) 75
72. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Mechanic Diesel 23.01.2019 (I-Shift) 75
73. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Heat Engine 23.01.2019 (III-Shift) 75
74. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) 23.01.2019 (I-Shift) 75
75. Assistant Loco pilot (ALP) Heat Engine 08.02.2019 (I-Shift) 75
76. R.R.B. Ajmer Asst. Loco Pilot 10.10.2004 100
78. R.R.B. Allahabad Asst. Loco Pilot 03.08.2008 100
79. R.R.B. Allahabad Asst. Loco Pilot 09.12.2007 100
80. R.R.B. Bangalore Asst. Loco Pilot 25.01.2004 100
83. R.R.B. Bhopal Asst. Loco Pilot 06.06.2010 100
84. R.R.B. Bhubneswar Asst. Loco Pilot 14.06.2009 100
85. R.R.B. Bhubneswar Asst. Loco Pilot 15.07.2012 100
86. R.R.B. Bilaspur Asst. Loco Pilot 15.07.2012 100
87. R.R.B. Chandigarh Asst. Loco Pilot 14.09.2008 100
90. R.R.B. Chennai Asst. Loco Pilot 06.06.2010 100
91. R.R.B. Chennai/Bangalore Asst. Loco Pilot 27.10.2002 100
92. R.R.B. Gorakhpur Asst. Loco Pilot 08.10.2006 100
5

97. R.R.B. Guwahati Asst. Loco Pilot 22.01.2006 100
98. R.R.B. Jammu-Kashmir Asst. Loco Pilot 06.06.2010 100
99. R.R.B. Kolkata Asst. Loco Pilot 02.11.2008 100
102. R.R.B. Kolkata Asst. Loco Pilot 2014 100
104. R.R.B. Malda Asst. Loco Pilot 16.07.2006 100
105. R.R.B. Mumbai Asst. Loco Pilot 03.06.2001 100
110. R.R.B. Mumbai/Bhopal Asst. Loco Pilot 05.01.2003 100
111. R.R.B. Muzaffarpur Asst. Loco Pilot 15.02.2009 100
112. R.R.B. Patna Asst. Loco Pilot 04.02.2007 100
113. R.R.B. Patna Asst. Loco Pilot 11.11.2001 100
114. R.R.B. Patna Asst. Loco Pilot 2014 100
115. R.R.B. Ranchi Asst. Loco Pilot 04.09.2005 100
118. R.R.B. Ranchi Asst. Loco Pilot 2014 100
120. R.R.B. Secunderabad Asst. Loco Pilot 06.06.2010 100
123. R.R.B. Siliguri Asst. Loco Pilot 2014 100
124. R.R.B. Trivandrum Asst. Loco Pilot 20.06.2004 100
125. R.R.B. Ahamadabad Asst. Loco Pilot 2014 100
126. R.R.B. Ahamadabad Asst. Loco Pilot 17.10.2004 100
INDIAN ORDNANCE FACTORY (IOF)
128. Indian Ordnance Factory 10.09.2017 80
129. Indian Ordnance Factory Apprentice Fitter 2017 90
130. Indian Ordnance Factory 2016 80
131. Indian Ordnance Factory 08.05.2016 80
DRDO
136. DRDO Fitter 2022 80
137. DRDO Turner 2022 80
138. DRDO Machinist 2022 80
139. DRDO Mechanic Motor Vehicle 2022 80
140. DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2022 80
141. DRDO Fitter 2016 100
142. DRDO Turner 2016 100
143. DRDO Machinist 2016 100
144. DRDO Mechanic Motor Vehicle 2016 100
145. DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 100
6
Himachal Pradesh
146. HPSSC Fitter 20.10.2019 120
147. HPSSC Jr. Technician (fitter) 30.08.2018 30.08.2018 120
Cochin Shipyard
148. Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 13.06.2022 20
149. Cochin Shipyard (Sheet Metal) 13.06.2022 20
150. Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14.12.2021 20
Haryana
151. HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03.08.2021 100
152. HSSC Fitter 09.08.2021 100
Northern Coalfields Limited (NCL)
153. NCL Tech. (Machinist) 27.12.2020 70
154. NCL Tech. (Fitter) 27.12.2020 70
155. NCL Tech. (Machinist) 10.07.2020 70
Other State & PSU's Examinations
156. DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03.11.2022 50
157. HPCL Maintenance & Tech. (Mech.) 07.08.2022 50
158. BDL Technician 2022 100
159. NLC Technician 24-09.2022 80
160. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 100
161. NPCIL Stipendiary Trainee (Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 50
162. MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022 75
163. BEML 2022 100
164. NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 100
165. NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 100
166. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 100
167. BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 100
168. NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 80
169. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 80
170. IOCL 2020 100
171. BHEL 2020 100
172. RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 100
173. SAIL (Fitter) 17.11.2019 80
174. BECIL (NE07) Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 45
175. CRPF Constable Tradesman 2016 40
176. SAIL Bokaro Steel Plant 2016 60
177. NTPC Fitter 2016 80
178. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 80
179. BEL Technician Fitter 20.11.2016 100
180. BEL Technician Fitter 19.11.2016 100
181. MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 75
182. HAL Fitter 2015 50
183. VIZAG Steel Fitter 2015 50
184. MES Fitter (Tradesman) 2015 50
185. NTPC Fitter 2014 60
186. BHEL Hyderabad Fitter 2014 100
187. SAIL Durgapur Steel Plant 2014 60
188. COAL India Fitter 2013 80
189. Mazagon Dock Shipbuilders Ltd. Fitter 2013 80
Total 15822
7
Trend Analysis of Fitter

Through Pie Chart and Bar Graph
Fasteners, 283 Screw and Sheet Metal, 256 Introduction : The

Thread, 356 Trade and Safety
Power Means, 179
Transmission, 441 Measurement
and Systems
of Units, 214
Grinding Measuring
Wheel Device and
and Tools, 720
Grinding Micro
Machine, Measuring
269 Device, 326
Forging, 278
Lathe
Machine, 1494 Heat
Treatment, 362 Metallurgy, 676
8
Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join

@ITI_Electrician_Exam
01. for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job Updates
Introduction : The Trade and
Safety Means
CPR can keep oxygen rich blood flowing to the brain
1. Importance of first treatments and other organs until emergency medical treatment can
restore a typical heart rhythm.
1. In a 5S concept the term 'Seiso (Shine)' standsThe three basic parts of CPR are easily remembered as
for _______. "CAB" : C for compressions, A for airway and B for
breathing.
(a) Segregate needed item from unneeded and
clear the later. 4. If a patient does not respond to mouth
(b) Keep needed item in correct place. resuscitation treat a first aider should
immediately……
(c) Keep the work piece neat and clean.
(a) seek medical help
(d) Maintain the established procedures.
(b) check for broken limbs
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(c) keep the body warm with blankets
Ans. (c) : The concept of 5S– 5S is a methodical way (d) check pupils of eyes and pulse
to organize workplace and working practices as well as
BEML 2022
being an overall philosophy and way of working. It is
split into 5 phases each named after a different Japanese RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
Ans. (a) : If a patient does not respond to mouth
term beginning with the letter "S" (Seiri, seiton, seiso,
seiketsu, shitsuke). resuscitation treat, a first-aider should seek medical
Hence the name 5S. help.
Seiri – Sort, classify 5. 5S stands for …….
Seiton – Straighten, simplify, set in order, configure (a) Sort, Systematic, Segregation,
Seiso – Sweep, shine scrub, clean and check Standardization and Sustain
Seiketsu – Standardize, stabilize, conformity (b) Sort, Set, Shine, Standardization, Sustain
Shitsuke – Sustain, self discipline, custom and (c) Sort, Sequence, Segregation, Standardization,
practice. Sustain
(d) Sort, Set, Systematic, Standardization Sustain
2. A victim of electric shock is unconscious and
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
not breathing. In case the victim's mouth is
closed tightly, which method of artificial Ans. (b) : 5S stand for–
resuscitation/respiration is more suitable? Japanese English
(a) Mouth-to-mouth method Seiri Sort
(b) Nelson's method Seiton Set
Seiso
(c) Schaffer's method or, Holger-Nielsen method Shine
(d) None of these Seiketsu Standaridize
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022 Shitsuke Sustain
Ans. (c) : • A victim of electric shock is unconscious6. Benefits of the 5S systems are……
and not breathing in case the victim's mouth is closed (a) increase the cleanliness
tightly, then schaffer's method or Holger-Nielsen (b) increase the productivity
method of artificial resuscitation respiration is more (c) increase the production rate
suitable. (d) maintain the production rate
3. What is CPR in safety? RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
(a) Cardio pulmonary resuscitation Ans. (b) : Benefits of the 5S system are increase the
(b) Cardiac prevention remedies productivity.
(c) Cardiac pulsating rate
(d) None of these
Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022
IOCL 2020
Ans. (a) : Cardio pulmonary resuscitation (CPR) is a
lifesaving technique that's useful in many emergencies,
such as a heart attack or near drowning, in which 5S is organization technique to create and maintain
someone's breathing or heartbeat has stopped. intuitive workplace.
Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 9 YCT

7. The first aid boxes should be properly Ans. (b) : If your clothes catch fire on the work spot,
equipped and kept in ……… you will roll over the ground.
(a) important places (b) machining area • If a worker has suffered from electric shock, he
(c) easy access place (d) right position should be kept warm and covered.
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 13. If a person faints due to suffocation, the first
Ans. (c) : The first aid boxes should be properly aid to be given is
equipped and kept in easy access place. (a) Give him a warm drink
8. If a worker has suffered from electric shock, he (b) Sprinkle cold water on his face
should be (c) Place him on a well ventilated location
(a) Given an alcoholic drink (d) Give him artificial respiration
(b) Given a cold drink NTPC Fitter 2016
(c) Made to walk RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(d) Kept warm and covered Ans. (c) : If a person faints due to suffocation, the first
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 aid to be given the place him on a well ventilated
location.
Ans. (d) : If a worker has suffered from electric shock,
he should be kept worm and covered. 14. Which of the following should not be kept in a
first-aid kit?
9. In case of electric fire, which one of the
(a) Sterile dressings (b) Plasters
following should not be used:
(c) Eye dressing (d) Headache tablets
(a) Put water on it
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(b) Use sand or clay
(c) Use C. T. C. extinguisher Ans. (d) : A workshop should have the following
facilities and medicine for first aid treatment.
(d) Use dry chemical power
• Tincture iodine • Tincture benzoin • Dettol • Burnol
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
• Pain killers • Bandage • Cotton • Safety pin • Raw
Ans. (a) : in case of electric fire never throw water on plaster • Wooden splinters • Netted cloth • Gloss for
an electrical fire because water conducts electricity and
giving medicines • Gloss for cleaning eyes • Dropper
you could be electrocuted.
• Stretcher etc.
• If you don't have a fire extinguisher, you can use
baking soda to extinguish an electrical fire. • Headache tablets not be kept in a first-aid kit.
15. In case of an accident, the victim should
10. What is the first action if a colleague (victim)
immediately be
received a heavy electric shock?
(a) asked to take rest
(a) Pull the victim from the live conductor
(b) enquired about the accident
(b) Pour water to avoid burning of victim
(c) attended to immediately
(c) Fetch the first aid box
(d) left to himself without treatment
(d) Switch of the current immediately
Ans. (c) : In case of an accident, the victim should
Ans. (d) : Switch off the current immediately is the first immediately be attended to and given first aid before a
action if a colleague (victim) received a heavy electric trained medical worker arrives.
shock.
16. Oil fire is extinguished by:
11. In ABC of first aid, A stands for Airway, B (a) Putting water on it
stands for breathing and C stands for.... (b) Foam extinguisher
(a) Cardio problem (c) Sod acid extinguisher
(b) Circulation (d) None of the above
(c) Cardio arrest RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(d) Cleaning and dressing Ans. (b) : Oil fire is extinguished by foam extinguisher.
17. Soft skill helps in –
Ans. (b) : In ABC of first aid, 'A' stand for airway, 'B' (a) getting promotions
stands for breathing and 'C' stand for circulation. (b) finding better jobs
A – Airway, B – Breathing, C – Circulation. (c) developing a good personality
12. If your clothes catch fire on the work spot, (d) all of the above
what will you do first? RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
(a) Run away from the spot Ans. (d) : Soft skill helps in–
(b) Roll over the ground (i) Getting promotions (ii) Finding better jobs (iii)
(c) Put a thick blanket all over the body Developing a good personality (iv) The modern
(d) Direct a fire extinguisher towards the clothes workplace in interpersonal (v) Customer and clients
BHEL 2020 demand soft skills (vi) Improve your workplace
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 productivity.
18. A person possessing good personal skills should Ans. (a) Fire–Combustion/burning of any inflammable.
have certain qualities which include – In the combustion of any substance, the following three
(a) confidence (b) determination factors are presents in appropriate amounts–
(c) patience (d) all of the above 1. Fuel 2. Heat 3. Oxygen
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Cause of caught fire–
Ans. (d) : A person possessing good personal skills 1. Loosing of electrical wiring condition.
should have certain qualities which include– 2. Smelting increase workshop.
(1) Confidence (2) determine (3) patience (4) Ambition 3. Short circuit in workshop.
(5) creativity (6) flexibiliity. 4. Searing of explosive and inflammable substance here
19. Fire due to electricity should be controlled by and there.
putting ______ 5. Overloading of electrical wiring.
(a) sand (b) clay 24. Which chemical is used in the soda acid fire
(c) CO2 (d) water extinguisher
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (a) Carbon dioxide
Ans. (c) : Fire due to electricity should be controlled by (b) Sulphur dioxide (SO2)
putting CO2 (carbon di-oxide). (c) Aluminium sulphate
• If a worker has suffered from electric shock, he (d) Sodium bicarbonate
should be kept worm and covered.
20. If a patient is not responding to the mouth-to IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
mouth respiration, then the primary attendant UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
should-
Ans. (d) : Soda Acid fire extinguisher–Carbonous fire
(a) immediately search for medical assistance caused by wood, cloth and other solid combustive
(b) check the fractured bones materials, soda acid fire extinguisher is used for
(c) check the body warm with a quilt extinguishing. It should not extinguish an electrical fires
(d) check nerves and eyes because its released chemicals are good conductors of
BHEL Hyderabad Fitter 2014 electricity. chemical in it as sodium bicarbonate is used.
Ans. (a) : If a patient is not responding to the mouth-to- 25. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA)
mouth respiration, then the primary attendant should codes and standards are adopted and used
immediately search for medical assistance. throughout the world to minimise the
21. The best way to avoid an accident is – possibility of fire and other risks. Which code
(a) wearing safety equipments of NFPA deals with Standards for Fire Officer
(b) following safety rules pertaining to job professional qualifications?
machine and work area (a) 1389 (b) 1710
(c) following own way of working (c) 1002 (d) 1021
(d) working like a skilled labor Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 Ans. (d) For fire officer professional qualification the
Ans. (b) : The best way to avoid and accident is follow 1021 code is used for the NFPA standard.
safety rules pertaining to job machine and work area. 26. In the event of an accident, immediately to the
victim–
22. Materials used in primary treatment is / are –
(a) Should be told for rest
(a) tincture iodine (b) burnol (b) Should inquire about accident
(c) dettol (d) all of the above (c) Should provide help (Assistance)
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 (d) Should be left without treatment
Ans. (d) : Materials used in primary treatment are– UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
1. Tincture iodine 2. Tincture benzoin 3. Dettol Ans. (c) : First aid–Medical first aid given to the
4. Burnol 5. Pain killers 6. Bandage 7. Cotton 8. Safety patient before the arrival of the doctor. In the event of
pin 9. Raw plaster 10. Wooden splinters 11. Netted an accident, immediately to the victim should provide
cloth 12. Gloss for giving medicines 13. Gloss for assistance.
cleaning eyes 14. Dropper 15. Stretcher etc. Materials for first aid–
23. Which of the following options is • Tincher iodine
INCORRECT with respect to the key elements • Mercury cream
of a fire safety management system? • Tincher benzoin
(a) Regularisation of staff leave plan • Dettol
(b) Regular evacuation drills • Pain killer
(c) Maintenance and servicing of fire equipment • Cotton
(d) Staff training • Betadin
BDL Technician 2022 • Netted cloth
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019 • Safety pin
27. The first Aid in case of snake bite is Ans : (d) For body safety–
(a) Pour water on wound • Gloves
(b) Put antiseptic on wound • Apron
(c) Tie cloth around wound and cut the wound to • Coveralls etc.
bleed the blood
(d) Rub the wound 33. Always while grinding–
(a) Stand in front of wheel
ISRO Technician Plumber 27-11-2016
(b) Stand on the side of the wheel
Ans. (c) : The first treatment for snake bite is first of all (c) Wear goggles
cloth should be tied on the wound and the wound should (d) Both (a) and (c) above
be cut to let the blood comeout. NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
28. Which fire extinguisher is used to control class (HAL Fitter, 2015)
'B' fire– Ans : (b) Always stand on the side of the wheel while
(a) Waterr (b) Carbon tetracloride grinding with a grinder at the workpiece because the
(c) Wood chips (d) CO2 sparks come out the wheel can harm you and for this
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III you should also wear eye glasses.
Ans : (d)
Fire Type of fire Fire
class extinguisher 2. Industrial accident and safety
used
Class-A Carbonace fire Water, sand, soda 34. Fire due to metals are classified as _____.
(wood, paper, coal) acid (a) Class M (b) Class D
Solid fuel (c) Class P (d) Class K
Class-B Liquid fuel (diesel, Foam type UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
petrol, kerosene) extinguisher, Co2
extinguisher Ans. (b) : Fires are classified according to the various
type of combustible fuel that has been ignited, if the
Class-C Gases fuel (LPG, CO2, Hylone
wrong type of fire extinguisher is used it could cause
methane, CNG, etc.) chemical
the fire to spread or injure the operator.
Class-D Electric current, CTC (Carbon
metallic fire tetra chloride) Class of fire
29. .......... Used for safety of head– A Wood, paper, fabric, plastic
(a) hard hats (b) helmets B Flammable liquids (for example
(c) caps (d) both (a) and (b) gasoline)
(IOF Fitter, 2016) C Burning gases (for example, natural
Ans : (d) Head protection– gas)
• Safety helmets D Combustible metal such as
• Hard hats magnesium, potassium and
• Hair net zirconium
• Bump cap
E Fires involving potentially
Respiratory protection–
energized electrical equipment
• Gas respirator
• Positive gauge pressure respirator K Unsaturated cooling oils in well
• Automatic respirator devices. insulated cooking appliances
located in commercial kitchens.
30. Wore for safety of legs–
(a) Slipper (b) Canvas shoes 35. Which of the following is not a Personal
(c) Lather shoes (d) All of above Protective Equipment?
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001) (a) Spanner (b) Ear plugs
Ans : (c) Safety equipments for legs– (c) Face shield (d) Safety shoes
• Lather shoes UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
• Safety shoes Ans. (a) : Personal protective equipment is designed to
31. Used for safety of eyes– protect from hazards and minimise the risk of injury or
(a) Goggles (b) Glasses facility.
(c) Face Shields (d) All of above • Personal protective equipment (PPE) usually consists
(IOF Fitter, 2015) of the following–
Ans : (d) Eye protection equipments–While working 1. Respiratory protection requirement
in the workshop to protect the eyes goggles, glasses and 2. Personal alert safety system (PASS)
face shield should be used to protect the eyes remain 3. Helmets, coats, trousers, protective gloves and
safe. protective hoods.
32. Used for safety of body– 4. Eye protection
(a) Coveralls (b) Gloves 5. Hearing protection
(c) Apron (d) All the above
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) • Spanner is not a personal protective equipment.

36. In related to use of fire extinguisher the term (a) Spraying jets of water on the base of the fire
P.A.S.S. stand for and then gradually upwards
(a) Pull - Action - Squeeze - Sweep (b) Cutting off the supply of oxygen to the using
(b) Pull - Aim - Squeeze - Sweep foam, dry powder of CO2
(c) Push - Aim - Sweep - Squeeze (c) Any of (a) or (b)
(d) None of these
(d) Push - Action - Sweep - Squeeze
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022
Ans. (c) : • Spraying jets of water on the base of the fire
Ans. (b) : PASS system stands for Pull, Aim, Squeeze and then gradually upwards or cutting of the supply of
and Sweep. It describes the stages in which a fire oxygen to the fire using foam, dry power or CO2 is more
extinguisher should be operated and explains what each effective for extinguishing a fire involving large wood,
stage entails, giving enough information for the operator cloth or paper as a fuel.
to use the extinguisher safety. • Wood, cloth and paper fires are class-A type of fire.
37. Which shape is used for 'prohibition' and 40. There is some fault in a live electrical circuit or
'mandatory' type safety signs? appliance and you need to repair/service it.
(a) circular (b) triangular Which of the following does not represent a
(c) square (d) elliptical good safety practice?
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022 (a) Stand on a wooden stool.
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (b) Stand on an insulated ladder.
(c) Keep the main switch on and keep the circuit
Ans. (a) : The shape is used for prohibition and live.
mandatory type safety signs is circular.
(d) Open the main switch and make the circuit
dead
Ans. (c) : • There is some fault in a live electrical or
appliance and you need to repair/service, keep the main
switch on and keep the circuit live does not represent a
• The shape is used for warning (caution risk of danger) safety practice/method.
is triangular type.
41. What immediate action is recommended in case
of severe bleeding?
(a) make the patient to lie down and rest.
(b) raise the injured part above the level of the
body.
(c) apply pressure to the wound.
• The shape is used for safe condition is, (d) All of these
rectangular/square UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022
Ans. (d) : Following action is recommended in case of
severe bleeding–
A. Apply pressure to the wound
B. Raise the injured part above the level of the body
38. What is starving in extinguishing of fire? C. Make the patient to live down and rest
(a) Adding fuel to the fire 42. Extinguishing of fire through the process of
(b) Using water to cool the fire isolating the fire from the supply of oxygen by
(c) Removing fuel element from the fire blanketing it with foam, sand etc. is known as:
(d) Preventing oxygen supply to the fire (a) Smothering (b) Cooling
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022 (c) Watering (d) Starving
Ans. (c) : • Removing fuel element from the fire is UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022
starving in extinguishing of fire. Ans. (a) : • Extinguishing of fire through the process of
• If any combustible material can be removed or gas or isolating the fire from the supply of oxygen by blanketing
it with foam, sand etc. is known as smothering.
fuel flows shut off.
• Starvation is achieved by the removal of the fuel
• The most commonly used fire fighting medium is burning in the fire.
water, referring to the triangle of fire, cools the heat • Any combustible material can be removed or gas or
being produced in the fire to below ignition fuel flows shut off.
temperature. 43. Unsafe working habits always end up in loss of:
39. Which method is more effective for (a) production (b) profits
extinguishing a fire involving large wood, cloth (c) personal injury (d) All of these
or paper as a fuel? UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022
Ans. (c) : Unsafe working habits always end up in loss 49. Which is true regarding CO2 extinguisher?
of personal injury. (a) Carbon dioxide is filled in it at 2 bar pressure
44. ........... is used for the fire caused by electricity (b) It produces CO2 by chemical reaction
in a factory. (c) It extinguishes fire by displacing the air from
(a) Water (b) Soil the surrounding
(c) CTC extinguisher (d) All of these (d) It can not be used for fire caused due to
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 electrical equipments
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 NLC Technician 24-09.2022
Ans. (c) : CTC is used for the fire caused by electricity JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
in a factory. Ans. (d) : CO2 extinguisher work by displacing the air
• The CTC fire extinguisher full form is Carbon from surrounding. As carbon dioxide is also very cold
Tetrachloride Fire Extinguisher. as it comes out of the extinguisher, so it cools the fuel
• It is used to be very effective extinguisher for as well.
combating the small fire.
50. To extinguish fire due to flammable liquids
45. To control fire from oil, petrol etc., which which type of extinguishing agent is used?
extinguisher is used? (a) Foam
(a) Water (b) CO2
(b) Water
(c) Foam (d) CTC
(c) Carbon Tetra Chloride
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(d) None of the above
NTPC Fitter-2014
ISRO Technician B (RAC) 03-11-2022
Ans. (c) : Foam extinguisher is used to control fire from
oil, petrol etc. Foam extinguishers takes away the 'heat' Ans. (a) : Foam fire extinguishers are suitable to fight
elements that is one of the conditions for the fire to take burning solids such as wood as liquid fires such as
place. burning petrol. The foam has the ability to creep over
46. Fire can be reduced by removing ________. the burning liquid or to soak into burning.
(a) Oxygen (b) Heat 51. The fuel involved Class 'D' fire is
(c) Fuel (d) Any of above (a) Flammable Liquid (b) Wood/Paper
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 (c) Metals (d) Liquefied Gas
Ans. (d) : ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
• The three essential things required to reduced fir are Ans. (c) : The fuel involved class 'D' fire is metals
fuel, heat and oxygen. Classes Types of fires
• The air supplies oxygen and heat to raise the of fire
temperature of the fuel beyond the ignition Class 'A' Ordinary combustibles such as wood,
temperature. paper, cloth, rubber, and some plastics.
• Fire can be reduced by removing any one of these
Class 'B' Flammable liquids such as gasoline,
factors.
petroleum, greases, tars, oils, oil based
47. Which of the following is used to extinguish paints, solvents, alcohols.
fire? Flammable gases such as propane and
(a) Water (b) Foam butane.
(c) Chemical (d) All of above
Class 'C' Energized electrical equipment such as
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
computers, servers, motors, transformers
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
and appliance
Ans. (d) : Water, chemical & foam all are used to
extinguish fire. Class 'D' Combustible metals such as magnesium,
titanium, zirconium, sodium, lithium and
• No single extinguisher can be used to tackle every fire
potassium
& because each type of fire extinguisher has different
categories of fire on which it is effective. 52. Which type of fire extinguisher is used in
48. _______ present in the industry should be kept welding shop?
in security cordon for the safety of the (a) Foam type extinguisher
personnel (b) Dry powder extinguisher
(a) Temperature indicators (c) CO2 extinguisher
(b) Stock of welding rods (d) Halon extinguisher
(c) Tailstock of lathe RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
(d) Flywheel of prime movers Ans. (c) : CO2 type of fire extinguisher is used in
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 welding shop.
Ans. (d) : Prime movers of flywheel present in the • Foam, water and dry chemical are used in class 'A'
industry should be kept in security cordon for the safety fire.
of personal. • Dry powder to put off class C fire.
53. An accident is Ans. (c) : While grinding safety goggles must use.
(a) Unplanned event • While grinding a tool gloves, apron and glass
(b) Non-controlled event should not be worm.
(c) Undesirable event • In case of arc welding dark glass screen should
(d) All of the above protect eyes.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
60. A hammer with loosely fitted handle will
Ans. (d) : An accident is– (a) Fly away and cause accident
• Unplanned event (b) Absorb shock
• Non-controlled event (c) Have easy swing
• Undesirable event. (d) Convey more leverage
54. Which one of the following is not the cost due RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
to an accident?
Ans. (a) : A hammer loosely fitted handle will fly away
(a) Cost due to damage to machine, tools,
material and property and cause of accident.
(b) Cost of lost time of the injured person 61. What should never be placed on a burn
(c) Cost of compensation and medical aid (a) Aloe (b) Water
(d) Cost due to increase in production (c) Coco butter (d) Dry sterile
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 Ans. (c) : Coco butter should never be placed on a burn.
Ans. (d) : Cost due to increase production is not the 62. The fire triangle in fire hazards is identified as..
cost due to an accident. (a) fuel, oxygen, and heat
55. The safe way of working is (b) fuel, oxygen, and vapour
(a) An effective and right way of working (c) fuel, burning and solid
(b) An ancient way of working (d) fuel, oil and waste
(c) A way of handling the work in a hurry RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(d) A way of normal working
Ans. (a) : The fire triangle in fire hazards in defined as
UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018 fuel oxygen and heat.
Ans. (a) : The safe of working is an effective and right
way of working.
56. An oily floor should be cleaned by
(a) Cotton waste
(b) Putting water
(c) Putting saw dust
(d) Spraying carbon dioxide or sand
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 63. Which of the following fire extinguishing agent
Ans. (c) : An oily floor should be cleaned by putting is suitable for a live electrical fire?
saw dust. (a) Water
57. Fire is a combination of (b) Carbon dioxide
(a) Fuel, light and oxygen (c) Carbon Tetrachloride
(b) Fuel, heat and oxygen (d) foam
(c) Fuel, heat and carbon dioxide RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
(d) Fuel, light and nitrogen
Ans. (c) : Carbon tetrachloride fire extinguishing agent
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.05.2015
is suitable for live electrical fire.
Ans. (b) : Fire is a combination of fuel, heat and
oxygen. • Carbon dioxide (CO2) – suitable for class-B fires
• Foam extinguishers are suitable for – flammable
58. In case of arc welding, one should protect his
eyes by using liquid fires, running liquid fires.
(a) Dark glass screen (b) Sun goggles 64. In case of electric fire, which one of the
(c) Mask (d) Clear glasses following should not be used_______.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 (a) Put water on it
Ans. (a) : In case of arc welding, one should protect his (b) Use sand or clay
eyes by using 'Dark glass screen'. (c) Use C.T.C. extinguisher
• While grinding safety goggles must use. (d) Use dry chemical powder
59. While grinding one must use RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
(a) Dark glass screen (b) Mask Ans. (a) : In case of electric fire do not put water on it.
(c) Safety goggles (d) Sun goggles • If a worker has suffered from electric shock, he
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 should be kept worm and covered.

65. Who is responsible for providing you with Ans. (a) : Die nut is used to rectify damaged or rested
Personal Protective Equipment? threads. or
(a) Your employer (b) Your supervisor Die nut (Solid nut)– The die nut is used for chasing or
(c) Your co-worker (d) Yourself reconditioning the damaged threads.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 • Die nuts are not to be used for cutting new threads.
Ans. (a) : Your employer is responsible for providing • The die nuts are available for different standards
you with personal protective equipment (PPE). and sizes of threads.
66. Machine guards should be fitted to protect the 71. Which should be done immediately if a
operator and other nearby from – cylinder leaks due to defective valves or safety
(a) In running nip points plug?
(b) Flying chips & sparks (a) Try to repair it yourself
(c) Rotating parts (b) Ask other to repair it
(d) All of these (c) Inform the supplier
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 (d) Move it to a safe area
Ans. (d) : Machine guards should be fitted to protect NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
the operator and other nearby from in running nip RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
points, flying chips and sparks and rotating parts. Ans. (d) : Move it to a safe area should be done
67. Personal Protective Equipment is required immediately if a cylinder leaks due to defective values
when – or safety plug.
(a) Employers suffer an injury 72. If a person gets electric shock, what should be
(b) The employees suffer an injury the immediate action?
(c) An employee asks for it (a) Disconnect the electric current
(d) Engineering, work practice, and (b) Given him to drink sugar water
administrative controls do not provide (c) Use gloves
sufficient protection against hazards (d) Rush to the hospital
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Ans. (d) : Personal protective equipment is required Ans. (a) : If a person gets electric shock disconnect the
when engineering work practice, and administrative electric current immediate action.
controls do not provide sufficient protection against • If a worker has suffered from electric shock, he/she
hazards. should be kept worm and covered.
68. In case of any problem during machine 73. If there is LPG leakage at home or workshop,
running, what should be done first– what should you do––
(a) Start shouting (a) Do not switch on the lights and fans
(b) Run electric panel (b) Do not switch off the lights and fans
(c) Call senior (c) Open the doors
(d) Press red button in front (d) All of these
Ans. (d) : In case of any problem during machine Ans. (d) : If there is LPG leakage at home or workshop,
running, what should be done first press red button in what should we do–
front. • Do not switch on the lights and fans
69. The following extinguisher is suitable for cotton • Do not switch off the lights and fans.
or other textile fire : • Open the doors and widows to ensure ventilation.
(a) Water (b) Soda acid 74. The safety device used to protect eyes while
(c) Foam (d) Dry chemicals grinding is
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (a) Hand screen (b) Helmet
Ans. (a) : Water CO2 fire extinguisher is suitable for (c) Chipping goggles (d) Chipping screen
cotton or other textile fire. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• Foam, water and dry chemicals are used in class A Ans. (c) : The safety device used to protect eyes while
type of fire extinguishers. grinding is chipping goggles (safety goggles).
• Foam is best suited to extinguish oil or flammable • The safety device used to protect eyes while are
liquid fire. welding is dark glass screen.
• The three factors cause fire are oxygen, fuel and 75. There are three pre-requisites for any fire or
heat. explosion to take place. Which one of the
70. Which one of the following is used to rectify following is not included in the three pre-
damaged or rusted threads ? requisites?
(a) Die nut (b) Circular split die (a) Fuel (b) Oxygen
(c) Two-piece die (d) Die plate (c) Nitrogen (d) Ignition
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
Ans. (c) : There are three pre requisites for any fire or Ans. (d) : To put off class B fire the type of fire
explosion to take place and that is– (1) Oxygen (2) fuel extinguisher used is foam type.
(3) Heat (ignition). 82. The three factors that cause fire are oxygen,
• Nitrogen is not included in the three pre-requisites. fuel and ........
76. In first aid, applying pressure to stop a (a) Heat (b) CO2
bleeding becomes….. (c) H2O (d) Hazardous
(a) safe (b) unsafe RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(c) dangerous (d) no dangerous Ans. (a) : The three factors that cause fire are oxygen
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 fuel and heat.
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Ans. (a) : In first aid, applying pressure to stop bleeding
becomes safe.
• A workshop should have the following
facilities and medicine for first aid treatment–
1. Tincture iodine 2. Tincture benzoin 3. Dettol
4. Burnol 5. Pain killers 6. Bandage 7. Cotton 8. Safety
83. Which one of the following fire extinguishers is
pin 9. Raw plaster 10. Wooden splinters 11. Netted
suitable for the live electrical fire?
cloth 12. Glass for giving medicines 13. Glass for
(a) Halon
cleaning eyes 14. Dropper 15. Stretcher etc.
(b) Water
77. What is safety so as to cultivate? (c) Foam
(a) Concept (b) Habit (d) Liquefied chemical
(c) Culture (d) Discipline RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 Ans. (a) : Halon fire extinguishers is suitable for the
Ans. (d) : Discipline is safety so as to cultivate. live electrical fire.
78. First aid procedure often consists of simple and • Foam, water and dry chemical are used in class A
basic life saving techniques, that an individual type of fire extinguisher.
performs with proper training and…. • In case of electric fire, water should not be used.
(a) Knowledge (b) experience 84. A person being electrocuted should be removed
(c) skill education (d) None of the above from the live supply by means of
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 (a) A length of metal pipe
Ans. (c) : First aid procedure often consists of simple (b) A length of dry timber
and basic life saving techniques, that an individual (c) A length of wet timber
performs with proper training and skill education. (d) A scaffold pole
79. Which is the cause of electric fire? RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
(a) Loose connection Ans. (b) : A person being electrocuted should be
(b) Overloading the wires removed from the live supply by means of a length of
(c) Electric short circuit dry timber.
(d) All of these 85. Burning wood is classed as which type of fire?
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 (a) Class A (b) Class B
Ans. (d) : The cause of electric fire is– (c) Class C (d) Class D
(1) Loose connection (2) Over loading the wires (3) RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
Electric short circuit (4) Faulty electrical outlets (5) Ans. (a) : Analyze and identify the type of fire refer
Worn out sockets that aren't properly grounded. table–1
Class-A Wood, paper, cloth, solid material
80. Before cleaning the machine, the machine
should be_____ Class-B Oil based fire (grease, gasoline, oil)
liquefiable gases.
(a) Run (b) Stopped
Class-C Gas and liquid fiable gases
(c) Switched in (d) Moved
Class-D Metals and electrical equipment.
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
86. On finding a fire in a building a machinist's
Ans. (b) : Before cleaning the machine, the machine first action should be
should be stopped. (a) Raise an alarm (b) Fight the fire
81. To put off class B fire, the type of Fire (c) Leave the building (d) Carry on working
extinguisher used is .......... BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(a) Dry powder (b) Jet of water RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
(c) Carbon dioxide (d) Foam type Ans. (a) : On finding a fire in a building a machinist's
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 first action should be raise an alarm.
87. To put off class C fire, the type of extinguisher 91. While grinding a tool ________ should always
used is …. be worn.
(a) dry powder (b) carbon dioxide (a) gloves (b) apron
(c) jet to water (d) foam type (c) glass (d) all of the above
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
Ans. (a) : Ans. (d) : Wear safety glasses or goggles or a face
Fuel Extinguishing shield to protect against flying particles. Gloves aprons
metatarsal safety boots, hearing protection and
Class 'A' fire Most effective i.e. cooling with
wood, paper, water jets of water should be respiratory protection may be required depending on the
cloth etc. solid sprayed on the base of the fire and work. Ensure the floor around the work area is clean.
materials then gradually upwards. 92. Match the following accidents with their
Class 'B' fire Water should never be used on solutions.
flammable burning liquids. Foam, dry Accidents Solution
liquidable solid powder or CO2 may be used on 1. Burnt by acid (A) Giving artificial
this type of fire. respiration
Class 'C' fire gas Dry power extinguishers are used 2. Burnt by metal (B) Clean using running
and liquefied gas on this type of fire. water
Special powders have now be 3. Breathing stops (C) Dry bandage
developed which are capable of (a) I (C), 2(A), 3(B) (b) I (C), 2(B), 3(A)
controlling and/or extinguishing (c) I (B), 2(A), 3(C) (d) I (A), 2(C), 3(B)
this type of fire. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
Class 'D' fire Carbon dioxide, dry powder and Ans. (b) :
metal & electric vaporizing liquid (CTC) Accident Solution
equipment extinguishers can be used to deal
Burnt by acid – Dry bandage
with fires in electrical equipment
foam or liquid (i.e. water) Burnt by metal – Clean using running water
extinguisher must be used on Breathing stops – Giving artificial respiration
electrical equipment under any 93. What should be placed on a burn ?
circumstances. (a) Aloevera
88. Safety can be effectively expressed by ….. (b) Water
(a) showing unsafe actions of an individual (c) Dry sterile dressing
(b) showing the correct actions of an individual (d) All of the above
(c) showing the actions of skilled worker RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(d) showing unsafe action by posters and safe Ans. (d) : Aloevera, water and dry sterile dressing
methods practice should be placed on a burn.
BEML 2022 94. Fire, caused due to petrol, diesel and oils
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 belongs to the category–
Ans. (b) : Safety can be effectively expressed by (a) class A (b) class B
showing the correct action of an individual. (c) class C (d) class D
89. Which of the following things should be present IOCL 2020
in the first aid box ? RRB ALP Patna 2014
(a) Gauze bandage (b) Adhesive tape Ans. (b) : Fire caused due to petrol, diesel and oils
(c) Pair of scissors (d) All of the above belong to the category class B.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 • Fire caused due to wood, paper, cloth etc. belongs
Ans. (d) : A first aid box consists of all the things to the category class A.
necessary for providing aid against a minor would or • Fire caused due to gas and liquefied gas belongs to
injury during an accident. the category class 'C'.
• It consists of things like– • Fire caused due to electric equipment or metal
(1) Gauze bandage (2) Adhesive tape (3) Pair of belongs to the category class 'D'.
scissors (4) Cotton (5) Antiseptic cream etc. 95. Class D fires, involve fire caused due to
90. While working on a machine _________ should flammable metals such as –
not be worn. (a) magnesium (b) sodium
(a) loose clothes (b) shoes (c) potassium (d) all of the above
(c) apron (d) gloves RRB ALP Patna 2014
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 Ans. (d) : Class D fires involves fire caused due to
Ans. (a) : While working on a machine loose clothes flammable metal such as magnesium, sodium, titanium
should not be worn. and potassium.
96. Which of the following is / are required for 7. The workshop floor should be neat and clean.
burning a substance ? 8. A fire extinguisher plant should always be readily
(a) Oxygen available in a workshop.
(b) Flammable material 9. We shouldn't stand under a moving crane.
(c) A source of heat 10. There should be no oil, grease etc. on the workshop
floor.
(d) All of the above
99. Which of the following is true about safety of
NTPC Fitter 2016 machines?
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (a) Oil, grease etc. should be put into machine
Ans. (d) : Oxygen, flammable material and a source of while operation.
heat are required for burning a substance. (b) Leave the machine switched on
(c) Don't wear goggles while grinding
(d) The speed of the machine is adjusted
according to the size of the job.
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
Ans. (d) : Safety of Machines– These machines are a
source of maintenance of a machine it is responsibility
of worker. The following points should be noted for
• The factors that must be present in combination for safety of machines–
a fire to continue to burn are as follows fuel, heat 1. There should be a proper distance between any two
and oxygen. machines.
2. We shouldn't put oil grease etc. in a working
97. Which of the following is / are the cause of an machine.
accident ? 3. We shouldn't charge the gears of a working
(a) Ignorance (b) Curiosity machine.
(c) Indiscipline (d) All of the above 4. We should switch off the machine when the
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 electricity goes off.
Ans. (d) : Cause of accident– 5. We shouldn't keep tools in a stockpile while
working on a machine.
(1) Ignorance (2) Curiosity (3) Over-confidence (4)
6. Every machine should be cleaned before and after
Lack of interest (3) Indiscipline (6) Over time (7) Use use.
of wrong tool (8) Fault in electrical wiring (9) Machine 7. We should use goggles while grinding.
without safety guards (10) Bad planning (11) Incorrect 8. We should never stand in front of the wheel while
procedure of working. grinding.
98. Which of the following is a general safety rule ? 100. The basic category of safety sign is –
(a) Smoking should be avoided (a) regulatory sign (b) informative sign
(b) Heavy load should be lifted cautiously (c) warning sign (d) all of the above
(c) One should wear apron while working RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
(d) All of the above Ans. (d) : Safety signs– Many signs are used for safety
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 in a workshop. They are follows–
Ans. (d) : Safety means protect oneself and other 1. Prohibitive signs 2. Mandatory signs 3. Warning
signs 4. Informative signs 5. Emergency.
colleagues from any accidents. Different safety
practices and standards are used in a workshop to 101. _________ extinguisher should be used in order
prevent accidents. These safety standards should be to extinguish fire due to oil.
followed in every workshop. (a) Foam fire (b) Ammonia fire
(c) CO2 fire (d) All of the above
Type of safety– Safety is of the following types–
(1) Self safety (2) General safety (3) Safety of machine.
Ans. (a) : Foam fire extinguisher should be used in
General safety– order to extinguish fire due to oil.
1. Smoking should be avoided 102. Clothes that are used while working in a
2. Heavy loads should be lifted cautiously workshop are –
3. One should wear apron white working (a) loose clothes
4. Flammable substances should be kept at safe places (b) tie, muffler and slippers
in a workshop. (c) wrist watch and ring
5. There should be no naked electric wires in a (d) apron, shoes and goggles
workshop RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
6. A workshop should have a proper arrangement of Ans. (d) : Apron, shoes and goggles are used while
lighting. working in a workshop.

103. Which tube is kept in the first aid box for 108. The safety sign indicates–
heating a wound ?
(a) Soframycin (b) Boroline
(c) Betadine (d) Penicillin
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (c) : Betadine is kept in the first aid box for
heating a wound.
104. A person stuck with an electric wire is (a) using milling cutter
separated by – (b) using adjustable guard
(a) dry wood or rubber gloves (c) workshop area
(b) holding his hand (d) using ear-aid
(c) holding his hand RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
(d) metal rod Ans. (b) : This safety sign indicates using adjustable
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 guard.
Ans. (a) : A person stuck with an electric wire
separated by dry wood or rubber gloves.
• If a worker has suffered from electric shock he
should be kept worm an covered.
105. A person suffered shock should not be made to
drink ________
(a) water (b) tea 109. The given figure indicates a–
(c) milk (d) none of the above
Ans. (d) : A person suffered shock should not eat or
drink anything.
• If a person (worker) get suffered from electric shock
he/she should be kept worm covered.
(a) mandatory sign (b) warning sign
106. What measures should be taken in order to (c) prohibitive sign (d) informative sign
protect our fingers while lifting and placing
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
any heavy load from the surface ?
(a) Attaching a roller Ans. (d) : This given figure indicates a informative
sign.
(b) Placing it on a stand
(c) Keeping wooden bumpers
(d) Applying grease
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : Keeping wooden bumpers measures should
be taken in order to protect our fingers while lifting and
• Informative signs generally square in shape.
placing any heavy load from the surface. 110. A tampered job is cooled while grinding it, by
107. The following figure depicts using–
(a) wind (b) sand
(c) water (d) none of the above
Ans. (c) : A tempered job is cooled while grinding it by
(a) mandatory sign (b) warning sign using water.
(c) prohibitive sign (d) informative sign 111. Which of the following basic safety rules should
BHEL 2020 you follow when using hand and power tools?
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 (a) Keep all tools in good condition with regular
Ans. (b) : maintenance
(b) Examine each tool for damage before use and
do not use damaged tools
(c) Operate tools according to the manufacture's
instruction
BDL Technician 2022
The following figure depicts warning sign. RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
Ans. (d) : Basic safety rules, when using hand and 116. Fire class in which the fuel is gas or liquefied
power tools– gas is
1. Keep all tools in good condition with regular (a) Class A (b) Class B
maintenance. (c) Class C (d) Class D
2. Examine each tool for damage before use and do NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
not use damaged tools. ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
3. Operate tools according to the manufacture's Ans. (c) :
instruction. Fire class Type of fire
112. How long a rescue breath need to be? Class-A Solid fuel/carbonaceous fire
(a) Delivered over 2 seconds Class-B Liquid fuels
(b) Delivered over 1 seconds Class-C Gases fuels
(c) Long enough to make the chest rise Class-D Electrical fire/metallic fire
(d) A small puff of air
117. What is the colour of Argon cylinder?
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (a) Dark green solder (b) Yellow solder
Ans. (c) : A rescue breath need to be long enough to (c) Grey solder (d) Maroon
make the chest rise. RRB ALP RAC 23.01.2019, Shift-I
113. What is the CTC found in a fire extinguishers Ans. (a) :
mean– Gases cylinder Colour code
(a) Carbon Tetra chloride
Acetylene Maroon/Red
(b) Chromium Try chloride
(c) Chloride Tetra calcium Argon cylinder Dark green solder
(d) Calcium Telurium chlorine CO2 cylinder Gray-solder
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 Cl2 cylinder Yellow solder
NMRC 15.09.2019 Helium-cylinder Brown solder
Ans. (a) : CTC found in fire extinguishers means it is Hydrogen cylinder Red solder
carbon tetra chloride. Also called halon type fire
Nitrous oxide cylinder Blue solder
extinguisher, this type of fire extinguisher is specially
suitable for electrically fire. Generally CTC is used as 118. What colours are used on signs used for fire
fire extinguisher for all type of fire classes (Class-A, fighting equipment–
Class-B, Class-C and Class-D). (a) White pictogram on a black background
114. __________ is used for the fire caused by (b) Red pictogram on a white background
electricity in a factory. (c) Green pictogram on a white background
(a) Water (b) Soil (d) Yellow pictogram on a white background
(c) CTC extinguisher (d) All of these RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I
NMRC, 15-09-2019 Ans. (b) : White colour diagram on red background
Ans. (c) : CTC (Carbon Tetra chloride) is used for the (pictogram) are used for fire extinguisher equipment.
five caused by electricity in a factory. Fire fighting equipments–
• CTC type fire extinguisher, it is also caused halon 1. Water type fine extinguisher
type fire extinguisher. 2. Soda acid fire extinguisher
• In this carbon tetra chloride (CCl4) or Bromo chloro 3. Foam type fire extinguisher
di-fluoromethene (BFC) filled with air pressure. 4. Dry type powder fire extinguisher
• The vapor generated by this device is poisonous so 5. CO2 fire extinguisher
that it is kept only open place. 6. Carbon tetra chloride fire extinguisher
115. Class D fire extinguishers are commonly found 119. Full form of MCB used in electrical wiring for
in a chemical laboratory. They are for fires protection purpose–
that involve combustible metals, such as (a) Miniature Circuit Breaker
magnesium, titanium potassium and sodium. (b) Mean Circuit Breaker
the geometric symbol for class D fire (c) Minimum Current Breaker
extinguishers is a/an (d) Maximum Current Booster
(a) Yellow Star (b) Red Square BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) Green Triangle (d) Blue Circle DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019 Ans. (a) : Full form of MCB used in electrical wiring
Ans. (a) for protection purpose is miniature circuit breaker.
Fire class Geometrical symbol Miniature circuit breaker (MCB)–MCB is an
Class-A Green Triangle automatically operated electrical switch used to protect
Class-B Red Square low voltage electrical circuits from damage caused by
Class-C Blue Circle excess current from an overload or short circuit. MCBs
Class-D Yellow Star are typically rated up to a current upto 125 Amp.

Fuse Vs MCB–Now days miniature circuit breakers Ans. (d) : The fire of electrical equipments category is
(MCBs) are much more commonly used in low voltage class-D. Fire extinguisher is used for class-D is carbon
electrical networks instead of fuse. tetra chloride, it is also known as halon type fire
120. Which gas is filled in a extinguisher cylinder– extinguishers.
(a) Air (b) Carbon di-oxide 125. Which of the following is not being included in
(c) Hydrogen (d) Helium the hand book?
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I (a) Fundamental information's
Ans. (b) : Carbon dioxide gas is filled in a extinguisher (b) Directional details
cylinder. (c) General defects
Carbon dioxide is used in extinguishing a fire because it (d) Factories act
neither burns nor does it help in burning. It is also RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
heavier than air, it insulators the burning substance by UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
cutting the supply of oxygen. Ans : (d) Factories act is not being includes in the hand
121. Halon extinguishers are filled with: book.
(a) water Hand book included following factors–
(b) liquefied petroleum gas • Fundamental information's
(c) kerosene • Directional details
(d) carbon tetrachloride • General defects
RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I 126. Match the following given lists :
Ans. (d) : Halon type fire extinguishers are filled with List-I List-II
carbon tetra chloride or BromochlodiFluoro methane (Type of fire) (Fuel)
liquid. It is specially used for electrically fire or metallic A. Class A fire 1. Gas & liquefied gas
fire (class-D), but generally it is used for all type of B. Class B fire 2. Wood
fires. C. Class C fire 3. Metals
122. Does not cause electric fire– D. Class D fire 4. Flammable liquids
(a) Loose connection (a) A–2, B–4, C–1, D–3
(b) Electric short-circuit (b) A–1, B–2, C–3, D–4
(c) Open door (c) A–3, B–4, C–1, D–2
(d) Over loading (d) A–3, B–4, C–2, D–1
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. (c) : Open door does not cause of electric fires. Ans : (a)
Causes of electrical fire– (Type of fire) (Fuel)
• Loose connection Class-A Wood
• Electric short-circuit Class-B Flammable liquid
• Over loading Class-C Gas and liquid gas
• Wrong connection Class-D Metals/Electric
123. What type of fire extinguisher is used in case of 127. According to the factories act 1948, section 23.
liquids fire– Which machine is not a dangerous machine?
(a) Class-A (b) Class-B (a) Circular saw
(c) Class-C (d) Class-D (b) Milling machine used in metal trades
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (c) Power press other then hydraulic press
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022 (d) Grinding machine
RRB Ranchi ALP Fitter 19-01-2003 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. (b) : Ans : (d) Factory Act 1948, section 23–This section
states that the factory owners or managers can not allow
Fire class Type of fire Fire extinguisher
any worker to work any machine without instruction to
Class-A Solid Water, sands, soda him/her about the dangerous outer comes the relevant.
(carbonaceous) acid F.E. pre cautions.
Class-B Liquid Foam type, CO2 F.E The dangerous machine which are included in this
Class-C Gases Dry powder F.E. section–
Class-D Electric fire/ CTC/CO2 F.E. • Circular saw
metallic fire • Milling machine used in metal trades
124. In which category is the fire of electrical • Power press other than hydraulic press
equipment included– 128. What is the range of electric current causes a
(a) Class-E (b) Class C heart condition which results in instant death?
(c) Class-B (d) Class-D (a) 10-20 mA (b) 50-100 mA
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (c) 100-110 mA (d) 20-50 mA
MES Fitter tradesman 2015 NLC Technician 24-09.2022
NTPC Fitter 2014 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. : (a) Ans : (d) Helps in accident control in factory/workshop

Current Effect of its are–
1 to 8 mA It gives a feeling of shock, but it is not • Automatic safety guard.
painful that is man can bear it. • Interlock safety guard.
8-15 mA It gives a painful shock, but the control • Trip safety guard.
of the nervous, nervous persists, there 134. Which of the followings, leads to industrial
fore its tolerance do human personality hazards and causes accidents?
dependent. (a) Noise and vibrations
15-20 mA It gives a painful shock, muscle control (b) Poor lighting and Poor ventilation
of the related nerve is not maintained (c) Heat and Humidity
lives, so humans can't bear it can and (d) All of these
dies instantly. (IOF Fitter, 2015)
129. Types of fire extinguishers for Class 'A' Fire: Ans : (d) Factor leading to industrial hazards and
(a) Water filled extinguishers
causes of accidents are–
(b) Foam or Dry powder or CO2
(c) Special powders • Noise and vibrations
(d) Halon, Carbon dioxide, dry powder and • Poor lighting
vaporizing liquid (CTC) • Poor ventilation
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 • Heat and humidity
RRB Ajmer ALP 22-05-2004 135. Indian Boiler Act, 1923 is applicable to
Ans. (a) : (a) all boilers
Type Fire extinguisher (F.E.) (b) boilers more than 100 litres capacity
Class-A Water/sands/soda acid F.E. (c) boilers more than 1000 litres capacity
Class-B Foam type F.E./CO2 F.E.
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Class-C Dry powder type, Halon type Ans : (b) Indian boiler act, 1923 is applicable to boilers
Class-D CTC(Carbon tetra chloride) F.E. more than 100 liters capacity.
130. Which information sheet should be used as a • Thickness of the boiler shell should not be less than 7
safety standard while doing electrical work– mm.
(a) Extremely hot-do not come in contact 136. Which of the following safety measures is used
(b) Extremely dangerous to promote the safety?
(c) Strictly prohibited area (a) Excessive fine (b) Writing slogans
(d) do not touch hot (c) Stopping the work (d) All of these
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
Ans : (b) As a safety standard when doing electrical (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
work uses extremely dangerous notice boards.
Ans : (b) Writing slogans is used to promote the safety
131. The heat energy released is measure with the best way.
help of :
(a) Energy meter (b) Thermometer Safety symbols– 4 types–
(c) Calorimeter (d) Anemometer • Prohibition symbols
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 • Mandatory symbols
Ans : (c) Energy meter – Electrical energy • Warning symbols
Thermometer – Temperature • Information symbols
Calorimeter – Heat energy 137. Which of the following is true if
Anemometer – Air velocity environmentally sound products are made
132. According to the definition of ''week'' under through efficient processes?
the Factory Act, 1948, it is a period of 7 days (a) It is unprofitable, as long as recyclable
beginning at midnight on materials prices are soft
(a) Sunday (b) Monday (b) It is known as lean manufacturing
(c) Saturday (d) Friday (c) It can still be profitable
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (d) It is easier for repetitive processes than for
Ans : (b) According to the definition of "week" under product-focused processes
the factory act, 1948, it is a period of 7 days beginning NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
at midnight on Monday. (RRB Chennai/Bangalore ALP, 27.10.2002)
133. Which of the following helps in accident control? Ans : (c) It environmentally sound products are made
(a) Automatic safety guard through the efficient processes it can still be profitable.
(b) Interlock safety guard 138. In how many classes is the fire placed–
(c) trip safety guard (a) Two (b) One
(d) All of these (c) Four (d) Three
(RRB Patna ALP, 11.11.2001) (IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (c) There are four classes of fires– 143. What do you use for respiratory protection–
1. Class A – Solid fuels (a) Exhaust Fan (b) Ceiling Fan
2. Class B – Liquid fuels (c) Filter respirators (d) None of the above
3. Class C – Gases fuels (IOF Fitter, 2013)
4. Class D – Electric fires or metallic
Ans : (c) Respiratory protection–
139. What is used to extinguish a gas fire–
(a) Dry powder fire extinguisher • Gas respirators
(b) C.T.C. fire extinguisher • Positive pressure respirators
(c) Water • Automated respirators etc.
(d) All of above Artificial respiration–There are four types of artificial
(IOF Fitter, 2014) respiration.
Ans : (a) Dry powder type fire extinguisher– 1. Sylvester method
• In this type of machine powder is filled with air
2. Shafer method
pressure instead of water.
• This powder is neither flammable nor an aid in 3. Mouth to mouth respiration
ignition. 4. Artificial respiration devices
• It is used to extinguish class 'C' and class 'D' fires. 144. Not a cause of accident–
(a) In attention to dangerous
(b) Negligence
(c) Respect for safety
(d) Wrong use of equipment
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 25.05.2003)
Ans : (c) Respect of safety is not cause of accident,
while other options are cause of accident.
145. Which fire extinguisher is used to put out the
fire of oily substances–
(a) Foam (b) Soda acid
(c) C.T.C. (d) None of above
140. What should be done in case of fire in the NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
workshop–
(a) Watch silently (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(b) Try to get out immediately Ans : (a) Foam type fire extinguisher should be used to
(c) Switch off the electric main supply put out the fire of oily substances (liquids fuels).
(d) Information fire brigade immediately 146. What chemicals are used in foam type fire
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016) extinguishers–
Ans : (c) In case of fire in the workshop, immediately (a) Na2CO3 + AlSO4 (b) AlSO4 + NHCO3
pull the main, to closed the supply. After that go out and
(c) NaOH + HCl (d) None of above
call the fire brigade immediately.
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016)
141. What to do if it becomes dark due to power
outage at work place– Ans : (a) Foam type fire extinguisher : mixture of
(a) do not create panic sodium bicarbonate and powder of aluminium sulphate,
(b) provide alternative lighting when it is mixed CO2 is produced
(c) Use the stairs to get out Na2CO3 + AlSO4 —→ CO2 + others
(d) All of above
(IOF Fitter, 2013) 147. Where are dry chemical fire extinguishers
Ans : (d) If work place become dark due to power used–
outage we should do– (a) Electric fire (b) Oily substances
• do not create panic (c) Wooden fire (d) None of above
• provide alternative lighting. (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
• use the stairs to get out. Ans : (a) Dry chemical powder type fire extinguishers
142. Care must be taken while using a hammer– are used for electric fire.
(a) At chisel head (b) At job 148. Soda acid fire extinguisher is used for which
(c) At hammer (d) None of above
fire–
(RRB Allahabad ALP, 09.12.2007)
(a) Wooden fire (b) Petrol fire
Ans : (b) At job care must be taken while using a
hammer. (c) Electric fire (d) None of above
One should keep on eye on the job while using the (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016)
hammer, while keeping an eye at the chisel head will Ans : (a) Soda Acid Fire Extinguisher is used for solid
result in cutting elsewhere on the job, spooling the job. fuels like wood, coal, paper, clothes etc.

152. Regulatory sign are ________ in shape.

3. Symbols (a) circular (b) rectangular
149. Identify the Warning Sign (c) triangular (d) trapezoidal
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Ans. (a) : Regulatory sign are circular in shape.
• Prohibitive signs are circular in shape.
• Mandatory signs are round in shape.
• Informative signs are square in shape.
• Warning signs are triangular in shape.
153. The shape and color of the border of a
(a) Risk of Electric Shock prohibitive sign is –
(b) Risk of Fire (a) round and red
(c) Risk of Ionizing Radiation
(b) square and black
(d) Laser Beam
(c) triangular and white
(d) none of the above
Ans. (d) :
Ans. (a) : The shape and color of the border of
prohibitive sign is round and red.
154. Prohibitive sign is –
150. Which one of the following represents Electric

shock? (a)
(a) (b)
(c) (d)
(b)
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
Ans. (c) : This figure represents electric shock–
(c)
151. The following safety sign (white symbol on a
blue background) is an example of a: RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
Ans. (d) : All of the above
155. Which of the following is the sign of danger on
an electrical panel ?
(a) (b)
(a) Prohibition sign (b) Mandatory sign

(c) Warning sign (d) Information sign
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (c) (d)
Ans. (b) : Safety sign (White symbol on a blue BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
background) is an example of a mandatory sign. RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
Ans. (b) : 159. Identify the displayed sign.
(a) Warning sign (b) Mandatory sign

This sign (figure) of danger on an electrical panel. (c) Prohibitive sign (d) Informative sign
156. This 'figure' represents –
Ans. (a) : The displayed sign represent warning sign.
(a) emergency door

(b) smoking is prohibited
(c) no entry This symbol represents the risk of explosion.
(d) none of the above 160. Identify the method of artificial respiration
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 shown in the figure.
Ans. (c) :
(a) Labord method

This 'figure' represents no entry. (b) Silvester's method
157. BIS stands for – (c) Schafer's method
(a) Bureau of Indian Standard (d) Mouth to mouth method
(b) Bureau of International Standard
(c) Bureau of Industrial Standard BEML 2022
(d) None of the above RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 Ans. (c) : Schafer's method is artificial respiration
Ans. (a) : BIS stands for – Bureau of Indian Standard. method shown in the figure.
158. The sign for 'smoking is prohibited' is
(a) (b) 161. Identify the method of artificial respiration

shown in the figure.
(c) (d) None of the above

Ans. (a) :
This sign for 'smoking is prohibited' (a) Labord method
(b) Silvester's method
(c) Schafer's method
(d) Respiratory method
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Ans. (b) : Silvester's method is artificial respiration 166. Match the following given lists :
method sown in figure. COLOUR SYMBOL TYPE
A. Red 1. Warning
B. Yellow 2. Mandatory
C. Blue 3. Prohibition
D. Green 4. Emergency escape
(a) A–3, B–1, C–2, D–4
(b) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3
(c) A–2, B–3, C–4, D–1
(d) A–1, B–2, C–3, D–4
162. Identify the displayed signs.
IOCL 2020
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans : (a)
(Colour) (Symbol type)
A. Red Prohibition
B. Yellow Warning
C. Blue Mandatory
D. Green Emergency escape
167. Isometric view corresponding to this
(a) Warning sign (b) Mandatory sign orthographic view in first angle projection is:
(c) Informative sign (d) Prohibitive sign
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
Ans. (d) : The displayed sign shows prohibitive sign.
• Generally prohibitive signs are circular in shape.
163. The shape of an information sign is.........
(a) Circular (b) triangular
(c) square (d) oval
Ans. (c): The shape of an informative signs is square in ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016
shape. Ans : (c) The projection given in the question is the first
164. Among the below colours, which color is used angle orthographic view corresponding isometric view
for prohibition sign? of–
(a) White symbol on blue background
(b) Yellow background with black border and
symbol
(c) White symbols on green back ground 168. State the procedure shown in the diagram of
(d) Red border and cross bar, black symbol on the attachment–
white backgrounds
NTPC Fitter 2016
Ans. (d) : Red border and cross bar, black symbol on
white backgrounds is used for prohibition sign.
165. In order to prevent accidents caused by
dangerous electric current and damage caused (a) Diameter of the cylindrical object is being
by shocked, what is mainly needed to provide measured.
(b) Verticality of the object is being measured.
an extinguishing alternate path to this flow of
(c) Height between two surfaces is being
electric current? measured.
(a) Resistance (b) Earthing (d) Flatness of the object is being measured.
(c) Ammeter (d) Diode UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I Ans. : (a) It is used to find the centre of circular
Ans : (b) To provide an alternating route to this flow of workpiece.
extinguishing electric current to prevent accidents used • In this figure, & question it is measuring the
by dangerous electric current and damage caused by diameter of the cylindrical object, so that the centre
electric shocks earthing is mainly required. of that object can be found.

169. State the procedure shown in the figure– Ans : (b)

→ Respiration protection wear (Mandatory)/
Poisson danger (Warning sign)
→ Toxic hazards (Warning)/Wear breathing
protection (Mandatory sign)
(a) Wheel grinding (b) Wheel balancing → First aid (Information)/First aid available
(c) Crank grinding (d) Tap grinding
(Informative sign)
BHEL 2020
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 → Laser beam (Warning)/Laser beam hazard
Ans. : (b) Before fixing any grinding wheel on the
machine spindle. It is necessary to balance it. (Warning sign)
Otherwise, even a slight lack of balance has very bad 172. Which notation is used to denote a regulator
effect on the bearing of the machine. unit–
170. Identify the correct sequence of chisels shown (a) 3 (b) 0.003
in the figure–
(c) 0.3 (d) 3.0
Ans : (c) 0.3 notation to represent a regulator unit.
173. What is the welding symbol for fillet weld?
(a) (b)
(c) V (d) II
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
Ans : (a) Various basic symbols and sectional
representation symbols of welding are as follows.
(a) (a) Web (b) Cross cut (c) Flat (d) Half round
(b) (a) Web (b) Flat (c) Cross cut (d) Half round
(c) (a) Web (b) Half round (c) Cross cut (d) Flat
(d) (a) Cross cut (b) Web (c) Flat (d) Half round
Ans. : (c)
(a) Web Chisel– This chisel is used to remove the
metal between holes after drilling them.
(b) Half Round Chisel– This chisel is used for cutting 174. Select the correct front view for this object:
key-ways in hubs etc. or for making oil grooves in
brass.
(c) Cross Cut Chisel– By this chisel the key in the
shaft or hum are cut. Half round groove can also be
made by making one end of this chisel in roundness.
(d) Flat Chisel– This is the most commonly used
chisel, it is used for chipping.
171. Which of these symbol is used for showing
toxic hazard–

ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016
Ans : (c) The correct front view option of the given
object is (c).

175. Which of the following is precise but not Shape – triangular

accurate: Background – Yellow colour
Special sign (Figure) – Black colour
Border – Black colour
178. Which class does the symbol shown in the

ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 picture belong to–
Ans : (d) The figure given in option (d) is not accurate
while it is precise.
• The figure given in option (c) is both precise and
accurate.
176. Which class does the symbol shown in the
picture belong to–
(a) Mandatory Sign(b) Information Sign

(c) Prohibition Sing
(d) Warning Sign
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (a) Mandatory symbols–Safety instructions are
(a) Information sign (b) Warning Sign given to the worker before work through mandatory
(c) Prohibition Sign (d) Mandatory Sign signs. So that the workers can understand these signs
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) easily and easily can work.
Ans : (c) Symbol given in the question is used for Shape – Circular
prohibition. Background – Blue colour
Prohibition symbols–Such signs advise not to do any Special sign – White colour
wrong during, which reduces accidents in factories.
Shape – Circular
Outer roundness of circle – Red colour
and corss bar – Red colour
Background – White colour
Special sign made (action not do) – black colour
179. Which class does the symbol shown in the figure
belong to–
177. One of the symbols show in the figure ..........

comes in the category– (a) Prohibition Sign (b) Warning Sign
(c) Mandatory Sign (d) Information Sign
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (d) Information symbols–This signs are
information resulted, by these signs a variety of
notifications are given.
Shape – Square
(a) Mandatory Sign (b) Warning Sign Background – Green colour
(c) Information Sign (d) Prohibition Sign Sign made of – White colour
BDL Technician 2022 Background – White colour
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 Sign made of – Red colour
Ans : (b) Symbol given in the figure categorised in the
class.
Warning symbols–Through these signs, the trainee is
warned before working, that is warned so, so that he
does not suffer any physical damage while working


Measurement and Systems of Units

1. System of Units F.P.S., C.G.S. Ans. (b) : 1 Yard = 3 feet
and M.K.S. 1 yard = 36 inches
1 yard = 0.9144 mm
1. What is formula to calculate electric energy 6. The unit of momentum is .........
(E)? (a) kg.m/s (b) N.m/s
(a) E = power × time (c) kg.m/s2 (d) N.m/s2
(b) E = voltage × time DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
(c) E = Electric current × time Ans. (a) : The unit of momentum is kg-m/s.
(d) E = resistance × time Momentum = mass × velocity
UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022 or =m×v
Ans. (a) : • Power is the rate of energy consumption = kg × m/s
energy can directly be calculated as– = kg-m/s
E
P= 7. 45 degree is equal to how many radian:
t (a) 0.785 (b) 1.57
E = P×t (c) 6.28 (d) 1.05
Where, E = Energy (in joule) NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
P = Power (in watt) NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
t = Time (in second) Ans. (a) : 180 = π radian
o
2. Which of the following is a unit of length? π

(a) Kilogram (b) Newton 1o = radian
(c) Metre (d) Kelvin 180
MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022 π
45o = 45 ×
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 180
Ans. (c) : Metre is the unit of length. = 0.785 radian
• Kilogram is the unit of mass. 8. What is the SI unit of temperature?
• Newton is SI unit of force. (a) Celsius (b) Kelvin
• Kelvin is the unit of temperature. (c) Fahrenheit (d) All of these
3. Convert 12 mm into inch– NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
(a) 0.590 inch (b) 0.333 inch Ans. (b) : The SI unit of temperature is Kelvin.
(c) 0.472 inch (d) 0.313 inch
• One Kelvin is formally defined as 1/273.16 of the
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 thermodynamic temperature of the triple point of
Ans. (c) : ∵ 1 inch = 25.4 mm or 2.54 cm pure water.
and 1 mm = 1/25.4 inch • The formula of changing Kelvin to Degree Celsius of
1 Degree Fahrenheit is –
So the value of 12 mm = 12 ×
25.4 C F − 32 K − 273.15
= =
12 mm = 0.472 inch. 5 9 100
4. One micron value is 9. Which of the following is the relation between
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.00001 mm the units of energy N-m/s and Watt?
(c) 0.0001 mm (d) 0.001 mm N-m N-m
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 (a) 1 = 0.36 Watt (b) 1 = 3.60 Watt
s s
Ans. (d) : 1 micron = 10–6 m
= 10–6 × 103 mm N-m N-m
–3 (c) 1 = 1Watt (d) 1 = 9.81Watt
1 micron = 10 mm s s
= 0.001 mm ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
5. One yard is equal to how many inches? N-m
(a) 3 (b) 36 Ans. (c) : 1 = 1Watt
s
(c) 30 (d) 12
Taking R.H.S.
Measurement and Systems of Units 30 YCT
1 watt = J/s C F − 32º

=
N-m 5 9
=
s C 140 − 32 108
= =
Hence: L.H.S = R.H.S 5 9 9
10. Which of the following is an example for a first C = 60º C
order lever? 14. 1 m = _______ inch.
(a) Coal Tongs (b) Brake pedal (a) 39.37 (b) 36
(c) Nut Cracker (d) Wheel Barrow (c) 100 (d) 37.39
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) Ans. (a) :
Ans. (b) : Levers are the most basic machine which are 1 inch = 2.54 cm
used to do some work with minimum effort. 1
• Ist class lever 1 cm = inch
2.54
100
1 m or 100 cm = = 39.37 inch
F = Fulcrum 2.54
W = Weight 1 m = 39.37 inch
P = Force/effort 15. 1 Thou = ______ inch.
Example : Brake pedal, scissors. (a) 1/10 (b) 1/100
• 2nd class lever (c) 1/1000 (d) 1/10000
Ans. (c) : 1 thou = 0.001 inch
Example : Staplers, Nail Clippers
1 thou = 1/1000 inch
• 3rd class lever
1 inch = 2.54 cm
16. 10–2 mm = ______ micron.
Example : Human jaw, Fishing rod (a) 0.01 (b) 0.1
11. Which of the following is the correct (c) 10 (d) 100
relationship between the units N-m and Joule? ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
(a) 1 N-m = 10 J (b) 1 N-m = 9.81 J Ans. (c) :
(c) 1 N-m = 1 J (d) 1 N-m = 0.981 J 1 micron = 10–3 mm
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) 10 micron = 10–2 mm
Ans. (c) : One joule is defined as the amount of energy 17. 0.35 mm = ............. microns
exerted when a force of one Newton is applied over a (a) 3.5 (b) 35
displacement of one meter. (c) 350 (d) 3500
1 Joule = 1 N-m Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022
12. What is the momentum of a moving body RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
(a) Force × Velocity Ans. (c) : 1 micron = 10–6 m
(b) Mass × Velocity = 10–3 mm
(c) Mass × Acceleration 1
(d) Moment of Inertia × Velocity 1 mm = −3 micron
10
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
1
Ans. (b) : Momentum is the physical quantity which is 0.35 mm = −3 × 0.35 = 350 micron
the measure of the quantity of motion of a moving 10
body.
p = mass × velocity 18. The unit of momentum is.................
p = m×v (a) kg. m/s (b) N. m/s
= N-s (c) kg. M/s2 (d) N.m/s2
13. Convert 140º Fahrenheit to degree Celsius ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
(a) 72º C (b) 90º C Ans. (a) : Momentum- It is the quantity of motion of
(c) 60º C (d) 100º C the body. It is measured by product of mass and
velocity i.e. P = mv, where m= mass of boy v= velocity.
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
Momentum is a vector quantity since velocity is a
Ans. (c) : Using this equation- vector while mass is scalar. The SI unit of momentum is
kg. m/s

19. Which is the base unit of measurement of 1"

length in British system? Ans. (d) : = 0.03125"
32
(a) Meter = 0.794 millimeter (mm)
(b) Millimeter = 0.0794 centimeter (cm)
(c) Inch
24. Convert 12 mm into inch : -
(d) The imperial standard yard (a) 0.0590 inch (b) 0.333 inch
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) 0.472 inch (d) 0.313 inch
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (d) : The yard is an English unit of length. NMRC, 15-09-2019
1 yard = 36 inch Ans. (c) : 1 inch = 25.4 mm
= 3 feet 1
= 0.9144 meter 1 mm = inch
25.4
1 inch = 25.4 millimeter 1
= 2.54 centimeter 12 mm = 12 × ⇒ 0.472 inch
25.4
20. One yard is equal to how many inches 12 mm = 0.472 inch
(a) 72 Inch (b) 12 Inch 25. Value of the 1 micron is-
(c) 3 Inch (d) 36 Inch (a) 1/100 mm (b) 1/10 mm
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM (c) 1/1000 mm (d) 1/10000 mm
Ans. (d) : One yard = 36 inch UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
= 3 feet Ans. (c) : 1 micron = 10–6 meter
= 0.9144 meter = 10–6 × 103 mm
One feet = 12 inch = 10-3 mm
1 mile = 1760 yard 1
= 3 mm
21. One micrometer (µ) is equal to– 10
(a) 0.001 Millimeter (b) 0.01 Millimeter 1
= mm
(c) 0.1 Millimeter (d) 0.0001 Millimeter 1000
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 26. Match the following units of length/distance in
Ans. (a) : One micrometer (µ) is equal to 0.001 List–I with their corresponding equivalent
millimeter (mm). values in List–II
1 micrometer = 10–6 m List – I List– II
= 10–6 × 103 mm = 10–3 mm Units of length/ Equivalent values
= 0.001 mm. distance
22. ............is used to measurement of temperature A) 1 nanometre i) 10–6 metre
inside a furnace. B) 1 micrometre ii) 10–12 metre
(a) Thermometer (b) Barometer C) 1 angstrom iii) 10–9 metre
(c) Calorimeter (d) Pyrometer D) 1 picometre iv) 10–10metre
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (a) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iii), (C)- (i), (D)-(iv)
Ans. (d) : (b) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)- (iv), (D)-(ii)
Instrument Application (c) (A)-(iii), (B)-(ii), (C)- (i), (D)-(iv)
Pyrometer Temperature inside a furnace (d) (A)-(iii), (B)-(i), (C)- (ii), (D)-(iv)
Thermometer Temperature NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
Barometer Atmospheric pressure Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
Calorimeter Heat flow Ans. (b)
1  Numerator  Units of length/distance Equivalent values
23. "=   (A) 1 nanometer 10–9 meter
32  Decimal equivalent 
(a) 0.25'' (b) 0.5'' (B) 1 micrometer 10–6 meter
(c) 0.0625'' (d) 0.03125'' (C) 1 angstrom 10–10 meter
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (D) 1 picometer 10–12 meter

27. Match the physical quantities in List–I with Acceleration = Rate of change of velocity
their corresponding units of measurement in dv
List–II. a=
dt
List – I List – II
Physical Quantities Units d ds d 2s
a= × = 2
(A) Mass (i) kgms–2 dt dt dt
31. SI unit of length
(B) Density (ii) m3 (a) Millimetre (b) Kilometre
(C) Weight (iii) kg (c) Metre (d) Centimetre
(D) Volume (iv) kgm–3 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
(a) (A)-(iv), (B)-(iii), (C)-(i), (D)-(ii) Ans. (c) :
(b) (A)-(i), (B)-(ii), (C)-(iii), (D)-(iv) Physical quantities SI units
(c) (A)-(iii), (B)-(iv),(C)-(i), (D)-(ii) 1. Length Meter
(d) (A)-(ii), (B)-(i), (C)-(iv), (D)-(iii) 2. Mass Kilogram
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 3. Time Second
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019 4. Electric current Ampere
5. Temperature Kelvin
Ans. (c)
6. Intensity of light Candela
Physical quantities Units 7. Quantity of substance Mole
(A) Mass kg 32. Unit of energy is :
(B) Density kgm–3 (a) Watt (b) Newton
(C) Weight kgms–2 (c) Newton per meter (d) Joule
3 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
(D) Volume m
28. The unit of moment of force in SI unit is : Ans. (d) :
(a) Newton meter (b) Kgm Physical quantities Units
(c) Kfgm (d) Newton centimeter Energy Joule
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 Power Watt
Force Newton
Ans. (a) : Moment of force is defined as the product of
force and perpendicular distance from the axis. Pressure Pascal
Surface tension Newton per meter
Moment of force = Force × Distance
• Units of force is Newton-meter. 33. Unit of current is :
(a) Volt (b) Ohm
29. The density of a body is defined as
(c) Ampere (d) Joule
(a) Force per unit volume
(b) Mass per unit volume
(c) Pressure per unit volume Ans. (c) :
(d) Acceleration per unit volume Physical quantities Units
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 Current Ampere
Ans. (b) : The density of a body is defined as mass per Resistance Ohm
unit volume. Voltage Volt
Mass (m) Energy Joule
Density (ρ) = 34. Convert 60o Celsius to Fahrenheit :
Volume(v)
(a) 100oF (b) 140oF
• Unit of density - kg/m3 o
(c) 160 F (d) 172oF
• Density of water at 20ºC is 998 kg/m3 or 1000 kg/m3
30. Velocity is the rate of change of :
Ans. (b) : We know that,
(a) force (b) Displacement
C − 0 F − 32
(c) Viscosity (d) acceleration =
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 5 9
Ans. (b) : Velocity is the rate of change of or C F − 32
=
displacement. 5 9
Velocity = Rate of change of displacement 60 F − 32
=
ds 5 9
V=
dt F = 108 + 32 = 140o

35. Poise is the unit of : Ans. (a) : The physical quantities which do not depend
(a) Energy (b) Viscosity on any other physical quantities for their measurements
(c) Pressure (d) none of these are known as fundamental quantities.
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 Fundamental quantity Unit
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015 Length meter
Ans. (b) : Units of viscosity– Mass kilogram
Time second
N − sec
• In SI system = Electric current Ampere
m2 Temperature Kelvin
Dyne − sec Intensity of light Candela
• In CGS system = or poise
cm 2 Quantity of substance Mole
N − sec • Pressure is not a fundamental unit.
• One poise = 0.1
m2 41. The base unit of length as per SI is the ..............
36. Quantity of matter contained in a body is (a) Millimeter (b) Meter
called: (c) Kilometer (d) Centimeter
(a) Mass (b) Weight BEML 2022
(c) Density (d) Volume ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Ans. (b) : The base unit of length as per SI is the
meter.
Ans. (a) : Quantity of matter contained in a body is
called mass. It is also a measure of the body's inertia. 1 kilometer = 1000 meter
1 meter = 100 centimeter
• SI unit of mass is kilogram (kg) and in CGS is gram.
1 centimeter = 10 millimeter
Weight–Weight of an body is the force acting on the
body due to gravity. 42. The standard temperature at which
measurement shall be taken is—
37. One micron is equal to .................. Centimetre. (a) 30ºC (b) 15ºC
(a) 1/1000 (b) 1/100 (c) 20ºC (d) 25ºC
(c) 1/10 (d) 1/10000 ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
Ans. (c) : The standard temperature at which
Ans. (d) : 1 micron = 10–6 meter measurement shall be taken is 20ºC or 293.15 K.
= 10–6 × 102 centimeter
43. SI unit of velocity is
1
= 10–4 = centimeter (a) m/s (b) m/s2
10000 (c) Kg/s (d) s/m
38. .............. is the unit of relative density. RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
(a) gm/cc (b) m/s
Ans. (a) :
(c) kg/cm2 (d) None of these
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 Physical quantity Unit
Velocity m/s
Ans. (d) : Relative density is a ratio of same dimension
quantities. So it does not have a unit. Acceleration m/s2
Density of substance Force kg-m/s2 or Newton
Relative density = Weight kg-m/s2 or Newton
Density of standard substance
Mass kg
• Relative density of water is 1.
Pressure kg/ms2 or N/m2
39. One inch is equal to :
(a) 24.5 mm (b) 25.4 mm 44. Unit of resistance in electrical circuit is–
(c) 25.2 mm (d) 24.4 mm (a) ampere (b) ohm
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 (c) ohm/ampere (d) ampere/ohm
IOCL 2020 RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I Ans. (b) :
Ans. (b) : 1 inch = 2.54 cm Physical quantity Unit
= 25.4 mm Electric current Ampere
1 feet = 12 inch Resistance Ohm
40. Which one of the following is not a Voltage Volt
fundamental unit? Capacitance Farad
(a) Pressure (b) Length
Magnetic flux Weber
(c) Mass (d) Time
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II Magnetic field Tesla

45. Unit of inductance is : Ans. (d) : Stress is defined as load per unit area of
(a) Henry (b) Ohms cross-section.
(c) Pascal (d) Henry/Pascal Load
Stress =
RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019 Cross- sectional area
NTPC Fitter 2016 Newton
Ans. (a) : Unit of stress = or Pascal
m2
Physical quantity Unit • Stress is an internal resistance against external
Inductance Henry changes like force bending, torsion etc.
Conductance Siemen • It can be both tensile or compressive in nature.
Electric charge Coulomb 50. Which of the following is a direct measuring
Illumination Lux tool
Luminous flux Lumen (a) Try Square (b) Steel Rule
46. Unit of capacitance is : (c) Straight Edge (d) Ring Gauge
(a) Henry (b) Ohms ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018
(c) Pascal (d) Farad Ans : (b) Direct measuring tool–It is determines the
RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019 actual dimension and size of a workpiece.
Ans. (d) : For example–Steel rule, Vernier caliper, Micrometer,
Physical quantity Unit protector etc.
Capacitance Farad Indirect measuring tool–Transfer the measurement
from the workpiece to the direct measuring tool, then
Resistivity Ohmmeter
the comparison is made.
Conductivity Siemens per meter
For example–Try square, straight edge, all gauge,
Electric flux Volt-meter calipers etc.
Electric field Volt per meter or
51. The value of one micro-inch is
per coulomb (a) 0.000001" (b) 0.00001"
47. One micrometer is equal to how much (c) 0.0001" (d) 0.001"
nanometers?
BHEL 2020
(a) 103 (b) 102
–2 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018
(c) 10 (d) 10–3
Ans : (a) 1 micro-inch = 0.000001"
1 square-inch = 6.45 cm2
Ans. (a) : 1 micrometer = 10–6 m
1 square feet = 0.093 m2
1 nanometer = 10–9 m
= 10–6 × 10–3 1 m2 = 1550 inch2
= 10–3 micrometer 52. What is the SI unit of Temperature?
–3
10 micrometer = 1 nanometer (a) Celsius (b) Fahrenheit
∴ 1 micrometer = 103 nanometer (c) Kelvin (d) Joule
48. 1 mm is equal to ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
(a) 1000 microns (b) 100 microns Ans. (c) : SI unit of temperature is kelvin.
(c) 10 microns (d) 10000 microns Temperature conversion
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
C − 0 F − 32 K − 273
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 = =
100 180 100
Ans : (a) 1m = 10-3 mm
= 10-3 × 106 microns K = C + 273
= 103 microns 53. The base unit of length as per S.I. units is
1 mm = 1000 microns (a) inch (b) foot
49. Stress is defined as (c) centimetre (d) metre
(a) Load × area of cross section ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
(b) Force × time Ans. (d) : The base unit of length as per SI unit is
(c) Force × distance meter.
(d) Load/area of cross section Other units of length - kilometer, centimeter, millimeter,
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 inch, feet, yard, mile etc.

54. Current can be measured by 59. The corresponding value of –40°C in degree
(a) Riyometer (b) Ammeter Fahrenheit equals :
(a) 0oF (b) 40oF
(c) Volmeter (d) Wattmeter
(c) –40oF (d) 100oF
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I Ans. (c) : We know that,
Ans. (b) : Current is measured by ammeter. C − 0 F − 32
=
Electrical instrument Measurement 5 9
Ammeter Current Given, C = –40º
−40 − 0 F − 32
Ohmmeter Resistance =
5 9
Wattmeter Power in circuit F = –40º
Voltmeter Potential difference 60. 25.4 mm is equal to :
Multimeter Current, Resistance and (a) 1 cm (b) 2.5 inches
voltage (c) 1.0 inch (d) None of these
55. ISO is an acronym for : SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
Ans. (c) : 2.54 cm = 1 inch
(a) International standards organisation
25.4 mm = 1 inch
(b) International organisation for standardisation 61. Work is usually required to be held in a
(c) Indian standards organisation vertical positions for laying out. For this
(d) Indian organisation for standardization purpose this is clamped to
ISRO Technician-B Welder 10.12.2017 (a) Surface plate (b) An angle plate
(c) A.V–block (d) A machine bed
Ans. (b) : ISO is an acronym for International BDL Technician 2022
Organization for standardization. The ISO makes UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
standards and guidlines for a variety of businesses and Ans : (b) An angle plate is a 90º section of cast steel. It
purposes publishes technical reports. is used to hold work that cannot be held in any other
• It was founded on 23 February 1947. way.
• Angle plate is also used for vertical reference plane.
56. Thermocouples are used for measurement
• Surface plate is used for a horizontal reference plane.
of.................
• V-block is used to hold round rods or pipes.
(a) resistance (b) voltage
62. For taking both taper and angular measurements
(c) pressure (d) temperature which of the following tools can be used?
RRB ALP Mechanic Motor Vehicle 23-1-2019, Shift-III (a) Sine bar (b) Bevel protractor
Ans : (d) (c) Auto collimator (d) Combination set
Instruments Measurement UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Thermocouples Temperature Ans : (a) For taking both taper and angular
Ohmmeter Resistance measurement sine bar can be used.
Voltmeter Voltage • Sine bar is used in conjunction with slip gauge blocks
Barometer Pressure for precise angular measurement.
57. The SI unit of pressure is- • Bevel protractor and auto collimator is also used to
(a) Newton (b) Joule angular measurement.
(c) Dyne (d) Pascal • Combination set has main three parts–
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II 1. Center head
2. Protractor head
Ans. (d) : SI unit of pressure = Pascal or N/m2
3. Square head
MKS unit of pressure = kgf/m2
CGS unit of pressure = Dyne/cm2 63. 1 square meter is equal to which of the
following
• Atmospheric pressure is measured by barometer.
(a) 11.764 square feet (b) 10.00 square feet
• Very high temperature (like temperature inside a
(c) 10.50 square feet (d) 10.764 square feet
furnace) is measured by pyrometer.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
58. 1 micron = ............ mm Ans : (d) 1 m2 = 104 cm2
(a) 0.1 (b) 0.01
(c) 0.001 (d) 0.0001 104
= feet 2 (∵ 1 feet = 30.48 cm)
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 30.48
Ans. (c) : 1 micron = 10–6 m = 10.764 feet2
= 10–6 × 103 millimeter 1 square meter = 10.764 square feet
= 10–3 mm 64. Which one of the following is not correct?
= 0.001 mm
Volt • IHP (Indicated horse power) is the actually generated

(a) Ohm =
Ampere power by the engine.
• BHP is always less than IHP.
Coulomb
(b) Ampere = IHP = BHP + FHP
Second where, FHP = Friction horse power
Coulomb 70. Decibel (db) is a unit used to measure:
(c) Volt =
Joule (a) Light (b) Sound
Joule (c) Frequency (d) None of the above
(d) Coulomb = ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
Volt
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans : (b) Decibel (db) is a unit used to measure sound.
D.M.R.C Maintainer Technician 2006 • A whisper is about 30 db and a normal conversation is
Ans : (c) All given option is correct. about 60 db.
Coulomb • In industrial areas, the permissible limit is 75 db for
Except Volt = daytime and 70 db at night.
Joule • Noise about 70 db over a prolonged period of time
65. One micron is equal to which of the following– may start to damage our hearing.
(a) 0.01mm (b) 0.001mm • Loud noise above 120 db can cause immediate harm
(c) 0.0001mm (d) 0.10mm to our ears.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
– 71. What is the material of surface plate?
Ans : (b) 1 micron = 10 6 m (a) Mild steel (b) Tool steel
–6 3
= 10 × 10 mm (c) High carbon steel (d) Granite
-3
= 10 mm DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
= 0.001 mm Ans : (d) Surface plate is a solid flat plate. It is used as
66. Which of the given is not a vector? the main horizontal reference plane for precision
(a) Force (b) Momentum inspection.
(c) Mass (d) Velocity • Surface plate is made by granite or cast iron.
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 • Surface plate is also used as baseline for all
Ans : (c) Scalar quantities are defined by magnitude measurements to a workpiece.
only. Ex–Mass, time, energy, density, volume, speed, 72. One micron = ............cm
distance etc. (a) 0.001 (b) 0.0001
• Vector quantities are defined by both magnitude as (c) 0.01 (d) 0.00001
well as direction. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
Ex–Velocity, Acceleration, Force, Momentum, Ans : (b) 1 micron = 10-6 m
Displacement etc. = 10-6 × 102 cm
67. Units for Emission standards = 10-4 cm
(a) g/km (b) km/g = 0.0001 cm
(c) g-km (d) km-g 73. The taper of internal part can be measured
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 with the help of :
Ans : (a) Units for emission standard is g/km. (a) Sine bar
68. ...........is the rate at which work is done in a (b) Combination set
specific time (c) Slip gauge and balls of standard dimension
(a) Torque (b) Power (d) Dial gauge
(c) Efficiency (d) Force DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 Ans : (c) The taper of internal part can be measured
Ans : (b) Power is the rate at which work is done in a with the help of slip gauge and balls of standard
specific time. dimension.
• Slip gauge is also known as gauge block or Johnson
Work
Power = gauge.
Time • Sine bars should not be used for angle greater than
Joule 60º.
Unit of power= or Watt
Sec 74. Dynamometer is a device which is used to
• One horse power = 746 watt. measure following?
69. BHP of an engine is measured by: (a) Chip thickness ratio
(a) Torque wrench (b) Dynamometer (b) Force during metal cutting
(c) Tachometer (d) Odometer (c) Decay of cutting tool
ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016 (d) Deflection of cutting tool
Ans : (b) BHP (Brake horse power) of an engine is BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
measured by dynanometer. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
• BHP is the power available to do useful work.
Ans : (b) Dynamometer is used to measure force during Ans : (b)

metal cutting or frictional resistance. Physical properties Unit
Types of dynamometer– Current Ampere
1. Absorption dynamometer–Prony brake Voltage Volt
dynamometer, Rope brake dynamometer, Hydraulic Resistance Ohm
dynamometer. Power Watt
2. Transmission dynamometer–Epicyclic train 81. Who Invented Universal Standard Time?
dynamometer, Torsion dynamometer, Belt (a) Enrico Fermi
transmission dynamometer. (b) Adolf Gaston Eugen Fick
(c) Sandford Fleming
75. 2500mm is equal to following– (d) Benoit Fourneyron
(a) 250cm (b) 25dm (IOF Fitter, 2015)
(c) 2.5m (d) All of the above
Ans : (c) Universal standard time is invented by
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 sandford fleming.
Ans : (d) 1 m = 1000 mm Universal time is a time standard based on Earth's
1 dm = 100 mm rotation. While originally it was means solar time at 0º
1 cm = 10 mm longitude.
2500 mm = 250 cm = 2.5 m = 25 dm • Sandford fleming was Canada's foremost railway
76. How many decimeter is in one meter construction engineer and scientist.
(a) 100 (b) 10 82. Kilowatt hour is a unit of :
(c) 1 (d) 1000 (a) Mass (b) Time
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001) (c) Electric energy (d) Electric power
DRDO Turner.2016 DRDO Machinist.2016
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
Ans : (b) 1 m · 10 dm
Ans : (c) Kilowatt-hour is a unit of electric energy.
1 dm · 10 cm Kilowatt hour is a composite unit of energy equal to
1 cm · 10 mm one kilowatt sustained for one hour.
77. How many centimeter in one inch • SI unit of power is watt.
(a) 25.4 (b) 0.254 • 1 kilowatt-hour is equal to 3.6 × 106 joule.
(c) 2.54 (d) 0.0254 • Kilowatt-hour is a commercial unit of power.
(IOF Fitter, 2016) 83. 1 kg/cm2 pressure is equivalent to
Ans : (c) 1 inch = 2.54 cm (a) 0.1 bar (b) 1.0 bar
= 25.4 mm (c) 10.0 bar (d) 100.0 bar
= 0.0254 m (IOF Fitter, 2014)
78. The value of one kilowatt hour is Ans : (b) 1 kg/cm2 pressure is equivalent to 1 bar.
(a) 3.6 x 106J (b) 3.6 x 103J • Atmospheric pressure is represented by atm.
3
(c) 10 J (d) 105J • Bar is the unit of pressure that is almost similar to the
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001) atmospheric unit.
Ans : (a) One kilowatt hour– 1 atm = 101.325 kPa
1 bar = 100 kPa
J
= 1000 × 60 × 60sec 1 bar = 0.986923 atm
sec 84. How many watt in one horse power
= 36 × 105 J (a) 1000 (b) 750
= 3.6 × 106 J (c) 746 (d) 748
79. The measurement of length is determined in (RRB Chennai/Bangalore ALP, 27.10.2002)
metric system : Ans : (c) Horse power is the unit of power which is
(a) cm (b) m generally used to measuring power of pump or motor.
(c) mm (d) km • One horse power is equal to 746 watt. It is equivalent
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 to 746 joules of workdone in one second.
DRDO Turner.2016 85. Unit of force is :
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) (a) Farad (b) Fermi
Ans : (b) The measurement of length is determined in (c) Newton (d) Rutherford
metric system from meter. MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
Other unit of length–kilometer, centimeter, millimeter, (RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004)
inch, feet, yard etc. Ans : (c) Unit of force is newton.
80. What is a unit of Ampere? • Fermi is a small practical unit of distance. It is used
(a) Voltage (b) Current for measuring nuclear size.
(c) Resistance (d) Power • Farad is the unit of capacitance.
(HAL Fitter, 2015) • Rutherford is the unit of radioactivity.
86. One carbon credit is equivalent to– Ans : (c)

(a) 10 kg CO2 (b) 100 kg CO2 Medium Speed of light
(c) 1000 kg CO2 (d) 10,000 kg CO2 Vacuum 3 × 108 m/s (highest)
(IOF Fitter, 2015) Water 2.25 × 108 m/s
Glass 2 × 108 m/s
Ans : (c) Carbon credit is a permit that allows the Rock salt 1.96 × 108 m/s
company that holds it to emit a certain amount of Turpentine oil 2.04 × 108 m/s
carbon dioxide or other greenhouse gases.
92. One parsec, unit for measuring distances related
• One carbon credit is equivalent to one ton of CO2 or
to stars, equals to :
1000 kg CO2. (a) 4·25 light year (b) 3·25 light year
• Carbon credit is the difference between the carbon (c) 4·50 light year (d) 3·05 light year
emissions allowed and actually emitted carbon. (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
87. Which unit of the measurement is multiplied by Ans : (b) Parsec is the unit for expressing distance to
0.39 to get inch stars and galaxies, used by astronomers.
(a) Millimeter (b) Centimeter • It represents the distance at which the radius of
(c) Meter (d) Decimeter earth's orbit subtends an angle of one second of arc.
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 • 1 parsec = 3.26 light year
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002) = 3.086 × 1016 meter
Ans : (b) 1 inch = 2.54 centimeter • 1 light year = 9.46 × 1015 meter
1 93. Light year is unit of :
1centimeter = inch (a) Distance (b) Time
2.54 (c) Age (d) Intensity of light
= 0.39 inch (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
88. Unit of work is : DRDO Machinist.2016
(a) Joule (b) Newton (RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
(c) Watt (d) Dyne Ans : (a) Light year is the unit of distance. Light year
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 is a large unit of length used to express astronomical
Ans : (a) Work = Force × Displacement distance.
= kg-m/s2 × m 1 light year = 9.46 × 1015 meter
=N-m • Parsec is the largest unit of astronomical distance
= Joule measurement.
Newton = Unit of force in SI system 94. 1 km distance means :
Dyne= Unit of force in CGS system (a) 100 m (b) 1000 cm
Watt= Unit of power in SI system (c) 1000 m (d) 100 cm
89. Approximately how much is a barrel of oil : DRDO Turner.2016, (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(a) 131 litre (b) 159 litre Ans : (c) 1 km = 1000 m
(c) 179 litre (d) 201 litre = 1000 × 100 cm
(RRB Allahabad ALP, 09.12.2007) = 1000 × 100 × 10 mm
Ans : (b) One barrel of oil = 158.987 litre 95. One picogram equals to–
≈ 159 litre (a) 10–6 gram (b) 10–9 gram
–12
One barrel of oil = 42 gallon (in US) (c) 10 gram (d) 10–15 gram
One barrel of oil = 35 gallon (in UK) BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
(RRB Patna ALP, 11.11.2001)
90. Which of the following is not correctly matched?
(a) Knot – unit of measurement of speed of a shipAns : (c) One picogram = 10–12 gram
(b) Nautical mile – Unit of distance used in 1 microgram = 10–6 gram
navigation 1 nanogram = 10–9 gram
(c) Angstrom – Unit of wavelength of light 1 femtogram = 10–15 gram
(d) Light year – Unit of measurement of time 96. The size of nano-particle lies between which of
(NTPC Fitter, 2014)the following?
(a) From 100 n.m. to 1000 n.m.
Ans : (d) Correctly matched– (b) From 0.1 n.m. to 1 n.m.
Light year – Unit of measurement of distance (c) From 1 n.m. to 100 n.m.
Angstrom – Unit of wavelength of light (d) From 0.01 n.m. to 0.1 n.m.
Nautical mile – Unit of distance used in navigation (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
Knot – unit of measurement of speed of a ship Ans : (c) The size of nano particle lies between 1 n.m.
91. Speed of light is : - 100 n.m. (1 nanometer - 100 nanometer). Nano
2 11 particles are now being used in the manufacture of
(a) 9 × 10 m/s (b) 3 × 10 m/s
(c) 3 × 108 m/s (d) 2 × 104 m/s scratch proof eye glasses transparent sunscreens, self-
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 19.01.2003) cleaning windows and ceramic coatings for solar cells.
97. How would the height of a six feet tall person be (a) Dyne second/cm2 (b) Dyne/cm2
expressed in nanometers (approximately) ? (c) Erg/cm2 (d) Poise/cm2
(a) 183 × 106 nanometer DRDO Machinist.2016
(b) 234 × 106 nanometer
(c) 183 × 107 nanometer (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
(d) 234 × 107 nanometer N − sec
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 05.06.2005) Ans : (a) SI unit of coefficient of viscosity =
m2
Ans : (c) Height of person = 6 feet CGS unit of coefficient of viscosity
Q 3.28 feet = 1 meter Dyne − sec
= or Poise
1 cm 2
∴ 6 feet = × 6 = 1.829 meter ⇒ 1.83 meter
N − sec
3.28 • One poise = 0.1 = 1 gm/cm-sec
Q 10–9 meter = 1 nanometer m2
1 meter = 1/10-9 nanometer • 1 Poiseuille = 10 poise = 1 decapoise
1 103. Einstein is a unit in light chemistry and its
∴ 1.83 meter = −9 ×1.83 = 1.83 × 109 value is
10 (a) 6.02 × 1023 quanta
6 feet = 183 × 107 nanometer (b) 10eV energy
98. One nanometer is equal to : (c) 3.70 × 1010 excited molecules
(a) 10–9 meter (b) 10–6 meter (d) 10-8 second
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(c) 10–10 meter (d) 10–3 meter
DRDO Turner.2016
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005)
(RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010) Ans : (a) Einstein is defined as one mole of photons.
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 25.05.2003) Einstein is defined as the energy is one mole of photon.
Ans : (a) 1 nanometer = 10–9 meter One mole of energy = 6.02 × 1023 quanta.
1 micrometer = 10–6 meter 104. Which of the following is not the unit of
magnetic field?
1 Angstrom = 10–10 meter (a) Tesla (b) Gauss
1 millimeter = 10–3 meter (c) Newton/Ampere-m (d) Weber
99. One metric ton weight equals to– (RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006)
Ans : (d) Tesla, gauss and Newton/Ampere-m is the
(a) 1000 gram (b) 1000 kg
unit of magnetic field while weber is the unit of
(c) 2.2 pound (d) 1 gallon magnetic flux.
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) 1 gauss = 10–4 tesla
Ans : (b) 1 metric ton = 1000 kg 1 tesla = 1 weber/m2
1 pound = 0.454 kg 105. Which of the following can be used in
temperature measurement above 1500º
1 gallon = 3.79 litre centigrade?
1 barrel = 159 litre (a) Clinical thermometer
100. 1 micron is equal to : (b) Thermo-electric thermometer
(c) Platinum resistance thermometer
(a) 1/10 mm (b) 1/100 mm (d) Pyrometer
(c) 1/1000 mm (d) 1/10000 mm (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) Ans : (d)
Ans : (c) 1 micron = 10–6 meter Temperature Range of
measurement instrument temperature
1
= 10−6 ×103 mm = mm 1. Clinical thermometer 35ºC - 43ºC
1000 2. Platinum resistance –200ºC - 1200ºC
101. Unit of radioactivity is : thermometer
(a) Candela (b) Fermi 3. Thermoelectric 200ºC - 1200ºC
thermometer
(c) Curie (d) Angstrom
4. Pyrometer Above 1500ºC
(IOF Fitter, 2014) 106. Dobson unit is used to–
Ans : (c) Curie is a SI unit of radioactivity. (a) Measuring the thickness of earth
SI unit of radioactivity is becquerel. (b) Measuring the thickness of diamond
(c) Measuring the thickness of ozone layer
• A curie is a large unit of radioactivity.
(d) Measuring of noise
1 curie = 37 billion becquerel DRDO Turner.2016
• A becquerel is one decay per second. VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
102. Unit of viscosity coefficient in CGS system is :
Ans : (c) Dobson unit is used to measuring the 111. Which of the following pairing is incorrect
thickness of ozone layer in a column of air from the (a) Hygrometer–Water vapour content of the
ground to the top of the atmosphere. atmosphere
• The average amount of ozone is around 300 dobson (b) Lactometer–Specific gravity of liquids
which means 3 mm thick ozone. (c) Anemometer–Speed of the wind
• Average ozone hole is around 100 dobson that means (d) Seismograph–Earthquakes
1 mm. (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
107. Which thermometer is suitable for measuring
2000ºC? Ans : (b)
(a) Gas thermometer Hygrometer–Water vapour content of the atmosphere
(b) Mercury thermometer Lactometer–Density of milk
(c) Full radiation pyrometer Anemometer–Speed of the wind
(d) Vapour pressure thermometer Seismograph–Earthquakes
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 • Lactometer works on the principle of Archimede's
(IOF Fitter, 2015) principle.
Ans : (c) Radiation pyrometer has an optical system 112. An anemometer measures which of the
including a lens, a mirror and an adjustable eyepiece. following?
• Radiation pyrometer is suitable to measure the (a) Speed of light
temperature 2000ºC.
(b) Speed of wind
• Gas thermometer measures the temperature of a gas
by volume or pressure difference. (c) Speed of water stream
• Vapour pressure thermometer measures the (d) Speed of satellites
temperature by variable saturated vapour pressure of (RRB Patna ALP, 04.02.2007)
the volatile liquid. Ans : (b) An anemometer measures speed of wind. It is
108. Which instrument is used for photographing a common weather station instrument.
the Sun? • Anemometer measures speed of wind in knot.
(a) Galvanometer 113. What is the sensory receptor related to the
(b) Potentiometer detection of blood pressure?
(c) Spectrophotometer
(a) Chemo receptor (b) Mechano receptor
(d) Spectroheliograph
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) (c) Photo receptor (d) Magneto receptor
Ans : (d) Spectroheliograph is used for photographic (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
the sun. It is used to obtain an image of the sun in light Ans : (b) Mechno receptor is an important receptor
of a particular wavelength. related to somatosensory system.
• Galvanometer is used to measure electric current. • It is related the detection of blood pressure.
• Potentiometer is used to measure emf of a cell or • Chemo receptor transmits nervous signals to
potential difference between two points. respiratory centre in the brain.
109. The instrument used for measuring air pressure • Photo receptors are specialized neurons found in the
is called……. retina.
(a) Anemometer (b) Barometer
• Magneto receptor allows an organism to detect the
(c) Hygrometer (d) Thermometer
(IOF Fitter, 2012) earth's magnetic field.
Ans : (b) Barometer is used to measuring air pressure 114. Instrument for measuring low temperatures is
(atmospheric pressure). called
• Anemometer is used to measure wind speed. (a) Diagometer (b) Cryometer
• Hygrometer is used to measure humidity or amount of (c) Chromatoptometer (d) Cymometer
water vapour in the air. (IOF Fitter, 2016)
• Thermometer is a device used to measuring Ans : (b) A cryometer is a thermometer used to
temperature. measure very low temperature.
110. Which instrument is used for measuring • A diagometer is a sort of electroscope in which the
humidity of atmosphere? dry pile is employed to measure the amount of
(a) Barometer (b) Anemometer
electricity transmitted by different bodies.
(c) Thermometer (d) Hygrometer
(IOF Fitter, 2014) • Cymometer is used to wave motion.
Ans : (d) • Chromatoptometer is used to color perception.
Instruments Measurement 115. Instrument for measuring work performed is
Hygrometer Humidity called ............
Barometer Atmospheric pressure (a) Eudiometer (b) Anemometer
Anemometer Wind speed (c) Hyetometer (d) Ergometer
Thermometer Temperature (IOF Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (d) Instrument for measuring work performed is 120. Instrument for measuring light intensity is
called ergometer. called
Anemometer → Used to measure wind speed. (a) Lucimeter (b) Cryometer
(c) Cyanometer (d) Barometer
Eudiometer → Used to measure change in volume of DRDO Machinist.2016
gas (RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012)
Hyetometer → Used to measure rainfall. Ans : (a)
116. Which device is used to measure the depth of Instrument Measurement
ocean? Lucimeter Light intensity
(a) Lexometer (b) Nanometer Cryometer Very low temperature
(c) Fathometer (d) Hydrometer Cyanometer Color intensity of blue sky
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) Barometer Atmospheric pressure
DRDO Turner.2016 121. Instrument used for measuring specific gravity
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 is called ............
(a) Bathymeter (b) Cryometer
Ans : (c) Fathometer → Used to measure the depth of
(c) Aerometer (d) Cymometer
ocean. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
Nanometer → Used to measure the smallest things (an UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
atom or molecules) Ans : (c) Aerometer is used for measuring specific
Hydrometer → Used to measure specific gravity of gravity or density.
liquid. • The aerometer is use today are mostly made of glass.
117. Instrument for mesuring blueness of the sky or • Cymometer is used to measure wave motion.
ocean is called.......... 122. The instrument used to measure Blood Pressure is
(a) Bathymeter (b) Ceraunograph (a) Sphygmomano-meter (b) Thermometer
(c) Cyanometer (d) Barometer (c) ECG (d) Stethoscope
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
Ans : (c) A Cyanometer is an instrument for measuring Ans : (a)
'blueness' specifically the colour intensity of blue sky. Instrument Application
• Bathymeter an instrument used to measure the depth Sphygmomano meter Blood pressure
Themometer Temperature
of water in seas or lakes. ECG Diagnosis of heart disease
118. Instrument for measuring time is called……… Stethoscope Listening of sounds produced
(a) Diagometer (b) Anemometer by heart or lungs
(c) Durometer (d) Chronometer 123. Instrument for measuring rainfall is called
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (a) Lucimeter (b) Galactometer
Ans : (d) A chronometer is a instrument that is used to (c) Hyetometer (d) Hygrometer
measure an accurate time of a fixed known location. (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
• It is a clock for controlling or determining the Ans : (c)
longitude of a vessel at sea. Instrument Measurement
• Diagometer is used to measure the amount of Hyetometer Rainfall
electricity transmitted by different bodies. Lucimeter Light intensity
Hygrometer Humidity
• Durometer is used to measure the hardness of
124. Instrument for measuring wind velocity is called
materials. (a) Coulombmeter (b) Anemometer
119. Which device is used to measure earthquakes? (c) Cyanometer (d) Chronometer
(a) Endoscope (b) Thermometer DRDO Fitter.2016
(c) Sonograph (d) Seismograph (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
DRDO Fitter.2016 Ans : (b) Instrument for measuring wind velocity is
DRDO Turner.2016 called anemometer.
DRDO Fitter.2016 • A coulomb meter is a tool for measuring the
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 electrostatic charge of a material.
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 • Coulomb meter can measure upto 1999 nanocoulomb.
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) • Most popular anemometer is robinson cup
Ans : (d) anemometer.
Instrument Measurement 125. How can we measure specific gravity of milk?
Seismograph Earthquakes (a) Using a viscometer
Thermometer Temperature (b) Using a odometer
(c) Using a hygrometer
Endoscope View the inside of a person's
(d) Using a hydrometer
body DRDO Turner.2016
Sonograph Evaluate, diagnose and treat a Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
wide range of medical conditions Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Ans : (d) Specific gravity of milk is measured by Newton

hydrometer. Unit of intensity of electric field =
Coulomb
• Hydrometer uses Archimedes principle. • Intensity of electric field is a vector quantity.
• A hydrometer is made of a thin glass or plastic tube 130. Which of the following thermometers is called
sealed at both ends. pyrometer?
• Odometer is used for measuring the distance travelled (a) Thermo-electric thermometer
by a vehicle. (b) Radiation thermometer
• Viscometer is used for measuring the viscosity of (c) Gas thermometer
liquid. (d) Liquid thermometer
126. Match correctly BEML 2022
(1) Fathometer A. Atmospheric UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
pressure Ans : (b) Radiation thermometer also known as
(2) Barometer B. Atmospheric pyrometer is usually used to measure high
humidity temperature where contact with the hot body it not
(3) Hygrometer C. Height possible.
(4) Altimeter D. Depth of sea • Helium and hydrogen are most widely used in gas
Code: thermometer.
(a) 1-B, 2-C, 3-A, 4-D (b) 1-D, 2-A, 3-B, 4-C • Gas thermometer is more sensitive than liquid
(c) 1-D, 2-B, 3-C, 4-A (d) 1-C, 2-A,3-B,4-D thermometer.
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012) • Mercury is commonly used in liquid thermometer.
Ans : (b) Correctly matched– 131. Pyrometer is used to following measurement–
Fathometer - Depth of sea (a) Air pressure
Barometer - Atmospheric pressure (b) High temperature
Hygrometer - Atmospheric humidity (c) Humidity
Altimeter - Height (d) Intensity of earthquake
IOCL 2020
127. Instrument used to measure the intensity of
DRDO Turner.2016
light is called
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
(a) Anemometer (b) Calorimeter
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
(c) Luxmeter (d) Altimeter
(RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014) Ans : (b)
Air pressure Barometer
Ans : (c) Luxmeter is a device that is used to measure
High temperature Pyrometer
the intensity of light. Equipped with digital and analog
Humidity Hygrometer
circuits a luxmeter allows the photographer to
Intensity of earthquake Seismograph
determine the proper exposure for photography.
132. Which of the following instrument is used to
128. Which of the following is the instrument for
detect the position of submerged objects in the
nomination of thermometer on water, vapour,
ocean?
temperature?
(a) Audiometer (b) Galvanometer
(a) Thermostat (b) Pyrometer
(c) Sextant (d) Sonar
(c) Hypsometer (d) Hygrometer
DRDO Fitter.2016
DRDO Turner.2016
(RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014) Ans : (d) Sonar is used to detect the position of
submerged objects in the ocean.
Ans : (d) Hygrometer is used to measure humidity or
• Sextant is a doubly reflecting navigation instrument
water-vapour content in air.
that measures the angular distant between two visible
• Hypsometer is an instrument for measuring height or
objects.
elevation.
• Audiometer is used to measure hearing threshold.
129. Unit of electric field is– • Galvanometer is used to measure small electric
(a) Newton (b) Newton/Ampere current.
(c) Newton/Coulomb (d) Volt/Coulomb
DRDO Turner.2016 133. Match the List-I with List-II and select the
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 correct answer from the code given below:
List-I List-II
Ans : (c) (Instrument/device) (Quantity to be
F measure)
Intensity of electric field (E) =
q A. Ammeter 1. Pressure
where, B. Hygrometer 2. Weight
F = Electric force (unit - newton) C. Barometer 3. Current
q = Electric charge (unit - coulomb) D. Spring balance 4. Specific humidity

Code : 137. Relative Humidity is measured by–

A B C D A B C D (a) Hydrometer (b) Hygrometer
(a) 2 3 4 1 (b) 3 4 1 2 (c) Lactometer (d) Potentiometer
(c) 4 1 2 3 (d) 1 2 3 4 DRDO Fitter.2016
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014) UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
Ans : (b) Correctly matched– Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Ammeter Current
Hygrometer Specific gravity Ans : (b)
Barometer Pressure Hydrometer - Specific gravity of liquid
Spring balance Weight Hygrometer - Relative humidity or water vapour
134. Which one of the following is not correctly content in air
matched? Lactometer - Purity of milk
(a) Decibel Unit of loudness of sound Potentiometer - Voltage difference between two
(b) Horse power Unit of power point of electric current
(c) Nautical mile Unit of distance in 138. Which instrument is used to measure
navigation
atmospheric pressure :
(d) Celsius Unit of heat
(a) Hydrometer (b) Barometer
NTPC Fitter 2016
(c) Manometer (d) Hygrometer
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (d) Ans : (b) Atmospheric pressure is measured by
Decibel Unit of loudness of sound barometer.
Horse power Unit of power • Manometer is used to measure pressure of fluid
Nautical mile Unit of distance in navigation flowing in pipeline.
Celsius Unit of temperature • Hydrometer is based on concept of buoyancy.
• 1 horsepower (hp) = 746 watt
139. Which liquid is used in a simple barometer?
• 1 Nautical mile = 1852 meter
(a) Water (b) Mercury
• Unit of heat is calorie.
(c) Alcohol (d) All of the above
135. Which of the following is not correctly
matched? DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) Manometer - Pressure Ans : (b) Mercury is used in simple barometer. The
(b) Carburetor - Internal combustion high density of mercury makes it expand less.
engine • In the space above the mercury column in a barometer
(c) Cardiograph - Speed of heart tube, the gauge pressure of the vapour is negative.
(d) Seismograph - Surface curvature 140. Sudden drop in the level of mercury in a
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 barometer is an indicator
Ans : (d) Correctly matched– (a) Fair weather (b) Storm
Manometer - Pressure (c) Snowfall (d) Heavy rain
Carburetor - Internal combustion engine
Cardiograph - Speed of heart DRDO Turner.2016, DRDO Fitter.2016
Seismograph - Earthquake Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
• Richter scale is used to rate the magnitude of an Ans : (b) Condition of barometer regarding weather–
earthquake that is the amount of energy released during 1. Sudden fall of mercury level - indicates storm or
an earthquake. cyclone.
• Seismograph is an instrument used to detect and 2. Gradual fall in mercury level - indicates possibility
record seismic waves. of heavy rain.
136. Which of the following is not correctly 3. Gradual rise in mercury level - indicates dry weather
matched? or fair weather.
(a) Anemometer - Speed of air
(b) Ammeter - Electric current 141. Liquid crystals are used in :
(c) Tachometer - Pressure difference (a) Wrist watches (b) Display devices
(d) Pyrometer - High temperature (c) Pocket calculators (d) All of the above
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 BHEL 2020
Ans : (c) DRDO Fitter.2016
Anemometer - Speed of air
Ammeter - Electric current Ans : (d) Liquid crystal is a state of matter whose
Tachometer - Rotational speed of shaft properties are between liquids and solids crystals.
Pyrometer - High temperature • Liquid crystals are used in all kinds of display devices
• Pressure difference is measured by differential including computer, monitors and laptop screens, TVs,
manometer. clocks, visors and navigation system.
142. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct Code:
answer using the codes given below A B C D A B C D
List-I List-II (a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 4 1 2 3
A. Stethoscope 1. To measure the intensity of
(c) 4 1 3 2 (d) 3 1 2 4
light
B. Sphygmoman- 2. To find out the purity of IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
ometer gold DRDO Fitter.2016
C. Keratometer 3. To listen heart sound Ans : (d)
D. Luxmeter 4. To measure blood pressure Anemometer Air speed
Code : Seismograph Earthquake
A B C D A B C D Barograph Atmospheric pressure
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 4 3 2 1 Hygrometer Humidity
(c) 3 4 2 1 (d) 2 1 4 3 146. Auxanometer is used to–
DRDO Fitter.2016 (a) Measure the rate of photosynthesis
Ans : (c) (b) Measure the rate of growth
Stethoscope To listen heart sound (c) Measure the rate of lysis
Sphygmoman To measure blood pressure (d) Measure the rate of loss of energy
ometer DRDO Fitter.2016
Keratometer To find out the purity of gold Ans : (b) Auxonometer is used to measure the growth
Luxmeter To measure the intensity of light in length of a plant organ.
143. Which instrument is used to measure blood • Auxonometer is also used to measure pressure
pressure? inside the roots of the plants.
(a) Glucometer • Auxonometer allow measurement of growth in
(b) Sine wave inverter micrometer.
(c) Sphygmomanometer
147. Which of the following one pair is not correctly
(d) Hygrometer matched?
DRDO Turner.2016 (a) Odometer : Instrument for measuring the
DRDO Fitter.2016 distance travelled by the wheels
Ans : (c) Sphygmomanometer is used to measure of vehicles
blood pressure. (b) Odometer Instrument for measuring the
• Glucometer is used to measure how much glucose is frequency of electromagnetic
in the blood. waves
• Sine wave inverter converts direct current (DC) to (c) Audiometer Sound-intensity measuring
alternating current (AC). device
• Lactometer is a type of hydrometer which is used to (d) Ammeter : Electrical power measuring
measure the specific gravity of milk. device
144. The principle on which the stethoscope used by DRDO Fitter.2016
doctors work is : Ans : (d) Ammeter is used to measure the current in a
(a) Interference circuit.
(b) Reflection • Wattmeter is used to measure electrical power.
(c) Refraction
148. The instrument used to measure the intensity
(d) Superposition of sound wave
of sound :
DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) Chronometer (b) Anemometer
Ans : (d) Principle of stethoscope is based on (c) Audiophone (d) Audiometer
superposition of sound wave.
DRDO Fitter.2016
Stethoscope is used to listening to sounds produced
within the body mainly heart or lungs. Ans : (d) Audiometer is used to measure the intensity
of sound.
145. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
answer codes given below: • Chronometer is used to measure accurate time.
List-I List-II • Chronometer is used for navigation purpose.
A. Anemometer 1. Earthquake • Odometer is used to measure distance travelled by a
B. Seismograph 2. Atmospheric pressure vehicle.
C. Barograph 3. Air speed • Audiophone is used for improving imperfect sense of
D. Hygrometer 4. Humidity hearing.

149. Mercury is commonly used in the thermometers Temperature Kelvin K

because of its characteristic : Quantity of mole mol
(a) High density substance
(b) High fluidity Luminous Candela cd
(c) High coefficient of expansion intensity
• There is two supplementary quantity–(1) Plane
(d) High specific heat
angle unit radian, (2) Solid angle, unit-steradian.
DRDO Fitter.2016 153. The speed of airplanes and ships is shown is
Ans : (c) Mercury is commonly used in the 'naut'. The speed of 100 nauts will be :
thermometers because it has high coefficient of (a) Equal to 100 mile per hours
expansion hence it expands uniformly and noticeable (b) Equal to 115 mile per hours
(c) Equal to 130 mile per hours
for a slight change of temperature.
(d) Equal to 160 mile per hours
• Mercury is a non sticky viscous metal and hence it NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
makes a clear meniscus, helpful in readings. DRDO Fitter.2016
• Mercury has low density and low specific heat. Ans : (b) 1 mile = 1.60 km
1 km = 1/1.60 mile
150. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 1
answer codes given below : 1.85 km = ×1.85mile
1.60
List-I List-II km
A. Lactometer 1. Electric current 1knot = 1.85
B. Ammeter 2. Relative humidity h
1
C. Hygrometer 3. Electric voltage = × 1.85 mile / h
D. Voltmeter 4. Purity of milk 1.60
= 1.15 mile/h
Code: 100 knot = 1.15 × 100 = 115 mile/h
A B C D A B C D 154. Which is not correctly matched?
(a) 4 1 2 3 (b) 1 3 4 2 (a) Celsius - Temperature
(c) 1 4 3 2 (d) 4 3 2 1 (b) Kilowatt hour - Energy
(IOF Fitter, 2012) (c) R.H. factor - Blood
Ans : (a) (d) Richter scale - Humidity
Lactometer Purity of milk BDL Technician 2022
DRDO Turner.2016
Ammeter Electric current
(RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 29.06.2008)
Hygrometer Relative humidity
Ans : (d) Richter scale is used for measuring
Voltmeter Electric voltage
earthquakes. Richter scale measures rate the magnitude
151. The relative density of milk can be found by– of an earthquake.
(a) Hydrometer (b) Butyrometer • Richter scale is a base 10 logarithmic scale.
(c) Lactometer (d) Thermometer • Mercalli scale is based on observation earthquake
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 damage.
Ans : (c) The relative density of milk can be found by • Humidity is measured by hygrometer.
lactometer. 155. Pascal unit is :
• Butyrometer is used to measure fat content in milk or (a) Humidity (b) Pressure
milk products in general. (c) Rain (d) Temperature
• Gerber method is a very popular method for the (RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012)
determination of milk fat. Ans : (b) Pressure is the force applied perpendicular to
• Hydrometer and lactometer work on the archimedes the surface of an object per unit area.
principle. Force (F)
Pressure (P) =
152. This is not SI fundamental unit: Area (A)
(a) Ampere (b) Candela Unit of pressure = Newton/m2 or Pascal
(c) Newton (d) Kelvin • Gauge pressure is positive for pressure above
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 atmospheric pressure, zero at atmospheric pressure and
negative for pressure below atmospheric pressure.
Ans : (c)
• Atmospheric pressure is measured in bar.
Fundamental Fundamental Symbol
Quantity Unit 156. 'Joule' is related to 'energy' in the same way as
' Pascal' is related to :
Length meter m
(a) Quantity (b) Pressure
Mass kilogram kg (c) Density (d) Purity
Time second s (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Electric current ampere A (RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012)
Ans : (b) Joule is the unit of energy and pascal is the Ans : (c) Intensity of sound is measured in decibel.
unit of pressure. • Decibel is a relative unit of measurement. It is equal
kilogram (kg) to one tenth of a bel.
Unit of density (ρ) =
m3 • The unit of intensity of sound is watt/m2.
• Density is the ratio of mass and volume. • Pitch is a property of sound which is used to
157. What is the unit of Atmospheric pressure? differentiate between grave sound and sharp sound.
(a) Bar (b) knot 162. Decibel :
(c) Joule (d) Ohm
(a) Is a musical instrument
DRDO Turner.2016
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) (b) Is the wavelength of noise
(c) Is a measure of sound level
Ans : (a) Unit of atmospheric pressure is bar. It is not
(d) Is a musical voice
SI unit or CGS unit, but is accepted for use with SI
unit. RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
1 bar = 100 kPa = 105 Pa (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Atmospheric pressure also known as barometric Ans : (c) Decibel is a measure of sound level. Decibel
pressure, is the pressure within the atmosphere of is a logarithmic ratio of the quantities such as sound
earth. pressure, power, voltage and intensity etc.
• Atmospheric pressure is measured by barometer. • Noise levels below 35-40 dB are usually necessary for
158. Unit of electric resistance of a conductor is– good night's sleep.
(a) Farad (b) Volt • A departing jumbo jet may result in 120 dB being
(c) Ampere (d) Ohm recorded along the runway.
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
163. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
Ans : (d)
Physical quantity Unit answer using the codes given below :
Capacitance Farad List-I List-II
Voltage Volt A. Cusec 1. Pressure
Electric current Ampere B. Byte 2. Intensity of earth-
Electric resistance Ohm quake
159. Electron volt is the unit of– C. Richter 3. Rate of flow
(a) Energy D. Bar 4. Computer
(b) Charge of electron Code :
(c) Potential difference A B C D A B C D
(d) Power
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 3 4 2 1
(c) 4 3 2 1 (d) 3 4 1 2
Ans : (a) BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Physical quantity Unit
Energy Electron volt (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Charge of electron Coulomb Ans : (b)
Potential difference Volt Cusec Rate of flow
Power Watt Byte Computer
• Electron volt is the work required to move an Richter Intensity of earthquake
electron through a potential difference of one volt. Bar Pressure
1 electron volt (ev) = 1.60218 ×10-12 erg. 164. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct
= 1.60218×10-19 joule answer using the codes given below :
160. Which of the following SI units is not correctly List-I List-II
matched? A. Wavelength 1. Hertz
(a) Work - Joule (b) Force - Newton
(c) Mass - Kilogram (d) Pressure - Dyne B. Energy 2. Angstrom
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) C. Intensity of sound 3. Joule
Ans : (d) Dyne is the unit of force in CGS unit. SI unit D. Frequency 4. Decibel
of pressure is pascal. Code:
Work - Joule A B C D A B C D
Force - Newton (a) 2 3 4 1 (b) 1 2 3 4
• Newton is the SI unit of force. (c) 2 3 1 4 (d) 2 1 3 4
161. The decibel unit is used to measure : (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
(a) Speed of light Ans : (a)
(b) Intensity of heat
(c) Intensity of sound Wavelength Angstrom
(d) Radioactive frequency Energy Joule
(IOF Fitter, 2013) Intensity of sound Decibel
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008) Frequency Hertz

165. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 169. What is measured in cusecs?
answer using the codes given below : (a) Purity of water
List-I List-II (b) Depth of water
(Unit) (Quantity) (c) Flow rate of water
A. Watt 1. Heat (d) Quantity of water
B. Knot 2. Navigation BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
C. Nautical mile 3. Speed of ship (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
D. Calorie 4. Power Ans : (c) Cusec is the unit used to measure the
Code: amount of water release from reservoir (i.e. flow rate).
A B C D A B C D • Cusec is the short from for cubic feet per second.
(a) 3 1 4 2 (b) 1 2 3 4 • Flow rate refers to the volume of liquid that flows
(c) 4 3 2 1 (d) 2 4 1 3 per unit time.
(RRB Jammu-kashmir ALP, 06.06.2010) 1 cusec = 28.317 litre per second
Ans : (c) 170. What is the SI unit of mechanical energy?
Watt Power (a) Joule
Knot Speed of ship (b) Watt
Nautical mile Navigation (c) Newton-second
Calorie Heat (d) Joule-second
166. Megawatt is a unit of measurement of electricity, (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
who Ans : (a) Mechanical energy is the total amount of
(a) is produced energy of an object. This energy is relative to an
(b) is consumed object's position or motion.
(c) is saved • Energy due to an objects motion is kinetic energy.
(d) is loss in transmission • Stored energy due to an objects position is potential
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) energy.
Ans : (a) Megawatt is used to measure the output of a Mechanical energy = kinetic energy + potential
power plant. energy.
1 megawatt (MW) = 1000 kilowatt (KW) • Unit of mechanical energy is joule.
• Gigawatt (GW) measure the capacity of large power 171. Which of the following quantity is measured on
plants or of many plants. Richter scale?
• One megawatt is equivalent to the energy produced (a) Movement of glaciers
by 10 automobile engines. (b) Population growth
167. Tachyon means : (c) Intensity of earthquakes
(a) Particles moving faster than the speed of light (d) Temperature inside the earth
(b) Part of a molecule with a heavy nucleus NLC Technician 24-09.2022
(c) Particles moving faster than the speed of sound DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016
in air Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
(d) Amount of lattice vibrations Ans : (c) The Richter is used for measurement of
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 earthquake. Richter scale is used to rate the magnitude
Ans : (a) A tachyon is a hypothetical particle that of an earthquake. The Richter scale is a base-10
always travels faster than light speed. The word logarithmic scale that each other of magnitude is 10
tachyon comes from the Greek. Its meaning is swift, times more intense than the last one.
quick, fast, rapid. • Richter scale does not measure earthquake damage.
168. Which of the following is vector quantity? 172. PARSEC unit is :
(a) Time (b) Speed (a) Distance (b) Time
(c) Displacement (d) Distance (c) Glare of light (d) Magnetic force
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016 (RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012)
Ans : (a) Parsec is the unit of astronomical distance.
Ans : (c) The physical quantities for which both
• A parsec is a distance from the sun to an astronomical
magnitude and direction are defined distinctly are
object which has a parallax angle of one arc second.
known as vector quantities.
1 parsec = 3.26 light year.
Example–Displacement, velocity, acceleration, weight,
force, momentum etc. 173. The smallest unit of length is–
• It is represented by quantity symbol in bold or with (a) Micron (b) Nanometer
the arrow sign above. (c) Fermimeter (d) None of the above
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 16.07.2006)
• Time, speed, distance, density, volume, temperature, -
work are scalar quantities. Ans : (c) 1 micron · 10 6 meter
-
• Scalar quantity has magnitude only. It does not have 1 nanometer · 10 9 meter
-10
direction. 1 angstrom · 10 meter

-
1 fermimeter · 10 15 meter Ans : (d) Volume is a scalar quantity. In scalar
-
1 zeptometer · 10 21 meter quantity, only magnitude is required, while in vector
From the given option, fermimeter is smallest unit of quantity, magnitude as well as direction are required.
length. • Vector quantity is represented by an arrow.
174. Fermi is the unit which expresses– • Displacement, velocity, force are vector quantity.
(a) Energy (b) Momentum 178. Which of the following one is not the unit of
(c) Impulse (d) Length heat?
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009) (a) Calorie (b) Kilocalorie
Ans : (d) Fermi is the unit of length equals to 10-15 m. (c) Kilojoule (d) Watt
• It is also known as femtometer. (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
• Unit of energy is joule in SI system. Ans : (d) Watt is not unit of the heat. It is unit of
• Unit of momentum is kg-m/sec. power. While calorie, kilocalorie and kilo joule is unit
• Unit of impulse is Newton-sec. of heat or energy.
175. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct 1 kilocalorie = 4.18 kilo joule
answer using the codes given below : 179. Which of the following is a vector quantity?
List-I/metÛeer-I List-II (a) Momentum (b) Pressure
A. High velocity 1. Mach (c) Energy (d) Work
B. Wavelength 2. Angstrom (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
C. Pressure 3. Pascal Ans : (a)
D. Energy 4. Joule
Scalar quantity Vector quantity
Code:
1. Distance 1. Displacement
(a) A-2 B-1 C-3 D-4 (b) A-1 B-2 C-4 D-3 2. Speed 2. Velocity
(c) A-1 B-2 C-3 D-4 (d) A-2 B-1 C-4 D-3
3. Mass 3. Weight
(RRB Bhubneswar ALP, 15.07.2012)
4. Energy 4. Acceleration
Ans : (c) 5. Density 5. Momentum
High velocity Mach 6. Power 6. Force
Wavelength Angstrom
7. Length, area 7. Gravity
Pressure Pascal
Energy Joule 8. Volume 8. Drag
• Mach number is the ratio of speed of an object to the 9. Time 9. Impulse
speed of sound in the medium through which the 10. Temperature 10. Lift
object is travelling. 11. Work
• The wavelength of a wave describes how long the 12. Pressure
wave is. 180. Consider the following physical quantities:
176. Match List-I with List-II and select the correct Energy, power, pressure, impulse,
answer using the codes given below : temperature, gravitational potential. Which of
List-I List-II the above is/are vector quantity/quantities?
(Physical quantity) (Unit) (a) Only impulse
A. Acceleration 1. Joule (b) Only impulse and pressure
B. Force 2. Newton-second (c) Impulse, temperature and pressure
C. Work done 3. Newton (d) Gravitational potential
D. Impulse 4. meter/second2 NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
Code:
DRDO Turner.2016
A B C D A B C D
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 2 1 4 3
(c) 4 3 1 2 (d) 3 4 2 1 Ans : (a) Impulse is a vector quantity, while pressure,
(RRB Banglore ALP, 08.07.2007) temperature, power energy and gravitational potential
Ans : (c) are scalar quantity.
Physical quantity Unit
Acceleration meter/second2 2. Units of Angle Measurement
Force Newton
Work done Joule and Tools
Impulse Newton-second
177. Which of the following quantity is not vector? 181. Radian is equal to
(a) Displacement (b) Velocity (a) 58.3º (b) 59.4º
(c) Force (d) Volume (c) 57.3º (d) 60.3º
(RRB Siliguri ALP, 2014) HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
Ans. (c) : Radian is the SI units of measuring angle. • Two plane surfaces of slotted type angle plate have
The length of an arc of a unit circle is numerically equal slots milled.
to measurement in radian of the angle. • The slots on the slotted type angle plate are machined
on the top surface for accommodating bolts.
186. Material used for angle plate is–
(a) High carbon steel
(b) Medium carbon steel
(c) Gray cast iron
2π Radian = 360º (d) Cast iron steel
360º 180º DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
1 Radian = = BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
2π π
Ans. (c) : An angle plate is a 90º section of cast iron,
1 Radian = 57.295º ≈ 57.3º with two accurately machined surface.
182. One degree equals to: • Angle plate are used to hold workpieces square to the
(a) 60 seconds (b) 60 minute table during marking out operations.
(c) 100 seconds (d) 100 minutes • Angle plates have ribs on the unmachined part for
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 good rigidity and to prevent distortion.
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 • Plain solid angle plates are suitable for supporting
Ans. (b) : One degree equals to 60 minutes. workpieces during layout work.
183. Which of the following is related to the 187. Which of the following is an example of a
temperature? comparator?
(a) Vernier caliper (b) Micrometer
(a) It is a form of energy
(c) Dial gauge (d) Steel rule
(b) It is measured by calorie meter
(c) It is a measure of heat
Ans. (c) : Dial gauge is an example of comparator.
(d) It has a unit calorie
Dial gauge is also known as a dial indicator, is a
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) comparison measuring instrument.
Ans. (c) : Temperature is the measure of coldness or • The working principle of the dial gauge is dependent
hotness show in terms of any measuring scale, it on the movement of the spindle.
indicates the trajectory in which heat energy • Part of the dial gauge that shows the numbers from the
spontaneously propagates. Heat flow from a hotter body measurement results is called scale.
(Higher temperature) to a colder body (lower
188. Sine bar is used to measure :
temperature).
(a) Angle of a tapered job
Conversion of temperature unit
(b) Angle between surfaces
º C − 0 º F − 32 K − 273.15 (c) Run out of job
= =
5 9 5 (d) None of the above
184. 60º corresponds to ............ radians? HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) 2π (b) π/2 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
(c) π/3 (d) π Ans. (a) : Sine bar is used to measure angle of a tapered
job. Sine bar is the one of the most accurate angle
measuring device.
Ans. (c) : • Working principle of sine bar is based on the
180º = π radian trigonometric function.
π π • Sine bar is specified by centre distance between two
60o = × 60 = radian rollers.
180 3
185. Which angle plate is adjustable in such a way 189. ............ is used for leveling of machineries
(a) Scale (b) Spirit level
as to keep both the surfaces at an angle?
(c) Bevel Protractor (d) Gauge blocks
(a) Box angle plate ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
(b) Slotted type angle plate Ans. (b) : Spirit level is used for leveling of
(c) Plain solid angle plate machineries. Spirit level is an instrument to indicate
(d) Swivel type angle plate whether a surface is horizontal or vertical relative to the
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM earth.
Ans. (d) : Swivel type angle plate is adjustable so that • Different types of spirit level may be used by
the two surface can be kept an angle. carpenters, brick layers, metal workers.
• Box angle plate has all the faces machined square to • Spirit level is made of a tube and a holder, tube is
each other. generally made of glass or plastic.

190. Which among the following instruments is used 194. Which grade of slip gauge is used for general
to check the concentricity of the outside workshop application?
diameter?
(a) Grade '0' (b) Grade '00'
(a) Limit gauges
(b) Dial test indicator (c) Grade 'ii' (d) Grade 'i'
(c) Sine bar IOCL 2020
(d) Vernier bevel protractor RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III Ans : (c) Grade 'ii' of slip gauge is used for general
Ans. (b) : Dial test indicator is used to check the workshop application.
concentricity of the outside diameter. Grades of slip gauge–
Function of dial test indicator– 1. Grade '00' → Calibration grade
1. As a comparison in mass production. 2. Grade '0' → Inspection grade
2. Check the centre alignment.
3. Grade 'i' → Tool room application
3. Determine errors in geometric shapes such as oval,
round and taper. 4. Grade 'ii' → Workshop application
4. As a comparison of two heights or two distances 195. Finishing of measuring faces of slip gauge is
between narrow boundaries. done by :
191. Which among the following instruments are (a) Reaming (b) Honning
used to check the components only to insure (c) Lapping (d) Drilling
that the sizes are within the prescribed limits in
mass production work? RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
(a) Try square (b) Dial test indicator Ans : (c) Finishing of measuring faces of slip gauge is
(c) Gauges (d) Vernier caliper done by lapping.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III • Cross-sectional size of slip gauge is 32 × 9 mm.
Ans. (c) : Gauges are used to check the components • Slip gauge is also known as gauge block or Johnson
only to insure that the sizes are within the prescribed gauge.
limits in mass production work. • Slip gauges are made of stabilized high grade steel.
• Taylor's principle is related to gauge design. • Hardness of slip gauge should be 64 HRC.
• 'NO GO' and 'GO' gauges are designed to check the 196. Dial test indicator is used for measuring–
minimum and maximum material limit. (a) temperature
192. Which of the following is not a tool/instrument (b) viscosity
used for marking? (c) deviation of any object from an expected
(a) Angle plate (b) 'V' block standard
(c) Surface plate (d) Dial indicator (d) density
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II BEML 2022
Ans. (d) : Dial indicator is not used for marking. Dial RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
indicator is high precision instrument, used for Ans. (c) : Dial test indicator is used for measuring
comparing and determining the variation in sizes of a
deviation of any object from an expected.
component.
• It works on the principle of rake and pinion. • High magnification ratio is important in this
instrument.
• A dial test indicator magnifies small variations in
sizes by means of a pointer on a graduated dial. • A rotatable bevels are used in dial test indicator for
marking final zero setting.
193. What is the angle of the angle plate
(a) 30o (b) 45o • Tolerance pointers are attached to dial face for rapid
(c) 65 o
(d) 90o checking of parts.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II 197. The size of the sine bar is specified by its
Ans. (d) : The angle of angle plate is 90º. (a) Weight
• Angle plate is made of cast iron. (b) Centre distance between the two rollers
• The edges and ends of the angle plate are machined (c) Total Length
square. (d) Size of the rollers
Types of angle plate– ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
1. Plain solid angle plate Ans : (b) The size of sine bar is specified by its centre
2. Slotted type angle plate distance between the two rollers.
3. Swivel type angle plate • Sine bar is a precision measuring instrument for
4. Box type angle plate checking and setting angles.
• Slotted type of angle plate can be tilted 90º along with • The commonly available size of sine bar are–100 mm,
the work for marking or machining. 200 mm, 250 mm.

198. Which of the following is an example of a 203. Which angle can be checked using try square?
comparator? (a) 900 (b) 600
0
(a) Vernier Caliper (b) Micrometer (c) 30 (d) 400
(c) Dial gauge (d) Steel rule BHEL 2020
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
Ans. (a) : 900 angle can be checked by using try square.
Ans. (c) : Dial gauge is an example of a comparator.
• Try square has a blade and a stock which are fixed
199. Which of the following is an instrument for together at exactly 90º.
indirect angle measurement? • Try square is a checking tool.
(a) Bevel gauge (b) Bevel protractor • It is used to check the flatness of the job and the right
(c) Combination set (d) Sine bar angle between two surfaces.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 • It has two main parts–(1) Blade, (2) Stock.
Ans. (d) : Sine bar is an instrument for indirect angle
measurement.
• The distance between the axes of the two cylinders of
sine bar is 5 inches or 10 inches.
• Some holes are drilled in the body of sine bar to
reduce the weight and facilitate handling.
200. The size of the sine bar is specified by its :
(a) Diagonal cross-length of sine bar
(b) Centre to centre distance between rollers
(c) One end at the other end of the sine bar
(d) Out of distance between rollers
204. Size of sine bar is taken from–
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I (a) Width
Ans : (b) The size of sine bar is specified by its length. (b) Distance between two roller centres
• The length of the sine bar is the centre to centre (c) Weight
distance between rollers. (d) All of the above
• Upper surface of sine bar forms the hypotenuse of a DRDO Turner.2016
triangle. (RRB Ranchi ALP, 21.09.2003)
201. Which of the following instrument is not used Ans : (b) Size of sine bar is taken from the distance
for measuring of angles? between two roller centres.
(a) Clinometer (b) Optical flats • Working principle of sine bar is based on
(c) Bevel protractor (d) Protractor head trigonometrical ratio.
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I • Sine bar is a precision angle measuring instrument.
Ans : (b) Optical flat is a disc of high quality glass or • Accuracy of setting a sine bar decreases appreciably
quartz. with steep angle.
• Optical flats are often used into test gauge blocks for 205. Sine bar is not in which of the following sizes?
precision and wear. (a) 500 mm (b) 200 mm
• Optical flat is also used as reference against the (c) 100 mm (d) 300 mm
flatness of unknown surface for comparison. NTPC Fitter 2016
• Clinometer, bevel protractor and protractor head is a (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
angle measuring instrument. Ans : (a) Sine bar is not available in 500 mm sizes.
202. To measure the cylinder bore one of these 206. The purpose of hole in the sine bar is–
instrument is used. Identify (a) For looking good
(a) Micrometer (b) Dial indicator
(b) To reducing weight
(c) Screw gauge (d) Caliper
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (c) To clamping the workpiece
Ans. (b) : To measure the cylinder bore dial indicator is
used. (IOF Fitter, 2012)
• Micrometer is used for making precise linear (RRB Allahabad ALP, 03.08.2008)
measurements of dimensions such as diameter, Ans : (c) The purpose of hole in sine bar is to clamping
thickness and length. the workpiece.
• Screw gauge is mainly used to measure the diameter • It is not possible to measure the angle of a given
of a thin wire. specimen directly employing a sine bar.
• Inside calipers are used to measure an objects inside • Bevel protractor measures the angle of the given
dimension. specimen directly.
• Outside calipers are used to measure an objects • Sine bar measures the angle of the given specimen
external size. indirectly by usage of slip gauge.
207. Sine bar works on principle of– • The jobs are mounted using angle plates for both
(a) Trigonometry (b) Geometry measuring and marking.
(c) Algebraic (d) None of the above • Angle plate is mainly made of cast iron.
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007) 211. What is the accuracy of master gauge?
Ans : (a) Sine bar works on the principle of (a) 0.00001" (b) 0.0001"
trigonometry. (c) 0.001" (d) 0.01"
• A surface plate, sine bar and slip gauges are used for (IOF Fitter, 2015)
the precise formation of an angle. Ans : (b) A master gauge is a standard or reference
gauge.
• It is used for checking the accuracy of inspection
gauges.
• It is also used to calibrate or set micrometer,
comparator, or other gauging system.
• Accuracy of master gauge is 0.0001".
212. Measuring tool is made of which metal?
(a) Spring (b) Stainless steel
(c) Both (d) None of the above
BDL Technician 2022
(Coal India Fitter, 2013)
h Ans : (c) Measuring tool is made of spring steel and
Sinθ =
l stainless steel both.
where, h - height of sine bar 213. Bevel protractor is used in–
l - length of sine bar
(a) Linear measurement
208. Material of sine bar is–
(b) Measuring of flat surfaces
(a) Stainless steel
(b) High carbon steel (c) Measuring of height
(c) Stabilized chromium steel (d) Angular measurement
(d) High speed steel IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(IOF Fitter, 2012) (IOF Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (c) Sine bar is made of stabilized chromium steel. Ans : (d) Bevel protractor is an instrument that is used
209. Sine bar is used to– for measuring the angle of job.
(a) Measure the diameter of hole
• The bevel protractors have a beam, a graduated dial
(b) Determine the angle of a taper job
(c) Levelling of a job for drilling and blade that has a connection with a swivel plate.
(d) Check the profile of a thread • The range of bevel protractor is 0-180º.
DRDO Turner.2016 • It is also known as plain protractor or engineer's
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 14.09.2008) protractor.
Ans : (b) Uses of sine bar– 214. Clinometer is related to :
1. For checking the angles of taper job. (a) Spirit level
2. To set the workpiece at a given angle.
3. For checking the measurement of unknown angle in (b) Bevel protractor
the workpiece. (c) Tolerance measurement
4. To check for unknown angles on heavy components. (d) Angle gauge
210. Which of the following is not the angle (IOF Fitter, 2012)
measuring device : Ans : (d) Clinometer is an instrument used for
(a) Angle plate (b) Sine bar measuring angles of slope, elevation or depression of an
(c) Bevel protector (d) Angle gauge object with respect to gravity's direction.
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 • A clinometer is a useful equipment for measuring
Ans : (a) Angle plate is not the angle measuring device. angles and calculating approximate heights.
It is used to clamp the job supporting it at 90º.
• It is used frequently is forestry, engineering and
• Angle plate is made by two plates machining at an
astronomy.
angle of 90º.

Measuring Device and Tools
5. The steel rule is graduated in 10 mm, 5mm, 1
1. Different Types of Rule mm and 0.5 mm. The reading accuracy of the
steel rule is
(a) 0.1 mm (b) 0.2 mm
1. Which of the following is a direct measuring (c) 0.5 mm (d) 0.6 mm
tool? RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(a) try square (b) steel rule Ans. (c) : The reading accuracy (least count) of steel
(c) straight edge (d) ring gauge rule is 0.5 mm.
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • Steel rule is a direct measuring instrument.
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 • The steel rule is an easy and quickest means to
Ans. (b) : Direct measuring instrument determine the measure the linear dimensions of a component.
actual dimension and size of a workpiece. • It is frequently used in the workshop.
Example–Steel rule, vernier caliper, micrometer etc. • A steel rule is made of stainless steel or spring steel.
2. The value of one thimble scale division in 6. What is the length of a narrow blade ?
metric micrometer is (a) 40 mm (b) 50 mm
(c) 60 mm (d) 70 mm
(a) 1 mm (b) 0.5 mm
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.01 mm
Ans. (c) : The length of a narrow blade is 60 mm.
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
7. Which of the following is used for checking the
Ans. (d) : The micrometer is a precision instrument level of machine from sea level?
used to measure a job, generally within an accuracy of (a) Crow bar (b) Differential crane
0.01 mm. (c) Spirit level (d) Plumb bob
• The micrometer works on the principal of screw and BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
nut. The longitudinal movement of the spindle during RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
one rotation is equal to the pitch of the screw. Ans. (c) : Spirit level is used for checking the level of
3. The least count of steel rule in inch is _______. machine from sea level.
(a) 1/8 (b) 1/16 • Spirit level is an instrument designed to indicate
(c) 1/24 (d) None of above whether surface is horizontal or vertical.
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 • Crow bar is commonly used to open nailed wooden
Ans. (d) : Steel rule is used to measure distances or to crates. It consists of a metal bar with single
flattened and curved points.
rule straight lines.
• A plumb bob is a pointed weight attached to the end
• Its sides are right angled & parallel to each other.
of the string and is used to find a vertical reference
• Its least count is 0.5 mm or 1/64 inch. line.
4. Steel rule is a- 8. What is determined while measuring a
(a) measuring tool (b) marking tool component ?
(c) cutting tool (d) striking tool (a) Nominal size (b) Actual size
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) Specified size (d) Scale size
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
Ans. (a) : Steel rule is a measuring tool. Ans. (b) : When measuring a component actual size is
determined.
• It is used to measure distance or to rule straight
• The size based on which the dimensional deviations
lines.
are given is called basic size.
• Least count of steel rule is 0.5 mm. • The extreme permissible sizes within which the
• It is a straightedge with equally spaced markings operator is expected to make the component is
along its length. called limits of size.
• It is available in different length, the common sizes • The difference between the maximum limits of size
being 150 mm, 300 mm and 600 mm. and the minimum limit of size is called tolerance.
Measuring Device and Tools 54 YCT

9. Steel rule is made of Ans. (a) : Error of measurement is the difference

(a) Brass (b) Zinc between the measured value of a quantity at its actual
(c) Stainless steel (d) Cast iron value or true value.
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 Error = True value – measured value.
Ans. (c) : Steel rule is made of stainless steel because Types of error–
stainless steel may be used to make rules as this is 1. Gross error.
naturally corrosion resistance, without needing a 2. Random error.
coating. 3. Systematic error.
• Steel rule is used to measure the linear dimensions 13. Steel rule is under–
of workpiece. (a) Linear measurement
(b) Angular measurement
• Steel rules are available in length of 150 mm, 300
(c) Radial measurement
mm, 600 mm, 1000 mm.
• Steel rule is also known as a straight edge or ruler.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
10. The sensitiveness of the spirit level depends Ans. (a) : Linear measuring instruments are designed to
upon the.... measure the distance between two surface or points (end
(a) size of the bubble measurement).
(b) length of the glass tube • Vernier calipers, micrometers, steel rules are linear
(c) type of liquid filled in the glass tube measuring instruments.
(d) curvature of the glass tube • Protractors, clinometers, sine bars and spirit levels
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 are angular measuring instruments.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 14. The steel rule is available in the size:
Ans. (d) : The sensitive of the spirit level depends upon (a) 50 mm (b) 75 mm
the– (c) 300 mm (d) 400 mm
1. The radius of curvature of the glass tube. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
2. Length of the bubble. Ans. (c) : The steel rule is available in the size of 150
3. Diameter of the bubble. mm, 300 mm, 600 mm, 1000 mm.
4. Viscosity and surface tension of the liquid. • Steel rule is a direct measuring instrument.
5. Smoothness of the finish of the tubes internal • It is made of stainless steel or spring steel.
surface. • The most commonly used steel rule is the 6" rule.
6. Length of one division. • It is a strip of metal graduated in inches and
fractions of an inch to give actual measurements.
11. The following is a line standard of
measurement….. 15. Which one of the following is the hardest
cutting tool material?
(a) Measuring tape (b) Slip gauge
(a) Diamond (b) Ceramics
(c) Micrometer (d) End bars
(c) Cermets (d) Cemented carbide
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Ans. (a) : Measuring tape is a line standard of Ans. (a) : The hardest cutting tool material is diamond.
measurement measuring tape is a flexible ruler used to
• Cemented carbide is harder than tool steel but less
measure length or distance. tough.
• It is made of materials like fiberglass, cloth, plastic, • Cubic boron nitride hardness is next to diamond.
metal ribbon or strip.
• Hardness of ceramics is more than the hardness of
• It is marked in centimeters and inches. cemented carbide but less tough.
• It is consists of a case, thumb lock, blade or tape, • Hardness of diamond is 70000-80000 N/mm2.
hook and sometimes a belt clip. 16. Name the part marked 'X' in the figure.
• The hook located at the end of the tape comes in
handily when measuring hard surfaces.
12. Error of measurement = ……..
(a) True value – Measured value
(b) Precision – True value (a) Ball peen (b) Eye hole
(c) Measured value – Precision (c) Face (d) Left soft
(d) None of these BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Ans. (b) : The part marked 'X' in the figure is eye hole. 21. Which tool is used as linear measurement?
Parts of a hammer– (a) Outside caliper (b) Inside caliper
1. Face 2. Ball peen 3. Cheek 4.Eye hole. (c) Steel rule (d) Scriber
1. Face – It is the striking portion. A slight convexity is RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
given to it to avoid digging of the edge. Ans. (c) : Steel rule–
2. Peen– It is used for shaping and forming work. • It is used as linear measurement.
3. Cheek– It is the middle part of the hammer head. • It is made up of wood, steel, celluloid or plastic.
4. Eye hole– The eye hole is meant for fixing the • It is available in different range from 150 mm to 1000
handle. mm.
17. One metre is equal to ........ mm. • Least count = 0.5 mm.
(a) 1 (b) 100 22. The reading accuracy of Engineers steel rules
(c) 1000 (d) 10000 is..............
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (a) 1.0mm (b) 0.5mm
(c) 1.5mm (d) 2.0mm
Ans. (c) : 1 metre = 100 cm
UPRVUNL (FITTER) 05.04.2021, 9:00AM-12:00PM
= 100 × 10 mm
ISRO Technician Plumber 27-11-2016
= 1000 mm
Ans : (b)
1 m = 103 mm = 1000 mm.
• It is used for linear measurement and marking.
18. Least count of an Engineer's steel rule is
• Reading accuracy of engineering steel rule = 0.5
(a) 1 mm (b) 0.5 mm
mm
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.01 mm
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 23. A linear measurement device _____
(a) Steel rule (b) Sine bar
Ans. (b) :
(c) Spirit level (d) Bevel protractor
• Least count of engineering steel rule = 0.5 mm.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
• It is used to measure the linear dimension of a
component with limited accuracy. Ans : (a) Steel rule–
• It works on the basic measuring technique of • It is used as linear measurement.
comparing an unknown length to the one previously • It is made up of wood, steel, celluloid or plastic.
calibrated. • It is available in different range from 150 mm to 1000
19. Which of the following statements is TRUE for mm.
a steel rule? • Least count = 0.5 mm.
(a) Marking instrument 24. Sensor meter is used in which work ?
(b) Precision instrument (a) To check the difference between two mating
(c) Checking instrument parts
(d) Direct reading measuring instrument (b) To check the accuracy of holes
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 (c) To check the accuracy of holes
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (d) To check the diameter of cylindrical parts
Ans. (d) : Steel rule– UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
• It is a direct reading measurement instrument. Ans : (a) Sensor meter is used to check the difference
• It is graduated in 10 mm, 5 mm, 1 mm and 0.5 mm between two mating parts.
in metric system. 25. A scale in which the distance between
• Measuring with a graduated rule is commonly graduations is proportional to the value of that
called direct measurement. graduation is called :
• Used for linear measurement and marking. (a) regular scale (b) Linear scale
20. For TIG welding, commonly used gas is : (c) Line scale (d) Equidistant scale
(a) Acetylene (b) Hydrogen LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
(c) Argon (d) All of these Ans : (b) Linear scale– A scale in which the distance
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 between graduations is proportional to the value of that
Ans. (c) : TIG welding– graduation is called linear scale.
• Commonly used gas as shielding gas = Argon. 26. Steel rule is made of :
• Shielding gas serves to blanket the weld and (a) Forged steel (b) Spring steel
excludes the active properties in surrounding air. (c) High carbon steel (d) Alloys
• It is a process that produces an electric arc NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
maintained between a non consumable tungsten UPRVUNL (FITTER) 05.04.2021, 9:00AM-12:00PM
electrode and part to be welded. (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001)
Ans : (b) Steel rule–

• It is used to measure linear dimension of a 2. Marking Tool
component with limited accuracy.
• It works on basic measuring technique of comparing
an unknown length to the one previously calibrated. 31. Witness marks are made using______punch.
• It is made up of spring steel or stainless steel. (a) 0º prick (b) Centre punch
27. Shrink rule is used : (c) 60º prick (d) 90º prick
(a) In sheet metal work (b) In smith work UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(c) Pattern maker (d) Die maker Ans. (c) : Witness marks are made using 60o prick
(IOF Fitter, 2015) punch.
Ans : (c) Shrink rule– Punch Point angle Application
• It is a special type of rule which is used to ease
pattern making. Centre punch 90o This is used for
• It looks like a simple rule, just the graduation on it is locating the centre of
bigger than a simple rule because shrinkage the holes
o
allowance is added to each division of the shrink rule. Prick punch 30 It is used for making
28. Which rule is used to check the zig-zag light punch marks
surfaces: needed to positive
(a) Scale (b) Shrink rule dividers
(c) Steel tape (d) None Dot punch 60 o
These punches are
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
used to make witness
Ans : (c) Steel tape– marks on scribed
• It is used to check the zig zag surfaces. lines.
• It is flexible.
• It can give you accurate results at any temperature 32. Which one of the following is not a type of
& its designed to withstand more wear and tear than punch?
fibre glass tapes. (a) Dot punch (b) Centre punch
29. During marking reference surfaces met by– (c) Prick punch (d) Porch punch
(a) Surface gauge UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(b) Work piece Ans. (d) : Porch punch is not a type of punch.
(c) For drawing work
Dot punch–
(d) Marking table is surface
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 • It is moulded of cast steel and its pointer has 60o
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) angle.
D.M.R.C. Maintainer Technician 2006 • It is used to make witness mark for the permanent
Ans : (d) A marking table is used as a reference surface marking.
for marking on work-pieces. Centre punch–
• Marking table are made of cast iron, or granite and are • The angle of point is 90o.
available in various sizes.
• It is used to located the centre of hole in wide and
• These tables are also used for setting measuring
instruments, and for checking sizes, parallelism and deep shape and also used for drilling centres.
angles. Prick punch–
30. Which type of rule is used for marking and • The point angle of prick punch is 30o or 60o.
measuring during working on hot job and • 30o point angle prick punch is used for marking
pattern by blacksmith? light marks and draw a curve.
(a) Narrow rule (b) Shrink rule • 60o point angle prick punch is used for marking
(c) Hook rule (d) Short rule
witness marks.
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) 33. _______is the point angle for a centre punch.
(RRB Chennai/Bangalore ALP, 27.10.2002) (a) 25º or 35º (b) 10º or 20º
Ans : (b) Shrink rule– (c) 60º or 90º (d) 45º or 55º
• It is a special type of rule which is used to ease UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
pattern making or case box. Ans. (c) : Centre punch is used to locate the centre of
• It looks like a simple rule, just the graduation on it holes in wide and deep shape.
is bigger than a simple rule because shrinkage
allowance is added to each division of the shrink • It is also used for drilling centres.
rule. • The point angle for a centre punch is 60o or 90o.

34. Tools used for the marking of any job, are The point angle of center punch a hand punch
known as : consisting of a short steel bar with a hardened conical
(a) Measuring tools (b) None of these point at one end used for marking the center of holes to
(c) Cutting tools (d) Marking tools be drilled.
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 38. 'V' block are available in grade of
Ans. (d) : Tools used for the marking of any job are (a) 0 and 1 (b) 1 and 2
known as marking tools. (c) A1 and A2 (d) A and B
• Some marking tools are scriber, marking table, HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
surface plate, angle plate, V block, divider etc. HPSSC (Fitter) 20-10-2019
35. Which of the following is a type of divider? Ans. (d) : V-block are available in grade A and B.
(a) Firm joint type divider • A grade V block are made from high quality steel. B
grade V block are made from closed grain cast iron.
(b) Spring type divider
(c) Spring type divider and firm joint type divider • V block of grade A is more accurate and grade B is
used for general work.
both
(d) None of these • V block are used to hold the workpiece during drilling
and it is made of cast iron.
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
• V blocks are generally used for cylindrical workpieces
Ans. (c) : Spring type divider and firm joint type to check their roundness or marking centres.
divider both are types of divider.
39. Scriber is made of
• A divider is an important instrument used for marking
(a) copper (b) high carbon steel
a work
(c) mild steel (d) cast iron
• It is similar to calipers but its legs have sharp point.
36. Which of the following is an indirect measuring
Ans. (b) : A scriber is a hand tool used in metal
tool? working to mark lines on workpiece, prior to machining
(a) inside caliper scriber is made of high carbon steel.
(b) vernier caliper
40. Surface plates are made of
(c) universal bevel protractor (a) high grade cast steel
(d) inside micrometer (b) fine grained cast iron
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 (c) alloy steel
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 (d) wrought iron
Ans. (a) : Indirect measuring tool transfer the HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
measurement from the workpiece to the direct Ans. (b) : Surface plates are made of fine grained cast
measuring instrument then the comparison is made. iron.
Example–Divider, calipers, surface gauge. Surface plate is used to fact the flatness of other surface
Direct measuring tool determine the actual dimension or to provide a truly flat datum surface in making off
and size of the workpiece. work for machining.
Example–Steel rule, vernier caliper, micrometer, 41. 'V' block is used to hold round bar. It has a 'V'
compass, French curve etc. groove which is usually
37. The point angle of center punch is (a) 30º (b) 60º
(a) 30º (b) 60º (c) 90º (d) 120º
(c) 90º (d) 120º HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 Ans. (c) : V-blocks are precision metal working jig
Ans. (c) : The point angle of center punch is 90o. typically used to hold around metal rod for performing
drilling or milling operations.
• V-block are made of cast iron.
• V groove which is usually angle 90º.
42. Which scraper is also called bearing scraper?
(a) triangular (b) half round
(c) flat (d) hook
Ans. (b) : Scrapper are mostly used in the
manufacturing industry for removing unnecessary
material from workpiece.

Types of scrapper– 47. The tool used for laying out large circles is:
Flat scrapper (a) Trammel (b) Divider
Half round scrapper (c) Jenny calipers (d) Scriber
Three square scrapper ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
Bull nose scrapper
Ans. (a) : Trammel:- In trammel consist of a bar with
Two handle scrapper
two movable head. It is used to draw large circles or
Hook scrapper
arcs that are beyond the limit of the divider. It is used
• Half round scrapper is also called bearing scrapper, as
it scraps the surface of bearing. mostly in sheet metal work.
• Half round scraper is found in a semicircular.
43. The instrument used for big circle marking is :
(a) divider (b) trammel
(c) height gauge (d) ring gauge
48. V- Block usually has an angle of:
BEML 2022
(a) 30º (b) 60º
(c) 90º (d) 120º
Ans. (b) : A trammel point set used for laying out circle
that arc too large. ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
• Trammel are used for measure distance between two Ans. (c) : V- block usually has an angle of –90º
point that are too great to be reached with divider. • V- Block is a supporting device which used to hold
44. Which system is a system of marking? round rods or pipes for performing drilling. or milling
(a) Media (b) Dating operation
(c) Zeting (d) Lay-out • V- Block is also used to check roundness.
Ans. (d) : Layout system is a system of marking.
• A layout indicates where a structure need to be placed
on your plot.
45. Sine bar is made of–
(a) hard carbon steel
(b) high speed steel
(c) nickel steel 49. The point angle of a scriber is:
(d) stabilized chromium steel (a) 30º (b) 60º
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 (c) 5º to 10º (d) 12º to 15º
Ans. (d) : Sine bar is made of stabilized chromium ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
steel.
Ans. (d) : The point angle of a scriber is 12º to 15º
A sine bar consist of a hard, precision ground body with
two precision ground cylinder fixed at the ends. • Scriber are used in metal working, to mark lines on
• Sine bar is used measure angle very accurately. work piece before manufacturing.
46. The angle point of the scriber is : • Scriber tip should be sharp and fine, so that thin and
(a) 5 to 10 degree (b) 15 to 20 degree accurate scribe line can be drawn on work piece.
(c) 25 to 30 degree (d) None of these
Ans. (b) : The angle point of the scriber is 15 to 20
degree.
A scriber is a hand tool used in metal work to mark
lines on workpiece, prior to machining. The process of
using a scriber is called as scribing. It is used instead of
pencils or ink lines, because the letter are hand to see, 50. A 100 mm long (nominal size) 'V' Block
easily erased. They are a rod with a tip made of cast capable of clamping workpieces between 5 to
steel. 90 mm in diameter and of Grade A will be
designated as
(a) 'V' Block 100/5-90 A I.S. 2949
(b) 'V' Block M 100/5-90 I.S. 2949
(c) 'V' Block 100/5-90 I.S. 2949
(d) 'V' Block M 100/5-90 I.S. 2949
Ans. (a) : A 100 mm long (nominal size) 'V' Block

capable of clamping workpieces between 5 to 90 mm in
diameter and of Grade A will be designated as 'V'
Block 100/5-90 A I.S. 2949.
Where, l = 100 mm
d = 5 to 90 mm
A = Grade A. (a) Scratch awl (b) Trammel
51. Scratch awl, shown in the figure, is used - (c) Making Punch (d) Divider
NTPC Fitter 2016
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
Ans. (d) : Divider is a type of marking tool.
• It is used to drawn an arc or circle on the surface of
a job.
• It is used to mark impressions up to 20 mm radius
on sheet metal.
(a) to draw deeper lines Type of divider–
(b) to firm up the drawn lines 1. Rivet type divider
(c) to make circles or impressions 2. Spring type divider.
(d) to draw ordinary lines 54. Which of the following methods of marking is
used for marking of an irregular shaped job ?
IOCL 2020 (a) Centre line method (b) Datum line method
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 (c) Marking by template (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : Scratch awl is used to draw deeper lines. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• Scratch awl is a wood working layout and point Ans. (a) : There are many method for working–
making tool. 1. Centre line method–
• The scratch awl is basically a steel spike with its tip • This method is used on odd shaped irregular job.
sharpened to a fine point. • An imaginary line is drawn is such types of job for
marking and other lines are drawn on its basis.
• Carpenters will use this scratch awl results to create 2. Marking by template–
lines that guide a hand saw or a chisel. • This method is used for quick marking in mass
52. Identify the making tool that is used to draw production.
the line on sheet surface as shown in the figure. 3. Datum line and datum surface–
• Datum line is a reference line from which all other
lines are marked.
55. In datum line method of marking, finished
surfaces are inclined at an angle of –
(a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 90° (d) 45°
Ans. (c) : In datum line method of marking, finished
surface are inclined at an angle of 90o.
(a) Trammel (b) Divider • Datum line is a reference line from which all other
lines are marked.
(c) Scriber (d) Compass
• For most components, two datum lines are required,
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 one horizontal and the other vertical.
Ans. (c) : Scriber is a marking tool that is used to draw • The intersecting point provides the common
the line on sheet surface. Scriber is made from a rod of position.
hardened and tempered tool steel.
• Scriber is ground to a fine point at one or both ends.
• The point angle of scriber is 12o-15o.
53. The marking tool shown in the following figure,
is used to mark impressions up to 20 mm
radius on sheet metal. Identify.
56. Which of the following punches is used at the Ans. (a) : Scriber is a tool used for marking.
point of contact of the two line for marking? • Length of scriber varies from 150 mm to 200 mm.
(a) Prick punch (b) Wad punch
• Scriber point is varies from 12o to 15o.
(c) Dot punch (d) Solid punch
• While scribing line, the scriber is used as a pencil so
that, the line drawn are closed to the straight edge.
Ans. (c) : Dot punch is used at the point of contact of
the two line for marking. • The point of the scriber should be ground and
hardened.
• Dot punch is moulded of cast steel and its pointer
has 60o angle. 60. Which marking tool is used for drawing a
• It is used to make witness mark for the permanent circle ?
marking. (a) Divider (b) Trammel
• Solid punch is used to make hole in the sheet and (c) Scriber (d) Both (a) and (b)
these holes are not accurate in size. RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
57. The main disadvantages of glass surface plate Ans. (d) : Dividers are used for scribing circles and also
is, its – for taking off and transferring dimensions.
(a) brittleness (b) hardness • Trammel is used for scribing large circles.
(c) toughness (d) ductility • Trammel has marking in inch and millimetre with
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 its friction.
Ans. (a) : Glass surface plate–
61. A parallel block is commonly made from –
• Its surface made up of glass is of 4 to 8 micron
(a) steel (b) cast iron
finish.
(c) granite (d) all of the above
• It is light weighted so that, easily movable from one
place to other. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
• It is not used in punching operation. Ans. (d) : Parallel block has a rectangular shape with
• It is also not affected by environment. different length and breadth of carbon steel block which
• The main disadvantage of glass surface plate is its is hard, temper and grinded.
brittleness. • It is commonly made from steel, cast iron and
58. Which of the following angle plates is most granite.
commonly used in workshops? • It is used to place under the finished job so that the
(a) Slotted type angle plate lower surface of job keep parallel to the machine
(b) Box angle plate table.
(c) Solid angle plate • It is also used for lifting the job up to the required
(d) Adjustable angle plate height.
BHEL 2020 62. Which of the following is used for moving up
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 and down of scriber, in a fixed surface gauge ?
Ans. (c) : Types of angle plate– (a) Base (b) Spindle
1. Solid angle plate– It is most commonly used plate in (c) Rocker arm (d) Nut
workpiece. RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
2. Adjustable angle plate– This angle plate is available Ans. (c) : Rocker arm is used for moving up and down
to support job at different angles.
of scriber, in a fixed surface gauge.
3. Box angle plate–
• Surface gauge or scribing block used for drawing
• It has four faces.
parallel line of anyone side of the job.
• This plate has all the faces at 90o to each other.
• Fixed surface gauge or fixed scribing block is used
4. Slotted type angle plate–
in four chuck lathe machine for the job turning.
• This type angle plate has slots on both surfaces.
• It is used when the support is needed while marking 63. The base of universal surface gauge is made up
on the job. of –
(a) cast iron (b) mild steel
59. The length of the scriber varies from –
(a) 150 mm to 200 mm (c) wrought iron (d) bronze
(b) 200 mm to 250 mm RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
(c) 100 mm to 150 mm Ans. (a) : In universal surface gauge or universal
(d) all of the above scribing block, pillar is not fix at base.
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • The base of universal surface gauge is made up of
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 cast iron.
• The lock nut is used for adjusting of scriber. Ans. (b) : The part marked as 'X' in the displayed
• Universal surface gauge done fine marking as surface plate is rib.
compare to the fixed scribing block or fixed surface • Surface plate is generally square or rectangular in
gauge. shape.
64. What is the hardness of grade B V-block ? • It is made of cast iron, granite, glass etc.
(a) 180-220 HB (b) 200-250 HB
• Its upper surface and sides are made accurately
(c) 100-150 HB (d) 150-180 HB
finish by scraping.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
• It is used to test the flatness of other surface or to
Ans. (a) : B grade V-block–
• These V-blocks are not so accurate as grade A. provide a truly flat datum surface in marking off.
• These blocks are used for general machine shop 68. Identify the punch shown in the figure.
work.
• These are available upto 300 mm length.
• These are made up of grained cast iron.
• The hardness of B-grade V-block is 180-220 HB.
65. What is the hardness of grade A V-block? (a) Pin punch
(a) 600-650 HB (b) Hollow punch
(b) 650-700 HB (c) Wad punch
(c) 700-750 HB (d) Dot punch
(d) None of the above RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
Ans. (c) : Punch shown in the figure is wad punch.
Ans. (b) : V-block are available in grade A and B.
• A wad punch is used to cut circular hole in soft
A-grade V-block–
material.
• These blocks are more accurate and available only
upto 100 mm length. 69. An angle plate is measured by –
• They are made of high quality steel. (a) weight
• The hardness of A-grade V-block is 650-700 HB. (b) length
66. A hollow punch is used for making hole in soft (c) number
materials, like – (d) length × breadth × height
(a) leather
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(b) gas cutting sheet
(c) non-ferrous metal Ans. (d) : Angle plate is made of closely grained cast
(d) all of the above iron or steel.
BDL Technician 2022 • The edges and ends are also machined square.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 • They have ribs on the un-machined part for good
Ans. (d) : A hollow punch is used for making hole in rigidity and to prevent distortion.
soft materials, like leather, gas cutting sheet and non- • An angle plate is measured by length × breadth ×
ferrous metals. height.
• It is easily identified by its exit hole located near the
70. In an angle plate, a slot is cut –
working end.
• The exit hole allows the punched material to be (a) for tightening nut with bolt
removed and discarded. (b) for fixing hooks, etc.
67. Identify the part marked as 'X' in the (c) to reduce the load
displayed surface plate. (d) to keep to job straight
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (a) : In an angle plate, a slot is cut for tightening
nut with bolt.
• Solid angle plate is suitable for supporting
workpieces during layout work.
(a) Jig (b) Rib
(c) Edge (d) Straight • Slotted type angle plate is comparatively bigger in
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 size than the solid angle plate.

71. These are used for setting a job in machine Ans. (a) : Dividers are the tools used for measurement
shop. Identify. in geometry. Dividers are used for scribing circles and
also for taking off and transferring dimensions.
• The legs of a divider are uniformly pointed.
74. As shown in the following figure, this kind of
punch is used for fine marking. Identify.
(a) Adjustable parallel block

(b) Solid type parallel block
(c) Fixed surface gauge
(d) Universal surface gauge
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (a) Drift punch (b) Dot punch
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 (c) Prick punch (d) Hollow punch
Ans. (b) : Solid type parallel blocks are used for setting RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
a job in machine shop.
Ans. (c) : Prick punch shown in the figure is used for
• They are available in a set of two, having same fine marking.
length, breadth and height.
• The angle of the prick punch is 30o or 60o.
• Solid parallel blocks are available in two grades–
grade A and grade B. • The 30o prick punch is used for marking light marks
and drawn a curve.
• A grade is used in tool room and B grade in
machine shop. • 30o prick punch is used for soft metal such as brass,
copper, aluminium etc.
72. Match the following punches with their usage.
• The 60o prick punch is used for marking witness
Punch Usage
marks.
1. Centre punch (A) Punching of observed
points 75. The purpose of a universal marking block is –
2. Dot punch (B) To mark light lines for (a) to draw lines at a height
giving right position to (b) to identify the centre of round rod
the divider leg. (c) to measure right angles
3. Prick punch (C) To mark extra thick (d) to draw angles
marks for giving RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
better position to drill Ans. (b) : Universal marking block is also known as
point. universal scribing block.
(a) 1(C), 2(A), 3(B) (b) 1(C), 2(B), 3(A) The purpose of a universal marking block–
(c) 1(A), 2(C), 3(B) (d) 1(B), 2(A), 3(C) • It is used to drawn parallel lines of base on the job
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 surface.
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 • To find out the centre of circle or cylindrical job.
Ans. (a) : • For truing the job in lathe machine.
Punch Usage 76. Punch shown in the following figure, is used on
Centre punch To mark extra thick marks for the metal, for marking the centre point at
giving better position to drill point. which the hole will be made. Identify.
Dot punch Punching of observed points
Prick punch To mark light lines for giving right
position to the divider leg.
73. The legs of a divider are –
(a) uniformly pointed
(b) uneven
(c) one straight and another bent inside
(d) one at 45° and another at 60°
(a) Prick punch (b) Centre punch 2. Single level double groove V-block–
(c) Dot punch (d) Pin punch
Ans. (b) : Punch shown in the above figure is centre
punch and it is used on the metal, for marking the centre
point at which the hole will be made.
• The angle of point is 90o in a centre punch.
• It is used to locate the centre of holes in wide and
deep shape.
3. Double level single groove V-block–
77. What is the purpose of label 'B' in the V-block
shown in the following figure?
4. Matched pair V-block–

(a) For taking measurement
(b) For measuring angle
(c) For clamping
(d) For supporting
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
79. Which type of V-block is shown in the
Ans. (c) : The purpose of label 'B' in the V-block shown
in the above figure is for clamping. following figure?
• V-blocks are used to hold the cylindrical or circular
job for marking and setting the job on machines.
• The angle of V-block remains 90o.
(a) Single level, single groove

(b) Single level, double groove
(c) Double level, single groove
(d) Double level, double groove
78. Which type of V-block is shown in the NLC Technician 24-09.2022
following figure? RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
Ans. (c) : V-block shown in the figure is double level
single groove.
• Double level singles groove V-blocks will have two
grooves on the top and bottom.
• A single groove for clamping on either side.
(a) Single level, single groove 80. Identify the instrument in the following figure,
(b) Single level, double groove which is used for making big impressions and
(c) Double level, single groove
circles.
(d) Double level, double groove
Ans. (b) : There are four types of V-blocks–
1. Single level single groove V-block–
(a) Divider (b) Trammel

(c) Scriber (d) Surface gauge

Ans. (b) : The instrument in the figure, which is used Ans. (d) : Scriber shown in the figure is adjustable
for making big impression and circles is trammel. scriber.
• Trammel has 15 to 50 cm long round or flat rod • The length of this type of scriber can be increased
known as beam or trammel bar. or decreased according to need.
• Two sliding hands are attached to its beam and can • It contains an empty sleeve which carry knurling in
be set at any place by screw fixed with head. outside parts.
81. Precise instruments are used on the table • The wire of scriber go inside the sleeve with the
shown in the following figure. Identify the help of nut.
table. 84. Identify pocket scriber from the following.
(a)
(b)
(a) Angle plate (b) Surface plate (c)

(c) V-block (d) All of the above
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (d)
Ans. (b) : Surface plate is used to test the flatness of RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
other surface or to provide a truly flat datum surface in Ans. (c) : Pocket scriber is held formally in the handle
marking off. by a knurled chuck and when not in used can be
• Surface plate is available in many sizes, but reversed into the handle and lock by the chuck.
generally 50 × 50 cm2 and 100 × 100 cm2 surface • In pocket scriber, the hexagonal shaped head
plate sizes are used. prevents rolling.
• It is available in the thickness of 2.5 cm to 7.5 cm. 85. The punch shown in the figure, is available in
82. Which angle plate can be set at any angle as 60° and 90°, and is used for fine and correct
shown in the following figure ? marking. Identify
(a) Drift punch (b) Bell centre punch

(c) Automatic punch (d) Pin punch
Ans. (c) : Automatic punch–
• It is a modern punch and while using it, there is no
need to strike hammer over punch head.
(a) Solid angle plate
• Its point is of either 60o or 90o.
(b) Box angle plate
• It is used for fine and accurate marking.
(c) Swivel base angle plate
• The quality of strike can be adjusted by rotating its
(d) Slotted type angle plate
cap fitted to back.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
86. Pin punches are used for making holes in
Ans. (c) : Swivel base angle plate can be set at any
cylindrical jobs. Pin punches are available in
angle easily.
the following set of pins –
• Swivel base angle plate is used to support the job at
(a) 5 pins (b) 6 pins
an angle.
(c) 10 pins (d) 12 pins
• Box angle plate has all the faces at 90o to each
other.
Ans. (a) : Pin punch–
83. Identify the scriber shown in the following
• Pin punches are used for making holes in cylindrical
figure.
jobs.
• It is also used to draw out the dove tail pin from the
(a) Pocket scriber (b) Straight scriber job.
(c) Bent scriber (d) Adjustable scriber • Pin punches are available in the set of 5 pins.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 • Its edge is not pointed but have cylindrical pin.

87. The material of a surface plate is – 91. Material of B grade V-block is –

(a) high grade cast iron (a) high quality iron
(b) fine grained cast iron (b) fine grained cast iron
(c) alloy steel (c) steel
(d) wrought iron (d) brass
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Ans. (b) : The material of a surface plate is fine grained Ans. (b) : Material of B grade V-block is fine grained
cast iron, granite, glass etc.
cast iron.
• Surface plate is generally square or rectangular in
• B grade V-block is available upto 300 mm length.
shape.
• Upper surface and sides of the surface plate are 92. Arms of solid angle plate are made at an angle
made accurately finish by scraping. of –
88. Why end stop is used with any V-block? (a) 60° (b) 90°
(a) To stop disfiguring of the job on the V-block (c) 45° (d) 110°
(b) To stop the circular movement of the job in NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
the V-block RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(c) For indicating and machining Ans. (b) : Angles plates are suitable for supporting
(d) To prevent the fall of V-block lobe and axial workpiece during layout work.
movement • They are comparatively smaller in size.
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 • Slots are provided to clamp the workpiece.
• Arms of solid angle plate are made at an angle of
Ans. (d) : End stop is used with any V-block to prevent
90o.
the fall of V-block lobe and axial movement.
• Swivel base angle plate can be set at any angle
• The U-clamps are used to fix the job tightly in the
easily.
V-block for machining purpose.
• V-blocks are finished to a high accuracy in respect 93. This scraper cutting edge helps to make point
to dimension, flatness and squareness. contact while scrapping and also helps to
89. Which point is correct with relation to the remove small spots, name the type of scraper –
specifications of V-block? ––––––––
(a) Angle of V–block (b) Height of V–block (a) three square scraper (b) bull nose scraper
(c) Length of V–block (d) Range of V–block (c) half round scraper (d) flat scraper
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : V-block is specified by length. Ans. (c) : Half round scraper–
• Grade A, V-block is available upto 100 mm length. • It is used to remove high spots in bore and bearing.
• Grade B, V-block is available upto 300 mm length. • These type of scrapers are widely used for scraping
• Grade A, V-block is made of high quality steel and internal cylindrical surface and curved surface of
grade B is made of grained cast iron. plane bearing.
90. V–block is available in the following grades – • Its body is of semicircular shape and has a cutting
(a) A and B (b) A, B and C edge on both sides.
(c) only A (d) only B • Its cutting angle is between 45o to 65o.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 94. What is the name of the angle denoted by 'A' in
Ans. (a) : V-blocks are available in grade A and grade the Fig.?
B.
1. Grade A –
• These blocks are more accurate and available upto
100 mm length.
• They are made up of high quality steel.
2. Grade B –
• These V-blocks are not accurate as grade A. (a) Point angle (b) Clearance angle
• These blocks are used for general machine shop (c) Rake angle (d) Cutting angle
work. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
Ans. (c) : Ans. (c) : The size of divider is specified by the

distance between the pivot and the point.
• Divider is used for drawing circle or arc on a job
and dividing the line in equal parts.
Types of divider–
1. Rivet type divider– It is also known as firm joint
divider.
2. Spring type divider– Its both legs have upper joint
• Point angle varies from 35o to 70o. attached with spring.
• Rake angle is up to 20o.
98. Typical locating device for cylindrical job used
• Clearance is about 10o. in jigs and fixtures are________.
• Inclination angle is about 40o. (a) Drill jigs
95. What is the name of scriber marked as '2' in (b) V-block
figure?
(c) Mandrels
(d) Angle plate
Ans. (b) : Typical locating device for cylindrical job
used in jigs and fixtures are V-blocks.
(a)Straight scriber
(b)Bent scriber • V-blocks are used to hold the cylindrical or circular
(c)Adjustable sleeve scriber object for marking and setting the work on the
(d)Ball head scriber machines.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 99. V-block (vee locators) are used for clamping as
Ans. (c) : Adjustable sleeve scriber contains an empty well as locating when faces are inclined upto:
sleeve which carry knurling in outside parts. (a) 30° (b) 12°
• The wire of scriber go inside the sleeve with the (c) 9° (d) 3°
help of nut. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
• The length of this scriber can be increased or Ans. (a) : V-block are used for clamping as well as
decreased according to need. locating when faces are inclined upto 30o.
• One end of bent scriber is straight and other is bent
Types of V-block–
at 90o but both are pointed.
1. Single level single groove V-block.
96. Which type of rule is used for marking and
measuring patterns and hot jobs handled by 2. Single level double groove V-block.
blacksmith? 3. Double level single groove V-block.
(a) Narrow rule (b) Shrink rule 4. Matched pair V-block.
(c) Hook rule (d) Short rule 100. In a marking media, copper sulphate needs to
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 be handled carefully because…..
Ans. (b) : Shrink rule is used for marking and (a) it will quickly dry
measuring patterns and hot jobs handled by blacksmith. (b) it is poisonous
• At the time of marking, shrink allowance would (c) it will quickly dilute
increase from real measuring.
(d) it is highly concentrated
• Hook rule is used to get the measurement on inside
caliper.
• Narrow rule is used to measure groove or hole. Ans. (b) : The copper sulphate is used on machine
• Key seat rule is used to draw parallel lines. finished surfaces.
97. The size of the divider is specified by the….. • Copper sulphate sticks to the finished surface well.
(a) distance between points when opened fully • Copper sulphate needs to be handled carefully
(b) total length of the legs because it is poisonous.
(c) distance between the pivot and the point • Copper sulphate solution is prepared by mixing
(d) length of the legs without points copper sulphate in water and a few drops of nitric
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 acid.

101. Name the type of divider shown in figure. 103. Which work holding devices support the round
job, while drilling the job on a drilling
machine?
(a) ‘V block and clamps, bolts, packing piece
(b) The machine vice and bolts, packing piece
(c) The hand vice with clamps, bolts
(d) The pin vice with clamp, bolts
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
Ans. (a) : V-block and clamps, bolts, packing piece
support the round job, while drilling the job on a
drilling machine.
104. Name the marking media that takes more time
(a) Firm joint
for drying than the other.
(b) Spring joint (a) Copper sulphate
(c) Screw joint (b) Cellulose lacquer
(d) Needle joint (c) Prussian blue
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (d) chalk powder mixed with water
Ans. (b) : Types of divider RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
1. Rivet type divider– Ans. (c) : Prussian blue marking media takes more time
• It is also known as firm joint divider. for drying than the other.
• The legs of this divider are attached with the help of • It is used on machined finished surfaces.
rivet and a washer is placed between them. • Cellulose lacquer is a commercially available
• It is opened or closed by applying force on its legs. marking media.
2. Spring type divider– • Cellulose lacquer is available in different colors and
dry very quickly.
• It is similar to rivet type divider but its both legs
• Layout die marking media is mostly used in 3D
have upper joint attached with spring.
marking.
105. Which one is not the marking media used on
machined work surface?
(a) Prussian blue
(b) Copper sulphate solution
(c) Cellulose lacquer
(d) Chalk powder mixed with spirit
Ans. (d) : Chalk powder mixed with spirit or white
wash is not used on machined work surface.
• It is used for rough, rusty or mild steel jobs and
suitable for casting and forging.
102. When Prussian blue mixed with ........, it forms
a quick drying stain which is known as • White wash is not recommended for workpiece that
have high accuracy.
marking blue or layout dye.
(a) Grease 106. The recommended cutting angle of a flat
scraper is in between.........
(b) Oil
(a) 70o to 75o (b) 75o to 80o
(c) Methylated spirits o o
(c) 80 to 85 (d) 85o to 90o
(d) Plastics
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (c) : When Prussian blue mixed with methylated Ans. (a) : The recommended cutting angle of a flat
spirits, it forms a quick drying strain which is known as scraper is in between 70o to 75o.
marking blue or layout dye. • The flat scraper is used for removing slight
• Prussian blue is used on machine finished surfaces. irregularities on a flat surface.
• It gives very clear and accurate lines, but takes more • Its edge is made slightly convex.
time for drying than the other marking media. • Its length is 100 mm to 300 mm.

107. The half round scraper cutting is in between (a) Fine adjusting screw
(a) 30o to 35o (b) 35o to 40o (b) Guide pins
o o
(c) 40 to 45 (d) 45o to 65o (c) Base
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 (d) Rocker arm
Ans. (b) : Half round scraper is used to remove high RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
spots in bore and bearing to give the right type of fit to Ans. (b) : Guide pins helps to draw parallel lines along
the mating shaft or journal. a datum edge.
• The half round scraper cutting angle is in between • Pillar is fitted into rocker arm with the help of nut.
35o to 40o. • Head of rocker arm is attached with adjusting
screw.
• Bull nose scraper is used to make oil pocket in large
bearing. • When turn the screw, then scriber is moving up and
down direction.
• Two handle is used to scrap large size flat surface.
• The lock nut is used for adjusting of scriber.
108. Templates are used for– • Universal surface gauge done fine marking as
(a) Drilling (b) Milling compare to the fixed surface gauge.
(c) Boring (d) Marking 112. For a vernier caliper, the main scale reading is
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 20 mm and the least count is 0.02 mm. The
Ans. (d) : Templates are used for marking. The purpose total reading when vernier division is matched
of marking is used to mark on any workpiece or a job to with the main scale in 26th division.
obtain accurate shape and size. What will happen?
109. Which one is not the use of divider? (a) 26.04 mm (b) 20.26 mm
(a) Scribe circle (c) 20.02 mm (d) 20.52 mm
(b) Arcs UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
(c) Transferring distance BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(d) Marking tangents Ans. (d) : Main scale division (MSD) = 20 mm
Vernier caliper least count (LC) = 0.02 mm
Vernier scale reading (VSD) = 26 mm
Ans. (d) : Dividers are used to scriber circle, arcs and
Total reading = MSD + LC × VSD
transferring distance.
= 20 + 0.02 × 26
• Dividers are not used for marking tangents. = 20.52 mm
• Dividers is classified according to the maximum 113. What is the angle of point of dot punch?
opening between the two points.
(a) 10º (b) 45º
• Dividers are made of high carbon steel and mild
(c) 60º (d) 90º
steel. UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
110. Surface plate is used to– Ans. (c) : Dot punch–
(a) Check the trueness of flat surface • It is similar to centre punches but have a sharper
(b) Check the surface roughness point ground to an angle of 60o by holding it
(c) Hold the round bars during marking tangentially.
(d) Check the roundness of a cylindrical work • It is used basically to mark the centre of a hole to be
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 drilled either by hand or drilling machine.
Ans. (a) : Surface plate is used to check the trueness of 114. What is sharp point angle of scriber?
flat surface. (a) 5º to 10º (b) 0º to 5º
(c) 45º to 90º (d) 15º to 20º
• It is used to test the flatness of other surfaces or to
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
provide a truly flat datum surface in marking off.
Ans. (d) : Scriber–
• Surface plate is available in the thickness of 2.5 cm • It is a hand tool used in metal work to mark lines on
to 7.5 cm. work piece, prior to machining.
Types of surface plate– • They are rod with a tip made of cast steel that has
1. Cast iron surface plate. been hardened & tempered.
2. Granite surface plate. • The point is sharpened at an angle of 15 to 20o.
3. Glass surface plate. 115. The 600 dot punch is used for.............
111. Which one of the following parts of a universal (a) witness marks (b) position of dividers
surface gauge helps to draw parallel lines along (c) accuracy punching (d) wide punching
a datum edge? DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
Ans. (a) : Dot punch– • Prick punch is a short length punch. It is made of
• It is similar to centre punches but have a sharper high carbon steel.
point ground to an angle of 60o by holding it • It is used to draw curves.
tangentially to a tool. 119. Combination set is used to:
• It is normally used to mark the centre of a hole to be (a) In checking the flatness of surface
drilled either by hand or on the drilling machine. (b) To draw a circle
(c) To draw a line
(d) To check angular surface
Dot punch UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
116. Which of the following is a type of divider? Ans. (d) : Combination set–
(a) Firm joint type divider • It can be used for different types of work, like
(b) Spring type divider layout work, measurement and checking of angle.
(c) Spring type divider and Firm joint type • It has a–
divider both (i) Centre head and a rule
(ii) Protractor head
(d) None of these
(iii) Square head.
NMRC, 15-09-2019 • It is a instrument that has all the features of try
Ans. (c) : square, bevel protractor, rule and scriber.
• Divider is a type of marking tool.
• It is used to drawn an arc or circle on the surface of a
job.
Type of divider–
(i) Rivet type divider
(ii) Spring type divider and firm joint divider.
117. The sine bar of 100 mm is placed at an angle of Combination set
30º on the gauge block. What will be the height 120. What is determined while measuring a
of the gauge block? component :
(a) 25 mm (b) 75 mm (a) Nominal size (b) Actual size
(c) 100 mm (d) 50 mm (c) Specific size (d) Scale size
BEML 2022 UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 Ans. (b) :
Ans. (d) : Hypotenuse (H) = 100 mm • During measurement of component, actual size is
Perpendicular (P) = ? determined.
angle (θ) = 30 o Actual size– It is the size of the component by actual
measurement after it is manufactured.
121. Divider is used for which of the following :
(a) Drawing the circle
(b) Drawing the arc
(c) For transferring and stepping the distances
P
sinθ = UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
H
Ans. (d) : Divider–
⇒ P = H sinθ
• It consist of two straight adjustable legs hinged
= 100 × sin30° together and ending in sharp points.
P = 50 mm • It is made of high carbon steel point of it is
118. Which angle of the prick punch is used to mark hardened & tempered.
the witness mark: • It is used for–
(a) 90º (b) 30º (i) To draw the circles
(c) 45º (d) 60º (ii) To draw the arcs
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (iii) For stepping and transferring the distances etc.
Ans. (d) : 122. The tool, which is used for laying out large
• 60o angle of the prick punch is used to mark the circle is :
witness mark. (a) Trammel (b) Divider
• 30o angle of the prick punch is used to put the (c) Jenny Caliper (d) Scriber
divider in proper position. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018

Ans. (a) : Trammel– • Due to its law angle, the tip of the divider gets a
• Trammel are used in layout work to scribe circles very accurate position.
and arcs that are too large to be drawn with divider • It is used to draw curves on the surface.
or compass.
128. Purpose of hollow punch is :
• It can also be used to bisect lines & angles.
(a) Deepen a drill point
123. Permanent marks made by placing punch (b) Making the marked line firm
marks at convenient intervals along a marked
line is known as : (c) Determining the centre of a round job
(a) Punch marks (b) Witness marks (d) For making holes in thin metallic, leather or
(c) Line marks (d) Drill marks hard board sheets
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 NTPC Fitter 2016
Ans. (b) : Permanent marks made by placing punch ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
marks at convenient intervals along a marked line is Ans. (d) : Hollow punch–
known as witness marks. • It is designed to puncture a surface, such as sheet
124. Which of the following is used to drive dowels metal or leather in order to create a hole.
and rivets out of their holes? • It is easily identified by its exit hole located near the
(a) Centre punch (b) Prick punch working end.
(c) Pin punch (d) Hollow punch • The exit hole allows the punched material to be
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 removed and discarded.
Ans. (c) : Pin punch–
• Pin punch is not used for marking, but for removing
a dowel pin or taper pin stuck in the job.
• This punch does not have a tip but instead has a
cylindrical pin, the length of which meets the
requirement of the job.
125. ................ is used for making very large radius.
(a) Divider (b) Caliper
129. The measurements are set on the dividers
(c) Trammel (d) Vernier
usually with
(a) Jenny Caliper (b) Vernier Caliper
Ans. (c) : Trammel-
(c) Steel rule (d) Micrometer
• It is used to draw large circles or arcs that are
IOCL 2020
beyond the limit of the dividers.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
• It consists of a bar with two movable heads.
Ans. (c) : Steel rule–
126. What is the use of trammel?
• With a steel ruler usually set the measurement to the
(a) Laying out a large circle
divider.
(b) Scribing straight line
(c) Digging bulk materials • It is 1/2 mm or 1 mm of steel.
(d) Checking gaps between two mating surface • It is in the form the thick bond.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 • Its working edge is straight and parallel in length. In
this mm or cam or inch or both marks are made.
Ans. (a) : Trammel–
• It is used to draw large circles or arcs that are 130. Scribers are made of
beyond the limit of the dividers. (a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel
• It consists of a bar with two movable heads. (c) High carbon steel (d) Stainless steel
• It is found from 15 cm to 50 cm ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016
• It's scribers should be sharp. DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
127. The angle of prick punch is : SAIL Bokaro Steel Plant 2016
(a) 60o (b) 30o UPRVUNL Technician grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
(c) 90o (d) 120o Ans. (c) : Scriber–
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 • It is hand tool used in metal work to mark lines on
Ans. (b) : Prick punch– work pieces, prior to machining.
• The angle of prick punch is 30o. • It is a rod with a tip made of high carbon steel that
• It is made of high carbon steel. has been hardened & tempered.

131. Select the punch used for making witness • It is made of cast iron or granite and arc available in
marks from the following various sizes.
(a) 60o Prick Punch (b) 30o Prick Punch • These tables are also used for setting measuring
(c) Centre Punch (d) 90o Centre Punch instruments and for checking sizes, parallelism and
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 angles.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 136. Parallel block is used for :
Ans. (a) : (a) For cutting parallel keyways
• 60o angle of the prick punch is used to mark the (b) For horizontal setting of workpiece
witness mark. (c) For levelling of machine tools
• 30o angle of the prick punch is used to put the (d) For marking parallel lines of any edges
divider in proper position. RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
• Prick punch is a short length punch. It is made of Ans : (b) Parallel block–
high carbon steel. • Parallel block is used for horizontal setting of
132. The tools used to indicate/mark the length of workpiece.
pipe to be cut is ................... • It is made of carbon steel or tool steel.
(a) Hammer (b) Scribers • These are also useful for raising the workpiece held
(c) Screws (d) Nails in vices or machine tables to provide better
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 observation of the machining process.
Ans. (b) : Scriber–
• It is a marking tool.
• It is used to indicate the length of pipe to be cut.
• It is made of high carbon steel which is hardened &
tempered.
133. Scriber is used for
(a) Measuring (b) Marking 137. Centre punch is used :
(c) Tapping (d) Drilling (a) For drilling in base plate
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (b) For cutting metals
Ans. (b) : Scriber– (c) For marking
• It is a marking tool. (d) For chipping of metal
• It is made of high carbon steel which is hardened & RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I
tempered. Ans. (c) : Centre punch–
• The point angle of scriber is sharpened at an angle of • It is used to locate or mark the centres of holes or to
12 to 15o. deeper the focal point.
134. Markings on the work piece is made by using • The point angle of it is kept 90o
(a) Punch (b) Scribers • Length of this punch is 100 mm & diameter is 10
(c) Calipers (d) Steel rules mm.
ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
Ans. (b) : Scriber–
• It is a marking tool.
• It is a hand tool used in metal work to mark on work
piece, prior to machining.
• They are rod with a tip made of cast steel that has
been hardened & tempered.
• The point is sharpened at an angle of 15 to 20o.
135. Following the reference surface is provided by:
(a) Workpiece (b) Marking off table 138. Why surface plate is used for marking?
(c) By sketch of job (d) Bore gauge (a) Because it provides datum surface
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III (b) Because marking table is put over it
Ans : (b) Marking off table– (c) Because it wear job having heavy weight
• It is used as a reference surface for marking on (d) Because its surface are a is more
workpieces. RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I

Ans : (a) Surface plate– 143. A divider is not used for

• It is a solid flat plate used as the main horizontal (a) Transferring dimensions
reference plane for precision inspection marking out & (b) Scribing circles
tooling setup. (c) General layout circles
• It is generally made of good quality cast iron which is (d) Measuring distance between two points
stress relieved to prevent distortion. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
139. Trammel is used : Ans. : (d) A divider is used for transferring and
(a) For marking the angles stepping of distances, scribing circles and general layout
(b) For making polygons circles.
(c) For marking parallel lines 144. Which compass is used to draw a large
(d) For marking circles diameter circle or arc?
BHEL 2020 (a) Simple compass
(b) Wing compass
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
(c) Trammel compass
Ans. (d) : Trammel– (d) Spring compass
• It is used to draw large circles or arcs that are DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
beyond the limit of dividers. Ans : (c) Trammel–
• It consists of bar with two movable heads. • It is used to draw large circles or arcs that are
• It is found from 15 to 50 cm. beyond the limit of dividers.
• It's scriber should be sharp. • It consists of a bar with two movable heads.
140. Which instrument is used to draw parallel • It is found from 15 cm to 50 cm.
lines? • It's scriber should be sharp.
(a) Universal surface gauge
(b) Divider
(c) Micrometer screw gauge
(d) Trammel
Ans. (a) : Universal surface gauge–
• It is used for drawing parallel lines.
• It can be set at any angle.
• Base of it is made of cast iron.
141. Which marking medium is used for marking
145. Which of the following can be used to scrape
related to casting?
lines parallel to a part?
(a) Red lead
(a) Vernier calipers
(b) Copper (b) Divider
(c) Chalk powder (c) Hermaphrodite caliper
(d) Persian blue oil paint (d) Screw gauge
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
Ans. (c) : Chalk powder is used for casting related Ans : (c) Hermaphrodite caliper–
marking. It is not recommended for workpieces of high • It is tool used to layout lines that are parallel with
accuracy. the edges of the workpiece.
Persian blue is used on field or machine finished • It can also be used to locate the center of cylindrical
surfaces. This will give very clear lines but takes more shaped workplaces.
time for dying than marking media.
146. State the use of Plumb bob:
142. The tool, which is used for laying out diameter (a) More accurate replacement for the vertical
is– sprit level and also to transfer points down
(a) Scriber (b) Divider vertically in marking
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Try square (b) More accurate replacement for the Horizontal
RRB ALP Heat Engine 23-01-2019, Shift-III sprit level and also to transfer points down
Ans. (b) : Divider– Horizontally in marking
• It is used for scribing circles, arcs and for (c) More accurate replacement for the Inclined
transferring & stepping of distances. sprit level and also to transfer points down
• The measurements are set on the dividers with a Angled in marking
steel rule. (d) None of the above
• Size of dividers ranges between 50 to 200 mm. ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016
Ans : (a) Plumb Bob– It is in the shape of a bob made 150. Mortise gauge is classified as
of brass or steel. Its lower part is sharp. This string is (a) Planning tool
usually threaded into a wooden bar. The length of the (b) Marking tool
strip is equal to maximum diameter of the bob. (c) Boring tool
Plumb is used to check the straightness of vertical (d) Striking tool
surfaces. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
147. Which of the following is proper instrument Ans. : (b) Mortise gauge–
for dividing straight lines and curves into equal • It is a marking tool.
parts?
• It consists two pins, one of them is fixed & other is
(a) Divider (b) Protractors
(c) Try square (d) Templates adjustable.
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • It is used for marking parallel lines where a mortise
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 & tenon joint is to be cut.
Ans : (a) Divider– 151. Centre punch point has an angle usually (in
• It consists of two straight adjustable legs hinged degrees)–
together and ending in sharp points. (a) 30 or 120 (b) 15 or 75
• It is made of high carbon steel. It point tip is (c) 60 or 90 (d) 30 or 45
hardened & tempered. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
• It is used for dividing straight lines and curves into Ans : (c) Center punch–
equal parts. • It is used for locating the center of the holes.
• It's point angle is usually 60o or 90o.
• They are made up of high carbon steel, hardened
and ground.
152. Which is used for dot punch?
(a) For marking lines
(b) Marking for memory
(c) For holding jobs
(d) For finding holes
Divider
148. Statement 1 : In a machine establishment
Ans : (b) Dot punch–
crowbar, chain hoisting and rope is used.
Statement 2 : These elements are established first • It is similar to centre punches but have a sharper
of all for machine running afterwards. point ground at an angle of 60o.
(a) Statement 1 and 2 both are right and 2 is • The dot punch is lighter and thinner version of the
correct explanation of 1. centre punch and is basically for the same job.
(b) Statement 1 and 2 both are right but 2 is not a However, it is more accurately as the dot produced
correct explanation of 1. is smaller.
(c) Statement 2 is right but 1 is wrong.
(d) Statement 1 is right but 2 is wrong.
Ans. : (a) In a machine establishment crowbar, chain
hosting & rope is used. These elements are established 153. What is point angle of center punch?
first of all for machine running afterward. (a) 550 (b) 700
149. Prick punch refers (c) 30 0
(d) 900
(a) For Enlarging the marks. (IOF Fitter 2017)
(b) To make small marks
(c) With centre punch
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
(d) For Machining work
UPRVUNL (FITTER) 05.04.2021, 9:00AM-12:00PM
BDL Technician 2022
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
Ans. : (b) Ans : (d) Centre punch–
• It is used to make small marks. • It is used to locate or mark the centers of holes or to
• It is similar to a center punch but used for marking deepen the focal point.
out. • The point angle is kept at 90o.
• It is a short length punch. It is made of high carbon • Length of this punch is 100 mm & diameter is 10
steel. mm.
154. Centre punch is used for which of the 157. White lead powder mixed with a solution of
following? turpentine oil, the marking media prepared is
(a) For marking the lines called .......
(b) For locating and marking holes (a) White wash
(c) To mark for memory (b) Red lead
(d) For holding jobs (c) Persian blue
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am (d) None of the above
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 (RRB Patna ALP, 11.11.2001)
Ans : (b) Centre punch– Ans : (c) White lead powder mixed with a solution of
turpentine oil, the marking media prepared is called
• It is made of high carbon steel.
Persian blue.
• It is used to locate or mark the centres of holes or to
158. Divider size is taken–
deepen the focal point.
(a) Distance between two legs by opening it
• The point angle of its is kept is 90o. properly.
• Length of this punch is 100 mm & diameter is 10 (b) Total length of two legs
mm. (c) Distance between working point & rivet
centre
(d) Total length of legs without point
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002)
Ans : (c) Divider–
• It's size is distance between working point & rivet
centre.
• It is used for scribing circles, arcs & for transferring
& stepping of distances.
• The measurements are set on the dividers with a
steel rule.
• The size of dividers ranges between 50 to 200 mm.
155. Marking tables are made up of: 159. Which of the following is not a marking media?
(a) Concrete (b) Aluminum (a) White wash
(c) Granite (d) None of the above (b) Copper sulphate
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 (c) Black polish
UPRVUNL (FITTER) 05.04.2021, 9:00AM-12:00PM (d) Lay out die
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007)
Ans : (c) Marking table–
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
• It is used as a reference surface for marking on
Ans : (c) Black polish is not a marking media. Marking
workpieces.
place will not appear by it.
• It is made of cast iron or granite and available in
160. Surface plate is not of which shape ?
various sizes. (a) Triangular
• These tables are also used for setting measuring (b) Rectangular
instruments, and for checking sizes, parallelism and (c) Square
angles. (d) Circular
156. State the use of Marking Knife: (RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009)
(a) Used for marking only Ans : (a) Surface plate–
(b) Used for marking and scribing • It is not of triangular shape.
(c) Used for Scribing only • It is made of high carbon steel.
(d) None of the above • It's shape is rectangular, square and circular.
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 161. Trammel is a type of ............. tool.
Ans : (b) Marking knife– It is used for marking & (a) Multi purpose
scribing. (b) Marking
• A marking knife is also called striking knife. (c) Outer measurement
• It is used for accurately marking workpieces. (d) Inside measurement
(HAL Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (a) Trammel–
• It is a multipurpose tool are beyond the limit of
dividers.
• It consist of bar with two movable heads. Ans : (d) Triangular Scraper–
• It's scriber should be sharp. • It is useful for scraping, trimming and debarring
metals, tubing & other materials.
• It's hardened & tempered triple edge blade is
secured in a wood handle with steel ferrule.
• Cutting edge of scrapper is ground at 55o to 60o
• Triangular scrapper is triangular, the front end of
which is made into a taper & is made in the form of
a sharp point.
167. Which of the following is pull type scrapper?
(a) Flat scrapper (b) Hook scrapper
(c) Bull nose scrapper (d) Angular scrapper
Ans : (b) Hook scrapper is a pull type scrapper.
162. Purpose of engraved lines on the surface of • Its shape is like a flat scrapper put its point is bend
marking off table : at an angle of 90o.
(a) For measuring • It is also used for scraping the central part of large
(b) For setting job flat surfaces.
(c) To beautify the table surface • It is often used for finishing work.
(d) None of these 168. Template job is used for marking. Which of the
(IOF Fitter, 2013) following is not quality of it?
Ans : (b) (a) It is not more accurate
• Purpose of engraved lines on the surface of marking (b) It is of workpiece's shape
off table it to set the job so that marking of job can (c) It is not hardened & tempered
be better. (d) It is made of sheet or wood
• Marking table is made of cast iron or granite and (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
available in various sizes. Ans : (c) Template–
163. Length of beam of trammel : • It is used for marking on job and for checking the
(a) 100 to 300 mm (b) 100 to 400 mm prepared job.
(c) 150 to 500 mm (d) 100 to 500 mm • It is not pure accurate, it is of shape of workpiece
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) and it is made of sheet or wood.
Ans : (c) Length of trammels beam · 15 to 50 cm • It is not hardened & tempered.
1 cm = 10 mm 169. Where is scrapper used?
(a) For chipping (b) For filling
15×10 · 150 and 50×10 · 500 mm
(c) For scrapping (d) For drilling
164. Marking media used for casting & forging (IOF Fitter, 2012)
surface : Ans : (c) Scraper– The tool which are used to scrap off
(a) Chalk powder (b) Persian blue the protruding parts on the surfaces after machining are
(c) Copper sulphate (d) Red vermilion called scrapers.
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
170. What is used for centre marking on the job
before drilling?
Ans : (a) Chalk powder is used to casting related (a) Prick punch (b) Dot punch
marking. It is not recommended for workpieces of high (c) Holley punch (d) Centre punch
accuracy. (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 25.05.2003)
165. When scribing line with a surface gauge, the Ans : (d) Centre Punch–
angle between the point of the scriber and the
• It is used to mark the centre of a point to show the
surface of job is kept :
centre of hole when drilling.
(a) 900 (b) 700
(c) 15 to 20 0
(d) 30 to 350 • It's included angle is 90o.
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) • It is made up of high carbon steel.
Ans : (d) When scribing a line with a surface gauge the • Length of this punch is 100 mm and diameter is 10
angle between the point of the scriber and the surface of mm.
job is kept 30 to 35o. 171. Where is try square used?
166. Cutting edge of triangular scraper is ground (a) To check 45o
at: (b) To check 45o to 90o
(a) 700 to 750 (b) 810 to 870 (c) To check 90o angle
0 0
(c) 45 to 50 (d) 550 to 600 (d) None of the above
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
Ans : (c) Try Square– Ans. (d) : Hermaphrodite calipers are also known as
• Made of hard quality wood such as teak or odd leg calipers.
mahogany etc. Hermaphrodite caliper– Jenny caliper is used in
• Consist of two parts– marking and layout work. It has one leg with an
(i) Stock adjustable divider, and the other leg is bent both legs of
(ii) Blade the caliper are joined together with a firm joint.
• Stock & blade are joined together at right angle. Hermaphrodite calipers as known by following names–
• Used for–
(i) Jenny caliper
(i) Checking angle of 90o
(ii) To draw horizontal & vertical lines. (ii) Odd leg calipers
• It is not used to draw inclined lines. (iii) Leg and point caliper.
175. The caliper useful for scribing lines parallel to
the edge of the work and for finding the centre
of cylindrical work is:
(a) Outside caliper (b) Transfer caliper
(c) Inside caliper (d) Hermaphrodite
Ans. (d) : A hermaphrodite caliper is a tool used to
layout lines that are parallel with the edges of the
workpiece. It, can also be used to locate the center of
cylindrical shaped workpiece.
172. The undercut is kept just below the try square :

(a) To check the size of it
(b) To beautify it
(c) To adjust it at right angle
(d) To place the buss at the end of the job
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (c) Try square–
• Undercut is kept just below the try square to adjust
it at right angle.
• It is use to draw horizontal & vertical lines.
• It can not be used to draw inclined lines. Hermaphrodite caliper
173. Surface plate is made of 176. The main scale is on which part of Vernier
(a) Mild steel (b) High carbon steelheight gauge?
(c) Grey cast iron (d) Wrought iron (a) movable (b) mass
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
(c) Vernier scale (d) beam
Ans : (c) Surface plate– NLC Technician 24-09.2022
• It is made up of cast iron. HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
• It is used to check the straightness of workpiece.
Ans. (d) : The main scale in vernier height gauge is
• It can check up to 0.025 mm flatness. beam.
• It can be of square or rectangular shape.
• A vernier height gauge the following parts–
• It is used to check the surface of job & for marking
on small jobs. Beam
Base
Main side
3. Different Types of Calipers
Measuring Jaw
Jaw clamp
174. Hermaphrodite Calipers are also known as
Vernier scale
____.
Main scale
(a) Spin up calipers
(b) Sectional calipers Locking screw
(c) Multiple leg calipers Scriber blade
(d) Odd leg calipers • A vernier depth gauge is a precision instrument use to
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 measure depth of holes.
177. On which part the main scale graduated on • This is used for marking parallel lines from a finished
Vernier height gauge? edge and also for locating the centre of round bars.
(a) beam
(b) base
(c) vernier scale
(d) scriber
Ans. (a) : The vernier height main scale graduation are
graduated on beam.
• A scriber is a hand tool used in metal work to mark
lines on workpiece, prior to machining.
178. What is the measuring device used to measure 181. The calipers used for finding the centre of
both internal and external diameter? round bars is called
(a) Plug gauge (a) Firm Joint Calipers
(b) Feeler gauge (b) Spring Joint Calipers
(c) Vernier caliper (c) Jenny Calipers
(d) Ring gauge (d) All the above
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022 ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans. (c) : The calipers used for finding the centre of
Ans. (c) : The Vernier calipers work on the basic round bars is called jenny calipers.
principle of alignment of measurement marking on the 182. Error in squareness can be determined by
vernier scale and main scale. using the following–
• Vernier caliper used to measure both internal and (a) try square and slip gauge
external diameter. (b) try square and filler gauge
• The least count of Vernier caliper 0.02 mm. (c) bevel edge try square
179. From the following select the commonly used (d) none of the above
tool for laying out large circles HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) Divider
Ans. (a) : Error in squareness can be determined by
(b) Hermaphrodite caliper using the try square and slip gauge.
(c) Trammel
• Try square is a checking tool that is used to check
(d) Scriber the flatness of the job and the right angle (angle of
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) 90o) between two surfaces.
Ans. (c) : A trammel point set is used for transferring • Slip gauge or gauge blocks are used as standard for
measurement, scribing arcs and laying out circle that are precision length measurement.
too big for a conventional compass or divider.
• Wringing is the act of joining the slip gauges
• Hermaphrodite caliber used for scribing parallel line together.
to an edge.
183. The caliper meant for measuring the diameter
• Divider, instrument for measuring transferring or
of shaft is __________
making off distance.
(a) jenny caliper
• A scriber is a hand tool used in metal work to mark
(b) outside caliper
lines on workpiece, prior to machining.
(c) inside caliper
180. Which caliper is used to find the centre of
(d) odd leg caliper
round bars?
(a) Inside caliper NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(b) Jenny caliper Ans. (b) : The caliper meant for measuring the diameter
(c) Vernier caliper of shaft is outside caliper.
(d) Outside caliper • The caliper is used for measuring the outer length,
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 width and diameter.
Ans. (b) : Jenny caliper is used to find the centre of • These are available in 100 mm, 150 mm, 200 mm
round bars. and 300 mm size.
• Jenny caliper is also known as odd-leg caliper or • There are two types of outside caliper such as
hermaphrodite caliper. simple outside caliper and spring outside caliper.

184. A vernier dial caliper accuracy 0.05 mm, beam (a) Jenny caliper (b) Inside caliper
scale reading 25 mm and the reading shown by (c) Outside caliper (d) Vernier caliper
the head of the dial 24. Calculate the reading. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(a) 25.9 (b) 26.0 RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
(c) 26.1 (d) 26.2 Ans. (a) : Caliper shown in the figure is jenny caliper or
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 odd leg caliper or harmapholite caliper.
Ans. (d) : Accuracy of vernier dial caliper = 0.05 mm. • In jenny caliper, its one leg bent inside and other
Beam scale reading = 25 mm. pointed.
Reading of the dial = 24 • Jenny caliper is used to find out the centre of
Total reading = Reading of dial × accuracy of vernier parallel lines or circular shaft.
dial caliper + beam scale reading • According to need, its legs can be turn outside.
= 24 × 0.05 + 25 187. Spring type caliper is –
= 26.2 mm (a) inside caliper (b) outside caliper
185. Match the following figures of caliper with (c) jenny caliper (d) both (a) and (b)
their names. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
1. Jenny caliper
Ans. (d) : Types of caliper–
2. Inside caliper
1. On the basis of joint–
3. Outside caliper
(i) Firm joint caliper
(ii) Spring joint caliper
2. On the basis of leg–
(i) Outside caliper
(ii) Inside caliper
(iii) Hermaphrodite caliper
• Spring type caliper–
(i) Inside spring caliper
(a) 1 (C), 2 (B), 3 (A) (b) 2 (A), 2 (B), 3 (C) (ii) Outside spring caliper
(c) 1 (B), 2 (A), 3 (C) (d) 1 (C), 2 (B), 3 (A) 188. Identify the jenny caliper from the following.
Ans. (a) :
Outside caliper
Inside caliper
Ans. (a) :
Jenny caliper
Jenny caliper or odd leg caliper or

hermaphrodite caliper
Spring inside caliper
186. Which type of caliper is shown in the figure ?

Spring outside caliper
Firm joint outside caliper

189. Identify the name of that caliper which has Ans. (b) : Name of the point 'X' marked on the figure of
three name. a jenny caliper is bent leg.
(a) Jenny caliper
(b) Inside caliper
(c) Outside caliper
(d) Divider caliper
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (a) : Jenny caliper has three name.
• Jenny caliper known as odd leg caliper or
hermaphrodite caliper.
• There are three types of hermaphrodite caliper–
1. Fixed point hermaphrodite caliper
193. Static test is carried out using–
2. Adjustable point hermaphrodite caliper (a) dial test indicator (b) slip gauge
3. Heel type hermaphrodite caliper. (c) sine bar (d) all of the above
190. The size of the caliper is taken – RRB ALP Patna 2014
(a) from the length of the leg Ans. (d) : Static test is carried out using dial test
(b) from point till the center of rivet indicator, slip gauge and sine bar.
(c) from total length • Dial test indicators are used primarily for measuring
(d) all of the above gauges and fixtures.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003• Slip gauge is an end standard used for precision
Ans. (b) : Caliper are used to transfer the measurements length measurement.
from a steel rule to objects and vice-versa. • Sine bar is used in conjunction with slip gauge
blocks for precise angular measurement.
• Calipers are generally made by carbon steel.
194. The tooth thickness of rack is measured by-
• The size of the caliper is taken from point till the
(a) Universal vernier caliper
centre of rivet.
(b) Gear tooth vernier caliper
191. Caliper is made of which one of the following (c) Flange micrometer
metals ? (d) Gear tester
(a) Tool steel RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(b) Carbon steel Ans. (b) : The tooth thickness of rack is measured by
(c) Mild steel gear tooth vernier caliper.
(d) Brass • Gear tooth vernier caliper is a mixed form of two
BEML 2022 calipers.
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007• Gear tooth vernier caliper has a depth bar, above
Ans. (b) : Calipers are generally made by carbon steel. which the measurement are marked in both metric
Calipers are of different types, depending upon the type and British system.
of the joint and shape of the leg. 195. Jenny caliper is used _____.
192. What is the name of point 'X' marked on the (a) For finding the external diameter of round bar
following figure of a jenny caliper ? (b) For finding the internal diameter round bar
(c) For finding the center of round bar
(d) For finding the angles
Ans. (c) : Jenny caliper is used for finding the centre of
parallel lines or round bar.
• It is also called odd leg caliper or hermaphrodite
caliper.
• In this type of caliper, its one leg bent inside and
(a) Adjustable divider point other pointed.
(b) Bent leg • Outside caliper is used for measuring the outer
(c) Odd leg length, width and diameter.
(d) None of the above • Inside caliper is used for measuring inner length,
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 slot or gap width and inner diameter.

196. The firm joint calipers and spring joint calipers Ans. (b) : Micrometer shown in the figure is flange
are differentiated by........... micrometer.
(a) slope at the leg (b) type of joint • Both anvil of flange micrometer are the shape of
(c) slope at the head (d) type of adjustment flanges.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 • It is used to measure chordal thickness of gear teeth.
Ans. (b) : The firm joint calipers and spring joint • It is also used to measure the thickness of fins made
calipers are differentiated by type of joint.
on a cylinder.
Types of caliper–
1. On the basis of joint– 200. What is marked as 'x' in gear tooth vernier
(i) Firm joint caliper caliper?
(ii) Spring joint caliper
2. On the basis of leg–
(i) Outside caliper
(ii) Inside caliper
(iii) Hermaphrodite caliper
197. The spring type outside calipers are used along
with steel rule
(a)
Vertical beam
The accuracy of caliper is ….
(b)
Movable beam
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.50 mm
(c)
Horizontal beam
(c) 0.75 mm (d) 1.00 mm
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) (d)
Chordal addendum
IOCL 2020 RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
Ans. (d) : Marked as 'X' in gear tooth vernier caliper is
Ans. (b) : Accuracy of caliper is 0.5 mm. chordal addendum.
• Gear tooth vernier caliper is used to test how fine
• Calipers are indirect measuring instrument used for
the teeth of any spur gear
transferring measurements from a steel rule to a job
and vice-versa. • It has a depth bar, above which the measurement are
• Spring joint calipers have the advantage of a quick marked in both metric and British system.
setting with the help of an adjusting nut. • It is a mixed form of two calipers.
• For setting a form joint caliper, tap the leg lightly on
201. Which of the following is an indirect measuring
a wooden surface. tool?
198. Surface gauge is under– (a) Inside caliper
(a) Linear measurement (b) Vernier caliper
(b) Radial measurement (c) Universal bevel protractor
(c) Plain surface measurement (d) Inside micrometer
Ans. (a) : Inside caliper is an indirect measuring tool
Ans. (c) : Plain surface measurement– while vernier calipers, universal bevel protractors and
• The measurement of surface accuracy is called plain
inside micrometers are direct measuring tool.
surface measurement.
• In direct measurement, the job is directly measured
• In this measurement, the measuring tools are used
by measuring tool.
such as surface plate, surface gauge, straight edge,
dial test indicator, vernier height gauge etc. • In indirect measurement, we have a helping tool
with the main measuring tool.
199. What is the name of the micrometer?
202. Name the caliper which has one divider point
and other is bent leg?
(a) Inside caliper (b) Outside caliper
(c) Jenny caliper (d) Scriber
(a) Inside micrometer Ans. (c) : Jenny caliper has one divider point and other
(b) Flange micrometer is bent leg.
(c) Outside micrometer • While measuring by hermaphrodite caliper, its both
(d) Screw pitch micrometer legs should be placed parallel and at right angle of
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 the workpiece.
203. Calipers are ..... Ans. (b) : Vernier height gauge is mainly used for
(a) Direct measurement instrument layout work.
(b) Indirect measurement instrument • Vernier height gauge are provided with both straight
(c) Accurate measurement instrument and offset scribers.
(d) Precision measurement instrument • The lower side of the base is hardened, ground and
lapped.
• Vernier height gauge can also measured upto 0.02
Ans. (b) : In indirect measurement, we have a helping mm in metric and 0.01 inch in British system.
tool with the main measuring tool.
207. In a combination set- square arrangement
• The job is measured by the main tools in indirect shown in figure, the value of obtuse angle is ......
measurement such as calipers, gauges, dividers,
telescope gauge etc.
• Steel rules, micrometers, vernier calipers, bevel
protractors are direct measuring tools.
204. Which caliper takes more time in setting
dimensions? (a) 120º (b) 110º
(a) Firm caliper (b) Spring caliper (c) 105º (d) 100º
(c) Inside caliper (d) Outside caliper BHEL 2020
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Ans. (b) : Spring caliper takes more time in setting Ans. (c) : In a combination set-square arrangement–
dimensions.
• In spring caliper, the legs are assembled by means
of a pivot loaded with a spring.
• For opening or closing the caliper legs, a screw and
nut are provided.
• The setting will not change unless, the nut is turned.
• The size of a caliper is specified by its length which
is the distance between the pivot centre and tip of
the leg.
205. Size of a vernier height gauge is specified by ..... According to trigonometry rules–
(a) Width of the beam 45 + 30 + x = 180
(b) Height of the vernier scale x = 180 – 75
(c) Height of the beam = 105
(d) Size of the base x = 105o
• The value of obtuse angle (x) is 105o.
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
208. One quarter of a circle covers 90º. 3/4m of a
Ans. (c) : Size of vernier height gauge is specified by
circle covers how many degrees?
height of the beam.
(a) 360º (b) 270º
• Beam of vernier height gauge is similar to the main (c) 180º (d) 0º
scale of vernier caliper and is attached to the base. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
• The vernier height gauge is mainly used in the
Ans. (b) : Given that,
inspection of parts and layout work with a scribing
attachment. 1
One quarter of a circle   = 90o
• Heights or vertical distance may also be measured 4
using the bottom of the scribe. 3
206. Vernier height gauge is mainly used for ...... of a circle = ?
4
(a) Radial measurement
1
(b) Layout work = 90
4
(c) Angular measurement
(d) Depth measurement 3 3
= 90 × 4 ×
NTPC Fitter 2016 4 4
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 = 270o
209. The least count of a vernier caliper in which 19 Ans. (d) : Hermaphrodite calipers–
(19 mm) main scale divisions are divided into • It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg
20 equal divisions is …. ending in a sharp point.
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm • It can also be used to locate the center of cylindrical
(c) 0.019 mm (d) 0.05 mm shaped workplaces.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 • It is tool used to layout lines that are parallel with
Ans. (d) : Main scale divisions (19 mm) are divided the edges of the workpiece.
into 20 equal parts in the vernier scale.
So, one main scale division = 1 mm
19
one vernier scale division =
20
Least count = one main scale division – one vernier
scale division
19
= 1−
20
213. Which measurement is done by vernier bevel
1
= = 0.05 mm protractor?
20 (a) Angle (b) Cutter diameter
210. It is used to measure the internal size of an (c) Inside diameter (d) Thickness
object: BDL Technician 2022
(a) Inside caliper (b) Outside caliper DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
(c) Divide caliper (d) Odd leg caliper Ans. (a) : Vernier bevel protractor– It is a precision
instrument meant for measuring angles to an accuracy
of 5 minutes.
Ans. (a) : Inside caliper is used to measure the internal 214. One main scale division in a Vernier calipers is
size of an object. 1 mm and there are 20 equal divisions on the
• These are available in 75, 100, 150, 200 and 300 Vernier scale which match with 16 main scale
mm size. divisions. What will be the least count for this
• These calipers are two types such as simple inside Vernier calipers.
caliper and spring inside caliper. (a) 0.02 mm (b) 0. 2mm
• Calipers are generally made by carbon steel. (c) 0.05 mm (d) 0.1 mm
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
• Its legs turn outwards so that it can accurately
measure inside dimensions. Ans. (b) Value of 1 part of main scale (MSD) = 1mm
No. of division on vernier scale = 20
211. In which caliper rack & pinion setup is used
16
for operation of sliding unit? Value of 1 division of vernier scale = mm
20
(a) Vernier height gauge Least value of vernier caliper = MSD – VSD
(b) Vernier caliper & micrometer
16
(c) Micrometer = 1−
(d) Vernier calipers 20
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM 4
=
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 20
Ans. (a) : Vernier height gauge– 1
= = 0.2mm
• It is used to measure vertical dimension from 5
reference ground. 215. The reading given by a spectrometer, when it is
• It consist of a graduated scale or bar is held in a used to measure the angle of a prism is as
vertical position by a finely ground fixed base. follows:–
• The graduated scale has least count of 0.02 mm. Main Scale reading = 58.5 degree,
• For operation of sliding unit rock & pinion Vernier Scale reading = 9 divisions,
1 division on main scale corresponds to 0.5
arrangement is used.
degree.
212. Calipers which are available with the heel or 30 is the total division on the vernier scale and
usual bent leg are known as: it matches with 29 divisions of main scale.
(a) firm joint calipers What is the angle of the prism?
(b) firm and spring joint calipers (a) 59 degree (b) 58.77 degree
(c) spring joint calipers (c) 58.59 degree (d) 58.65 degree
(d) hermaphrodite calipers BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
Ans. (d) Main scale reading = 58.5o 217. Least count of an inside caliper is :
Vernier scale reading = 9 division (a) 1 mm (b) 2 mm
1 division on main scale = 0.5o = 30 minutes (c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.5 mm
30 division on vernier scale (VSD) = 29 division on ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
main scale (MSD) Ans. (d) : Inside caliper–
29 • It is used for measuring slot width and inside
1 VSD = MSD
30 diameter.
LC = 1 MSD – 1 VSD • Least count = 0.5 mm
29 • It is available in size of 75,100,150,200 & 300 mm.
= 1−
30 218. Which of the following is TRUE for a Jenny
o
1 1 Caliper?
= ×  (a) To draw a line at a set distance from the edge
30  2 
of the work
o
 1  (b) To check the diameter of an internal groove
= 
 
60 (c) To check the concentricity of the outside
Total reading = MSD + (VSD × LC) diameter
o (d) To check the angle for a taper
 1 
= 58.5o + 9 ×   ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
 60 
Ans. (a) : Jenny caliper–
= 58.5o + 0.15
• It is also known as hermaphrodite or add leg caliper.
Total reading = 58.65o
• It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg
Prism's angle = total reading = 58.65o
ending in a sharp point.
216. Match the following items in List-I with their
• It can be used to locate the centre of cylindrical
properties or description in List-II.
shaped workpieces.
List – I List – II
• It is used to draw a line at a set distance from the
A) Vernier caliper i) U-shaped frame edge.
measures fitted with a screwed
spindle which is
attached to a thimble
B) Degree of ii) Angle
repetitiveness
C) Sine bar iii) Diameter
measures
D) Screw gauge iv) Precision
(a) (A)-(iii), (B)-(iv), (C)- (ii), (D)-(i)
(b) (A)-(iv), (B)-(ii), (C)- (i), (D)-(iii) 219. Jenny Caliper is also called as
(c) (A)-(iv), (B)-(iii), (C)- (i), (D)-(ii) (a) Outside caliper
(d) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iii), (C)- (iv), (D)-(i) (b) Inside caliper
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (c) hermaphrodite caliper
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019 (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
(A) Vernier caliper– It is used for measuring linear
Ans. (c) : Jenny caliper–
dimensions. It is also used for measuring diameter of
round objects with the help of the measuring jaws. • It is also known as hermaphrodite or odd leg
(B) Precision– Degree of repetitiveness. caliper.
(C) Sine bar– It is used for measuring angles. It can • It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg
not be used for measuring angle more than 45 . o ending in a sharp point.
(D) Screw gauge– • It can be used to locate the centre of cylindrical
• U shaped from fitted with a screwed spindle which shaped workpiece.
is attached to a thimble. 220. Hermaphrodite caliper is also called as
• It is a mechanical tool that allows precise (a) Odd leg caliper (b) Outside caliper
measurement of the diameter, radius or thickness of a (c) Inside caliper (d) Spring caliper
thin wire. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
Ans. (a) : Hermaphrodite caliper– 224. Which one of the following hand tools is used
• It is also known as Jenny or odd leg caliper. while handling a hot welded job?
(a) Hand screen (b) Goggles
• It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg
(c) Tong (d) Earth clamp
• It is a tool used to layout lines that are parallel to the
Ans : (c) Tongs– It is used for holding, bending &
edges of workpieces
turning hot metal under forging and welding operations.
• It can be used to locate the centre of cylindrical It is made of mild steel or medium carbon steel.
shaped workpiece.
225. Inside caliper is used to measure ............
(a) Hole diameter
(b) Height of sky scrappers building
(c) Diameter of key way
(d) Both hole & key way diameter
Ans : (d) Inside caliper–
• It is used to measure internal diameter (like hole &
key way diameter) or width of slot etc.
• It is an indirect measuring tool because when we
measure it, we don't know what size is the width of
the slot or the inner diameter of the measured slot.
221. Which of the following is not a measuring Therefore, after measuring the width of the slot or inner
instrument? diameter, the caliper is checked with a steel rule.
(a) Hermaphrodite Calipers 226. Which type of caliper is used to measure the
(b) Steel rule width of slot?
(c) Micrometer (a) Outside caliper (b) Jenny caliper
(d) Vernier Calipers (c) Inside caliper (d) Odd leg caliper
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans. (a) : Hermaphrodite caliper is not a measuring Ans : (c) Inside caliper– It is used to measure the
instrument. internal diameter or width of the slot.
222. Mark the odd one out– 227. What is the use of odd leg caliper?
(a) Hermaphrodite caliper (a) To determine the bore diameter
(b) Vernier caliper (b) To measure outer diameter
(c) Jenny caliper (c) To find the center of cylindrical parts
(d) Odd leg caliper (d) To measure length
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 Ans : (c) Odd leg caliper–
Ans. (b) : Hermaphrodite caliper, jenny caliper and odd • It is also known as hermaphrodite or jenny caliper.
caliper are the name of the same caliper. It is used to • It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg
scribe lines parallel to the edges of a part. ending in a sharp point.
Vernier caliper is used for measuring linear dimension. • It is a tool used to layout lines that are parallel to the
edges of workpieces.
223. Which of the following can be used to scribe
lines parallel to the edge of a part : • It can also be used to locate the center of cylindrical
shape workpieces.
(a) Vernier Caliper
(b) Screw gauge 228. Which caliper is used for quick setting?
(c) Divider (a) Spring joint caliper (b) Firm joint caliper
(d) Hermaphrodite Caliper (c) Jenny caliper (d) Lay joint caliper
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Ans : (a) Spring joint caliper–
Ans : (d) Hermaphrodite Caliper–
• It is a measuring instrument consisting of two legs,
• It is also known as Jenny or add leg caliper. a spring, and an adjusting nut.
• It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg • It is used for quick setting.
ending in a sharp point. • It is a transfer measuring tool. Although they are
• It is used to scribe lines parallel to the edges of a used to take measurements, spring joint caliper do
part. not have a graduation scale. To provide reading
• It can be used to locate the centre of cylindrical they must checked against a measuring device such
shaped workpieces. as a rules or micrometer.

229. By which name odd leg caliper is not known? 234. Which caliper is joint by rivet and washer :
(a) Transfer caliper (b) Jenny caliper (a) Spring type (b) Firm joint
(c) Hermaphrodite caliper (d) Odd leg caliper (c) Butt joint (d) None of these
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 14.09.2008)
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006) Ans : (b) Firm Joint Caliper–
Ans : (a) Odd leg caliper is also known as • It is joined by rivet and washers.
hermaphrodite or jenny caliper. It's not known as • It's size is expressed by the distance from the center
transfer caliper. of the rivet to the measuring end.
• It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg • This allows both internal and external
ending in a sharp point. measurements to be taken.
• It is used to draw lines parallel to the edges of a • These are of two types–
part. (i) Firm joint inside caliper
230. Working point of simple caliper is– (ii) Firm joint outside caliper.
(a) Hard (b) Case hard
235. By which instrument line in drawn on the edge
(c) Soft (d) None of the above
of round rod?
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005)
(a) Vernier height gauge
Ans : (b) Working point of simple caliper is case hard (b) Jenny caliper
because it is made of mild steel.
(c) (a) and (b) both
231. What is provided for measuring outside (d) None of these
diameter indirectly? NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(c) Jenny caliper (d) Micrometer
(RRB Patna ALP, 04.02.2007) Ans : (c) Line is drawn on the edge of sound rod with
the help of both vernier height gauge and jenny caliper.
Ans : (b) Outside caliper– It is a device which is used
to measure exterior diameter of any object or to Vernier Height Gauge– It is a precision instrument
measure thickness of an object. used to measure depth of holes, recesses, slots and steps
within an accuracy of 0.02 mm.
232. Which is used to draw parallel lines on job :
(a) Gauge (b) Caliper Jenny caliper–
(c) Divider (d) Jenny caliper • It has one leg bent inward and on straight leg ending
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 in sharp point.
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) • It is a tool used to layout lines that are parallel with
Ans : (d) Jenny caliper– the edges of the workpieces.
• It is also known as hermaphrodite or add leg caliper.
• It has one leg bent inward and one straight leg 4. Different Types of Tools
• It is used to scribes lines parallel to edge of a part.
236. Which one of the following is not used for
cutting metals?
(a) Circular disk saw
(b) Power saw
(c) Horizontal saw
(d) Hammer saw
Ans. (d) : Hammer saw is not used for cutting metals.
• It is used for general carpentry framing, nail pulling
cabinet making, assembling furniture.
233. ............. measured by simple caliper. • Hammer saw are designed according to the intended
(a) Indirect (b) Direct purpose.
(c) Comparison (d) All of these 237. Dowel pins are used for _____ of two or more
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 components.
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 21.09.2003) (a) Cleaning drilled holes
Ans : (a) Simple caliper– (b) Accurate positioning
• It is an indirect measuring tool. (c) Machining surface
• It is used to measure the length, width thickness & (d) Permanent joining
diameter of job with the help of steel rule. UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
Ans. (b) : Dowel pins are used for accurate positioning Half hard hacksaw blade–
of two or more components. • This type of blade has only half teeth hard and
• Dowel pins used in machine fabrication are metal tempered so that, it is flexible.
cylindrical fasteners that retain parts in a fixed • It is not broken easily and teeth have a short age.
position or keep part aligned. 242. Sine bar is made of
• General depending on the function of the part, one (a) High speed steel
or two dowel pins are sufficient for holding adjacent (b) Chrome alloy
part. (c) Stabilized chromium steel
238. Frosting is usually done with the help of a (d) High carbon steel
______. NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(a) Hand scrapper (b) Chromium plates HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(c) Tongs (d) Drill bits Ans. (c) : Sine bar is a instrument used for measuring
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 angle. It is specified by distance between rollers. It is
made of stabilized chromium steel.
Ans. (a) : Frosting–
• The frosting is a process in which scraped metal
surface is decorated with the use of hand scrapper.
• Frosting can also be called as flaking or flowering.
239. ______is a holding device especially for
cylindrical objects.
(a) Steel rule h
sin θ =
(b) Surface plate l
(c) Calipers 243. Sine bar is measurement distance between
(d) V-Block (a) width (b) length
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (c) middle of roller (d) height
Ans. (d) : V-block is a holding device especially for MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
cylindrical objects. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
• It is also used to measure the roundness of the Ans. (c) : Sine bar is specified by centre distance
cylindrical job. between two roller.
• The included angle of V-block is 90o. • It is used for measuring angle
• For special purpose such as checking the triangle • It's working principle is based on trigonometric
effect or for tap and other three fluted tools, 60o V- function.
block can be secured.
240. The head of_______hammer is generally made
up of wood/rubbet.
(a) Claw (b) Ball peen
(c) Sledge (d) Mallet
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 h
Ans. (d) : Mallet is used to light strike on metal for sin θ =
l
bending and winding.
244. End of spanner set make an angle of ____ with
• It is made up of hard wood or hard rubber (Teak,
axis.
shisam, kiker etc.)
(a) 15º (b) 20º
241. All hard hacksaw blades are made up (c) 30º (d) 60º
of_____material. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) Zinc HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(b) High speed steel Ans. (a) : Spanner–It is a tool used to provide grip and
(c) Titanium mechanical advantage in applying torque to turn
(d) Copper objects.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 • End of spanner set make an angle of 15º.
Ans. (b) : All hard hacksaw blade– 245 The size of screw driver is measured from
• It is made up of the carbon steel or high speed steel. (a) Body (b) Weight
• It is hard, tempered and has a easily broken (c) Tip (d) Shank
tendency because, it has no flexibility. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019

Ans. (d) : Screw driver is a tool used for turning Ans. (c) : A sine bar is used to measure angles loosed
screws. The size of screw driver is measured from on the sine principal.
shank. • A sine bar is used to measure the angle (θ) between
246. Sine bar is made of : the height of a slip gauge and the hypotenuse length
(a) Stabilized Nickel Steel of the sine bar.
(b) Stabilized Chromium Steel
(c) Stabilized Carbon Steel
(d) Stabilized Tungsten Steel
Ans. (b) : Sine bar made of stabilized chromium steel.
A Sin bar consist of hardened, precision ground body
two precision ground cylinder fixed at ended.
Sin bar measure angle.
247. A Sine Bar is specified by
(a) Distance between the roller centers 251. The purpose of using bar is to ___
(b) Length of datum surface (a) Measure the length of job
(c) Length of the rollers (b) Measure the diameter of job
(d) Length of the bar (c) Find the angle of tap job
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 (d) Check the level of the job
Ans. (a) : A sine bar is specified by distance between BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
the roller centers. RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
• They are made corrosion resistance, hardened, ground Ans. (c) : The purpose of using bar is to find the angle
and stabilized. top job.
• A sine bar measure angle based on sine rule principal. The required angle is obtained when the difference in
248. To measure a hole of diameter 2 mm, which of height between the two rollers is equal to the sine of
the following instrument is used? angle multiplied by the distance between the centre of
(a) Pin gauge (b) Internal micrometer the rollers.
(c) Bore gauge (d) Slip gauge 252. A sine bar is made with four or five equally
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 spaced holes on its body. The purpose of these
Ans. (a) : • Pin gauge can be used to measure a hole of holes is to –
diameter 2 mm. (a) Handle the sine bar easily
• Pin gauge works on 'Go' and 'No Go' principle. (b) Reduce the weight of sine bar
• 'Go' and 'No Go' principle is that the Go end of the (c) Prevent distortion of the top surface
gauge must go into the feature of the component being (d) Give good appearance of the sine bar
checked & the 'No go' end must not go into the same RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
feature. Ans. (a) : A sine bar is made with four or five equally
249. A hand tool is used for closing and locking of spaced holes on its body. The purpose of these holes is
seams in sheet metal work. to handle the sine bar easily.
(a) Groover (b) Trammel • Place one roller on the surface plate and the other
(c) Riveting hammer (d) Stakes roller on the slip gauge block stack of height H.
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 253. A sine bar is available in standard sizes. Which
Ans. (a) : • A hand groover is used to lock the sheet of the following is not a standard size of the
metal seams, as shown is the figure. sine bar ?
• Seams made this way are known as grooved seams- (a) 100 mm (b) 200 mm
the kind used on buckets, air ducts, tin cans, etc. (c) 250 mm (d) 300 mm
250. In a sine bar, the angle is measured according RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
to the angle formed between the height of slip Ans. (d) : The size of a sine bar is specified by its
gauge and the _____ length.
(a) Height of sine bar • Sine bar is distance between the centers of the
(b) Number of slip gauge rollers.
(c) Length of sine bar • The commonly available sizes are 100 mm, 200
(d) Width of sine bar mm, 250 mm and 500 mm.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 • A sine bar is used to measure angle.
254. Try square is used to examine - 257. The hardest cutting tool material is –––––––
(a) circular surface (b) square surface (a) high speed steel (b) cemented carbide
(c) flat surface (d) irregular surface (c) diamond (d) stellite
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Ans. (c) : Try square is used to examine flat surface. Ans. (c) : The hardest cutting tool material is
Try square is a wood working tool used for marking and
diamond. The hardness of some common materials in
checking 90o angles on piece of wood.
the knoop scale is shown in the table.
• Try square is made of two key parts, the blade is
also known as a beam or tongue and the stock. Material Hardness N/mm2
• Which are fixed together at 90o to form an L shape. Hardness steel 7,000-13,000
Tungsten carbide 18,000-24,000
Aluminium oxide 20,000-30,000
Titanium carbide 18,000-32,000
Silicon carbide 21,000-30,000
Boron carbide 28,000
Cubic boron nitride 35,000-47,500
Diamond 70,000-80,000
258. Least count of a vernier bevel protractor is
255. The value of maximum diameter of circle that
can be drawn using a trammel is ______ given by –
(a) 1 MSD – 1 VSD (b) 2 MSD – 1 VSD
(c) 1 VSD – 2 MSD (d) 2 VSD – 1 MSD
Ans. (b) : When the zero of the vernier scale coincides
with the zero of the main, scale, the first division of the
vernier scale will be very close to the 2nd main scale
division.
Hence the least count is 2 MSD – 1 VSD
(a) 12 inch (b) 24 inch
24 23o 1o
(c) 36 inch (d) 72 inch i.e. the least count = 2o − = or 51
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 12 12 12
Ans. (d) : The value of maximum diameter of circle • Least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5 minutes.
that can be drawn using a trammel is 72 inch. MSD = Main Scale Division
A trammel point set is used for transferring VSD = Vernier Scale Division
measurements scribing arcs and laying out circles that
259. Which of the following is a direct measurement
are too big for a conventional compass or divider.
tool?
A precision trammel set includes two scriber points and
two pencil point. (a) Steel rule (b) Micrometer
256. Identify the tool used to protect the workpiece (c) Protractor (d) All of the above
from being damaged due to frequent use of RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
wrenches. Ans. (d) :
(a) Stillson pipe wrench Direct measuring Indirect measuring
(b) Chain wrench instrument instrument
(c) Strap wrench
Determine the actual Transfer the
(d) Footprint wrench
dimension and size of measurement from the
IOCL 2020
workpiece workpiece to the
direct measuring
Ans. (c) : Strap wrench is used on finished tubular
instrument, than the
surfaces to avoid marking or damaging. These wrenches
have metallic straps by which the surfaces can be tightly comparison is made
gripped. Measuring tape, steel rule, Simple calipers, dial
Foot print wrench– It is used for gripping and turning vernier calipers, micrometer gauge etc.
pipes and round stocks in confined places. etc.

260. The size of a try square is determined by – Ans. (b) : Spirit level, bubble level, or simply a level is
(a) Length and width of the stock an instrument design to indicate whether a surface is
(b) Length and width of the blade horizontal (level) or vertical (plumb).
(c) Inside end of the stock till the final end of the There are different types of spirit level for different
blade uses:
(d) none of the above • Surveyor's leveling instrument
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 • Carpenter's level (either wood)
Ans. (c) : The size of a try square is determined by • Aluminium or composite materials
inside end of the stock till the final end of the blade. • Mason's level
• It consists of a stock and a blade its size is specified • Torpedo level
by the length of its blade. • Post level
• Try square is a precision instrument, which is used • Line level
to check the squareness of a surface. • Engineer's precision level
261. Identify the type of engineer try square shown • Electronic level
in the figure below – • Inclinometer
• Slip or skid indicator
• Bull's eye level.
264. Angle plate is made up of .............
(a) Closed grain cast iron
(b) Cast steel
(a) engineer square with bevel edge stock (c) Tool steel
(b) engineer square with stock (d) High speed steel
(c) engineer square with flange BHEL 2020
(d) none of the above RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 Ans. (a) : Angle plate is made up of closed grain cast
Ans. (b) : iron or steel.
• Try square is used to mark line at 90 degree to a • The edges and ends are also machined square, they
straight edge. have ribs on the un-machined part for good rigidity
• It is used to mark out lines square to the face edge and to prevent distortion.
and face side. 265. CRIMPING is to reduce the .......... of a
• It may also be used to check if edges are straight. If cylindrical shape, allowing it to be slipped into
the try square is placed on the edge of the material the next section.
and held up to a light, any light shining through (a) Diameter (b) Length
between the material and the try square blade (c) Width (d) Mass
indicates that the edge of the material is not straight. RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
262. The error in squareness can be accurately Ans. (a) : Crimping is to reduce the diameter of a
determined by using a ......... cylindrical shape, allowing it to be slipped into the next
(a) try square and slip section.
(b) try square and feeler gauge 266. The tool made of cemented carbide wear out
(c) cylinder square and slip gauge faster at –
(d) beveled edge try square (a) Medium speeds (b) Fast speeds
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (c) Slow speeds (d) Very fast speeds
Ans. (c) : The error in squarness can be accurately
determined by using a cylinder square and slip gauge. Ans. (c) : Carbide are used for tool material because of
their high hardness over a wide range of temperature,
263. The spirit level is used for checking the level of
high electric modulus, high thermal conductivity and
machine when low thermal expansions.
(a) lifting the machine
• These tool can not be used at low speeds as at low
(b) erecting the machine speed the chips of workpiece material are welded to
(c) shifting the machine the surface of the tool and increases its wear.
(d) grouting the machine 267. The figure shows the setup of a sine bar for
NTPC Fitter 2016 taper angle checking. Name the item marked
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 ‘X’ in the figure
Ans. (c) : Cutting angle of chisel for chipping mild

steel is 55o.
• The upper part of a chisel is chamfered to an angle
of 10o to 12o.
Material to be cut Point angle Angle of
inclination
Cast iron 60o 37o
o
Mild steel 55 34.5o
(a) Stopper (b) Slip gauges Brass 50o 32o
(c) Sine bar (d) Job Copper 45o 29.5o
o
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 High carbon steel 65 39.5o
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 Aluminium 30o 22o
Ans. (b) : Slip gauge are made in sets and consists of a 270. The instrument use to measure high
number of hardened blocks made of high grade steel temperature in the furnace is............
with low thermal expansion. (a) Thermometer (b) Barometer
They are used for two purpose– (c) Calorimeter (d) Pyrometer
For direct precise measurement where the accuracy of RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
the workpiece demand it. Ans. (d) : The instrument use to measure high
• For use with high magnification comparator to temperature in the furnace is pyrometer.
establish the size of the gauge blocks in general use. • Pyrometer device for measuring relatively high
• For checking an accuracy of measuring instrument. temperature, such as are encountered in furnace.
Most pyrometers work by measuring radiation from the
268. The size of the dividers are specified by...........
body whose temperature is to be measured.
(a) total length of legs
271. The advantage of ceramic cutting tool is:
(b) distance between the points when fully
(a) Higher cutting speed
opened
(b) Longer Tool life
(c) length of legs without points (c) Reduced Built-up edge
(d) distance between the pivot and the point (d) All of these
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
Ans. (d) : Dividers are used for scribing circles, arcs Ans. (d) : The advantages of ceramic cutting tools are–
and for transferring and stepping off distances. • Higher cutting speed
• The size of the dividers are specified by distance • Longer tool life
between the pivot and the point. • Reduced built up edge
• The sizes of dividers range between 50 to 200 mm. • Superior surface finish
• Coolant is not needed
• Lower co-efficient of friction
• Greater machining flexibility.
Note–
• Used in machining of hard ferrous materials and
cast iron.
• Ceramic cutting tools can be used to machine
difficult materials at high cutting speed.
272. The main characteristic of ceramic cutting tool
is:
Divider (a) High compressive strength
269. Cutting angle of chisel for chipping mild steel (b) High tensile strength
is....... (c) Low brittleness
(a) 35o (b) 45o (d) Cannot be operated on high speeds
(c) 55o (d) 65o BDL Technician 2022
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Ans. (a) : The main characteristic of ceramic cutting Ans. (d) : Dovetail type guideways are preferred when
tool is– the location of the moving part is considered essential.
• High impact strength • These are generally used for milling machine tables,
• High compressive strength saddles, and knees.
• High yield strength at operating temperature. • In dovetail type guideways adjustment for wear can
• High toughness and bending strength. be made by parallel blocks pushed by set screws.
• Excellent conductivity, low thermal expansion for
good dimensional stability.
Note– Ceramic cutting tools are very brittle.
• They can be used only on machines which are
extremely rigid and free of vibration.
• Used in machining of hard ferrous material and cast
iron.
273. Main alloying element in H.S.S. is-
(a) Tungsten (b) Chromium
• It features extremely rigidity and alignment
(c) Vanadium (d) Nickel
characteristic. It is an expensive guide way to
produce.
Ans. (a) : List the major alloying elements in H.S.S.–
276. High speed steel contains tungsten vanadium,
Vanadium– Improves toughness, abrasion resistance,
chromium and cobalt in the composition of 18
and hot hardness.
: 4 : 1 Which one is 4% in the composition?
Chromium– Improves toughness, wear resistance and
(a) Tungsten (b) Vanadium
high temperature strength.
Tungsten and cobalt have similar effects, improve (c) Chromium (d) Cobalt
strength and hot hardness. NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Molybdenum improves wear resistance, toughness, and RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
high temperature strength and hardness. Ans. (c) : High speed steel is special alloy steel which is
Note– obtained by alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium
• Alloying element in stainless steel is 18% W, 4% cobalt and molybdenum with steel.
Cr, 1% V. • HSS is an alloy of 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and
• Main alloying element in H.S.S. is Tungsten (W). 1% vanadium.
274. Carbon percentage in HSS tool is- • High speed steels are used for cutting metals at a
(a) 0.75 to 1.00% (b) 1.00 to 2.00% much higher cutting speed than ordinary carbon tool
(c) 0.60 to 0.75% (d) 0.20 to 0.30% steels.
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 Note–
Ans. (c) : A common type of high speed steel contains • Chromium is included mainly to enhance
18% tungsten, 4% chromium 1% vanadium and only hardenbility and reduce oxidation damage during
0.6 to 0.8% carbon. heat treatment.
• HSS is special alloy steel which is obtained by Chromium– Improve toughness wear resistance and
alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium, cobalt and high temperature strength.
molybdenum with steel.
277. A flat chisel is used to .............
• HSS is used for cutting tool in lathe, shapers,
(a) Cutting thin sheet metal
planers, milling machines, drilling machines,
(b) Cutting key ways
broaching machines etc.
(c) Enlarging hole
275. Dovetails are provided on guideway of machine
(d) Squaring materials at the corners
tools. The clearance between dovetails are
adjusted by– RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
(a) Keeper plate (b) Locking screw Ans. (a) : A flat chisel is used to cutting thin sheet
(c) Taper wedge (d) Gib metal.
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • Flat chisels are used to remove metal from large flat
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 surfaces and chip-off excess metal of welded.
Ans. (a) : Cemented carbide is capable of cutting speed

3-4 times greater than HSS cutting tools.
Cutting speed used for different tool materials are–
Carbon steel (5-10 m/min) < HSS minimum speed, (10-
60 m/min) < cast alloy < carbide, (30-140 m/min) <
cemented carbide, 150 m/min < cermets, (150-350
m/min) < ceramics or sintered oxide maximum speed,
• Flat chisel is used to cut bars and rods to reduce more than 500 m/min < CBN < diamond.
surface and to cut sheet metal that is too thick or 281. A block level can be used for
difficult to cut with tin snips. (a) Checking vertical alignment only
278. The chisel will dig into the material when ....... (b) Checking horizontal alignment only
(a) The rake is more (c) Checking angular alignment only
(b) The clearance angle is too low (d) Checking vertical and horizontal alignment
(c) The angle of inclination is more RRB ALP Patna 2014
(d) The angle of inclination is too low Ans. (d) : A block level can be used for checking
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 vertical and horizontal alignment.
Ans. (c) : The chisel will dig into the material when the • For vertical & horizontal alignment, the block level
angle of inclination is more. tools are used.
Chisel– It is made of high carbon steel or chrome • For horizontal alignment, the spirit level tools are
vanadium steel. used.
• It's cutting edge is kept at 35o to 70o angle • It consist of a small glass tube containing a liquid
and an air bubble the tube is sealed and fixed
horizontal in a block.
• The correct point/cutting/wedge angle of the chisel

depends on the material to be chipped. Sharp angles
are given for soft materials and wide angles for hard 282. Where should the cutting tools be placed ?
materials. (a) Along with measuring instruments
• If the clearance angle is too low or zero the rake (b) With loosening or tightening instruments
angle increases the cutting edge can not penetrate (c) Along with all other instruments
into the work, the chisel will slip. (d) At a distance from all the instruments
• If the clearance angle is too great, the rake angle RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
reduce, the cutting edge digs in, and the cut Ans. (d) : The cutting tools be placed at a distance from
progressively increases. all the instruments.
279. The width of a form tool should never exceed 283. ......... allows lines to be scribed at a preset
______ times than the smallest diameter of the distance, from the tables surface.
finished part. (a) Angle plates
(a) 1.5 (b) 3.0 (b) Scriber
(c) 4.0 (d) 4.5 (c) Height gauge or scribing block
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 (d) Surface gauge
Ans. (b) : The width of a form tool should never exceed RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
3 times the smallest diameter of the finished part. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
280. Cemented carbide is capable of cutting speed Ans. (c) : Scribing block is a gauge consisting of a
(a) 3 - 4 times greater than HSS cutting tools scriber mounted on an adjustable stand used to test the
(b) 5 - 8 times greater than HSS cutting tools accuracy of plane surfaces.
(c) 8 - 10 times greater than HSS cutting tools • Height gauge may also be used to measure the
(d) 10 - 15 times greater than HSS cutting tools height of an object by using the underside of the
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 scriber the datum.

284. Usually angle plate is designed in grade_____. Ans. (b) :

(a) Number 3 (b) Number 2 Direct measuring Indirect measuring
(c) Number 1 (d) Number 0 instrument instrument
Determine the actual Transfer the
Ans. (b) : Usually angle plate is designed in grade dimension and size of measurement from the
number 2. workpiece workpiece to the
They are available in two grades, grade-1 and grade-11, direct measuring
in different sizes to meet a wide range of requirement
instrument, than the
GMT box angle plates are made of closed grained cast
comparison is made
iron to IS 210, grade 20 and hardness is guaranteed to
be above 180 BHN. Measuring tape, steel rule, Simple calipers, dial
• The grade 2 angle plates are used for general machine vernier calipers, micrometer gauge etc.
shop work. etc.
285. ______is used for support to job while 288. For which die stock is used?
marking. (a) To produce thread on die
(a) Scriber (b) To produce thread on pipe
(b) Punch (c) To turn the die
(c) Angle plate (d) To hold the pipe
(d) Prick punch UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (c) : Die stock– Die stock is used while hand
Ans. (c) : Angle plate is used for support to job while threading for managing the die.
marking.
• Die stock is used to turn the die.
Angle plate– It is made of closely grained cast iron or
steel. The edges and ends are also machined square. Die– Dies are used to form or cut a male thread on the
They have ribs on the unmachined part for good rigidity outside of rods or bars.
and to prevent distortion. 289. What is name of given angular measuring
The slots are machined on the top plane surfaces for instrument, in a given figure?
accommodating damping bolts.
286. Straight edges are used to measure–
(a) Straight length of parts
(b) Flatness
(c) Parallelism (a) Vernier bevel protector
(d) Perpendicularity (b) Universal bevel gauge
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) Bevel protractor
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (d) Bevel or bevel gauge
Ans. (b) : Straight edges are used to measure flatness. UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
For checking the flatness, single-edged as well as three Ans. (b) : Universal bevel gauge–
and four edged straight edge may be used with single
• It is used for tool makers.
edge straight edge, it is applied in different direction at
different places on the surface to be tested. • It measure angles.
They are available in length from 75 to 175 mm and • It comes under category of mechanical protractor.
with one to four working edges. 290. Which one is not a part of ordinary depth
Straight edges may be classified as– gauge?
1. Tool makes straight edge
(a) Base (b) Graduated beam
2. Wide edge straight edge
(c) Clamping screw (d) Handle
3. Angle straight edge.
287. Which of the following is a direct measuring
Ans. (d) : Ordinary depth gauge–
tool?
(a) Try square • Handle is not a part of ordinary depth gauge.
(b) Steel rule Whether base, graduated beam and damping screw
(c) Straight edge are part of ordinary depth gauge.
(d) Ring gauge • It is an instrument for measuring depth below
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 reference surface.

291. Which of the following chisel is used to cut Ans. (d) : Cold chisel and wood working tool are made
spiral grooves? up of high carbon steel.
(a) Diamond pointed chisel • The cold chisel is a hand cutting tool used by fitters
(b) Half round nose chisel for chipping and cutting off operations.
(c) Flat chisel • Cold chisel are used to remove waste metal when a
(d) Cross cut chisel very smooth finish is not required or when the work
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 can not be done easily with other tools, such as a
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM hacksaw, file, bench sheers or power tools.
Ans. (b) : Half round nose chisel– 295. According to the BIS, what is name of V block
• It is also known as gauge chisel. shown in figure?
• It is designed to be used for cutting spiral grooves in
metal and includes many specialized uses. Such as
cutting semicircular grooves for always in bearings.
292. After taking reading of chisel many times :
(a) It's cutting edge becomes thin (a) Matched pair 'V' block
(b) It's case hardening is done before taking its (b) Single level double groove 'V' block
re-reading (c) Single level single groove 'V' block
(c) It should be forged before grinding it given. (d) Double level single groove 'V' block
(d) It is better for again sharpening UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (d) : Double level single groove 'V' block– In
Ans. (c) : After a number of re-grinding of chisel it these type of block, two grooves are made in top &
should be forged before grinding it again. After bottom of the 'V' block and one rectangular groove is
repeated use, the cutting edge of the chisel gets spoiled made on each side.
& its head also fails.
While marking & machining round shaped jobs, they
Therefore, in order to make good cutting in a right way,
require marking and machining by holding them with
there is need to grind to chisel, the cutting edge of chisel
support.
should be grinded in a slightly convex instead of
grinding at straight. 296. What is the purpose of surface plate?
293. In the given figure, what the shown figure is : (a) Measurement of depth of hole
(b) Testing of flatness of workmanship
(c) Measurement of inside diameter
(d) Measurement of length
(a) Grinding tool DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
(b) Chaser tool Ans. (b) : Surface plate–
(c) Drilling tool • It is made up of cast iron.
(d) Single point cutting tool • It is used to check the straightness of workmanship.
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 • It can check up to 0.025 mm flatness.
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM • It can be of square and rectangular shape.
Ans. (b) : Chaser tool– • It is used to check the surface of job for marking on
• It is a multi point cutting tool which is used to cut small jobs.
'V' threads. 297. What should be tangent angle of chisel for
• It is of two type– cutting aluminium?
(i) Hand chaser (a) 600 (b) 900
0
(ii) Machine chaser (c) 30 (d) 1200
• Hand chaser is used for cleaning the threads of any DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
bolt etc and for finishing of threads. Ans. (c) :
• Machine chaser is used to cut threads on capstan, Material to be cut Point angle
turret or automatic machines. High carbon steel 65o
294. Cold chisel & wood working tool are made up Cast iron 60o
of which of the following? Mild steel 55o
(a) Medium carbon steel (b) Full mild steel Brass 50o
(c) Mild steel (d) High carbon steel Copper 45o
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM Aluminium 30o

298. Which material is used in power hexa-blade? 302. Is useful gauge for checking the external
(a) Medium carbon steel (b) High speed steel diameter of shaft:
(c) High carbon steel (d) Mild steel (a) Contour gauge (b) Ring gauge
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (c) Plug gauge (d) Feeller gauge
Ans. (b) : Power hexa blade– HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
• It is a hand tool used to cut metal. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
• It is made of either low alloy steel or high speed Ans. (b) : Ring Gauge–
steel and is available in standard length of 250 mm • It is used for checking the external diameter of the
and 300 mm. shaft.
• The selection of blade depends on the shape & • It working process is similar to caliper gauge.
hardness of material to be cut. • It is used for checking outer measurement of
299. The length of the hammer handle for a 500 gm cylindrical job.
hammer should be about............ • Outer part of ring gauge is knurled so that gauge
(a) 300 mm (b) 400 mm can be handled strongly.
(c) 350 mm (d) 500 mm 303. Use of V-block:
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 (a) To check the surface roughness
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (b) To hold round rod during marking and
Ans. (a) : Length of hammer blade for a 500 gm drilling
hammer should be about 300 mm. (c) To mark the center of the round rod
300. The hammer used for propagating metal in one (d) For estimating flat surfaces
direction along the line of strike is : UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(a) Straight peen hammer Ans. (b) : V block–
(b) Ball peen hammer • V block is used to hold circular and semi circular
(c) Cross peen hammer shapes.
(d) Sledge hammer • It is used to hold workpiece properly during drilling,
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 boring operations.
Ans. (c) : Cross peen hammer– • They consist of a rectangular steel or cast iron block
• This hammer is used for propagating metal in one with a 120o channel rotate 45o from the, forming a
direction along the line of strike. V shape channel in the top.
• The hammer face is flat and peen is built into the 304. V-block 50/5-40 A is used to hold the job whose
cross of the handle. diameter will be:
• It is mostly used for making grooves in sheet job (a) Between 5 to 40 (b) Between 5 to 50
and for impacting on inner bend of sheet job while (c) 40 mm (d) 50 mm
folding it.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
• This weight is 0.125 to 1.5 kg.
Ans. (a) : V block–
• It is used to hold circular and semicircular shapes.
So that different machining operations can be
performed easily.
• V block 50/5-40 A is used to hold the job whose
diameter will be between 5 to 40.
305. Which non ferrous metal's tensile strength can
301. Hammer which are heavier in weight are : be increased by hammering or rolling?
(a) Sledge hammer (b) Claw hammer (a) Lead (b) Copper
(c) Hand hammer (d) Ball peen hammer (c) Tin (d) Zinc
NMRC, 15-09-2019 UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
Ans. (a) : Sledge hammer– Ans. (c) : Copper– It is very malleable and ductile. It
• It is tool with a large, flat, often metal head, attached can be made into sheets or wires. Copper is a good
to a long handle. The long handle combined with a conductor of heat and also highly resistant to corrosion.
heavy head allows the sledge hammer to gather • The tensile strength of copper can be increased by
momentum during a suing and apply a large force hammering or rolling.
compared to hammers designed to drive nails. 306. Mallet is made of
• It is heavier in weight (a) Lead (b) Brass
• It is available in 2 to 10 kg weight & used for heavy (c) Hard wood (d) Cast Iron
impact in large works. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
Ans. (c) : Mallet is made up of hard wood. Ans. (d) : Beam compass–
• It is mostly used in sheet metal work. • It is an instrument used for drawing large circles or
• It is used in carpentry work. curvatures larger than these possible with the small
307. What is the clearance angle if the angle of compass sets.
inclination of a chisel, with point angle 60o, is • The beam compass was frequently used for drawing
39.5o? large diameter circles.
(a) 15o (b) 9.5o 310. Which of the following chisel is used for
o
(c) 20.5 (d) None of the three separating metals after chain drilling?
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 (a) Half round nose chisel
Ans. (b) : Given, (b) Diamond point nose chisel
Inclination angle (I) = 39.5o (c) Cape chisel
(d) Web chisel
Point angle (β) = 60o
Therefore,
Ans. (d) :
Inclination angle (I) = Clearance angle (α) + Point
Flat chisel To remove metal from
angle (β)/2 large flat surfaces &
60 chip-off excess metal of
39.5 = α +
2 welded joints and
39.5 = α + 30 castings
α = 39.5 – 30 Cross cut or cape chisel For cutting flutes, curved
α = 9.5o grooves (oil grooves)
Half round nose chisel For cutting flutes, curved
grooves.
Web chisel/punching For separating metals
chisels after chain drilling
311. In a chisel, the cutting edge cannot penetrate
into the work and slip if :
(a) Clearance angle is high
(b) Clearance angle is low
(c) Rake angle is low
(d) Rake angle is high
308. Which of the following chisel is used for ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
squaring material at the corners? Ans. (b) : Chisel–
(a) Flat chisel
(b) Web chisel
• It is of octagonal shape.
(c) Diamond point chisel
(d) Cross–cut chisel • In it, cutting edge can not penetrate into the work
and slip if clearance angle is low.
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 312. In a chisel, the cut progressively increases if :
Ans. (c) (a) Rake angle is high
Chisel Use (b) Clearance angle is zero
Flat chisel To remove metal from large flat (c) Clearance angle is high
surfaces & chip-off excess metal (d) Angle of inclination is low
of welded joints and castings ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
Cross cut or cape For cutting flutes, curved grooves Ans. (c) : Chisel– In a chisel, the cut progressively
chisel (oil grooves) increase if clearance angle is high.
Diamond point For squaring materials at corners, clearance angle– It is angle between the bottom face of
chisel joints the point and the tangent to the work surface originating
Web For separating metals after chain at the cutting edge.
chisel/punching drilling
chisels 313. Dowel pins are used for ............
309. Which of the following is used for scribing (a) measurement of diameter of hole
large diameter circles or arcs? (b) measurement of depth of hole
(a) Ordinary compass (b) Wing compass (c) hidden fastening
(c) Spring compass (d) Beam compass (d) none of these
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
Ans. (c) : Dowel pins– 318. Name the hand tool used to remove the high
• It is also known as guide pins. spots of a job after machining :
• It is used for hidden fastening. (a) Chisel (b) Scriber
• It is used in machine fabrication retain parts in a (c) Scraper (d) None of the above
fixed position or keep parts aligned. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
314. Head of a chisel is not hardened. The reason is Ans. (c) : Scraper– It is used to remove the high spots
to : of a job after machining.
(a) Reduce the cost of chisel • It is made up of high grade tool steel or special alloy
(b) Avoid damage of head during hammer blow steel and tungsten carbide tipped tools.
(c) Avoid injury to the operator 319. Gauge is used for measuring small air gaps and
(d) Avoid the slippage during hammer blow clearances
BEML 2022 (a) Ring gauge (b) Feeler gauge
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (c) Taper gauge (d) No Go gauge
Ans. (d) : Head of chisel is not hardened. The reason is ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
to avoid the slippage during hammer blow. Chisel is a Ans. (b) : Feeler gauge–
cutting tool which is used to remove unnecessary • It is a tool used to measure gap widths.
metals. • It is mostly used in engineering to measure the
It is made up of high carbon steel. It's head is kept at an clearance between two parts.
angle of 40o to 70o and cutting angle at 35o to 70o. It's
• They consist of a number of small lengths of steel
body is of octagonal shape.
of different thicknesses with measurements marked
315. Which of the following is used to check the on each piece.
final fit to mating tapers?
(a) Layout die 320. .................. scraper is used to scrape round or
curved surfaces and to remove sharp corners
(b) Prussian blue
and burrs
(c) Penetrating die
(a) Flat scraper (b) Triangular scraper
(d) Lapping compound
(c) Half round scraper (d) None of the above
IOCL 2020
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
Ans. (b) : Prussian blue is used to check the final fit to
mating taper parts. Ans. (b) : Triangular scraper–
• It is also known as three square scrapper.
316. Which of the following hand tool is used to
mark the centre of a hole when drilling? • Its shape is triangular and has three cutting edges.
(a) Centre Punch (b) Dot Punch • It is used to scrape round or curved surfaces and to
(c) Drive Punch (d) Both (a) and (b) remove sharp corners & burrs.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 321. Screw driver is used for tightening screws
Ans. (a) : Centre punch– having star or cross grooved head used in
• It is used to locate the centre of holes or to deepen electronic equipments is :
the focal point. (a) Offset screw driver
• The point angle is 90o. (b) Watch makers screw driver
• They are made of high carbon steel hardened and (c) Ratchet screw driver
ground. (d) Philips screw driver
317. Purpose of an angle plate is : ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
(a) Work holding Ans. (d) : Philips screw driver is used for tightening
(b) Tool holding screws having star or cross grooved head used in
(c) Both (a) and (b) electronic equipment.
(d) Marking lines parallel to the edge of a job • It has a head with point edges in the shape of a
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 cross, which fits nearly into the cross slots of a
NTPC Fitter 2016 Phillips screws.
Ans. (a) : Angle plate– It is the purpose to hold the 322. Pliers is used for gripping nuts which are fitted
workpiece and tool. in narrow and down places
• The edges and ends are also machined square. They (a) Side cutting pliers (b) Slip joint pliers
have ribs on the unmachined part for good rigidity (c) Vice grip pliers (d) Nose pliers
and to prevent distortion. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
• The slots are machined on the top plane surfaces for Ans. (d) : Nose pliers– It is used for gripping nuts
accommodating damping bolts. which are fitted in narrow and down places.
323. Spanner is used to turn-bolts mounted in Ans. (d) : Cross cut chisel–
deeper places is : • It is also known as cape chisel.
(a) Socket spanner • It is used for cutting grooves, flutes, keyways etc.
(b) Adjustable spanner
(c) Box spanner
(d) Ring spanner
Ans. (c) : Box spanner–
• It normally feature a six sided ring type head that
fits the nut that has been pressed out of the steel 328. Point angle of chisel for aluminium is
tube during the manufacturing process. (a) 65º (b) 60º
• It is used to turn bolts mounted in deeper places. (c) 30º (d) 55º
324. Wrench is used for turning large diameter
Ans. (c) :
pipes
Material to be cut Point angle
(a) Adjustable wrench
High carbon steel 65o
(b) Pipe wrench Cast iron 60o
(c) Strap wrench Mild steel 55o
(d) Chain wrench Brass 50o
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I Copper 45o
Ans. (d) : Chain wrench– Aluminium 30o
• It is used for holding or gripping larger diameter 329. Angular contact ball bearings are designed to
pipes. take
• It is used for pipes with diameter of 50 mm to 150 (a) Axial and vertical thrust
mm. (b) Radial load
(c) Axial thrust
325. The slots on angle plate provided for
(d) Axial thrust and radial load
(a) Reducing the weight ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
(b) Accommodating clamping bolts Ans. (d) : Angular contact ball bearing– It can take
(c) Aligning the work heavy radial and thrust loads.
(d) Hanging with hooks Thrust ball bearing : It can not take the radial load.
BHEL 2020 Taper roller bearing : It can take heavy radial and
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III thrust load.
Ans. (b) : Angle plate– It is made of closely grained Cylindrical roller bearing : It can take radial load
cast iron or steel. The edges and ends are also machined only.
square. They have ribs on the unmachined part for good Deep groove ball bearing : It takes load in radial as
rigidity and to prevent distortion. well as in axial direction.
The slots are machined on the top plane surfaces for 330. Trowel is used for ...............
accommodating damping bolts. (a) Picking, spreading mortar
(b) Curing
326. Hand tool used for cutting thin sheets is called :
(c) Digging
(a) Stakes (b) Scriber (d) Washing
(c) Punch (d) Sniper RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II Ans. (a) : Trowel–
Ans. (d) : Sniper– • It is used for spreading and smoothing picking,
• Hand tool used for cutting thin sheets. mortar and concrete.
• It is made of high carbon steel. • It is an essential tool for masonry.
• It's cutting edges are hardened & tempered. • It is available in two sizes.
• It's cutting edges are ground at an angle of 80o. • Large size trowel is used in walls, pillars, concrete
etc.
327. Cross cut Chisels are used for
331. .............. has a long blade ideal for cleaning
(a) working on large flat surfaces
grooves and accessing tight spaces.
(b) chipping excess metal of castings (a) Skew chisel (b) Mortise chisel
(c) chipping metal of weld joints (c) Paring chisel (d) Corner chisel
(d) cutting key ways RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) Ans. (c) : Paring chisel– It has a long blade ideal for
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 cleaning grooves and accessing.
332. Which of the following chisel is used for cutting 336. Why small convexness is provided on cutting
keyways and grooves? edge of flat chisel?
(a) Cross-cut chisel (b) Flat chisel (a) To cut curved surfaces
(c) Web chisel (d) Punching chisel (b) To cut the cutting edges corners
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 (c) To cut sharp corner
Ans. (a) : (d) To provide space to enter lubricant
Chisel Use RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
Flat chisel To remove metal from large flat Ans : (b) Flat chisel–
surfaces & chip-off excess metal • This chisel is made from high carbon steel by forging.
of welded joints and castings • While cutting, the shearing edge is provided with a
Cross cut or cape For cutting flutes, curved grooves slight convexity so that it does not penetrate deeply
chisel (oil grooves) while grinding the metal.
Diamond point For squaring materials at corners, • Its length is kept 10 to 40 cm and cutting edge is kept
chisel joints at 1.6 to 3.2 cm.
333. Which of the following chisel is used for • It is used to save the cutting edge corner from cutting.
separating metals after chain drilling? 337. Which gauge is used for measuring diameter of
(a) Half round nose chisel cylinder bore :
(b) Diamond point nose chisel (a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Barometer
(c) Cape chisel (c) Telescopic gauge (d) Taper plug gauge
(d) Web chisel RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
BDL Technician 2022 Ans : (c) Telescopic gauge– It is indirect measuring
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 devices used to measure the internal diameter of a bore,
Ans. (d) : Web chisel– hole, groove, slot etc.
• It is also known as punching chisel. • This T-shaped tool consists of a handle, two
telescopic rods and a locking screw.
• It is used for separating metals after chain drilling.
338. C clamp is used for
• Chisel is a tool used for cutting, chopping and (a) Holding material in tight position
shaping wood stone & metals. (b) Measuring length
334. What is the use of Diamond point chisel? (c) Drawing circular shape on materials
(a) Forming square groove on metal surfaces (d) Drilling hole
(b) Chipping on metal surfaces RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
(c) Forming "V" groove on metal surfaces Ans. (a) : C clamp– A C-clamp or G-clamp is a type of
(d) Forming semi-circle groove on metal clamp device typically used to hold a wood or metal
surfaces workpiece and often used in, but are not limited to
carpentry and welding.
RRB ALP RAC 23.01.2019, Shift-I
339. Torque wrench is used for :
Ans : (c) Diamond point chisel– These chisels are used
(a) Tightening wires
for removing unwanted materials and debris from
corners and other hard-to-access area. (b) Tightening bolt and nut
(c) Adjusting bolt and nut
(d) Tightening broke
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I
335. Prick punch having 60o taper angle is used for : Ans. (b) : Torque wrench–
(a) For removing cut thread • It is used where the tightness of screw & bolt is
(b) For making punching marks for holes to be crucial.
drilled • It allows the operator to set the torque applied to
(c) For marking at hole position fastener, so it can be matched to specifications for
(d) To make divider point particular application.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III 340. Sharp flat chisel is used :
Ans : (b) 60o prick punch is used for making witness (a) For cutting nut
mark. (b) For removing unwanted material
• It is a short length punch. (c) For providing finishing to metal
• It is made of high carbon steel. (d) For cutting wires
• It is used to draw curves. RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I
Ans. (b) : Ans. (a) : Mallet–

• This width of sharp flat chisel is smaller than its • It is a hammer used to strike an object without
thickness. damaging it.
• For convenience in cutting slight soundness is • They are typically light weight and made from solid
provided to cutting edge. wood, rubber, plastic or leather.
• Forging angle of the chisel is 25o to 30o. 345. If the handle in a hammer is loose then it :
• It is used for removing or chipping unwanted metal (a) Cause of accident
(b) Can work properly
341. Which part of ball peen hammer is used for (c) Provides proper grip
shaping & forming functions? (d) Provides good support
(a) Peen (b) Check DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
(c) Face (d) Wedge Ans. (a) :
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I • If the handle in a hammer is loose then it can be
Ans. (a) : Ball peen hammer– It is type of peening cause of accident.
hammer used in metal working. It has two heads, one • It is hand tool mostly used in workshop.
flat and the other called the peen rounded. Peen is used • It is used for operations live forging, banding,
for shaping & forming functions. chipping, riveting.
• Main parts of hammer are handle, eye hole, face,
peen, cheek.
346. An air chisel is used to break or cut metal
object apart. How is it operated?
342. What is the point angle of center punch? (a) Hydraulically (b) Frictionally
(a) 60o (b) 45o (c) Magnetically (d) Pneumatically
o
(c) 30 (d) 90o RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I Ans. (d) : Air chisel– It is a pneumatic hand tool used
Ans. (d) : Centre punch– to carve in stone and to break or cut metal objects apart.
It is designed to accept different tools depending on
required function.
• It is used to locate or mark the centres of holes or to
347. What is the other name for Jenny spanners?
deepen the focal point.
• It's point angle is kept 90o. (c) Odd-leg caliper (d) Joint spanner
343. Which of the following is not a type of tap
wrench?
(a) Double-ended adjustable RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II
(b) T-handle Ans. (d) : Jenny spanner is also known as joint spanner.
(c) Spanner 348. Chisel for metal cutting are hardened :
(d) Solid type (a) At tip (b) All over
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 (c) At the cutting edge (d) At middle
Ans. (c) : Tap wrench– It is a hand tool used to turn
Ans : (c) Chisel–
taps or other small tools, such as hand reamers or screw
• It is most commonly used tool for cutting light &
extractors.
thin metals.
Types of tap wrench–
• It is made of high carbon steel or chrome vanadium
(i) Solid tap wrench steel.
(ii) Adjustable tap wrench • It's cutting edge is kept at 35o to 70o angle.
(iii) T handle tap wrench. • Chisel for metal cutting are hardened at the cutting
• Spanner is not a type of wrench. edge.
344. Which of the following material is not used for 349. In chipping process, the following chisel is
making mallet? used.
(a) cast iron (b) Rubber (a) Cape chisel (b) Hot chisel
(c) Wood (d) Plastic (c) Cold chisel (d) Side chisel
MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I (IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (c) Cold chisel– 355. Scrapper is made of .................... metal.

• It is a hand cutting tool used by fitters for chipping (a) High carbon steel (b) Carbon steel
and cutting off operations. (c) Stainless steel (d) Mild steel
• It is made from high carbon steel or chrome DRDO Machinist.2016
vanadium steel. (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
350. .......... pliers is used for opening and fitting Ans : (a) Scrapper–
circlip • It is a tool used to scrap off the protruding parts on
(a) Combination plier (b) Diagonal plier the surfaces after machining.
(c) Long nose plier (d) Slip joint plier • It is made of high carbon steel.
DRDO Fitter.2016 • Its cutting edges are hardened and tempered.
Ans : (c) Long Nose Plier– 356. Name the tool, which is used to lift or move
• The jaws of this type of pliers are long & sharp heavy loads by leverage affect.
from the front. (a) Hosting tool (b) Crow bar
• It is used to hold, remove and fit small parts in tight (c) Fork lift (d) Broaching tool
spaces where jaws of other pliers can not move. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
351. The tools used to indicate/mark the length of Ans : (b) Crow bar–
pipe to be cut is.............. • It is a first type lever.
(a) Hammer (b) Scribers • It is used to lift or move heavy loads by leverage
(c) Screws (d) Nails affect.
ISRO Technician Plumber 27-11-2016 • It is made of medium carbon steel, wrought iron,
Ans : (b) Scribers– titanium etc.
• It is a hand tool used in metal work to mark lines on
workpieces prior to machining.
• It is made of high carbon steel which is later
hardened & tempered.
357. What is the point angle of prick punch which is

used for making light punch marks?
(a) 450 (b) 1000
0
(c) 75 (d) 300
352. 'Heels & valleys' on the job surface is checked ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
by which instrument ? (MAZGAON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
(a) Ammeter (b) Dial gauge Ans : (d)
(c) Profile meter (d) Barometer • 30o angle of prick punch is used for marking light
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 12.10.2003) punch marks.
Ans : (c) Profile meter– It is measuring instrument • Prick punch is a short length punch. It is made of
used to measure a surface's profile, in order to quantity high carbon steel.
its roughness.
353. What is use of drift?
(a) To remove drill (b) To remove die
(c) To put sleeve (d) To remove taps
Ans : (a) Drift– It is used to remove the drill and socket
from the machine's spindle.
354. Which type of plier is used of fit and remove
circlips in assembly work
(a) Circlip plier (b) Flat nose plier
(c) Slip joint plier (d) Round nose plier
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 358. During chipping, chisel should kept at an angle
Ans : (a) Circlip plier– It is used for fastening and of ?
removing retaining rings, sometimes referred to as snap (a) 200 (b) 400
rings. They are typically used by engineers working on (c) 50 0
(d) 600
meters, pistons or turbines. (IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (b) Chipping– It is an operation of removing • Rebates are made by joining two planks together.
excess metal with the help of chisel and hammer. • Its blade is open on both the saw sides of the block,
During chipping, chisel should kept at an angle of 40o. so that the wooden peel can come out on both sides.
359. Choose the bar having forged end used for Its block is made of wood or iron.
pulling big nails out of timber and as a tool to
move heavy objects. Other uses are to open
crates or to loosen boards of concrete forms:
(a) Awls
(b) Crow Bar
(c) Pincers
Ans : (b) Crow bar– It is the bar having forged end
used for pulling big nails out of timber and as a tool to
move heavy objects. Other uses are to open creates or to 363. State the use of paring chisel:
open loosen bards of concrete forms. (a) It is most suitable for all paring work such as
finishing off joints
360. Correct sequence of processes for producing a
cold chisel (b) Used for Rough Work
(c) It is Used for Heavy work
(a) Forging, Rough grinding, hardening &
(d) Both (b) & (c)
tempering
DRDO Machinist.2016
(b) Rough grinding, Forging, hardening and
tempering
Ans : (a) Paring chisel– It is used for delicately
(c) Casting, forging, hardening
shaving thin silvers of wood. It is most suitable for all
(d) Casting, Machining, Rough grounding
paring work such as finishing off joints. They have a
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 long flat thin blade, which provides excellent control for
Ans. : (a) Cold chisel– fine work.
• It is hand cutting tool used by fitters for chipping 364. Bevel edge firmer chisel is used for:
and cutting off operations. (a) Cleaning up corners & joints
• It is made of high carbon steel. (b) Heavy work such as mortising
• It is made by forging high carbon steel, grinding its (c) General chiseling
cutting edge & then this cutting edge is hardened (d) All of the above
and tempered. ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016
361. State the use of Trying plane: Ans : (a) Bevel edge firmer chisel is used for cleaning
(a) Used for producing a rough Surface up corner and joints.
(b) Used for producing a true and Curved 365. Smaller sizes of drills are not marked and the
Surface size is found by the use of
(c) Used for producing a true and straight surface (a) Micrometer (b) Template
(d) None of the above (c) Drill gauge (d) None of these
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 (IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (c) Drill gauge– Small sizes of drills are not
Ans : (c) Trying plane–
marked and the size is found by the use of it. It is tool
• It is also known as joints plane. that measures the angle and length of the cutting edge
• It is type of hand plane used in wood working to of a drill.
straighten the edges of boards and to flatten the
366. .......... is checked by try square.
faces of larger boards. (a) Round surface (b) Groove surface
362. State the use of Rebate planes: (c) Flat surface (d) Irregular surface
(a) Used for planning and smoothing rebates BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
(b) Used for Planning of Grooves VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
(c) Used for Rough Planning Ans : (c) Try square–
(d) None of the above • It is made of hard quality wood such as teak or
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 mahogany etc.
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 • It consist of two parts–
Ans : (a) Rebates Planes– (i) Stock
• It is a hand plane used for planning and smoothing (ii) Blade
rebates. • Stock and blade are joined together.

• Used for– 370. V shape grooves and square groove's corners

(i) Checking flat surface are created by which chisel?
(ii) Draw horizontal & vertical lines. (a) Diamond point chisel
• It is not used to draw inclined lines. (b) Cross cut chisel
(c) Cow mouth chisel
367. Plumb bob is made of which metal?
(d) Web chisel
(a) Aluminium (b) Cast iron
(c) Brass (d) Stainless steel (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) Ans. (a) :
Chisel Use
Ans : (c) Plumb bob– It is in the shape of bob made of
Flat chisel To remove metal from large flat
brass its lower part is sharp. This string is usually
surfaces & chip-off excess metal
threaded into a wooden bar. The length of the strip is
of welded joints and castings
equal to maximum diameter of the bob.
Cross cut or cape For cutting flutes, curved grooves
chisel (oil grooves)
Web For separating metals after chain
chisels
Diamond point For squaring materials at corners,
chisel joints
371. Cutting angle of flat chisel is grind at .... for
Plumb bob
chipping of cast iron.
368. Diamond point chisel ........... (a) 450 (b) 600
(a) Its point of diamond (c) 50 0
(d) 700
(b) Its edge is sharp like a diamond (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(c) It is sharp like a diamond
Ans. (b) :
Material Cutting angle
Ans. (b) :
Cast iron 60o
Chisel Use
Mild steel 55o
Flat chisel To remove metal from large flat
Brass 50o
surfaces & chip-off excess metal
Copper 45o
of welded joints and castings
Aluminium 30o
372. Point of flat chisel is grinded for aluminium
chipping–
Half round nose For cutting flutes, curved
(a) 500 (b) 600
chisel grooves. 0
(c) 65 (d) 300
Web For separating metals after chain
Ans. (d) :
chisels
Diamond point For squaring materials at corners,
chisel joints
Cast iron 60o
369. Which chisel is used for making rectangular
Mild steel 55o
slot?
Brass 50o
(a) Flat chisel
Copper 45o
(b) Diamond point chisel
Aluminium 30o
(c) Web chisel
(d) Cross cut chisel 373. Edge of flat chisel is grinded in convex because:
(a) Edges will sharpened by it
(b) Chisel will not jump & also cut will be
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
proper during cutting by it
Ans : (d) Cross cut chisel– (c) Edge will not twist by it
• It is also known as cape chisel. (d) Grinding of chisel will be easier by it
• It is used for cutting keyway and grooves. (IOF Fitter, 2014)
• It is available in length of 100 to 400 mm. Ans : (b) Edges of flat chisel is grinded in convex
• Width of its cutting edge is 4 to 12 mm. because chisel will not jump & also cut will be proper.

374. Inclination of chisel during chipping of mild Ans : (b) Centre punch–
steel– • It is used to locate the centre of holes or to deepen
(a) 370 (b) 320 the focal point.
0
(c) 35 (d) 34.50
(IOF Fitter, 2016) • The point angle of it is 90o.
Ans : (d) During chipping of mild steel– • It is made of high carbon steel hardened and
Inclination angle = 34.5o ground.
Point angle = 55o 380. Hollow punch is used :
375. Inclination angle of chisel during chipping of (a) For creating hole in hot iron
brass– (b) Cutting washer in thin sheets
(a) 320 (b) 400 (c) Finding centre
0
(c) 37 (d) 300 (d) None of the above
(RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014) (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
Ans : (a) During chipping of brass– Ans : (b) Hollow Punch–
Inclination angle = 32o
• It is used for punching sound holes in gasket
Point angle = 50o
material, leather, rubber, canvas, cardboard, plastic
376. Chisel used for cutting keyway–
& other soft materials.
(a) Flat chisel
(b) Diamond point chisel • The special design of the cutting edge prevents
(c) Cross cut chisel faming of material inside the punch.
(d) Round nose chisel • The cutting edge, is induction hardened for
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) extended working life.
Ans. (c) : 381. Cold chisel differs from not chisel become it is :
Chisel Use (a) Hardened & tempered
Flat chisel To remove metal from large flat (b) Length is more
surfaces & chip-off excess metal (c) Length is loss
of welded joints and castings (d) Made of different metals
Diamond point For squaring materials at corners, Ans : (a)
chisel joints Cold chisel Hot chisel
Web For separating metals after chain It is hardened & It is not hardened and
chisel/punching drilling tempered because the tempered as compare to
chisels metal being cut or shaped cold chisel & metal being
377. Centre head is used for : by it is hard cut by it is generally soft.
(a) Marking 382. Cutting angle of round nose chisel is–
(b) Checking roundness (a) 200 to 300 (b) 350 to 450
(c) Measuring angle 0
(c) 45 to 60 0
(d) 250 to 350
(d) Finding the centre point of round rod Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (b) Round nose tool– It is used for cutting
Ans : (d) Centre head– It is used to determine the curved grooves (oil grooves)
centre of circular objects, such as the end of rods.
Because the "arms" rest at 90o from each other, they can • Cutting angle = 35 to 45o
also be used to determine whether the corner of an • Forging angle = 30o
object is perfectly square. 383. ............ surface of box angle plate are finished
378. Straight edge is made of : which is used for machining & marking.
(a) Brass (b) Steel or cast iron (a) 6 (b) 4
(c) Plastic (d) Wood (c) 8 (d) 3
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
Ans : (b) Straight edge– It is a tool used for drawing Ans : (a) Box angle plate– It is six surface are finished.
straight lines or checking their straightness. It is made It is used for marking and machining.. Significant
of steel or cast iron. It is used in the automatic service
advantage of it is after setting the work can be turned
or machine industry to check the flatness of machined
over with the box enabling further marking out or
mating surface.
machining.
379. Centre punch is made of :
(a) Mild steel (b) High carbon steel 384. Template is made of which of the following?
(c) High speed steel (d) Stainless steel (a) Sheet (b) paper
(IOF Fitter, 2014) (c) Cardboard (d) Rubber
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
Ans : (b) Template– If a product has to be made in Ans : (c) Scrapper–

large number then first a sample is prepared after that • It is made of tool steel or carbon steel.
by copying it other products like that are prepared. The • It is used to remove high spots of a job after
product which is prepared as this sample is called as machining.
template. 390. Which scrapper is used for scrapping of large
• It is mainly made of sheet, cardboard & rubber. bearing?
385. Cross cut chisel is forged at which angle? (a) Flat (b) Half round
(a) 300 (b) 450 (c) Triangular (d) Two hand scrapper
0
(c) 60 (d) 900 NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 Ans : (d) Two Handle Scraper–
Ans : (a) Cross–cut chisel– • It is used for scrapping of large surfaces & bearing
• Width of its cutting edge is less than its thickness. boxes.
• It is used for cutting flutes, key ways & grooves. • It provides better & faster scrapping as compare to
• It is forged at an angle of 30o. triangular and half round scrapper.
386. Which scrapper is used for cleaning keyway? 391. Cutting edge of flat chisel is grinded at which
(a) Hook scrapper angle for cutting steel?
(b) Half round scrapper (a) 350 (b) 450
0
(c) Flat scrapper (c) 60 (d) 700
(d) Triangular scrapper Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
DRDO Fitter.2016 Ans : (d) For cutting steel with flat chisel cutting edge
Ans : (a) Hook Scraper– is grind at 70o angle. For cutting steel with diamond
• It's shape is like a flat scrapper but its point is bent chisel cutting edge is grind at 60o angle.
at an angle of 90o. Therefore where a flat scrapper 392. What is forged angle of hot chisel?
can not be used it is used. (a) 300 (b) 450
• Apart from this, this is used for scraping the central (c) 600 (d) 900
part of large flat surfaces (like key ways, hole etc.) BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
• It is often used for finishing work. (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
387. How much metal is removed by scrapping ? Ans : (a) Hot Chisel–
(a) 0.05 to 0.07 mm (b) 0.1 to 0.4 mm
• It is used to cut metal that has been heated in a forge
(c) 0.5 to 0.8 mm (d) None of the above
to soften the metal.
DRDO Fitter.2016
• These chisels are not hardened & tempered.
Ans : (a) Scrapper–
• Forged angle of hot chisel is 30o.
• It is used to remove the high spots of a job after
machining. 393. Which type of tool is chisel?
• It is made of high grade tool steel or special alloy (a) Cutting tool (b) Holding tool
steel & tungsten carbide tipped tools. (c) Marking tool (d) Measuring tool
• It scratches metal up to 0.05 to 0.07 mm from UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
surface. Ans : (a) Chisel–
• According to B.I.S. its allowance is 0.01 to 0.4 mm. • It is used for cutting thin sheets in two or more
388. Which tool is used for removing high spots of parts.
surface? • It is made of high carbon steel which is hardened &
(a) Chisel (b) File tempered.
(c) Scrapper (d) Grinder • Head, body as same & cutting edge are main parts
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 of chisel.
Ans : (c) Scraper– 394. Which tool is used for chipping?
• It is used to remove the high spots of a job after (a) Plier (b) Drill
machining. (c) Hammer (d) Chisel
• It is made of high grade tool steel or special alloy Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
steel & tungsten carbide tipped tools.
Ans : (d) Chipping–
• According to B.I.S. its allowance is 0.01 to 0.4 mm.
• The removal of weld spatter, rust or old point from
389. Scrapper is made of which metal? iron work is called chipping.
(a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel
(c) Carbon steel (d) None of the above • Chisel is used for chipping process.
(HAL Fitter, 2015) • Cutting angle of chisel for general purpose is 60o.

395. Why some convexity is provided in cutting 400. Which tool is used to make the job in proper
edge of flat chisel : shape?
(a) For providing convenience for chipping (a) Marking tool (b) Measuring tool
(b) For safety of cutting edge (c) Cutting tool (d) Checking tool
(c) For saving material from getting stuck into Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
cutting edge
Ans : (b) For making the job in proper shape measuring
(d) All above
tool is use. After that marking is done and at the last
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 cutting is done.
Ans : (c) Flat Chisel– Measuring tool– Steel rule, protractor, shrinks rule,
• It is used to remove metal from large flat surfaces & measuring tape etc.
chip off excess metal of welded joints and castings.
• Some convexity is provided in cutting edge. 401. Crater wear will occur in following part of
• For saving material from getting stuck into cutting single point cutting tool :
edge. (a) Flank (b) Side
396. What is accuracy of workshop surface plate? (c) Rake (d) Tip
(a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.001 mm DRDO Fitter.2016
(c) 0.0025 mm (d) 0.025 mm Ans : (c) Crater wear–
BEML 2022 • It occurs in single point cutting tool.
DRDO Fitter.2016 • It occurs mainly on surface of tool at short distance
Ans : (d) Work Shop Surface Plate– from edge of tool.
• This type of surface plat is used in workshop for • It occurs mainly due to diffusion.
general purpose.
• Speed ↑↑ : Crater wear predominates
• Its accuracy is 0.025 mm.
• MRR ↑ : Crater wear ↑.
• Accuracy of inspection surface plate – 0.0025 mm
• It is more common when –
• Accuracy of master surface plate – 0.00025 mm
Work material – ductile
397. General cutting tool is made of which
material? Tool material – Brittle
(a) Tool steel (b) Special steel 402. Cutting tool in electro discharge machining is
(c) H.C. steel (d) High speed steel made of :
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 (a) High speed steel (b) Tool steel
Ans : (c) (c) Carbide tipped tool (d) Graphite
• General cutting tool is made of high carbon steel. DRDO Fitter.2016
• Percentage of carbon in high carbon steel is 0.7 to Ans : (d) Electro discharge machining–
1.5%. • High voltage & low current method.
398. With the help of which of the following tools a • Workpiece – anode
vernier height gauge is used to draw parallel Tool – cathode
lines on a round rod? • Both tool & workpiece are conductive in nature.
(a) Surface plate (b) V block
• Cutting tool is made of graphite.
(c) Both (a) & (b) (d) None of the above
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 403. A face plate is used for holding which of the
following?
Ans : (c) With the help of surface plate & V block tool
a vernier height gauge is used to draw parallel lines on a (a) Round job (b) Finished job
round rod. (c) Irregular job (d) Hollow job
• Surface plate & V block are usually made of cast IOCL 2020
iron. Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
399. Which is indirect measuring tool? Ans : (c) Face Plate–
(a) Chisel (b) Steel rule • It is a circular plate threaded at its centre with plain
(c) Caliper (d) Micrometer & slots which are machined rapidly.
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 • It is used for holding jobs such as thin & irregular
Ans : (c) Calipers– shaped workpiece that can not be held between
• It is a indirect measuring tool. centres & chucks.
• It is used for measuring length, width, thickness and 404. Anvil is used in following function :
diameter etc with help of steel rule. (a) Forging (b) Welding
• It is made of mild steel or high carbon steel. (c) Fitting (d) Machining
• It's measuring edge is hardened & tempered. UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
Ans : (a) Anvil–

• It is metal working tool consisting of a large block 5. Combination Set, Try-square
of metal (usually forged or cast steel) with a
flattened top surface upon which another object is 410. The angle of Vernier bevel protractor edge is
struck. (a) 30º and 45º (b) 30º and 60º
• It is used in forging operation. (c) 15º and 45º (d) 45º and 60º
405. How many flutes are these in Phillips screw
NTPC Fitter 2016
driver
Ans. (d) : Vernier bevel protractor–It is used for
(a) One (b) Two measuring angle of any job.
(c) Three (d) Four • Least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5' (min.).
DRDO Fitter.2016 • Its design consists of a fixed stock and an adjustable
Ans : (d) Phillips Screw Driver– blade.
• It has head with a painted edges in the shape of a • Angle of edge of vernier bevel protractor is 45º & 60º.
cross, which fits neatly into the cross slots of a 411. The principle of universal bevel protractor is
Phillips screw. similar to that
• It is available in five different sizes from 0 to 4. (a) Vernier bevel protractor
• If you don't use right size, you can easily strip a (b) depth micrometer
Phillips screw, making it difficult to remove. (c) dial test indicator
(d) fixed gauge
406. Accuracy of master surface plate :
(a) 0.001 inch (b) 0.0001 inch
Ans. (a) : The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
(c) 0.00001 inch (d) 0.000001 inch instrument meant for measuring angles to an accuracy
(IOF Fitter 2013) of 5 minutes.
Ans : (c) Accuracy of master surface plate is 0.00001 The least count of vernier bevel protractor is 1/12º or 5
inch. Accuracy of this type of surface plate is much minutes. To get the least count of 5 minute in a vernier
more then inspection surface plate. bevel protractor the 23 degree main scale is divide into
12 equals parts on vernier scale.
407. Which of the following measuring instrument
412. Which of the following is not the part of
is non contact type?
combination set?
(a) Micrometer (b) Pressure gauge (a) center head (b) square head
(c) Speedometer (d) Pyrometer (c) protractor head (d) stock
DRDO Fitter.2016 BHEL 2020
Ans : (d) Pyrometer– It is a non contact type device. HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
It is used for measuring high temperature. Ans. (d) : Stock is not part of a combination set.
408. Which spanner is used for different types of The combination set consist of scale, squaring head,
nut & bolt? protractor and centre head. It consist of a heavy scale,
which is grooved all along its length. It is on this groove
(a) Double end spanner (b) Socket spanner
that sliding squaring head is fitted.
(c) Box spanner (d) Screw wrench
413. The following is not a part of combination set:-
DRDO Fitter.2016 (a) Rule (b) Protractor Head
Ans : (a) Double end spanner– It is used for tightening (c) Square Head (d) Divider
& loosening of rotary fasteners such as nut & bolts. ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
409. Shape of flat chisel is measured? Ans. (d) : Combination set is a non-precision
(a) By its weight instrument which can be used to determine flatness,
(b) By its length measuring angles, inspection and layout work etc.
(c) By its diameter • Part combination set
(d) By width of its edges 1. Steel Rule 2. Square head
3. Prolocutor head 4. Center head
DRDO Fitter.2016
414. What is the use of a try square?
Ans : (d) Flat chisel–
(a) To check right angle
• It is made of high carbon steel by forging of it. (b) To check acute angle
• Length of this chisel is 10 to 40 cm and width of its (c) To check obtuse angle
cutting edge is 1.6 to 32 cm. (d) To check straight angle
• Shape of flat chisel is measured by width of its HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
edges. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (a) : Try square is use to check right angle. Ans. (c) : Try square is used to set work piece at right
• A try square can also be used on a surface to check its angles on work holding devices such as vices.
straightness or correspondence to an adjoining surface. • Try square is made of hardened steel.
• It is primary use to measure the accuracy of a 90º right • It is also called engineer's square.
angle. • It has two main pars – (1) Blade (2) Stock
• Blade and stock are set at 90o angle.
419. In combination set, the square head has one
measuring face at 90° and another at (from the
rule)….
(a) 15° (b) 30°
°
415. Which is NOT the use of a try square? (c) 45 (d) 60°
(a) Measuring right angle RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
(b) Checking squareness Ans. (c) : In combination set, the square head has one
(c) Marking straight lines at 90º against an edge measuring face at 90° and another at (from the rule) 45o.
(d) Setting workpiece at 90º • Square head of combination set is used to set
BDL Technician 2022 workpiece on the machines and measure the depth
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 of slots.
Ans. (a) : Uses of try square– • It is also used to mark and check 90° and 45o.
• Check the squareness of machine job or field • Square head is made of cast steel.
surfaces. 420. A combination set is:
• Check flatness of machined surfaces. (a) High precision measuring instrument
• Mark lines at 90o to the edge of workpiece. (b) Semi precision measuring instrument
• Set workpiec at 90o on work holding devices such (c) Non precision measuring instrument
as vices. (d) None of these
416. Try square is meant to ….. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
(a) check the round surface Ans. (c) : Combination set is a non-precision measuring
(b) check the groove surface instrument.
(c) check the flat surface • The combination set can be used for different types
(d) check the irregular surface of works such as layout work, measurement and
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 checking angles.
Ans. (c) : Try square is a checking instrument, which is • The size of combination set is given by the length of
used to check squareness and flatness of surface. steel rule.
• The accuracy of a measurement by a try square is • The combination set has three parts–
about 0.002 mm per 10 mm length. 1. Protractor head
• The try square has a blade with parallel surfaces. 2. Square head
• The blade is fixed to the stock at right angle (90o) 3. Centre head with a steel rule.
417. The principle use of try square is ............. 421. Combination set is used in:
(a) Checking flatness (a) Foundry shop (b) Welding shop
(b) Checking squareness (c) Forging shop (d) Fitting shop
(c) Checking length RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
(d) Checking diameter Ans. (d) : Combination set is used fitting shop.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 • The main parts of combination set–
Ans. (b) : The principle use of try square is checking
Parts of Use
squareness.
combination set
• Try squares are specified according to the length of
blade i.e. 100 mm, 150 mm, 200 mm etc. Protractor head Used for marking and measuring
angles within an accuracy of 1o.
• Simple try square is used by carpenter.
Centre head Used to locate the centre of
418. Try square is used to set work pieces at right
cylindrical jobs.
angles on..........
(a) machines Square head Used to mark and check 90o & 45o
(b) surfaces angles.
(c) work holding devices According to the requirement of job anyone head is
(d) stock used to fit with a steel rule that has a groove at back
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 side surface.

422. The two legs of the try square are known as: Ans. (a) : To get least count of 5' in a vernier bevel
(a) Stock and blade protractor, the 23o main scale division are divided into
(b) Big blade and small blade 12 equal parts on vernier scale.
(c) Stock I and Stock II Least count = 2 × main scale division – 1 × vernier
(d) None of these scale division
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 23
= 2 ×1 −
Ans. (a) : The two legs of the try square are known as 12
stock and blade. 1o
=
• Blade and stock are set at 90o angles. 12
• The thinner part of the try square is called the blade 1
and the thicker part is called the stock. = × 60 = 5'
12
• The surface of the blade is marked with mm, cm or 426. The value of each vernier scale division of
inch. vernier bevel protractor is:
423. Which part of vernier height gauge attached to (a) 1° (b) 5'
the base is similar to the main scale of vernier (c) 55' (d) 2°
caliper? NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(a) Beam (b) Scriber RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
(c) Vernier slide (d) Locking screws Ans. (c) : The value of each vernier scale division of
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 23o
Ans. (a) : The main parts of vernier height gauge– vernier bevel protractor is or 1o55'.
12
1. Base– This is the datum with which measurements • The value of each main scale division of vernier
and setting are made. bevel protractor is 1o.
2. Beam– This is similar to the main scale of a vernier • Stock is one of the contacting surfaces during the
caliper and attached to the base. measurement of an angle.
3. Vernier slide scriber– This unit slides are fixed on • Vernier scale is tightened by two screw on a swivel
the beam and are carried by the vernier plate, locking plate.
screws, fine setting device and scriber.
427. Work is usually required to be held in a
424. Which method gives accurate results when vertical position for layout. For this purpose, it
effective diameter is measured without is clamped to
considering the thread angle? (a) Surface plate (b) A machine bed
(a) Two wire method (c) An angle plate (d) A V-block
(b) Three wire method RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
(c) Best wire size Ans. (c) : Work is usually required to be held in a
(d) All of these vertical position for layout. For this purpose, it is
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 clamped to an angle plate.
Ans. (b) : Three wire method gives accurate results • An angle plate is made of cast iron or steel and
when effective diameter (pitch diameter) is measured machined accurately to the angle of 90o.
without considering the thread angle. 428. Combination set can be used to–
• In three wire method, the size of the wires used (a) Check angular surface
depends on the pitch of the thread to be measured. (b) Scribe lines
• For measuring the effective diameter, three wires (c) Draw circle and arcs
are suitably placed between the threads. (d) None of the above
• The measuring wires are fitted in wire-holders RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
which are supplied in pairs. Ans. (a) : Combination set can be used to check angular
425. To get least count of 5' in a vernier bevel surface.
protractor, the 23° main scale divisions are • The combination set can be used for different types
divided into: of works such as layout work, measurement and
(a) 12 equal parts on vernier scale checking angles.
(b) 22 equal parts on vernier scale • The spirit level in combination set is attached to
(c) 24 equal parts on vernier scale setting jobs in a horizontal plane.
(d) 25 equal parts on vernier scale • The size of combination set is given by the length of
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 steel rule.

429. Which head is used and set to any required Ans. (b) : Try square–
angle in the combination set? • It is used to–
♦ Checking angle of 90o
♦ Draw horizontal & vertical lines.
♦ Checking squareness of the surface.
• It can not draw inclined lines.
433. Combination set is an instrument which has
(a) Centre head (b) Bevel protractor
(c) Square head (d) All the above
Ans. (d) : Combination set– It can be used for
different types of work, like layout work, measurement
(a) Square head (b) Protractor head and checking of angles.
(c) Centre head (d) Rule • It has a protractor head, square head, centre head &
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 a rule.
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 434. Gauge used to measure the thickness of a wire
Ans. (b) : Protractor head is used and set to any or a sheet
required angle in the combination set. (a) Profile gauge (b) Radius gauge
• The protractor head can be rotated and set to any (c) Wire gauge (d) Slip gauge
required angle. MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
• The protractor head is used for marking and ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
measuring angles within an accuracy of 1o. Ans. (c) : Wire gauge–
• Centre head of combination set is V-shaped and • A wire gauge is a device used to measure the
made of cast iron. diameter of a wire.
• Internal angle of centre head is of 90 with slot on
o • This denotes the amount of electric current that can
its hypotenuse be safely carried, resistance & weight of the wire.
430. Try square is used to measure : 435. Which of the following is not part of a
(a) acute angle (b) right angle combination set
(c) obtuse angle (d) none of these (a) Stock (b) Protractor head
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 (c) Square head (d) Centre head
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
Ans. (b) : Try square– UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
• It is used for checking angle of 90o and for drawing Ans. (a) : Combination set–
horizontal & vertical lines. • It can be used for different type of work like layout
• It can not draw inclined lines. work, measurement & checking of angle.
• It is made of hard quality wood such as teak or • It has a protractor head, square head, centre head
mahogany etc. and a rule.
• It consist mainly two parts – (a) stock (b) blade. • Stock is not a part of combination set.
• Stock & blade are joined at right angle. 436. Which of the following is not provided on
431. A precision instrument used for checking combination set?
squareness of machined or filed surfaces : (a) Centre head (b) Protractor head
(a) Micrometer (b) Vernier caliper (c) Vernier scale (d) Spirit scale
(c) Try square (d) Steel rule ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 Ans. (c) : • Vernier scale is not provided on
Ans. (c) : Try square– combination set.
• It is used for checking squareness of machined or Combination set–
filed surface. • It can be used for different type of work like layout
• It consist mainly two parts – (a) stock (b) blade. work, measurement of angle.
• Stock & blade are joined at right angle. • Main parts of it are– Protractor head, square head,
432. Try-square is used to measure centre head & a rule.
(a) Angle between surfaces 437. Accuracy of measurement by a try-square is
(b) Check squarness of the surfaces about ...................... mm per 10 mm length.
(c) Straightness of surfaces (a) 0.002 (b) 0.050
(d) None of the above (c) 0.020 (d) 0.010
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
Ans. (a) : Try square– Ans. (c) : Try square–

• It is used to– • It is used for –
♦ Checking angle of 90o (i) Checking flatness & squareness of surface
♦ Checking squareness of job. (ii) Checking angle of 90o
♦ For horizontal & vertical lines. • It consist mainly two parts – (a) stock (b) blade.
• It consist mainly two parts – (a) stock (b) blade. • Stock & blade are held at right angle to each other.
• Stock & blade are held at right angle to each other.
443. There are 3 heads in a combination set. Match
• Accuracy of measurement by a try square is about them with their application–
0.002 mm per 10 mm length.
List-I List-II
438. ........... is not a part of combination set. A. Square head 1. To check and mark
(a) Centre head (b) Slip gauge
angle of 45 degree and
(c) Protractor head (d) Square head
90 degree
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
B. Protector head 2. To mark center of
Ans : (b) Combination set– cylindrical job
• It can be used for different type of work like layout
C. Center head 3. To measure up to 1
work, measurement of angle.
degree accurately
• Main part s of combination set are–
Protractor head, square head, centre head & a rule. (a) A–1, B–3, C–2 (b) A–3, B–1, C–2
(c) A–2, B–3, C–1 (d) A–3, B–2, C–1
439. Which one of the following is not part of
combination set
(a) Protractor head (b) tail head
(c) centre head (d) square head Ans. : (a)
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 Square head To check and mark angle of 45
Ans : (b) Main parts of combination set– degree and 90 degree
(i) Protractor head Protractor head To measure up to 1 degree
(ii) Square head accurately
(iii) Centre head & rule Centre head To mark center of cylindrical job
Tail head is not a part of combination set. 444. Try square is used for testing squareness of-
440. A combination set doesn't contain which of the (a) One surface at a time
below part (b) Two surface at a time
(a) Square head (b) Rule (c) Three surface at a time
(c) Protractor head (d) Dial gauge
(d) Any degree of angle of two surfaces
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. (d) : Combination set– Ans. : (a) Try square–
• It can be used for different type of work like layout • It is used for –
work, measurement of angle etc. (i) Checking flatness & squareness of surface
• Main parts of a combination set– protractor head, (ii) Checking angle of 90o
square head, centre head & a rule. • It can test squareness of one surface at a time.
• Dial gauge is not a part of combination set. • It consist mainly two parts – (a) stock (b) blade.
441. Which of the following is not a part of the • Stock & blade are held at right angle to each other.
combination set?
445. What is use of protractor head in combination
(a) Protractor head (b) Steel rule
(c) Square head (d) Socket spanners set?
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (a) Measuring depth
Ans. (d) : Parts of a combination set– (b) Measuring length
(i) Square head (c) Measuring angle
(ii) Protractor head (d) Measuring diameter
(iii) Centre head & rule. NLC Technician 24-09.2022
• Socket spanner is not part of combination set. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
442. Identify the instrument used for checking Ans : (c) Combination set–
flatness and squareness of a surface? • It can be used for different type of work like layout
(a) Go Gauge work, measurement of angle.
(b) Center punch
• Main parts of combination set are protractor head,
(c) Try square
(d) Vernier height gauge square head, centre head & a rule.
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II • Protractor head– It is used to measure angle up to 1o
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 accurately.

446. Measurement of accuracy of micrometer, Slip gauge– Slip gauges or gauge blocks are used as
caliper & dial indicator is done by following :
standards for precision length measurement.
(a) Feeler gauge (b) Slip gauge • Slip gauge or gauges blocks are made of a special
(c) Ring gauge (d) Flung gauge steel alloy.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014450. Go gauges follows _____ principle.
Ans : (b) Slip gauge– It is made of high carbon steel & (a) Tesla's principle (b) Rucking principle
have a rectangular shape. They are particularly accurate (c) Swifts principle (d) Taylors principle
in measuring tolerances between 0.001 to 0.005 mm. It UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
can check the accuracy of micrometer caliper and dial
indicator. Ans. (d) : GO gauge follows Taylors principle.
447. State the use of Combination set: • Taylors principle states that the GO gauge should be
(a) Layout work (b) Measurements designed to cover the maximum metal condition
(c) Checking angles (d) All of the above (MMC) in as many dimension as possible in the
same limit gauge.
• Whereas NO GO gauge are used to cover the
Ans : (d) Combination set–
minimum of metal condition in one dimensionally.
work, measurement of angle. 451. _____ gauges are used as a quick means to
• Main parts of combination set are protractor head, check size within certain limits by comparing it
square head, centre head & a rule with opening gauge.
(a) Wine gauge (b) Wire gauge
(c) Snap gauge (d) Roll gauge
Ans. (c) : Snap gauges are used as a quick means to
check size within certain limits by comparing it with
opening of gauge.
• Snag gauges are generally C- shaped and adjustable
448. Head of combination set by which any angle is to the maximum and minimum limits of the part
checked is called as .... being checked.
(a) Square head (b) Protractor head 452. Identify the gauge in given figure
(c) Centre head (d) Rule
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (b) Combination set–
(a) Ring gauge
(b) Plug gauge
work, measurement & checking of angle.
(c) Radius gauge
• It consists protractor head, square head, centre head
(d) Planner gauge
a rule.
• Protractor head is used for measuring angle.
Ans. (c) : The figure shown above is called radius
gauge.
6. Different Types of Gauge Radius gauge– The radius gauge resembles a feeler
gauge blades vary in thickness whereas, the radius
449. _____ are used to measure external tapers. gauge blade tips are designed to measure external and
(a) Sine bar & slip gauges internal radius on each blade.
(b) Spirit level & slip gauges • If the blade used for measuring external radius are
(c) Cosine bar & slip gauges called 'Radius gauges' whereas, the blade used for
(d) Dumpy level & slip gauges internal radius is called 'fillet gauge'.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 • The radius gauge set consists of both fillet and
Ans. (a) : Sine bar and slip gauge are used to measure radius gauge.
external tapers. 453. Slip gauge generally is made of –
Sine bar– The principle of the sine bare is based on the (a) Titanium dioxide
trigonometric function. (b) Zirconium oxide
• The size of a sin bar is specified by its length. (c) Manganese oxide
• The length of the sin bar is the distance between the (d) Cast iron
centres of the rollers. UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022

Ans. (b) : Slip gauge– • With the help of micrometer, the telescopic rods
• It is also known as Johson gauge or gauge block. measure the distance of the bore.
• Slip gauge is used as standard for precision length • In one set there are 5 telescopic gauges, available
measurement. which ranges 12.7 mm - 152.7 mm.
• It is a solid rectangular block made in sets of high
quality tool steel or zirconium oxide with low
thermal expansion.
• The two opposite measuring faces of each block are
lapped.
454. Fillet gauge are also known as_____gauge.
(a) Ring (b) Plug 457. Which of the following is an example of
(c) Length (d) Radius indirect angle measuring tool
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (a) Bevel Protractor (b) Bevel gauge
Ans. (d) : Fillet gauge are also known as radius gauges. (c) Combination set (d) Marking table
• It is used to measure the radius of an object. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
455. How height should one arc be raised above NCL Fitter 27.12.2020
another arc to measure angle of an angle 10o Ans. (b) : Bevel gauge is an example of indirect angle
using a 100 mm sine bar? measuring tool.
100 mm meeFve yeej keâe GheÙeesie keâjkesâ 10º kesâ keâesCe (1) Direct measuring tool - Determine the actual
keâer peebÛe keâjves kesâ efueS Skeâ Ûeehe keâes otmejs Ûeehe kesâ dimension and size of work piece.
Thej efkeâlevee TBÛee nesvee ÛeeefnS? Ex.- Steel rule, vernier caliper, micrometer, Bevel
protector, combination set, try square etc.
(a) 17.37 mm (b) 18.37 mm
(2) Indirect measuring tool -Transfer the measurement
(c) 14.37 mm (d) 15.37 mm
from the workpiece to the direct measuring instrument,
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 then a comparison is made.
Ans. (a) : Ex. - Divider, calipers (inside and outside), surface
gauge, plug gauge, Bevel gauge etc.
458. For checking the diameter of holes, which
gauge can be used
(a) Ring Gauge (b) Wire gauge
(c) Feeler gauge (d) Plug gauge
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Sin θ = 10o Ans. (d) : For checking the diameter of holes plug
L = 100 mm {sin 10o = 0.173648} gauge is used The standard plug gauge is used in
H general engineering workshop, tool rooms etc. The limit
Angle measured by sin bar = sin θ = plug gauge is used where large quantities are to be
L
produced. The single ended limit plug gauge has
H separate 'GO' and NO GO members. The progressive
0.173648 =
100 limit plug gauge has 'GO' and 'No GO' members on the
H = 17.3648 ≃ 17.37mm same side of the handle.
459. Dial bore gauge is also known as
456. What is the minimum dimension which can be
measured with telescopic gauge (a) Plug gauge (b) Ring gauge
(a) 12.7 mm (b) 10 mm (c) Snap gauge (d) Hole gauge
(c) 8 mm (d) 150 mm HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans. (d) : Dial bore gauge is also known as hole gauge.
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 • It is used for measuring inner diameter of bores.
Ans. (a) : 12.7 mm is the minimum dimension which • It is mostly used in engine cylinder to measure bore or
can be measured with telescopic gauge. hole diameter.
Telescopic Gauge - 460. Frame of thread snap gauge is
• It is an indirect measuring gauge and used to measure (a) "C" Shape (b) V-Shape
only hole, slot, or bore. (c) Circular (d) Square
• The shape of this gauge is as 'T' with knurling on the NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
back side of the handle. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
Ans. (a) : Thread snap gauge is used for checking • V-block used to hold round metal rods or pipes for
external threaded parts. It is available in knife edge or performing drilling or milling operation.
roller style. Shape of its frame is "C" shape. • Ring gauge is used for checking the external diameter
461. Filler gauge is used to check of a cylindrical object.
(a) Radius of job 466. The tooth profile of gears in a dial gauge is
(b) Surface of roughness described by ______ curve
(c) Difference between two holes (a) Cycloid (b) Trochoid
(d) Difference between two parts (c) Epicycloid (d) Hypocycloid
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
Ans. (d) : Feeler gauge is a tool used to measure gap Ans. (a) : The tooth profile of gears in a dial gauge is
widths. described by cycloid curve.
• It is used in engineering to measure the clearance The outline of teeth of a gear is called the profile.
between two parts. The following of two profiles of teeth are commonly
• It consists of a number of small lengths of steel of used–
different thickness with measurements marked on each A. Involute profile teeth, B. Cycloid profile teeth
piece. Cycloid–The cycloid is the curve generated by a fixed
462. What is another name of wire and sheet gauge? point on the circumference of a circle which rolls
(a) S.W.G. (b) Ring gauge without slipping along a fixed straight line.
(c) Plug gauge (d) Screw pitch gauge 467. A NO-GO plug gauge is used to check which of
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 the following?
(a) Lower limit of hole (b) Upper limit of hole
Ans. (a) : Wire & sheet gauge–It is also known as
standard wire gauge. It is used to measure the thickness (c) Tolerance (d) Deviation
& diameter of wire & sheet. NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
463. Hardness of slip gauges should be Ans. (b) : They are made with cylindrical GO end on
(a) more than 63 HRC (b) less than 60 HRC one side and NO GO end on the other side for checking
the inside diameter by plug gauge.
(c) 55 HRC (d) 31 HRC
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 • GO end is used to check lower limit while NO GO
end is used to check upper limit of the hole.
Ans. (a) : Hardness of slip gauges should be more than
63 HRC. 468. 'GO and 'NO GO' are provided on the same
end in a ______
Slip gauges or gauge blocks are used as standard for
precision length measurement. (a) Snap gauge
(b) Double-ended plug gauge
464. The measuring styles of mechanical surface
indicator is made of (c) Depth gauge
(a) tool steel (b) carbide (d) Progressive gauge
(c) diamond (d) cast alloy HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
Ans. (c) : The measuring styles of mechanical surface Ans. (d) : In the case of plain plug gauge a form of
indicator is made of diamond. convenient combined Go and No Go gauge is the
progressive gauge, which is a single ended gauge with
• Diamond, a mineral composed of pure carbon, it is
one gauging member having two diameter to the Go and
hardest naturally occurring substance.
No Go limit respectively.
465. Which of the following instruments is used to
• Plug gauge is used to check the hole.
check the clearance between two mating
• Go plug gauge – Lower limit hole
surface?
(a) V-block (b) Plug gauge • No Go plug gauge – Upper limit hole
(c) Feeler gauge (d) Ring gauge 469. The range of a screw pitch gauge is about ____.
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022 (a) 25 mm to 30 mm (b) 0.35 mm to 5.0 mm
Ans. (c) : Feeler gauge is used to check clearance (c) 0.35 mm to 0.5 mm (d) 3.5 mm to 5.0 mm
between two mating surface. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
• A feeler gauge is tool used to measure gap width. Ans. (b) : The range of a screw pitch gauge is 0.35 mm
• Plug gauge used to check inside diameter limit on to 5.0 mm. Screw pitch gauge is used to measure the
hole. pitch of a screw thread.

470. Determine the height of slip gauge for an angle 474. Feeler gauge is used for measuring :
of 30º using sine bar of 200 mm long. (a) Depth (b) Diameter
(a) 400 mm (b) 400 3 (c) Gap (d) Length
(c) 400 / 3 (d) 100 mm
Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022
Ans. (c) : A Feeler gauge is a tool used to measure gap
Ans. (d) : Given, widths, feeler gauges are mostly used in engineering to
θ = 30º measure the clearance between two parts.
L = 200 mm 475. SWG stands for sheet metal work :
Height of slip gauge (a) Standard welding groove
H = L × sinθ (b) Standard width groove
= 200 × sinθ (c) Standard wire gauge
H = 100 mm (d) All of these
471. Calculate the height of the slip gauge pack Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022
required to raise a 100 mm sine bar to an angle Ans. (c) : SWG stands for standard wire gauge.
of 30 deg. Standard wire gauge (SWG), also known as the British
(a) 50 mm (b) 45 mm Standard Gauge. SWG is used to denote the thickness of
(c) 25 mm (d) 30 mm sheet metal as well as wire.
Ans. (a) : Given,
θ = 30º
L = 100 mm
The height of slip gauge is -
H = L sin θ
H = 100 × sin 30
1
H = 100 ×
2
H = 50 mm
472. In a plug gauge the Go side will have a In SWG, increase of value then decrease of thickness of
diameter equal to the sheet or wire.
(a) Maximum size of the component 476. Which of the following is NOT a shaft
(b) Minimum size of the component alignment method?
(c) Basic size of the component (a) Laser beam method
(d) Actual size of the component (b) Piano-wire method
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 (c) Optical telescope method
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 (d) Wilhelmy plate method
Ans. (b) : In a plug gauge the Go side will have equal to Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14-12-2021
minimum size of a component. Ans. (d) : Wilhemly plate method is not a shaft
• A plug gauge is a cylindrical type of gauge used to alignment method.
check the accuracy of holes. Shaft alignment methods–
• Go gauge is always made for the maximum material • Laser beam method
limit of the component. • Piano-wire method
• No Go gauge is always made for the minimum • Optical telescope method
material limit of the component. 477. 'Run-out' is measured to identify ........... during
473. Radius gauges are used to check ______. alignment of a pump and motor
(a) Inner and outer radii (b) Only Inner radius (a) Parallel misalignment
(c) Only outer radius (d) Irregular curves (b) Angular misalignment
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 (c) Axial misalignment
Ans. (a) : Radius gauge is also known as fillet gauge. (d) Combined misalignment
• It is used to check both inner & outer radius of an Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14-12-2021
object. Ans. (a) : 'Run-out' is measure to identify by parallel
• These are made of hardened sheet metal. misalignment during alignment of a pump and motor.
478. Feeler gauges are used for checking ........... 482. Which of the following instruments would be
(a) size of thread best suited for flatness measurement?
(b) clearance (a) Dial indicators (b) Micrometers
(c) depth (c) Bevel gauge (d) Vernier height gauge
(d) diameter less than 1 mm ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
BEML 2022 Ans. (a) : Flatness- It defined as a minimum distance
Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14-12-2021 between two planes within which all the points lies on a
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 surface. A surface along which all the points lies along
Ans. (b) : A feeler gauge is a tool used to measure gap single plane is called as perfectly flatness surface
widths.
• Feeler gauges are mostly used in engineering to flatness is denoted by
measure the clearance between two parts. Flatness can be measured by following methods and
They consist of a number of small lengths of steel of tools.
different thicknesses with measurements marked on 1. By Dial indicator
each piece.
2. Spirit level method
3. Auto collimator
4. Beam comparator
5. Interference method
6. Laser beam
483. In Mechanical comparators, the magnification
range is
(a) Between 1-10
479. The accuracy of micrometers, calipers, dial (b) Between 10-100
indicators can be checked by a
(c) Between 100-1000
(a) Feeler gauge (b) Plug gauge
(d) Between 1000-10000
(c) Ring gauge (d) Slip gauge
Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14-12-2021 ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
Ans. (d) : The accuracy of micrometers, calipers, dial Ans. (c) : In mechanical comparators, the magnification
indicators can be checked by a slip gauge. range is between 100-1000; these comparators are
• A feeler gauge is used to check thickness of a relatively cheap and are used mainly for comparative
clearance. measurement of an external surface.
• A feeler gauge is a tool used to measure gap width. 484. A block level can be used for-
• Feeler gauges are mostly used in engineering to (a) checking vertical alignment only
measure the clearance between two parts. (b) checking horizontal alignment only
480. Which comparator is used in mass production? (c) checking angular alignment only
(a) Optical (b) Pneumatic (d) checking vertical and horizontal alignment
(c) Electronics (d) Mechanical IOCL 2020
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
Ans. (b) : Pneumatic comparator is used in mass Ans. (d) : A block level can be used for checking
production. vertical and horizontal alignment.
• A pneumatic comparator is a precision devices • Level, a device for establishing a horizontal plane.
operated using a pneumatic system or compressed air.
• It consists of a small glass tube containing a liquid
• They are cheap, simple to operate free from and an air bubble, the tube is sealed and fixed
mechanical wear.
horizontally in a block.
• They are easy to clean, low maintenance cost.
• For horizontal alignment, the spirit level tools are
481. Size of Go plug gauge is _____ used.
(a) Lower limit of shaft (b) Upper limit of shaft
(c) Upper limit of hole (d) Lower limit of hole
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
Ans. (d) : Plug gauge is used to check holes or internal
dimension.
GO plug gauge checks lower limit of hole
NO GO plug gauge checks upper limit of hole.
485. Small hole gauge is used to check dimensions Ans. (c) : Strips of feeler gauge are 75 to 300 mm long.
from ___ • This gauge is 300 mm long and is used to check
(a) 6.4 to 6.8 mm (b) 7.8 to 8.8 mm flatness and gap between the two mating parts.
(c) 9 to 10 mm (d) 10 to 11 mm • The gauge is available in various thickness.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 • Steel feeler gauge sets are used to measure gap
Ans. (c) : Small hole gauge is used to check dimensions widths by inserting the gauge into a gap.
from 9 to 10 mm. 490. Which of the following gauges is used for
• A small hole gauge is a precision measurement tool checking cylinders, which are not kept in
that is ideal for measuring small holes, slots and vertical or horizontal position
recesses in all kind of work. (a) Plug gauge (b) Ring gauge
• Small hole gauge is also called transfer gauge. (c) Snap gauge (d) Pilot gauge
486. To cut acme thread ____ is used. RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
(a) Centre gauge (b) Plug gauge Ans. (d) : Pilot gauge is used for checking cylinders
(c) Ring gauge (d) Screw gauge and does not kept in vertical or horizontal position.
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 • These readings allow pilots to gauge airspeed and
attitude and have various applications in other
Ans. (a) : To cut acme thread centre gauge is used.
equipment.
• Centre gauge are commonly used for hand-grinding
• The tubes are usually beneath the cockpit on the
threading tool bits on a bench grinder and are also
front fuselage.
used with tool and cutter grinders.
491. ACMM is a –
• ACME thread is used for job screws, lead screws,
(a) Non-contact measuring device
CNC systems and many other application.
(b) Surface condition measuring device
• It is also used in industrial application where heavy
(c) Coordinate measuring device
torque is required and power transmission such as
(d) Multiple gauging device
lathes milling machines and presses.
487. According to I.S.I metric screw pitch gauge can
Ans. (c) : ACMM is a co-ordinate measuring device.
measure upto____ pitch
(a) 0.4 to 7 mm (b) 0.5 to 8 mm • It is a piece of equipment that measures the
geometry of physical objects.
(c) 0.6 to 9 mm (d) 0.25 to 6 mm
• CMM using a probing system to detect discreet
points on the surface of objects.
Ans. (b) : According to I.S.I. metric screw pitch gauge • There are four main types of co-ordinate measuring
measure up-to 0.5 to 8 mm. machine bridge, cantilever, gantry and horizontal
• It is used to measure pitch of thread and also used to arm.
compare the profile of threads. 492. Wear resistant gauges are made up of –
• Screw pitch gauge is used to reference tool is (a) Hardened alloy steel
determining the pitch of thread that is on a screw or (b) Tungsten carbide
in a tapped hole. (c) Chromium carbide
488. ______Strips are there in metric screw pitch (d) Chromium plated steel
gauge RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(a) 24 (b) 48 Ans. (b) : Wear resistant gauges are made of tungsten
(c) 52 (d) 58 carbide.
NTPC Fitter 2016 • Wear-resistant materials minimize friction between
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 mating surface, allowing parts to retain their form
Ans. (a) : 24 strips are there in metric screw pitch and integrity for longer in applications involving
gauge. contact between load-bearing surfaces.
• Screw pitch gauge is also known as thread gauge. 493. The most precise and close tolerance gauges
• It is used to measure thread pitch or lead, number of are classified as –
threads per inch (TPI) and also the thread angle of a (a) Z (b) Y
screw. (c) XX (d) X
489. Strip of feeler gauge are ______ long RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
(a) 20-100 mm (b) 100-350 mm Ans. (c) : The most precise and close tolerance gauge
(c) 75-300 mm (d) 300-0 mm are classified as XX.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 Class ZZ pin gauge – Allowed deviation (0.0002)

Class Z pin gauge – Allowed deviation (0.0001) • In this, the size of hole is taken by pushing two
Class X pin gauge – Allowed deviation (0.00004) leaves out with a screw through a wedge.
Class XX pin gauge – Allowed deviation (0.00002) • When these leaves get stuck in the hole, it is taken
494. What is the angle of drill point gauge ? out and measured with the help of a micrometer.
(a) 59° (b) 118° 498. What is the shape of a small hole gauge ?
(c) 112° (d) 73° (a) Tubular (b) Circular
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (c) Conical (d) Cubical
Ans. (a) : An angle of drill point gauge is 59o. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
Drill point gauge– It is used to check the angle for Ans. (a) : The shape of a small hole gauge is tubular.
drills and to measure the length of cutting edges. It is • With the help of this gauge we can measure holes of
often used when the drill has been re-sharped. diameter from 3.2 mm to 12.7 mm.
• In this, the size of hole is taken by pushing two
leaves out with a screw through a wedge.
• When these leaves get stuck in the hole, it is taken
out and measured with the help of a micrometer.
495. The shape of the snap gauge is –
(a) U (b) C
(c) P (d) I
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 Small hole gauge
Ans. (b) : The shape of snap gauge is C. 499. In how many sets the small hole gauges are
available ?
Snap gauge– Both the lower and upper limit sizes of a
job can be checked by snap gauge. Through this, the (a) 21 (b) 18
thickness, width, length or diameter etc. of the outer (c) 12 (d) 7
size of a job can be checked. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
• It has the size of 'GO' on one side and 'NO GO' on RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
the other side. Ans. (d) :
• Hole gauge are available in sets of 4 number to
measure holes in diameter from 3 mm to 13 mm.
• The following table shows the sets of hole gauges
and their ranges.
496. The shape of adjustable caliper gauge is – Set Number Range (in mm)
(a) U (b) T Number-1 3 to 5
(c) I (d) C Number-2 5 to 7.5
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 Number-3 7.5 to 10
Ans. (d) : The shape of adjustable caliper gauge is C. Number-4 10 to 13
Adjustable caliper gauge– The working method of this 500. The shape of frame of thread snap gauge is –
gauge is same as the snap gauge, but its design is some (a) Circular (b) Square
what different. (c) 'Y' type (d) 'C' type
• In this, both the GO and NO GO parts are made on BHEL 2020
the same side back and forth.
• There is GO size in the front part of the gauge and
Ans. (d) : The shape of frame of thread snap gauge is
NO GO size in the back part.
'C-Type'.
• By checking it once, it is known as wether the job is
• Thread snap gauges are also called a thread calipers.
accepted or rejected.
• It is only used for checking external threaded parts.
497. What is the value below which the small hole
gauge is used for measurement ? • Thread snap gauge consists of two pairs of anvil for
'GO' and 'NO GO' size.
(a) 25.8 mm (b) 21.7 mm
(c) 18.7 mm (d) 12.7 mm • The shape of adjustable caliper gauge is C.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 501. _______ is measured using a sine bar.
Ans. (d) : Small hole gauge– With the help of this (a) Diameter of hole (b) Pitch of the thread
gauge we can measure holes of diameter from 3.2 mm (c) Angle (d) Taper
to 12.7 mm. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006

Ans. (c) : Angle is measured using a sine bar. Ans. (d) : Main advantage of using a gauge is–
• Sine bar works on the principle of trigonometry. 1. In the inspection room, jobs can be tested in less
• In a right triangle, the sine of an angle is the ratio of time and in larger quantities.
its perpendicular and hypotenuse. 2. Increase in production.
Perpendicular 3. The job can be tested and corrected in less time on
sin θ = the machine.
Hypotenuse
4. Cast per job come down due to higher production
• The length of the perpendicular is given by the
using gauge.
height of the slip gauge, while the length of the
hypotenuse is given by the size of the sine bar. 5. Gauges are easy to maintain.
6. Produced parts are interchangeable.
Height of slip gauge
Therefore, sin θ = 505. Which of the following factors cannot be
Length of sine bar
investigated through screw pitch gauge ?
502. What is the formula to calculate sine of an (a) Pitch (b) Lead
angle ? (c) Profile (d) Depth
Perpendicular
(a) Sinθ = RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
Base Ans. (b) : Screw pitch gauge is used to measure pitch,
Hypotenuse profile and depth.
(b) Sinθ =
Base • It is used to check the pitch of external and internal
Perpendicular threads.
(c) Sinθ =
Hypotenuse • It is also known as thread gauge.
Hypotenuse 506. The procedure of joining the slip gauges
(d) Sinθ =
Perpendicular together is called –
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (a) Packing (b) Wringing
Ans. (c) : In a right triangle, the sine of an angle is the (c) Heat treatment (d) Reaming
ratio of its perpendicular and hypotenuse. RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
Perpendicular Ans. (b) : The procedure of joining the slip gauge
sin θ = together is called wringing.
Hypotenuse
• To get the correct size by connecting the slip gauge
503. The GO side of plug gauge is equal to which of together, is it necessary to use the wringing process,
the following – otherwise the air-gap between the gauging surface
(a) Actual size of job will have the size of the gauge becomes more.
(b) Basic size of job
507. What are the common types of ring gauges ?
(c) Minimum size of job
(a) Plane cylindrical (b) Taper
(d) Maximum size of job
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 (c) Thread (d) All of the above
Ans. (c) : The 'GO' side of plug gauge is equal to
minimum size of job. Ans. (d) : Following are the common type of ring
• Plug gauge is made of a hardened steel and is used gauges–
to check the size of a hole. 1. Plane cylindrical gauge
• It can be used to check straight, tapered, threaded, 2. Taper gauges
square or splines holes. 3. Thread gauges
• The double added plug gauge is used to check the 4. Ring gauges
size within limits. 5. Form gauges
• At one end there is a minimum size of limit which is 6. Caliper gauges.
called 'GO' end and at the other end there is a 508. Which one of the following instrument is used
maximum limit of size which is called 'NO GO' end. to measure the fault of three point inside
• Thus ends can detached from the handle and micrometer ?
replaced as per requirements. (a) Ring gauge (b) Angle gauge
504. What is/are the main advantage (s) of using a (c) Plug gauge (d) Slip gauge
gauge?
(a) Time saving
(b) Increase in production Ans. (a) : Ring gauge– Ring gauge is used to check the
(c) Produced parts are interchangeable outside measurement of cylindrical job.
(d) All of the above • It is used to measure the fault of three point inside
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 micrometer.

• There is only one size hole in it, whose size is equal Ans. (c) : Adjustable thread snap gauge is adjusted
to the nominal size of the cylindrical job. according to thread diameter.
• The outer part of the ring is knurled. So that it can • To adjust them, loosen the locking screw and adjust
be held firmly. the anvils with the gauge block set in between them.
• Ring gauge are of the following three types– • It is used to check the conditions and acceptability
1. Plain ring gauge 2. Taper ring gauge of extremely threaded parts rather than smooth
3. Thread ring gauge. finished surfaces.
509. Which one of the following instrument is used 513. To check T.P.I. or pitch, _______ is used.
to measure the angle of the job or its taper with (a) tool gauge (b) centre gauge
accuracy about 5 minute ? (c) ring gauge (d) screw pitch gauge
(a) Micrometer (b) Sine bar RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
(c) Wire gauge (d) Centre gauge Ans. (d) : Screw pitch gauge– It is used to check the
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 pitch profile and depth of thread.
Ans. (b) : Sine bar is used to measure the angle of the • It is used to check the pitch of external and internal
job or its taper with accuracy about 5 minute. threads.
• A sine bar is used either to measure an angle very • It is also known as thread gauge.
accurately or face locate any work to a given angle. • It is used to measure of threads per inch (TPI) and
• Sine bars are made from a high chromium corrosion also the thread angle of screw.
resistant steel, and is hardened, precision ground 514. To check the accuracy of tool, grind on 60o
and stabilized. _____ is used.
• Sine bar is used to measuring angles for milling, (a) tool angle gauge (b) centre gauge
grinding and inspection applications. (c) screw pitch gauge (d) gauge
510. To check external "V" threads, _______gauge RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
is used.
Ans. (b) : To check the accuracy of tool, grind on 60o
(a) plug (b) ring
centre gauge is used.
(c) pitch (d) screw
Centre gauge– This is a gauge made by cutting various
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 angles in a carbon steel sheet. Generally these angles
Ans. (b) : To check external 'V' threads, ring gauge is are of 60o, 55o, 47.5o.
used. • The inner and outer angles of 60o are made in the
• It is used for checking the diameter of shaft and middle of the gauge and the side have angle of 55o
studs. and 47.5o.
• Ring gauges are used for comparative gauge as well 515. Use of centre gauge is :
as for checking, calibrating or setting of gauge of (a) for setting to tool at accurate position and
other standards.
height
• Ring gauges are metrology tools that are used for (b) for checking angle of thread tool
gauging the outer diameters of pins, shafts, splines,
(c) both (a) and (b)
fasteners, dowels, studs.
(d) for checking thread accuracy
511. Thread snap gauge is used to check-
(a) external diameter (b) external threads
Ans. (c) : Centre gauge–
(c) internal threads (d) internal diameter
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 • These gauges are used to check angles while
making tools for cutting threads.
Ans. (b) : Thread snap gauge– Thread snap gauge is
also called a thread calipers. • The same gauge is also used for fitting the tool at
right angles to the job when the tool is made at right
• Thread snap gauge are only used for checking
angles.
external threaded parts.
• Thread snap gauges are available in either a knife
edge style or a roller style.
• The front set of gauge members are a complete GO
gauge.
512. Adjustable thread snap gauge is adjusted
according to ____
(a) thread pitch (b) type of thread
(c) thread diameter (d) thread angle
• Centre gauge is used for setting to tool at accurate Ans. (c) : The permissible deviation for leveling of
position and height. machine is 0.03 or 300 mm.
• It is use for checking thread angle of tool. Permissible deviation– It is the differences in moisture
516. What is the principle of working of a plunger contents, weight, mixtures, ingredients, strengths and
type dial? sizes from that specified, that is considered acceptable.
(a) Conversion of linear speed into radial speed • It is also the distance or movement from the
through slotted link required position.
(b) Conversion of linear speed into radial speed 519. Which one of the following is used for checking
through rack and pinion
run out of the internal taper of machine
(c) Amplification of small change using lenses
spindle?
(d) Amplification using electronic medium
(a) Dial test indicator
BDL Technician 2022
(b) Test mandrel and dial test indicator
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) Precision height gauge
Ans. (b) : Working principle of plunger type dial–
(d) Test mandrel and precision height gauge
• The working principle of the dial gauge is
dependent on the movement of the spindle. RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
• It travels up and down. This movement is then Ans. (b) : The mandrel and dial test indicator is used for
converted to a rotating needle (Pointer) scale checking run out of the internal taper of machine
reading. spindle.
• The dial gauge can measure upto a reading of 0.01 • Both dial and test indicators are mainly comparative
or 0.001 mm. devices, test indicators, excel at consistency
• Its converted the linear speed into radial speed measurements, as opposed to comparative ones.
through rack and pinion. • They are most often used to explore relatively broad
part surfaces in either one or two dimensions.
For example– Measuring variations in height, flatness
and roundness.
• They are designed to measure in vertical and
horizontal positions and typically used to measure
clearances, tolerances and variation in tolerances of
machined parts to ensure accuracy.
520. The sensitivity of precision spirit level is.
(a) 0.02 to 0.05/ 100 mm
(b) 0.02 to 0.05/ 200 mm
(c) 0.02 to 0.05/ 500 mm
(d) 0.02 to 0.05/ 1000 mm
517. Universal surface gauge is used – RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
(a) to calculate the dimensions Ans. (d) : The sensitivity of precision spirit level is 0.02
(b) to check right angle to 0.05 or 1000 mm.
(c) for turning of job • A spirit level, bubble level or simply a level, is an
(d) for marking instrument designed to indicate weather a surface is
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 horizontal or vertical.
Ans. (c) : Universal surface gauge– It is most common • The sensitivity of the spirit levels is given as angle
marking tool used for scribing line parallel to a datum of inclination.
surface, setting jobs an machines parallel to a datum
521. Which among the following is NOT the
surface and checking the height and parallelism of jobs,
and sitting jobs concentric to the machine spindle. purpose of a grease?
• Universal surface gauge is used for turning of job. (a) Carry away heat produced in bearing/
• Guide pin of this surface gauge helps to draw (b) Prevent metal-to-metal contact and reduce
parallel lines along datum edge. friction.
518. The permissible deviation for leveling of (c) Prevent entry of foreign material i.e. dust, dirt
machine is. etc. in the bearing.
(a) 0.03/100 mm (b) 0.03/200mm (d) Provide a cushion to a load and shocks.
(c) 0.03/300mm (d) 0.03/400mm NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Ans. (a) : The following purpose of grease is– • It is made up of spring steel hardened and tempered
1. Prevent metal to metal contact and reduce friction. and is used for setting a single point thread cutting
2. Its prevents entry of foreign material i.e. dust, dirt tool.
etc. in the bearing. 525. "Go" and "No" sizes of 25H, plug gauge
3. Its provide a cushion to a load and shocks. should be
4. The main function of the grease is to remain intact (a) 24.958 mm (Go) and 25.023 mm (No Go)
on the surface to provide the lubrication for that (b) 25.023mm (Go) and 24.985 mm (No Go)
surface without leaking. (c) 24.977 mm (Go) and 25.042 mm (No Go)
5. Grease is used to keep vehicles, vessels, machines (d) 25.042 mm (Go) and 24.977 mm (No Go)
and their components lubricated at all times. RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
522. Which one of the following is NOT the Ans. (a)
property of a good lubricant? +0.004
(a) No change in viscosity due to variation in Dimension of 'GO' plug gauge = 24.982−0.000
temperature. +0.00
(b) Reduces friction between machine parts. Dimension of 'NO GO' plug gauge = 25.02−0.004
(c) Takes up the surface pressure between sliding 'GO' and 'NO GO' sizes of 25 H, plug gauge should be
parts. 24.958 mm (GO) and 25.023 mm (NO GO).
(d) Becomes thicker after prolonged use. 526. "Go" and No Go" sizes of 25h snap gauge
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 should be
Ans. (d) : A good lubricant generally possesses the (a) 24.977 mm (Go) and 25.002 mm (No Go)
following characteristics– (b) 25.002 mm (Go) and 24.977 mm (No Go)
1. A high boiling point and low freezing point. (c) 24.998 mm (Go) and 25.023 mm (No Go)
2. No change in viscosity due to variation in (d) 25.023 mm (Go) and 24.998 mm (No Go)
temperature. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
3. Reduce friction between machine parts. Ans. (b) For testing a shaft using snap gauge, the order
4. Takes up the surface pressure between sliding parts. of tolerances and wear allowances must be reversed.
5. Its protects from oxidation and corrosion. • Size of GO gauge = 25.02 – 0.002 = 25.018 mm
523. Which of the following statement is correct? +0.004
(a) Gauges are used to check the size. • Dimension of 'GO' snap gauge = 25.018−0.000
(b) Templates are used to check size. +0.004
(c) Gauges are used to measure the size. • Dimension of 'NO GO' snap gauge = 24.98−0.000
(d) Gauges are used to check the shape of • 'GO' and 'NO GO' sizes of 25 H snap gauge should
components. be 25.002 mm (GO) and 24.977 mm (NO GO).
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 527. Before wringing. the mating surfaces of slip
Ans.(a) Gauge are used to measure different types of gauges should be wiped clean with
objects having various sizes, shapes and thickness, the (a) soft linen cloth (b) chamois leather
gap in space, diameter of materials or pressure of the (c) either 'a' or 'b' (d) neither 'a' nor 'b'
flow. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
• Gauges are used to check the size. It is made of Ans. (c) The wringing is process of joining the slip
alloy steel. gauges together.
• It is a device used to provide certain dimensional in • Before wringing the mating surface of slip gauges
for motion, according to a specified standard or should be wiped cleaned with chamois leather and
system. soft linen cloths.
524. Which one of the following gauges is used to • To remove grease, wash in carbon tetra chloride.
align the lathe tool with the work ? • Clean slip gauge surface with a fine hair brush and a
(a) Try square (b) Centre gauge dry pad.
(c) Thread gauge (d) Straight edge 528. As sine bar is made with four of five equally -
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 spaced holes on its body. The purpose of the
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 holes is to
Ans. (b) Centre gauge is used to align the lathe tool (a) handle the sine bar easily
with the work. (b) reduce the weight of sine bar
• It is used to lathe work for checking the angles (c) prevent distortion of the top surface
when grinding the profiles of a single point screw (d) give good appearance to the sine bar
cutting tool bits and centres. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
Ans. (a) As sine bar is made with four of five equally Ans. (d) : The instrument used to measure high
spaced holes on its body. The purpose of the holes is to– temperature in the furnace is called pyrometer.
1. Handle the sine bar easily. Pyrometer– Pyrometer is a device for measuring
2. There are four to five holes in it, these holes are relatively high temperatures. Most pyrometers work by
used to clamp the job when required. measuring radiation from the body whose temperature
3. The size of the sine bar is given by the distance is to be measured.
between the centres of two rollers. • Radiation pyrometers are used to measure the
4. The accuracy of sine bar is 0.001 per inch. temperature of red hot metals up to 3000oC.
529. A sine bar is available in standard sizes. Which 532. 'V' blocks are available in grades of
one of the following is NOT a standard size of (a) 0 & 1
the sine bar? (b) 1 & 2
(a) 100 mm (b) 200 mm (c) A1 & A2
(c) 250 mm (d) 300 mm (d) A & B
RRB ALP Patna 2014 RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
Ans. (d) A sine bar is a precision measuring instrument RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
for checking and setting angles.
Ans. (d) :
• The size of sine bar is specified by its length.
• V block are generally made of hardened steel or cast
• The length of the sine bar is the distance between iron and are available in a wide range of sizes.
the centres of the rollers.
• They are used when laying out or drilling round
• The commonly available sizes are 100 mm, 200
work.
mm, 250 mm and 500 mm.
• They are found in grade A and grade B.
530. One of the precision instruments used to check
• 'B' grade V blocks are made from closed-grain cast
the dimensional accuracy of an external 'V'
thread, is a screw thread micrometer. Which iron and 'A' grade V blocks are made from high-
one of the following s\elements of a screw quality steel.
thread is checked with screw thread • V block of grade A is more accurate and is found
micrometer? only up to 100 mm in length.
(a) Major diameter • V block of grade B is used for general work and is
(b) Minor diameter found up to 500 mm in length.
(c) Pitch diameter
(d) Pitch
Ans. (c) Screw thread micrometer– Screw thread
micrometer is used to check the dimensional accuracy
533. A master gauge is ........
of an external 'V' thread.
(a) used by masters
• By this, the depth of thread and pitch diameter can
(b) a standard gauge for checking accuracy of
be measured.
gauges used on shop floors
• The 'V' angle of the anvil and the spindle is 60o to
(c) used by all mechanics
obtain the pitch diameter.
(d) a gauge used by experienced technician
• It is a high precision measuring device employed
for screw thread control. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
• To measure the diameter screws and bolts, it Ans. (b) : Master gauge– It is a standard gauge for
measure the distance from the outer thread on one checking accuracy of gauge used on shop floors.
side to the outer thread on the other side. • Master gauge is also called reference gauge or
531. The instrument used to measure high control gauge.
temperature in the furnace is • Master gauge is used for inspection just as there is
(a) Thermometer an error in workshop gauge used on the machine, in
(b) Barometer the same way, there is a possibility of variation in
(c) Colorimeter the inspection gauge due to continuous testing of
(d) Pyrometer jobs in the inspection room.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 • This gauge removes the error of inspection gauge.

534. Identify the part marked 'X' in figure. 536. Identify and name the part marked 'X' in
universal surface gauge?
(a) Guide pin (b) Clamping nut

(c) Snug (d) Adjustment screw
(a) Scriber (b) Vernier plate RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(c) Vernier slide (d) Beam Ans. (c) : Name of the part marked 'X' in universal
surface gauge is snug.
Universal surface gauge are used as–
Ans. (a) : The part marked 'X' in the figure is scriber. • Scribing lines parallel to the datum surface.
Scriber– Scriber is a marking tool made of high carbon • Setting job on machines parallel to a datum surface
steel. and checking the height and parallelism of jobs.
• It is used for drawing lines while marking on metal • Setting job concentric to the machine spindle.
jobs. 537. The two slip gauges in precision measurement
• The scriber should always be held diagonally in the are joined by ............
direction of movement. (a) Assembling (b) Sliding
(c) Adhesion (d) Wringing
• Its ends get worn out due to repeated use.
• Its edge should always be kept sharp. Ans. (d) : The two slip gauges in precision
535. The most commonly used size of the vernier measurement are joined by wringing.
height gauge is stated by the height of the beam • Slip gauges are manufactured by Johnson, hence
is ……. they are also called as Johnson gauge. This is also
(a) 275 mm (b) 300 mm known as gauge block.
(c) 325 mm (d) 350 mm • Gauge blocks are made of tool steel. It is machined
into rectangular blocks and left for seasoning. After
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 natural and artificial seasoning, they are heat
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 treatment.
Ans. (b) : The most commonly used size of the vernier • The process of joining of two slip gauge is called
height gauge is stated by the height of the beam is 300 wringing.
mm. 538. The other name of screw pitch gauge is _____
Vernier height gauge– It is a micrometer which is used (a) Pitch gauge (b) Depth gauge
to measure the height of parts. (c) Thread gauge (d) Slip gauge
• Vernier height gauge is mainly used for layout
Ans. (c) : The other name of screw pitch gauge is thread
work.
gauge.
• It is used for measuring the width of the slot and • Thread gauge is used to check the dimensions of a
external dimension. specific thread from angle, pitch and diameter.
• The vernier height gauge is used with the dial • It is used to check the pitch of external and internal
indicator to check the hole location, pitch threads.
dimensions concentricity and eccentricity. • It is also used to compare the profile of thread.
• It is also sued for measuring depth, with a depth 539. Screw pitch gauge is used to check the pitch of
attachments. the screw at about the ranges of _____
(a) 0.35 mm to 0.5 mm (b) 0.35 mm to 5 mm
• It is used to measure sizes from the lower plane
(c) 3.5 mm to 5.0 mm (d) 25 mm to 30mm
with the help of an offset scriber.
Ans. (b) : Screw pitch gauge– Screw pitch gauge is • After cleaning the dovetail and the matched pair of
used to check the dimensions of a specific thread from precision rollers, the rollers are positioned in such a
angle, pitch and diameter. way that the rollers will contact the angular faces.
• It is used to check the pitch of the screw at about the 543. The number of pieces in a standard set of angle
range of 0.35 mm to 5 mm. slip gauge in the second series is ..........
• It is used to check the pitch, profile and diameter of (a) 3 (b) 4
thread. (c) 5 (d) 6
540. Straightness can be checked with the help of RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
..... Ans. (a) : The number of pieces in a standard set of
(a) Spirit level (b) Sine bar angle slip gauge in the second series is 3.
(c) Slip gauge (d) Height gauge
• Slip gauges are of the following three types–
1. Working gauge set
Ans. (a) : Spirit level– A spirit level, bubble level or 2. Inspection gauge set
simply a level is an instrument designed to indicate
3. Master gauge set.
weather a surface is horizontal or vertical.
• It is used to check the straightness of surface. 544. How many grades of slip gauges are
recommended by BIS – IS : 2984 ?
• The sensitivity of spirit level is given as angle of
inclination. (a) 2 (b) 3
(c) 4 (d) 5
541. The accuracy depends upon ............
(a) Precision of instrument RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
(b) Precision of method Ans. (c) : 4 grades of slip gauges are recommended by
(c) Good planning BIS - IS : 2984.
(d) All of these Following grads of slip gauges are in use–
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 Reference (AAA)– Small tolerance (± 0.05 µm) used to
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 establish standards.
Ans. (d) : The accuracy depends upon the following Calibration (AA)– Medium tolerance (+ 0.10 µm to –
factors– 0.05 µm) used to calibrate inspection blocks and very
1. Its mostly depends on precision of instrument. high precision gauging.
2. Its depends on precision of method used. Inspection (A)– Wider tolerance (+ 0.15 µm to –0.05
3. Its also depends on planning. µm) used as tool room standards for setting other
• The least count is related to the precision of an gauging tools.
instrument. Workshop (B)– Large tolerance (tolerance + 0.25 µm
• We can say that, accuracy is the ability to measure to –0.15 µm) used as shop standards for precision
the closure value to the exact value. measurement.
• We can measure anything with more accuracy with 545. Name the gauge used for checking the ‘V’
the instrument having a smaller least count. threading tool.
542. The taper of internal dovetail can be measured (a) Centre gauge (b) Pitch gauge
with the help of ............. (c) Drill gauge (d) Template
(a) Sine bar RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
(b) Combination set Ans. (a) : Centre gauge is used for checking the 'V'
(c) Balls of standard dimensions and slip gauges threading tool.
(d) Dial gauge
• Centre gauge is used for setting to tool at accurate
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 position and height.
Ans. (c) : The taper of internal dovetail can be • Centre gauge is used to align the lathe tool with the
measured with the help of balls of standard dimensions work.
and slip gauges.
• It is made up of spring steel hardened and tempered
• There are situations where measurements of
and it is used to check the angle of tool.
components cannot be taken directly. A typical
example of this is a dovetail (Internal and external). 546. The flank angle and the form of fine screw
• In such cases, it is possible to calculate the size and thread can be checked by using........
taper accurately from the measurement taken over (a) plug gauge (b) thread micrometer
the balls or rollers placed between standard (c) optical projector (d) snap gauge
measuring instruments and the component. RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004

Ans. (c) : Optical projector– The flank angle and the 550. Which one of the following is not the function
form of fine screw thread can be checked by using of a Depth gauge?
optical projector. (a) Measuring depth of blind holes
• An optical projector is a device which enlarge the (b) measuring depth of grooves and slots
image. (c) Heights of shoulders in holes
• It is a commonly used to measurement of optical (d) Measuring diameter of holes
instruments. NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
• Optical comparators are used to check both RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
dimensional accuracy and surface defects such as Ans. (d) : Depth gauge does not measure the diameter
scratches and indentations. of holes.
547. To check the dimensional limits of an external Depth gauge– It is used for measuring things such as
screw thread the most suitable will be...... depth of blind holes, depth of grooves & height of
(a) plug gauge (b) thread micrometer protrusions.
(c) thread ring gauge (d) screw pitch gauge • It is essentially a narrow steel rule to which a
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 sliding head is clamped at the right angles to rule.
Ans. (b) : Thread micrometer– A thread micrometer • The head forms a convenient marker in places
is used to measures the pitch of the thread directly. where the rule must be held in distance from the
• It is used to check the dimensional limits of an point being measured.
external screw thread. 551. The measurement on dial test indicator is the:
• It is used to measure the thread pitch diameter. (a) Diameter of the plunger
• The screw thread diameter has a 60o pointed spindle (b) Length of the plunger
and a double V-shaped swiveling anvil. (c) Lift of the plunger
548. The measuring instrument used to measure (d) None of these
resistance is called- RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
(a) Voltmeter (b) Ammeter Ans. (c) : Dial test indicator– Its design consists of a
(c) Ohm-meter (d) Potentiometer plunger which slides in a circular body.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 • Dial indicator are measuring devices used in
Ans. (c) : Ohm meter– The instrument used to measure mechanical and industrial applications.
resistance is called ohmmeter. • They are designed to measure in vertical or
• The ratio of the potential difference between the horizontal position and typically used to measure
ends of a resistor to the current flowing through it is clearance, tolerances, and variation in tolerance of
called its electrical resistance. machined parts of ensure accuracy.
• It is measured in 'Ohm'. • The measurement on dial test indicators is the lift of
Voltmeter– It is a measuring instrument used to plunger.
measure the potential difference between any two points 552. Which one of the following precision measuring
of a circuit. instruments is based on the principle of
Ammeter– It is an instrument for measuring the current trigonometrical function?
flowing in a branch of circuit. (a) Dial gauge (b) Angular gauge
549. Property of the measuring faces of gauge (c) Sine bar (d) Bevel protractor
blocks to adhere to other measuring faces or to RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
faces with similar surface finish is known as :
Ans. (c) : Sine bar is precision measuring instruments is
(a) Ringing (b) Sticking
based on the principal of trigonometrically function.
(c) Wringing (d) Pasting
Sine bar– Sine bar is used to measure the angle of the
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 job or its taper with accuracy about 5 minute.
Ans. (c) : Wringing– The wringing process is joining • Sine bar are used to measuring angles for
the slip gauges together. milling, grinding and inspection applications.
• Property of the measuring faces of gauge blocks to • Sine bar works on trigonometry–
adhere to other measuring faces or two faces with
• In a right angle triangle, the sine of an angle is
similar surface finish is known as wringing.
the ratio of its perpendicular and hypotenuse.
• Before wringing the mating surface of slip gauges
perpendicular
should be wiped cleaned with chamois lather and sin θ =
soft liner clothes. hypotensuse

553. The gradual increase or decrease in diameter Ans. (b) : The size of slip gauge build up 44.8725
of piece of work measured along its length is mm.
called– Slip gauge– Gauge blocks are a system for producing
(a) Cylinder (b) Taper precision lengths.
(c) Slant (d) Cone
S. Block size Calculation Selected
No. block
Ans. (b) : The gradual increase or decrease in diameter group
of piece of work measured along its length is called
taper. 1. A block of 1.0005 44.8725 1.0005
mm –1.0005 mm
group I
2. A block of 1.002 43.872 1.002 mm
mm 1.002 group II
3. A block of 1.37 42.87 1.37 mm
• A machine taper is a system for securing cutting mm 1.37 group III
tools or tool holders in the spindle of a machine tool 4. A block of 16.5 41.5 16.5 mm
or power tool. mm 16.5 group IV
• Tapers in spindles usually holds centres, while tail 5. A block of 25 mm 25.00 25 mm of
stock tapers can hold not only lathe centres, but drill 25 group V
chuck arbors and large twist drills.
Overall size 00.000 44.8725
• Tapers are also used to held drill chuck arbors in
drill press spindles. mm
554. What is the name of the instrument? 556. What is the name of instrument?
(a) Sine bar (b) Slip gauge

(c) Angle block (d) Parallel block
(a) Bore dial gauge NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(b) Inside micrometer RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
(c) Two point internal micrometer
Ans. (a) : The name of instrument is sine bar.
(d) Three point internal micrometer
Sine bar– A sine bar consists of a hardened, precision
ground body with two precision ground cylindrical
Ans. (a) : The name of the instrument is bore dial fixed at the ends.
gauge.
Bore dial gauge– Bore dial gauge is an instrument used • The distance between the centres of the cylinders is
for measuring ovalization and conicity and for control precisely controlled, and the top of the bar is
of internal diameters of circular holes. parallel to a line through the centres of the two
• The least count of bore dial gauge is 0.02/0.01 mm. rollers.
• A bore gauge is a tool that are unique to the process • A sine bar is used either to measure an angle very
of accurately measuring holes. accurately or face locate any work to a given angle.
555. What is the size of slip gauge build up? 557. What measurement is taken by slip gauge and
precision roller?
(a) Width of the job

(b) Length of the job
(a) 44.872 mm (b) 44.8725 mm (c) Thickness of the job
(c) 44.8572 mm (d) 44.2875 mm (d) Distance between the holes
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
Ans. (b) : Slip gauges are used as standard for precision 560. Zero setting of the two point born dial gauge
length measurement. before the measurement is necessary to …..
• Slip gauges is also used for precised tool as (a) Account for the errors in the gauge
inspection gauge block. It is used for highest (b) facilitate comparison
precised work. (c) set up initial pressure in the gauge
• Such as measuring grade I, II and III. (d) eliminate inaccuracy of the measurement
• Grade 0 – This is used for tool room inspection. RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (d) : Zero setting of the two point born dial gauge
• Slip gauges are also called Johnson gauge.
before the measurement is necessary to eliminate
558. What is the name of the instrument? inaccuracy of the measurement.
Zero setting– Its dial should be set to zero before
taking the measurement. This zero is determined by
setting rings.
• Setting fixtures can also be used with slip gauge for
zero setting of dial bore gauges.
(a) Centre gauge (b) Feeler gauge 561. The shape of the thread in the ‘NO GO’ end of
(c) Radius gauge (d) Screw pitch gauge a thread snap gauge is
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 (a) Beveled (b) Truncated
Ans. (d) : The name of the instrument is screw pitch (c) Taper (d) Sharp
gauge or thread pitch gauge. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
Screw pitch gauge– This is made of carbon steel strips RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
like radius gauge or feeler gauge. The size of these Ans. (b) : The shape of the thread in the "NO GO" end
blades is zig-zag cut according to the profile of grades of a thread snap gauge in truncated.
of different pitches. Thread snap gauge– Thread snap gauge are also called
• The pitch of the thread is marked on each blade. a thread calipers.
• The full length of the blade should be used at the • It is only used for checking external threaded parts.
time of use. This gives good results. • Thread snap gauges are available in either a knife
• The angle of camber depend on the type of thread, edge style or a roller style.
o
such as metric thread having an angle 60 , and whit • The working method of this gauge is similar of the
o snap gauge, but its structure is some what different.
worth thread having an angle of 55 .
• There is separate set of pitch gauge for each type of • In this, both the 'GO' and 'NO GO' parts are made
thread. on the same side back and forth.
• The metric set has 21 blades and British set has 30 • There is GO size in the front part of gauge and NO
blades. GO size in the back part.
559. Which part of the surface gauge enables to 562. The handle of thread plug gauge is made from
ebonite material for
scribe parallel lines to datum edge?
(a) Reducing the cost
(a) Base (b) Snug
(b) Reducing the weight
(c) Spindle (d) Guide pin
(c) Easy manufacturing
(d) Easy handling
Ans. (d) : Guide pin– Scriber or guiding pin is used to RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
draw a parallel line along a datum edge.
Ans. (b) : The handle of thread plug gauge is made
• A surface gauge is one of the common instrument from ebonite material for reducing the weight.
used for drawing lines parallel to the datum surface. Thread plug gauge– It is used to calibrate thread ring
• Guide pins are cylindrical rods used in an assembly gauges.
to align components. • Thread plug gauge is used for checking internal
• These pins, held in place by friction, may be pushed threaded components.
down to bear against the edge of a surface plate so • Thread plugs are machined GO and NO GO gauges
that the instrument may be transversed along an that contain external threading machined to a very
edge. specific thread size.
• In order words, the pins keep the scriber point • A thread gauge is used to check the dimensions of a
moving in a straight line. specific thread form angle, pitch and diameter.

563. To convert the linear motion of the plunger of a 566. The gauge which has an additional blade is .....
dial test indicator to the rotary motion of the (a) Bevel gauge
pointer, which one of the following mechanisms (b) Universal bevel gauge
is used? (c) Bevel protractor
(a) Quick return mechanism (d) Angle gauge
(b) Rack and pinion mechanism BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(c) Screw thread mechanism RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(d) Hydraulic mechanism Ans. (b) : Universal bevel gauge– The gauge which
has an additional blade is called universal bevel gauge.
• The universal bevel gauge protector is a high
Ans. (b) : Rack and pinion mechanism is used to precision angle gauge used for accurate angle
convert the linear motion of the plunger of a dial test measuring of machines, molds and jigs.
indicator to the rotary motion of a pointer on the scale. • It is used in tool room for measuring accurate angle
Rack and pinion mechanism in dial test indicator– of machined components.
• Dial test indicator is a mechanical device used for 567. Engineers' steel rule is used to measure .....
precision measurement in industries. (a) Accuracy of job
• It uses a rack and pinion mechanism to measure and (b) Dimensions of workpiece
amplify the measurement and display them on a dial (c) Least count
(d) Bend of the workpiece
containing a graduated scale and pointer
arrangement.
Ans. (b) : Engineering steel rule is used to measure the
564. The least count of vernier bevel protractor is dimensions of workpiece.
(a) 1' (b) 5' • Standard steel rule is a measuring tool, which is
(c) 10' (d) 25' made up of stainless steel, carbon steel or spring
BEML 2022 steel.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 • One side of the steel rule is marked in inches and its
fractions are marked as one inch into 8, 16, 32 and
Ans. (b) : Vernier bevel protector– Vernier bevel
64 parts.
protector is used to measure an angle with more
• Similarly other side of the rule is marked in metric
precision. system of centimetre and each milimeter is divided
The protector head of a combination set can measure an into two equal parts.
angle of at least 10 degrees. • Normally, its thickness is 3/64 inch and width 3/4 or
• It can measure an angle with an accuracy of one 1 inch.
 1o  • It is hard and tempered.
twelfth of a degree  or 5 minute  . • It can measure the minimum length of 1/64 inches
 12 
  or 0.5 mm.
• The least count of a vernier bevel protractor is 5'.
565. Bevel gauges cannot measure angles
(a) Directly (b) Indirectly
(c) Closely (d) Accurately
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 568. A 'V' threading tool is set square to the work
axis with a.....
Ans. (a) : Bevel gauges can not measure angles (a) Bevel edged try square (b) Screw pitch gauge
directly. (c) Centre gauge (d) Dial gauge
Bevel gauges– A bevel gauges is also known as sliding RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
T bevel, false square and an adjustable gauge. Ans. (c) : A 'V' threading tool is set square to the work
• It is used for setting and transferring angles. axis with a centre gauge.
• Different from square, which is fixed and can only • Centre gauge is used for setting the lathe tool at
set a 90o angle. correct centre height.
• It can set any angle and transfer it on another piece. • Centre gauge is used to align the lathe tool with the
work.
• Bevel gauges are indispensable guides used to
• Centre gauge is used to check its flank angle
measure the sharpening angle of the cutting edge of
accuracy of single point metric 'V' threading tools.
a chisel or plane iron.
• A centre gauge is made up of spring steel hardened
• A bevel gauge is a great way of maintaining and and tempered and is used mainly for grinding and
setting angles when grinding. setting single point cutting tool.

569. Single point metric 'V' threading tools are (X − Y) / 2

checked for its flank angle accuracy by using a Then, tan θ =
(a) thread plug gauge (b) centre gauge H
(c) screw pitch gauge (d) tool angle gauge X−Y
tan θ =
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 2H
Ans. (b) : Single point metric 'V' threading tools are 571. A simple set up to determine the angle a of a
checked for its flank angle accuracy by using a centre. wedge shaped workpiece by calculation is
Centre gauge– It is used in lathe work for checking the shown in the Fig. A formula is derived
angles when grinding the profile to a single point screw connecting D, H, E and α Which one of the
cutting tool bits and centres. following is the correct formula ?
570. The set up to check the taper angle of a taper
plug gauge using slip gauges and rollers is
shown in the Fig. A formula connecting the two
measurements over the rollers (i.e. X and Y)
the slip gauge height 'H and 'θ' the half angle
of the taper plug angle is derived for the
calculation purpose. Which one of the following
is the correct formula ?
H H
(a) tan α = (b) sin α =
E+D E+D
H H
(c) cos α = (d) cot α =
E+D E+D
IOCL 2020
Ans. (b) :
H
The correct formula is sin α =
L+D
Given, D = diameter of rollers.
H = Height of slip gauge
E = Slip gauge.
X+Y θ X−Y
(a) tan θ = (b) tan =
2H 2 H
2(X − Y) X−Y
(c) tan 2θ = (d) tan θ =
H 2H
Ans. (d) : Given, major diameter D1 = X
minor diameter D2 = Y
Perpendicular
sin θ =
Hypotenuse
Given, perpendicular = H = BC
BC
∆ ABC sin α =
AB
H
sin α =
E+D
∴ In ∆ ABC 572. The rib which mounted back side of angle is
( D1 − D2 ) used for______.
BC = (a) Clamp while machining
2
(b) Lift the job
 X−Y
=  (c) Prevent from distortion in angle plate
 2  (d) Help for easily making job
Base = H (given) RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : The rib which mounted back side of angle Ans. (d) : Feeler Gauge–
used for prevent from distortion in angle plate. • It is used to check the clearance between mating
• Angle plates are made of closely grained cast iron parts.
or steel. • Length of it is 100 mm.
• The edges and ends also machined square. • It consist of grinded carbon steel strip of different
• They have ribs on the un-machined part for good length.
rigidity and to prevent distortion. • It can measure in both mm & inches.
573. 'V' block is used to hold round bars. It has a
Vee groove which is usually
(a) 30° (b) 60°
(c) 90° (d) 120°
Ans. (c) : 'V' block is used to hold round bars. It has a V
groove which is usually 90o.
• V-blocks are precision metalworking jigs typically
used to hold round metal rods or pipes for
performing drilling or milling operations. 577. Plain ring gauges are used to check............
• They consist of a rectangular steel or cast iron block (a) accuracy of external threads
with a 120o channel rotated 45o from the sides, (b) accuracy of internal threads
forming a V-shaped channel in the top. (c) inside diameter of work piece
574. Grade B 'V block' is available up to which of (d) outside diameter of work piece
the following length?
(a) 300 mm (b) 100 mm NTPC Fitter 2016
(c) 700 mm (d) 500 mm Ans. (d) : Plain ring gauge–
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM • It is used to check the external diameter of the
workpiece.
Ans. (a) : V Block–
• It is also used to check the error of three point inside
• It is used when laying out or drilling round work. micrometer and to set the indicator hole gauge in
• It is available in grade A & grade B fixed size.
• V block of grade B is used for general work & • It is made in GO & NO GO size.
found up to 300 mm length. • In this length of GO gauge is less & length of NO
• 'B' grade V blocks are made from closed grade cast GO gauge is more.
iron.
575. What is shape of cross section of slip gauge?
(a) 42×9 mm (b) 32×9 mm
(c) 52×9 mm (d) 22×9 mm
Ans. (b) : Slip gauge–
578. Screw pitch gauge is used for determining
• It is used as standard for precision length
what?
measurement.
(a) Pitch of the thread (b) Depth
• These gauge are made in sets and consists of a (c) Flank (d) Crest
number of hardened blocks made of high grade steel DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
with low thermal expansion. Ans. (a) : Screw Pitch gauge–
• The cross sectional size of a slip gauge is 32 × 9 • It is used to measure the pitch of a screw head.
mm. • It is used as reference tool in determining the pitch
576. The length of the blade in feeler gauge is.......... of a thread that is on a screw.
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 200 mm • It is not used as precision measuring instrument
(c) 0.03 mm (d) 100 mm rather it allows the user to determine the profile of a
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 given thread & quickly categorized the thread by
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00AM-12:00PM shape & a pitch.

579. According to Indian standard, special group of Ans. (a) : Surface gauge–
slip gauge is used, which included? • It is used to make or measure the accuracy of a
(a) 120 part (b) 130 part workpiece.
(c) 81 part (d) 112 part
• It is a dimensionless measuring instrument made of
steel also used to indicate the accuracy or evenness
of surfaces.
Ans. (d) : Slip gauge– It is used as standard for • It is type of marking tool with a double headed
precision length measurement. scriber.
• These gauge are made in sets & consist of a number
of hardened block made of high grade steel. • One end of it straight and other is bent at 90o.
• According to Indian standard, special group of slip 584. ............ gauge is used to check the clearance
gauge is used which includes 112 set. between two mating surface.
580. What is the gauge used for measuring shape of (a) Feeler gauge (b) Slip gauge
hole, slots or blank places? (c) Plug gauge (d) Ring gauge
(a) Snap gauge (b) Micrometer UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(c) Vernier micrometer (d) Telescopic gauge
Ans. (a) : Feeler gauge–
BHEL 2020
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 • It is used to check the clearance between mating
Ans. (d) : Telescopic gauge– parts.
• It is a indirect measuring device used to measure the • It consist of grained carbon steel strip of different
internal diameter of a bore, hole, groove, slot etc. length.
• This T shape tool consist of a handle, two telescopic • It can measure in both mm & inches.
rods and a locking screw. 585. In hydraulic and pneumatic circuit symbol G is
used.
(a) From reservoir
(b) From electric motor
(c) From filter
(d) From pressure measuring gauge
581. A drill gauge is a metal section of rectangular UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
or square section. Which have different types
Ans. (d) : In hydraulic & pneumatic circuit symbol G is
of ......
(a) 118 checking angle (b) diameter of holes used from pressure measuring devices.
(c) small holes of drill (d) drill having length 586. Which one of the following characteristic is
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 very important while selecting a gauge?
Ans. (b) : Drill gauge– (a) Ductility (b) Corrosion resistance
• It is used to identify the size of drill but– (c) Strength (d) Wear resistance
• It is a metal section of rectangular or square section UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
& contains various holes of different diameters.
Ans. (d) : Important characteristics which selecting a
• Each hole is marked with a measurement based on
gauge–
its sizes.
582. In which a progressive limit plug gauge- • Gauge should be wear resistance.
(a) Go and Not go are on different sides of gauge • Life of a gauge should be more.
(b) Not go only • Gauge should not be ductile.
(c) Go only • Strength of gauge should be more.
(d) Go and Not go are one side of gauge
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 • Gauge should be corrosion resistant.
Ans. (d) : Progressive gauge–In progressive gauge, 587. A feeler gauge is used for :
both gauging section as GO and NO GO on one side so (a) adjusting the parts for play
that a part may be gauged with one movement. (b) checking gap between mating parts
583. Surface gauge are used: (c) checking radius of jobs
(a) In making the accuracy of work (d) checking accuracy of holes
(b) To check surface finish
BDL Technician 2022
(c) For leveling of surface plate
(d) To check the thickness of surface plate ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
Ans. (b) : Feeler gauge– 593. Which gauge is used to measure the thickness
• It is used to check the clearance between mating of sheets :
parts. (a) Feeler gauge (b) Ring gauge
(c) Plug gauge (d) Wire gauge
• It is available in both mm & inches. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
• In this, grinded strip of carbon steel of different Ans. (d) : Wire gauge– It is device used to measure the
thickness are used. thickness of sheet.
588. At what standard temperature are the gauges Plug gauge– It measures diameters of hole.
kept in the inspection room Ring gauge– It is used to measure diameter of shaft &
(a) 10oC (b) 20oC studs.
(c) 10 F o
(d) 30oF Feeler gauge– It is used to measure clearance between
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 mating parts.
594. Which if NOT true for a wire gauge?
Ans. (b) : Gauge– It is made of high carbon steel,
(a) Used to measure the thickness of a wire
chromium steel, vanadium steel etc.
(b) Used to measure electrical conductivity of
• Gauge are kept at 20oC in inspection room. wire
589. The accuracy of a reference gauge is : (c) Steel disc in which number of holes and slots
(a) 0.05 mm (b) 0.01 mm are provided
(c) 0.001 mm (d) 0.0001 mm (d) Each slots and holes in the disc is marked
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 with its size
Ans. (c) : ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
• Accuracy of reference gauge is 0.001 mm. Ans. (b) : Wire gauge–
• It is used for checking the accuracy of inspection • It is used to measure the thickness/diameter of a
gauge. wire.
• It is used to calibrate or set micrometers, • It consists steel disc in which number of holes &
comparators or other gauging systems. slots of different sizes are provided.
590. Hardness of Slip Gauge should be : • Each slots & holes in disc in marked with its size.
(a) more than 63 HRC (b) 58 HRC 595. Which of the following statements is TRUE for
(c) 55 HRC (d) 50 HRC slip gauges?
(a) Metal block which are ground and lapped to a
specific thickness
Ans. (a) : Slip gauge– (b) Used to measure surface finish
• It is used as standard for precision length (c) Used to measure fine air gaps between two
measurement. surfaces
• It is made in sets & consist of a number of hardened (d) Slip gauge always gives error in desired
blocks made of high grade steel having low thermal length when stacked together
expansion. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
• Hardness = more than 63 HRC. Ans. (a) : Slip gauge–
• It is a metal block which are ground and lapped to a
591. A NO-GO plug gauge is used to check the
specific thickness.
............. of a hole.
• It is made of high carbon steel & of rectangular
(a) Lower limit (b) Upper limit
shape.
(c) Tolerance (d) Deviation
• It can check the accuracy of micrometer, caliper and
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 dial indicator.
Ans. (b) : Plug gauge– It is used to check hole. 596. The number which specify thickness of sheet
'GO' plug gauge– Minimum hole limit or lower limit. metal in known as :
'NO GO' plug gauge– Maximum hole limit or upper (a) Sheet size (b) Wire size
limit. (c) Gauge (d) None of the above
592. Which type of surface gauge is used on ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
cylindrical surface : Ans. (b) : The number which specify thickness of sheet
(a) Fixed type surface gauge metal is known as wire size.
(b) Movable type surface gauge 597. Number of threads per inch in a screw or bolt
(c) Universal type surface gauge is checked by
(d) Linear type surface gauge (a) Vernier caliper (b) Dial gauge
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 (c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Thread plug gauge
Ans. (c) : Universal type of surface gauge is used on BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
cylindrical surface. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
Ans. (c) : Screw pitch gauge– Ans. (c) :

• It is used to measure number of threads per inch in a Grade Purpose
screw or bolt. Calibration grade Special grade used for
• It is used as reference tool in determining the pitch experimental work, research work
of a thread, that is on a screw. and for measurement &
• It is not a precision measuring instrument. inspection of other gauges.
598. Thread ring gauges are used to check external Grade 00 Used for highest precision work
threads. Separate 'Go' and 'NO GO' gauging such as measuring grade I & II
members are provided. Which one of the Grade 0 Used for tool room or machine
following screw thread elements is not checked shop inspection
with this ring gauges? Grade I Used for precise work such as
(a) Pitch (b) Helix angle setting up sine bar, checking gap
(c) Profile (d) Pitch diameter gauges etc.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II Grade II For general workshop application
Ans. (b) : Thread ring gauge– 603. Radius gauges are used to check ..................
• It is used to check external threads. (a) Internal radius (b) External radius
• It measure pitch, profile & pitch diameter. (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of the above
• It does not measure helix angle. ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
599. Surface gauge is a Ans. (c) : Radius gauge–
(a) Marking tool (b) Cutting tool • It is also called as fillet gauge.
(c) Drilling tool (d) Clamping tool
• It is used to check external & internal radius.
604. Inspection of complex profiles can be easily
Ans. (a) : Surface gauge–
done by—
• It is a marking tool & used to measure the accuracy
(a) Using a vernier caliper
of a workpiece.
(b) Using a plunger dial
• It is a dimensionless measuring instrument also used
(c) Using a vernier height gauge
to indicate the accuracy or evenness of surface.
(d) Using a template
600. Best wire size is the one which, when placed in
the thread groove will make contact to the
(a) Minor diameter (b) Major diameter Ans. (d) : Template–
(c) Effective diameter (d) Crest of the thread • Inspection of complex profiles can be easily
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 done by using a template.
Ans. (c) : • It is made of mild steel.
• Best wire size is the one which, when placed in the • It is used for checking the shape of a product.
thread groove, will make contact to the effective 605. Determine the height of slip gauges if a sine bar
diameter. (200 mm length) makes an angle of 30º.
• Wire gauge is used to measure thickness of sheet & (a) 50 (b) 173.2
thickness wire. (c) 100 (d) 200
601. Screw pitch gauge determines ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
(a) Pitch diameter of threads Ans. (c) : Given,
(b) Thread Pitch Length of sine bar = 200 mm
(c) Major diameter of internal thread/Minor θº = 30º
diameter of external thread Height of slip gauge = ?
(d) All of the above According to the principle of sine bar–
NLC Technician 24-09.2022
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 Sine θ =
Ans. (b) : Screw pitch gauge– Length of sine bar
• It is also known as thread gauge. Height of slip gauge
Sine 30o =
• It is used to measure the pitch or lead of a screw 200
thread. Height of slip gauge = 200 × sin 30o
• It is also used to compare the profile of threads. Height of slip gauge = 100 mm
602. Slip gauges for purpose of general workshop 606. Which of the following is used to draw the
applications are ................ parallel lines and to find the centre of round
(a) accuracy/Grade 0 (b) accuracy/Grade I section material–
(c) accuracy/Grade II (d) accuracy/Grade III (a) Vernier caliper (b) micrometer
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) Surface gauge (d) Pyrometer
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
Ans. (c) : Surface gauge– 610. Taper ring gauge is used to measure
• It is used to draw the parallel lines and to find the (a) External taper
centre of round section material. (b) Internal taper
• It is a marking tool & also used to indicate the (c) External and Internal taper
accuracy & evenness of surfaces. (d) None of the above
607. Grade II ship gauge is used in : BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
(a) Workshop by operator ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
(b) Calibration purpose Ans : (a) Taper ring gauge– It is used to check both
(c) Final inspection accuracy & the outside diameter of a taper.
(d) None of the above Taper plug gauge– It is used to check the size of the
hole and accuracy of the taper.
Ans. (a) 611. Best wire size is the one which, when placed in
Grade Purpose the thread groove will make contact at
Calibration grade Special grade used for (a) minor diameter
experimental work, research work (b) major diameter
(c) pitch diameter
and for measurement &
(d) trough of the thread
inspection of other gauges.
Grade 00 Used for highest precision work
Ans : (c)
such as measuring grade I & II
• Best size wire is the one which, when placed in the
Grade 0 Used for tool room or machine
thread grooves will make contact at pitch diameter.
shop inspection
P
Grade I Used for precise work such as • Diameter of wire, d =
setting up sine bar, checking gap 2 cos α / 2
gauges etc. 612. The standard temperature at which gauges are
Grade II For general workshop application kept in metrology section is .............. Kelvin
608. Plug gauge is used for : (a) 288.15 (b) 293.15
(a) Measuring inside dimension (c) 298.15 (d) 303.15
(b) Measuring outside dimension NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(c) Comparing inside dimension ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
(d) Comparing outside dimension Ans : (b) The standard temperature at which gauges
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 are kept in metrology section is 20oC or 293.15 K.
Ans. (c) : Plug gauge– 613. Determine the angle set if the height of slip
• It is a type of limit gauge & used for comparing gauges used is 100mm with a sine bar of
internal dimension. 200mm length
• 'GO plug'– Lower limit/Minimum limit of a hole. (a) 45 degree (b) 60 degree
• 'NO GO plug'– Maximum limit/upper limit of a (c) 30 degree (d) 15 degree
hole. ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
Ans : (c)
609. Identify the instrument shown in the following
figure. sin α =
Length of sine bar
100
sin α =
200
1
sin α =
2
sin α = sin 30o
(a) Radius gauge (b) thread pitch gauge
(c) feeler gauge (d) none of the above α = 30o
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 614. Generally, gauges are used for
Ans : (c) Feeler gauge– (a) Measuring in mass production
• It is used to measure the clearance between mating (b) Measuring the exact true dimension value
parts. (c) Getting a direct read out
• It consists of grinded carbon steel strip of different (d) Increasing accuracy of measurement over
length. measuring instruments
• It can measure in both mm & inches. ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
Ans : (a) Gauge– It is used for dimensional control of Ans. (c) : Dial gauge is an example of comparator.
the component. • It is used to check the flatness of workpiece.
• It is used in mass production because measuring • It is work on the principle of rack and pinion.
dimensions is time consuming & expensive. 620. The purpose of using GO and NO GO Gauge.
• Generally absolute measurement is not required. This is use as _______.
615. The following tool is used for setting the job (a) Limit gauge (b) Radius gauge
concentric to the machine spindle (c) Slip gauge (d) Pitch gauge
(a) Try square (b) Scriber RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
(c) Bevel protractor (d) Surface gauge Ans : (a) GO and NO GO gauge are used as limit
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 gauge.
Ans. (d) : Surface gauge is a type of marking gauge. It • GO gauge inserts in the hole while NO GO gauge
is used for setting jobs concentric to the machine does not insert in the hole.
spindle and scribing line parallel to a datum surface. • It is used in mass production to check the size of parts.
• It is also known as marking block or scribing block. 621. Clearance between mating parts is measured
616. 3 wire method is used to measure by ...................
(a) Minor diameter (b) Major diameter (a) Dial Gauge (b) 'GO' Gauge
(c) Effective diameter (d) None of the above (c) Feeler Gauge (d) Caliper Gauge
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
Ans. (c) : Three wire method uses for checking the Ans. (c) : Feeler gauge–
effective diameter and the flank form with the help of • It is mostly used in engineering to measure
three wire of same diameter. In this one wire is hold at clearance between mating parts.
one end of screw thread and other two are at second • It consist of a number of small length of steel strip
end. of different thickness with measurements marked on
• Effective diameter for whitworth thread– each piece.
M = D + 3.1657d – 1.6005P • Stainless steel is most common material for feeler
• Effective diameter for metric thread– gauge.
M = D + 3d – 1.5155P 622. Which one of the following parts of a universal
617. Choose the most appropriate answer : surface gauge helps to draw parallel lines along
datum edge?
Standard wire gauge is used to measure :
(a) Base (b) Rocker Arm
(a) Size of wire
(c) Adjusting Screw (d) Guide Pins
(b) Size of sheet
(c) Size of both sheet and wire
(d) Size of the small tube
Ans. (d) : Universal surface gauge–
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 • It is most common marking tool used for scribing
lines parallel to a datum surface, setting jobs on
Ans. (c) : Standard wire gauge is used to measure the
size of both sheet and wire. It is like a disc plate on machines parallel to a datum surface and checking
which slots and holes are cut at the periphery of the disc the height and parallelism of jobs, and setting jobs
of different sizes. concentric to the machine spindle.
618. Which of the following instrument is used to • Guide pin of this surface gauge helps to draw
parallel lines along datum edge.
measure the gap?
(a) Taper plug gauge (b) Slip gauge 623. Which one of the following instruments is used
(c) Taper ring gauge (d) Thread gauge for checking large internal diameter?
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 (a) Hole gauge (b) Telescopic gauge
(c) Plug gauge (d) Snap gauge
Ans. (b) : Slip gauge is a precision measuring
instrument. It is used for measure the gap thickness and
length of jobs. It is also used for calibration of micro- Ans. (b) : Telescopic gauge–
measuring gauges and other gauges. • It is an indirect measuring device used to measure
619. Which of the following is an example of a the internal diameter of a base, hole, groove, slot
comparator? etc.
(a) Vernier caliper (b) Micrometer • It consists of a handle, two telescopic rods and a
(c) Dial gauge (d) Steel rule locking screw.
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 • With the help of a micrometer, the telescopic rods
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 measure the distance of a bore.

624. Which of the following is a non precision Ans : (c) Surface gauge–
instrument? • It is a non precision instrument.
(a) Vernier caliper (b) Depth gauge • It is used to draw parallel lines and to find the
(c) Slip gauge (d) Micrometer
centre of a material having round section.
• It is also known as marking block or scribing block.
Ans. (c) : Slip gauge is a non precision instrument.
• Vernier caliper, depth gauge, micrometers are 629. Wire gauge is a measurement of a wire's-
precise instruments. (a) brittleness (b) Tensile strength
• It is used for calibrating the micrometer, sine bar (c) Diameter (d) Hardness
and caliper. RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II
• It is made in sets and consist of a number of Ans. (c) : Wire gauge–
hardened blocks made of high grade steel with low • It is used for measuring diameter of wire.
thermal expansion. • It is also used for measuring thickness of sheet.
• It is designated into five grades. • In this different slots are cut on the circumference of
625. Centre of cylindrical rod is determined by rectangular or circular strip.
using ....... • These slots are of different sizes and sizes are
(a) Bevel gauge mentioned on each slot.
(b) Vernier caliper 630. The instrument used to measure cylinder bore
(c) Surface gauge
diameter is-
(d) Micrometer screw gauge
(a) Outside micrometer (b) Vernier caliper
(c) Bore dial gauge (d) Telescopic gauge
Ans. (c) : Surface gauge–
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II
• It is very useful when finding the centre of a piece
of round section material. Ans. (c) : Bore dial gauge– It is used for measuring
• It is normally used to scribe parallel lines. cylinder bore diameter.
• It's base is heavy & this means it is stable when in Outside micrometer– It is used for measuring outer
used. diameter.
• It sometimes have magnetic bases and this means Telescopic gauge– It is used for measuring depth of
they can be locked onto metal surface making easier deep holes.
to use. Vernier caliper– It is used for both inside and outside
626. External taper can be measured by : measurement.
(a) Thread ring gauge (b) Taper ring gauge 631. Which of the following is used to check the gap
(c) Plug gauge (d) Small hole gauge between contact breaker points?
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I (a) Wire gauge (b) Feeler gauge
Ans. (b) : Taper ring gauge– It is used to check both (c) Micrometer gauge (d) Vernier gauge
the accuracy & the outside diameter of a taper. RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I
Thread ring gauge– It is used to check the form and Ans. (b) : Feeler gauge–
dimensional accuracy of external thread. • It is used to check the gap between contact breaker
Plug gauge– It is used to check diameter of holes. points.
627. Which of the following is used for measuring • It consists a number of small length of steel strip of
the clearance between the valve and the tappet different thickness with measurement marked on
of the value actuating mechanism? each piece.
(a) Feeler gauge (b) Micrometer • Stainless steel is most common material for it.
(c) Slip gauge (d) Vernier caliper
632. Which of the following is used to measure the
RRB ALP Mechanic Motor Vehicle 23-1-2019, Shift-III
ovality of a cylinder bore?
Ans : (a) Feeler gauge–
(a) Pressure gauge (b) Dial bore gauge
• It is used for measuring the clearance between the
(c) Height gauge (d) Vacuum gauge
valve and tappet of the value actuating mechanism.
RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I
• It consist a number of small lengths of steel strip of
different thickness with measurement marked on Ans. (b) : Dial bore gauge is used to measure the
each piece. ovality of a cylinder base.
• Stainless steel is most common material for it. 633. Which gauge is most suitable for measuring
628. Which of the following is used to draw parallel cylindrical ring gauge?
lines and to find the centre of a material having (a) Micrometer
round section? (b) Plug gauge
(a) Pyrometer (b) Micrometer (c) Pneumatic comparator
(c) Surface gauge (d) Vernier caliper (d) Slip gauge
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
Ans. (c) : Pneumatic comparator– It is a precision Ans : (d) Feeler gauge–

device operated using a pneumatic system or • It is used to measure the clearance between mating
compressed air. parts.
It is most suitable for measuring cylindrical ring gauge. • It is also used to check the flat surfaces.
634. Which of the following gauge is used for • It consist a number of small length of steel strip of
calibrating the micrometers, sine bars, and different thickness with measurements marked on
calipers?
each piece.
(a) Feeler gauge
(b) Go and No Go gauge 639. Plug gauges are used to :
(c) Ring gauge (a) Measure diameter of the work piece
(d) Slip gauge (b) Measure diameter of the holes in the work
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II piece
Ans. (d) : Slip gauge– (c) Check the diameter of the holes in the work
• It is used for calibrating the micrometer, sine bar piece
and caliper. (d) Check the length of the work piece
• It is made in sets and consist of a number of IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
hardened blocks made of high grade steel with low DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
thermal expansion. Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
• It is designated into five grades. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
635. The other name of the feeler gauge is known as : (RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012)
(a) Gap gauge (b) Clearance gauge (RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
(c) Profile gauge (d) Thickness gauge Ans : (c) Plug gauge–
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 • It is used for checking the diameter of holes of
Ans : (b) Feeler gauge– different shape and sizes.
• It is also known as clearance gauge. • At one end, it has a plug of minimum limit size, the
• It is used to measure clearance between mating 'GO' end and at the other end a plug of maximum
parts. limit the 'NO GO' end.
• It consist a number of small length of steel strip of
640. Ring gauge is used for following–
different thickness with measurements marked on
(a) For checking diameter of shafts and studs
each piece.
(b) Checking the accuracy of holes
636. In a small hole gauge to check the minimum
(c) To check the clearance between two mating
size a hole is :
surfaces
(a) 3.8 mm (b) 3.5 mm
(c) 3.6 mm (d) None of above (d) All of the above
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 BEML 2022
Ans : (d) Small hole gauge is a direct measuring DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
instrument. It can measure the diameter of hole from 3.0 Ans : (a) Ring gauge–
mm to 12.7 mm. • It is used for checking the diameter of shafts &
So, this gauge can measure hole minimum of 3 mm. studs.
637. Taper ring gauge is used for : • The 'GO' ring gauge is of a size corresponding to a
(a) Checking inside taper maximum limit of a shaft while the 'NO GO' gauge
(b) Checking outside taper corresponds to minimum limit.
(c) Measuring inside taper 641. Which one of the following slip gauges is used
(d) Measuring out taper for calibration purpose?
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 (a) Grade–'II' (b) Grade–'I'
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (c) Grade–'00' (d) Grade–'0'
Ans : (b) Taper ring gauge is used to check both the DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
accuracy and the outside diameter of a taper.
Ans : (d) Slip gauge–
Taper plug gauge is used to check the size of the hole &
the accuracy of the taper. • It is used as standard for precision length
measurement.
638. Feeler gauge is used to ………
(a) Concave surface • According to BIS, it is designation into four grades.
(b) Convex surface Grade 0 – Calibration grade
(c) Both concave & convex surface Grade 00 – Reference grade
(d) Check the flat surfaces Grade I – Inspection grade
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 Grade II – Workshop grade
642. What is use of thread ring gauge? Ans : (b) Depth gauge–
(a) For checking outer diameter • It is used for measuring things such as depth of
(b) For checking internal thread blind holes, depth of grooves & height of
(c) For checking outside thread protrusions.
(d) For checking internal diameter • It is essentially a narrow steel rule to which a
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 sliding head is clamped at the right angles to rule.
Ans : (c) Plain ring gauge is used to check the outside • The head forms a convenient marker in places
diameter of a workpiece. where the rule must be held in a distance from the
Taper ring gauge is used to check both the accuracy & point being measured.
outside diameter of a taper.
647. Which of the following is used for measuring
Thread ring gauge is used to check the form and
pitch of given screw :
dimensional accuracy of an external thread.
(a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Feeler gauge
643. Which type of gauge is used to check the
(c) Wire gauge (d) Radius gauge
curved radius of concave and convex surface :
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
(a) Fillet gauge (b) Feeler gauge
(c) Slip gauge (d) Snap gauge
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Ans : (a) Screw pitch gauge– It is used to check the
pitch of external and internal threads.
Ans : (a) Fillet gauge is used to check the curved radius
of concave and convex surfaces. • It is also used to compare the profile of threads.
• Feeler gauge is used to check the clearance between 648. Which of the following is used for measuring
mating parts. concave and convex surface?
• Snap gauge is used for checking the external (a) Radius gauge (b) Feeler gauge
dimension. (c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Wire gauge
• Slip gauge is used as standard for precision length DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
measurement. Ans : (a) Radius gauge–
644. Thread gauge is used for checking what? • It is also known as fillet gauge.
(a) For checking diameter of internal cylindrical • It is used to measure the convex & concave surfaces
parts and radius of an object.
(b) For checking diameter of stud • It requires a bright light behind the object to be
(c) For checking pitch diameter of thread measured.
(d) For checking accuracy of holes 649. Thickness of sheet metal is measured by which
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 of the following?
Ans : (c) Thread gauge– It is used to check the (a) Wire gauge (b) Feeler gauge
dimensions of a specific thread from angle, pitch & (c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Radius gauge
diameter. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
645. Taper plug gauge is used to check what? DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
(a) To check diameter of straight hole Ans : (a) Wire gauge–
(b) To check external taper • It is used for measuring diameter of wire &
(c) To check taper hole thickness of sheet metal.
(d) To check the core diameter of internal thread • It consists of different slots cut on the
IOCL 2020 circumference of circular or rectangular strip.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 • These slots are of different sizes and sizes are
DRDO Turner.2016 mentioned on each slot.
Ans : (c) Taper plug gauge– To check the size of hole
and accuracy of taper.
Taper ring gauge– It is used to check both the
accuracy and the outside diameter of a taper.
646. Depth gauge is used for measurement of which
of the following :
(a) External diameter
(b) Depth of blind hole
(c) Depth of hole
(d) Internal diameter
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
650. The following tool is used for setting the job 653. What is the purpose of the screw pitch gauge?
concentric to the machine spindle: (a) Used to find the depth of a drill
(a) Try square (b) Scriber (b) Used to find the width of a file
(c) Bevel protractor (d) Surface gauge (c) Used to find the pitch of a thread
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 (d) None of the above
Ans : (d) Surface gauge– It is a most common marking ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016
tool used for scribing lines parallel to a datum surface, Ans : (c) Screw pitch gauge–
setting jobs on machine parallel to a datum surface, • It is used to measure pitch of thread and also used to
checking the height & parallelism of jobs and setting compare the profile of threads.
job concentric to machine spindle. • It is used to reference tool is determining the pitch
of a thread that is on a screw or in a tapped hole.
• It also save time i.e. remove the need for the user to
measure & calculate the pitch of a threaded item.
654. Which is measured with help of simple
instruments like feeler gauge :
(a) Width of job (b) Length/thickness
(c) Height (d) Diameter
• It is used to measure width of gap & clearance
between mating parts.
651. Clearance of tappet of valve is measured by : • It consist of number of small length of steel strip of
(a) Vernier caliper (b) Screw pitch gauge different thicknesses marked on each piece.
(c) Engineering scale (d) Feeler gauge 655. Minimum thickness measured by standard
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 feeler gauges
NTPC Fitter 2016 (a) 0.03 mm (b) 0.03 inch
(c) 0.03 cm (d) 0.03 m
Ans : (d) Feeler gauge–
• It is used to measure the clearance of tappet of ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016
valve.
• It consists of a number of small length of steel strip • It is used to check the clearance between mating
of different thicknesses with measurements marked parts.
on each piece. • Minimum thickness measured by it = 0.03 mm.
652. Clearance between two mating surface is 656. For mass production, inspection of jobs is
checked by : done by
(a) Snap gauge (b) Optical gauge (a) Gauge
(c) Feeler gauge (d) Wire gauge (b) Measuring instrument
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (c) Template
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am (d) Jig
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 (IOF Fitter 2017)
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 DRDO Turner.2016
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 Ans : (a) Gauge–
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 06.06.2010) • It is a device used to provide certain dimensional
(RRB Allahabad ALP, 03.08.2008) information, according to a specified standard or
Ans : (c) Feeler gauge– system.
• It is used to measure the clearance between matting • It is meant to measure the size of the object but
surfaces. most gauges are mainly used to specify if the
• It consist of a number of small length of steel strip of dimensions of the measuring object are less or
different thicknesses with measurements marked on greater than defined standards that are within the
each piece. tolerance range.
• It is used for inspection of job in case of mass
production.
657. Which one of the following slip gauges is used
for general workshop purpose?
(a) Grade- '0' (b) Grade- 'I'
(c) Grade- '00' (d) Grade- 'II'
Ans : (d) Slip gauge– It is used as standard for Ans : (c) Telescopic gauge–
precision length measurement. • It is an indirect measuring device used to measure
Grade 0 – Calibration grade the internal diameter of a bore, hole, groove, slot
Grade 00 – Reference grade etc.
Grade I – Inspection grade • It consists of a handle, two telescopic rods and a
Grade II – Workshop grade.
locking screw.
658. Lathe tool is aligned with workpiece :
• With the help of a outside micrometer, the
(a) By straight edge (b) Try square
(c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Center gauge telescopic gauge measure the distance of a base.
BHEL 2020 663. Telescopic gauge is ............. measuring tool.
(MAZGAON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (a) Direct (b) Indirect
Ans : (d) Centre gauge– It is used in lathe work for (c) Comparative (d) None of the above
checking the angles when grinding the profiles of a DRDO Fitter.2016
single point screw cutting tool bits and centres. Ans : (b) Telescopic gauge–
659. .................. is checked by dial bore gauge. • It is a indirect measuring device used to measure the
(a) Flatness internal diameter of a bore, hole, groove, slot etc.
(b) Squareness • It consists of a handle, two telescopic rod & a
(c) Diameter of internal base locking screw.
(d) Radius
664. Range of telescopic gauge :
DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) 5 to 100 mm (b) 12.7 to 152.4 mm
Ans : (c) Dial bore gauge–
(c) 10 to 150 mm (d) 10 to 100 mm
• It is mostly used to measure the inner diameter of
bores.
DRDO Fitter.2016
• The speed & accuracy can save a lot of time when
used to measure cuts or hole sizes in home Ans : (b) Telescopic gauge–
remodeling projects. • It is an indirect measuring tool used to measure
660. Which of the following comparator is not a internal diameter of a hole, bore, groove, slot etc.
gauge? • It consist of a handle, two telescopic rods and a
(a) Optical (b) Mechanical locking screw.
(c) Hydraulic (d) Pneumatic • With the help of a micrometer, the telescopic rods
DRDO Fitter.2016 measures the distance of a bore.
Ans :(c) Comparator– • Range of telescopic gauge– 12.7 mm to 152.4 mm.
• It is an indirect type of instrument with the help of 665. V groove is cut on the base of universal surface
which an unknown dimension of workpiece is gauge–
compared with a working standard (usually slip
(a) For reducing weight
gauges).
(b) For setting workpiece
• Hydraulic comparator is not a gauge.
(c) For moving backward and forward on 'V' bed
661. Which instrument is used in workshop to check
of lathe machine
the turned shape?
(d) For increasing its beauty
(a) Template
(b) Snap gauge DRDO Fitter.2016
(c) Dial test indicator and slip gauge Ans : (c) Universal surface gauge–
(d) Tool room microscope • V groove is cut on the base for moving backward &
(IOF Fitter, 2013) forward on 'V bed' of lathe.
Ans : (b) Snap gauge– • Guiding pin is used to draw a parallel line along a
• It is used in workshop to check turned shape. datum edge.
• It is a form of GO/NO GO gauge used for both 666. The part of the universal surface gauge which
cylindrical and non cylindrical parts. helps to draw parallel line along a datum edge
• GO snap gauge is used with a higher limit of shaft is the :
and NO snap gauge is used with a lower limit of a (a) Rocker arm
shaft. (b) Guide pin
662. Measurement of telescopic gauge is checked : (c) Snug
(a) From steel rule (d) Fine adjusting screw
(b) From outside caliper DRDO Fitter.2016
(c) From outside micrometer
Ans : (b) Guiding pin is used to draw a parallel line
(d) Ring gauge
DRDO Fitter.2016 along a datum edge.

667. Accuracy of roughness gauge : 672. Value of angle slip gauge given in figure :
(a) 0.001 mm (b) 0.01 mm
(c) 0.0001 mm (d) 0.05 mm
BDL Technician 2022
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (a) Accuracy of roughness gauge is 0.001 mm.
668. Slip gauge is made of :
(a) Stainless steel
(b) Stabilised chromium steel
(a) 150, 42', 35'' (b) 150, 35', 42''
(c) Carbon steel
(c) 330, 18', 18'' (d) 180, 18', 18''
(d) High speed steel DRDO Turner.2016
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (b) From given slip gauge–
Ans : (b) Slip gauge– Angle in left direction (LHA) = 27° + 9' + 27'
• It is used as standard for precision length = 27°36'
measurement. Angle in right direction (RHA) = 3° + 9° + 18"
• It is made in sets and consist of a number of = 12°18"
hardened blocks made of stabilised chromium steel α = LHA – RHA
with low thermal expansion. = 27°36' – 12°18"
• It is designated into five grades. = 27°35'60" – 12°0'18"
669. The slip gauge is not damaged by the use of = 15°35'42"
protractor slip. It is made of– 673. Value of angle slip gauge given in figure :
(a) Tungsten carbide
(b) Mild steel
(c) Cast steel
(d) Closed grain cast iron
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (a) Slip gauge– It is used as standard for
precision length measurement.
• The slip gauge is not damaged by use of protractor
slip.
• Protractor slip is made of tungsten carbide.
670. Grade I slip gauge is used :
(a) For inspection (a) 140, 24', 18'' (b) 140, 36', 18''
0
(c) 39 , 36', 18'' (d) 390, 18', 36''
(b) By worker in workshop
(c) For calibration
Ans : (a) LHA = 27° + 18" = 27°0'18"
RHA = 3° + 9° + 9' + 27'
= 12° 36'00"
DRDO Turner.2016
α = LHA – RHA
Ans : (a) = 27°0'18" – 12°36'00"
Grade 0 – Calibration grade = 26°60'18" – 12°36'00"
Grade 00 – Reference grade = 14°24'18"
Grade I – Inspection grade 674. ............. is used for cleaning after using slip
Grade II – Workshop grade. gauge.
671. Grade - 00 slip gauge is used : (a) Kerosene oil
(a) By worker in workshop (b) Mobile oil
(b) For inspection (c) Carbon tetra chloride
(c) For checking accuracy of other grades of slip (d) All of the above
gauge (RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.04.2002)
(d) All of the above Ans : (c) Slip gauge–
DRDO Machinist.2016 • It is used as standard for precision length
DRDO Turner.2016 measurement.
Ans : (c) • It is made in sets and consists of number of
Grade 0 – Calibration grade hardened blocks made of high grade steel with low
Grade 00 – Reference grade thermal expansion.
Grade I – Inspection grade • Carbon tetra chloride is used for cleaning after
Grade II – Workshop grade. using slip gauges.

675. Accuracy of gauge is ............. than template. 680. 'GO' & 'NO GO' size of progressive plug gauge
(a) Less (b) More is made on :
(c) Equal (d) None of the above (a) On both sides (b) On one side
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) In the middle (d) None of the above
DRDO Turner.2016 (RRB Kolkata ALP, 14.04.2002)
Ans : (b) Ans : (b) Progressive plug gauge–
• Gauge is used to find out the correct size. The • It is perfect for checking a short hole that is open at
completed objects are measured with a template. both ends.
• The gauge has very high accuracy whereas the • 'GO' and 'NO GO' size is provided on the same side.
template is not much accurate. 681. 'GO' and 'NO GO' end of fixed snap gauge is
676. 'GO' end of limit plug gauge is : on :
(a) Lesser in length (a) Both side (b) Same side
(b) Both ends are equal (c) Different (d) None of the above
(c) Larger in length (RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.06.2010)
(d) All of the above Ans : (a) Snap gauge– It is used as quick means for
(RRB Chennai ALP, 14.04.2002) checking sizes within certain limits by comparing the
Ans : (c) Limit plug gauge– size of the parts with the opening of the gauge.
• Limit gauge is used to ensure that the component • These are of two types
lies within the permissible limit. (i) Solid snap gauge
(ii) Adjustable snap gauge.
• 'GO' end of limit plug gauge is larger in length as
compare to 'NO GO' end of limit plug gauge. • In a fixed or solid gauge 'GO' and 'NO GO' is on
both side.
677. Which of the following statement is true :
682. Gauge is used at which of following standard
(a) Gauge is used for checking size
temperature :
(b) Gauge is used for measuring size
(a) 150C (b) 150F
(c) Gauge is used for checking the size of part 0
(c) 20 F (d) 200C
(d) Template is used for checking the size of part
DRDO Turner.2016
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (d) Gauge–
Ans : (a) Gauge– It is meant to measure the size of the
• It is used to measure the size of the object but most
object but most gauges are mainly used to specify if the
gauges are mainly used to specify if the dimensions
dimensions of the measuring object are less or greater
of the measuring object are less or greater than
than defined standards that are within the tolerance
define standards that are within the tolerance range.
range.
• Gauge is used at 20oC standard temperature.
678. Gauge is made of–
683. Diameter of GO end of limit plug gauge is
(a) Mild steel (b) Alloy steel
equal to :
(c) Cast steel (d) Cast iron
(a) Basic size of hole
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 06.06.2010) (b) Actual size of hole
Ans : (b) Gauge– It is a meant to measure the size of (c) Minimum possible size of hole
the object but most gauge are mainly used to specify if (d) Maximum possible size of hole
dimensions of the measuring object are less or greater (MAZGAON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
than define standards that are within the tolerance Ans : (c) Plug gauge is used to check holes or internal
gauge. dimension.
These are made of alloy steel GO plug gauge– Checks minimum limit of hole.
679. ........... is checked by snap gauge. NO GO plug gauge– Check maximum limit of hole.
(a) Internal size (b) Taper 684. One end of standard plug gauge is threaded
(c) Outer size (d) Threads and other end is plane, ............ is checked by
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 plane edge.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 (a) External diameter of hole
DRDO Turner.2016 (b) External diameter of thread
Ans : (c) Snap gauge– (c) Minor diameter of thread
• It is among the oldest and simplest measuring (d) All of the above
instruments. (IOF Fitter, 2012)
• It is used to measure the outside diameter of round Ans : (c) One end of standard plug gauge is threaded
parts such as shafts and the thickness of many other and other end is plane, minor diameter of thread is
components. checked by plane edge.

Standard thread plug gauge– Ans : (c) Taper ring gauge– A taper ring gauge has a
• One end of it is threaded and other end is plane. step at one end so that the tip or thickness of the job
• It is used to check the form and dimensional should come or go smoothly in the step.
accuracy of the internal threads. • It is used to check both the accuracy and outside
685. Body or handle of plug gauge is of plastic or diameter of taper.
ebonite because : 689. Size of feeler gauge is taken :
(a) Lighter in weight (a) By length of strip
(b) Cheaper and replaceable (b) By radius of strip
(c) Size is not affected by temperature of hand (c) By thickness of strip
while using (d) All of the above
(d) All of the above DRDO Turner.2016
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.06.2010) Ans : (c) Feeler gauge–
Ans : (d) Plug gauge– • It is used to check the clearance of mating parts.
• It is used to check holes or internal dimension. • It consist of number of small length of steel strip of
• It's body or handle is made of plastic or ebonite. different thickness with measurement marked on
each piece.
• 'GO' plug gauge– Lower limit of hole
• Size of feeler gauge is taken by thickness of strip.
• 'NO GO' plug gauge upper limit of a hole.
690. Angle of threading tool is checked by :
686. 'GO' and 'NO GO' end of plain ring gauge is (a) Centre gauge (b) Angle gauge
identified by : (c) Profile gauge (d) Radius gauge
(a) GO end is smaller in length NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(b) NO GO end is taper in length (RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001)
(c) GO end is longer in length
Ans : (a) Centre gauge–
• It is used to measure an included angle on tool bits
DRDO Turner.2016
that are used to cut threads.
Ans : (a) Plain ring gauge– • It is made up of spring steel hardened and tempered
• It is used to check the outside diameter of the & is used for grinding and setting a single point
workpieces. thread cutting tool.
• The GO & NO GO principals of gauging are that 691. Small hole gauge is used :
the 'GO' end of the gauge must go into the feature of (a) Depth of hole (b) Diameter of hole
the component being checked. (c) Depth slot (d) Width of slot
• 'GO end' of plain ring gauge is smaller in length. (RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
687. 'V' groove of plain ring gauge is made on outer Ans : (b) Small hole gauge– It is a precision
surface. It shows ....... measurement tool used to measure small holes, slots
(a) Beauty of gauge and recesses in all kind of work.
(b) 'NO GO' end 692. Telescopic gauge checks :
(c) 'GO' end (a) External diameter (b) Depth
(d) Method of manufacturing/design (c) Internal size (d) Taper
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 DRDO Turner.2016
(RRB Allahabad ALP, 06.06.2010) Ans : (c) Telescopic gauge–
Ans : (b) Plain ring gauge– • It is an indirect measuring device used to measure
• It is used to check the outside diameter of the the internal diameter of a bore, hole, groove, slot
workpieces. etc.
• The 'GO' ring gauge is of size corresponding to the • It consists of a handle, two telescopic rods & a
maximum limit of the shaft, while the 'NO GO' locking screw.
gauge corresponds to minimum limit of the shaft. 693. Adjustable snap gauge consists two adjustable
• V groove cut on outer surface shows 'NO GO' end anvil :
of plain ring gauge. (a) Both sides
688. A tapering gauge consists of a step at one end (b) Single on each sides
whose meaning is : (c) Single side
(a) For design (d) None of the above
(b) For reducing weight (MAZGAON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
(c) End of job must come between this step Ans : (c) Adjustable snap gauge are used for checking
(d) All of the above large size shafts made with horse shoe shaped frame of
DRDO Turner.2016 I section.
• In an adjustable snap gauge, two adjustable jaws are Ans : (b) Workshop gauge–
provided on one side and one fixed anvil on other • The accuracy of workshop gauges are 0.0005" or
side. 0.0025 mm.
• The distance between two anvil is adjusted by • It is used by a machine operator to check the
adjusting the adjustable anvil by means of set dimensions of the components as they are being
screws. produced.
694. What is accuracy of inspection gauge ? • These gauge are designed to keep the size of the
(a) 0.00003" (b) 0.0003" component near the centre limit of the tolerance.
(c) 0.003" (d) 0.03" 699. What is meant by limit gauge?
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002) (a) 'GO' end can go into the hole but 'NO GO'
Ans : (b) Inspection gauge– end does not
• It is used by the inspectors for the final acceptance (b) 'NO GO' end can go into the hole but 'GO'
of manufactured components when finished. end does not
• These gauges have slightly larger tolerance than (c) Both above
workshop gauges. (d) None of the above
• Accuracy of this gauge – 0.0003". (RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
695. Height of workpiece is measured by which Ans : (a) Limit gauge–
instrument? • It is used to determine that the given job lies within
(a) Dial gauge the limit or not.
(b) Slip gauge • It works on principle of 'GO' & 'NO GO'.
(c) Vernier height gauge • 'GO' end of limit gauge can go into the hole but 'NO
(d) None of the above GO' end does not.
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003) 700. ........... is measured by simple caliper.
Ans : (c) Vernier height gauge– (a) Indirect (b) Direct
• It is used for measurement of height of an object (c) Comparable (d) All three
and marking done by help of scriber. (RRB Ranchi ALP, 21.09.2003)
• It is based on principle of difference between main Ans : (a) Simple caliper–
scale and vernier scale like vernier caliper. • It is an indirect measuring instrument.
• It's least count is 0.02 mm or 0.011" • It is used to measure the distance between two
• It is made of stainless steel or mild steel. opposite sides of an object.
696. Depth of groove can be measured accurately by • Some calipers may be as simple as a compass with
which gauge? inward or outward facing points but no scale.
(a) Dial gauge • It is used in many fields such as mechanical
(b) Vernier depth gauge engineering, metal working, forestry, woodworking,
(c) Template science & medicine.
(d) Protractor 701. Which caliper is joined by rivet and washer?
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.06.2010) (a) Spring type (b) Firm joint
Ans : (b) Vernier depth gauge– It is a precision (c) Butt joint (d) None
instrument used to measure depth of holes, recesses, IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
slots & steps within the accuracy of 0.02 mm. (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 14.09.2008)
697. Gauge is made of which metal? Ans : (b) Firm joint caliper–
(a) Tool steel (b) Mild steel • They works on the friction created at junction of
(c) Stainless steel (d) High carbon steel legs.
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 • The two legs are identical in shape with the contact
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 points equally distant form the fulcrum & are joined
Ans : (a) Gauge– It is used to specify if the dimensions together by rivet & washer.
of the measuring object are less or greater than define • The distance between the rivet centre and extreme
standards that are within the tolerance range. working ends of the leg is known as nominal size.
• It is also used for inspection of job in mass 702. What is meant by snap gauge?
production. (a) Which measure gauge length
698. Accuracy of workshop gauge : (b) Which measure gauge width and thickness
(a) 0.00005" (b) 0.0005" (c) Which measures gauge outer diameter
(c) 0.005" (d) 0.05" (d) All above measurement
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
Ans : (d) Snap gauge– Ans : (d)

• It is used to check external dimension like length, • Limit gauge & vernier caliper is used for measuring
width, thickness and height etc. external measurement or slot of a workpiece.
• 'GO' & 'NO GO' principals of gauging are that the • Limit gauge is used to ensure that the component
'GO' end of the gauge must go into the feature of the lies within the permissible limit.
component being checked & 'NO GO' end must go • Vernier caliper is a device used for measuring linear
into the same feature. dimensions.
703. Which gauge is used for measuring hole? 708. What is another name of slip gauge?
(a) Wire gauge (b) Plug gauge (a) Ring gauge
(b) Johnson block gauge
(c) Feeler gauge (d) Ring gauge
(c) Ring gauge
(d) Taper gauge
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016 (RRB Allahabad ALP, 06.06.2010)
Ans : (b) Plug gauge– Ans : (b) Slip gauge–
• It is used to check holes or internal dimension. • It is also known as Johnson block gauge.
'GO' plug gauge– Checks minimum limit of a hole. • It is used as standard for precision length
'NO GO' plug gauge– Checks maximum limit of a measurement.
hole. • It is made in sets and consist of a number of
704. By which gauge external and internal radius of hardened block made of high grade steel with low
workpiece is measured ? thermal expansion.
(a) Radius gauge (b) Plug gauge 709. Telescopic gauge is used for what?
(c) Ring gauge (d) Taper gauge (a) For measuring screw pitch
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 (b) Internal diameter of large hole
Ans : (a) Radius gauge– (c) For measuring taper
• It is also known as fillet gauge. (d) For measuring slot
• It is used to measure external & internal radius of (RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012)
workpiece. Ans : (b) Telescopic gauge–
• It requires a bright light behind the object to be • It is an indirect measuring device used to measure
measured. the internal diameter of a bore, hole, groove, slot
etc.
705. By which gauge screw thread of pitch is
• It consist of a handle, two telescopic rolds and a
measured ?
locking screw.
(a) Ring gauge (b) Plug gauge
(c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Outside micrometer 710. Which of the following gauge is used for
checking threading tool of lathe at an angle of
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016
60o?
Ans : (c) Screw pitch gauge– (a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Thread plug gauge
• It is used to check the pitch of external & internal (c) Centre gauge (d) Thread ring gauge
threads. NTPC Fitter 2016
• It is also used to compare the profile of threads. (RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 29.06.2008)
706. Angle of a drill is measured by which gauge? Ans : (c) Centre Gauge–
(a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Angle gauge • It is used to measure an included angle on tool bits
(c) Ring gauge (d) Plug gauge that are used to cut threads.
BEML 2022 • It is made of spring steel hardened and tempered
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 and is used for grinding and setting a single point
Ans : (b) Angle gauge– thread cutting tool.
• It is made of alloy steel.
• Face of these gauge are tapped.
• It is used for measuring angle, to set the job on the
table of machine and for measuring drill angle.
707. Name of the gauge for measuring external 711. Which grade from the following grades of slip
measurement or slot of a workpiece : gauge for the purpose of laboratory and
(a) Limit gauge (b) Vernier caliper standard?
(c) Feeler gauge (d) Both (a) and (b) (a) Workshop grade (b) Inspection grade
IOCL 2020 (c) Calibration grade (d) None of these
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 (RRB Siliguri ALP, 2014)
Ans : (b) Slip Gauge– It is used as standard for 716. Which of the following is used for measuring
precision length measurement. small gaps?
Grade 0 – Calibration grade (a) Feeler gauge (b) Wire gauge
Grade 00 – Reference grade (c) Slip gauge (d) Naro gauge
Grade I – Inspection grade BHEL 2020
Grade II – Workshop grade (RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012)
712. What is the measuring of gauge in the case of Ans : (a) Feeler Gauge–
railway tracks? • It is used for measuring gap between mating parts.
(a) Distance between outer faces of two tracks • It consist of a number of small length of steel strip
(b) Distance between inner faces of two tracks of different thickness with measurements marked on
(c) Height of rail piece each piece.
(d) Length of concrete slippers 717. Double gauge is used for measurement of
(RRB Jammu-kashmir ALP, 06.06.2010) what?
Ans : (b) In the case of railway tracks the distance (a) Very short distance (b) More distance
between the inner faces of two tracks is measured by (c) Electric field (d) Speed
using gauge or by measuring the inside of two tracks by (RRB Banglore ALP, 08.07.2007)
the gauge to make a rail track. Ans : (a) Double gauge– A double gauge is used to
• Gauges for simple work are made of high carbon measure very short distance.
steel and after hardening are made to correct size by
718. Working principle of dial gauge is based on :
grinding & lapping.
(a) Inclined plane (b) Nut bolt
713. Which gauge is used for checking internal (c) Rack & pinion (d) Lever scale
threads? (RRB Mumbai ALP, 16.07.2006)
(a) Plug gauge (b) Ring gauge
Ans : (c) Dial gauge–
(c) Screw pitch gauge (d) Thread ring gauge
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009) • It is one of the simplest & most widely used
comparators.
Ans : (c) Screw pitch gauge–
• It is primarily used to compare work piece against a
• It is used to check the pitch of external and internal
threads. master.
• It is also used to compare the profile of a thread. • It works on principle of rake & pinion.
• It's least count is 0.01 mm or 0.0004 inch.
714. Gauge are–

(a) Direct measuring instrument
(b) Indirect measuring instrument
(c) Comparatively measuring instrument
(d) Non measuring instrument
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) Gauges–
• It is a indirect measuring tool.
• It is used to measure the size of the object but most
gauges are mainly used to specify if the dimensions 719. Optical gauge works on following principle :
of the measuring objects are less or greater than (a) Reflection (b) Refraction
defined standard that are within. (c) Polarisation (d) Interference
715. Profile of gear tooth is checked by : (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009)
(a) Optical pyrometer (b) Optical projector Ans : (a) Optical gauge– It works on the principle of
(c) Slip gauge (d) Sine bar reflection.
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008) 720. How many piece are there in working of
Ans : (b) Optical projector– general slip gauge?
• It is widely used for inspection purpose. (a) 54 (b) 81
• Profit of gear tooth is checked by it. (c) 118 (d) 30
• It projects a tool dimensional magnified image of (IOF Fitter, 2012)
the workpiece on to a viewing screen to facilitate Ans : (c) There are 112 slip gauges in working of
measurement. general slip gauge.

Micro Measuring Device
Ans. (a) : Tube micrometer is most suitable for
1. Micrometer measuring the thickness of piping. Tube micrometers
have a cylindrical anvil positioned perpendicularly to a
1. On______,in micrometer the graduation is spindle and is used to measure the thickness of the tubes.
marked. 4. What is the name of the part marked as X in
(a) Spindle (b) Thimble the following figure?
(c) Anvil (d) Frame
Ans. (b) : On thimble in micrometer the graduation is
marked. Spindle is fitted on the thimble.
• Graducations are made on its bevel edge surface. (a) Anvil (b) Thimble
• One part of thimble represents the least count of the (c) Spindle (d) Spindle lock
micrometer. BDL Technician 2022
• The size of micrometer and least count are written HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
on the frame. Ans. (a) : Parts of micrometer–
• Anvil is fitted on the axis of the barrel at the left end • Anvil • Spindle • Sleeve • Thimble • Ratchet
of the frame.
• The nut is fitted by cutting the measuring face at
one end of spindle and thread at the other end.
Above the figure X is Anvil.

• Officially answer given is (b).
5. Which pitch threads are cut on spindle of
British System Micrometer?
2. A Metric outside Micrometer of range 100-125 (a) 1/10" (b) 1/40"
mm is used to measure the diameter of a rod. (c) 1/50" (d) 1/100"
Barrel graduation showed 14.5 and the thimble HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
graduation in line with the barrel datum line Ans. (b) : 1/40" pitch threads are cut on spindle of
was 18. What is the diameter of the rod? British system micrometer.
(a) 14.68 mm (b) 14.70 mm
• The essential of a micrometer is an accurately
(c) 114.68 mm (d) 114.18 mm
threaded rod which can be turned in an equally
accurate – threaded guide. The usual pitch of the
Ans. (c) ∴ Range of micrometer = 100-125 mm thread for instruments made for English measure is
Barrel graduation (or) main scale reading 1/40 min. Thus there are 40 threads per inch.
MSR =14.50 mm = 14.50 mm 6. Which metal is used to make face of spindle
Thimble reading = 18×0.01 = + 0.18 mm and anvil of micrometer?
14.68mm (a) Brass (b) Copper
Therefore, (c) Carbide tip (d) Aluminium
Diameter of rod = 100 + 14.68 mm
D = 114.68 mm
Ans. (c) : Micrometer–It is used for measuring
3. Which of the following micrometer is most external dimension and thickness.
suitable for measuring the thickness of piping
(a) Tube Micrometer (b) Depth Micrometer • It works on principle of nut & bolt assembly.
(c) Flange Micrometer (d) Micrometer stops • Face of anvil & spindle of micrometer are made of
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 carbide tip.
Micro Measuring Device 149 YCT

7. Micrometer frame is made of 11. Least count of a Vernier bevel protractor is

(a) stainless steel (b) chromium steel .............
(c) high speed steel (d) Invar steel (a) 15' (b) 20'
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (c) 1' (d) 5'
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
Ans. (d) : Micrometer frame is made of invar steel. The Ans. (d) : The least count of bevel protector 5'. It is
frame of the micrometer houses all of the component commonly used for angular measurement where more
that don't move relative to the spindle. precision is required like for angular measurement in
8. Which of the following is trapezoidal thread? workshops.
(a) Acme (b) Square • The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
(c) Buttress (d) All of the above instrument meant for measuring angles to an
accuracy of 5 minutes i.e. (1/12)o i.e. 12th part of 1o.
DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
Ans. (a) : Acme thread is identical thread with respect 12. The least count of a metric Micrometer is-
to trapezoidal thread, angle of acme method is 29º. The (a) 0.001 mm (b) 0.01 mm
depth of the thread = 0.5P + 0.25. (c) 0.05 mm (d) 0.02 mm
• An Acme thread is a form of trapezoidal thread BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
forms frame are screw thread profiles with ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
trapezoidal outline. Ans. (b) : The least count of a metric micrometer is
• The trapezoidal thread has an included angle of 30o. 0.01 mm.
• Acme thread has an included angle of 20o. • Least count of any instrument is the smallest value
that can measure accurately.
• A micrometer is an instrument for precise
measurement of small distance.
• The sleeve which moves in the spindle by turning, It
is graduated with scale divisions that provide a
measuring accuracy of 1/100 (0.01) mm.
13. Least count of Vernier bevel protector is _____
(a) 5 minutes (b) 5 seconds
Where, P = Pitch of thread (c) 10 minutes (d) 10 seconds
9. How much is the included angle for a V-belt ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
(a) 10º-20º (b) 30º-40º Ans. (a) : Least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5
(c) 50º-60º (d) 80º-90º minutes.
Instrument Least count
Ans. (b) : The included angle for a V-belt is 30º-40º.
Vernier bevel protractor 5' (five minutes)
The nominal included angle of the V-belt shall be 40:
Sine bar 1' (one minute)
Angle gauge block 1" (one second)
Vernier caliper 0.02 mm
Vernier micrometer 0.001 mm
Dial caliper 0.01 mm
• Note–V-belt drives are generally used when the
distance between the shaft is too short for flat belt 14. What is the principle of micrometer?
drives. Its advantage is less vibration and noise. Also (a) Sliding
easy replacement and maintenance. (b) Screw and nut
10. Name the part of the micrometer that helps in (c) Rack and pinion
maintaining uniform pressure on the job (d) Worm and worm wheel
during measurements. HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
(a) Ratchet stop (b) Thimble HPSSC Jr. Technician Fitter 30.08.2018
(c) Lock nut (d) None of the above NTPC Fitter 2014
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) Mazagon Dock Ltd. Fitter 2013
Ans. (a) : Micrometer used to take the outside Ans. (b) : A micrometer works on the principle of a
measurement are known as outside micrometers. The screw and nut.
ratchet stop ensure uniform pressure between measuring • It allows you an axial rotation of the barrel like
surface. structure also known as thimble.
• A micrometers is a precision instrument used to • Thimble are used to measure the distance of the
measure a job generally with an accuracy of 0.01 mm. object.
• The ratchet stop or simply ratchet ensures uniform • Micrometer is a sensitive tool for making accurate
pressure between the measuring surfaces. measurement of linear dimensions.
15. A micrometer has a negative error of 0.02 mm. Ans. (c) : Screw thread micrometer is used to measure
If micrometer reading is 21.42 mm then what the pitch diameter and pitch of thread directly.
will be actual reading • It is similar to ordinary micrometer, it is provided
(a) 21.40 mm (b) 21.38 mm with contact point.
(c) 21.44 mm (d) 21.45 mm • It has two ends one is connected with a spindle and
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 another end has a fixed anvil with corresponding
Ans. (c) : Negative error in micrometer = 0.02. recess.
Micrometer reading = 21.42 • The spindle is in 'V' shape (55o to British thread and
Actual reading = Micrometer reading + negative 60o for metric thread)
reading 19. Instrument used to measure diameter of
= 0.02 + 21.42 circular stick is –
= 21.44 mm (a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer
16. Identify the part 'A' in the outside micrometer (c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer
Ans. (c) : Outside micrometer is used to measure the
diameter of circular sticks.
Out side micrometer–
• Micrometer works on the principle of nuts and bolts
or lead and pitch of screw.
(a) Barrel (b) Spindle • Least count of its 0.01 mm or 10 micron.
(c) Thimble (d) Ratchet • It has single start Acme threads.
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 • Main scale is calibrated on sleeve/barrel and ground
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 scale is situated on thimble.
• Pitch of screw thread is 0.5 mm and no. of divisions
Ans. (c) : Thimble–The thimble is the component that
on thimble scale is 50.
encompasses the barrel. In order to calculate the
rotations, it contains circular measurements. Pitch ( or lead )
Sleeve–It has a chrome finish and is zero-setting • Least count = Total division thimble
adjustable.
Ratchet–This component is located at the device's tip. 0.5
= = 0.01mm
It functions as a handle that, by sliding with a set 50
torque, regulates the pressure applied. 20. The depth micrometer is use for the
Anvil and spindle–A fixed anvil on the micrometer measurement of a wide range of sizes because
sticks out 3 mm from the left-side frame. The spindles __________.
diameter and the anvil's diameter are the same. (a) it has a length graduated sleeve
17. Least count of outside vernier micrometer is (b) it has a number of extension rods for the
____ different range of sizes
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.001 mm (c) it has a very lengthy spindle
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.02 mm (d) it has adjustable stock for different size
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 settings
Ans. (b) : Least count of outside vernier micrometer is NLC Technician 24-09.2022
0.001 mm. RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
Vernier micrometer– When we have to make a job Ans. (b) : The depth micrometer is use for the
with one micron in metric system and one micron in measurement of a wide range of size because it has a
British system measuring upto ten thousands of an inch. number of extension rods the different range of sizes.
1/10000 mm or 0.0001" then we used vernier • Least count of depth micrometer is 0.01 mm.
micrometer. • Graduation of depth micrometer is reciprocal to the
• In metric vernier micrometer draw 10 equally ordinary micrometer.
spaced lines on the sleeve parallel to the datum 21. The part of the metric micrometer which
lines, this are called vernier divisions. These 10 carries the 0.01 mm graduation is called a
lines on thimble made equal to 9 lines. _____________
18. One of the precision instruments used to check (a) sleeve (b) carrier
the dimensional accuracy of an external V (c) spindle (d) thimble
thread is a screw thread micrometer. Which
RRB ALP Patna 2014
one of the following elements of a screw thread
micrometer ? Ans. (d) : The part of the metric micrometer which
(a) Major diameter (b) Minor diameter carries the 0.01 mm graduation is called a thimble.
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Pitch • The part of the metric micrometer which carries the
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 0.5 mm graduation is called sleeve or barrel.

Parts of micrometer– 25. The least count of outside micrometer is _____

1. Frame– Forged steel or cast iron. (a) 0.02 mm (b) 0.001 mm
2. Barrel/sleeve– Datum line is made. (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.1 mm
3. Thimble– It carries round scale and represents the RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
least count of micrometer. Ans. (c) : The least count of outside micrometer is 0.01
4. Spindle– One end is measuring face and other end mm. (in metric system).
is threaded. 1
5. Anvil– It is made of alloy steel • Least count = = 0.001"( inches )
1000
6. Spindle lock nut– Used to lock the spindle to take
the reading. • Least count of vernier micrometer is 0.001 mm
7. Ratchet stop– Used to control the pressure. • Least count of vernier caliper is 0.02 mm.
22. Name the instrument to measure wall thickness 26. The instrument used to measure the thickness
of hydraulic pipe. of closely spaced section is _________
(a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer (a) disc type micrometer
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer (b) blade type micrometer
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 (c) internal micrometer
Ans. (d) : Tube micrometer is used to measure the wall (d) external micrometer
thickness of hydraulic pipe or pipe shared work pieces. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
• In its fixed anvil is situated at 90o from spindle. RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
• It is also known as span micrometer. Ans. (c) : Internal micrometer is used to measure the
23. Name the instrument to measure height of thickness of closely spaced section.
block step. • Least count of internal/inside micrometer is 0.01
(a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer mm. or 0.001" (inch) in British system.
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer • These micrometer does not have a frame.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 • These micrometer can measure 50-60 mm without
Ans. (a) : Depth micrometer is used to height of block extension rod.
step. 27. Determine the reading of the micrometer from
Depth micrometer– Depth micrometer is used to the figure.
measure the depth of bores, counter bores, rods, internal
slots and holes with accuracy, depth can be measured
along a large range by fitting an extension and over
micrometer. An outside micrometer has graduations in
the opposite direction.
(a) 7.32 mm (b) 7.31 mm

(c) 7.35 mm (d) 7.30 mm
Ans. (b) : Reading of micrometer–
Main scale reading (M.S.R.) = 7.00 mm.
Thimble or round scale = 31 × 0.01 mm.
Reading = + 0.31 mm
7.31 mm
Note– Thimble reading = coincide of thimble line ×
least count.
24. Which one is most precise ?
(a) Scale (b) Micrometer 28. On an outside micrometer, calibration and
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of the above datum lines are marked on the –
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (a) frame (b) thimble
(c) spindle (d) barrel
Ans. (b) : Precision Instruments– Precision
instruments are necessary in the modern era to make RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
and measure all tools and measurements with precision, Ans. (d) : Parts of outside micrometer– The following
there are called precision instruments because they are parts–
used for very precise measurements. 1. Frame– Cast iron or forged steel.
• The following precision instruments are used in 2. Barrel or sleeve– The part attached on the frame
work shop– with the graduated datum line.
• Micrometer • Vernier caliper • Dial gauge • Vernier 3. Thimble– It is connected to the spindle and
bevel protector • Sine bar • Optical projector. graduations are marked on its bevel edge.

4. Spindle– One end of the spindle is the measuring

face and other end is threaded, which is mounted on a
nut (barrel/sleeve)
5. Spindle lock nut– For locking the spindle in a
desired position after taking any reading.
6. Ratchet stop– To ensure equal pressure between the
measuring surface with ratchet stop the micrometer is
called as safe micrometer.
29. Reading of the following metric micrometer
shall be – (a)
Contact error
(b)
Equidistant error
(c)
Respective principle error
(d)
Observatory error
Ans. (d) : Observation error– Parallel error is found in
(a) 20.15 mm (b) 20.75 mm dial test indicator scale and instruments, the reason for
(c) 21.14 mm (d) 20.14 mm this is the distance between the scale and the indicator.
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 If we lock at the indicator from slant side rather than
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 looking straight at it, then the indicator will show a
Ans. (c) : Reading of metric micrometer– higher or lower reading.
Main scale reading = 21.00 mm Type of error–
(1) Systematic error (2) Geometric error (3) Random
Thimble reading = 14 × 0.01
error (4) Instrument error (5) Parallel error (6)
= 0.14 mm
Temperature error (7) Contact error (8) Observation
Total reading = MSR + Thimble reading error (9) Elastic deformation error (10) Cosine error.
= 21 + 0.14
32. Identify the part 'X' of a micrometer from the
Total reading = 21.14 mm figure.
30. Identify the micrometer shown in the figure.
(a) Anvil (b) Ratchet stop

(c) Frame (d) Spindle lock
(a) Outside micrometer RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(b) Inside micrometer Ans. (b) : Identity the part marked by 'X' is ratchet stop.
(c) Screw thread micrometer
(d) Depth micrometer
Ans. (b) : Inside micrometer– This micrometer does
not have a frame. One of its end has adjustable anvil
and other end has fixed anvil.
• It has a 1/2 inches spacing collar. It does not have a
ratchet stop and frame. Parts of micrometer–
• Anvil • Spindle • Frame • Sleeve • Thimble
• It is used extension rods for measuring. Its least
count is 0.001" (inches) or 0.01 mm. • Ratchet stop.
31. While taking reading by a dial indicator, if it is 33. What is the zero reading of a 50-70 mm outside
looked from an angle rather than looking micrometer?
straight then the indicator will show either (a) 0.00 mm (b) 0.01 mm
lower or higher reading. Which of the following (c) 25.00 mm (d) 50.00 mm
shall be the error? RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012

Ans. (d) : The micrometers range of measuring size is 37. There is positive error of 0.02 mm in a
50-70 mm, the zero reading of it is 50 mm. micrometer gives a measurement of 25.41 mm
• Zero reading of micrometer 50-75 mm is 50 mm. then what will the correct reading?
• Zero reading of micrometer 25-75 mm is 25 mm. (a) 25.39 mm (b) 25.37 mm
34. The meaning of zero error in a micrometer is – (c) 25.43 mm (d) 25.45 mm
(a) minor gap between the spindle and anvil NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
(b) micrometer is correct NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(c) zero mark is not visible on the thimble RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
(d) when the measuring face is in contact and Ans. (a) :
zero on the thimble and zero on the datum Micrometer reading = 25.41 mm
line do not meet each other Positive zero error = 0.02 mm
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 ∴ correct reading = 25.41 – 0.02 mm
Ans. (d) : Zero errors– When the measuring face is in = 25.39 mm
contact and zero on the thimble and zero on the datum
line do not meet each other. 38. What is the value of micrometer setting in the
following figure ?
• On the thimble coincides with the zero mark on the

(a) 2.30 mm (b) 2.31 mm
datum line near the datum line, then there is not
zero error, otherwise there is zero error. (c) 2.34 mm (d) 2.36 mm
Zero errors are two types– RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(1) Positive zero error Ans. (b) :
(2) Negative zero error. Main scale reading = 2.00 mm
35. The ratchet stop in a micrometer helps in – Thimble reading = 31 × 0.1
(a) controlling the pressure = + 0.31 mm
(b) locking the spindle Total reading = 2.31 mm
(c) adjusting the zero error 39. What is the value of micrometer setting in the
(d) holding the job following figure ?
Ans. (a) : The ratchet stop in a micrometer helps in
controlling the pressure. Ratchet stop maintain a
uniform pressure on micrometer during measuring with
the ratchet stop, micrometer is known as safe
micrometer.
36. There is a negative error of 0.03 mm in a
micrometer. If the micrometer gives a
measurement of 40.53 mm then, what will be (a) 12.69 mm (b) 12.68 mm
the correct reading ? (c) 13.00 mm (d) 12.65 mm
(a) 40.50 mm (b) 40.56 mm
(c) 40.46 mm (d) 40.59 mm
Ans. (a) :
Ans. (b) : Given data,
Micrometer reading = 40.53 mm Main scale reading = 12.50 mm
Negative error = 0.03 mm Thimble reading = 19 × 0.01
Correct reading of micrometer = Reading + Negative = + 0.19 mm
error. Total reading = 12.69 mm.
= 40.53 + 0.03 mm 40. In which of the following micrometers, the
= 40.56 mm graduations of thimble and sleeve are made in
Note– opposite direction with respect to an outside
• Correct reading = micrometer reading + negative micrometer ?
zero error (a) Inside micrometer (b) Depth micrometer
• Correct reading = micrometer reading – positive (c) Tube micrometer (d) Flange micrometer
zero error. RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003

Ans. (b) : In depth micrometers, the graduations of • Different types of micrometers have measuring
thimble and sleeve are made in opposite direction with ranges of between 25 mm and 1 inch.
respect to an outside micrometer. • This translates of the incremental metric
• Depth can be measured along a long a large range by measurements of 0-25 mm, 25-50 mm, 50-75 mm
fitting an extension rod over the micrometer. and 500 mm.
41. Identify part 'X' from the figure. • The imperial versions are equal to 0-1 inches, 1-2
inches, 2-3 inches etc.
45. There is an error in the outside micrometer. An
accurate reading can be taken by –
(a) adding negative error to actual reading
(b) subtracting negative error from actual reading
(c) adding double negative
(d) subtracting double negative error from actual
(a) Thimble cap (b) Thimble reading
(c) Graduation marks (d) Stock BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans. (b) : The part marked by 'X' is thimble. Ans. (a) : Accurate reading of micrometer it zero
Part of depth micrometer– reading is presents.
(1) Correct reading = Micrometer reading – positive
• Extension rod
zero error
• Stock (2) Correct reading = Micrometer reading + negative
• Lock zero error.
• Graduated sleeve Zero error– During zero setting, when zero graduation
• Thimble of thimble does not coincide with the datum line of
• Cap. sleeve or barrel is called as zero error. If it is coincide
42. In an external micrometer, the face and spindle with datum line then there is not zero error present.
of the anvil is made of the following – 46. In a vernier micrometer, vernier scale is
(a) cast iron (b) chromium steel graduated on...
(c) tungsten carbide (d) aluminium alloy (a) thimble (b) spindle
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 (c) barrel (d) frame
Ans. (b) : Parts of external micrometer and their
materials– Ans. (c) : Vernier micrometer– In a vernier
micrometer, vernier scale is graduated on barrel or
• Face and spindle– Tungsten carbide/High carbon
sleeve.
steel.
• Main scale is also graduated on sleeve or barrel.
• Frame – Cast iron/forged steel.
• Datum line also situated on sleeve or barrel.
43. The micrometer works on the principle of
• Vernier scales and datum line are parallel to each
(a) ratio of gears (b) rake and pinion other.
(c) difference between (d) bolts and nuts
• Round scales are graduated on thimble.
• 10 vernier graduation lines, marked on the parallel
Ans. (d) : The micrometer works on the principle of to the datum line, is equal to nine (9) division of
nuts and bolts. thimble scale.
Working principles of micrometer– Least count–
• A micrometer works on the principle of a screw and
∵ Value of 10 V.D. vernier scale = the value 9 Division
nut.
of thimble scale
• The linear distance travelled by a spindle in one = 9 × 0.01 = 0.09 mm
round is equal to the pitch of the screw.
∴ Value of 1 Division of vernier scale
• The screw used in micrometer is single start thread
and Acme thread. 0.09
= = 0.009 mm
44. Metric micrometers are available in the 10
following ranges– ∴ Least count = 1 thimble division – 1 vernier division
(a) 25 mm (b) 50 mm = 0.01 – 0.009 mm
(c) 75 mm (d) 5 mm = 0.001 mm.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 47. The value of one thimble scale division in
Ans. (a) : Metric micrometer available in following metric micrometer is ........
ranges– A range of 25 mm is marked on all (a) 1 mm (b) 0.5 mm
micrometers, such as, 0-25 mm, 50-75 mm, 75-100 mm, (c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.01 mm
100-125 mm and 125-150 mm etc. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (d) : The value of one thimble scale division in a Ans. (c) : The zero error of a 50-75 mm out side
metric micrometer is 0.01 mm. micrometer can be checked with test piece.
• The value of one main scale division is 0.5 mm. • While depth micrometer's zero error can be checked
• Least count of metric micrometer is 0.01 mm. with surface plate.
• Least count of vernier micrometer is 0.001 mm. 53. The value of the smallest division on sleeve of a
48. The faces of anvil and spindle of outside metric outside micrometer is
micrometer is made of…. (a) 0.50 mm (b) 1.00 mm
(a) Cast iron (b) Steel (c) 1.50 mm (d) 2.00 mm
(c) Tungsten carbide (d) Aluminium alloy RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 Ans. (a) : The value of smallest division on sleeve of a
Ans. (c) : The faces of anvil and spindle of outside metric outside micrometer is equal to pitch of screw
micrometer is made of tungsten carbide. 0.50 mm.
It is made of tungsten carbide due to its wearing and • The screw of micrometer has single start and acme
abrasion resistance property. threads, having pitch 0.5 mm.
49. The zero checking is done for (0-25 mm) depth 54. If the zero graduation of the thimble division of
micrometer on a an outside micrometer is below the datum line,
(a) Test piece (b) Setting ring when the measuring faces of the micrometer
(c) Surface plate (d) Straight edge are in contact, the error is
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (a) Negative (b) Positive
Ans. (c) : The zero checking is done for (0-25 mm) (c) Zero (d) None
depth micrometer on a surface plate. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• While the zero error of a 50-75 mm outside
Ans. (b) : If the zero graduation of the thimble division
micrometer can be checked with test piece.
of an outside micrometer is below the datum line. When
50. The smallest inside micrometer has the the measuring face of the micrometer are in contact, the
graduation marked on the sleeve to a range of error is called as positive zero error.
(a) 10 mm (b) 12 mm
• If the zero graduation of the thimble division of an
(c) 13 mm (d) 25 mm outside micrometer is above the datum line, when
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 the measuring face of the micrometer are in contact,
Ans. (c) : Micrometer head– It consists a sleeve a the error is called as negative zero error.
thimble, an anvil and locking screw for extension rods.
55. A depth micrometer can be used to measure
The smallest inside micrometer has the graduation
wide range of sizes because
marked on the sleeve to a range of 13 mm.
(a) It is equipped with a number of extension
1
• Inside micrometer can measure inch because it rods
2 (b) It has a lengthy spindle
1 (c) It has a lengthy sleeve
has a inch spacing collar. Thus this micrometer
2 (d) Is has an adjustable base
can measure smallest value 13 mm or 1/2 inch. IOCL 2020
51. A micrometer has a positive error of 0.02 mm. RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
What is the correct reading when the Ans. (a) : A depth micrometer can be used to measure
micrometer measures 25.41 mm? wide range of size because it is equipped with a number
(a) 25.39 mm (b) 25.37 mm of extension rods. Its zero error can be check with
(c) 25.43 mm (d) 25.45 mm surface plate.
BEML 2022
56. Metric outside micrometer has a threaded
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 spindle with a pitch of
Ans. (a) : (a) 0.5 mm (b) 0.25 mm
∵ Micrometer reading = 25.41 mm (c) 1.00 mm (d) 1.50 mm
and positive zero error = 0.02 mm RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
∴ correct reading = 25.41 – 0.02 mm Ans. (a) : The spindle of an ordinary metric micrometer
= 25.39 mm has 2 threads per millimeter and thus one compete
52. Zero error of a 50 - 75 mm outside micrometer revolution moves the spindle through a distance of
can be checked with 0.5 millimeters.
(a) Dial test indicator • The longitudinal line on the sleeve is graduated with
(b) Vernier height gauge 1 millimeter divisions graduated with 1 millimeter
(c) Test piece divisions and 0.5 millimeters subdivisions.
(d) Feeler gauge Hence, metric outside micrometer has a threaded
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 spindle with a pitch of 0.5 mm.

57. Zero error in micrometer means 62. Which inside dimension is not possible to
(a) There is negligible gap between the spindle measure by the inside micrometer….
and the anvil (a) 10.45 (b) 26.35
(b) Micrometer is true (c) 76.20 (d) 110.55
(c) Zero mark on the thimble is not visible NTPC Fitter 2016
(d) Zero on thimble and datum line on sleeve do RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
not coincide when measuring faces are in
Ans. (a) : 10.45 mm (less than 1/2 or 13 mm) inside
contact
dimension.
63. Write the reading of the 0-25 mm micrometer
Ans. (d) : Zero error in micrometer means, zero on setting shown in figure.
thimble and datum line on sleeve do not coincide when
measuring face are in contact. It is two type one is
positive zero error and another is negative zero error.
58. An outside micrometer has a negative error.
The correct reading can be taken by
(a) Adding the negative error in the actual
reading
(b) Deducting the negative error from the actual
reading (a) 7.34 (b) 7.33
(c) Adding twice the negative error in the actual (c) 7.32 (d) 7.31
reading RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
(d) Deducting twice the negative error from the Ans. (d) :
actual reading Main scale reading = 7.00 mm
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 Thimble reading = 0.01 × 31
Ans. (a) : If an outside micrometer has a negative error, = 0.31 mm
then the correct reading can be taken by adding the Total reading = 7.31 mm
negative error in the actual reading. 64. If '0' graduation of the thimble is above the
59. In a metric micrometer, a complete revolution datum line, when the measuring faces are in
of thimble advances contact, the error is …….
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.25 mm (a) zero (b) positive
(c) 0.50 mm (d) 1.00 mm (c) positive and negative (d) negative
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 BHEL 2020
Ans. (c) : In metric micrometer, a complete revolution RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
of the thimble advances 0.5 mm in axial direction. Ans. (d) : If '0' graduation of the thimble is above the
60. A micrometer has negative error 0.03 mm datum line, when the measuring face are in contact, the
shows a reading of 25.52 mm. The correct error is negative zero error.
dimension is ……
(a) 25.57 mm (b) 25.55 mm
(c) 25.57 mm (d) 25.60 mm
Ans. (b) : Micrometer reading = 25.52 mm
Negative error = 0.03 mm
65. Name the part marked "X" in figure.
Correct reading = 25.52 + 0.03 mm
= 25.55 mm
61. What is the part used to change the range of
depth Micrometer?
(a) Thimble (b) Stock
(c) Graduated sleeve (d) Extension rod
RRB Chennai ALP 27.10.2002
Ans. (d) :
• The depth micrometer consists of a stock on which
a graduated sleeve is fitted. (a) Spindle (b) Anvil
• The extension rod is used to change the range of (c) Thimble (d) Barrel sleeve
depth micrometer these extension rods can be RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
inserted inside the thimble and the sleeve. Ans. (c) : The part marked by 'X' in figure is known as
• The extension rods may be removed and replaced thimble, there are 50 graduations on thimble and the
according to the size of depth to be measured. value of one division is 0.01 mm.

66. Name the division marked ‘X’ indicate? Ans. (c) : The instrument used to measure the thickness
of closely spaced sections is internal micrometer.
71. Number of graduations on the thimble of a
metric micrometer––––
(a) 10 (b) 50
(a) Main scale division (c) 100 (d) 1000
(b) Vernier graduations RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) Datum line Ans. (b) : Number of graduations on the thimble of a
(d) Thimble graduations metric micrometer 50.
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 72. The part of the metric micrometer which
carries the 0.01 mm graduation is called a
Ans. (b) : The part/division marked by 'X' indicates the
…………
vernier graduations.
(a) sleeve (b) carrier
• There are 10 vernier graduations parallel to the
(c) spindle (d) thimble
datum line.
• There are 10 vernier graduations equal to 9
graduation of thimble.
Ans. (d) : The part of the metric micrometer which
• The value of 1 graduation of vernier is 0.009 mm.
carries the 0.01 mm graduation is called as thimble.
• The value of 1 graduation of thimble is 0.01 mm.
73. The diameter of finish turned shaft can best be
• Least count of vernier micrometer is 0.001 mm. checked with a ..............
67. Name the instrument to measure the diameter (a) Slip gauge (b) Height gauge
of round rod. (c) Dial indicator (d) Micrometer
(a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer Ans. (d) : The diameter of finish turned shaft can best
RRB ALP Patna 2014 be checked with a outside micrometer.
Ans. (c) : The instrument used to measure the diameter 74. Determine the least count when one main scale
of round rod is outside micrometer. equal to 1 mm and one vernier division equal to
• Inside micrometer is used to measure the internal 9/10.
diameter of hole. (a) 1.00 mm (b) 0.10 mm
• Depth micrometer is used to measure the bore (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.001 mm
depth. RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
• Tube micrometer is used to measure the sheet Ans. (b) : Determine the least count when one main
thickness and wall thickness of pipe/tube. scale equal to 1 mm and one vernier division equal to
68. The degree of repeatability of an instrument is 9/10.
expressed by .............. Least count=1 main scale value – 1 vernier scale value.
(a) Measure (b) Precision 9
= 1 mm – m
(c) Traceability (d) Hysteresis 10
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 1
Ans. (b) : The degree of repeatability of an instrument = mm = 0.10 mm
10
is expressed by precision.
75. For measuring the holes with a diameter
69. The smallest magnitude which can be greater than 50 mm, which one of the following
accurately measured using any measuring instruments is preferred :
instrument is called as .............
(a) Internal micrometer
(a) Least count (b) Small count
(b) External micrometer
(c) Parallax count (d) Device count (c) Height gauge
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (d) Depth gauge
Ans. (a) : The smallest magnitude which can be RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
accurately using any measuring instrument is called as Ans. (a) : For measuring the holes with diameter greater
least count. than 50 mm, internal micrometer is preferred.
70. The instrument used to measure the thickness 76. For internal measurement with an accuracy of
of closely spaced sections is ............. 0.01 mm which one of the following
(a) Disc type micrometer instruments is preferred -
(b) Blade type micrometer (a) External micrometer (b) Height gauge
(c) Internal micrometer (c) Internal micrometer (d) Depth gauge
(d) External micrometer BDL Technician 2022
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
Ans. (c) : For internal measurement with an accuracy of (a) Width of crest (b) Minor diameter
0.01 mm. Internal micrometer is preferred. Internal (c) Major diameter (d) Pitch diameter
diameter is a measuring instrument used to measure RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
internal diameter (D) of a large cylinder bore with high
Ans. (d) : Pitch diameter of an external screw thread
accuracy.
can not be measured directly with precision instruments.
77. Screw thread micrometer is used to measure:
(a) Length of the screw (b) Pitch diameter 82. The reading of a vernier outside micrometer as
(c) Outer diameter (d) None of these shown in Fig. is
Ans. (b) : Screw thread micrometer is used to measure
pitch diameter.
Screw thread micrometer–
• It is used for measuring the diameter for pitch of the
thread.
• This micrometer is similar to an outside
micrometer.
• The only difference is that its spindle and anvil are (a) 12.240 mm (b) 12.243 mm
made at 60o angle in order to fit on the 'V' thread. (c) 12.244 mm (d) 12.654 mm
• This micrometers are available in many sizes RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
according to the pitch of the threads. Ans. (b) :
78. Which one of the following parts is used for Main scale reading = 12.00 mm = 12.00 mm
locking the micrometer at any desired setting?
Thimble reading = 24 × 0.01 = 0.24 mm
(a) Spindle clamp (b) Frame
Vernier scale reading = 0.001 × 3 = 0.003 mm
(c) Barrel (d) Anvil
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 Total reading = 12.243 mm
Ans. (a) : Spindle clamp part is used for locking the 83. Depth micrometers are used in measuring
micrometer at any desired setting. different elements of work piece. For which
79. Which type of micrometer having the one of the following measurements a depth
advantage of the readings are seen in the screen micrometer is not suitable?
or dial directly? (a) Depth of holes
(a) Ball micrometer (b) Depth micrometer (b) Heights of shoulders and projections
(c) Digital micrometer (d) Flange micrometer (c) Depth of "V" threads
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 (d) Depth of grooves and recesses
Ans. (c) : Advantage of digital micrometer– NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
1. Fast reading as the reading is displayed.
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
2. Lower error, it eliminated human error.
3. Easy conversion Ans. (d) : Depth micrometers are used in measuring
4. Zero setting made easy at any point. different elements of work piece. For measurements of
5. Transferable data. depth grooves and recesses depth micrometer is not
80. The checking born with three-point internal suitable.
micrometer, the type of error detected is…. 84. The instrument which has all the features of
(a) Micro geometrical error try-square, bevel protractor, rule and scriber,
(b) Macro geometrical error is
(c) Temperature error (a) Outside micrometer
(d) Observation error (b) Inside micrometer
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (c) Depth gauge micrometer
Ans. (b) : The checking born with three pointed internal (d) Combination
micrometer, the type of error detected is macro
geometrical error.
Ans. (d) : The instrument which has all three features of
81. Which one of the following elements of an
external screw thread cannot be measured try-square, bevel protector, rule and scriber is
directly with precision instruments? combination set.

Ans. (d) : The zero reading of a 50-75 mm micrometer

is 50 mm.
90. Circular scale of the micrometer is marked on
(a) Barrel (b) Thimble
(c) Ratchet (d) Spindle
Ans. (b) :
85. Name the instrument to measure the diameter

of hole.
(a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer Micrometer– It is used for measuring length, diameter
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 and thickness based on the principal of nut and bolt.
Ans. (b) : Inside micrometer is used to measure the • It can measure up to 0.01 mm or 0.001 cm least
diameter of hole. count.
• Depth micrometer is used to measure the depth of Main components–
bore slots and grooves. • Frame • Ratchet stop • Anvil • Spindle • Sleeve
• Outside micrometer is used to measure the out side • Thimble.
diameter of bar or shaft. • Circular scale of the micrometer is marked on
thimble.
• Tube micrometer is used to measure the wall
• The thimble is the mechanism that advance the
thickness of tubes.
spindle on the micrometer.
86. Name the instrument to measure the height of 91. A work piece has a bore of 12.37 mm which can
shoulders and projections. be measured:
(a) Depth micrometer (b) Inside micrometer (a) By steel rule (b) By micrometer
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Tube micrometer (c) By plug gauge (d) By air gauge
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (a) : Depth micrometer is used to measure the UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
height of shoulders and projections. Ans. (b) : A work piece has a bore of 12.37 mm which
87. Micrometer can measure upto an accuracy of– can be measured by micrometer.
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm • Micrometer is used for measuring length diameter
and thickness based on the principal of nut and bolt.
(c) 0. 1 mm (d) 0.2 mm
• It can measure up to 0.01 mm or 0.001 cm least
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 count.
Ans. (a) : Micrometer can measure upto an accuracy of 92. The least count of metric micrometer is–
0.01 mm. It is also known as least count of an (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.05 mm
micrometer. (c) 0.10 mm (d) 0.50 mm
88. The purpose of ratchet stop micrometer screw UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
gauge is – Ans. (a) : The least count of metric micrometer 0.01
(a) To lock dimension mm. It is used of micro measurement based on the
(b) To impart blow motion principal of nut and bolt.
(c) To maintain sufficient and uniform measuring 93. Metric outside micrometer has a threaded
pressure spindle with a pitch of :
(d) To take care of wear of screw threads (a) 0.5 mm (b) 0.25 mm
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 (c) 1.00 mm (d) 0.05 mm
Ans. (c) : The purpose of ratchet stop in micrometer
screw gauge is to maintain sufficient and uniform
measuring pressure. Ans. (a) : Metric outside micrometer has a threaded
spindle with a pitch of 0.5 mm.
89. What is the zero text of 50-75 mm external • Metric outside micrometer least count is 0.01 mm.
micrometer–
94. A micrometer has a negative error of 0.03 mm.
(a) 0.00 mm (b) 125.00 mm What is the correct reading when the
(c) 0.01 mm (d) 50.00 mm micrometer measures 40.48 mm?
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (a) 40.15 mm (b) 40.51 mm
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 (c) 40.45 mm (d) 40.59 mm
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
Ans. (b) : Negative error = Real value + Reading value Ans. (c) : Ratchet stop is micrometer helps to control
0.03 = Real value – 40.48 the pressure.
= 40.51 mm. • It close the spindle by turning the ratchet, not the
95. A Metric Outside micrometer of range 100–125 thimble, the ratchet prevents excess pressure on the
mm is used to measure the diameter of a rod. object being measured. So you don't squash it and
get a false reading.
Barrel graduation showed 16.5 and the thimble
graduation in line with the barrel datum line 99. Zero error in micrometer means
(a) Micrometer is true
was 28. What is the diameter of the rod?
(b) Zero mark on the thimble is visible
(a) 16.78 mm (b) 16.64 mm (c) Zero on thimble and datum line on sleave do
(c) 116.64 mm (d) 116.78 mm not coincide when measuring faces are in
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 contact
Ans. (d) : Micrometer of range = 100 – 125 mm (d) There is negligible gap between the anvil
Thimble graduation in line with the barrel datum line ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
= 28 × least count Ans. (c) : Zero error in micrometer means– Zero on
= 28 × 0.01 thimble and datum line on sleeve do not coincide when
= 0.28 mm measuring faces are in contact.
Reading of barrel graduation (RB) = 16.5 mm • Zero error in micrometer occurs when zero on the
Minimum range = 100 mm thimble and datum line on sleeve do not coincide
when measuring faces are in contact.
Dia of rod = Minimum range Rth + RB
Type of zero error–
= 100 + 0.28 + 16.5 (1) Positive error (2) Negative error
= 116.78 mm
96. The least count of an outside micro meter is
0.01 mm. The range of the micro meter is 75 to
100 mm. The barrel reading is 15.50 mm and
the 10th thimble graduation coincides with the
barrel datum line. The reading is
(a) 15.60 mm (b) 15.06 mm 100. In a metric micrometer, a complete revolution
(c) 15.50 mm (d) 15.40 mm of thimble advances
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.25 mm
(c) 0.50 mm (d) 1.00 mm
Ans. (a) : NLC Technician 24-09.2022
Least Count = 0.01 mm ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
Range = 75 to 100 mm Ans. (c) : In a metric micrometer, a complete revolution
Reading of bareel = 15.50 mm of thimble advances 0.50 mm.
10th thimble graduation coincides with the barrel 101. An outside micrometer has a negative error.
datum line = 10 × L.C. The correct reading can be taken by
= 10 × 0.01 = 0.1 mm (a) Adding the negative error in the actual
Reading of micrometer = Reading of barrel + the value reading
of the 10th of the thimble (b) Deducting the negative error from the actual
= 15.50 + 0.10 = 15.60 mm reading
Diameter of rolling rod in measurement of micrometer (c) Adding twice the negative error in the actual
= Minimum range + reading of micrometer reading
(d) Deducting twice the negative error from the
= 75 + 15.60 = 90.60 mm
actual reading
97. The accuracy of a vernier micrometer is : ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
(a) ± 0.1 mm (b) ± 0.01 mm Ans. (a) : An outside micrometer has a negative error,
(c) ± 0.001 mm (d) ± 1 mm the correct reading can be taken by adding the negative
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 error in the actual reading.
Ans. (c) : The accuracy of vernier micrometer is ± • Micrometer used to take the outside measurement
0.001 mm. are known as outside micrometers.
• The outside micrometer has a negative error.
98. Ratchet stop is micrometer helps to :
• An inside micrometer is used to measure the
(a) Lock the spindle (b) Adjust zero error diameter of holes.
(c) Control the pressure (d) Hold the job
102. Which of the following is not a part of
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05-04-2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM micrometer?
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III (a) Leg (b) Spindle
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 (c) Anvil (d) Thimble
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
Ans. (a) : Leg is not a part of micrometer. Ans. (b) : Endometer micrometer be used to measure
Parts of micrometer– internal diameter of pipe.
(1) Frame • An inside micrometer is used to measure the
(2) Barrel/sleeve diameter of holes.
(3) Thimble 107. Lock nut in the micrometer is provided to
(4) Spindle (a) control the movement of the spindle
(5) Anvil (b) lock the reading after setting it over the work
(6) Spindle Lock nut piece
(7) Ratchet stop (c) Measure the work piece accurately
(d) lock the micrometer when it is not in use
Ans : (b) Lock nut is the micrometer is provided to
lock the reading after setting it over the workpiece.
• The lock nut is simply a quarter turn nut that locks
the spindle from turning.
• The sleeve contains the scale which is used to
determine the measurement and the internal threads
which allow the spindle to move.
103. Pitch diameter of an external thread is
measured using 108. The standard tool used to measure the
(a) Vernier caliper diameter of an internal recess
(b) Screw pitch gauge (a) Vernier caliper
(c) Screw thread micrometer (b) Five point internal micrometer
(c) Dial gauge
(d) Thread ring gauge
(d) Three point internal micrometer
ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
Ans. (c) : Pitch diameter of an external thread is Ans. (d) : The standard tools used to measure the
measured using screw thread micrometers. diameter of an internal races three point internal
• Screw thread micrometer is used to measure the micrometer.
effective diameter of the screw threads. This dimension
109. Metric outside micrometer has a threaded
is important, because the area of the thread flanks in the spindle with a pitch of
vicinity of the pitch line is where the greatest (a) 0.5 mm (b) 0.25 mm
transmission of force occurs between mating threads. (c) 1.00 mm (d) 0.05 mm
104. Pedometer micrometer is used– ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018
(a) Measure of external diameter Ans : (a) Metric outside micrometer has a threaded
(b) Measure of depth spindle with a pitch of 0.5 mm.
(c) Measure of length The spindle of an ordinary metric micrometer has 2
(d) Measure of external diameter threads per milimeters, and thus one complete
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I revolution moves the spindle through a distance of 0.5
Ans. (d) : Pedometer micrometer is used of measure of milimeter.
external diameter. The longitudinal line on the sleeve is graduated with 1
• An inside micrometer is used to measure the milimeter divisions and 0.5 milimeters subdivisions.
diameter of holes. 110. An inside micrometer cannot be used for
105. Which instrument is used to measure the measuring :
internal dimensions of a part, such at the (a) Internal features
internal diameter of a hole or tube– (b) External features
(a) Endometer micrometer (c) Parallelism of surfaces of deep bore
(b) Bore dial gauge (d) All of the above
(c) Dial gauge NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(d) External micrometer ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I Ans. (b) : An inside micrometer can not be used for
Ans. (a) : Endometer micrometer is used to measure the measuring external features.
internal dimensions of a part, such at the internal • Inside micrometer is used to measure the larger
diameter of a hole or tube. internal dimension.
106. What can an endometer micrometer be used to • Inside micrometer can measure internal diameter of
measure– holes.
(a) External diameter of pipe 111. A micrometer has a negative error of 0.03 mm.
(b) Internal diameter of pipe What is the correct reading when the
(c) Diameter of head surface micrometer measures 40.53 mm?
(d) External diameter of ball bearing (a) 40.50 mm (b) 40.56 mm
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 (c) 40.46 mm (d) 40.59 mm
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
Ans. (b) : Ans. (a) Accuracy limit of stick micrometer ± 0.005 mm.
Negative error = 0.03 mm • Stick micrometers are designed for the
Reading of micrometer = 40.53 mm measurement of longer internal lengths.
True reading = Reading of micrometer + Negative error These comprise of the following parts–
True reading = 40.53 + 0.03
• A 150 mm or 300 mm micrometer unit fitted with a
True reading = 40.56 mm
micrometer of 25 mm range and having rounded
112. Micrometer can measure upto ........... terminal faces.
(a) 0.1 mm (b) Microns size
• A series of extension rod which together with
(c) Least count (d) 0.005 mm
micrometer unit, permit of a continuous range of
measurement upto the maximum length required.
Ans. (c) : Micrometer can measure upto least count.
• Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm 116. The pitch of threads of a screw gauge is 0.5
mm. The number of division on the thimble is
• Least count of vernier caliper = 0.02 mm
25. The least count of the screw gauge is :
• Least count of bevel protector = 5' (five minute)
(a) 0.2 mm (b) 0.02 mm
113. The tool, which is used for outside diameter is
(c) 0.002 mm (d) None of these/j
(a) Try square (b) Divider
(c) Outside micrometer (d) Scriber NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
Ans. (c) : The tool which is used for outside diameter is Ans. (b) :
outside micrometer. Least count of screw gauge (LC) =
• Outside micrometers are used for measuring the
thickness or outside diameter of small parts. Pitch of thread
• The range of the outside micrometer is 75 to 100 The number of division on the thimble
mm.
114. A depth micrometer can be used to measure 0.5
= = 0.02 mm
.............. 25
(a) Roundness of the bore 117. In a micrometer if '0' (zero) graduation of the
(b) Length of the bore thimble is above the datum line, when the faces
(c) Thickness of the bore are in contact, the error is :
(d) Diameter of bore (a) Zero (b) Negative
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (c) Positive (d) Not defined
RRB ALP Heat Engine 23-01-2019, Shift-III SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
Ans. (b) : A depth micrometer can be used to measure Ans. (b) : Types of error–
length of the bore.
• Depth micrometer used to measure the depth of an
object with precision and accuracy with least count
of 0.01 mm.
118. The zero error of a micrometer is + 0.001 mm.

What will be the reading of micrometer to
measure 0.715 mm :
(a) 0.176 mm (b) 0.714 mm
(c) 0.717 mm (d) 0.713 mm
Ans : (a) Zero error = + 0.001 mm
Measure of job = 0.175 mm
Reading of micrometer (R) = ?
Q Measure of job = Reading of micrometer – Positive
zero error
Reading of micrometer = measure of job + Positive
error
• A wide range of sizes can be measured using depth = 0.175 + 0.001
micrometer because it is equipped with a number of = 0.176 mm
extension rod. 119. The valve of one thimble division of a metric
115. Accuracy limit of stick micrometer– vernier micrometer is–
(a) ± 0.005 mm (b) ± 0.0005 mm (a) 0.001mm (b) 0.01mm
(c) ± 0.5 mm (d) ± 0.05 mm (c) 0.002mm (d) 0.02mm
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008)
Ans : (b) The valve of one thimble division of a metric Ans : (a) The axial advancement of thimble is known as
vernier micrometer is 0.01 mm. pitch in a micrometer when thimble completes one
120. Parallel division of sleeve of British vernier revolution.
micrometer– 126. In a vernier height gauge when the jaws
(a) 1/100" (b) 9/100" touches the work table vernier scales shows-
(c) 9/1000" (d) 1/1000" (a) Zero reading (b) 0.1 reading
(RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 29.06.2008) (c) 0.01 reading (d) 0.02 reading
Ans : (c) Parallel divisions of sleeve of British vernier UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
micrometer 9/1000".
Ans : (a) In a vernier height gauge when the jaws
121. The value of one thimble division of british touches the work table vernier scale shows zero reading.
vernier micrometer is–
(a) 1/100" (b) 1/1000" • Vernier depth gauge or vernier height gauge is a
(c) 2/100" (d) 2/1000" precision instrument used to measure the depth of
(RRB Banglre ALP, 08.07.2007) holes, recesses slots, and steps with an accuracy of
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016) 0.02 mm.
Ans : (b) The value of one thimble division of british 127. For measuring in British and metric units–
vernier micrometer is 1/1000". (a) Same vernier and same micrometer can be
122. Diameter of finished turned shaft can be used
checked with– (b) Different verniers and different micrometers
(a) Combination set (b) Slip gauges can be used
(c) Dial indicator (d) Micrometer (c) Same micrometer but different verniers can
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 be used
Ans : (d) Diameter of finished turned shaft can be (d) Same vernier but different micrometer can be
checked with micrometer. used
123. Figure shows a depth micrometer– UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans : (d) For measuring in british and metric units same
vernier but different micrometer can be used.
128. What is the least count of Depth micrometer?
(a) 0.03 mm (b) 0.04 mm
(c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.01 mm
Ans : (d)
• Least count of depth micrometer = 0.01 mm
• Least count of micrometer = 0.01 mm
(a) (a) Ratchet (b) Thimble (c) Base (d) Lock nut • Least count of vernier caliper = 0.02 mm
(e) Depth rod (f) Sleeve
• Least count of bevel protector = 5' (five minute)
(b) (a) Ratchet (b) Thimble (c) Base (d) Lock nut
(e) Sleeve (f) Depth rod • Least count of vernier depth gauge = 0.02 mm
(c) (a) Ratchet (b) Thimble (c) Lock nut (d) Base • Least count of screw thread micrometer = 0.01 mm.
(e) depth rod (f) sleeve 129. What is a depth microscope used for–
(d) (a) Thimble (b) Ratchet (c) Base (d) Lock nut (a) Measure of external diameter
(e) depth rod (f) sleeve (b) Measure of depth hole
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (c) Measure of angle
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (d) Measure of internal diameter
Ans : (a) Parts of depth micrometer– DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
a → Ratchet b → thimble c → base d → Lock nut Ans : (b) Depth microscope used for measure of depth
e → Depth rod f → Sleeve. hole.
124. Millimeter scale in a micrometer is marked on– • Depth micrometer is a gauge used to measure the
(a) Barrel (b) Thimble depth of holes, slots and recesses.
(c) Spindle (d) Anvil
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 130. Which instrument can be used to measure the
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 thickness of a sheet of paper–
Ans : (a) Millimeter scale in a micrometer is marked on (a) Meter scale (b) Micrometer
barrel. (c) Plastic scale (d) Measure of tape
125. The axial advancement of thimble is known as UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
pitch in a micrometer when thimble completes- Ans : (b) Micrometer can be used to measure the
(a) One revolution (b) Half revolution thickness of a sheet of paper.
3 • Micrometer based on the principal of "nut and bolt".
(c) revolution (d) Two revolution • It can measure up to 0.01 mm or 0.001 cm least
4
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 count.
131. Inside micrometer is used to measure accuracy Ans : (c) Accidental errors/compensating errors–
of which level– • Random in nature.
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm • Don't have my fixed pattern.
(c) 0.03 mm (d) 0.04 mm • Can be positive or negative.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am • Follow the law of probability.
Ans : (a) Inside micrometer is used to measure • They have small magnitudes and tend to distribute
accuracy of 0.01 mm. equally on both sides of true valve.
• Inside micrometer is a device designed to precisely
measure things such as the inner diameter of holes. 137. Many times, dust, soil etc. gets deposited on the
measuring face of the measuring instrument, if
• Micrometer might be used to measure the outer
we measure without cleaning it then error in
diameter of a bolt, an inside micrometer could be
measurement occurs. This error is called as–
used to measure the inner diameter of a nut.
(a) Micro geometrical error
132. By which micrometer will you measure the (b) Micro numerical error
thickness of pipes and sheets– (c) Flexible transmit error
(a) Outside micrometer (d) Contact error
(b) Inside micrometer (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001)
(c) Depth micrometer
(d) Vernier micrometer Ans : (d) Many times dust, soil etc. gets deposited on
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) the measuring face of the measuring instrument, if we
measure without cleaning it then error in measurement
Ans : (a) Outside micrometer will you measure the
occurs, this error is called as contact error.
thickness of pipes and sheets.
• The least count of an outside micrometer is 0.01 138. The British micrometer has the least count–
mm. (a) 0.001" (b) 0.01"
(c) 0.0002" (d) 0.0001"
133. The part of the micrometer that equalizes the
pressure measured is–
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
(a) Anvil (b) Ratchet
(c) Barrel (d) None of these
Ans : (a) The British micrometer has the least count
of 0.001"
Ans : (b) The part of the micrometer that equalizes the Least count of different type of micrometer–
pressure measured is ratchet.
Micrometer Metric British
• The ratchet stop ensures uniform pressure between
Outside micrometer 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
the measuring surface.
Inside micrometer 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
134. Depth micrometers are used to measure Vernier micrometer 0.001 mm 0.0001 inch
(a) Depth of holes
Tube micrometer 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
(b) Depth of grooves and recesses
(c) Heights of shoulder and projections Depth micrometer 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
(d) All of the above Screw thread micrometer 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 Vernier caliper 0.02 mm 0.001 inch
Ans : (d) Depth micrometers are used to measure depth Dial caliper 0.01 mm 0.001 inch
of holes, depth of grooves, and recesses, height of Vernier height gauge 0.02 mm 0.001 inch
shoulder and projections. Vernier depth gauge 0.02 mm 0.001 inch
135. Extension rods are extra features for 139. The accuracy of a metric vernier micrometer is
(a) Sine bar (b) Inside micrometer ............ times that of an ordinary metric
(c) Vernier caliper (d) None of these micrometer–
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 (a) 2 twice (b) 3 twice
(IOF Fitter 2017) (c) 10 twice (d) 5 twice
Ans : (b) Extension rods are extra features for inside IOCL 2020
micrometer. (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
• The least count of the inside micrometer's 0.01 Ans : (c) The accuracy of a metric vernier micrometer
Parts of inside micrometer– Barrel thimble, extension is 10 times that of an ordinary metric micrometer.
rod, spacing coller, spindle, handle, anvil, locking • Micrometer reads only over a 25 mm range to cover
screw. a wide range of dimensions several sizes of
136. In micrometer random errors are also called as micrometer are necessary.
accidental errors, it is not because of which 140. The least count of the indicator micrometer is–
cause– (a) 0.1mm (b) 0.001mm
(a) Difference in temperature (c) 0.02mm (d) 0.05mm
(b) Visual error (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(c) Level of measuring surface Ans : (b) The least count of the indicator
(d) Dirt vibration micrometer is 0.001 mm.
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001) Least count of different type of micrometer–
Micrometer Metric 145. The thread are cut in the spindle of the
Depth micrometer 0.01 mm micrometer–
Screw thread micrometer 0.01 mm (a) Double start (b) Triple start
Sheet micrometer 0.01 mm (c) Square thread (d) Single start
Tube micrometer 0.01 mm (IOF Fitter, 2015)
Indicator micrometer 0.001 mm Ans : (d) The thread are cut in the spindle of the
Digital micrometer 0.001 mm micrometer single start.
Vernier micrometer 0.001 mm • The spindle is a very accurately machined screw
141. Screw thread micrometer is used to check ........ and the object to be measured is placed between the
spindle and the anvil.
of the screw.
• The spindle is moved by tuning the ratchet knob or
(a) Pitch (b) Core diameter
thimble until the object to be measured is lightly
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Outer diameter touched by both the spindle and the anvil.
(IOF Fitter, 2015) 146. That is called as safe micrometer–
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002) (a) Unused
Ans : (c) (b) That is easy to use
• Screw thread micrometer is typically used to (c) Which consist ratchet stop and that is
measure the pitch of the thread directly. working
• Screw thread micrometer has a 60 degree pointed (d) Whose spindle and anvil face is right
spindle and a double V-shaped swiveling anvil. (RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004)
• Screw thread micrometer reading indicated the Ans : (b) Which consist ratchet stop and that is working
this is called as safe micrometer.
thread pitch diameter.
147. The faces of micrometer spindle and anvil are
• Screw thread micrometers is least count of 0.01 mm
made of–
or 0.001 inch. (a) Carbide (b) Invar steel
142. In a screw thread micrometer, the ............ part (c) Stainless steel (d) Carbon steel
is replaceable. (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016)
(a) Anvil (b) Spindle Ans : (a) The faces of micrometer spindle and anvil are
(c) Ratchet stop (d) Lock nut made of carbide.
BEML 2022 Spindle– One end of the spindle is the measuring face
(IOF Fitter, 2015) the other end is threaded and passes through a nut, the
Ans : (a) In screw thread micrometer the anvil part is threaded mechanism allows for the forward and
replaceable. backward movement of the spindle.
Anvil– Anvil is one of the measuring faces which is
It consist of following parts– fitted on the micrometer frame.
(1) Frame (2) Anvil (3) Spindle (4) Thimble (5) Ratchet
148. The least count of metric micrometer is–
(6) Lock nut
1 1
143. The screw thread is checked by micrometer (a) mm (b) mm
with– 1000 100
(a) Square thread (b) V thread 1
(c) One micron (d) mm
(c) Acme thread (d) Trapezoidal 50
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (b) In a screw thread is checked by micrometer (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
with 'V' thread. Ans : (b) Least Count of metric micrometer
• Screw thread micrometer is used to check pitch Distance coverd by spindle in one revolution
=
diameter. the number of total parts on the thimble
• Screw thread micrometer is least count of 0.01 mm. 1/ 2
144. The thread in one inch on the spindle of the
·
50
british micrometer are– 1 1
(a) 50 (b) 25 · = · 0.01 mm
2 × 50 100
(c) 30 (d) 40
149. When a micrometer has positive error–
(RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009) (a) Thimble's zero is at the front of sleeves
Ans : (d) The thread is one inch on the spindle of the datum line
british micrometer are 40. (b) Thimble's zero is at the straight of sleeve zero
• The pitch of a micrometer thimble screw is 40 TPI (c) Thimble's zero is at the back of sleeve datum
(thread per inch). Each turn of the thimble moves line
the spindle exactly 0.25 inch. (d) In this micrometer gives less measurement
The barrel of the thimble is divided into 25 equal parts, (IOF Fitter, 2014)
each of which is 1/1000, or 0.001 inch. (RRB Allahabad ALP, 09.12.2007)
Ans : (c) When a micrometer has positive error Ans : (d) A characteristic of automobile micrometer is
thimble's zero is at the back of sleeve datum line. its anvil is replaceable in which measurement can be
taken in range of 100 mm from same micrometer.
154. The spur gear is checked by a flange
micrometer–
(a) Chordal thickness (b) Addendum
(c) Dedendum (d) Pitch
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant 2016)
Ans : (a) The spur gear is checked by a flange
micrometer chordal thickness.
150. When a micrometer has negative error– • The brown & sharp flange outside micrometer has
(a) Micrometer gives more measurement disc-shaped faces with flanges for measuring the pitch
(b) Thimble's zero is at the front of sleeves of gear teeth, and a vernier scale in inch units for
datum line taking precise outside diameter (OD) measurement.
(c) Thimble's zero is at the straight of sleeve zero 155. Three point internal micrometer is used to
(d) Thimble's zero is at the back of sleeve datum measure diameter holes up to .......... mm
line (a) 0 to 25mm (b) 10 to 20 mm
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (c) 10 to 25 mm (d) 5 to 20 mm
Ans : (b) When a micrometer has negative error (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
thimble zero is at front of datum line of sleeve or barrel. Ans : (b) Three point internal micrometer is used to
measure diameter holes up to 10-20 mm.
156. Digital micrometer is a modern micrometer, its
main feature is–
(a) Measure of accuracy 0.001 mm
(b) No error
(c) Its zero reading can be set any whereas
(d) This is costly
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
151. The measurement taken with 'V' anvil Ans : (c) Digital micrometer is a modern micrometer its
micrometer is– main feature is its zero reading can be set anywhere.
2d • Its least count of 0.001 mm or 0.001 inch.
(a) Which reading of open (b) • Digital micrometer is the most recent innovation in
2
micrometer technology.
5d 3d
(c) (d) 157. Depth micrometer does not consist frame and
2 2 anvil as outside micrometer also it is different
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 05.06.2005) from outside micrometer in which way–
Ans : (d) The measurement taken with 'V' anvil (a) Its least count 0.02 mm
micrometer 3d/2. (b) Its does not have thread on the spindle
152. Tube micrometer checks– (c) It is no inaccuracy in it
(a) External diameter of pipe (d) From this reading of departments covered by
(b) Internal diameter of pipe symbols are taken
(c) Thickness of pipe (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(d) Length of pipe Ans : (d) Depth micrometer does not consist frame and
(HAL Fitter, 2015) anvil as outside micrometer also it is different from
Ans : (c) Tube micrometers have a cylindrical anvil outside micrometer in which way from this readings of
positioned perpendicularly to a spindle and is used to departments covered by symbols are taken.
measure the thickness of tubes. 158. What is the function of ratchet stop of
• Micrometer stops are micrometer heads that are micrometer–
mounted on the table of a manual milling machine, (a) Give accurate reading
bedways of a lathe or other machine tool, in place (b) Giving proper pressure for reading
of simple stops. (c) Does not zero error
153. A characteristic of automobile micrometer is– (d) None of these
(a) Its list count is 1/1000 mm BHEL 2020
(b) Its measure check from 0 to 6 mm (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(c) Works both system at the one time Ans : (b) Micrometer is a precision instrument used to
(d) It anvil is replaceable in which measurement measure a job generally with in accuracy of 0.01 mm.
can be taken in range of 100 mm from same • The ratchet stop ensures uniform pressure between
micrometer the measuring surfaces.
NTPC Fitter 2016 • Giving proper pressure for reading is the function of
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 25.05.2003) ratchet stop of micrometer.

159. By which instrument the internal measurement Ans : (c) The rotating part of the micrometer on which
of bore hole can be measured with at most 25 or 50 marks are made is called thimble.
precision– • This thimble is the component that encompasses the
(a) Inside caliper (b) Inside micrometer barrel. In order to calculate the rotations, it contains
(c) Dial indicator (d) Height gauge circular measurements.
(IOF Fitter, 2012) 164. The least count of a micrometer is :
Ans : (b) Inside micrometer is a device designed to (a) 0.05 mm (b) 0.02 mm
precisely measure things such as the inner diameter of (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.001 mm
holes. Where a standard micrometer might be used to ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012
measure the cutter diameter of a bolt, and inside Ans. (c) : The least count of a micrometer is 0.01 mm.
micrometer could be used to measure the inner diameter • The least count of a screw gauge refers to the lowest
value that it can measure.
of a nut.
• The cap scale will be moved along the main scale
160. Which instrument is used to measure depth by 1/100 of mm or 0.01 mm using a screw gauge
pitch– with 100 divisions.
(a) Depth micrometer
(b) Inside micrometer 2. Vernier
(d) Outside micrometer
165. The diameter of a tennis ball can be measured
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
directly using ______.
Ans : (c) Screw thread micrometer instrument is used to (a) Luxmeter (b) Vernier calipers
measure depth pitch. (c) Meter scale (d) Physical balance
161. Accuracy of micrometer is determined by– UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(a) From the gap of is screw Ans. (b) : A vernier caliper can be used to calculate the
(b) The number of marks on its finger diameter of a tennis ball.
(c) The number of marks on the screw cap and
its finger
(d) The number of marks on the screw and
length of screw
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005)
Ans : (c) Accuracy of micrometer is determined by the 166. What is the formula to find the least count of
number of marks on the screw cap and its finger. vernier bevel protractor?
A micrometer is a helpful tool for enlarging accuracy (MSD = Main Scale Division, VSD = Vernier
and precision measurements. Scale Division)
The screw and nut are the foundation of the micrometer (a) 1 MSD – 1 VSD (b) 1 MSD – 2 VSD
is operation. (c) 2 MSD – 1 VSD (d) 2 MSD – 2 VSD
Ans. (c) : • Vernier bevel protractor is a precision
instrument meant for measuring angles to an accuracy
º
 1 
of 5' (minutes) i.e.   or i.e. 12th part of 1º.
 12 
• 12 MSD = 23 VSD
23
162. What is the minimum measurement that a 1 MSD = VSD
12
micrometer can take–
L.C = 2 MSD – 1 VSD
(a) 0.001 mm (b) 1 mm º
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.01 mm 23º 23  24 − 23 
= 2º ×1º − = 2− =
(RRB Patna ALP, 04.02.2007) 12 12  12 
Ans : (d) 0.01 mm is the minimum measurement that a º
 1 
micrometer can take. =   = 5' (minute)
163. The rotating part of the micrometer on which  12 
25 or 50 marks are made is called– • Least count of vernier bevel protractor is–
(a) Ratchet (b) Barrel or sleeve L.C = 2 MSD – 1 VSD
(c) Thimble (d) Nibble Where, MSD = Main scale division
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 VSD = Vernier scale division
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) L.C. = Least count

167. Which of the following is a precision measuring 171. The vernier scale of caliper has 50 divisions
instrument? which coincide with 49 main scale divisions. If
(a) Hacksaw blade (b) Prick punch each main scale division is 0.5 mm, then the
(c) Vernier caliper (d) Grinder least count of the vernier is:
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 (a) 0.1 mm (b) 1 mm
(c) 0.01 mm (d) 10 mm
Ans. (c) : Vernier caliper is a precision measuring
instrument because it measures the precise value of NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
linear dimensions. Ans. (c) : Given, 50 VSD = 49 MSD
• Its least count is 0.02 mm. 49
1 VSD = MSD
168. The part of the Digital Vernier Caliper which 50
differs it from others, is known as– 49 × 2
= MSD
(a) Beam (b) Vernier scale 50 × 2
(c) LCD Display (d) Main scale = 0.098 MSD
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 = 0.098 × 0.5 mm
NMRC, 15-09-2019 1 VSD = 0.49 mm
L.C = MSD – VSD
Ans. (c) : The part of the digital vernier caliper which
differs it from others, is known as LCD display. = 0.5 mm – 0.49 mm
= 0.01 mm
172. Name the part to which the depth bar of a
Vernier caliper is attached.
(a) Fixed scale
(b) Vernier scale
(c) Movable jaw
(d) Fine adjustment screw
Ans. (c) : The depth bar of a vernier caliper is attached
169. In vernier caliper, which one is smaller M.S. with movable jaw.
division or V.S. division?
(a) Both are equal (b) M.S. division
(c) V.S. division (d) None of these
BDL Technician 2022
Ans. (c) : In vernier caliper, V.S. division is smaller
than M.S. division.
• V.S. division means vernier scale division which is 9 • Part of vernier caliper–
mm long and consists of 10 division. 1. Main scale
• Each division on the vernier scale is 0.9 mm long or 2. Depth rod
0.1 mm less than the main scale divisions. 3. Thumb screw
4. Vernier scale
5. Fine adjustment screw
6. Movable jaw
7. Fixed scale
173. In a typical vernier caliper, 50 divisions of the
vernier scale occupy 49 divisions on the main
scale. While measuring the diameter of a rod,
170. The Vernier bevel protractor one division value the main scale reading shows 24 mm and the
is 20th Vernier scale division coincides with the
(a) 5º (b) 5' main scale. What is the diameter of the rod?
(c) 60º (d) 1º (a) 24.4 mm (b) 24.04 mm
(c) 24.2 mm (d) 24.02 mm
Ans. (d) : Vernier bevel protractor is used for
measuring angle. It can measure up to an accuracy of 5 Ans. (a) : Given,
minutes. Value of one division in vernier bevel (∵ Main scale division = 1 mm)
protractor = 1º. 50 VSD = 49 MSD
49 Ans. (b) : Vernier height gauges are used in metrology

Vernier scale division = MSD and metal working to detect or measure vertical
50
distance.
VSD = 0.98 mm
Vertical height gauge is used to measure height or
then, least count = MSD – VSD
external dimensions.
= 1 – 0.98
178. The least count of a vernier caliper in which 19
LC = 0.02 mm
(19mm) main scale divisions are divided into 20
Diameter = Main scale reading + Vernier coincidence × equal division in the vernier scale will be
Least count ___________
= 24 + 20 × 0.02 (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.019 mm
= 24 + 0.4 (c) 0.2 mm (d) 0.05 mm
= 24.4 mm BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Note– But officially answer is given option (b). RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
174. If the 9 main scale divisions (9mm) are divided Ans. (d) : Given,
into 10 equal parts in the vernier scale. What is
the least count of that Vernier Caliper? 19
1 VSD = MSD
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.09 mm 20
(c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.1 mm We have the formula for least count
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 LC = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
Ans. (d) : Given, 19
= 1 MSD – MSD
9 Main Scale Division (MSD) = 9 mm 20
1 MSD = 1mm LC = 0.05 mm
10 Vernier Scale Division = 9 mm VSD ⇒ Vernier scale division
1 VSD = 0.9 mm MSD ⇒ Main scale division
We know that least count is LC ⇒ Least count.
LC = 1 MSD – 1 VSD 179. Determine the least count when one main scale
= 1 mm – 0.9 mm equal to 1 mm and one vernier division is equal
LC = 0.1mm to 9/10.
175. Internal diameter is measured by _____ (a) 1.00 mm (b) 0.10 mm
(a) vernier calipers (b) ring gauge (c) 0.01 mm (d) 0.001 mm
(c) outside micrometer (d) digital micrometer RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (b) : Given,
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 9
Ans. (a) : A vernier caliper is usually used to measure 1 VSD = MSD
10
the diameter of circular objects.
Formula, LC = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
• Vernier caliper consists of two scale, the main scale
which is fixed, and a moving vernier scale. 9
= 1 MSD – MSD
• The main scale has reading in millimeter. 10
176. Least count of vernier height instrument in LC = 0.10 mm
metric system is – VSD ⇒ Vernier scale division
(a) 0.05 mm (b) 0.01 mm MSD ⇒ Main scale division
(c) 0.02 mm (d) 0.001 mm LC ⇒ Least count.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 180. Vernier caliper part used to measure depths of
Ans. (c) : Least count of vernier height instrument in an object or hole is–
metric system is 0.02 mm. (a) outside large jaws (b) inside small jaws
Vernier height is a precision measuring instrument (c) depth probe (d) none of the above
which is used the measuring of height of any object and RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
marking is done with the help of scriber. Ans. (c) : The vernier caliper part which is used to
• It is based on the principal of difference between measure depths of an object or hole is depth probe that
main scale and vernier scale. is attached to the movable head and slides along the
• The main scale has reading in millimeter. centre of the body.
177. Vernier height gauge is used for the • Vernier caliper can measure internal dimensions.
measurement of which of the following ? 181. The least count of vernier caliper is ________
(a) Internal dimensions (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm
(b) External dimensions (c) 0.001 m (d) 0.002 m
(c) Pitch dimensions NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
(d) Machine dimensions MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Ans. (b) : Least count of vernier caliper also known as 186. The least count of vernier bevel protractor is –
the vernier constant is the difference between one main (a) 1 min (b) 2 min
scale division and one vernier scale division. (c) 5 min (d) 7 min
• The least count of vernier caliper is 0.02 mm. RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
182. Name the part marked "X" in the given figure. RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : The least count of bevel protector,
60 o
LC =
12
LC = 5' (minutes)
(a) Fixed jaw (b) Movable jaw • The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
(c) Vernier scale (d) Main scale instrument meant for measuring angles with
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 accuracy.
Ans. (b) : A vernier caliper is given in figure marked 187. In a vernier micrometer, vernier scale is
name of the part which is marked by 'X' is movable jaw. graduated on....
183. Which one of the following instruments directly (a) Thimble (b) Spindle
gives the actual dimension ? (c) Barrel (d) Frame
(a) Inside caliper (b) Outside caliper RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
(c) Vernier caliper (d) Plug gauge
Ans. (c) : In a vernier micrometer, vernier scale is
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 graduated on barrel and circular scale is graduated on
Ans. (c) : With direct measurement, measuring the thimble.
instrument such as vernier calipers, micrometer, and
coordinate measuring machines are used to the measure 188. What is the specification of vernier height
dimension of the object directly. gauge?
(a) Length of scriber
184. Which part of the given vernier caliper, as
shown in the figure, is used for measuring (b) Height of base
internal radius? (c) Width of beam
(d) Height of the main scale
Ans. (d) : Specification of vernier height gauge–
1. Height of the main scale
2. Clear specification of the range of measurement.
3. Any specific requirements reading the type of
vernier desired.
4. Type of scale desired
Ans. (a) : In given figure, 'a' part is used for measuring
internal diameter. 5. Height of the beam.
189. The reading of a vernier outside micrometer as
shown in Fig is
185. The difference between 1 M.S.D and 1 V.S.D in (a) 12.240 mm (b) 12.243 mm
a vernier caliper is ______ mm. (c) 12.244 mm (d) 12.246 mm
(a) 0.02 (b) 0.001 RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
(c) 0.002 (d) 0.2 Ans. (b) :
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 190. To get least count of 5' in a vernier bevel
Ans. (a) : On main scale, 1 division = 1 mm. protractor, the 23º main scale are divided into
49 main scale division = 50 VSD (a) 12 equal parts on vernier scale
49 (b) 22 equal parts on vernier scale
1 VSD = MSD (c) 24 equal parts on vernier scale
50
1 VSD = 0.98 MSD (d) 25 equal parts on vernier scale
Least count = 1 MSD – 1 VSD RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
= 1 – 0.98 Ans. (a) : The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
= 0.02 mm instrument meant for measuring angle to an accuracy of
(VSD – Vernier scale division.) 5'.
• The least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5' Ans. (b) :

(minutes). • The least count of an outside micrometer is 0.01
• The value of each vernier scale division of vernier mm.
bevel protractor is 1 degree 55 minutes. • Outside micrometers are used for measuring the
• To get the least count of 5' in a vernier bevel thickness or outside diameter of small parts.
protractor the 23o main scale is divided into 12 196. While measuring with vernier bevel protractor,
equal parts of vernier scale. which part is used normally as reference
191. The least count of a vernier depth gauge is surface?
(a) 0.10 mm (b) 0.01 mm (a) Stock (b) Blade
(c) 0.20 mm (d) 0.02 mm (c) Dial (d) Disc
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
Ans. (d) : The least count of a vernier depth gauge is RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
0.02 mm. Ans. (a) : The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
• The vernier depth gauge is a precision instrument, instrument meant for measuring angle to an accuracy of
used to measure the depth of hole, recesses and slot. 5 minutes.
192. While laying out, the vernier height gauge must • Its least count is 5' (five minutes)
be used on the • Following are the part of vernier bevel protractor–
(a) Surface plate (b) Vee block 1. Dial 2. Blade 3. Locking screw
(c) Machine bed (d) Any flat surface 4. Stock– This is one of the contracting surface during
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 the measurement of an angle.
Ans. (a) : While laying out, the vernier height gauge 197. On which part of the vernier bevel protractor,
must be used on the surface plate. are the main scale divisions graduated?
The vernier height gauge is used with the dial indicator (a) Blade (b) Disc
to check hole location, pitch dimension, concentricity (c) Dial (d) Stock
and eccentricity. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
193. While marking with a vernier height gauge, the Ans. (b) : Disc part of the vernier bevel protractor, are
workpiece is generally the main scale divisions graduated.
(a) Supported by an angle plate
(b) Supported by another workpiece
(c) Held by one hand
(d) Held without support
Ans. (a) : While marking with a vernier height gauge,
the workpiece is generally supported by an angle plate.
• Angle plate is used with the surface plate for
supporting the workpiece in a perpendicular
direction.
194. The reading of a vernier caliper as shown in Parts of the vernier bevel protractor–
Fig. is • Stock • Blade • Disc • Main scale • Dial • Vernier
scale • Locking screw • Magnifying glass.
198. The least count of the vernier caliper is equal to
(a) Value of 1 M.S.D. – value of 1.V.S.D
(b) Value of 1 V.S.D. – value of 1.M.S.D
(a) 25.10 mm (b) 25.20 mm (c) Value of 2 M.S.D. – value of 1.V.S.D
(c) 25.40 mm (d) 25.50 mm (d) Value of 1 M.S.D. – value of 2.V.S.D
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 Ans. (a) : L.C. = Least count
Ans. (c) : Reading of M.S. = 25 mm M.S.D = Main scale division
From figure, 20 division of V.S. coincides to M.S. V.S.D. = Vernier scale division
Hence, reading of vernier caliper The least count of the vernier caliper is equal to
= M.S.D. + L.C. × V.S.D. = 1 MSD – 1 VSD.
= 25 + 0.02 × 20 199. Which one of the following instruments is used
= 24.40 mm to measure accurately the angle of taper?
195. The least count of a vernier outside micrometer (a) Bevel gauge
is (b) Bevel protractor
(a) 0.10 mm (b) 0.01 mm (c) Vernier bevel protractor
(c) 0.001 mm (d) 0.0001 mm (d) Taper gauge
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
Ans. (c) : Vernier bevel protractor is used to measure Ans. (b) : Vernier height gauges are used in conjunction
accurately the angle of taper. with the surface plate.
Bevel gauge– It is an adjustable gauge for setting and • The vernier height gauge is used with the dial
transferring angle. indicator to check hole location, pitch dimensions,
• Bevel protractor is a graduated circular protractor concentricity and eccentricity. It is also used for
with one pivoted arm, used for measuring or measuring depth, with a depth attachment. It is used
marking off angles. to measure size from the lower plane with the help
• Taper gauge is a measuring tool that measures size of an offset scriber.
as the width of gap and grooves. 204. A vernier dial caliper accuracy 0.05 mm, beam
200. The minimum measurement that can be scale reading 25 mm and the reading shown by
correctly read with a vernier caliper is called the hand of the dial 24.
(a) Zero reading (a) 25.9 (b) 26.0
(b) Least count (c) 26.1 (d) 26.2
(c) Main scale reading NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(d) Actual reading minus zero error RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 Ans. (d) : Given,
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 LC – 0.05 mm
Ans. (b) : The least count of any instrument is the Main scale reading = 25 mm
smallest value that it can measure accurately. Vernier scale reading = 24
201. Which of the following is an indirect measuring Reading = 25 + 24 × 0.05
tool? = 26.2
(a) Inside caliper 205. Vernier caliper can be used to measure ––––
(b) Vernier caliper (a) Outer dia of a hole (b) Inner dia of a hole
(c) Universal bevel protractor (c) Depth of a blind hole (d) All of these
(d) Inside micrometer RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans. (d) : This caliper can measure the outside diameter
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 of an object, the inside diameter of a hole or the depth
Ans. (a) : of a hole.
• Inside, outside and divider calipers offer an indirect 206. The Number of divisions on Vernier scale of a
measurement of an object. Vernier micrometer (metric) are:
• With direct measurement, measuring instrument (a) 5 (b) 10
such as vernier calipers, micrometer and coordinate (c) 50 (d) 100
measuring machines are used to target directly. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
202. The depth bar of vernier caliper is attached Ans. (b) : The vernier scale is a mm long and consist of
with…… 10 division. Each division on the vernier, then is 0.9
(a) fixed jaw (b) movable jaw mm long or 0.1 mm less than the main scale division.
(c) vernier scale (d) fine adjustment screw 207. Vernier height gauge work on the principle
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) similar to ____.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (a) Vernier micrometer
Ans. (b) : A vernier caliper is a precision measuring (b) Vernier caliper
instrument, least count is 0.02 mm. (c) Vernier bevel protractor
Ans. (b) : Vernier height gauge is a measuring device
which is used for measurement of height of any object
and marking done by help of scriber. It is based on the
principal of difference between main scale and vernier
scale like vernier caliper.
• Its least count is 0.02 mm.
Movable jaws, are part of the vernier side. One jaw is 208. What happens when the lock nut in the vernier
used for taking external measurement and other for caliper is not tightened after taking the
taking internal measurement. measurement ?
203. Vernier height gauges are used in conjunction (a) Vernier will slide and dimensions will change
with the …….. (b) Vernier will not slide and dimensions will
(a) angle plate (b) surface plate change
(c) face plate (d) base plate (c) Vernier will slide and dimensions are same
MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022 (d) Thumb lever will not work
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
Ans. (a) : When the lock nut in the vernier caliper is not Ans. (b) : Vernier micrometer have additional equality
tightened offer taking the measurement then vernier will spaced graduations given above the datum line 10
slide and dimension will change. equally spaced line.
209. While measuring with vernier caliper the 213. Vernier Bevel protector is an example of–
movable jaw lifts and gives incorrect reading. (a) Angular measurement
To get correct reading…… (b) Radial measurement
(a) Tight the strap provided at the end (c) Linear measurement
(b) Replace with good vernier caliper (d) All are correct
(c) Adjust the jib provided in the movable jaw RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(d) Ground the fixed jaw to suit the play Ans. (a) : Vernier bevel protector is an example of
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 angular measurement.
Ans. (c) : While measuring with vernier caliper the • The vernier bevel protractor is defined as a
movable jaw lift and gives incorrect reading. To get precision instrument that is used for measuring the
correct reading then adjust the jib provided in the angles to an accuracy of 5 minutes.
movable jaw. 214. Number of scales on a Gear tooth vernier are
210. What type of angle is measured with Vernier ……. .
Bevel Protractor figure shown below? (a) 3 (b) 4
(c) 1 (d) 2
Ans. (d) : It has two vernier scales, one horizontal and
the other vertical.
215. Indicate the combination of instruments used
for measurement of dovetail–
(a) Roller and depth gauge
(b) Vernier caliper and bevel protractor
(a) Right angle (b) Acute angle (c) Bevel protractor and depth gauge
(c) Obtuse angle (d) Straight angle (d) Roller and vernier caliper
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Ans. (b) : The vernier bevel protractor is a precision Ans. (d) : • The Combination of instruments used for
instrument meant for measuring angles. measurements of dovetail is roller end vernier caliper.
• It is used to measure the acute angle. • There are situation where measurement of component
• Parts of a vernier bevel protractor– can not be taken directly.
1. Stock 216. The size of a vernier height gauge is specified
2. Dial by:
3. Blade (a) Width of the beam
4. Locking screw (b) Height of the beam
(c) Weight of the height gauge
211. Graduations on vernier bevel protractor In
(d) Size of the scriber
vernier bevel protractor the 23 degrees is
divided into how many vernier divisions RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(a) 25 (b) 20 Ans. (b) : The size of a vernier height gauge is specified
(c) 12 (d) 10 by height of the beam.
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) • Vernier height gauge are used in metrology and
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 metal working to detect or measure vertical
distance.
Ans. (c) : As we know, 12 division of vernier scale are
equal to 23o or 23o divisions of the main scale. 1 • It least count is 0.02 mm.
division of vernier scale = 115 minutes. Now we can 217. A bore of 14.67 mm a workpiece can be
say that the least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5 measured by–
minutes. (a) Steel rule (b) Vernier caliper
212. Vernier micrometer have additional equality (c) Micrometer (d) Plug gauge
spaced graduations (vernier graduators) given RRB ALP Patna 2014
above the datum line Ans. (b) : A bore of 14.67 mm diameter on a job can be
(a) 8 equally spaced line measured by a vernier caliper.
(b) 10 equally spaced line • Least count is 0.1 mm.
(c) 12 equally spaced line • Micrometer– A 0-25 mm micrometer is used for
(d) 14 equally spaced line quick, accurate measurement two thousand of
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 milimeter.
• Plug gauge– A plain plug gauge is an accurate 222. The least count of a universal bevel protractor
cylinder used as an internal gauge for size control of is
holes. (a) 0.5' (b) 5'
218. The Vernier reading should not be taken at its (c) 5" (d) 5°
face value before a actual check has been taken RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
for– Ans. (b) : The universal bevel protractor is a high
(a) Zero error precision angle gauge used for accurate angle
(b) Its calibration measuring of machine, molds and jig.
(c) Flatness of measuring jaws • The least count of universal vernier bevel protractor
(d) Temperature equalization is 5'.
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 223. What will be the least count of the vernier
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 caliper shown in the figure?
Ans. (a) : During measurement vernier reading should
not be taken at its face value before an actual check has
been taken for zero error.
219. The principle of universal bevel protractor is
similar to that of (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm
(a) Vernier bevel protractor (c) 0.2 mm (d) 0.1 mm
(b) Depth micrometer UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
(c) Dial test indicator BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(d) Fixed gauge Ans. (b) : The least count of the vernier caliper shown
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 in the given figure will be 0.02 mm.
Ans. (a) : The principal of universal bevel protractor is • Vernier caliper is type of micrometer tool that can
similar to that of vernier bevel protractor. measure in accuracy of 0.001" or 0.02 mm.
• The least count of vernier bevel protractor is 5 • It is used to measure and check external, internal
minutes. depth and step measurement.
• Following part of vernier bevel protractor– Value of 1 division of main scale = 1 mm
1. Stock So, vernier scale division = 49 mm.
2. Dial 49
3. Blade 1 VSD = MSD = 0.98 MSD
50
4. Locking screw Least count = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
= 1 – 0.98
LC = 0.02 mm.
224. Least count of vernier caliper is defined as–
(a) The ratio of a main scale division and vernier
scale division
(b) Difference between a main vernier scale
division and a vernier scale division
(c) The multiple of a main scale division and a
vernier scale division
(d) The addition of a main scale division and a
220. On which part of the vernier bevel protractor, vernier scale division
are the main scale divisions graduated? UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
(a) Blade (b) Disc Ans. (b) : Least count of vernier caliper is defined as
(c) Dial (d) Stock difference between a main vernier scale division a
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 vernier scale division.
Ans. (b) : Disc– It is the most important part of vernier • It is used for measuring height, diameter and depth
bevel protractor, it has a main scale which is divided based on the principle of difference between two
into 360 equal parts. Each division is equal to 1o. scale.
221. The value of each vernier scale division or 225. In a vernier caliper, what is the difference
vernier bevel protractor is between a section of the main scale and a
(a) 1° (b) 5' section of a vernier scale–
(c) 1° – 55' (d) 2° (a) 0.3 mm (b) 0.01 mm
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (c) 0.4 mm (d) 0.02 mm
Ans. (c) : The value of each vernier scale division of DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
vernier bevel protractor is 1o–55'. Ans. (d) : Vernier caliper is least count of 0.02 mm of
• The least count is 5'. 0.001".
Main components– The least count of vernier depth gauge 0.02 mm.
• Main scale • Thumb screw • Depth rod • Lock screw It consists of the following parts–
• Fixed jaw • Sliding jaw • Vernier scale • Measuring • Base
jaws • Depth measuring bar. • Graduating beam
Note– Vernier caliper is used for both internal and • Clamping screws
external measurement. • Find adjustment mechanism
It is also used for depth measurements with the help • Vernier scale
of its depth measuring blade. • The beam is graduated with the main scale in mm.
226. In vernier caliper, which one is smaller M.S. 230. Which of the following formula is used to find
division or V.S. division? the least count of a vernier caliper (MSD –
(a) Both are equal (b) M.S. division
Main Scale Division, VSD – Vernier Scale
(c) V.S. division (d) None of these
Division)
BEML 2022
(a) Least Count = Value of 1 MSD – Value 1
NMRC, 15-09-2019
VSD
Ans. (c) : Vernier constant or least count of the vernier (b) Least Count = Value of 1 MSD + Value 1
calipers is the difference between the length of the VSD
smallest division on the main scale and the length of (c) Least Count = Value of 2 MSD + Value 2
one vernier division. VSD
Least count (L.C.) = (1 MSD – 1 VSD) (d) Least Count = Value of 1 MSD – Value 2
MSD = Main scale division VSD
VSD = Vernier scale division.
227. Which of the following is a precision measuring
Ans. (a) : Formula is used to find the least count of
instrument?
vernier caliper–
(a) Hacksaw blade (b) Prick punch
(c) Vernier caliper (d) Grinder Minimum least count = 1 MSD of value – 1 VSD of
NMRC, 15-09-2019 value
MSD = Main scale divisions
Ans. (c) : Precision measuring instrument vernier
caliper. VSD = Vernier scale divisions.
• The measurements provided by the vernier caliper Division of main scale
Least count =
are accurate and precise. Total no.of division vernier scale
• When two scales divisions slightly different in size Least count of vernier caliper = 0.02 mm.
are used, then difference between then can be 231. In a metric vernier caliper 49 main scale
utilized to enhance the accuracy of measurement. divisions are divided in to 50 vernier scale
228. A device used to measure the inner and outer divisions. So least count is
diameter of a shaft and the depth of aperture (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.2 mm
(a) Internal micrometer (c) 0.02 mm (d) None of the above
(b) Vernier caliper ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
(c) Depth gauge
(d) External micrometer Ans. (c) : Division on the main scale = 1 mm.
IOCL 2020 50th divisions on the main scale = 49 divisions on the
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 main scale of vernier caliper.
Ans. (b) : A device used to measure the inner and outer 49
Division on the vernier caliper =
diameter of a shaft and depth of aperture. 50
• Vernier caliper generally have a range of 300 mm. Least count = Division on the main scale – division on
• Vernier caliper is made of nickel chromium or the vernier caliper.
vanadium steel. 49
• The vernier calipers work on the basic principle of = 1−
50
alignment of measurement marking of measurement
markings on the vernier scale and main scale. 1
=
229. Vernier depth gauge is used to measure– 50
(a) External dimensions L.C. = 0.02 mm.
(b) Internal dimensions 232. The minimum measurement that can be
(c) Step, depth of blind hole correctly read with a Vernier caliper is called
(d) Pitch diameter (a) Sub scale division (b) Main scale division
UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018 (c) Zero reading (d) Least count
NTPC Fitter 2016 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
Ans. (c) : Vernier depth gauge is used for measuring the Ans. (d) : The minimum measurement that can be
depth of holes, recesses and distances from a plane correctly read with a Vernier caliper is called least
surface to a projections. count.

• The least count of any instrument is the smallest Measuring value = Main scale reading + Vernier scale
value that it can measure accurately. reading
• A vernier scale on caliper may have a least count of Measuring value = 25 + 0.02 × 28
0.02 mm. Measuring value = 25.56 mm.
233. In a vernier caliper, 100 divisions of the vernier 237. In a vernier caliper 50 divisions of the vernier
scale occupies x divisions (mm) of the main scale occupy 49 divisions on the main scale.
scale. Find out the value of x if the least count The main scale reading is 30 mm and 20th
of the vernier scale is 0.01 mm. vernier scale division coincides with the main
(a) 49 (b) 51 scale. What is the reading?
(c) 99 (d) 101 (a) 30.4 mm (b) 30.04 mm
BHEL 2020 (c) 30.02 mm (d) 30.2 mm
Ans. (c) : Division of the main scale = 1 mm Ans. (a) : Given,
X division of the main scale = x mm Vernier scale division (VSD) = 50
100 divisions of the vernier caliper = X divisions of the Main scale division (MSD) = 49
main scale MSD 49 50 − 49
Least count (L.C.) = 1 − = 1− =
x VSD 50 50
Divisions of the vernier scale =
100 1
= = 0.02 mm
Least count = Division of the main scale – Division of 50
the vernier scale MSR = 30 mm
234. Which of the following instrument has a VSR = L.C × 20 = 0.02 × 20
Vernier scale Total reading = MSR + VSR
(a) Vernier caliper = 30 + 0.02 × 20
(b) Universal Bevel protector =30 + 0.40
(c) Both (a) and (b) = 30.40
(d) Neither (a) nor (b) 238. Least count of vernier caliper is defined as–
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (a) As the ratio of relative change in resistance to
Ans. (c) : Vernier scale, universal bevel protector relative change in length
instrument has a vernier scale. (b) Scale as the difference between a small
• Vernier caliper is used for both internal and external division scale of the vernier scale and a small
measurement. division of the main
• Used for depth measurement with the help of its (c) As the least distance that can be accurately
depth measuring blade. measured by a vernier caliper
• Vernier caliper consists of two scale– (d) The phenomenon due to which resistivity of a
(1) Fixed scale (2) Movable scale. conductor change when it is subjected to
strain
235. Accuracy of a Vernier caliper is equal to :
(a) Least count (b) Least count/2 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
(c) Least count/4 (d) None of the above Ans. (c) : Least count of vernier caliper is that
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 minimum distance which can be measured by vernier
caliper accurately .
Ans. (a) : Accuracy of a vernier caliper is equal to least
• The least count of vernier caliper is 0.02 mm.
count.
• The fixed scale is called as main scale. Main scale is 239. In vernier height gauge, the scale division is
engraved on a solid L-shaped frame. Main scale is marked at–
(a) Fine adjustment unit (b) Base
calibrated or graduated in millimeters with each
(c) Vernier plate (d) Beam
division of 1 mm which can be called as least count
of main scale.
Note– The least count of 0.02 mm. Ans. (d) : In vernier height gauge the scale division is
marked at beam.
236. During measurement using vernier caliper, the • Vernier height gauge is a precision instrument used
main scale reading is 25mm and the 28th to measure the height of parts.
vernier caliper coincides with the main scale. • The height of an object is measured from the bottom
The least count of the veriner is 0.02 mm. The of the jaw.
measurement is
• It also provided with a scribing jaw, which is used
(a) 25.28 mm (b) 25.14 mm
for marking purpose.
(c) 25.56 mm (d) 25.00 mm
• It consists of the following parts–
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 • Base
Ans. (c) : Reading of main scale = 25 mm • Graduating beam
Least count = 0.02 mm • Clamping screws
Reading of vernier scale = 28 × Least Count • Find adjustment mechanism
= 28 × 0.02 • Vernier scale.

240. Measurement of step depth of blind hole is 244. While using the vernier height gauge, it must
done using– be placed on .................. Identify
(a) Vernier height gauge (a) Crankshaft (b) Cylinder head
(b) Universal surface gauge (c) Vee block (d) Surface plate
(c) Micrometer screw gauge RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II
(d) Vernier depth gauge Ans. (d) : While using the vernier height gauge it must
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I be placed on surface plate.
Ans. (d) : Measurement of step depth of blind hole is • Vernier height gauge is used for inspection of parts
done using vernier depth gauge. and layout work.
• Vernier depth gauge is least count of 0.02 mm. • Measuring and marking vertical distances above a
• A vernier depth gauge is precision instrument, used reference surface.
to measure the depth of holes, recesses, slots and 245. A vernier fine adjustment screw is used for–
steps with the accuracy of 0.02 mm. (a) To lock the inner jaw
241. Vernier caliper main scale, the value obtained (b) To lock the vernier caliper
on the vernier scale at zero position is equal to (c) Taking accurate measurement
15 and the vernier scale division. The value (d) To lock the fine adjustment caliper
obtained on the main scale is 30 is equal, if the RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
least count is 0.01, then the measured
Ans. (c) : The fine adjusting screw of vernier caliper is
dimension is :
(a) 15.30 mm (b) 14.70 mm used to take accurate measurement.
(c) 15 mm (d) 15.60 mm 246. On which part of the vernier height gauge are
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I the major scale divisions calibrated–
Ans : (a) Reading of main scale = 15 mm (a) Scriber (b) Fine adjusting nut
Reading of vernier scale = 30 × least count (c) Base (d) Beam
= 30 × 0.01 NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
= 0.30 RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
Measured dimensions = reading of main scale + reading Ans. (d) : Main scale on the beam portion of the vernier
of vernier scale height gauge division are calibrated.
= 15 + 0.30 • It works on the principal of vernier.
= 15.30 mm • This instrument is used to measure the height of the
242. Vernier depth gauge is used for measuring component and to mark accurately on the job.
(a) Step, depth of blind hole 247. At which position of Vernier height gauge, the
(b) Pitch circle diameter scriber is on the same level (coplanar) as the
(c) Round dimension base.
(d) Internal dimension (a) Vernier scale at ¾th position.
BDL Technician 2022 (b) Vernier scale at 1/4th position
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (c) When vernier scale reads zero
Ans. (a) : Vernier depth gauge is used for measuring (d) Vernier scale at middle position
step, depth of blind hole. RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
• Vernier depth gauge is a precision instrument, used to Ans. (c) : When the vernier scale reads zero, then the
measure the depth of holes, recesses slots and steps with base and scriber of the height gauge are at the same
in the accuracy of 0.02 mm. level.
It consist of the following part– 248. The width of a square thread of pitch 'p' is :
(a) Main scale (a) 0.25 p (b) 0.50 p
(b) Base (c) 0.75 p (d) 1.5 p
(c) Clamping screw
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
(d) Fine adjustment mechanism
(e) Vernier scale Ans. (b) The width of a square thread of pitch 'p' is 0.50 p.
243. The vernier caliper is used for measuring-
(a) Thickness (b) Flatness
(c) Shape (d) Roundness
RRB ALP Heat Engine 23-01-2019, Shift-III
Ans. (a) : The vernier caliper is used for measuring
thickness.
• Vernier caliper is least count 0.02 mm.
• Vernier caliper is made by chromium steel. Where, p = pitch of square thread
• Vernier caliper is used for both internal and external w = width of square thread
measurement used for depth measurement with the Dn = Nominal diameter of square thread
help of its depth measuring blade. Di = Minimum diameter of square thread

From square thread– Ans : (c) The least count of vernier bevel protractor of
p is 5 minutes. Vernier bevel protractor is used to
w = = 0.5p
2 measure angles.
From thread w = d • A part from being used for measuring angles,
249. Vernier bevel protector measures up to vernier bevel protractor is also used for setting work
(a) 12 in part of 1 degree holding devices on machine tools, worktables etc.
(b) 5 in part of 1 degree • It is used to measure the acute as well as obtuse
(c) 8 in part of 1 degree angles.
(d) 14 in part of 1 degree • For setting work-holding devices to angles on
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 machine tools, worktable etc.
254. Least count of vernier caliper having 50 VSD–
Ans : (a) Vernier bevel protector measures up to 12 in
(a) 2 mm (b) 0.002 mm
part of 1 degree.
(c) 0.2 mm (d) 0.02 mm
• It is a precision instrument that is used to measure
any angle from 0o to 360o. It works on vernier
theory as a result of which it can be measured for a DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
minimum of 5 minute. Ans : (d) Least count of vernier caliper = 0.02mm
250. Vernier caliper is not used to measure what– Least count of metric vernier micrometer is 0.001 mm
(a) Diameter of spindle • Since 50 vernier scale divisions match with 49 main
(b) Diameter of rod scale divisions, vernier scale division is–
(c) Diameter of external and internal a hollow 49 ×1mm
cylinder 1 VSD =
50
(d) Height of tower
• Using the formula for least count
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 LC = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
= 1 mm.
Ans : (d) Vernier caliper is not used to measure the
height of the tower.
• Vernier caliper invented by Cientist Pairy. 255. The standard tool used to measure the
• This is the reason why this caliper is also named diameter of an internal recess:
after him as vernier caliper. Through this external (a) Vernier caliper
measurement, internal measurement and depth (b) Five point internal micrometer
measurement of the job can be taken. (c) Dial gauge
251. The minimum measure of vernier bevel angle (d) Three point internal micrometer
scale is– ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
(a) 5 second (b) 1 minute Ans : (d) The standard tool suitable for measuring the
(c) 5 minute (d) 30 second diameter of internal recess is three point internal
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 micrometer.
Ans : (c) The minimum measure of vernier bevel • Internal micrometer are used to obtain maximum
1° accuracy of bore diameter in metric system.
angle scale is 5 minute or .
12 256. What is the accuracy of vernier height gauge–
252. Which is not used to measure the diameter of (a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm
beaker in laboratory– (c) 0.1 mm (d) 0.2 mm
(a) Vernier caliper RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
(b) Measuring tape Ans : (b) Accuracy of vernier height gauge is 0.02
(c) Meter scale mm.
(d) Micrometer screw gauge • Vernier height gauge is used for inspection of parts
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 and layout work.
Ans : (a) Vernier caliper was invented by a scientist • Measuring and marking vertical distance above a
named parry vernier. Through this, external
reference surface.
measurement, internal measurement and depth
measurement of the job can be taken. Due to this, 257. Which of the following is a direct measuring
measurement of larger size is taken than micrometer. instrument?
253. What is the use of vernier bevel protractor– (a) Vernier caliper (b) Sine bar
(a) Measuring diameter (b) Measuring depth (c) Odd leg caliper (d) Telescopic gauge
(c) Measuring angle (d) Measuring length (IOF Fitter 2017)
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am Ans : (a) Vernier caliper is a type of direct measuring
(IOF Fitter, 2012) instrument.

Direct measuring– Indirect measuring– 262. Accuracy of vernier caliper in metric system–
Determine the actual Transfer the 1 2
dimension and size of a measurement from the (a) mm (b) mm
1000 100
workpiece. workpiece to the
direct measuring 1
(c) mm (d) None of the above
instrument, then the 100
comparison is made. (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Exp.– Measuring tape, steel Exp.– Simple caliper, (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012)
rule, vernier caliper, dial gauge etc. Ans : (b) To find the accuracy of vernier caliper in
micrometer etc. metric system or finding the least count value of 1
258. Vernier micrometer is the least count of the division main scale = 1 mm.
metric– 1 49
(a) 0.01mm (b) 0.02mm So, vernier scale division = 49× · · 0.98 mm
50 50
(c) 0.001mm (d) 0.005mm Least count = 1 MSD – 1 VSD
MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022 · 1.00-0.98 · 0.02 mm
Ans : (c) In metric vernier micrometer the datum line 2
LC = mm
on the sleeve 10 parallel line are marked. This called 100
vernier scale. These 10 lines are equal to a part of the 263. Accuracy of vernier bevel protractor–
thimble. (a) 10 (b) 1'
Pitch (c) 5' (d) 50
Least count = (DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017)
Thimble × Division of vernier
(ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016)
1 (RRB Mumbai ALP, 16.07.2006)
1 1 (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
= 2 = = = 0.001
50 ×10 2 × 50 ×10 1000 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
259. Vernier depth bar attachment is attached to– Ans : (c) Accuracy of vernier bevel protractor is 5' (five
(a) Fixed jaw minutes).
(b) Movable jaw • It is commonly used for angular measurement
(c) Vernier scale where more precision is required for angular
(d) Fine adjustment screw measurement in workshops.
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006) 264. What is measured with vernier caliper–
Ans : (b) The depth bar attachment of the vernier is (a) Length (b) Width
attached to the movable jaw. When the zero line of the (c) Measuring diameter (d) None of these
main scale and the vernier scale coincide, the tip of the (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
depth strip remains flush with the surface of the main Ans : (d) Vernier caliper is measuring internal, external
scale end. and depth.
• It is used to measure the depth of a wrinkle or hole. 265. Why depth beam is provided at the back of
260. Principle of vernier caliper is– vernier caliper?
(a) Two scale of the same measurement based on (a) Measuring distance (b) Measuring depth
the difference between the main scale and (c) Measuring diameter (d) None of these
vernier scale (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(b) Rack and pinion Ans : (b) The depth of a job is measured with the help
(c) Spur gear and pinion of depth beam in vernier caliper.
(d) Both nut and bolt 266. What is the main difference between reading of
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 a vernier and micrometer–
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) (a) In measure (b) In least count
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (c) In scale (d) All of the above
Ans : (a) Principle of vernier caliper is two scale of the (RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012)
same measurement based on the difference between the Ans : (b) The main difference between vernier caliper
main scale and vernier scale. and micrometer is that the least count of vernier caliper
• The least count of vernier caliper is 0.02 mm . is 0.02 mm. and the least count of micrometer is 0.01
261. Vernier caliper is made up of which materials– mm.
(a) Forged steel (b) Cost steel 267. Function of off-set scriber of vernier height
(c) Stainless steel (d) High carbon steel gauge–
(IOF Fitter, 2014) (a) In draw line
Ans : (c) Vernier caliper was invented by a man named (b) To mark the center
Parry Vernier of France. These are usually made of (c) For checking finishing
nickel chromium or stainless steel. Its minimum value is (d) For drilling
0.02 mm in metric and 0.001 inch in inch (in British NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
system). (VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015)
271. Least count of instrument is related to what

Ans : (a) Vernier height gauge is a precision instrument
used to measure the height of parts. amongst the following?
• Function of off-set scriber of vernier height gauge (a) directly proportional to precision
in draw line. (b) inversely proportional to precision
• The height of an object is measured from the bottom (c) directly proportional to main scale readings
of the base to the bottom of the jaw.
• It also provided with a scribing jaw, which is used for
marking purpose. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
• The offset scriber in vernier height gauge is an Ans. (b) : Any measurement made by the instrument
can be considered repeatable to no less than the
attachment that permits setting heights from the face of
resolution of the least count. The least count of an
the surface plate i.e. vernier scale is at zero position.
268. On what principle does the vernier bevel instrument is inversely proportional to the precision of
protractor work– the instrument.
(a) Nut-bolt 272. What mechanism is used in the lever type dial
(b) Screw thread test indicator?
(c) Difference of two scale (a) Screw and nut
(d) On lead pitch
(b) Rack and pinion
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) (c) Lever and scroll
Ans : (c) It is a precision instrument that is used to (d) Worm and worm wheel
measure any angle from 0o to 360o. HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
• It works on vernier theory, as a result of which it Ans. (b) : Rack and pinion mechanism is used in the
can be measured for a minimum of 5 minutes. lever type dial test indicator.
Rack and pinion mechanism has two main
3. Other Micro Measuring Device functions–
and Use 1. Conversion of the steering wheel's rotational motion
into the linear motion.
269. The gap of the threads of the screw gauge is 0.5 2. Reduction of gears, which makes it easier for the
mm, the number of parts on the thimble is 25, steering wheel to turn the wheels.
find out the least count of screw gauge? 273.
(a) 0.2 mm (b) 0.02 mm
(c) 0.002 mm (d) None of these
Ans : (b)
Pitch 0.5
Least count = = = 0.02 mm
Parts of thimble 25
270. The size of sine bar is taken by
(a) weight What is being done in the sine bar + slip gauge
(b) width system shown in the given figure
(c) capacity to measure an angle (a) Verifying sine gauge length
(d) length (b) The surface finish of the top surface of the
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 component is being measured
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 (c) The angle between the top surface of the
Ans. (d) : The size of a sine bar is specified by its component and the surface resting on the sine
length. bar is being measured
• Sine bar commonly used to measuring the taper (d) Slip gauges are being calibrated
angle of the inner and outside cone. JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
• A sine bar is precision measuring instrument for IOCL 2020
checking and setting angles. Ans. (c) : Sine bar is a precision measuring instrument
• The length of the sine bar is the distance between for checking and settling of angles.
the centers of the rollers. • During checking angle, we should take care that
• The commonly available sizes are 100 mm, 200 upper surface of component kept above the sine bar
mm, 250 mm, and 500 mm. should be perfectly flat.
• A sine bar is used to measure angles based on the • To keep upper surface flat we provide slip gauge
sine principal. blocks on the roller of sine bar until it becomes flat.
• To check whether surface is flat or not dial gauge is

Ans. (d) : The two slip gauge in precision measurement
used on upper surface of component. are joined by wringing.
• In this figure angle between the upper surface of
Wringing of slip gauge– If two slip gauges are forced
component & surface resting on sine bar is being
against each other or measuring faces, because of
measured. contact pressure, gauges stick together and considerable
274. Measurement of pitch of external thread by force is required to separate these blocks. This is known
pitch measuring machine is done how? as wringing of slip gauges.
(a) By using vernier caliper
279. The minimum measurement that can be
(b) By placing styles between flanks of two
sequential threads correctly read by any measuring tool is called
(c) By using feeler gauge its
(d) By using microscope (a) least count (b) zero count
BEML 2022 (c) minimum point (d) main scale reading
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
Ans. (b) : Measurement of pitch of external thread by
Ans. (a) : The least count of a measuring instrument is
pitch measuring machine is done by placing styles the smallest value in the measured quantity that can be
between flanks of two sequential threads. resolved on the instruments scale.
275. Dial test indicator measures – • It is related to precision least count of vernier
(a) Difference between two surfaces caliper is 0.02 mm and least count of a micrometer
(b) Actual measurement is 0.01 mm.
(c) Job straight
280. Observation error is also known as one of the
(d) The small dimensions accurately
following –
(a) random error
Ans. (d) : A dial test measures the deflection of the
arm. Typically used to measure clearance, tolerance, (b) cosine error
and variation is tolerance of machined parts of ensure (c) temperature scale error
accuracy. (d) equidistant error
276. Dial test indicator works on principle of – RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(a) Converting reciprocating motion into linear
Ans. (d) : Observational error (or measurement error) is
motion the difference between a measured value of a quantity
(b) Enlarging dimensions by electronic system
and its true value.
(c) A combination of both (a) and (b)
• Measurement errors can be divided into two
(d) Rack and pinion
components :
(i) Random error (ii) Systematic errors.
Ans. (d) : Working principle of dial test indicator– It
• Observation error is also known as equidistant error.
converts the magnification of very fine movement of the
281. It is possible to measure the angle of a
style and plunger into rotary movement of the indicator
on the circular scale. component to an accuracy of one minute with...
• Rack and pinion system are used for converting the (a) Bevel protractor
linear speed of the plunger. (b) Vernier Bevel protractor
Parts of dial test indicator– (c) Combination set
(1) Case of housing (2) Cover or back (3) Bezel (4) Dial
(d) Sine bar with slip gauges
(5) Needle (6) Revolution counter (7) Rack or plunger
(8) Stem (9) Ball contact point. RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
277. How many millimeters are there in 0.1 inch ? Ans. (d) : A sine bar is used in conjunction with slip
(a) 0.0254 mm (b) 0.254 mm gauge blocks for precise angular measurement.
(c) 2.54 mm (d) 25.4 mm • The sine bar forms the hypotenuse of a right angle
NTPC Fitter 2016 triangle while slip gauge blocks form the opposite
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 site.
Ans. (c) : • It is possible to measure the angle of a component
∵ 1 inch = 2.54 cm = 25.4 mm to an accuracy of one minute with sine bar with slip
∴ 0.1 inch = 0.1 × 25.4 mm = 2.54 mm gauges.
278. The two slip gauges in precision measurement 282. Centre line of the contact rollers and datum
are joined by ________ surface of the sine bar are _____
(a) assembling (b) sliding (a) Same line (b) Perpendicular
(c) adhesion (d) wringing (c) Inclined (d) Parallel
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Ans. (d) : A sine bar is used to measure angles based on • It consists of a small glass tube containing a liquid
the sine principle Its upper surface forms the and air bubble, the tube is sealed and fixed
hypotenuse of a triangle formed by a steel bar horizontally in a block.
terminating in a cylinder near each end. • For vertical & horizontal alignment, the block level
• Centre line of the contact roller and datum surface tools are used.
of the sine bar are parallel. • For horizontal alignment, the spirit level tools are
283. The pointer of plunger type dial indicator used.
points to 52 divisions on dial and its revolution
counter shown 2 divisions. Least count of
instrument is 0.01 mm. The value of reading
is.......
(a) 5.2 mm (b) 5.4 mm
(c) 2.52 mm (d) 0.54 mm
BHEL 2020
287. One of the measurement techniques to
Ans. (c) : Revolution counters = 2 division determine the accuracy of screw thread is the
Pointer point to 52 divisions on dial three-wire method. Which one of the following
∴ Value of reading = (2 + 52 × 0.01) mm elements of an external thread is checked for its
= 2.52 mm. accuracy by this method?
284. The measurement in a dial test indicated is (a) Pitch (b) Profile
(a) the actual size of the component (c) Effective diameter (d) Major diameter
(b) the difference between the steps of 5 mm RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(c) the magnified small variation in sized through Ans. (c) : Three-wire method uses three wires of the
a pointer same diameter for checking the effective diameter and
(d) the direct reading of the dimensions flank form.
RRB ALP Patna 2014 • The wires are finished with a high degree of accuracy.
Ans. (c) : Dial test indicator is a high precision The size of the wires used depends on the pitch of the
instrument. thread to be measured. For measuring the effective
diameter, three wires are suitably placed between the
• It is used for checking the flatness, parallelism, threads.
straightness, ovalness etc. It is used to set the job in
the centre of a lathe machine. 288. While laying out, the vernier height gauge must
be used on the
• A dial test indicator magnifies the deviation in size
(a) Surface plate (b) Vee block
and display it on the graduated dial with the help of
a pointer. (c) Machine bed (d) Any flat surface
285. Dial test indicator are used for .......
Ans. (a) : The vernier height gauge is mainly used for
(a) Direct measurement of external dimensions
layout work.
(b) Direct measurement of internal dimensions
• It is used for measuring the width of the slot and
(c) Comparing and determining variation in sizes
external dimension. Like a vernier caliper, a vernier
(d) Measuring complicated profile height gauge works on the principle of difference in
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 divisions of two scales (Main scale and vernier scale) of
Ans. (c) : Dial test indicator checks and compares the the same measurement.
variation with high precision in the measurement of a • While laying out, the vernier height gauge must be
component. Unlike the vernier caliper and micrometer, used on the surface plate.
it does not display the direct reading of the 289. The size of a vernier height gauge is specified
measurement of a size. by
286. A block level can be used for (a) width of the beam
(a) Checking vertical alignment only (b) height of the beam
(b) Checking horizontal alignment only (c) weight of the height gauge
(c) Checking angular alignment only (d) size of the scriber
(d) Checking vertical and horizontal alignment RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (b) : The size of a vernier height gauge is specified
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 by height of beam. Beam is perpendicularly connected
Ans. (d) : A block level a device for establishing a to the base. It is similar to the beam scale of the vernier
horizontal plane. caliper.

290. While marking with a vernier height gauge, the 294. In Trigonomentry, the formula for sin is ......
workpiece is generally Adjacent side Opposite side
(a) supported by an angle plate (a) (b)
Hypotenuse Hypotenuse
(b) supported by another workpiece
(c) held by one hand Opposite side Adjacent side
(c) (d)
(d) held without support Adjacent side Opposite side
Ans. (a) : While marking with a vernier height gauge,
the workpiece is generally supported by an angle plate.
• An angle plate is a work holding device used as a Ans. (b) :
fixture in metal-working. Opposite side
sin θ =
• Angle plates are used to hold workpieces square to Hypotenuse
the table during marking out operations.
• Adjustable angle plates are also available for
workpiece that need to be inclined usually towards a
milling cutter.
291. Which one of the following elements of an
external screw thread cannot be measured
directly with precision instruments ?
(a) Width of crest (b) Minor diameter
(c) Major diameter (d) Pitch diameter
BDL Technician 2022 295. In the sine bar of length L = 200 mm is used to
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 check accurately the angle φ of the workpiece.
Ans. (d) : Pitch diameter of external screw thread the built up height of the slip gauge is h = 85
cannot be measured directly with precision instrument. mm. Select the correct angle:-
Pitch– It is the distance, parallel to the screw axis,
between corresponding points on adjacent thread forms
having uniform spacing.
Major diameter– It is the largest diameter of a screw
thread.
292. The length of sine end is the distance between...
(a) One end to another end of the sine bar
(b) Diagonal cross length of the sine bar
(c) Centre to centre between the rollers (a) 25º 10′ (b) 24º 15′
(d) Outside to outside between the rollers (c) 26º 10′ (d) 28º 10′
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
Ans. (c) : A sine bar is a precision measuring Ans. (a) : Length of sine bar = 200 mm
instrument for checking and setting angle. The size of a Built up height = 85 mm
sine bar is specified by its length.
85
• The length of sine bar is the distance between centre sin φ =
to centre between the rollers. 200
• The commonly available sizes are 100 mm, 200  85 
φ = sin −1   = 0.43896 rod
mm, 250 mm, and 500 mm.  200 
293. The purpose of the holes provided on the sides
180o
= ( 25.151)
of the sine bar is for..... o
= 0.43896 ×
(a) Easy handling π
(b) Supporting the slip gauge = 25o10'
(c) Using as a reference while setting 296. A sine bar is available in standard sizes. Which
(d) To reduce the weight as well as to clamp the one on the following is NOT a standard size of
workpiece
the sine bar:-
(a) 100 mm (b) 200 mm
Ans. (d) : The purpose of the holes provided on the
(c) 250 mm (d) 300 mm
sides of the sine bar is for clamping the workpiece and
to reduce the weight. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• A surface plate, sine bar, and slip gauges are used for Ans. (d) : A sine bar is a precision measuring
the precise formation of an angle. instrument for checking and setting angle.

• The size of a sine bar is specified by its length. 301. What is the use of Vernier bevel protractor?
• The length of sine bar is distance between centre of (a) Accurately measure the angle of taper
rollers. (b) Approximately measure the angle of taper
• The commonly available sizes are 100 mm, 200 mm, (c) Accurately measure the surface irregularities
250 mm and 500 mm. (d) None of the above
297. A sine bar is used measure–
Ans. (a) : Vernier bevel protractor is use for accurate
(a) Surface roughness (b) Gear profile
measurement of taper angle.
(c) Internal tapers (d) External tapers
• A vernier bevel protractor can measure and angle
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 with an accuracy of one twelfth of a degree (1/12 or
Ans. (d) : A sine bar is used measure external tapers. 5 minutes).
• Sine bar is used to measure the taper angle of the • The value of one division of the vernier scale
inner and outside cone and the head diameter of the attached to it is 1o-55'. The value of main scale
cone. division is 1o.
• Angles are measured using a sine bar with the help of 302. A micrometer has a positive error of 0.01 mm.
gauge blocks and a dial gauge or a spirit level. To What is the correct reading when the
measure the angle of a wedge, the wedge is placed on a micrometer measures 10.41 mm?
horizontal table. (a) 10.39 mm (b) 10.40 mm
298. Which one of the following instruments is used (c) 10.41 mm (d) 10.42 mm
to check the concentricity of the outside ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
diameter? RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
(a) Vernier caliper (b) Outside micrometer Ans. (b) : Positive error of micrometer = 0.01 mm
measurement of micrometer = 10.41 mm.
(c) Dial test indicator (d) Dial caliper
Correct reading = 10.41-0.01 = 10.40 mm.
303. The instrument used for precision
Ans. (c) : To check the concentricity of the outside measurement of angles
diameter a dial test indicator is used. (a) Vernier caliper
• Concentricity is the circular form of geometric (b) Vernier bevel protractor
dimensions and tolerance symmetry. To measure (c) Micrometer
concentricity, the target is rotated and maximum and (d) Combination set
minimum runout is measured with dial indicator. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016
• The largest maximum and minimum difference is UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM
used as concentricity. Ans. (b) : A vernier bevel protractor is used to measure
299. Which instrument is used to accurately an angle with greater precision. Its blade is made of
measure the angle of taper– carbon steel or alloy steel.
(a) Taper gauge 304. What is the least count in a bevel protractor, if
(b) Protractor main scale graduations are 1º apart and
(c) Vernier bevel protector number of graduations in Vernier scale is 12?
(d) Bevel gauge (a) 1 minute (b) 2 minute
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (c) 4 minute (d) 5 minute
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
Ans. (c) : Vernier bevel protractor is used to measure an Ans. (d) : Given,
angle with more precision. Value of one division of main scale = 1
Number of total division of vernier scale = 12
• The vernier bevel protractor is a precision
instrument meant for measuring angles to an accuracy Value of one division of main scale
Least count =
of 5 minutes i.e. (1/12) i.e. 12th part of 1o. the total number of divisions of
• Its least count is 5 minutes. the vernier scale
300. Checking the nature of the thread using– 1º 1
(a) Optical profile projector = = × 60 = 5 minute
12 12
(b) Profile meter
305. Which one is not a measuring instrument?
(c) Micrometer (a) Vernier caliper (b) Depth micrometer
(d) Vernier caliper (c) Steel rule (d) Odd leg caliper
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
Ans. (a) : Optical profile projector– Optical Ans. (d) : Odd leg caliper is also called Jenne caliper or
measuring instruments are used for highly precise hermaphrodite caliper. It is a marking tool, not a
measurements. measuring tool.
• They are known as optical instruments because light It is used to draw parallel lines or to find the centers
beam are used as amplifying levers. of cylindrical objects.
306. Bevel protractor is used– 309. Stopper is provided at one end of slip gauge,
(a) To measure or mark angles function of it–
(a) Support slip gauge
(b) Viscosity
(b) To be used as a reference while setting
(c) The division of anything from the expected (c) Easy to use
standard (d) To prevent job slip
(d) Temperature (IOF Fitter, 2013)
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I Ans : (d) A stopper is attached at the end of sine bar
Ans : (a) Bevel protractors are used to measure or mark whose function is to prevent the job slipping.
angles. It is used to measure an angle with greater 310. Bottom surface of sine bar and center line of
precision. Its least count is 5 minutes or 1/12 degree. contact rollers are–
The value of one division of the vernier scale attached (a) Same line (b) Perpendicular
to it is 1o-55'. (c) Oblique (d) Parallel
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
307. Which of the following instrument for angle
Ans : (d) The bottom surface of the sine bar and the
measurement? center line of the contact roller are parallel. The distance
(a) Seperator from the center of one roller to the center of the other
(b) Sin bar roller is the size of sine bar.
(c) Angle iron 311. If the lever of plunger of the dial test indicator
(d) Hermaphrodite caliper is parallel with the measuring surface or not, if
(UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016) it is not in straightness then it .............. is called
Ans : (b) Sin bar is an angle measurement with this, the error.
task of measuring the known angle accurately or (a) Cosine error (b) Invisible error
(c) Parallel error (d) Micro error
arranging the workpiece at a certain angle or checking
the unknown angle is taken unknown angle is taken.
Ans : (a) Cosine error occurs when the plunger or lever
• Sin bar are made of hardened, corrosion resistance of the measuring instrument is not parallel to the
and grinded, stabilized chromium steel. workpiece to be measured.
312. Mechanical comparator are mostly used it is of
two different types. Which of the following
mechanical comparator is not a gauge?
(a) Sigma (b) Micrometer
(c) Dial indicator (d) Micrometer
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans : (d) Mechanical comparator are used more. These
are different types.
Micrometer is not a mechanical comparator gauge.
313. In pneumatic comparator is used :
308. When using sine bars, angles are measured (a) Rack and pinion (b) Lever and scroll
(c) Compressed air (d) Hydraulic pressure
according to ratio between the height of the slip
(RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
gauges and–
Ans : (c) Compressed air is used in pneumatic
(a) Height of sin bar
comparator.
(b) Length of sin bar
• A pneumatic comparator is a precision device
(c) Number of slip gauge operated using a pneumatic system or compressed
(d) Width of sine bar air like other mechanical, optical and electrical
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 comparators pneumatic comparators are also used to
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) analyze the dimensional difference between the
Ans : (b) When using sine bar, the angle is formed workpiece to be measured and the standard
according to the ratio between height of the slip workpiece.
between height of the slip gauge and the length of the 314. Negative reading in dial test indicator is called–
sine bar for the measurement of angle. (a) When the needle moves forward
(b) When the needle move backward
• If sine bar is inclined at angle (c) When the needle is moved anticlockwise
sinθ = h/l from the zero reading
Where, l = length of sine bar (d) None of the above
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (c) In a dial test indicator, when the needle moves 320. Pitch of cut tooth in dial test indictor in
anticlockwise from zero reading, negative reading occur metric–
when the needle moves clockwise from zero reading (a) 1/4mm (b) 1mm
positive pitting occurs. (c) 1/2mm (d) 1.5mm
315. Dial test indicator works on the principle of– (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(a) Nut an bolt (b) Lead and pitch Ans : (c) In the metric system, the internal structure of
(c) Rack and pinion (d) None of these the dial test indicator consist of so teeth on the rack 25
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 mm length, so the distance between two teeth is either
(IOF Fitter, 2013) 1
(RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012) mm or 0.5 mm.
2
321. Lever type indicator works on the principle of–
Ans : (c) Dial test indicator works on the principal of (a) Rack and pinion (b) Lever and scroll
rack and pinion. (c) Nut and bolt (d) Lead and pitch
• The flatness, parallelism and ovality of a job is NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
checked with dial test indicator. (RRB Banglre ALP, 08.07.2007)
• Its precision is taken up to 0.001 inch in British and Ans : (b) Magnification of movement in lever type
0.01 mm in metric. indicator is achieved by a lever and scroll mechanism.
316. Accuracy of dial test indicator in British That's why it work on the principal. It has a stylus with
ball type indicator.
system–
• It is often used where it is difficult to use a plunger
(a) 0.001" (b) 0.01"
type dial test indicator.
(c) 0.005" (d) 0.002"
322. Dial caliper is not available in which least
count–
Ans : (a) The accuracy of dial test indicator in British (a) 0.1mm (b) 0.01mm
system is 0.001". (c) 0.02mm (d) 0.05mm
• Its working method is also similar to that of metric (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009)
indicator on its dial, 0 to 100 marks are marked at equal Ans : (a) Dial caliper are available in the least count of
distance. 0.01 mm, 0.02 mm, 0.005 mm, but never in the least
317. Accuracy of dial test indicator in metric count of 0.1 mm.
system– 323. Micro measuring instruments is used–
(a) 0.02mm (b) 0.01mm (a) Thumb nut (b) Dome nut
(c) 0.05mm (d) 0.005mm (c) Cup nut (d) Ring nut
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 (IOF Fitter, 2015)
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) Ans : (a) Thumb nut used in micro measuring
instrument.
Ans : (b) The accuracy of dial test indicator in metric
324. Minimum measurements by dial test indicator–
system is 0.01 mm. (a) 0.001 mm (b) 0.01 mm
100 mark of dial = 1 mm (c) 0.0002 mm (d) 0.02 mm
1 (IOF Fitter, 2014)
1 mark of dial = = 0.01mm
100 Ans : (b) The least count of dial indicator is 0.01 mm.
318. Dial test indicator is not used for which of the Dial gauge works on rack pinion principle.
following work? 325. Measured by dial test indicator–
(a) Flatness (b) Parallelism (a) Flatness (b) Parallelism
(c) Overness (d) Marking (c) Taperness (d) All of the above
(RRB Jammu-kashmir ALP, 06.06.2010)
(RRB Siliguri ALP, 2014)
Ans : (d) Flatness, parallelism and taperness of a job
Ans : (d) Dial test indicator is used to determine the are also determined by dial test indicator.
flatness, parallelism and ovality of job or workpiece,
326. Bezel of dial test indicator is used for–
while marking tool are used make a job. (a) Zero setting (b) To clamp
319. Tooth cut in 1" in a rack in dial indicator in (c) Too see the setting (d) None of the above
British system– (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
(a) 25 (b) 40 Ans : (a) In dial test indicator scale is rotated by a ring
(c) 60 (d) 30 bezel to set easily to zero. Some dial test indicator read
(RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012) zero as plus (+) in clockwise direction and minus (–) in
Ans : (b) In British system, up teeth are cut in 1 inch the anticlockwise direction. From which reading of (+)
pitch on the rack of dial test indicator. and (–) are taken.


05 for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job Updates
Forging
(c) Give finish to the drilled hole
1. Forging and Types of Forging (d) Enlarge the existing hole
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
1. Which among the following is a term used for Ans. (b) : Spot facing is the operation of smoothing and
forging in which the thickness of the job is squaring the surface around at the end of a hole so that
increased by decreasing its length?
it can provide a smooth seat for a nut or head of a bolt.
(a) drawing out (b) punching Spot facing is generally done on casting and forging
(c) drifting (d) jumping objects.
Ans. (d) : Jumping/upsetting is forging operation the
heating a metal bar then holding it firmly with special
tooling applying pressure to the end of bar in the
direction of axis to reduce its length and thickness
increased.
• Drawing out process length increased and diameter
decreased.
2. Forging is done when the metal is in
(a) liquid condition (b) plastic condition 6. The extrusion materials, commonly used for
the purpose of extrusion is/are–
(c) elastic condition (d) none of these
(a) plastic (b) mild steel
(c) copper (d) all of the above
Ans. (b) : Forging is process in which material is BEML 2022
plastically deformed to the desired shaped by
applicating of localized compression force exterted RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
manually or power hammer and press etc. Ans. (d) : Extrusion–It consists of pressing a metal
3. The forging temperature of wrought iron is– inside a chamber to force it out by high pressure
through an orifice which is shaped to provide the
(a) 860º to 1340ºC (b) 850º to 1250ºC
desired form of the finished part.
(c) 800º to 1300ºC (d) 320º to 480ºC
• Rods, tubes, structural shapes, flooring strips and lead
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 covered cables etc. are typical products of extrusion.
Ans. (a) : The forging temperature of wrought iron is • Plastic, copper and mild steel are commonly a used
860ºC to 1340ºC. extrusion materials.
Forging is general treats of hammering, working or 7. A high carbon steel has to be forged which
forging of heated metals. colour indicates the most suitable forging
• During the process of its manufacture it is forged or temperature?
wrought with larges hammer to combine the slag with (a) Yellow (b) Dark cherry red
iron.
(c) White (d) Light yellow
4. Which of the following forging process BHEL 2020
represents an increase in the cross-sectional
IOCL 2020
area and reduction in length?
(a) Drawing down (b) Punching Ans. (d) : • A high carbon steel has to be forged.
(c) Upsetting (d) Setting down • Light yellow is most suitable forging temperature.
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 • A high speed steel has to be forged. Most suitable
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 20-11-2016 forging temperature is yellow.
NTPC Fitter 2016 • While heating, white colour indicates that the mild
steel is ready for forging.
Ans. (c): The process of increasing the cross-sectional
area of a bar at the expense of it's length is known as 8. The process of local thinning down of a stock
upsetting. Upsetting involves squeezing the stock/billet by forging operation is called as
between two flat-surface. Thus reducing its height due (a) Setting down (b) Drawing down
to increase in cross-section. (c) Swaging down (d) Punching
5. Spot facing is done to: RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(a) Deburr the mouth of the drilled hole Ans. (a) : Setting down–The process of local thinning
(b) Make surface flat so that the bolt head can down of a stock forging operation is called as setting
taken proper seat on the surface down.
Forging 188 YCT
Drawing down–It is a process of elongate the length Ans. (b) : Forging–It is a process by which piece of
and reduce the cross-sectional area of workpiece. metal is shaped by heating it in a furnace, hammering it
Punching–It is process of producing holes, generally or pressing it with a forging machine.
cylindrical by using a not punch. • Forging is done when metal is in plastic condition.
9. A high speed steel has to be forged. Which 14. Which one of the following is the function of
colour indicates the most suitable forging tuyers in the forge?
temperature? (a) Permits cooled air
(a) Light yellow (b) Dark cherry red (b) Controls smoke and parks
(c) White (d) Yellow (c) Acts as an outlet of product of combustion
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (d) No function
Ans. (d) : • A high speed steel has to be forged. RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
• Yellow is most suitable forging temperature. Ans. (c) : Tuyers is a one of the parts of forge.
• A high carbon steel has to be forged. Light yellow • It is also called as nozzle.
colour is most suitable forging temperature. • It acts as an outlet of product of combustion
10. Which among the following is a forging defect, • Through the tuyers air is sent at high speed in furnace
which occurs during the upsetting process to burn the fuel.
when faces of the stock becomes square? • These are covered with fire clay to prevent them from
(a) Buckling of stock melting due to high temperature and also connected to
(b) Folds according tank to keep them cool.
(c) Surface and internal cracks 15. Which marking media is used for casting and
(d) None of the above forging surfaces……
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 (a) chalk powder (b) Prussian blue
Ans. (a) : Buckling of stock is a forging defect, which (c) copper sulphate (d) red lead
occurs during the upsetting process when faces of the RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
stock becomes square. Ans. (a) : Chalk powder–It is used for marking on
Upsetting is the process in which thickness of job is casting and forging surfaces. It is not suitable for fine
increased and length is reduced. works.
11. Forging is done at Prussion blue–It provides very accurate and clear
(a) The melting point of the metal marking but its drying time is more.
(b) Below the melting of the metal Copper sulphate–It can be used only on steel jobs. It
(c) Above the melting point of the metal sticks to the finished surface very well.
(d) None of the above 16. Which of the following defect in forging is not
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 due to melting practice?
Ans. (b) : Forging–It can be of two types. It is done (a) Dirt (b) Slag
below the melting point. (c) Blowholes (d) Seams
Hot forging–It consists of heating a metal to a plastic RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
state and then the pressure is applied to form it into Ans. (d): Defects in forged parts–
desired shapes and sizes. 1. Defects resulting due to melting practice–Dirt, slag
Cold forging–During this method, the metal is allowed and blow holes.
to flow in some predetermined shape according to the 2. Ingots defects–Pikes, cracks, scabs, poor surface and
design of dies, by a compressive force or impact. segregation.
12. Which one of the following tongs is used while 3. Defects results from improper forging such as seams,
forging hexagonal bolt? cracks, raps etc.
(a) Round tong (b) Side tong 4. Defects due to non-alignment of proper die halves.
(c) Hollow tong (d) Pipe tong 5. Defects resulting from improper heating and cooling.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 17. Which of the following are ingot defects?
Ans. (b): Tong is used to hold the part heated in the (a) Pipes, Cracks, Scabs
furnace. It is made of different capacities according to (b) Burnt metal, Decarburized steel, Flakes
the requirement of the job. Generally these are made to (c) Seams, Cracks, Laps
open from 1 cm to 6 cm. These length is kept more or (d) Dirt, Slag, Blowholes
less according to this so that the heat of job does not RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
reach the hands.
Ans. (a) : • Pipes, Cracks, Scabs–Ingos defects.
• Side tong is used while forging hexagonal bolt.
• Burnt metal, Decarburized steel, Flakes–Defects
13. Forging is done when the metal is in resulting from improper heating and cooling.
(a) Liquid condition (b) Plastic condition
• Seams, Cracks, Laps– Improper forging defects.
(c) Elastic condition (d) None of the above
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 • Dirt, Slag, Blowholes–Defects due to melting practice.
Forging 189 YCT
18. Drawing out process is done on anvil Name the Ans. (a) : In forging operation, the heating temperature
part on which operation is done––– is determined by the color of the steel, that is red colour
(a) Face (b) Beak shows the forging temperature is 600oC.
(c) Tail (d) Round Hole 23. In a forging operation the cross section of piece
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 of stock is reduced and the length is increased.
Ans. (a) : Drawing out process is performed on face of Name the operation……
anvil. (a) drawing out (b) upsetting
• In this process, metal is increased in length. (c) jumping (d) bucking
• In this first necking, fullering and finally finishing is RRB ALP Patna 2014
done. Ans. (a) : Drawing down–It is process in which length
• While drawing out, the drawing should be turned in of metal is increased and the cross-section of piece of
between, otherwise it will get suppressed or swell, stock is reduced.
which is called sag or coke for fuel. • In this first necking, fullering and finally finishing is
19. What is the chemical composition for smith's done.
fuel in a forge? • On the heavy work this is more easily carried out
(a) Charcoal with low sulphur content either between top and bottom fullers or by using the
(b) Charcoal with high sulphur content top fuller only with the job on anvil face.
(c) Coke with low sulphur content 24. In hand forging the hearths heated with..........
(d) Coke with high sulphur content (a) Solid fuel (b) Liquid fuel
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (c) Producer gas (d) Petroleum gas
Ans. (a) : Charcoal with low sulphur content chemical BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
composition for smith fuel in forge. RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
Charcoal is very clean and there is little to contaminate Ans. (a) : Hand forging–By the process of hand
the metal. forging, various shapes are provided by heating the
• It is low density, however, and greater amounts must pieces of metal and placing them on anvil with the help
be burnt to provide enough heat for bigger jobs. of tongs.
• In the process, hearth is heated with solid fuel.
20. What type of seam can be used to join a collar
to a flange without using solder or screw or 25. To ensure correct heating of workpieces during
rivets? forging, the placement of the workpieces in the
(a) Dovetail seam (b) Pitts burg seam hearth is important. The correct placement is.
(a) directly on the top of the fire
(c) Snap lock seam (d) Cleat seam
(b) away from the layers with a thick layer of
BDL Technician 2022 coal on the top
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (c) near the tuyers allowing the air to blow
Ans. (a): Dovetail seam–This seam is an easy and directly on the stock
convenient method of joining collars to flanges without (d) below the tuyers and work covered with coal
using solder or screw or rivets. RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Pittsburgh seam is commonly used in sheet metal Ans. (b) : Hearth–It is main parts of forge, in which
shops. metal is heated.
21. While heating, which colour indicates that the • It is made of fire bricks and clay.
mild steel is ready for forging? • To ensure correct heating of workpieces during
(a) Light yellow (b) White forging, the placement of the workpieces in the hearth is
(c) Dark cherry red (d) Yellow red important. The correct placement is away from the
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 layers with a thick layer of a coal on the top.
Ans. (b) : While heating, white colour indicates that the 26. Which one of the following materials for lathe
mild steel is ready for forging. cutting tools can be forged to any desired
• Forging is process by which piece of metal is shaped shape?
by heating it in a furnace, hammering it or pressing it (a) High speed steel (b) High carbon steel
with a forging machine. (c) Stellite (d) Tungsten carbide
• Forging process is done when metal is in plastic RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
condition. Ans. (b) : High carbon steel for lathe cutting tools can
22. In forging operation, the heating temperature be forged to any desired shape.
is determined by the color of the steel. 27. Which of the following is an advantage of
What is the color, when heating temperature is forging?
600 °C (a) Welding of forged parts is easier
(a) Red (b) White (b) Structure of grain is refined
(c) Dull brown (d) Yellow (c) Higher ductile and resistant to impact load
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (d) All of the above
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Forging 190 YCT
Ans. (d) : Advantages of forging– Ans. (d) : Heating temperature for high carbon steel in
• It improves the internal structure of metal. a cold forging operation should be 950oC.
• Welding of forged parts is easier. 33. In drop forging:
• Structure of grain is refined. (i) Closed impression dies are used
• Higher ductile and resistant to impact load. (ii) Final shape is obtained in number of steps
• Thick jobs can be forged without wasting material. (iii) Excess metal is provided purposely to ensure
28. What is forge? complete filling of dies
(a) Operation (b) Furnace (iv) Which of the above is (are) true?
(c) Tool (d) Machine (a) i and ii (b) i and iii
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) i, ii and iii (d) only i
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
Ans. (b) : • Forge is basically a furnace in which metal Ans. (b): Drop forging–In drop forging
is heated. • Closed impression dies are used.
• It is mainly of two types– • Excess metal is provided purposely to ensure complete
1. Stationary forge–This forge is fixed at any one filling on dies.
place. It is made of fire bricks and clay. • The accuracy of the jobs to be forged depends on the
2. Portable forge–It is made of mild steel plates. die used.
• Its design consists of a stand with four legs on which • This method is used to make jobs of the same shape in
square or round shaped sheet box is attached. It also has large quantities.
a hand blower for air. 34. The type of force applied through die in forging
29. A die is used in: is:
(a) Casting process (b) Forging process (a) Tensile force (b) Shear force
(c) Extrusion process (d) All of these (c) Compressive force (d) Any of these
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
Ans. (d) : Die– A die is a specialized machine tool used RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
in manufacturing industries to cut and/or form material Ans. (c) : Forging is a process in which material is
to a desired shape or profile. shaped by application of compressive force exerted
• Die is used in casting process, extrusion process and manually or with power hammers, presses or special
forging. forging machine.
30. Bolts are produced by: 35. The suitable temperature range for forging
(a) Upset forging (b) Hammer forging steel with carbon content 0.7% is :
(c) Press forging (d) Hot bar forging (a) 800 – 950ºC (b) 1100 – 1250ºC
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 (c) 1000 – 1150ºC (d) 1300 – 1450ºC
Ans. (a) : Bolts are produced by upset forging.
Upset forging–It is a manufacturing process that Ans. (b) :
plastically deforms metal under great pressure into high Carbon percentage Temperature
strength components of varying size. Up to 0.15% 800 to 1300ºC
31. The following hammers are used for 0.15 - 0.45% 750 to 1200ºC
impression die forgings: 0.45 - 0.8% 1100 to 1250ºC
(i) gravity drop hammer 36. Which of the following properties is not
(ii) Steam hammer improved by hot forging?
(iii) Air lift hammer (a) Elastic limit
(a) only i (b) i and ii (b) Work hardening
(c) i and iii (d) i, ii and iii (c) Ultimate tensile strength
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (d) Brittleness
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
Ans. (d) : Impression die forging–It is a metal Ans. (d) : Hot forging of metal is done at temperature
deformation technique in which a billet is compressed above the recrystallization temperature.
between two sets of a die to form a complex part. • It results in improved elastic limit, work hardening,
• Hammers used in this forging are–Gravity drop ultimate tensile strength and high ductility.
hammer, steam hammer and airlift hammer. 37. Hot forging of a metal is caused out at:
32. Heating temperature for high carbon steel in a (a) Melting point
cold forging operation should be .......... deg C. (b) Above recrystallization temperature
(a) 150 (b) 1200 (c) Below recrystallization temperature
(c) 1100 (d) 950 (d) At recrystallization temperature
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
Forging 191 YCT
Ans. (b) : Hot forging of metal is done at temperature 43. Arrange material in increasing order,
above the recrystallization temperature. according to their welding capacity
• It results in optimum yield strength, low hardness and (a) Copper, mild steel, cost iron
high ductility by hardening the metal at extremely high (b) Mild steel, cost iron, copper
temperature. (c) Cost iron, copper, mild steel
(d) Copper, cost iron, mild steel
38. Which of the following is not true for hot
forging?
Ans. (d): According to their welding capacity, material
(a) The forgings have great resistance to impact in increasing order–
and fatigue loads Copper < Cost iron < Mild steel.
(b) Forging distorts the previously created Weldebility of materials depend upon–
unidirectional fibre (a) Melting point
(c) Forged parts have uniform density (b) Thermal expansion
(d) Forging operation is suitable for complex (c) Thermal conductivity
shapes (d) Surface condition
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 (e) Change in the microstructure
Ans. (d) : Hot forging–It is the controlled plastic 44. Property of a metal due to which it melts on
deformation of metals at elevated temperature by using giving heat?
the external pressure. (a) Malleability (b) Ductility
The pressure may be applied by hand hammer or power (c) Meltability (d) Elastity
hammer, so in this pressure applied is not continuous UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
but intermittent. Ans. (c) : Meltabilty– When metals are heated then it
39. The term applied to the first operation in an transform in their liquid state i.e. melt. This ability of
material is called meltability & this phenomenon is
impression die forging is called: called melting.
(a) Fullering (b) Blocking Malleability– The ability of material to deform to a
(c) Trimming (d) Coining greater extent before signs of crack appears when it is
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 subjected to compressive force. Ex– Rolling, forging.
Ans. (a) : The term applied to the first operation in an 45. At what temperature is cold working done
impression die forging is called fullering. (a) At room temperature
• Fullering more generally refers to any forging (b) Normal temperature
process creating a sharp transition in cross- (c) Critical temperature
dimensional area. (d) High temperature
40. In forging die (without ejectors), to facilitate
Ans. (a) : Cold working– The working of metals below
removal of forgings from die, the draft for
their recrystallisation temperature is known as cold
inside force must be: working.
(a) 1 – 4º (b) 4 – 7º Mostly cold working process is done on room
(c) 7 – 10º (d) 10 – 13º temperature.
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 Effects on material due to cold working–
Ans. (c) : In forging die (without ejectors) to facilitate (i) Stress generated.
removal of forging from die the draft angle provide 7- (ii) A distortion of grain structure created.
10o inside force must be. (iii) Surface finish is remould.
(iv) Close dimension tolerance can be maintained.
41. The material which is squeezed out between the
faces of the dies is known as: 46. Rolling and extrusion are examples of............
(a) Slag (b) Flash (a) Hot working (b) Welding
(c) Cold working (d) Forging
(c) Scale (d) Misrun
Ans. (a) : Rolling & extrusion are examples of hot
Ans. (b) : Excess metal is squeezed out between the die working process.
faces and is called flash or flashing. Hot working– The working of metal above the
42. .......... tool is used in fitting operation. recrystallisation temperature is called hot working. Ex.–
(a) Files (b) Chisel Extrusion, rolling etc.
(c) Hammer (d) All of these Effects can material due to hot working–
1. Porosity of the metal eliminated.
2. Grain structure of metal is refined.
Ans. (d) : Fitting operation tool– 3. The mechanical properties such as toughness,
• File • Chisel • Hammer • Spanner. ductility, resistance to shock improved.
Forging 192 YCT
47. The most suitable temperature in forging of Ans. (c): Drop forging– Drop forging is metal forming
low carbon steel is: process that a billet is inserted into a die and then
(a) 7000ºC (b) 1100ºC hammered until it has assumed the space of the die.
(c) 1300ºC (d) 1600ºC • The lower die is a stationary part while the upper
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 part is a moving hammer dropped onto the
workpiece in order to deform it.
52. For forging of low alloy steel, its temperature
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 10-12-2017 should be order of–
Ans. (c) : Hot forging of steel is done above the (a) 750 degree Celsius
recrystallization temperature between 950-1300oC. (b) 950 degree Celsius
Metals Forging Temperature oC (c) 1000 degree Celsius
Al & Mg alloy 350-500 (d) 1100 degree Celsius
Cu, Brass, Bronze 600-950
Ans. : (d) For low alloy steel, the forging temperature is
Wrought iron 900-1300 order of 1100oC.
High carbon and alloy 800-1150 Material Forging temperature (oC)
steel Carbon steel → 1290°C
Stainless steel 940-1180 Low carbon alloy → 1100°C
48. The act of giving a desired shape to a metallic Titenium → 955°C
piece by heating and then hammering the same Aluminium → 300°C
is called : Brass → 815°C
(a) Slotting (b) Blanking 53. Tuyere in smith's forge is refers to
(c) Forging (d) Deep drawing (a) Supply the air
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (b) To control the supply of air
(c) To supply the fuel
Ans. (c) : Forging– It is a process in which material is (d) To collect the smoke
shaped by the application compressive forces exerted UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
manually or with power harmers. Ans. : (a) Tuyeres is the shape of taper it pipe. The
Blanking– The operation of cutting of flat sheet to the forced air is sent through the tuyeres to burn the fuel.
desired shape is called blanking. 54. Forging of plain carbon steel is carried out at
49. In forging operation : temperature
(a) tensile force is applied on work piece (a) 750 degree Celsius
(b) magnetic force is applied on work piece (b) 900 degree Celsius
(c) Compressive force is applied on work piece (c) 1100 degree Celsius
(d) No force is applied on work piece (d) 1300 degree Celsius
RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. (c) : Forging operation– Forging is a process in Ans. : (d) Forging temperature of plane carbon steel is
which material is shaped by the application of localized 1300°C
compressive forces exerted manually or with power Materials Forging
hammers. temperature
1. Plane carbon steel 1290°C
50. What is forging? 2. Stainless steel (non-magnetic) 1150°C
(a) A machining process 3. Stainless steel (magnetic) 1095°C
(b) A tool 4. Ni 1095°C
(c) A die casting process 5. Ti 955°C
(d) Furnacing and hammering it 6. Cu 900°C
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II 7. Brass 815°C
Ans. (d) : Forging operation– Forging is a process in 8. Al 300°C
which material is shaped by furnacing and hammering 55. The process of increasing a cross sectional
manually or with power hammers. dimension is
1. Smith forging (a) Drawing down (b) Setting down
2. Drop forging (c) Upsetting (d) Cutting down
3. Press forging.
Ans.: (c) Upsetting– When a piece of stock is worked
51. In drop forging, forging is done by droping : in such a way that its length is shortened and either or
(a) The work piece at high velocity both its thickness and width increased the piece is said
(b) The hammer at high velocity to be upset and the operation is known as upsetting.
(c) The die-with hammer at high velocity 56. For supporting metal when cutting through
(d) A weight on hammer to hammer to produce chisel which part of anvil is used
the requisite impact (a) Born (b) Face
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 (c) Chipping block (d) Tail
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Forging 193 YCT

Ans. : (c) Blacksmith Anvil– A blacksmith uses tools Ans : (b) Hemming– In the hemming process the edge
like anvil to create objects from metal. The anvil is of sheet is folded over itself.
made of hardened wrought iron or special type of steel. • It is increase the stiffness of the part.
• It eliminates the sharp edges and prevents
damage/wear of the edge.
• It is also called flattering process.
61. Hard die is used to cut hot metal and it loses its
hardness with repeated use. What should be
done for this
(a) It should be harden properly
(b) After use it is left in the open air
Parts of anvil & its use– (c) Its cutting edge should be cooled frequently
(i) Horn– To bend the curve parts. (d) None of these
(ii) Upper parts of horn is called chipping block & used (RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001)
to cut the workpiece by chisel. Ans : (c) Hard die is used to cut hot metal and loses its
(iii) Tail towards left side used to turn the workpiece at hardness with repeated use, to reduce losses of
90o. hardness, its cutting edge should be cooled frequently.
(iv) The circular hole in the tail is used to punch hole 62. Use of Bolster in forging
and bend the thin rod and hardy hole (square hole) is (a) To increase length
used for working different type work by assembling
(b) To make rivets, bolt & screw head
square shank tools.
(c) For bending
57. ––––––––– process is used to make large size (d) All of the above
bolts.
(a) Upset forging (b) Swaging
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
(c) Hammer forging (d) Roll forging
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 Ans : (b) A bolster is a type of heading tools. It has
Ans. : (a) Upset forging– This is applied to increase various sized holes. It is used for upsetting and forming
the cross section area of the stock at the expense of its the head of rivets, bolts & screw etc.
length. To achieve the upsetting, force is applied in the 63. The punches and drifts used in forging are
direction parallel to the length axis. Ex.– Fasteners, made of which metal
bolts, valves, nails and couplings. (a) Mild steel (b) Forged steel
58. Single continuous squeezing action is (c) Cast steel
performed in– (d) 0.8% carbon steel
(a) Drop forging (b) Machine forging (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(c) Press forging (d) Roll forging Ans : (d) The punches and drifts used in forging are
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 made of medium carbon steel i.e. (0.8% carbon steel).
Ans. : (c) Press forging– Press forging which is mostly Punch and drift are hardened and tempered.
used for forging of large section of metal. Uses a 64. The forging temperature maintained for high
hydraulic press to obtain slow and squeezing action carbon steel
instead of a series of blow as in drop forging. (a) 900 to 11500C (b) 800 to 13000C
• Single continuous squeezing action is performed in (c) 600 to 900 C 0
(d) 700 to 11000C
press forging. VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
59. High carbon steel forging is to be done. If it (RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009)
should be heated up to temperature– Ans : (a) Melting temperature of high carbon steel is
(a) When its colours becomes cherry red 900 to 1150oC.
(b) When its colours becomes yellow Metal Forging temperature
(c) When its colours becomes light yellow Aluminium – 350oC to 500oC
(d) When its colours becomes green
Mild steel – 800oC to 1350oC
High carbon steel – 900oC to 1150oC
Ans. : (c) For forging of high carbon steel it heated up
to temperature till its colours becomes light yellow. 65. In forging a yellowish white color occurs when
In forging operation the metal is heated and then a force the temperature
is applied to manipulate the metal in such a way that the (a) 12000C (b) 9000C
0
required final shape is obtained. (c) 1100 C (d) 10500C
60. The process of stiffening edge of sheet metal (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
article by folding is called...........? Ans : (a) When the red job is given more temperature in
(a) Notching (b) Hemming the forging furnace. It keep on changing its fixed
(c) Punching (d) Snipping colour. When exposed to temperatures upto 1200oC, the
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016 job appears white to yellowish in colour.
Forging 194 YCT
66. Red colour appears in forging when 73. Use of punch in forging
temperature is (a) For punching
(a) 8000C (b) 7000C (b) To hole in hot metal
0
(c) 600 C (d) 9000C (c) To hole in cold metal
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (d) All of the above
Ans : (b) Red colour appears in forging when (RRB Chennai/Bangalore ALP, 27.10.2002)
temperature is 7000C. Ans : (b) To make a hole in hot metal, punch is used in
67. The bright cherry colour occurs when the forging operation. Forging is a process in which
material is shaped by furnacing and hammering
temperature is
manually of by power hammer.
(a) 12000C (b) 13000C
(c) 1100 C 0
(d) 10000C 74. Necking is done for the process
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002) (a) To decrease length
(b) To increase length
Ans : (d) When the job gradually turns from red to (c) To increase diameter
bright cherry colour, it should be understand that at that (d) To decrease diameter
time the temperature of the job is upto 1000oC. (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
68. When the yellow colour occurs in the forge, Ans : (b) Necking is a type of forging process in which
then the temperature length of job increases and for making neck. Generally
(a) 11000C (b) 9000C it is done by fullering operation.
0
(c) 1200 C (d) 9500C 75. Hammers are available in the market
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) (a) According to face
Ans : (a) When the forge temperature is upto 1100oC (b) According to weight
the colour of the forge job turns yellow. (c) Type of face & according to weight
69. When a part is not in equilibrium after forging (d) According to material
and rises or falls. It is called (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
(a) Bend (b) Curvature BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(c) Jogged (d) None of above Ans : (c) Hammer available in the market according to
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 05.06.2005) weight & type of face. Hammer are generally made of
Ans : (c) When a part is not in equilibrium after forging cast steel. It face and peen make hard & temper.
and rises or falls, it is called jogged. Important part of hammer–
1. Peen 2. Face
70. Axial cracks or folds in the workpiece on 3. Eye Hole 4. Head
forging cause the bend of the fold : 5. Handle 6. Wedge
(a) Hammer shop strike on hot metal
(b) Hammering on less not metal
(c) Excessive hammering on workpiece 2. Forging Tools-Hammer, Swage
(d) All of the above Block, Anvil and Other Tools
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
Ans: (b) Hammering on less not metal cause the axial 76. Die is made up of :
cracks or folds in the workpiece. (a) Low carbon steel (b) None of these
71. Internal cracks in the workpiece are produced (c) High carbon steel (d) Mild steel
due to BEML 2022
(a) Forging at high temperature BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
(b) Forging at low temperature
(c) Not holding the workpiece properly Ans. (c) : Die is made of high carbon steel.
(d) All of the above • High speed steel is used as a standard material for
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004) dies and cutting elements.
Ans : (b) Internal cracks in the workpiece are due to 77. Hammer which are heavier in weight are–
forging of metal at low temperature. (a) Sledge hammer (b) Claw hammer
72. The action of drawing down is done to increase (c) Hand hammer (d) Ball peen hammer
the length. What tool is used in it IOCL 2020
(a) Saw hammer BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
(b) Flatter Ans. (a) : Sledge hammer– The sledge hammer is a
(c) Bolster heavy-duty hammer used for demolition jobs where
(d) Top and bottom fuller high force is required.
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) • Sledge hammer is a heavy weight hammer.
Ans : (d) In drawing-down operation fullers are used. It 78. Which angle of Chisel is for cast iron chipping?
is made of high carbon steel in two parts, called the top (a) 30º (b) 60º
and bottom fullers. Fullers are used to reduce the cross- (c) 90º (d) 100º
sectional area of portion of the stock as necking down, HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
grooving. NTPC Fitter 2016
Forging 195 YCT
Ans. (b) : 83. What is the angle of prick punch used for
Material Point angle witness mark?
High carbon steel 65º (a) 90 degree (b) 60 degree
Cast iron 60º (c) 30 degree (d) 20 degree
Mild steel 55º NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
Brass 50º Ans. (c) : Prick punch– This is also made of high
Copper 45º carbon steel, prick punch is also made hard and
Aluminium 30º tempered.
79. Swage block is made of • Its point is made at a 30o angle.
(a) mild steel (b) malleable cast iron
Punch Angle
(c) high carbon steel (d) tool steel
BHEL 2020 Center punch 90o
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 Dot punch 60o
Ans. (b) : Swage block is made of cast iron or steel Prick punch 30o
with grooved sides. 84. Select the most appropriate cutting angle of the
• Swage block used for shaping their work by holding it chisel for chipping Mild steel
on the work and striking with a hammer. (a) 70º (b) 65º
• Malleable cast iron may be produced by taking a (c) 55º (d) 45º
white iron coating and holding in at 950-1000ºC.
80. What is the use of beak in an anvil?
(a) drawing (b) bending Ans. (c):
(c) upsetting (d) cutting off Material Cutting angle
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Aluminium 30
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 Copper 45
Ans. (b) : Brass 50
Mild steel 55 to 60
Cast iron 60 to 65
Cast steel 70
85. In a chisel the cut progressively increases if
............
(a) Clearance angle is high
(b) Clearance angle is zero
(c) Rake angle is high
The round taper end of the anvil is called beak. (d) Angle of inclination is low
• Beak is used for bending and rounding. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
• Anvil is made of cast iron. Ans. (a) : If the clearance angle is too low the rake
• An anvil is a platform for shaping metal. angle increased. The cutting edge can not penetrate into
81. Leg ice body is made of the work. The chisel will slip. If the clearance angle is
(a) mild steel (b) cast iron high, the cut progressively increased.
(c) wrought iron (d) high carbon steel • Clearance angle is the angle between the bottom face
BDL Technician 2022 the point and tangent to work surface originating at the
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 cutting edge.
Ans. (a) : Leg vice were traditionally made from 86. Which of the following is not a part of chisel?
wrought iron or forged steel. The leg vice can be
(a) Head (b) Body
visualized as a giant wooden hand screw clamp placed
vertically. (c) Point (d) Snug
82. The cutting angle for chisel for chipping of NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
mild steel is– ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(a) 45º (b) 50º Ans. (d) : Part of chisel–
(c) 55º (d) 60º 1. Steel hoop 2. Ferrule
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 3. Bolster 4. Bevel
Ans. (c) : The cutting angle for chisel for chipping of 5. Body 6. Head
mild steel is 55º. 7. Point
• The cutting angle between the cutting face of a cutting • Chisel cutting tool with sharpened edge at the end of
tool and the surface of the work back of the tool. metal blade used in dressing, shaping etc.
Forging 196 YCT
87. Identify the hammer shown in the following Ans. (c) : Rake angle :- The angle between the face of
figure: tool and a plane parallel to its base.
Lip angle :- The angle between face and flank of the
tool. As the lip angle increases, the cutting edge will go
stronger.
Relief angle :-The angle formed between the flank of
the tool and a perpendicular live drawn from the cutting
point to the base of the tool.
(a) Claw hammer (b) Cross pen hammer
(c) Ball pen hammer (d) Sledge hammer
Ans. (c) : Ball pin hammer is used for shaping &
forming work like riveting & bending.
• One end of the head is ball shaped & other end is flat.
88. What is the use of dowel in assembly
technique?
(a) Accurate positioning of two or more parts
(b) Securing components together
(c) Eliminate the need for drilling
(d) Increase the efficiency of fit
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
Ans. (a) : The use of dowel in assembly technique is to 92. The point angle of chisel to cut aluminium is
accurate positioning of two or more parts. (a) 60º (b) 50º
• Dowels are commonly used as structural (c) 45º (d) 30º
reinforcements in cabinet making and in numerous ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
other applications.
• Dowels are used in wheel axles in toys. Ans. (d) : The point angle of chisel to cut aluminium is
• Dowels are used in gymnastics grips. 30º.
89. Which chisel is used for cutting curved oil Chisel–The cold chisel is a hand cutting tool used by
groove? fitters for chipping and cutting-off operations.
(a) Flat chisel • Chisels are made from high carbon steel or chrome
(b) Web chisel vanadium steel.
(c) Half-round nose chisel There are five common types of chisels–
(d) Diamond point chisel 1. Flat chisels
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 2. Cross-cut or cape chisels
Ans. (c) : Half-round nose chisel are used for cutting 3. Half-round nose chisels
curved oil grooves. 4. Diamond point chisels
• Half-round nose chisel are also known as gauge chisel. 5. Web chisels/punching chisels
• They are also used for creating semi-circular grooves.
• They are also used in cutting flutes of twist drills. 93. The weight of an engineer's hammer, used for
marking purposes is ––––––––––
90. Which of the following chisels are primarily
used to cut keyways: (a) 250 gms (b) 275 gms
(a) Cape chisel (c) 300 gms (d) 325 gms
(b) Flat chisel RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(c) Round nose chisel Ans. (a) : Engineer's hammer is a hand tool used for
(d) Diamond point chisel striking purpose while punching, bending, straightening,
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 chipping, forging or riveting.
Ans. (a) : Cape chisel are primarily used to cut key • An engineer's hammers are specified by their weight
ways a diamond pointed chisel is used for cutting V- and the shape of the peen.
shaped grooves. • Weight of an engineer's hammer used for marking
91. In a Chisel, the angle between the top face of purpose is 250 gm.
the cutting point and normal to the work
94. Eye hole of a hammer head is ––––––––– in shape.
surface at the cutting edge is known as ...........
(a) Clearance angle (b) Angle of inclination (a) Circular (b) Oval
(c) Rake angle (d) None of the above (c) Rectangular (d) Triangular
ISRO Technician B (RAC) 03-11-2022 RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Forging 197 YCT
Ans. (b) : The eye hole of the hammer is oval and taper • It doesn't have a peen.
towards the center because– • It is used for extracting nails.
• It is reduce the weight
• It is easy to manufacture
• It reduce the effort required to hammer the hand.
95. Which part of a hammer is hardened and
tempered?
(a) Peen (b) Face
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of the above 99. Hammer made of wood is known as –––––––––
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (a) Hand hammer (b) Claw hammer
Ans. (c): (c) Mallet (d) Ball peen hammer
Ans. (c) : Mallet–It is wooded headed hammer of the
round or rectangular cross-section.
• It is used where light force is required.
Head–It is made of drop forged carbon steel. • It is used for bending and smoothening the sheet.
• It must be capable of absorbing shock. 100. Claw hammers are generally made of –––––––
Face–Main component of the hammer by which job is metal.
striked. (a) Mild steel (b) Cast steel
Peen–The other side of the face is called peen. (c) Cast iron (d) Wood
Cheek–The middle part of the hammer is called cheek. RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
Eyehole–It is provided for fixing the handle. Ans. (b) : Claw hammer–It is a hammer used by
• Generally hammer is made by forging cast steel or carpentry.
carbon steel after that face and peen are hardened • It is used for extracting nails.
tempered.
• It has flat face on one side and a tong called a claw is
96. Which of the following hammers is used for made by cutting a groove to trap the head of the nail on
blacksmithy work due to its heavy weight? the other.
(a) Sledge hammer (b) Hand hammer • It is generally made of cast steel.
(c) Claw hammer (d) Power hammer
101. Identify the claw hammer from the following
figures.
Ans. (a) : Sledge hammer–These hammers are used for
blacksmithy work due to its heavy weight.
• It is also used for cutting flat, angle etc.
• Their weight ranges from 2 kg to 10 kg and according
to the weight, the length of their body is from 600 to
900 mm.
97. Which of the following hammer is used for
making corners and V-grooves?
(a) Cross peen hammer (b) Sledge hammer RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(c) Ball peen hammer (d) Mallet
Ans. (d) : Claw hammer–
• It is a hammer used carpentry.
• It is used for extracting nails.
Ans. (a) : Cross peen hammer–The face of this
• It doesn't have a peen.
hammer is as flat as that of a ball peen hammer but the
peen is shaped like an inverted V. • It is generally made of cast steel.
• The axis of this peen is at 90º to the handle. 102. Which of the following tools is used for
• Their weight ranges from 0.125 kg to 1.5 kg. flattening the metal around a punched hole?
98. For extracting nails, –––––––––––– is used. (a) Ball peen hammer (b) Power hammer
(a) Hand hammer (b) Soft hammer (c) Sledge hammer (d) Claw hammer
(c) Claw hammer (d) Sledge hammer RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 Ans. (a) : Ball peen hammer–The stretching hammer
Ans. (c) : Claw hammer– of this hammer is round like a ball, while the face is flat
• This hammer is used by a carpenter. like other hammers.
• It has flat face on one side and a tong called a claw by • It is used for flattening a metal around a punched hole.
cutting a groove to trap the head of the nail of the other. • These are specially used for riveting.
Forging 198 YCT

103. Mallet is made of –––––––––––– 107. Identify the hammer head shown in the figure.
(a) Lead (b) Brass
(c) Hard wood (d) Cast iron
Ans. (c) : Mallet is made of wood.
• It is used where light forces are required.
104. A straight peen hammer is used for
(a) Making channel grooves
(b) Depth is increased (a) Straight peen hammer
(c) Sheets are flattened (b) Ball peen hammer
(d) Angles are straightened (c) Cross peen hammer
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (d) None of the above
Ans. (c) : Straight pein hammer–The face of this
hammer is flat and the shape of the pein is like an Ans. (b) : Ball pein hammer–The streching hammer of
inverted 'V'. this hammer is round like a ball while the face is flat
like other hammers.
• In this hammer, axis of pein is parallel to the handle
• It is used for flattening the metal around a punched hole.
and hence it is called a straight pein hammer.
• It is used to flattened the sheets. 108. The point angle of chisel for cutting cast iron
is–
105. Name the hammer shown in the figure. (a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 65°
Ans. (c) :
Cast iron 60°
Mild steel 55°
(a) Straight peen hammer Brass 50°
(b) Ball peen hammer Aluminium 30°
(c) Cross peen hammer Copper 45°
(d) None of the above 109. Chisel shown in the figure is –
Ans. (c) : Cross pein hammer–The face of this
hammer is as flat as that of a ball pin hammer but pein
is shaped like an inverted 'V'.
• The axis of this pein is 90º to the handle.
• Their weight ranges from 0.125 to 1.5 kg.
(a) half round chisel (b) flat chisel
106. As shown in the figure, a strip of metal needs to
(c) cross cut chisel (d) web chisel
be expanded in one direction. Which of the
following hammers is ideal for the job? BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
Ans. (b) : Flat chisel–The width of this chisel is greater
than its thickness.
• It's cutting edge is given a slight rounding which
provides convenience in cutting.
• It is used for removing metal in the form of chipping.
110. Which of the following shapes is inappropriate
(a) Ball peen hammer (b) Cross peen hammer for head of a chisel ?
(c) Sledge hammer (d) Mallet (a) Plain (b) Round
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) Mushroom (d) None of the above
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
Ans. (b) : Cross pein hammer–It is most suitable when Ans. (c) : Mushroom slope head is a inappropriate for
strip of metal needs to be expanded in one direction. chisel head.
Forging 199 YCT
111. What is the name of the part marked as 'A' in 113. Cutting angle of flat chisel for chipping
the figure ? aluminium is –
(a) 30° (b) 55°
(c) 60° (d) 70°
Ans. (a) :
Cast iron 60°
Mild steel 55°
Brass 50°
Aluminium 30°
Copper 45°
(a) Point angle (b) Clearance angle 114. How much quantity of carbon is present in cold
(c) Rake angle (d) Cutting angle chisel ?
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 (a) 0.75% to 1.00% (b) 0.70% to 1.00%
(c) 0.60% to 0.90% (d) 0.90% to 1.00%
Ans. (c) : Terminology of chisel–
Rake angle (A)–Angle between top face of the cutting
point and normal to the work surface at the cutting Ans. (a) : Cold chisel–Metal pieces are cut by cold
edge. chisel. There is need for its use in almost every shop.
Clearance angle–Angle between the bottom face of the Chisel of different sizes are used for different tasks.
point and tangent to the work surface originating at the • Cutting angle of chisel varies from 35 to 70º.
cutting edge. • Cold chisel is commonly made of high carbon steel
Point angle–Point angle of chisel depends on the having 0.75 to 1% carbon.
material to be chipped. 115. Which of the following chisels is used for
chipping the groove as shown in the figure ?
(a) Flat chisel (b) Cross cut chisel

(c) Half round chisel (d) Web chisel
Ans. (b) : Cross cut chisel–It is used for cutting the
groove in any workpiece.
112. A little convexity is made on the cutting edge of • It can also cut the keyways in shaft or hub.
flat chisel for – • Half round groove can also be made by making one
(a) cutting sharp corners end of this chisel in roundness.
(b) allowing the lubricant to reach at the cutting 116. A groove is being chipped by means of a chisel
edge as shown in figure. How can you avoid the
(c) cutting round surfaces metal breaking off as a lump when reaching the
(d) stopping the ends of the cutting edge from end of the groove ?
entering the metal
Ans. (d) : Flat chisel–A little convexity is made on the
cutting edge of a flat chisel for stopping the ends of the
cutting edge from entering the metal.
• It is used for removing metal in the form of the
chipping. (a) Chipping with light force when reaching the
end
(b) Chipping using soluble oil
(c) Holding the chisel with less inclination
(d) The end portion is chipped from opposite
direction
Forging 200 YCT
Ans. (d) : To avoid metal breaking off as lumps when Ans. (b) : Cross cut chisel–Its cutting angle is 50º and
reaching end of the groove, end portion is chipped from forging angle is 25º.
opposite direction. • Width of cutting edge of cross cut chisel is less than
117. While chipping, the clearance angle is the angle its thickness.
between – • It is used for cutting grooves in any workpiece.
(a) the working surface of the job and the top • It can also be used for cutting keyway in shaft or hub.
surface of cutting edge of chisel 122. The cutting angle of chisel for chipping of mild
(b) the working surface of the job and the bottom steel is –
surface of cutting edge of chisel (a) 45° (b) 50°
(c) the surface at right angle to the cutting edge (c) 55° (d) 60°
of chisel and the working surface of the job RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(d) none of the above Ans. (d) : The cutting angle of chisel for chipping of
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 mild steel is 60°.
Ans. (b) : While chipping, the clearance angle is the 123. Match the following –
angle between the working surface of the job and the
bottom surface of cutting edge of chisel. 1. Cross cut chisel (A) For making sharp
• Point angle of chisel depends on material to be corners
chipped. 2. Diamond point (B) For cutting round
• Rake angle is the angle between top face of the cutting chisel grooves
point and normal to the work surface of the cutting 3. Half round chisel (C) For moving away
edge. materials from
118. Cross cut chisel is forged at ––––––– angle. hollow job
(a) 60° (b) 90° 4. Cow mouth (D) For cutting key
(c) 30° (d) 100° chisel ways etc. of marrow
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 grooves
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 (a) 1(A), 2(C), 3(D), 4(B)
Ans. (c) : Cross cut chisel–Width of cutting edge of (b) 1(D), 2(A), 3(B), 4(C)
cross cut chisel is less than its thickness. (c) 1(C), 2(A), 3(B), 4(D)
• It is used for cutting grooves in any workpiece. (d) 1(B), 2(D), 3(C), 4(A)
• It can also be used for cutting keyways in shaft or hub. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
• It is forged at 30º angle. Ans. (b) :
119. Chisel should be held at ––––––––– angle while Chisel type Use
chipping. 1. Cross cut chisel D. For cutting keyway
(a) 20° (b) 40° etc. of narrow grooves
(c) 60° (d) 80° 2. Diamond point chisel A. For making sharp
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 corners
Ans. (b) : Chisel is most commonly used tool for 3. Half round chisel B. For cutting round
cutting light and thin metals. grooves
• High carbon steel is used for making chisel. 4. Cow mouth chisel C. For moving away
• Main parts of chisel are–Head, body and cutting edge. materials from hollow
• Chisel should be kept at 40º for chipping. job
120. Chisel used by blacksmith is called- 124. Which chisel is used for cutting key-way groove
(a) cold chisel (b) hot chisel and slot?
(c) flat chisel (d) all of the above (a) Flat chisel
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 (b) Cross cut chisel
Ans. (b) : Hot chisel–This chisel is used to cut metal in (c) Half round nose chisel
hot condition. (d) Diamond point chisel
• It is most commonly used in smithy shop and forging NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
shop. Its cutting edge angle is 30º. After harvesting, RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
each time its edge is cooled in water. This makes its Ans. (b) : Cross cut chisel–Width of cutting edge of
edge hard. It does not require repeated hardening and cross cut chisel is less than its thickness.
tempering. • It is used for cutting keyway, grooves and slots.
121. In ––––––– chisel, cutting angle is 50° and • It is forged at 30º angle.
forging angle is 25°.
125. Identify the chisel shown in the figure below.
(a) flat (b) cross cut
(c) cow mouth (d) diamond cut
Forging 201 YCT
(a) Diamond point chisel 130. Which among the following is a forging tool as
(b) Half round chisel shown in Fig. ?
(c) Flat chisel
(d) Cross cut chisel
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (a): Diamond point chisels–These are used for
squaring materials at the corners, joints.
Half-round nose chisels–They are used for cutting
flutes, curved grooves. (a) Swage block (b) Swage
126. Which type of upsetting is shown as 'X' in Fig.? (c) Flatter (d) Cold set
Ans. (b) : Swage–It is a forging tool type that gives
various shapes to the workpiece.
• It has a handle at the top and a square shank at the
bottom.
(a) End upsetting (b) Centre upsetting 131. Which one of the following forging tool as
(c) Jumping (d) None of the above shown in Fig.?
Ans. (c) : Jumping or upsetting–It is a method of
increasing width and thickness of hot metal.
• In full upsetting, metal is fully heated and hammered (a) Swages (b) Hardie and hot set
to increase the thickness and width. (c) Hardie and cold set (d) Flatter
127. Which type of bending tool is shown in Fig. ? RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : Hardie and cold set is shown in figure.
• Hardie is used to cut hot metal job with the help of hot
chisel.
• Cold set is used for cutting cold metal. It is also used
for notching.
132. Which one of the following is a forging tool as
(a) Bending block (b) Fork tool shown in Fig.?
(c) Bending die (d) Bending link
Ans. (b) : Fork tool
128. Which among the following is used for bending
hooks of flat and round steel bars?
(a) Bending links (b) Bending blocks
(c) Bolster swages (d) Fork tool (a) Swages (b) Hardie and hot set
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 (c) Hardie and cold set (d) Flatter
Ans. (c) : Bolster swages is used for bending hooks of RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
flat and round steel bars. Ans. (b) : Hardie and hot set is used in figure.
Bending links is used for making clips. • Hardie is used to cut hot metal job with the help of hot
Bending blocks bends the job with the help of its round chisel.
hole. • Hard set is used for cutting hot metal that's why it is
129. Fullers are used for hardened.
(a) Necking and grooving 133. Which one of the following vices is usually used
(b) Forming the heads of rivets, bolts etc in forging shop?
(c) Making shoulders with right angles (a) Hand vice (b) Bench vice
(d) Drawing down (c) Leg vice (d) Pin vice
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
Ans. (a) : Fuller–It is a tool used for necking and Ans. (c) : Leg vice–It is generally used in forging shop.
grooving in forging shop. • Leg vice is used in blacksmithy shop. The job can also
• It spreads the metal workpiece when the metal is in be worked on with a heavy hammer by holding the job
plastic form by applying compressive load. in a leg vice. This leg vice is attached to a strap attached
• It is available in different shapes and sizes. This size to the bench. This vice can be clamped to the bench
represents width of fuller edge. with bolts and it fits into a hole in the bottom.
Forging 202 YCT

134. Which one of the following operations is Ans. (d) : Flat chisel is used for removing metal in the
performed when bottom swage and top fuller form of chipping.
are used together? • The body of this chisel is octagonal in shape.
(a) Hollowing (b) Drawing out • Its cutting edge is given a slight rounding which
(c) Jumping (d) Bending provides convenience in cutting.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 • The width of this chisel is greater than its thickness.
Ans. (a) : Hollowing–This operation is performed when 139. The chisel used to cut keyways is
bottom swage and top fuller are used together. (a) Cape chisel
Drawing out is used for increasing length of metal. (b) Flat chisel
Bending is the process of bending metal without (c) Round nose chisel
damaging its structure. Hardy pole, leg vice, horn of (d) Diamond point chisel
anvil etc. is used for this work. RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
Jumping is method of increasing width and thickness of Ans. (a) : Cape chisel–These are used for cutting
hot metal. keyways.
135. Which among the following parts of the anvil is • Width of cutting edge of this chisel is less than its
called beak? thickness.
(a) Rectangular top surface • Half round groove can be made by making its edge in
(b) Round tapered end round shape.
(c) Square hole 140. The peen of a cross-peen hammer is
(d) Bottom portion (a) Angular to the handle
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (b) Straight to the handle
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (c) Cross to the handle
Ans. (b) : Parts of anvil– (d) Bent towards the handle
Face–It is used for drawing down and cutting off NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
metals. RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Beak–It is the round tapered end of anvil. Ans. (c) : Cross pein hammer–The face of this
Upsetting block–It is used for upsetting operations. hammer is as flat as that of a ball pein hammer but pein
Hardie hole– It is used for inserting hardie and stakes. is shaped like an inverted V.
Round hole–It is used for punching holes in the work. • The pein of a cross pein hammer is cross to handle.
136. Swage block is made of • The axis of this pein is at 90º to the handle.
(a) Mild steel (b) Malleable cast iron 141. The peen of a straight peen-hammer is
(c) High carbon steel (d) Tool steel (a) Angular to the handle
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (b) Straight to the handle
Ans. (b) : Swage block–It is a rectangular block of (c) Cross to the handle
malleable cast iron. It has holes of different sizes and (d) Bent towards the handle
shapes across it and there are grooves of different sizes RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
and the sections on the edges. Ans. (b) : Straight pein hammer–The face of this
• Swage block are used for turning, breaking and hammer is flat.
punching jobs. • In this hammer, axis of pein is parallel to the handle.
137. Oil grooves are to be cut in brass half bearings. • The pein of straight pein hammer is straight to handle.
Which one of the following chisels is suitable? • It is used to flattened the sheets.
(a) Flat chisel 142. The jaws in this type of wrench open parallel
(b) Cross cut chisel with the help of a screw thus providing suitable
(c) Half-round nose chisel for all sizes of nuts. These are:
(d) Web chisel (a) Pipe wrenches (b) Monkey wrenches
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 (c) Socket wrenches (d) Allen wrenches
Ans. (c) : Half-round nose chisel–It is used for cutting RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
oil grooves in brass half bearing. The front taper part of Ans. (b): Monkey wrenches–The jaws in this type of
this chisel is made in semi-circular shape. The cutting wrench open parallel with the help of a screw thus
edge is made on its end. Its cutting edge width is very providing suitable for all size of nuts.
less. • Monkey wrenches are quite similar to an adjustable
138. The body of a flat chisel is usually made in the spanner.
shape of • The difference is that those wrenches are found having
(a) Rectangular (b) Square bigger jaw which is built with a handle itself. The other
(c) Hexagonal (d) Octagonal jaw is found to be movable on which the threads are cut
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 as that in the pipe wrenches.
Forging 203 YCT

143. Which one of the following types of hammers is (a) Hand hammer
used for forming a rivet head by spreading the (b) Sledge hammer
shank of the rivet? (c) Ball pane hammer
(a) Ball peen hammer (d) Straight pane hammer
(b) Cross peen hammer RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
(c) Straight peen hammer Ans. (a) : Hand hammer is used in forge shop weight
(d) Soft hammer from 1 to 2 kg and is fitted with short wooden handle.
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 Sledge hammer is used for blacksmithy work due to its
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 heavy weight.
Ans. (a) : Ball pein hammer is used for forming a rivet Ball pin hammer is used for flattening a metal around a
head by spreading the shank of the rivet. punched hole.
Cross pein hammer is used for spreading the metal in Straight pin hammer is used to flattened a sheet.
one direction. 148. Drawing out process is done on Anvil.
Straight pein hammer is used at corners. Name the part on which operation is done
144. The length of the hammer handle for a 500g (a) Face (b) Freak
hammer should be about (c) Tail (d) round hole
(a) 275 mm (b) 300 mm RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) 325 mm (d) 350 mm
Ans. (a) : Anvil parts–
Face is used for drawing out process.
Ans. (c) : Engineer's hammer is a hand tool used for Beak is the round tapered end of anvil
striking purpose while punching, bending, straightening,
Upsetting block is used for upsetting operations.
chipping, forginr or riveting.
Hardie hole is used for inserting hardie and stakes.
• It is specified by their weight and the shape of the
pein. 149. Which hammer is used for sheet metal work?
• Their weight varies from 125 gm to 750 gm. (a) Ball pein hammer
• Length of the hammer handle for a 500 g hammer (b) Sledge hammer
should be about 325 mm. (c) Cross pein hammer
145. Identify the name of the stake shown in the (d) Soft hammer (wood)
figure below BEML 2022
Ans. (d) : Soft hammer is used for sheet metal work.
Ball pein hammer is used for flattening a metal around
a hole.
Sledge hammer is used for heavy striking work.
150. Which work holding devices support to the
round job. While drilling the job on a drilling
machine ?
(a) Found head stake (b) Funnel stake (a) ‘V’ block and clamp bolts, packing piece
(c) Half moon stake (d) Copper smith stake (b) the machine vice and bolts, packing piece
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 (c) the hand vice with clamp bolts
Ans. (d) : Copper smith stake (d) the pin vice with clamp, bolts
146. The swage is a tool used in forge shop, it is RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
made out of Ans. (a) : ‘V’ block and clamp bolts, packing piece is
(a) High carbon steel used to support the round job while drilling the job on a
(b) Malleable cast iron drilling machine.
(c) Medium carbon steel 151. Which grade of file is used for removing
(d) Low carbon steel rapidly a large quantity of metal
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 (a) dead smooth file (b) smooth file
Ans. (a): Swage is a forging tool type that gives various (c) second cut file (d) rough file
shapes to the workpiece. RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
• It is made of high carbon steel. Ans. (d): Rough file is used for removing rapidly a
• It has a handle at the top and a square shank at the large quantity of metal.
bottom. • It is used filing soft metal.
147. The type of Hammer used in forge shop Dead smooth file is used for fine finishing.
weights from 1 to 2 kgs and is fitted with short Second cut file provides good finished surface.
wooden handle is Smooth file removes very less amount of material.
Forging 204 YCT
152. One of the function of fuller in forging shop is 156. Chisels are used to cut metal in cold or hot
…. condition. Cutting point angle of chisel is also
(a) swaging down (b) upsetting known as ……..
(c) necking down (d) bending down (a) rake angle (b) clearance angle
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (c) wedge angle (d) angle of inclination
Ans. (c) : Fuller is tool used for necking and grooving
in forging shop. Ans. (c) : Terminology of chisel–
• It spreads the metal workpiece when the metal is in Rake angle–Angle between top face of the cutting point
plastic form by applying compressive load. and normal to the work surface at the cutting edge.
Clearance angle–Angle between the bottom face of the
• It is available in different shapes and sizes.
point and tangent to the work surface originating at the
• This size represents width of fuller edge. cutting edge.
153. Which of the following is not a material Point angle–It is also known as wedge angle.
handling equipment? • Point angle of chisel depends on materials to be
(a) Cranes (b) Lifts chipped.
(c) Tongs (d) Hoists 157. Brazier's anvil is made up of ............
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 (a) Forged wrought (b) Mild steel
Ans. (c) : Tongs is not a material handling equipment. (c) Cast steel (d) Aluminium
Tongs are used to grip and lift objects instead of holding RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
them directly with hands. Ans. (c) : Brazier's anvil is made up of cast steel.
• They are usually joined near the handle with two 158. Anvil tools have ........... shanks to fit the hardy
grippers at the other end. hole.
154. Name the forging tool given in figure. (a) Straight (b) Round
(c) Tapered (d) None of these
Ans. (a) : Anvil tools have straight shanks to fit the
hardy hole. Its body is made of mild steel and plate of
tool steel is welded on face.
• Its weight is 80 to 300 kg and its size is taken as width
of working face. It is used by placing it on stand.
(a) Swage (b) Galt tong
159. To remove scale on forging, which of following
(c) top fuller (d) Flatter operations are used?
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 (a) Pickling in acid, tumbling, trimming
Ans. (d) : Flatter is used for finishing plain surface. (b) Pickling in acid, tumbling, shot peening
Swages are used finishing round, square or octagonal (c) Tumbling, shot peening, trimming
shape jobs. Fullers are used for necking and grooving (d) Pickling in acid, shot peening, trimming
in forging shops. RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
155. Name the part marked 'X' in the figure. Ans. (d) : To remove scale on forging, pickling in acid,
shot peening and trimming operations are used.
160. Which hammer is used to riveting?
(a) Sledge hammer (b) Cross pein hammer
(c) Engineer's hammer (d) Plastic hammer
Ans. (b): Cross pein hammer is used to riveting.
• The face of this hammer is as flat as that of a ball pein
(a) Ball pein (b) Eye hole hammer but the pein is shaped like an inverted V.
(c) Face (d) Left soft • The axis of this pin is at 90º to the handle.
MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022 • Their weight ranges from 0.125 kg to 1.5 kg.
IOCL 2020 161. Anvil is made of–––
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (a) Mild steel (b) Cast iron
(c) Copper (d) Ceramic
Ans. (b): Eyehole is provided for fixing the handle. It
is oval in shape.
Ans. (b) : Anvil–Body of anvil is made of mild steel
and tool steel plate is welded on face.
• Its weight is 80 to 300 kg and its size is specified by
width of its working face.
• Main parts of anvil are–Body, face, hardie hole,
round hole, beak or horn, cutting space and tail.
Forging 205 YCT

162. Anvil beak is used for ………… 166. Which tool is used to enlarge a previously
(a) drawing down and cutting off metals punched hole in forging?
(a) Drill (b) Reamer
(b) bending and rounding operations
(c) Drift (d) Tap
(c) punching holes in the work
(d) inserting hardie and stakes
Ans. (c) : Drift is used to enlarge a previously punched
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 hole in forging.
Ans. (b) : Parts of an anvil– 167. The chisel will dig into the material when........
Face is used for drawing down and cutting off metals. (a) the rake angle is more
Beak is round tapered end of anvil. It is used for (b) the clearance angle is too low
rounding and bending operation. (c) the angle of inclination is more
Hardie hole is used for inserting hardie and stakes. (d) the angle of inclination is low
Round hole is used for punching holes in a work. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
163. Choose the best device to hold and locate a Ans. (c) : Chisel will dig into material when angle of
inclination is more.
round bar for drilling:
• If clearance angle is too more, rake angle reduces, the
(a) Pin locator cutting edge digs in and cut progressively increases.
(b) Adjustable locator 168. Parallel blocks are used for.........
(c) ‘V’-block (a) marking parallel lines along an edge
(d) Wedge type location (b) leveling machine tools
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 (c) cutting parallel keys
Ans. (c) : ‘V’-block is used to hold and locate a round (d) setting workplace horizontal
bar of drilling. Cylindrical or circular objects are RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
difficult to mark by placing them on surface plate. It is Ans. (d) : Parallel blocks–It is used for setting
made of cast iron but sometimes they are made of mild workplace horizontal.
steel and case hardened. The angle of V groove is 90º They are of two types–
but considering the requirement of a large job, the angle 1. Solid parallels
2. Adjustable parallels
is also made of 120º.
169. ‘V’ blocks of grade ‘B’ are made of.........
164. Which chisel is used to separate metals after
(a) cast iron (b) mild steel
chain drilling?
(c) steel (d) cast steel
(a) Web chisel NTPC Fitter 2016
(b) Flat chisel RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
(c) Cross cut chisel Ans. (a) : ‘V’ block is used to hold and locate a round
(d) Diamond point chisel bar for drilling.
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 • They are available in two grades.
Ans. (a) : Web chisel is used to separate metals after • Grade 'B' V block is made of cast iron and it is used
chain drilling. for general work.
• Grade 'A' V block is made of steel and it is more
Flat chisel is used to remove large flat surfaces and
accurate.
chip off excess metals of welded joints and casting.
170. The included angle of groove of ‘V’ block is
Cross cut chisel is used to cut keyways, grooves and always........
slots. (a) 60o (b) 90o
Diamond point chisel is used for squaring materials at (c) 120 o
(d) 140o
corners. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
165. What is the use of beak in an anvil? Ans. (b) : V block is used to hold and locate a round bar
(a) Drawing (b) Bending for drilling. It is made of cast iron but sometimes they
(c) Upsetting (d) Cutting off are made of mild steel and case hardened.
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 • Included angle of V block is 90º.
171. The type of hammers used in forge shop weight
Ans. (b) : Parts of an anvil–
from 3 to 9 kgs and is fitted with long wooden
Beak–It is round tapered end of an anvil. It is used for handles is…..
bending operation. (a) hand hammers
Face–It is used for drawing down and cutting off (b) sledge hammer
operations. (c) bail pein hammer
Upsetting block–It is used for upsetting operation. (d) straight pein hammer
Hardie hole–It is used for inserting hardie and stakes. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
Forging 206 YCT
Ans. (b) : Sledge hammer is used in forge shop weight • Face is the main component of the hammer by which
from 3 to 9 kgs and is fitted with long wooden handle. job is striked.
• It is also used for cutting flat, angle etc. by die by • Pein is other side of the face.
hitting hard. • Check is the middle part of the hammer.
• Their weight ranges from 3 to 9 kg and according to • Eyehole is provided for fixing the handle.
the weight, the length of their body is from 600 to 900 175. Which hammer is used for punching purpose?
mm. (a) Cross pein hammer
172. Normally chisels are provide with convexity. (b) Straight pein hammer
What will be the effect on job when using the (c) Ball pein hammer
chisel not provide with convexity? (d) Sledge hammer
(a) Poor finish at the cut surface RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
(b) Metal will not be removed from the work Ans. (c) : Ball pein hammer–The pein of this hammer
surface is hemispherical in shape.
(c) Digging on the sides of the job • It is used for punching purpose.
(d) Chisel will slip away from the job. • Both face and ball pein of this hammer are hardened
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 and tempered.
Ans. (c) : Chisel is a hand cutting tool used to cut or • Its ball pein is used to make the head by beating the
chisel or piece of metal. It is an important tool of turner. tail of the rivet.
Six or eight aspects are made on its body. Its cutting 176. Eye hole of hammer is.........
edge is hardened and tempered. (a) Straight
• If convexity is not provided on chisel then digging in (b) Tapered at handle end
will occur on sides of the job. (c) Tapered form both ends
173. Which one is not the common type of cold (d) Topered form front end
chisel? RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(a) Flat chisel Ans. (c) :
(b) Cross cut chisel
(c) Half-round nose chisel
(d) Round chisel
BHEL 2020
Ans. (d) : • The cold chisel is hand-cutting tool used by Eyehole of hammer is tapered from both ends.
fitters for chipping and cutting off operations. • It is provided for fixing the handle.
• Chisels are made from high carbon steel or chrome • It is oval in shape.
vanadium steel.
177. The purpose of Anvil is:
There are five common types of chisels.
(a) Supporting the workpiece
1. Flat chisels (b) Hammering the workpiece
2. Cross-cut or cap chisels (c) Drilling the workpiece
3. Half-round nose chisels (d) Threading the workpiece
4. Diamond point chisels RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
5. Web chisels/punching chisels. Half-round nose chisel
Ans. (a): Anvil is used for supporting the workpiece.
is common type of cold chisel.
Anvil tools have straight shanks to fit the hardie hole.
• The front tapered part of this chisel is made in a semi Its body is made of mild steel and plate of tool steel is
circular shape. The cutting edge is made on its end. Its welded on face.
cutting edge width is very less. This chisel is easily used • Its weight is 80 to 300 kg and its size is taken as width
to make grooves which are helpful in transporting of working face.
bearing, pulleys and lubricants.
178. Which one of the following is not a forging
174. The pein is the part of the hammer. tool?
There are different shapes of pein. (a) Anvil (b) Swage block
Which one of the following is not the shape of (c) Fuller (d) Reamer
pein? RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(a) Ball pein (b) Cross pein
Ans. (d) : Reamer is not a forging tool.
(c) Straight pein (d) Bend pein
• Reamer is a circular multifluted cutting tool which is
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 used to make a predrilled hole perfectly round, smooth
Ans. (d) : Bend pein in not a shape of pein of hammer. and precise.
Parts of hammer– • It is made of high carbon steel, high speed or alloy
• Head is made of drop forged carbon steel. It must be steel and are hardened and tempered. Straight or spiral
capable of absorbing shock. grooves are made on its body.
Forging 207 YCT
179. The cutting angle of a cold chisel varies from: 184. What happens if the rake angle of a chisel
(a) 35º to 70º (b) 30º to 60º increases?
(c) 45º to 60º (d) 10º to 30º (a) Chisel will slip
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 (b) Cutting edge breaks
Ans. (a) : Cold chisel–Metal pieces are cut by cold (c) Proper cutting takes place
chisel. There is need for its use in almost every shop. (d) Cutting angle digs in the work
Chisel of different sizes are used for different tasks. RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
• Cutting angle of cold chisel varies from 35 to 70º. Ans. (a) : Rake angle of chisel–Angle between top face
• Cutting angle of chisel mostly depends on material to of the cutting point and normal to the work surface at
be chipped. the cutting edge.
• Small angles are needed for soft materials and large • If rake angle increases then chisel will slip.
angles are needed for hard materials. 185. What is the name of the slight curvature
180. Diamond chisel is used for: ground to the cutting edge of a chisel?
(a) Cutting keyways (a) Crowning (b) Tapering
(b) Removing surplus metal from surfaces (c) Concavity (d) Convexity
(c) Squaring small holes RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(d) Setting over pilot holes Ans. (d) : Slight curvature ground to the cutting edge of
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 a chisel is called convexity.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 • A slight convexity is given to the cutting edge of
Ans. (c) : chisel to prevent digging of the ends of the cutting edge.
Chisel Uses 186. Which part of the forge supplies air to the
forge?
Diamond chisel For squaring small holes
(a) Blower (b) Compressor
Cross cut chisel For cutting keyway etc. of (c) Electric motor (d) Regulator valve
narrow grooves
Half round chisel For cutting round grooves
Ans. (a) : Blower is part of the forge supplies air to the
Flat chisel For removing metal in form of forge.
chipping • It is a device similar to fan which works to send air to
181. Which one of the following is not the function burn fuel in the forge. These are hand operated or power
of a Cross Peen Hammer? operated and generally rotate at speed of 3000 rpm.
(a) Bending (b) Stretching • Blowers are either attached to each forge or a single
(c) Hammering (d) Riveting blower is used to pipe air to several furnaces.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 187. 'V' blocks are available in grades of
Ans. (d) : Cross pein hammer is not used for riveting. (a) 0 & 1 (b) 1 & 2
• The face of this hammer is as flat as that of a ball pein (c) A1 & A2 (d) A & B
hammer but pein is shaped like an inverted V. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
• The axis of this pein is at 90º to the handle. Ans. (d) : V block is used to hold cylindrical and
• Their weight ranges from 0.125 to 1.5 kg. circular objects for different purpose
182. Which one of the following tool material can be • They are available in two grades
forged to the required shape? • Grades 'B' V-block is made of cast iron and used for
(a) High carbon steel (b) High speed steel general work.
(c) Cemented carbide (d) Satellite • Grades 'A' V-block is made of steel and used for
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 accurate work.
Ans. (a):High carbon steel can be forged to the required 188. A hammer with loosely fitted handle will
shape. (a) fly away and cause accident
• Forging is the process by which a metallic part is (b) absorb shock
deformed to final shape with the application of pressure (c) have easy swing
and with or without application of heat. (d) convey more leverage
183. Name the tool used in forging work to enlarge a BDL Technician 2022
previously punched hole ....... RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(a) Punch (b) Drift Ans. (a) : Hammer is a hand tool used for striking
(c) Fork (d) Anvil purpose while punching, bending, straightening,
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 chipping, forging or riveting.
Ans. (b) : Drift is used in forging work to enlarge a • It is specified by their weight and shape of pein.
previously punched hole. • Hammer with loosely fitted handle will fly away and
• It consists 0.8% carbon. cause accident.
Forging 208 YCT

189. Which one of the following types of hammers is Ans. (d) : Disadvantage of forging–
used for forming a rivet head by spreading the • It cannot be carried out over brittle materials.
shank of the rivet? • It is possible only at the proper temperature according
(a) Ball peen hammer to the metal.
(b) Cross peen hammer • Oxidation occurs due to contact with air in hot
(c) Straight peen hammer condition.
(d) Soft hammer • Its initial cost is high
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 • The volume of job changes.
Ans. (a) : Ball peen hammer is used for forming a rivet
194. Which of the following hammers requires an
head by spreading the shank of the rivet.
automatic power source to raise the hammer
• The pein of this hammer is hemispherical in shape.
before striking?
• Both pein and face of this hammer are hardened and
(a) Ball peen hammer (b) Cross peen hammer
tempered.
(c) Sledge hammer (d) Power hammer
190. Scribers are made of ….
(a) low carbon steel
(b) medium carbon steel Ans. (d) : Power hammer require an automatic source
(c) high carbon steel to raise the hammer before striking.
(d) cast iron • It is used for forge welding process by blacksmith to
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 creates knives, blades and more.
Ans. (c) : Scribers–It is a marking tool, made of high 195. Which of the following tools is used for
carbon steel. flattening and smoothing the surface of a job?
• It is used for drawing lines while marking on metal (a) Flatter (b) Anvil
jobs. It should always be held diagonally in the (c) Hammer (d) Blower
direction of movement. Repeated use of the scriber RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
wears out at its ends. It edges should always be sharp. Ans. (a): Flatter is used for flattening and smoothing
191. Handle of hammer is made of: the surface of a job.
(a) Hard wood Anvil is a block on which metal is placed to be shaped
(b) Soft wood originally by hand with a hammer.
(c) Elastic wood or Bamboo Hammer is a tool used for striking purpose while
(d) plastic punching, bending, straightening, chipping, forging or
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 riveting.
Ans. (a): Handle of hammer is made of hard wood. Blower is part of forge that supplies air to forge.
196. Which of the following proves more
appreciable when air is required at appreciable
pressure?
(a) Fan (b) Root blower
192. An operation, in which force is applied (c) Motor (d) Compressor
perpendicular to the axis of length so that RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
metal gets elongated by reducing the cross- Ans. (b) : Root blower proves more appreciable when
sectional area, is called – air is required at appreciable pressure.
(a) jumping (b) upsetting • Blowers are either attached to each forge or a single
(c) drawing out (d) bending blower is used to pipe air to several furnaces.
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 197. Which part of an anvil is used to bend the job
Ans. (c) : Drawing cut–An operation, in which force is at right angle?
applied perpendicular to the axis of length so that metal (a) Hardie hole (b) Beak
gets elongated by reducing the cross-sectional area. (c) Face (d) Tail square beak
• In this first necking, fullering and finally finishing is RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
done.
• While drawing out, drawing should be turned in Ans. (d) : Tail square beak is used to bend the job at
between otherwise it will get suppressed which is called right angle.
sag. Hardie hole is ued for inserting hardie and stakes.
193. Disadvantage of forging is- Face is used for drawing down and cutting off metals.
(a) it cannot be carried out over brittle metals Beak is used for rounding and bending operation.
(b) its initial cost is high 198. Which of the following is used to store the
(c) the volume of the job changes water for cooling the hot tools and jobs?
(d) all of the above (a) Quenching tank (b) Coal tank
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (c) Tuyers (d) Cooling tank
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Forging 209 YCT
Ans. (a) : Quenching tank is used to store the water for 202. Identify the forging tool shown in the following
cooling the hot tools and jobs. figure.
Parts of forge–
Hearth–It is a part in which metal is heated.
Tuyers–It sends air at high speed in furnace to burn the
fuel.
Water tank–Tuyers is attached to water tank to keep
itself cool so that it will not melt because of high (a) Rack used to remove the clinkers
temperature. (b) A shovel which is used for lifting the coal
Blower is part of forge that supplies air to forge. (c) Sprinkle water in the furnace to bring down
the fire at one place
199. Which forging tool is shown in the following
(d) The flatter which makes the surface smooth
figure?
Ans. (a) : Rack an poker are used to remove clinkers
from the fire. Its shape is like a thin tube.
It is of two types–
1. Straight
(a) Swages (b) Hardie and hot set 2. Bent
(c) Hardie and cold set (d) Flatter 203. Identify the forging tool shown in the following
figure.
Ans. (b) : Hardie and hot set is shown in figure.
• Hardie is used to cut hot metal job with help of hot
chisel.
• Hard set is used for cutting hot metal that's why it is
hardened. (a) The rack used to remove the clinkers
200. Which of the following is used to bend the hook (b) A shovel which is used for lifting the coal
of flat and round steel of bars? (c) Sprinkle water in the furnace to bring down
(a) Bending link (b) Bending blocks the fire at one place
(c) Bolster swage (d) Fork tool (d) The flatter which makes the surface smooth
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (c) : Sprinkler is a forging that sprinkle water in
Ans. (c) : Bolster swage–It is mainly used to bend the
the furnace to bring down the fire at one place.
hook of flat and round steel of bars.
Bending blocks–It is a block with large round hole. The 204. Identify the forging tool from the following
figure.
job is folded with the help of its round holes.
Bending links–It is used for making clips.
201. Identify the hollow tong from the following
figures.
(a) (a) The rack used to remove the clinkers
(b) A shovel which is used for lifting the coal
(c) Sprinkle water in the furnace to bring down
(b) the fire at one place
(d) The flatter which makes the surface smooth
(c) RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
Ans.(b): Shovel is a tool used for putting coal in
furnace.
(d)
205. Identify the forging tool shown in the following
figure.
Ans. (d) : Hollow tong–The bits of hollow round tongs
are round in shape and can grip a job from the end. It
can be used to hold cylindrical, square or hexagonal
jobs firmly and securely.
Forging 210 YCT

(a) The set hammer to be used for making the (a) The set hammer which is used for making the
slot on the job slot on the job
(b) The fuller to be used for making of solder on (b) The fuller which is used for making of solder
right angle on right angle
(c) The bolster which is used for making the head
(c) The bolster to be used for making the head of
of rivet and bolt
rivet and bolt
(d) The flatter which is used for finishing the
(d) The flatter to be used for finishing the surface surface.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
Ans. (a) : Set hammer is a forging tool which is used Ans. (c) : Bolster is a forging tool which is used for
for making slots on the job. making the head of rivet and holt bolt so it is also called
Some forging tools– as heading tool.
Bending blocks 209. Identify the hammer shown in the figure.
Bending links
Bolster swages
Bending die
206. Steps of drawing out is shown in the figure. (a) Ball peen hammer (b) Cross peen hammer
Identify the necking from it. (c) Sledge hammer (d) Mallet
(a) (b) RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Ans. (c) : Hammer shown in figure is sledge hammer.
Sledge hammer–These hammers are used for
(c) (d) blacksmithy work due to its heavy weight.
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 • It is also used for cutting flat, angle etc. by die by
hitting hard.
Ans. (b) : Drawing out–An operation in which forge is • Their weight ranges from 2 kg to 10 kg and according
applied perpendicular to the axis of the length so that to the weight, the length of their body is from 600 to
metal gets elongated by reducing cross-sectional area. 900 mm.
• In this first necking, fullering and finally finishing is 210. In ______ forging, job is heated and placed on
done. the anvil.
• Fig 'b' shows necking process. (a) hand (b) hammer
207. Identify the beak of anvil form the following (c) press (d) open die
figure. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
Ans. (a) : Types of forging–
• Hand forging
(a) (b) • Machine forging
• Drop forging
Hand forging–By the process of hand forging, various
shapes are provided by heating the pieces of metal and
placing them on anvil with the help of tong or according
(c) (d) to the requirement various forms are given to job.
211. ______ stores fuel for forging.
(a) Surge tank (b) Coal tank
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) Tuyers (d) Hearth
Ans. (b) : Figure 'b' shows anvil. Ans. (b) : Parts of forge–
Anvil–It is used for supporting the workpiece. It has • Coal tank stores fuel for forging.
straight shanks to fit the hardie hole. Its body is made of • Tuyers sends air at high speed in furnace to burn the
mild steel and plate of tool steel is welded on face. fuel.
• Its weight is 80 to 300 kg and its size is taken as width Water tanks–Tuyers is attached to water tank to keep
of working face. itself cool so that it will not melt because of high
temperature.
208. Identify the forging tool given in the following Blower is part of forge that supplies air to forge.
figure.
212. ______ hammer has wedge shaped peen.
(a) Cross peen (b) Hand
(c) Ball peen (d) Sledge
Forging 211 YCT
Ans. (a) : Cross pein hammer has wedge shaped pein. Blower is a part of forge that supplies air to forge.
• The face of this hammer is as flat as that of ball pein Water tank–Tuyers is attached to water tank to keep
hammer but the pein is shaped like an inverted 'V'. itself cool so that it will not melt because of high
• The axis of this pein is 90º to the handle. temperature.
• Their weight ranges from 0.125 kg to 1.5 kg. 217. A chisel head should not be like
213. Rake and poker is used to remove_____ from (a) plane (b) round
the fire. (c) mushroom (d) none of the above
(a) coal (b) coke NLC Technician 24-09.2022
(c) clinkers (d) air RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 Ans. (c) : A chisel head should not be like mushroom
Ans. (c) : Rake and poker is used to remove clinkers shape.
from the fire. A chisel or punch with a mushroomed head is
• Its shape is like a thin tube. dangerous because bits of metal chisel or punch is
• It is of two types– ground to a smooth and chamfer.
1. Straight 218. Type of forging used for No scaling at
2. Bent. workpiece surface:
Sprinkler is a forging that sprinkle water in the furnace (a) Hot forging of steel
to bring down the fire at one place. (b) Cold forging of steel
Shovel is a tool used for cutting coal in furnace. (c) Warm forging of steel
214. The main part of the forge furnace where metal (d) None of these
is heated is – RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
(a) quenching tank (b) blower
Ans. (b) : Cold forging of steel for no scaling at
(c) hearth (d) chimney
workpiece surface.
• Because of the higher strength of the material cold
Ans. (c) : Parts of forge– forging requires greater force and the workpiece
Hearth is a part in which metal is heated. materials must have sufficient ductility at room
Tuyers sends air to high speed in furnace to burn the temperature. Cold forged parts have good surface finish
fuel. and dimensional accuracy.
Blower is a part of forge that supplies air to forge. • Hot forging required smaller forces, but it produces
Water tank–Tuyers is attached to water tank to keep accuracy and surface finish that are not as good.
itself cool so that it will not melt because of high
temperature. 219. For mild steel, the hot forging temperature
range is ..........
215. The part of the anvil which is used for jumping
(a) 400ºC to 600ºC (b) 700ºC to 900ºC
and upsetting the metal is –
(a) face (b) beak (c) 1000ºC to 1200ºC (d) 1300ºC to 1500ºC
(c) upsetting block (d) round hole RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 Ans. (c) :
Ans. (c) : Parts of an anvil– Metal Forging temperature
Face is used for drawing down and cutting off (ºC)
operations. Low carbon steel (mild 1000 to 1200
Beak is a round tapered end of an anvil. It is used for steel)
bending operation. Medium carbon steel 750 to 1250
Upsetting block is used for jumping and upsetting the High carbon and alloy 800 to 1150
metal. steels
216. Which of the following is the function of tuyers Stainless steel 940 to 1180
in the forge?
(a) To supply the cold air 220. Compound dies perform ..........
(b) To control smoke and spark (a) Two or more operation at one station in one
stroke
(c) To extrude the burning substances
(b) Two or more operation at different station in
(d) To soak the burning substances
one stroke
(c) Only one operation and that too at one work
Ans. (a) : Parts of forge– station
Hearth is a part in which metal is heated. (d) Two operations at two different work stations
Tuyers sends air to high speed in furnace to burn the in the same stroke
fuel. RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Forging 212 YCT
Ans. (a): Compound dies perform two or more 225. It has a 60 degree cutting angle and is used for
operation at one station in one stroke. trimming and finishing:
Simple die only one operation is performed for each (a) Motrise chisel (b) Paring chisel
stroke of the press ram. (c) Skew chisel (d) Dovetail chisel
Combination die two or more operations RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
simultaneously at one station in a single stroke of the Ans. (c) : Skew chisel–It has 60º cutting angle and is
ram. used for trimming and finishing.
Progressive die two or more operations and are Paring chisel–It is primarily used for removing thin
performed simultaneously at different stations. shaving of woods.
221. In blanking operation the clearance provided is Mortise chisel–It is used for chiselling away the waste
........ wood.
(a) 50% on punch and 50% on die 226. It is used for cleaning out corners or difficult
(b) On die places and pulling over centre punch marks
(c) On punch wrongly placed for drilling:
(d) On die or punch depending upon designer's (a) Flat chisel
choice (b) Cross cut chisel
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 (c) Round nose chisel
Ans. (c) : Blanking operation–Die size = blank size (d) Diamond point chisel
• As the blank is fixed since blank here is a useful part. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
The clearance will be provided on the punch in the
blanking operation.
Punching operation–The clearance will be provided on Ans. (d) : Diamond point chisel is used for cleaning
die. out corners or difficult places and pulling center punch
marks wrongly placed for drilling.
222. These include taper pins, straight pins, dowel
pins, levis pins, and cotter pins : Flat chisel is used for removing metal in form of
chipping.
(a) General fasteners (b) Machine pins
(c) Rivets (d) Hammer Cross cut chisel is used for cutting keyways etc. of
narrow grooves.
Round nose chisel is used for cutting round grooves.
Ans. (b) : Machine pins are employed to properly align
join together two parts or components. 227. The eyehole of the hammer is oval and tapers
• The machine pin fastener commonly employed in towards the centre to ............
industrial and commercial application. (a) reduct the weight
• It includes–Taper pins, straight pins, dowel pins, levis (b) make manufacturing easy
pin, locating pins, cotter pins etc. (c) reduce the effort required to hammer
223. The cold chisels are made by: (d) wedge the handle
(a) Drawing (b) Rolling RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(c) Piercing (d) Forging Ans. (d) :
Ans. (d) : Chisel is a hand cutting tool used to cut or
chisel a piece of metal. It is an important tool of turner.
Six or eight aspects are made on its body. It is of two
types–
1. Hot chisel
2. Cold chisel. • Eyehole of the hammer is oval and tapers towards the
• Cold chisel is used to cut metal in cold condition. center to wedge the handle.
• Cold chisel is made by forging operation. 228. Chisel is _______for removing more brittleness.
224. While tightening or loosening a nut with an (a) Tempered (b) Hardened
adjustable wrench: (c) Annealed (d) Carburised
(a) The wrench should be pulled toward you RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
(b) The wrench should be pushed away from you Ans.(a): Chisel is most commonly used tool for cutting
(c) Both are recommended light and thin metals.
(d) None of these • High carbon steel is used for making chisel.
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 • Main parts of chisel are–Head, body and cutting edge.
Ans.(a): Wrenches are used for fastening and • Chisel is tempered for removing more brittleness.
loosening bolts and pipes apart from the spanners. 229. Anvil, fitted on micrometer frame is made up
• Most of wrenches are adjustable, with different of which material
opening ranges. (a) Aluminium (b) Bronze
• While tightening or loosening a nut with an adjustable (c) Alloy steel (d) Cast iron
wrench the wrench should be pulled towards you. UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Forging 213 YCT

Ans. (c) : The anvil is heavy block of alloy steel on Ans. (c) : A swage block is a large, heavy block of cast-
which hot metal is forged. iron used in smiting with variously-sized holes in its
Its top surface is hardened. face and usually with forms on the sides.
230. What is the purpose of stakes? 235. The teeth of a saw are folded:
(a) Blanking (b) Piercing (a) Left
(b) Towards south
(c) Shearing (d) Forming
(c) In any direction
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (d) Each tooth are south right and left and every
Ans. (d) : The purpose of stakes is forming. Stakes are third and fourth tooth are straight
the sheet metal worker's anvils used for bending, UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
seaming or forming using a hammer or mallet. Ans. (d) : To prevent the blade from getting caught in
Types of stakes– the slit cut by it, its teeth are turned on both sides. So
1. Hatchet stake 2. Halfmoon stake 3. Creasing iron that the width of the silt it cuts is greater than the
stake 4. Horse stake 5. Funnel stake 6. Beak or Bick thickness of the blade. This process is called the setting
iron stake. of teeth.
231. Instrument used to make fluid congruent joints In the single staggered setting, one tooth is turned to the
called left and the other tooth to the right. Every third & fourth
(a) Rivet snap (b) Fullering tool tooth is kept straight.
(c) Calking tool (d) Dolly tool 236. Why is the eye hole made long in a hammer
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (a) Handle does not rotate in hammer
Ans. (b) : Fullering tool is used to make fluid congruent (b) To increase life
joint by pressing the surface of the edge of the plate. (c) Looking good shape
• Caulking is used to make the riveted joint leak proof (d) For good greeping
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
or fluid-tight in pressure vessel like steam boilers,
air receivers and tank etc. Ans : (a) Hammer– According to the function and size
there are many types of hammers. They are mostly
made of cast steel. Its edge hole is made long. So that
the handle does not rotate in the hammer.
Parts of hammer–
(i) Face (ii) Peen (iii) Body (iv) Eye-hole (v) Handle
(vi) Cheek.
237. What is the included angle in V Blocks?
(a) 45o (b) 90o
232. The included angle of VEE block is..........in all (c) 120 o
(d) 60o
cases. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
(a) 180 (b) 900 Ans. (b) : V-block consist of rectangular steel or cast
(c) 1180 (d) 450 iron block with a 90o included angle. It is precision
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 metal working jigs typically used to hold round metal
Ans. (b) : V-block consist of rectangular steel or cast rods or pipes for performing drilling or milling
iron block with a 90o included angle. It is precision operations.
metal working jigs typically used to hold round metal
rods or pipes for performing drilling or milling
operations.
233. The tool used to keep a metal piece in fire for
heating as well as gripping and turning the 238. In forging a drift is used for :
work piece during forging is : (a) Drilling a hole
(a) Tongs (b) Anvil (b) Enlarging a punched hole
(c) Hammers (d) Snips (c) Upsetting
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (d) Bending
Ans. (a) : Tongs– A mild steel tong is used to hold the ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
heated part in the furnace. It is made in different Ans. (b) : A drift in a forging is used to enlarge and
capacities according to the job. Generally they are made shape a hole to a specific dimension or shape. Unlike a
to open from 1 cm to 6 cm. Their length is also kept punch, a drift usually has a slightly taper to smaller on
more are less according so that the heat of the job does the stuck end to ensure that it falls through the work-
not reach the hand. piece.
234. Swage block is made of: 239. Which of the following hammers is used for
(a) Alloy steel (b) Steel softer blow?
(c) Cast Iron (d) Stainless steel (a) Sledge hammer (b) Rubber hammer
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 (c) Cluw hammer (d) Ball Peen hammer
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
Forging 214 YCT
Ans. (b) : Rubber hammer– It is a type of mallet– use 245. Which one of the following is a striking tool?
for soft materials. (a) Hammer (b) Reamer
Sledge hammer– Breaking stone (c) Jumper (d) Drill bit
Ball peen hammer– Metal working Ans. (a) : Hammer is a striking tool. It is a common
Claw hammer– Wood working. hand tool. Banding, chipping, riveting & forging
240. Hammer used for drawing nails out of wooden process are performed by hammer.
articles : 246. In forging a hardie is used for
(a) Double face hammer (a) Cutting heavy hot metal
(b) Ball peen hammer (b) Swaging hot metal
(c) Soft hammer (c) Bending hot metal
(d) Claw hammer (d) Upsetting hot metal
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
Ans. (a) : In forging hardie is used for cutting heavy hot
Ans. (d) : Claw hammer– Claw hammer is used by
metal.
carpenters in this, a chisel is made by cutting a slit to
trap the flat face on one side and the head of the nail on Hardie is a form of chisel used in forging shop with a
the other side. Which is called claw. It is used to tapered head fixed in to the hardie hole of the anvil and
remove nails from wooden objects. the cutting edge being upward.
241. "V" blocks of grade 'B' are made of 247. "V" block is used to hold round parts. "V"
(a) Closed grain cast iron groove angle is ................
(b) Mild steel (a) 30º (b) 60º
(c) Steel (c) 90º (d) 120º
(d) Tool steel ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 Ans. (c) : V-block consist of rectangular steel or cast
Ans. (a) : V-blocks are generally made of hardened ion block with a 90o included angle. It is precision metal
steel or cast iron and are available in the wide range of working jigs typically used to hold round metal rods or
sizes. It is found in grade A and grade B. B grade V pipes for performing drilling or milling operations.
blocks are made from closed grain cast iron and A grade 248. Which one of the following type of hammer is
V blocks are made from high quality steel. used for rivet head by spreading the shank of
242. The weight of the hammer is stamped in which the rivet?
part of a hammer (a) Ball peen hammer (b) Cross peen hammer
(a) Face (b) Peen (c) Soft hammer (d) Mallet
(c) Cheek (d) Eye hole ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 Ans. (a) : A ball peen hammer is used to make the rivet
Ans. (c): The weight of the hammer is marked on the head by expanding the shank of rivet. This hammer is
cheek part of the hammer. Hammer are often made of mostly used for chipping and riveting.
high carbon steel and the face & peen are hardened and According to BIS it is 0.11 to 0.91 kg are found up to
tempered.
ball peen hammer usually 0.33 kg. for lighter works.
• Hammers are classified on the basis of its shape and
weight. 249. The purpose of holding the hammer handle at
243. Which is a forging tool? its ends is to:
(a) Taper (b) Round file (a) avoid injury to hand
(c) HSS tool (d) Fuller (b) get a proper grip
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (c) have maximum leverage
Ans. (d) : Fuller is a forging tool. It is used to reduce (d) avoid damage to workpiece
the cross sectional area of a portion of the stock. Fuller RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I
are used necking down, grooving and drawing a piece Ans. (c) : The purpose of holding the hammer handle at
of work. its ends is to have maximum leverage.
244. If forging is carried out at very low We know that–
temperature, what will happen? (For ideal machine) =
(a) More scaling will occur Length of effort side ( x ) from fulcrum
MA =
(b) Easy forming happens Length of weight side ( y ) from fulcrum
(c) Cracking occurs
(d) Forging surfaces will be smooth If x ↑ : M.A. ↑
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 250. V-block is used in workshop to check :
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (a) Roundness of a job
Ans. (c): Surface cracking–It is occurs when the (b) Dimensions of oval job
forging operation takes place at low temperatures, (c) Surface roughness
which causes the metal to crack. The solution is to work (d) Taper on a job
at higher temperature. SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
Forging 215 YCT
Ans. (a) : V-block is used in workshop to check Ans : (c) Hammer is manufactured by medium carbon
roundness of a job. steel, forging steel, cast steel etc. It has four main parts
251. Identify the tongs in figure and choose answer – Surface, peen, check eye.
with the help of following codes–
• Surface is the main part of hammer. It is hardened and

made in to a corves shape with somewhat protruding
1. Pick up outwards.
2. Hollow round • Peen is the front part of surface. By this operation
3. Square mouth like beating of curved surfaces, spreading the rivet
4. Flat mouth head, widening the metal by beating etc. are performed.
(a) A–3, B–4, C–1, D–2 •
(b) A–3, B–1, C–4, D–2
255. The cutting angle of cold chisel for chipping
(c) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3
cost iron is
(d) A–3, B–2, C–4, D–1
(a) 900 (b) 600
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 0
(c) 55 (d) 37.50
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans. : (a) The anvil of smith is a heavy block of
Ans: (b) Cold Chisel– The cold chisel is a hand cutting
wrought iron. Its top surface is hardened & tempered. It
is available in 80 to 300 kg mass. Generally the anvil tool used by fitters for chipping and cutting-of
which used is 150 kg. mass. The minimum thickness operations at room temperature. It is made from high
limit of anvil is 12.5 mm. carbon steel or crome vanadium steel. During the
chipping of cast iron cutting angle of cold chisel is 60o.
252. Which hammer is favorite for a Fitter?
(a) Ball peen hammer 256. What type of hammer is used to make the head
(b) Cross peen hammer the of the rivet by spreading the rivet?
(c) Warrington hammer (a) Mallet hammer
(d) Claw hammer (b) Claw hammer
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (c) Ball peen hammer
Ans. : (a) Ball peen hammer– It is also known as (d) Straight peen hammer
machinist's hammer. It is a type of peening hammer UPRVUNL TG-II Fitter-09-11-2016
used in metal working. It has two heads, one flat & Ans : (c) Ball peen hammer is used to make the head of
other rounded called the peen. the rivet by spreading the rivet. It is available in weight
Main parts of ball peen hammer– of 0.2 kg. to 2 kg.
1. Face 2. Peen 3. Cheek 4. Eye 257. How to hold the hammer handle while hitting
the nail?
(a) Middle of the handle
(b) Near the hammer head of the handle
(c) Anywhere in length of the handle
(d) End of the handle
Ans : (d) To hit the nail, the hammer handle is hold at
253. What is the use of anvil the end by which it heated with more power.
(a) Laxity (b) Drilling 258. The engineer's hammer is specified by its........
(c) Fitting (d) Welding (a) Volume (b) Length of handle
BEML 2022 (c) Weight (d) Material
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 DRDO Machinist.2016
Ans : (c) In filling process, anvil is used in workshop. It ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
is used in workshop to hold & support workpiece. Ans : (c) The engineer's hammer is specified by its
254. What material is the hammer made of weight. In smithy shop hammer is used for forging
(a) Brass operations. It is made of forged steel or cast steel an
(b) High carbon steel smithy shop, hammer is classified as–
(c) Medium carbon steel 1. Hand hammers
(d) Iron 2. Sledge hammers
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 2. Power hammers or Press
Forging 216 YCT
259. The cross-section of the chisel is frequently Ans : (c) Hearth– The part of the forge where the block
(a) Rectangular (b) Square smithy is kept on fire by keeping the fuel's called
(c) Hexagonal (d) Octagonal hearth.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 Hood– Its function is to collect the smoke and leave it
Ans : (d) The cross-section of the chisels is usually through the chimney.
hexagonal or octagonal. It is usually made of carbon Tuyers– Tuyers is used to supply the air to fuel and
tool steel. Its cutting edge is hardened and tempered. fire.
260. When the chisel will burrow inside the material 265. To protect the dry tuars of the forge from the
(a) The angle of slope is greater
heat
(b) The angle of recess is too small
(a) Covered with sand
(c) Greater angle of inclination
(d) The angle of inclination is too small (b) Cement plaster is done
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 (c) Covered with fire clay
Ans : (c) The chisel will burrow inside the material (d) Kept in the open air
when angle of inclination is greater. Chisels are an (IOF Fitter, 2013)
important tools to cut or metal remove. Ans :(c) The dry tuyers of the forge are covered with
261. Drift used in forging– fire clay to protect it from heat.
(a) To enlarge the hole made by punch 266. Forge anvil is also known as anvil. It is made
(b) Drifting from
(c) Bend of workpiece (a) Cast steel (b) Cast iron
(d) All of the above (c) Mild steel (d) Carbon steel
IOCL 2020 NTPC Fitter 2016
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
Ans : (a) Drift is used in forging to enlarge the hole Ans : (a) The anvil is heavy block of alloy steel on
made by punch. which hot metal is forged.
262. Swages are made up of Its top surface is hardened. Anvil is used in metal
(a) Copper (b) Alluminium working and metal can be placed on it to be shaped with
(c) Pig iron (d) High carbon steel
a hammer.
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006) 267. Anvil is a forging tool. Forging of hot metal is
Ans : (d) A swage block is a large, heavy block of cast done on it. Which surface of it is hard
iron or high carbon steel. It is used in smithing with (a) Cast iron (b) Pig iron
variously sized & shaped holes like rectangular, (c) Block (d) Hard die hole
triangular round, square & L-shape in its face and (IOF Fitter, 2014)
usually with feerms firms on the sides. Ans : (b) The anvil is heavy block of alloy steel on
263. Tools used in necking– which hot metal is forged.
(a) Hard die and hammer Its top surface is hardened.
(b) Hot chisel and hammer
268. The stand of anvil is made of
(c) Fuller and hammer
(a) Cast iron (b) Pig iron
(d) Swage and hammer
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) (c) Block (d) Hard die hole
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (c) Fullers and hammer are used for necking
down, grooving and drawing a piece of work. Fullers Ans : (a) Blacksmith Anvil– A blacksmith uses tools
are made of high carbon steel in two parts called the top like anvil to create objects from metal. The anvil is
and bottom fullers the bottom tool fits in the hardie hole made of hardened wrought iron or special type of steel.
of the anvil.
Parts of anvil & its use–

264. Forge is used in black smithy. Thy part in (i) Horn– To bend the curve parts.
which the fire is lit by adding coal is called (ii) Upper parts of horn is called chipping block &
(a) Hood (b) Tuyers used to cut the workpiece by chisel.
(c) Hearth (d) Tank (iii) Tail towards left side used to turn the workpiece at
(IOF Fitter, 2016) 90o.
Forging 217 YCT

(iv) The circular hole in the tail is used to punch hole 274. The attack of slag hammer should not be done
and bend the thin rod and hardy hole (square hole) on hard surface because
is used for working different type work by (a) Hammer can break
assembling square shank tools. (b) Hard surface can break
269. Swag block is of square shape. Half and other (c) Hammer will bounce on hard surface and can
shape grooves are cut on its sides, it is cause injury
provided– (d) Strain will generate in hammer
(a) For block cutting (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
(b) Forging Ans : (c) The attack of sledge hammer should not be
(c) For punching & bending done on hard surface because hammer will bounce on
(d) None of the above hard surface and cause injury.
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
275. Which hammer is used in heavy forging work
Ans: (c) Swage block are made of cast-iron. It surface (a) Ball peen hammer
is hardened. Swage block is of square shape, half other (b) Cross peen hammer
shape grooves are cut for bending & punching
(c) Straight peen hammer
operations.
(d) Sledge hammer
270. Which hand tool is often used in forging and (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
riveting
Ans : (d) For heavy metal working (forging) operation
(a) File (b) Claw hammer
(c) Ball-peen hammer (d) Punch sledge hammers are used.
(IOF Fitter, 2014) Sledge hammer– A sledge hammer is a tool with a
large, flat, often, metal head, attached to a long handle.
Ans : (c) Ball peen hammer is used for forging &
reviting riveting operation. The long handle combined with a heavy head allows the
In forging hardie is used for cutting heavy hot metal. sledge hammer to gather momentum during a swing and
Hardie is a form of chisel used in forging shop with a apply a large force.
tapered head fixed in to the hardie hole of the anvil and 276. The eye hole is placed in the hammer
the cutting edge being upward. (a) So that the wedge can be inserted into the
271. Tongs are used in forging shops to hole handle
different sizes of jobs. What metal is it made (b) It is difficult to prepare to round hole
of? (c) It can be used to make an eyelet taper
(a) Mild steel (b) Cast steel (d) None of the above
(c) High carbon steel (d) Forged steel (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(IOF Fitter, 2015) Ans : (a) The eye hole is placed in the hammer. So that
Ans : (a) Tongs are used in forging shop to hold the wedge can be inserted in to the handle.
different sizes of jobs are made of mild steel. On the 277. What is the protruding head of a chisel called a
basis of tangs nose, different types of tongs are given hammer blow
bellow– (a) Rocking (b) Mushroom
1. Flat tongs 2. Hollow bit tongs (c) Pinning (d) Flat
3. Link tongs 4. Pliers tongs BHEL 2020
5. Rivet tongs 6. Angle tongs (IOF Fitter, 2013)
272. How much kg's of hand hammer used in forge
Ans : (b) The protruding head of a chisel called
shop is and small handle is fitted on it
mushroom formed by hammer blow.
(a) 2 to 3 kg (b) 1/2 to 1 kg
(c) 1 to 2 kg (d) 2 to 3 kg 278. Why do we provide some width to the outside
DRDO Machinist.2016 of the hammer’s eye-hole
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (a) To increase in size
Ans : (b) According to BIS, hammer used in forging (b) To have a good grip
shop with small handle is about 1/2 to 1 kg. (c) The ease of trapping the handle
273. Slag hammer is used for heavy forging, it is of (d) Widening the handle by hitting the gully in
how much kg the mouth
(a) 2 to 10 kg (b) 2 to 7 kg IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) 3 to 5 kg (d) 4 to 10 kg (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
(IOF Fitter, 2015) Ans : (d) Keep some width on the outside in the eye-
Ans : (a) For heavy forging operation sledge hammer is hole of the hammer so that when the handle is loose
used. Its weight is about 2 to 10 kg. then it can be tighten by gulluy or puchher.
Forging 218 YCT


Metallurgy
Ans. (d) : Toughness of the material is measured
1. Property of Metal (Physical directly by performing impact testing.
property, Chemical property, Toughness–
Mechanical property • It is defined as the ability of the material to absorb
energy before fracture takes place.
1. The property of material to resists fracture due • Tough materials have the ability to bend, twist or
to high impact load is called as_______. stretch before failure takes place.
(a) Malleability (b) Ductility • Toughness is measured by Izod and Charpy impact
(c) Hardness (d) Toughness testing machines.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 4. Which property of a metal describes its ability
Ans. (d) : Toughness is a property of material to resists to withstand shock or impact?
fracture due to high impact load or shock loading or (a) Ductility (b) Malleability
cyclic load. (c) Toughness (d) Brittleness
• It is the property of material which enables it to UPSSSC Boring Technician 03-07-2022
absorb energy without fracture. NMRC, 15-09-2019
• It is represented by area under stress-strain curve for UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM
material upto fracture. Ans. (c) : Toughness– • The property in parts subjected
to shock and impact loads.
Ductility– • Property of a materials enabling it to be
drawn in to wire with the application of a tensile force.
• Bend test used for common comparative test for

toughness.
5. Due to which property of metal we can increase
2. The opposite of ductility is_______
its size by rolling or hammering?
(a) Tenacity (b) Brittleness
(a) Elasticity
(c) Malleability (d) Roughness
(b) Plasticity
(c) Malleability
BDL Technician 2022
(d) Ductility
Ans. (b) : The opposite of ductility is brittleness.
• Ductility is the property of the material that enable it
to be drawn out or elongated to an appreciable extant BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
before rupture occurs. Ans. (c) : Due to malleable property of materials or
3. Toughness of the material is measured directly metals we can increase its size by rolling or hammering.
by performing______. • Malleability is a materials ability to form their sheets
(a) Bend testing under pressure by hammering or rolling.
(b) Hardness testing • Gold is most malleable metal.
(c) Roughness testing • Malleability is caused by metallic bonds that have
(d) Impact testing freely moving electrons that allow the atoms in the
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 metal to shift and slip test each other when physical
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 force is applied.
Metallurgy 219 YCT

6. The property of a metal to withstand shock or 9. Normally plier is made of

impact is called ............ (a) Stainless steel (b) Cast iron
(a) Hardness (b) Brittleness (c) Cast steel (d) Mild steel
(c) Ductility (d) Toughness HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (c) : Pliers are multipurpose hand tools that feature
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 opposing fouls for gripping, bending & cutting
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 purposes. Normally pliers are made of cast steel.
Ans. (d): The property of a metal to withstand shock or 10. Which is the material used for flat shape
impact is called toughness. bearing?
Toughness– (a) Gun metal
• It is the property of material which enable it to (b) Mild steel
absorb energy without fractures. (c) Cast iron
• It is desirable in material which ia subjected to (d) Copper
cyclic loading or shock loading.
• It is represented by area under stress strain curve for
Ans. (c) : Flat shape bearing is made of cast iron, like
material upto fracture.
guide way bearing.
• Bend test is used for common comparative test for
11. The process to hard outer surface of low
toughness.
carbon steel is called
(a) Hardening
(b) Tempering
(c) Annealing
(d) Case of hardening
Ans. (d) : Case hardening–Process of increasing
hardness of only surface by process of diffusion of
carbon and nitrogen.
• In this method, only surface of low carbon steel is
hardened while leaving the center or core soft & ductile.
7. ______ is the decreasing order of hydration 12. Grey cast iron compressive strength is
enthalpy of alkaline earth metal ions. (a) 2000 kg/cm2 (b) 5000 kg/cm2
(a) Sr2+ >Be2+ > Ca2+ >Mg2+ (c) 6000 kg/cm 2
(d) 6250 kg/cm2
(b) Ca2+ >Be2+ > Mg2+ >Sr2+ HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(c) Mg2+ >Be2+ > Sr2+ >Ca2+ Ans. (d) : Grey cast iron is obtained by remelting pig
(d) Be2+ >Mg2+ > Ca2+ >Sr2+ iron. It is an alloy of carbon & iron with small amounts
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021 of silicon, phosphorous, manganese & sulphur. It's
compressive strength is 6250 kg/cm2 (6250 bar).
Ans. (d) : Decreasing order of hydration enthalphy of
alkaline earth metal Iron. 13. Malleability is the property of metals which
Be2+ >Mg2+ > Ca2+ >Sr2+ helps to manufacture
(a) plates (b) thin sheets
•Officially answer is given (b).
(c) wires (d) rod
8. The melting point of copper is HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
(a) 648ºC (b) 3400ºC
Ans. (b) : Malleability is the property of metal to be
(c) 1083ºC (d) 1600ºC beaten/hammered into flat thin sheet. This is useful in
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 making aluminium foil and other flat surface of metals.
Ans. (c) : 14. High vibration levels can create .......... that
Metal Melting point (ºC) cause structural members to yield or crack.
Tin 232 (a) thermo-mechanical loads
Zinc 420 (b) thermal loads
Aluminium 660 (c) mechanical loads
Copper 1085 (d) fatigue loads
Iron 1538 HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022
Tungsten 3410 NLC Technician 24-09.2022
Metallurgy 220 YCT
Ans. (d): High vibration levels can create fatigue loads Ans. (d): Toughness is the ability of a material to with
that cause structural members to yield or crack. stand impact loading.
• In material science, fatigue is the weakening of a • Hardness is the ability of material to resist
material and fatigue loading means continuously deformation.
loading a material with some force until it experience a • Brittleness the property of a material that fractures
crack.
when subjected to stress but has a little tendency to
15. Which one of the following is not a mechanical deform before fracture.
property of a metal?
• Fatigue occur when a material is subjected to cycling
(a) Corrosion resistance
loading, causing damage which may progress to
(b) Strength
failure.
(c) Hardness
20. The best conductor of heat is :
(d) Elongation
(a) Iron (b) Silver
(c) Copper (d) Aluminium
Ans. (a) : Mechanical property of metal–Hardness,
toughness, strength, yield strength, elongation, fatigue,
plasticity, malleability and creep. Ans. (b) : Materials that allow energy to flow within it
in the form of heat to pass through them are called good
• Corrosion resistance is a chemical property.
conductor of heat example best conductor, silver,
16. Ratio of shear stress and shear strain is called copper, Aluminium, Gold etc.
_____
21. Young's modulus of Aluminium alloy is
(a) Modulus of rigidity
(a) 207 GPa (b) 120 GPa
(b) Poisson's ratio
(c) 70 GPa (d) 210 GPa
(c) Elasticity coefficient
(d) Safety Coefficient
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) Ans. (c) :
Material Young of modulus (E)
Ans. (a) : Ratio of shear stress and shear strain is called
modulus of rigidity. • Steel 210 GPa
Lateral strain • Alluminium Alloy 70 GPa
Poisson's ratio = • Copper 120 GPa
Longitudinal strain
• Brass 120 GPa
17. What is Factor of safety
• Iron 170 GPa
(a) Ultimate Stress/Maximum Force
22. Which of the following material properties
(b) Maximum force/Working stress
enables a metal to be made into then sheets?
(c) Ultimate stress/Working stress
(a) Toughness (b) Hardness
(c) Ductility (d) Malleability
Ultimatestress Ultimate force
Ans. (c) : FOS = = Ans. (d) : The property by the virtue of which they can
Working stress Working force beaten into thin sheet called malleability.
Magnitude of factor of safety depend upon type of load. • The property by virtue of which they can be drawn
18. What is thermal conductivity of an ideal heat into wire is called ductility.
insulator? • Hardness is the scratching or abrasion.
(a) Zero (b) One 23. In metal cutting operations discontinuous chips
(c) Infinity (d) None of these are produced while machining
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) (a) Brittle material (b) Ductile material
Ans. (a) : Thermal conductivity of perfect heat insulator (c) Soft material (d) Hard material
should be zero. And for perfect heat conductor is BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
infinity. ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
19. The property possessed by a material to resist ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
sudden load is .............. Ans. (a) : Discontinues chip -
(a) Brittleness (b) Fatigue 1. Brittle work materials
(c) Hardness (d) Toughness 2. Low cutting speed
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 3. Large feed and depth of cut
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 4. Small rake angle
Metallurgy 221 YCT

5. High tool-chip friction. Ans. (a) : Ductility– It is the property which permits
• Continuous chip– material to be drawn out longitudinaly to reduced
1. Ductile work materials section, under the action of tensile force.
2. High cutting speed • A ductile material must passes a high degree of
plasticity and strength.
3. Small feeds and depth
• Ductility material must have low degree of
4. Sharp cutting edge
elasticity.
5. Large rake angle
• Ductility is useful in wire drawing.
6. Low tool-chip friction
27. The microstructure and physical property of
• Continuous chip with BUE– the material can be altered by
1. Ductile materials (a) milling (b) Heat treating
2. Low to medium cutting speed (c) Grinding (d) Turning
3.Large feed ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
4. Small rake angle Ans. (b) : The microstructure and physical property of
5. Tool chip friction causes portions of a chip to adhere the material can be altered by heat treating.
to rake face. Heat treatment– The process of heat treatment is
24. Which metal has highest malleability from the carried out first by heating the metal and then cooling it
following? in the caustic sodasolution brine, water, oil, air or
(a) Copper (b) Platinum suitable cooling medium.
(c) Aluminium (d) Gold 28. The factor which influences the sudden fatigue
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 while manufacturing pig iron?
(a) Brittleness (b) Ductility
Ans. (d) : Malleability–Property of material by virtue
(c) Malleability (d) Rigidity
of which material can be hammered or rolled into thin
sheets without rupture.
Ans. (a) : Brittleness– The factor which influence the
• Decreasing order of the malleability of engineering
sudden fatigue while manufacturing pig iron.
materials–
Ductility– It is the property of a material enabling it to
Gold > Silver > Aluminium > Copper. be drawn into wire with the application of tensile force.
• Gold is the most malleable metle as it can is For example– Copper, mild steel, Al etc.
hammered to a thickness of 0.0025 mm.
29. The common name of red lead is –
• 1 gm of gold can be beaten into a sheet that spreads (a) lead oxide
across an are of 1 m2. (b) lead sulphate
25. The property of metal having the tendency for (c) lead carbonate
expanding or flattening on all directions : (d) lead sulphide
(a) Ductility (b) Conductivity NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(c) Malleability (d) Elasticity RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (a) : The common name of red lead is lead oxide.
• Lead oxide are a group of inorganic compounds
Ans. (c) : Malleability is the property by virtue of
which a material may be hammered or rolled into thin with formulas including lead (Pb) and oxygen (O).
sheets without rupture. This property generally • Lead oxide has been widely utilized in batteries,
increases with the increase of temperature. Metals pigments and paints, ceramics, glass industry etc.
which possess this property exhibit large deformation or
30. The chemical formula of red lead is –
plastic response when being subjected to compressive (a) Pb2O3 (b) Pb3O4
force. (c) PbO (d) PbO2
Examples of malleable metals are : Gold > silver > RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
aluminium > copper > tin > indium. Ans. (b) : The chemical formula of red lead is Pb3O4.
26. The property of a metal by which it can be • It is water insoluble compound that is prepared by
drawn out into wire is known as the oxidation of metallic lead or lead monoxide.
(a) Ductility (b) Malleability 31. Specific gravity of red lead is –
(c) Brittleness (d) Toughness (a) 8.00 (b) 8.32
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 (c) 8.5 (d) 8.25
ISRO Technician B (RAC) 03-11-2022 RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Metallurgy 222 YCT
Ans. (b) : Specific gravity of red lead is 8.32. Ans. (a) : In the process of chlorising, aluminium
• Specific gravity is defined as the ratio of material powder is used for protection against corrosion.
density to the density of water is 4oC. 37. Which one of the following processes involves
32. The most favourable metal for chemical plants pressing or rolling sheets together under high
and food processing equipment is stainless steel pressure?
because it has high corrosion resistance at (a) Calorising (b) Shearardising
(a) Atmospheric temperature only (c) Lacquering (d) Cladding
(b) High humidity RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
(c) High electrical current Ans. (d) : Cladding process involves pressing or rolling
(d) Elevated temperature sheets– together under high pressure.
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 Cladding– The method in which composite billets of
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 base metal and anti-corrosion metal coating are rolled or
Ans. (d): The most favourable metal for chemical drawn is called cladding.
plants and good processing equipments is stainless steel Aluminium (coated metal) cladding with steel (base
because it has high corrosion resistance at elevated metal) is best example.
temperature. Cladding is often achieved by extruding two dissimilar
metals through a die as well as pressing or rolling sheets
33. Which one among the following metals is most together under high pressure.
corrosive?
38. In the process of shearardising, which type of
(a) Tin (b) Lead
powder is used to form a corrosion-resistant
(c) Zinc (d) Magnesium coating?
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 (a) Aluminium powder
Ans. (d) : Magnesium is the most corrosive material. (b) Zinc powder
• While magnesium belongs to the high reactivity (c) Tin powder
category, so magnesium will have the highest rate (d) Lead powder
of corrosion, so magnesium is the most corrosive RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
metal in the given metals. Ans. (b) : Zinc powder used to form a corrosion
34. Which one among the following metals is least resistant coating in the shearardising process.
corrosive? • Aluminium powder used in chlorising process.
(a) Gold (b) Silver 39. Which metal is ideally suited for anodizing?
(c) Stainless steel (d) Aluminium (a) Copper (b) Nickel
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 (c) Aluminium (d) Iron
Ans. (a) : Gold is a least corrosive metals. Hence gold RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
is low reactive category of metals, so gold is least Ans. (c) : Aluminium is ideally suited for anodising.
corrosive metal. • Anodising is an electrolytic process for producing
Lead is a least corrosive metal among all metals. thick oxide coating, usually on aluminium and its
35. Which one among the following is NOT alloys.
considered "noble"? 40. Of all the metals, gold has the highest
(a) Gold (b) Silver (a) ductility (b) malleability
(c) Tin (d) Graphite (c) corrosion resistance (d) all of the above
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
Ans. (c) : Gold, silver and graphite considered as noble, Ans. (d) : Gold has the highest ductility, malleability,
but tin is not considred as noble. corrosion resistance properties.
• A noble metal is ordinarily regarded as a metallic Ductility– It is property of material to be drawn into
chemical element that is generally resistant to wire.
corrosion and is usually found in nature in its raw Malleability– It is a special case of ductility which
form. Ex.– Gold, platinum etc. permit materials to be rolled or hammered into thin
36. In the process of chlorising, which type of sheet.
powder is used for protection against 41. Which one from amongst the following is least
corrosion? brittle metal?
(a) aluminium powder (b) Zinc powder (a) Copper (b) Gray cast iron
(c) Tin powder (d) Lead powder (c) Aluminium (d) Manganese
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Metallurgy 223 YCT
Ans. (a) : Copper is least brittle material, but cast iron 45. What is produced when aluminium is oxidized
is highly brittle material. by water?
• It is the property of breaking of a material with little (a) Hydrogen (b) Oxygen
permanent distortion. (c) Nitrogen (d) Carbon dioxide
• It is the property of a material opposite to ductility. RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
42. Which one of the following has suitable Ans. (a) : Hydrogen produced when aluminium is
acoustic properties for use in musical oxidized by water.
instruments? 46. Which of the following can penetrate the
(a) Bronze (b) Muntz metal protective layer of aluminium and corrode the
(c) Gilding metal (d) Brass metal?
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (a) Acidic substances (b) Alkaline substance
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Neither (a) nor (b)
Ans. (d) : Brass has suitable acoustic properties for use RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
in musical instruments. Ans. (b) : Alkaline substance can penetrate the
43. As compared to steel, the density of aluminium protective layer of aluminium and corrode the metal.
is about • Alkalis are very corrosive in nature and penetrate
(a) half (b) one-third deeply. Examples of strong alkalis include barium,
(c) one-fourth (d) one-fifth sodium, ammonium, calcium, lithium and
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 potassium hydroxides.
Ans. (b) : The density of aluminimum is about one- 47. Which one of the following metals has better
third as compared to steel or copper. electrical conductivity than copper?
• The specific gravity of mild steel is 7.85. (a) Lead (b) Tin
• The specific gravity of aluminium is 2.8. (c) Zinc (d) Silver
Density of material RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
Specific gravity =
Density of water Ans. (d) : Silver has better electrical conductivity then
copper.
Material Specific gravity
• Metals like copper, gold, silver, steel, aluminium
Ethanol – 0.78
are electrical conductivity material.
Olive oil – 0.91
Water – 1 48. Which one of the following metals is most
Iron wood – 1.5 impervious to X-rays and gamma radiation?
Graphite – 1.9-2.3 (a) Lead (b) Zinc
Table salt – 2.17 (c) Tin (d) Antimony
Aluminium – 2.7 RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
Cement – 3.15 Ans. (a) : Lead is most impervious to X-rays and
Iron – 7.87 gamma radiation.
Copper – 8.96 • The largest use of lead is in storage batteries in car
Lead – 11.35 and other vehicles. Lead compounds are used as a
Mercury – 13.56 pigment in paints, dye, and ceramic glazes.
Gold – 19.3 49. Best conductor of heat and electricity is….
44. As compared to copper, the conductivity (both (a) Nickel (b) Copper
thermal and electrical) of aluminium is about (c) Chromium (d) Aluminium
(a) 39% (b) 49% RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(c) 59% (d) 69% Ans. (b) : Copper is best conductor of heat &
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 electricity. Silver > Copper > Aluminium > Steel.
Ans. (c) : The conductivity (both thermal & electrical) • Silver has better electrical conductivity than copper.
of aluminium is about 59% as compared to copper. 50. Malleability is the property of metals which
Thermal conductivity– Thermal conductivity is a helps to manufacture…
materials ability to conduct heat or thermal energy. (a) Rods (b) Plates
Electrical conductivity– Metallic and polarised (c) Thin sheets (d) Wires
materials are good electrical conductors. RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Metallurgy 224 YCT
Ans. (c) : Malleability is the property of metals which Ans. (a) Carbon percentage in H.S.S. is 0.5-0.8%.
helps to manufacturing of thin sheets. • In high carbon speed steel contains–
• Malleability is a special case of ductility which Tungsten – 18%
permit materials to be rolled or hammered into thin Chromium – 4%
sheets.
Vanadium – 1% and
• The malleable materials commonly used in
Carbon – 0.5-0.8%.
engineering practice are lead, soft steel, wrought
iron, copper, aluminium etc. 55. A black malleable cast iron
51. Which one of the following properties is the (a) Is a raw casting
most essential for the metals in the process of (b) Can be worked with hard cutting tools
casting, welding, brazing and soldering? (c) Which through malleablizing and is
(a) Fusibility (b) Malleability decarburized at the outer skin
(c) Tehnacity (d) Plasticity (d) Is steel cast in moulds.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans. (a) : Fusibility is the Most essential for metals in RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
the process of casting, welding, brazing and soldering. Ans. (c) A black malleable cast iron is a raw casting.
Fusibility– The quality of being fusible or convertible
Types of malleable cast iron–
from a solid to liquid state by heat.
(i) Black heart malleable iron
52. Which one of the following metals has less
(ii) White heart malleable iron
carobon content?
(iii) Pearlitic malleable iron.
(a) Plain carbon steel (b) Wrought iron
(c) Pig iron (d) Cast iron Malleable cast iron– It is obtained from white cast iron
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 by a suitable heat treatment process (i.e. annealing).
Ans. (b): Wrought iron– Wrought iron is an iron alloy 56. Which one of the following range of carbon
with very low carbon content with respect to cast iron. content is present in pig iron?
It is soft, ductile, magnetic and has high elasticity and (a) 0.05 to 1.4 % (b) 0.9 to 1.4%
tensile strength. (c) 1.7 to 2.2% (d) 3 to 5%
• It can be heated and reheated and worked into RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
various shapes. Ans. (d) 3-5% carbon content is present in pig iron.
• Steel has a higher tensile strength than wrought • Pig iron is the product of smelting iron ore with a
iron.
high-carbon fuel and reluctant such as coke, usually
• It is the purest iron which contain upto 99.9% iron, with limestone as flux.
the carbon content is about 0.02%.
• Blast furnace is used to get pig iron from iron ore.
• It is tough, malleable and ductile materials.
57. Best conductor of heat and electricity is...
• It can not stand sudden and excessive shocks.
(a) Nickel (b) Copper
• It can be easily forged or welded.
(c) Chromium (d) Aluminium
53. Main alloying element in H.S.S. is
(a) Tungsten (b) Chromium RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(c) Vanadium (d) Nickel Ans. (b) : Copper is best conductor of heat and
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 electricity.
Ans. (a) Tungsten is main alloying element in HSS. • Conductor are the substances through which a flow
• A common type of high speed steel contains 18% of current i.e. the flow of free electrons can be set
tungsten, 4% chromium, 1% vanadium, and only up easily These electrons are able to conduct
0.5-0.8% carbon. electricity and heat.
54. Carbon percentage in H.S.S is 58. Metals possess physical and mechanical
(a) 0.75 to 1.00% properties. Which one of the following is a
(b) 1.00 to 2.00 % physical property?
(c) 0.60 to 0.75 % (a) Fusibility (b) Tenacity
(d) 0.20 to 0.30 % (c) Ductility (d) Malleability
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
Metallurgy 225 YCT
Ans. (a) : Mechanical property– Ans. (c) : Malleability, ductility and toughness enables
Strength, stiffness, elasticity, plasticity, ductility, the manufacture of chain links from wrought iron.
brittleness, malleability, toughness, resistance, creep, 64. Increase of carbon content in steel results in
fatigue, hardness etc. (a) Increase in hardness
Physical property– Colour, structure, weight/specific (b) Increase in malleability
gravity, density/relative density, magnetism, (c) Increase in ductility
conductivity, fusibility etc. (d) Increase in strength
59. Most metals have RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
(a) High electronegativities Ans. (a) : Increase of carbon content in steel result in
(b) Low electronegativities increase in hardness.
(c) Small atomic radii Hardness– It embraces many different properties such
(d) High ionization energies as resistance to wear, scratching, deformation and
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 machinability etc.
Ans. (b) : Most metals have low electronegativities. 65. Which one of the following is the capacity of a
• Electronegativity is a chemical property that metal to withstand destruction under the action
describes the tendency of an atom or a functional of external loads?
group to attract electron and toward itself. (a) Stiffness (b) Strength
Note–Fluorine is the most electronegative element. (c) Toughness (d) Ductility
60. Metals which burn on exposure to air are best RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
stored Ans. (b) : Strength is the capacity of a metal to
(a) Underwater (b) Under alcohol withstand destruction under the action of external loads.
(c) Under vinegar (d) Under kerosene Ductility– Property of a material enabling it to be
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 drawn into wire with the application of tensile force.
Ans. (d) : Metals which burn on exposure to air are best 66. Which one among the following properties of a
stored under kerosene, like sodium. metal is the property by which resistance is
offered to fracture by repeated bending or
61. Galvanized metals have been covered with a twisting?
thin sheet of
(a) Brittleness (b) Stiffness
(a) Chromium (b) Copper
(c) Toughness (d) Malleability
(c) Tin (d) Zinc
BEML 2022
Ans. (d) : Galvanized metals have been covered with a Ans. (c) : The property by which resistance is offered to
thin sheet of zinc. fracture by repeated bending or twisting is known as
• Galvanizing is a process of coating iron or steel toughness.
with zinc in order to provide greater protection Stiffness– Ability of a material to resist deformation
against corrosion for the iron or steel base. under stress.
62. Which one of the following is a chemical 67. Rust is formed from iron and which other
property of metal? element?
(a) Corrosiveness (b) Conductivity (a) Hydrogen (b) Nitrogen
(c) Hardness (d) Elasticity (c) Oxygen (d) Sulphur
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
Ans. (a) : Corrosiveness is a chemical property of RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
metal. Ans. (c) : Rust is formed from iron and oxygen element.
• A corrosive substance is one that will damage or 68. Which of these metals is liquid at room
destroy other substances with which it comes into temperature?
contact by means to a chemical reaction. (a) Beryllium (b) Lithium
63. Which one of the following groups of (c) Mercury (d) Osmium
properties enables the manufacture of chain RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
links from wrought iron? Ans. (c) : Mercury is liquid at room temperature.
(a) Ductility, malleability and hardness • Elemental or metallic mercury is a shiny, silver
(b) Hardness, toughness and ductility white metal, historically referred to as quick silver,
(c) Malleability, ductility and toughness and is liquid at room temperature.
(d) Hardness, toughness and brittleness • It is used in older thermometers, fluorescent light
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 bulb and some other electrical switches.
Metallurgy 226 YCT
69. Which of the following metals can be found in a Ans. (c) : Resistance of material against any external
pure state in nature? force is known as strength.
(a) Lithium (b) Iron • The strength of metal is inversely proportional to
(c) Gold (d) Aluminium the square root of the grain size.
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 74. Permanent deformation of material with
Ans. (c) : Gold can be found in a pure state in nature. respect to time due to constant load and
variable temperature is known as:
• It is a bright, slightly orange-yellow, dense soft,
(a) Elasticity (b) Isotropy
malleable and ductile metal in a pure form.
(c) Hardness (d) Creep
70. The chief chemical property of aluminium is
that it is
Ans. (d) : Permanent deformation of material with
(a) Soft (b) Brittle
respect to time due to constant load and variable
(c) Strong (d) Tough temperature is known as creep.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 • A creep test is used for describing the slow steady
Ans. (a) : Aluminium is a silvery-white, light weight flow of a material under low stress conditions.
metal. 75. Resistance developed by surface of any
• It is soft and malleable. material is known as:
• Aluminium is used in a huge variety of product (a) Strength (b) Hardness
including cans foils, window frames and aeroplane (c) Stiffness (d) Creep
parts etc. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
71. The metals having good weldability, in Ans. (b) : Hardness– It is very important of the metals
descending order are….. and has a wide variety of meanings. It has many
(a) Cast steel, iron, carbon steel, cast iron different properties such as resistance to wear,
(b) Carbon steel, iron, cast steel, cast iron scratching, deformation, and cutting action etc.
Hardness is usually expressed in numbers.
(c) Iron, carbon steel, cast steel, cast iron
76. The body of aeroplane is made of aluminum
(d) Cast iron, iron, carbon steel, cast steel
because of its______
IOCL 2020
(a) Colour (b) Melting point
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (c) Lustre (d) Weight
Ans. (a) : Weldability– The weldability, also known as RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
joinability of a material refers to its ability to be welded. Ans. (d) : The body of aeroplane is made of aluminium
Weld ability of material– Cast steel > iron carbon steel because of its weight.
> cast iron. • For aircraft manufacturing, including its strength,
72. Annealing of steel is done to impart which one density, malleability and ductility elasticity and
of the following property on steel? brittleness, toughness and feasibility.
(a) Hardness 77. Bending allowance s proportional to the ……..
(b) Toughness (a) width of the material
(c) Ductility (b) length of the material
(d) None of the mentioned (c) thickness of the material
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 (d) flatness of the material
Ans. (c): Annealing– RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
• Quenching medium → Furnace Ans. (c): Bending allowances is proportional to the
thickness of material.
• Full annealing → Ductility↑ and toughness↑
78. Ductility of cast iron is .............
• Process annealing → Stress relieving
(a) Poor (b) Mild
• Spheroids annealing → Machinability↑ (c) High (d) Very high
• Diffusion annealing → To homogenize the RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
chemistry of materials. Ans. (a) : Ductility of cast iron is poor.
73. Resistance of material against any external • The percentage elongation or percentage reduction
force is known as: in the area before the rapture of a test specimen is
(a) Stiffness (b) Malleability the measure of ductility.
(c) Strength (d) Hardness • Lead, copper, Aluminium, mild steel are typical
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 ductile materials.
Metallurgy 227 YCT
79. Ratio of stress to strain is – Ans. (a) : Viscosity is the ability of the oil to resist
(a) Deformation of body internal deformation due to mechanical stresses. In
(b) Modulus of elasticity general viscosity depends on a fluids state, such as its
(c) Elongation temperature, pressure and rate of deformation. The S.I.
unit of viscosity is N/m2-s or Pa-s. It is denoted by
(d) None of these
Greek letter (µ) for the dynamic viscosity.
83. Magnesium is used in high resistivity
Ans. (b) : Young's modulus or modulus of elasticity is electrolytes due to its ………….
the ratio of stress to strain. (a) Neutral potential
Young's modulus or modulus of elasticity– Hook's (b) Most positive potential
law states that when a material is loaded within elastic (c) Most negative potential
limit, the stress is directly proportional to strain. (d) Zero potential
σ∝ε RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
or Stress (σ) ∝ Strain (ε) Ans. (c) : Magnesium is used in high resistivity
σ = Eε electrolytes due to its most negative potential.
σ Magnesium has the highest negative potential according
E= to the electrochemical series.
ε
84. Which of the following method is adopted for
Where, E = constant = known as young modulus. preventing corrosion by acids ?
Modulus rigidity (C) or shear modulus– (a) Deaeration
Shear stress ( τ ) (b) Removal by using ion-exchange resin
Modulus of rigidity (C) = (c) Neutralisation with lime
Shear strain ( φ )
(d) Dehumidificaiton
τ RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
C=
φ Ans. (c) : Neutralisation with lime is done for
preventing corrosion by acids. Lime is a calcium-
80. Which of the following materials is most containing inorganic material in which carbonates,
ductile? oxides and hydroxides predominate.
(a) Copper (b) Ceramic 85. Which of the following method is adopted for
(c) Mica (d) Cast iron preventing corrosion by moisture ?
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 (a) Deaeration
Ans. (a) : In the above mentioned options copper is (b) Removal by using ion-exchange resin
most ductile. It is soft, malleable, and ductile metal with (c) Neutralisation with lime
very high thermal and electrical conductivity. Due to its (d) Dehumidificaiton
high ductility it is drawn in wire and is used as electrical NTPC Fitter 2016
wire. Melting point of copper is 1084.62oC. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
81. Stress is defined as the ratio of ........... Ans. (d) : The prevent corrosion by moisture moisture
(a) Force/area from the air is removed by dehumification using silica
gel.
(b) Force/volume
(c) Normal stress/volumetric strain 86. Which property of metal is called mechanical
property?
(d) None of these
(a) specific gravity (b) fusibillity
RRB ALP Patna 2014
(c) conductivity (d) tenacity
Ans. (a): Stress is the measure of an external force RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
acting over the cross sectional area of an object. It has
Ans. (d): Tenacity of metal is a mechanical property.
unit of force per area : N/m2 (SI). The tenacity of a metal is its ability to resist the effect of
Strain is the ratio of change in length to the original tensile forces without rupturing. Mild steel, wrought
length, when a given body is subjected to some external iron and copper are some example of tenacious metals.
force. 87. Property of wrought iron is decide by _____.
82. _______ is the ability of the oil to resist internal (a) Carbon and magnesium
deformation due to mechanical stresses. (b) Carbon and manganese
(a) Viscosity (b) Flashpoint (c) Aluminum and carbon
(c) Fire point (d) None of these (d) Magnesium and manganese
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
Metallurgy 228 YCT
Ans. (b) : Wrought iron is an iron alloy with a very low Ans. (c) : Physical properties of tungsten–
carbon content (less than 0.08%) in contract to that of • Tungsten has highest melting point among all
cast iron (2.1% to 4%). Property of wrought iron is metals. Its melting point is 3400oC.
decides by carbon and magnesium wrought iron is
• Excellent high temperature strength.
tough, malleable, ductile, corrosion resistant and easily
forged welded. • Radiation shielding.
88. Which of the following materials has the • Very high tensile strength
maximum ductility? • Least corrosion, acid and chemical proof.
(a) Mild steel (b) Copper • Very high in density.
(c) Aluminium (d) Zinc 93. Which of the following elements is added to
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 steel to increase its resistance to corrosion in
Ans. (a) : Mild steel has maximum ductility. Those environments like seawater?
materials shown the lower amount of the carbon. (a) Aluminium (b) Copper
Alloying elements from one metal to another metal. (c) Titanium (d) Vanadium
89. The cutting tool material should possess certain RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
quality. Ans. (b) : Copper is added to steel to increase its
Ability of the tool material to retain most of the resistance to corrosion in environments like seawater. A
cold hardness property even at very high large amount of copper can help prevent the formation
temperature is termed as of rust.
(a) cold hardness (b) red hardness 94. When comparing copper with brass which one
(c) toughness (d) brittleness of the following is true about copper?
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 (a) It is more ductile
Ans. (b) : Ability of the tool material to retain most of (b) It has higher tensile strength
the cold hardness property even at very high (c) It has higher resistance to corrosion
temperature is termed as red hardness. Cold hardness is (d) It is more difficult to weld
the amount of hardness possessed by a material at RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
normal temperature. Ans. (a) : Copper is more ductile than brass.
90. Aluminum in its pure form is not used for Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. The proportions of
engineering work because–– the copper and zinc are varied to yield many different
(a) It is brittle (b) It is very light kinds of brass. Basic order brass is 67% copper and
(c) It is costly (d) It lacks strength 33% zinc. It has high tensile strength, high corrosion
BHEL 2020 resistance than copper. It finds wide application in
making bearings, hose coupling, valves, and electrical
Ans. (d) : Following are the properties of aluminium– plugs and sockets.
• Non- corrosive
95. Which of the following substances is not an
• Easily machined and cast insulator?
• Light weight yet durable (a) Ceramic (b) Rubber
• Non-magnetic and non-sparking (c) Plastic (d) Copper
• Good heat and electrical conductor. RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
Aluminium is its pure form is not used for engineering Ans. (d) : Copper is not an insulator. An electrical
work because it lacks strength. insulator is a material in which electric current does not
91. If a substance breaks easily it is said to be––– flow freely. e.g. plastic, rubber, wood etc.
(a) Magnetic (b) Conductive A conductor electrical conductor, is a substance that
(c) Brittle (d) Ductile allows electricity to flow through it.
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 e.g.- copper, gold, aluminium.
Ans. (c): Brittleness describes the property of a material 96. Which of the following is not an insulator?
that fracture when subjected to stress but has a little (a) Gold (b) Glass
tendency to deform before rupture. (c) Mica (d) Rubber
Example of brittle material; glass, ceramic graphite etc. RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
92. The melting point of tungsten is about Ans. (a) : Gold is not an insulator.
(a) 2600°C (b) 3000°C Electrical insulators are the substances that don't allow
(c) 3400°C (d) 3800°C electricity to flow through it. e.g. glass, mica, rubber.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 Pure silver is the best conductor of electricity.
Metallurgy 229 YCT
97. Which of the following is not a conductor? 101. Identify the material which is more brittle in
(a) Copper (b) Aluminium nature–
(c) Mica (d) Gold (a) Steel (b) Mild steel
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (c) Cast iron (d) Aluminium
Ans. (c) : Mica is not a conductor, instead it is a NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
insulator. Mica can be made into thin and dielectric. RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Because of these properties, they are used in electrical
Ans. (c) : Brittleness is the property of the material by
appliances. They are used in control devices, heating
virtue of which, it breaks without significant plastic
devices, neon light etc.
deformation, when subjected to stress. e.g. cast iron,
98. Which one of the following material is
glass.
relatively difficult for machining?
(a) Ductile material (b) Malleable material 102. The main load that the circlip is subjected to is
(c) Hard material (d) All the above …..
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 (a) Thrust (b) Tensile
Ans. (c) : Hard materials are those that cannot be (c) Radial (d) Compressive
crushed, cut, distorted, or scraped readily. e.g. diamond, RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
iron carbide, quartz etc. Ans. (d) : A circlip is a type of fastener consisting of a
99. The material with higher density will have: semi-flexible metal ring with open ends which can be
(a) Higher weight (b) Lower weight snapped its place. Circlips are often used to secure
(c) Constant weight (d) None of these pinned connection. The circlip is subjected to
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 compressive stress.
Ans. (a) : Density is the measurement of how tightly a 103. The tensile stress is tensile load divided by
material is packed together. It is defined as the mass per (a) Length of workpiece
unit volume. (b) Cross sectional area of the workpiece
Mass (c) Circumferential area of the wrokpiece
i.e. Density = (d) Volume of the workpiece
Volume
Weight– Weight of an object is the force acting on the RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
object due to gravity. Ans. (b) : Tensile stress can be defined as the
Weight = mass × gravity = m × g magnitude of the force applied along an elastic rod,
So, the material with higher density will have higher which is divided by the cross-sectional area of the rod in
weight. a direction perpendicular to the applied force. Tensile
stress tends to stretch the material.
100. Which one of the following is the resistance of a
metal to elastic deformation? 104. Which one of the following metal is corrosion-
(a) Ductility (b) Strength resistant?
(a) Aluminium (b) Tin
(c) Stiffness (d) Toughness
(c) Copper (d) Mild steel
BDL Technician 2022
Ans. (c) : The resistance of a metal to elastic
Ans. (b) : Tin is a chemical element with the symbol
deformation is called stiffness.
Sn. It is a silvery coloured metal. It is a soft, malleable
A material with a high value of Young's modulus E is & ductile. It melts at about 232oC. Tin is not easily
stiffer than the material with a lower value of Young's oxidized and resist corrosion because it is protected by
modulus. an oxide film.
The ability of the material to withstand stress (resist
105. Which one of the following alloys can resist
fracture due to high impact loads) without fracture is
saltwater corrosion?
known as toughness.
(a) Brass (b) Gun metal
Stiffness is the resistance of a metal to elastic
(c) Zinc alloy (d) Nickel chrome alloy
deformation. For an elastic body with a single degree of
F
freedom, the stiffness is defined as k = . Ans. (c): Zinc alloys can resist salt water corrosion.
δ
Muntz metal, a variety of the alloy brass consisting of
• Elastic modulus ↑ ⇒ stiffness ↑ 60% Cu and 40% Zn is best for marine applications.
F = force on body. 106. Which one of the following group of properties
δ = displacement produced by the force. enables the manufactured of chain link from
Its SI unit is Newton per meter. wrought iron?
Metallurgy 230 YCT
(a) Ductility, malleability an hardness Ans. (b) : High-speed steel is a subset of tool steels
(b) Hardness, toughness and ductility commonly used as cutting tool material. A common
(c) Malleability, ductility and toughness type of high-speed steel contains 18% tungsten, 4%
(d) Hardness, toughness and brittleness chromium and 1% vanadium.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 High speed steels possess high strength, wear
Ans. (c) : Wrought iron is an iron alloy with a very low resistance, toughness and hardness.
carbon content (less than 0.08%). It is highly malleable, 111. Toughness of a cutting tool means ability to
ductile, and possesses high toughness. It is used for withstand ________ without failure.
making chain links, fences, gates, railings, grills etc. (a) high temperature (b) wear
107. Which one among the following properties of a (c) impact forces (d) chemical reaction
metal is the power of return to its original RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
shape after deformation when the load is
removed? Ans. (c) : Toughness of a cutting tool means ability to
(a) Ductility (b) Malleability withstand shock loading without fracture. It measures
(c) Stiffness (d) Elasticity the energy required to check a material it is important
for things like hammers and cutting tools which suffer
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
impact and dynamic loads.
Ans. (d) : Elasticity– Ability of a deformed body to 112. The most important basic quality of a cutting
return to its original shape and size when the forces tool material is…..
causing the deformation are removed. Elasticity of a (a) brittleness (b) malleability
material is quantified by the elastic modulus such as the (c) elasticity (d) toughness
Young's modulus, bulk modulus or shear modulus RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
which measure the amount of stress needed to achieve a Ans. (d) : Toughness is necessary to enable the tool to
unit of strain. withstand cutting forces to absorb shock and prevent the
108. Which one of the following properties of a chipping of the cutting edge.
metal has the ability to change its shape
113. Easiness in machining with regard to tool life,
without destruction under the influence of
surface finish and power consumption is
external forces?
called....
(a) Plasticity (b) Elasticity
(a) Machinability
(c) Stiffness (d) Malleability
(b) Hardenability
(c) Rate of metal removal
Ans. (a) : Plasticity is the ability of material to change
its shape without destruction under the influence of (d) Surface finish rating
external forces. It is also defined as the ability of a solid RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
material to undergo permanent deformation, a non- Ans. (a) : Easiness in machining with regard to tool life,
reversible change of shape in response to applied forces. surface finish and power consumption is called
109. The tensile strength of a metal is its ability to machinability. In general, the larger the shear stress or
resist fracture when subjected to tensile loads. specific power values, the more difficult the material is
The tensile strength of metals are expressed to machine and form, requiring greater forces and lower
in... speeds.
(a) N/mm2 (b) kg/mm2 114. The property of metal by which they can
(c) N. metre (d) kg. metre transfer heat and electricity is known as-
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 (a) Conductivity (b) Plasticity
Ans. (a) : The tensile strength of a metal is its ability to (c) Elasticity (d) Fusibility
resist fracture when subjected to tensile loads. It is RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
expressed as force per unit cross-sectional area with unit Ans. (a) : The property of metal by which they can
N/mm2. transfer heat and electricity is known as conductivity. In
110. General composition of High Speed Steel metal conductivity depends on movement of free
cutting tool (H.S.S.) is in the ratio of 18:4:1. In electrons. With increase in temperature, conductivity of
this ratio 18 refers to metal decreases due to increase in lattice vibration. Pure
(a) Chromium (b) Tungsten silver is the best conductor of electricity.
(c) Cobalt (d) Vanadium 115. The property of a metal by which it breaks due
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) to alternate application of tension and
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 compression is called-
Metallurgy 231 YCT
(a) Fatigue (b) Strength 119. Materials which shows direction dependent
(c) Toughness (d) None of the above properties are known as:
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (a) orthotropic materials
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (b) isotropic materials
Ans. (a) : The property of a metal by which it breaks (c) homogeneous materials
due to alternate application of tension and compression (d) anisotropic materials
is called fatigue. For most ferrous materials endurance UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
limit (Se) is set as the cyclic stress level that the Ans. (d): Anisotropic materials show different property
material can sustain for 10 million cycles. in different directions. Example– Glass, crystals with
116. Most suitable place in the furnace to warm up cubic symmetry, diamonds etc.
the component would be – • Isotropic–Which materials exhibits the same elastic
(a) under the air spout from where the flame properties in all directions at a point.
comes from bottom part • Homogeneous–A material is said to be homogeneous
(b) away from air spout and covered by a thick if it exhibits the same elastic properties at all points.
layer of coal from top 120. Select the minimum ductility of material
(c) top of the flame which is covered with a thin (a) Copper (b) Iron
layer of coal (c) Steel (d) Aluminium
(d) near the air spout where the air is received UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
directly by the component Ans.(b): Iron has minimum ductility in the given
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 options
Ans. (b) : Most suitable place in the furnace to warm up Decreasing order of ductility–
the component would be away of from the air spout and Mild steel > Copper > Aluminium > Nickel > Zinc >
covered by a thick layer of coal from top. Tin > Lead
117. ....... is considered for machining feasibility. Decreasing order of the malleability of metals–
(a) Ductile material Gold > silver > lead > soft steel > wrought iron >
(b) High cutting speed copper > aluminium.
(c) Small rake angle 121. Select the property of metals which is opposite
(d) Small uncut chip thickness to toughness.
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 (a) Ductility (b) Expandability
Ans. (a) : Ductile material is considered for machining (c) Brittleness (d) Malleability
feasibility. Ductility is the ability of a material to be UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
drawn or plastically deformed without fracture. Gold is Ans. (c) : Brittleness is opposite to toughness.
the most ductile metal. A wire of about 2 km length can • Toughness is the property of a material to resist
be drawn from one gram of gold. fracture due to high impact load like hammer blows.
118. Which of the following material does not show Brittle material has low toughness property.
the property of malleability? 122. The property of a cutting tool which resists
(a) Lead (b) Aluminium breaking due to sudden load during cutting of
(c) Cast iron (d) Silver metal is called?
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM (a) Ductility (b) Hardness
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) Toughness (d) Power
Ans. (c) : Malleability is the property by virtue of
which a material may be hammered or rolled into thin Ans. (c) : Toughness is the property of a material to
sheets without rupture. resist fracture due to high impact load or sudden load.
Hardness– It embraces many different properties such
• Malleability is the ability of a metal to exhibit large
as resistance to wear, scratching deformation and
deformation or plastic response when being subjected to
machinability.
compressive force.
123. What is the property of a material to be
• Lead has maximum malleability.
permanently deformed to some degree without
• Cast iron does not show the property of malleability. breaking?
• Decreasing order of the malleability of metals (a) Plasticity (b) Hardness
Gold > Silver > Lead > Soft steel > Wrought iron > (c) Malleability (d) Ductility
Copper > Aluminium. DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Metallurgy 232 YCT
Ans. (a) : Plasticity is the property of a material to be Ans.(c): The ability of a material to withstand scratches,
permanently deformed under load without breaking. abrasion and indentation is known as hardness.
Ductility–It is the property of a materials ability to 129. Due to which property of metal we can increase
undergo significant plastic deformation under tensile its size by rolling or hammering?
stress before rupture. (a) Elasticity (b) Plasticity
124. That temperature at which solid metal changes (c) Malleability (d) Ductility
into liquid, is known as– NMRC, 15-09-2019
(a) Fusion point (b) Boiling point Ans. (c) : Malleability is the property which permits
(c) Melting point (d) Critical point materials to be rolled or hammered into thin sheets. A
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 malleable material should be plastic but it is not
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 essential to be so strong.
Ans. (c) : The temperature at which solid metal change
130. Which metal protective coating is mounted on
into liquid, known as melting point.
household utensils:
• Boiling point of a substance is the temperature at
(a) From nickel (b) From tin
which the substance transitions from a liquid to gaseous
(c) From zinc (d) From chromium
phase.
125. Steel, in its hardened condition, is generally too
brittle to be used for certain functions. Ans. (b) : Tin (Sn) is coated on the surface of
Therefore it is............ household utensil to protect them from corrosion and
(a) toughened (b) straightened wear. Tin is non-reaction and non toxic to humans.
(c) hardened (d) tempered 131. According to Indian standard plane carbon
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 steel represented by 20C8 it means-
Ans. (d) : Steel, in its hardened condition, which is (a) Carbon from 0.15% to 0.25% and manganese
detained by hardening, gives the material a low from 0.6% to 0.9%
toughness. Tempering reduces the hardness in the (b) Carbon 0.4% and manganese 0.8%
material and increases the toughness. (c) Carbon from 0.35% to 0.45% and manganese
126. Thermal conductivity and electrical from 0.80% to 1.2%
conductivity are the measure of the ability of a (d) Carbon 0.04% and manganese 0.8%
metal to conduct : UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(a) heat and electricity Ans. (a) : According to Indian standards, the carbon
(b) temperature only steels are designated in the following order–
(c) temperature and friction • Letter 'C' carbon.
(d) heat only
• 20C8 means carbon steel containing 0.15 to 0.25%
(0.2% on an average) carbon and 0.60 to 0.90% (0.75%
Ans. (a) : The thermal conductivity of any physical
rounded off to 0.8% on an average) manganese.
material is a measure of its potential to conduct heat. In
materials of low thermal conductivity, heat transfer 132. Malleable cast iron will be generated:
occurs at a lower rate than in materials of high thermal (a) By rapid cooling of molten cast iron
conductivity. (b) White cast iron by annealing process
Electrical conductivity is a measurement of how easily a (c) White cast iron by electric process
material allows electric current to flow through it. (d) Addition of chromium in a molten cast iron
127. The ability of a metal to drawn into a wire is a UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
measure of its– Ans. (b) : Malleable cast iron is obtained from white
(a) Ductility (b) Hardness cast iron by annealing process. Through an annealing,
(c) Rigidity (d) Malleability the brittle structure of cast iron is transformed into the
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 malleable form. It is used for small casting requiring
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 good tensile strength and ability to flex without
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM breaking.
Ans. (a) : The ability of a metal to drawn into a wire is 133. Read the following statements and choose the
a measure of its ductility. Wrought iron, gold, silver, CORRECT option.
copper, aluminium are ductile material. (i) The ability of a material to be formed into
128. The ability of a metal to withstand scratches, sheets by hammering or rolling is called as
abrasion and indentation is known as– malleability.
(a) Brittleness (b) Toughness (ii) The tendency of a material to crack when it is
(c) Hardness (d) Malleability subjected to deformation is called as
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 brittleness.
Metallurgy 233 YCT
(a) (i) is FALSE and (ii) is TRUE (a) (A)-(iv), (B)-(ii), (C)- (iii), (D)-(i)
(b) (i) is TRUE and (ii) is TRUE (b) (A)-(iii), (B)-(ii), (C)- (iv), (D)-(i)
(c) (i) is TRUE and (ii) is FALSE (c) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iii), (C)- (iv), (D)-( i)
(d) (i) is FALSE and (ii) is FALSE (d) (A)-(iii), (B)-(ii), (C)- (i), (D)-(iv)
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019 Ans. (a)
Ans.(b) Malleability–It is the property which permits True stress strain curve Tensile strength
materials to be rolled or hammered into thin sheets. Toughness of material Both elastic and plastic
Gold, silver, copper are malleable materials. Tensile strain Extension per unit length
Brittleness–Brittleness is the property of the material Hook's law Elastic limit
by virtue of which it breaks without significant plastic 136. Corrosion resistance in steel is increased by
deformation, when subjected to stress. Example-cast adding-
iron, glass, etc. (a) Aluminium and zinc
134. Match the properties of materials in List–I (b) Chromium and nickel
with their corresponding meanings in List-II (c) Manganese and molybdenum
List–I List–II (d) Tungsten and sulphur
Action Type of force UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
A) Ductility i) To press Ans. (b) : Corrosion resistance in steel is increased by
something into adding chromium, it strongly increases the hardenability
a smaller space of steel and corrosion resistance of alloys.
B) Malleability ii) Ability to 137. Ductility of a metal enables it :
undergo large (a) to be drawn in to thin wire
deformation in (b) to be shaped into fine sheets
tension (c) to break into pieces with small force
C) Compression iii) Ability to (d) to cut another metal
undergo large ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
deformation in Ans. (a) : Ductility of a metal enables it to be drawn
compression into thin wire.
D) Hardness iv) A measure of the 138. The property of a metal by virtue of which the
resistance of a metal can be bent or stretched without failure
material to is .............
surface (a) Hardness (b) Brittleness
indentation or (c) Ductility (d) Toughness
abrasion ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
(a) (A)-(i), (B)-(ii), (C)- (iv), (D)-(iii) Ans. (d) : The property of a metal by virtue of which
(b) (A)-(ii), (B)-(iii), (C)- (i), (D)-(iv) the metal can be bent or stretched without failure is
(c) (A)-(iii), (B)-(iv), (C)- (ii), (D)-(i) called ductility.
(d) (A)-(iv), (B)-(i), (C)- (iii), (D)-(ii)
139. Ability of a material to resist abrasion is called:
(a) Hardness (b) Ductility
Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
(c) Stiffness (d) Malleability
Ans. (b) Ductility–Ability to undergo large
deformation in tension.
Malleability–Ability to undergo large deformation in Ans. (a) : Ability of a material to resist wear, abrasion,
compression. indentation is called hardness.
Compression–To press something into a smaller 140. Force required to produce unit deformation is
space. called :
Hardness–A measure of the resistance of a material (a) Ductility
to surface indentation or abrasion. (b) Percentage reduction of area
135. Match the following items in List–I with their (c) Stiffness
properties/meanings in List–II. (d) Hardness
List–I List–II ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
A) True stress strain i) Elastic limit Ans. (c) : Force required to produce unit deformation is
curve called stiffness.
B) Toughness of ii) Both elastic and We know, F = kx
material plastic Where, F = force
C) Tensile strain iii) Extension per unit k = stiffness
length x = deformation
D) Hooke's law iv) Tensile strength if x = 1 unit then F = k
Metallurgy 234 YCT

141. The property of a metal due to which it can be Ans : (c) Mechanical advantage–It is the ratio of load
shaped to a wire by drawing process is called : to the effort.
(a) Malleability (b) Hardness Load (W)
(c) Ductility (d) Brittleness Mechanical advantage =
Effort (P)
Ans. (c): The property of a metal due to which it can be Velocity ratio–It is the ratio of distance moved by
shaped to a wire by drawing process is called ductility. effort to the distance moved by load.
142. The property of a metal to resist abrasion or Y
V.R. =
cutting is called : X
(a) Toughness (b) Ductility 148. What is meant by toughness of material?
(c) Malleability (d) Hardness (a) Property of material to resist compressive
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I force
Ans. (d) : The property of a metal to resist abrasion or (b) Property of material to resist abrasion or
cutting is called hardness. scratch
143. Which one of the following properties offers (c) Property of material to withstand shock/
resistance to abrasion? impact
(a) Toughness (b) Ductility (d) Property of material to withstand shear load
(c) Hardness (d) Malleability
Ans. (c) : Toughness is the property of material to
Ans. (c) : Hardness is the property of a material to resist
withstand shock and impact load.
wear abrasion, and indentation.
149. A material is magnetic, if
144. What is the property of metal required for wire
and cable manufacturing? (a) It attracts/repels magnet
(a) Ductility (b) Toughness (b) Current can pass through it
(c) Malleability (d) Hardness (c) It attracts all other metal
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III (d) Heat transfer is possible
Ans. (a) : Ductility is the property of metal required for
wire and cable manufacturing. Ans. (a) : A surface is magnetic when it attracts or
The material of high ductility can be drawn easily in to repels the magnet. A magnet has two poles–South and
North. The force between like poles is called repulsive
a wire.
force and force between opposite poles is called force of
145. Which of the following property of metal is not attraction.
a mechanical property? 150. Yield Strength of material is determined using
(a) Elasticity (b) Toughness (a) Impact test (b) Tensile test
(c) Conductivity (d) Malleability (c) Hardness test (d) Radiographic test
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
Ans. (c) : Conductivity is not a mechanical property. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
Conductively is a measurement of how easily a material Ans. (b) : The yield strength of a material is determined
allows electric current or heat flow through its. using tensile test. The results of the test are plotted on a
146. The property of a material to resist sudden stress-strain curve. The stress at the point where the
load during metal cutting is termed as steel-strain curve deviates from proportionality is the
(a) Cold hardness (b) Red hardness yield strength of the material.
(c) Toughness (d) Brittleness 151. Hydrogen embitterment is:
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 (a) A heat treatment process carried out in a
Ans. (c) : The property of a material to resist sudden hydrogenated atmosphere to increase the
load during metal cutting is termed as toughness. strength and toughness of weldments
Red hardness–Red hardness is defined as the (b) A hard facing operation to provide wear
maximum temperature at which steel retains a given resistance properties to the surface of
hardness. components
147. The mechanical advantage in a simple machine (c) A process by which metals become brittle and
is defined as fracture prone due to the induction and
(a) effort/load subsequent diffusion of hydrogen into the
(b) work/effort metal
(c) load/effort (d) A gas welding process using hydrogen and
(d) distance moved by effort oxygen to generate heat for welding
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018 ISRO Technician-B Welder 10.12.2017
Metallurgy 235 YCT

Ans. (c) : Hydrogen embitterment is a process by which Elasticity– Elasticity is the property of material to
metals become brittle and fracture prone due to the return to their original shape and size after the forces
induction and subsequent diffusion of hydrogen into the deforming them have been removed.
metal. 156. Converting of metal into sheet this property is
152. Which of the following material does not have called ……….
any malleable property? (a) Plasticity
(a) Aluminium (b) Silver (b) Ductility
(c) Iron (d) Graphite (c) Elasticity
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (d) Malleability
Ans. (d): Malleability–It is the property which permits IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
materials to be rolled or hammered into thin sheets. Ans : (d) Converting of metal into sheet this property
Aluminium, silver, iron are malleable material. Graphite is called malleability.
is a brittle material. 157. Which of the following is the purpose of heat
153. Match list–I with List-II and select the correct treatment?
answer using the coder given below the list : (a) Reduce resistance of heat loss
List–I List–II (b) Reduce the hardness and tensile strength
(Material properties) (Test to be determine (c) Increase the hardness and decrease the tensile
properties) strength
(d) Increase the hardness and tensile strength.
A. Ductility 1. Impact test
DRDO Machinist.2016
B. Toughness 2. Fatigue test
C. Endurance limit 3. Tension test
Ans : (d) The purpose of heat and tensile is to increase
D. Resistance to 4. Hardness test
the hardness and tensile strength, change the grain size
penetration
and modify the structure of the material.
Codes :
• To increase the hardness, case hardening process is
(a) A3, B2, C1, D4 (b) A4, B2, C1, D3
done.
(c) A3, B1, C2, D4 (d) A4, B1, C2, D3
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 158. Which of the following methods improve the
Ans. (c) : mechanical property of metal?
(a) Fitting (b) Forging
Material properties Test to be determine
(c) Filing (d) Heat treatment
properties
A. Ductility 3. Tension test
Ans : (d) Heat treatment process is a series of
B. Toughness 1. Impact test
operations involving the heating and cooling of metals
C. Endurance limit 2. Fatigue test
in the solid state.
D. Resistance to 4. Hardness test
• Its purpose is to change a mechanical property or
penetration
combination of mechanical properties so that the metal
154. The characteristics that enables one material to
will be more useful, serviceable, and safe for definite
cut another is its relative :
purpose.
(a) Toughness (b) Hardness
159. Consider these heat treatment processes for a
(c) Ductility (d) Resilience
high grade steel file.
1. Annealing
Ans : (b) Due to the hardness property one material cut
2. Tempering
to the another. Hardness is also define as resistance of
3. Hardening
scratches abrasion and induction.
4. Casting
155. Property by which metal can be drawn in the
Which of these is most suited for production of
form of wires, without failure is known as :
(a) Malleability (b) Toughness high grade steel file?
(c) Ductility (d) Elasticity (a) Only 1 and 2 (b) Only 3
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (c) Only 2 and 3 (d) Only 4
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans : (c) The property by which metal, can be drawn Ans : (c) For production of high grade steels file there
in the form of wires, without failure is known as are two important heat treatment process are most
ductility. suitable for hardening and tempering.
Metallurgy 236 YCT

160. What is resistance ability of matter to Ans : (b) Physical property of metal–
mechanical forces and loads called? Shiny (lustrous), conductivity, colour, melting and
(a) Optical property (b) Electric property boiling point, ductility, density etc.
(c) Mechanical property (d) Chemical property
166. The material having very low malleability and
tensile strength is called?
Ans : (c) Resistance ability of matter to mechanical
(a) Hard (b) Flexible
forces and loads called mechanical property.
(c) Brittle (d) Rigid
Mechanical properties are : Elasticity, plasticity,
ductility, toughness, hardness, malleability, etc. UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
161. Which of the following properties of matter is Ans : (c) Malleability is the opposite property of
necessary to resist deformation during stress? brittleness. Brittle material has low tensile strength but
(a) Ductility (b) Toughness high compressive strength. So low malleable and
(c) Stiffness (d) Tenacity tensile strength material will be high brittle.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 167. The ability to be leveled into thin sheets
Ans : (c) Stiffness–It is the ability of a material to without cracking by heating or cooling is
resist deformation under stress. The modulus of expressed by which of the following properties?
elasticity is the measure of stiffness. (a) Malleability (b) Plasticity
(c) Ductility (d) Elasticity
162. Toughness of material mainly depends on?
(a) Tensile strength and ductility DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
(b) Conductivity Ans : (a) Malleability is the property of metal due to
(c) Hardness which metal may be hammered or rolled into thin sheets
(d) Flexibility without cracking by heating or cooling.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 168. Choose the correct option for the amount of
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 carbon in medium carbon steel?
Ans : (a) Toughness of material mainly depends on (a) 0.3–0.75% (b) 0.6–1.5%
tensile strength and ductility. A material with high (c) 0.05–0.03% (d) 0.9–1.5%
strength and high ductility will have more toughness DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
than a material with low strength and high ductility Ans : (a)
163. What is the property of a matter called, due to Plain carbon steel %C
which it can be made in to thin sheets by being Dead mild steel Upto 0.15%
molded or beaten? Low carbon steel 0.15-0.30%
(a) Plasticity (b) Malleability Medium carbon steel 0.30-0.80%
(c) Brittleness (d) Resilience High carbon steel 0.80-1.5%
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 169. A special case of ductility which permits
Ans : (b) Malleability is the property by virtue of materials to be rolled or hammered into thin
which a material may be hammered or rolled into thin sheets, is called :
sheets without rupture. (a) Plasticity
164. Which of the following, is not a mechanical (b) Brittleness
property? (c) Ductility
(a) Plasticity (d) Malleability
(b) Corrosion resistance LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
(c) Strength Ans : (d) Malleability is the property of material which
(d) Brittleness permits materials to be rolled or hammered into thin
BEML 2022
sheets.
170. The hardness is the property of a material due
Ans : (b) Corrosion resistance is a chemical property of
metal. The properties which are perceived from any to which it:
cutting action by machine on the metal, are called (a) can be drawn into wires
mechanical properties. Example–Plasticity, ductility, (b) can be rolled or hammered into thin sheets
malleability, toughness, hardness, brittleness etc. (c) can cut another metal
165. Which of the following is a physical property of (d) breaks with little permanent distortion
metal? LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
(a) Elasticity (b) Density Ans : (c) Hardness is the property of material due to
(c) Creep (d) Brittleness which, it can cut another metal, resist to scratch,
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 abrasion and indentation.
Metallurgy 237 YCT
171. If the metals are ductile and cutting speed is Ans : (d) The ratio of stress and strain under elastic
high, then– limit known as Hook constant or Young modulus or
(a) Continuous chips are formed modulus of elasticity.
(b) Discontinuous chips are formed σ ∝ ε or σ = E.ε or
(c) Discontinuous chips with built-up edges are Stress ( σ ) P×l
formed Modulus of elasticity (E) = =
(d) None of the above Strain ( ε ) A × ∆l
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 • A material with high modulus of elasticity will be
Ans : (a) more elastic
Type of chips Cutting Material Rake 175. The property of a metal to be rolled or
speed angle hammered without breaking or cracking in to
Continuous chips High Ductile Large thin sheets is called :
Discontinuous Low Brittle Small (a) Ductility
chips (b) Hardness
Continuous chips Low Ductile Small (c) Elasticity
with built-up (d) Malleability
edge ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
172. Resistance to fatigue of a material is measured UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM
by Ans. (d) : The property of a metal to be rolled or
(a) Elastic limit hammered without breaking or cracking into thin sheets
(b) Young's modulus is called malleability. Example–Lead, copper,
(c) Ultimate tensile strength aluminium etc.
(d) Endurance limit 176. Most rapid method of forming metal in to
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 desired shapes by plastic deformation in
Ans:(d) The resistance to fatigue of a material is between rolls is called
measured by endurance limit. (a) Drawing (b) Piercing
• Endurance limit is defined as the maximum stress that (c) Extrusion (d) Rolling
a material can withstand without fatigue, for an infinite ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
number of cycles. Ans. (d): Rolling–In rolling, the material is compressed
in between two rotating roller (opposite direction) such
that the thickness of material is reduced.
Extrusion–Extrusion is the process of confining the
metal in a closed cavity and then allowing it to flow
from only one opening so that the metal takes the shape
of the opening.
Drawing–Drawing is the process of forming a flat piece
of material (blank) into a hollow shape by means of
173. Which of the following factors does not affect punch which causes the blank to flow into the die
hardness cavity.
(a) Quenching medium 177. Power of return of material to its original
(b) Chemical composition shape after deformation when load is removed,
(c) Air is known as
(d) Critical cooling rate (a) Plasticity (b) Elasticity
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (c) Toughness (d) Stiffness
Ans : (c) Hardness is not affected by air among these IOCL 2020
factors. It depends on the quenching medium, cooling
Ans. (b) : Elasticity, is the ability of a deformed
rate, chemical composition etc.
material body to return to its original shape and size
• Brine quenching medium, gives high cooling rate, that
when the forces causing the deformation are removed.
increases the hardness.
178. The property of a metal due to which it
174. The ratio of stress and strain under elastic limit expands in all directions without wear and tear
is known as– when hammered or rolled is–
(a) Poisson's ratio (b) Ductility (a) Hardness (b) Casting
(c) Plasticity (d) Elasticity (c) Malleability (d) Brittleness
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
Metallurgy 238 YCT
Ans : (c) Malleability is the property of metal due to (a) Elasticity (b) Plasticity
which, metal may be hammered or rolled into thin (c) Ductility (d) Tenacity
sheets without wear and tear. (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
179. Shock resisting steels should have Ans : (b) Plasticity is the property of a metal that when
heat and pressure is applied to it, it changes its shape.
(a) high hardness
184. Due to this property thin metal wires are made
(b) high toughness
and it does not break while making wires. This
(c) high tensile strength
is called–
(d) low wear resistance (a) Curvature (b) Malleability
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 (c) Toughness (d) Ductility
Ans : (b) Shock resisting steels should have high (RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004)
toughness. Toughness is the property of a metal by Ans : (d) Ductility is the property of a metal that allows
virtue of which the metal can withstand shock load. the metal to be drawn into a wire without breaking.
180. Which of the following has the desirable Example–mild steel, copper etc.
property of splitting into pieces during wear 185. The property of metals due to which they
and tear? wears shocks is called–
(a) Hardness (b) Fatigue (a) Fatigue resistance (b) Malleability
(c) Strength (d) Brittle (c) Ductility (d) Toughness
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001)
Ans : (d) Due to the property of brittleness when an Ans : (d) Toughness is the property of a metal by virtue
object is hammered, it breaks into pieces. of which the metal can withstand shock load.
• Brittleness is the property of the material by virtue of 186. The property of metals due to which it does not
which it breaks without significant plastic deformation, break even after applying pressure or pulling
when subjected to stress. on it. The capacity to resist tensile force is
181. When a sheet of metal is bent, the middle plane called–
or line (neutral) (a) Ductility (b) Yield point
(a) Does not stretch or contract (c) Tenacity (d) Stress
(b) Contracts (RRB Patna ALP, 11.11.2001)
(c) Stretches Ans : (c) Tenacity is the property of metals due to
(d) Unpredictable which it does not break even after applying pressure or
ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016 pulling on it.
Ans:(a) When a sheet of metal is bent, tension occurs 187. The property opposite to brittleness in a metal
on one side of the middle layer and compression on is called–
the other side. The middle layer of the sheet will (a) Rigidity (b) Ductility
neither be under tension nor under compression, this (c) Elasticity (d) Toughness
surface is called neutral surface. (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
182. The property of a metal in which if a load is Ans : (d) Toughness– • The property in parts subjected
put on it, it gets suppressed, but as soon as the to shock and impact loads.
load is removed, it comes to the its old state, Ductility– • Property of a materials enabling it to be
this is called– drawn in to wire with the application of a tensile force.
(a) Plasticity (b) Tenacity
(c) Tensile strength (d) Elasticity
NTPC Fitter 2016
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (d) Elasticity is the property of material due to
which a material return to its original shape and size
when the forces causing the deformation are removed.
• Tenacity of a material is its ability to resist the effect
of tensile forces without rupturing.
• Tensile strength is the maximum stress that a material 188. Which of the following should not be property
can stand without breaking in tension. of spring?
183. The property of a metal that when heat and (a) Resilience (b) Brittleness
pressure is applied to it, it changes its shape, is (c) Toughness (d) Strength
called– (IOF Fitter, 2014)
Metallurgy 239 YCT
Ans : (b) Spring material should not have the property 192. In fire triangle which three elements are
of brittleness, so that it does not break due to shock required?
load. (a) oxygen, fuel, oil
Toughness–Spring metal should have the property of (b) oxygen, fuel, air
toughness so that it can withstand shock load. (c) oxygen, heat, fuel
Strength–The spring metal should be strong so that it (d) heat, fuel, fire
can withstand stress easily. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
2. Metal Alloy Ans. (c) : Fire is a chemical reaction in which energy in
the form of heat is produced when fuel comes in contact
189. Duralium is an alloy of which metal? with oxygen. This process is know as combustion. In
(a) Nickel fire triangle the three element required are oxygen, heat
(b) Silver and fuel.
(c) Monel metal
(d) Aluminium
BHEL 2020
Ans. (d) : Duralium is an alloy of aluminium.
• Duralium is a strong, hard and light weight alloy of
aluminium.
• It is used in aircraft construction. 193. Main alloying element in H.S.S. is
• Duralium is made with copper, magnese and magnism (a) tungsten (b) vanadium
in addition to aluminium. (c) chromium (d) None of these
190. Gun metal is an alloy of HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
(a) Copper, Zinc, Tin Ans. (a) : H.S.S. (High-speed steel) contains 18%
(b) Tin, Lead tungsten 4% chromium and 1% vanadium.
(c) Copper, Zinc Vanadium is added to remove slag impurities and
(d) Lead, Tin, Zinc reduce nitrogen.
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 Chromium is mainly responsible for hardenability.
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 H.S.S. material are used in total for cutting a metal.
IOF Fitter 2017 194. A divider is used for
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 (a) scribing circles
Ans. (a): (b) scribing arcs
Gun metal 88% Cu + 10% Sn + 2% Zn (c) transferring and stepping of distances
Dutch metal 80% Cu + 20% Zn (d) All of these
Brass 70% Cu + 30% Zn HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
Muntz metal 60% Cu + 40% Zn Ans. (d): The divider is one of the basic indirect
191. Bauxite ore is used to make measuring instruments. Divider consist of joint pair of
(a) Gold leg, each with a sharp point.
(b) Aluminium A divider used for scribing circle, scribing arc and
(c) Silver transferring and stepping of distance.
(d) Zinc 195. Which is an alloy from the following?
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 (a) Copper
Ans. (b) : Aluminium ore– (b) Lead
(i) Bauxite (c) Aluminium
(ii) Corundum (d) Stainless Steel
(iii) Feldspar ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
(iv) Cryolite Ans. (d) : • Stainless steel is an alloy. It is when
(v) Alunite correctly that treated and finished, resists oxidation and
(vi) Kaolin corrosive attack from most corrosive media.
• Bauxite is most important aluminium ore. • It is an alloy of iron, nickel & chromium.
Metallurgy 240 YCT

196. 60-40 Brass is known as _____ metal. 200. Two dissimilar metals are connected in a
(a) Muntz (b) Gun metal corrosive electrolytic environment. The type of
(c) Cold (d) Noble corrosion likely to occur is
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 (a) pitting corrosion
Ans. (a) : 60-40 Brass is called as muntz metal. (b) galvanic corrosion
Cut its important alloys– (c) Crevice corrosion
Brass 60% Cu + 40% Zn (d) Graphitic corrosion
BDL Technician 2022
Dutch metal 80% Cu + 20% Zn
Delta metal 55% Cu + 41% Zn + 4% Fe
Ans. (b) : Galvanic corrosion occurs when two
Gun metal 88% Cu + 2% Zn + 10% Sn
dissimilar metal are immersed in a conductive solution
197. Brass is an alloy of : and are electrically connected. One metal (the cathode)
(a) Copper and Tin is protected, while the other (the anode) is corroded.
(b) Copper and Zinc 201. Stainless steel contains chromium, minimum
(c) Copper and Lead percentage
(d) Copper and Molybdenum (a) 6.5% (b) 10.5%
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 (c) 14.5% (d) 18.5%
Ans. (b) : Stainless steels are steels containing at lest
ISRO Technician-B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 10.5% chromium, less than 1.2% carbon and other
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 alloying element.
Ans. (b) : Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. Brass There are three general classification of stainless steel :
is also corrosion resistant. 1. Austenitic stainless steel.
Alloy Composition 2. Martensitic stainless steel.
3. Ferritic stainless steel.
1. Brass Cu = 70%, Zn = 30%
2. Bronze Cu = 88%, Sn = 12% 202. Galvanizing is providing a protective coating
on mild steel of the metal
3. Phosphor Cu = 87-90%, Sn = 9-10%, P =
(a) zinc (b) lead
bronze 0.1-0.3%
(c) tin (d) aluminium
4. Monel metal Ni = 68%, Cu = 29%, 3% other
constituents
5. Duralumin Al = 95%, Cu = 3.5 - 4.5%, Mn
= 0.40-0.70%, Mg = 0.4-0.7% Ans. (a) : Galvanizing is providing a protective coating
on mild steel of zinc.
198. The type of brass with 95% Copper and 5%
Zinc is called as • The galvanizing process consists of three steps–
(a) Admirality brass (b) Naval brass (i) Surface preparation
(c) Muntz metal (d) Gilding metal (ii) Fuxing
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 (iii) Galvanizing.
Ans. (d) : The type of brass with 95% copper and 5% 203. Which one of the following alloys can resist
zinc is called as gilding metal. saltwater corrosion?
199. The composition of soft solder is lead and (a) Brass
(a) Silver (b) Tin (b) Gun metal
(c) Copper (d) Aluminium (c) Zinc alloy
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (d) Nickel chrome alloy
Ans. (b) : The composition of soft solder is lead and tin. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• Soldering can be classed as soft soldering and hard Ans. (c): Corrosion is defined as the process of slow
soldering. conversion of metals into their undesirable compounds
• The process of joining metals using tin lead solders by reaction with moisture and other gases present in
o
which melt below 420 C is know as soft soldering. atmosphere.
• The process of joining metals using hard solders Galvanization :
consisting of copper, zinc, cadmium and silver • In this method, a thin layer of zinc is applied to
which melt above 600oC is known as hard prevent corrosion of iron or steel.
soldering. • It is done to protect metal from salt water corrosion.
Metallurgy 241 YCT

204. Crane hooks are made of Ans. (a) : The chief alloying elements of stainless steel
(a) Wrought iron (b) High carbon steel are chromium and nickel.
(c) Cast steel (d) Cast iron Stainless steel are characterized primarily by their
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 corrosion resistance, high strength and ductility, and
Ans. (a) : Crane hooks are made of wrought iron. high chromium content.
Wrought iron– It is a very pure iron where the iron 209. Which nonferrous metal tensile strength can be
content is of the order of 99.5%. It is tough, malleable increased by hammering or rolling?
and ductile and can easily be forged or welded.
(a) Lead (b) Copper
205. Carbon content in cold chisel is
(c) Tin (d) Zinc
(a) 0.6 to 0.7% (b) 0.85 to 0.95%
(c) 1.0 to 1.2% (d) 1.2 to 1.4%
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 Ans. (b) : The tensile strength of copper can be increase
Ans. (c) : Carbon content in cold chisel is 1.0 to 1.2% by hammering or rolling.
cold chisels are made from carbon tool-steel, which is • Copper is very malleable and ductile and can be
usually octagonal is cross-section. Tool steel is used as made into sheets or wire.
it can be hardened to from a hard and tough cutting • Copper is a good conductor of heat and also highly
edge. resistance to corrosion.
206. Cast iron is used for manufacturing machine 210. An alloy is a ……..
beds because
(a) Pure metal
(a) It can resist more compressive stress
(b) Mixture of metals in any proportion
(b) It is heavy in weight
(c) Mixture of metals in fixed proportion
(c) It is a cheaper metal
(d) Mixture of two non-metals
(d) It is a brittle metal
Ans. (c) :
Ans. (a) :
• An alloy is a mixture of metals in fixed proportion.
• Cast iron is used for manufacturing machine beds
• Alloys are used in applications like building,
because it can resist more compressive stress.
automobiles, surgical tools and aerospace industry
• Cast iron is a hard and brittle material. etc.
• It has excellent vibration damping material. • An alloy retains all the property of metal like
• Graphite is present in cast iron in free form and it electrical conductivity, ductility, luster etc.
adds self-lubricating properties to cast iron.
211. What is the colour of Tin?
207. Generally, bearing bushes are made of (a) Yellow
(a) Copper (b) Brass (b) Reddish brown
(c) White metal (d) Gun metal (c) Soft bluish grey metal
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 (d) Silver white
Ans. (d) : RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
• Generally bearing bushes are made of gun metal. Ans. (d) : Tin is a soft, silvery-white metal that is very
• Gun metal is an alloy of copper, tin and zinc. light and easy to melt. Being so soft, tin is rarely used as
• It usually contains 88% copper, 10% tin and 2% a pure metal.
zinc. 212. The free carbon content in cast iron in an
• This metal is also known as admiralty gun metal. independent form is known as..........
• It is extensively used for casting boiler fittings, (a) Ferrite (b) Graphite
bushes, bearing, glands etc. (c) Pearlite (d) Martensite
208. The chief alloying elements of stainless steel are RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(a) Chromium and nickel Ans. (b): The free carbon content in cast iron in an
(b) Chromium and tungsten independent from is known as graphite.
(c) Nickel and vanadium • The carbon contents in cast iron varies from 1.7 to
(d) Nickel and tungsten 4.5%.
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 • It has low tensile strength, high compressive
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 strength and no ductility.
Metallurgy 242 YCT

213. The melting point of cast iron is Ans. (d) :

(a) 962oC (b) 1150oC • Carbon steel, composed simply of iron and carbon.
o
(c) 1260 C (d) 1615oC • Steel is an alloy made up of 98% of iron and 2%
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 carbon.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 218. Metals which burn on exposure to air are best
Ans. (b) : stored
• The melting point of cast iron is 1150oC. (a) Underwater (b) Under alcohol
• Cast iron is group of iron-carbon alloys with a (c) Under vinegar (d) Under Kerosene
carbon content greater than 2%. RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
• Its usefulness derives from its relatively low melting Ans. (d) :
temperature.
• Sodium is stored under kerosene oil to prevent their
214. Which of the following is an alloy? reaction with the oxygen, moisture and carbon
(a) Lead (b) Tin dioxide of air.
(c) Brass (d) Aluminium • They are so reactive that they react vigorously with
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 oxygen. The catch fire and start burning when kept
Ans. (c) : The most widely used copper-zinc alloy is open in the air.
brass. This is fundamentally a binary alloy of copper 219. Galvanized metals have been covered with a
with zinc each 50%.
thin sheet of
• There are various types of brasses, depending upon (a) Chromium (b) Copper
the proportion of copper and zinc.
(c) Tin (d) Zinc
• Brasses are very resistant to atmospheric corrosion
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
and can be easily soldered.
Ans. (d) :
215. Which one of the following metals/alloys has
the highest melting point? • Galvanized metals have been covered with a thin
(a) Aluminium (b) Bronze sheet of zinc.
(c) Brass (d) Copper • Galvanization is the process where iron and steel
RRB ALP Patna 2014 are protected from rusting or corrosion with the help
of zinc.
Ans. (d) : Melting Point– It is defined as the
temperature at which the solid substance changes its • When zinc reacts with the moisture in the
state from solid to liquid. atmosphere, a protective layer of zinc oxide (ZnO)
Name of the element Melting Point is formed.
Copper (Cu) – 1084oC 220. Which metal is most abundant in Earth's
Gold (Au) – 1064oC crust?
Aluminium (Al) – 660.3oC (a) Calcium (b) Sodium
216. Plain carbon steel with 0.4% to 0.6% carbon is (c) Alminium (d) Iron
classified as …… RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
(a) low carbon steel Ans. (c) : Aluminium is the most abundant metal that is
(b) medium carbon steel found in the earth's crust with 8.9%. Aluminium is a
(c) high carbon steel silvery-white as well as lightweight metal. It is a very
(d) stainless steel good conductor of electricity and heat.
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 221. Which of these metals is liquid at room
Ans. (b) : There are 3 types of plain carbon steel : temperature?
(i) Low-carbon steels– Carbon content in the range of (a) Beryllium (b) Lithium
< 0.5% (c) Mercury (d) Osmium
(ii) Medium carbon steels– Carbon content in the RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
range of 0.5-0.8%. Ans. (c) :
(iii) High-carbon steels– Carbon content in the range • Mercury is in the form of liquid at room
of 0.6-1.5%. temperature.
217. Which of the following is an alloy of iron and • Mercury is the only metal in liquid from at room
carbon? temperature.
(a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron • As mercury is sensitive to temperature changes, it
(c) Wrought iron (d) Steel is used in the devices that are used to measure
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 temperature.
Metallurgy 243 YCT
222. Which of the following metals can be found in a Ans. (c) • Tungsten metal is used for making the
pure state in nature? filament of electric bulbs.
(a) Lithium (b) Iron • It has a very high melting point being an alloy.
(c) Gold (d) Aluminium
• It has very high resistance, so it does not burn easily
at room temperature.
Ans. (c): Gold occurs in its pure state.
• The lamp glows at high temperature.
• Gold is a noble metal.
227. After hardening, the tools require ..........
• The melting point of the gold is 1064oC.
(a) tempering (b) normalising
• Gold does not react with oxygen even at high
(c) annealing (d) stress relieving
temperature.
• Gold is the most ductile metal.
Ans. (a) : After hardening, the tool require tempering.
223. White metal is an alloy of
Tempering is done for the following reasons :
(a) Copper and tin
(b) Copper, zinc and tin • To reduce brittleness of the hardened steel and thus
(c) Copper, lead, tin and antimony to increase ductility.
(d) Copper, zinc, tin and antimony • To remove internal stress caused by rapid cooling of
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 steel.
Ans. (c) : • White metal is an alloy of copper, lead tin • To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue.
and antimony. 228. Non metallic cutting tool materials are made of
• White metal bearings are used in motor engines. non metal like….
• It has low melting point, softness and low friction, (a) tungsten (b) chromium
so it is a material used for minimizing shaft wear (c) vanadium (d) diamond
and improving durability in the rotation mechanical RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
elements. Ans. (d) : Non metallic cutting tool material are made
224. Muntz metal is an alloy of of non metal like diamond.
(a) Copper and zinc • Diamond is hardest substance among all known
(b) Copper and tin material.
(c) Copper and aluminium • It has good thermal conductivity, low friction
(d) Copper and nickel coefficient low thermal expansion.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 • It is used for machining very hard non-ferrous
Ans. (a) • Muntz metal is an alloy of copper and zinc. material like hard carbide, nitrides etc.
• It is known as yellow metal. 229. High carbon steel tools are used for turning
• The addition of 1% tin to muntz metal increases at......
corrosion resistance to marine environments and the (a) Higher cutting speed than HSS
brass called naval brass. (b) Lower cutting speed than HSS
225. Monel metal contains (c) Same cutting speed as HSS
(a) Copper and aluminium (d) Same cutting speed as carbide tipped tool
(b) Nickel and copper
(c) Copper and chromium
Ans. (b) : High carbon steel tools are used for turning at
(d) Copper and zinc
lower cutting speed than HSS.
Carbon tool steel–
Ans. (b) : Monel metal composed of nickel and copper
with small amount of iron, manganese, carbon and • Use for making hand drills, narrow blade, taps, dies,
silicon. chisels.
• Monel metal is stronger than pure nickel. • It is used for machining soft materials like
• Monel alloys are resistant to corrosion by many magnesium, aluminium, wood.
agents, including rapidly flowing sea water. • Temperature range 200-250oC.
226. The filaments of lamp bulb are made of 230. Carbon percentage in a HSS tool is......
(a) Nickel (b) Chromium (a) 0.2 to 0.3% (b) 0.6 to 0.75%
(c) Tungsten (d) Tin (c) 0.75 to 1.0% (d) 1 to 2%
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
Metallurgy 244 YCT
Ans. (c) : Carbon percentage in HSS tool is 0.75 to Ans. (b) : The tensile strength of copper can be
1.2%. increased by hammering or rolling.
• The most commonly used HSS has a composition Copper is very malleable and ductile and can be made
called 18-4-1 i.e. tungsten 18%, chromium 4%, into sheets or wire. Copper is a good conductor of heat
vanadium 1%. and also highly resistant to corrosion.
• The HSS is used for cutting tools in lathes, shapers, 236. What is the approximate composition of lead
planers, milling machines, drilling machines etc.
and tin in a eutectic alloy?
231. The most commonly used proportions of the
(a) 60% tin and 40% Lead
alloying elements in HSS are.....
(a) 18% tungsten, 4% chromium, 1% vanadium (b) 40% tin and 60% Lead
(b) 18% chromium, 4% cobalt, 1% tungsten (c) 63% tin and 37% Lead
(c) 18% cobalt, 4% tungsten, 1% chromium (d) 66% tin and 34% Lead
(d) 18% Vanadium, 4% carbon, 1% cobalt NLC Technician 24-09.2022
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (a) : The most commonly used proportions of the (RRB Allahabad ALP, 09.12.2007)
alloying elements in HSS are 18% tungsten, 4% (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
chromium, 1% vanadium. Ans. (c) : The estimated composition of lead and tin in
High speed steels are used for cutting metals at a much a eutectic alloy is 63% tin and 37% lead.
higher cutting speed than ordinary carbon tools steel. • Solder is an alloy of tin and lead. A solder is a fusible
232. Fuse is generally made up of- metal alloy with a melting point or melting point range
(a) Tin + lead (b) Lead + iron of 90-450ºC, used in a process called soldering where it
(c) Tin + copper (d) Copper + zinc is melted to join metallic surfaces.
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 237. By what name is an alloy of lead, tin, copper
Ans. (a) : A fuse is made of an alloy of tin and lead has and antimony known–
a low melting point. It is used because it is important (a) Gun metal (b) German silver
that the device melts without heating so as hot to (c) Babbit metal (d) Muntz metal
produce fires or to heat nearby. DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
233. Which of the following metals has higher Ans. (c) : Composition of babbit metal–
ductility? A lead based alloy A tin based alloy
(a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel Pb 75% Sn 88%
(c) Bronze (d) Brass Sb 15% Sb 8%
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 Sn 10% Cu 4%
Ans. (b) : Mild steel has higher ductility. Ductility is • Babbit metal also called white metal, is an alloy used
the property of the material that enables it to be drawn to provide the bearing surface in a plain bearing.
out or elongated to an appreciable extant before rupture 238. HSS (18-4-1) is used to manufacture............
occurs. (a) cutting tools
The percentage elongation or percentage reduction in (b) machining body
the area before rupture of a test specimen is the measure
(c) cutting tools (Non-ferrous)
of ductility.
(d) hand tools
234. Which alloy metal is a virtually muntz metal DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
and with little tin, prevents corrosion in the
Ans. (a) : High speed steel is used to manufacture of
presence of salt water?
cutting tool (ferrous).
(a) Muntz metal (b) Gilding metal
(c) Naval brass (d) Cartridge brass • HSS contains 18 tungsten, 4% chromium, 1%
vanadium and 0.7% carbon.
239. In which furnace cast iron is manufactured ?
Ans. (c) : Muntz metal– Muntz metal is also a type of
brass that contains 40% zinc and 60% copper with (a) Blast furnace (b) Pudding furnace
excellent tensile strength and lesser ductility. It is also (c) L.D.M. furnace (d) Cupola furnace
known as yellow metal. NMRC, 15-09-2019
235. The tensile strength of which non-ferrous metal Ans. (d): Material Furnace
can be enhanced by hammering or rolling? Pig iron Blast furnace
(a) Lead (b) Copper Cast iron Cupola furnace
(c) Tin (d) Zinc Wrought iron Puddling furnace
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 Steel Bessemer converter, open hearth
Metallurgy 245 YCT

240. Aston process is used to produce __________ 245. .............. is used for galvanising iron to protect
(a) Wrought iron (b) Cast iron from rusting
(c) Copper (d) High speed steel (a) Calcium (b) Aluminium
NMRC, 15-09-2019 (c) Copper (d) Zinc
Ans. (a) : Aston or Byers process is used for the ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
production of wrought iron. Production of wrought iron Ans. (d) : Galvanising process is the process of
is a laborious and costly process. The following four applying a protective zinc coating to iron or steel to
processes are done in its production. prevent rusting.
1. Refining 2. Puddling Anodising–It is an electrolytic process for producing
3. Shingling 4. Rolling thick oxide coating, usually on aluminium and its
241. Alloys of copper and tin are known as- alloys.
(a) Bronze (b) Copper-tin 246. Steels having 18% chromium and 8% Nickel is
(c) Brass (d) Tin-copper called
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (a) High speed steel (b) Maraging steel
Ans. (a) : Alloys of copper and tin are known as (c) Stainless steel (d) Carbon steel
bronze. The useful range of composition is 75 to 95% ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
copper and 5 to 25% tin. Ans. (c) : Stainless steel is a corrosion resistant alloy of
• Copper and zinc alloys are called brass. iron, chromium and in some cases, Nickel and other
242. In hypoeutectoid steel, the percentage of metal.
carbon will be- • The steel having 18% chromium and 8% nickel is
(a) 1.5 to 2% (b) Above 2% called austenitic stainless steel.
(c) 0.8 to 1.5% (d) Less than 0.8% • Stainless steel has 3 type–
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 1. Martensitic stainless steel
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 2. Ferrite stainless steel
Ans. (d) : 3. Austenitic stainless steel
Steel Carbon content 247. As per IOS designation for carbide tool inserts
Hypotectoid steel less than 0.8% - S P U N 12 03 08, 'N' represents
Eutectoid steel 0.8% (a) Class of chip breaker
Hyper eutectoid steel 0.8% to 2% (b) Clearance angle
243. The hardest tool material available next to (c) Basic shape
diamond is (d) Tolerance class
(a) Stellite ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
(b) Ceramics Ans. (a) : As per IOS designation for carbide tool
(c) Cemented Carbide inserts. N represents class of chip breaker.
(d) Cubic Boron Nitride 248. Preferable material for manufacturing
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 precision measuring instruments :
Ans. (d) : CBN (Cubic boron nitride) is the second (a) Invar (b) Kovar
hardest element after diamond. (c) Stainless steel (d) Cast iron
• CBN trade name is barazon. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
• Sequence of hardness– Ans. (a) : The alloy steel which contains 36% nickel is
Diamond > CBN > Ceramic > Cemented Carbide > called "Invar" its coefficient of expansion is almost
HSS zero. Therefore, there is no expansion or contraction in
244. One of the alloying elements in Bronze is the measuring instrument when the temperature changes
Copper. Which is the other main alloying during measurement. The measuring instrument always
element? gives the correct reading. That's why invar is used in the
(a) Lead (b) Chromium manufacturing of precision measuring.
(c) Zinc (d) Tin • It is most commonly used to make pendulum of
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 clocks, precision measuring instrument etc.
Ans. (d) : Bronze is an alloy of copper and tin. 249. Anodizing is a process of :
• Melting point of bronze is 1005º. (a) Zinc coating
• Bronze is brittle as compare to brass, so it has high (b) Tin coating
machinability. (c) Aluminium coating
• Bronze is used in the manufacture of switches, (d) Gold coating
telephone parts, spring etc. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
Metallurgy 246 YCT
Ans. (c) : Anodizing is an electrolytic process for Ans : (a) Polycarbonate, thermoplastic or layers of
producing thick oxide coating usually on aluminium laminated glass are used in the manufacture of bullet
and its alloys. proof glass.
250. The major percentage of the element present in • Polyamide is used in the manufacture of bullet proof
the composition of Inconel is : jackets.
(a) Iron (b) Aluminium 255. Which of the following pairs is correctly
(c) Nickel (d) Chromium matched?
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
Ans. (c) : Inconel consist of 80% Nickel, 14% (a) Silver iodide ─ Horn silver
(b) Silver chloride ─ artificial rain
chromium and 6% iron. This alloy has excellent
(c) Zinc phosphide ─ Rat poison
mechanical properties at ordinary and elevated
(d) Zinc oxide ─ Philosopher's wool
temperatures. It is used for making spring which have to
withstand high temperatures and are exposed to Ans : (c) Option (c) is the correctly matched.
(Zinc phosphide – Rat poison)
corrosive action.
• Correct match of other three option are–
251. Select the right sequence of cutting tool Horn silver ─ Silver chloride
materials, in which they exhibit better hot Artificial rain ─ Silver iodide
hardness : Philosopher's wool ─ Zinc oxide
(a) Carbide > HSS > Carbon tool steel >
256. Which of the following cannot be forged?
Ceramics (a) Steel alloy (b) Cast iron
(b) Ceramics > Carbide > HSS > Carbon tool (c) Copper alloy (d) Carbon steel
steel DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
(c) HSS > Ceramic > Carbide > Carbon tool steel Ans. (b) : Cast iron contains high carbon percentage so
(d) Carbon tool steel > Carbide > HSS > it can not be forged. High carbon content would cause a
Ceramics brittle weld.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 • Cast iron has good casting characteristics, high
Ans. (b) : Correct sequence of tool material according compressive strength, wear resistance and excellent
to hot hardness– machinability.
Ceramics > Carbide > HSS > Carbon tool steel 257. Which of the following element is added to
252. Which of the following is a non metallic tool about 0.05 - 0.15% to obtain deoxidised
material copper?
(a) High speed steel (a) Silicon (b) Sulphur
(b) Ceramic (c) Phosphorus (d) Manganese
(c) High carbon steel ISRO Technician-B Welder 10.12.2017
(d) Stellite Ans. (a) : Silicon is added to about 0.05-0.15% to
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 obtain deoxidised copper.
• Deoxidation improve strength and increase its
Ans. (b) : Ceramic is a non metallic tool material.
properties for conducting heat and electricity.
Ceramic tools are sintered or powder metallurgically
258. Which of the given statement is not correct
produced (Aluminium oxide) tools that are superior to
about copper?
carbide attached to the tool bit by brazing. (a) Its melting point is 11000C.
253. Which of the below is the hardest tool material (b) Its tensile strength is 4.5 M ton.
(a) HSS (b) Carbide (c) Its ore is pyrite.
(c) Ceramic (d) Diamond (d) Used for die casting.
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 Ans : (d) Copper is a metal found in nature, its main
Ans. (d) : Diamond is the hardest tool material that is ores are cuprite, azurite, etc. it has melting point of
used for cutting. Its can be used at a cutting speed of 50 1083ºC and a tensile strength of 4.5 mega tons.
times higher than that of HSS. 259. Match the following given lists :
• Diamond is used for machining of glass, plastic and List- I List-II
other abrasive materials. (Cutting fluid used) (Metals)
• Being brittle, it is used in finishing operation. A. Dry, soluble, low 1. Mild steel
viscosity oils
254. Which of the following polymers is used in B. Soluble oil, Emulsion 2. Cast iron
makes bullet proof windows? C. Kerosene 3. Titanium &
DRDO Fitter 2016 Alloys
(a) Polycarbonate (b) Environment D. High concentrated 4. Bronze/brass
(c) Polystyrene (d) Polyamide soluble oils
Metallurgy 247 YCT
Choose the correct option– • Kevlar is a polyamide, used for making bullet proof
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 jacket.
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 • Bakelite is used in making mugs, buckets, electrical
(IOF Fitter, 2012) switches.
(a) A–2, B–1, C–4, D–3 263. What is the alloy of bronze metal?
(b) A–2, B–3, C–1, D–4 (a) Copper and Tin (b) Tin and Zinc
(c) A–4, B–1, C–3, D–2 (c) Copper and Zinc (d) Copper and Aluminum
(d) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
Ans : (a) (IOF Fitter, 2014)
Metals Cutting fluid used ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
Cast iron – Dry, soluble, low viscosity oil Ans : (a) Bronze is an alloy of copper (88%) and tin
Mils steel – Soluble oil, Emulsion (12%).
Titanium & Alloys – High concentrated soluble oil • Bronze is a hard and brittle material.
Bronze/Brass – Kerosene • Bronze melting point is 950ºC.
260. Match the following given lists : • Bronze has high resistance to corrosion from salt
List I (Metals) List II (Properties) water.
A. Aluminium 1. Used in galvanization of • Bronze is used in making valve, Nut, Bush etc.
iron sheet and wire. 264. Which material is used in the manufacturing of
B. Copper 2. Mixed with other metals to parallel shank drills?
make them free cutting (a) Medium Carbon steel (b) High speed steel
C. Gun metal 3. Used for coating in plates (c) Cast iron (d) Mild steel
for making them corrosion HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
free DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
D. Wrought iron 4. For making cheap electric Ans : (b) High speed steel is used in the manufacturing
conductors. of parallel shank drills.
(a) A–2, B–1, C–4, D–3 265. Which of the following is a ore of aluminium?
(b) A–1, B–4, C–3, D–2 (a) Bauxite (b) Magnetite
(c) A–4, B–1, C–3, D–2 (c) Pyrites (d) Hematite
(d) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 Ans : (a)
Metal Their ores
Ans : (b)
Aluminium Bauxite, Corundum, Alunite
Metal Properties
Iron Hematite, Magnetite, Pyrite
Aluminium – Used in galvanization of iron sheet Copper Cuprite, Copper glance,
and wire malachite
Copper – From making cheap electric Zinc Sphalerite, calamine, zincite
Gun metal – Used for coating in plates for Lead Galena, Anglestire
making them corrosion free 266. What is the composition of soft solder?
Wrought iron – Mixed with other metals to make (a) Lead 80% Tin 20%
them free cutting (b) Lead 70% Tin 30%
261. Which of the following is used in making "Bullet (c) Lead 58% Tin 42%
proof jacket"? (d) Lead 50% Tin 50%
(a) Fibrous glass (b) Gun metalZ DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
(c) Lead (d) Laminated glass Ans : (d) Solder has two types–
DRDO Fitter.2016 (i) Soft solder
(ii) Hard solder
Ans : (d) Laminated glass is used in making bullet
• Soft solder is a composition of 50% lead, and 50%
proof jackets.
tin. Soft soldering includes the soldering with solder,
262. Which of the following polymers is used in
where hard soldering the liquids temperature is below
making bullet proof clothes?
450ºC, with hard soldering the liquids temperature of
(a) Bakelite (b) Polyamide solders is between 450ºC and 900ºC.
(c) Teflon (d) Polyurethane
267. Which of the following is a ore of copper?
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 (a) Hematite (b) Bauxite
Ans : (b) Polyamide is used in making bullet proof (c) Pyrite (d) Magnetite
clothes. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
Metallurgy 248 YCT
Ans : (c) Ore of copper are–Copper pyrites, Cuprite, Code :

Copper glance, Malachite (a) A-1, B-2, C-4, D-3
268. When elements such as copper, nickel, (b) A-2, B-1, C-3, D-4
chromium and molybdenum are added to (c) A-1, B-2, C-3, D-4
molten cast iron, it produces (d) A-2, B-1, C-4, D-3
(a) Chilled cast iron (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(b) Nodular cast iron Ans : (d) German silver is an alloy of copper (60%),
(c) White cast iron zinc (15%) and nickel (25%).
(d) Ally cast iron Solder – Lead (68%) + Tin (32%)
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Bleaching powder – CaOCl2
Ans : (d) When elements such as copper, nickel, Hypo – Na2S2O3.5H2O
chromium and molybdenum are added to molten cast
273. Which of the following element is not present in
iron, it produces alloy cast iron.
German silver?
Effect of elements– (a) Copper (b) Aluminium
Nickel–improve toughness
(c) Zinc (d) Nickel
Chromium–Wear resistance (Forms chromium
carbide)
(RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009)
Molybdenum–Increases strength and hardness.
Ans : (b) Aluminium is not present in German silver.
Copper–Not much solubility but resists rusting.
The composition of German silver is Cu (60%), Nickel
269. In steel, manganese increases–
(25%) and Zinc (15%).
(a) Tensile strength (b) Hardness
(c) Tensile (d) Fluidity 274 . Which one of the following will not contain
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 silver?
(a) Horn silver (b) German silver
Ans : (a) Manganese in steel increases the tensile
(c) Ruby silver (d) Lunar caustic
strength of steel. About 5% manganese is added to the
steel, which makes steel hard.
270. ______ is a metal with hexagonal closed packed Ans: (b) German silver is an alloy, it does not contain
structure. silver. Its components are copper, nickel and zinc. It is
(a) Aluminium (b) Iron used for making jewelry and other thing.
(c) Silver (d) Magnesium 275. Which of the following alloys has maximum
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 copper content?
Ans : (d) Magnesium is a metal with hexagonal closed (a) Brass (b) Bronze
packed (HCP) structure. (c) German silver (d) Gun metal
Aluminium – FCC (RRB Mumbai ALP, 05.06.2005)
Silver – FCC Ans : (b)
Iron – BCC Alloy Copper content
271. The filament of a halogen lamp is an alloy of Brass 70%
(a) Tungsten and Iodine Bronze 75-95%
(b) Tungsten and bromine Gun metal 88%
(c) Tungsten and sodium German silver 60%
(d) Molybdenum and sodium 276. Beryl is an ore/ mineral of
RAS/RTS(Pre) G.S. Re-Exam. 1999-2000 (a) Nickel (b) Beryllium
Ans : (c) The filament of a halogen lamp is made of (c) Lead (d) Tin
an alloy of tungsten and sodium. Due to the presence (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
of sodium in the filament of the lamp, it produce Ans : (b) Beryl is an important mineral of modern era,
yellow light. from which beryllium metal is extracted. Its chemical
272. Match list-I with list-II and choose the correct formula is Be3Al2 (SiO3)6. It is light but hard and firm,
answer using the codes given below lists so it is used in aircraft.
List-I List-II 277. Examine the following statements and find the
A. German silver 1. Tin correct answer from the given code–
B. Solder 2. Nickel 1. Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc.
C. Bleaching powder 3. Sodium 2. Magnetite, is the most important ore of
D. Hypo 4. Chlorine aluminium.
Metallurgy 249 YCT
3. Amalgam compounds are these substance which Ans : (c) Stainless steel is a combination of chromium,
essentially contain mercury. and nickel with iron. Nickel increase the hardness,
4. Potassium nitrate is the essential chemical used strength and toughness of steel.
in photography. 282. Which of the following is not a alloy?
Code : (a) Steel (b) Brass
(a) 1 and 2 (b) 1 and 3 (c) Bronze (d) Copper
BEML 2022
(c) 2 and 3 (d) 1, 3 and 4
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (d) Copper is a metal while steel, brass and
Ans : (b) • Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc. bronze are alloy.
• Magnetite, hematite's are iron ores. • Brass is a alloy of copper and zinc.
• Amalgam is that compounds which essentially • Bronze is a alloy of copper and tin.
contain mercury. • Steel is a alloy of iron and carbon.
• Silver bromides is the essential chemical used in 283. Generally, the wire used for installing safety
photography. fuse is made of which metal?
278. Melting point of copper is– (a) Tin
(a) 9610C (b) 10630C (b) Lead
0
(c) 1083 C (d) 15390C (c) Nickel
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 (d) An alloy of tin and lead
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (c) Copper is a non ferrous metal which is usually Ans : (d) Generally, a wire made of an alloy of copper,
obtained from ores copper pyrite, copper glance. The tin and lead is used to install a safety fuse. Its melting
point is low.
melting point of copper is 1083º.
Metal Melting point 284. Amalgam–
Aluminium 660ºC (a) is highly colored alloy
Brass 930ºC (b) is an alloy containing carbon
(c) is a mercury alloy
Lead 328ºC
(d) Alloy with high resistance to abrasion
Zinc 420ºC
Silver 961ºC
Ans : (c) An amalgam is an alloy of mercury with one
279. Which of the following metal has lowest or more other metals.
melting point? • Any metal which gets alloyed by mercury is called
(a) Silver (b) Lead amalgam for ex.– gold mercury amalgam, silver
(c) Gold (d) Tin mercury amalgam etc.
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004) 285. When galvanizing brass utensils, the smoke
Ans : (d) In the given options, tin has lowest melting from ammonium chloride power used for
point. clearing hot pots, is–
Metal Melting point (a) Ammonia
Silver 961ºC (b) Carbon monoxide
Lead 328ºC (c) Hydrochloric acid
Tin 230ºC (d) Ammonia and hydrochloric acid
280. Admiral bronze is used in– (IOF Fitter, 2015)
(a) As a high pressure steam fitting Ans : (d) The smoke emanating from the ammonium
(b) For making electric wire chloride. Powder is ammonia and hydrochloric acid.
(c) None of these When a rod moistened with hydrochloric acid is
carried in a gas jar of ammonia. It gives white smoke
(d) To join two metal
of ammonium chloride.
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
286. Various alloying elements are added to produce
Ans : (a) Admiral bronze is used in high pressure steam
different alloy steels, which one of the following
fitting.
combination of alloy elements is used in HSS?
281. Manufacture of stainless steel is done by (a) Chromium, Nickel and molybdenum
following metal combination– (b) Nickel, Molybdenum and Silicon
(a) Zinc (b) Solder (c) Chromium, Vanadium and Manganese
(c) Nickel (d) Copper (d) Chromium, Vanadium and Tungsten
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003) ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
Metallurgy 250 YCT
Ans. (d) : A common type of high speed steel contains Ans : (b) Cellulose nitrate is also called 'gun cotton'. It
18% tungsten, 4% chromium, 1% vanadium and only is used as an explosive in rockets, in printing work, in
0.5-0.8% carbon. HSS is used to make cutting tool. making ink base and in cleaning leather etc.
287. Gun metal is an alloy of 292. Match list-I with list-II and choose the correct
(a) Copper and Zinc answer using the codes given below the lists:
(b) Tin and Zinc List-I List-II
(c) Copper, Tin and Zinc
(A) Stainless steel 1. Copper and zinc
(d) Lead, Tin and Zinc
(B) German silver 2. Copper and tin
(C) Bronze 3. Chromium, nickel and
Ans. (c) : Gun metal contains 88% copper, 10% tin and
iron
2% zinc. It is used in making bush bearing, it can be
forced by heating it to 600ºC (D) Brass 4. Copper, zinc and nickel
Code :
288. Which one of the following tool material has
A B C D A B C D
highest temperature value up to which it retain
its hardness? (a) 3 4 2 1 (b) 1 2 4 3
(a) High speed steel (b) Ceramics (c) 2 3 1 4 (d) 4 1 3 2
(c) Carbon steels (d) Satellite (HAL Fitter, 2015)
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 Ans : (a) The correct match is as follows–
Ans. (b) : List-I List-II
Material Temperature up to which Stainless steel - Chromium, nickel, iron
it retain hardness German silver - Copper, nickel and zinc
High carbon steel 250ºC Bronze - Copper, tin
Stellite 950ºC
Brass - Copper, zinc
HSS 650ºC
Ceramics 1400ºC 293. Which of the following alloys is not correctly
matched from the point of view of its
289. Among the following, which is not a shape of
composition–
carbide throw-away tip tools—
Alloy Composition
(a) Round (b) Rectangular
(a) Brass Copper and zinc
(c) Pyramid (d) Triangle
(b) Gun metal Copper, tin and zinc
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (c) Nichrome Nickel, Iron and
Ans. (c) : Pyramid is not a shape of carbide throw-away Chromium
tip tools. (d) Solder Lead and zinc
290. As per ISO designation for carbide throw-away (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
tool inserts, 'C' is representation of basic Ans : (d) Solder is an alloy of lead and tin. A solder is a
shape— fusible metal alloy with a melting point or melting
(a) Circular range of 90 to 450ºC. It is especially useful in
(b) Rhomboidal with 55º corner angle electronics and plumbing.
(c) Rhomboidal with 80º corner angle 294. Which of the following alloys is called amalgam?
(d) Round (a) Zinc copper (b) Copper tin
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (c) Mercury zinc (d) Lead zinc
Ans. (c) : There are 16 standard shapes as per ISO VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
designation for carbide throw away tool inserts. Some Ans : (c) An alloy made by mixing mercury and any
are here as follow: other metal is called amalgam. Except of iron, all metals
A – Parallelogram 85º combine with mercury to form alloy.
B – Parallelogram 82º 295. Which of the following metal is present as a
C – Diamond 80º (Rhombic) common composition in brass, bronze and
D – Diamond 55º (Rhombic) German silver?
E – Diamond 75º (Rhombic) (a) Antimony (b) Copper
R – Round (c) Tin (d) Zinc
291. Which of the following is gun cotton?
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) Ans : (b) Brass, bronze and german silver are alloy of
(a) Calcium phosphate copper.
(b) Cellulose nitrate Brass – Copper + zinc
(c) Potassium hydroxide Bronze – Copper + tin
(d) Cellulose sulphate German silver – Copper + zinc + nickel
Metallurgy 251 YCT

296. The colour of brass get discoloured in air due 301. The metal which quickly with cold water is–
to the presence of– (a) Sodium (b) Aluminium
(a) Oxygen (b) Hydrogen sulphide (c) Magnesium (d) Iron
(c) Carbon dioxide (d) Nitrogen (RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014)
(IOF Fitter, 2014) Ans : (a) Sodium reacts violently with water because
Ans : (b) The colour of brass gets discoloured in air it is much more active than hydrogen. It form sodium
due to hydrogen sulphide. hydroxide and hydrogen gas.
Sodium + Water —→ Sodium hydroxide
297. Gun metal is an alloy of?
(a) Copper, tin and zinc 302 . Assertion (A)─ Sodium metal is stored in
(b) Aluminium, tin and steel kerosene.
Reason (R)─ The metal sodium burns when
(c) Copper, steel and zinc
exposed to air.
(d) Aluminium, tin and zinc
(a) Both A and R are correct and R is the correct
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005) explanation
Ans : (a) Gun metal is an alloy of copper (88%), tin (b) Both A and R are correct and R is not the correct
(10%) and zinc (2%) explanation
298. Following given material, which is the correct (c) A is right R is false
sequence, according to decreasing order of (d) A is false but R is right
their density? DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) Steel > Mercury > Gold Ans : (a) Sodium metal reacts with the oxygen in air
(b) Gold > Mercury > Steel to form sodium oxide. The sodium oxides formed will
(c) Steel > Gold > Mercury then react with water vapour in the air and give
(d) Gold > Steel > Mercury sodium hydroxide film. So medium metal is stored in
IOCL 2020 kerosene.
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012) 303. Sodium metal is stored by immersing it in–
(a) Kerosene (b) Air
Ans : (b)
3 (c) Water (d) Ammonia
Metal Density (kg/m )
NTPC Fitter 2016
Gold 19300 DRDO Turner.2016
Mercury 13600
Ans : (a) Sodium metal is stored in kerosene because
Steel 7750
it reacts and starts burning when left open in air.
299. In normal 18 carat gold, sold in market, there 304. Which of the following is hardest metal?
are– (a) Zinc ─ Copper (b) Copper ─ tin
(a) 82 parts of gold and 18 parts of other metals (c) Mercury ─ Zinc (d) Lead ─ Zinc
(b) 18 parts of gold and 82 parts of other metals (RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014)
(c) 18 parts of gold and 6 parts of other metals Ans : (c) An alloy made by mixing mercury and any
(d) 9 parts of gold and 15 part of other metals other metal is called amalgam. Except of iron, all
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) metals combine with mercury to form alloy.
Ans : (c) There are 18 parts of gold and 6 parts of 305. Which of the following is hardest metal?
other metals in 18 carat gold. The purest form of gold (a) Gold (b) Iron
is 24 carat. (c) Platinum (d) Steel
300. Consider the following statement: (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
Glass can be engraved or scratched Ans : (c) In the given options, platinum is hardest
1. by diamond metal. Whereas diamond is the hardest of the known
2. by hydrochloric acid substances.
3. by aquaregia 306. Match List-I with List-II and choose the
4. by concentrated sulfuric acid correct answer using the codes given below the
lists:
(a) 1 and 4 (b) 2 and 3
(c) 1 and 2 (d) 2 and 4 List-I List-II
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) (naturally obtained (element present)
substance)
Ans : (c) Diamond is used to cut glass as well as to A. Diamond 1. Calcium
engrave or scratch it. Hydrochloric acid is also used B. Marble 2. Silica
for scratching or etching on glass. That's why C. Soil 3. Aluminium
hydrochloric acid is not stored in a glass vessel. D. Ruby 4. Carbon
Metallurgy 252 YCT

Code: Code :
A B C D A B C D A B C D A B C D
(a) 3 1 2 4 (b) 4 2 1 3 (a) 1 3 2 4 (b) 2 3 4 1
(c) 2 1 3 4 (d) 4 1 2 3 (c) 3 2 4 1 (d) 4 3 1 2
DRDO Fitter.2016 BHEL 2020
Ans : (d) DRDO Fitter.2016
Diamond ─ Carbon
Ans : (d) Silver is the best conductor of heat and
Marble ─ Calcium
Soil ─ Silica electricity. The most abundant metal is aluminium.
Ruby ─ Aluminium • Gold is the most malleable and ductile material.
307. Match List-I (Naturally obtain substances) • Lead is least conductor of heat.
with List-II (Element) and select the correct 311. Which of the following element does not cause
answer using the code given below: pollution?
List-I List-II (a) Copper (b) Cadmium
A. Diamond 1. Calcium (c) Arsenic (d) Nickel
B. Marble 2. Silica (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
C. Sand 3. Aluminium
D. Ruby 4. Carbon Ans : (a) Except copper, other elements spread
Code : pollution. Some heavy metals dissolve in water and
pollute it, such as cadmium, lead and mercury.
(a) A-3, B-1, C-2, D-4
(b) A-4, B-2, C-1, D-3 Cadmium and mercury destroy the kidneys.
(c) A-2, B-1, C-3, D-4 312. What is minerals?
(d) A-4, B-1, C-2, D-3 (a) Liquid (b) Inorganic solid
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014) (c) Gas (d) All of the above
Ans : (d) Diamond is formed by transformation of (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
carbon. Sand is formed by transformation of silica. Ans : (b) Minerals are substances naturally formed in
Ruby is formed by transformation of aluminium. the earth. Minerals are typically, solid, inorganic, have
308. Which one of the following metal pairs have the a crystal structure and are formed by geological
lightest and heaviest metal? processes naturally. A mineral may consist of a single
(a) Lithium and mercury chemical element or a compound more usually.
(b) Lithium and osmium
(c) Aluminium and osmium 313. A green colored basic carbonate layer on a
(d) Aluminium and mercury metal gets deposited on keeping it in air for
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) some time. The metal is
Ans : (b) Lithium is the lightest and osmium is the (a) Copper (b) Silver
heaviest metal among the given metal pairs. Lithium (c) Nickel (d) Zinc
has lowest and osmium has the highest density. (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
309. Bauxite is a ore of: Ans : (a) When copper is kept in air for some time, a
(a) Iron (b) Aluminium layer of green carbonate gets deposited on it. Copper
(c) Copper (d) Gold metal reacts with gases, moisture and atmospheric
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 gases to form copper carbonate.
Ans : (b) 314. Which of the following is heaviest metal?
Element Ore (a) Copper (b) Uranium
Aluminium Bauxite, Corundum (c) Aluminium (d) Silver
Iron Hematite, Magnetite, Siderite
Copper Copper pyrites, malachite, cuprite
Ans : (b) The heaviest naturally occurring element is
310. Match List-I with List-II and choose the correct
uranium with atomic number 92 and atomic weight
answer using the codes given below the lists:
238 gm.
List-I List-II
A. Best conductor of heat and 1. Gold • Osmium is the heaviest known metal.
Electricity 315. Which of the following metals is liquid at
B. Metal, found in maximum 2. Lead normal temperature?
quantity (a) Lead (b) Mercury
C. Most flexible and ductile metal 3. Aluminium (c) Nickel (d) Tin
D. Least conductor of heat 4. Silver Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
Metallurgy 253 YCT
Ans : (b) Mercury is the metal that remains liquid at 321. Which one of the following metals is mainly
normal temperature. used in mobile phone batteries?
• It is a heavy, silvery white liquid metal. (a) Copper (b) Zinc
(c) Nickel (d) Lithium
• Its linear expansion coefficient is very high. So it is used
in thermometer.
Ans : (d) A lithium-ion battery is used in mobile phone
316. From which mineral was radium obtained? batteries.
(a) Limestone (b) Pitchblende • Lithium-ion battery is a secondary cell. i.e.
(c) Rutile (d) Hematite rechargeable battery.
DRDO Fitter.2016 • These batteries are used in portable electronics,
Ans : (b) Radium is obtained from pitchblende. electric vehicles, and also in military and aerospace
Radium is present in all minerals of uranium and can applications.
be obtained by refining uranium. 322. The main reducing agent used in metallurgy of
iron is:
317. The alloy made from which metal is used in the
(a) Coke (b) Carbon dioxide
making of parts in airoplanes and railways (c) Lime (d) Aluminium
coacher? Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
(a) Copper (b) Iron Ans : (a) Iron is obtain from the ore hematite by
(c) Aluminium (d) None of these smelting process in blast furnace.
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 Coke is used as a reducing agent.
Ans : (c) Aluminium alloy is used to make the parts in In furnace, the hot air inside will come in contact with
airoplanes and railway coaches. Aluminium is a lightweight the falling coke and reacts to form carbon monoxide.
metal and does not rust. This metal is a good conductor of 323. Which of the following is not an ore of nickel?
heat and electricity. (a) Garnierite
318. The first metal used in the world was? (b) Pentelandite
(a) Copper (b) Gold (c) Limonite
(c) Silver (d) Iron (d) Niccolite
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (c) Limonite is not an ore of nickel.
Ans : (a) Copper was the first metal used in the world
324. Which of the following are the two main
over 10000 years ago.
constituents of granite?
• Probably copper can be found as a naturally (a) Iron and silica
occurring native metal that is sometimes found in large (b) Iron and silver
lumps on the ground. (c) Silica and aluminium
319. Galvanised iron sheets are protected from (d) Iron oxide and potassium
corrosion because they contain a layer of– IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(a) Lead (b) Chromium Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
(c) Zinc (d) Wang Ans : (c) Granites are hard, crystalline, coarse-grained
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 light coloured rocks. These are examples of igneous
rocks, it contains 72.04% of silica and 14.42% of
Ans : (c) When an iron object is left open in the aluminium. Other elements found in granite are
atmosphere, iron reacts with the oxygen and moisture present potassium oxide 4.12%, sodium oxide 3.69%, calcium
in the atmosphere, as a result of this reaction's, iron rusts due oxide 1.82%, Iron oxide 1.68%, etc.
to the formation of a mixture of ferric hydroxide and ferric
325. 'German silver' is used in the manufacture of
oxide. To prevent rusting of iron, it is coated with zinc,
ornamental items, coins, jewelry, etc. What is
which is called galvanisation.
the reason, for giving it this name?
320. Monazite is an ore of: (a) It is an alloy of copper and contains silver as a
(a) Zirconium (b) Thorium constituent.
(c) Tritanium (d) Iron (b) Silver was first used by the Germans
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 (c) It looks like silver
Ans : (b) (d) It is an alloy of silver
Element Ore (IOF Fitter, 2012)
Thorium Monazite Ans : (c) German silver is an alloy. It contains copper,
Iron Hematite, magnetite, sidrite zinc and nickel. It is used in making ornamental items,
Copper Copper pyrites, malachite, cuprite coins, and jewelry etc. Because of its silver like
Aluminium Bauxite appearance, it is called german silver.
Metallurgy 254 YCT

326. Match list-I with list-II and select correct 330. Which of the following is not a type of cast
answer using the codes given below the list: iron?
List-I (Alloy) List-II (Component) (a) White cast iron
A. Solder 1. Iron and carbon (b) Malleable cast iron
B. Brass 2. Copper and zinc (c) Lavender cast iron
C. Bronze 3. Copper and tin (d) Grey cast iron
D. Steel 4. Lead and tin UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
Code: Ans. (c) : Cast iron contains about 2 to 3.75% carbon
A B C D A B C D and small percentages of silicon, sulphur, phosphorous,
(a) 1 2 3 4 (b) 4 2 3 1 and manganese.
(c) 1 3 2 4 (d) 4 3 2 1
The important type of cast iron are as follows–
(HAL Fitter, 2015)
(a) Grey cast iron.
Ans : (b) The correct match is–
(b) White cast iron
A. Solder – Lead and tin
B. Brass – Copper and zinc (c) Chilled cast iron
C. Bronze – Copper and tin (d) Molted cast iron
D. Steel – Iron and carbon (e) Malleable cast iron
327. Pentlandites is an ore/mineral of……….. (f) Nodular or spheroidal graphite cast iron
(a) Titanium (b) Nickel (g) Alloy cast iron.
(c) Uranium (d) Zinc 331. Which of the following is not a property of
(IOF Fitter, 2012) copper as an engineering material?
Ans : (b) (a) It has high corrosion resistance
Element Ore (b) It is ductile and can work in bundle shape
Nickel Pentlandites, Nicolite, Garnerite
(c) It has high strength at high temperature
Titanium Ilmenite, Rutile
Zinc Sphelerite, calamine, zincite (d) It has very high thermal conductivity
Uranium Pinch blade UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
328. Sphalerite is an ore/mineral of NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(a) Mercury (b) Molybdenum Ans. (c) : Property of copper–
(c) Silver (d) Zinc • Excellent heat conductivity
BDL Technician 2022 • Excellent electrical conductivity
Ans : (d) Sphalerite is a ore of zinc.
• Good corrosion resistance
Element - Ore
• Good machinability
Mercury - Sinebar
Molybdenum - Wulfenite • It is malleable and ductile.
Zinc - Sphelerite, calamine, zincite 332. Which one of the following is incorrect
regarding use and application of Aluminum?
3. Ferrous and non ferrous Metal (a) Battery containers
(b) Making cooking utensils
329. Which non-ferrous metal widely used in (c) Bus bars
batteries and as solders are hazardous to (d) Roofing sheets
environment? UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(a) Copper (b) Tin Ans. (a) : Battery container is incorrect regarding use
(c) Zinc (d) Lead and application of aluminium.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Application of Aluminium–
Ans. (d) : Lead is non ferrous metal widely used in • House hold and consumer items such as utensils.
batteries and as solders are hazardous to environment.
• It is used for making electrical wires.
• Its properties include a low melting point 327.5oC.
• Aluminium is also used in making windows, doors
It is used in case of casting high density, low
and roofs of factories.
strength, case of fabrication, acid resistance
electrochemical reaction with sulfuric acid, • It is used in telescope mirrors.
chemical stability in air, water and soils and the 333. Types of cast iron, in which iron contains
ability to alternate sound waves atomic radiation major part of carbon in the form of graphite
and mechanical vibration. flake, which of the following is?
Metallurgy 255 YCT

(a) Grey cast iron Ans. (a) : Pure metallic palladium has a silver-white
(b) Nodular cast iron colour.
(c) White cast iron • Palladium is a chemical element with the symbol Pd
(d) Malleable cast iron and atomic number 46.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 • Palladium is used in catelytic converters for cars. It
Ans. (a) : Grey cast iron also known as flake graphite is also used in jewellery (white gold) and some
cast iron. It is a type of casting iron in which most of the dental fillings and crowns.
carbon is present as flake graphite. • Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc.
• The properties of grey cast iron depends on the • Bronze is an alloy of copper and tin.
distribution, size and amount of graphite flake and • German silver is an alloy of copper, zinc and nickel.
matrix structure. 337. Which one of the following engineering metal is
• Gray cast iron is one of the most easily cast of all used as insulator against harmful nuclear
metals in the foundry. radiation?
334. Which one of the following is correct regarding (a) Lead (b) Copper
the properties of Tin as an engineering (c) Tin (d) Zinc
material? UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(a) Tensile strength 1550 kg/cm3, Melting Point Ans. (a) : Lead metal is used as insulator against
419 ºC. harmful nuclear radiation.
(b) Tensile strength 130 kg/cm3, Melting Point • It is preferred material for radiation shielding.
232 ºC. • It is highly effective in providing protection from
(c) Tensile strength 600 kg/cm3, Melting Point sources of radiation.
660 ºC 338. The purest form of iron where the iron content
(d) Tensile strength 150 kg/cm3, Melting Point is close to 99.5% is known as______.
327 ºC
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (a) Wrought iron
3 (b) Low alloy steel
Ans. (b) : Tensile strength of tin is 130 kg/cm and
o
melting point is 232 C. (c) Pig iron
• Tin is a soft silvery-white metal. (d) Cast iron
• Tin is not easy oxidized and resists corrosion UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
because it is protected by an oxide film. RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
• Tin is high malleable. Ans. (a) : Wrought iron–
• Tin alloys easily with other metals. • Wrought iron is a very pure iron where the iron
content is of the order of 99.5%.
335. In galvanizing a layer of______is deposited.
• It usually contains less than 0.1% carbon and 1 or 2%
(a) Copper (b) Zinc
slag.
(c) Chromium (d) Vanadium
• It is produced by re-melting pig iron and some small
amount of silica, sulphur, or phosphorus may be
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 present.
Ans. (b) : In galvanizing, a layer of zinc is deposited. • It is tough, malleability and ductile and can easily be
Galvanization is the process of coating a protective zinc forged or welded.
layer to steel or iron to prevent rusting. 339. In high speed steel the constituents are in ratio
• The zinc coating prevents corrosive substances from of 18:4:1, constituents are in order
reaching the underlying steel or iron. (a) Tungsten, Chromium, Vanadium
• Galvanized steel is used as a construction material. (b) Chromium, Vanadium, Tungsten
336. Identify the odd one out (c) Vanadium, Chromium, Tungsten
(a) Palladium (d) Tungsten, Vanadium, Chromium
(b) Bronze NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
(c) German silver Ans. (a) : High speed steel is an alloy of 18% tungesten
(d) Brass 4% chromium, and 2% vanadium. So the order is
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 tungsten, chromium, vanadium.
Metallurgy 256 YCT
340. Among the following, which is maximum Ans. (a) :

corrosion resistant? Metal Melting temperature (ºC)
(a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron Tin 232
(c) Wrought iron (d) Stainless steel Zinc 420
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 Aluminium 660
Ans. (d) : Stainless steel is maximum corrosion Copper 1085
resistant. Iron 1538
• Stainless steel is an alloy of iron, chromium and in Tungsten 3400
some cases, nickel and other metals.
345. The lower critical temperature of high carbon
• The most common alloys are sometimes called 18-8
steel is
'or' 18% chromium and 8% nickel.
(a) 900º (b) 723º
341. Which rubber is used as insulator for power
(c) 960º (d) 823º
cables and control wires?
(a) Butyl
(b) Hypalone Ans. (b) : • The temperature, at which the change of
(c) Silicon structure to austenite starts, 723ºC, is called the lower
critical temperature for all plain carbon steel.
(d) Nitrite butadiene
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021 • When a low carbon steel is heated, there is no change
in grain size upto the lower critical point and it is same
Ans. (c) : Silicon rubber and silicon composite
for all steel (723ºC).
insulating technologies are increasing the material
choice of electrical power grids. 346. Cast iron contains how much quantity of
carbon?
342. What is the name of the metal which do not
contain iron? (a) 2% (b) 6%
(a) Ferrous metals (c) 4% (d) 8%
(b) Non-ferrous metals HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(c) Insulation metals Ans. (c) : It is obtained by remelting of pig iron with
(d) None of the above coke & limestone in cupola furnace.
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021 • Carbon content – 2 to 4.5%
Ans. (b) : Non-ferrous metals not contain Iron. • It also contains small amount of impurities live
Example : Aluminium, copper, brass, tin. silicon, sulphur, manganese & phosphorous.
• Ferrous metal are any metal that contains Iron such as 347. Failure of material for the application
stainless steel. alternating stress is due to
• Insulator are used in electrical equipment to support (a) Fatigue (b) Creep
and separate electrical conductor without allowing (c) Rupture (d) Brittle
current through themself. DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
343. Wrought iron is used in ship to protect from Ans. (a) : Failure of material for the application
rust because of alternating stress is due to fatigue.
(a) Large water (b) Salty water Fatigue of a component is due to cyclic load.
(c) Sweet water (d) Wave water Fatigue failure is common in transmission shaft, ball
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 bearing, connecting rod, suspension spring.
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 Fatigue limit of material can be increased by–
Ans. (b) : Wrought iron– (i) By applying residual compression stress
• It is a purest form of iron. (ii) By surface finishing
• Carbon content – 0.02-0.03% (iii) By shot peening
• It is tough, ductile and can be easily forged (iv) Cold working
• It is used in ship to protect from rust because of salty 348. The alloy German Silver has the following
water. elements, apart from Copper.
344. What is the melting point of tungsten? (a) Tin and Zinc (b) Lead and Zinc
(a) 3400ºC (b) 1600ºC (c) Zinc and Nickel (d) Lead and Nickel
(c) 1250ºC (d) 1083ºC BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
Metallurgy 257 YCT
Ans. (c) : German silver is a composition of copper 353. Cast iron is used for machine body due to its
60%, 20% zinc, and 20% nickel. There is no silver following property:
present in German silver. (a) low melting point
German silver is widely used because of its hardness, (b) resistance to wear
toughness and resistance to corrosion. (c) high compressive strength and resistance to
shock
• Tin and zinc ––– bronze
(d) low cost material
349. The main constituents of stainless steel are: ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
(a) Iron, chromium, nickel and carbon Ans. (c) : Cast iron–It contains 2 to 3.75% with small
(b) Iron, carbon, chromium and tungsten percentage of sulphur, phosphorous, Manganese and
(c) Iron, nickel, carbon and vanadium silicon.
(d) Iron, nickel, carbon and tungsten • It is hard & brittle in nature
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) • It has excellent vibration damping capacity and wear
Ans. (a): The main constituents of stainless steel are resistance. That is the reason of being used in machine
iron, chromium, nickel and carbon, it is hard wearing body.
corrosion resistance. It is used different type 354. Which among the following is the heaviest
application. metal?
350. Melting point of Aluminium is ............... (a) Aluminium (b) Silver
(a) 450ºC (b) 460ºC (c) Copper (d) Gold
(c) 560ºC (d) 660ºC ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 Ans. (d) :
Ans. (d) : Alluminium has a higher melting point Metal Density (g/cm3)
compared to other metal like copper, brass etc. Aluminium 2.7
Copper 8.96
It melting point approximately 660ºC.
Silver 10.49
351. Which is the second major alloying element is
Gold 19.32
'monel' metal
Mercury 13.56
(a) Nickel (b) Zinc
Platinum 21.45
(c) Copper (d) Manganese
355. Density of mild steel is ______.
(a) 7.8 gm/cm3 (b) 2.7 gm/cm3
Ans. (c) : Monel allow of Nickel copper alloys 66% 3
(c) 19.3 gm/cm (d) 1.4 gm/cm3
nickel, 31.5% copper with small amount of iron,
Magness carbon and silicon.
Ans. (a) : Mild steel–
• Monel is used for marine engineering, valve pump etc.
• Carbon percentage in mild steel lies between 0.15 to
352. Phenyl formaldehyde is also called as 0.3%.
(a) Teflon • It is soft & ductile in nature
(b) PVC • It's density is 7.8 gm/cm3
(c) Phenol
• It is used for making structural section like angle,
(d) Bakelite channels, rods etc.
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 The density of some important materials are listed
Ans. (d) : Bakelite is a polymer made up of the below–
monomers phenyl and formaldehyde. Metal Density (in kg/m3)
• Bakelite which one of the synthetic materials to Tungsten 19300
transform the materials basis of modern life. Copper 8940
• Bakelite used in electrical insulator, radio and
Mild steel 7850
telephone casing etc.
Aluminium 2710
• Teflon is a polymer of tetra fluoroethene. It is used for
356. The minimum percentage of carbon present in
inner coating material of non-stick cookware.
cast iron :
• PVCC polyvinyl chloride is one of most widely used (a) 1% (b) 0.8%
polymer. (c) 0.5% (d) 2%
• Phenol is aromatic organic compound with C6H5OH. Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022
Metallurgy 258 YCT
Ans. (d) : Cast iron is impure form of iron and contains 360. Which compound is formed when aluminum
about 93-94% Fe, 2-4% carbon and remaining are the oxide is exposed to air
impurities of Si, P, S, and Mn. It is obtained from pig (a) Aluminum oxide
iron. (b) Aluminum chloride
Wrought iron– It is purest iron which contains 99.5%
(c) Aluminum sulphate
iron. The carbon content is about 0.02%. It is a tough,
malleable and ductile material. (d) None of the above
Steel– Dead mild steel – upto 0.15% C RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Low carbon or mild steel – 0.15 to 0.45% C Ans. (b) : When aluminium (Al) is exposed to air,
Medium carbon steel – 0.45 to 0.80% C. aluminium oxide or alumina (Al2O3) is formed. It just
High carbon steel – 0.80 to 1.5% C. reacts with the atmospheric oxygen and creates a
357. Cast iron from pig iron is produced in _____ protective aluminium oxide and prevents corrosion.
(a) Blast furnace (b) Bessemer process 361. Which of the following is commonly used as
(c) Gas fired kiln (d) Cupola working material?
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 (a) Aluminum (b) Stainless steel
Ans. (d): Cupola furnace is used to produce cast iron (c) Duralumin (d) All of the above
from pig iron. Pig iron is obtained from blast furnace. RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
• Cupola furnace works on principle that combustion of
Ans.(d): Duralumin, stainless steel, aluminum is
coke generates carbon di-oxide and heat and this causes
the iron to melt. commonly used as working material.
358. What is the electrical conductivity of • The substance which are useful in the field of
aluminum? engineering are called engineering materials.
(a) 4.5 × 107S/m (b) 3.5 × 108S/m A particular material is selected is on the basis of
7
(c) 3.5 × 10 S/m (d) 2.5 × 1010S/m following considerations–
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 • Properties of material
Ans. (c) : • Mechanical properties– Strength, ductility,
Name of material Conductivity at 20oC toughness, hardness, strength to weight ratio etc.
(Ohm-meter) • Physical properties– Density, specific heat,
Aluminium 3.5 × 107 thermal expansion, conductivity, melting point etc.
Calcium 2.82 × 107 • Chemical properties– Oxidation, corrosion,
Beryllium 2.5 × 107 toxicity etc.
Silver 6.3 × 107 362. How much quantity of carbon is present in cold
Gold 4.2 × 107 chisel ?
Copper 5.8 × 107 (a) 0.75% to 1.00% (b) 0.70% to 1.00%
Diamond 10–14 (c) 0.60% to 1.90% (d) 0.90% to 1.00%
359. Which of the following ranges gives the yield RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
strength of aluminum? Ans. (a) : The quantity of carbon is present in cold
(a) 200-300 MPa chisel is 0.75% to 1.00%.
(b) 100-800 MPa The cold chisel is a hand cutting tool used by fitters for
(c) 500-550 MPa chipping and cutting off operations.
(d) 200-600 MPa
There are five common type of chisels–
1. Flat chisels
2. Cross-cut or cape chisels
Ans. (d) : Yield strength of aluminum alloys 200-600
MPa. 3. Half-round nose chisels.
Element Yield strength (MPa) 4. Diamond point chisels
Tungsten – 550 5. Punching or web chisels.
Iron – 80-100 363. Which of the following metals is used in
Titanium – 100-225 batteries?
Copper – 117 (a) zinc (b) lead
Tin – 9-14 (c) tin (d) copper
Nickel – 14-35 RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
Metallurgy 259 YCT
Ans. (b) : Lead is used in batteries industries. • Density of alumium ⇒ 2.70 g/cm2
2
• Lead batteries are used in batteries industries due to • Density of tin ⇒ 7.29 g/cm
the following reasons– • Density of copper ⇒ 8.94 g/cm2
1. Using lead in batteries makes it most reliable. • Density of lead ⇒ 11.20 g/cm2
2. Lead batteries are very cheap and cost-friendly. • Density of steel ⇒ 7.84 g/cm2
3. These batteries are preferred due to their large 368. White metal is an alloy of
current capability. (a) Copper and tin
364. Which one of the following is used in heat (b) Copper, zinc and tin
exchangers (radiators)? (c) Copper, lead, tin and antimony
(a) Brass (b) Bronze (d) Copper, zinc, tin and antimony
(c) Duralumin (d) Phosphor bronze RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 Ans. (c) : White metal is an alloy of copper, lead, tin
Ans. (a) : Heat exchanges or radiators generally made and antinomy.
of brass because of brass is good conductor of heat. White metal is also called babbit metal. A babbit metal
365. Which one of the following metals has less tin base alloy containing 88% tin, 8% antimony and 4%
carbon content? copper is called babbit metal. It is a soft material with a
(a) Plain carbon steel (b) Wrought iron low coefficient of friction and has little strength.
(c) Pig iron (d) Cast iron 369. The alloys "Duralumin" and "Hindalium"
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 contain 95% of
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (a) Copper (b) Zinc
Ans. (b): Wrought iron has less carbon content as (c) Lead (d) Aluminium
compared to other ferrous metal. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
Wrought iron– Wrought iron is a very pure iron where Ans. (d): The alloys duralumin and hindalium contain
the iron content is of the order of 99.5%. 95% of aluminium. Duralumin and hindalium is the
alloys of aluminium.
• It usually contains less than 0.1% carbon and 1 or
2% slag. Duralumin composition– 3.5 to 4.5% copper, 0.4%
manganese, 0.4 to 0.7% magnesium and the remaining
• It is produced by re-melting pig iron and some small
is aluminium.
amount of silicon, sulphure or phosphorus may be
Hindalium composition– Hindalumin is a common
present.
trade name of aluminium alloy. It is an alloy of
366. Which one of the following metals is corrosion- aluminium, magnesium, manganese, chromium and
resistant? silicon etc.
(a) Aluminium (b) Tin 370. Which one of the following characteristics
(c) Copper (d) Mild steel about tin is correct?
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 (a) Tin can withstand high temperature
Ans. (b) : Given in following metal tin a corrosion (b) Tin is the main constituent of most solders
resistance metal. (c) Tin is very good conductor of electricity
Tin has atomic number 50, and its atomic weight is (d) Tin is corrosion resistant metal
118.71. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
• Tin (Sn) is a relatively soft and ductile metal with a Ans. (d) : Important properties of tin–
silvery white color. 1. Tin is corrosion resistant metal.
• It has density of 7.29 g/cm . 3 2. Tin is solid, with silvery white appearance with
• Low melting point of 237.88 C o lustre.
3. It is melting point is 231oC.
• It is allotropic in nature.
4. It is good conductor of head and electricity.
367. Which among the following is the lightest
371. Aluminium is widely used in aircraft industry
metal? because it is ............
(a) Lead (b) Tin (a) corrosion resistant
(c) Aluminium (d) Copper (b) soft and ductile
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (c) light in weight
Ans. (c) : Given in following metal aluminium is the (d) low tensile strength
lightest metal. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Metallurgy 260 YCT
Ans. (c) : Aluminium is widely used in aircraft industry Ans. (d) : Carbide is a non-ferrous cutting tool material.
because is light in weight. Aluminium is ductile, Carbide tools have a high wear resistance, enabling the
malleable and light weight, and has one third the density user to use the tool at higher speeds and longer duration
and stiffness of steel. It is easily machined, cast draum as compared to other material like HSS.
and extruded. 376. Pig Iron contains ............% iron.
Aluminium with magnesium alloy is used to make body (a) 70 (b) 80
of aircraft which is light weight and resistance to (c) 90 (d) 95
corrosion. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
372. Scribers are made of Ans. (c) : Pig iron contains 90% iron.
(a) Mild steel brass (b) brass Pig iron– It is the crude from of iron and is used as raw
(c) high carbon steel (d) cast iron material for the production of various other ferrous
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 meals, such as cast iron, wrought iron and steel. The pig
Ans. (c) : A scriber is a bond tool used in metal iron is obtained by smelting iron ores in a blast furnace.
working to make lines on workpiece to mark line on The pig iron from the blast furnace contained 90 to 92%
workpieces, prior to machining, scriber is made of high of iron. The various other elements present in pig iron
carbon steel. are carbon (1 to 5%), silicon (1 to 2%), manganese (1 to
2%), sulphur and phosporus (1 to 2%).
373. Presence of which material in a gray castiron
causes reduced ductility? 377. Property of wrought iron is decided by ..........
(a) Graphite (a) Carbon and Magnesium
(b) Aluminum (b) Carbon and Manganese
(c) Coke (c) Aluminium and Carbon
(d) Magnesium and Manganese
(d) Zinc
Ans. (b) : Property of wrought iron is decided by
Ans. (a): Present of graphite in a gray cast iron causes
present of carbon and manganese contained.
reduced ductility.
Wrought iron– It is purest iron which contains 99.5%
Grey cast iron is brittle (less ductile) because of the
iron buy may contain upto 99.9% iron. The carbon
graphite flakes present in it. The flakes with pointed
content is about 0.02% it is a tough, malleable and
ends acts as tress raisers. These flakes then behave as ductile material. It can not stand sudden and excessive
cracks causing brittle fracture when load is applied. shocks. It can he easily forget or welded.
374. A non-ferrous metal which has property of 378. The process which lowers the content of
brittleness that is……. sulphur and phosphorus in steels is known as....
(a) Zinc (b) Lead (a) Refining (b) Passivation
(c) Tin (d) Copper (c) Inhibition (d) Stimulation
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Ans. (a) : A non-ferrous metal which has property of Ans. (a) : The process of lowers the content of sulphur
brittleness that is zinc. and phosphorus in steel is known as repining.
• The material which has no ferrous contained is Steel– It is an alloy of iron and carbon, with carbon
called non-ferrous metals. Example– Copper, content upto a maximum of 1.5%. Most of the steel
aluminium, zinc etc. produced now a days is plain carbon steel or simply
• Zinc– It is brittle and softens on heating, it is also carbon steel. It is divided into the following types
corrosion resistant. depending upon the carbon content.
• Tin– It is soft and highly corrosion-resistant. 1. Dead mild steel → upto 0.15% carbon
• Lead– It is soft and malleable and has good 2. Low carbon mild steel → 0.15 to 0.45% carbon
resistance to corrosion. It is a good insulator against 3. Medium carbon steel → 0.45 to 0.8% carbon
nuclear radiation. 4. High carbon steel → 0.8 to 1.5% carbon.
375. Which of the following is a non-ferrous cutting 379. Which of the following alloy is used in making
tool material? aircraft structures ?
(a) High carbon steel (b) High speed steel (a) Duralumin (b) Brass
(c) Toll steel (d) Carbide (c) Bronze (d) Manganin
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
Metallurgy 261 YCT
Ans. (a) : Duralumin is an alloy of aluminium it is light 384. Which one of the following metals is used to
weight yet strong and has corrosion resistant properties protect underground telephone and power
which make this alloy suitable for making aircraft parts. cables from corrosion?
(a) Copper (b) Lead
380. As compared to iron, aluminium has…..
(c) Nickel (d) Chromium
(a) Higher tendency to oxidize
(b) Less tendency to oxidize
Ans. (d) : In order to protect underground telephone
(c) Equal tendency to oxidize
and power cable from corrosion, moisture and other
(d) None of these damaging liquids it make chromium.
385. When steels carbon content is 0.83%, it
Ans. (a) : As a compared to iron, aluminium has higher increases steels-
tendency to oxidize. (a) hardness (b) strength
Aluminium is indeed a more reactive element than iron. (c) Malleability (d) Ductility
However aluminium in sheet form reacts with RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
atmospheric oxygen forming a layer of aluminium Ans. (b) : When carbon content in steel 0.83%, it
oxide on its surface. The oxide layer is very highly increases steels strength.
bound on the surface of aluminium and the oxide itself In present of carbon in steel following properties
is not very reactive. effected–
381. Non- ferrous metals do not contain –––– 1. The ultimate strength of steel increases.
(a) Tin (b) Lead 2. The elongation before fracture decreases.
(c) Zinc (d) Iron 3. The ductility of the metal decreases.
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 4. Increasing carbon also reduces the weldability
Ans. (d) : Non-ferrous metals do not contain iron. A especially above 0.25% carbon.
non-ferrous material is those metals that do not have 386. Which of the following is combined state of
iron or steel as their constituents. carbon in iron or iron alloy?
Therefore, the non-ferrous materials may be elements or (a) Steel (b) Wrought iron
alloys such as copper, aluminium and zinc. (c) Pig iron (d) cast iron
Example– Copper, aluminium, silver, gold, zinc etc. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
382. Which of the following elements is added to
steel used at very low temperature (i.e. – Ans. (a) : Steel is combined state of carbon in iron or
iron alloys.
190°C)?
Steel– It is an alloy of iron and carbon, with carbon
(a) Manganese (b) Chromium
content upto a maximum of 1.5% most of the steel
(c) Nickel (d) Molybdenum produced now a days is plain carbon steel or simply
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 carbon steel.
Ans. (c) : Nickel elements is added to steel used at very 387. Carbon content in steel ranges from ____
low temperature (i.e. 190oC). Nickel is also used to (a) 0.15 to 1.5% (b) 0.15 to 0.5%
improve the mechanical properties of steel. It is used to (c) 0.5 to 1.5% (d) 0.15 to 1.25%
increase toughness and impact strength, even at lower RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
temperature.
Ans. (a): Carbon content in steel ranges upto 0.15 to
383. Aluminium conducts ....... heat than cast iron. 1.5% it is divided into the following types depending
(a) More (b) Less upon the carbon content.
(c) Equal (d) None 1. Dead mild steel → upto 0.15% carbon.
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 2. Low carbon or mild steel → 0.15 to 0.45% carbon.
Ans. (a) : Aluminium conducts more heat than cast 3. Medium carbon steel → 0.45 to 0.8% carbon.
iron. 4. High carbon steel → 0.8 to 1.5% carbon.
• Iron is much denser than aluminium, so any heat it 388. the process of attaining pig iron by reduction
accumulates tends to take longer to dissipate due to method from iron ore is known as ___
radiation or conduction. Aluminium is one of the (a) Smelting (b) Annealing
lightest metal and looses heat rapidly. That a reason (c) Cooling (d) Milling
aluminium is more heat conductor than iron. RRB ALP Patna 2014
Metallurgy 262 YCT

Ans. (a) : The process of attaining pig iron by reduction Ans. (c) :
method from iron ore is known as smelting. Metal name Melting point
o
• The pig iron is obtained from the iron ore in the 1. Wrought iron – 1500 C
o
following steps– 2. Copper – 1084 C
1. Concentration– It is the process of removing the 3. Cast iron – 1200oC to 1350oC
impurities like clay, sand etc. from the iron ore by 4. Aluminium – 658oC
washing with water. 392. Match list 'A' to list 'B'.
2. Roasting– It is the process of expelling moisture, List A List B
carbon dioxide, sulphur and arsenic from the iron ore by 1. Mineral insulator (A) Ebonite
heating in shallow kilns. 2. Rubber and product of (b) Mica
3. Smelting– It is process of reducing the ore with Rubber
carbon in the presence of a flux. The smelting is carried 3. Wax (C) Bakelite
out in a large tower called blast furnace. 4. Synthetic product (D) Paraffin wax
389. Which non-ferrous metal is widely used for (a) 1(B),2(A),3(D),4(C)
water heating instruments? (b) 1(D),2(A),3(B),4(C)
(a) Copper (b) Lead (c) 1(B),2(C),3(D),4(A)
(c) Zinc (d) Tin (d) 1(D),2(A),3(B),4(C)
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 BEML 2022
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (a) : Copper as a non-ferrous metal is widely used
for water heating instruments. Ans. (a) : Match list A to list B–
• Heat exchangers or heating instruments are devices List-A List-B
that transfer or exchange heat from one media to 1. Mineral insulator – Mica
another. It is used either for cooling or heating purpose. 2. Rubber and product of rubber – Ebonite
For better heat transfer, the heat exchangers made by 3. Wax – Paraffin wax
good thermal conductor material such as copper, bronze 4. Synthetic product – Bakelite.
etc. 393. Which of the following is used in a heating
element?
390. Match the following.
(a) Nichrome (b) Tungsten
Metal Carbon contents
(c) Chromium (d) Cobalt
1. Cast iron (A) 0.5% to 1.5%
2. Soft steel (B) 2% to 4%
Ans. (a) : Nichrome wire is generally used as a heating
3. Steel (C) 0.1% to 0.25%
element in heating appliances because it has the
(a) 1(A),2(C),3(B) (b) 1(B),2(C),3(A) following features–
(c) 1(C),2(A),3(B) (d) 1(B),2(A),3(C) 1. It offers a very large resistance, so it convert very
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 large amount of electric energy into heat energy.
Ans. (b) : 2. It has a high melting point such that it can be heated
Metal name Carbon contents till red hot without melting.
1. Cast iron – 2% to 4% 394. Nichrome is mostly used as heating element
2. Soft iron – 0.1% to 0.25% because-
3. Steel – 0.5% to 1.5% (a) It has high melting point
(b) It has high heating effect
391. Match the following metals with melting points.
(c) It has low resistance
1. Wrought iron (A) 1200ºC to 1350º
2. Copper (B) 658ºC
3. Cast iron (C) 1084ºC
Ans. (b) : Nichrome is mostly used as heating element
4. Aluminium (D) 1500ºC because it has high heating effect.
(a) 1(B),2(C),3(D),4(A)
395. Which of the following metals is used for
(b) 1(A),2(D),3(B),4(C) making ornaments?
(c) 1(D),2(C),3(A),4(B) (a) Nichrome (b) Monel metal
(d) 1(C),2(D),3(A),4(B) (c) German silver (d) Bell metal
Metallurgy 263 YCT
Ans. (c) : German silver as metals, it is used for making (a) Dead steel
ornament. German silver is widely used for ornament (b) Mild steel
making because of its hardness, toughness, and (c) Medium carbon steel
resistance to corrosion. It is alloy of Cu, Zn, and Ni. (d) High carbon steel
396. Which of the following metals is used for RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
making bells of temples? Ans. (d) : High carbon steel is used for making cold
(a) Gun metal (b) Muntz metal chisel, punches, hacksaw blade and files etc.
(c) Monel metal (d) Bell metal 401. Melting point of zinc is ___
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 (a) 1083ºC (b) 655ºC
Ans. (d) : Bell metal is an alloy of copper (80%) and tin (c) 419ºC (d) 325ºC
(20%). RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
• Bell metal is a hard alloy used for making bell and Ans. (c) : Melting point of zinc is 419oC.
different musical instruments. Metal Melting Point (oC)
• Bell metal is known for its resonance and attractive 1. Aluminium – 658
sound. 2. Copper – 1084
397. Which of the following has highest magnetic 3. Tin – 231
property? 4. Lead – 327
(a) Wrought iron (b) Cast iron 5. Silver – 960
(c) Pig iron (d) None of the above 6. Gold – 1063
IOCL 2020 402. Name the non-ferrous metal which is not used
Ans. (a) : For given following option wrought iron has as a conductor of electricity.
highest magnetic property. (a) Aluminium (b) Copper
398. Which non-ferrous alloy is suitable for the (c) Lead (d) Brass
manufacturing of bearing bushes? RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(a) Cast phosphor bronze Ans. (c) : Lead is poor conductor of electricity hence
(b) Lead gun metal lead is not used to make electric wires.
(c) Low tin bronze 403. Malleable cast iron has higher ___
(d) Drawn phosphor bronze (a) Ductility (b) Malleability
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (c) Brittleness (d) Hardness
Ans. (b) : Lead gun metal is a non-ferrous alloy which RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
is suitable for the manufacturing of bearing bushes. Ans. (a) : Malleable cast iron has higher ductility.
• Bearing is a machine element that constrains Malleable cast iron– Malleable cast iron is one which
relative motion between moving part at the desired can be rolled and hammered to obtain different shape,
motion and direction. because it is in ductile nature. malleable cast iron
399. Which one of the following is a non-ferrous produced by heat treatment of hard and brittle white
metal? cast iron.
(a) Tin (b) Mild steel 404. Which ferrous metal possesses the property of
(c) Wrought iron (d) Pig iron brittleness?
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (a) Wrought iron
Ans. (a) : Tin is a non-ferrous metal. (b) Grey cast iron
• It has an atomic number 50 and atomic weight (c) Dead mild steel
118.17. It is known for it softness, malleability and (d) Medium carbon steel
bluish white appearance. RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
• At room temperature, there is no effect of oxygen Ans. (b) : Grey cast iron contains around 2 to 4% of
and water over the tin. It is also resistant to carbon as impurity and the second most impure form of
corrosion. That is the reason it is used as a coating iron after pig iron which contains more than 4% of
for other metal. carbon impurity along with traces of silicon,
400. Name the type of plain carbon steel, used for phosphorous, manganese and sulphur. Grey cast iron is
making cold chisel, punches, hacksaw blade, prepared when pig iron is remelted and then cast into
files etc. metal parts. Grey cast iron hard and brittle in nature.
Metallurgy 264 YCT

405. Nodular cast iron is also known as: Ans. (a): To find out the pig iron, the iron ore is used in
(a) spheroidal graphite iron blast furnace is hematite ore of iron–
(b) gray cast iron (i) Hematite
(ii) Magnetite
(c) white cast iron
(iii) Limonite
(d) brittle cast iron (iv) Siderite
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM Hematite mineral is divided into two parts–
Ans. (a) : Nodular cast iron is also known as spheroidal A. Read hematite– Iron contained - 70%
graphite iron. It is formed by adding a small amount of B. Brown hematite– Iron contained - (50-90)%
magnesium or cerium to the pure molten grey iron that 410. What is the basic ore of copper :
has been subjected to desulphurization. (a) Barytes (b) Magnetite
• It is used for making machine parts like axles, (c) Pyrites (d) Hematite
brackets, levers, crankshaft housing, die pads and die DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
shoes. Ans. (c) :
Minerals Ore Formula
406. Percentage of iron in wrought iron is about: Iron Hematite Fe2O3
(a) 50 percent (b) 99.5 percent Magnetite Fe3O4
(c) 0.5 to 2 percent (d) 0.1 to 0.2 percent Limonite Fe2O3.3H2O
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM Siderite FeCO3
Ans. (b) : Iron content is wrought is 99.5%. Copper Copper pyrite CuFeS2
Material %Carbon Cupper glance Cu2S
Wrought iron 0.02-0.03 Cuprite Cu2O
Azurite 2CuCO3.Cu(OH)2
Steel 0.5-1.5
411. Aluminium is a non-ferrous metal which is
Cast iron 2-6.67 extracted from
Pig iron 3.8-4.7 (a) Lead (b) Bauxite
407. Complex casting of gray cast iron can be done (c) Galena (d) Antimony
easily because of which of the following it DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
occurs : Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
Ans. (b) : Aluminium is extracted from bauxite ore.
(a) Good ductility
Minerals Ore Formula
(b) Good malleability
Aluminium Bauxite Al2O3.nH2O
(c) Good strength Kaolinite Al2Si2O5(OH)4
(d) Good flowability Diaspoxe Al2O3.H2O
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM Zinc Zinc blends Or ZnS
Ans. (d) : Complex casting of gray cast iron can be sphalerite
easily cast because it has good fluidity the carbon Calamine ZnCO3
content in gray cast iron is 2.8% to 3.8% in combined Zincite ZnO
form. It contains graphite in 6-10% volume. It is softer 412. Which metal is ideally suitable for anodizing ?
than other cast iron. It is used in pipes, cylinders, (a) Aluminium (b) Nickel
machines bed and frames etc. (c) Iron (d) Copper
408. Which form of iron the amount of carbon is DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
less : Ans. (a) : Anodizing is accomplished by immerging the
(a) High carbon steel (b) Wrought iron aluminium into an electrolyte bath and passing on
electric current through the medium. It produce oxide
(c) Pig iron (d) Cast iron
coating on Al sheet.
Ans. (c) :
Ans. (b) : Wrought iron is the purest form of iron Process Description
where the iron content is of the order of 99.5%. It is Galvanising Deposition a protective layer of
tough, malleable and ductile and can easily be forged or zinc on iron or steel
welded, chains, crane, hooks, railway couplings etc. Electroplating Deposition of metal over any
409. Which of the following ore is used in blast metallic or non-metallic surface
furnace to obtain pig iron : Perkerizing Phosphate coating
(a) Hematite (b) Coke Cementation Sheradzing Zinc coating
(c) Flux (d) Cast iron process cloradizing Al. coating
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 chromizing Cr. coating
Metallurgy 265 YCT
413. What are crane hooks made of : (a) Fibrous structure

(a) Wrought iron (b) Cast iron (b) High compressive strength
(c) High carbon steel (d) Cast steel (c) Non–corrosive slag constituent
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (d) Cannot be hardened or tempered
NTPC Fitter 2016 Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
Ans. (a) : Crane hooks are made of wrought iron. It can Ans. (b) Cast iron–Cast iron is a hard and brittle
bear tensile and bending load. material. It contains carbon about 2 to 3.75%.
414. Which of the following metals is found in liquid • It has high compressive strength and low tensile
form at room temperature? strength.
(a) Osmium (b) Beryllium
• It is neither malleable nor ductile.
(c) Mercury (d) Lithium
• It has excellent vibration damping capacity and wears
resistance.
Ans. (c) : Mercury is a metal which is found in liquid
state at room temperature. 420. A certain metal is the heaviest of the common
Melting point of mercury is –39ºC. metals and is extracted from an ore known as
Density of mercury 13600 kg/m3. galena. It is alloyed with brass as well as steel
415. Which of the following most purest type of to improve their machinability. This non-
iron? ferrous metal is.
(a) Cast iron (b) Wrought iron (a) Copper (b) Aluminium
(c) Mild steel (d) High carbon steel (c) Lead (d) Zinc
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) BHEL 2020
Ans : (b) Wrought iron is the purest form of iron. Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
416. What is name of zinc coated iron? Ans. (c) The ore of lead is Galena (PbS). It is a non-
(a) Cast iron (b) Galvanised iron ferrous alloy.
(c) Stainless steel (d) Black iron Lead is used with Copper and steel alloy to improve
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 machineability property.
Ans. (b) : Zinc coated iron is known as galvanised iron. • Lead is heavy, soft and bad conductor of heat.
417. Nodular cast iron will be produce- 421. Read the following statements and choose the
(a) On adding magnesium to molten cast iron CORRECT option.
(b) On adding nickel to molten cast iron i) Manganese is a Non–Ferrous metallic mineral.
(c) On adding copper to molten cast iron ii) Mica is a Ferrous metallic mineral.
(d) On adding of molybdenum to molten cast iron (a) (i) Is TRUE and (ii) is TRUE
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (b) (i) Is TRUE and (ii) is FALSE
Ans. (a) : Nodular cast iron is formed by adding a small (c) (i) Is FALSE and (ii) is TRUE
amount (0.04 to 0.06 percentage) magnesium to the (d) (i) Is FALSE and (ii) is FALSE
pure molten grey cast iron. It is also known as Tubewell Operator, 12-01-2019
spheroidal graphite iron. It has high ductility, elastic
Ans. (d) Manganese is not found in nature in pure form
coefficient, mechanical strength and high corrosion less
but found in compounds formed with other elements.
property.
Iron compounds are mixed in manganese.
418. If V is cutting speed, T is tool life, C is constant
Mica is a non-ferrous mineral metal. It is not a good
then the statement of tool life will be [n =
conductor of electricity while its thermal conductivity is
exponent : It depends tools and work]
(a) TCn = V (b) VTn = C good conductor of electricity while its thermal
n
(c) VC = T (d) VnT = C conductivity is good.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 422. What is the approximate percentage of Carbon
Ans. (b) : Taylor tool life equation– in Cast iron?
VTn = C (a) 4 to 6 (b) 2 to 4
Where, V = Cutting speed (c) 0.5 to 1.5 (d) 0.05 to 0.5
T = Tool life
n = Exponent (depends on tool material)
C = Constant Ans. (b) : In cast iron the percentage of carbon is about
419. Cast iron is an alloy of iron and carbon. The 2 to 4. Cast iron is mainly used for making casting.
important characteristic of this iron which Cast iron is produced in the cupola furnace. The
makes its a valuable material for engineering temperature ranges of this furnace from 1260º to
applications is 1340ºC.
Metallurgy 266 YCT

423. Which of the following is TRUE for cast iron? 428. Which one the following statement regarding
(a) Having good corrosion resistance mercury is not correct?
(b) Widely used as cutting tool material (a) It does not poisioness for creature
(c) Widely used for manufacturing Lathe beds (b) It does not stick with glass surface
(c) The atomic number of mercury is 80.
(d) Used for manufacturing of automobile bodies
(d) Its relative density is 13.6 times of water
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 density.
Ans. (c): Cast iron is widely used for manufacturing DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
lathe bed due to its high compressive strength and good Ans. (a) : Mercury is poisioness for creatures.
damping capacity. • It is one of the heaviest and most dense metal (13.6 K
424. Cast iron is used to manufacture machine beds Kg/m3).
because : • Mercury is a silvery-white liquid metal at room
temperature.
(a) It is heavy
• Due to high density, it used in barometer and
(b) It is cheap
manometers.
(c) It is brittle • Due to high thermal expansion, it is used in
(d) It resist more compressive load thermometer.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 429. ............... catches the fire on contact with air.
Ans. (d) : Due to high compressive resistance load & (a) Aluminium (b) Cast iron
good damping capacity, It is used to manufacture (c) Sodium (d) Stainless steel
machine beds cast iron is used. Cast iron is brittle DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
material. Ans. (c) : Sodium, on coming in contact with air,
catches fire. Being a reactive element, it is not found in
425 . Hardest natural substance known as :
free state. In the combined state, it is found in sufficient
(a) Granite (b) Marble quantities in the form of chlorides, nitrates, carbonates,
(c) Diamond (d) Graphite borates and sulfates. It is while metal similar to silver. It
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I is good conductor of electricity.
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM 430. Thermal conductivity of which of the following
Ans. (c) : Diamond is the hardest material in nature. In material is maximum?
this each carbon atom is sp3 hybridized and linked to (a) iron (b) glass
(c) copper (d) sodium
four other carbon atoms tetrahedrally by covalent bands
firmely.
Ans. (c) : The thermal conductivity of copper material
426. Which of the following is a ferrous metal : is maximum. Copper is pinkish-reddish heavy and soft
(a) Copper (b) Aluminium metal. It is extracted from pyrite and malachite ores.
(c) Gold (d) Mild steel Copper in pyrite 32% and up to 55% in malachite,
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I melting point of copper is 1083ºC. Its tensile strength is
Ans. (d) : Mild steel is a ferrous metal. It is soft & 4.5 ton/cm2.
ductile and has good weldeability & machineability. 431. In alloy & steel, which one of the following is
responsible for improving corrosion resistance?
Types of steel Carbon (%)
(a) manganese (b) Lead
Dead mild steel 0.01-0.15
(c) nickel (d) tungsten
Mild steel 0.15-0.3 IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Medium carbon steel 0.3-0.8 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
High carbon steel 0.8-1.5 Ans. (c) : An alloy steel, nickel is responsible for
427. Substance which do not have definite improving corrosion resistance. Nickel is white colored
crystalline structure, what are they called? hard metal. Acid has no effect on it. Nickel has melting
(a) Polymorphic (b) Polycrystalline point of 1455ºC and a relative density of 8.9. Nickel is
(c) Amorphous (d) Single crystal used in the manufacture of cadmium batteries, boiler
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I tubes, engine valve etc. Nickel is used in electroplating
Ans. (c) : Materials which structure is not crystalline of iron and brass objects.
called non-crystalline material or amorphous material. 432. What is the amount of carbon contained by a
soft steel wire?
• Amorphous materials do not have well defined
(a) to 0.1% (b) to 0.15%
structure. Eg. Ceramics & polymers structure are non- (c) to 0.18% (d) to 0.2%
crystalline. ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018
Metallurgy 267 YCT
Ans. (b) : The amount of carbon contained by a soft Ans : (b) Silver is a good conductor of electricity. It is
steel wire is 0.15% also a good conductor of heat because it has more free
Mild steel is used for manufacturing soft steel wire. electrons. Its atomic number is 47 and atomic weight
Types of steel Carbon (%) 108. It is used for manufacturing ornaments and also
Dead mild steel 0.01-0.15 used in electronic circuit.
Mild steel 0.15-0.25 Note–Ruby silver, horn silver and argentite are ores of
Medium carbon steel 0.3-0.8 silver.
High carbon steel 0.8-1.5
438. The maximum hardness of high speed steel is
433. Which iron is formed when the melt is frozen? obtained on tampering at
(a) Alpha (b) Beta
(a) Low temperature
(c) Gamma (d) Delta
(b) Medium temperature
ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018
(c) High temperature
Ans. (d) : When the molten metal is frozen, delta iron is
(d) None of these
formed.
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015
434. The two commonly used semiconductor
Ans : (c) The maximum hardness of high speed steel
materials are:
(a) gallium and indium is obtained on tampering at high temperature.
(b) aluminium and antimony 439. Which of the following is non ferrous metal ?
(c) germanium and silicon (a) Mild Steel (b) Cast iron
(d) arsenic and boron (c) High Carbon steel (d) Brass
RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Ans. (c) : Silicon (Si) and Germanium (Ge) are used as Ans : (d) Brass is non ferrous metal.
the most common semiconductor. Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc.
• These are elements of column 14. Alloy Ingredients Use
• Atomic number of Ge is 14 and Si is 32. Brass Cu-70%, Zn-30% Bush, musical
• These are used for manufacturing electronic devices, instrument
I.C. Chip etc. Bronze Cu-88.96%, Sn- (4- Sculptures
435. Iron and ........... make rust formation. 12)% modal
(a) Hydrogen (b) Sulpher Gun metal Cu-88%, Zn-2%, Sn- Journal bearing
(c) Nitrogen (d) Oxygen 10%
BDL Technician 2022 German Cu-60%, Ni-4%, Zn- Jewelry
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II silver 35% ornaments
Ans. (d) : Rust is an oxide, which is formed by the open 440. The alloy containing more than 2% carbon is
air oxidation of iron. It is slow process caused by the known as :
reaction and moisture. So, chemically rust is a hydrated (a) Mild Steel
iron oxide (b) Cast iron
4Fe + 2O 2 + xH 2 O  → 2Fe 2 O3 .xH 2 (c) High speed steel
So, the rusting of iron is due to oxidation corrosion. (d) Low alloy steel
436. Lead is extracted from the ore : IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
(a) Lemonite (b) Bauxite Ans : (b)
(c) Galena (d) Tin stone Ferrous metal Carbon (%) Production
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 furnace
Pig iron 4-6 Blast furnace
Ans. (c) :
Cast iron 2-4.5 Cupola furnace
Metal Ore
Wrought iron 0.017 Pudding
Lead (Pb) Galena, Cerussite
process
Calcium (Ca) Dolomite, calcite, gypsum,
Steel 0.15-1.5% Crucible,
feldspar, Asbestos Bessemer open
Silver (Ag) Ruby silver, Horn silver, Argentite hearth furance
Tin (Sn) Casseterite 441. Pig iron is :
Zinc (Zn) Zinc blande, zincite, calamine (a) Impure form of iron
437. Among the given materials which is a good (b) 90% pure form of iron
conductor of electricity? (c) 95% pure form of iron
(a) Copper (b) Silver (d) 99.9% pure form of iron
(c) Aluminium (d) Brass IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015 Ans : (a) Pig iron is impure form of iron.
Metallurgy 268 YCT
442. The colour of the cast iron is ………. Ans : (b) Dead carbon steel has 0.01-0.15% carbon.
(a) White (b) Red Steel Carbon (%)
(c) Black (d) Yellow Dead mild steel 0.01-0.15
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 Mild steel 0.15-0.3
Ans : (c) The color of cast iron is black. It has high Medium carbon steel 0.3-0.8
compressive strength. High carbon steel 0.8-1.5
443. The properties of cast iron is : 448. Which of the following is ferrous metal :
(a) Low compressive strength (a) Brass (b) Aluminium
(b) more brittle (c) Cast Iron (d) Lead
(c) High malleability and ductility IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
(d) High tensile strength Ans : (c) ÌCast iron is a ferrous metal. It has carbon
DRDO Machinist.2016
content 2 to 4.5%.
449. According to the Indian standard specification,
Ans : (b) Cast iron has corrosion resistance, high
nodular or spheroidal graphite cast iron is
strength, high machineability & brittle property.
denoted by which letters?
444. What is the tensile strength of wrought iron?
(a) BG (b) BM
(a) 500-750 N/mm2 (b) 50-100 N/mm2
2 (c) WM (d) SG
(c) 100-200 N/mm (d) 250-500 N/mm2
Ans : (d) As per Indian standard specification nodular
Ans: (d)
or spheroidal graphite cast iron is designed by SG
Iron Tensile strength
(Spheroidal Graphite).
Wrought iron 250-800 N/mm2
Cast iron 124 N/mm2 450. What is the melting point of aluminum?
Gray cast iron 827 N/mm2 (a) 648°C (b) 985°C
Mild steel 430 N/mm2 (c) 700°C (d) 750°C
Alloy steel 1860 N/mm2 NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
445. Malleable cast iron is preferred for which DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
purpose ? ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
(a) Cutting tool Ans : (a)
(b) Ball bearing Metals Melting point (ºC)
(c) Shaft and axel Aluminium 660
(d) Pipe fitting as elbow, Tee (T), Union Brass 927
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Bronze 913
Ans : (d) Pipe fittings to malleable cast iron such as Copper 1083
preference is given to elbow, Tee, union etc. The Lead 163
carbon content in cast iron is less than that of white cast Zinc 419
iron. In malleable cast iron, graphite occurs in the form 451. On adding silicon to cast iron :
of nodules. It is produced by heat treatment of white (a) Decrease the fluidity of the molten metal.
cast iron. (b) Graphite silk formation is encouraged.
446. Which is not a characteristic of wrought iron? (c) Tensile strength is improved.
(a) Can beat more impact (d) Cast iron become white and hard.
(b) Ductile material UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
(c) Can easily forged and weld Ans : (b) Silicon may be present in cast iron up to 4%.
(d) Hard and malleable It provides the formation of free graphite which makes
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 the iron soft and easily machinable.
Ans : (a) Wrought iron is very pure form of iron. 452. What is solidification range of gray cast iron?
• It is tough, malleable and ductile and can easily be (a) 2400 - 2000° F (b) 1600 - 500° F
forged or welded, but it can not take sudden shock. (c) 1400 - 1300° F (d) 800 - 700° F
447. What percentage (%) of carbon in dead carbon Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
steel on which the strength is maximum?
Ans : (a) Solidification temperature of grey cast iron is
(a) 0.53 (b) 0.15
2400 - 2000°F. For making tough, Ni, Cr and V alloy
(c) 0.83 (d) 0.057
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 are mixed in it.
Metallurgy 269 YCT

453. High carbon steel contains................. of carbon. 457. An anvil made of forged mild steel is covered
(a) 0.3% to 0.5% (b) 0.6% to 1.5% with which of the following?
(c) 0.15% to 0.3% (d) None of these (a) Cast steel (b) High carbon steel
(IOF Fitter 2017) (c) Mild Steel (d) High speed steel
Ans : (b) DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
Types of steel Carbon (%) Ans : (a) An anvil made of forged mild steel is covered
Dead mild steel 0.01-0.15 with cast steel. In mild steel carbon percentage is 0.15
Mild steel 0.15-0.3 to 0.25%. It is used in boiler plate and draft forging.
Medium carbon steel 0.3-0.8 458. The percentage of carbon in cast iron varies
High carbon steel 0.8-1.5 from :
454. Match the following given lists : (a) 0.1 to 0.3 (b) 0.3 to 0.7
List I List II (c) 0.7 to 1.7 (d) 1.7 to 4. 5
A. Cast iron 1. Used for making LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
electric conductors Ans : (d) The percentage of carbon in cast iron varies
B. Copper 2. It cannot be casted from 1.7 to 4.5. The melting point of cast iron is 1204ºC
C. Gun metal 3. It is a mixture of and its relative density is 7.27. It is used in making
copper, tin and zinc pillars, brackets, machine beds etc.
D. Wrought iron 4. It cannot be forged 459. Chilled cast iron is produced :
(a) A–1, B–3, C–2, D–4 (a) by quick cooling of molten cast iron
(b) A–4, B–1, C–3, D–2 (b) by adding copper to the molten cast iron
(c) A–2, B–4, C–1, D–3 (c) by adding chromium to the molten cast iron
(d) A–2, B–3, C–1, D–4 (d) from white cast iron by electric process
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
Ans : (b) Ans : (a) Chilled Cast Iron–This is a type of white
A. Cast iron – It can not be forged cast iron. When a localized area of gray cast iron is
B. Copper – Used for making electric conductor cooled very rapidly from the melt, cast iron is formed at
C. Gun metal – It is a mixture of copper tin and zinc the place that has been cooled. Child cast iron finds
D. Wrought iron – It can not be casted applications in areas where improved hardness and wear
455. Which one is not an annealing process? resistance are required.
(a) Stress relief annealing 460. Which of the following is not a ferromagnetic
(b) Process annealing material–
(c) Spheroidising (a) Iron (b) Nickel
(d) Tempering (c) Zinc (d) Cobalt
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
Ans : (d) Tempering is a heat treatment process. Ans : (c) Zinc is not a ferromagnetic material.
Types of annealing process– Ferromagnetic materials are those materials which are
1. Diffusion annealing process strongly magnetized when placed in an external
2. Full annealing process magnetic field. These materials are strongly attracted to
3. Spherodise annealing process a magnet. e.g. cobalt, nickel, iron etc.
4. Process annealing process. 461. Cast iron and steel pipes are made by–
Note–Option (c) is correct by commission. (a) Centrifugal casting
456. How much amount is carbon in plain carbon (b) Investment casting
steel? (c) True centrifugal casting
(a) 0.06–0.6% (b) 0.05–0.3% (d) Stamp casting
(c) 0.05–0.9% (d) 0.05–2.0% DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 Ans : (c) Cast iron and steel pipes are made by true
Ans : (d) Plain carbon steel contains carbon percentage centrifugal casting.
up to 2%. True centrifugal casting–It is used to create
1. Dead mild steel – up to 0.15% symmetrical round hollow parts such as pipes and tubes.
2. Low carbon steel – 0.15% to 0.45% The process does not require the use of cores; it creates
3. Medium carbon steel – 0.45% to 0.8% the parts through pure centrifugal force generated by
4. High carbon steel – 0.8% to 1.5% continuous rotation along the horizontal or vertical axis.
Metallurgy 270 YCT

462. Which of the following is non-metal Ans. (d) : Density of iron is 7.8 gm/cc. Its atomic
(a) Mercury (b) Sodium number is 26 and atomic weight is 55.84. Melting point
(c) Argon (d) Magnesium of pure iron is 1539º and boiling point of iron is
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 2862ºC.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II 468. What is the purity level of wrought iron?
Ans. (c) : Argon is a non-metal. (a) 90.9³ (b) 95.9³
Argon is a chemical element in group 18 of periodic (c) 99.9³ (d) 93.9³
table. It is a noble gas. It is the third-most abundant as ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
in Earth's atmosphere, at 0.934%. Ans : (c) Purest form of iron is wrought iron. The purity
463. Which of the following is not a iron ore. level of wrought iron is 99.9%. It is soft, ductile,
(a) Magnetite (b) Hematite magnetite, and has high elasticity and tensile strength.
(c) Bauxite (d) Limonite Wrought iron is used in making metal gates, iron
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II railings, iron bare, candle holder etc.
Ans. (c) : Bauxite is not a iron ore. 469. Pick the material which has the least coefficient
Bauxite is an ore of aluminium. Aluminium is extracted of thermal expansion?
from electrolysis method. (a) Mild steel (b) Aluminium
Magnetite, Hematite & Limonite are ore of iron. (c) Invar (d) Titanium
Magnetite has very high content of iron up to 70-75 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
percent. Ans : (c) Invar has the least coefficient of thermal
464. By smelting Iron ore we get expansion. It is nickel-iron alloy in which percentage of
(a) Cast Iron (b) Pig Iron nickel is 36%. Common grades of Invar have a
(c) Wrought Iron (d) Low Carbon Steel coefficient of thermal expansion of about 1.2 × 10–6 K–1.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 Invar is used in making precession instruments,
Ans. (b) : By smelting iron ore we get pig iron. pendulum of clock, seismic creep gauges etc.
Smelting uses heat and a chemical reducing agent to 470. Identify the heaviest material in the given
decompose the ore, driving off other elements as gases options?
or slag and leaving just metal behind. (a) Mild steel (b) Aluminium
Pig iron is the product of smelting iron ore. It has high (c) Plastic (d) Lead
content of carbon. It is brittle due to impurities. It is ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
used as raw materials for cast iron, wrought iron and Ans : (d) Among the given option heaviest material is
steel. lead. It has density of 11.34 (g/cm2). Its melting point is
465. Which of the following is not a metal? 327.4ºC and boiling point is 1620ºC. Lead is poor
(a) Aluminium (b) Mercury conductor of heat and electricity.
(c) Graphite (d) Bronze 471. As the % of carbon increases in iron, it
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 becomes more.........?
(a) Softer (b) Harder
Ans. (c) : Graphite is not a metal. Graphite is a
(c) Ductile (d) Tougher
allotrope of carbon. It occurs naturally and is most
stable form of carbon under standard condition. It
Ans : (b) As the % of carbon increases in iron, it
consist of stacked layers of grapheme. It is good
becomes more harder. It contain other element such
conductor of electricity. It is used as lubricants, in silicon, sulphur, phosphorous, manganese etc.
pencils and electrodes. 472. Which of the following metals are found in free
Note–Mercury is liquid at room temperature. state?
466. Which of the following is the heaviest metal (a) Aluminium (b) Gold
(a) Magnesium (b) Aluminum (c) Chromium (d) Zinc
(c) copper (d) lead RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Ans. (d) : Lead is heaviest metal among given option. Ans : (b) Gold is found in free state.
Lead is silvery with a hint of blue. Its melting point is Gold is placed in the bottom part of the activity series
327ºC and relative density is 11.36. Lead is used in car and hence it is one of the least reactive metals. Gold
batteries, solder, ammunition etc. does not combine with other elements.
467. Density of Iron is 473. Cinnabar is an ore/mineral of
(a) 2.7 gm/cc (b) 4.5 gm/cc (a) Lead (b) Manganese
(c) 5.5 kg/m3 (d) 7.8 gm/cc (c) Molybdenum (d) Mercury
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Metallurgy 271 YCT
Ans : (d) Cinnabar (HgS) is an ore/mineral of mercury. Ans : (b) Uraninite is an ore of uranium.
Its appearance is bright scarlet to bricks-red colour. Uraninite, formally pitch blend, is a radioactive,
Cinnabar has a mean refractive index of 3.2, a hardness uranium-rich mineral and ore with a chemical
between 2.0 and 2.5 and a specific gravity of composition that is largely UO2.
approximity 8.1.
480. Malachite is an ore/mineral of
474. Turquoise is an ore/mineral of
(a) Lead (b) Manganese
(a) Copper (b) Manganese
(c) Mercury (d) Copper
(c) Mercury (d) Tin
DRDO Turner.2016 DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (a) Turquoise is an ore/mineral of copper. It is an Ans : (d) Malachite, a minor ore but a widespread
opaque, bluish green mineral substance. It is found in mineral of copper, basic carbonate, CuCO3(OH)2.
nature in the form of hydrated phosphate of copper and Malachite was used as a mineral pigment from ancient
aluminium. Due to its colour and luster, it is used as black to green till about 1800.
gear since ancient time. 481. The common name of lead (II) sulphide is
475. Magnetite is an ore/mineral of (a) borax (b) Epsom salt
(a) Beryllium (b) Chromium (c) galena (d) brimstone
(c) Iron (d) Lead DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (c) The common name of lead (II) sulphide is
Ans : (c) Magnetite is an ore of iron.
galena. It is a black insoluble powder. It is used in
Magnetite is a mineral whose primary component is an
making pottery and pencils attractive. The presence of
iron oxide that contains equal amounts of iron (II) and
lead salt in the solution is known from its black
iron (III). Its empirical formula is Fe3O4, and it is often
precipitate.
expressed as iron (II, III) oxide.
476. Carnotite is an ore/mineral of…….. 482. Molybdenite is an ore/mineral of
(a) Beryllium (b) Chromium (a) Molybdenum (b) Nickel
(c) Uranium (d) Copper (c) Silver (d) Tin
DRDO Turner.2016 DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (c) Carnotite is a mineral of uranium. It is a Ans : (a) Molybdenite is an ore of molybdenum.
strong bright greenish yellow mineral that is commonly Molybdenum is a rare metallic element found in the
found in the form of flakes in the crust and sandstone. It Earth's crust. It looks like graphite but is very soft. It is
is also contain small amounts of calcium, barium, difficult to differentiate between graphite and
magnesium, iron and sodium. molybdenum without scientific equipment.
477. Chromite is an ore/mineral of 483. Bauxite is used as raw material by which
(a) Zinc (b) Uranium industry
(c) Chromium (d) Titanium (a) Aluminium (b) Iron
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) Steel (d) Gold
DRDO Fitter.2016 DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (c) Chromite is a mineral containing a mixture of Ans : (a) Bauxite is used as raw material by aluminium
chromium and iron. It is used in metal refining, thermal industry. Feldspar, diaspore, alunite corundum etc.
insulation works and chemical industries. Odisha These are also ores of aluminium. Aluminium is
produces highest chromite in the country. extracted from bauxite. It is found in Odisha, M.P.
478. Ilmenite is an ore/mineral of………… 484. What is the percentage of carbon in cast iron?
(a) Titanium (b) Copper (a) 0.2% (b) 0.15 to 0.3%
(c) Lead (d) Manganese (c) 1.1 to 1.4% (d) 2 to 4 %
DRDO Fitter.2016
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (a) The main ore of titanium is ilmenite. This
Ans:(d) The percentage of carbon in cast iron is 2 to
element was discovered by the greater in 1791. It is
denoted by Ti and its atomic number is 22. It is a 4%.
transition metal. Titanium is used in aircraft, There are following different types of cast iron–
spacecraft and missiles because of their low density 1. Grey Cast Iron
and ability to withstand extreme temperature. 2. White Cast Iron
479. Uraninite is an ore/mineral of……… 3. Mottled Cast Iron
(a) Zinc (b) Uranium 4. Malleable Cast Iron
(c) Titanium (d) Aluminium 5. Chiled Cast Iron
DRDO Fitter.2016 7. Nodular Cast Iron
Metallurgy 272 YCT

485. The important metal used will iron to make Ans : (b) Galena is the major ore of lead. It is one of
stainless steel is– the most abundant and widely distributed sulfide
(a) Aluminium (b) Chromium minerals.
(c) Tin (d) Carbon 491. Ore of copper is ______.
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (a) Galena (b) Calamine
Ans : (b) Stainless steel is alloy of iron, chromium (c) Tin stone (d) Pyrite
and, in some cases nickel and other metals. It is (RRB Ranchi ALP 21.09.2003)
corrosion resistant alloy. 18/8 stainless steel is alloy Ans : (d) The ore of copper is malachite and pyrite.
that contain 18% chromium and 8% nickel. It is highly 55% copper is obtained from malachite and 32% copper
durable and easy to fabricate. is obtained from pyrite. It is malleable and ductile. Its
486. When metals are attracted by a magnet, it is colour is red and melting point is 1089ºC.
called magnetite property. This propergy is 492. Zinc is the main metal for making brass, its
present in– melting point is
(a) all types of metals (a) 6480C (b) 4180C
(b) non-ferrous metals (c) 3270C (d) 6600C
(c) ferrous metals DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (b) The melting point of zinc ranges from 415ºC.
DRDO Turner.2016
By heating it from 100ºC to 150ºC, sheets and stars are
Ans : (c) The magnetic properties are shown by ferrous made. Zinc is obtained from calamine ore. Brass is an
metals. Example-Mild steel, cast iron, wrought iron, alloy of Cu and Zn i.e. Cu-70% and Zn-30%.
non-ferrous metal does not show magnetic property.
493. Which of the following is not use of
487. Which of the following is an ore of Aluminium?
phosphorous bronze–
(a) Calamine (b) Bauxite
(a) in making heavy duty bearing
(c) Tip stone (d) Hematite
(b) in making gear and worm wheel
(c) in making welding rod
DRDO Fitter.2016
(d) in making bell
Ans : (b) Bauxite is ore of Aluminium. Aluminium is a DRDO Turner.2016
a light metal will a specific gravity of 2.7. It is ductile
Ans : (b) By adding phosphorous to bronze,
and malleable. Its melting point is 6580C. Its
phosphorous bronze is formed. it contains 93.7%
applications include roofing, foil insulation, windows,
copper, 6% tin and 0.3% phosphorous. It has high
cladding, doors etc.
strength and ductility. It is used for making bearings,
488. Aluminium is a light metal, so which of the pump parts etc.
following is used for making aircraft?
494. The composition of copper, tin and zinc in gun
(a) Copper (b) Duralumin
metal are–
(c) Monel metal (d) White metal
(a) 88, 10 and 2³ (b) 60, 35 and 5³
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (b) Duralumin, strong, hard, lightweight alloy of (c) 80, 15 and 5³ (d) 55, 40 and 5³
aluminium. Widely used in aircraft construction. DRDO Fitter.2016
Duralumin is an alloy of 95% aluminium, 4% copper Ans : (a) The composition of copper, tin and zinc in
0.6% manganese and 0.5% magnesium. gun metal are 88, 10 and 2% respectively. It can be
489. Aluminium is a non-ferrous metal. Which of forged by heating up to 600ºC. It is used to make steam
the following is not a use of aluminium– and hydraulic castings, valves, gears, statues etc.
(a) Making paint 495. Tin is a metal is placed in group of–
(b) making cooking utensils (a) Ferrous (b) Ferrous alloy
(c) frames of doors, windows (c) Non-ferrous (d) Non ferrous alloy
(d) brass making NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
DRDO Fitter.2016 DRDO Turner.2016
Ans: (d) Aluminium is not used in making brass. Brass Ans : (c) Tin is a metal placed in group of non-ferrous
is an alloy of copper and zinc in which percentage of metal. Its melting point is 230ºC. Tin is obtained from
copper is 70% and zinc is 30%. cassiterite or tinstone (SnO2)
490. Lead is an ore of _____. 496. Ore of tin is–
(a) Malachite (b) Galena (a) Cassiterite (b) Galena
(c) Tin stone (d) Calamine (c) Pyrite (d) Hematite
DRDO Turner.2016 (RRB Muzaffarpur ALP 15.02.2009)
Metallurgy 273 YCT
Ans : (a) The principal tin mineral is cassiterite or Ans: (c) Melting point of wrought iron is 15350C to
tinstone (SnO2), a naturally occurring oxide of tin 16000C. The carbon percentage is 0.12–0.15% in it. It is
containing about 78.8 percent tin. Tin is used for the purest form of iron.
coating brass utensils for cooking and for coating on 503. Dome (blast furnace) is used in the production
steel kite sheets. of–
497. Tin is a non ferrous metal, its melting point is– (a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron
(a) 4180C (b) 6480C (c) Mild steel (d) None of the above
0
(c) 230 C (d) 9500C (RRB Banglore ALP 15.07.2012)
DRDO Turner.2016 Ans : (a) Smelting–In this method, a blast furnace
Ans : (c) Tin is a non ferrous metal. Its melting point is (dome-like) furnace is used to clean the iron ore. The
230ºC and its colour is silvery white. It is malleable and impurities come out in the form of foam. After
ductile metal. It can be formed into thin sheet by rolling concentrating the iron ore, it is melted by blast furnace
or hammering. to prepare pig iron.
498. Melting point of brass is about– 504. The melting point of cast iron is in the range
(a) 9500C (b) 8000C of–
0
(c) 1083 C (d) 11000C (a) 1150–1300ºC (b) 1800–1900ºC
(RRB Ranchi ALP 08.07.2007) (c) 1450–1600ºC (d) 600–700ºC
Ans : (a) The melting point of brass is about 950ºC. DRDO Turner.2016
Brass is an alloy of copper and zinc with 70% Cu and Ans : (a) The melting point of cast iron is in the range
30% Zn. Brass is used in making locks, hinges, valves, of 1150-1300ºC. Carbon in cast iron is present in two
plumbing etc. forms–
499. Which of the following metal is the best 1. Free carbon or graphite
conductor of heat? 2. Combined form
(a) Aluminium (b) Wrought iron Properties of cast iron–
(c) Lead (d) Copper (i) It is hard and brittle
DRDO Turner.2016 (ii) Percentage of carbon is 2-4%
Ans : (d) Copper is the best conductor among given (iii) It is not malleable and ductile
option. The best conductor of heat is silver. Copper is (iv) It can not be forged
obtained from ore of pyrite and malachite. Copper is (v) It is not prone to rust
used in making electric appliances, vapour pipe and (vi) Can bear load but can not bear shock
alloy. 505. Which heat treatment is given to increase the
500. Which of the following metals is good insulator mechanical strength of steel?
of nuclear radiation? (a) Hardening (b) Tempering
(a) Zinc (b) Lead (c) Annealing (d) Normalising
(c) Aluminium (d) Copper DRDO Turner.2016
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 Ans : (c) Annealing–It is a process of softening hard
(IOF Fitter, 2013) steel to make it machinable.
Ans : (b) Lead is a good insulator of nuclear radiation. Hardening–By this hardness of metal is increased. The
Its melting point is 327ºC. There is no affect of acid on hardness of steel depends on the percentage of carbon.
this. It is obtained from ore of galena. Normalising–It involves heating a material to an
501. Usually rust occurs in ferrous metals. This is
elevated temperature and then allowing it to cool back
______ properties of metals.
to room temperature by exposing it to room temperature
(a) Physical (b) Chemical
air after it is heated. It change the microstructure which
(c) Mechanical (d) None of the above
in turn reduces its hardness and increases its ductility.
506. Which of the following is close to the purest
Ans : (b) Rust occurs in ferrous metals. this is a
form of Iron?
chemical property of metals. When air and water come
(a) Cast Iron (b) Wrought Iron
in contact with ferrous metals chemical reaction occurs
(c) Grey Iron (d) Mild Steel
and a layer of red iron oxide is formed on the surface.
502. Melting point of wrought iron is (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(a) 9600C (b) 10800C
(c) 1535 C 0
(d) 19000C Ans : (b) Wrought iron is purest form of iron. The
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 percentage of carbon is 0.12-0.15%. It is malleable and
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) ductile.
Metallurgy 274 YCT

511. Select the material commonly used for making

4. Steel and Alloy Steel scribers
(a) Wrought Iron (b) High carbon steel
507. Stainless steel is not a type of ______. (c) Mild steel (d) Bronze
(a) Plain carbon steels ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
(b) Alloy steel IOCL 2020
(c) Corrosion resistance steel Ans. (b) : Scriber are making high carbon steel.
(d) Chromium added steel A scriber is a hand tool used in metal work to mark
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 lines on workpiece, prior to machining.
Ans. (a) : Stainless steel– It is defined as the alloy steel 512. Low carbon steel contains _____ %of Carbon
which when correctly heat treated and finished, resists (a) 0.1 to 0.3 (b) 0.01 to 0.1
oxidation an corrosive attack from most corrosive
(c) 0.3 to 0.35 (d) 0.3 to 1.6
media.
The different types of stainless steels are as follows–
1. Martensitic stainless steel containing 12 to 14% Ans. (a) :
chromium and 0.12 to 0.35% carbon. Type of alloy steel % of carbon
2. Ferritic stainless steel containing 16 to 18% nickel Dead carbon steel Less than 0.16
and about 0.12% carbon. Mild steel or low carbon 0.16 to 0.35
3. Austenitic stainless steel containing 18% chromium steel
and 8% nickel, it is non-magnetic nature. Medium carbon steel 0.35 to 0.5
508. Which one of the following is most elastic High carbon steel 0.5-2.0
material?
513. Crane hooks are generally made of
(a) Steel (b) Glass
(a) High carbon steel
(c) Sponge (d) Rubber
(b) Wrought iron
(c) Cast steel
Ans. (a) : Steel is most elastic material.
(d) Cast iron
• If the object is elastic, the body regains its original
shape when the pressure is removed.
• Steel having the steepest linear stress strain curve Ans. (b) : Wrought iron is the purest form of iron,
among all. although it may contain traces of carbon. It is usually
made by pudding process. It is very costly and it uses
509. The carbon contains in medium carbon steel is
has been almost totally replaced by cheaper steel.
from ______
However, for some component like chain-links and
(a) 0.5% to 0.1% (b) 0.2% to 0.5% crane hook wrought iron is still the preferred raw
(c) 0.75% to 1.5% (d) 0.3% to 0.75% material.
BEML 2022
514. The carbon content in Mild Steel is .................
(a) 0.2 to 0.6% (b) 0.05 to 0.25%
Ans. (d) : (c) 0.6 to 0.8% (d) 0.1 to 0.2%
Steel % of carbon
Dead mild steel up to 0.15%
Ans. (b) : Mild steel alloy
Low carbon steel 0.15 to 0.45%
Carbon content →0.05-0.25%
Medium carbon steel 0.45 to 0.8%
High carbon steel 0.8 to 1.5% Sulpher → 0.055%
510. At room temperature, plain carbon steel Iron → 99.7-99.9%
contains: Phosphorous → 0.055%
(a) Ferrite and cementite 515. The carbon percentage ranges from ______ for
(b) Ferrite and pearlite Hyper eutectoid steel
(c) Pearlite and cementite (a) 0.8 to 2.0% (b) 0.02 to 1.2%
(d) Ferrite, pearlite and cementite (c) 0.002 to 1.2% (d) 0.06 to 0.12%
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
Ans. (d) : At room temperature, plain carbon steel Ans. (a) : Hypo-eutectoid steel < 0.8%C
contains, ferrite, cementite and pearlite. Hyper - eutectoid steel = (0.81-2.1%)C
Metallurgy 275 YCT
• Hypereutectoid steel are commonly used as the tool 521. Material used for making the shaft keys :
material. (a) Stainless steel (b) High speed steel
• Hypo eutectoid steel is the most ductile (c) Cast steel (d) Mild steel
• The eutectic temperature and composition determine a Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022
point on the phase diagram called eutectic point. Ans. (d) : Shaft keys are made from either medium
516. SS 304 contains _______. carbon steel or stainless steel. But they can be made
(a) 8% Cr, 18% Ni (b) 18% Cr, 8% Fe from many different types of material such a aluminium
(c) 18% Ni, 8% Fe (d) 18% Cr, 8% Ni alloy bronze copper and brass to suit different
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 application environments.
Ans. (d) : SS 304 is also known as austenitic stainless 522. 316 L refers to :
steel. It contains 18% chromium and 8% nickel and (a) Aluminium (b) Brass
66.7% iron. (c) Stainless steel (d) Cupro Nickel
• Also called as 18/8 steel. Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022
• It is most versatile & most widely used stainless steel. Ans. (c) : 316 L stainless steel is defined by its low
• SS 304 stainless steel is not prone to oxidation or carbon content is not more than 0.03% carbon. In
corrosion. general its composition is between 16-18% chromium
517. Which of the following element is not present is and between 10-15% nickel (as well as trace amounts of
SS 304? manganese, silicon, phosphorus sulphur and nitrogen).
(a) Au (b) Fe 523. Which is most suitable alloying element in
(c) Ni (d) Cr normal HSS cutting tool?
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 (a) Tungsten (b) Carbon
NTPC Fitter 2016 (c) Vanadium (d) Chromium
Ans. (a) : SS 304 is contain 18% Cr and 8% nickel and JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
66-70% iron. Ans. (a) : High speed steel–Main constituent is
518. Typical percentage (%) of Tungsten in HSS tungsten.
Tool material is ________. Tungsten series–18% Tungsten, 4% Chromium, 1%
(a) 04 (b) 28 Vanadium
(c) 18 (d) 11 Molybdenum series–5% Molybdenum, 4% Chromium,
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 2% Vanadium, 6% Tungsten.
Ans. (c) : High speed steel–Tungsten series–18% • It is used for manufacturing milling cutters, drills,
Tungsten, 4% chromium, 1% Vanadium. taps, broaches, saw etc.
• It is used for manufacturing milling cutters, drills, 524. What is the tensile strength of stainless steel?
lathe tools, taps, broaches and saw. (a) 215 MPa (b) 100-800 MPa
519. Main alloying element in stainless steel is____. (c) 500-550 MPa (d) 200-600 MPa
(a) Nickel (b) Chromium RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(c) Vanadium (d) Carbon Ans. (a) : The tensile strength of stainless steel is 215
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 MPa.
Ans. (b): Stainless steel which when correctly heat In a tensile test the ratio of maximum load to original
treated and finished, resists oxidation and corrosive cross-sectional area is called tensile strength.
attack from most corrosive metal. 525. A brass shaft is to be finish turned to a surface
• It is an alloy of iron & chromium and in some cases roughness Ra = 0.8 with high cutting speed.
nickel & other metals. Which one of the following cutting tool
520. Main alloying element in HSS is _______. materials is suitable for thesis purpose?
(a) Tungsten (b) Chromium (a) H.S.S (b) High carbon steel
(c) Nickel (d) Manganese (c) Low alloy steel (d) Cemented carbide
BHEL 2020 RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 Ans. (d) Cemented carbides are a class of hard
Ans. (a) : High speed steel–Main alloying element– materials used extensively for cutting tools. (It consist
Tungsten. of fine particles of carbide cemented into a composite
Tungsten (W) series–Tungsten-18%, Chromium-4%, by a binder metal). Carbide cutters leave a better surface
Vanadium-1% finish than high speed steel.
Application–Milling cutters, Drills, Lathe too, Taps, • Cementite or iron carbide (Fe3C) contains 6.67%
Broaches, Saw. carbon by weight.
Metallurgy 276 YCT

526. A solid forged boring tool is made of Ans. (c) : Forging is the process in which metals are
(a) H.S.S (b) Tungsten carbide formed and shaped using compressive forces. The
(c) Stellite (d) Cast iron forces are delivered using hammering, pressing or
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 rolling. Forging is generally a hot working operation
Ans. (a) Boring is process of enlarging existing holes and cold forging is also used. The forging temperature
with a bore. are above the recrystallization temperature and are
A solid forged boring tool is made of H.S.S. typically between 950oC - 1250oC.
527. Solid milling cutters are manufactured from The most suitable heating temperature for forging low
(a) Sintered carbide (b) H.H.S. alloy steel is 1100oC.
(c) Ceramic (d) Stellite 532. Describe hardness in a file is generally
BDL Technician 2022 (a) 30 HRC (b) 45 HRC
Ans. (b) Solid milling cutters are manufactured from (c) 60 HRC (d) 80 HRC
H.S.S. They are usually made from high speed steel or
cemented carbide. They are the most common tool used
in a vertical mill. Ans. (c) : File is the main cutting tool in fitter trade.
528. Which one of the following is an alloy of iron Filling is the process of removing small amount of
and carbon? material from the surface of any part of a job. The
(a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron hardness of file is generally 60 HRC.
(c) Wrought iron (d) Steel 533. Which of the following is the non-metallic anti
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 corrosion treatment ?
Ans. (d) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon. Iron is the (a) Enamelling (b) Cladding
base metal of steel. The carbon in typical steel alloys (c) Sheradising (d) Calorising
may contribute up to 2.14% of its weight. Because of its RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
high tensile strength and low cost, steel is used in
buildings, infrastructure, tools, ships and weapons. Ans. (a) : Enameling is a process by which powdered
glass is fused to a metal substrate at high heat. Enamels
529. Which one of the following elements. influences
can be applied to glass, ceramic and most commonly,
most of the forge ability of steel ?
metals. It is the non-metallic anti corrosion treatment.
(a) Silicon (b) Manganese
(c) Carbon (d) Nitrogen 534. The carbon content in wrought iron ranges
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 from ……
Ans. (c) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon, iron being (a) 0.02% to 0.03% (b) 0.02% to 0.1%
as base metal. Increasing carbon content in steel (c) 3% to 4% (d) 0.01 % to 0.05%
increases hardness and brittleness but decreases impact RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
strength of steel. Forge ability of steel decreases Ans. (a) : Wrought iron is a very pure iron where the
because of decrease in malleability. iron content is of the order of 99.5%. It usually contains
530. In case of steel, through which one of the less than 0.1% carbon and 1 or 2% slag. It is produced
following processes, there will be no increase in by re-melting pig iron and some small amount of
hardness ? silicon, sulphur or phosphorous. It is tough, malleable
(a) Heating above 6000 C and slow cooling and ductile and can easily be forged or welded.
(b) Rolling 535. Killed steel is opposite of ............. steel.
(c) Hammering (a) Carbon (b) Alloy
(d) Alloying with chromium (c) Rimmed (d) None of these
Ans.(a) Heating steel above 600oC and slow cooling
Ans. (c) : Killed steel or deoxidized steel is that steel
will not increase hardness. In fact it will increase
machinability, ductility and make steel softer. which has been completely deoxidized by addition of an
Spherodidise annealing is used to reduce hardness agent before casting. It is characterized by high degree
increase ductility and help eliminates internal stresses. of chemical homogeneity. It is called killed because it
will quietly solidify in the mould, with no gas bubbling
531. The most suitable heating temperature for
out.
forging low alloy steel is
(a) 750ºC (b) 850ºC Rimmed steels are low carbon steel that is partially
(c) 1100ºC (d) 1200ºC deoxidized or non oxidized. Rimmed steel is opposite of
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 killed steel.
Metallurgy 277 YCT

536. Sine bar is made out of .......... Ans. (d) : Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon, with
(a) nickel steel carbon content upto a maximum of 1.5%. Density of
(b) high speed steel steel is 7.85 gm/cm3.
(c) high carbon steel 541. Which of the following elements may be used to
(d) stabilised chromium steel deoxidize steels?
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 (a) Calcium (b) Magnesium
Ans. (d) : Sine bars are made from a high chromium (c) Phosphorous (d) Sulphur
corrosion resistant steel, and is hardened, precision NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
ground and stabilized. Two cylinders of equal RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
diameters are placed at the ends of the bar.
Ans. (a) : Deoxidized steel or killed steel is steel that
537. Name the material commonly used for thicker
has some or all of the oxygen removed from the metal
walled bearing bushes carrying hardened steel
during steel making process. Deoxidation of steel uses
shafts
elements forming strong and stable oxides. Manganese,
(a) Phosphor bronze (b) Brass
silicone, aluminium, cerium, calcium are commonly
(c) Aluminium (d) Copper
used as deoxidizers.
542. The general composition of high speed steel
Ans. (a) : Phosphor bronze is a member of the family of
cutting tool (HSS) is in the ratio of 18:4:1. In
copper alloys. It is composed of copper that is alloyed
this ratio 18 refers to …….
with 0.5-11% of tin and 0.01-0.35% phosphorous.
Alloyed tin increases the corrosion resistance and (a) Chromium (b) Tungsten
strength of copper, while phosphorous increases its (c) Cobalt (d) Vanadium
wear resistance and stiffness. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Phosphor bronze is used for thicker walled bearing Ans. (b) : High speed steel is special alloy steel which
bushes carrying hardened steel shafts. is obtained by alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium,
538. As per BIS, hot rolled steel flats are designated cobalt and molybdenum with steel.
(in the order of sequence) by HSS is an alloy of 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1%
(a) Width × ISF × thickness as per IS 1731 vanadium. The main use of high speed steels continues
(b) Width × Thickness × ISF as per IS 1731 to be in the manufacturing of cutting tools, drills, taps,
(c) ISF × thickness × Width as per IS 1731 milling cutters, saw blades etc.
(d) ISF × width × thickness as per IS 1731 543. The most favorable metal for chemical plants
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 and food processing is stainless steel because it
Ans. (a) : As per Indian standards, the rolled steel flats has high corrosion resistance at …
designated on the basis of its width and thickness. i.e. (a) atmospheric temperature only
width × thickness × ISF as per IS 1731 (b) high humidity
e.g. (c) high electrical current
(d) elevated temperatures
Ans. (b) : Stainless steel is a corrosion-resistant alloy of
iron, chromium and in some cases, nickel and other
metals.
539. The carbon content range in high carbon steel
is......... Stainless steel is popularly used for cookware kitchen
(a) 0.1 % to 0.3 % (b) 0.3% to 0.7% utensils and cutlery. This is because it is hard wearing,
corrosion resistant, and it does not affect the flavour of
(c) 0.7% to 1.4% (d) 2.1% to 2.75%
the food.
Ans. (c) : The carbon content range in high carbon steel 544. Various alloying elements are added to produce
is 0.8 to 1.5%. A high percentage of carbon given different alloy steels. Which one of the
hardness and strength to metal. It is mainly used for following combination of alloying elements is
tools like chisels, hammers, drills, tap etc. and used for HSS?
machining parts like springs, mandrels. (a) Chromium, nickel and molybdenum
540. Density of steel is........ (b) Nickel, molybdenum and silicon
(a) 7.55 gm/cm3 (b) 7.65 gm/cm3 (c) Chromium, Vanadium and manganese
3
(c) 7.75 gm/cm (d) 7.85 gm/cm3 (d) Chromium, Vanadium and tungsten
Metallurgy 278 YCT
Ans. (d): High speed steel is special alloy steel which is 549. The tensile strength of which non-ferrous metal
obtained by alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium, can be increased by hammering or rolling?
cobalt and molybdenum with steel. High speed steels (a) Mild steel (b) Cast iron
are used in manufacturing cutting tools like drills, taps, (c) Alloy steel (d) Copper
milling cutters, saw blades, planer, tool bits etc. BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
545. Various alloying elements are added to Ans. (d): Non ferrous metals– These are metals or
improve certain properties of alloy steels. alloys that don't contain iron (allotropes of iron, ferrite)
in appreciable amounts. e.g. Al, Cu, Pb, Sn etc (metals)
Which among the following will have the least
and brass (alloy). Non-ferrous metals have properties
co-efficient of expansion?
like low weight high conductivity and non-magnetic
(a) Chromium (b) Nickel properties.
(c) Vanadium (d) Tungsten The tensile strength of non-ferrous metal like copper
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 can be increased by hammering or rolling. Copper is
Ans. (b) : An alloy steel may be defined as a steel to very malleable and ductile and can be made into sheets
which elements other than carbon are added in or wires.
sufficient amount to produce an improvement in 550. The cutting tool is manufactured by ..........
properties. Steel containing 2 to 5% nickel improves (a) low carbon steel
tensile strength, impart hardness, toughness and reduce (b) medium carbon steel
rust formation. A nickel steel alloy containing about (c) high carbon steel
36% nickel is known as invar. It has zero coefficient of (d) wrought iron
expansion. RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
546. Stoving finishes, retain their colour during the Ans. (c) : The cutting tool is manufactured by high
stoving process which is done in a convection carbon steel. High carbon steel is an alloy steel in which
over at …. percentage of carbon vary from 0.6 to 1.0%. High
carbon steel properties include very high strength
(a) 90°C to 100°C (b) 110°C to 120°C
extreme hardness and resistance to wear. These
(c) 130°C to 140°C (d) 150°C to 160°C properties makes it useful for manufacturing cutting
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 tool.
Ans. (b) : Stoving finishes are coatings that require 551. Approximate content of vanadium in H.S.S.
curing at elevated temperatures, starting from 130oC. cutting tool material is–
Stoving finishes, retain their colour during the stoving (a) 16% (b) 4%
process which is done in a convection over at 110oC to (c) 1% (d) 0.1%
120oC. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
547. Which one of the following materials for lathe Ans. (c) : High speed steel is a subset of tool steels,
cutting tools cane forged to any desired shape:- commonly used as cutting tool material. It is often used
(a) High speed steel (b) High carbon steel in power saw blades and drill bits. It is superior to high-
(c) Satellite (d) Tungsten carbide carbon steel.
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 High speed steel is special alloy steel which is obtained
by alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium, cobalt and
Ans. (b) : High carbon steel is an alloy steel in which
molybdenum with steel. HSS is an alloy of 18%
percentage of carbon vary from 0.6 to 1.0%. High
tungsten, 4% chromium and 1% vanadium.
carbon steel is used for a variety of cutting tools,
springs, and coils for the manufacturing industry. It can 552. Chromium in H.S.S. cutting tool material is–
be forged to any shape to get cutting took for lathe (a) 16% (b) 4%
machine. (c) 1% (d) 0.6%
548. Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for the
operation:- Ans. (b) : High speed steel is special alloy steel which
is obtained by alloying tungsten, chromium, vanadium,
(a) Boring (b) External threading
cobalt and molybdenum with steel. HSS is an alloy of
(c) Internal threading (d) All of these 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1% vanadium.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 553. Which of the following tool materials has high
Ans. (d) : HSS tool bits are high speed steel squares and cutting speed?
flats that are heat treated and ground to close tolerances. (a) Carbon steel (b) H.S.S.
Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for the operation (c) Cast alloy (d) Carbide
like boring, external threading, internal threading. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Metallurgy 279 YCT
Ans. (d) : The cemented carbide cutting tool is Ans. (d) : The carbon percentage in medium carbon
produced by powder metallurgy technique. It consist of steel ranges from 0.3 to 0.6.
tungsten, tantalum, and titanium carbide with cobalt as Plain steel is mainly of the following types–
binder. Cemented carbide tools are extremely hard; they
can withstand very high-speed cutting operation.
Dead steel – Up to 0.15%
Carbide tool does not lose their hardness up to 1000oC. Low carbon steel – 0.15 to 0.30%
554. The hardness of carbon tool steels is increased Medium carbon steel – 0.30 to 0.80%
when alloyed with– High carbon steel – 0.80 to 1.5%
(a) Tungsten
(b) Chromium and vanadium 558. Which of the following is highly ductile steel?
(c) Silicon (a) Medium carbon steel (b) High carbon steel
(d) Magnese (c) Mild steel (d) Dead mild steel
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (b) : The hardness of carbon tool steel is increased Ans. (d): Dead mild steel is highly ductile steel. It is
when alloyed with chromium and vanadium. Tungsten used in automobile body parts, plate and wire
increases tempering and wear resistance. Vanadium production.
increases wear resistance of finishing tools.
Dead mild steel usually has the property of being
555. An alloy is a– magnetically ductile and easily weldable. The
(a) Fuse metal percentage of carbon in this is 0.15%.
(b) Mixture of metals in any proportion
559. What is the material used for making abrasive?
(c) Mixture of metals in fixed proportion
(a) Mild steel
(d) Mixture of two non-metals
(b) High speed steel
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (c) Corrosion resistant steel (stainless steel)
Ans. (b) : Alloy is a substance formed from the (d) Wrought steel (forged steel)
combination of two or more metals. The properties DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
exhibited by alloys are often quite different from the
Ans. (d) : Forged steel is used to make abrasive. A
properties of their individual components.
scraper is used to scrape the finished surface will a file
In alloy the composition of each element used is or machine to make it flat.
uniform through out the volume.
• The most common abrasive used is aluminium oxide,
e.g. Brass – Cu (70%), Zn (30%)
also common are silicaon Carbide, tungsten carbide and
Bronze – Cu (88-96%), Sn (12-4%)
garnet.
Gun metal – Cu (88%), Zn (2%), Sn (10%).
560. Steel is an alloy made up of which of the
556. Stainless steel is called so because of its: following metals?
(a) high corrosion resistance (a) Carbon and tin
(b) colour (b) Iron and carbon
(c) high strength (c) Cast iron and nickel
(d) high ductility (d) Iron and manganese
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Ans. (a) : Stainless steel is called so because of its high Ans. (b) : Steel is an alloy made up of iron and carbon.
corrosion resistance. The main element in this is carbon. The higher the
Stainless steel has the following properties– carbon content in the steel, the more hard and spongy is
1. Anti-corrosion steel.
2. High tension strength 561. What is the percentage of carbon in high speed
3. Very durable tool steel?
4. Hot resistant (a) 0.60 - 0.75³ (b) 0.20 - 0.30³
5. Environment friendly (c) 1.00 - 2.00³ (d) 0.75 - 1.00³
557. Range of carbon percentage in medium carbon DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
steel is approximately– Ans. (d) : The percentage of carbon in high speed tool
(a) 0.1 to 0.3 percent (b) 0.7 to 0.95 percent steel is 0.75-1.00%. In this, tungsten, chromium,
(c) 1 to 1.5 percent (d) 0.3 to 0.6 percent vanadium, cobalt, molybdenum are used as parallel
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM elements. The cutting speed of high speed steel is
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 highest in aluminium.
Metallurgy 280 YCT

562. What is the main alloying element of high 567. Specific gravity of mild steel
speed steel? (a) 5 (b) 2.7
(a) Chromium (b) Manganese (c) 7.8 (d) 1
(c) Vanadium (d) Tungsten ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 Ans. (c) : Specific gravity of mild steel is 7.8. Mild
Ans. (d) : The main alloying element of high speed steel contain 0.25% of carbon.
steel is tungsten. Commonly used high speed steel 568. The lower critical point (heating) for steel is at:
contain 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1% vanadium. (a) 723oC (b) 900oC
Tungsten is used to make filaments of electric bulbs. (c) 1200 Co
(d) 523oC
563. Among the following, which is maximum ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
corrosion resistant? Ans. (a) : The lower critical point cheating for steel is at
(a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron
723ºC.
(c) Wrought iron (d) Stainless steel
NMRC, 15-09-2019 569. Which of the following is NOT true for a
stainless steel alloy?
Ans. (d): Stainless steel has maximum corrosion
(a) It contains Chromium
resistant. Chromium is used in stainless steel along with
(b) It is having anti-corrosion property
nickel, due to which hardness and strength increases.
Steel with 8% nickel and 18% chromium and 1% (c) It is very brittle
carbon makes non-magnetic stainless steel. (d) It is weldable
564. Lower critical point of steel
(a) 723ºC (b) 800ºC Ans. (c) : Stainless steel is not brittle.
(c) 603ºC (d) 700ºC Properties of stainless steel–
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (i) It contains about 18% chromium
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (ii) It is anti-corrosion
(iii) It is weldable
Ans. (a) : Lower critical point of steel is 723ºC. At this
(iv) High tensile strength
temperature the transformation of eutectoid steel from
austenite to pearlite occurs. This temperature is the 570. Main alloying elements of stainless steel are :
same for both hypo eutectoid and hyper eutectoid. (a) Chromium and Zinc
(b) Chromium and Nickel
565. Shearing tools are made-
(c) Chromium and Copper
(a) Nickel steel
(d) Chromium and Tungsten
(b) Crome steel
(c) Silicon steel
(d) High speed steel Ans. (b) Main alloying elements of stainless are
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 chromium and nickel. It contain about 18% chromium.
It is hard. It does not rust. It is used for making utensils,
Ans. (d) : Shearing tools are made from high speed
blades, valves etc.
steel.
• The percentage of carbon in high speed steel is 0.7%. 571. the main constituents of HSS :
(a) Tungsten, Nickel, Chromium
• In 18-4-1 high speed steel, there is 18% tungsten, 4%
(b) Tungsten, Nickel, Cobalt
chromium and 1% vanadium.
(c) Tungsten, Chromium, Vanadium
• It maintain its hardenability at temperature of 600ºC.
(d) None of these
• In chrome steel there is 0.36% carbon, 0.57% ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012
chromium.
Ans. (c) : The main constituents of HSS is tungsten,
566. Chromium coating process on steel parts is- chromium, vanadium. It maintain its hardness at about
(a) Cladding (b) Cementation 650ºC. In this 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1%
(c) Spraying (d) Chlorinating vanadium are present.
572. Rubber is .................. elastic than mild steel.
Ans. (*) : The chrome plating process is a method of (a) More (b) Less
applying a thin layer of chromium onto a substrate (c) Equal (d) None of these
through an electroplating procedure. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
• Cementation process of extracting the metal from a ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012
solution based on the electrochemical reaction between Ans. (b) : Rubber is less elastic than mild steel. The
the cementing metal and ion of the precipitated metal. stain produced to that in steel. A material with more
• Chlorination is the process of adding chlorine to value of Young's modulus of elasticity is more elastic
drinking water to kill parasites, bacteria and viruses. and has less strain.
Metallurgy 281 YCT
573. Zinc is coated on Mild Steel. It is known as 578. What is the percentage of carbon in mild steel?
(a) Brittle (a) Less than 0.3%
(b) P.V.C. (b) Less than 2% but more than 0.3%
(c) Softner (c) More than 2%
(d) Galvanised Iron (G.I.) (d) None of the above
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
Ans. (d) : Zinc is coated on mild steel, it is called Ans. (a) : The percentage of carbon in mild steel is less
galvanised iron. It is said that it stops the corrosion. It is than 0.3%. Mild steel has ductility.
a metallurgical process. 579. Steel which contains 0.8% carbon is called
574. The melting point of mild steel is (a) Hypoeutectoid steel
(a) 1500oC (b) 900oC (b) Hypereutectoid steel
(c) 500oC (d) 3000oC (c) Eutectoid steel
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 (d) Cast iron
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
Ans. (a) : The melting point of mild steel is 1500oC.
Ans. (c) : Steel in which 0.8% carbon is present is
• Mild steel is a type of carbon steel that contains a low
called eutectoid steel. Eutectoid steel is of the following
level of carbon.
types–
575. At room temperature plain carbon steel (i) Hyper eutectoid steel
contains (ii) Hypo eutectoid steel
(a) Ferrite and Cementite Hyper eutectoid steel contains more than 0.8% carbon.
(b) Ferrite and Pearlite It consists of a mixture of cementite and pearlite.
(c) Pearlite and Cementite Hypo eutectoid steel contain less than 0.8% carbon. It
(d) All the three is mixture of pearlite and ferrite.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 580. What is the percentage of carbon in high
Ans. (d): Plain carbon steel of room temperature carbon steel :
contains all ferrite, cementite, pearlite. (a) 0.8% to 0.2% (b) 0.5% to 1%
576. High speed steel is an alloy of (c) 4% to 6.7% (d) 6.7% to 10%
(a) Tungsten, steel, copper ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
(b) Steel, Nickel Ans. (b): Percentage of carbon in high carbon steel is
(c) Tungsten, chromium, vanadium 0.5% to 1%.
(d) Nickel Type of steel Amount of carbon
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 1. Dead mild steel 0.05 – 0.15%
Ans. (c) : High speed steel is an alloy of tungsten, 2. Low carbon and mild steel 0.15 – 0.30%
chromium, vanadium. 3. Medium carbon steel 0.30–0.8%
A 18-4-1 H.S.S contain 18% tungsten, 4% chromium 4. High carbon steel 0.8 or 1.5%
and 1% vanadium. It has a carbon content of 0.7%. 5. Tool steel 0.9 – 1.5%
High speed steel maintain their hardness up to 650º 581. Increase of carbon content in steel results in :
temperature. (a) Reduction in strength
577. 18-8 stainless steel means (b) Increase in hardness
(a) 18% Tungsten & 8% Chromium (c) Increase in strength
(b) 18% Chromium & 8% Nickel (d) Increase in ductility
(c) 18% Nickel & 8% Chromium ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
(d) 18% Chromium & 8% Cobalt Ans. (b) : Increase of carbon content in steel results in
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 increase weldability. It improve hardenability.
Ans. (b) : A 18-8 stainless steel contain 18% chromium 582. Stainless steels are alloy steels which essentially
and 8% nickel and up to 0.7% carbon. contains minimum 12% of the following
element :
• Stainless steel does not rust and does not attract (a) Carbon (b) Nickel
magnets. (c) Chromium (d) Cobalt
• Stainless steel is used for making cutting tools, ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
surgical instruments, household utensils, automobile Ans. (c) : Stainless steels are alloy of steels which
parts etc. contain minimum 12% chromium.
Metallurgy 282 YCT
583. Main alloying element in HSS is .................. Ans : (d) Forged mild steel is material of stake.
(a) Tungsten (b) Chrominum • Originally stakes were made out of sharpened wood.
(c) Vanadium (d) Nickel Today, stakes are made out of ultralight metal like
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 aluminium or titanium.
Ans. (a) : Generally 18:4:1 ratio is used in high speed 588. What is the material of Chisel?
steel. Contains 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1% (a) Low Carbon Steel
vanadium. It has a carbon content of 0.7%. Therefore (b) Tool steel
the main alloying element in high speed steel is (c) Cast iron
tungsten. (d) Medium carbon steel
584. Specific gravity of steel as compared to DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
aluminium is– Ans : (b) Tool steel is used to make chisel.
(a) More
• Chisel meaning is a hand tool used for carving,
(b) Less
cutting, shaping hard materials such as wood, stone,
(c) Equal
metal.
(d) Varies with the weight of certain type of
substance 589. What is the amount of carbon present is low
DRDO Machinist.2016 carbon steel?
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (a) 0.15-0.3% (b) 0.3-0.6%
(c) 0.9-1.5% (d) 0.6-1.5%
Ans : (a) Specific gravity of steel as compared to
aluminium is more. Specific gravity of steel is 7.8 and DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
specific gravity of aluminium is 2.7. Ans : (a) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon, in which
585. Alloy of high speed steel are in ratio of the maximum amount of carbon is up to 1.5 percent. On
(a) Chromium = 8%, Tungsten = 4%, Vanadium the basis of carbon percentage, there are following types
= 1% of steel–
(b) Chromium = 4%, Tungsten = 18%, Carbon percentage
Vanadium = 1% 1. Low carbon steel 0.15% to 0.3%
(c) Cobalt = 8%, Tungsten = 4%, Vanadium = 2. Medium carbon steel 0.3 to 0.8%
1% 3. High carbon steel 0.8 to 1.5%
(d) Chromium = 4%, Tungsten = 1%, Vanadium 590. High speed steel is forged. Which colour
= 1% indicates the most suitable forging
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 temperature?
Ans: (b) High speed steel is a type of alloy steel in (a) Red (b) Pale brown
which there is 18% tungsten, 4% chromium and 1% (c) Dark cherry red (d) Yellow
vanadium. It contain about 0.7% carbon. It is used for UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
making drill, reamer, milling cutter etc. Ans: (d) If high speed steel is forged, the yellow colour
Tungsten–Its presence increases toughness of hardened indicates the most suitable forging temperature.
steel. S.N Temp. Colour
Chromium–It enhances wear resistance. 1. 13000C White
Vanadium–Increases the heat tolerance of steel. 2. 12000C Yellow white
0
586. How an orange peel can be avoided in cold 3. 1100 C Yellow
working of metals? 4. 10000C Bright cherry red
(a) Using fine grained steel 5. 8000C Dull cherry red
(b) By temper rolling 6. 6000C Red
(c) Stretching the strip 7. 5000C Dull Brown
(d) Machining 591. What are the upper critical temperatures for
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 steel?
Ans : (a) By using fine fibrous steel the condition of (a) Depends on the rate of heating
formation of orange peel in cold working of metals can (b) Depends on the rate of cooling
be prevented. (c) Is constant
587. What is the material of stakes? (d) Varies according to the amount of carbon in
(a) High speed steel (b) High carbon steel the steel.
(c) Cast steel (d) Forged mild steel UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans : (d) Upper critical temperature for steel varies
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 according to the amount of carbon in the steel.
Metallurgy 283 YCT
592. What is a steel rule made of? (b) Acid Bessemer and acid open hearth
(a) Cast steel processes
(b) Soft steel (c) Acid Bessemer and basic open hearth
(c) Stainless steel processes
(d) High carbon steel (d) Basic Bessemer and basic open hearth
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 processes
Ans : (c) A steel rule is made of stainless steel. LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
593. Steel containing 0.15 to 0.45% carbon is Ans : (a) Duplex process of steel making is a
called? combination of Basic Bessemer and acid open hearth
(a) Dead mild steel process. Steel is made by this process at Tata Iron and
(b) Heat resistant steel Steel Works, Jamshedpur.
(c) High carbon steel
(d) Low carbon steel 598. The lower critical point for all steel is :
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 (a) 600° C (b) 723° C
Ans : (d) Steel containing 0.15 to 0.45% carbon is (c) 913° C (d) 1143° C
called low carbon steel. It cannot be hardened and NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
tempered but can be rolled. Its small parts are made by LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
forging. Ans : (b) The lower critical point for all steel is 723ºC.
594. 0.8% carbon steel has _____ . It is the temperature of pearlite to austenite
(a) No critical point transformation. Below this temperature austenite does
(b) Three critical point not exist.
(c) Two critical point 599. What are races and balls made of?
(d) One critical point (a) High tungsten carbide
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 (b) Molybdenum
Ans : (d) 0.8% carbon steel has a critical point. This (c) High speed steel
point is called the eutectoid point. At this point the (d) Chromium steel
ferrite is completely converted to pearlite. Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
595. Steel is an alloy of which of the following? Ans : (d) Races and balls are made of chromium steels.
(a) Carbon and tin High speed steels are used to make tools.
(b) Cast iron and nickel
600. 18/8 stainless steel has–
(c) Iron and carbon
(d) Iron and manganese (a) 18% Ni, 8% Cr (b) 18% W, 8% Cr
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 (c) 18% Cr, 8% Ni (d) 18% Cr, 8% W
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (c) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon. It also Ans : (c) 18/8 stainless steel contains 18% Cr, 8% Ni.
contain small amount of impurities which can't be It is austenitic form of stainless steel. It is very resistant
removed. The maximum amount of carbon in steel is to corrosion and oxidation.
upto 1.5%. 601. What is the forging temperature range of high
596. Metal cutting chisels are made of which of the carbon steel?
following? (a) 8150C to 8500C
(a) Low alloy steel (b) 11000C to 11500C
(b) Low carbon steel (c) 12100C to 12950C
(c) High speed steel (d) 6500C to 7600C
(d) High carbon steel UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (b) The forging temperature range of high carbon
Ans : (d) Metal cutting chisels are made of high carbon
steel is 1100ºC to 1150ºC
steel. High carbon steel contain 0.75 to 1.5% of carbon.
S.N. Material Melting Point
It can be hardened by heat treatments. It is also
tempered at 370ºC. It is used for making sharp edged 1. Pure iron about 15280C
cutting tools. 2. Cast iron 12000C to 12500C
3. Copper 10800C
597. Duplex process of steel making is a
combination of : 4. Brass 9000C
(a) Basic Bessemer and acid open hearth 5. Lead 3270C
processes 6. Tin 2350C
Metallurgy 284 YCT

602. Stainless steel is used in which types of tools? Ans : (c) Stainless steel is an alloy of iron that contains
(a) in common tools chromium upto 15%. It is hard and does not rust. It is
(b) in surgical tools used in making tensils, blades, valves etc.
(c) in measuring tools 607. Which of the following elements are included in
(d) None of the above stainless steel?
DRDO Turner.2016 (a) Chromium, Nickel and iron
Ans : (b) Stainless steel is an alloy of iron that is (b) Nickel, Iron and Carbon
resistant to rusting and corrosion. It contains at least (c) Iron, Carbon and Copper
11% chromium and may elements such as carbon, other (d) Iron, Chromium, Nickel and Carbon
non metals and metals to obtain other desired UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
properties. It is used to make blades, surgical tools etc. Ans : (d) Stainless steel is an alloy which contain iron,
603. In the structure of steel, globular form of chromium, nickel and carbon.
cementite is obtained through: • Chromium is the main alloying element of stainless
(a) Normalising (b) Carbonizing steel.
(c) Spheroidising (d) Malleabilising • These can be used is cookware, cutlery, surgical
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 instruments, major appliances, storage tank, etc.
Ans : (c) The steel is heated slightly above the lower 608. The hardness of steel is increased by providing–
critical temperature and heated at this temperature for (a) Carbon content
some time and then cooled slowly in the furnace, it (b) Manganese content
produces round and globular form of carbide (c) Silicon content
(cementite). (d) Chromium content
• It is mainly used for low carbon steel. UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
• Spherodizing steel is used for facillilate the Ans : (a) Hardness of steel depends on the carbon it
processing of steel and to increase their ductility. contains. As the carbon content increases its hardness
increases.
604. Steel becomes soft on heating but its _______
increases. 609. How much carbon is there in steel?
(a) Compressive strength (a) 0.1-2% (b) 7-10%
(b) Tensile strength (c) 10-15% (d) 0
(c) Plasticity DRDO Turner.2016
(d) Ductility Ans : (a) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon, with
DRDO Turner.2016 carbon content up to a maximum of 2%.
Ans : (b) Steel becomes soft on heating but its tensile Type of steel Carbon content
Dead mild steel – up to 0.15%
strength increases.
Low carbon steel – 0.15% to 0.45%
• When steel is heated then δl increase
Medium carbon steel – 0.45% to 0.8%
We know tensile stress = strain × E
High carbon steel – 0.8% to 1.7%
σ ∝ δl
610. To obtain stainless steel from steel, it is further
605. Haematite is an ore/mineral of modified by adding some element to it. Which of
(a) Zinc (b) Iron the following should not be used for that
(c) Lead (d) Manganese purpose?
DRDO Turner.2016 (a) Carbon (b) Silicon
Ans : (b) (c) Manganese (d) Nickel
Metal Ore DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016
Iron Hematite, magnetite, siderite Ans : (b) To obtain stainless steel from steel, it is
Aluminium Bauxite further modified by adding carbon, manganese, nickel
Copper Copper pyrites, malachite cuprite, etc. while silicon is not added to it.
copper glance 611. Steel is mainly a mixture of iron and–
Zinc Sphalerite, calamine, zincite (a) Chromium (b) Nickel
606. The important metal used along with iron in (c) Manganese (d) Carbon
making stainless steel is– HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) Carbon (b) Tin (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(c) Chromium (d) Alluminium Ans : (d) Steel is an alloy of iron and carbon, with
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 carbon content up to a maximum of 2%.
Metallurgy 285 YCT

612. The percentage of silver in German silver is– Ans : (c) Springs are made from metals like stainless
(a) 1% (b) 5% steel, Titanium alloy, carbon steel, chromium steel,
(c) 0% (d) None of the above vanadium steel, hard drawn copper silicon, manganese
DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016 steel and phosphor bronze. Spring material should have
Ans : (c) German silver is an alloy of copper 50%, high toughness and strength property.
Zinc 35% and Nickel 15%. 618. Which metals are mixed in high speed steel?
613. Which substance is not used in making of (a) 1% Vanadium (b) 4% Chromium
stainless steel? (c) 18% Tungsten (d) All of the above
(a) Carbon (b) Chromium (RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009)
(c) Manganese (d) Molybdenum Ans : (d) A common type of high speed steel contains
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016 18% tungsten, 4% chromium, 1% vanadium and only
Ans : (d) Carbon, chromium and manganese are used 0.5-0.8% carbon.
to make stainless steel. 619. When is high speed steel used?
• Chromium prevents the iron from rusting and also (a) In ordinary tools (b) In cutting tools
provides heat resistant properties. (c) In measuring tools (d) All
614. Case hardening of mild steel is done. Its core is (RRB Banglre ALP, 08.07.2007)
(a) Completely rigid Ans : (b) High speed steel is often used for making
(b) Soft and malleable drills, cutters and cutting tools of lathe, shaper and
(c) Brittle planer etc.
(d) None of the above 620. The melting point carbon steel compare to
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001) alloy steel is?
Ans : (b) Case hardening is the process of hardening (a) Less (b) More
the surface to resist wear and tear. While its core (c) Equal (d) None of the above
remains soft and malleable to resist shocks. (RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008)
Case hardening process are– Ans : (a) Melting point of carbon steel is less than alloy
1. Carburising 2. Nitriding 3. Cyniding steel.
4. Flame hardening 5. Induction hardening
621. Rails are made of
615. Increasing the amount of carbon in steel– (a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel
(a) Increase ductility (c) High carbon steel (d) High speed steel
(b) Increase hardness (IOF Fitter, 2012)
(c) Become soft
Ans : (c) Rails are made of high carbon steel. In HCS
(d) Increase malleability
the carbon percentage varies from 0.8 to 1.5%. A high
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
percentage of carbon gives hardness and strength to the
Ans : (b) The hardness of steel depends on carbon metal.
content. Increasing the amount of carbon increases
• All modern rails are hot rolled steel with a cross
hardness and strength and improve hardenability, but
section approximate to an I-beam.
decreases ductility.
622. The hardness of steel basically depends on–
616. Circlip are made of metal–
(a) On the percentage of carbon
(a) Mild steel (b) Stainless steel
(b) On the percentage of mixed
(c) Spring steel (d) Wrought iron
(c) On employing heat treatment
(d) Size of carbide and their distribution in iron
Ans : (c) Circlip are generally made of spring steel, so
(RRB Siliguri ALP, 2014)
that fasteners can be elastically deformed to a
Ans : (a) The hardness of steel depends on the
reasonable degree and brought back to their original
percentage of carbon. As the carbon content increases,
shape. The circlip are used to hold the rotating parts.
hardness of steel increase.
617. Which of the following is not a spring
623. The process of forming a thin phosphate
material–
(a) Stainless steel coating on steel, which serves as a base or
(b) Silicon manganese steel primer for enamels and paints, is called–
(c) Mild steel (a) Anodizing (b) Colorizing
(d) Phosphor bronze (c) Parkerizing (d) None of the above
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
Metallurgy 286 YCT
Ans : (c) Parkerizing is a method of protecting a steel 629. Wrought iron is produced using______.
surface from corrosion through the application of a (a) Fractional distillation process
chemical phosphate conversion coating. (b) Dryers process
624. What size steel grade does the Brinell hardness (c) Aston process
testing apparatus use? (d) Fending process
(a) 4 mm (b) 5 mm
(c) 10 mm (d) 15 mm
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 Ans. (c) : Wrought iron is produced using aston
Ans : (b) Brinell hardness testing apparatus use 5 mm process.
size steel grade. Aston or Byers process– In this process the pig iron is
625. Which of the following is hardest? fist melted in a cupola and then refined in a bessemer
(a) Mild steel (b) High speed steel converter. This refined metal is then poured into a ladle
(c) Cast iron (d) Glass (known as shotting) which contains a required amount
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009) of slag previously prepared in a small open hearth
Ans : (b) In the given option high speed steel is hardest furnace.
material. 630. In which furnace cast iron is manufactured?
• Mild steel contains 0.25% carbon content. (a) Blast furnace (b) Pudding furnace
• Cast iron contains 2% to 4.5% carbon content. (c) LDM furnace (d) Cupola furnace
626. The thin layer of zinc on the surface of steel BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
and iron objects is called?
(a) Hot dipping (b) Tinning Ans. (d) : Cast iron is manufactured in cupola furnace.
(c) Galvanizing (d) Electroplating • Pig iron is manufactured in blast furnace.
(RRB Bhubneswar ALP, 15.07.2012) • Wrought iron is manufactured in puddling furnace.
Ans : (c) Galvanizing is the process of applying a • Cast iron is an alloy with a high carbon content (at
protective zinc coating to steel or iron to prevent least 1.7% and usually 3.0-3.7%).
rusting. The most common method is hot dip • It is useful derives from its relatively low melting
galvanizing, in which the parts are submerged in a both temperature.
of hot, molten zinc.
631. Aston process is used to produce ...............
627. Stainless steel 'corrosion proof steel' is an alloy
(a) Wrought iron (b) Cast iron
of the following–
(a) Iron, carbon and nickel (c) Copper (d) High speed steel
(b) Iron and manganese BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
(c) Iron, chromium and zinc Ans. (a) : Aston process is used to produce wrought
(d) Iron, chromium and carbon, nickel iron.
(RRB Allahabad ALP, 03.08.2008) • In this process the pig iron is first melted in a cupola
Ans : (d) Stainless steel is an alloy iron, carbon, and then refined in a bessemer converter.
chromium and nickel. Stainless steel has high corrosion
• The refined metal poured into a small open heath
resistance, stainless steel is used in cookware, cutlery,
furnace which contains a require amount of slag.
surgical instruments, storage tank etc.
• In this process temperature of the slag is very low
5. Furnaces so refined metal solidifying rapidly and producing
small pieces of the metal.
628. The output from blast furnace is called_____. • The small pieces produced settled in bottom of the
(a) Low alloy steel ladle and weld together as spogy mass.
(b) Silicon killed iron • The balls of spongy mass are pressed to removed
(c) Mild steel slag which known as bloom.
(d) Pig iron • The bloom is passed through rolling mills which
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 convert it into desired shape of wrought iron.
Ans. (d) : The output from blast furnace is called pig 632. What is the name of furnace of obtain cast
iron. iron?
• Pig iron has a very high carbon content typically 3.5 (a) Cupola furnace (b) blast furnace
to 4.5%, therefore, it is an impure form of iron. (c) Electric furnace (d) None of the above
• Wrought iron is the purest form of iron. It has an iron BEML 2022
alloy with a very low carbon content (less than 0.08%) HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
Metallurgy 287 YCT
Ans. (a) : A cupola furnace is a vertical cylindrical 637. What is produced from blast furnace?
furnace used for melting only cast Iron. (a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron
• Electric furnace is used for heating purpose in various (c) Malleable iron (d) None of the above
industrial production process. HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
• Officially answered is given (d). Ans. (a) : Pig iron is produced from blast furnace.
633. Blast furnace produces • Blast furnaces used carbon as a fuel.
(a) casting (b) steel • Blast furnaces are also used for lead and copper.
(c) pig iron (d) melting iron • Blast furnaces aer estimated to have been responsible
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 for over 4% of global greenhouse gas emissions.
• Blast furnaces remains an important part of modern
Ans. (c) : Blast furnace produces pig iron from iron ore.
Pig iron is produced by smelting or iron ore in blast iron production.
furnace or by smelting in electric furnace. 638. The metal which is to be coated is known as___
634. In a blast furnace the mostly used flues is (a) anode (b) electron acceptor
(a) coke (b) iron ore (c) substrate (d) cathode
(c) slag (d) limestone RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
IOCL 2020Ans. (c) : Substrate– A substrate, in the context of
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 corrosion is the parent or base material to which a
Ans. (d) : The blast furnace is a brick lined stainless coating is applied or the material upon which a process
steel stack, which is heated using preheated on is conducted. A substrate can be nearly any type of
limestone, coke and iron ore are placed in the blast material, including metals, plastic and ceramics.
furnace and heated. The coke, limestone and iron react
639. Pig iron is product of
in the presence of heat producing slag and liquid iron.
(a) Cupola furnace (b) Blast furnace
• Limestone used to remove impurities from the blast
furnace when making iron. (c) Open hearth furnace (d) Electric arc furnace
• Blast furnace mostly used fuel is coke. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
635. Which type of blowers advances into the Ans. (b)
furnace, cleans and comes back? • Pig iron is product of blast furnace.
(a) Insertable kinetic blower • Pig iron has a high carbon content, typically 3.5%-
(b) Wall blower 4.5% along with small percentage of silicon,
(c) Retractable blower sulphur, manganese and phosphorous.
(d) Air heat blower • It is the crude form of iron is used as a raw material
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022 for the production of various other ferrous metals.
Ans. (c) : Retractable blower use air saturated or 640. Which one the following processes can produce
superheated steam as a cleaning, medium and their high alloy steel with accurately specified
compact design makes it possible to fit tight space in chemical composition?
furnace. (a) Bessemer process
636. What is the name of stake? (b) Open hearth furnace
(c) Electric arc process
(d) Crucible process
Ans. (c) The electric arc furnace is used to reduce iron
from iron ore. Heat is generated from an electric arc
(a) Horse (b) Bick iron between electrodes. Oxygen is blown into the furnace,
(c) Funnel stake (d) Creasing iron and lime and other material are added to combine with
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 the impurities and form slag. Molten iron is extracted
Ans. (c) : The given figure is funnel stake. and poured out via a tapping spout.
• A funnel is the smokestack or chimney on a ship used 641. Fire clay, dinas and talc bricks are main
to expel boiler steam and smoke or engine exhaust. refractory material employed in forge .
• There are 3 core of funnel stake– What is the melting point of natural talc
°
1. Tripwire funnel (a) 1000 C (b) 1200°C
°
2. Webinar funnel (c) 1500 C (d) 1700°C
3. High ticket funnel NTPC Fitter 2016
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Metallurgy 288 YCT
Ans. (c) : (c) let out smoke and dust

• Talc's melting point is at 1500oC. (d) prevent the heat from escaping from the
• Talc is a metamorphic and hydrothermal mineral hearth
which is found typically in the greens chist facies of RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
metamorphic rocks and is shear zones where it is an Ans. (c) : The forge supplies heat for raising the
alteration product. temperature of the metal to be forged.
642. The charge is fed into the blast furnace through Parts of a forge and their use :
the– • Hearth • Tyers • Cooling tank • Air valve • Blower
(a) Throat (b) Stack • Hood and chimney.
(c) Bosh (d) Tuyere
647. Which of the following furnaces is used in
puddling process, used for obtaining wrought
iron?
Ans. (a) : (a) Cupola furnace
• The charge is fed info the blast furnace through the (b) Bessemer converter
throat.
(c) Reverberatory furnace
• A blast furnace is a type of metallurgical furnace
(d) Blast furnace
used for smelting to produce industrial metals,
generally pig iron, but also others such as lead or RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
copper. Ans. (c) :
643. What is contained inside the well of cupola? • Reverberatory furnace is used in puddling process,
(a) Molten iron (b) Solid iron used for obtaining wrought iron.
(c) Molten steel (d) Solid steel • The puddling process consisted of the puddling
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 furnace and the rolling mill.
Ans. (a) : 648. ____ is use as flux in the blast furnace.
(a) Limestone (b) Coke
• Molten iron is contained inside the well of cupola.
(c) Charcoal (d) Oxygen
• A cupola furnace is a melting device used in
foundries that can be used to melt cast iron.
Ans. (a) :
644. What is the range of efficiency of cupola?
• Limestone is use as flux in the blast furnace.
(a) 20% to 40 % (b) 30% to 50%
• The main advantage of a blast furnace are that it is a
(c) 40% to 60% (d) 50% to 70%
cost effective method of producing iron and steel,
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 for cheaper than other methods.
Ans. (b) : • A blast furnace is type of metallurgical furnace used
• The efficiency of a cupola varies from 30% to 50%. for smelting to produce industrial metals.
• The efficiency of cupola does not depend on heat in 649. To obtain cast iron, cupola furnace is used. The
the air blast. base of the cupola furnace is filled with layers
• The efficiency of cupola depends on the heat used of ___
in preheating, heat used in coke. (a) Sand (b) Coke
645. The function of tyers in the forge is to (c) Iron (d) Slag
(a) allow the forced air into the hearth BHEL 2020
(b) act as an outlet for the products of RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
combustion Ans. (b) :
(c) allow the cooled air • To obtain cast iron, cupola furnace is used. The base
(d) allow the work pieces to be heated in the of the cupola furnace is filled with layers of coke.
forge. • The cupola is a most widely used foundry furnace
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 for melting ferrous metals and alloys.
Ans. (b): The function of types in the forge is to act as 650. A steel made tool for placing coal or coke in the
an outlet for the products of combustion. furnace, to set coal pieces in furnace, and also
to remove ash from the furnace, is called –
646. The function of the hood in the forge is to…
(a) shovel (b) sprinkler
(a) prevent rain water falling on the fire
(c) hammer (d) tong
(b) give appearance to the forge
Metallurgy 289 YCT
Ans. (a): Ans. (a) :

• A shovel is a tool used for digging, lifting, and • Coke is obtained by distillation of bituminous coal
moving bulk materials, such as soil, coal, coke, in absence of oxygen.
gravel, show etc. • Charcoal is a type of fuel created when the wood is
• Shovel is used in furnace for placing coal or coke. buned in completely.
651. ______ is used to localize the heat generated 656. Which of the following parts of a gorge is made
inside the hearth. up of high quality refractory bricks to
(a) Blower (b) Fan withstand the high temperature, arised in the
(c) Sprinkler (d) Tong forge?
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (a) Tuyers (b) Chimney
Ans. (c): Sprinkler is used to localize the heat generated (c) Hearth (d) None of the above
inside the hearth. RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
652. Which of the following types of coal has higher Ans. (c) :
carbon content?
• A forge is a type of hearth used for heating metals,
(a) Anthracite (b) Bituminous
or the workplace where such a hearth is located.
(c) Lignite (d) Pit
• The hearth is the container for liquid hot metal
liquid slag, and coke.
657. The poisonous smoke of coal in the furnace is
Ans. (a) :
let out through the _____
• Anthracite coal has higher carbon content. (a) tuyers (b) hearth
• Coal is a combustible black or brownish-black (c) hood and chimney (d) tank
sedimentary rock, formed as rock strata called coal
seams.
Ans. (c) :
• Type of coal–
• The poisonous smoke of coal in the furnace is let
(i) Anthracite (ii) Lignite (iii) Bituminous.
out through the hood and chimney.
653. Which of the following tanks is used to
• Chimneys are provided over the furnace in factories
maintain cooling of tuyers?
because the hot gases coming out of the furnace are
(a) Quenching tank (b) Cooling tank
less dense than the air.
(c) Coal tank (d) Surge tank
658. The main function of tuyers in a forging hearth
BDL Technician 2022
is..........
Ans. (b) : (a) To send cooling water
• Cooling tank is used to maintain cooling of tuyers. (b) To start initial fire
• The blast furnace tuyer is cooled by the water (c) To send forced air to burn fuel
supplied at a rate of 15-25 m3/hour directly to the (d) To maintain temperature
inner face of the tuyer. RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
654. ________ are the tools which are used for Ans. (c) :
finishing the site of the punched holes.
• The main function of tuyers in a forging hearth is to
(a) Drifts (b) Leg vice
send forced air to burn fuel.
(c) Punch (d) Tongs
Tuyer–
• The forced air is sent through the tuyers to burn the
Ans. (a) : fuel.
• Drift are the tools which are used for finishing the • The tuyers are covered with refractory material to
site of the punched holes. avoid melting.
• A drift tends to be softer and has a blunt end and is • The air also passes through a cooling tank.
designed to widen a punched hole.
659. By what name the process of converting iron
655. Which of the following can be obtained by
ore into pig iron by chemical reaction is known
distillation of bituminous coal in absence of
as?
oxygen.
(a) Ironing (b) Charging
(a) Coke (b) Charcoal (c) Gliding (d) Smelting
(c) Ash (d) None of the above UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Metallurgy 290 YCT
Ans. (d) : Smelting is process of reducing the ore with 665. The cupola is used to make :
carbon in the presence of a flux. The smelting is carried (a) Pig iron (b) Cast iron
out in a large tower called blast furnace. (c) Wrought iron (d) Steel
660. Pig iron is melted and made into wrought iron SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
(a) In blast furnace (b) In pudding furnace Ans. (b) :
(c) In hearth furnace (d) In cupola Ferrous metal Furnace used in production
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 1. Pig iron Blast furnace
Ans. (b): Pig iron is melted and made into wrought 2. Cast iron Cupola furnace
iron. In puddling process, iron is the purest form of iron. 3. Wrought iron Puddling furnace
It has very low carbon content less than 0.08%. 4. Steel Crusible, Bessemer furnace
661. In basic bessemer process, the furnace is lined 666. In which furnace, is pig iron manufactured?
with: (a) Blast furnace
(a) Silica bricks (b) Open hearth furnace
(b) A mixture of tar and burnt dolomite bricks (c) Cupola furnace
(c) Cement bricks (d) Electric Arc furnace
(d) Both silica and cement bricks RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
Ans. (b) : In basic bessemer process, the furnace is Ans : (a) Pig iron is manufactured in blast furnace by
lined with a mixture of tar and burned dolomite. This smelting of iron ores.
process is application for making steel from pig iron • The cast iron is obtained by remelting pig iron with
which contains more than 1.5% phosphorus. coke and lime stone in a furnace known as cupola.
662. Duplex process of steel manufacturing is 667. Pit furnace is also named as:
combination of- (a) Arc furnace
(a) Alkaline bassemer and basic open Furnace (b) Induction furnace
process (c) Cupola furnace
(b) Alkaline bassemer and Alkaline open furnace (d) Crucible furnace
process LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
(c) Basic bassemer and Alkaline open furnace Ans : (d) Pit furnace is also named as crucible process
process
is very homogeneous, free from slag and dirt and much
(d) Basic bassemer and basic open furnace
superior to cement steel. The steel so produced is
process
known as crucible steel.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 668. Following are the furnace in which steel is
produced–
Ans. (a) : The duplex process of steel making is a
(a) Pudding furnace
combination of alkaline bessemer process and basic
(b) Open hearth furnace
open hearth process.
(c) Blast furnace
663. What is the order of temperature of heat
(d) Cupola furnace
produced in an electric arc furnace?
(a) 3000ºC - 4000ºC (b) 4000ºC - 5000ºC
(c) 5000ºC - 6000ºC (d) 6000ºC - 7000ºC Ans : (b) Open hearth furnace is used for produced
ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018 steel.
Ans. (d) : The order of temperature of heat produced in The method is also called siemens martin process. Most
an electric are furnace is 6000ºC-7000ºC. of the steel is prepared in our country by this method
This process is mainly used for the preparation of high only. By this method cast iron or pig iron is melted and
quality and special alloy steels of high melting point. carbon and other impurities are removed from it. Red
heamatite arc is used to oxidize impurities like carbon,
664. The instrument used to measure high
temperature in the furnace is- silicon and magnese. Apart from this, ferro magneties is
(a) pyrometer (b) Colorimeter also used.
(c) Thermometer (d) Barometer 669. Puddling furnace is used for the production of?
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (a) Steel
Ans. (a) : Pyrometer is used to measure high (b) Wrought iron
temperature in the furnace. Most pyrometer work by (c) Cast iron
measuring radiation from the body whose temperature (d) Pig iron
is to be measured. UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Metallurgy 291 YCT
Ans : (b) Puddling furnace is used for production of Ans : (b) For melting cast iron, cupola furnace is used.
wrought iron. Wrought iron is the purest form of iron. Cupola is a heavy furnace and has the capability to melt
down heavy metals like cast iron.
670. The material used in furnace wall as a inner

most layer, to resist high temperatures,
physical and chemical reactions is called..........
(a) Epoxy
(b) Char coal
(c) Refractory
(d) Nitrading
Ans : (c) The material used in furnace wall as a inner 674. The Wrought iron is produced by remelting
most layer to resist high temperature, physical and pig iron in :
chemical reactions is called refractory. Refractory (a) Cupola furnace (b) Blast furnace
bricks are made from fire clay, using the same process (c) Electric are furnace (d) Puddling furnace
as ordinary clay. NLC Technician 24-09.2022
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
671. The process of obtaining pig iron from iron ore
is called.........? Ans : (d) The wrought iron is produced by remelting
pig iron in puddling furnace.
(a) Puddling
(b) Smelting
(c) Prickling
(d) Blasting
Ans : (b) The process of obtaining pig iron from iron
ore is called smelting. The smelting is carried out in
blast furnace. Pig iron from the blast furnace contains
90 to 92% of iron.
672. The required amount of air under pressure
enters the cupola furnace from the air chamber
675. The temperature of blast furnace is kept?
through openings, which are called : (a) 9600C (b) 19000C
(a) limbs (c) 1000 C to 1700 C (d) 36000C
0 0
(b) sprues (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(c) tuyeres Ans : (c) The temperature of blast furnace is around
(d) riser 1000ºC to 1700ºC. The lower part of furnace has
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 maximum temperature and upper part has minimum
Ans : (c) The required amount of air under pressure temperature. The blast furnace is used to obtain pig iron
enters the cupola furnace from the air chamber through from iron ores.
openings, which are called tuyeres. The tuyeres are 676. Impact test is used to determined?
always fitted in one or more numbers of rows. Auxiliary (a) Hardness (b) Ductility
tuyeres being more efficient are fitted in the cupola to (c) Toughness (d) Brittleness
supply more air and increase melting efficiency. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
673. For melting of cast iron, the commonly used (IOF Fitter, 2012)
furnace is : Ans : (c)
(a) Pit furnace Property Test
(b) Cupola furnace Ductility Tensile test
(c) Arc furnace Hardness Brinell hardness, Rockwell hardness,
(d) Rotary furnace Vicker hardness test
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 Toughness Impact test, Izode test
Metallurgy 292 YCT


Heat Treatment
5. Molten salt is used in_______for hardening.
1. Case hardening and (a) Liquid carburizing
Method of Case hardening (b) Pack carburizing
(c) Gas carburizing
1. Case hardening severity is depends on–
(d) Powder carburizing
I. Size of part
II. Position of case
Ans. (a) : Molten salt is used in liquid carburizing for
III. Activity of carburization media hardening. Liquid carburizing is cheaper than pack
(a) I, II and III (b) I and III carburizing.
(c) II and III (d) I and II • In liquid carburizing, the components are dipped in
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 a bath by trying them to a wire or placing them in a
Ans. (a) : Case hardening severity is depends on– wiring basket.
• Size of part • The thickness of the hard case also depends on the
percentage of sodium carburizing.
• Position of case
• In pack carburizing, the components are packed in a
• Activity of carburization media. cast iron or steel box with the powder of carburizing
2. The process used to produce a high surface material.
hardness and toughened core is called as: 6. Induction hardening is a method for______.
(a) Tempering (b) Normalizing (a) Case hardening (b) Impact hardening
(c) Case hardening (d) Hardening (c) Carburizing (d) Fatigue hardening
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
Ans. (c) : Process used to produce a high surface Ans. (a) : Induction hardening is a method for case
hardness and toughened core is called case hardening. hardening in case hardening, only upper surface of job
Types of case hardening– is hardened while its interior remains soft and tough.
1. Carburizing 2. Cyaniding 3. Nitriding 4. Induction • In the high frequency induction process, heat is
hardening 5. Flame hardening. generated by the current metal, because the current
flows more on the upper surface.
3. ____ is not a technique of hardening.
• In induction hardening, the depth of hardening can
(a) Carburizing (b) Atomization be controlled by choosing the appropriate
(c) Cyaniding (d) Nitriding frequency.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 7. Barium Carbonate is used as an______in solid
Ans. (b) : Atomization is not a technique of hardening. carburizing.
The various surface or case hardening process are as (a) Energizer (b) Effluence enhancer
follows : (c) Economizer (d) Erosion enhancer
(a) Carburizing (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d) UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
Induction hardening (e) Flame hardening. Ans. (a) : Barium carbonate (BaCO3) is used as an
4. Process of heating the metal beyond the critical energizer in solid carburizing.
temperature in a sealed container filled with There are three different forms of carburizing
ammonia is called as: 1 = Solid (Pack) carburizing
(a) Normalizing (b) Carburizing 2 = Liquid carburizing (cyaniding)
(c) Cyaniding (d) Nitriding 3 = Gas carburizing
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 8. Solid carburizing process is carried out by
(a) Heated Sodium Carbonate and Sodium
Ans. (d) : Nitriding is the case hardening process where
Cyanide salt bath
nitrogen is added to the surface of steel parts using
(b) Heating the packed box in an atmosphere of
dissociated ammonia as a source. Ammonia at a temperature from 480º C to
• Nitriding process uses nitrogen instead of carbon. 650 ºC
Heat Treatment 293 YCT
(c) Heating the parts in the molten Cyanide salt Ans. (b) : Galvanization is the process of coating a
bath at a temperature of 800 ºC to 850 ºC protective zinc layer to steel or iron to prevent rusting.
(d) Heating the packed box in carbonaceous • Zinc coating prevents corrosive substances from
medium about 900 ºC to 950 ºC reaching the underlying steel or iron.
12. In which method of surface hardening, the
Ans. (d) : The solid carburizing process is carried out surface remains free from scales?
by heating the packed box in carbonaceous medium (a) Nitriding (b) Case hardening
about 900oC to 950oC.
(c) Flame hardening (d) Induction hardening
• The medium is usually coke or charcoal mixed with
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
barium carbonate.
Ans. (d) : Induction hardening is the heating process
that increase the hardness and tensile strength of ferrous
materials.
• The surface of induction hardening remains free from
scales.
13. What is the name of part marked as 'X' an the
following pipe join?
9. Induction hardening is a method for_______.

(a) Riveting (b) Bolting
(c) Case hardening (d) Welding (a) Outer pipe
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (b) Hemp packing
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 (c) Tapered male thread
Ans. (c) : Case hardening is a method used to harden (d) Parallel female thread
the outer surface of low-carbon steel while leaving the HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
center or core soft and ductile. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
• Induction hardening is a method for case hardening. Ans. (b) :
Induction hardening–
• Quenched after the induction heating.
• Selective areas of the component heated by
induction heating to the desired depth.
10. At what temperature carburizing is carried
out? • It is used for help make better seals.
(a) 500ºC to 600ºC (b) 850ºC to 1000ºC • Parallel female thread used to seal on adjust face by
(c) 1000ºC to 1200ºC (d) 200ºC to 400ºC the use of gasket.
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 • Officially answer is given (a).
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 14. Which method of surface hardening is done in
Ans. (c) : Carburizing is a method of increasing the a heated salt bath?
hardness of only surface by the process of diffusion of (a) Flame hardening (b) Gas carburising
carbon & nitrogen. (c) Pack carburising (d) Liquid carburising
• Carburizing is carried out at 1000 to 1200ºC. HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021
• Carburizing is mainly of three types– Ans. (d) : Liquid carburizing is a process that is usually
(i) Pack carburizing for small and medium size part. In the salt bath the
(ii) Liquid carburizing carbon to be diffused in the workpiece come from
(iii) Gas carburizing molten salt that is mixture of sodium cyanide (NaCN)
11. Galvanized iron refers to iron coated with: and Barium chloride (BaCl2).
(a) Tin (b) Zinc • The process facilitates the production exterior metal
(c) Chromium (d) Germanium cases with a high carbon content that surface hardening.
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 • Flame hardening to produce a hard wear resistance
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 surface.
• Gas carburizing or gas hit riding process which 19. What happens in carburising process of steel?
produce nitrogen that enter the cases of the steel and (a) Nitrogen is mixed to surface
increase the hardness. (b) Core of steel component is hardened
• Pack carburization is process which involves placing (c) Carbon material is reduced on surface
steel item into a furnace in close proximity to high (d) Carbon is mixed in surface layer
carbon items. JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
15. The percentage of carbon in job for hardening IOCL 2020
is Ans. (d) : Carburising process–
(a) 0.1% (b) 0.2% • It is a surface hardening process.
(c) 0.4% (d) 0.5% • In this process, steel sample is heated in presence of
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 carbonaceous medium like charcoal, methane, ethane
Ans. (d) : Hardening–The objective of hardening is to gas or sodium carbonate salt.
produce the martensite. • Quenching must be done after this process.
Temperature range – 30º to 50ºC above the upper 20. Nitriding is a process of
critical temperature for hypo eutectoid steel. (a) Tempering (b) Annealing
• 30 to 50ºC above LCT for hyper eutectoid steel. (c) Quenching (d) Case hardening
• % of C in job for hardening = 0.5%. ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
16. In nitriding process the NH3 gas in introduced NTPC Fitter 2016
at Ans. (d) : Nitriding is a casehardening process in
(a) 500ºC – 560ºC (b) 575ºC – 600ºC which nitrogen is introduced into the surface of a
(c) 600ºC – 650ºC (d) 650ºC – 700ºC ferrous alloy such as steel. They are also used on
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 titanium , aluminum and molybdenum. The three main
Ans. (a) : In nitriding process the NH3 gas heated at method used are
temperature up to 500ºC the nitrogen dissociates i. Gas Nitriding
resulting into the part surface. ii. Salt Bath Nitriding
• It is used for hardening surface of steel. iii. Plasma Nitriding
17. Case hardening is a method of producing hard Note:- Nitriding processes are most commonly used on
skin on the surface of low- alloy steels.
(a) high-carbon steel parts 21. Case hardening operation is carried out on
(b) cast iron ____
(c) low-carbon steel parts (a) aluminums (b) mild steel
(d) alloy steel parts (c) cast iron (d) brass
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
Ans. (c) : Case hardening is method used to harden the Ans. (b) : Case hardening operation is carried out on
outer surface of low carbon steel while leaving the mild steel.
center or core soft and ductile. Case hardening– Case hardening is a method used to
Case hardening is a heat treatment process that produces harden the outer surface of low-carbon steel while
a surface which is resistant to wear, while maintaining leaving the center or core soft and ductile.
toughness and strength of the core. 22. The purpose of heat treatment is....
18. Nitriding is a process of (a) To make bright
(a) Tempering (b) To change in shape
(b) Annealing (c) To produce certain required properties
(c) Quenching (d) To prevent it from rusting
(d) Case hardening RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022 Ans. (c) : Heat treatment–
BEML 2022 • Its purpose is to change a mechanical property or
Ans. (d) : Nitriding is a process of case hardening. combination of mechanical properties so that the
Nitriding–Heating the steel in atmosphere of NH3 gas. metal will be more useful, serviceable and safe for a
Quenching is not required in nitriding. definite purpose.
Case hardening–Process of increasing the hardness of • By heat treating, a metal be made harder, stronger,
only surface by the process of diffusion of carbon or and more resistant to impact, heat treatment can also
nitrogen. make a metal softer and more ductile.

23. Measuring gauges require wear resistance. (a) Increasing the percentage of carbon of the
Which heat treatment process is required to get steel piece
such property? (b) Increasing the percentage of carbon of the
(a) Normalizing (b) Case hardening core of the piece
(c) Annealing (d) Tempering (c) Increasing the percentage of carbon on the
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 surface
Ans. (b) : Case hardening– It is desirable that a steel (d) Decreasing the percentage of carbon of the
being used should have a hardened surface to resist steel piece
wear and tear. At the sometime, it should have soft and RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
tough interior or core so that it is able to absorb any Ans. (c) : For case hardening the first stage is
shock. carburizing by carburizing it is meant increasing the
24. Normal hardening temperature of less than percentage of carbon on the surface.
0.83% carbon plain carbon steel is.... • Increasing carbon only on the surface of low carbon
(a) Below the upper critical range steel can give a hard surface and tough core.
(b) Above the upper critical range 28. Which one of the following heat treatment
(c) Below the lower critical range processes produces a scale-free surface on the
(d) Above the lower critical range component?
(a) Flame hardening (b) Case hardening
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) Nitriding (d) Induction hardening
Ans. (b) : Normal hardening temperature of less than
BHEL 2020
0.83% carbon plain carbon steel is above the upper
critical range.
Ans. (d) : Induction hardening heat treatment process
• Plain carbon steel in which carbon percentage is
produces a scale free surface on the component.
less than 0.83% are called hypo-eutectoid steel and
carbon percentage greater than 0.83% are called Induction hardening–
hyper-eutectoid steel. • Fastest method of case hardening.
25. Liquid carburising is done in a heated salt • Medium carbon steel can be hardened by this
bath. Which one of the following is not a technique.
carburising salt? • Copper induction coil is used in induction hardening
(a) Sodium carbonate (b) Sodium sulphate for application over camshaft, crankshaft.
(c) Sodium cyanide (d) Barium chloride 29. The process of increasing carbon percentage on
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 the surface of low-carbon steel is known as
(a) Hardening (b) Nitriding
Ans. (b) : Sodium sulphate is not a carburising salt.
(c) Carburizing (d) Tempering
Liquid carburizing is a process that is usually used for
small and medium sized parts. In the salt bath the
carbon to be diffused in the workpiece comes from a Ans. (c) : Carburising is the process of saturating the
molten salt that is a mixture of sodium cyanide (NaCN) surface layer of low carbon steel at 850oC-950oC with
and barium chloride (BaCl2). carbon from a carbon aceous source capable of giving
up its carbon to be metal.
Carburizing in salt bath comes with the advantages of a
flexible use, great temperature uniformity around the 30. The process of producing a component with
part and it is quite easy to control. tough and ductile core and a hard outer surface
is known as
26. After hardening process, the metal becomes
(a) Hardening (b) Case hardening
more hardened and also will become more
(c) Tempering (d) Annealing
(a) Brittle (b) Ductile
BDL Technician 2022
(c) Malleable (d) Tough
Ans. (b) : Case hardening or surface hardening– It is
desirable that a steel being used should have a hardened
Ans. (a) : Hardening is a heat treatment process in surface to resist wear and tear. At the sometime, it
which steel is heated at 30-50o above the critical range. should have soft and tough interior or core so that it is
Soaking time is allowed to enable the steel to obtain a able to absorb any shocks etc. This type of treatment is
uniform temperature throughout its cross-section. Then applied to gears, ball bearings, railway wheel etc. The
the steel is rapidly cooled through a cooling medium. various surface hardening or case hardening process are
• Hardening increase the brittleness in the metal. as follows–
27. For case hardening the first stage is (a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d)
carburising. By carburising it is meant... Induction Hardening (e) Flame hardening.
31. Which one of the following is the solid (a) To increase toughness
carburizing material? (b) To increase ductility
(a) Charcoal (b) Petrol (c) To increase hardness
(c) Austenite (d) Cementite (d) To reduce hardness
Ans. (a) : The carburizing mixture contains a carbon- Ans. (a) : Purpose of tempering–
rich material like charcoal along with an energizer. The • To reduce brittleness of the hardened steel.
energizer is composed of sodium carbonate (soda ash) • To remove internal stresses caused by rapid cooling
and barium carbonate. of steel.
32. While hardening, after heating the steel to the • To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue.
required temperature, it is held at that
36. One component of C50 steel is heated to 830ºC,
temperature as soaking time for normally
soaked at it for some time and then quenched
(a) 5 minutes for 40 mm thickness
in oil. Again it is heated to 600ºC and quenched
(b) 10 minutes for 5 mm thickness in oil. Name this process of heat treatment.
(c) 2 minutes for 20 mm thickness (a) Annealing
(d) 20 minutes for 2 mm thickness (b) Normalizing
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 (c) Hardening and tempering
Ans. (a) : While hardening, after heating the steel to the (d) Case hardening
required temperature, it is held at that temperature as RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
soaking time for normally 5 minutes for 40 mm
Ans. (c) : One component of C50 steel is heated to
thickness.
830oC soaked at it for same time and then quenched in
33. Which one of the following quenching media is oil. Again it is heated to 600oC and quenched in oil.
used for hardening H.S.S. tool? This process is hardening and tempering.
(a) Water (b) Brine solution
37. Which one of the following processes is used for
(c) Oil (d) Soda water hardening the surface of tool steel?
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (a) Carburizing (b) Cyaniding
Ans. (c) : (c) Induction hardening (d) Hardening
• High speed steels are used for cutting metals at a BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
much higher cutting speed than ordinary carbon tool Ans. (c) : Induction hardening is a process used for the
steels. surface hardening of tool steel and other alloy
• Quenching is slow in oils but quenching metal in oil components.
is the most popular method because it diminishes • Fastest method of case hardening.
risk of cracking and working.
• Medium carbon steel can be hardened by this
• Oil quenching media is used for hardening H.S.S. technique.
tool.
38. Lower critical temperature of high carbon steel
34. What is the hardening temperature for H.S.S. while hardening is
tool ?
(a) 960ºC (b) 900ºC
(a) 1250 ºC (b) 950 ºC
(c) 723ºC (d) 560ºC
(c) 850 ºC (d) 750 ºC
Ans. (c) :
Ans. (a) : 1250oC is the hardening temperature for
• The temperature, at which the change of structure to
H.S.S. tool.
austenite starts, 723oC, is called the lower critical
High speed steel (H.S.S.)–
temperature for all plain carbon steels.
• HSS is used for machining at high speed.
• The temperature at which the structure of steel
• Most common type of HSS are– completely changes to Austenite is called the upper
18 : 4 : 1 critical temperature. This varies depending on the
W = 18%, Cr = 4%, V = 1%. percentage of carbon in the steel.
• Tungsten increases red hardness. 39. The external surface of the part made of mild
• Chromium resist atmospheric corrosion. steel can be hardened by
• Vanadium increases hardness. (a) Tempering (b) Normalizing
35. Which one of the following is the purpose of (c) Cash hardening (d) Hardening
tempering a hardened steel component? RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
Ans. (c) : Case hardening– It is desirable that a steel Ans. (b) : After heating up to required hardening
being used should have a hardened surface to resist temperature, tool steels be quenched to build up
wear and tear. At the sometime, it should have soft and hardening structure.
tough interior or core so that it is able to absorb any 44. A punch is made out of unalloyed steel. After
shock.
hardening a crack takes place. What can be the
40. In nitriding process the NH3 gas is introduced reason to develop this crack?
at (a) The punch is too long heated
(a) 500ºC to 560ºC (b) 575ºC to 600ºC
(b) The punch is too little heated
(c) 600ºC to 650ºC (d) 650ºC to 700ºC
(c) The punch is too slowly quenched
(d) The punch is suddenly quenched
Ans. (a) : Nitriding–
• Nitriding is a case hardening process in which
nitrogen instead of carbon is added to the surface of Ans. (b) : A punch is made out of unalloyed steel. After
the steel. hardening a crack takes place. The reason to develop
• Nitriding heats the steel part to 482-621oC in an this crack is the punch is too little heated.
atmosphere of ammonia gas and dissociated 45. Case hardening is a method of producing hard
ammonia. skin on the surface of
• No quenching is done after nitriding. (a) High-carbon steel parts
41. In a case hardening process, ammonia gas is (b) Cast iron (heavy parts)
introduced on steel; the process is known as (c) Low carbon steel parts
(a) Cyaniding (b) Nitriding (d) Alloy steel parts
(c) Carburizing (d) Ammonising NLC Technician 24-09.2022
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (b) : Nitriding– Ans. (c) : Case hardening is a method used to harden
• Nitriding is a case hardening process in which the outer surface of low carbon steel while leaving the
nitrogen instead of carbon is added to the surface of center or core soft and ductile. Case hardening involves
the steel. heating the metal to its critical temperature in some
• Nitriding heats the steel part to 482-621oC in an carbonaceous metal.
atmosphere of ammonia gas and dissociated 46. The carburizing is done on ......
ammonia. (a) high carbon steel
• No quenching is done after nitriding. (b) medium carbon steel
42. "Cyaniding" and "Nitriding" are two methods (c) low carbon steel
of
(d) high speed steel
(a) Hardening (b) Case hardening
(c) Tempering (d) Normalising
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (c) : Carburizing–
Ans. (b) : Cyaniding and nitriding are two methods of • Carburizing process involves diffusing carbon into
case hardening. low carbon steel to form a high carbon steel surface.
Surface hardening or case hardening– It is desirable • The carburizing process is also referred to as case
that a steel being used should have a hardened surface hardening process.
to resist wear and tear. At the sometime, it should have • Increasing carbon only on the surface of low carbon
soft and tough interior or core so that it is able to absorb steel can give a hard surface and tough core.
any shocks. 47. Mild steel can be converted into high carbon
The various surface hardening or case hardening steel by using which of the following process?
processes are as follows :
(a) Annealing (b) Normalizing
(a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d)
(c) Case hardening (d) None of these
Induction Hardening (e) Flame hardening.
43. After heating upto required hardening
temperature, why must tool steels be Ans. (c) : Case hardening also referred as carburizing
quenched? increases carbon content of steel, thus imparting
(a) To induce internal stresses hardness to steel.
(b) To build up hardening structure 48. In general, hardening is followed by…
(c) To fall off the scale (a) Annealing (b) Normalizing
(d) To return it to its original structure (c) Tempering (d) Case hardening
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : In general, hardening is followed by Ans. (c) : When nitriding in salt both the molten salt is
tempering. splashing when the workpiece is dipped. To avoid
• Tempering is a low temperature heat treatment splashing, the workpiece should be coated with oil.
process normally performed after a hardening 53. Heat treatment of metals is necessary
process in order to reach a desired (a) To produce certain desired properties
hardness/toughness ratio. (b) To make good appearance on the component
49. Which defect arises due to faulty heat (c) To increase strength of the metal
treatment? (d) To make the metal rust-proof
(a) Over heating and burning RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
(b) Oxidation and decarburization Ans. (a) :
(c) Cracks, distortion and warping
• Heat treatment of metals is necessary to produce
(d) All of these certain desired properties.
• The process of changing the structure and thus
Ans. (d) : Defect arises due to faulty heat treatment– changing the properties of metal, by heating and
• Over heating and burning. cooling is called heat treatment of the metal.
• Oxidation and decarburization. • So heat treatment helps in improving the strength of
• Cracks, distortion and warping. the metal.
50. In heat treatment, the sudden cooling of plain 54. Name the method shown in the figure below.
carbon steel after attaining the upper critical
temperature is to........
(a) improve machinability
(b) increase toughness
(c) increase the hardness
(d) reduce the brittleness
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (a) Induction hardening (b) Flame hardening
Ans. (c) : In heat treatment, the sudden cooling of plain (c) Case hardening (d) None of the above
carbon steel after attaining the upper critical NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
temperature is to increase the hardness. Ans. (a) : Induction hardening is a process used for the
• If the hot steel is cooled rapidly the austenite surface hardening of steel and other alloy components.
The parts to be heat treated are placed inside a copper
changes into a new structure called marten site. This
structure is very fine-grained, very hard and coil and then heated above their transformation
magnetic. temperature by applying an alternating current to the
51. The process of producing a component with coil.
tough and ductile core and a hard outer surface 55. Sometimes, the case-hardened components are
is known as heated again at a temperature of 200ºC. The
(a) Hardening (b) Case hardening possible reason behind this is-
(c) Tempering (d) Annealing (a) To remove quenching stress
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (b) To remove cracks
Ans. (b) : The process of producing a component with (c) To increase ductility
tough and ductile core and a hard surface is known as (d) To soften
case hardening. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
The various surface or case hardening processes are as
Ans. (a) : Sometimes, the case-hardened components
follows :
are heated again at a temperature of 200oC. The possible
(a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d)
Induction Hardening (e) Flame hardening. reason behind this is to remove quenching stress.
52. When nitriding in salt bath the molten salt is 56. The main benefit of flame hardening is-
splashing when the workpiece is dipped. To (a) The required part of the job can be heated
avoid splashing, the workpiece should be (b) The required spot of the job can be hardened
(a) preheated (b) washed (c) Time saving
(c) coated with oil (d) coated with metal (d) All of the above
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010

Ans. (d) : Flame hardening– Flame hardening is a Ans. (a) :

common surface hardening method. Metal surface, such • Water quenching media is suitable for plain carbon
as steel, are heated with a high-temperature flame and steel for hardening.
then quenched. The result of flame hardening is a hard Hardening– The main objects of hardening are–
surface that is more resistant against wear and • To increase the hardness of the metal so that it can
corrosion. resist wear.
The main benefit of flame hardening is– • To enable it to cut other metals, i.e., to make it
• The required part of the job can be heated. suitable for cutting tool.
• The required spot of the job can be hardened. 61. For annealing hypoeutectoid steel according to
the carbon content, it should be heated to-
• Time saving.
(a) 30 to 50ºC above the lower critical point
57. In which activity a metal's mechanical (b) 30 to 50ºC above the upper critical point
properties can be changed as desired by (c) 600 to 630ºC
changing the metal's internal structure with the (d) 1000 to 1030ºC
help of heating and cooling?
(a) Mechanical treatment RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
(b) Heat treatment Ans. (b) : Full annealing– The purpose of full
(c) Electrical treatment annealing is to soften the metal, to refine the grain
(d) Chemical treatment structure, to relieve the stresses and to remove trapped
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 gases in the metal.
o o
Ans. (b) : In heat treatment, a metal's mechanical • The process consists of heating the steel 30 C-50 C
properties can be changed as desired by changing the above the upper critical temperature for hypo-
metals internal structure with the help of heating and eutectoid steel and by the same temperature above
the lower critical temperature for hyper-eutectoid
cooling.
steels.
58. Case hardening is normally done for the steel • It is held at this temperature for sometime and then
that contains- cooled slowly in the furnace.
(a) Low carbon (b) High carbon 62. Which one of the following is a heat treatment
(c) High chromium (d) H.S.S. process for surface hardening?
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 (a) Normalizing (b) Annealing
Ans. (a) : (c) Carburizing (d) Tempering
• Case hardening is a method used to harden the outer RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
surface of low-carbon steel while leaving the center Ans. (c) : The various surface or case hardening process
or core soft and ductile. are as follows :
• Case hardening involves heating the metal to its (a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d)
critical temperature in some carbonaceous metal. Induction Hardening (e) Flame hardening.
Carburizing–
59. Case hardened job worns out ____and can
• Carburizing is one of the most widely used surface
withstand pressure.
hardening processes.
(a) Less (b) More
• The process involves diffusing carbon into low
(c) Unaffected (d) None of the above
carbon steel to form a high carbon steel surface.
• Increasing carbon only on the surface of low carbon
Ans. (a) : steel can give a hard surface and tough core.
• Case hardened job worns out less and can withstand 63. The size of a welding machine is determined
pressure. by:
• Case hardening is a method used to harden the outer (a) Input amperage
surface of low-carbon steel while leaving the center (b) Output amperage
or core soft and ductile. (c) Open circuit voltage
60. Which quenching media is suitable for plain (d) Closed circuit voltage
carbon steel for hardening? HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) Water (b) Ice RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
(c) Air (d) None of the above Ans. (b) : The size of a welding machine is determined
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 by output amperage.

64. Which of the following is a case hardening 68. If amount of carbon is increased in steel–
process? (a) Ductility increases
(a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (b) Malleability increases
(c) Nitriding (d) All of these (c) Strength increases
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 (d) Hardness increases
Ans. (d) : The various surface or case hardening DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
process are as follows : Ans. (d) : If amount of carbon is increased in steel the
(a) Carburising (b) Cyaniding (c) Nitriding (d) hardness of steel also increased.
Induction Hardening (e) Flame hardening. Hardness– Material hardness is the properly of the
material which enables into resist plastic deformation
65. ______ is a heat treatment process of surface usually by penetration or by indentation.
hardening.
69. In galvanizing, the metal coating is done-
(a) Case hardening (b) Normalising
(a) From aluminium (b) From zinc
(c) Annealing (d) Tempering (c) From tin (d) From chromium
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
Ans. (a) : Case hardening is a heat treatment process of Ans. (b) : Galvanizing– Galvanizing is the process in
surface hardening. which steel requires a zinc coating to be applied to the
Surface hardening or case hardening– It is desirable steel in the molten not both, if also requires the steel to go
that a steel being used should have a hardened surface through a series of other baths to ensure that the zinc will
to resist wear and tear. At the sometime, it should have completely adhere to iron in the steel without any other
soft and tough interior or core so that it is able to absorb foreign bodies getting in the way.
any shocks. 70. Purpose of heat treatment is:
66. In nitriding process, surface is introduced with (a) Reduce machinability
: (b) Metal softening
(a) Hydrogen (b) Carbon (c) To eliminate the stress produced in material
(c) Nitrogen (d) Ammonia during hot and cold work
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (d) To eliminate the stress produced in material
Ans. (c) : Nitriding is a case hardening process in which during hot and cold work and softening metal
nitrogen instead of carbon is adder to the surface the ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
steel. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
• Nitriding heats the steel part of 482-621oC in an UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
atmosphere of ammonia gas and dissociate Ans. (d) : The steels are heat treated to achieve any one
ammonia. of the following objectives–
• The time the part spends in this environment (a) Relieve the stress set up in the metal during hot or
dictates the depth of the case. cold working.
• No quenching is done after nitriding. (b) Modify the grain size.
67. Cyaniding and nitriding are two methods of (c) Soften the metal and improve machinability.
what? (d) Improve mechanical, electrical and magnetic
(a) Tempering (b) Case hardening properties.
(c) Nitriding (d) Hardening 71. Nitriding is a process of
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (a) Heat treatment (b) Annealing
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (c) Hardening (d) Case hardening
Ans. (b) : Case hardening– A process of adding ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
carbon, nitrogen or both of the surface of low carbon Ans. (d) : Nitriding is a case hardening process.
steels. So, as to get a hardened layer of certain depth on Nitriding– Nitriding has been known for its
the surface. effectiveness in resisting shear stress due to friction
The surface become more hard and wear resistant, even and prevention of the tooth flank sub-surface fatigue
through the care remains soft and tough. failure, that can occur in high loaded core-hardened
Some important case hardening process– gear teeth is desired.
(A) Carburising (addition of carbon) 72. The process of hardening the upper surface of
(B) Nitriding (addition of nitriding) a carbon steel is called :
(C) Cyaniding(addition of carbon and nitrogen) (a) Annealing (b) Case hardening
(D) Induction hardening (electric furnace is used) (c) Tempering (d) Normalizing
(E) Flame hardening (neutral flame is used) ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
Ans. (b) : Case hardening– Case hardening a process Ans. (d) : Case hardening is a surface hardening
of increasing the hardness of only surface by the process case hardening is a selective heat treatment in
process of diffusion of carbon and nitrogen. which the surface layers of a metal are hardened to a
• These process limited, only for low and medium certain depth while a relatively soft core maintained.
carbon steel. Important case hardening process–
(a) Carburizing (b) Nitriding (c) Cyaniding (d) Flame
73. The process of hardening only on the surface of
hardening.
a component is known as :
78. Case hardening of steel
(a) Annealing (b) Tempering
(a) Improves surface finish
(c) Case hardening (d) Normalizing (b) Is the hardening of the casing or surface of
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 steel above steel by proper heat treatment
Ans. (c) : Case hardening– Case hardening a process (c) Involves diffusion of carbon & nitrogen in
of increasing the hardness of only surface by the the surface of steel above the critical
process of diffusion of carbon and nitrogen. temperature on heating
• These process limited, only for low and medium (d) Is the saturation of surface of steel with any
carbon steel. element by its diffusion from the surrounding
medium at high temperature
74. Which of the following is not a surface
BEML 2022
hardening process? UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
(a) Case hardening (b) Nitriding Ans : (b) Case hardening of steel is the hardening of the
(c) Induction heating (d) Quenching casing or surface of steel above steel by proper heat
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 treatment. But case hardening is limited to low and
Ans. (d) : Quenching– Quenching is the rapid cooling medium carbon steel.
of a heated metal in a quenching medium such as water, 79. Which one of the following processes can also
oil or air in order to obtain desirable material properties. be known as case hardening?
In metallurgy, quenching is one of the critical steps in (a) Normalizing (b) Carburizing
the heat treatment of a metal. (c) Annealing (d) Hardening
75. The external surface of the part made of mild DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
Ans : (b) Carburizing– Carburizing is the case
steel can be hardened by.............
hardening process. In this the carbon content of the
(a) Tempering (b) Case hardening surface is increased (up to 1%) to obtained a hard layer
(c) Normalising (d) Austenitizing on workpiece surface after the heat treatment. It is
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 applied to low carbon steel up to 0.18% carbon.
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 80. What is the main process of annealing?
Ans. (b) : Case hardening– Case hardening is a (a) Increasing hardness
method used to a harden the outer surface of low-carbon (b) Increasing brittleness
steel while leaving the centre or core soft and ductile. (c) Softening of steel
The following method are commonly used in case (d) Increasing magnesium
hardening– DRDO Machinist.2016
1. Carburizing 2. Cyaniding 3. Nitriding 4. Flame DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
hardening 5. Induction hardening. Ans : (c) The main purpose of annealing–
76. Which gas is used for nitriding process? • Relieve the internal stress of a material.
(a) Ammonia (b) Oxygen • To increase the machinability of the material.
(c) Acetylene (d) Hydrogen • Increase the softness of material.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II • Refines the grain size.
81. What is the purpose of hardening?
Ans. (a) : Nitriding– In the nitriding process heating of
(a) To increase brittleness
steel in atmosphere of NH3 gas or NH3 salt bath
(b) To soften the steel
nitriding. (c) To induce internal stress
The gas nitriding process consists of heating the parts at (d) To develop high hardness to resist wear
500oC in a constant circulation of ammonia gas. IOCL 2020
77. Case hardening is done on mild steel by DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
_______ process. Ans : (d)
(a) Hardening (b) Annealing • The main purpose of the hardening process is
(c) Normalizing (d) Nitriding develop high hardness surface to wear resistance.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II • Hardness is defined as resistance to plastic.
82. Which one of the following methods produce a Ans : (b) Hardening–
hard surface on the low carbon steel? • The main object of hardening is to produce the
(a) Annealing (b) Normalizing
martensite.
(c) Carburising (d) Hardening
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am • The temperature range of hypo eutectoid steel 30oC
Ans : (c) Carburizing– Carburizing is a surface - 50oC above the upper critical temperature and
hardening process in which process increasing the 30oC - 50oC above the lower critical temperature for
hardness only surface core remaining soft. But this hyper eutectoid steel.
process limited to low & medium carbon steel. 87. Case hardening is a method in which the outer
Types of carburizing process– surface of a metal is hardened–
1. Pack carburizing– Components packed in a box (a) High carbon steel (b) Alloy steel
with carburizing agent (for example – Charcoal) (c) Cast iron (d) Mild steel
2. Liquid carburizing– Heated in container filled with
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
a molten soft (for example – sodium carbonate).
3. Gas carburizing– Components are heated and Ans : (d) Case hardening is done to prevent wear and
surrounded by a hydrocarbon gas (such as methane, tear on the surface of mild steel. Case hardening
ethane) in the furnace. hardens the outer surface of the part, leaving the inside
83. The process of removing the internal defect or soft and tough.
stress caused by the work is expressed by the 88. Which of the following material, not used for
term– carburising?
(a) Normalizing (b) Annealing (a) Sodium (b) Barium carbonate
(c) Hardening (d) Tempering
(c) Calcium carbonate (d) Molasses
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
Ans : (a) Normalizing– Normalizing is the heat Ans : (a) Sodium is not used for carburizing.
treatment process is which remove internal stress and Carburizing increases the amount of carbon in the outer
also improve machinability tensile strength & structure surface of the steel part.
of welded part or forged part. 89. In gas nitriding, the mild steel parts are heated
Temperature range 30oC - 50oC above the upper critical to 500oC and the gas is passed into the hot
temperature for hypo eutectoid and hyper eutectoid and part–
hyper eutectoid steel.
(a) Carbon (b) Oxygen
84. Which property of a material to resist sudden (c) Ammonia (d) Hydrogen
load during metal cutting is termed as:
(a) Cold hardness (b) Red hardness (RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004)
(c) Toughness (d) Brittleness Ans : (c) Gas nitriding– Nitriding is a case hardening
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 process in which nitrogen instead of carbon is added to
Ans : (c) Toughness– Toughness is the mechanical the surface of the steel.
properties by which material resist fracture due to high • Nitriding heated the steel part to 462-621oC in an
impact load like hammer blows. This properties is atmosphere of ammonia gas and dissociated
desirable in part subjected to shock and impact load ammonia.
such as cutting tool. • The time the part spends in this environment
85. Case hardening is done at– dictates the depth of the case.
(a) High speed steel (b) Cast iron
(c) High carbon steel (d) Mild steel • No quenching is does after nitriding.
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 90. The process of flame hardening is done on the
Ans : (d) Case hardening– Case hardening is the parts made of–
surface hardening process in which the surface layer of (a) Wrought iron
metal are hardened to a certain depth while a relatively (b) Medium carbon steel
soft core is maintained. But case hardening is limited to (c) Mild steel
low and medium carbon steel. High carbon steel can not (d) Pig iron
be hardened. (IOF Fitter, 2016)
86. In a hardening process, the hypo-eutectoid Ans : (b) Flame hardening– It is a type of surface/case
steel is heated from 300 C mes 500 C above the
hardening used for improving resistance to surface
upper critical temperature and then cooled: indentation fatigue and wear.
(a) in still air
(b) suddenly in a suitable cooling medium • There is practically no distortion of the workpiece
(c) slowly in the furnace because only small section of a workpiece are
(d) slowly and steadily to room temperature heated.
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 • But flame hardening is limited to medium carbon
NTPC Fitter 2016 steel.
91. Induction coil used in induction hardening is Ans : (b) Flame hardening is difficult to harden a small
made of which metals? size job because the job becomes hard in its entire
(a) Copper (b) Brass thickness.
(c) Mild steel (d) Cast iron Flame hardening– It is carried out by heating by an
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 oxyacetylene flame having a temperature of 3000oC to
(IOF Fitter, 2016) 3200oC and subsequent quenching hardens the surface
layer. It is used for large cost gear, works, shaft steel
Ans : (a) Induction hardening– Induction hardening
guide ways, mill rolls etc.
is process to increase the surface hardening of mild
steel or medium carbon steel and core remain soft.
In this process work is placed in copper induction coil
and heated by high frequency AC current.
95. Which of the following gas is not used for

carburising?
(a) Carbon monooxide (b) Methane
(c) LPG (d) Propane
BDL Technician 2022
Ans : (c) LPG gas never used for carburizing process. It
is often used in cooking and for other purposes.
92. Induction hardening is suitable for metal parts 96. In the nitriding method, NH3 gas is passed
having– when temperature is–
(a) Cast iron (a) 5000C to 5600C (b) 6000C to 6500C
(b) Mild steel 0 0
(c) 650 C to 700 C (d) 5750C to 6000C
(c) 0.73% to 0.7% carbon steel (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(d) Wrought iron Ans : (a) Nitriding is the surface hardening process in
BHEL 2020 which nitrogen is diffused into the base of steel to make
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 the surface harder. This diffusion take place at relatively
Ans : (c) Induction hardening– Induction hardening is low temperature nearly 500oC to 560oC. At this
the surface hardening process, but this process limited temperature, when nitrogen is diffused into the base of
to mild steel and medium carbon steel (0.3 to 0.7% steel, the hardening occurs without quenching.
carbon) workpiece.
93. The toughness of steel increases in secondary 2. Annealing and Normalising
hardening the other name of this method is–
(a) Annealing (b) Normalizing 97. In normalizing, specimens are _____.
(c) Tempering (d) Case hardening (a) Cooled beyond upper critical temperature
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001) (b) Heated above melting point temperature
Ans : (c) Tempering– (c) Heated beyond upper critical temperature
• The toughness of steel increases in secondary (d) Heated below lower critical temperature
hardening the other name of this method is known UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
as tempering. Ans. (c) : In normalizing specimens are heated beyond
• In this process, martensite is produced in which iron upper critical temperature.
carbide will be present in the matrix of ferrite. • The main purpose of normalizing is to refine grain
94. In which method it is difficult to harden a size.
small size job because the job becomes hard in • The homogeneous structure provides a higher yield
its entire thickness? point, ultimate tensile strength.
(a) Induction hardening 98. What happens in the normalizing process?
(b) Flame hardening (a) Heating the part below the critical
(c) Gas nitriding temperature and cooling then in a furnace
(d) Carburizing (b) Heating parts above critical temperature and
(IOF Fitter, 2015) cooling in still air

(c) Heating the part above the critical Ans. (a) : Purpose of annealing process–
temperature and then cooling slowly in a 1. To relieve the internal stress of a material.
furnace 2. To restore ductility to perform the further operation
(d) Heating the part below the critical on the material
temperature and cooling in a water bath 3. To induce softness
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 4. To increase the mechinability of the material
Ans. (b) : In normalizing process steel is heated from 5. To reduce the hardness of a material.
30oC to 50oC above the upper critical temperature for
hypo-eutectoid steel and 30oC to 50oC above the lower 102 Which of the following is not a purpose of
critical temperature for hyper eutectoid steel. It is held annealing?
at this temperature for about fifteen minutes and then (a) To increase machinability
allowed to cool down in still air. (b) To increase hardness
• The process of normalizing is frequently applied to (c) To relieve internal stresses
casting and forging work piece. (d) To restore ductility
99. Cooling medium used in annealing process is UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(a) Furnace cooling (b) Water cooling Ans. (b) : The purpose of annealing is–
(c) Air cooling (d) Oil cooling 1. To relieve the internal stress of a material.
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 2. To restore ductility to perform the further operation
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 on the material
Ans. (a) : Cooling medium used in annealing process is 3. To induce softness
furnace cooling. 4. To increase the mechinability of the material
Annealing involves heating the steel to a suitable 5. To reduce the hardness of a material.
temperature, holding it at that temperature for some 103. The heat treatment of steel to obtain softness,
time, and then cooling it slowly. improved machinability, increased ductility, to
Objective of annealing– relieve internal stresses and to refine the grain
1. To obtain softness size is called
2. To improve machinability (a) Annealing (b) Tempering
3. To relieve internal stresses (c) Nitriding (d) Hardening
4. To refine the grain size BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
100. In annealing, mild steel specimens are NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
cooled____ Ans. (a) : Annealing (Full Annealing) :-
(a) In salt bath (b) In oil The purpose of full annealing is to soften the metal, to
(c) Slowly in furnace (d) In water retina the grain structure, to relieve the stresses and to
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 remove trapped gases in the metal. The process consists
Ans. (c) : Annealing– The purpose of annealing is to of heating the steel 30ºC-50ºC above the upper critical
soften the metal, to refine the grain structure, to relieve temp. For hypo-eutectoid steel and by the same temp.
the stress and remove trapped gases in the metal. Above the lower critical temp for hyper eutectoid steels;
• The process consists of heating the steel 30oC – It is held at this temperature for some time and then
50oC above the upper critical temperature for hypo- cooled slowly in the furnace.
eutectoid steel and by the same temperature above 104. Which of the following heat treatment process
the lower critical temperature to hyper-eutectoid is used to increase ductility and to relieve the
steels. internal stresses in steel?
• It is held at this temperature for some time and then (a) Hardening (b) Nitriding
cooled slowly in the furnace. (c) Quenching (d) Annealing
101. Which one of the following is not a purpose of BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
annealing process? Ans. (d) : Annealing process is used to increase
(a) To increase the strength and reduce the ductility and to relieve the internal stresses in steel.
ductility
105. In normalizing, cooling is done in which of the
(b) To soften the metal so that it can be cold following medium?
worked
(a) Water (b) Furnace
(c) To reduce the hardness and improve
(c) Air (d) Oil
machinability
(d) To relieve the internal stress BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Ans. (c) : In normalizing, cooling is done in still air.

106. While normalizing, the steel should be cooled in Annealing Normalizing

(a) still air room temperature Quenching medium- Quenching medium- still
(b) oil Furnace air of air of room temp.
(c) by forced air Objective:- Objective:-
(d) water For Increasing toughness, To refine the grain
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 and ductility structure of steel, to
Ans. (a) : Normalizing steel heating the steel to an 1. Full Annealing improve machinability,
elevated temperature followed by cooling to still air 2. Process Annealing tensile strength.
room temperature. The heating and flow cooling change 3. Spheroidise Annealing
the microstructure.
110. Cooling rate for carbon steel during annealing
• The reduce hardness of steel and will increase process is
ductility.
(a) 50 to 100 ºC/hr (b) 100 to 150 ºC/hr
107. Most unsuitable method for removal of a tap (c) 150 to 200 ºC/hr (d) 200 to 250 ºC/hr
that was broken inside an aluminium job?
(a) Tap extractor method
(b) Arc welding method
Ans. (b) : Cooling rate for carbon steel during
(c) Annealing and drilling method
annealing process is 100 to 150 ºC/hr.
111. Annealing is the process of heating the steel
above upper critical temperature and cool it...
(a) Open atmospheric air
Ans. (c) : Most unsuitable method for removal of a tap
(b) Covered with ash or sand
that was broken inside an aluminium job is annealing
(c) Suddenly quenching in water
and drilling method.
(d) Suddenly quenching in oil.
108. Annealing is not done to _______
(a) Increase hardness
(b) Facilitate cold working Ans. (b) : Annealing is the process of heating the steel
above upper critical temperature and cool it covered
(c) Reduce hardness
with ash or sand.
(d) Refine grain size
• Annealing is the heat treatment process is used to
increase ductility and to relieve the internal structure of
steel.
Ans. (a) : Purpose of annealing– • It increase the ductility of material and reduce the
• It relieves internal stresses hardness to make it more workable.
• It improves ductility • After heating, the steel is cooled to room temperature
• It improves machinability in still air.
• It refines grain size 112. The process of heating the high carbon steel
• It decrease strength & hardness above upper critical temperature followed by a
109. When steel is heated in a furnace and then slow cooling is termed as..
cooled in air at room temperature, the process (a) Normalizing (b) Annealing
is called (c) Hardening (d) Tempering
(a) Annealing RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(b) Hardening Ans. (b) : Annealing–The process of heating the high
(c) Normalizing carbon steel upper critical temperature followed by a
(d) Tempering slow cooling is called annealing.
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 Some annealing process are given below–
Ans. (c) : • Full annealing–It increase the ductility of material
•When steel is heated in a furnace and then cooled in and reduces the hardness. It also increase toughness.
air at room temperature, the process is called • Process annealing–Stress relieving.
normalizing. • Spherodise annealing–Machinability
• If cooling is done at furnace then it is called • Diffusion annealing–Homogenize chemical of
Annealing. material.

113. For best result of annealing, the heated steel Ans. (d) : A carbon steel piece is heated just above
piece is cooled 730ºC maintained at that temperature for a few hours
(a) Slowly in the furnace itself by switching off and then slowly cooled. This process is called
the heat supply annealing.
(b) By removing the piece from the furnace and • Annealing is one of the most common heat treatment
allowing it to cool in open air process.
(c) By removing the piece from the furnace and • It is used to soften the steel and improve ductility.
placing it under a blast of air • It is used to improve the machinability.
(d) By removing the piece from the furnace and
117. Annealing is a heat treatment given to metals to
dipping it in a tank containing water
…..
(a) Prevent dezincification
(b) Remove the residual stresses
Ans. (a) : For best result of annealing, the heated steel
(c) Lower the sulphur content
piece is cooled slowly in the furnace itself by switching
off the heat supply. (d) Form a protective layer
• Annealing is one of the most common heat treatments. RRB ALP Patna 2014
• It is used to soft steel and to improve ductility. In this Ans. (b) : Annealing is a heat treatment given to metals
process, the steel is heated and slowly cooled to room to remove the residual stresses.
temperature or quickly quenched in water. • It reduce hardness of the metals and improve ductility
114. For annealing hypoeutectoid steel according to and improve the machinability.
the carbon content, it should he heated to 118. While normalizing the component should be
(a) 30ºC to 50ºC above the lower critical point cooled _____
(b) 30ºC to 50ºC above the upper critical point (a) By dipping in water
(c) 600ºC to 630ºC (b) By forced air
(d) 1000ºC to 1030ºC (c) By quenching in oil
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 (d) In still air to room temperature
Ans. (b) : For annealing hypoeutectoid steel according RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
to the carbon content, it should he heated to 30ºC to Ans. (d) : In normalizing process, the component
50ºC above the upper critical point. should be cooled in still air to room temperature.
• It is used to soften steel and improve ductility and • In this process, involves heating of steel component
toughness and reduce the hardness of material. above the upper critical temperature for hypo-eutectoid
• It is heated to 50ºC above the upper critical steel and the hyper-eutectoid steel by 30ºC to 50ºC.
temperature and allow to filled part to cool in the • The component is hold at this temperature long
furnace. enough for homogeneous quentenization and is cooled
115. The process of heating steel to about 40ºC room temperature in steel air.
above the upper critical temperature and 119. Annealing involves heating the component to a
cooling it in still air to room temperature is temperature ………
known as (a) Slightly above the critical temperature
(a) Hardening (b) Annealing (b) Equal to critical temperature
(c) Normalizing (d) Tempering (c) Slightly less than critical temperature
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 (d) None of these
Ans. (c) : The process of heating steel to about 40ºC BEML 2022
above the upper critical temperature and cooling it in Ans. (a) : Annealing involves heating the component to
still air to room temperature is known as normalizing. a temperature slightly above the critical temperature.
• Normalizing is the heat process is used to refine the • For annealing of hypoeutectoid steel is heated 30ºC to
grain structure of steel and also improve machinability, 50ºC above the upper critical temperature.
tensile strength and structure of weld. 120. While hardening, after heating the steel to the
116. A carbon steel piece is heated just above 730ºC, required temperature, it is held at that
maintained at that temperature for a few hours temperature as soaking time for normally
and then slowly cooled. What heat treatment (a) 5 minutes for 10 mm thickness
process is carried out? (b) 10 minutes for 5 mm thickness
(a) Normalizing (b) Casehardening (c) 2 minutes for 20 mm thickness
(c) Hardening (d) Annealing (d) 20 minutes for 2 mm thickness
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
Ans. (a) : While hardening, after heating the steel to the (b) The component must be cooled in a wet air
required temperature, it is held at that temperature as (c) The component must be cooled in air with no
soaking time for normally 5 minutes for 10 mm circulation
thickness. (d) The component must be cooled in a dry air
• Annealing involves heating the steel to a suitable with natural circulation
temperature, holding it at temperature for some time UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
and then it cooling it slowly. Ans. (c) : Normalizing– In normalizing process steel is
• The main purpose of annealing is to reduce the heated 30oC to 50oC above the upper critical
hardness of a material. temperature for hypo-eutectoid and hyper eutectoid
121. Normalizing is- steel and quenching medium mostly use still air.
(a) Heating steel below 400ºC and then cooling it By this process refine the grain structure of the steel and
in water improve the machinability, tensile strength and structure
(b) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical of weld.
temperature and letting it inside the furnace 124. What is the main purpose of tempering?
after switching off the furnace (a) Increasing hardness
(c) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical (b) Improving machinability
temperature and immediately cooling it in (c) Removing deformation
water (d) Decreasing toughness
(d) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
temperature and cooling it at room DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
temperature under steady air Ans. (b) : Tempering is the heat treatment process
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 which is done usually quenching. In the process the
Ans. (d) : Normalizing is process of heat treatment, in material is heated to a temperature below the
this heating steel 50ºC above high critical temperature recrystallization temperature and holded for few hours.
and cooling it at room temperature under steady air. This process removes internal stress and improve
machinability of material.
• By this process we improve machinability and refine
the grain structure of the steel. 125. In normalizing cooling is done in which of the
following medium?
122. In the following figure, which curve is
(a) Water (b) Furnace
represented by the label Y?
(c) Air (d) Oil
NMRC, 15-09-2019
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM
Ans. (c) : Normalizing– In normalizing process steel is
heated temperature range 30o to 50oC above the
upper critical temperature for hypo eutectoid and
hyper eutectoid steels.
• Quenching medium– Air or still air.
• The main purpose of normalizing to refine the grain
structure of the steel to improve machinability
(a) Before hardening (b) After hardening
tensile strength and structure of weld.
(c) Hardening (d) None of the above
126. Which of the following heat treatment process
is used to increase ductility and to relieve the
Ans. (b) : In this figure, after hardening curve is internal stresses in steel?
represented by label 'Y'. (a) Hardening (b) Nitriding
• Hardening–It is heat treatment process in which steel (c) Quenching (d) Annealing
is heated to 30ºC to 50ºC above the critical range. NMRC, 15-09-2019
• The effect of percentage of carbon on the hardness of Ans. (d) : Annealing is the heat treatment process is
steel is, the increasing of carbon content arouses an used to increase ductility and to relieve the internal
increase of the hardness and brittleness but also stress in steel.
decrease of the impact toughness of the steel. • Full annealing → Ductility and toughness increase.
123. Select the precaution that must be taken while • Process annealing → Stress relieving.
normalizing steel : • Spherodise annealing →Machinability
(a) The component must be cooled in a dry air • Diffusion annealing → Homogenize chemical of
with forced circulation material.
127. Materials after cold working are subjected to 132. Process done to produce ductility in steel?
following process to relieve stresses- (a) Carburising (b) Core hardening
(a) Normalising (b) Tempering (c) Annealing (d) Case hardening
(c) Hot working (d) Annealing DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
Ans. (c) : Main purpose of different annealing process–
Ans. (d) : Materials after cold working are subjected to
Full annealing – Reduce hardness, increase ductility,
internal stress these internal stress removing by
annealing process. refine grain structures, relieve internal stresses induced
due to cold working, welding etc.
128. Which heat treatment process is used to refine
the steel structures: Process annealing– Removes residual stress.
(a) Tempering (b) Normalizing Spheroidize– Improves machinability.
(c) Annealing (d) Carburizing Diffusion – Eliminates chemical in homogeneity.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 133. Stainless steels are annealed at what
Ans. (b) : Normalizing is heat treatment process is used temperature?
to refine the grain structure of steel and also improve (a) 650ºC - 700ºC (b) 700ºC - 750ºC
machinability, tensile strength and structure of weld. (c) 750ºC - 800ºC (d) 800ºC - 850ºC
129. The heat treatment of steel to obtain softness, ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018
improved machinability, increased ductility, to Ans. (c) : Stainless steel are annealed 750oC - 800oC
relieve internal stresses and to refine the grain
temperature.
size is called.
(a) Annealing (b) Tempering The quenching medium used in annealing process
(c) Nitriding (d) Hardening is still air.
IOCL 2020 134. Annealing is done–
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 (a) To get hardness (b) To get toughness
Ans. (a) : The heat treatment of steel to obtain (c) To get softness (d) To get tenasity
softness, improved machinability, increased ductility RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
to relieve internal stress and to refine the grain size is Ans. (c) : Main purpose of different annealing process–
called annealing. • Full annealing – Ductility and toughness.
Purpose of annealing process–
1. Remove the internal stress of material. • Process annealing – Stress relieving.
2. Refine the grain size. • Spherodise annealing – Machinability.
3. Improve the mechanical properties. • Diffusion annealing – Homogenize chemical of
4. Decrease the hardness of material. material.
130. Which of the following is not a constituent of 135. The cooling medium used for the normalization
plain carbon steel in annealed condition? process is–
(a) Pearlite (b) Martensite (a) Water (b) Air
(c) Ferrite (d) Cementite (c) Under sand (d) Oil
BHEL 2020
Ans. (b) : Martensite– Martensite is a supersaturated
solid solution of carbon in α-iron. It is tetragonal, needle
line structure, having high hardness and low ductility, Ans. (b) : Normalising (Air quenching)– In
martensite is not a constituent of blain carbon steel in normalising process involves heating of steel
annealed condition. component above the A3 upper critical temperature for
131. Annealing of steel close not provide the hypo-eutectoid steel and above ACM (upper critical
following result : temperature for cementite) temperature for hyper-
(a) Softness steel and improves ductility eutectoid steel by 30oC to 50oC. The component is hold
(b) Relieves internal stresses caused by previous at this temperature long enough for homogeneous
process questenitization and is cooled room temperature in steel
(c) Increase the hardness of steel air.
(d) Refines gain structure
136. Normalizing of steel is done by :
(a) Leaving in the open yard for six months to
NTPC Fitter 2016 two years
Ans. (c) : By annealing process of steel the hardness of (b) Heating below critical temperature followed
steel never increase. by air cooling
The main purpose of annealing process– (c) Heating above critical temperature followed
1. Remove the internal stress of material. by air cooling
2. Refine the grain size. (d) Heating above critical temperature followed
3. Improve the mechanical properties. by furnace cooling
4. Decrease the hardness of material. SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
Ans. (c) : Normalizing of steel is done by heating above 141. When steel is heated in furnace and cooled in
critical temperature followed by air cooling. air at normal temperature this process is called
Normalizing– In normalizing process steel is heated as–
temperature range 30o-50oC above the upper critical (a) Annealing (b) Tempering
temperature for hypo eutectoid and hyper eutectoid steel (c) Hardening (d) Normalizing
in normalizing process. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
137. What is main purpose of normalization? UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
(a) Increase brittleness Ans : (d) When steel is heated in a furnace and then
(b) Increase hardness cooled in air at room temperature this process is called
(c) Reduce rough wear structure normalizing.
(d) Increase strength 142. During normalizing process of steel. the
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 specimen is heated :
Ans : (c) Main objective of normalizing process– (a) between the upper and lower critical
1. The main purpose of normalizing is to refine grain temperature and cooled in still air
size. (b) above the upper critical temperature and
2. Remove cold work stress. cooled in furnace
3. Remove dislocation due to hot working.
(c) above the upper critical temperature and
4. Reduce rough wear structure.
cooled in still air
138. That process, in which steel on the basis of its (d) between the upper and lower critical
carbon material is heated at optimum temperature and cooled in furnace
temperature and kept for sometime at that
temperature and then cooled slowly in a
furnace, called as– Ans : (c) During normalizing process of steel heated
(a) Tempering (b) Annealing above the upper critical temperature and cooled in still
(c) Normalizing (d) Hardening air.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Normalizing– In normalizing process steel is heated
Ans : (b) The process by which steel is heated and 30o-50oC above the upper critical eutectoid steel and
sufficiently formed to a suitable temperature, quenching medium air is used.
depending on the type of its carbon content. If kept for 143. The heat treatment process used for castings is:
a period of time and them cooled slowly in a furnace is (a) Normalizing (b) Annealing
called annealing. (c) Tempering (d) Hardening
139. The process which helps in the production of LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
microscopic particles for uniformity of Ans : (a) Normalizing process is done for heat
structure and refinement of mechanical treatment of casting steel.
characteristics is called– Normalizing– The normalizing is done for the
(a) Normalizing (b) Annealing following purpose–
(c) Hardening (d) Tempering 1. To refine the grain structure of the steel to improve
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 machinability, tensile strength and structure of
Ans : (a) In normalizing process steel grain structure is weld.
improve and machinability, tensile strength also 2. To remove strain caused by cold working processes.
increase. 3. To remove dislocation caused in the internal
140. Main purpose of annealing– structure of the steel due to not working.
(a) To remove deformation 4. To improve certain mechanical and electrical
(b) To improve machinability properties.
(c) To increase toughness 144. Which of the following is not a case hardening
(d) To increase hardness process?
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 (a) Normalizing (b) Carburizing
Ans : (b) The main purpose of annealing is to improve (c) Cyaniding (d) Nitriding
machinability. By heating a metal to a particular LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
temperature and cooling it slowly in a furnace.
Ans : (a) Normalizing is not a case hardening process.
Different annealing process Purpose
Full annealing Stress relieving Surface hardening or case hardening– Case
Spherodise annealing Machinability hardening is the surface hardening process in which
Diffusion annealing Homogenize increasing the hardness of only surface by the process
chemical of material of diffusion of carbon and nitrogen and care remaining
Full annealing Ductility and soft, but case hardening is limited to only low and
toughness medium carbon steel.

145. Which characteristics get reduced due to the 4. Heat to 50oC above the (D) Normalizing
process of annealing? upper critical
(a) Toughness temperature and allow to
(b) Stress and hardness filled part to cool in the
(c) Hardness furnace.
(d) Stress (a) 1–b, 2–d, 3–a, 4–c (b) 1–a, 2–d, 3–b, 4–c
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (c) 1–d, 2–a, 3–b, 4–c (d) 1–c, 2–d, 3–b, 4–a
Ans : (b) Annealing involves heating the steel to a (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003)
suitable temperature holding it at that temperature for Ans : (b)
same time, and then cooling it slowly. 1. Heat to a temperature below 400oC and cool slowly
• The main purpose of annealing is to reduce the stress – Tempering
& hardness of a material and restore ductility to 2. Heat to a temperature 50oC above the upper
perform the further operation on the material. critical temperature and then allow to cool in still air
– Normalizing
146. Which of the following method is used to soften
3. Heat of 50oC above the upper critical temperature
of the material? and cool suddenly in water – Hardening
(a) Annealing (b) Normalizing 4. Heat to 50oC above the upper critical temperature
(c) Tempering (d) Carburizing and allow to filled part to cool in the furnace –
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 Annealing
Ans : (a) The method of softening of hardened part of 149. The main objective of normalization is?
steel to make it machinable is called annealing process. (a) Softening the metal part
The main purpose of annealing– (b) Increasing machinability
1. To soften of material. (c) Refining the grain structure
2. To increase the quality of machine ability. (d) All of the above
3. To remove internal stresses. NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
4. To increase the tensile strength. (HAL Fitter, 2015)
147. Crankshaft of motor car is made of which Ans : (c) Normalizing–
material? • Refining the grain structure.
(a) Aluminium steel • Normalizing gives more homogenized and refine
(b) Nickel chrome steel grain structure than annealing.
(c) Silicon steel • Normalizing is fast, efficient and less costly.
(d) Stainless steel • Produce hard surface and tough core.
BDL Technician 2022 150. Annealing is a method in which steel is heated
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 and cooled to a temperature higher than the
Ans : (b) The crank shaft of automobiles is made of upper critical temperature?
nickel chrome steel. The crank shaft receives power (a) In the open air
from the connecting and further transfers it to the (b) Covered in ashes or sand
clutch. (c) Immediately immersed in water
Main parts of crank shaft– (d) Dipped in oil
1. Crank pin 2. Crank web 3. Oil hole 4. General (HAL Fitter, 2015)
bearing 5. Counter weight. Ans : (b)
• Full annealing – Ductility increase and toughness
148. Match the following–
increase.
Heating and Cooling Process
• Process annealing – Stress relieving.
Temperature
• Spherodise annealing – Machinability increase.
1. Heat to a temperature (A) Tempering
• Diffusion annealing – To homogenize the chemistry
below 400oC and cool
of metal.
slowly
151. In annealing, cooling is done
2. Heat to a temperature (B) Hardening (a) Very rapidly (b) Rapidly
50oC above the upper (c) Very slowly (d) In air
critical temperature and (IOF Fitter 2017)
then allow to cool in still Ans : (c) In annealing, cooling is done very slowly
air. annealing is a heat treatment process used mostly to
3. Heat of 50oC above the (C) Annealing increase ductility and reduce the hardness of a material.
upper critical This change in hardness and ductility is a result of the
temperature and cool reduction of dislocation in the crystal structure of the
suddenly in water. material being annealed.
152. To increase mechanical strength of steel, 157. During tempering______is restored at the cost
treatment done is? of______
(a) Hardening (b) Tempering (a) Hardness, Ductility
(c) Annealing (d) Normalizing (b) Toughness, Hardness
DRDO Machinist.2016 (c) Toughness, Ductility
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002) (d) Hardness, toughness
Ans : (d) Normalizing is a heat treatment process that is UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
used to make a metal more ductile and tough after it has Ans. (b) : During tempering, toughness is restored at
been subjected to mechanical hardening process. the cost of hardness.
153. When steel is heated to red hot and gradually • Tempering is a process of heat treatment which is
cooled, the process is called? used to increase the toughness of iron-based alloys.
(a) Annealing (b) Mitigation
158. From tempering in low alloy steel ..........
(c) Softening (d) Smelting
(a) Exponential increase in hardness
(b) Reduction in hardness
(c) No change in hardness
Ans : (a) When steel is heated to red hot and cooled
(d) Increase in hardness
slowly, the process is called annealing.
Purpose of annealing– UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
1. To soften Ans. (b) : After hardening, steel is usually re-heated to
2. To increase the quality of machinability. a suitable temperature below the lower critical point to
3. To increase the property of ductility. improve its toughness but it is done at the expense of
4. To refine the grain size. hardness.
Steel in its hardened condition, is generally too brittle
and too severely strained. In this condition steel can not
3. Hardening and Tempering used and hence it has to be tempered.
159. The correct sequence of quenching media used
154. In hardening, we infuse ____ on the surface of in hardening process having highest to lowest
the component. cooling power is:
(a) Carbon (b) Vanadium (a) Brine - Oil - Water - Air
(c) Copper (d) Zinc (b) Water - Brine - Oil - Air
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (c) Brine - Water - Oil - Air
Ans. (a) : In hardening, we infuse carbon on the surface (d) Oil - Brine - Water - Air
of the component. UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
155. At a low temperature tempering, the temper NLC Technician 24-09.2022
color observed on spring is: Ans. (c) : The correct sequence of quenching media
(a) Golden Yellow (b) Purple used in hardening process having highest and lowest
(c) Violet (d) Dark blue cooling power is–
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Brine – water – oil – air
Ans. (d) : At a low temperature tempering, the temper 160. The process of inducing toughness and
color observed on spring is dark blue. reducing brittleness by heat treatment is
called–
156. Which of the following is the hardness testing
(a) annealing (b) hardening
method?
(c) normalizing (d) tempering
(a) Knoop test (b) Wrap test
(c) Charpy test (d) Izod test
Ans. (a) : Knoop test is the hardness testing method. In
the knoop test, only the longer diagonal is measured. Ans. (d) : Tempering is heat treatment process. This
process increases toughness, reduces brittleness and
• The knoop hardness is calculated based on the increases ductility.
projected area of the ident. The heat treatment applied to ferrous alloy such as steel
• The shape of indentor used for knoop hardness test or cast iron.
is pyramid.
161. Name the heat treatment process in which after
• Brinell hardness test is applicable for low hard hardening a tool, it is reheated and cooled to
material. get the required property of toughness.
(a) Tempering Ans. (d) : Hardening process–It consists of heating the

(b) Normalising metal to a temperature of 30ºC to 50ºC above the upper
(c) Case hardening critical point for hypo eutectoid steels and by the same
(d) Induction hardening temperature above the lower critical temperature for
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) hyper eutectoid steel.
• It held at this temperature for considerable time &
Ans. (a) : Tempering process is introducing toughness.
then quenched in a suitable coding medium (water,
Tempering is the process of heating a substance to a brine solution, oil bath etc)
temperature below its critical range, holding and then
165. The aim of tempering is to____
cooling.
(a) increase the hardness
• It reduces brittleness.
(b) improve the strength
162. Which of the following statement is wrong (c) relieve the stress
(a) Quenching of metal involves suddenly (d) increase the machinability
cooling it in a cooling medium NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(b) Quenching of metal is used to increase its Ans. (b) : The aim of tempering is to improve the
machinability strength.
(c) Quenching of metal is done after heating is to Tempering– Tempering is a process of heat treating,
a desired temperature which is used to increase the toughness of iron based
(d) Quenching of metal is used to increase it alloys.
hardness • Tempering is usually performed after hardening to
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 reduce some of the excess hardness, and is done by
Ans. (b) : Quenching involves the rapid cooling of a heating the metal to some temperature below the
metal to adjust the mechanical properties of its original critical point for a certain period of time, then
state. In a quenching process metal is heated to allowing it to cool in still air.
temperature greater than that of normal conditions. • For instance, very hard tools are after tempered at
• To obtained different cooling rate different quenching low temperature, while springs are tempered at
much higher temperatures.
medium is used.
• Cooling rate–Brine > Water > Molten salt > Oil > Air 166. During heat treatment when carbon is
dissolved to form solid solution, it is known as
163. Hardenability of steel specimen (a) Ferrite (b) Pearlite
(a) determines amount of cementite come with in (c) Austenite (d) Cementite
steel NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(b) determines the distribution of hardness &
Ans. (c) : During heat treatment when carbon is
depth obtained by quenching dissolved to form solid solution, it is known as
(c) is measurement of resistance of plastic austenite.
deformation • Austenite is a material science term for iron with a
(d) is represented by Hook's law face-centered cubic (FCC) crystal structure and this
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 phase occurs in the Fe-C system above the eutectoid
Ans. (b) : Hardenability of steel specimen is determines temperature of 723oC.
by distribution of hardness & depth obtained by 167. H.S.S. is tempered at
quenching. (a) 220ºC to 230ºC (b) 230ºC to 270ºC
• Cooling rate obtained by different quenching (c) 280ºC to 400ºC (d) 550ºC to 600ºC
medium– Brine > Water > Molten salt > Oil > Air. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
164. Which is true regarding its quenching to Ans. (d) : High speed steel (HSS) is tempered at 550oC
increase the hardness of steel parts? to 600oC.
(a) Steel alloys can not be hardened by Purpose of tempering the steel– Steel in its hardened
quenching condition is generally too brittle to be used for certain
function therefore it is tempered.
(b) Radiation cooling is used as cooling method
The aim of tempering–
(c) Very quick cooling rate is gained due to
• To relieve the internal stresses.
quenching in air
• To regulate the hardness and toughness.
(d) Water is used for quenching of plain carbon
steel • To decrease the brittleness.
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 • To restore some ductility.
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 • To induce shock resistance.

168. To reduce internal stresses of a hardened tool, • Brittleness– Brittleness increases with decreases
the method of heat treatment generally applied toughness, but is greatly affected by internal
is stresses as well.
(a) Stabilising (b) Annealing • Plasticity– The ability to mold, bend or deform in
(c) Normalising (d) Tempering manner that does not spontaneously return to its
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 original shape. This is proportional to the ductility
Ans. (d) : To reduce internal stresses of a hardened tool, or malleability of the substances.
the method of heat treatment generally applied is • Elasticity– Also called flexibility, this is the ability
tempering. to deform, bend, compress, or stretch and return to
169. After hardening process, the metal becomes the original shape when external stress is removed.
more….. Elasticity is inversely related to the young's
(a) malleable modulus of the material.
(b) brittle 172. Measuring gauges require wear resistance,
(c) tough which heat treatment process required to get
(d) ductile new properties _____
(a) Normalizing (b) Case hardening
(c) Annealing (d) Tempering
Ans. (b) : After hardening process the metal becomes
more brittle.
Hardening– The objective of hardening is to produce Ans. (d) : Measuring gauges require wear resistance,
the martensite. tempering process required to get new properties.
Martensite– Martensite is formed in carbon steels by • The aim of tempering is to decrease brittleness of
the rapid cooling also known as quenching of the hardened steel.
austenite at a high rate such that carbon atoms do not 173. Tempering involves ……….
have time to diffuse out of the crystal structure to form (a) Reheating the quenched component to a
cementite (Fe3). temperature greater than critical temperature
170. After hardening the tool is reheated and cooled (b) Increasing the brittleness
to get required property of toughness. This (c) Reheating the quenched component to a
process is called …… temperature equal to critical temperature
(a) Flame hardening (d) None of these
(b) tempering RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(c) induction hardening Ans. (d) : Tempering– The tempering process consists
(d) cash hardening of reheating the hardened steel to some temperature
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 below the critical temperature, followed by any desired
Ans. (b) : After hardening the tool is reheated and rate of cooling.
cooled to get required property of toughness. This • The purpose of tempering a hardened steel
process is called tempering. component is for reducing its brittleness.
171. The purpose of tempering a hardened steel 174. Which of the following property is affected by
component is for …… heat treatment ?
(a) increasing its hardness (a) Hardness
(b) reducing its brittleness (b) Strength
(c) increasing its ductility (c) Ductility
(d) increasing its toughness (d) All of these
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
Ans. (b) : The purpose of tempering a hardened steel Ans. (d) : Hardness, strength and ductility these all
component is for reducing its brittleness. properties of material affected by heat treatment.
• Strength– Resistance to permanent deformation Heat treatment– The process of heat treatment is
and fearing. carried out first by beating the metal and then cooling it
• Toughness– Resistance to fracture, as measured by in the caustic soda solution, brine water, oil or air.
the Charpy test. Toughness often increases as • The purpose of heat treatment is to soften the metal
strength decreases. to change the grain size, to modify the structure of
• Hardness– A surface's resistance to scratching, the material and to relieve the stresses set up in the
abrasion, or indentation. material after hot or cold working.

175. Induction hardening process involves ……. Ans. (b) : Tempering process is required after repairing
(a) Heating surface by induction in field of broken cast iron parts using a low heat input electrodes.
invariable current • Tempering is done for the making steel tough to
(b) Case depth minimum of 2 mm are produced resist shock and fatigue.
(c) Heating surface by induction in field of 180. What is the percentage of carbon present in the
alternating current low carbon steel?
(d) None of these (a) 0.05-0.1%
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 (b) 0.15-0.3%
Ans. (c) : Induction hardening process involves heating (c) 0.5-0.8%
surface by induction in field of alternating current. (d) 0.8-1.4%
Hardening– The process of hardening consists of RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
heating the metal to a temperature of 30oC to 50oC
above the upper critical point for hypo eutectoid steel Ans. (b) :
and the by the some temperature above the lower • Dead mild steel → upto 0.15% carbon
critical temperature for hyper-eutectoid steels. • Low carbon or mild steel → 0.15% to 0.45% carbon
176. The transformation of austempering gives the • Medium carbon steel → 0.45% to 0.8% carbon
product of ............. • High carbon steel → 0.8% to 1.5% carbon
(a) Martensite (b) Bainite 181. To reduce internal stresses of a hardened tool
(c) Cementite (d) Ledeburite the method of heat treatment generally applied
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 is ........
Ans. (b) : The transformation of austempering gives the (a) Stablilising
product of bainite. (b) Annealing
• The objective of hardening is to produce the (c) Normalising
martensite. (d) Tempering
177. Tempering is the process of removing the RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
property of ...... Ans. (d) : To reduce internal stresses of a hardened tool,
(a) brittleness the method of heat treatment generally applied is
(b) malleability tempering.
(c) toughness Normalising– The process of normalising consists of
(d) ductility heating the steel 30oC to 50oC above its upper critical
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 temperature for hypo-eutectoid steels. It is held at this
temperature for about 15 minutes and then allowed to
Ans. (a) : Tempering is the process of removing the
cool down in still air.
property of brittleness and increase ductility.
• The process of normalizing is frequently applied to
178. The tempering on steel judged by the colour of
casting and forgings etc.
the oxide film produced upon heating of steel.
What is the temperature range for steel where Purpose of normalizing–
the colour changes from pale straw to blue? • To refine the grain structure of the steel to improve
(a) 180° C to 200°C machinability of weld.
(b) 230°C to 300°C • To remove strains caused by cold working process.
(c) 300°C to 400°C • To remove dislocations caused in the internal
(d) 400°C to 450°C structure of the steel due to hot working.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 • To improve certain mechanical and electrical
Ans. (b) : The tempering on steel judged by the colour properties.
of the oxide film produced upon heating of steel. The 182. For reducing the hardness after the hardening
temperature range for steel is 230oC to 300oC where the process and increasing ductility, the process
colour changes from pale straw to blue. adopted is:
179. Which heat treatment is required after (a) Tempering (b) Annealing
repairing broken cast iron parts using a low (c) Normalising (d) All of these
heat input electrode? RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
(a) Hardening Ans. (a) : Tempering process is adopted for reducing
(b) Tempering the hardness after the hardening process and increasing
(c) Annealing ductility.
(d) Normalizing • Tempering is the process of removing the property
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 of brittleness and increase ductility.
183. For making surface hard and keeping the core Ans. (c) : For case hardening the first stage is
ductile, the process adopted is: carburizing. By carburizing it is meant increasing the
(a) Normalising (b) Annealing percentage of carbon on the surface.
(c) Case hardening (d) Martempering Case hardening process–
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 (a) Carburizing
Ans. (c) : Case hardening process is adopted for making (b) Cyaniding
surface hard and keeping the core ductile. (c) Flame hardening
Hardening– The objective of hardening is to produce (d) Induction hardening.
the martensile. 187. While hardening, after heating the steel to the
• Only medium carbon steel can be hardened. required temperature, it is held at that
Case hardening– Process of increasing the hardness of temperature as soaking time for normally
only surface by the process of diffusion of carbon (a) 5 minutes for 10 mm thickness
and nitrogen. (b) 10 minutes for 5 mm thickness
Induction hardening– Fastest method of case (c) 2 minutes for 20 mm thickness
hardening. (d) 20 minutes for 2 mm thickness
• Medium carbon steel can be hardened by this RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
technique. Ans. (a) : While hardening, after heating the steel to the
• Copper induction coil is used in induction hardening required temperature, it is held at that temperature as
for application over camshaft, crankshaft. soaking time for normally 5 minutes for 10 mm
Tempering– Process of introducing toughness. thickness.
188. Which one of the following quenching media is
• Tempering is the process of removing the property
used for hardening H.S.S. tool?
of brittleness and increase ductility.
(a) Water (b) Brine solution
184. Which heat treatment process increases the (c) Oil (d) Soda water
wear resistance? RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
(a) Hardening Ans. (c) : Oil quenching media is used for hardening
(b) Tempering high speed steel (HSS) tool.
(c) Annealing Quenching medium–
(d) Normalizing Water– Vapour blanket from non-uniform cooling.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 Salt bath– Decrease the tendency of vapour blanket
Ans. (a) : Hardening heat treatment process increases formation
the wear resistance. Oil bath– Uniform cooling.
185. After hardening process, the metal becomes 189. What is the hardening temperature for H.S.S.
more hardened and also will become more tool?
(a) Brittle (a) 1250ºC (b) 950ºC
(b) Ductile (c) 850ºC (d) 750ºC
(c) Malleable RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(d) Tough Ans. (a) : The hardening temperature for high speed
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 steel tool is 1250oC.
Ans. (a) : After hardening process, the metal becomes 190. One component of C50 steel is heated to 830ºC,
more hardened and also will become more brittle. soaked at it for some time and then quenched
• The objective of hardening is to produce the in oil. Again it is heated to 600ºC and quenched
martensite. in oil. Name this process of heat treatment.
• Only medium carbon steel can be hardened. (a) Annealing
186. For case hardening the first stage is (b) Normalizing
carburising. By carburising it is meant... (c) Hardening and tempering
(a) Increasing the percentage of carbon of the (d) Case hardening
steel piece RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
(b) Increasing the percentage of carbon of the Ans. (c) :
core of the piece Hardening– After hardening process, the metal
(c) Increasing the percentage of carbon on the becomes hard and brittle.
surface • The objective of hardening is to produce the
(d) Decreasing the percentage of carbon of the martensite.
steel piece Tempering– The purpose of tempering a hardened
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 steel component is for reducing its brittleness.

191. Lower critical temperature of high carbon steel Ans. (c) : The toughness in a steel is increased and
while hardening is brittleness is decreased by a heat treatment process that
(a) 960ºC is called tempering.
(b) 900ºC 197. Desirable hardness a file is generally :
(c) 723ºC (a) 30 HRC
(d) 560ºC
(b) 45 HRC
(c) 60 HRC
Ans. (c) : Lower critical temperature of high carbon
steel while hardening is 723oC. (d) 80 HRC
• Hardening temperature for HSS tool is 1250oC. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
192. Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter is Ans. (c) : Desirable hardness in a file is generally 60
(a) 45 HRC HRC.
(b) 52 HRC • HRC = Hardness on Rockwell Scale.
(c) 62 HRC 198. Which one of the following heat treatment
(d) 75 HRC
processes produces a scale-free surface on the
component?
Ans. (c) : Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter
(a) Flame hardening
is 62 HRC.
(b) Case hardening
• HRC = Hardness on Rockwell Scale.
193. H.S.S. is tempered at (c) Nitriding
(a) 220ºC to 230ºC (d) Induction hardening
(b) 230ºC to 270ºC RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
(c) 280ºC to 400ºC Ans. (d) : Induction hardening process produces a scale
(d) 550ºC to 600ºC free surface on the component.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 • Induction hardening process is a type of surface
Ans. (d) : High speed steel is tempered at 550oC to hardening in which a metal parts in induction heated
600oC. and them quenched. The quenched metal undergoes
194. After heating upto required hardening a martensite transformation increasing the hardness
temperature, why must tool steels be and brittleness of the part.
quenched?
(a) To induce internal stresses 199. Which one of the following is the purpose of
(b) To build up hardening structure tempering a hardened steel component?
(c) To fall off the scale (a) To increase toughness
(d) To return in to its original structure (b) To increase ductility
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 (c) To increase hardness
Ans. (b) : After heating upto required hardening (d) To reduce hardness
temperature, tool steel must be quenched to build up RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
hardening structure.
Ans. (a) : The purpose of tempering a hardened steel
195. A punch is made out of unalloyed steel. After component is to increase toughness.
hardening a crack takes place. What can be the
reason to develop this crack?
(a) The punch is too long heated
(b) The punch is too little heated
(c) The punch is too slowly quenched
(d) The punch is suddenly quenched
Ans. (b) : A punch is made out of unalloyed steel after
hardening a crack take place the reason can be to
develop this crack the punch is to little heated.
196. The toughness in a steel is increased and
brittleness is decreased by a heat treatment
operation called as 200. Which one of the following processes is used for
(a) Annealing
hardening the surface of tool steel?
(b) Normalizing
(a) Carburizing (b) Cyaniding
(c) Tempering
(d) Case hardening (c) Induction hardening (d) Hardening

Ans. (c) : Induction hardening process is used for 205. Due to increase in content of carbon in steel-
hardening the surface of tool steel. (a) The hardness increases
• Fastest method of case hardening is induction (b) the robustness increases
hardening. (c) The robustness decreases
(d) The ductility increases
201. In nitriding process the NH3 gas is introduced
at:
Ans. (a) : Hardness– Hardness is the ability of a
(a) 500 ºC to 560 ºC (b) 575 ºC to 600 ºC
material to resist deformation, which is determined by a
(c) 600 ºC to 650 ºC (d) 650 ºC to 700 ºC standard test where surface resistance to indentation is
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 measured.
Ans. (a) : In nitriding process the NH3 gas is introduced • If carbon content is increased in steel, hardness will
at 500oC to 560oC. be increase.
• Nitriding is a heat treatment process that diffuses 206. High speed steel is preheated before heating at
nitrogen into the surface of a metal to create a case the right hardening temperature. The reason
hardened surface. behind this is-
(a) To remove quenching stress
202. In a case hardening process, ammonia gas is
(b) to remove cracks
introduced on steel; the process is known as:
(c) to increase ductility
(a) Cyaniding (b) Nitriding (d) To soften
(c) Carburizing (d) Ammonising RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 Ans. (b) : High speed steel is preheated before heating
Ans. (b) : In a case hardening process, ammonia gas at the right hardening temperature. The reason behind
(NH3) is introduced on steel, the process is known as this is to remove cracks.
nitriding. 207. When carbon steel is heated above high critical
• Nitriding process improves mechanical properties, point, and then cooled immediately, which
surface hardness and corrosion resistance. property of steel is enhanced?
o o (a) Hardness (b) Malleability
• Temperature range 500 C to 560 C.
(c) Ductility (d) Elasticity
• Below tempering temperature.
203. The process of heating metal below 400ºC and Ans. (a) : When carbon steel is heated above high
then cooling in water is called- critical point, and then cooled immediately, hardness of
(a) Normalizing (b) Case hardening steel is enhanced.
(c) Annealing (d) Tempering 208. Hardening is-
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 (a) Heating steel below 400ºC and then cooling
Ans. (d) : The tempering process consists of reheating in water
the hardened steel to some temperature below the lower (b) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical point
critical temperature followed by any desired rate of and letting it stay inside after switching off
the furnace
cooling.
(c) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical point
• The process of heating metal below 400oC and then and immediately cooling in water
cooling in water is called tempering. (d) Heating steel 50ºC above high critical point
204. Which of the following metals has hot hardness and cooling in steady air at room temperature
ranging from 200ºC to 250ºC? RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(a) High speed steel tool Ans. (c) : Hardening– The process of hardening
(b) High carbon steel tool consist of heating the metal to a temperature of 30oC to
(c) Cemented carbide tool 50oC above he upper critical point for hypo-eutectoid
steels and by the same temperature above the lower
(d) Stellite tool
critical temperature for hyper-eutectoid steel.
209. The hardness of steel depends upon-
Ans. (b) : High carbon steel tool metal has hot hardness (a) Percentage value of carbon
ranging from 200oC to 250oC. (b) The temperature at which it is heated
Hot hardness– In materials engineering and (c) The rate of cooling
metallurgy, hot hardness or red hardness corresponds to (d) All of the above
hardness of a material at high temperatures. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
Ans. (d) : Hardness of steel depends upon– • The process of hardening consists of heating the
• Percentage value of carbon. metal to a temperature of 30oC to 50oC above the
• The temperature at which it is heated. upper critical point for hypo-eutectoid steel and by
the same temperature above the lower critical
• The rate of cooling.
temperature for hyper eutectoid steels.
210. What is the maximum temperature at which 214. Which heat treatment method is generally used
the internal structure of metal start to change? to remove internal stress by hardened tool?
(a) critical temperature (a) Stabilizing (b) Annealing
(b) Higher critical temperature (c) Normalizing (d) Tempering
(c) Lower critical temperature RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
(d) All of the above Ans. (d) : Tempering– The tempering (also known as
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 drawing) is done for the following reasons.
Ans. (b) : Upper critical temperature– The • To reduce brittleness of the hardened steel and thus
temperature at which the structure of steel completely to increase ductility.
change to austenite is called the upper critical • To remove internal stresses caused by rapid cooling
temperature. of steel.
211. The objective of steel's tempering is- • To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue.
(a) To get rid of internal stress 215. Normal hardening temperature for steel having
(b) To control hardness and toughness less than 0.83% carbon content is-
(c) To decrease brittleness (a) Below the upper critical range
(d) All of the above (b) Above the upper critical range
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (c) Below the lower critical range
Ans. (d) : Tempering– The tempering is done for the (d) Above the lower critical range
following reason– RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(i) To reduce brittleness of the hardened steel and Ans. (b) : Normal hardening temperature for steel
thus to increase ductility. having less than 0.83% carbon content is above the
(ii) To remove internal stress caused by rapid cooling upper critical range.
of steel. 216. Which of the following generally decreases in
(iii) To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue the steel after quench hardening?
(a) Brittleness (b) Toughness
212. The objective of steel hardening is-
(c) Impact strength (d) None of these
(a) To increase cutting capability
(b) to increase erosion resistance
Ans. (c) : Impact strength generally decreases in the
(c) to increase hardness
steel after quench hardening.
217. Carbon steel is tempered at_______.
(a) 200°C to 300°C (b) 100°C to 150°C
Ans. (d) : Hardening is a metallurgical metal working
(c) 550°C to 600°C (d) 400°C to 500°C
process used to increase the hardness of a metal. The
hardness of a metal is directly proportional to the
uniaxial yield stress at the location of the imposed Ans. (a) : Carbon steel is tempered at 200oC to 300oC.
strain. A harder metal will have a higher resistance to • High speed steel tempered at 550oC-600oC.
plastic deformation than a less hard metal. 218. Tempering of hardened steel decreases its:
213. The properties of steel are changed by suitable (a) brittleness
heat treatment methods. Which method is (b) shock resistivity
suitable to increase abrasion resistance in steel? (c) machinability
(a) Hardening (b) Tempering (d) ductility
(c) Annealing (d) Normalizing UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 Ans. (a) :
Ans. (a) : The main objects of hardening are– • Tempering of hardened steel decreases its
(a) To increase the hardness of the metal so that it can brittleness.
resist wear. • Increases toughness by reducing brittleness in
(b) To enable it to cut other metals i.e. to make it tempering.
suitable for cutting tools. • High speed steel tempered at 550oC - 600oC.

219. How does the cooling character affect the 223. Upon heat treatment of carbon steel, which of
hardness of carbon steel? the following will give the maximum hardness?
(a) The cooling rate has no effect on the hardness (a) Normalising
(b) Lower rate of cooling leads to higher (b) Tempering
hardness (c) Quenching after austenitising
(c) Lower rate of cooling leads to lower hardness (d) Annealing
(d) Higher rate of cooling leads to lower hardness IOCL 2020
Ans. (c) : Heat treatment of carbon steel quenching
Ans. (c) : The lower rate of cooling leads to lower
after austeniting give the maximum hardness. To obtain
hardness of carbon steel. After heating the steel, it is
austenitic structure, the steel is heated slightly above the
cooled at a fixed minimum rate. This process is called
critical temperature and quenched at 250oC to 300oC
quenching. Quenching medium water, air, oil, salt, or
with a suitable liquid medium in which the steel
caustic soda solution.
structure does not change from austenite to martensite
220. What is the lower critical temperature of high but to bainite. As it changes, it is hard but not brittle.
carbon steel during hardening? 224. Temporary hardness can be removed by
(a) 560ºC (b) 900ºC (a) Base Exchange process
(c) 960ºC (d) 723ºC (b) Filtration
BEML 2022 (c) Screening
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (d) Boiling
Ans. (d) : High carbon steel has a lower critical ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
temperature of 723oC during solidification. The Ans. (d) : Temporary hardness can be removed by
percentage of carbon in high carbon steel varies boiling, this type of hardness arises from the
between 0.6-1.5%. It is used in making cutting tools, presence of bicarbonates of calcium and
die-blocks, railway tracks, springs, taps and dies etc. magnesium in water.
221. Case hardening is done on: Temporary hardness can be removed–
(a) Mild steel 1. Temporary hardness can be removed by boiling
(b) Cast iron water.
(c) Brass 2. Temporary hardness can be removed by filtering
(d) Bronze water after adding alum.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 225. For maximum hot hardness of cutting tool–
Ans. (a) : Case hardening– In many engineering (a) Carbon tool steel
applications, it is desirable that a steel being used (b) Ceramic
should have a hardened surface to resist wear and tear. (c) High speed steel
At the sometime, it should have soft and tough interior (d) Cast iron
or core so that it is able to absorb any shocks etc. This RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 08-02-2019, Shift-II
type of treatment is applied to gears, ball bearing, NTPC Fitter 2016
railway wheels etc. Ans : (b) Ceramics–
222. The toughness in a steel is increased and • It consists of fine grained powder of Al2O3 along with
brittleness is decreased by a heat treatment SiC, chromium oxide, magnesium oxide, magnesium
operation called as : oxide, nickel oxide, titanium carbide.
(a) Annealing • It is manufactured by powder metallurgy.
(b) Normalizing • Temperature 1400oC.
(c) Tempering • Cutting speed 300 - 600 m/min.
(d) Case hardening 226. For hardening high speed steel, quenching
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 media used–
Ans. (c) : The toughness in a steel is increased and (a) Water (b) Oil
brittleness is decreased by a heat treatment (c) Saline water (d) Soda water
operation called as tempering. RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
The tempering is done for the following reason– Ans : (b) Oil is used as a quenching medium to harden
(i) To reduce brittleness of the steel and thus to high speed steel. Its cutting speed is higher than that of
increase ductility. high carbon steel.
(ii) To remove internal stresses caused by rapid cooling 227. ................ the process of case hardening in
of steel. which the outer surface is made hard by
(iii) To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue. increasing the amount of carbon–
(a) Normalizing Ans : (d) Feeler gauges are generally made of tempered
(b) Tempering tool steel or stainless steel, with the help of feeler
(c) Annealing gauge, the gap between two meeting surface is
(d) Carburizing measured.
232. Which of the following heat treatment
Ans : (d) Carburizing is the process of case hardening
processes, which creates equilibrium
in which the outer surface of the workpiece is hardened
processes?
by increasing the amount of carbon. It is a process of
(a) Normalizing and tempering
heat treatment in which carbon is absorbed by heating a
metal in the presence of charcoal or carbon monoxide. (b) Hardening and normalizing
This process is carried out on low carbon steel. (c) Annealing and normalizing
228. Which heat treatment process is used to reduce (d) Annealing and hardening
internal stresses of hardened tool? BHEL 2020
(a) Normalizing UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
(b) Stabilizing Ans : (c)
(c) Tempering • Annealing and normalizing process brings
(d) Annealing equilibrium state in the metal.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III • Normalizing gives more homogenized and refine
Ans : (c) Tempering– grain structure than annealing.
• To reduce brittleness of the hardened steel and thus • Normalizing is fast, efficient and costly.
to increase ductility. 233. Which of the following Hardened steel can be
• To remove internal stresses caused by rapid cooling used after process?
of steel.
(a) Carbonitriding
• To make steel tough to resist shock and fatigue. (b) Nitriding
The tempering process consists of reheating the
(c) Cyaniding
hardened steel to some temperature below the lower
(d) Tempering
critical temperature, followed by any desired rate of
cooling. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
229. Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter is
(a) 45 HRC (b) 52 HRC Ans : (d) Hardened steel is used after tempering.
(c) 62 HRC (d) 75 HRC Tempering– When steel parts or tools are hardened, it
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018 has the property of brittleness, due to which if they are
Ans : (c) High speed steel– It is a carbon steel alloy. It hit, then that part tool can break. Therefore the hardness
contains high amounts of tungsten, the composition of of the part should also be maintained and the brittleness
HSS consist of 18% tungsten 4% chromium and 1% should also be reduced. For this part tempering is done.
vanadium and 0.7% carbon. 234. Primary objective of full annealing is to:
The hardness of high speed steel ranges from 62 to 64 (a) Increase toughness and yield point
HRC. The addition of 5 to 8% cobalt in HSS results in (b) Increase ductility and machinability
high strength and wear resistance. (c) Reduce ductility
230. The increase in hardness due to cold working is (d) Improve surface finish
called ................. LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
(a) age hardening
Ans : (b) Full annealing– The purpose of full
(b) work hardening
annealing is to soften the metal, to refine the grain
(c) induction hardening
structure, to relieve the stresses and to remove trapped
(d) flame hardening
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 gases in the metal. The process consists of heating the
steel 30oC - 50oC above the upper critical temperature
Ans. (b) : The increase in hardness due to cold working
is called work hardening. for hypo eutectoid steel and by the same temperature
Cold working is the plastic deformation metals below above the lower critical temperature for hyper-eutectoid
the recrystallization temperature. In most cases, such for sometime and then cooled slowly in the furnace.
cold forming is done at room temperature. 235. The heat treatment process used for softening
231. What is the material of the feeler gauge? hardened steel is :
(a) High speed steel (a) Annealing
(b) High carbon steel (b) Normalizing
(c) Mild steel (c) Tempering
(d) Stainless steel (d) Nitriding
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
Ans : (c) The heat treatment process used for softening

hardened steel is tempering. 4. Ferrite, Cementite, Pearlite,
Tempering is the process of heat treatment in which the Austenite, Martensite
following of the metal is reduced and toughness is
increased. Tempering mainly done on high carbon steel 240. Cyaniding and Nitriding are two methods of:
or high speed steel. (a) Hardening
236. Metal after hardening gets– (b) Case Hardening
(a) Malleable (c) Tempering
(b) Brittle (d) Normalizing
(c) Tough strong NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(d) Ductile NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) Ans. (b) : Case hardening–Case hardening is a method
Ans : (b) Metal after hardening becomes brittle, the used to harden the outer surface of low-carbon steel
steel is not suitable for most of the work. Therefore by while leaving the centre or core soft and ductile.
tempering, the extra brittleness is removed and ductility • Case hardening involves heating the metal to its
increased. critical temperature in some carbonaceous material.
237. Tempering of high speed steel done at– 241. Which type of stainless steel is used for making
(a) 2200C to 2300C knives and turbine blades?
(b) 2800C to 4000C (a) Duplex (b) Ferritic
(c) 5500C to 6000C (c) Austenitic (d) Martensitic
(d) 2300C to 2700C BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (d) : Martensitic is a type of stainless steel is used
Ans : (c) Tempering of high speed steel done at 550oC for making knives and turbine blades.
to 600oC.
Martensitic stainless steel–The chromium steel
Tempering is a process of heat treating, which is used to containing 12 to 14% chromium and 0.12 to 0.35%
increase toughness of iron-based alloys. Tempering is carbon is called martensitic stainless steel, as they
usually performed after hardening to reduce some of the passes martensite structure.
excess hardness. • These steels are magnetic and may be hardened by
238. Hardening is followed by suitable heat treatment and the hardness obtainable
(a) Tempering depends upon carbon content.
(b) Normalizing • These steels can be easily welded and machined.
(c) Annealing
242. Which one of the following structures of steel is
(d) None of these obtained due to the drastic cooling from the
BDL Technician 2022 austenite structure?
(IOF Fitter 2017) (a) Pearlite (b) Cementite
Ans : (a) Tempering is a method used to decrease the (c) Martensite (d) Troostite
hardness, thereby increasing the ductility of the RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
quenched steel, to impart some springiness and
Ans. (c) : Martensite structures of steel is obtained due
malleability to the metal.
to the drastic cooling from the austenite structure.
239. Martempering is a ............... process.
• In the system, martensite is the hardest, strongest and
(a) Normalising
most brittle phase. It is a metastable phase that results
(b) Tempering from a diffusion of the transformation of austenite when
(c) Annealing Fe-C alloy are rapidly cooled and quenched.
(d) Hardening • Martensite is a super saturated solid solution of carbon
(IOF Fitter 2017) in ferrite with a body centered tetragonal (BCT)
Ans : (d) Martempering is a hardening process. structure.
Martempering– This process is also known as stepped 243. During heat treatment when carbon is
quenching or interrupted quenching. It consists of dissolved to form solid solution, it is known as
heating steel above the upper critical point and then (a) Ferrite (b) Pearlite
quenching it in a salt both kept at a suitable (c) Austenite (d) Cementite
temperature. NLC Technician 24-09.2022
Ans. (c) : During heat treatment when carbon is Ans. (c) : A given component cracked after heat
dissolved to form solid solution, it is known as treatment because it was suddenly cooled in brine.
austenite. • The main reason for cracking in heat treatment are–
• Austenite is solid solution of carbon and other part design, steel grades, part defects, heat treating
constituents in a particular form of iron known as γ-iron practice and tempering practice.
(gamma iron).
247. Carbon steel is tempered at ____
• This is a face-centered cubic structure formed when
iron is heated above 910ºC (1670ºF) and gamma iron (a) 200ºC to 300ºC (b) 100ºC to 150ºC
becomes unstable at temperatures above 1390ºC (c) 550ºC to 600ºC (d) 400ºC to 500ºC
(2530ºF). HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
244. Which one of the following quenching media is Ans. (a) : Carbon steel is tempered at 200ºC to 300ºC.
used for hardening H.S.S. tool? • Tempering is a heat treatment that improves the
(a) Water (b) Brine solution toughness of hard, brittle steels so that they can hold up
(c) Oil (d) Soda water during processing.
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 • Tempering requires that the metal reaches a
Ans. (c) : The quenching media is used for hardening temperature below the lower critical temperature.
high speed steel (HSS) tool is oil. • Percentage of carbon have low toughness, steels
• Quenching is the rapid cooling of a workpiece cooling tempered between 200ºC to 400ºC have reduced
of a workpiece in water, oil or air after heating the toughness.
material to a certain temperature (depending on the 248. It is solid mixture of gamma iron and carbon-
material) to obtain certain material properties. (a) Ferrite (b) Cementite
• Quenching is slow in oils but quenching metal in oil is (c) Austenite (d) Pearlite
most popular method because it dimensions risk of BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
cracking and warping. RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
• High speed steels are used for cutting metals at much Ans. (c) : Austenite is solid mixture of gamma iron and
higher cutting speed than ordinary carbon tool steels. carbon.
• Oil medium is used for quenching to reduce the risk of
• In an austenite structure, the microstructure appears to
cracking during machining.
be more random at the atomic layer meaning that the
245. Which one of the following groups of electrons are unable to align their rotation in a
quenching media is in order of their severity of consistent direction. Therefore they appear as non-
the cooling rate, i.e. from slow to rapid cooling? magnetic or non ferromagnetic.
(a) Oil, forced air, brine solution
249. A laminated structure formed on mixing ferrite
(b) Force air, oil, brine solution
and cementite is called-
(c) Brine solution, oil, forced air
(a) Alloy (b) Cementite
(d) Forced air, brine solution, oil
(c) Austenite (d) Pearlite
Ans. (b) : Force air, oil, brine solution is the groups of
Ans. (d) : A laminated structure formed on mixing
quenching media is in order of their severity of the
ferrite and cementite is called pearlite.
cooling rate, i.e. from slow to rapid cooling.
• Pearlite is a structural component of steel. It is formed
• Industrial quenching media listed in order to
from the two phases ferrite and cementite.
increasing quenching severity are as under–
1. Air 250. The appropriate temperature for forging of low
carbon steel and high speed steel would be –
2. Oil
(a) 1600oC (b) 1100oC
3. Soluble oil and water solutions o
(c) 1300 C (d) 900oC
4. Fused or liquid salts.
5. Tap water
6. Water solution of 10% sodium chloride (brine) Ans. (b) : The appropriate temperature for forging of
low carbon steel and high speed steel would be 1100oC.
246. A given component cracked after heat
• The forging temperatures are above the
treatment. What can be the possible reason?
recrystallization temperature and are typically between
(a) It was heated for long time
950ºC to 1250ºC.
(b) It was not properly cleaned before heating
251. What is formed when carbon dissolved in iron?
(c) It was suddenly cooled in brine
(a) Austenite (b) Ferrite
(d) It was slowly cooled in air (c) Pearlite (d) Cementite
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Ans. (b) : Ferrite is formed when carbon dissolved in Ans. (a) :

iron. Ferrite has the softest structure. Its hardness is • Iron with 0.008% to 0.025% carbon is known as
very less. The austenite structure is obtained when steel ferrite.
is heated above the lower critical temperature (723oC). • Ferrite is a pure iron structure with very little carbon
Ferrite and cementite combine to form pearlite. Steel content.
with 0.83% carbon is called pearlite. • It has high magnetic properties.
• This structure is soft and ductile.
252. Ferrite is a very weak solid solution of?
257. While heating plain carbon steel, the
(a) Carbon and iron
temperature at which .................. is formed is
(b) Only carbon called lower critical point.
(c) Steel (a) Ferrite (b) Pearlite
(d) Hydrogen (c) Cementite (d) Austenite
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
Ans. (a) : Ferrite is a very weak solid solution of carbon Ans. (d) :
and iron. Ferrite is an alloy of α-iron and carbon. The • While heating plain carbon steel, the temperature
ferrite content in α-iron is upto 99.9%. Ferrite is soft at which austenite is formed is called lower critical
point.
and ductile.
• In an austenitic structure, the microstructure
253. If the steel is heated, the change starts in the appears to be more random at the atomic layer
structure from temperature 723ºC this new meaning that the electrons are unable to align their
structure is called: rotation in a consistent direction. Therefore, they
(a) Cementite (b) Ferrite appear as non-magnetic or non-ferromagnetic.
(c) Pearlite (d) Austenite 258. The lower critical point (heating) for steel is at
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (a) 723ºC (b) 900ºC
Ans. (d) : If the steel is heated, the change starts in the (c) 1200ºC (d) 523ºC
structure from temperature 723oC. This new structure is
Ans. (a) :
called austenite.
• The lower critical point (heating) is at 723oC.
254. At room temperature, plain carbon steel • It is the temperature of pearlite to austenite
contains : transformation.
(a) Ferrite and cementite • Below this temperature austenite does not exist.
(b) Ferrite and pearlite 259. Martensite is manufactured by which of the
(c) Pearlite and Cementite following?
(d) Ferrite, Cementite and Pearlite (a) normalising process
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 (b) annealing process
Ans. (d) : At room temperature, plain carbon steel (c) tempering process
contains ferrite, cementite and pearlite. In this steel, (d) quenching process
carbon is added as an alloying element, hence it is
Ans. (d) Martensite is a metastable crystallization phase
known as plain carbon steel. The carbon content in it is
of iron formed by the rapid cooling or quenching of
upto 1.5%. austenite.
255. Quenching transforms austenite to : 260. ............ is the hardest component of steel.
(a) Ferrite (b) Cementite (a) austenite (b) cementite
(c) Martensite (d) Pearlite (c) bainite (d) pearlite
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
Ans. (c) : Quenching transforms austenite to martensite. Ans. (b) :
Martensite is a metastable crystallization phase of iron • Cementite is the hardest component of steel.
formed by the rapid cooling or quenching of austenite. • Cementite consists of 93.33% iron and 6.67%
carbon.
256. Iron with 0.008% to 0.025% carbon is known
• Pearlite consists of 87% ferrite and 13% cementite.
as :
261. What is the kind of lattice in a gamma iron?
(a) Ferrite
(a) Face centered cubic
(b) Pearlite (b) Body centered cubic
(c) Cementite (c) Hexagonal closely packed
(d) Hyper eutectoid (d) Tetragonal centered cubic
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018
Ans. (a) : Face Centred Cubic (FCC)– In a unit cell of Ans : (b) The temperature point at which steel is heated
face centred cubic space lattice, there are fourteen atoms. to change starts it is called the lower critical point. The
The eight atom are located at the corner of six faces. This starting and ending points of steel transformation are
type of lattice is found in gamma (γ) iron, aluminium, called critical point and the chain joining these two
copper, lead silver, nickel, gold, platinum, calcium etc. points is called critical range. The temperature from
262. Alpha iron exists only in ................... condition. where the change starts at 723oC is called the lower
(a) High temperature critical point and where it completes the upper critical
(b) Room temperature point.
(c) High pressure 267. Steel has 0.8% carbon. What is it called?
(d) Low pressure (a) 100% pearlite
ISRO Technician-B Welder 21.04.2018 (b) Ferrite and pearlite
Ans. (b) : Alpha iron exists at room temperature. At (c) 100% Austenite
normal temperature, ferrite is called alpha iron. Alpha (d) Pearlite and cementite
iron is less ductile, but has magnetic properties. Carbon UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
is not soluble in it, its crystal structure is body centered. Ans : (a) Steel which contains only 0.8% carbon, it is
called pearlite structure. Pearlite contains a mixture of
263. Austempering is an ............ process.
ferrite and cementite. The content of pearlite is mainly
(a) Tempering
found in low carbon steel and medium carbon steel.
(b) Hardening
(c) Annealing 268. When a steel containing more than 0.8%
(d) Normalizing carbon is cooled slowly below the lower critical
(IOF Fitter 2017) point, it consists of :
(a) Mainly pearlite
Ans : (a) Austempring– In this process, steel is heated (b) Mainly ferrite
above the critical temperature (923oC). It is then (c) Ferrite and pearlite
quenched in the bath maintained at the temperature (d) Pearlite and cementite
above the martensite start temperature within the LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
bainitic range (200-400oC generally). The final
Ans : (d) Cementite in steel does not occur freely but is
structure is bainite in austempering. Bainite has higher
mixed in a substance called pearlite. Pearlite contains
toughness and ductility than martensite but is hardness
87% ferrite and 13% cementite. Cementite, which is a
and strength are less compared to the martensite. chemical substance, also contains a mixture of 14 parts
264. All basic heat treatment process for steel ferrite and 1 part carbon. The starting and ending points
involves- of steel change is called critical point and the link
(a) Transformation of austenite between the two parts is called the critical range.
(b) Transformation of pearlite
(c) Transformation of martensite
(d) Transformation of eutectoid
5. Miscellaneous Question
269. Ra value of surface refers to
Ans : (a) All basic heat treatment process for steel lead
to transformation of austenite. (a) Type of coating given on surface
(b) Heat treatment given on surface
265. Cementite consists–
(c) Roughness of surface
(a) 16.67% carbon and 83.33% iron
(b) 13% carbon and 87% ferrite (d) Hardness of surface
(c) 13% ferrite and 87% pearlite BEML 2022
(d) 6.67% carbon and 93.33% iron NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Ans. (c) : Ra value of surface refers to roughness of
Ans : (d) Cementite contains 6.67% carbon and surface.
93.33% iron. Cementite in steel does not occur Surface roughness is calculated measuring the average
independently but is mixed with a substance called of surface picks and valleys across to surface. This
pearlite. Pearlite contains 87% ferrite and 13% measurement is most commonly shown as "Ra" for "
Roughness average".
cementite.
266. The temperature point of which the change 270. Ultrasonic testing is done in materials to
determine
starts on heating steel is called?
(a) Exothermic point (a) Cracks below the surface
(b) Lower critical point (b) Yield strength
(c) Upper critical point (c) Hardness
(d) Reheating point (d) Ultimate tensile strength
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Ans. (a) : Ultrasonic testing is done in material to (a) A-iii, B-i, C- ii, D-iv
determine the cracks below the surface. (b) A-iii, B-i, C-iv, D-ii
• Ultrasonic testing (UT) comprises a range of non- (c) A-iv, B-iii, C-ii, D-i
destructive test (NDT) techniques that send ultrasonic (d) D-ii, C-i, B-iii, A-iv
waves through an object or material. This high ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
frequency sound waves are transmitted in to materials to IOCL 2020
characterise the material or cracks (flow) detecting.
Ans. (c) : Binocular body → Thermoplastics
271. The rusting of Iron can be prevented by
Diesel engine piston → Alluminium alloy
(a) Painting
(b) Greasing Lifting hook of a crane → Un-heat treated wrought iron
(c) Oiling Bed of high precision lathe → Grey cast iron
(d) All the above 275. TTT Curves refers to:
HSSC Pipe (Fitter) 03-08-2021 (a) Time, Travel and Temperature curve
Ans. (d) : Rusting of Iron can be prevented by painting, (b) Temperature, Time and Transformation curve
oiling, greasing etc. (c) Temperature, Transformation and Testing
272. The purpose of heat treatment is curve
(a) to make bright (d) Transmission, Temperature and Time curve
(b) to change in shape ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(c) to produce certain desired properties Ans. (b) : TTT Curves refers to time - temperature and
(d) to prevent it from rusting transformation curve
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 TTT curve also called isothermal transformation.
Ans. (c) : Heat treatment is used to improve the TTT diagram are used to predict the kinetic of diffusion
physical properties of given materials. phase transformation for given temperature.
Heat treatment can soften metal to improve formability. 276. In an Iron-carbon phase diagram, Y axis
• Heat treatment is the process of heating metal and represents
then cooling the metal in controlled way to select (a) Percentage of carbon
desired mechanical properties. (b) Percentage of Iron
273. Which of the following processes is oxide (c) Temperature
coating process? (d) Volume
(a) Parkerizing ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(b) Sherardising NTPC Fitter 2016
(c) Anodising Ans. (c) :
(d) Galvanization
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022
Ans. (c) : Anodising is an electrochemical process that
convert the metal surface into a decorative, durable
corrosion resistance anodic oxide finish.
• Galvanizing process is applying a protective zinc
coating to steel.
• In an Iron-Carbon phase diagram. Y-axis represents
• Parkerizing is process phosphate coating in steel.
temperature and X-axis represents carbon percentage.
• The sherardizing process involve diffusing of the zinc
into base metal off the object. 277. Galvanising means :
(a) Painting
274. Match the type of materials for realizing
various parts. (b) Stainless steel coating
(c) Zinc coating
Binocular body (i) Grey cast iron
(A) (d) None of these
(B) Diesel engine (ii) Un-heat treated Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022
piston wrought iron BHEL 2020
(C) Lifting hook of a (iii) Aluminium Ans. (c) : Galvanising is the process of applying a
Crane allow protective zinc coating to steel or iron to prevent
(D) Bed of high (iv) Thermo plastics rusting. The most common method is hot-dip
precision lathe galvanizing.

• Paint is the most commonly used material to protect 282. Silver plating is a type of
steel. (a) electroplating
• Stainless steels corrosion resistant properties are (b) galvanizing
due to the chromium content. (c) organic coating
(d) electroforming
278. Coating of ............... metal is applied in
Galvanisation RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(a) Tin (b) Lead Ans. (a) : Silver plating, or silver electro plating, is the
process of depositing a thin layer of silver on a base
(c) Zinc (d) Aluminium
metal, such as copper, nickel etc.
Cochin Shipyard (Fitter) 14-12-2021
283. In nickel plating, a layer of ______ is coated
Ans. (c) : Coating of zinc metal is applied in over the surface of work piece.
Galvanisation. (a) Silver
• Coating of tin metal is applied in tinning. (b) nickel
279. The microstructure and physical property of (c) chromium
the material can be altered by (d) aluminum
(a) Milling IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(b) Heat treating Ans. (b) : Nickel electroplating is a process of applying
(c) Grinding a nickel coating onto a metal surface by means of
(d) Turning electrolytic deposition.
ISRO Technician B (RAC) 03-11-2022 • Nickel electroplating is a process that uses an
Ans. (b) : The microstructure and physical property of electrical current to coat a conductive material.
the material can be altered by heat treating. 284. What is the thickness of chromium over nickel
• Microstructure can be induced in almost all plating in chrome plating?
engineering materials to alter their mechanical (a) 10µm
properties this is usually achieved through thermal (b) 50 µm
treatment involving heating and cooling under (c) 1m
controlled condition. (d) 6 cm
280. Which of the following is the non-metallic anti RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
corrosion treatment? Ans. (a) :
(a) Enameling • 10 µm is the thickness of chromium over nickel
(b) Cladding plating in chrome plating.
(c) Sherardising • The thickness of chrome plating varies depending
(d) Calorising on the application.
BDL Technician 2022 285. Galvanization is widely used to coat ____ over
iron and steel
Ans. (a) :
(a) Silver
• Enameling is a process by which powdered glass is (b) chromium
fused to a metal substrate at high heat. Enamels can (c) zinc
be applied to glass, ceramics, and most commonly
(d) tin
metals.
• Coating the metal with point or enamel prevents the
Ans. (c) :
metal from exposure to oxygen, thus preventing
• Galvanization is widely used to coat zinc over steel
corrosion.
to prevent rusting.
281. What is the other name for electroplating? • Galvanizing protects the underlying iron or steel.
(a) Galvanizing • The zinc coating, when intact, prevents corrosive
(b) Surface coating substances from reaching the underlying steel or
(c) Electrodeposition iron.
(d) Metal spraying 286. Which type of galvanization is used for small
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 parts having intricate shapes?
Ans. (c) : Electroplating– Electroplating, also known (a) gold dip galvanizing
as electrochemical deposition or electrode position, is a (b) flow galvanizing
process for producing a metal coating on a solid (c) electroplating galvanizing
substrate through the reduction of cations of that metal (d) Sherardizing
by means of a direct electric current. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Ans. (d) : 291. Which of the following is used to provide a

• Sherardizing is used galvanizing those small parts decorative and corrosion resistant coating on
having intricate shapes. aluminum and its alloy”
• In this process, these is a box or container having (a) Galvanizing
filled with fine zinc powder. (b) Anodizing
287. Why is electroplating galvanizing not (c) Tinning
recommended for mass production? (d) Cladding
(a) It is a time consuming process. RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(b) The process is economical. Ans. (b) :
(c) Galvanizing is better than other processes • Anodizing is to provide a decorative and corrosion-
(d) None of the above resistant coating on aluminium and its alloy.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 • A thin coating of oxide on aluminium can protect
Ans. (a) : Electroplating and galvanizing process is not the surface from corrosion.
recommended for mass production because it is a time 292. None-metallic coating is of following type(s) -
consuming process. (a) planar coating
288. What is the other name for metal spraying? (b) contour coating
(a) Hot dipping (c) wire and cable coating
(b) Organic coating (d) all of the above
(c) Spray metalizing BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(d) Galvanizing RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 Ans. (d) : Different types of non-metallic coating
Ans. (c) : process–
• Metallizing is used to spray metal coatings on (a) Planar coating
fabricated workpiece. (b) Contour coating
• The coating metal initially is in wire or powder (c) Wire and cable coating.
form. 293. 27°C is equivalent to __________ Kelvin.
• It is fed through a special gun and melted by an oxy (a) 273
fuel gas flame, then atomized by a blast of (b) 300
compressed air. (c) 373
289. Hot dipping is a type of - (d) 400
(a) electroplating RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(b) galvanizing Ans. (b) : Temperature = 27oC
(c) organic coating Kelvin = T + 273
(d) electroforming = 27 + 273
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 = 300 K.
Ans. (b) : 294. The process for costing by spraying or
• Galvanization or galvanizing is the process of sprinkling glass powder at suitable
applying a protective zinc coating to steel or iron, to temperature is known as...
prevent rusting. (a) Painting
• The most common method is hot dip galvinizing in (b) Plastic coating
which the parts are submerged in a both of molten (c) Clading
hot zinc.
(d) Enameling
290. Which metal is used for coating in galvanizing? RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
(a) Lead
Ans. (d) : The process for costing by spraying or
(b) Brass sprinkling glass powder at suitable temperature is
(c) Zinc known as enameling process.
(d) Aluminum
295. Which one of the following groups of
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 quenching media is in order of their severity of
Ans. (c) : Zinc metal is used for coating in galvanizing. the cooling rate, i.e. from slow to rapid cooling?

(a) Oil, Forced air, brine solution 299. Which furnaces are extensively used because
(b) Forced air, oil, brine solution they give uniformity of temperature in the heat
(c) Brine solution, oil, force air treatment chamber?
(d) Forced air, brine solution, oil (a) Oil fired furnaces (b) Gas fired furnaces
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 (c) Electric furnaces (d) None of these
Ans. (b) : Forced air, oil, brine solution groups of RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
quenching media is in order of their severity of the Ans. (c) : Electric furnace–
cooling rate i.e. from slow to rapid cooling. • It means an extreamely hot enclosed space, where
296. The purpose of heat treatment is heat is produced by means of electrical arcing for
(a) To change the mechanical properties of steel. melting certain metals such as scrap steel without
(b) To change the internal structure of steel changing electro-chemical properties of the metal.
(c) To change the appearance of the component • The heat produced by the electric arc produces at
(d) To change the chemical properties of steel. max 3500oC but normally it is around 1800oC.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 300. Carbon nitriding is carried out in gas mixture
Ans. (a) : consisting of carburizing gas end ..............
• The purpose of heat treatment is to change the (a) Nitrogen (b) Sulphur
mechanical properties of steel. (c) Hydrogen (d) Ammonia
• The heat treatment process is a series of operations RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
involving the heating and cooling of metals in the Ans. (d) :
solid state.
• Carbon nitriding is a heat treatment process by
• Some important heat treatment process– which carbon and nitrogen (ammonia) permeate the
(a) Normalizing (b) Annealing (c) Hardening (d) surface layer of steel components.
Tempering.
• The process involves temperatures of around 850oC.
297. A given component cracked after heat
301. The term heat treatment is used to describe a
treatment. What can be the possible reason?
process controlled by ..............
(a) It was heated for long time
(a) Temperature (b) Heating
(b) It was not properly cleaned before heating
(c) Cooling (d) Both (b) and (c)
(c) It was suddenly cooled in brine
(d) It was slowly cooled in air
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 Ans. (d) :
Ans. (c) : • Heat treatment is an operation involving the heating
and cooling of a metal or alloy so as to obtain
• Cracked after heat treatment can be caused by
certain desirable properties.
several factors.
• Some important heat treatment process–
• It was suddenly cooled in brine.
(1) Annealing (2) Normalizing (3) Hardening (4)
• Improper heating to austenitizing temperature can
Tempering.
result in thermally induced stress.
302. Which defect arises due to faulty heat
298. Electroplating is done on jobs to resist
corrosion. Which pole of a D.C. supply is treatment?
connected to the work in electroplating (a) Over heating and Burning
process? (b) Oxidation and Decarburization
(a) Positive pole (c) Cracks, Distortion and Warping
(b) Positive terminal post (d) All of these
(c) Negative pole RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
(d) Negative terminal post Ans. (d) : Some defect arises due to faulty heat
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 treatment–
Ans. (b) : • Over heating and burning
• Positive terminal post of a D.C. supply is connected • Oxidation and decarburization
to the work in electroplating process. • Quench cracks, distortion and warping.
• Electroplating is widely used in industry and the 303. The following is used in heat treatment process
decorative arts to improve object surface qualities as a quenching medium for obtaining a higher
such as abrasion and corrosion resistance. degree of hardness.
(a) Mineral oil Ans. (c) : Chromazing process used to convert the
(b) Fatty acid surface of steel into a high chromium iron.
(c) Waxes • Chromazing is a thermo-chemical process
(d) Graphite suspensions consisting of saturating, by way of diffusion of
ferrous alloy predominantly of steel, with
chromium.
Ans. (b) : Fatty acid is used in heat treatment process as 308. Stoving finishes, retain their colour during the
a quenching medium for obtaining a higher degree of stoving process which is done in a convection
hardness. over at………
304. Which one of the following is the base metal for (a) 90°C to 100°C
the process 'hot dip coating' ? (b) 110°C to 120°C
(a) Mainly ferrous (c) 130°C to 140°C
(b) Sheradising (d) 150°C to 160°C
(c) Chromising RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(d) Vitreous enameling Ans. (b) :
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 • Stoving finishes are coating that require curing at
elevated temperatures, starting from 110oC to
Ans. (a) : Hot drip coating is most commonly applied to
120oC.
iron cathodic protection.
• Korthals's stoving finishes are characterized by a
305. In an aluminium etching treatment, if the combination of excellent hardness, abrasion
solution having 25% nitric acid, 2% sulphuric resistance.
acid and 0.5% hydrochloric acid, is used at 309. Ferrous components are sprayed with metal
100°C for 15 minutes, what type of finish can coatings for prevention of corrosion. The metal
be obtained spraying is done with the help of a gun or pistol
(a) Gray finish having a suitable nozzle. In metal
(b) Silvery finish spraying……..
(a) the metal is sprayed in powder form on the
(c) White finish
surface of components.
(d) Purple finish (b) the metal is sprayed in powder form on to the
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 preheated surfaces.
Ans. (b) : Aluminium etching is the process using (c) molten metal is sprayed on to the component
chemical etchants to relatively and accurately dissolve a surface by the gun.
way metal to create the desired component. (d) tiny particles of molten metal is sprayed with
the help of blowing compressed air.
306. Silver or copper finishes are generally used on
lighting fittings, name plates etc. Which one of
Ans. (d) :
the following is the process for this?
• In metal spraying tiny particles of molten metal is
(a) Chemical finishing sprayed with the help of blowing compressed air.
(b) Electroplating • Metal spraying is used to protect LPG propane or
(c) 'Oxidised' finishing butane gas bottles against corrosion.
(d) Phosphate finishing 310. Graphic shows the arrangement for
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 electroplating.
Ans. (a) : Silver copper finishes are generally used on
lighting fittings. Chemical finishing process is used.
307. Which one of the following processes used to
convert the surface of steel into a high
chromium iron?
(a) Colorising
(b) Sheradising
(c) Chromising
(d) Vitreous enameling
When steel components are to be coated with 314. For HSS hardening, the soft metal is first
copper by electroplating, copper sulphate is overheated and then cooled in-
used as …. (a) Oil
(a) electrolyte (b) anode (b) Air
(c) cathode (d) a flux (c) Water
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 (d) In ashes of dung cakes
Ans. (a) : RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
• When steel components are to be coated with Ans. (a) :
copper by electroplating, copper sulphate is used as • For HSS hardening the soft metal is first overheated
electrolyte. and then cooled in oil.
• Electroplating is the process of aligning another • High-speed steel is a tool steel with high hardness,
metal onto a metal. wear resistance, and heat resistance
• Electroplating is widely used in industry and the • High-speed steel is often used in power-saw blades
decorative arts to improve object surface qualities and drill bits.
such as abrasion and corrosion resistance. 315. Identify the label 'X' in the following figure.
311. The instrument used to measure high
temperature in the furnace is
(a) Thermometer
(b) Barometer
(c) Colorimeter
(d) Pyrometer
Ans. (d) : (a) Water spray (b) Burner
• Pyrometer is used to measure high temperature in the (c) Soft surface (d) Glowing
furnace.
RRB ALP Patna 2014
• Most pyrometers work by measuring radiation from
Ans. (a) : The level 'X' indicates water spray in the
the body whose temperature is to be measured.
above figure.
312. Heat treatment of metals is necessary
(a) To produce certain desired properties 316. Delicate parts are quenched in oil. The possible
(b) To make good appearance on the component reason behind this is-
(c) To increase strength of the metal (a) To remove cracks
(d) To make the metal rust-proof (b) To remove brittleness
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (c) To soften them
Ans. (a) : (d) To make them ductile
• Heat treatment can soften metal, to improve desired RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
properties. It can make parts harder, to improve Ans. (a) : The oil quenching process is used in the heat
strength. treatment of metals. A piece of metal is rapidly cooled
• It can put a hard surface on relatively soft components to change its individual properties as toughness,
to increase abrasion resistance. strength and hardness.
313. Which one of the following processes is used for 317. The process of heating the steel till high critical
removing scratches from previous operations? point and then cooling in oil or water is called-
(a) Enameling (a) Normalizing
(b) Painting (b) Lubrication
(c) Oxidation (c) Quenching
(d) Polishing (d) Heat treatment
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Ans. (d) : Ans. (c) :
• Polishing is finishing process for smoothing a work • Quenching is the rapid cooling of a work-piece to
piece's surface using an abrasive and work wheel or obtain certain material properties.
a leather strap. • Quenching rapid cooling as by immersion in oil or
• Polishing refer to process that use an abrasive that is water of a metal object from the high temperature at
glued to the work wheel. which it has been shaped.

318. Heat is closely related with .......... • Heat treatment is the process of heating and cooling
(a) Liquids in which metal is heated to the required temperature
(b) Energy and then to the desired rate of cooling.
(c) Entropy Purpose of heat treatment–
(d) Temperature • Heat treatment increases the hardness of the metal.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 • Increases in machinability.
• Increase in the magnetic and electrical properties of
Ans. (d) :
the metal.
• Heat is closely related with temperature.
• Reducing the brittleness of the metal.
• Temperature is a measure of the amount of energy 322. Which of the following is not a heat treatment
possessed by the molecules of a substance. The process?
scales for measuring temperature in SI units are the (a) Normalising
celsius and Kelvin temperature scales. (b) Tempering
• Heat, on the other hand is energy in transit heat (c) Machining
flows from a hotter body (higher temperature) to a (d) Annealing
colder one (lower temperature). RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I
319. The purpose of heat treatment is to_____. Ans. (c) : Normalizing, tempering and annealing are all
(a) Relieve the stresses set up in material after heat treatment process, but machining process is not
hot or cold working a heat treatment process.
(b) Modify the structure of the material • Machining process is a negative process, because in
(c) Reorder grains of structure this process the desired metal is removed from the
(d) All of these job as required.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 323. With which of the following metals, thin wire
cannot be drawn;
Ans. (d) : (a) Aluminum
• Main purpose of heat treatment is to change a (b) Copper
mechanical property or combination of mechanical (c) Cast iron
properties as– (d) Mild steel
• Relive the stress set up in material after hot or cold UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
working. Ans : (c) Wire cannot be drawn with cast iron because
• Modify the structure of the material does not have tensile property. It is a brittle material.
• Reorder grains of structure. 324. Hot working of metals are done
320. The composition of iron carbide is : (a) Below recrystallization temperature
(a) Iron, carbon and steel (b) At recrystallization temperature
(b) Iron and steel (c) Above recrystallization temperature
(c) Iron and carbon (d) At room temperature
(d) Steel and carbon RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 Ans : (c) Recrystallizing temperature– It is defined as
the temperature at which the formation of new grains
Ans. (c) : The composition of iron carbide is iron and
starts appearing in the microstructure. It is also defined
carbon.
as the temperature at which material are just
321. The process of soaking during heat treatment transformed from solid to liquid.
is: Hot working– If the metal forming process is done
(a) To keep the steel at the same temperature for above the recrystalilizing temperature then it is called
a certain period hot working.
(b) To quench the steel by spraying water Cold working– If the metal forming process is done
(c) To cool the steel to room temperature in still below the recrystallizing temperature of base metal.
air 325. Powder metallurgy does not belongs to
(d) To harden the outer surface of low carbon (a) Porous products of bearing
steel (b) Refractory parts e.g. cathode, anode
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (c) Automotive parts
Ans. (b) : The process of soaking water during heat (d) Casting
treatment steel is to be quenched by spraying. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015

Ans : (d) Powder metallurgy is the science by which (a) 1–b, 2–c, 3–d, 4–a (b) 1–c, 2–a, 3–b, 4–d
metals are prepared into fine powders and by mixing the (c) 1–d, 2–c, 3–a, 4–b (d) 1–a, 2–b, 3–c, 4–d
powders of one or more metals or their alloys together (RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004)
with some alloys by mixing or without mixing we make Ans : (a)
some things. 1. Two scales B and C are used to check the hardness –
• It can produce porous product like-self lubricating Rockwell hardness method
bearing and filters etc. 2. The angle of diamond pyramid indenter is 136o –
• Refractory parts such as x-ray cathode tube, anode Vicker hardness method
and control grid etc. 3. It is mostly used for soft metals other than copper.
326. What is the temperature required for complete Used to check the hardening of alluminium lead and
annealing in hypereutectoid steel? cast iron– Brinell hardness method
(a) 30oC to 50oC below upper critical 4. Hardness of large surface parts is checked– Shore
temperature hardness method
(b) 30oC to 50oC above lower critical
329. The indenter of Rockwell hardness testing
temperature
machine is made of–
(c) 30oC to 50oC below lower critical
(a) Carbide
temperature
(d) 30oC to 50oC above upper critical (b) Diamond
temperature (c) Stellite
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 (d) High carbon steel
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (b) Full annealing process consists of heating the Ans : (b) Indenter of Rockwell hardness testing
steel 30oC - 50oC above the upper critical temperature machine is made of diamond matter. Two types of
for hypo-eutectoid steel and by the same temperature scales are used in this–
above the lower critical temperature for hyper-eutectoid 1. B-scale → It is called HRB
steel. It is held at this temperature for sometime and 2. C-scale → It is called HRC
then cooled slowly in the furnace. 330. The angle of indenter of rockwell hardness
327. While hardening steel, it is kept constant at testing machine is–
necessary temperature for some time which is (a) 900 (b) 600
called soaking time, it is kept at– (c) 120 0
(d) 1300
(a) 5 minutes for 10 mm thickness (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
(b) 2 minutes for 20 mm thickness
Ans : (c) The angle of indenter of Rockwell hardness
(c) 20 minutes for 2 mm thickness
testing machine is 120o. The point of the testing tool to
(d) 10 minutes for 5 mm thickness
test the hardness of the metal in Rockwell method
DRDO Machinist. 2016
diamond core is installed, through this the hardness of
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
hard steel is checked.
Ans : (a) Soaking time for carbon and low alloy– 5
minutes for 10 mm thickness and for hard alloy – 10 331. Brinell hardness testing is used to check the
minutes for 10 mm thickness. hardness of..........metals–
(a) Hard
328. Match the following–
1. Two scales B and C (A) Shore hardness (b) Soft
are used to check the method (c) Ferrous
hardness (d) All of the above
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006)
2. The angle of diamond (B) Rockwell
pyramid indenter is hardness method Ans : (b) Brinell hardness testing is used to check the
136o hardness of soft material like aluminium, lead and cost
3. It is mostly used for (C) Vicker hardness iron.
soft metals other than method 332. The indenter of brinell hardness testing
copper. Used to check machine is made of–
the hardening of (a) Tungsten carbide
alluminium lead and (b) Stellite
cast iron (c) Hard steel
4. Hardness of large (D) Brinell hardness (d) High speed steel
surface parts is method NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
checked (IOF Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (a) The ball indenter is used in brinell hardness 337. Painting on a metal surface is a .......... method
testing. It is made from hardened steel or tungsten to prevent it from rusting–
carbide, whose diameter range from 1-10 mm. (a) Permanent treatment
333. The hardness of ............. metals is checked by (b) Semi-permanent treatment
the Vickers hardness method– (c) Temporary treatment
(a) Soft (d) None of the above
(b) Non-ferrous NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(c) Non ferrous alloy (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
(d) Hard Ans : (b) Painting on a metal surface is a semi-
(IOF Fitter, 2014) permanent treatment used to prevent from rusting.
Ans : (d) Vickers hardness method– Hardness of hard • Electroplating on metal surface is a permanent
metals is checked by using hardness tester. In this test a treatment method.
mark is made with an indentation tool (diamond 338. The method of electroplating on a metal
pyramid), whose the joint angle is 136o. surface is–
18544 × P (a) Non-permanent
Vickers hardness value = (b) Semi-permanent
d2
(c) Permanent
Where, P = Load in kg
(d) All the above
d = Mean diagonal of the mark
334. The tool used in vicker hardening is made of
Ans : (c) Electroplating on metal surface is a permanent
............ material–
method. Painting, coloring, tining, galvanizing etc. is
(a) Tungsten carbide
semi-permanent method.
(b) Hard steel
(c) Diamond 339. The method of removing the rust and scale
(d) Stellite layer on the metal surface by sand blasting is
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004) called–
(a) Chemical method
Ans : (c) The tool used in vicker hardening is made of
(b) Mechanical method
diamond material. This method is similar to that of
(c) Both of the above
Brinell. In this only one size testing tool is used. It is
used to check more hard materials such as cutting tools.
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
The point of the tool used in this method is diamond
and conical. Ans : (a) The method of removing the rust and scale
layer on the metal surface by sand blasting is called
335. The point of the vicker hardness tool is made
chemical method.
conical at–
(a) 1360 (b) 1200 340. The coating of zinc on mild steel parts/sheets is
(c) 90 0
(d) 1300 called–
(a) Tinning
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
(b) Electroplating
18544 × P
Ans : (a) Value of Vickers hardness ( HV ) = (c) Metal spraying
d2 (d) Galvanizing
Where, P = Load in kg (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
d = Mean Diagonal Ans : (d) The coating of zinc on the mild steel
The point angle of the indenter to used in this is 136o. It parts/sheets is called galvanizing. This method is also
is a highly polished pyramid. called hot dipping method. A solution of zinc is used in
336. The hardness of a parts checked by shore this.
hardness method– 341. After heating the metal parts, mobil oil is
(a) Small (b) Heavy applied on that surface and metal part is again
(c) Soft (d) All of the above heated because of burning of oil surface gets
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 05.06.2005) black, that is called as–
Ans : (b) In shore hardness method, the hardness of (a) Colouring
those part is checked, which cannot be taken to the (b) Smoke finishing
hardness test machine. In this method, shore selerocsape (c) Enamel
is used to check the hardness of a heavy parts like bed (d) None of the above
of machines etc. (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
Ans : (b) By heating the metal part and applying mobil 347. To protect cutting tool and measuring
oil its surface, the metal part is heated again due to instrument from corrosion, layer is applied on
which the oil burns and darkness the surface, which is it, called as–
called smoke finishing. (a) Tinning
342. In electroplating a layer of nickel, chromium (b) Galvanizing
etc. applied to the metal part, which is called– (c) Lacquering
(a) Cathode (d) Electroplating
(b) Anode (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
(c) Electrolyte Ans : (c) To protect the metal part from corrosion, the
(d) None of the above coating of plastic with a special type of thinner is called
(IOF Fitter, 2016) lacquering. It is available in many colors and is also
transparent, in which there is no colour. The metal part
Ans : (a) In electroplating a layer of nickel, chromium
containing the lacquer should be kept away from the
is applied to the metal part, which is called cathode. The
flame or else it may catch fire. This action protects most
solution in which the metal is coated is called anode.
measuring tools and cutting tools from corrosion made
343. In this method the coated billets are rolled to keep.
drawn–
348. Monel metal is prepared by mixing the metal
(a) Chromizing (b) Sheardizing
with copper in 2 : 1. It is not affected by the
(c) Cladding (d) Metal spraying
salt water of the sea–
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
(a) Nickel
Ans : (c) In the cladding method, coated billets are (b) Chromium
rolled drawn. (c) Copper
344. In this method solution of zinc powder is inside (d) Zinc
the steel barrel in which temperature of (IOF Fitter, 2014)
solution is 370oC and part is immersed in it Ans : (a) Monal metal is prepared by mixing nickel
because of that good gripping of painting metal with copper in 2 : 1. It is not affected by the salt
occurs at surface of part called as– water of the sea.
(a) Cladding 349. After a long time, a green coating gets
(b) Sheardizing deposited on the surface of the copper part–
(c) Chromizing (a) White oxide
(d) Galvanizing (b) Patina
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 (c) Oxide
Ans : (b) In this method, the solution of zinc powder (d) None of the above
inside the steel barrel in which the temperature of the (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
solution is 370oC, the part is immersed in it due to Ans : (b) After a long interval on the surface of the
which a good gripping of the painting is made on the copper part a green layer gets deposited which is called
surface of the part it is called sheardizing. patina.
345. Used as sheathing material to avoid corrosion 350. Match the following–
on telephone and power cable below ground– Name of method Uses
(a) Nickel (A) Metal (1) To prepare the
(b) Copper spraying base for the
(c) Lead painting
(d) Tin (B) Galvanizing (2) To protect and
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 protect against
(IOF Fitter, 2014) worn and worn
Ans : (c) Lead is used as a sheathing material to protect surfaces
telephone and power cables from corrosion under the (C) Cladding (3) Coating with other
ground. metallic coating
346. This metal is used for chemical plants and food for beautification
processing equipment– and corrosion
(a) Stainless steel (b) Copper protection
(c) Nickel (d) Tin (D) Electroplating (4) The base metal or
(IOF Fitter, 2012) the covering metal
Ans : (a) Stainless steel metal is used for chemical are drawn in small
plants and food processing equipment. section

(E) Sheradizing (5) Structural work (C) Seating material for (3) Patina
bolts and nuts to under ground
protect the pipes telephone cable and
under various power cable
environmental (D) It retains its high (4) Lead
conditions polish and colour for
(a) A–5, B–1, C–4, D–3, E–2 a long time
(b) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1, E–5 (a) A–3, B–1, C–4, D–2 (b) A–2, B–3, C–4, D–1
(c) A–5, B–3, C–2, D–1, E–4 (c) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1 (d) A–3, B–4, C–1, D–2
(d) A–3, B–4, C– 1, D–2, E–5 (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) Ans : (a)
(A) A layer is formed over the Patina
Ans : (a) copper due to
(A) Metal spraying – Structural work bolts and nuts environmental pollution
to protect the pipes under (B) Affinity of aluminum and Alumina
various environmental its alloys with oxygen
conditions (C) Seating material for under Lead
(B) Galvanizing – To prepare the base for the ground telephone cable and
painting power cable
(C) Cladding – The base metal or the covering (D) It retains its high polish and Chromium
metal are drawn in small colour for a long time
section 353. Match–
(D) Electroplating – Coating with other metallic Electroplating (1) Lacquering
coating for beautification and (A)
corrosion protection (B) Painting (2) Temporary
(E) Sheradizing – To protect and protect against treatment
(C) Applying oil or (3) Semi-
worn and worn surfaces
greese permanent
351. Match the following– treatment
Aluminium (1) Chromizing (D) Thinnerzed plastic (4) Permanent
(A) powder layer treatment
(B) Chromium (2) Sheradizing (a) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1 (b) A–2, B–3, C–4, D–1
powder (c) A–3, B–2, C–4, D–1 (d) A–3, B–4, C– 1, D–2
(C) Aluminium (3) Chlorizing BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
and chromium (IOF Fitter, 2012)
powder Ans : (a)
(D) Zinc powder (4) Electroplating (a) Electroplating – Permanent treatment
(a) A–1, B–2, C–3, D–4 (b) A–2, B–3, C–4, D–1 (b) Painting – Semi-permanent treatment
(c) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1 (d) A–3, B–4, C–1, D–2 (c) Applying oil or greese – Temporary treatment
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (d) Thinnerzed plastic layer –Lacquering
Ans : (d) 354. Match the following–
(A) Aluminium powder – Chlorizing Method Uses
(A) The copper part is (1) Vermilion
(B) Chromium powder – Electroplating immersed in a solution colour
(C) Aluminium and chromium – Chromizing of potassium sulphide
powder and water
(D) Zinc powder – Sheradizing (B) For coating enamel (2) Dark blue
352. Match the following– paint on metal parts
(C) Leads is melted and (3) Blue
(A) A layer is formed (1) Alumina
oxygen is passed black
over the copper due through it
to environmental (D) Mobile oil to the hot (4) Muffle
pollution part furnace
(B) Affinity of aluminum (2) Chromium (E) On keeping the steel (5) Smoke
and its alloys with part in molten lead for finishing
oxygen some time

(a) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1, E–5 Ans : (d) Nickel, chromium coating is done on the
(b) A–4, B–3, C–4, D–1, E–2 metal parts to protect it from corrosion, to bring beauty
(c) A–3, B–4, C–1, D–5, E– 2 to the polish.
(d) A–4, B–3, C–5, D–2, E–1
358. What is meant by enamel?
DRDO Machinist.2016
(a) Greasing
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (c) (b) Painting
(A) The copper part is Blue black (c) Varnishing
immersed in a (d) Colouring
solution of potassium (RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005)
sulphide and water Ans : (b) Painting– Semi-permanent coating of enamel
(B) For coating enamel Muffle furnace paints on metals to protect them from rust etc. So that
paint on metal parts there is no effect of water and air.
(C) Leads is melted and Vermilion colour 359. What is the coating of tin on metal called–
oxygen is passed
(a) Galvanizing
through it
(b) Tinning
(D) Mobil oil to the hot Smoke finishing
part (c) Tempering
(E) On keeping the steel Dark blue (d) Colouring
part in molten lead (IOF Fitter, 2012)
for some time Ans : (b) Tinning– In this method, tin is coated on a
355. Zinc chloride is commonly used flux in the job. Usually this method is done on metal sheets. Before
process of tinning, clean the oil or grease on the job thoroughly
(a) Welding should take.
(b) Sheradising 360. Important method of measurement of hardness
(c) Hard brazing
of metal–
(d) None of these
(a) Brinell method
(IOF Fitter 2017)
(b) Rockwell method
Ans : (b) Sheradizing–
(c) Evolution method
• This process is used for galvanizing those small
parts having intricate shapes. (d) All of the above
• In this process, there is a box or container having (IOF Fitter, 2015)
filled with fine zinc powder. Ans : (d) Brinell method, Rockwell method and
• The parts are placed in the box, surrounded by the evolution method are the popular method of measuring
powder, the box is then heated in an oxygen. hardness.
• Zinc powder vaporises, zinc vapour comes in 361. What coating is done to protect iron from the
contact with the surface of the workpiece and zinc effects of climate?
is deposited on the workpiece. (a) Painting
356. Which metal layer is applied over iron in (b) Enameling
galvanizing? (c) Galvanizing
(a) Zinc (d) All of the above
(b) Brass
(c) Copper
(d) All of the above Ans : (c) Galvanizing– In this method, after pickling
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) the job is dipped in molten zinc.
Ans : (a) In galvanizing iron is coated with layer of This method is often used for construction work,
zinc. It is a semi-permanent corrosion resistant metal. preventing bolts and nuts from rusting etc. is used to
357. Why layer of nickel chromium is applied on protect against.
metal parts? 362. Temperature of eutectoid reaction–
(a) To protect against rust (a) 6000C (b) 9100C
(b) To bring beauty to the polish 0
(c) 723 C (d) 11370C
(c) To protect from heat (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(d) (a) and (b) above
(IOF Fitter, 2012) Ans : (c) Eutectoid reaction takes place at 723oC.


Lathe Machine
4. Which of the following drill machine can drill
1. The part of Lathe Machine and numbers of workpiece at a time
their Work (a) Gang drilling machine
(b) Pillar type drill machine
1. A part "Headstock" is present (c) Multi station drill machine
in______machine. (d) None of the above
(a) Welding machine (b) Lathe machine BEML 2022
(c) Printing machine (d) EDM machine
Ans. (c) : Multi station drill machine can drill numbers
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 of workpiece at a time.
Ans. (b) : Headstock is a part of lathe machine. This is Multi spindle drilling machine :-
mounted on the inner guideways at the left hand side of • The multiple head spindle drilling machine may have
the bed. any no. of spindles from 4 to 48 or more, all driven
• The head stock consists of main spindle, a chuck from the one spindle drive gear in one head.
spindle nose, back gear drive and all gear drive. • The multiple spindle drill machine is specially
designed for mass production operations such as
• The head stock houses a hollow spindle and the drilling, reaming or tapping many holes at a time.
mechanism for driving the spindle at multiple 5. Which taper is used on spindle nose of lathe
speeds. head stock
2. Traversing hand wheel is the part of ........ (a) Pin taper
(a) Apron (b) Tail stock (b) Morse taper
(c) Brown and sharp taper
(c) Gear box (d) Leg
(d) Pitch taper
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
Ans. (a) : Traversing wheel is the part of apron. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Apron– Ans. (b) : Morse taper is used on spindle nose of lathe
• It is made of cast iron similar to a hollow box with head stock.
fits under the saddle on the front part of the bed. 1. Morse Standard taper -
• It is self holding taper
• A feed rod and lead screw pass through the middle
• It is mostly used in industrial application.
of the apron.
• It is denoted by letter MT.
• To provide manual or automatic movement to • It is available in 8 size, from MT-O to MT-7
carriage from right to left, it is consist of gears, 2. Brown and sharp Taper -
clutch and leavers, which are connected to many • It is both self-holding and quick releasing taper.
gears. • Self holding taper available from BS-1 to BS-18.
3. Cutting tool in lathe machine is held by______. • Quick releasing taper used in milling machine's
(a) Base (b) Tailstock arbors.
(c) Carriage (d) Headstock 3. Pin Taper -
• It is a self holding taper which is available in British
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 and metric system.
Ans. (c) : Cutting tool in lathe machine is held by • In British system, taper is 1:48
carriage. • In metric system, taper is 1:50
• The main purpose of the carriage is to hold cutting •It is mostly used in pin taper.
tool at desired angle and to slide the tool in different The tool performs the desired operation after reaching
directions during the machine operation. the desired position. It is used in drilling application.
Chucks– A chuck is used for holding and rotating the 6. Which type of thread is used in lead screw of
workpiece in a lathe, the various types of chuck are lathe machine
(a) Spur thread (b) Helical thread
three jaw chuck (universal chuck), four jaw chuck
(c) Trapezoidal thread (d) Saw tooth thread
(independent chuck), combination chuck, magnetic
IOCL 2020
chuck, collet chuck and air or hydraulic chuck. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Lathe Machine 338 YCT
Ans. (c) : Trapezoidal thread is used in lead screw of 11. Lathe beds are made of cast iron due to
lathe machine. following reason:
• The lead screw is used for thread cutting. It is made (a) It is heavy
from good quality alloy steel and is provided with (b) It is cheap
acme thread. i.e. Trapezoidal thread (c) High damping capacity
• These thread have a profile that is neither square nor (d) It does not resist compressive load
V-thread from and have a from of a trapezoid. NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
7. ............. is a fixed unit of lathe on the left hand Ans. (c) : Lathe bed are made of cast iron due to high
side whose function is to transmit the drive damping capacity.
from the main motor to the work. • Cast iron can withstand more compressive load and
(a) Toolpost (b) Bed resist vibration.
(c) Headstock (d) Tailstock • Graphite is present in cast iron in free from and it adds
BECIL NE07 Maintainer (Fitter) 2019 self-lubricating properties to cast iron.
• The corrosion resistance of cast iron is improved via
Ans. (c) : Headstock is a fixed unit of lathe on the left
the addition of minor elements such as silicon, nickel,
hand side whose function is to transmit the drive from
chromium, molybdenum and copper.
the main motor to the work.
• Headstock houses the (1) spindle (2) speed change 12. The purpose of tumbler gear in lathe is to
mechanism and change gears. (a) Cut gears
• The headstock is the name given to the end of a lathe (b) Reduce Spindle Speeds
which supports the main spindle and chuck. (c) Reverse the spindle direction
• It is driven by a motor, possibly through a gear box. (d) Give designed directions of movement to the
carriage.
8. Lathe bed is made of ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(a) Mild steel (b) Stainless steel BHEL 2020
(c) Cast iron (d) None of these
Ans. (d) : The purpose of tumbler gear in lathe is to
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 give designed direction of movement to the carriage.
NTPC Fitter 2016 • Tumbler gear mechanism is used to change the
Ans. (c) :Lathe bed is made of cast iron. It is a basic direction of carries by engaging tumbler gear the carries
foundation of lathe on different parts are positioned. can be moved along the lathe axis line either during
• It should be good damping characteristics. thread cutting.
Type of lathe bed– 13. The included angle of 'Morse taper' is
(i) Flat type lathe bed approximately .................
(ii) Inverted V type lathe bed (a) 4º (b) 3º
(iii) Combination of both (Flat & V type) (c) 2.5º (d) 1º
9. In which operation carriage is locked? ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(a) Facing (b) Threading Ans. (b) : The included angle of morse taper is
(c) Drilling (d) None of these approximately is 3º.
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 • A morse toper is a tapered spindle used on lathe and
drill presses to mount tooling.
Ans. (a): Facing–It is the process of removing metal
from the end of workpiece to produce a flat surface. 14. Which part of the lathe is locked while the
form tool method is used for turning taper?
• Facing operation is performed on lathe machine.
(a) Compound rest (b) Carriage
• In this operation carriage is locked.
(c) Tail stock (d) Head stock
• Half nut is used to lock the lathe carriage and the lead ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
screw for thread cutting operation.
Ans. (b) : The cutting tool is set exactly at the center
10. The slots provided on angle plate are and brought into position by carriage movement.
(a) reducing weight • The carriage is then locked and then the taper turning
(b) hanging with hooks of the job is done by turning the handle of compound
(c) aligning the work rest by hand.
(d) accommodating bolts 15. Turret in tool in turret lathe
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 (a) Drilling can not be done on work
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 (b) Tapping can not be done
Ans. (d) : An angle plate is a work holding device used (c) Machining can not be done with cutting tool
as a fixture in metal working. in square tool post
• Angle plate are used to hold workpiece square to the (d) Boring work can be done
table during marking out operation this slot provided on JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
angle plate are accommodating bolts. IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (d) : Turret lathe is used to perform multiple 20. Which among the following statements in
cutting operations such as turning, drilling, boring, respect of chasers is correct?
thread cutting and facing on the same workpiece. (a) Chase is a single point cutting tool
• Several cutting tools are mounted or the hexagonal (b) Cutting threads by a chaser is slower process
main turret, which is rotated for each specific cutting than that by a single point tool
operation. (c) Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish
16. Provided stepped drive to obtain different- (d) The sane chaser can be used for cutting any
different spindle speed in any machine is based pitch of thread irrespective of the type of
on– chase used
(a) Hydraulic drive BDL Technician 2022
(b) Rack & pinion Ans. (c) : • Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish
(c) Stepped cone pulley drive • Thread chasers and thread restores are used to form or
(d) Stepper motor cut screw threads.
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 21. Which one of the following is used only for
Ans. (c) : Stepped cone pulley drive is used for finishing and maintaining correct form of
changing the speed of the driven shaft while the main or thread?
driving shaft runs at constant speed. (a) Tap (b) Threading tool
• This is accomplished by shifting the belt from one (c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped tool
part of the steps to the other.
17. Choose the wrong statement regarding
Ans. (c) : Threading chaser is used only for finishing
operation of lead screw of lathe
and maintaining correct form of thread.
(a) It is used when thread cutting is to be done
• Quality screw threads are produced by thread chasing.
(b) Rotary motion is converted into linear motion
of carriage • Thread chasing process is slow but can provide high
(c) A separate meter is provided in lead screw to quality.
operate it 22. Tool maker's buttons are used for
(d) Square threads are not convenient to use (a) aligning the workpiece for boring to a given
because of difficulty of fitting a split nut. datagram
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 (b) setting the tool at correctly centre height
Ans. (c) : Lead screw is used in thread cutting (c) adjusting the slackness in the guide ways of
operation. cross slide
• It converts rotary motion of carriage into reciprocating (d) holding the workpiece firmly
motion. It is driven from the head stock through the RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
feed gearbox & moves the carriage in a longitudinal Ans. (a): Tool maker's buttons are used for aligning the
direction against the workpiece. workpiece for boring to a given datagram.
18. In Lathe, The compound rest can be swiveled • Hardened steel material is used to make the tool
horizontally through maker's buttons.
(a) 180º (b) 90º 23. Which among the following is not the feature of
(c) 270º (d) 360º tail stock ?
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 (a) It holds the job
Ans. (d) : In Lathe, The compound rest can be swiveled (b) Drills and reamers can be mounted on it
horizontally through 360º. (c) dead centre is mounted on its spindle
19. Which one of the following materials is used for (d) It can be used for taper turning by offset
manufacturing centre drills? method
(a) Cast steel (b) Mild steel BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) High speed steel (d) Cast iron RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (a) : Holding the job is not the feature of tail stock.
Ans. (c) : High speed steel is used for manufacturing Tail stock–Tail stock is a tool holder directly mounted
centre drills. on the spindle axis opposite to the head stock.
• It has a higher red hardness and improved wear • Provides support to heavy and long job.
resistance.
• Use in drilling and reaming operation. Drill and
Material used to make drill bits:
reamer is held in sleeve.
• Carbon steel • Job is held between centre with the help of tail stock.
• High-speed steel • Taper turing done with tail stock and method is known
• Cobalt steel as tail stock off set method.
• Tool steel with carbide tips commonly twist drills are • By the help of tail stock turning small letter on the
mad up of HSS. long work piece.
24. What is the function of the drop worm 28. The carriage of lathe travels along which axis?
provided in the apron of the centre lathe? (a) "B" axis (b) "Z" axis
(a) Engages/disengages the power feed (c) "Y" axis (d) "X" axis
(b) Changes the direction of rotation of the RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
workpiece
Ans. (b) : The carriage of lathe travels along "Z" axis or
(c) changes the feed direction
horizontal axis.
(d) Engages/disengages the lead screw
Carriage and saddle–The carriage supports the cross
slide, compound tool post moves along the ways
Ans. (a) : The function of the drop worm provided in manual power feed. It comprises the saddle, a casting
the apron of the lathe is engages/disengages the power
that rides across the top of the ways.
feed.
Apron mechanism–To provides automatic feed to 29. The basic turning lathe is -
carriage. Longitudinal feed, cross feed and thread (a) turret lathe (b) automatic lathe
cutting low speed arrangement. (c) engine lathe (d) swiss lathe
25. The tail stock barrel has an internal taper. RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
Which one of the following standard tapers is Ans. (c) : The basic turning lathe is engine lathe.
provided in the barrel bore? Lathe–The lathe is a machine tool used principally for
(a) Metric taper shaping of the metal. The work piece is held and rotated
(b) Morse taper by the lathe while a tool bit is the cutting acting.
(c) jarno taper 30. Tumbler gear quadrant is used for -
(d) Brown and Sharpe taper
(a) increasing the speed of the spindle
(b) decreasing the speed of the spindle
(c) changing the direction of rotation of the lead
Ans. (b) : Morse taper is provided in the barrel bore. screw
• A morse taper is a tapered spindle used on lathes and
(d) changing the direction of the spindle
drill presses to mount tooling.
• Morse taper is a self holding type taper and it is
available in an 8 size from MT0 to MT7. Ans. (d): Tumbler gear quadrant is used for changing
26. A job is provided between the top slide and the the direction of the spindle.
swivel base assembly of the compound slide. its • The carriage can be moved from headstock end to
purpose is to - tailstock from tailstock end to headstock end
(a) allow dismantling the top slide easily automatically by engaging the tumbler gear.
(b) eliminate the backlash of the screw and the • The tumbler gear is used while thread cutting and
nut in the assembly automatic feeding.
(c) adjust the slackness developed due to wear 31. In a gap bed lathe, the gap is provided-
(d) permit flow of the lubricant between the (a) just below the nose of the head stock spindle
sliding surfaces (b) just below the spindle of the tail stock
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 (c) in the middle of the bed
Ans. (c) : A job is provided between the top slide and (d) anywhere in the bed
the swivel base assembly of the compound slide. Its RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
purpose is to adjust the slackness developed due to
wear. Ans. (a) : In a gap bed lathe, the gap is provided just
below the nose of the head stock spindle.
27. The carriage of a lathe travels along which
axis? Function of a lathe bed–
(a) horsepower and chuck diameter • To locate the fixed units in accurate relationship to
(b) swing and distance between centers each other.
(c) bed length and spindle speed • To provide slide-ways upon which the operating units
(d) tool post size and lathe travel can be moved.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 32. What should be followed to prevent lathe bed
Ans. (b) : The carriage of a lathe travels along swing guide ways from damaging by chuck while
and distance between centers or carriage of a lathe mounting?
travels along horizontal axis. (a) Take the help of the supervisor
Carriage and Saddle–The carriage supports the cross- (b) Support it with screw jack
slide, compound tool post moves along the ways under (c) Lift it with hand crane
manual power feed. It comprises the saddle, a casting (d) Place a wooden piece on the guideways
that rides across the top of the ways. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Ans. (d) : To prevent lathe bed guide ways from Ans. (a) : Bed parts of a lathe should have high
damaging by chuck while mounting place a wooden compressive strength.
piece on the guideways. • Bed is main body of the lathe made by cast iron
• The main use of a lathe chuck is to hold the material having free graphite.
block it operates on. This keeps the piece to be machine • It is a heavy, rugged and single piece casting made to
when it spins.
support the working parts of the lathe.
33. A tumbler gear unit consists of -
37. The compound slide swivel base is set at 450 to
(a) one gear (b) two gears
centre line of lathe. the degree of the reading at
(c) three gears (d) four gears
cross index index will be -
(a) 1350 (b) 900
Ans. (c) : A tumbler gear unit consists of three gears,
(c) 450 (d) 300
having the same number of teeth and it connects the
spindle gear to the fixed gear. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
• Tumbler gear unit is also called the reversing gear unit Ans. (c) : The compound slide swivel base is set at 450
as it is used to change the direction of feed of the tool to centre line of lathe. the degree of the reading at cross
for the same direction of rotation of the spindle. index index will be 45º.
34. The lathe bed has - • The compound slide offers a way to turn tapers and
(a) one set of "V" guideways and flatways cut angles on a lathe without rotating the headstock.
(b) two sets of "V" guideways and flatways 38. Which one of the following is not a part of the
(c) Three sets of "V" guideways and flatways centre lathe?
(d) four sets of "V" guideways and flatways (a) Saddle (b) Feed rod
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (c) Arbor (d) Lead screw
Ans. (b): The lathe bed has two sets of "V" guideways RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
and flatways.
Ans. (c): Arbor is not a part of the centre lathe.
Lathe–The lathe is a machine tool used principally for
• Arbor is the tool holding device used in the milling
shaping of the metal.
machine.
• The workpiece is held and rotated by the lathe while a
tool bit is the cutting acting. Principle parts of lathe–
Principle parts of lathe– 1. Bed and ways
1. Bed and ways 2. Head stock
2. Head stock 3. Tail stock
3. Tail stock 4. Carriage and saddle
4. Carriage and saddle 5. Cross slide and compound
5. Cross slide and compound. 6. Tool post and tools
35. The carriage in a lathe moves- 7. Apron mechanism.
(a) parallel to the axis of rotation 39. The horizontal feed, cross feed and screw
(b) at any angle to the axis of rotation cutting movement in a lathe is controlled by -
(c) perpendicular to the axis of rotation (a) head stock (b) tail stock
(d) either(a) or (b) (c) cross-slide (d) apron
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
IOF Fitter 2015 Ans. (d) : The horizontal feed, cross feed and screw
Ans. (a) : The carriage in a lathe moves parallel to the cutting movement in a lathe is controlled by apron.
axis of rotation. The main parts of apron are–
• The carriage supports the cross-slide, compound tool • Traversing hand wheel
post moves along the ways under manual power feed. ]
• Feed lever
• It comprises the saddle, a casting that rides across the • Feed selector
top of the ways.
• Lead screw engagement lever.
36. Which among the following parts of a lathe
should have high compressive strength? 40. Which lathe is used for mass production work?
(a) Bed (a) Capston lathe (b) Bench lathe
(b) Main spindle (c) Turret lathe (d) All of the above
(c) lead screw RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
(d) Sliding gears in head stock Ans. (*) : The turret and capstan lathe both are used for
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 mass production work.

• The turret and capstan lathe represent the more 45. Centre Fixed in tail stock is called ____
automated turning machine gives us high production (a) half centre (b) revolving centre
rate. (c) dead centre (d) all of the above
• This machine skill of the worker making it possible RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
for in experienced operator to produced identical part. Ans. (c) : Centre Fixed in tail stock is called dead
• An outstanding feature is the turret in plane of the tail centre.
stock. • The included angle of lathe dead centre is 60º, a body
41. Which type of operation is done by using tail provide with a morse taper shank and a tang.
stock? • The dead centre is made out of high carbon steel,
(a) Taper turning (b) Roping hardened and ground.
(c) turning (d) Step turning • A good lubricant should be used for the dead centre.
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 46. What is the proper device to hold gear or
Ans. (a) : Tail stock–Tail stock is a tool holder directly pulley on lathe?
mounted on the spindle axis opposite to the head stock. (a) Steady (b) Angle plate
• Provide support to heavy and long job. (c) Mandrel (d) Four jaw chuck
• Use in drilling and reaming operation. Drill and RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
reamer is held in sleeve. Ans. (c) : A mandrel can be described as a solid steel
• Job is held between centre with the help of tail stock. shaft or spindle which is used for holding bored parts
• Taper turning done with tail stock and method is for machining their outside surface on lathe.
known as tail stock off set method. • They are also known as arbors. Use of mandrels is
• By the help of tail stock turning small taper on the however done in relatively small jobs.
long workpiece.
47. What is an angle of dead centre?
42. ___ is the type of thread cutting inside the three (a) 900 (b) 600
jaw chuck. 0
(c) 30 (d) 450
(a) Acme thread (b) Scroll thread
(c) B.A thread (d) Square thread
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans. (b) : The angle of dead centre is 60º.
Note–Dead centre has been described in Q. No. 69.
Ans. (b) : Universal scroll chuck–The universal scroll
chuck has three jaws which move in unison as an 48. A turret lathe is used for ____
adjusting pinion is rotated. Scroll chuck is its ease of (a) mass production (b) general production
operation in centering work for concentric turning. This (c) low production (d) piece production
chuck is not as accurate as the independent chuck. NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
• The universal scroll chuck can be use to hold centre RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
round or hexagonal workpieces. Ans. (a) : The turret and capstan lathe represent the
• Three jaws, the chuck cannot be used effectively to mare automated turning machine gives us high
hold square octagonal or irregular shapes. production rate. This machine skill of the worker
43. Which chuck has reversible jaw? making it possible for in experienced operator to
(a) Three jaw chuck (b) Four jaw chuck produced identical part.
(c) Tail stock (d) Head stock • An outstanding feature is the turret in plane of the tail
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 stock.
Ans. (b) : The independent chuck has four jaws chuck 49. Back gear is used in cone pulley head stock on
which are adjusted individually on the chuck face by lathe_____
means of adjusting screw. (a) below the axis of job
• The jaw can be reversed to hold work by the inside (b) on axis line
diameter. (c) upper the axis of job
44. Lead screw of a lathe is used for _____ (d) all of the above
(a) threading (b) taper turning RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(c) boring (d) step turning Ans. (c) : Back gear is used in cone pulley head stock
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 on lathe upper the axis of job.
Ans. (a) : Lead screw–Advances the carriage for thread • The back gear consists of four gears located at the
cutting operation when half nut lever is engaged. Lead back of the headstock which reduces the speed of
screw of lathe acme thread (29º) and single start thread stepped pulley in the headstock.
(Lead = Pitch). • When the back gears are engaged this pulley is
• Lead screw of a lathe is used for threading. disconnected from the headstock spindle.

50. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to Ans. (b) : Head stock–Head stock is clamped on the
give depth of cut ? left hand side head stock spindle a hallow cylindrical
(a) Compound slide (b) Top slide shaft supported by the thrust bearing.
(c) By adjusting to tool (d) Cross slide • Provides a drive from work holding, live centre, face
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 plate, chuck, driving plate.
Ans. (d) : Cross slide on a lathe is used to give depth of • Headstock is mounted permanently on the inner guide
cut. ways at the left-hand side of the leg bed.
• The cross slide is a dovetailed slide that moves at a
right angle to the ways. The cross feed advances the • Tail stock is located on the inner guide ways at the
cutting tool into the work at a right angle to the right side of the bed opposite to head stock.
workpiece by means of a lead screw and hand wheel. The function of head stock–
• The compound sits on top of the cross slide. • To provides a mean to assemble the work holding
51. What is the advantage of tail stock having left devices.
handed threads? • Transmit the drive from the main motor to the work.
(a) Avoid advancement of barrel when rotated • To accommodate shaft, gears and levers for a wide
clockwise range of varying works speeds.
(b) Ensure that the barrel advances with
55. What will happen if the spindle threads are
clockwise
worn out in a gate valve ?
(c) Reduce the tendency for excessive movement
of the barrel (a) Valve hard to turn
(d) avoid jamming of spindle and hand wheel (b) Loud noise when turning the valve
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (c) Water flows around the stuffing box
Ans. (b): Advantage of tailstock spindle having left (d) Valve will not close or open when spindle
handed threads is that it ensure that the barrel advances turns
with clockwise movement of hand wheel. RRB ALP Patna 2014
52. The sliding surfaces of the lathe bed are - Ans. (d) : If the spindle threads are worn out in a gate
(a) flame hardened (b) case hardened valve then valve will not close or open when spindle
(c) normalized (d) tempered turns.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 56. Which one of the following cutting fluids is
Ans. (a) : The sliding surfaces of the lathe bed are used during grinding mild steel ?
flame hardened. (a) Mineral oil
Lathe bed–It is base or foundation of the lathe. (b) Non systematic cutting oil
• It is heavy, rugged and single piece casting made to (c) Soluble oil
support the working parts of the lathe. (d) Paraffin
• It is made from grey or modular cast iron. RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
53. While mounting to prevent lathe bed guide Ans. (c) : Soluble oil is generally used as a cutting fluid
ways from damaging by chuck what should be
for centre lathes, milling, drilling and sawing.
done?
• An oil is called soluble oil is added to water which
(a) Take the help of supervisor
gets a non-corrosive effect with water.
(b) Support it with screw jack
(c) Lift it with hand crane • Water is cheapest coolant, but it is not suitable
(d) Place a wooden piece on the guide ways because it causes rust to ferrous metals.
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 57. Which one of the following is used for checking
Ans. (d) : To prevent lathe bed guide ways from run out of the internal taper of machine
damaging by chuck place a wooden piece on the guide spindle?
ways. (a) Dial test indicator
54. The head stock of lathe is situated at the (b) Test mandrel and dial test indicator
(a) right hand end of the lathe bed (c) Precision height gauge
(b) left hand end of the lathe bed (d) Test mandrel and precision height gauge
(c) middle of the lathe bed RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
(d) bottom of the lathe bed Ans. (b) : Test mandrel and dial test indicator are used
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) for checking run out of the internal taper of machine
DRDO Turner, 2016 spindle.
58. The purpose of lathe centre shown in the figure The most common types of steady rests are–
is ... • Fixed steady rest
• Follower steady rest (travelling steady)
62. Which one of the following tool posts is easy for
setting the tool centre height of the tool in a
lathe?
(a) Open side tool post
(a) Supporting pipes
(b) Single screw tool post
(b) Centre supporting heavy jobs
(c) Four-way tool post
(c) Taper turning by offset methods
(d) Universal tool post
(d) Used for general purpose
Ans. (d) : Universal tool post is easy for setting the tool
Ans. (a) : The purpose of lathe centre shown in the centre height of the tool in a lathe.
figure is supporting pipes.
• The tool post holds and firmly supports the tool or
Centres–They act as solid bearings to support the work tools. The tool post is fitted on the top slide.
during the operation, cast steel or high grade tool steel
• The commonly used types of tool posts are–
is the common material used for their manufacture.
• American type tool post or single way tool post.
59. Scroll and gear mechanism is employed in • Indexing type tool post or square tool post
(a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Four-jaw chuck • Quick change tool post
(c) Magnetic chuck (d) Collet chuck
• British type tool post.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
63. A follower steady consists of
Ans. (a) : Scroll and gear mechanism is employed in
(a) One pad (b) Two pads
three jaw chuck.
(c) Three pads (d) Four pads
Universal scroll chuck–The universal scroll chuck has
three jaws which move in unison as an adjusting pinion RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
is rotated. Scroll chuck is its ease of operation in Ans. (b) : Follower steady rest–
centering work for concentric turning. • A follower steady is fixed to the saddle of the lathe.
• The universal scroll chuck can be use to hold centre • As it follows the tool it gives support just behind the
round or hexagonal workpieces. Three jaws, the chuck cutting point.
cannot be used effectively to hold square octagonal or • In the follower steady the support is continuous to the
irregular shapes. entire length of cutting.
60. Which among the following materials is used • It has usually two pads. One pad is located opposite to
for steady rest pads? the cutting tool and the other pad bears the top of the
(a) Mild steel (b) Lead workpiece to prevent it from springing up.
(c) Brass (d) Aluminium 64. A follower steady is fixed on the
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 (a) Tailstock (b) Bed
Ans. (c) : Steady rest is a lathe accessory used to give (c) Saddle (d) Headstock
extra support for a long and slender workpiece in RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
addition to the centre support during turning. Ans. (c) : A follower steady is fixed on the saddle.
The most common type of steady rests are: Note–Follower steady has been described in Q. No. 10.
• Fixed steady rest 65. Dead centre, as compared with the live centre,
• Follower steady rest (travelling steady) bears or resists
61. Which among the following statements in (a) No friction (b) Equal friction
respect of fixed steady is NOT correct? (c) Less friction (d) More friction
(a) When setting its two lower pads are made to RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
just touch the surface of the job first. Ans. (d) : Dead centre, as compared with the live
(b) It must be true before the pads to bear on the centre, bears or resists more friction.
job. • Live centres spin with the material. Dead centres do
(c) Skinning is done on the job before it is set not spin.
with the job. • Dead centres are used at very low RPM and loading force
(d) It is fixed to the carriage of the lathe. and typically require some lubrication and the part they are
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 "centering" can only take light side loading cuts.
Ans. (d) : Steady rest is a lathe accessory used to give • Live centres are mounted in heavy and highly accurate
extra support for a long and slender workpiece in bearings can work at high RPM and heavy end and side
addition to the centre support during turning. loading.

66. The size of three-jaw chuck is specified by Ans. (a) : Lead screw are commonly made from high
(a) The size of each jaw carbon steel, stainless steel or aluminium.
(b) The thickness of each jaw Lead screw–Advances the carriage for thread cutting
(c) The diameter of the body of the chuck operation when half nut lever is engaged. Lead screw of
(d) Width of the body of the chuck lathe acme thread (29º) and single start thread (Lead =
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 Pitch).
Ans. (c) : The size of three-jaw chuck is specified by 71. On a center lathe, the threads of various feed
the diameter of the body of the chuck. and pitch can be obtained by _____
• The universal scroll has three jaw chuck.
(a) Back gear
• The universal scroll chuck can be used to hold centre
round or hexagonal workpieces. Three jaws, the chuck (b) Quick change gear box
cannot be used effectively to hold square octagonal or (c) Apron system
irregular shapes. (d) tumbler gear system
67. One of the parts of a centre lathe is tumbler RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
gear unit. It is provided to Ans. (b) : On a center lathe, the threads of various feed
(a) Change the direction of feed and pitch can be obtained by quick change gear box.
(b) Transmit motion from feed shaft to the Back gear–The back gear unit is used to get reduced
carriage spindle speeds.
(c) Change the direction of rotation of the work Apron mechanism–It contains the mechanism for
(d) Alter the spindle speed moving and controlling the carriage.
Tumbler gear–The tumbler gear mechanism is used for
Ans. (a) : Tumbler gear mechanism is used to change changing the direction of rotation of the lead screw and
the direction of lead screw and feed rod in lathe
the feed shaft.
machines. By engaging tumbler gear, the carriage can
be moved automatically from tailstock end to 72. In a lathe machine which of the following is
headstock. fitted on the bed ?
68. The graduations are marked at the base of the (a) Headstock (b) Tailstock
tailstock. To offset the body these graduations (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
are given in RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(a) Degrees (b) Taper per foot Ans. (c) : In a lathe machine, headstock and tailstock
(c) mm (d) Radians are fitted on the bed.
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 Headstock–Headstock is clamped on the left hand side
Ans. (b): The graduations are marked at the base of the had stock spindle a hallow cylindrical shaft supported
tailstock. To offset the body these graduations are given by the thrust bearing. Provides a drive from work
in taper per foot.
holding, live centre, face plate, chuck, driving plate.
• Tail stock is a tool holder directly mounted on the
spindle axis opposite to the head stock. Tail stock–Tail stock is a tool holder directly mounted
on the spindle axis opposite to the head stock.
69. A face plate is held at
(a) Headstock spindle (b) Tailstock 73. Which of the following provides foundation for
(c) Tool post (d) Bed the whole lathe machine?
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 (a) Tailstock (b) Bed
Ans. (a) : Face plate–It is usually a circular cast iron (c) Headstock (d) Carriage
disc, having a threaded hole at its centre so that it can be RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
screwed to the threaded nose of the main spindle. Ans. (b) : Bed foundation for the whole lathe machine.
• It consists of a number of holes and slots by means of • Bed is main body of the lathe made by cast iron
which the work can be tightened to it. A number of having free graphite.
other things like bolts, nut, washers, clamping plates
74. In lathe work, when the tool is fed parallel to
and metallic packing pieces etc. are required for holding
the work properly on a face plate. the rotation of job work, it will produce ………
(a) Cylindrical surface (b) Spherical surface
• Used for holding irregular shapes on the lathe
machine. (c) Tapered surface (d) All of these
70. Lathe lead screw is made of_________. RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(a) High carbon steel (b) Cast iron Ans. (a) : In lathe work, when the tool is fed parallel to
(c) Mild steel (d) Nickel the rotation of job work, it will produce will be
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 cylindrical surface.

75. The lathe spindles are usually made hollow and 79. The tail stock is used to ..............
provided with – (a) Support the other end of the work when it is
(a) Internal taper being machined between centres
(b) No taper (b) Holds a tool for performing operations such
(c) Internal and external taper as drilling, reaming, tapping etc.
(d) External taper (c) Both (a) and (b)
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : The lathe spindles are usually made hollow RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
and provided with internal taper. Ans. (c) : Tail stock–Tail stock is a tool holder directly
• Lathe spindles are used for machine cutting of mounted on the spindle axis opposite to the head stock.
workpieces. • Provides support to heavy and long job.
• It can also be referred to as workpiece spindles. • Use in drilling and reaming operation. Drill and
• As the workpiece is clamped via the chuck of the lathe reamer is held in sleeve.
spindle. • Job is held between centre with the help of tailstock.
76. A lathe with four steps on the cone pulley and • Taper turning done with tail stock and method is
with back-gears will have – known as tail stock off set method.
(a) Four direct speeds • By the help of tail stock turning small taper on the
long work piece.
(b) Four indirect speeds
(c) Both (a) and (b) 80. The cutter in a milling machine is mounted on
(d) Eight indirect speeds ..........
(a) Arbor (b) Tool holder
(c) Spindle (d) All of these
Ans. (c) : Four direct and four indirect speeds
movement of a lathe is controlled by four steps on the
cone pulley with back gears. Ans. (d) : Milling is defined as the process of cutting,
• The lathe is a machine tool used principally for shaping and finishing a piece of metal. Milling is used
shaping of the metal. The workpiece is held and rotated when more complex metal shape are desired.
by the lathe while a tool bit is the cutting acting. Arbor–Its one end is attached to the column and the
other end is supported by an over arm.
77. Twist drills are made of –
• It holds and drives different types of milling cutters.
(a) High speed steel (b) Carbon steel
Spindle–It gets power from gears and belt drives to
(c) Stainless steel (d) Either (a) or (b) drive the motor.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 • It has provision to add or remove milling cutters onto
Ans. (d) : Drilling is the production of cylindrical holes the arbor.
of definite diameters in workpieces by using a multi- 81. The unit of a lathe that houses the lathe spindle
point cutting tool called a drill. and control levers for speed selection is called
• Almost all drilling operation is done using a twist drill. .........
It has two or more spiral or helical flutes formed along (a) Tail stock (b) Carriage
its length. (c) Head stock (d) Apron
Material used to make drill bits– RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
• Carbon steel
Ans. (c): Head stock–Head stock is clamped on the left
• High speed steel (HSS) hand side head stock spindle a hollow cylindrical shaft
• Cobalt steel. supported by the thrust bearing. Provides a drive from
78. The size of a lathe is specified by the– work holding, live centre, face plate, chuck, driving
(a) Length between centers plate.
(b) Swing diameter over the bed • Lathe spindle are usually made hollow and provided in
(c) Swing diameter over the carriage internal taper, spindle nose end have external screw
(d) All of these thread.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 • Spindle can be driven stepped pulley and belt or
transmission gear both can use change spindle speed.
Ans. (d) : Specification of lathe–
Different spindle speed on lathe is geometrical
• The length between the centers progression.
• The length of the bed
82. The lather part which is used to hold the drill is
• The height of the centers ..
• The maximum diameter. (a) tool post (b) tail stock
• The swing diameter over carriage. (c) head stock (d) spindle
• The swing diameter over the bed. RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
Ans. (b) : Tail stock–Tail stock is a tool holder directly (a) bed (b) head stock
mounted on the spindle axis opposite to the head stock. (c) cross-slide (d) tail stock
• Provides support to heavy and long job. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
• Use in drilling and reaming operation. Drill and Ans. (a) : Part marked X in figure is bed.
reamer is held in sleeve. • Bed is main body of the lathe made by cast iron
• Job is held between centre with the help of tail stock. having free graphite.
• Taper turning done with tail stock and method is • It is the base of foundation of the lathe.
known as tail stock off set method. 86. The lead screw of a Lathe has:
• By the help of tail stock turning small taper on the (a) Single start (b) Double start
long workpiece. (c) Triple start (d) Any of these
83. Name the type of carrier shown in figure RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Ans. (a) : The lead screw of a lathe has single start.
Lead screw–Advances the carriage for thread cutting
operation when half nut lever is engaged.
87. The guideways are of:
(a) Flat type (b) V-type
(c) Dovetail type (d) All of these
Ans. (d) : Guideways–The ways are the ground surface
on the top side of the bed on which the carriage and tail
stock ride.
(a) Safe adjustable carrier Guideways are used in three type–
(b) Adjustable carrier 1. V-type ways
(c) Bent tail carrier 2. Flat type ways
(d) Straight tail carrier 3. Dovetail type ways.
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 88. Which one of the following parts acts as
Ans. (b) : Adjustable carrier is shown in given figure. housing for gear trains through which power
Type of lathe carriers– feed could be given to the carriage and cross
• Straight tail carrier slide?
• Bent tail carrier (a) Tool post (b) Apron
• Adjustable carrier. (c) Chuck (d) Saddle
Adjustable carrier–It is a clamp type carrier that RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
consists of a clamping plate and an adjustable screw. Ans. (b) : Apron mechanism–To provides automatic
• It is used to hold small diameter jobs and square and feed to carriage. Longitudinal feed, cross feed and
rectangular shaped rods. thread cutting low speed arrangement.
84. The taper provided in nose of the tail stock 89. Three Jaw chuck is also known as:
barrel/spindle of lathe is..... (a) Independent chuck
(a) Morse taper (b) Jarno taper (b) compound chuck
(c) Brown and Sharpe (d) Metric taper (c) Universal chuck
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 (d) None of these
Ans. (a) : The taper provided in nose of the tail stock RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
barrel/spindle of lathe is morse taper. Ans. (c) : Universal scroll chuck–The universal scroll
• The small female taper is a morse taper to take a lathe chuck has three jaws which move in unison as an
centre or a tool such as a twist drill. adjusting pinion is rotated. Scroll chuck is its ease of
operation in centering work for concentric turning. This
85. Name the part marked ‘X’ in Figure.
chuck is not as accurate as the independent chuck.
• The universal scroll chuck can be use to hold centre
round or hexagonal workpieces. Three jaws, the chuck
cannot be used effectively to hold square octagonal or
irregular shapes.
90. The swing diameter over the bed is.............the
height of the centre measured from the bed of
the lathe.
(a) Equal (b) Twice
(c) Thrice (d) Half of
Ans. (b) : The swing diameter over the bed is twice the 95. Height of the center measured from the bed of
height of the centre measured from the bed of the lathe. the lathe as compared to swing diameter over
Specification of lathe– the bed is-
• The length between the centres. (a) Double (b) Half
• The length of the bed (c) Same (d) Four times
• The height of the centres. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• The maximum diameter. Ans. (b) : Height of the center measured from the bed
• The swing diameter over carriage. of the lathe as compared to swing diameter over the bed
is half.
• The swing diameter over the bed.
96. In lathes, half nut is used to-
91. Which one of the following is used to lock the
(a) Give desired direction of movement to the
lathe carriage to the lead screw for thread lathe carriage
cutting?
(b) Lock the lathe carriage to the lead
(a) Chuck (b) Face plate
(c) Reduce spindle speed
(c) Spindle (d) Half nut
(d) None of these
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
Ans. (d) : A half nut is used to engage the lead screw to Ans. (b) : A half nut is used to engage the lead screw to
the carriage so that the carriage moves longitudinally in the carriage so that the carriage moves longitudinally in
a direction parallel to the axis of rotation when the lead a direction parallel to axis of rotation when the lead
screw rotates through the spindle motor. screw rotates through the spindle motor.
92. The chuck used for setting up of heavy and 97. In lathe, chasing dial is used for-
irregular shaped workpiece is: (a) Thread cutting (b) Drilling
(a) Drill chuck (c) Parting off (d) Taper turning
(b) Four jaw independent chuck RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
(c) Three jaw chuck Ans. (a) : Chasing dial–
(d) Magnetic chuck • To cut a thread on a lathe, the lathe spindle and lead
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 screw must be in same relative position for each
Ans. (b) : The chuck used for setting up of heavy and successive cut.
irregular shaped workpiece is four jaw independent • Most lathe has a thread chasing dial built into like
chuck. centre lathe or attached to the carriage for this purpose.
• The independent chuck has four jaws which are • The chasing dial indicates when the split nut should be
adjusted individually on the chucks by means of engaged with the lead screw for the cutting tool to
adjusting screws. follow the previously cut groove.
93. The bed of planer is made of- 98. A step cone pulley is provided on a lathe to-
(a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel (a) Reverse the spindle rotation
(c) Tool steel (d) Copper (b) Change the spindle speed
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 (c) Drive the lead screw
(d) All of these
Ans. (a) : The bed of planer is made of cast iron.
• The bed of planer is a box like casting having cross
ribs. It is very large in size and heavy in weight and it Ans. (b) : Belt drive lathes–A belt drive lathe transmits
supports the column and all other moving parts of the power from the motor to the spindle by means of belts
machine. and is known as a step cone pulley.
• The step cone pulley has diameters of different sizes
94. The different mechanisms used to give that change ratio to achieve different spindle speeds.
reciprocating motion to the table are following-
99. The scribes are made of:
(a) Reversible motor drive
(a) Carbon steel (b) Spring steel
(b) Open and cross belt drive
(c) Stainless steel (d) Cast steel
(c) Hydraulic drive
(d) All of these
Ans. (a) : Scriber–A scriber is a pointed tool used for
making lines on metals. Scribers are made from high
Ans. (d) : The different mechanisms used to give carbon steel and the points are hardened and tempered.
reciprocating motion to the table–
100. Planning machine beds are made out by.........
• Reversible motor drive (a) Forging (b) Casting
• Open and cross belt drive (c) Fastening (d) Fabricating
• Hydraulic drive. RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
Ans. (b) : Planning machine beds are made out by Ans. (b) : In lathe, the carriage and tail stock are guide
casting. on different guideways.
• The bed of planner is a box-like casting having cross Guideways–
ribs. It is very large the size and heavy in weight and it 1. V-type ways
supports the column and all other moving parts of the 2. Flat type ways
machine. 3. Dovetail type ways.
101. The main function of a cross rail in a planning 105. The size of slotting machine is specified by its
machine is to carry.......... maximum..........
(a) Dog (b) Saddle (a) Longitudinal travel of table
(c) Housing (d) Workpiece (b) Height between table and ram
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 (c) Crosswise travel of table
Ans. (b) : Cross rail–The shaping machine part is (d) Length of stroke of ram
mounted on the ground vertical guideways of the RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
column. It features who parallel guideways on its top
perpendicular to ram axis, this is called a saddle. It Ans. (d) : The size of slotting machine is specified by
helps to move the table crosswise direction by the help its maximum length of stroke of ram.
of a feed screw. • The size of the shaper is specified by the maximum
length of stroke or cut it makes.
102. Which one of the following is a general purpose
lathe? 106. The quick return motion in a slotter is obtained
(a) Speed Lathe (b) Engine Lathe by ........
(c) Bench Lathe (d) Toolroom Lathe (a) Whitworth mechanism
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 (b) Variable speed reversible motor
Ans. (b) : Engine lathe is a general purpose lathe. (c) Fast and loose pulley mechanism
• The lathe is a machine tool used principally for (d) Crank and slotted lever mechanism
shaping of the metal. The workpiece is held and rotated RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
by the lathe while a tool bit is the cutting acting. Ans. (d) : The quick return motion in a slotter is
Principle parts of lathe– obtained by crank and slotted lever mechanism.
1. Bed and ways • A quick return mechanism converts the circular
2. Head stock motion into reciprocating motion.
3. Tail stock • This mechanism is mostly used in shaping, planning
4. Carriage and saddle and slotting machines.
5. Cross slide and compound. 107. Which one of the following is not the operation
103. The capacity of lathe is expressed as .......... performed using shaper?
(a) Horsepower and chuck diameter (a) Machining horizontal and vertical surface
(b) Swing and distance between centre (b) Cutting splines
(c) Bed length and spindle speed (c) Cutting square threads
(d) Tool post size and travel (d) Cutting gears
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (b) : The capacity of lathe is expressed as swing Ans. (c) : The shaper is used to machine flat surfaces,
and distance between centre. which may be horizontal, vertical or angular planes.
Specification of lathe– Shaper to cut curved and irregular shapes, slots, grooves
• The length between the centers and keyways.
• The length of the bed • The shaper usually cut only in one direction, so that
• The height of the centers the return stroke is lost time. However, the return stroke
• The maximum diameter. is made at up to twice the speed of the cutting stroke.
• The swing diameter over carriage. • Cutting square thread is not the operation performed
• The swing diameter over the bed. using shaper.
104. In lathe, the carriage and tail stock are guide 108. In the crank type shaper, the bull gear receives
on ......... power........
(a) Same guideways (a) Directly from the electrical motor
(b) Different guideways (b) Through V belt
(c) Not guided on guideways (c) Through pinion gear
(d) None of these (d) Directly from the electromagnetic motor
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
Ans. (c) : In the crank type shaper, the bull gear 113. Clapper box in shaper is used........
receives power through pinion gear. (a) To avoid lengthy tool
• The bull gear is a large gear mounted within the (b) To ensure cutting action
column. The radial side is bolted to the center of the (c) To lift the tool holder during return stroke
bull gear it carries a sliding block into which the
(d) To lift the tool holder during cutting stroke
crankpin is fitted. Rotation of the bull gear will make
the crankpin to revolve at a uniform speed. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
109. The purpose of the quick return mechanism in Ans. (c) : Clapper box–
a shaper is to .............. • It carries the tool holder.
(a) Obtain a better finish on the job • The main function of the clapper box is to provide
(b) Enables to set the job quickly clearance for tools in return stroke.
(c) Reduce idle time during shaping • It prevents the cutting edge from dragging the
(d) Obtain slower forward stroke workpiece while return stroke and prevents tool wear.
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 114. The operation cannot be done on the slotting
Ans. (c) : The purpose of the quick return mechanism in machine is.........
a shaper is to reduce idle time during shaping. (a) Keyway slotting
• A quick return mechanism converts the circular (b) Dovetail slotting
motion into reciprocating motion.
(c) Gear cutting
• This mechanism is mostly used in shaping, planning
and slotting machines. (d) Thread cutting
110. Which one is not the reason for non functioning RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
of feed mechanism? Ans. (d) : The operation cannot be done on the slotting
(a) Breakage of pawl machine is thread cutting.
(b) Breakage of feed screw rod There are the following operations performed in the
(c) Loose adjustable block slotting machines–
(d) Higher motor RPM • Machining flat surfaces
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 • Machining circular surfaces
Ans. (d) : Higher motor RPM is not the reason for non • Machining irregular surfaces
functioning of feed mechanism. • Machining of slots, keys and grooves.
• The movement of the tool relative to the work is
termed as feed. 115. The inside sharp corner of a job should be
finished by using......
111. The part of the shaper that supports the table
is called ........ (a) Round nose tool
(a) Ram (b) Base (b) Keyway tool
(c) Saddle (d) Clapper box (c) Square nose tool
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 (d) Cornering tool
Ans. (c) : The part of the shaper that supports the table RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
is called saddle. Ans. (d): The inside sharp corner of a job should be
• The saddle moves up and down (y-axis), usually finished by using cornering tool.
manually, to set the rough position of the depth of cut. • A cornering tool is actually a small molding plane. It
Final depth can be set by the hand crank on the tool cuts a fixed-radius curve on an edge.
head.
116. Which form of thread is used in 4 jaw chuck
112. Identify which type of mechanism of shaper
for adjusting the jaws?
produces less noise.....
(a) Crank and slotted mechanism (a) Vee thread (b) Acme thread
(b) Hydraulic mechanism (c) Square thread (d) Buttress thread
(c) Rack and pinion mechanism RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
(d) Movement Ans. (c) : Square thread is used in 4 jaw chuck for
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 adjusting the jaws.
Ans. (b) : Hydraulic drive shapers–These utilize a • Efficiency of square thread is more.
hydraulic system to reciprocate the ram, a double acting • No radial pressure or side thrust on the nut. Life of nut
ram imparting a natural quick return stroke. is more.
• Adjustable both the length of stroke and the position • Difficult to manufacture usually turned on lathe with a
of the ram. Simplicity of control over speed, stroke the single point cutting tool.
hydraulic shaper was the most expensive of all. • Square thread (screw jack, presses, clamping device).

117. What is the name of the part marked 'X'? 120. The jarno taper is specified by its taper
number. Which one of the following statements
is applicable while determining of the smaller
diameter of the taper?
(a) Divide the taper number by 2
(b) Divide the taper number by 4
(c) Divide the taper number by 8
(d) Divide the taper number by 10
(a) Body (b) Scroll RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
(c) External jaw (d) Internal jaw Ans. (d) : Jarno tapers have a taper of about 1:20 on
BEML 2022 diameter.
Ans. (b) : Part marked 'X' in given figure is scroll. • The large diameter size can be obtained by dividing by
8, the small end is always the taper size divided by 10
Universal scroll chuck (Scroll plate)–The universal
and the length is the taper size divided by 2.
scroll chuck has three jaws which move in unison as an
adjusting pinion is rotated. 121. Which one of the following standard tapers is
self-holding type?
• Scroll chuck is its ease of operation in centering work
(a) Morse taper
for concentric turning.
(b) Brown and Sharpe taper
• This chuck is not as accurate as the independent
(c) Jarno taper
chuck.
(d) Metric taper
• The universal scroll chuck can be use to hold centre
round or hexagonal workpieces. Three jaws, chuck
cannot be used effectively to hold square octagonal or Ans. (a) : Morse taper is self-holding type taper and it is
irregular shapes. available in an 8 size from MT0 to MT7.
118. What is the name of the part marked 'X'? 122. In milling, feed is defined as the rate at which
the work is fed to the revolving cutter. Which is
the correct expression for the unit of feed rate
in milling?
(a) m/min. (b) mm/rev.
(c) mm/sec. (d) mm/min.
Ans. (d) : Unit of feed rate in miling is mm/min.
• Feed rate (mm/min) = Feed (mm/tooth) × number of
teeth × spindle speed (RPM).
(a) Tool post (b) Tap slides 123. A phospher bronze split bearing bush (figure)
(c) Cross slide (d) Swivel base is to be finish machined on a centre lathe.
Ans. (d) : Part marked 'X' in given figure is swivel base.
Tool post–Tool post are used to hold cutting tools. Tool
posts allow for rapid tool changeover and provide a
high degree of position and indexing.
Cross slide–The cross slide is a component found on
the top of a lathe that allows the tool bit to slide back
The slitting of bush into two halves is done
and forth.
(a) before beginning to rough turn and bore
119. Which one of the following standard tapers has (b) after rough oversize turning the collars and
a taper ratio of 1 in 24? the step without boring
(a) Morse taper (c) after rough oversize turning the collars, step
(b) Metric taper and rough boring
(c) Brown and Sharpe taper (d) after completely finish turning the collars,
(d) Jarno taper step and finish boring
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
Ans. (a) : Morse tapers has a taper ratio of 1 in 24. Ans. (c) : The slitting of bush into two halves is done
• Morse taper is a self holding type taper and it is after rough oversize turning the collars, step and rough
available in an 8 size from MT0 to MT7. boring.

124. The ram of a mechanical shaper has simple (c) support workpieces during facing large
harmonic motion in which the ram speed is diameter workpieces with short length
maximum at the .... (d) support long workpiece held in chuck, to
(a) beginning of the stroke perform operations at the overhanging end
(b) middle of the stroke RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(c) end of the stroke
Ans. (d) : A fixed steady rest is used to support long
(d) point one fourth the end of stroke
workpiece held in chuck, to perform operations at the
overhanging end.
Ans. (b) : The ram of a mechanical shaper has simple
harmonic motion in which the ram speed is maximum at • Fixed steady rest consists of a frame containing three
the middle of the stroke. adjustable pads.
Ram–The ram slides back and front in dovetail for 128. Which among the following statements is not
square ways to transmit power to the cutter. The starting correct?
point and the length of the stroke can be adjusted. (a) A face plate is similar to the magnetic chuck
125. A traveling steady is fixed on the saddle of a (b) For accurate setting of the job on the face
lathe. What is the function of this steady rest? plate, dial test indicator is used
(a) To prevent bending of long shafts due to (c) To check the balance of the face plate work,
cutting force
spindle drive should be disconnected
(b) To avoid load on the lathe centres while
(d) 'V' block is essential for holding round job on
turning long shafts
face plate
(c) To reduce the load on the cutting tool while
turning RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(d) To ensure to turn at higher cutting speeds Ans. (a) : A face plate is similar to the magnetic chuck
than recommended is not correct.
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 Face plate–It is usually a circular cast iron disc, having
Ans. (a) : A traveling steady is fixed on the saddle of a a threaded hole at its centre so that it can be screwed to
lathe. The function of this steady rest to prevent bending the threaded nose of the main spindle.
of long shafts due to cutting force. • It consists of a number of holes and slots by means of
126. A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread which the work can be tightened to it.
roughing tool. Which one of the following is the
• A number of other things like bolts, nuts, washers,
correct procedure for aligning the finishing tool
with the thread groove? clamping plates and metallic packing pieces etc. are
(a) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned required for holding the work properly on a face plate.
in the groove by compound slide and cross • It is used for holding irregular shapes on lathe
slide machine.
(b) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned 129. Which one of the following statements is true
in the groove by carriage hand wheel and with respect to the half nut?
cross slide hand wheel (a) It is detachable part of the saddle
(c) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool
(b) It is an integral part of the saddle
positioned in the groove by compound slide
and cross slide (c) It is an integral part of the apron
(d) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool (d) It is detachable part of the apron
positioned in the groove by carriage and cross RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
slide hand wheels Ans. (d) : Half nut is detachable part of the apron.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 • A half nut is used to engage the lead screw to the
Ans. (c) : A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread carriage so that the carriage moves longitudinally in a
roughing tool. direction parallel to the axis of rotation when the lead
The correct procedure for aligning the finishing tool screw through the spindle motor.
with thread groove, work revolving, half nut engaged,
tool position in the groove by compound slide and cross 130. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to
slide. give depth of cut?
127. A fixed steady rest is used to (a) Compound slide
(a) support the tool rigidly to avoid chatter during (b) Top slide
operation (c) By adjusting the tool
(b) support long shafts that are being threaded for (d) Cross slide
their full length RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
Ans. (d) : Cross slide on a lathe is used to give depth of Ans. (b) : The advantage of tailstock spindle having
cut. left-handed threads ensure that the barrel advances with
• The cross slide is a dovetailed slide that moves at a clockwise movement of hand wheel.
right angle to the ways. The cross feed advances the 136. An irregularly shaped workpiece is turned on a
cutting tool into the work at a right angle to the lathe. Which one of the following work holding
workpiece by means of a lead screw and hand wheel. accessories is used?
• The compound sits on top of the cross slide.
(a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Two-jaw chuck
131. An angular workpiece is to be faced. It should (c) Driving plate (d) Face plate
be mounted
(a) in a 3-jaw chuck (b) in a collet
(c) between centres (d) on a face plate Ans. (d) : The face plate is used for holding jobs as
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 thin and irregularly shaped workpieces that cannot be
held between centres and chucks.
Ans. (d) : An angular workpiece is to be faced. It
should be mounted on a face plate. 137. The chip breaker on a lathe tool is essential
when
132. Which among the following materials is used
for steady rest pads? (a) Turning soft material
(a) Mild steel (b) Lead (b) Turning ductile materials and to break the
(c) Brass (d) Aluminium chips
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 (c) Turning cast iron
Ans. (c) : The three adjustable pads which are made up (d) Turning hardened materials
of brass metal can be moved radially in or out by means RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
of adjusting screws. The three pads are adjusted on a Ans. (b) : The chip breaker on a lathe tool is essential
trued cylindrical face of the workpiece. when turning ductile materials and to break the chips.
133. A fixed steady has • Chip breakers are used to reduce the swarf into small
(a) one adjustable pad two adjustable pad pieces as they are formed with the help of an
(b) two adjustable pads obstruction attached to the face of tool.
(c) three adjustable pads 138. Which one of the following is used to hold the
(d) four adjustable pads workpiece for machine diameter concentric to
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 its hole/bore?
Ans. (c) : Fixed Steady Rest– (a) Face plate (b) Mandrel
• A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and it is (c) Three-jaw chuck (d) Four-jaw chuck
stationary. It gives support at one fixed place only. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
• It consists of a frame containing three adjustable pads.
Ans. (b) : Mandrels–
134. During machining operation using face plate, • A mandrel can be described as a solid steel shaft or
the angle plate is held on the
spindle which is used for holding bored parts for
(a) face plate (b) carriage
machining their outside surfaces on lathe. They are also
(c) tailstock (d) bed
known as arbors. Use of mandrels is however done in
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 relatively small jobs.
Ans. (a) : During machining operation using face plate,
139. Which among the following centres is suitable
the angle plate is held on the face plate.
when workpiece held between centres is to be
• The face plate is used for holding jobs as thin and
turned at high speed?
irregularly shaped workpieces that cannot be held
between centres and chucks. (a) Ball centre (b) Half centre
(c) Pipe centre (d) Revolving centre
135. What is the advantage of tailstock spindle
having left-handed threads? RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
(a) Avoid advancement of barrel when rotated Ans. (d) : Revolving centre is suitable when workpiece
clockwise held between centres is to be turned at high speed.
(b) Ensure that the barrel advances with 140. The lathe which performs larger number of
clockwise movement of hand wheel operations with minimum wastage of time is
(c) Reduce the tendency for excessive movement called.....
of the barrel (a) Speed lathe (b) Turret lathe
(d) Avoid jamming of spindle and hand wheel (c) Center lathe (d) Tool room lathe
Ans. (a) : The lathe which performs larger number of 144. For mounting a lathe chuck.......
operations with minimum wastage of time is called (a) Start it by hand and then turn the power on
speed lathe. (b) Mount it on by power
• In general, a tool room lathe consists of a large engine (c) Mount it by hand
lathe, usually powered by a steam-powered engine, that (d) Mount it with the help of a hammer
is set up for higher precision work. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
141. Name the part of tail stock marked 'X' Ans. (c) : For mounting a lathe chuck mount it by hand.
• Chuck plate is to be mounted on lathe spindle.
145. Driving plates are used for .......
(a) Mounting fixtures and work pieces
(b) Driving shaft between centres with a lathe
dog
(c) Facing operations only
(d) Internal operations only
(a) Spindle lock lever
(b) Handle
Ans. (b) : Driving plate–
(c) Tailstock spindle
• It is a circular plate which is used when turning jobs in
(d) Tailstock clamping bolt
between centres.
• It is used with a straight tail or bent tail carrier to give
Ans. (a) : Part of tail stock marked X in given figure is a positive drive to the job.
spindle lock lever.
146. Identify the part marked 'X' in figure.
• The tailstock spindle can be fixed in position by
clamping it with the spindle lock.
142. Identify and name the part of carriage marked
'X'.
(a) Compound slide

(b) Bed
(c) Guide bar set at 1/2 included angle
(d) Sliding block
(a) Swivel base (b) Cross slide Ans. (c) : Part marked X in figure is guide bar set at 1/2
(c) Tool post (d) Compound rest included angle.
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 147. Name the operation in which tool is moving
Ans. (a): Part of carriage marked X in given figure is parallel to lathe axis and forming
swivel base. (a) Form tool method
Carriage and Saddle–The carriage supports the cross- (b) Compound slide method
slide, compound tool post move along the ways under (c) Taper turning by attachments
manual power feed. It comprises the saddle, a casting (d) Tailstock offset method
that rides across the top of the ways. RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
143. Name the type of chuck shown in the figure. Ans. (d) : In tailstock offset method, the tool is moving
parallel to lathe axis. The body of the tailstock is shifted
on its base to an amount corresponding to the angle of
taper.
148. The taper per foot of BS10 self holding taper
is.....
(a) Magnetic chuck (b) Three jaw chuck (a) 0.5161 per foot (b) 0.5611 per foot
(c) Two jaw chuck (d) Four jaw chuck (c) 0.6151 per foot (d) 0.6511 per foot
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Ans. (c) : Chuck shown in the figure is two jaw chuck. Ans. (a) : The taper ratio of the brown and sharp taper
• 2 jaw self-centering are used for rectangular shaped is 1:20 and its included angle of BS10 is 0.5161
parts as a stationary fixture. inch/foot.

149. To obtain maximum production at minimum Ans. (b) : A single spindle auto lathe for bar work has
cost from capstan and turret lathes, it is its slide movement controlled by cams. For the
essential that the machines are equipped with a production of typical component the cams are fixed on
wide range of turret and cross slide tooling. the cam holder mounted on the three camshafts of the
show in Fig. is machine. The number of revolutions made by the
camshafts will be equal to 1/3 rpm of the main spindle.
152. Which one of the following is the working
feature of an automatic lathe?
(a) Unloading of workpiece
(b) Repeating the cycle of operation without
operator's attention
(c) Coolant circulation and performing all cutting
operations
Ans. (d) : Working feature of an automatic lathe–
• Unloading of workpiece
• Repeating the cycle of operation without operators
attention.
• Coolant circulation and performing all cutting
(a) Recessing tool holder operations.
(b) knee turning tool holder • Machine tool has automatic processing.
(c) Tangential type steady turning tool holder • Accurate and reliable processing.
(d) Ending type roller steady turning tool holder 153. The copying unit of a copying lathe functions
IOCL 2020 on
Ans. (a) : Shown in figure is recessing tool holder. (a) Hand power system
(b) Mechanical power system
150. The carrier of a multi-spindle automatic lathe,
(c) Hydraulic power system
which is being operated by an indexing
mechanism, accommodates the spindle. The
number of spindles that can be accommodated
are Ans. (c) : A copying lathe is a semi automatic machine
which produces components in large quantities of
(a) 3, 4, 5 (b) 3, 6, 9
specific shape and dimensions from a template of the
(c) 4, 6, 7 (d) 4, 6, 8 required object.
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 • A copying attachment which could be a hydraulic unit
Ans. (d): Multi spindle automatic lathe– is incorporated in the machine.
• These are fastest type production machine and are 154. Which type of template is used for copying a
made in a variety of models with 2, 4, 5, 6, 8 spindles. shaft?
• Production capacity is higher, maching accuracy is (a) Cylindrical (b) Flat
lower compared to single spindle. (c) Square (d) Triangular
151. A single spindle auto lathe for bar work has its
slide movement controlled by cams. For the Ans. (a) : Copying lathe machine–A machine used for
the production of plane and curved surface from a
production of typical component the cams are
master (template, pattern, model or blueprint) on
fixed on the cam holder mounted on the three
products made of various materials.
camshafts of the machine. The number of
• Cylindrical type of template is used for copying a
revolutions made by the camshafts will be shaft.
equal to
155. Which type of template is required for face
(a) rpm of the main spindle copying?
(b) 1/3 rpm of the main spindle (a) Cylindrical (b) Plate
(c) Twice the number of components produced (c) Flat (d) Triangular
per minute. RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(d) Number of components produced per hour. Ans. (b) : Plate type of template is required for face
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 copying.
156. Which among the following statements in 3. A saddle provided on which a 4-station tool post is
respect of relieving lathe is correct? mounted to hold and different tool.
(a) A relieving lathe is similar to turret lathe 4. A tool post fitted at the back of the carriage. It holds
(b) A relieving lathe is used for cutting large a parting tool post mounted on the cross slide is
wheels indexed by hand.
(c) A relieving lathe is capable to relieve the 5. This machine has no tailstock, but in its place a
milling cutters circumferentially hexagonal turret is mounted on slide that rests upon
(d) A relieving lathe is used for turning axles the bed.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 • The longitudinal and cross feed movement of the
Ans. (c) : A relieving or backing off attachment is used turret saddle and cross slide is controlled by
for external internal and end relieving of miling cutters adjustable stops.
and taps. 161. The spindle speeds of a turret lathe have
157. A stop bar with number of stops is provided for (a) Same range as of a centre lathe of the same
the cross slide to control the depth of cut / capacity
plunge of tool on the (b) Higher range than that of centre lathe of the
(a) Front tool post only same capacity
(b) Rear tool post only (c) Lower range than that of centre lathe of the
(c) Front and rear tool posts individually same capacity
(d) Front and rear tool posts simultaneously (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : A stop bar with number of stops is provided Ans. (b) : The spindle speeds of a turret lathe have
for the cross slide to control the depth of cut / plunge of higher range than that of centre lathe of the same
tool on the front tool post only. capacity.
158. Which among the following is used for the bar 162. In a capstan or turret lathe, the tailstock of the
work on capstan lathe? centre lathe is replaced by a
(a) Four-jaw chuck (b) Air-operated chuck (a) Indexing head (b) Tool head
(c) Fixture (d) Collet (c) Turret head (d) Boring head
RRB ALP Patna 2014 RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (d) : A collet is used for the bar work on capstan Ans. (c) : In a capstan or turret lathe, the tailstock of the
lathe. centre lathe is replaced by a turret head.
Capstan lathe–The turret is mounted on an auxillary
163. What is a Built-Up Edge (BUE) in respect of a
slide (ram) which slides on the saddle.
turning tool?
• Movement of turret is very short
(a) Job material embedded on tool edge.
• Suitable for bar work
(b) A tool bit soldered on a tool shank
• In capstan lathe, less fatigue for operator due to light
ram. (c) Tool height is built up with packing pieces
(d) Tool cutting edge with a crater on it
159. The hexagonal turret in a saddle type turret is
mounted directly on RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
(a) Ram (b) Saddle Ans. (a):Conditions for forming built-up edge (BUE)
(c) Bed (d) Sub-bed chips–
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 • Work material - ductile
Ans. (b) : The hexagonal turret in a saddle type turret is • Cutting velocity - low or medium
mounted directly on saddle. • Feed - high or medium
160. Stops and trips are provided on capstan and • Cutting fluid - absent or inadequate
turret lathe for controlling the movement of the • Rake angle - low (dull cutting edge)
cutting tool on 164. Jaw chucks, turning fixtures and collet chucks
(a) Cross slide (b) Turrent head are the work holding devices used on capstan
(c) 'a' and 'b' both (d) Neither 'a' nor 'b' and turret lathes. Which one of the following
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 work holding devices having detachable pads
Ans. (c) : A capstan and turret lathe is used to are fitted?
manufacture any number of identical workpiece in less (a) Four jaw independent chuck
time. (b) Collet chuck
The capstan and turret lathe consists of– (c) Two jaw chuck
1. Bed (d) Three jaw self centering chuck
2. All gear head stock RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
Ans. (b) : Collet chuck–The collet chuck is the most 169. A stop bar with number of stops is provided for
accurate means of holding small workpieces in the the cross-slide to control the depth of cut/
lathe. The collet chuck consists of a spring machine plunge of tools on the…
collet. (a) front tool post only
165. Which one of the following statements indicates (b) rear tool post only
the problem caused due to the backlash in cross (c) front and rear posts individually
slide and compound slide? (d) front and rear posts simultaneously
(a) Concentric error in the component RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
(b) Difficulty in maintaining the size of the Ans. (a) : A stop bar with number of stops is provided
component within the specified limits for the cross-slide to control the depth of cut/ plunge of
(c) out of roundness error in the component tools on the front tool post only.
(d) Straightness error in the component
170. Which one of the following statements
describes the movement of roller steady tool
Ans. (d) : Straightness error in the component indicates holder (tangential type) used on capstan lathe?
the problem caused due to the backlash in cross slide (a) Both rollers and the tool can be moved
and compound slide. towards or away from the workpiece centre
166. Jib is provided in the dovetail assembly of the (b) Roller movement is independent of the tool
cross-slide and the saddle. Its purpose is to… movement
(a) allow the assembly of cross-slide and saddle (c) Rollers are in fixed position and tool alone
(b) guide the cross-slide movement on the saddle can be moved
(c) eliminate backlash between the cross-slide (d) Tool movement is independent of rollers.
crew and nut
(d) reduce the slackness in the cross slide
movement Ans. (a) : Follower rests–Sometimes, when the job is
too flexible, it becomes, necessary to support job very
close to the cutting edge of the tool throughout the
Ans. (d) : Jib is provided in the dovetail assembly of the operation. In such cases a follower rest is used.
cross-slide and the saddle. Its purpose is to reduce the
slackness in the cross slide movement. • It is attached to the saddle of the lathe carriage and
thus travels along with the tool throughout the
167. Roller steady tool holders enable heavier cuts operation.
to be taken on workpieces, when machining
components on capstan and turret lathes. The 171. Which among the following factors governs the
number of rollers provided is… selection of feed when turning a workpiece?
(a) one (b) two (a) Tool geometry
(c) three (d) four (b) Surface finish required
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (c) Type of coolant required
Ans. (b) : Roller steady tool holders enable heavier cuts (d) All of the above
to be taken on workpieces, when machining RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
components or capston and turret lathes. The number of Ans. (d): Feed is depends on–
rollers provided is two. 1. Productivity
168. Stops and trips are meant for controlling the 2. Surface finish
movement of the cutting tools on the cross slide 3. Feed rate unit
and on the hexagonal turret of a capstan lathe. 4. Cutting tool geometry
Finger stops are provided on the… 5. Machine tool capability.
(a) cross-slide and saddle hand wheels only
172. Which one of the following is used only for
(b) cross-slide hand wheel and star wheel of the
turret only finishing and maintaining correct form of
thread?
(c) saddle hand wheel and star wheel of the turret
only (a) Tap (b) Threading tool
(d) saddle and cross-slide hand wheels and turret (c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped tool
star wheel RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 Ans. (c) : Threading–Screw threads are cut with the
Ans. (a) : Stops and trips are meant for controlling the lathe for accuracy and for versatility both inch and
movement of the cutting tools on the cross slide and on metric screw thread can be cut using the lathe.
the hexagonal turret of a capstan lathe. Finger stops are • A thread is a uniform helical groove cut inside a
provided on the cross-slide and saddle hand wheels cylindrical work piece or on the outside of a tube or
only. shaft.
173. While threading on a lathe, the carriage is • The cross feed advances the cutting tool into the work
moved by means of at a right angle to the workpiece by means to lead screw
(a) Lead screw and hand wheel. The compound sits on top of the cross
(b) Hand wheel slide.
(c) Feed rod 177. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to
(d) Gear train on a rack give depth of cut:
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 (a) Compound slide (b) Top slide
Ans. (a) : The lead screw is used for thread cutting is (c) By adjusting the tool (d) Cross slide
made from good quality alloy steel headstock through RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
the feed gearbox and moves the carriage in a Ans. (d) : Cross slide on a lathe is used to give depth of
longitudinal direction against the workpiece. cut.
• Acme thread has an included angle of 29º. These are Cross slide–The cross slide is a dovetailed slide that
used in lathe screws. moves at a right angle to the ways. The cross feed
Square thread–In this thread, the flanks are advances the cutting tool into the work at a right angle
perpendicular to the axis of the thread. This is used for to the workpiece by means to lead screw and hand
transmitting motion or power. E.g. Flypress, cross-slide, wheel. The compound sits on top of the cross slide.
lead screw and compound slide etc. 178. Which of the following is a mechanism for
174. Which one is a main feature of tail stock? mechanized movements of the carriage along
(a) It holds the taper turning attachment longitudinal axis:-
(b) It holds the workpiece (a) Cross-slide (b) Compound rest
(c) Dead centre is mounted on the tailstock (c) Apron (d) Saddle
(d) It holds the driving plates RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 Ans. (c) : Apron is a mechanism for mechanized
Ans. (c) : Tailstock–Tailstock is a tool holder directly movements of the carriage along longitudinal axis.
mounted on the spindle axis opposite to the headstock. Carriage and Saddle–The carriage supports the cross-
The main feature of tail stock is dead centre is mounted slide, compound tool post moves along the ways under
on the tail stock. manual power feed. It comprises the saddle, a casting
• Provides support to heavy and long job. that rides across the top of the ways.
• Use in drilling and reaming operation. Drill and 179. The following acts as driving shaft in Lathe.
reamer is held in sleeve. (a) Countershaft (b) Spindle shaft
• Job is held between centre with the help of tail stock (c) Lead screw (d) None of these
• External taper turning done with tail stock and method RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
is known as tailstock offset method. Ans. (a) : Countershaft acts as driving shaft in lathe.
• By help of tailstock turning small taper on the long • The lead screw is used for thread cutting. It is made
workpiece. from good quality alloy steel and is provided with acme
• Dead centre is hardened and lubricated for reducing thread.
friction and wear. • The lead screw of a lathe has single start threads.
175. The specification of lathe does not include…. 180. A desired speed of ......... can be obtained by
(a) length between centers selecting the suitable change gears having
(b) height of the centers above the guide ways proper number of teeth
(c) the range of number of revolutions (a) Lead screw (b) Countershaft
(d) the total overall length of the lathe (c) Spindle (d) Feed gear box
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
Ans. (c) : The specification of lathe does not include the Ans. (a) : A desired speed of lead screw can be
range of number of revolutions. obtained by selecting the suitable change gears having
176. The cross-slide in a lathe moves: proper number of teeth
(a) Parallel to the axis of rotation 181. Modern lathes are equipped with ..... to obtain
(b) At any angle to the axis of rotation various spindle speeds.
(c) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation (a) All geared-head stock
(d) None of these (b) Single gear
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 (c) Double gear
Ans. (c) : The cross-slide in a lathe moves (d) All of these
perpendicular to the axis of rotation. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Cross slide–The cross slide is a dovetailed slide that Ans. (a) : Modern lathes are equipped with all geared-
moves at a right angle to the ways. head stock to obtain various spindle speeds.

182. What is swing over arrange? 187. A lathe with four steps on the cone pulley and
(a) The maximum diameter of workpiece that can with back gears will have:
be rotated over the bed ways (a) Four direct speeds
(b) The minimum diameter of workpiece that can (b) Four indirect speeds
be rotated over the bed ways (c) Four direct and fours indirect speeds
(c) The maximum diameter of workpiece that can (d) Eight indirect speeds
be rotated over lathe saddle RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
(d) The minimum diameter of workpiece that can Ans. (c) : A lathe with four steps on the cone pulley and
be rotated over lathe saddle with back gears will have four direct and fours indirect
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 speeds.
Ans. (c) : Swing over arrange is the maximum diameter 188. In a center lathe, the cutting tool is fed in .....
of workpiece that can be rotated over lathe saddle. with reference to the lathe axis.
183. Which of the following is not a part of carriage (a) Cross direction only
of the centre lathe? (b) Longitudinal direction only
(a) Tool post (b) Apron (c) Both cross and longitudinal directions
(c) Compound rest (d) Gear box controls (d) Any direction
Ans. (d) : Gear box is not a part of carriage of the Ans. (c) : In a center lathe, the cutting tool is fed in both
centre lathe. cross and longitudinal directions with reference to the
lathe axis.
184. The job-supporting device that is bolted to the
back end of the carriage and moved along 189. Which is a reason for manufacturing grey cast
during machining operation is called ............ iron by lathe bed?
(a) Angle plate (b) Steady rest (a) can withstand compressive load
(c) Follower rest (d) Compound rest (b) can withstand tensile load
(c) difficult to machine ability
(d) to brake sudden shock
Ans. (c) : The job-supporting device that is bolted to the
back end of the carriage and moved along during
machining operation is called follower rest. Ans. (a) : The beds are mostly made of close-grained
grey cast iron. Cast iron has a very high damping
185. The tailstock is used to ............. capacity cost iron can withstand more compressive load
(a) Support the other end of the work when it is and resist vibration.
being machined between centres
190. What shold be used to move the carriage
(b) Holds a tool for performing operations such manually?
as drilling, reaming, tapping etc. (a) Cross slide (b) Carriage hand wheel
(c) Both (a) and (b) (c) Feed lever (d) Half nut
(d) None of the above RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
Ans. (b): The carriage hand wheel is used to move
Ans. (c): Tailstock–Tailstock is a tool holder directly manually position and or hand feed the carriage in the
mounted on the spindle axis opposite to the headstock. longitudinal axis.
• Support the other end of the work when it is being 191. Which among the following is the cause for
machined between centres incorrect pitch of thread during thread cutting
• Holds a tool for performing operations such as with single point tool:
drilling, reaming, tapping etc. (a) Incorrect selection of change gears
• By the help of tailstock turning small taper on the long (b) Lead screw worn out
workpiece. (c) Half nut worn out
• Provides support to heavy and long job. (d) All of these
• Job is held between centre with the help of tailstock. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
186. The unit of a lathe that houses the lathe spindle Ans. (d) : Incorrect pitch of thread during thread cutting
and controls levers for speed selection is called with single point tool due to incorrect selection of
........... change gears, lead screw worn out, half nut worn out.
(a) Tail stock (b) Carriage 192. In single point tool, feed is expressed in______.
(c) Head stock (d) Apron (a) millimeter per revolution
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (b) meter per revolution
Ans. (c) : The unit of a lathe that houses the lathe (c) centimeter per revolution
spindle and controls levers for speed selection is called (d) milimeter
head stock. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (a) : Feed is expressed as the distance moved by Ans. (b) : Device which is fastened to the headstock
the tool in one minute it is expressed in millimeters per end of the work to be turned between centres is called a
revolution (mm/rev). Depth of cut is the depth of chip lathe dog.
taken by the cutting tool and one-half total amount 198. In lathe the carriage and tail stock are guided
removed from the workpiece in a single cutting. on–
193. Compound rest should be_______degree in (a) Same guideways
second method of giving feed. (b) Different guideways
(a) 5 (b) 10 (c) No guided on guideways
(c) 8 (d) 0 (d) None of these
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Ans. (d) : Compound rest should be 0 degree in second
Ans. (b) : In lathe the carriage and tail stock are guided
method of giving feed.
on different guideways.
194. Work is usually required to be held in vertical
199. A desired speed of ____ can be obtained by
position for layout. For this purpose it is
selecting the suitable change gears having
clamped to_____.
proper number of teeth.
(a) Surface plate (b) A machine bed
(a) Lead screw (b) Countershaft
(c) An angle plate (d) A V-block
(c) Spindle (d) Feed gear box
Ans. (c) : Work is usually required to be held in vertical
position for layout. For this purpose it is clamped to an Ans. (c) : A desired speed of spindle can be obtained by
angle plate. selecting the suitable change gears having proper
• Angle plates have two plane surfaces mechanical number of teeth.
perfectly flat and at right angle. 200. Half nut is connected with–
195. The main purpose of back gear unit in (a) Locking device
headstock is– (b) Jig and Fixtures
(a) Normal spindle speed (c) Thread cutting on lathe
(b) Reduced spindle speed (d) Quick engaging and disengaging device
(c) Increased spindle speed RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
(d) Double the spindle speed Ans. (d) : The half nut or split nut is used for thread
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 cutting in a lathe. It engages or disengages the carriage
Ans. (b) : The back gear mechanism is an additional with the lead screw so that the rotation of the leadscrew
part of the belt drive lathe. is used to traverse the tool along the workpiece to cut
• It is used to obtain a slower and wider range of spindle screw threads.
speeds back gear disengagement and engagement. 201. A jib is provided between the top slide and the
• As the name implies, "back gear" is a gear mounted at swivel base assembly of the compound slide. Its
the back of the headstock. purpose is to
• The back gear consists of four gears located at the (a) Allowing dismantling the top slide easily
back of the headstock which reduces the speed of (b) Eliminate the backlash of the screw and the
stopped pulley in the headstock. nut in the assembly
196. Which one of the lathe parts mentioned below (c) Adjust the slackness developed due to wear
is not provided with a power feed? (d) Permit flow of the lubricant between the
(a) Carriage (b) Compound rest sliding surfaces
(c) Cross slide (d) Feed screw RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 Ans. (c) : A jib is provided between the top slide and
Ans. (b) : The lathe parts mentioned below is not the swivel base assembly of the compound slide. Its
provided compound rest with a power tool. purpose is to adjust the slackness developed due to
• Compound rest is fitted on the top and to the front of wear.
the cross-slide the compound rest can be swiveled 202. One of the parts of a centre lathe is tumbler
horizontally through 360º. gear unit it is provided to
197. Device which is fastened to the headstock end (a) Change the direction of feed
of the work to be turned between centres is (b) Transmit motion from feed shaft to the
called a– carriage
(a) Face plate (b) Lathe dog (c) Change the direction of rotation of the work
(c) Vice (d) Independent chuck (d) Alter the spindle speed
Ans. (b) : One of the parts of a centre lathe is tumbler Ans. (c) : The distance of a drill advances into the job
gear unit it is provided to transmit motion from feed in one complete revolution is known as feed.
shaft to the carriage. 208. What is the maximum length of the workpiece
203. The graduations are marked at the base of the that can be used on a lathe machine?
tailstock. To offset the body these graduations (a) Height of centre
are given in
(b) Length between centre
(a) Degrees (b) Taper per foot
(c) Maximum length of machine bed
(c) mm (d) Radians
(d) Maximum diameter of bar
Ans. (b) : The graduations are marked at the base of the
tailstock. To offset the body these graduations are given Ans. (b) : Maximum length of workpiece that can be
in taper per foot. used on lathe machine is equal to length between centre.
There are two centre in Lathe machine–
204. The capacity of lathe is expressed as
(a) Horsepower and chuck diameter 1. Live centre
(b) Swing and distance between centres 2. Dead centre
(c) Bed length and spindle speed 209. By what measure is the vertical distance
(d) tool post size and lathe travel between the lathe axis and the bed known as?
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 (a) Length between center
Ans. (b) : The capacity of lathe is expressed as swing (b) Maximum bar diameter
and distance between centres. (c) Maximum length of machine bed
Specification of lathe– (d) Height of center
• The length between the centers → This expresses UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
the maximum length of job that can be mounted IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
between the lathe centers i.e. between head stock and
Ans. (d) : The vertical distance between the Lathe axis
tail stock.
and the bed is known as height of center.
• The length of the bed → Gives the approximate floor
area that the lathe can occupy. • Lathe machine bed are generally made of cast iron.
• The height of the centers → is measured from the • Lathe machine bed are casted, and able to absorb
lathe bed. shocks.
• The swing diameter over carriage → Indicates the • In Lathe machine turning, boring, threading and
maximum diameter of the work that may rotate over the reaming etc. operation can be performed.
saddle. This is normally less than the swing diameter 210. Through which of the following is the
over the bed. transmission of electricity to the carriage by
205. The basic turning lathe is the lead screw?
(a) Turret lathe (b) Automatic lathe (a) Apron mechanism (b) Half nut
(c) Engine lathe (d) Swiss lathe (c) Worm and work gear (d) Gear box
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Ans. (c) : The basic turning lathe is engine lathe. Ans. (b) : Through the medium of half nut, power is
• The major function of the engine lathe is to change the transmitted to carriage by lead screw.
size shape or finish of a revolving piece with various Half nut is splited in two part with internal thread.
cutting tools.
211. Which of the following part sits exactly on the
206. The compound slide swivel base is set at 45° to
top of the compound rest?
the centre line of lathe. The degree of the
reading at the cross slide index will be (a) Saddle (b) Cross slide
(a) 135° (b) 90° (c) Apron (d) Top slide
(c) 45° (d) 30° DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
BHEL 2020 Ans. (d) : Top slide, Fits exact by on the top of the
Ans. (c) : The compound slide swivel base is set at 45° compound rest. Top slide is the upper most part of
to the centre line of lathe. The degree of the reading at compound rest. It is used to support the tool post which
the cross slide index will be 45º. holds the cutting tool.
207. The distance of a drill advances into the job in 212. Which of the following parts sits exactly on the
one complete revolution is known as top slide of the lathe?
(a) r.p.m. (b) cutting speed (a) Saddle (b) Tool post
(c) feed (d) machine speed (c) Cross slide (d) Compound rest
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Ans. (b) : Tool post fits exactly on the top slide of lathe. 216. What is the method used to move and control a
• The part which hold and carries the cutting tool is carriage?
called tool post. (a) Compound rest (b) Tool post
• The tool post is located above the compound rest. (c) Cross slide (d) Apron
• Top slide is upper part of compound rest. DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
213. By whom is the tail stock adjusted? Ans. (d) : Apron is used for moving and controlling the
(a) Main part of tail stock carriage.
(b) Spindle of tail stock Apron is hollow type box which is made of cast iron. It
(c) Entire tail stock as a single unit is fitted below the saddle and infront of bed. It is
equipped with gears, clutch and levers to provide
(d) Base of tail stock
manual or automatic movement of carriage to left and
right and also for cross slide on it.
NTPC Fitter 2016
Ans. (a) : Tail stock is adjusted by main part of tail
stock.
• Tail stock is situated at right side of Lathe machine
bed. It can be slide to and from over the base. It's body
is made up of cast iron.
Main objective of tail stock for holding and turning the
job between the center. It provides the base for turning
between the center's. 217. ___________ is a fixed unit of lathe on the left
hand side whose function is to transmit the
214. For mounting the chuck in lathe
drive from the main motor to the work.
(a) Mount it by power only (a) Tool post (b) Bed
(b) Start it by hand and then switch on to power (c) Head stock (d) Tailstock
assemble to spindle nose. BDL Technician 2022
(c) Mount it by hand with the help of hammer NMRC, 15-09-2019
(d) Mount it by hand only. Ans. (c) : Head stock is a fixed unit of lathe on the left
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 hand side whose function is to transmit the drive from
Ans. (d) : Chuck of lathe machine should be mounted the main motor to the work.
by hand only. • Head stock is part of Lathe machine which is fitted
215. Three jaw chucks, used in lathe machine, permanently at left side of bed. Head stock is equipped
are........... with spindle to hold the workpiece and for rotate. There
(a) independent chucks (b) free rotating chucks is a mechanism to rotate the spindle for different motion
(c) self-centering chucks (d) used as clutch as per requirement.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 • Head stock also provide the motion to Lead screw,
Feed rod and Gear train etc.
Ans. (c): Three jaw chuck used in Lathe machine is also
called self centering chuck. 218. Which part of lathe machine has a dead center
(a) Lead screw (b) Carriage
• It's body is made of cast iron. Through it, workpeice
(c) Headstock (d) Tailstock
of round, triangle and hexagon shape can be easily and
quickly tied into concentric. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
• It is very useful for high production and mostly used Ans. (d) : Tail stock is the part of Lathe machine which
has a dead center.
for light workapiece.
• Tailstock is fitted at right side of bed. It can be move
to any place and fixed in bed.
• Tail stock is used for supporting the job, when turning
is done between the center.
• Tail stock has a hardened dead center with morse
taper.
219. To true a job precisely in a 4 jaw chuck, the
instrument used is a :
(a) Micrometer
(b) Vernier bevel protractor
(c) dial test indicator with a magnetic base
(d) Try square
Ans. (c) : To true a job precisely in a 4 jaw chuck has 226. The tool post is mounted on the
four independent jaw. (a) head stock (b) bed
• 4 jaw chuck has four independent jaw. (c) tail stock (d) None of the above
• It is can be used to hold the irregular shaped job. ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
• Cast iron is used to make the chuck with circular Ans. (d) : • Tool post is mounted above the compound
shape rest.
220. In a conventional lathe tool post is mounted • Tool post is used to hold and to carry the cutting tool.
directly on the: • Four tool can be fastened together on the tool post as
(a) Saddle (b) Top slide per requirement. Any tool can be brought into position
(c) Cross slide (d) Compound Rest for work by rotating the handle mounted on it. Handle is
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 rotated in opposite direction for tightening the cutting
Ans. (b) : In conventional lathe tool post is mounted tool.
directly on the top slide. • For light job only one tool holding type tool post is
221. A dead centre is the lathe centre fixed in used.
(a) Head stock (b) Tail stock 227. The function of a cross slide is
(c) Carriage (d) Saddle (a) To supply feed to the tailstock
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 (b) To supply feed to the chuck
Ans. (b) : A dead centre is the lathe center which is (c) To supply feed to the tool post
fixed in tailstock. Tail stock is made of cast iron. Tail is (d) To supply feed to the tool
used to support large job. ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
222. The conical point of a lathe centre is Ans. (c) : Function of a cross slide is to supply feed to
(a) 30o (b) 60o tool post.
o
(c) 90 (d) 100o • Through cross slide feed is provided perpendicular to
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 spindle axis to perform facing operation.
Ans. (b) : Conical point to angle of Lathe centre is 60º . • With the help of cross slide taper turning can be done
Center is used for machining between the center. by providing cross feed.
223. Which is the lathe centre generally used for • During the cylindrical turning depth of cut is also
taper turning? given by cross slide.
(a) Dead centre (b) Half centre 228. For mounting a lathe chuck
(c) Ball centre (d) Self-driving centre (a) Start it by hand and then switch on to power
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 and assemble to the spindle nose
Ans. (c) : For taper turning, Ball centre is generally (b) Mount it by power only
used in Lathe machine. (c) Mount it by hand only
224. The surface of a lathe bed should be (d) None of the above
(a) Rough (b) Clean
(c) True (d) None of the above ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (c): Lathe chuck is mounted on Lathe by hand.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 Chuck is a important accessory for holding and rotating
Ans. (c): The surface of a Lathe bed should be true. work piece. In Lathe of short length and large diameter
Lathe bed is made of cast iron. Casting method is for or of irregular shape which can not be conveniently
mating the Lathe bed. mounted between centre.
Base must be enough rigid and strong to withstand the Chuck is mounted on threaded part of spindle with the
force exerted by tool during turning operation also help of back plate. Set screw is used to lack it.
should be able to absorb the vibration and shocks. 229. Tumbler gear mechanism is used to
Function of Lathe bed to provide guide ways and for (a) Change the direction of feed
controlled operation. Accuracy of Lathe depend upon
(b) To transmit the motion from the lead screw to
the bed.
the carriage
225. The accessory of a carriage is
(a) tail stock (b) cross slide (c) To change the direction of the chuck
(c) chuck (d) head stock (d) To change the spindle speed
Ans. (b) : Main accessory of carriage– Ans. (a) : Tumbler Gear mechanism is used to change
1. Saddle the direction of feed. Direction of carriage can be
2. Cross slide changed by changing the direction of feed rod with help
3. Compound slide of Tumbler reversing unit. Motion to carriage is
4. Tool post provided by feed rod or Lead screw because motion to
5. Apron feed rod on Lead screw is given by spindle.

230. In a conventional lathe tool post is mounted Ans. (b) : Follower rest is used in lathe machine during
directly on the the machining of long job to over come the weight and
(a) Saddle (b) Top Slide load applied by the cutting tool.
(c) Cross slide (d) Compound rest Follower rest is mounted on carriage so that it can travel
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 along the cutting tool.
Ans. (b) : In conventional lathe tool post is mounted Follower rest help to producing uniform diameter in
directly on the top slide. long job.
231. Taper turning is done by which part of the Note–Steady is mounted at fixed point on Lathe bed.
lathe machine?
235. The part that belongs to the head stock of the
(a) Lead screw (b) Carriage
(c) Gear box (d) Cross slide lathe is
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III (a) Main spindle (b) Tool post
Ans : (d) Taper turning is done with the help of cross (c) Tail stock (d) Carriage
slide on lathe machine cross slide is mounted on saddle, ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
manual feed is provided by hand wheel for automate Ans : (a) Main spindle belongs to head stock.
feed Apron mechanism is used.
• Spindle can rotate freely in bearing fitted in head
Method for taper turning on Lathe machine–
stock.
1. By a broad nose form tool
2. By setting over tail stock centre • Main spindle provides the motion to holded job.
3. By swiveling the compound rest • Main spindle is made of Alloy steel.
4. By taper turning attachment Part of Head Stock–
5. By combining longitudinal and cross feed in special 1. Spindle or main spindle
lathe.
2. cone pulley
232. To maintain bed gap near head stock of lathe
3. Back Gear
machine, what is the reason for?
(a) For reducing the weight of bed 4. Tumbler Gear
(b) Reducing the price of machine 236. Which type of lathe is used for production
(c) For improving fineness work
(d) For machining large diameter job (a) Centre lathe
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III (b) Bench lathe
Ans : (d) For machining large diameter job a gap is (c) Tool room lathe
provided near the head stock of Lathe machine, but the (d) Capstan and turret lathe
used of this gap is restricted to short length job. But in
other hand for machining job of very short length, gap ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
creates difficulties, because of that gap is not provided Ans. (d) : Capstan and turret lathe is used in mass
in precision lathe machines. production.
233. Which one of the following statement is correct These type of Lathe are used for all type of turning
regarding chuck of independent jaw (For jaw operation.
chuck). Those machines can be most efficiently used when
(a) It should not be used to hold circular job. turning, drilling, reaming and thread cutting operations
(b) Jaws can't be used to hold the bar of square are required at same work piece.
cross section All tool are arranged in order of operation at turret and
(c) The jaws move together tool post these type of lathe machine are equipped with
(d) Jaws can move in and out in radial direction. automatic feed and motion to spindle.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III 237. Tail stock in lathe can be used for
Ans : (d) Four jaw independent chuck–It has four (a) Holding drills/reamers
independent jaws each jaw may moved independently (b) Supporting larger jobs
by rotating the screw which meshes with teeth cut on (c) Holding drill chucks with taper shanks
the underside of the jaw.
Chuck is used to hold heavy and irregular shaped
articles. Each jaw of chuck can move independently
radialy in or out direction. Ans. (d) : Tail stock is used in Lathe machine for
234. Follower rest when used, it is mounted on holding drill, reamer, taps etc. and also used to support
which part of the centre lathe : long job during the turning on lathe machine means
(a) Bed (b) Carriage machining between the center.
(c) Apron box (d) Tool post • A standard taper is provided on tail stock to drill
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 chuck shank for drilling purpose.

238. Lathe beds are usually made of 243. To hold cutting tools, like drills and reamers in
(a) Mild steel lathe machine, ..............is used.
(b) Cast iron (a) head stock (b) cross slide
(c) Stainless steel (c) tool post (d) tail stock
(d) Aluminium alloy RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 Ans. (d) : To hold cutting tool like drill, and reamers in
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 lathe machine, Tail stock is used.
Ans. (b) : Lathe machine bed are made by cast iron by • Tail stock is situated at the right side of the bed. It can
casting process. be move to and from on lathe bed. The body of tail
• Cast iron has good compressive strength, It is the most stock made of cast iron.
suitable material for absorbing shocks and loads which 244. Which one of the following tool post is easy for
produced during machining operation. setting the tool centre height of the tool?
239. Which of the following should be place at the (a) Open Side tool post
top of the compound rest? (b) Swish Screw tool post
(a) Top slide (b) Cross slide (c) Four-way tool post
(c) Chuck (d) Saddle (d) Universal tool post
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
Ans : (a) Top slide is upper part of compound rest, it is Ans. (d) : For every setting of tool center height of tool,
also compound slide. Universal tool post is used. Tool post is situated over
Cutting tool can be move along the axis of lathe at any the tool slide of compound slide.
angle with the help of compound slide, there is a It is used to hold tool in proper position.
making of 0º-360º for setting the tool in a desired angle. 245. Pulley and back gears are situated at which
part of the lathe?
240. An irregularity shaped workpiece is turned on
(a) Tail stock (b) Slide rule
a lathe. Which one of the following work
(c) Head stock (d) Base
holding accessories is used?
(a) Three-jaw chuck
Ans. (c) : Pulleys and back gear are part of head stock.
(b) Two-jaw chuck • Head stock is at left side of lathe main function of
(c) Driving plate head stock to provide power and motion from motion to
(d) Face plate workpiece. Shaft, Gear and Lever are help to provide
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 the different type of motion head stock consist of main
Ans. (d) : Face plate is used to hold irregularity shaped three part–
workpiece. 1. Job holding device
Note–Four jaw chuck also can be used for irregular 2. Drive mechanism
3. Main spindle
shaped workpiece.
246. Which machine is mother of the machine tool?
241. The compound slide swivel bases is set at 45° to (a) Lathe (b) Milling machine
the centre line of lathe. The degree of reading (c) Grinding machine (d) Shaper machine
at the cross slide will be ..................... BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(a) 135° (b) 90° DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
(c) 45° (d) 30° Ans. (a) : Lathe is the mother of machine tool. Lathe is
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 the machine tool in which job is rotated in spindle axis.
Ans. (c) : The compound slide swivel base is set at 45º Cylindrical, conical and plane surface are produced by
to the centre line of lathe. The degree of reading at the Lathe machine. Drilling, boring, reaming and threading
cross slide will be 45º. operation can be done by lathe machine.
242. The stationary center of lathe machine is made 247. Why cast iron is used to make machine beds?
(a) It is a ductile material
of which of the following material?
(b) It is a costly material
(a) High carbon steel (b) Mild steel
(c) It can absorb more compressive load
(c) Copper (d) Zinc (d) It is heavy in weight
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
Ans. (a) : Stationary center of lathe machine is made of Ans. (c) : Cast iron is used for making machine beds,
high carbon steel. because it's compressive strength is more as compared
Note–Bed of Lathe machine is made of cast iron. to other material.

• Part made by cast iron can absorb more shock and 251. The power is transmitted by lead screw to the
compressive load carriage in a lathe through :
• Cast iron has self lubricating property (a) Gear box
(b) Worm and gear
• In cast iron, carbon is find in free state.
(c) Rack and pinion
248. The unit of a lathe which houses the lathe (d) Half nut
spindle and control levers for speed selection is NLC Technician 24-09.2022
called a : IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
(a) Head stock (b) Tail stock
Ans : (d) The power is transmitted by lead screw to the
(c) Feed box (d) Carriage carriage in a lathe through half nut.
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 • Half nut is splited nut in two part with standard
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 thread.
Ans. (a) : Head stock is the unit of lathe which houses For transmitting power and motion lead screw and half
the lathe spindle and control levers fan speed selction. nut is used. Half nut and lead screw is generally used
Main part of head stock– for thread cutting.
1. Job holding devices 252. Tail stock body is made of which of the
2. Driving mechanism material?
3. Main spindle (a) Tool steel (b) High speed steel
249. In a Lathe machine the chucks hold the (c) Cast iron (d) Mild steel
(a) Tool (b) Workpiece DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
(c) Work or Tool (d) None of these Ans : (c) The body of tail stock made of cast iron.
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 • Tail stock is located on the inner ways at the right
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015 hand end of the bed.
• Tail stock can move to and on bed, from part of it's
Ans : (b) Chuck is important accessory of lathe
spindle is drilled with standard taper (Morse Taper).
machine which is used to hold the work piece and to
For supporting dead centre, drill and reamer Morse
rotate it.
provided in Tail stock.
• Chuck is used to hold cylindrical and short lengthed
work piece or irregular shaped workpiece, very
quickly.
250. Match the following given lists :
List I List II
A. Part of the Lathe which 1. carriage
holds the mechanism of
carriage
B. Which stops at guide way 2. apron
and run longitudinally 253. On which one of the following can a tool post
C. Part which contains 3. Feed mechanism be mounted?
tool post (a) Cross slide (b) Head stock
D. Provide automatic feed to 4. Compound slide (c) Tail stock (d) Compound rest
the cutting tool-compound DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
slide Ans : (d) • Tool post is mounted above the compound
(a) A–2, B–1, C–4, D–3 rest.
(b) A–1, B–3, C–4, D–2 • Tool post is used to hold and to carry the cutting tool.
(c) A–4, B–3, C–2, D–1
(d) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3 • Four tool can be fastened together on the tool post as
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 per requirement. Any tool can be brought into position
for work by rotating the handle mounted on it. Handle is
Ans : (a)
rotated in opposite direction for tightening the cutting
A. Part of the Lathe which 2. apron
holds the mechanism of tool.
carriage • For light job only one tool holding type tool post is
B. Which stops at guide way 1. carriage used.
and run longitudinally 254. Which of the following system, in lathe
C. Part which contains 4. Compound machine is used for the movement of carriage
tool post slide in lathe machine?
D. Provide automatic feed to 3. Feed (a) Compound rest (b) Apron
the cutting tool-compound mechanism (c) Mandrel (d) Saddle
slide UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (b) Apron mechanism is used for the movement Ans : (b) Follower rest–Follower rest follows the tool
of carriage in lathe machine. during the cutting action because it is fixed on the
Apron is mounted on saddle by bolts in front of bed. saddle at the rear end of the carriage.
Apron is consist of carriage, tool and equipment for As the saddle moves, follower rest also travel along the
manual or automatic feed. tool.
Apron is consist of carriage, tool, and equipment for For longitudinal feed to workpiece, tool is fixed such a
manual or automatic feed.
position that jaw of follower always remains behind the
Lever, Gear and clutch are given for automatic feed.
tool tip. So that follower rest can bear the force
255. The gear set used in lathe machine is known produced due to cutting action.
as– Follower rest is generally used for turning long job and
(a) Spur gear (b) Intermediate gear
for finishing cut.
(c) Bevel gear (d) Gear train
259. To set the work run eccentrically, the following
DRDO Machinist.2016
method is used to hold the job:
(a) 3 jaw chuck (b) Collet chuck
Ans : (d) The gear set used in lathe machine is known
(c) 4 jaw chuck (d) None of the above
as Gear train.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
Gear train are used to transmit power from one shaft to
another shaft. Ans : (c) For rotating and setting eccentrically 4 jaw
According to position of shaft and power transmission– chuck is used. For quick centering of job, concentric
1. Simple Gear train jaw marked in the surface of jaw. Four jaw chuck is
2. Compound Gear train used to hold square, octagonal, and irregular shaped
3. Epicylic Gear train work piece.
256. Why is carriage given on lathe? 260. Name the part of a lathe machine, that
(a) For holding workpiece provides the method of holding and moving the
(b) For holding tool end giving feed cutting tool.
(c) For holding dead centre (a) Bed (b) Head stock
(d) For reversing spindle speed (c) Carriage (d) Tail stock
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
Ans : (b) Lathe carriage is given in lathe machine for Ans : (c) Carriage is the part of lathe machine which
holding tool and giving feed. provide the method of holding and moving the cutting
When work piece is rotated by spindle axis. For thread tool.
cutting required feed and motion to tool is given by At the carriage tool is mounted when job is rotated by
carriage. The motion required to carriage is provided by spindle required feed and motion for cutting in provided
spindle with the help of feed mechanism and feed gear by carriage.
box.
261. Brown and sharp taper are used in :
257. Size of a Lathe is specified by which one of the (a) Lathe (b) Shaper
below? (c) Drills (d) Milling machine
(a) Taper cutting (b) Centre height DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
(c) Speed (d) Cutting depth
Ans : (d) Brown and sharp taper used in milling
machine. In brown and sharp system, Three index plate
Ans: (b) Specification of lathe machine is given by–
is used every plate has six holes.
1. height of the centre above the top of the bed.
0 - 150 – Light lathe 262. In a lathe machine operation, the feed rod is
150-300 – Medium lathe placed on :
> 300 – Heavy lathe (a) Compound slide in axial
2. The swing or maximum diameter of work that can be (b) Tail stock movement
rotated over the way of the bed. (c) Carriage in automatic turning
3. Max length of work that can be accommodated (d) Tool post arrangement
between the lathe centre. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
4. The maximum diameter of the work that can be Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
rotated over the lathe spindle. Ans : (c) In lathe machine operation the feed rods are
258. Follower rest mounted on the carriage for automatic turning.
(a) Follows the workpiece 263. On which of the following is the compound rest
(b) Follows the tool fitted?
(c) Fixed to the lathe bed (a) Tail stock (b) Tool post
(d) Fixed to the tail stock (c) Head stock (d) Cross slide
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
Ans : (d) Compound rest is fitted on cross slide. Ans : (a) A gap is placed in the bed lathe slightly below
Order of component head stock spindle nose.
• Tool post over compound rest So that, job of bigger diameter can be machined with
• Compound rest over cross slide the same lathe machine.
• Cross slide over saddle
• Saddle over bed ways
264. In a lathe center is made of :
(a) High carbon steel (b) Mild steel
(c) Stainless steel (d) Cast steel
(RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004)
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001) 269. Face plate is held/fastened–
Ans : (a) Lathe center of lathe machine is made of high (a) At the head stock spindle
carbon steel. (b) Tail stock
Lathe centre is generally may be 60º, 75º, and 90º. (c) Tool post
265. Which part of the lathe machine has high (d) Bed
compressive strength? (IOF Fitter, 2016)
(a) Bed Ans : (a) Face plate is a circular disc made of cast iron,
(b) Main spindle at the centre of face plate a threaded hole is made for
mounting it. Face plate is being mounted on main
(c) Lead screw
spindle of lathe machine.
(d) Sliding Gear of head stock
• Main spindle has a threaded part on front part of it. At
(IOF Fitter, 2015) the face plate slots and holes of different size and shape
Ans : (a) Bed of lathe machine has compressive are cut.
strength because of high compressive strength bed of 270. Which is known as self centric chuck?
lathe machine is able to absorb shock due to cutting (a) Four jaw chuck (b) Collet chuck
action bed of lathe machine is made of cast iron. (c) Magnetic chuck (d) Three jaw chuck
266. Which of the following is not a part of center DRDO Turner.2016
lathe? Ans : (d) Three jaw chuck is called self centering
(a) Saddle (b) Feed rod chuck. It is also called universal chuck.
(c) Arbor (d) Lead screw • Jaw of chuck, moved together by the key. In three jaw
chuck job is easily centered that's why it is called self
centering chuck.
Ans : (c) Some important part of centre lathe machine– 271. The size of three jaw chuck is specified by–
1. Head stock (a) Size of every jaw
2. Tail stock (b) Thickness of every jaw
3. Saddle (c) Diameter of body of chuck
4. Lead screw (d) Width of chuck body
5. Carriage VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
6. Tool post etc. Ans : (c) The size of the three jaw chuck is specified by
Note–Arbor is the part of milling machine, milling the diameter of body of chuck.
cutter is mounted on Arbor. • Three jaw chuck is also known as universal chuck.
267. The speed of horizontal feed, cross feed and • It is self centering chuck. All three chuck are
screw cutting is controlled in a lathe machine– concentric and work together.
(a) Head stock (b) Tail stock • There jaw chuck used to hold perfect round or regular
job.
(c) Cross slide (d) Apron
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 272. Which of the following part controls the length
of taper while taper is cut by compound slide
method?
Ans: (d) In Lathe machine horizontal feed, cross feed (a) Tail stock (b) Top slide
and screw cutting speed are controlled by apron. It is (c) Cross slide (d) Saddle
fitted below the carriage with the saddle for such type (IOF Fitter, 2014)
of motion levers provided in apron is used. Ans : (b) Top slide controls the length of the taper
268. Gap is placed in the bed lathe– while the taper is being cut by compound slide method.
(a) Slightly below the head spindle nose 273. The sliding surface of lathe bed is–
(b) Slightly below the tail stock spindle (a) Flame hardening (b) Case hardening
(c) In the middle of the bed (c) Normalization (d) Tempered
(d) Any where in bed (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 14.04.2002
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009)
Ans : (a) Sliding surface of lathe bed in being hardened Ans : (a) Pillar type tool post is fitted over upper part of
by flame hardening process. compound rest of light duty – lathe machine. Only one
• Lathe beds are made by cast iron that's why it's sliding tool at a time can be attached to it. Cutting tool is
surface can not hardened by case hardening or tempered tightened by bolt by placing it in the slot made in pillar
process. and rocker arm.
274. The back gear mechanism is cone pulley head 280. Scroll .............. and gear mechanism in which
stock is used– of the following it occurs?
(a) For decreasing spindle speed (a) Three jaw chuck (b) Four jaw chuck
(b) For increasing spindle speed (c) Magnetic chuck (d) Collet chuck
(c) For reversing spindle speed (IOF Fitter, 2016)
(d) For transferring power from spindle gear to Ans : (a) Three jaw chuck has three chuck so it is
stud gear called three jaw chuck. It's body is made of cast iron. It
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) is also called self centering chuck. There is
Ans : (a) The cone pulley is used for the back gear arrangement of scroll and gear mechanism to slide the
mechanism in head stock for decreasing the spindle all three jaw together with the help of key.
speed. Spiral threaded circular plate is called scroll plate.
• Spindle speed can be notable at different speed with
281. The lathe bed three main functions–
the help of cone pulley speed of rotation can change
(a) Job is mounted on it
according to number of step in cone pulley.
(b) Carriage slides over it
275. Which of the following is not a characteristic of (c) It bears good compressive load
tail stock? (d) Tail stock slides over it
(a) It holds the workpiece (e) All of above
(b) To hold drill and reamer (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(c) Dead centre is located in the spindle of tail Ans : (e) Lathe bed–It is made of cast iron.
stock
It bears the load of head stock, Tail stock, and
(d) It is used in taper turning through offset
compound slide, All cutting operation are done above it
method
some lathe are mentioned below–
DRDO Turner.2016 1. Flat bed
Ans : (a) Characteristic of tail stock– 2. V-Bed
• To hold drill and reamer 3. Combination bed
• Dead centre is located in the spindle of tail stock 4. Gap bed
• It is used in taper turning through offset method
Note–Tail stock is not used for holding the work piece.
Head stock is used to hold the work piece.
276. When using the taper turning attachment the
taper turning attachment is tied?
(a) Bed (b) Carriage
(c) Tail stock (d) Cross slide
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) 282. Tail stock offset is determined by–
Ans : (a) For taper turning with help of taper turning (a) Dial indication tool holder and dial
attachment. It is fallowed over the bed of lathe machine. micrometer
277. Work holding device for lathe machine (b) By the height gauge
(a) Four jaw chuck (b) Metric taper (c) By the steel rule, distance between dead
(c) Brown and sharp (d) Journo taper centre and bed ways
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (d) Micrometer, caliper or offset gauge
Ans: (a) "Four jaw chuck is used for holding irregular NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
shape and size workpiece." (RRB Malda ALP, 16.07.2006)
278. The fit center in the tail stock of the lathe (RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004)
machine which does not move along– Ans : (a) Tail stock offset is determined by the dial
(a) Live centre (b) Revolving centre indicator tool holder and dial micrometer.
(c) Dead centre (d) Pipe centre 283. Study rest is used to–
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) (a) To move the job
Ans : (c) Dead centre is a fit centre in tail stock in lathe (b) To hold the job
machine which does not move with workpiece. (c) To support the job
279. This type of tool post is replaced with a tool– (d) For zig-zag twisted job
(a) Pillar type tool post DRDO Turner. 2016
(b) Quick change tool post
(c) Indexing tool post Ans : (c) Steady rest is used to support the job during
(d) British type tool post the cutting action against the cutting tool.
DRDO Turner.2016 • Steady rest is fixed at a point.

284. Follower study is fitted– 291. The other end of the long cylindrical job is
(a) at Lathe carriage (b) Tail stock supported by which of the part of lathe?
(c) at head stock (d) at Lathe bed (a) Tail stock (b) Head stock
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 25.05.2003) (c) Carriage (d) Tool rest
Ans : (a) Follower steady rest is fitted over lathe (IOF Fitter, 2015)
carriage it travels along the carriage so that it can Ans : (a) The other end of the long cylindrical job is
support the job and cutting tool through out the supported by the tail stock of the lathe.
operation. 292. Tail stock is used in which operation?
It is used for long job and for finishing operation. (a) In turning (b) In taper turning
(c) In supporting (d) In Shaping
285. Tail stock offset is done during taper turning– (RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007)
(a) by off setting the base of tail stock.
Ans : (b) For taper turning, tail stock offset method is
(b) by off setting the spindle of tail stock.
used for that tail stock set over some distance.
(c) by off setting the upper body of tail stock
(d) by off setting the whole tail stock. 293. Which metal is used in lathe chuck?
(a) Cast iron (b) Carbon steel
(IOF Fitter, 2014) (c) Hard carbon steel (d) None of these
Ans : (b) The off setting of tail stock at the time of (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
taper turning is done by off setting the tail stock spindle. Ans : (b) Lathe chuck is work holding device scroll
286. Chasing dial is mounted on right end of the plate, bevel, pinion, jaws lathe chuck are made of alloy
(a) Tail stock (b) Apron steel and body of chuck is made of cast iron.
(c) Cross slide (d) None of these 294. What is the function of cone pulley in lathe
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005) machines?
Ans : (b) Chasing dial is mounted on right end of the (a) To hold the job
Apron. To cut the thread on lathe machine, the lathe (b) To change the job
machine spindle and lead screw must be in the same (c) To change the motion of job
relative position for every successive cut. (d) All of above
• Chasing dial indicates the time of engagement of split (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
nut. For accurate cutting of thread split nut and lead Ans : (c) Cone pulley is used to change the motion of
screw should be engage at a proper timing. job with the help cone pulley rotation of job can be
change as per requirement.
287. The tool for holding and turning the threading
die is known as 295. The machine on which turning, boring,
(a) Handle (b) Adjusting wrench threading etc. can be done is called–
(a) Threading machine (b) Lathe machine
(c) Stock (d) Drift
(c) Drilling machine (d) Boring machine
(IOF Fitter 2017) BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans : (c) The tool for holding and turning the threading (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
die is known as stock. Ans : (b) The Lathe machine turning, boring, threading,
288. Lathe centre are provided with the following drilling, boring can be done. The operator of lathe
standard taper : machine is called turner.
(a) Morse (b) British 296. Which of the following is a mechanism for
(c) Metric (d) Brown and sharp mechanized movements of the carriage along
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 longitudinal axis?
(a) Cross–slide (b) Compound rest
Ans : (a) Lathe centre are provided with the morse (c) Apron (d) Saddle
standard taper. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
289. Lathe spindle has got: (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(a) Internal thread (b) External thread Ans:(c) Apron is a mechanism for mechanized
(c) Taper thread (d) No thread movement of carriage along the longitudinal axis at the
carriage cutting tool is tightened.
Ans : (b) Lathe spindle has a external thread at a one side,
at which driving plate, chuck on face plate is tightened.
2. Lathe Cutting Tools and Angle
290. Rotary power of lead screw is transmitted to 297. An oversized hole will be produced in drilling,
the lathe carriage through if
(a) Gear (b) Rack and pinion (a) Feed rate is high
(c) Half–nut (d) Chain & sprocket (b) Cutting speed is low
(RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003) (c) Lips of drills are of unequal length
(IOF Fitter 2017) (d) Insufficient coolant is used
Ans : (c) Rotary power of lead screw is transmitted to BEML 2022
the lathe carriage through half-nut. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Ans. (c) : An over sized hole will be produced in 301. Which angle make rake angle in twist drill?
drilling, if lip of drills are of unequal length. (a) point table (b) lip clearance angle
Over sized holes :- Following reasons - (c) helix angle (d) chisel angle
1. The unequal length of cutting edges. HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
2. The unequal angle of the cutting edges.
Ans. (c) : Rake angle is also known as helix angle. The
3. The unequal thinning of the points.
angle between the leading edge of the land and the axis
4. The spindle running out of the center.
of the drills.
5. The drill point not being in the center.
Rough holes :- An rough hole will be produced in 302. Carbide tipped tool used for turning hard
drilling due to following reasons: - material is provided with
1. Feed rate is too high. (a) side rake angle (b) zero rake angle
2. Drill cutting edges are not sharp. (c) positive rake angle (d) negative rake angle
3. Cooling is ineffective HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
298. Tool chatter is caused by which of following Ans. (d) : Carbide tipped tool used for turning hard
(a) Smaller clearance angle material is provided with negative rake angle because
(b) High rake angle cutting force are always perpendicular to the cutting
(c) Excessive clearance angle face. Carbide is strong under compression but much
(d) Small rake angle weaker under tension. A negative cutting face directs
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 the cutting force to put the carbide under compression.
IOCL 2020
303. The point angle in general purpose drill bit is:
Ans. (c) : Excessive clearance angle is caused of tool
(a) 108 degree (b) 90 degree
chatter.
1. Side cutting edge angle (cs) too high. (c) 118 degree (d) 60 degree
2. Excessive clearance angle. NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
3. High nose radius Ans. (c) : The point angle in general purpose drill bit is
4. Cutting force high 118 degree.
299. Carbide tool is better than HSS tool because • The 118 degree bit cuts more aggressively and is
(a) It is more heat resistant generally used for drilling into soft material like wood.
(b) It has higher tool life • The clearance angle in cutting edge is kept 3º-8º.
(c) It can be used at higher cutting speed • Although it can puncture through steel, if used for
(d) All of the above this, the sleeper cutting angle also will cause it to dull
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 more quickly.
NTPC Fitter 2016 304. High carbon steels are machined using tools
Ans. (d) : Carbide tool is better than HSS tool because - having:
1. It is more heat resistant. (temperature = 900ºC – (a) Negative Rake angle
1000ºC)
(b) Small positive rake angle
2. Higher cutting speed (cutting speed = 150 – 200 (c) Large positive rake angle
m/min)
(d) Zero rake angle
3. Its tool life is higher than H.S.S.
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
4. It is mode by powder metallurgy.
H.S.S. Cutting tool : Ans. (a) : High carbon steels are machined using tools
1. It is known as 18:4:1 steel having negative rake angle.
18% = Tungeston, 4% = Chrumium, 1% = Vanadium • The lip angle of negative lathe angle is more that why
300. Oblique cutting is used in it requires more strength.
(a) Cast iron (b) Aluminium • For carbide tool tips the negative rake angle takes 5-
(c) High carbon steel (d) Mild steel 10º
Ans. (d) : Oblique cutting–Cutting edge is inclined at
an angle to cutting velocity.
• The chip flows on the tool face at an angle less than
90º with the normal of the cutting edge.
• Oblique cutting is used in mild steel.
• Example–Turning, drilling, milling etc.

305. Tool chatter is caused by which reason? 309. While thread cutting on a lathe by using single-
(a) Small clearance angle point tool, the moves in a path is called as-
(b) Excessive clearance angle (a) epicyloid (b) cycloid
(c) Small rake angle (c) rake (d) helix
(d) Excessive rake angle BDL Technician 2022
BHEL 2020 Ans. (d) : While thread cutting on a lathe by using
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 single-point tool, the moves in a path is called as helix.
Ans. (b) : Extremely large side cutting edge angles and • The angle between the perpendicular to the cutting the
excessive clearance angle may cause tool chatter. workpiece and the face of the tool is called the rake
• Cutting pressure is greatly affected by cutting tool angle.
angles especially rake angles. • Rake angle is also known as helix angle.
306. A pipe in centre of job, while facing operation • In lathe cutting tools, the value of rake angle is kept
on a lathe is due to .............. from 0º to 20º.
(a) Tool not being set on to the centre height 310. For setting of tools for threading, it is aligned
(b) Tools cutting edge being blunt with the work by using -
(c) Tools is not clamped rigidly (a) try square (b) centre gauge
(d) Using low rpm (c) thread plug gauge (d) template
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (a) : Facing is an operation of machining the end Ans. (b) : For setting of tools for threading, it is aligned
of a workpiece that perpendicular to the rotating axis. with the work by using centre gauge.
• Facing operation on lathe is due to tool not being set • The centre gauge is made by cutting various angles in
on the center heights. a 3 mm thick leaf of carbon steel.
• These angles are 60º, 55º and 47.5º
307. How many forces are acting during orthogonal
cutting and oblique cutting • Internal and external angles of 60º are made in middle
(a) 1, 2 (b) 2, 3 and the sides have angles of 55º and 47.5º.
(c) 2, 1 (d) 1, 1
Ans. (b) : Orthogonal cutting process is two
dimensional cutting in which the tool's cutting edge is
perpendicular to the direction of cutting speed. The chip
is formed due to shear deformation in the shear plane.
• The orthogonal cutting only two force cutting force
and shear force. 311. The tip of a cemented carbide tool is joined on
• Oblique cutting the cutting edge of the wood is the shank by -
inclined at a certain angle to the cutting vector velocity. (a) welding
It also called three-dimensional cutting process. (b) brazing
• Oblique cutting involve three force cutting force, (c) soldering
shear force and radial force. (d) clamping with a screw
308. Grade the following in terms of increasing BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
hardness of cutting tools. Ans. (b) : The tip of a cemented carbide tool is joined
(A) Diamond on the shank by brazing.
(B) Stellite • Cemented carbide tools are made by sintering carbon
(C) High speed steel mixtures with tungsten, titanium or tantalum.
(D) Cemented carbide • Special diamond wheels are used to sharpen these
(a) A, B, C, D (b) C, D, B, A tools.
(c) B, C, D, A (d) D, B, A, C • Their cutting speed is 4 to 6 times higher than high
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 steel.
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 312. Which one of the following materials for lathe
Ans. (c): Hardness is a measure of the resistance to cutting tool can be forged to any desired shape?
plastic deformation induced by either mechanical (a) High speed steel (b) High carbon steel
indentation or abrasion. (c) Stellite (d) Tungsten carbide
• Increasing hardness of cutting tool RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
Stellite → High speed steel → cemented carbide → Ans. (b) : The materials for lathe cutting tool can be
Diamond. forged to any desired shape is high carbon steel.
• It maintain its hardness at temperature from 200ºC to 316. Which among the following statements in
250ºC. respect of the lathe cutting tool is correct?
• High speed steel maintains its hardness even at 600ºC. (a) Red hotness temperature is higher for high
• High speed steel can be used at twice or three times of carbon steel tool than that of carbide tool
speed as high carbon steel. (b) The property of tool chipping off with
313. A brass shaft is to be turned to a surface vibration is more for cemented carbide tool
roughness Ra = 0.8, with high cutting speed. than that of HSS tools
Which one of the following cutting tool (c) Ceramic tool has more resistance to shock as
materials is most suitable ? compared to HSS tools
(a) High speed steel (b) high carbon steel (d) HSS tool can work at more spindle speed and
(c) Low alloy steel (d) Cemented carbide feed than cemented carbide tool
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
Ans. (d) : Cemented carbide is most suitable for turning Ans. (b) : The property of tool chipping off with
a brass shaft to a surface roughness 0.8 Ra with high vibration is more for cemented carbide tool than that of
cutting speed. high speed steel (HSS) tools.
• Cobalt is the binder in the cemented carbide tools. • High speed steel is the enhanced form of carbon steel.
• These tools are being developed to meet the • In addition to carbon, elements such as tungsten,
challenges for increasingly high speed. cobalt, vanadium and molybdenum are added to the
steel to make it more heat resistant.
• These tools cannot be used at low speeds.
• The tool made of cemented carbide wears out faster at • These elements increase its heat tolerance.
low speed. 317. In the parting off tool which angle will help the
314. A carbide tipped tool with blue marking is used tool to penetrate into the work without rubbing
on lathe. Which one of the following materials at the sides?
can be machined with this tool? (a) Top rake angle
(a) Brass (b) Steel (b) Front clearance angle
(c) Plastic (d) Grey cast iron (c) Side clearance angle
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 (d) Back clearance angle
Ans. (b) : Carbide tips are brazed into carbon steel
shanks before being used for cutting or machined. Ans. (d) : • Angle between the axis drawn in front of
• The materials can be machined with carbide tipped the cutting edge and the tool axis is called front
tool is steel. clearance angle.
• Ceramics tool are also used as a tip, it is used by • Angle between the side cutting edge of the tool with
holding the shank or brazed. the perpendicular to the tool axis drawn downwards on
the side cutting surface is called side clearance angle.
• Ceramic tools are very brittle for this reason they are
not used on rough surfaces or where the tool is pushed.
• Ceramic tools are used for finish machining.
315. Which one of the following angles of rough
turning tool, depends upon the feed rate
chosen?
(a) Top rake angle
(b) Side rake angle
(c) Front clearance angle
(d) Side clearance angle 318. Which one of the following angles in the lathe
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 tool helps for easy flow of chips?
Ans. (d) : Side clearance angle is a angle between side (a) Top rake angle
cutting edge of the tool with the perpendicular to the (b) Front clearance angle
tool axis drawn downwards on the side cutting surface. (c) Side clearance angle
• It is also made to keeps the cutting edge in contact (d) Back clearance angle
with the job while working. NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
• Side clearance angle depends upon the feed rate for Ans. (a): In the lathe tool, top rake angle helps for easy
rough turning tool. flow of chips. The angle between the perpendicular to
• Side clearance also increases as the feed rate increase. the cutting face of the workpiece and the face of the tool
• Front clearance angle is the angle between the axis is called rake angle.
drawn in front of the cutting edge and the tool axis. • There are three types of rake angle–
1. Positive rake angle–The nose of the tool face is Ans. (a) : The facing tool is used in turning.
tilted backward. • Facing is the process of leveling the ends of a job on a
2. Zero rake angle–There is no tilt in the back. lathe machines.
3. Negative rake angle–It is tilted towards the nose. • By this process, the ends of the job are made
perpendicular to its rotational axis.
• The longitudinal feed is not required during facing
operation.
• When the carriage is not locked while facing the face
becomes convex.
323. Lathe cutting tool is made of ___
(a) high speed steel (b) low carbon steel
(c) cast iron (d) none of the above
Ans. (a) : Lathe cutting tool is made of high speed steel.
319. Helix angle is found on which of the following ?
Lathe cutting tools–
(a) Feed rod of lathe
1. Single point cutting tool–This type of tool has only
(b) Threading tool
one cutting edge for single point action.
(c) Threaded workpiece
• Boring tool, turning tool, planning tool etc. are single
(d) Taper turning attachment
point cutting tools.
2. Multi point cutting tool–Some tools that have more
Ans. (c) : Helix angle is found on threaded workpiece. than one cutting point is known as multi point cutting
A helix angle is the angle between any helix and an tools.
axial line on its right.
• They are used for cutting process on a lathe machine
320. Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for like drill and reamer etc.
which of the following operation ?
324. Drill shank taper cutting is _____
(a) Boring (b) External threading
(a) Jarno taper
(c) Internal threading (d) All of the above
(b) brown and sharp taper
(c) morse taper
Ans. (d) : Inserted HSS (high speed steel) tool bits are (d) none of the above
more useful for boring, external threading an internal
threading. HSS tool bits can handle the high heat that is
generated during cutting and are not changed after Ans. (c) : Morse taper is the most commonly used taper.
cooling. • This taper is used in spindles of lathe and shank of the
• Boring tool bits are ground similar to left hand turning drill.
tool bits and thread cutting tool bits but with more • There are eight types of morse taper.
clearance angle. • Tapers from MT1 to MT4 are used for drill shranks,
321. The negative rake angle is generally provided reamers and centres.
on the tool made of - • This taper is 5/8 inch or about 3 degree a foot.
(a) High speed steel (b) Tool steel • Brown and sharp taper is used in arbor of the milling
(c) Tungsten carbide (d) high carbon steel machine.
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 325. What is the name of the part marked as 'A' in
Ans. (c) : The negative rake angle is generally provided the following figure ?
on the tool made of tungsten carbide.
• The tool rake is the negative rake is titled towards the
nose.
• Zero rake angle tool is for cutting of brass etc.
• Zero rake angle occurs on the tool when there is no tilt
in the back of the face of the tool.
• Positive rake angle on the tool is used for soft
material.
322. The facing tool is used in ____
(a) turning (b) knurling (a) Point angle (b) Clearance angle
(c) threading (d) "v' cutting (c) Rake angle (d) Cutting angle
Ans. (c) : The name of the part marked as 'A' in the • The angle form between cutting lip and chisel edge is
above figure is rake angle. known as chisel edge angle.
• The angle at which the cutting edges or lip of
standards drills are meeting is called point angle or
cutting angle.
328. The drilled hole is larger than the size of drill
used. The reason is....
(a) Too much feed
(b) Helix angle not accurate
(c) Lip clearance not accurate
(d) Unequal length of the cutting edges
Ans. (d) : The drilled hole is larger than the size of drill
where, used. The reason is unequal length of the cutting edges.
α → clearance angle Other reason of oversize hole in drilling–
β → point angle • Uneven angle of cutting edge.
• Point is thicker on one side and thinner of the other
γ → rake angle side.
δ → inclination angle • Point of drill or chisel angle is not in center.
326. Which one of the following formula is applied 329. A carbide tipped tool with the blue making is
to find the tail stock offset, when turning tapers used on a lathe. Which one of the following
by offset method? material can be machined with this tool?
D−d D−d (a) Brass (b) Steel
(a) (b) (c) Plastic (d) Grey cast iron
l 2l
D−d d−D
(c) ×L (d) Ans. (a) : A carbide tipped tool with the blue making is
2l 2l used on a lathe. Brass can be machined with this tool.
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 • High carbon steel maintain its hardness at
Ans. (c) : When turning tapers by offset method then temperatures from 200ºC to 250ºC.
D−d • Heat resistance of high carbon steel is low.
set over, S = ×L . • High carbon steel is used at speeds of 10 m/min to 20
2l
m/min.
Where,
330. A shaft of 50 mm has to be rough turned to
L → total length
∅ 42 mm in one pass. When will you check to
l → length of taper ensure the set depth of cut is correct?
D → large diameter (a) After the tool traveled the full length
d → small diameter. (b) After the tool traveled half way
• If the taper is given in ratio then set over can be (c) Just after the cut is taken at the tailstock end
determine by– (d) After the tool has traveled a distance more
T×L than the angular shoulder
S= RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
2
Ans. (d) : A shaft of 50 mm has to be rough turned to
T → taper
∅ 42 mm in one pass. After the tool has traveled a
L → length of job distance more than the angular shoulder, it is ensure the
• Tail stock offset method is used to give only external set depth of cut is correct.
taper in large length. 331. A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread
327. Which angle makes rake angle in a twist drill? roughing tool. Which one of the following is the
(a) Chisel angle (b) Point angle correct procedure for aligning the finishing tool
(c) Helix angle (d) Lip clearance angle with the thread groove?
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 (a) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned
in the groove by compound slide and cross
Ans. (c): In a twist drill, the helix angle is also known slides
as rake angle. (b) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned
• The angle between the flutes and the axis of the drill is in the groove by carriage hand wheel and
called the helix angle. cross slide hand wheel
(c) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool External threading–

positioned in the groove by compound slide • In case of external threads, major diameter is the
and cross slide diameter of the workpiece on which the threads are cut.
(d) Work revolving half nut engaged, tool • The minor diameter is the smallest diameter after
positioned in the groove by carriage and cross cutting the full thread.
slide hand wheels Internal threading–
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 • In the case of internal threads, the major diameter is
the largest diameter after the threads are cut.
Ans. (c) : A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread
• The minor diameter is the diameter of the hole drilled
roughing tool. Correct procedure for aligning the
or forming the thread.
finishing tool with the thread groove is work revolving,
half nut engaged, tool positioned in the groove by 335. A workpiece is chamfered to remove burrs. It
compound slide and cross slide. is observed that the chamfer width is not
uniform through the periphery of chamfer on a
• While cutting the thread, the half nut engages itself
workpiece. Which one of the following is the
from the beginning when any mark of the dial comes in cause for this defect?
line with the zero line. (a) The angle of chamfering is not correct
332. Which one of the following is a remedial (b) The chamfering tool not set square to the
measure to prevent the tool cutting edge work axis
chipping off? (c) The work face not running true
(a) Increase feed rate (d) The overhang of the tool is too much
(b) Reduce cutting speed RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
(c) Decrease nose radius Ans. (c) : This defect is due to work face not running
(d) Use negative top rake true.
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 • The process in which the bevel edge is made by the
Ans. (d) : Negative top rake is used to prevent the tool cutting tool to a certain distance at the outer ends or
cutting edge chipping off. ends of the hole diameter is called chamfering.
• Negative rake angle is used on cemented carbide and • Chamfering has the following objectives–
tip tools from which large amounts of turning can be 1. To prevent the winged edge forming on the threaded
performed. job.
2. To alignment of shaft and hole.
• The back tilt of face of the tool cutting point is called
top angle. 3. To provide good appearance to the job.
4. To remove the burrs from the edges of the job to
• The side tiltness of the face of the cutting point is
make the job firmly holdable.
called side rake.
336. By which one of the following, a multistate
333. While thread cutting on a lathe by using single- thread is cut on a lathe?
point tool, the tool moves in a path called as (a) By a chaser (b) By a die head
(a) Epicycle (b) Cycloid (c) By a single-point tool (d) By a split die
(c) Rake (d) Helix RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (c) : The carriage is used for thread cutting on the
Ans. (d) : While thread cutting on a lathe by using lathe machine by a single point cutting tool.
single-point tool, the tool moves in a path called as • Both internal and external threads are cut by single
helix. point cutting tool on the lathe.
• While threading cutting the tool moves in a helical • A multistate thread is cut on a lathe by a single point
path. tool.
• In external threading, the minor diameter is the • Only external threads can be cut by chaser.
smallest diameter after cutting the full thread. 337. Which one of the following operations is NOT
• In internal threading, the minor diameter is the done on a workpiece held in-between centres?
diameter of the hold drilled for forming the thread. (a) Knurling
334. Which one of the following diameters of the (b) Undercutting by plunging
workpiece should be turned before cutting (c) Thread cutting
external threads? (d) Parting off
(a) Major diameter (b) Core diameter RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Head diameter Ans. (d) : Parting off is not done on a workpiece held
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 in-between centres.
Ans. (a) : Major diameter of the workpiece should be • Parting off is a process performed on a lathe, whereby
turned before cutting external threads. a tool will pierce and cut off a given length of a job.

• In this process the tool is set in such a way that its (c) When turning bigger diameter job, the rpm is
edge is at the height of the rotational axis. proportionally increased
• The process of cutting the groove inside a hole is (d) When turning smaller diameter job, the rpm is
called undercutting. proportional decreased
338. Power feed is not possible in compound slide RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
method of tapper turning. Which one of the Ans. (a) : During turning, after giving one depth of cut,
following defects can be noticeable on the the diameter is reduced equal to double the depth.
tapered workpiece due to the above reason? • Carbide tipped tool cannot withstand shock load.
(a) Chatter • When turning bigger diameter job, the rpm is
(b) Poor surface finish proportionally decreased.
(c) Taper angle more than set • When turning smaller diameter job, the rpm is
(d) Taper angle less than set proportionally increased.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 341. Which one of the following types of chips is
Ans. (b) : In compound slide method of taper turning, found while turning cast iron?
power feed cannot be used, feed can be given only by (a) Long curly chips (b) Segmental chips
hand due to the poor surface finish. (c) i-shaped chips (d) Spiral chips
• Both external and internal tapers can be made by RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
compound slide taper turning method. Ans. (b) : Types of chips in metal cutting–
• It is possible to turn at a greater taper angle. 1. Continuous chips
• The thread cannot be cut on the tapped part. 2. Discontinuous or segmented chips
339. A bronze split bearing as shown if Fig, is to be 3. Continuous chips with built up edges.
finish machined on a centre lathe, from a 1. Continuous chips–
bronze casting pot. The splitting of the bush • It is formed during the machining of ductile material
into two halves is done (mild steel, aluminium and copper) with high speed.
• The size of the chips is small.
• The rake angle of the tool is may be high.
2. Discontinuous or segmented chips–
• It is formed in a small segment or with breakage
during cutting.
• It is formed by using brittle material (cast iron, brass,
(a) before beginning to rough turn and bore the bronze) low cutting speed and small rake angle.
pot
3. Continuous chips with built up edges–
(b) after rough oversize turning the collar and the
• By using the ductile material.
step without boring
• Due to smaller rake angle of tool.
(c) after rough oversize turning the collar and the
step and rough boring • The cutting speed of the tool is low.
(d) after completely finish turning the collar and 342. While step turning, it is preferred to turn first
step and finish boring (a) small diameter step
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (b) large diameter step
Ans. (c) : The splitting of the bush into two halves is (c) either 'a' or 'b'
done on a center lathe after rough oversize turning the (d) neither 'a' or 'b'
collar and the step and rough boring. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
• The diameter of the workpiece obtained by plain Ans. (b) : While step turning, it is preferred to turn first
turning remains same throughout its length. large diameter step.
• During rough turning, the job diameter is kept slightly • To make shaft on a lathe machine, many steps have to
more than the finish size. be made in different sizes.
• In rough turning the cutting speed is kept low and the • For this, firstly turning the entire length into the
depth of cut and feed are kept high. largest diameter and after this, the metal is separated by
340. Which among the following statements is turning the excess metal to make a smaller size.
correct? 343. As the diameter of the workpiece decreases, the
(a) During turning, after giving one depth of cut, spindle speed (for the same cutting speed)
the diameter is reduced equal to double the (a) increases (b) decreases
depth (c) remains the same (d) none of the above
(b) Carbide tipped tool can withstand shock load RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
Ans. (a) : As the diameter of the workpiece decreases, (a) Incorrect selection of change gears
the spindle speed (rpm) for the same cutting speed (b) Lead screw worn out
increases. (c) Half nut worn out
πDN m (d) Any one of the above
V= RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
1000 min
Ans. (d) : The cause for incorrect pitch of thread during
1 thread cutting with single point tool is–
⇒ D∝
N 1. Incorrect selection of change gears
where, 2. Lead screw worn out
V = cutting speed (m/min) 3. Half nut worn out
D = diameter of workpiece (mm) 347. Which one of the following is the reason for
N = rpm torn threads while thread cutting on lathe?
Hence, the diameter (D) of the workpiece decreases, the (a) Blunt tool
spindle speed or rpm increases for same cutting speed. (b) Heavy depth of cut
(c) Insufficient side clearance
344. The difference in measurement between the
(d) Any one of the above
machined and un-machined diameter is equal
to the
Ans. (d) : The reason for torn threads while thread
(a) depth to the (b) 1/2 × depth of cut
cutting on lathe is–
(c) 2×depth of cut (d) none of the above 1. Blunt tool
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 2. Heavy depth of cut
Ans. (c) : 3. Insufficient side clearance.
348. For setting of tool for threading, it is aligned
with the work by using
(a) try square (b) centre gauge
(c) thread gauge (d) template
Ans. (b) : For setting of tool for threading, it is aligned
D−d with the work by using centre gauge.
t=
2 • Centre gauge measures an included angle on tool bits
D – d = 2t that are used to cut threads.
Where, • Centre gauge also known as fishtail gauge.
• When the tool bits has been ground to correct angle,
D = unmachined diameter
then they are used to set the tool perpendicular to the
d = machined diameter workpiece.
t = depth of cut 349. Which among the following statement in
345. Centre drilling should be done at respect of threads/thread cutting is NOT
(a) higher rpm with a slower feed correct?
(b) higher rpm with a higher feed (a) Threading tool are checked for accuracy for
(c) slower rpm with a higher feed the 60º angle by using a centre gauge
(d) slower rpm with a slower feed (b) M 10 × 1.25 is a fine pitch thread
(c) M 10 is a course pitch thread
(d) Same tool is used for cutting external and
Ans. (a) : On the lathe machine, when a long shaft has internal threads
to be supported a the dead center, a special structure is RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
made on its face. Ans. (d) : • M 10 × 1.25 is a fine pitch thread.
• Center drilling consists of drilling and counter sinking • M 10 is a course pitch thread.
at once, hence it is also called combination drilling. • Threading tool are checked for accuracy for the 60º
• Center drilling should be done at higher rpm with a angle by using a centre gauge.
slower feed. 350. While cutting internal threads on lathe with
• When the feed given by the centre drill is high then a single point tool, the spindle speed should be
plain hole formed by the dead center at the surface (a) less than that for the plain turning operations
inaccurate surface of the job is obtained. (b) more than that for the plain turning operations
346. Which among the following is the cause for (c) equal to that for plain turning operations
incorrect pitch of thread during thread cutting (d) None of the above
with single point tool? RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
Ans. (a) : While cutting internal threads on lathe with Ans. (b) : High carbon steel for lathe cutting tools can
single point tool, the spindle speed should be less than be forged to any desired shape.
that for the plain turning operations. • High carbon steel is used in the manufacture of cutting
• The carriage is used for thread cutting on the lathe tools and machining soft materials.
machine by a single point cutting tool. • It maintains its hardness at temperature from 200ºC to
• In this method, thread is formed according to the 250ºC.
shape of the tool. • Stellite is a non-ferrous alloy, made from a mixture of
351. Which one of the following statements in cobalt, tungsten and chrominum.
respect of thread cutting is NOT correct? 354. When rough turning a work piece with a
(a) Inserted tool bits are more advantageous carbide tool long curly chips are formed.
while cutting internal threads Which one of the following is the right way of
(b) Before cutting internal threads, the hole getting rid of this kind of chip?
should be chamfered (a) Stop the power feed at intervals so that the
(c) When internal threads cutting is done in a chip breaks
blind, hole , a recess should be provided (b) Change the rake angle
(d) When cutting internal threads, the core (c) Provide chip breaker on the tool
diameter may be equal to the size of external (d) Use a metal hook and pull away the chips
threads RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
Ans. (c) : A continuous type of chip (long curly chips)
Ans. (d) : • Inserted tool bits are more advantageous is quite troublesome, they should be broken into small
while cutting internal threads. pieces for the cause of handling and to prevent it from
• Before cutting internal threads, the hole should be becoming a work hazard.
chamfered. • Chip breaker is used to reduce the swarf into small
• When internal threads cutting is done in a blind, hole, pieces.
a recess should be provided. • Long curly chips interfere with the cutting operation
• When cutting internal threads, the core diameter may and can damage the surface of the finished part.
be equal to minor diameter.
355. Which one of the following statements is true
352. Which among the following in respect of thread with reference to the tool life?
cutting is NOT correct? (a) Time between starting and finishing a job
(a) The threads can be cut on a lathe by using
(b) Total time for turning work including
simple gear train arrangement only
regrinds
(b) The 127 teeth gear is used as driven gear for
(c) Time between two successive regrinds
cutting metric threads on a lathe having lead
screw in TPI (d) Time between starting of metal cutting and
tool wear out
(c) The 63 teeth gear is used as a driver for
cutting British threads on a lathe having RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
metric lead screw Ans. (c) : Tool life is defined as the time period
(d) The teeth of the driver and driven are based between two successive grinding of tool.
on the pitch of thread to be cut and the pitch • It is the period of time in which the tool cuts
of thread on lead screw effectively and efficiently.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 • Tool life most commonly expressed in minute.
Ans. (a) : The threads can be cut on a lathe by using • Expected tool life of some tool material–
simple gear train arrangement and compound gear train Cast tool steel - 120 minute
arrangement both. High speed steel - 60-120 minute
• The 127 teeth gear is used as driven gear for cutting Cemented carbide tool - 420 to 480 minute.
metric threads on a lathe having lead screw in TPI. 356. Hand chasers are used for
• The 63 teeth gear is used as a driver for cutting British (a) Quick production of threads
threads on a lathe having metric lead screw.
(b) Cutting threads on soft metal directly
• The teeth of the driver and driven are based on the
pitch of thread to be cut and the pitch of thread on lead (c) Rectifying threads cut on steel rods which are
screw. distorted
(d) Rectifying crest and root of threads formed by
353. Which one of the following materials for lathe
single point tool
cutting tools can be forged to any desired
shape? RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(a) High speed steel (b) High carbon steel Ans. (c) : Hand chasers are used for rectifying threads
(c) Stellite (d) Tungsten carbide cut on steel rods which are distorted.
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 • Thread chasers are used to form or cut screw threads.

• Only external threads can be cut by chaser. 360. A tool, which is used to enlarge a previously
• One set of chasers can be used to thread different drilled hole is known as
diameter of the same pitch. (a) Facing tool (b) Turning tool
357. The included angle of the countersinking (c) Form tool (d) Boring tool
portion of a centre drill of type 'B' used for RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
protecting the centre hole is Ans. (d) : A tool, which is used to enlarge a previously
(a) 75° (b) 90° drilled hole is known as boring tool.
(c) 100° (d) 120° Type of boring machine–
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 1. Table type boring machine
Ans. (d) : The included angle of the countersinking 2. Floor type boring machine
portion of a centre drill of type 'B' used for protecting 3. Precision boring machine
the centre hole is 120°. 4. Multiple head type boring machine
• Center drill consist of a pilot drill and a countersink. 5. Standard vertical boring machine
• A centre drill is used for drilling a hole on the axis of a 6. Vertical turret lathe boring machine
shaft to hold it between centers. 7. Vertical milling machine type boring machine.
358. Which one of the following is used only for • The floor type boring machine having no table.
finishing and maintaining correct form of 361. What effective change will occur to the tool
thread? geometry if the cutting tool is set below the
(a) Tap (b) Threading chaser centre height on lathe?
(c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped tool (a) Front clearance angle increases
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 (b) Front clearance angle decreases
Ans. (c) : Threading chaser is used only for finishing (c) Front clearance angle remains the same
and maintaining correct form of thread. (d) Front clearance angle becomes zero
• A chaser just reforms the thread and clean out RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
anything that should not be there. Ans. (a) : If the cutting tool is set below the centre
• There are two types of thread chaser– height on lathe, front clearance angle increases.
1. Hand chaser • The slope between the axis drawn in front of the
2. Tool chaser cutting edge and tool axis is known as front clearance
• Hand chasers are generally used for finishing the angle.
damage threads for increasing the depth of threads. • This slope is from the top of the tool towards its
• Hand chasers have two teeth, one is cutting teeth and bottom.
other is sizing teeth. • If the clearance is increased, it reduces the cut edge
359. The chip breaker on a lathe tool is essential
when
(a) Turning soft material
(b) Turning ductile materials and to break the
chips
(c) Turning cast iron
(d) Turning hardened materials
Ans. (b) : The chip breaker on a lathe tool is essential
when turning ductile materials and to break the chips. 362. Name the angle marked 'A' in the lathe cutting
tool shown in the fig.
(a) Front clearance angle

• Chip breakers are parallel to the cutting edge to break (b) Side rake angle
the continuity of the chips. (c) Front rake angle
• Long chips interfere with the cutting operation and can (d) Side clearance angle
damage the surface of the finished part. RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
Ans. (b) : The angle marked 'A' in the lathe cutting tool (c) Ceramic tool has more resistance to shock as
shown in the figure is side rake angle. compared to HSS tool
• There are two types of rake angle– (d) HSS tool can work at more spindle speed and
1. Top rake angle–The back tilt of the face of the tool feed than cemented carbide tool
cutting point is called top rake angle. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
2. Side rake angle–The side tiltness of the face of the Ans. (b) : Correct statements in respect of the lathe
cutting point is called side rake angle. cutting tools–
363. Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for the • Red hotness temperature is higher for carbide tool than
operation that of higher carbon steel tool.
(a) Boring (b) External threading • The property of tool chipping off with vibration is
(c) Internal threading (d) All the above more for cemented carbide tools than that of HSS tool.
RRB ALP Patna 2014 • HSS tool has more resistance to shock as compared to
Ans. (d) : Inserted HSS (High speed steel) tool bits are ceramic tool.
more useful for the operation boring, external threading • Cemented carbide tool can work at more spindle speed
and internal threading. (rpm) and feed than high speed steel tool.
• Heat resistance of high carbon steel is low. 367. Which among the following statements in
• High steel tool is used at speeds of 10 m/min to 20 respect of chip breakers is correct?
m/min. (a) Chip breakers are essential for breaking the
364. Which one of the following materials is used for long continuous chips into small pieces
manufacturing centre drills? (b) Chip breakers are necessary to break the chips
(a) Cast steel (b) Mild steel to protect the finished work surfaces
(c) High speed steel (d) Cast iron (c) Chip breakers are provided to curl and break
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 the chips
Ans. (c) : High speed steel is used for manufacturing (d) all the above
centre drills. RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
• In addition to carbon, tungsten, cobalt, vanadium and Ans. (d) : Correct statements in respect of chip
molybdenum are added to the steel to make it more heat
breakers–
resistance.
• Chip breakers are essential for breaking the long
• This steel maintains its hardness even at 600ºC.
continuous chips into small pieces.
• High speed steel can be used at twice or three times of
speed as high carbon steel. • Chip breakers are necessary to break the chips to
protect the finished work surfaces.
365. Which among the following statements in
• Chip breakers are provided to curl and break the chips.
respect of chasers is correct?
(a) Chaser is a single point cutting tool 368. Helix angle is found on
(b) Cutting threads by a chaser is slower process (a) Feel rod of lathe
than that by a single point tool (b) Threading tool
(c) Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish (c) Threaded work piece
(d) The same chaser can be used for cutting any (d) Taper turning attachment
pitch of thread irrespective of the type of RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
chaser used Ans. (c) : Helix angle is found on threaded workpiece.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 Helix angle–The angle made by helix of thread
Ans. (c): Correct statements in respect of chasers– perpendicular to the axis of pitch diameter is called
• Chaser is a multipoint cutting tool. helix angle.
• Cutting threads by a chaser is faster process than that Lead of thread
by a single point tool. tan φ =
Circumference of pitch diameter
• Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish.
Where, φ = helix angle
• The same chaser cannot be used for cutting any pitch
of thread irrespective of the type of chaser used. Lead = Pitch × Numbers of starts
366. Which among the following statements in 369. Which one of the following factors will NOT
respect of the lathe cutting tools is correct? influence the selection of the cutting speed?
(a) Red hotness temperature is higher for high (a) Diameter of the work piece
carbon steel tool than that of carbide tool (b) Work piece material
(b) The property of tool chipping off with (c) Tool material
vibration is more for cemented carbide tools (d) Operation to be performed
than that of HSS tool RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
Ans. (a) : Factors affecting the cutting speed of the 373. A traveling steady is fixed at the saddle of a
tool– lathe. What is the function of this steady rest?
1. Tool material (a) To prevent bending of long shafts due to
2. Workpiece material cutting force.
3. Operation to be performed (b) To avoid load on the lathe centres while
4. Tool life turning long shafts.
5. The shape of the tool (c) To reduce the load on the cutting tool while
6. Use of coolant turning.
• Diameter of the workpiece will not influence the (d) To ensure to turn at higher cutting speeds
selection of the cutting speed. than recommended.
370. Which one of the following angles of rough RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
turning tool, depends upon the feed rate Ans. (a) : The function of steady rest is to prevent
chosen? bending of long shafts due to cutting force.
(a) Top rake angle • Steady rest fixed at the same place on the lathe bed
(b) Side rake angle provides the base to the job.
(c) Front clearance angle • Its three jaws are adjusted with the help of screws
(d) Side clearance angle according to the task.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 • Follower rest is applied on the saddle of the lathe's
Ans. (d) : Side clearance angles of rough turning tool, carriage. It moves along the carriage.
depends upon the feed rate chosen. 374. Tool maker's buttons are used for
Side clearance angle is a angle between side cutting (a) Aligning the work piece for boring to a given
edge of the tool with the perpendicular to the tool axis datum
drawn downwards on the side cutting surface. (b) Setting the tool at correct centre height
• Side clearance also increases as the feed rate increase. (c) Adjusting the slackness in the guideways of
371. The size of the centre drill is selected on the cross-slide
basis of the (d) Holding the work piece firmly
(a) Length of the work piece RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
(b) Material of the work piece Ans. (a) : Tool maker's buttons are used for aligning the
(c) Diameter of the work piece work piece for boring to a given datum.
(d) Operation to be performed on the work piece • Tool maker's buttons are useful in situations where it
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 is not easy to find the datum on the machine tool and
Ans. (c) : Centre drill is used for drilling a conical need the hole or detail to be accurately placed.
shape on the both ends of a job or workpiece at lathe • They can be used also as a reference position when
machine or the milling machine. milling pockets.
• The size of the centre drill is selected on the basis of 375. An angular work piece is to be faced. It should
the diameter of the workpiece. be mounted
• It can do drilling and counter sinking at one time. (a) In a three-jaw chuck (b) In a collet
• It is also known as combination drill. (c) Between centres (d) On a face plate
372. Taps are surface treated to RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
(a) Improve the appearance Ans. (d): An angular work piece is to be faced. It
(b) Improve the wear resistance property should be mounted on a face plate.
(c) Prevent them from getting corroded • The face plate is a circular plate made of cast iron.
(d) Be used only on automatic threading • Its center has thread similar to the threads cut on the
machines lathe spindle.
• It has rectangular and 'T' shape slots to hold the job on
the face.
Ans. (b) : Taps are surface treated to improve the wear
376. Which taper is used on spindle nose of the lathe
resistance property. Tap is a type of hand cutting tool,
headstock?
which is used to make threads in cylindrical holes.
(a) Jarno taper
• A tap always operates on the same axis of center line
(b) Brown and sharpe taper
of the hole.
(c) Pin taper
• Tang of hand tap is square in shape.
(d) Morse taper
• The upper parts of thread is known as land.
Ans. (d) : Morse taper is used on spindle nose of the Ans. (d) : Taper pins–
lathe headstock. Morse taper is the most commonly • Their diameter decreases from one end to the other
used taper.
end.
• There are eight types of taper. It is often represented
by MT. • Its large end is called head and small end is called
• Tapers from MT1 to MT4 are used for drill shanks point.
reamers and centres. • These pins are used in where the machine parts need
• This taper is 5/8 inch or about 3 degrees a foot. to be opened and assembled repeatedly.
• Jarno taper is used in dyeing machines.
• All taper pins are made in a 1:50 taper ratio.
377. The capacity of a lathe is expressed as
(a) Horsepower and chuck diameter 381. Taper angle for tilting compound slide method
(b) Swing and distance between centres is calculated by ____
(c) Bed length and spindle speed (a) sin θ = D – d/2l (b) cos θ = D – d/2l
(d) Tool post size and lathe travel (c) tan θ = D – d/2l (d) All of these
Ans. (b) : The capacity of a lathe is expressed as swing
and distance between centres. Ans. (c) : If the diameter of both ends are 'D' and 'd' the
Lathe specification– setting angle α can be calculated by taking the value of
1. Length of bed tan α from this formula–
2. Maximum distance between the two centers. D−d
3. Height of center over the bed. tan α =
2l
4. Maximum swing over the bed.
5. Maximum swing over carriage  D−d 
⇒ α = tan   radian
6. Diameter of spindle hole.  2l 
378. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to D−d
give depth of cut? α=  × 57 degree
(a) Compound slide (b) Top slide  2l 
(c) By adjusting the tool (d) Cross slide 382. To set an angle using sine bar the height of the
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 slip gauges and the length of the sine bar which
Ans. (d) : Cross slide on a lathe is used to give depth of forms the ratio of _____
cut. (a) cosθ (b) sinθ
• The compound rest and tool post are fitted above cross
slide. (c) tanθ (d) cotθ
• The handle fitted in the cross feed screw is used to RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
drive the cross slide by hand. Ans. (b) : The principle of the sine bar is based on the
• A spindle is attached to its spindle to provide
trigonometrical function.
automatic feed by power.
• Facing work is done by giving the tool a vertical feed Height of gauge block
sin θ =
to the spindle axis. Length of sine bar
379. The relief angle given behind the cutting lips is
A
called sin θ =
(a) Lip clearance angle (b) Helix angle C
(c) Rake angle (d) Chisel edge angle
Ans. (a) : The relief angle given behind the cutting lips
is called lip clearance angle.
• The angle between the face of the cutting point and the
flank is called the lip angle.
• If the clearance angle is too much, the cutting edges
will be weak and it is too small, the drill will not cut.
• The lip clearance angle is to prevent the friction of the
tool behind the cutting edge.
383. The type of thread on lead screw of lathe _____
380. The standard taper of pin is_______.
(a) Square (b) Acme
(a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 30
(c) 1 : 40 (d) 1 : 50 (c) Whitworth (d) Buttress

Ans. (b) : The threads used in lead screw of lathe is

acme. A lead screw is sometimes used with split nut
(also called half nut) which allows the nut to be
disengaged from the threads and moved axially.
• The lead screw is used for thread cutting.
• It is driven from the headstock through the feed
gearbox and moves the carriage in a longitudinal
direction against the workpiece.
384. The centre drill is also known as _____
(a) Cutting tool (b) Facing tool
(c) Continuation drill bit (d) Tool head
Ans. (c) : The centre drill is also known as continuation
drill bit. 387. The point angle of drill, for drilling stainless
steel, is –
• A centre drill is used for drilling a hole on the axis of
(a) 90° (b) 118°
a shaft to hold it between centres. It was also used to
(c) 135° (d) 150°
drill centre holes on machining centre.
385. The lip angle of a single point tool is usually–
Ans. (c) : The angle at which the cutting edges or lip of
(a) 40° to 60° (b) 20° to 40° standard drills are meet is called point angle.
(c) None of these (d) 60° to 80° Point angle for different metals–
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 Mild steel, cast iron - 118º
Ans. (d) : The angle between the face and the flank of Stainless steel - 135º
the single point cutting tool is known as lip angle. Copper and its alloy - 100º
Backelite, plastic - 80º
388. In a center lathe, the cutting tool is feed in
............... with reference to the lathe axis.
(a) Cross direction only
(b) Longitudinal direction only
(c) Both (a) and (b)
• Lip angle depend on the rake and clearance angle (d) Any direction
provided on the tool. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
• A larger lip angle permits machining of harder metals. Ans. (c) : The feed is the distance in the direction of the
The lip angle of a single point tool is usually 60º-80º. cut on the lathe is completed by the cutting tool at a
386. Crater wear occurs mainly on the – complete circle of the job.
Types of feed–
(a) Cutting edge only
1. Longitudinal feed–The tool moves in a direction
(b) Face of the cutting tool at a short distance
parallel to the rotational axis of the job.
from the cutting edge only
2. Cross feed–The tool moves in a direction
(c) Nose part, front relief face and side relief face perpendicular to the rotation axis of the job.
of the cutting tool 3. Angular feed–The tool moves at a certain angle from
(d) Front face only the rotation axis of job.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 389. Ceramic cutting tools are –
Ans. (b): Crater wear occurs mainly on the face of the (a) Made by cold pressing of aluminium oxide
cutting tool at a short distance from the cutting edge powder
only. (b) Available in the form of tips
• Crater wear, the temperature is the main culprit and (c) Brittle and have low bending strength
tool diffuses into the chip material. (d) All of these
• Temperature is maximum at some distance from the RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
tool tip, so crater wear starts at some distance from the Ans. (d) : Ceramic cutting tools are made by cold
tool tip. pressing of aluminium oxide powder.

• It is available in the form of tips. Ans. (a) : Advantage of taper turning attachment–
• It is very brittle and have low bending strength. • It is suitable for both external and internal threads.
• They are not used on rough surfaces or where the tool • Accurate tapers in single setting are obtained.
is pushed. • Its setting is very easy and can be performed quickly.
• These tools maintain their hardness up to 1200ºC. • Too much skill is not needed for the operator.
390. For machining hard material, the rake angle of • It can be tapped to its full length.
the single point cutting tool for a Lathe • Duplicate tapers can be obtained by this.
machine is : 394. The specific operation of half centre is:
(a) Zero rake angle (a) Thread cutting (b) Drilling
(b) Positive rake angle (c) Reaming (d) Facing
(c) Negative rake angle MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
(d) All of these RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 Ans. (d) : Half centre is used while facing the job
Ans. (c) : For machining hard material, the rake angle without disturbing the setting as per the classification of
of the single point cutting tool for a Lathe machine is the lathe centres.
negative. • Though it is termed as half centre, little less than half
• Negative rake angle is used on cemented carbide tools is relieved at the tip portion.
or harder materials. • The point of the half centre is flat. So that the tool can
reach more close to the centre.
• A positive rake angle is used for cutting shaft and
ductile material. 395. Live centres will move along with:
• A zero rake angle is used for machining brass. (a) Head stock (b) Tail stock
(c) Carriage (d) Cross slide
391. For machining ductile material, the rake angle
of the single point cutting tool for a Lathe RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
machine is : Ans. (a) : A centre is place in the taper hole of the
(a) Positive rake angle (b) Zero rake angle spindle of the lathe machine. This centre rotates with
the spindle and job of the lathe, so it is called live
(c) Negative rake angle (d) All of these
centre.
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 • Live centres will move along with head stock.
Ans. (a) : For machining ductile material, the rake • Dead centre is mostly stationary. It is made more
angle of the single point cutting tool for a Lathe rigid.
machine is positive.
396. Goose neck to is used for:
• Rake angle is an important parameter for the surface (a) Rough cutting
finish of the product.
(b) Intermediate cutting
• Rake angle decides the cutting forces and power (c) Very good finishing
needed for cutting a soft and a hard material.
(d) Drilling
399. The narrow flat surface limited between the RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
cutting edge and the heel is called:
Ans. (c) : Goose neck to is used for very good finishing.
(a) Heel (b) Land
397. Which one of the following standard tapers is
(c) Recess (d) Body
self-holding type?
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (a) Morse taper
Ans. (b) : The narrow flat surface limited between the (b) Brown and Sharpe taper
cutting edge and the heel is called land. (c) Jarno taper
• The back of cutting edge is called the heel. (d) Metric taper
• The width between two flutes on a line of axis is RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
called web.
Ans. (a): 1. Morse taper–
• Body clearance is a part of body, which reduces the • It is the most commonly used taper.
friction between drill and hole being drilled.
• It is self-holding type taper.
393. Which one of the following is not an advantage • It is used in spindles of lathe centre and in the shank of
of using taper attachment during taper drill.
turning? 2. Brown and sharp taper–
(a) It is suitable for only external threads • It is used in the spindle and arbor of the milling
(b) Accurate tapers in single setting are obtained machine.
(c) Its setting is very easy and can be performed • There are 18 types of brown and sharp tapers.
quickly 3. Metric taper–
(d) Too much skill is not needed for the operator • It is applied to the outside surface of the spindle of the
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 lathe.

398. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to Ans. (c) : A return signal the confirms the position of
give depth of cut ? tool or workpiece is called feedback.
(a) Compound slide 402. To rake of a single point cutting tool is to–
(b) Top slide (a) Avoid rubbing of tool with the work
(c) By adjusting the tool (b) Allow the chip to flow freely
(d) Cross slide (c) Increase the heat generation
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (d) Avoid chip to flow
Ans. (d) : Cross slide on a lathe is used to give depth of RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
cut. Ans. (b) : To rake of a single point cutting tool is to
• Compound rest and tool post are fitted above cross allow the chip to flow freely.
slide. • The back rake angle of a single point cutting tool is
• Compound rest or compound slide is mounted on the the angle between the face of the tool and the horizontal
cross slide. line which is parallel with the baseline of the tool.
• The upper part of the compound rest is called top 403. Small bit, usually of high speed steel held in a
slide. suitable holder is known as–
• Top slide is used to provide the base for tool posts. (a) Tipped tool (b) Solid tool
399. A 5º taper over 5 mm length is to be made on a (c) Carbide tool (d) Tool bit
100 mm diameter job, which method should be RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
used?
Ans. (d) : Small bit, usually of high speed steel held in
(a) Taper turning attachment
a suitable holder is known as tool bit. Tool bit is a non-
(b) Tail stock offset method rotary cutting tool.
(c) Compound rest method
404. General composition of HSS is 18 : 4 : 1 in
(d) Form tool method which 18% is ........ .
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 (a) Carbon (b) Chromium
Ans. (d) : A 5º taper over 5 mm length is to be made on (c) Tungsten (d) Vanadium
a 100 mm diameter job, form tool method should be RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
used.
Ans. (c) : General composition of HSS in 18 : 4 : 1–
• Form tool taper turning method is the best method to
give short length tapers. Tungsten → 18%
• Taper turning attachment is used to give both external Chromium → 4%
and internal tapers with low taper angle. Vanadium → 1%
• Compound slide taper turning method is used both Carbon → 0.7%
external and internal taper with greater taper angle. • The main use of HSS in the manufacture of various
• Tail stock offset method is used only external taper. cutting tools (drills, taps, milling cutter, tool bits etc.)
400. The tool life is most affected by ________ 405. Which one of the following cutting tool
(a) Cutting speed materials is used mainly on lapping wheels?
(b) Feed and depth of cut (a) Diamond (b) Carbide
(c) Not using coolant and lubricant (c) Stellite (d) Ceramics
(d) Material of tool RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 Ans.(a): Cutting tool materials used on lapping wheels–
Ans. (a): The tool life is most affected by cutting speed. 1. Diamond–It is used for lapping tungsten carbide.
Tool life is defined as the time period between two 2. Boron carbide–It is used for lapping dies and
successive grinding of tool. gauges.
Factor affecting tool life– 3. Aluminium oxide–It is used for lapping soft steels
1. Cutting speed and non-ferrous metals.
2. Feed 406. The distance through which a screw thread
3. Depth of cut advances axially in one turn called..........
4. Tool geometry (a) Pitch of thread (b) Lead of thread
5. Coolant (c) Depth of thread (d) Diameter of thread
6. Tool material RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
7. Types of machining Ans. (b) : The distance through which a screw thread
401. A return signal the confirms the position of tool advances axially in one turn called lead of thread.
or workpiece is called_____ Pitch–The distance between one point on a thread to the
(a) RPM (b) Servocontrol corresponding point on the next thread.
(c) Feedback (d) Control system Lead = Pitch × Numbers of start.
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 • For a single start thread, lead is equal to the pitch.

407. Name the type of cutting tool used on planning • The forward stroke of the tool will be considered as
machine? the cutting stroke in which material removal is taking
(a) Multi point cutting tool place from the workpiece.
(b) Single point cutting tool • The return stroke will be taking as an idle stroke so
(c) Broaching tool that tool is simply moving in backward direction to take
(d) Mounted abrasive tools the position of the tool.
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 411. The range of oscillation of the rocker arm of
Ans. (b) : Single point cutting tool has only cutting shaper is controlled by the component.........
edge for single point action. (a) Bull gear (b) Compensating link
• Planning tools, boring tools, slotting tools, turning (c) Slotted link (d) Sliding block
tools etc. are single point cutting tools. RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
• Side cutting tools are most commonly used on a lathe Ans. (c) : The range of oscillation of the rocker arm of
machine as single point cutting tools. shaper is controlled by the component slotted link.
• Some tools that have more than one cutting point is • A shaper machine is a reciprocating type of machine
known as multi point cutting tools. that is used for producing horizontal, vertical flat
• Drill and reamer are multipoint cutting tools. surface.
408. The usual ratio of forward and return stroke in • The workpiece is fixed on the table and the ram holds
shaper...... the single point cutting tool.
(a) 2 : 1 (b) 1 : 2 • Column supports the ram that is moving forward and
(c) 2 : 3 (d) 3 : 2 backward for operation.
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 412. The convex surface can be slotted by using
Ans. (d) : The quick return mechanism is designed that .........
it moves the ram holding the tool at a comparatively (a) Longitudinal feed (b) Rotary feed
slower speed during the forward cutting stroke, whereas (c) Cross feed (d) Vertical feed
during the return stroke it allows the ram to move at a RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
faster speed to reduce the idle return time.
Ans. (b) : The convex surface can be slotted by using
• Quick return mechanism is mostly used in shaping,
rotary feed.
planning and slotting machines.
• Cornering tool is required for slotting a convex
• The usual ratio of forward and return stroke in shaper
surface.
3:2.
• In slotting machine, material cutting on the downward
409. In shaping compound angle may be obtained
stroke and upward stroke being idle.
by using ........
• Work table specified for transverse, longitudinal or
(a) plan vice (b) Swivel vice
rotary movement.
(c) Universal vice (d) Tool make vice
413. Right hand straight turning tools is one that
cuts from ...........
Ans. (c): In shaping compound angle may be obtained
(a) Left to right on the job
by using universal vice.
(b) Right to left on the job
• Universal vice is used in tool and die maker section.
(c) Top to bottom on the job
• Its jaw is open in parallel direction after fixing a job
vertically or horizontally. (d) Bottom to top on the job
• It can be rotated at any angle. RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
• Universal vice is not used for heavy work because its Ans. (b) : Right hand straight turning tools is one that
rigidity is very low. cuts from right to left on the job (leftward).
410. Which one of the following is the characteristic • Left hand straight turning tools is one that cuts from
of a standard shaper machine relating to left to right on the job (rightward).
cutting process?
(a) The tool cuts during forward motion
(b) The tool cuts on both direction
(c) The tool cuts in reverse direction
(d) The tool cut when the ram is not moving
Ans. (a) : In shaper the cutting tool is fixed on the ram
which moves forward and backward (return) in a slider
form.
414. Morse Tapers come in eight sizes - 0 to 7. There Ans. (d) : The feed is the distance that a drill advances
is one half-size which is rarely used. Which is into the job in one complete rotation.
that half-size? The rate of feed depends upon–
(a) 2 1 2 (b) 3 1 2 • Finish required after machining.
(c) 4 21 (d) 5 1 2 • A material of the drill.
RRB ALP Patna 2014 • Material to be drilled i.e. workpiece material.
Ans. (c) : Morse Tapers come in eight sizes identified 419. Which among the following is not the factor for
by whole numbers between 0 to 7 and one half size 4½ selection of cutting speed and feed for reaming
is very rarely found and not shown in the table). a hole with a machine reamer?
• The MT2 taper is the size most often found in drill (a) Material of the job.
presses up to ½" capacity.
(b) Material of the reamer
• Morse tapers are of the self holding type.
(c) Diameter (size) of the reamer
415. Which morse taper is found in drill presses up (d) Rigidity of the fixture.
to 1 2 " capacity?
(a) MT1 (b) MT2
Ans. (d) : Reaming is a sizing operation that removes a
(c) MT3 (d) MT4
small amount of metal from a hole already drilled.
• It is a multi point tool.
Ans. (b) : MT2 morse taper is found in drill presses up
• Factor for selection of cutting speed and feed for
to ½" capacity.
reaming a hold with a machine reamer–
• Often the designation is abbreviated as MT followed
by a digit, for example a morse taper number 4 would 1. Material of the job
be MT4. 2. Material of the reamer
416. Which one of the following tapers has been 3. Diameter of the reamer
adopted by International Organization of 4. Type of coolant and lubricant.
Standardization as ISO 296? 420. While chipping, the clearance angle is the angle
(a) Brown and Sharpe taper between
(b) Jarno taper (a) the working surface of the job and the top
(c) Standard taper pin surface of cutting edge of chisel
(d) Morse taper (b) the working surface of the job and the bottom
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 surface of cutting edge of chisel
Ans. (d) : Morse taper has been adopted by (c) the surface at right angle to the cutting edge
International Organization of Standardization as ISO of chisel and the working surface of the job
296. (d) None of the above
• Morse taper is the most commonly used taper. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
• The taper angle of the morse taper varies somewhat Ans. (b): While chipping, the clearance angle is the
with size but is typically 1.49º. angle between the working surface of the job and the
• Morse taper is 5/8 inch or about 3 degrees a foot. bottom surface of cutting edge of chisel.
417. The sizes 4 to 12 are applicable to
(a) Standard taper pin
(b) Jarno taper
(c) Brown and Sharp taper
(d) Morse taper
Ans. (c) : The sizes 4 to 12 are applicable to brown and
sharp taper.
• There are 18 types of brown and sharp self holding
tapers, represented by BS1 to BS18.
• Except for BS10, all other tapers are ½" per feet while 421. For regrinding carbide tipped cutters with
BS10 has a taper of 0.5171" per feet. diamond wheel, the depth of cut should be in
418. The rate of feed depends upon the range of ....
(a) finish required (a) 0.001 mm to 0.002 mm
(b) material of tool (drill) (b) 0.005 mm to 0.025 mm
(c) material to be drilled (c) 0.100 mm to 0.125 mm
(d) all the above (d) 0.150 mm to 0.175 mm
Ans. (b) : For regrinding carbide tipped cutters with • This taper is expressed by the numbers 4, 6, 80, 100,
diamond wheel, the depth of cut should be in the range 120, 160 and 200.
of 0.005 mm to 0.025 mm. • All measurements of it are in mm and the number
• Diamond abrasive wheel is used for grinding carbide represents the larger diameter.
tip tool. • So, 80 represents the big or larger diameter of taper.
422. You have to mill an aluminium job. Which one 426. When the threading tool reaches the end of the
of the following feature of the cutter is suitable thread, the tool should be
for this? (a) left in the groove and reverse the workpiece
(a) More number of cutting edges with more chip (b) withdrawn after stopping the machine
space (c) withdrawn while the tool is taking cut
(b) Straight teeth cutter with larger wedge angle (d) withdrawn after removing the workpiece
(c) Less number of cutting edges with more chip RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
space
Ans. (c) : When the threading tool reaches the end of
(d) Helical teeth cutter with zero rake angle
the thread, the tool should be withdrawn while the tool
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 is taking cut.
Ans. (a) : For milling an aluminium job, the cutter has • A thread is a uniform helical groove of specified
more number of cutting edges with more chip space is length and pitch.
suitable.
• Deeper threads need multiple passes of a tool.
• Aluminium is a ductile material.
• A single point tool is mostly used to cut threads on a
423. Which one of the following equipments is used lathe machine.
in the shop floor for the checking of the form
427. When cutting ISO metric threads of coarse
that is being turned?
pitch, the compound rest should be swiveled to
(a) Template (b) Snap gauge
(a) 15° (b) 30°
(c) Dial test indicator and slip gauges °
(d) Tool room microscope (c) 45 (d) 60°
Ans. (a) : Template– Ans. (b) : When cutting ISO metric threads of coarse
• The product that is prepared as sample is called pitch, the compound rest should be swiveled to 30º.
template. Thread angle of metric thread is 60º.
• In production machines, the template acts as a tool. • The thread cutting tool moves along the lathe carriage
by attaching it to the lead screw of the haft nut.
• In sheet metal work, a template is prepared to cut the
sheet into the special shape. Marking is done by placing • The direction of rotation of the load screw determines
this template on a sheet. the direction of the hand of the thread.
• Template is used in the shop floor for the checking of 428. For cutting acme threads, the threading tool
the form that is being turned. should be ground to an included angle of
424. Rake angle is not provided on form tool used to (a) 30° (b) 58°
°
produce taper on a workpiece. (c) 29 (d) 47½º
The reason for this is RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(a) to reduce grinding time of the tool Ans. (c) : For cutting acme threads, the threading tool
(b) to reduce wastage of tool material should be ground to an included angle of 29º.
(c) taper angle is not affected by re-sharpening • For cutting acme threads, an angle of 29º is made
(d) for the tool to have large wedge angle between the two sides edges of the single tool to be
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 used.
Ans. (c) : Rake angle is not provided on form tool used • At the time of cutting the left hand thread, the thread
to produce taper on a workpiece. The reason for this is cutting tool moves from the head stock in a direction of
taper angle is not affected by re-sharpening. the tail stock.
425. A metric self-releasing taper is specified as ISO 429. The compound slide swivel base is set at 45° to
80. The number indicates that the centre line of the lathe. The degree of the
(a) length of taper is 80 mm. reading at the cross slide index will be
(b) big diameter of taper is 80 mm. (a) 135° (b) 90°
°
(c) small diameter of taper is 80 mm. (c) 45 (d) 30°
(d) diameter upto which the mating parts match. RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 Ans. (c) : The compound slide swivel base is set at 45°
Ans. (b) : Metric taper is taper recognized by ISO and to the centre line of the lathe. The degree of the reading
is currently very popular in India. at the cross slide index will be 45º.
• The cutting edge of square threading cutting tool is set • Before the thread cutting , hold the job to the lathe
parallel to the axis of the workpiece. machine and chamfer at the right end where the thread
• Square thread cutting process is mostly completed in starts.
two stage. 433. Which of the following angle of a lathe cutting
• The width of the first tool is kept at half of three- tool makes it sharp and pointed?
fourths of the pith (3/8 P). (a) Positive rake angle
430. Which one of the following combination of (b) Negative rake angle
movements is used to turn a ball on a centre (c) Both positive and negative rake angles
lathe with single point tool? (d) Neither positive nor negative rake angles
(a) Carriage and compound slides are used RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(b) Cross slide and compound slides are used
Ans. (a) : Positive rake angle of a lathe cutting tool
(c) Carriage and cross slide are used makes it sharp and pointed.
(d) Compound slide and apron are used • In the positive rake, the nose of the tool face is tilted
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 backwards.
Ans. (b) : Cross slide and compound slides are used to • A positive rake angle is used for cutting soft and
turn a ball on a centre lathe with single point tool. ductile material.
• Compound slide is mounted on the cross slide. • A negative rake angle is used for cutting very hard and
• Compound slide has a rotational base at the bottom, on brittle material.
which left and right side signs are made from 0º to 45º. • A zero rake angle is used for machining brass.
• Compound slide, slides with a screw on the dovetail
434. Which of the following operations often use
path on the rotational base.
multipoint cutting tools?
431. Back-gear mechanism is provided in cone (a) Milling and drilling (b) Drilling and turning
pulley headstock to
(c) Turning and milling (d) Milling and planing
(a) Reduce the speed of spindle
(b) Increase the speed of spindle
(c) Reverse the speed of spindle Ans. (a) : Milling and drilling operations often use
(d) Transmit power from spindle gear to stud multipoint cutting tools.
gear • A multi point cutting tool contains more than one
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 main cutting edges that simultaneously engage in
cutting action in a pass.
Ans. (a) : Back-gear mechanism is provided in cone
• Turning tool, shaping tool, planning tool, slotting tool,
pulley headstock to reduce the speed of spindle.
boring tool etc. are single point cutting tool.
• In headstock, the eccentric shaft behind the spindle fits
into two bearings. These bearings have a back gear unit. 435. Reciprocation of the cutting tool in shaping
• The spindle is made of alloy steel and rotates freely in machines is accomplished by
the bearing fitted in the head stock. (a) Rack and pinion mechanism
• The inner part of the front end of the spindle is made (b) Crank and connecting rod mechanism
in a morse taper. (c) Cam and cam follower mechanism
432. Which one of the following is the correct (d) Oscillating lever mechanism
position of threading tool to cut V-thread? RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(a) Exactly at centre height of the workpiece with Ans. (d) : Reciprocation of the cutting tool in shaping
tool axis perpendicular to the workpiece axis machines is accomplished by oscillating lever
(b) Exactly at centre height of the workpiece with mechanism.
tool axis at 60° to the workpiece axis • Oscillating lever mechanism is used to convert
(c) Exactly at centre height of the workpiece with reciprocating motion into rotary motion.
tool axis at 45° to the workpiece axis • The cylindrical oscillates, as the piston is moved by
(d) Exactly at centre height of the workpiece with the crank shaft.
tool axis at 30° to the workpiece axis • This mechanism is an inversion of single slider crank
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 chain.
Ans. (a) : Exactly at centre height of the workpiece 436. Which one of the following shaper tools is
with tool axis perpendicular to the workpiece axis is the chosen when narrow slots are to be cut?
correct position of threading tool to cut V-thread. (a) Straight roughing tool
• For cutting the thread, first of all the required size is (b) Offset shaping tool
prepared for the particular thread of the job. (c) Grooving tool
• Cutting speed is generally kept at one-fourth for thread (d) Round nose tool
cutting. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009

Ans. (c) : Grooving shaper is chosen when narrow slots Ans. (d) : Cutting tool material must be tough enough
are to be cut. so that it can work without fracture in impact forces
• Round nose tool is used for roughing operation, the occurs in interrupted cutting operations.
tool has no top rake. • It must be able to withstand vibrations occurred during
• Goose necked tool is also known as spring tool. machining.
437. A tipped tool is more useful than HSS tool 441. The best method for producing small taper on
because
long jobs is ......
(a) It can resist more heat
(a) Compound rest
(b) it can keep the cutting edge sharp
(b) Taper turning attachment
(c) cutting speed can be increased
(d) all the above (c) Form tool
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 (d) Tracing attachment
Ans. (d) : A tipped tool is more useful than HSS tool RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
because– Ans. (b) : The best method for producing small taper on
• It can resist more heat. long jobs is taper turning attachment.
• It can keep the cutting edge sharp. Taper turning attachment method–
• Cutting speed can be increased. • It is used to give both external and internal tapers.
438. A right hand shaper tool can remove metal • It can be tapped to its full length.
(a) from right to left (b) from left to right • The power feed can be given easily by this.
(c) 'a' and 'b' both (d) neither 'a' nor 'b' • Job is hold between a chuck or two centres.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 • It can used only turn with low taper angle.
Ans. (a) : A right hand shaper tool can remove metal
442. Name the setting method for producing
when moving from right to left.
external taper shown in figure.
• A left hand shaper tool removes metal when moving
from left to right.
• In right hand shaper tool, the cutting edge of the tool
must be at left side of the tool.
• In left hand shaper tool, the cutting edge of the tool
must be at right side of the tool.
439. Name the type of carrier shown in the figure.

(b) Form tool method
(d) Tail stock set over method
(a) Bent tail carrier Ans. (c) : For producing external taper shown in figure
(b) Adjustable carrier is compound rest or compound slide method.
(c) Straight tail carrier Compound rest taper turning method–
(d) Safe adjustable carrier • By this method, both external and internal tapers can
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 be made.
Ans. (c) : Carrier shown in the figure is straight tail • It is possible to turn at a greater taper angle.
carrier. • It is convenient to use.
• Straight tail carrier are driven by studs in the driving • In this method power feed cannot be used, only feed
plates. can be given by hand.
• Bent tail carrier are used for turning round blocks.
• Only tapers of limited length can be made in it.
• The clamp type carrier is used to safely hold a wide
variety of workpiece. 443. A multistart square thread is to be cut on a
• Workpiece of all sizes can be hold by adjusting the lathe with a single point tool. Which one of the
clamp type carrier at different points. following angles of the tool is to be ground by
440. The most important basic quality of a cutting taking into consideration, the thread helix
tool material is ....... angle?
(a) Brittleness (b) Malleability (a) Side relief (b) Front clearance
(c) Elasticity (d) Toughness (c) Side rake (d) Side clearance
Ans. (d) : A multistart square thread is to be cut on a 446. A single-spindle auto lathe of ∅ 15 mm
lathe with a single point tool. Side clearance angles of capacity has tooling on the front and rear cross
the tool is to be ground by taking into consideration, the slide for the production of a component as
thread helix angle. shown in Fig. Which one of the following
444. Which one of the following statement is NOT tooling combinations is most suitable for its
correct ? production?
(a) Lay is the direction of the predominant
surface pattern, ordinarily determined by the
production method used.
(b) Normal profile is the contour of a surface in a
plane perpendicular to the surface, unless
some other angle is specified.
(c) One micrometer is equal to one thousandth of (a) Turning tool on the front cross slide, forming
millimetre tool on the rear cross slide and parting tool on
(d) Flaws are the irregularities, which occur at the vertical slide
one place or at relatively frequent or widely (b) Turning tool on rear cross slide, forming tool
varying intervals in a surface on front cross slide and parting tool on the
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 vertical slide
Ans. (b) : (c) Turning tool on the vertical slide, forming
tool on the rear cross slide and parting tool on
the front cross slide
(d) Turning tool on vertical slide, forming tool on
front cross slide and parting tool on the rear
cross slide
Lay–It is the direction of the predominant surface Ans. (d) : A single-spindle auto lathe of ∅ 15 mm
pattern, ordinarily determined by the production method capacity has tooling on the front and rear cross slide for
used. the production of a component. Turning tool on vertical
Flaws–Flaws are the irregularities, which occur at one slide, forming tool on front cross slide and parting tool
place or at relatively frequent or widely varying on the rear cross slide tooling combinations is most
intervals in a surface. suitable for its production.
• One micrometer is equal to one thousandth of a 447. A bar stop is to be set to control the length of
millimeter. identical components machined on a single
1 µm = 10–6m spindle automatic lathe. Which one of the
= 10–6 × 103 mm following is to be taken as reference for setting
= 10-3 mm the bar stop?
445. The component shown in Fig. is to be (a) The dead length collet front face
manufactured on a single-spindle auto lathe. (b) The parting off tool side face towards right of
The parting tool travel is 7 mm. To increase the the operator
life of the tool it is necessary to (c) The parting off tool side face towards left of
the operator
(d) The centre of the parting off tool shank
Ans. (b) : A bar stop is to be set to control the length of
identical components machined on a single spindle
(a) increase the cutting edge width automatic lathe. As reference for setting the bar stop is
(b) use a tool bit of larger cross section to be taken for the parting off tool side face towards left
(c) use a pre-cut tool operating from a different to the operator.
slide
448. While using circular form tool on an automatic
(d) use a part off blade instead of a solid tool
lathe, the spindle speed should be
(a) Same as for straight form tool
Ans. (c) : The component shown in Fig. is to be
(b) Slightly less than that for straight form tool
manufactured on a single-spindle auto lathe. The parting
tool travel is 7 mm. To increase the life of the tool it is (c) Slightly more than that for straight form tool
necessary to use a pre-cut tool operating from a (d) Either 'a' or 'c'.
different slide. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (b) : While using circular form tool on an Ans. (c) : Self-opening dies are used to cut threads upto
automatic lathe, the spindle speed should be slightly 100 mm diameter.
less than that for straight form tool. • Self opening dies are heavy duty and are made with
• Straight form tools have square or rectangular cross- high precision and all parts are hardened and ground.
section with the form along its side or end. 452. The parting off tool is fixed on capstan or
• Circular form tools are cut in disc type shape. turret lathe in an inverted position in the
(a) Tool post on cross slide
449. Four types of cut off tools with different shapes (b) Tool post on the turret head
of the cutting edge are shown in Fig. Which one (c) Rear tool post
of the tools shown in most suitable to perform (d) None of the above
the parting off operation on a capstan lathe? RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Ans. (c) : The parting off tool is fixed on capstan or
turret lathe in an inverted position in the rear tool post.
• Capstan lathe is more suitable for large production. It
employs multiple tools simultaneously.
• Turret lathe has turret head instead of capstan head.
• The turret head is directly mounted on the machine
bed.
(a) (b)
453. The shape of rollers in the roller box turning
tool is
(a) Conical
(b) Convex
(c) Concave
(c) (d)
(d) Slight taper with small end towards the face
of the job
Ans. (c) : After the job is completed on the capstan Ans. (d) : The shape of rollers in the roller box turning
lathe or center lathe machine, it is removed from the tool is slight taper with small end towards the face of
log. This work is called parting off. the job.
• Box turning tools are used in the turrets of screw
• In width, parting off tools are similar to grooving
machines, turret lathe and CNC lathes.
tools, but their points are longer in length. • They are recommended for turning diameter where
• In parting off, the job cut is slowed while parting, so straightness, accuracy and finishing are of primary
that the metal cut by the tool is at least unless. importance.
450. On a capstan lathe box turning tool is used to 454. Which among the following is used to
(a) Plain turn work accommodate grooving tool?
(b) Under cut work (a) Offset tool holder
(c) Chamfer the edge of work (b) Slide tool holder
(c) Adjustable angle cutter holder
(d) Provide support to the work when tools on
(d) Knee tool holder
cross slide are in operation.
Ans. (b) : Slide tool holder is used to accommodate
Ans. (a) : On a capstan lathe box turning tool is used to grooving tool.
plain turn work. • Before cutting the threads on a job, a groove is made
• When the turning process is done by holding the at the end with some length, in which the threads can be
workpiece between two centres in the chuck, then this cleared.
process is called plain turning. • Cross feeds are given to make the depth of the
• Plain turning is also called parallel or cylindrical grooves.
turning. • The process of cutting the groove inside a hole is
called undercutting.
• The diameter of the workpiece obtained by this
process remains same throughout its length. 455. Which one of the following work materials
need carbide tools with chip breakers for rough
451. Self-opening dies are used to cut threads upto turning?
(a) 25 mm diameter (b) 50 mm diameter (a) Cast iron (b) Bronze
(c) 100 mm diameter (d) 150 mm diameter (c) High tensile brass (d) Mild steel
Ans. (d) : Mild steel need carbide tools with chip Ans. (a) : Given,
breakers for rough turning. Front clearance angle = 8º
• Chip control in turning is difficult in the case of mild Back rake angle = 15º
steel because chips are continuous. Wedge angle = ?
• Thus the development of a chip breaker for mild steel We know that,
is an important subjects for the automation of turning Front clearance angle + Back rake angle + Wedge angle
operations. = 90º.
456. Rake angle is not provided on a form tool used 8º + 15º + Wedge angle = 90º
to produce taper on work piece. The reason for Wedge angle = 90º – 23º = 67º.
this is….
460. The standard solid plain mandrel is generally
(a) to reduce grinding time of the tool made of tool steel, hardened and ground with a
(b) to reduce wastage of toll material taper of
(c) taper angle is not affected by resharpening (a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 100
(d) for the tool to have large wedge angle (c) 1 : 200 (d) 1 : 2000
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : Rake angle is not provided on a form tool Ans. (d) : A mandrel is a cylindrical, tapered rod that
used to produce taper on work piece. The reason for this helps hold the workpiece. Mandrels are typically made
is taper angle is not affected by resharpening. of steel and are used in hollow jobs on lathe.
457. Pre cutting is done to reduce the load on the • A solid mandrel is a cylindrical, tapered bar whose
parting tool thereby increasing its life. Which one side is larger in diameter than the other.
one of the following statements is true with • The standard solid plain mandrel is generally made of
respect to feature of the precut tool? tool steel, hardened and ground with a taper of 1:2000.
(a) Width of the cutting edge of the pre cutting 461. Which one of the following elements of an
tool will be less than the width of the parting external BSW thread cannot be formed with a
tool single-point thread cutting tool during
(b) Length of cutting edge of the pre cutting tool threading?
will be less than that of the parting tool (a) Root (b) Helix angle
(c) Width of the cutting edge of the pre cutting (c) Thread angle (d) Crest
tool will be more than that of the parting tool
(d) Length and width of the cutting edge of the
pre cutting tool will be equal to that of the Ans. (d): Crest of an external BSW thread cannot be
parting tool formed with a single-point thread cutting tool during
threading.
• The uppermost part of the thread is known as crest.
Ans. (b): Pre cutting is done to reduce the load on the
• The lowermost part of the groove of the thread is
parting tool thereby increasing its life. Length of cutting
known as root.
edge of the pre cutting tool will be less than that of the
• The angle formed by meeting two sides of thread is
parting tool.
called angle of thread.
458. A Fe 310 steel shaft is turned with a H.S.S. tool. • The angle made by helix of thread perpendicular to the
Which one of the following ranges of rake axis of pitch diameter is called helix angle.
angles is most suitable?
(a) 0° - 6° (b) 8° - 10° 462. Cemented carbide is capable of cutting speed
(a) 3– 4 times greater than HSS cutting tools
(c) 14° - 18° (d) 18° - 30°
(b) 5 – 8 times greater than HSS cutting tools
(c) 8 – 10 times greater than HSS cutting tools
Ans. (c) : A Fe 310 steel shaft is turned with a H.S.S.
(d) 10 – 15 times greater than HSS cutting tools
tool. Most suitable rake angle for this is 14° - 18°.
• Value of rake angle for single point cutting tool used
on a lathe machine is kept from 0° - 20°. Ans. (a) : Cemented carbide tools are made by sintering
• The angle between the perpendicular to the cutting carbon mixtures with tungsten, titanium or tantalum.
face of the workpiece and the face of the tool is called This process is called powder metallurgy.
the rake angle. • This mixture is sintered from 1500-4000 kg per cm
459. A lathe tool has a front clearance angle of 8° and 1500ºC temperature.
and a back rake angle of 15°. Its wedge angle • In this way various shapes are converted into tips.
will be…. • These tips are brazed into carbon steel shanks before
(a) 67° (b) 75° being and used for cutting.
(c) 82° (d) 83° • Cemented carbide is capable of cutting speed 3-4
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 times greater than HSS cutting tools.

463. The width of a form tool should never exceed... Ans. (b) : Given,
times the smallest diameter of the finished part. Diameter of workpiece (d) = 60 mm
(a) 1.5 (b) 3.0 Cutting speed (V) = 30 m/min.
(c) 4.0 (d) 4.5 rpm (N) = ?
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 We know that,
Ans. (b) : The width of a form tool should never exceed πdN
3.0 times the smallest diameter of the finished part. V= m / min
1000
• A cutting tool having one or more cutting edges with
22 × 60 × N
well defined profile or contour that is reproduced as the 30 =
desired form on the workpiece surface is called form 7 ×1000
tool. N = 159 rpm
• These tools have their cutting edges ground to the 468. Which one of the following centres is suitable
shape of the groove, undercut or thread to be cut. while cutting taper by set over method?
464. Which one of the following is the hardest (a) Plain centre (b) Half centre
cutting tool material ? (c) Ball centre (d) Revolving centre
(a) Diamond (b) Ceramics RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
(c) Cermets (d) Cemented carbide Ans. (c) : Ball centre is suitable while cutting taper by
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 set over method.
Ans. (a) : Diamond is the hardest cutting tool material. • In the ball centre, a ball is used in front of the point.
• Its brittle and wear resistance is very high. • The point of half centre is flat.
• It is widely used in cutting tools because they are • Half centre is used for facing the job.
considered to be the hardest material. • Revolving centre is used to hold jobs rotating at high
speeds.
465. By which one the following, a multi-start,
thread is cut on a lathe? 469. In a thread the surface joining the crest and the
(a) Chaser (b) Single-point tool root is called its:-
(c) Die head (d) Split die (a) Crest (b) Flank
(c) Depth (d) Pitch
Ans. (b): A multi-start, thread is cut on a lathe by single
point tool. Ans. (b): In a thread the surface joining the crest and
the root is called its flank.
• Multi start threads are used to make fast transmission.
• The perpendicular distance between the crest and root
• Methods of multi start thread cutting–
of a thread is known as depth of thread.
1. By dividing the first change gear
• Pitch is the distance between one point on one thread
2. By using indexing drive plate to the corresponding point on the next thread.
3. By using slotted face plate.
1
466. The setting of lathe tool with respect to the Pitch =
work axis effects the value of ...... Thread per inch
(a) Rake angle and clearance angle 470. On turning lathes the machine zero point is
(b) Rake angle and cutting angle generally at the:-
(c) Cutting angle and clearance angle (a) Head stock of lathe spindle nose face
(d) Cutting angle and side rake angle (b) Dead centre of tail stock
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (c) Tool point mounted on tool post
Ans. (a) : The setting of lathe tool with respect to the (d) None of the above
work axis effects the value of rake angle and clearance RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
angle. Ans. (b) : The tail stock is at the right side of the base
• The negative rake angle increases the lip angle of the of the lathe machine. A mark is formed on the rear end
tool, allowing cutting at high values of depth cut. of the base of the machine and a zero mark is marked on
• Clearance angle produces less heat and the cutting the body, when the zero line meet each other, the axis of
edge works for a longer time. the tail stock and the head stock is in a straight line.
467. For plain turning a 60 mm diameter workpiece • So, on turning lathe the machine zero point is
using HSS tool with recommended cutting generally at the dead centre of tail stock.
speed of 30 meter / min., the rpm should be:- 471. The axis of turning machine are:
(a) 80 rpm (b) 159 rpm (a) Z and X axis (b) X and Y axes
(c) 192 rpm (d) 318 rpm (c) Z and Y axis (d) X, Y and Z axes
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
Ans. (a) : The axes of turning machine are Z and X Ans. (c) : In gang drilling machine, a number of single
axis. Simple CNC lathes are two axis and have no Y- spindle machine columns are placed side by side on a
axis. common base and have common work table.
• Z axis depends on the orientation of the spindle. • To perform the operations like drilling, reaming
• The axis of motion which is parallel to the spindle axis counter boring etc. on workpiece gang drilling machine
is Z axis. will be used.
• The axis that moves right and left is the X axis for 476. Tool signature is ..........
both horizontal and vertical spindles. (a) There is nothing like tool signature
472. Which steel is used as cutting tool? (b) A numerical method of identification of tool
(a) Tungsten steel (b) Manganese steel (c) The plan of tool
(c) Chromium steel (d) Nickel steel (d) The complete specification of tool
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
Ans. (a) : Tungsten steel is used as cutting tool. Ans. (b) : Tool signature is a numerical method of
identification of tool.
473. The correct sequence of the following
• Tool signatures have 7 elements in both ASA and
parameters in order of their maximum to
ORS systems.
minimum influence on tool life is:
• 7 elements of tool signatures according to ASA
(a) Feed rate, depth of cut, cutting speed (American Standards System)–
(b) Depth of cut, cutting speed, feed rate
1. Back rake angle–αb
(c) Cutting speed, feed rate, depth of cut
2. Side rake angle–αs
(d) Feed rate, cutting speed, depth of cut
3. End relief angle–γe
4. Side relief angle–γs
Ans. (c) : The correct sequence of maximum to 5. End cutting edge angle–Ce
minimum (decreasing order) influence on tool life is–
6. Side cutting edge angle–Cs
Cutting speed > feed rate > depth of cut.
7. Nose radius–r
• Cutting speed has the greatest influence on tool life
followed by feed rate and depth of cut. 477. In orthogonal cutting, the angle at which the
cutting face in inclined, the direction of the cut
• Relationship between tool life and cutting speed is
is .............
expressed by the Taylor equation–
(a) 90º (b) 60º
VTn = C
(c) 45º (d) 30º
where,
V = cutting speed (m/min)
T = tool life (min) Ans. (a) : In orthogonal cutting, the angle at which the
cutting face in inclined, the direction of the cut is 90º.
C = constant
• In orthogonal cutting, cutting wedge is perpendicular
474. The tool made of cemented carbide wears out to the direction of tool travel.
faster at:
• Orthogonal cutting is used in slotting, parting
(a) Slow speeds (b) Medium speeds grooving, pipe cutting.
(c) Fast speeds (d) Very fast speeds • Oblique cutting is used in turning, milling, drilling,
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 grinding.
Ans. (a) : The tool made of cemented carbide wears out 478. Thrust force will increase with the increase in
faster at slow speeds. Cemented carbide tools cannot be ..........
used at low speeds as at low speed the chips of (a) Side cutting edge angle
workpiece material are welded to the surface of the tool
(b) Tool nose radius
and increases its wear.
(c) Rake angle
• Carbide is used for tool material because of their high
hardness over a wide range of temperature. (d) End cutting edge angle
475. It is desired to perform the operations like
drilling, reaming, counter-boring etc, on Ans. (a) : Thrust force will increase with the increase in
workpiece. Which of the following machine will side cutting edge angle.
be used? • Side cutting edge angle is the angle between the side
(a) Sensitive drilling machine cutting edge and the side of the tool shank.
(b) Radial drilling machine • It is also known as approach angle.
(c) Gang drilling machine • This angle prevents interference as the tool enters the
(d) Multiple spindle drilling machine work material.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 • This angle affects the tool life and surface finish.

479. In which one of the following standard tapers, 482. The surface of the single point cutting tool on
it is easy to determine the taper dimensions which the chips formed in cutting operation
when the specification is given number slide is called as :
................ (a) Flank (b) Heel
(a) Brown and sharp (b) Metric (c) Face (d) Shank
(c) Morse (d) Jarno RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 Ans. (c) : The surface of the single point cutting tool on
Ans. (d) : In jarno tapers, it is easy to determine the which the chips formed in cutting operation slide is
taper dimensions when the specification is given called as face.
number. • An intersecting line of base and the flank of the tool is
• There are 20 types of jarno tapers. called heel.
• The various dimensions are derived from the • Flank is the surface that the vertical and adjacent to
following formulas– the cutting edge.
No. of taper • Shank is the main body of the tool. Shank is always
Large diameter of taper = held in the holder.
8
No. of taper
Small diameter of taper =
10
No. of taper
Length of taper =
2
480. The angle between side cutting edge and end
cutting edge is called as :
(a) Approach angle (b) Nose angle
(c) Side relief angle (d) End relief angle 483. Ceramic cutting tools are:
(a) Made by cold pressing of aluminum oxide
powder
Ans. (b): The angle between side cutting edge and end
(b) Available in the form of tips
cutting edge is called as nose angle.
(c) Brittle and have low bending strength
• In case of less nose angle, the nose may rupture or
(d) All of these
become blunt.
• Its value is generally kept at 90º in turning.
Ans. (d): Ceramic cutting tools are–
• In all turning tools the nose is made into some
roundness. 1. Made by cold pressing of aluminum oxide powder.
2. Available in the form of tips.
481. Lead angle in the single point cutting tool is the
3. Brittle and have low bending strength
angle between:
4. Used for finish machining.
(a) The end cutting edge and the normal to the
tool shank 5. Not used on rough surface or where the tool is
pushed.
(b) The portion of side shank immediately below
the side cutting edge and the line 484. Which of the following statement is wrong?
perpendicular to the base of the tool (a) The larger side rake angle produces chipping
(c) The tool face and the parallel to the base of (b) The smaller rake angle produces excessive
the tool wear and deformation in tool
(d) Side cutting edge and the side of the tool (c) The side cutting edge angle (less than 15º)
shank increase tool life
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (d) The increase in nose radius decreases tool life
Ans. (d) : Lead angle in the single point cutting tool is RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
the angle between side cutting edge and the side of the Ans. (d) : Correct statement–
tool shank. 1. The increase in nose radius increases tool life.
• Lead angle is also known as side cutting edge angle. 2. The larger side rake angle produces chipping.
• As the tool enters the work material, interference may 3. The smaller rake angle produces excessive wear and
occur. This interference is avoided by the lead angle. deformation in tool
• For general machining, the value of lead angle vary 4. The side cutting edge angle (less than 15º) increase
from 16º to 30º. tool life.

485. Slow speed of the spindle is necessary in: 489. Tool should be set at_______to the axis for
(a) Thread cutting thread cutting.
(b) Tuning a work of larger diameter (a) 45° (b) 60°
(c) Turning a hard or tough material (c) 80° (d) 90°
(d) All of these RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007Ans. (d) : Tool should be set at 90° to the axis for
Ans. (d) : Slow speed of the spindle is necessary in–thread cutting.
1. Thread cutting. • The thread cutting tool moves along the lathe carriage
2. Tuning a work of larger diameter. by attaching it to the lead screw of the half nut.
3. Turning a hard or tough material. • The direction of rotation of the lead screw determines
the direction of the hand (right and left) of the thread.
486. State the direction of rotation of job and lead
• On the lathe machine, external and internal both
screw while cutting left hand thread viewing
threads are cut.
from tailstock end. (CW = clockwise; ACW =
anticlockwise). 490. To remove maximum material per minutes
(a) Both the job and lead screw rotate CW with the same tool life–
(a) Increase depth of cut
(b) Both the job and lead screw rotate ACW
(b) Increase feed rate
(c) Job rotates CW and lead screw rotates ACW
(c) Decrease cutting speed
(d) Job rotates ACW and lead screw rotates CW
(d) Increase cutting speed
Ans. (d) : While cutting left hand thread viewing from
tailstock end, job rotates ACW and lead screw rotatesAns. (a) : To remove maximum material per minutes
with the same tool life increase depth of cut.
CW.
Tool life is affected by–
• Before threading operation, hold the job to the lathe
machine and chamfer at the right end where the thread1. Cutting speed
starts. 2. Feed
3. Depth of cut.
• If the number of threads to be cut in a multiple of the
• Cutting speed has the greatest influence on tool wear
number of lead screws, the half nut can be attached at
any point. and tool life.
• The feed can be read from the dial on the spindle. 491. Larger end cutting edge angle……tool life.
487. Lowest portion of side cutting edges is ____of (a) Increases (b) Decreases
single point cutting tool. (c) Does not affect (d) None of these
(a) Heel (b) Flank RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(c) Rake (d) Neck Ans. (a) : Larger end cutting edge angle increase tool
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010life.
End cutting edge angle–
Ans. (a): Lowest portion of side cutting edges is heel of
single point cutting tool. • It is the angle between the end the cutting edge and a
line perpendicular to the shank.
• The heel is the intersection of the base and the flank of
the tool. • The end cutting edge angle avoids interference
• Flank is the surface that are vertical and adjacent to between the machine surface and the tool.
the cutting edge. • Small end cutting edge angle for roughing and a
large angle in finishing are required.
488. The side angle of thread cutting tool depends
upon the_____for thread cutting. 492. As the cutting speed increases, the tool cutting
(a) Helix angle (b) Rake angle forces–
(a) Remain constant
(c) Clearance angle (d) Lip angle
(b) Increases
(c) Decreases
Ans. (a) : The side angle of thread cutting tool depends
(d) First increases and then decreases
upon the helix angle for thread cutting.
• The angle made by helix of thread perpendicular to the
axis of pitch diameter is called helix angle. Ans. (c) : As the cutting speed increases, the tool
cutting forces decreases. Increasing cutting speed
Lead of thread
tan φ = increases cutting temperature and results in shortening
Circumference of pitch diameter tool life.
• The angle formed by meeting two sides of thread is • Cutting forces depends on tool geometry and its
called thread angle. material, workpiece material, feed and cutting speed.
493. Tool life is measured by the– 497. A left hand tool on lathe cuts most efficiently
(a) Number of pieces machined between tool when tool travels–
sharpening (a) From left to right end of lathe bed
(b) Time the tool is in contact with the job (b) From right to left end of lathe bed
(c) Volume of material removed between tool (c) Across bed
sharpening (d) At angular position
(d) All of these RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 Ans. (a) : A left hand tool on lathe cuts most efficiently
Ans. (d) : Tool life is measured by the– when tool travels from left to right end of lathe bed that
• Number of pieces machined between tool sharpening. is from spindle to tailstock.
• Time the tool is in contact with the job. • It is more stable at high velocity and power cutting
• Volume of material removed between tool sharpening. operation with a rigid setup.
494. Tool life is generally better when– 498. Brown and Sharp taper is generally used in–
(a) Grain size of metal is large (a) Lathe machine (b) Milling machine
(b) Grain size of metal is small (c) Shaper machine (d) Broching machine
(c) Hard constituents are present in the RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
microstructure of the tool material Ans. (b) : Brown and Sharp taper is generally used in
(d) None of these milling machine.
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 There are two types of brown and sharp taper–
Ans. (a) : Tool life is generally better when grain size 1. Quick release
of metal is large. 2. Self holding
• The tool life of a tool is said to be over if– • The quick release taper is 3½" per feet.
1. The tool has failed and a poor surface finish is • There are 18 types of brown and sharp self holding
obtained. tapers, represented by BS1 to BS18.
2. Sudden increase in power and cutting forces takes • Except for BS10, all other tapers are ½" per feet, while
place and chatter appears in machining. BS10 has a taper of 0.5171" per feet.
3. Overheating and fuming due to friction occurs in 499. In a gap bed lathe, the gap is provided
addition to dimensional instability. (a) Just below the nose of the headstock spindle
495. When the tool face is ground to slope from the (b) Just below the spindle of the tailstock
nose towards the rear end, it is called– (c) In the middle of the bed
(a) Positive rake (b) Negative rake (d) Anywhere in the bed
(c) Zero rake (d) All of these RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 Ans. (a): In a gap bed lathe, the gap is provided just
Ans. (a): When the tool face is ground to slope from the below the nose of the headstock spindle.
nose towards the rear end, it is called positive rake. • In some lathe machines, detachment beds are made
• Zero rake occurs on the tool when there is no tilt in the which are known as gap beds.
back of the face of the tool. • Necessary work is done by taking out this bed before
• When the tool face is ground to slope from the nose turning big jobs on the machine.
towards the front end, it is called negative rake. • Flat beds are used for heavy tasks.
496. Larger than 15° side cutting edge angle– • Lathe machines with gap beds are used to make low
(a) Increase tool life wide and large diameter jobs on the lathe machine bed.
(b) Decrease tool life 500. In a lathe machine, if the drive is transmitted
(c) Produces chipping and decrease tool life from the feed shaft to the cross slide, the tool
(d) Results in excessive stress concentration and will move in the direction?
greater heat generation (a) Angular direction
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (b) Circular direction
Ans. (c) : Larger than 15° side cutting edge angle (c) Perpendicular direction
produces chipping and decrease tool life. (d) Opposite direction
• Increasing the side cutting edge angle decreases chip BEML 2022
control. UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
• Increasing the side cutting edge angle decreases the Ans. (d) : In Lathe machine, If the drive transmitted
chip thickness and increases chip width. Thus breaking from the feed shaft to cross slide, tool will move in
chip is difficult. Hence tool life decreases. opposite direction.

501. On which the formation of chips during cutting 505. Cutting edge angle of widely used roughing tool is:
is based? (a) 30º (b) 90º
(a) Clearance angle of tool (c) 45º (d) 60º
(b) Wedge angle of the tool IOCL 2020
(c) Clearance angle and wedge angle of tool UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(d) Rake angle of tool Ans. (d) : 60º cutting edge angle is widely used in
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 rough tool.
Ans. (d) : The formation of chips during cutting is 506. Angle included between the flanks of a thread
based on rake angle of tool.
measured in an axial plane is called:
502. Revolving head type knurling tool is fitted (a) Pitch angle (b) Helix angle
with? (c) Lead angle (d) Flank angle
(a) Rough, medium and refined pitch
(b) Medium pitch
Ans. (c) : Angle included between the flanks of a thread
(c) Rough pitch
measured in axial plane is called lead angle.
(d) Refined pitch
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 • For single start thread it is also called flank angle. It is
base for thread angle.
Ans. (a) : Revolving head type knurling tool is fitted
with rough, medium and refined pitch. Knurling in done 507. Which of the following is not an element
to improve the griping on job. machine tools:
There is two type of knurling– (a) Spindle and bearing (b) Structure
1. Straight knurling ex. Bottle cap (c) Drive (d) Cutting tool
2. Diamond knurling ex. Measuring tool (Ratchet of UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
micrometer) Ans. (d) : Cutting tool is not a element of machine tool
Note–Grip of straight knurling is low as compared to 508. The body of the tool does not rub against the
diamond knurling. workpiece_____.
503. What is the purpose of clearance angle? (a) Rake Angle (b) Helix Angle
(a) Preventing the friction of tool with the (c) Clearance Angle (d) All of above
workpiece UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
(b) For avoiding over heating Ans. (c) : The body of the tool does not rub against the
(c) To break the long chip workpiece by making clearance angle.
(d) Help to remove out the chip It is the angle between machined surface and flank
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 surface of cutting tool.
Ans.(a): The purpose of clearance angle is for
preventing the friction of the tool with the workpiece. It
is the angle between machined surface of job and flank
surface of cutting tool.
Two type of clearance–
1. Front clearance
2. Side clearance
504. Calculated the mandrel to be set for cutting a
work 70mm in diameter at the rate of 33 509. The lowest possible rate of feed will give :
m/min. (a) good surface finish
(a) 300 Round per minute (rpm) (b) medium surface finish
(b) 640 rpm (c) poor surface finish
(c) 150 rpm (d) none of the above
(d) 412 rpm ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 Ans. (a) : The lowest possible rate of feed will give
Ans. (c) : Diameter (D) = 70 mm good surface finish. As the rate of feed increases surface
Cutting velocity (V) = 33 m/min, N = ? finish decreases.
πDN 510. Which of the following controls the chip
V= m / min geometry while turning?
1000
(a) Relief angle (b) Approach angle
V × 1000 33 × 1000
N= = = 150 rpm (c) Rake angle (d) Clearance angle
π× D π × 70 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
Ans. (c) : Rake angle controls the geometry of chip Ans. (a) : Cutting speed (also called surface speed) may
during the cutting. be defined as the rate (or speed) at the workpiece
• Rake angle is the angle between perpendicular to surface, irrespective of the machining operation used.
machined surface and face surface of tool. • It may be defined as the speed at which the cutting
511. Angle between the top face of cutting point and edge passes over the material while machining.
normal (90o) to the work surface at the cutting 516. For rough turning the stock tools with
edge following approach angle are available. Which
(a) Rake angle (b) Clearance angle will be :
(c) Inclination (d) Point angle (a) 30o (b) 28o
o
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 (c) 0 (d) 25o
Ans. (a) : Angle between the top face of cutting point
NTPC Fitter 2016
and (90º) to the work surface at the cutting edge is
Ans. (a) : For rough turning of the stock tool 30º
called rake angle.
approach angle is employed.
• Rake angle varies between 0º-20º
517. When turning ductile materials the rake angle
512. High carbon steels are machined using tools will be :
having (a) Less positive (b) Less negative
(a) Small positive rake angle (c) More positive (d) More negative
(b) Large positive rake angle ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
(c) Zero rake angle Ans. (c) : For turning ductile material, more positive
(d) Negative rake angle rake range is used.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 518. Thread of lead screw of a Lathe is :
Ans. (d) : High carbon steels are machined using tools (a) Metric (b) BSW
having negative rake angle. (c) ACME (d) Knuckle
Negative rake angle–It is used for hard metals which ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012
requires high cutting force and machined at very high Ans. (c) : ACME, thread is used in lead screw of lathe
speed. machine.
513. For turning lengthy tapers with a small taper Thread angle of ACME is 29º. ACME thread are more
angle, the method of taper turning employed is stronger than square thread.
(a) offsetting the tailstock 519. The rake angle required for machining cast
(b) form tool plunging iron is
(c) swivelling the compound slide (a) 8o (b) 0o
o
(d) Combination of the lathe cross slide and the (c) 25 (d) 30o
compound slide movement ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 Ans. (b): 0º rake angle required for machining cast iron.
Ans. (a): For turning lengthy taper with a small taper, 520. Calculate the tailstock offset in mm for the job
offsetting the tail stock, method is used. details given below using tailstock offset
Note–This method is only used for external taper method for taper turning : Big diameter (D) =
turning. 36 mm, Small diameter (d) = 32 mm, Length
514. When a tool is set below the centre, the taper (l) = 125 mm, Total length of job (L) =
(a) top rake angle increase 250 mm
(b) top rake angle decreases (a) 2 mm (b) 4 mm
(c) top rake angle does not change (c) 6 mm (d) 8 mm
(d) top rake angle becomes negative BHEL 2020
Ans. (b) : When tool is set below the centre, the top Ans. (b) : Given,
rake angle decreases. Big diameter (D) = 36 mm
While the clearance angle increases by the same Small diameter (d) = 32 mm
amount. Thus the cutting force increase because of the Taper length (l) = 125 mm
prediction in the rake angle. Total length (L) = 250 mm
• When a tool is set above the centre, the rake angle
increases, while the clearance angle decreases. Set over of tailstock ( s ) =
(D − d)× L
515. The speed at which the cutting edge passes over 2l
the material while cutting is known as (36 − 32) × 250
=
(a) Cutting speed (b) Feed rate 2 ×125
(c) Rotational speed (d) Machine speed s = 4 mm
521. Choose the correct formula to find out the dia 526. Offsetting the tailstock is used for turning
of job d in mm if the cutting speed (V) in (a) Lengthy tapers with a small taper angles
m/min and the revolution per minute (n) are (b) Small tapers
given (c) Medium size tapers
1000 × V (d) Small tapers with small taper angles
(a) d =
π ×n ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
π ×n Ans. (a) : Offsetting the tail stock is for turning lengthy
(b) d =
1000 × V (job) taper with a small taper angles.
1000 × π 527. When the big diameter of the taper is at the
(c) d = head stock ends the offset is towards the.............
V ×n
(a) Tail stock (b) Operator
1000 × n
(d) d = (c) Centre (d) None of the above
π ×V ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
Ans. (b) : When the big diameter of the taper is at the
Ans. (a) : If the cutting speed of drill is 'V', m/min and
head stock ends the offset is towards the operator's
it's diameter 'd' and 'n' is the number of r.p.m. of drill
slide.
then–
Note–If tail stock is offset away from the operation,
π dn
V= m / min then big diameter of job will be at the tail stock side.
1000
528. Form tool plunging method is a method of
V × 1000
d= m taper turning used for
π ×n (a) Big lengths of taper
522. A multipoint cutting tool used to create (b) Small lengths of taper in mass production
external V thread in lathe where the accuracy is not the criterion
(a) Knurling tool (b) Chaser (c) Medium lengths of taper
(c) Lathe dog (d) Tap
(d) Small length of taper where accuracy is
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 essential
Ans. (b) : For external 'V' cutting in lathe machine, ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
thread cutting in lathe machine, thread cutting is done
with the help of chaser. Ans. (b) : Form tool plunging method is a method of
taper turning used for small lengths of taper in mass
523. The maximum side relief angle provided on
production where accuracy is not a criterion.
parting tools is
(a) 5o (b) 2o 529. In a lathe when a tool is set above the center
(c) 8 o
(d) 10o the top rake angle ...................
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 (a) increases (b) decreases
Ans. (b) : The maximum side relief angle provided on (c) does not change (d) none of the above
parting tool is equal to 2º. ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
524. Tool will rub against the work surface and the Ans. (a) : In a lathe when a tool is set above the centre
cutting force increases when the top rake angle increases while the clearance angle
(a) Clearance angle is more decreases.
(b) Clearance angle is less 530. In order to achieve a specific surface finish in
(c) Rake angle is more single point turning, the most important factor
(d) Rake angle is less to be controlled is
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 (a) Depth of cut (b) Cutting speed
Ans. (b) : Tool will rub against the workpiece surface (c) Feed (d) Tool rake angle
and cutting force increased when clearance angle is less.
525. Which of the following method is suitable for Ans. (b) : In order to achieve a specific surface finish in
turning steep taper? single point turning, the most important factor to be
(a) Offsetting the tail stock method controlled is the cutting speed.
(b) Form tool plunging This cutting speed gives high surface finish.
(c) Swiveling the compound slide 531. The factor responsible for the formation of
(d) Combination of the lathe compound slide discontinuous chips is
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 (a) Low cutting speed and large rake angle
Ans. (c) : Swiveling the compound slide method is (b) Low cutting speed and small rake angle
suitable for turning steep taper. (c) High cutting speed and large rake angle
Note–This method can be uses for external or internal (d) High cutting speed and small rake angle
steep taper in lathe machine. ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
Ans. (b) : Condition for discontinuous chip. Ans. (b) :

1. Discontinuous chip produce during cutting of brittle
material.
2. At low cutting speed.
3. At high feed, discontinuous chip produced.
4. At high depth of cut, discontinuous chip produced.
532. If l is length of cut, n is number of cuts, N is In ∆ABC
rpm, and f is feed, then turning time T is given BC D − d
by tan BAC = tan α = =
AB 2l
l×n l×N
(a) (b) D−d
f ×N f ×n tan α =
2l
l× f f ×N
(c) (d)  D−d 
n× N l×n α = tan −1  
 2l 
536. A taper is to be made (using tail stock offset
Ans. (a) : If length of job is 'l'. 'n' is the number of cut, method) in φ 40 blank which is 100 mm length.
N is the r.p.m and 'f' is feed. Taper is limited to a length of 80 mm with a
l×n smaller end of φ 38. What will be the tail stock
then (T ) =
f ×N offset?
533. Back rake angle of turning tool is measured on (a) 1.25mm (b) 2.5mm
its (c) 0.0125mm (d) 0.025mm
(a) Machine longitudinal plane
(b) Machine transverse plane
Ans. (a) : Given,
(c) Orthogonal plane
(d) Normal plane D · 40 mm
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 d · 38 mm
Ans. (b) : Back rake angle of turning tool is measured Taper length (l) · 80 mm
in machine transverse plane. Total length (L) · 100 mm
534. Only two perpendicular components of cutting Tail stock offset (s) · ?
force act on the tool in case of ............... cutting. D−d 40 − 38
(s) · ×L= × 100
(a) Oblique (b) Orthogonal 2l 2 × 80
(c) 3d (d) Inclined s = 1.25 mm.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 537. Tool life in turning will decrease by maximum
extent if we double the
Ans. (b): In the case of orthogonal cutting, only two
(a) depth of cut (b) feed
perpendicular component of the cutting force act on the tool.
(c) cutting velocity (d) tool rake angle
• In orthogonal cutting the force acts in axial and radial ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
direction, there is no force acting in the radial direction. Ans. (c): The linear distance traveled by the point of the
• In orthogonal cutting, the cutting edge of the tool is at tool on the periphery of the workpiece in one minute is
90º to the feed. called its cutting speed.
It is expressed in meters per minute.
Doubling the cutting speed in cutting reduces the life of
the tool to the maximum extent.
538. Which of the following is not used for turning a
taper in a lathe?
(a) Compound Slide method
535. If 'D' is big diameter, 'd' is small diameter and
(b) Tail stock offset method
'l' is length of a tapered work piece, the half (c) Form tool method
included angle (α) of taper is given by (d) Top slide rotation method
(a) tan-1 { (D - d)/l } (b) tan-1 { (D - d)/(2l) } Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
(c) tan-1 { 1/(D - d) } (d) tan-1 { 1/(2D - d) } Ans. (d) : The top slide rotation method is used to
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 operate the taper in the lathe.

539. Unit of cutting speed in turning operation is : 544. Amount of offset required for the job for
(a) mm/revolution turning a taper having half angle (a) = 1º
(b) Revolution/minute (tangent of 1º = 0.0175) and total length of the
(c) m/minute job = 200 mm is
(a) 1.143 mm (b) 3.50 mm
(d) Revolution/hour
(c) 2.0175 mm (d) 3.141 mm
Ans. (c) : The unit of cutting speed (v) in turning
Ans : (b) Let the offset be S
operation is m/min or mm/min.
πDN ∴ α =10 L = 200 mm
v= m/s tan 10= 0.0175
1000 × 60
S = tan α × L
v = πDN/1000 m/min
= 0.0175 × 200
540. As per ISO standard, if a tool name is S = 3.50 mm
VBMT160408, then the last two digit '08'
denotes : 545. Which of the following formula is correct for
turning time
(a) Thickness of the insert
(b) Nose radius of the insert Length of cut × No. of cuts
(a)
(c) Rake angle of the insert Feed × r. p.m.
(d) Clearance angle of the insert Feed × r. p.m.
(b)
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Length of cut × No. of cuts
Ans. (b) : The last two digit '08' in the tool name Length of cut × No. of cuts
VBMT160408 denotes the nose radius of the insert as (c)
per the ISO standard. V-insert shape, B-relief angle, M- Feed × r. p.m.
tolerance, T-hole/chip breaker, 16-A length of thickness Length of cut × r. pm.
(d)
of insert 08-nose radius. Feed × No. of cuts
541. Which one of the following is an OD turning ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
tool shank as per ISO standard? Ans : (a) The formula of turning time–
(a) CNMG120402 (b) PCLNR2525M12
Length of Cut × No.of Cuts
(c) A20S-SCKCR09 (d) CCMT090402 Turning time =
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Feed × r.p.m.
Ans. (b) : PCLNR2525M12 is an OD turning tool 546. Machining of which of the following material
shank according to ISO standard. In this requires less cutting force
PCLNR2525M12 stands for P-clamping system, C- (a) Titanium (b) Stainless steel
Insert shape, L-Cutting edge angle, N-Insert Relief (c) Aluminum (d) Cast iron
Angle, R-Hand of tool, 25-Shank height, 25 shank with ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
M-Tool Holder length, 12-Insert size. Ans. (c) : Generally, less shearing force is required for
542. In a centre lathe, distance moved by the tool in soft materials, aluminum comes in the category of soft
one revolution of the work piece is known as : material so less shearing force is required in its
(a) RPM (b) Spindle speed machining, more fittings are used for soft materials and
less fittings are used for hard substances and cutting
(c) Cutting speed (d) Feed depth are used on machines with higher power.
547. Which of the following terms are associated
Ans. (d): In the center lathe, the distance traveled by the with taper
tool in one rotation of the workpiece is called feed. Its (a) Jarno (b) Morse
unit is in meter. The distance traveled by the workpiece (c) Brown & Sharpe (d) All of the above
in unit time with reference to the cutting edge of the BDL Technician 2022
tool is called cutting speed. ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
543. When the tool of centre lathe moves ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
perpendicular to the axis of rotation. Ans. (d) : The increase in symmetry between the larger
(a) it produces a cylindrical surface and smaller diameter at both ends of a job at a given
(b) it produces a flat surface length is called taper.
(c) it produces a tapered surface Tapers are of the following types:
(d) none of the above 1. Morse taper
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 2. Jarno taper
Ans : (b) When the centre lathe tool moves at a speed 3. Brown & Sharp taper
perpendicular to the axis of rotation, it produces a flat 4. Pin taper
surface. 5. Metric taper

548. Morse taper is mentioned in which number 553. The tip of cemented carbide tool is joined in
form? shank by ...............
(a) 0 to 9 (b) 0 to 7 (a) welding
(c) 1 to 8 (d) 0 to 8 (b) brazing
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 (c) soldering
Ans. (b) : Morse taper is mentioned in number from 0 (d) damping with a screw
to 7. ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
549. What is the included angle (internal angle) of Ans. (b) The super abrasive tip is attached to a corner or
lathe dead centre? edge of the insert body by a brazing process. Brazing
provides enough binding force to withstand the cutting
(a) 45o (b) 90o
force and heat and is a convenient method to attach
(c) 30o (d) 60o
small abrasive tips.
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
554. Which among the following factors governs the
Ans : (d) There are two centers in the lathe, the live selection of feed when turning a workpiece?
center and the dead center the live center is located on (a) Tool geometry (b) Surface finish
the spindle of the head stock. (c) Depth of cut (d) All of the above
550. The difference in measurement between the ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
machined and un-machined diameter is equal Ans. (d) : The following factor are kept in mind for the
to the .............. selection of feed while turning the workpiece.
(a) depth of cut (b) ½ depth of cut 1. Tool geometry
(c) 2 × depth of cut (d) None of the above 2. Surface finishing
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 3. Depth of cut
Ans. (c) : The difference in measurement between 555. Signature of single point cutting tool angles are
machined and non-machined diameter is equal to 2 × .....................
shearing depth. The thickness of the surface of the (a) Ten elements of angle
material cut once or in one cut by the cutting tool is (b) Six elements of angle
called the depth of cutting. (c) Seven elements of angle
551. The tailstock barrel has an internal taper. (d) Five elements of angle
Which of the following standard taper is ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
provided in the barrel bore? Ans. (c) : Signature of single point cutting tool angles
(a) Metric taper are (7) Seven element of angle.
(b) Morse taper (1) Bake rake angle
(c) Torno taper (2) Side rake angle
(d) Brown & Sharpe taper (3) End relief angle
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 (4) Side relif angle
Ans. (b) : The tailstock barrel has an internal taper. The (5) End cutting angle
morse taper is provided in the barrel bore. (6) Side cutting angle
• MT0 to MT7 morse taper is a self-holding type taper (7) Nose radius
that is available in an eight-size range from MT0. 556. Choose the wrong statement :
552. The negative rake angle is generally provided (a) The different spindle speeds on a lathe form
on the tool made of .................. geometrical progression
(a) HSS (b) Tool Steel (b) The lead screw of a lathe has single start
(c) Tungsten Carbide (d) HCS threads
UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018 (c) The lathe centers are provided with standard
tapers known as Morse taper
(d) Tumbler gears is lathe are used to reduce the
Ans. (c) : The negative, rake angle is usually given on a spindle speed
tool made of tungsten carbide. Under cutting the rake SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
angle is kept negative under shock conditions. Negative Ans. (d) : The tumbler gear lathe is part of the
rake angles are used from 2º to 10º. For hard materials, machine's head stock. This is a set of free gear. It is
the rake angle is kept negative and for soft materials the used to change direction. The cone pulley is used to
rake angle is kept high. increase or decrease the speed of the spindle.

557. A turning tool with nose radius is a : Positive rake angle–It is used when there is required of
(a) Multiple point tool less cutting force and used for low strength materials
(b) Single point tool like mild steel etc.
(c) Two points tool Negative rake angle–It is used for hard metal which
(d) None of the above requires high cutting force and machined of very high
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 speed.
Ans. (b) : A turning tool with nose radius is a single 562. Choose the operation in which we use single
point tool. point cutting tools?
(a) Milling (b) Turning
558. It is required to cut screw threads of 2 mm
(c) Drilling (d) Taping
pitch on a lathe. The lead screw has a pitch of 6
mm. If the spindle speed is 60 rpm, then the DRDO Machinist.2016
speed of the lead screw will be : UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015
(a) 10 rpm (b) 20 rpm Ans : (b) Turning–
(c) 120 rpm (d) 180 rpm • Turning is the most common lathe machining
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 operation in which the tool removes material from the
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 outside diameter of a rotating workpiece.
PC • It is done with the help of single point cutting tool.
Ans. (b) : Gear ratio =
PL 563. Portion of the tool on which sharp edge made is
called?
N L PC
= (a) Flank (b) Shank
NS PL (c) Face (d) Nose
2 UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015
⇒ NL = × 60 = 20rpm
6 Ans : (d) Portion of the tool on which sharp edge
559. The hardness of grinding wheel is specified by : made is called nose.
(a) BHN (b) Letter of alphabet 564. In which of the following operation on lathe,
(c) LPN (d) Search test the spindle speed will be minimum :
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 (a) Knurling (b) Taper turning
Ans. (b) : The hardness of grinding wheel is specified (c) Parting off (d) Thread cutting
by letter of alphabet. IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
560. In a lathe operation, ............ can be calculated Ans : (d) The spindle speed is kept the lowest during
Length of cut the cutting of angle on the lathe, for cutting with a
by the formula : cutting tool on a lathe, it is necessary that the
Feed × R.P.M. longitudinal feed of the tool in one revolution of the
(a) Machining time spindle by it should be equal to the pitch of the thread to
(b) Speed be cut.
(c) Cutting force 565. What is the range of lathe spindle speed?
(d) Power during cutting (a) 1200 to 3600 round per minute
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 (b) 1800 to 3600 round per minute
Ans. (a) : In lathe operation (c) 2000 to 3600 round per minute
Length of cut (d) 3000 to 3600 round per minute
Machining time · UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Feed × R.P.M.
πDN Ans : (a) The range of lathe spindle feed is 1200 to
Cutting velocity = m/s 3600 round per minute.
1000 × 60
566. In a center lathe the cutting tool is feed in........
where D = Diameter with reference to the lathe axis–
N = Speed (in rpm) 1. Cross direction only.
561. Single point thread cutting tools should ideally 2. Longitudinal direction.
have : Choose the correct option–
(a) Zero rake (b) Positive rake (a) Only 1 (b) Only 2
(c) Negative rake (d) Normal rake (c) Both 1 & 2 (d) Any direction
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. (a) : Zero rake angle–It is used for gear cutting or Ans : (c) Angular or taper lathe–Under this, the
thread manufacturing. Brass and cast iron are machined cutting tool moves in a straight line at an angle θ other
with zero rake. than 90º to the axis of the work section x-x.

Longitudinal or cylindrical lathe–Under this lathe, the 570. The operation illustrated in the below figure is
cutting tool moves in a straight line parallel to the axis called:
of rotation x-x of the work section.
567. Side cutting edge angle is depicted in:
(a) Parting operation

(b) Facing operation
(c) Groove machining
(d) Chamfering
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
Ans : (d) Sharp edge are removed by chamfering
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 action. Chamfering can be done by from cutting tool,
Ans : (b) which can be done at any angle but usually do it at 45º.
571. The point angle of live centre is?
(a) 30° (b) 45°
(c) 60° (d) 190°
Ans : (c) The live center or live center head is located
on the spindle of the stock with a point angle of 60º.
568. The angle between the lathe centres is: 572. Which of the following centres is suitable while
cutting taper by set over method?
(a) 15° (b) 30°
(a) Plane centre (b) Half centre
(c) 45° (d) 60° (c) Ball centre (d) Revolving centre
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans : (d) The angle between the lathe centres is 60º. (RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
• Lathe centres are generally made of high carbon steel Ans : (c) Ball centre is sometimes used for tapering by
the "set over tail stock" method. The standard centres
which is hardened, tempered and ground. cannot sit squarely in the centre hole when the tail stock
• A good lubricant should be used for the dead centre. is set over.
569. What is an angle 'β' represents in the cutting
tool figure given below?
573. Which of the following angles is used to

prevent the body of the tool from rubbing
against the surface of the workipece?
(a) Rake angle (b) Helix angle
(c) Clearance angle (d) None of the above
(a) Clearance angle (b) Rake angle DRDO Turner.2016
(c) Wedge angle (d) None of these Ans : (c) Clearance angle are represented by α. The
angle between the face and the flank adjacent to the
work section or cut off from the work section is called
Ans : (c) The angle between the face and the flank of the clearance angle. Normally the clearance angle is
the tool-point is called the lip angle, and is represented kept at 1º to 12º
by β. The clearance angle is represented by α, its value 574. Which of the following tools is used to enlarge
is generally kept from 5º to 12º. Rake angle is the drill hole?
represented by γ, its value is generally kept 0º to 20ºC. (a) Facing tool (b) Turning tool
(c) Form tool (d) Boring tool
Ans: (d) To increase the diameter of the hole made by
the drill tool, boring tool is used for finishing the drilled
hole, reamer tool is used.
575. The fingers of the fixed study fit:
(a) at 90° angle (b) at 120° angle
(c) at 60° angle (d) at 75° angle
Ans : (b) The fingers of the fixed study fit at 120º 581. Lathe cutting tools are made by forging which
intervals (360º/3 = 120º) with three fingers fitted at 120º of the following metals?
angles to each other. (a) Hard carbon (b) High carbon steel
576. Which angle of a turning tool depends on the (c) Tungsten carbide (d) Stellite
chosen feed rate? DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) top rake angle (b) side rake angle Ans : (b) Lathe cutting tools are made from high carbon
(c) front clearance (d) side clearance steel that is hard and tempered, case hardening of model
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) steel.
Ans : (d) The side clearance angle of a turning tool 582. For turning hard material, the tool is kept at
depends on the chosen feed rate.` _____ angle?
(a) Positive rake (b) Negative rake
577. Which of the following should be the tool angle (c) Zero rake (d) All of the above
to prevent chips formation in plane turning? DRDO Fitter.2016
(a) Side clearance angle
Ans : (b) Negative rake angle–This angle is the cutting
(b) Front clearance angle
edge of the tool. This angle is made in taper towards the
(c) Aproach angle
nose, usually in hard metals. Designed for key turning
(d) Top rake angle
and jerking operations.
(RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014)
583. Ceramics lathe cutting tools work safely____
Ans : (d) The top rake should be angled to prevent ºC?
chips formation while doing plane turning using a (a) 1200°C (b) 1000°C
cutting tool on a job.
(c) 1600°C (d) 80°C
578. What effective change will occur to the tool (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
geometry if the cutting tool is set below the Ans : (a) Ceramics lathe cutting tools work safely up to
centre height on lathe? 1200ºC
(a) The forward recess angle will increases
584. High speed steel lathe tools work safely
(b) The forward recess angle will decreases
_______ ºC?
(c) The forward recess angle will remain
(a) 800°C (b) 700°C
unchanged
(c) 600°C (d) 900°C
(d) The forward recess angle will be zero
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (a) If the cutting tool is set below the center Ans : (c) High speed steel lathe tools work safely of
height of the lathe, the forward recess angle will 600ºC.
increase and the cutting tool will be lowered by the
585. The knurling shown in figure is:
lathe, if set above the center height, the forward recess
angle will decrease.
579. Which of the following combination of movements
is used to turn a ball on a centre lathe with single
point tool? (a) Straight knurling (b) Double knurling
(a) Carriage and compound slide (c) Cross knurling (d) Diamond knurling
(b) Cross slide and compound slide MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
(c) Carriage and cross slide DRDO Turner.2016, (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
(d) Compound slide and apron Ans: (d) The knurling shown in figure is Diamond
DRDO Fitter.2016 knurling.
Ans : (b) Combination of cross slide and compound 586. The angle 'A' of the lathe tool shown in figure:
slide movement is used to turn a ball on a centre lathe
with single point tool.
580. A screw thread is formed by cutting a _____
groove on a cylindrical surface?
(a) Helical grooves
(b) Square grooves
(c) V-grooves (a) Front clearance angle
(d) Hemispherical grooves (b) Side Rake Angle
DRDO Fitter.2016 (c) Front Rake Angle
Ans:(a) The thread is formed by cutting helical grooves (d) Side clearance angle
on the cylindrical surface, which allows the screw to NLC Technician 24-09.2022
move easily in the thread. DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans: (b) Side Rake Angle–The angle by which the faceAns: (c) Turning can be done by the compound slide
of the tool is inclined towards side, is called side rake
shown in the figure the compound slide is hand drive.
angle. It is provided on tools to control chip flow.591. Multiple tooling layout is possible in
• The negative rack is usually provided on cemented (a) Capstan lathe
carbide tools.
(b) Plano–miller
587. Which of the following angles of lathe tool (c) Planer
helps in removal of chips particles?
(a) Top rake angle (d) All of these
(b) Front clearance angle (IOF Fitter 2017)
(c) Side clearance Ans : (d) Multiple tool layout is possible in capstan
(d) Back clearance angle lathe, Plano-miller, planer.
592. Which of the following tool angle improves
Ans : (a) Rake angle–The angle made by the face of surface finish?
tool and a line perpendicular to the workpiece. The (a) Clearance angle
strength of the tool depends upon this angle. The rake (b) Rake angle
angle required to machine brass by high speed tool is 0º. (c) Nose angle
The angle by which the face of the tool is inclined (d) None of these
towards back, is called back rake angle.
(IOF Fitter 2017)
588. The cutting speed of a high speed steel tool for
Ans : (b) Rake angle–The angle made by the face of
brass turning on a lathe is kept at _______
(a) 25 m/min (b) 35 m/min. the tool and the plane parallel to the base of the cutting
(c) 100 m/min. (d) 70 m/min tool.
593. Suitable change gears for cutting 17 TPI on 4
Ans : (d) On lathe for turning brass, the cutting speed TPI lead screw lathe are
of the high speed tool is kept up to 70 m/min. Under all (a) 30, 105 (b) 20, 85
the machining operations, the movement of the (c) 15, 85 (d) None of these
workpiece relative to the cutting edge on the tool is BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
called cutting speed. It is generally measured in M/min. (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
πDN Ans : (b) Change gears suitable for 17 TPI cutting on 4
Cutting speed V = m / min TPI lead screw lathes are 20, 85.
1000
Where, D = diameter of workpiece 594. Last element of the cutting tool signature is
V = Cutting speed (a) Nose radius
N = R.P.M. (b) Side clearance angle
(c) Front rake angle
589. Oblique Cutting is used– (d) None of these
(a) For facing (b) Form turning (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(c) Finish turning (d) Rough turningAns : (a) It is the intersection of the side cutting edge
(NTPC Fitter, 2014)
and end cutting edge.
Ans : (c) Oblique cutting or three dimensional cutting
Tool signature–
edge of the tool is inclined at an angle less than 90º to
1. Back Rake angle
the direction of tool travel. Frequently more than one
2. Side rake angle
cutting edges are in action. The cutting edge may not
3. End relief angle
clear the width of the workpiece. The chip flows on the
4. Side relief angle
tool face at an angle less than 90º with the normal on
5. End cutting edge angle
the cutting edge. The maximum chip thickness may not6. Side cutting edge angle
occur at the middle. 7. Nose radius
590. By which method the taper shown in figure is 595. What is the device use to catch any kind of
turned into a taper? rod?
(a) Three jaw chuck (b) Four Jaw chuck
(c) Collet chuck (d) None of these
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (c) Collet chuck–These are small chucks that
fitted on the headstock spindle and used for holding bar
(a) Form tool stock (long bar or rods)
(b) Offset method • These chucks are particularly useful in cases where
(c) Compound slide accurate centering and quick setting are required.
(d) Taper turning attachment • These chucks hold cylindrical, square, hexagonal
DRDO Turner.2016 shape workpiece.
596. By which chuck hold the job self alignment 600. Angle plate is made of
automatically? (a) Cast steel
(a) Three Jaw chuck (b) Four Jaw chuck (b) Spheroidal cast iron
(c) Magnetic chuck (d) None of these (c) High speed steel
DRDO Machinist.2016
(d) Tool steel
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans : (a) Three Jaw chuck–It is also known as self-
centering chuck or universal chuck. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
• These chuck is used for holding round, hexagonal or Ans. (b) : Angle plate is made of spheroidal cast iron.
other regular shaped work-piece. (generally) that has been stabilized to prevent further
• The work is centered automatically because all three movement or distortion. Slotted holes or 'T' bolt slots
jaw move forward or backward by an equal amount are machined into the surfaces to enable the secure
when the chuck is adjusted. attachment or clamping of workpiece to the plate and
597. The tools use on a lathe machine are generally the plate to the worktable.
made of? Types of Angle plates :-
(a) Medium carbon steel 1. Plain solid angle plate
(b) High carbon steel 2. Slotted type angle plate.
(c) High speed steel 3. Swivel type angle plate.
(d) Tool steel 4. Box angle plate.
DRDO Fitter.2016 601. Which chuck has reversible jaw?
Ans : (b) The tools used on lathe machines are (a) Three jaw chuck (b) Four jaw chuck
generally made of high carbon steel. Operations like
(c) Two jaw chuck (d) Head stock
turning boring, drilling, rimming and threading can be
done on the lathe machine. There are many types of HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
lathe machines– Ans. (b) : Four jaw chuck–It is also known as
1. Central lathe machine independent chuck or reversible jaw.
2. Capstan lathe machine • It is used for wide range of regular and irregular work.
3. Turret lathe machine 602. What type of threads cutting inside the three
598. The assembly that contains the tools on a lathe jaw chuck have?
machine is called? (a) Acme thread (b) Square thread
(a) Tool holder (b) Tool post (c) Scroll thread (d) Buttress thread
(c) Tool place (d) Tool grip
DRDO Fitter.2016
Ans. (c) : Scroll threads are cut inside the three jaw
Ans : (b) Tool post–The part that holds and carries the
chuck.
cutting tool is called the tool post. It is tightened on the
upper part of the compound rest with the help of a long • Chuck is device used to hold & rotate the workpiece
bolt. in lathe.
• Three jaw chuck is a self dependent chuck used to
3. Work Holding and Work Supporting hold round & regular jobs.
Devices and Used on Lathe Machine 603. Lathe bed is made of
(a) H.C steel (b) cast iron
599. Knurling is specified as______. (c) mild steel (d) nickel
(a) Cutting process NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
(b) Fusion process HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
(c) Forming operation Ans. (b) : Lathe bed is made of cast iron. Cast iron has
(d) Welding process very high damping capacity. Cast iron can with stand
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 more compression load and resist vibration.
Ans. (c) : Knurling is specified as forming operation. 604. Morse standard taper is available in numbers
The process of making the outer surface rough of from:
measuring instruments, gauges and tools is called (a) 1 to 7 (b) 1 to 8
knurling. (c) 0 to 7 (d) 0 to 8
• The knurl tool is hold in the tool post. NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
Purpose of knurling– Ans. (c) : Morse standard taper is available in number
• To provide good hand grip on various types of form 0 to 7.
mechanical components. • The principle of the Morse taper is that of the cone
• To increase the diameter of job. into the cone.

• Morse tapers may be identified either by measurement 610. Which one of the following shoulders is used on
the large or the small diameter, the length or the taper components to thread?
per inch. (a) Square shoulder (b) Radius shoulder
• One of the most common self locking tapers is the (c) Undercut shoulder (d) Beveled shoulder
Morse taper. HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
605. The cutting fluid used while cutting aluminium Ans. (c) : Undercut shoulder is used on components to
is: be threaded.
(a) Air jet (b) Ethanol 611. 'V' groves of cast iron pulley have to be fine
(c) Kerosene (d) Water turned. Which one of the following work
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 holding methods gives the highest
Ans. (c) : Kerosene oil is used for cutting the concentricity?
aluminium. (a) Holding between a four -jaw chuck and a
• Machine of cast iron is done in dry forms coolant is revolving centre
not used. (b) Holding between a three-jaw chuck and
606. One of the following is not a work holding supporting with a pipe centre
accessory of a lathe. Name it. (c) Holding on a split mandrel and machining
(a) Face Plate (b) Mandrel between
(c) Catch Plate (d) Self Centring Chuck (d) Holding on cone mandrel and machining
between centers
Ans. (c): Work's holding accessory of a lathe–
Ans. (d): Holding on cone mandrel and machining
1. Chuck
between centers of the work holding methods gives the
2. Face plate highest concentricity.
3. Centers
612. The matching scroll threads on the back faces
4. Carrier
of the chuck jaws of a concentric chuck are
5. Steady rest
(a) equal in number but unequal in pitch
6. Driving plate
(b) unequal in number but equal in pitch
7. Mandrel
(c) unequal in number and unequal in pitch
• Catch plate hold job and workpiece in between the
(d) equal in numbers and equal in pitch
center.
607. Select the taper of a standard taper pin.
Ans. (b) : The matching scroll threads on the back faces
(a) 1 : 10 (b) 1 : 20
of the chuck jaws of a concentric chuck are unequal in
(c) 1 40 (d) 1 : 50 number but equal in pitch.
613. Scroll and gear mechanism is employed in
Ans. (b) : Standard taper pin 1 : 20. (a) three - jaw chuck (b) Four - jaw chuck
It is a reduction in 1 mm in diameter for every 20 mm (c) magnetic chuck (d) collect chuck
length of shaft.
608. Follower steady is fixed on the ...............
Ans. (a) : Scroll and gear mechanism is employed in
(a) Tail stock (b) Bed
three - jaw chuck.
(c) Head stock (d) Saddle
• The collect chuck preferred for quick setting and
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 accurate centering of the job.
Ans. (d) : A follower steady is fixed on the saddle of • The four jaw chuck is also called as independent
the lathe. In the follower steady the support is chuck since each jaw can be adjusted independently.
continuous to the entire length of cutting. • Four jaw chucks are used for a wide range of regular
609. Large, irregular and eccentric workpiece is and irregular shapes.
clamped on lathe by ______ 614. A fixed steady has -
(a) 4 jaw chuck (b) 3 Jaw chuck (a) one adjustable pad
(c) Magnetic chuck (d) Collet chuck (b) two adjustable pad
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 (c) three adjustable pad
Ans. (a) : 4 jaw chuck is used to hold large, irregular (d) Four adjustable pad
and eccentric workpieces on lathe. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
3 jaw chuck is used to hold perfect round & regular
jobs Ans. (c) : A fixed steady has three adjustable pad.
Magnetic chuck provides a consistent clamping • A steady rest is used for long jobs.
pressure but it can used for only metallic workpieces. The most common types of steady rests are–
Collet chuck can be used where accurate & quick • Fixed steady rest
centering are required. • Follower steady rest (travelling steady)

615. During machining operation using faceplate, Ans. (a) : A face plate is held at head stock spindle.
the angle plate is held on the -
(a) faceplate (b) carriage
(c) tailstock (d) bed
Ans. (a) : During machining operation using faceplate,
the angle plate is held on the faceplate.
• The function of faceplate in a centre-lathe is to hold
workpieces which cannot be easily held by any of the 620. Which type of chuck is used for self alignment?
other methods. (a) Four jaw chuck (b) Magnetic chuck
• The faceplate is used for holding jobs such as thin and (c) Three jaw chuck (d) None of these
irregularly shaped workpieces that cannot be held RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
between the centers and chucks. Ans. (c) : Three jaw chuck is used for self alignment.
616. -Which one of the following methods is used to • Scroll and gear mechanism is employed in the three
press the mandrel squarely to the workpiece? jaw chuck.
(a) By hammering (b) By arbor press • It is also known as three jaw universal chuck, self
(c) By tailstock (d) By vice centering chuck and concentric chuck having three jaws
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 that work at the same time.
Ans. (b): By arbor press method is used to press the • Three jaws chucks are used to hold only perfect round
mandrel squarely to the workpiece. and regular jobs, workpieces of circular and hexagonal
617. Which type of holding device is shown in shapes.
following figure?
621. Which of the following system is used for

holding the job quickly?
(a) Dog chuck (b) Three jaw chuck
(a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Four-jaw chuck (c) face plate (d) Collect chuck
(c) Face plate (d) Magnetic chuck
Ans. (d) : Collect chuck system is used for holding the
Ans. (c) : Face plate shown in following figure. job quickly.
Collect chuck–These are small chucks that fit on the
head stock spindle and used for holding bar stock (long
bar or rods)
• These chucks are particularly useful in case where
accurate centering and quick setting are required.
• It is circular plate threaded at its centre with plane and • Most accurately centering on lathe can be done by
T-slots with are machined rapidly. collect chuck.
• The faceplate is used for holding jobs such as thin and • It is possible to change the collect for different cross-
irregularly shaped workpieces that cannot be held sections depending on the cross-section of the raw
between the centres and chucks. material.
618. A follower steady consists of - 622. To protect from bending during thread cutting
(a) one pad (b) two pads of the job ____ is used.
(c) three pads (d) four pads (a) mandrel (b) steady rest
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (c) revolving centre (d) dog chuck
Ans. (b) : A follower steady consists of two pads. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
• A steady rest is used for long workpiece (jobs). Ans. (b) : To protect from bending during thread
• A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and is only cutting of the job steady rest is used.
used to support at one fixed place. Steady rest–Steady rest is made of cast iron. It may be
619. A face plate is held at - model to be slide on the lathe bed ways and clamped at
(a) head stock spindle (b) tail stock any desired position where the work piece needs
(c) tool post (d) bed support. It has three jaws, these jaws can be adjusted
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 according to the diameter of the workpiece.

Machining is done upon the distance starting from the 628. Which one of the following is used to hold the
head stock to the point of support of the rest. One or work piece for machine diameter concentric to
more steady rests may be used to support the free end of hole /bore?
a long workpiece (job). (a) Face plate (b) Mandrel
623. Drill is gripped for drilling on lathe in ______ (c) Three jaws chuck (d) Four jaws chuck
(a) lathe chuck (b) toll post RRB ALP Patna 2014
(c) tail stock (d) none of the above Ans. (d) : Four jaws chuck–The four jaws chuck is
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 also called an independent chuck since each jaw can be
Ans. (c) : Drill is gripped for drilling on lathe in tail adjusted independently.
stock. • Four jaws chuck are used for a wide range of regular
Tail stock–Tail stock is located on the inner guide ways and irregular shapes.
at the right side of the bed opposite to the head stock.
The main use of tail stock are–
1. It supports the other end of the longer workpiece
when it is machined between centers.
2. It is useful in holding tools like drills, reamers and
taps when performing drilling, reaming and tapping.
Face plate–It is a circular plate threaded at its center
624. Counter boring is done for-
with plain and T-slots which are machined rapidly.
(a) deburring the hole ends
• The job on the work piece is held by the faceplate
(b) enlarging holes to accurate size
using bolts and suitable in the slots.
(c) finishing cored holes
(d) accommodating socket head screws
Ans. (d) : Counter boring is done for accommodating
socket head screws.
625. A tool, which is used for enlarging a previously
drilled hole is known as - 629. Which among the following centers is suitable
(a) facing tool (b) turning tool when work piece held between centers is to be
(c) form tool (d) boring tool turned at high speed?
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (a) Ball centre (b) Half centre
Ans. (d) : A tool, which is used for enlarging a (c) Pipe centre (d) Revolving centre
previously drilled hole is known as boring tool. RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
626. The size of three jaws chuck is specified by - Ans. (d) : Revolving centre is suitable when work piece
(a) the size of each jaw held between centers is to be turned at high speed.
(b) the thickness of each jaw Revolving centre–The revolving centre is used in the
(c) the diameter of the body of the chuck tailstock for supporting a heavy job revolving at high
(d) width of the body of the chuck speed and where in this center (unlike dead center)
revolves with the job.
Ans. (c) : The size of three jaws chuck is specified by
width of the body of the chuck.
627. Due to which of the following reason a lathe
half centre is used ?
(a) To support the workpiece
(b) To turn long work piece
(c) Because it is easy to lubricate the workpiece 630. The included angel of live centre nose is -
(d) To face the workpiece upto the end of the (a) 300 (b) 450
0
centre hole (c) 60 (d) 900
Ans. (d) : Half center is used while facing the job Ans. (c) : The center which is accommodated in the
without disturbing the setting as per the classification main spindle sleeve is known as a live center and the
of the lathe center. center fixed in the tailstock spindle is known as a dead
• Another good use of a dead center is the tail stock is centre. In construction both centers are identical, made
with a half (dead) center which allows you to face as one unit that consists of a conical point of 60º
almost to the center of the part being faced with center included angle, a body provided with a morse taper
providing support. shank and a tang.

631. Which of the following centre is suitable while Ans. (c) : The faces of anvil and spindle of outside
cutting taper buy set over method? micrometer is made of tungsten carbide.
(a) Paling centre (b) Half center 637. Which one of the following standard tapers is
(c) Ball center (d) Revolving center self- holding type?
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 (a) Morse taper
Ans. (c) : Ball center is sometimes used for tapering by (b) Brown and Sharpe taper
the "set overtail stock" method. The standard centers (c) Jarno taper
cannot sit squarely in the center hole when the tail stock (d) Metric taper
is set over.
632. A face plate is held at -
Ans. (a) : Morse taper is a standard taper, this taper is
(a) head stock spindle (b) tail stock
self- holding type.
(c) tool post (d) bed
Taper sleeves and sockets
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
• Sleeves and sockets are made with the same taper so
Ans. (a) : Face plate– that the taper shank of the drill when engaged will give
• The face plate is used for holding jobs such as thin and a good wedging (jam) action.
irregularly shaped workpieces that cannot be held • Due to this reason morse tapers are called self-holding
between the centres and chucks. tapers.
• The face plate is held at the headstock spindle as
• Morse taper is used in drill and reamers.
shown in the figure.
638. Which one of the following methods of catching
633. Which one of the following is used to hold
the threads consumers more time when cutting
cylindrical rough casting for turning?
odd pitch threads?
(a) Three jaws chuck (b) Four jaws chuck
(a) Using thread-chasing dial
(c) Collect chuck (d) Magnetic chuck
(b) Reversing the machine
(c) Marking the work holding device and lead
Ans. (b) : A four jaw chuck has independently screw
adjustable jaw, it can be used to center parts that are not
(d) Pre-determined travel of the carriage
round.
634. The fixing of machine parts properly with
other requirements is called– Ans. (c) : Marking the work holding device and lead
(a) alignment (b) installation screw methods of catching the threads consumers more
time when cutting odd pitch threads.
(c) checking (d) unpacking
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 639. Which among the following statements is NOT
correct?
Ans. (a) : The fixing of different parts of a machine
(a) A faceplate is similar to the magnetic chuck.
properly as per the requirement is called alignment.
(b) For accurate setting of the job on the
• If the different parts of a machine are not in a proper
faceplate, dial test indicator is used.
way, the term is called as misalignment.
(c) To check the balance of the faceplate work,
• Misalignment causes problems where working.
spindle drive should be disconnected.
• Remove the contents from the box is known as
(d) 'V' block is essential for holding round job on
unpacking.
faceplate
635. Which one of the following combination of RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
movements are used to turn a ball on a centre
Ans. (a) : Face plate–It is circular plate threaded at
lathe with single point tool?
center with plain and t-slots which are machine rapidly.
(a) Carriage and compound slide are used
• Face plate is fitted to the lathe spindle with its center
(b) Cross slide and compound slide are used
threaded portion.
(c) Carriage and cross slide are used
• The face plate is suitable to hold both regular and
(d) Compound slide and apron are used irregular shaped workpieces, which cannot help
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 conveniently by chucks or on centers.
Ans. (b) : Cross slide and compound slide combination Magnetic chuck–These chuck are used for holding
of movements are used to turn a ball on a centre lathe very thin workpieces which cannot be held in an
with single point tool. ordinary chuck. This can also be used when the
636. The faces of anvil and spindle of outside distortion caused by the jaws of an ordinary chuck is not
micrometer is made of ..... desirable.
(a) Cast iron (b) Steel 640. When machining an irregularly shaped work
(c) Tungsten carbide (d) Aluminium alloy piece held in faceplate. Counter balancing is
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 done by clamping weights. This is done
(a) Before mounting the faceplate on the spindle Ans. (c) : The fingers of a fixed steady rest are set to
nose. support a lengthy work piece held in a four-jaw chuck.
(b) Before mounting the faceplate on the spindle The fingers are adjusted and set when the work piece is
nose and revolving the work piece at the trued at both ends and work is stationary.
slowest rpm. 644. The slots are provided on angle plate for
(c) After mounting the faceplate on the spindle (a) Accommodating bolts
nose and keeping the spindle in neutral
(b) Hanging with hooks
position.
(c) Reducing weight
(d) After taking the rough cut.
(d) Aligning the work
Ans. (c) : When machining an irregularly shaped work
piece held in faceplate. Counter balancing is done by Ans. (a) : The slots are provided on angle plate for
clamping weights. This is done for after mounting the accommodating bolts.
faceplate on the spindle nose and keeping the spindle in Angle plate–It is employed for holding work in
neutral position. combination with a face plate. When the size or shape
of the work is such that not possible to mount the work
641. A fixed steady rest is used to
directly on the face plate and the work mounted on it.
(a) Support the tool rigidly to avoid chatter
during operation.
(b) Support long shafts that are being threaded
for their full length.
(c) Support work pieces during facing large
diameter work pieces with short length.
(d) Support long work pieces held in chuck, to 645. A stake is a ….
perform operations at the overhanging end. (a) marking tool (b) hand tool
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (c) cutting tool (d) supporting tool
Ans. (d) : A fixed steady rest is used to support long RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
work pieces held in chuck, to perform operations at the Ans. (d) : A stake is a supporting tool.
overhanging end.
• In the sheet metal work, anvil is known as stake. It
• The fixed steady rest can be clamped at any desired
is used for bending, reaming and forming.
position on the lathe bed by the base clamping screw.
• They actually work as supporting tools well as
642. You want to fix an irregularly shaped work forming tools.
piece on a lathe, which one of the following
accessories is the most appropriate? 646. The most suitable tool for correct folding of
(a) Three-jaw self-centering chuck sheet metal at 90° is ….
(b) Driving plate (a) folding bars (b) angle iron
(c) Faceplate (c) hand hammer (d) hatchet stake
(d) Catch plate RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I) Ans. (a) : The most suitable tool for correct folding of
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 sheet metal at 90° is folding bars.
Ans. (c) : Face plate–It is circular plate threaded at 647. Which head is used for locating centre of the
center with plain and t-slots which are machine rapidly. cylindrical jobs ……
• Face plate is fitted to the lathe spindle with its center (a) Square head (b) try square
threaded portion. (c) Steel rule (d) Centre head
• The face plate is suitable to hold both regular and RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
irregular shaped workpieces, which cannot help Ans. (d) : Centre head is used for locating centre of the
conveniently by chucks or on centers. cylindrical jobs.
643. The fingers of a fixed steady rest are set to 648. What is the name of the tool used to remove the
support a lengthy work piece held in a four-jaw drill chuck from the spindle of the drill?
chuck. The fingers are adjusted and set when
(a) Chuck key (b) Chisel
the work piece is
(a) Trued to the chuck and the work is stationary. (c) Drift Pin (d) Saw
(b) Trued at the tailstock and when the work is RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
running at slow rpm. Ans. (a) : Chuck key tool used to remove the drill
(c) Trued at both ends and work is stationary. chuck from the spindle of the drill.
(d) Trued at both ends when the work is running • Drill drift is a wedge shaped tool used for removing
at slow rpm. the taper shank tools from the nose of the machine
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 spindle.
649. The above of V-Block is ............. 654. After setting, the work can be turned over with
(a) 45° (b) 30° the box enabling further making out or
(c) 90° (d) 60° machining. Name the type of angle plate.
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (a) Plain solid angle plate
Ans. (c) : The above of V-block is 90°. (b) Slotted type angle plate
• V-blocks are precision metal working jigs typically (c) Swivel type angle plate
used to hold round metal rods or pipes for performing (d) Box angle plate
drilling or milling operations. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
They consist of rectangular steel or cast iron block with Ans. (d) : Box angle plate–They have applications
a 90º channel rotated 45° degrees from the sides, similar to those of other angle plate. After setting, the
forming a V-shaped channel in the top. work can be turned over with the box enabling further
650. A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and making out or machining. This is a significant
only used to ______ advantage. This has all the faces machined square to
(a) Support at one fixed place only each other.
(b) Only support the chucks 655. The vice clamps are used to ……
(c) Support the both ends (a) protect hard jaws
(d) Only support centers (b) clamp the workpieces rigidly
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (c) protect the finished surfaces
Ans. (a) : A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed (d) prevent the movable jaw being field
and only used to support at one fixed place only. RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
651. The angle of angle plate used on lathe is _____ Ans. (c) : The vice clamps are used to protect the
(a) 30 degree (b) 45 degree finished surfaces.
(c) 60 degree (d) 90 degree • A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and only
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 used to support at one fixed place only.
Ans. (d) : The angle of angle plate used on lathe is 90 • The bench vices are specified by the width of jaw.
degree.
656. In which tool post on lathe, quick replacement
• Angle plate are used to hold workpiece square to the of the tool is ensured ?
table during making out operation.
(a) Single way tool post
652. The proper device to hold gear or pulley on (b) Four bolt tool post
lathe is
(c) Open slide tool post
(a) Steady (b) Angle Plate
(d) None of these
(c) Mandrel (d) For jaw chuck
Ans. (c) : Open slide tool post on lathe, quick
Ans. (c) : The proper device to hold gear or pulley on
replacement of the tool is ensured.
lathe is mandrel.
• In open slide tool post, the tool post slide can be
• Mandrel is used to hold the workpiece for
swiveled to any desired position after loosening the
machining diameter concentric to its hole or bore.
central bolt which slides in a T-slot.
• The mandrel is mounted between centers and the
workpiece rotates with it. 657. Three jaw chuck is also known as ………
(a) Universal chuck
653. The bench vices are specified by ………
(b) Self-centering chuck
(a) the length of spindle (c) Universal or self centering chuck
(b) the width of jaw (d) None of these
(c) the length of fixed jaw RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
(d) the moving distance of movable jaw
Ans. (c) : Three jaw chuck is also known as universal
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 chuck, self centering chuck and concentric chuck.
Ans. (b) : The bench vices are specified by the width of • It is generally made of high carbon steel.
jaw. • Three jaw chucks are used to hold only perfect
• Bench vice is an example of clamping device. round and regular jobs, workpiece of circular and
• Bench vice is a work-holding device used to hold hexagonal shapes.
work for operations such as sawing, filing, chipping, 658. Which of the following chuck is also known as
tapping, threading etc. dog chuck ?
• Vices have two parallel jaws one fixed and the other (a) Four jaw chuck (b) Three jaw chuck
movable, threaded in and out by a screw and lever. (c) Two jaw chuck (d) None of these
• A bench vice has buttress type of threads. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
Ans. (a) : Four jaw chuck is also known as dog chuck. Ans. (c) : The name of the part marked ‘X’ of a four
Four jaw chuck–Four jaw chuck is also known as jaw chuck is known as jaw.
independent chuck has four jaws which are adjusted
individually on the chuck face by means of adjusting
screws.
• Four jaw chuck are used for a wide range of regular
and irregular shapes.
659. In Lathe, the back gears are used for affecting
……. in spindle speeds, thereby facilitating
wider range of speeds. 662. What must be done to prevent the chuck from
(a) Increase (b) Reduction damaging the lathe guide-ways, while
(c) Increase of reduction (d) None of these mounting?
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (a) Lift the chuck with a hand crane
(b) Ask the instructor for help
Ans. (b): In Lathe, the back gears are used for affecting (c) Place a wooden block or board on guide-ways
reduction in spindle speeds, thereby facilitating wider (d) Support with a screw jack
range of speeds. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
660. Name the plat marked ‘X’ shown in figure Ans. (c): Place a wooden block or board on guide-ways
must be done to prevent the chuck from damaging the
lathe guide-ways, while mounting.
663. Steady rest is ...........
(a) an additional support provided for long jobs
(b) used while turning un-symmetrical objects
(c) used during thread cutting only
(d) used when a lathe is subjected to vibrations
(a) Template (b) Gauge plate
Ans. (a) : Steady rest is an additional support provided
(c) Snap gauge (d) Forming plate for long jobs.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 • Steady rest is a lathe accessory used to give extra
Ans. (a) : support for along and slender workpiece in addition to
the center support during turning.
The most common types of steady rests are:
• Fixed steady rest
• Follower steady rest.
664. Three jaw chuck is also known as.......
(a) self centering chuck (b) self chuck
(c) automatic chuck (d) union chuck
Name the plate marked ‘X’ shown in figure is known as RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
template. Ans. (a) : Three jaw chuck is also known as self
661. Name the part marked ‘X’ of a four jaw chuck centering chuck.
• Three jaw chuck a device that holds a workpiece in a
lathe or tool in a drill, having a number of adjustable
jaws geared to move in unison to centralize the
workpiece or tool.
665. Irregular shaped work piece are clamped on
the lathe in ...........
(a) face plate (b) four jaw chuck
(c) collet chuck (d) mandrel
Ans. (a) : A lathe face plate is a basic workholding
accessory for a wood or metal turning lathe.
(a) T-slot (b) Chuck body • It is a circular metal plate which fixes to the end of the
(c) Jaw (d) Clamping piece lathe spindle.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 • Then the workpiece is clamped to the face plate.
666. Surface plates are made of....... • The tool post can hold up to four tools at once, each
(a) high grade cast steel locked in place by hexagonal-head cap screws. Tools
(b) fine grained cast iron can be made of carbide tipped tools of various types
(c) alloy steel high speed steel.
(d) wrought iron 669. Bent tail carrier are shown in figure. What is
the purpose of this carrier ?
Ans. (b) : Surface plates are made of fine grained cast
iron.
• A surface plate is used to test the flatness of other
surface to provide a truly flat datum surface in marking
off work for machining.
• The flat surface provides stability.
667. Name the lathe accessory shown in figure
(a) holt the work in 3 jaw chuck

(b) hold the work in 4 jaw chuck
(c) hold the work in fixture
(d) hold the work in between centre
Ans. (d) : Lathe carrier–
(a) Four jaw chuck (b) collet chuck • They are also known as lathe dogs.
• They are used to drive the work during turning
(c) self centering chuck (d) automatic chuck
between centres.
• The work is clamped firmly in the lathe carrier.
Ans. (a) : • The four jaw chuck is also called an • It is available with a straight tail or bent tail.
independent chuck.
670. Shape of face plate is:
• All jaw is adjusted separately through its screw with (a) Circular (b) Square
the key.
(c) Rectangular (d) Triangular
• Chuck is too giving by reversible jaws. RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
668. Name the tool post shown in the figure. Ans. (a) : Shape of face plate is circular.
• A face plate is a circular metal plate used for holding
workpieces in a lathe.
• It is mainly used for protection and for enhancing the
design and appearance of the device.
671. During thread cutting on Lathe Gear ratio is
the ratio between speed of the lead screw and:
(a) Speed of the motor
(b) Half of the speed of the motor
(a) single way tool post (c) Speed of the workpiece
(b) index type tool post (d) None of these
(c) universal tool post RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
(d) British type tool post Ans. (c) : Gearing ratio used for thread cutting on a
lathe machine in the ratio of the speed of the lead screw
to speed at the workpiece.
Ans. (a) :
Speed of the lead screw
Gearing ratio =
Speed of the workpiece
672. During marking, the reference surface is
provided by ........
(a) Sketch of the job
(b) Workpiece
(c) Marking off table surface
(d) Surface gauge
Ans. (c) : Marking table (Marking off table) is used as Ans. (b) : Lead–Lead is the distance a threaded
reference surface for marking on workpieces. component moves along the matching component
• Marking tables are cast iron or granite and are during one complete revolution.
available in various sizes. • For a single start thread, the lead is equal to the
673. Centre gauge is used for........ pitch.
(a) Setting the lathe tool at correct centre 677. Which one of the following lathes is used for
woodworking spinning and polishing work?
(b) Checking the pitch of thread
(a) Speed lathe (b) Engine lathe
(c) Checking the fit of thread
(c) Bench lathe (d) Toolroom
(d) Checking the profile of thread
Ans. (a) : The speed lathe finds applications where
Ans. (a) : • A centre gauge is a small, flat measuring cutting force is least such as in wood working, spinning,
tool made of steel that thus three different 60º and sizes centering, polishing, winding, buffing etc.
cut into it for measuring the included angle of different • The spindle speed is 1200-3600 rpm in speed lathe.
sized tool bits.
• In speed lathe, used of step pulley to change the
• This gauge measures and included angle on tool bits speed of spindle.
that are used to cut threads.
678. Which one of the following is not the function
674. An angular workpiece is to be faced. It should of a lathe head stock?
be mounted- (a) Accommodate work holding devices
(a) In a three-jaw chuck (b) Accommodate shafts, gears and levers
(b) In a collet (c) Accommodate lubricating system
(c) Between centres (d) Accommodate coolant mechanism
(d) On a face plate RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 Ans. (d) : Accommodate coolant mechanism is not the
Ans. (d) : An angular workpiece is to be faced. It function of a lathe head stock.
should be mounted on a face plate. The function of head stock–
Face plate–A face plate are used to hold work that is • Accommodate work holding devices
too large or of such a shape that it cannot be held in a • The headstock supports one end of the workpiece and
chuck or between centers. imparts rotational motion to the work.
• It is usually a circular cast iron, having a threaded hole • Accommodate lubricating system.
at its center so that it can be screwed to the threaded 679. The centre used for taper turning by offset
nose of the main spindle. method is........
675. The amount of offset of tailstock for taper (a) Half centre (b) Ball centre
turning is done by the offset screws provided. (c) Revolving centre (d) Swivel V centre
The procedure to be followed is- RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(a) Loosen both screws and push the body to the Ans. (b) : Ball centre is sometimes used for tapering by
amount of offset the "offset tail stock" method. The standard centers
(b) Loosen both the screws and push the base to cannot sit squarely in the center hole when the tail stock
is set over.
the amount of offset
(c) Loosen the screw opposite to the direction of
movement and tighten the other screw
(d) Loosen the screw in the direction of
movement and tighten the other screw 680. The top and sides of the table of shaper usually
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 have -
Ans. (c) : The amount of offset of tailstock for taper (a) L type slots (b) T type slots
turning is done by the offset screws provided. The (c) U types slots (d) I type slots
procedure to be followed is loosen the screw opposite to RRB ALP Patna 2014
the direction of movement and tighten the other screw. Ans. (b) : The top and sides of the table of shaper
676. The distance a threaded component moves usually have T-type slots.
along the matching component during one • Shaper machine is a production machine in which the
single point cutting tools are attached and the workpiece
complete revolution is called–
is fixed and while moving forward the tool cuts the
(a) Pitch (b) Lead workpiece and in return, there is no cut on the
(c) Helix angle (d) Thread angle workpiece and used for producing flat and angular
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 surfaces.
681. Live Centre will move along with- Ans. (a) : Shaper is used for the purpose of machining
(a) Headstock (b) Tailstock smaller jobs. It is mainly used for producing flat and
(c) Carriage (d) Cross slide plan surface.
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 • Planer is used for the purpose of machining too
Ans. (a) : Live Centre will move along with headstock. large and heavy jobs.
• Live or revolving center is constructed so that the 60º 687. The unit at lathe which houses the lathe spindle
center runs in its own bearings and is used at the non- and control lever for speeds selection is called
driven or tailstock end of a machine. .....
• It allows higher turning speeds without the need for
separate lubrication and also greater clamping (c) Feed stock (d) Apron
pressures. RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
Ans. (a) : Head stock–The headstock is usually located
682. For turning internal tapers, the suitable
on the left side of the lathe and is equipped with gears,
method -
spindles, pulleys, chucks, gear speed control severs and
(a) By a form tool feed controllers.
(b) By setting over the tailstock • Feed red–It is used to move the carriage automatically
(c) By a taper turning attachment during threading.
(d) By swiveling a compound rest 688. Cylindrical parts are held on planer by ...........
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (a) V- blocks, T bolt and clamps
Ans. (c) : For turning internal tapers, the suitable (b) Angle plate
method by a taper turning attachment. (c) T bolt and clamps
683. Which one of the following is used to lock the (d) None of these
all geared carriage to the lead screw for thread RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
cutting? Ans. (a) : Cylindrical parts are held on planer by V-
(a) Chuck (b) Faceplate blocks, T bolt and clamps to prevent all 6 degrees of
(c) Spindle (d) Half nut freedom of the cylindrical part.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 689. What is the temperature that carbide tools can
Ans. (d) : Half nut is used to lock the all geared withstand by the carbide tools?
carriage to the lead screw for thread cutting operation. (a) Upto 250ºC
(b) Upto 750ºC
684. Drive mechanism of a planer includes-
(c) Upto 500ºC
(a) Cam and follower drive
(d) Above 1000ºC
(b) Rope drive
(c) Direct reversible drive
Ans. (d) : • Cemented carbide tools are extremely hard,
(d) None of these they can with stand very high speed cutting operation.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 The carbide tool does not lose its hardness above
Ans. (c) : Drive mechanism of a planer includes direct 1000ºC.
reversible drive. • A high cobalt tool is used for a rough cut while a low
685. For holding small job, which one of the cobalt tool is used for finishing operations.
following work holding devices is preferred for 690. What is the name of the part marked 'X'?
planner-
(a) Vices (b) V blocks
(c) Stops (d) Braces
Ans. (a) : For holding small job, vices is preferred for
planner.
• The primary function of any vise is to hold an object (a)Fixture
safety and recurely so that it can be worked on. (b)Faceplate
686. Which one of the following machine is (c)Workpiece
preferred for pre-marked contours? (d)Counter weight
(a) Shaper (b) Lathe RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
(c) Drilling machine (d) Planer Ans. (d) : Counter weight is the name of the part
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 marked 'X'.

695. What is the name of the clamp?
(a) Bent clamp (b) Finger clamp

(c) Goose neck clamp (d) Toe dog and poppet
Face plate–It is usually a circular cast iron disc, having Ans. (a) :
a threaded hole at its center so that it can be screwed to
the threaded nose of the main spindle. It consists of a
number of holes and T-slots by means of which the Clamping device purpose is to hold work in the correct
work can be tightened to it. relative position in the fixture and ensure that the job is
691. What is the name of the part marked 'X'? not displaced under cutting forces.
696. What is the name of the part marked 'X'?
(a) Key (b) Keyway

(c) Spacer (d) Bearing bushings (a) 'C' clamp (b) 'U' clamp
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (c) Strap clamp (d) Tool maker's clamp
Ans. (d): A bushing is one classification of the overall
category of bearings. A bushing is a thin tube or sleeve that Ans. (b) : U clamp is the name of the part marked 'X'.
allows relative motion by sliding, as compared to rolling. 697. Which one of the following work holding
accessories of a centre lathe serves the purpose
692. Which lathe operation is intended for
of a fixture?
generating concave and convex profile on the
(a) Three jaw self centering chuck
workpiece?
(b) Driving plate
(a) Facing (b) Chamfering
(c) Steady rest
(c) Form turning (d) Taper turning
(d) Catch plate
Ans. (c) : • Turning operation is intended for generating Ans. (c) : Steady rest–
concave and convex profile on the workpiece. • A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and it is
• Taper turning is a machining operation which means stationary. It gives support at one fixed only.
that the diameter of cylindrical workpieces gradually • It consists of a frame containing three adjustable pads.
decreases from one part to another.
698. Taper turning by using taper turning
693. Which lathe accessory is used to drive the work attachment can be done
during turning between centres? (a) only if the job is held between centres
(a) Faceplate (b) Steady rest (b) only if the job is held in a collet
(c) Lathe centre (d) Lathe carriers (c) whether job is held between centres or in a
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 collet
Ans. (d): Lathe carriers–They are also known as lathe (d) none of these
dogs. RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
• They are used to drive the work during turning Ans. (c) : Taper turning by using taper turning
between centers. attachment can be done whether job is held between
• The work is clamped firmly in the lathe carrier. centres or in a collet.
694. What happens if the tool is not clamped rigidly • Taper turning is the turning process in which the
while facing in a lathe? cutting tool moves at an angle to the axis of the
workpiece so that a tapered shape is obtained in the
(a) Correct face (b) Convex face workpiece.
(c) Concave face (d) Pip at the centre
699. Morse tapers are of self-holding variety, and
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 can have three types of ends. Which one of the
Ans. (b) : Facing is the process of removing material following is not among those three?
from the end and shoulder of a workpiece, using a (a) Tang (b) Threaded
special tool to produce a smooth surface perpendicular (c) Flat (d) Splined
to the rotational axis of the workpiece. RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
Ans. (d) : The principal of the morse taper is that of the (a) The tool material is soft
one into the cone the trunnion and the bore are both (b) The tool overhanging is more than required
uniformly tapered. (c) The carriage is not locked to the bed
700. The standard solid plain mandrel is generally (d) The automatic feed is not used
made of tool steel, hardened and ground with a RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
taper of Ans. (b) : Plunge cut tool–The plunge cutting tool is
(a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 100 the most difficult of saw cuts with any tool. The
(c) 1 : 200 (d) 1 : 2000 oscillating tool can cut quick clean holes in many
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 materials and finish off plunge cuts started by other
Ans. (d) : A taper mandrel has a taper of approximately tools in tougher materials.
0.005 inches per foot and is designed to hold work by 705. V grooves of cast iron pulley have to be fine
being driven into an accurate hole on the work, gripping turned. Which one of the following work
the work by friction. holding methods gives the highest
701. The matching scroll threads on the back faces concentricity?
of the chuck jaws of a concentric chuck are
(a) equal in numbers but unequal in pitch
(b) unequal in numbers but equal in pitch
(c) unequal in numbers and unequal in pitch
(d) equal in numbers and equal in pitch
Ans. (b) : The matching scroll threads on the back faces
of the chuck jaws of a concentric chuck are unequal in
numbers but equal in pitch.
702. The rollers used in the roller box turning tool
holders are... (a) Holding between a four-jaw chuck and a
(a) convex shaped revolving centre
(b) concave shaped (b) Holding between a three-jaw chuck and
(c) slightly tapered with smaller end towards supporting with a pipe centre
work face (c) Holding on a split mandrel and machining
(d) slightly tapered with smaller end towards between centres
turret face (d) Holding on cone mandrel and machining
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 between centres
Ans. (a) : The rollers used in the roller box turning tool RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
holders are convex shaped. Ans. (d) : V grooves of cast iron pulley have to be fine
• Box tools are used in the turrets of screw machines, turned. Work holding methods gives the highest
turret lathes and CNC lathes. concentricity holding on cone mandrel and machining
703. The fingers of a fixed steady rest are set to between centres.
support a lengthy workpiece held in a four-jaw 706. Which one of the following is used to hold
chuck. The fingers are adjusted and set when cylindrical rough casting for turning?
the workpiece is (a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Four-jaw chuck
(a) trued at the chuck and the work is stationary (c) Collet chuck (d) Magnetic chuck
(b) trued at the tailstock end when the work is RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
running at slow rpm Ans. (b) : Four-jaw chuck is used to hold cylindrical
(c) trued at both ends and work is stationary rough casting for turning.
(d) trued at both ends when the work is running • It is used to hold large irregular and eccentric
at slow rpm workpiece on lathe.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 707. The function of steady rest in lathe machine
Ans. (c): Fixed steady rest–This is the most commonly is....
used steady. It is fixed on the bed of the lathe usually (a) To prevent bending of long shaft due to
near the right hand end of the workpiece. cutting force
704. A taper for 10 mm length is produced on a (b) To avoid load on the lathe centres while
workpiece by plunge cut using a form tool. The turning long shafts
chatter marks are seen on the taper surface (c) To reduce the load on the cutting tool while
even though the recommended cutting speed is turning
used and the workpiece is held rigidly. Which (d) To ensure to turn at higher cutting speeds
one of the following is a cause for this defect? RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
Ans. (a) : The function of steady rest in lathe machine Ans. (b) : The collet chuck is the most accurate means
is to prevent bending of long shaft due to cutting force. of holding small workpieces in the lathe. The collet
708. Which one of the following is used while chuck consists of a spring machine collet.
threading operation of a centre lathe? 713. Which one of the following tool holders of a
(a) Saddle (b) Feed rod turret lathe has got provision to accommodate
(c) Arbor (d) Dead screw the pilot bar of the machine?
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 (a) Knee turning tool holder
Ans. (c) : Arbor is used in threading operation of a (b) Roller steady turning tool holder
centre lathe. (c) Start turning tool holder
(d) 'V' steady turning tool holder
709. Easy setting the centre height of tool in the tool
post is ...... RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
(a) Universal tool post Ans. (a) : Knee shaped tool holder–A turret lathe
(b) Open side tool post screw machine tool holder that supports tools for
simultaneous turning and internal cutting operations.
(c) 4-way tool post
(d) Single screw tool post 714. Which one of the following tool holders of a
turret lathe is used to support the job by 'V'
shaped block?
Ans. (a) : Universal tool post is easy for setting the tool (a) Knee turning tool holder
center high of the tool in a lathe. (b) Roller steady turning tool holder
710. Bench vice is used to hold work for ..... (c) 'V' steady turning holder
(a) Filling, cutting, tighting (d) Start turning tool holder
(b) Filling, finishing, smoothing RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(c) Filling, cutting, smoothing Ans. (c) : 'V' steady turning holder of a turret lathe is
(d) Filling, Positioning, threading used to support the job by 'V' shaped block.
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 715. Which one of the following tool holders of a
Ans. (b): Bench vice is used to hold work for filling, turret lathe required no other additional
finishing, smoothing. support?
• Vices are used for holding the workpieces they are (a) Roller steady tool holder
available in different types. (b) Balanced tool holder
• The vice used for bench work is the bench vice or (c) 'V' steady turning tool holder
called engineers vice. (d) Recessing tool holder
711. In a single spindle automatic lathe for bar work RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
of ∅ 25 mm capacity, collets are used to hold Ans. (b) : Balanced tool holder of a turret lathe required
the bar stock. Which one of the following types no other additional support.
of collets is suitable for this? 716. Which one of the following tool holders of a
(a) Draw-in collet turret lathe is used while finishing the ends of
(b) Push type collet bolt, pin, rod etc.?
(c) Dead-length collet (a) Balanced tool holder
(d) Master collet with pads (b) Bar ending tool holder
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 (c) Die holder
Ans. (c) : Dead-length collets are used in the main and (d) Form tool holder
sub spindle, the collets can be installed in various types RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
of machines, such as turning machines, sliding Ans. (b) : Bar ending tool holder of a turret lathe is
headstock automatic lathes. used while finishing the ends of bolt, pin, rod etc.
712. Jaw chucks, turning fixtures and collet chucks 717. On a capstan lathe the finger stops are
are the work holding devices used in capstan positioned
and turret lathes. Which one of the following (a) radially (b) axially
work holding devices having detachable pads (c) tangentially (d) squarely
are fitted? RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
(a) Four-jaw chuck
Ans. (a) : On a capstan lathe the finger stops are
(b) Collet chuck positioned radially.
(c) Two-jaw chuck • Capstan lathe is the modified form of engine lathe and
(d) Three-jaw self-centering chuck center lathe in which the tailstock is replaced by a
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 hexagonal turret tool head.
718. Turning fixtures are special work holding 721. Which one of the following statements is
devices to locate and hold castings and forgings correct?
for capstan and turret lathe work. Which one (a) Jacob's drill chuck cannot be held in flange
of the following statements is NOT true with tool holder
respect to the turning fixtures used on turret (b) Drills, reamers, boring bars can be held in
lathe? flange tool holder
(a) Should be capable of preventing the slipping (c) A threading attachment is used for driving the
of the work saddle of turret lathe
(b) Should be capable to resist bending of the (d) A thread chasing attachment is used for
workpiece driving the turret or capstan lathe.
(c) Should be able to transmit the cutting load on
the main spindle Ans. (b) : Drills, reamers, boring bars can be held in
flange tool holder is correct statement.
(d) Should have provisions to accommodate
balance weights. 722. The rigidity of knee turning tool holder can be
increased by using
(a) Clamp
Ans. (d) : Turning fixture–Turning fixture mainly
(b) Tee bolt
consists of workpiece locating and clamping elements.
(c) Overhead support bar
These fixture are used for facing, boring and turning
operations.
719. When roller steady tool holder is in operation, Ans. (c) : The rigidity of knee turning tool holder can
packing blocks are used to be increased by using overhead support bar.
(a) Set the tool holder on turret to avoid fouling
723. Roller steady turning tool holder is used mainly
with cross slide tools for turning
(b) Make it easy for indexing the turret (a) External diameter (b) Internal diameter
(c) Avoid fouling with adjacent tools on turret (c) Internal grooves (d) None of the above
head RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(d) Give additional support and rigidity to the Ans. (a) : Roller steady turning tool holder is used
tool holder. mainly for turning external diameter.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 724. The overhead support bar protruding from the
Ans. (c) : When roller steady tool holder is in operation, headstock of turret lathe engages the guide
packing blocks are used to avoid fouling with adjacent bush on the
tools on turret head. (a) Slide tool holder
720. The tool holder mounted on the turret head of (b) Flange tool holder
a turret lathe shown in Fig. is (c) Knee tool holder
(d) Recessing tool holder
Ans. (c) : The overhead support bar protruding from the
headstock of turret lathe engages the guide bush on the
knee tool holder.
(a) Start turning tool holder 725. When knee tool holder is used on a turret lathe,
(b) Roller steady turning tool holder (tangential) it
(c) Roller steady turning tool holder (ending (a) Needs additional support
type) (b) Needs no additional support
(d) Vee steady tool holder (c) Needs a fixture
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
Ans. (b) : When knee tool holder is used on a turret
lathe, it needs no additional support.
726. On a capstan lathe multiple cutter holder is
used for
(a) Plain turning (b) Facing
The tool holder mounted on the turret head of a lathe (c) 'a' and 'b' both (d) Neither 'a' nor 'b'
shown in Fig. is start turning tool holder. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Ans. (c) : On a capstan lathe multiple cutter holder is Ans. (c) : Four position shaft is used to control the size
used for both plain turning and facing. of length and diameter of the job.
727. Which among the following is the method of • Tap is used to cut internal threads on capstan lathe.
operating the work holding devices on capstan • Stops and trips are provided on capstan and turret
and turret lathe? lathe for controlling the movement of the cutting tool on
(a) Manually both cross slide and turret head.
(b) Hydraulically 731. Lead is the metal used for balancing weight
(c) Pneumatically during lathe face plate work. The reason for
(d) Any one of the above this the lead is…
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 (a) most ductile (b) heaviest
Ans. (d) : Manually or hydraulically or pneumatically is (c) toughest (d) most elastic
the method of operating the work holding devices on RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
capstan and turret lathe. Ans. (b) : Lead is the metal used for balancing weight
728. Which one of the following is shown in Fig? during lathe face plate work. The reason for this the
lead is heaviest material.
732. A lengthy workpiece is to be turned using a
travelling steady as support. A step for a short
length is turned for setting the fingers of the
travelling steady. The tip of the tool is then set
(a) Combination tool holder to the required depth…
(b) Knee tool holder
(c) Recessing tool holder
(d) Form tool holder
Ans. (a) :
(a) Ahead from the centre of the finger but well
clear off the step face
(b) behind to the centre of the finger but clear off
the work face
(c) just touching the step face
Combination tool holder is shown in figure. (d) just touching the face of the work
729. Which one of the following is shown in Fig.? RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : Steady rest is a lathe accessory used to give
extra support for a long and slender workpiece in
addition to the center support during turning.
Or
Sometimes, when the job is too flexible, it becomes
necessary to support the job very close to the cutting
(a) Form tool holder (b) Tap holder edge of the tool throughout the operation. In such cases
(c) Multiple cutter holder(d) Die holder a follower rest is used. It is attached to the saddle of the
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 lathe carriage and thus travels along with the tool
Ans. (a) : throughout the operation.
733. A flange with a collar and a through hole is to
be reversed and reset in a four jaw chuck as
shown. During resetting it is necessary to true
the..
Form tool holder is shown in figure.

730. Which one of the following is used to control
the size of length and diameter of the job?
(a) Trips (b) Stop roll
(c) Four position shaft (d) None of the above
(a) Machined diameter and the face of the flange Ans. (d) : Chip breakers will be used to break the chip
(b) Unmachined diameter and face of the flange in this condition.
(c) Bored hole of the flange Types of chip breakers (commonly used):
(d) The machined diameter of the flange 1. Groove type–It is consist of grinding a groove on the
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 face of the tool, behind the cutting edge, leaving a small
Ans. (c) : A flange with a collar and a through hole is to land near the tip.
be reversed and reset in a four jaw chuck as shown. 2. Step type–It is consist of grinding a step on the face
During resetting it is necessary to true the bored hole of of the tool adjacent to the cutting edge.
the flange. 3. Secondary rake type–It is consists of providing a
secondary rake on the tool through grinding together
with a small step.
4. Clamp type–This type of chip breaker is very
common with the carbide tipped tools. The chip breaker
is a thin and small plate which is either brazed or to held
mechanically on the tool face.
737. Which among the following statements in
respect of chip breakers is correct?
734. Which one of the following work holding
accessories is NOT suitable to hold the work (a) Chip breakers are essential for breaking the
piece for eccentric turning on a centre lathe? long continuous chips into small pieces
(a) Four jaw independent chuck (b) Chip breakers are necessary to break the chips
(b) Face plate to protect the finished work surfaces
(c) Three jaw self centering chuck (c) Chip breakers are provided to curl and break
(d) Turning fixture the chips
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (d) All the above
Ans. (c): Three jaw self centering chuck work holding RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
accessories is NOT suitable to hold the work piece for Ans. (d) : See the explanation of the above question.
eccentric turning on a centre lathe. 738. A fixed taking the rough cut.
735. When rough turning a workpiece with a (a) Support the tool rigidly to avoid chatter
carbide tool long curly chips are formed. during operation.
Which one of the following is the right way of (b) Support long shafts that are being threaded
getting rid of this kind of chip? for their full length.
(a) Stop the power feed at intervals so that the (c) Support workpieces during facing large
chip breaks diameter workpieces with short length.
(b) Change the rake angle (d) Support long workpieces held in chuck, to
(c) Provide chip breaker on the tool perform operations at the overhanging end.
(d) Use a metal hook and pull away the chips RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (d) : A fixed taking the rough cut to support long
Ans. (c) : Chip breaker are used to reduce the swarf into workpieces held in chuck, to perform operations at the
small pieces as they are formed with the help of an overhanging end.
obstruction attached to the face of the tool.
739. A traveling steady is fixed at the saddle of a
• Continuous machining like a turning of ductile
material (metals) produce continuous chips, which leads lathe. What is the function of this steady rest?
to their handling and disposal problems in that case use (a) To prevent bending of long shafts due to
of chip breaker becomes very important. cutting force.
(b) To avoid load on the lathe centres while
736. Chip breakers are meant to break continuous
turning long shafts.
long chips. Which one of the following types of
chip breakers is found on a throw away insert (c) To reduce the load on the cutting tool while
with holder? turning.
(a) Piece of sheet metal clamped to the holder in (d) To ensure to turn at higher cutting speeds
the path of the coil than recommended.
(b) A step is ground on the throw away insert RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
along the cutting edge Ans. (a) : A traveling steady is fixed at the saddle of a
(c) A small groove ground at the cutting edge lathe. The function of the steady rest is to prevent
(d) A carbide bit is screwed and held on the top bending of long shafts due to cutting force.
face of the bit • Steady rest provide the base to the job.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 • It is made of cast iron.
740. Which among the following materials is used 744. A follower steady is fixed on the
for steady rest pads? (a) Tailstock (b) Bed
(a) Mild steel (b) Lead (c) Saddle (d) Headstock
(c) Brass (d) Aluminium RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 Ans. (c) : A follower steady is fixed on the saddle of the
Ans. (c) : The fixed steady rest can be clamped at any lathe.
desired position on the lathe bed by the base clamping Carriage and Saddle–The carriage supports the cross-
screw. slide; compound tool post moves along the ways under
• The three adjustable pads which are made up of brass manual power feed. It is comprises the saddle, a casting
metal can be moved radially in or out by means are that rides across the top of the ways.
adjusted on a trued cylindrical face of the workpiece. 745. A lathe half centre is used
741. Which among the following statements in (a) To support the workpiece always
respect of fixed steady is NOT correct? (b) To turn long workpiece
(a) When setting its two lower pads are made to (c) Because it is easy to lubricate the workpiece
just touch the surface of the job first.
(d) To face the workpiece upto the end of the
(b) It must be trued before the pads to bear on the centre hole
job.
(c) Skinning is done on the job before it is set
with the job. Ans. (d) : A lathe half centre is used to face the
workpiece upto the end of the centre hole.
(d) It is fixed to the carriage of the lathe.
• Through it is termed as half center, little less than half
is relieved at the tip portion. Used while facing the job
Ans. (d): It is fixed to the carriage of the lathe. without disturbing the setting.
746. Which among the following centres is suitable
when workpiece held between centres is to be
turned at high speed?
(a) Ball centre (b) Half centre
(c) Pipe centre (d) Revolving centre
Ans. (d) : Revolving centre–The revolving center is
used in the tailstock for supporting a heavy job
revolving at high speed and where in this center (unlike
dead center) revolves with the job.
742. Tool maker’s buttons are used for

(a) Aligning the workpiece for boring to a given
datum
(b) Setting the tool at correct centre height
(c) Adjusting the slackness in the guideways of
cross-slide
(d) Holding the workpiece firmly 747. Which one of the following is used to hold
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 cylindrical rough casting for turning?
(a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Four-jaw chuck
Ans. (a) : Tool maker’s buttons are used for aligning
(c) Collet chuck (d) Magnetic chuck
the workpiece for boring to a given datum.
743. Which one of the following tool posts is easy for
setting the tool centre height of the tool in a Ans. (b) : Four-jaw chuck is also called an independent
lathe? chuck since each jaw can be adjusted independently.
(a) Open side tool post
(b) Single screw tool post
(c) four-way tool post
(d) Universal tool post
Ans. (d) : Universal tool post is easy for setting the tool • Four-jaw chuck are used for a wide range of regular
centre height of the tool in a lathe. and irregular shapes.

748. For production of shafts in large number, the 754. The centre drill size is selected on the basis of
lathe used is ...... the…..
(a) turret lathe (b) copying lathe (a) length of the job
(c) centre lathe (d) capstan lathe (b) material of the job
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (c) diameter of the job
Ans. (a) : For production of shafts in large number, the (d) type of operation
lathe used is turret lathe. RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
Turret lathe–Turret lathe are capable of performing Ans. (d) : The centre drill size is selected on the basis
multiple cutting operations such as turning, boring, of the type of operation.
drilling, thread cutting and facing on the same
755. The advantage of the 4 way tool post is….
workpieces.
(a) more rigidity to the tool
749. ISO coding system for square tungsten carbide (b) skill not required to set the tool
inserts, used in turning is .........
(c) tool set is easy
(a) T (b) R
(d) less time required for setting of the tool
(c) S (d) C
Ans. (d) : The advantage of the 4 way tool post is less
Ans. (b) : ISO coding system for square tungsten
time required for setting of the tool.
carbide inserts, used in turning is R.
Four way tool post–It is also called a square tool post
750. Face plates are similar in shape to the lathe or a four way tool post.
catch plate, but ..........
• Four post can be fixed in this type of tool posts and
(a) large in diameter (b) small in diameter
anyone can be brought into the operating position and
(c) equal in diameter (d) different in shape the square head is clamped with the help of the handle
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 lever.
Ans. (a): Face plates are similar in shape to the lathe 756. The carriage hand wheel…..
catch plate, but large in diameter.
(a) has a micrometer dial that is sometimes in
Face plate–It is fitted to the lathe spindle with its metric units as well as in British units
central threaded portion.
(b) is used for a quick approach and return and
• The job on the late is held by the faceplate using bolts for delicate operation not requiring a power
and clamps in the shots. feed
751. How to identify the size of angle plate? (c) is used for feeding when long cuts are made
(a) Length (b) Width on shafts
(c) Weight (d) Size number (d) should never be used except in an emergency
Ans. (d) : Angle plate size is identified by size number. Ans. (b) : The carriage hand wheel is used for a quick
752. Identify rough turning tool for turning approach and return and for delicate operation not
operation in lathe. requiring a power feed.
(a) Crank tool 757. Driving plates are used for…..
(b) 'V' tool (a) mounting fixtures and workpieces
(c) L.H. offset facing tool (b) driving shaft between centers with a lathe dog
(d) Round nose tool (c) facing operation only
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 (d) internal operations only
Ans. (d) : Round nose tool is used to rough turning for RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
turning operation in lathe. Ans. (b) : Driving plates are used for driving shaft
753. Parallel blocks are used for ….. between centers with a lathe dog.
(a) setting workpiece for machining Driving plate–It is a circular plate which is used when
(b) setting workpiece for measuring turning jobs in between centers.
(c) avoiding to keep workpiece on the floor • It is used with a straight tail or bend tail carrier to give
(d) avoiding to keep machine accessories on the a positive drive to the job.
floor Following driving plates–
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 • Catch plate
Ans. (a) : Parallel blocks are used for setting workpiece • Driving plate
for machining. • Safety driving plate.
758. For mounting a lathe chuck…… Ans. (b) : Counter sinking–

(a) start it by hand and then turn the power on • It is also similar to counter boring except that the
(b) mount it own by power additional machining done on a hole is conical to
(c) mount it by hand accommodate the counter sunk machine screw head.
• Again the depth of counter sinking should be large
(d) mount it with the help of a hammer
enough to accommodate the screw head to fully flush
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 with the surface.
Ans. (c) : For mounting a lathe chuck mount it by hand.
759. Which of the following statements is correct
about an independent four jaw chuck?
(a) It is not to be used for round jobs
(b) The jaws move simultaneously
(c) The jaws can be reversed and assembled
(d) The jaws cannot be operated in the reverse
direction Spot facing–It removes sufficient metal from the
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 surface around a drilled hole to form a true seat for a
Ans. (c) : Four jaw chuck– bolt head or nut.
• The four jaw chuck is also called an independent 764. The function of a travelling steady is to....
chuck since each jaw can be adjusted independently. (a) Prevent bending of long shafts due to cutting
• The four jaw chuck are used for a wide range of a force
regular and irregular shapes. (b) Avoid load on the lathe centres while turning
long job
760. In the face plate work, balancing is done…. (c) Reduce the load on the cutting tool while
(a) to increase the speed turning
(b) to reduce the pressure on the tool (d) Ensure to turn at higher cutting speed than
(c) for uniform rotation of work recommended
(d) to get a good finish RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (a): The travelling steady rest is fixed on the
slide. It facilitates e.g. continuous processing and thread
Ans. (c): In the face plate work, balancing is done for
cutting or long shaft or spindles. These rests absorb the
uniform rotation of work. pressure directly on the tool at the time of chip removal.
761. A follower steady is held on the They are particularly needed for long thin shaft.
(a) lathe bed (b) lathe carriage 765. What is the formula to determine cutting time
(c) lathe spindle (d) lathe stock in lathe (where l = length, s = feed, n = rpm, cs
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 = cutting speed)?
Ans. (b):A follower steady is held on the lathe carriage. l cs
(a) (b)
The most common types of steady rests are– s×n s×n
1. Fixed steady rest l× n l× n
(c) (d)
2. Follower steady rest/travelling steady rest. s s × 1000
762. In which tool post, more than one tool can be RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
set? Ans. (a) :
(a) Open side tool post V = cutting speed (m/min)
(b) Four way tool post D = diameter of the job to be turned (mm)
(c) Universal tool post L = length of the job to be turned (mm)
(d) Single screw tool post f = feed per revolution (mm/rev)
Tm = time required for turning.
N = Revolution of the jobs per minute
Ans. (b) : Four way tool post provides firm supports for
1000 × V
both signals or double tool set up. In this tool post each N= (rpm)
tool is secured in the tool post by more than one bolt πD
and so the rigidity is more. πDN
Cutting speed V = m / min
763. The process of beveling the end of a hole is 1000
called….. Machining time for turning operation–
(a) counter boring (b) counter sinking
L
(c) spot facing (d) reaming Tm = min
fN
766. Back-Gear mechanism is provided in cone 770. Which among the following statement is NOT
pulley headstock to: correct:-
(a) Reduce the speed of spindle (a) A faceplate is similar to the magnetic chuck
(b) Increase the speed of spindle (b) For accurate setting of the job on the
(c) Revere the speed of spindle faceplate, dial test indicator is used
(d) Transmit power from spindle gear to stud (c) To check the balance of the faceplate work,
gear spindle drive should be disconnected
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 (d) ‘V’ block is essential for holding round job
Ans. (a) : Back gear mechanism is provided in cone on faceplate.
pulley headstock to reduce the speed of spindle. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
• Tumbler gear mechanism is provided in cone pulley Ans. (a) : For accurate setting of the job on the
headstock to reverse the speed of feed rod or lead faceplate, dial test indicator is used.
screw. 771. A split bearing bush which has its two halves
767. The bench vice is called as parallel jaw vice solves soldered, is held in a four–jaw
because: independent chuck for machining which one of
(a) It can hold the jobs having parallel sides the following defects will result if the work is
(b) It is fixed parallel to the shop floor not held by the two opposite jaws on soldered
(c) Its width of jaws are parallel point:
(d) Its movable jaw moves parallel to the fixed (a) Truing at the chuck end is not possible
jaw (b) Soldering will give way and the two halves
will be separated
(c) Bored hole not concentric with outer dia. of
Ans. (d) : The bench vice is called as parallel jaw vice
the bush
because its movable jaw moves parallel to the fixed jaw.
(d) Bored dimensional accuracy cannot be
obtained.
Ans. (b): A split bearing bush which has its two halves
solves soldered, is held in a four–jaw independent
chuck for machining which one of the following defects
will result if the work is not held by the two opposite
768. The headstock of a lathe is situated at the: jaws on soldered point. After mounting the face plate on
(a) Right - hand end of the lathe bed the spindle nose and keeping the spindle in neutral
(b) Left-hand end of the lathe bed position.
(c) Middle of the lathe bed 772. In a center lathe, the cutting tool is fed in .......
(d) Bottom of the lathe bed with reference to the lathe axis.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (a) Cross direction only
Ans. (b) : • Headstock is mounted permanently on the (b) Longitudinal direction only
inner guideways at the left hand side of the leg bed. (c) Both (a) and (b)
• The spindle rotates on the two large bearings housed (d) Any direction
on the headstock casing. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
• Tail stock is located on the inner guideways at the
Ans. (c) : In a center lathe, the cutting tool is fed in
right side of the bed opposite to headstock.
cross and longitudinal direction with reference to the
769. To prevent lathe bed guideways from lathe axes.
damaging by chuck while mounting:-
773. The angle made by the face of the tool and the
(a) Take the help of the supervisor plane parallel to the base of cutting tool is
(b) Support it with screw jack called:
(c) Lift it with hand crane (a) Rake angle (b) Cutting angle
(d) Place a wooden piece on the guideways (c) Clearance angle (d) Lip angle
Ans. (d) : Place a wooden piece on the guideways to Ans. (a) : Rake angle–The angle between the face of
prevent lathe bed guideways from damaging by chuck the tool and the plane parallel to the base of the cutting
while mounting. tool is called rake angle.
Ans. (b) : 4 jaw chuck is provided for T-slots.

• The four jaw chuck is also called an independent
chuck since each jaw can be adjusted independently.
• Four jaw chucks are used for a wide range of regular
and irregular shapes.
778. Cutting tool is held with 3 bolts. Name the tool
post.
(a) Open side tool post (b) Four way tool post
(c) Universal tool post (d) British tool post
Ans. (b) : • It is also called a square tool post or a four
way tool post.
• Four tools can be fixed in this type of tool posts and
Lip angle–The angle between face and flank of the tool. anyone can be brought into the operating position and
As the lip angle increases, the cutting edge will go
the square used is clamped with the help of the handle
stronger.
lever.
774. A lathe with four steps on the cone pulley and
with back-gears will have: • By loosening the handle lever, the next tool can be
(a) Four direct speeds indexed and brought into the operating position the
(b) Four indirect speeds indexing is manual.
(c) Four direct and four indirect speeds 779. Which one of the following methods of catching
(d) eight indirect speeds the threads consumes more time when cutting
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 odd pitch threads:
Ans. (c) : Four direct and four indirect speeds (a) Using thread - chasing dial
movement of a lathe is controlled by four steps on the (b) Reversing the machine
cone pulley with back gears. (c) Marking the work holding device and lead
775. For changing the rotation of feed rod, which screw
lever should be used? (d) Pre-determined travel of the carriage
(a) Feed change lever RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
(b) Carriage locking lever Ans. (c): Marking the work holding device and lead
(c) Feed selector screw methods of catching the threads consumes more
(d) Feed reverse lever time when cutting odd pitch threads.
780. Chip breakers are used to–
Ans. (d) : For changing the rotation of feed rod, feed
reverse lever should be used. (a) Increase tool life
• Feed reverse lever located on the left end of the (b) Remove chips from bed
headstock, this lever reverses the direction of the (c) Break the chips into short segments
carriage feed. (d) Minimise heat generation
• The lever is squeezed and moved up or down to RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
change the feed direction.
Ans. (c) : The function of a chip breaker is to improve
776. Tool holders are used to chip control and to reduce cutting resistance. A better
(a) extent the life of the tool balance between the two will increase the machining
(b) protect the tool performance. Reduced cutting resistance can avoid
(c) clamp the tool securely chipping and fracturing of the cutting edge caused by
(d) deflect the cutting pressure vibration.
781. The chuck preferred for quick setting and
Ans. (b) : Tool holders are used to protect the tool. accurate centring of a job is–
• Tool holder is a general term for the adapters used to
(a) Four jaw independent chuck
mount the cutting tools in the machine tool equipment
that performs these operation. (b) Three jaw universal chuck
777. Which chuck is provided for T-slots? (c) Magnetic chuck
(a) 3 jaw chuck (d) Collet chuck
(b) 4 jaw chuck RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
(c) Magnetic chuck Ans. (d) : Collet chuck–These are small chucks that fit
(d) 2 jaw concentric chuck into the headstock spindle and are use for holding bar
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 stock (long bar or rods).
• These chucks are particularly useful in case where 787. What is the function of the drop worm
accurate centering and quick setting are required. provided in the apron of the centre lathe?
• It is possible to change the collet for different cross- (a) Engages/ disengages the power feed
sections depending on the cross-section of the raw (b) Changes the direction of rotation of the
material. workpiece
782. Square or irregular shaped workpiece for (c) Changes the feed direction
turning is usually mounted in– (d) Engages/ disengages the lead screw
(a) Three jaw chuck (b) Independent chuck RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(c) Collet chuck (d) Mandrel Ans. (a) : Engages/disengages the power feed is the
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 function of the drop worm provided in the apron of the
Ans. (b) : The four jaw chuck is also called an centre lathe.
independent chuck since each jaw can be adjusted 788. The sliding surfaces of the lathe bed are
independently. (a) Flame hardened (b) Case hardened
• Four jaw chucks are used for a wide range of regular (c) Normalised (d) Tempered
and irregular shapes. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
783. Work which can to be chucked because of its Ans. (a) : The sliding surfaces of the lathe bed are
shape can be mounted on the following device flame hardened.
for facing operations: • Flame hardening is a heat treatment process where
(a) Collet (b) V-block oxyfuel gas flames are directly impinged on the gear
(c) Face plate (d) Vice tooth surface area to be hardened which is then
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 subjected to quenching.
Ans. (c) : A lathe face plate is a basic workholding 789. Which one of the following on a lathe is used to
accessory for a wood or metal turning lathe. It is a give depth of cut?
circular metal plate which fixes to the end of the lathe (a) Compound slide
spindle. The workpiece is then clamped to the face (b) Top slide
plate. Typically using T-slot nuts in slots in the face (c) By adjusting the tool
plate or less commonly threaded holes in the face plate (d) Cross slide
itself. RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
784. The included angle of taper, in collet is usually Ans. (d): • The cross slide is assembled to the saddle
(a) 1-2° (b) 5-10° with the help of the tapered jib.
(c) 30° (d) 45° • The cross-slide functions perpendicular to the lathe
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 axis either by hand feed or automatic feed i.e. give the
Ans. (c) : The include angle of taper is 30o in collet depth of cut to the workpiece.
usually. • In lathe cross slide is used to give depth of cut.
785. A slight taper on the full length of a long shaft 790. Drill chucks are held on the machine spindle by
mounted between centres on a universal means of
cylindrical grinder can be ground by– (a) arbor drift (b) drift
(a) Offsetting the tail stock (c) draw-in bar (d) chuck nut
(b) Swiveling the table on its base RRB ALP Patna 2014
(c) Swiveling the wheel head Ans. (a) : Drill chucks are held on the machine spindle
(d) Taper turning attachment by means of an arbor fitted on the drill chuck.
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 Drift–Taper shunk drills are held on machine spindle
Ans. (c) : A slight taper on the full length of a long with the help of sleeve, morse taper and socket. Drift is
shaft mounted between centres on a universal used to remove the socket from the machines spindle.
cylindrical grinder can be ground by swiveling the 791. A wedge like tool is used for removing the
wheel head. taper shank tools from the nose of the machine
786. The special gear of 127 teeth or 63 teeth may be spindle? What is this called?
used to cut metric threads in a lathe having (a) Drill chuck (b) Drill key
British lead screw. It s known as (c) Drill socket (d) Drill drift
(a) ldler gear (b) Change gear RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
(c) Translating gear (d) Compound gear Ans. (d) : Drill drift–Drill drift is a wedge like tool
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 which is used for removing the taper shank tools from
Ans. (c) : The special gear of 127 teeth or 63 teeth may the nose of the machine spindle.
be used to cut metric threads in a lathe having British Drill chucks–Drill chucks are the drill holding devices
lead screw. It s known as translating gear. and held on a machine spindle with the help of an arbor.
792. The maximum diameter that can be worked on Ans. (d) : A collet chuck is meant for gripping of large
the lathe machine without hitting the carriage jobs. It is used on semi-automatic machines to hold long
is know as ......... cylindrical jobs. It can hold square and hexagonal cross-
(a) Height of the centers section jobs too.
(b) Length between the centres 797. A steady is used ...............
(c) Swing diameter above the carriage (a) To drive the job (b) To hold jobs
(d) Maximum bar diameter (c) To support the job (d) All of the above
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
Ans. (c) : The maximum diameter that can be worked Ans. (c) : A steady is used to support the job. It is
on the lathe machine without hitting the carriage is needed when the length and stiffness of a workpiece
know as the swing diameter over the carriage. makes it different to machine without distorting the
The maximum diameter of the Job that can be rotated part.
over the lathe machine is called swing over bed.
798. A carrier is used with a ...............
Maximum swing on carriage–The maximum swing of
the carriage of the job is equal to the diameter of the (a) catch plate (b) carriage
carriage between the centers. (c) tail stock (d) none of these
The maximum swing on bed–Swing on the bed is ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
equal to the maximum diameter of the job can be Ans. (a) : A carrier is used with a catch plate. Both are
performed by tying it to the lathe. used to drive the work during turning. A projecting pin
793. One of the following is not a work holding from the catch plate or carrier fits into the slot provided
accessory of a lathe in either of them.
(a) Face plate 799. A mandrel is employed for the turning of
(b) Mandrel (a) Bush, sleeve, gear blank
(c) Catch plate (b) Spindle, piston, head
(d) Self Centring Chuck (c) Bearing, bolt, stud
BEML 2022 (d) None of these
Ans. (c):Lathe accessories include for work holding Ans. (a): Mandrel is used to a hollow bar or a bar with a
device. bore when turning between live centre and dead centre
1. Face plate of the lathe.
2. Self centering • A moving mandrel is also used for tube drawing.
3. Mandrel • A mandrel is employed for the turning to bush, sleeve,
Catch plate is not work holding accessory. gear blank etc.
794. A lathe dog is used for 800. Most suitable chuck for holding thin job is
(a) Driving the work during turning between ..................
centres (a) Magnetic chuck
(b) Supporting long jobs during turning (b) Air-operated chuck
(c) As a cutting tool during turning (c) Collect chuck
(d) Holding the job (d) 2 jaw concentric chuck
Ans. (a) : A lathe dog is used for driving the work
Ans. (a) : • Magnetic chuck is one of the most
during turning between centres.
important devices for holding workpiece of short length
795. In a lathe follower, steady rest will be fixed to for machining in lathe.
the : • Magnetic chucks are available in circular and
(a) Bed (b) Saddle rectangular shapes, only workpieces made of magnetic
(c) Chuck (d) Lead screw materials can be grasped by magnetic chucks.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 • Magnetic chucks are actuated by an electromagnet or
Ans. (b) : In a lathe follower, steady rest will be fixed a permanent magnet.
to the saddle. 801. Using a 4-jaw chuck over 3-jaw chuck will be
• The follower steady is like C shape. advantageous in which of the following
796. A collet chuck is meant for the gripping of operations?
(a) heavy jobs (b) large dia jobs (a) Drilling (b) Taper turning
(c) large jobs (d) small dia jobs (c) Eccentric Turning (d) Trepanning
Ans. (c) : In eccentric turning, the use of jaw chuck 806. The lathe accessory used to give extra support
over 3-jaw is beneficial. In eccentric shearing, for long and slender jobs is known as
according to the eccentricity of job, center holes are (a) Dead centre (b) Lathe dog
made at both ends. The center line joining pairs of (c) Steady rest (d) Lathe carrier
center holes forms different diameters. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
Ans. (c) : A steady rest consists of a cast iron base.
802. To true a job precisely in a 4 jaw chuck, the
The main function of a steady rest is to provide support
instrument used is a to a long slender work. For this purpose one or more
(a) Micrometer steady rest may be used to support the free end of long
(b) Vernier bevel protractor workpiece.
(c) Dial test indicator with a magnetic base 807. For machining of casting on a lathe, it should
(d) Try square be held in :
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 (a) Collet chuck (b) Three jaw chuck
Ans. (c) To true a job precisely in a 4-jaw chuck, the (c) Face plate (d) Four jaw chuck
instrument used is a dial test indicator with magnetic SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
base. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
• There are four jaw in four jaw chuck. Ans. (d) : A four jaw independent chuck. Each jaw
made of tough steel has three inner and one outer
• By this any type of object is caught to rotate on any gripping surfaces. The outer gripping surface is used for
axis. holding larger sizes of workpiece by reversing the jaw.
803. Which among the following is the most precise The chuck is particularly used in heavy and irregular
work holding device in a lathe? shaped articles.
(a) Three jaw chuck (b) Face plate 808. What is mounted on the top of the cross slide
(c) Collets (d) Driving plate and has a circular base graduated in degrees?
IOCL 2020 (a) Saddle (b) Compound rest
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (c) Cross slide (d) Apron
Ans. (c) : Use of collet chuck in turret, capstan and tool NTPC Fitter 2016
rooms. Most precise jobs are done for making parts like UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015
watches or typewriters etc. Ans : (b) The compound rest or compound slide is
mounted on the top of the cross slide and has a
These are mainly three types of chuck–
circular base graduated in degrees.
(i) Push and collet chuck It is used for obtaining angular cuts and short tapers as
(ii) Draw in chuck well as positioning of the tool to the work.
(iii) Dead length bar chuck 809. Half nut is connected with :
804. The following is not related to Lathe (a) Milling machine
(a) Pipe centre (b) Female centre (b) Locking device
(c) Centre punch (d) Driving plate (c) Jigs and fixtures
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 (d) Thread cutting on lathe
Ans : (c) Center punch does not related to lathe.
Ans : (d) Half nut is connected with thread cutting on
• Pipe center, Female center and driving plate are lathe. The rotation speed of the lead screw is changed
related to lathe. by half nut to the feed speed of the carriage. This nut is
• The driving plate is used in machining on the lathe mounted on the apron of the carriage. The feed can be
when the workpiece is held between the centers. ended at any time by opening the half nut with the help
• Use of pipe center to divide pipes into pieces and to of a lever.
provide a base when cutting a pipe. 810. Angle of the angle plate is :
(a) 30 degree (b) 45 degree
805. To set the work run eccentrically, the following
(c) 60 degree (d) 90 degree
method is used to hold the job
(a) 3 jaw chuck (b) Collect chuck Ans : (d) Angle plate made of cast iron. Angle of the
(c) 4 jaw chuck (d) None of the above angle plate is 90º. Holes and slots are provided on both
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 faces, so that it may be clamped on a faceplate and can
Ans. (c) : A four jaw independent chuck. This chuck hold the workpiece.
has four jaws. Conentric circles inscribed on the face of 811. Metal used for making face plate :
the chuck facilitate quick centering of the workpiece. (a) Carbon steel (b) Tool steel
This type of chuck is particularly used in the setting of (c) Wrought iron (d) Cast iron
heavy and irregular shaped articles. IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Ans : (d) A face plate consists of a circular disc bored. 815. The taper turnig method which cannot be used
Face plate made of cast iron. for internal taper turning on a lathe:
(a) Compound slide method
(c) Tail stock offset method
Ans : (c) In taper turning, tail stock offset method
cannot be used for internal taper turning on a lathe.
This method is suitable for turning small taper on long
jobs.
812. Identify the type of Tool holding devices shown 816. The different spindle speeds on a lathe form:
in the figure (a) Arithmetical progression
(b) Geometrical progression
(c) Harmonical progression
(d) Static progression
Ans : (b) The different spindle speeds on a lathe form
geometrical progression.
Cutting speed (v) of tool is the speed at which the metal
is removed by tool from the workpiece.
(a) Single way tool post 817. The chuck preferred for quick setting and
(b) Universal tool post accurate centering of a job is:
(c) Four way tool post (a) Three jaw universal chuck
(d) Quick change tool post (b) Four jaw chuck
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (c) Collect chuck
Ans : (c) Four way tool post four sides are open to (d) Magnetic chuck
adjust four tool at a time. This type of tool post is used LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
in moderate heavy lathes and is suitable for repeat work. Ans: (c) The collet chuks are used for holding bar stock
813. The tail stock set over required to turn a taper in production work and quick setting with accurate
on the entire length of a work piece having centering.
both ends diameter D and d is 818. Select the wrong statement–
(a) (D–d)/2L (b) (D–d)/L (a) Different spindle motion on the lathe from the
(c) (D–d)/2 (d) D–d geometric sequence.
BHEL 2020 (b) The lead screw of the lathe has single threats
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (c) Standard tapers are installed in the lathe
Ans : (c) The amount of set over being limited, this center called morse tapers.
method is suitable for burning small taper on long jobs. (d) Tumbler gears are used in the lathe to reduce
D−d the spindle speed.
Set over =
2 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
814. Lathe machine accessories is : Ans : (d) Tumbler gear is not used to reduced spindle
(a) Head stock and carriage speed in lathe machine, tumbler gear is used to adjust
(b) Forearm and drive plate spindle speed.
(c) Tool Holder and Lead screw 819. Which is the turning tool include with nose
(d) Lead screw and cone pulley radius?
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 (a) Multipoint tool (b) Single point tool
Ans : (b) Lathe accessories are– (c) Double point tool (d) None of these
1. Lathe dog or carrier IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
2. Chucks DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
3. Face plate Ans : (b) Two main part of single point tool
4. Forearm (i) Shank
5. Drive plate (ii) Cutting edge (Rake angle, clearance angle, Nose
6. Angle plate radius) single point cutting tool having a wedge-like
7. Steady rest action. It is wide application on lathes, and slotting
8. Mandrels machines.

820. The taper turning on lathe can be done by the 825. ........ teeth are cut, on the face of the lathe file.
following method: (a) Double cut (b) Single cut
(a) Form tool method (c) Rasp cut (d) Curved cut
(b) Compound rest method
(c) Taper Attachment method DRDO Fitter.2016
(d) All of the above Ans : (b) On the face of the lathe file cut single teeth.
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 826. To cut a spur gear of 54 teeth having module 3,
Ans : (d) The method of taper turning– the size of gear blank is required
1. By form tool method
(a) 132 mm (b) 168 mm
2. By compound rest method
3. By set over the tailstock centre method (c) 180 mm (d) None of these
4. By taper turning attachment method DRDO Fitter.2016
5. By combination of longitudinal and cross feed in Ans : (b) To cut a spur gear of 54 teeth having module
special lathe. 3, the size of gear blank is required 168 mm.
821. The taper is cut by the taper turning
827. Which index plate is to be required to index an
attachment, the job is held in ............
(a) Chuck (b) Mid of center angle of 19°40'?
(c) None of these (d) Both (a) and (b) (a) Plate–I (b) Plate–II
DRDO Turner.2016 (c) Plate–III (d) None of these
Ans : (d) In taper turning attachment, this principle is DRDO Fitter.2016
to guide the tool in straight path set an angle to the axis Ans : (b) Index plate II is to be required to index an
of rotation of the workpiece. angle of 19º40'.
Work is being revolved between centres or by a chuck. 828. Mandrel is required to hold the
822. A standard right hand tool holder turning is (a) Hollow Job (b) Solid job
suitable for ......... (c) Stepped job (d) None of these
(a) Near the tailstock
(b) For the job of small diameter BDL Technician 2022
(c) For heavy cutting DRDO Turner.2016
(d) Near the headstock Ans: (a) A mandrel is a device for holding and rotating
DRDO Fitter.2016 a hollow piece of work.
Ans: (d) A standard right hand tool holder is suitable Types of mandrel–
for turning near headstock. 1. Plain mandrel
The headstock provides mechanical means of rotating 2. Step mandrel
the work at multiple speeds. 3. Collar mandrel
823. Face plate is used ............. 4. Screwed mandrel
(a) To hold finish job 5. Cone mandrel
(b) For support the job 6. Gang mandrel
(c) To hold round job
(d) To hold irregular job 7. Expansion mandrel
DRDO Fitter.2016 829. Which of the following feed is required for
Ans : (d) Face plate is used for hold irregular job. Face grooving operation?
plate is made of cast iron. (a) Longitudinal (b) Cross
This has the radial, plain and 'T'-slots for holding work (c) Vertical (d) Combined
by bolt and clamps. (IOF Fitter 2017)
824. Driving plate is used to ........ Ans : (b) Cross slide part of carriage which is used for
(a) For internal operation cross feed. Cross feed is required for grooving
(b) For facing operation operation.
(c) To hold fixture and workpiece 830. Which one of the following is an accessories of
(d) To rotate the job between center and dog lathe work?
carrier. (a) Steady rest (b) Tail Stock
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (c) Feed rod (d) None of these
Ans : (d) Driving plate is used to move the job between (IOF Fitter 2017)
the centre and the dog carrier Ans : (a) Steady rest consists of a cast iron base, the
main function of a steady rest is to provide support to a
long slender work.
831. Which device is used to hold the gear or pulley
on the lathe?
(a) Mandrel (b) Angle plate
(c) Steady (d) Feed rod
DRDO Turner.2016
Ans : (a) Mandrel Accessories used to hole gear or Ans. (b) : Knurling tool is used to make a component of
pulley on lathe. diamond shaped pattern if this tool is attached on lathe
Mandrel is a device for holding and rotating a hollow machine.
piece of work. • Knurling is the operation of producing a straight-
832. Which device is the job held in a lathe lined, diamond-shaped pattern or cross lined or
machine? serrated pattern on a cylindrical external surface by
(a) Head stock (b) Jaw chuck pressing a tool called knurling tool.
(c) Line center (d) None of these • Knurling is a forming operation, not a cutting
DRDO Turner.2016 operation.
Ans : (b) A chuck is one of the most important devices
for holding and rotating a piece of work in a lathe.
There are type of chuck–
1. Four jaw chuck
Diamond knurling
2. Three jaw chuck
3. Air or hydraulic chuck 837. When the tool wear takes place by the action of
4. Magnetic chuck sliding chips against its top surface of the tool
and thus creating a concave impression on it.
5. Collet chuck
This type of wear is known as :
833. Which tool is used to check the centre while (a) Nose wear (b) Flank wear
tying a job in a four jaw chuck on lathe?
(c) Crater wear (d) Built-up edge
(a) Callipers (b) Divider
(c) Surface gauge (d) Straight pin scriber
(IOF Fitter, 2012) ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
Ans : (c) Use the surface gauge to check the center Ans. (c) : Crater wear–It is a tool wear that takes place
when tying the job to the four jaw chuck on the lathe. by the action of sliding chips against its top surface of
the tool and thus a concave impression on surface is
Its one end is straight and pointed.
seen. The main cause of crater wear is high temperature
834. Non-spherical jobs can be hold well: generated at the chip-tool interface and occurs due to
(a) In four jaw (b) Three jaw chuck combination of diffusion and adhesion as the chip
(c) In mandrel (d) In collect jaw moves over the rake face of the tool.
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 838. For machining brittle materials like brass the
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 practically the back rack angle would be equal
Ans. (a) : Four jaw chuck is used for non spherical to
workpiece. The diameter of the body specifies the size (a) 15º (b) 10º
of the chuck. (c) 5º (d) 0º
4. Operation performed on Lathe
Ans. (d) : A positive rake angle is used for cutting soft
Machine and ductile material.
A negative rake angle is used for cutting a very hard or
835. ____ tapers can be turned with set-over a brittle material.
tailstock method on a lathe machine.
A zero rake angle is used for machining brass material.
(a) Redundant (b) Internal
Material Rake Angle
(c) External (d) Deep groove Aluminium 12º-25º
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Brass 0º-8º
Ans. (c) : External tapers can be turned with set-over Bronze 0º-15º
tailstock method on a lathe machine. Cast iron 0-5º
Taper turning with tailstock set over method– This Copper 18º-25º
method is employed for turning small tapers on longer Stainless steel 8º-10º
jobs and is confined to external tapers only. Mild steel 12º-20º
Form tool method– A tapering form is used to obtain
839. The relation between the tool life (7) in minutes
tapers. It is limited to short external tapers.
and cutting speed (V) in m/min is (where n =
836. A diamond shaped pattern on component is An exponent, which depends upon the tool ad
produced using______tool on lathe machine. workpiece, and C = A constant):
(a) Single point cutting (b) Knurling (a) VnT = C (b) VTn = C
n
(c) Drilling (d) Hacksaw (c) V /T = C (d) V/Tn = C
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
Ans. (b) : The relation between the tool life in minutes 843. Knurling is the operation done on which
and cutting speed (V) in m/min is an exponent, which machine
depends upon the tool and workpiece is VTn = C. (a) Grinding machine (b) Milling Machine
In this, V = cutting speed in m/min. (c) Drill Machine (d) Lathe machine
T = tool life in minutes NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
n = An exponent which depends upon the tool and Ans. (d): Knurling is the operation done on Lathe
workpiece machine knurling is the operation of producing straight
C = constant line diamond-shaped pattern or crass-line pattern on a
840. In metal cutting, use of low feeds and high cylindrical external surface by pressing a tool called
cutting speeds is desired when the objective is: knurling tool.
(a) High metal removal rate • Knurling is not a cutting operation but it is forming
operation.
(b) Dry machining
(c) Use of soft cutting tool • Purpose of knurling is a good grip and make for
passivity handling etc.
(d) Surface finish
Ans. (d) : In metal cutting, use of low feeds and high
cutting speeds is desired when the objective is surface
finish.
844. If the cutting speed is 20 m/min, what is the
• Surface finish is a term that refers to the process used
rotational speed required for a 20 mm drill bit?
to alter a metal's surface by adding, removing or
(a) 120 rpm (b) 320 rpm
reshaping.
(c) 400 rpm (d) 160 rpm
841. What is the name of process of producing a flat NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
seat for a bolt head at the opening of drilled
Ans. (b) : Given that,
hole
V = 20 m/min
(a) Counter boring (b) Counter sinking
d = 20 mm
(c) Reaming (d) Spot facing
πdN π × 20 × N
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 Vm = ⇒ 20 =
1000 1000
Ans. (d) : Spot facing-It is an operation of smoothing
20 × 1000
and squaring the surface around a hole. N= = 318.18 ≈ 320 rpm
22
Counter boring -Operation of enlarging one end of an × 20
existing hole concentric with the original hole with 7
square bottom cutting speed for counter boring is 845. Which of the following cannot be used for taper
greater than that of drilling operation. turning?
Counter sinking - Operation of making cone shape (a) Compound rest method
enlargement of the end a hole. (b) Form tool
842. While machining cast iron coolant should be (c) Tail stock offset method
(d) None of these
(a) Dry air (b) Soft water
(c) Kerosene (d) Machine oil
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 Ans. (d) : Compound rest, form tool & tail stock offset
method all of these are used for taper turning.
• Compound rest is used for taper turning of small size
Ans. (a) : While machining cast iron coolant should jobs.
be dry air.
• Form tool are used for short & steep taper.
Material Cutting fluid • Offset method is used only for taper turning of small
Cast iron Machined dry/dry top angles & long jobs.
air/compressed air 846. Which of the following is a disadvantage in
Brass, Bronze, Monel Machined dry/soluble oil forming taper with the compound slide
metal method?
Aluminum Kerosen oil, mineral oil, (a) External taper cannot be produced
soluble oil (b) Steep taper cannot be produced
Stainless steel Sulphar based mineral oil (c) Internal taper cannot be produced
(d) Taper length is limited to the movement of
Alloy steel Soluble oil the top slide.
Wrought iron Sulphar based mineral oil ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
Ans. (d) : This is the biggest disadvantage of this Ans. (c): Given,
method compound slide is taper length is limited to v = 120 m/min
movement of the top slide.
d1 = 25 mm
847. Find the time required for one complete cut on
a piece of work 350 mm long and 50 mm in d2 = 50 mm
diameter. The cutting speed is 35 d3 = 75 mm
meters/minute and the feed is 0.5 mm per rpm of spindle = N
revolution. Now cutting speed of spindle
(a) 3.56 minutes (b) 3.65 minutes
v = πdN m/min
(c) 3.34 minutes (d) 3.14 minutes
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 v
N1 =
Ans. (d) : Given, πd1
L = 350 mm 120 ×1000
d = 50 mm N1 = = 1528 πpm
π× 25
V = 35 meter/min
120 × 1000
f = 0.5 mm / revolution So, N2 = = 764 rpm
π = 3.14 π× 50
In turning - 120 × 1000
N3 = = 509.6rpm
πdN π× 75
V=
1000 850. While turning ductile materials, long
35 × 1000 continuous chips are formed. Select the
N=
50 × 3.14 incorrect statement regarding this problem.
N = 222.9 ≈ 223 rpm (a) Chips can be safety hazard to the operator
turning time (b) A hammer is used as chip breaker to break the
L chips as soon as possible
T=
fN (c) Chip may become coded near the tool or
350 workpiece
=
0.5 × 223 (d) To break off long chips, a chip breaker is
t = 3.13 ≈ 3.14 min used on tool
t = 3.14 minutes HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
848. The life of a lathe tool is 400 mins., when JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
operating at a cutting speed of 40m/mim. Given
the Vtn = C. Find the highest cutting speed that Ans. (b) : There are both advantage & disadvantages of
that will give a tool life of 900 mins. The value having long continuous chip.
of n is 0.5 Although continuous chip is considered an ideal for
(a) 32.13 m/min. (b) 26.67 m/min. better surface finish, low power consumption and longer
(c) 41.45 m min. (d) 47.35 m/mm. tool life, they are not always desirable as they can create
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 unsafe work conditions for the operator.
Ans. (b) : Given, • Chip breakes are used to break the chips into short
V1 = 40 m/min segments.
T1 = 400 min
T2 = 900 min 851. In facing operation of lathe
n = 0.5 (a) Feed is given by axial movement of carriage
Given Taylor Principal VTn = C (b) Job must be hold in face plate
V1T1n = V2 V2n ............(i) (c) Depth of cut is shown by axial movement of
Put the given value in equation (i). carriage
40×4000.5 = V2 × 9000.5 (d) Diameter of job will reduce
40 × 20 = V2 × 30 NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
V2 = 26.67 m/min JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
849. For a cutting speed of 120m/min, if the job dia. Ans. (c) : Facing is an operation of machining the end
are 25 mm, 50 mm and 75 mm, the rpm of the of a workpiece to produce a flat surface square with
spindle will be.
axis.
(a) 756,509,1528 (b) 600,659,1624
(c) 1528,764,509.6 (d) 800,572,450 • Facing is mounted into a tool holder that rest on the
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 carriage of the lathe.

• Depth of cut in facing operation is controlled by axis Knurling–Knurling is the operation of producing
motion of carriage. straight lined, diamond-shaped pattern or cross lined
pattern on a cylindrical external surface by pressing a
tool called a knurling tool.
• Knurling is not a cutting operation but it is a forming
operation.
856. Which one of the following diameter of the
workpiece should be turned before cutting
852. Which of the following statement is wrong? external threads?
(a) Machine tool induced vibration can not affect (a) Major diameter (b) Core diameter
the cutting tool (c) Pitch diameter (d) Head diameter
(b) Machine tool induced vibration can be RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
minimized by vibration can be minimized by Ans. (a) :
vibration absorption methods.
(c) Machine tool induced vibration occurs due to
unbalanced electric motor
(d) Machining surface finish becomes worst due
to machine tool induced vibrations
Ans. (a) : Vibration induce in machine tool affects
cutting tool. Cutting tool is made of various parts and
when vibrations are produced, they also start vibrating Major diameter of the workpiece whould be turned
at same frequency. If frequency approaches natural before cutting external threads.
frequency of vibration then amplitude of vibration will 857. When the threading tool reaches the end of the
be excessive & the part may break ratio of even. thread, the tool should be-
853. During a machining operation the heat from (a) left in the groove and revers the workpiece
the workpiece is removed from the ______
(b) withdrawn after stopping the machine
medium by the coolant.
(c) withdrawn while the tool is taking cut
(a) Radiation (b) Convection
(d) withdrawn after removing the workpiece
(c) Phase change (d) Conduction
Ans. (b) : During a machining operation heat from the
work object is removed by a coolant through a Ans. (c) : When the threading tool reaches the end of
convection system. the thread, the tool should be withdrawn while the tool
• Convection is mode of heat transfer by motion of fluid is taking cut.
molecules. It occurs due to difference in density. 858. Which among the following statements in
854. How much depth of cut, feed and spindle aligned with the works in respect of threads /
should be for finish turning operation? thread cutting is not correct?
(a) High, high & high (b) Low, low & high (a) Threading toll are checked for accuracy for
(c) High, low & high (d) Low, high & high the 600 angle by using a centre gauge
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 (b) M10 × 1.25 is a fine pitch thread
Ans. (b) : Turning is a process in which the workpiece (c) M 10 is a coarse pitch thread
is rotated and a cutting tool removes a layer of material. (d) Same tool is used for cutting external and
In a finish turning operation, spindle speed is high, feed internal threads
& depth of cut is low. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
855. Knurls of 1.25 mm pitch (21 TPI), produces Ans. (d) : Thread cutting–
(a) Coarse knurling (b) Medium Knurling • Threading tool are checked for accuracy for the 60o
(c) Fine Knurling (d) None of the above angle by using a centre gauge.
• M10 × 1.25 is a fine pitch thread.
• M10 is a coarse pitch thread.
Ans. (b) : Knurls of 1.25 mm pitch (21 TPI), produces
medium knurling, for fine knurling pitch knurls of 0.75 • A thread is a helical shaped groove formed on
mm. cylindrical surface of workpiece.

859. Which among the following statements is Ans. (c) : A multi start thread is cut on a lathe by a
correct? single point tool.
(a) During turning, after giving one depth of cut, • A single point cutting tool can be used for
the diameter is reduced equal to double the increasing the size of holes or boring.
depth
864. What type of knurling is shown in following
(b) Carbide tipped tool can withstand shock load figure?
(c) When turning bigger diameter job , the r.p.m
is proportionally increased
(d) When turning smaller diameter job, the r.p.m
is proportionally increased
Ans. (a): During turning, after giving one depth of cut, (a) Straight knurling (b) Double knurling
the diameter is reduced equal to double the depth. (c) Cross knurling (d) Diamond knurling
860. Which one of the following operations is not RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
done on work piece held in -between centre? Ans. (d) : Diamond knurling– It is a finishing process
(a) Knurling used to create any combination of horizontal vertical or
(b) Undercutting by plunging crossing lines on the surface of a workpiece.
(c) Thread cutting 865. counter boring is done for -
(d) Parting off (a) debarring hole ends
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 (b) enlarging holes to accurate size
Ans. (d) : Parting off is mainly perform in bar feed (c) finishing cored holes
machines, often used in mass production. (d) accommodating socket head screws
• Knurling is a manufacturing process typically RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
conducted on a lathe, where a pattern straight or
Ans. (d) : Counter boring is done for accommodating
crossed lines is rolled into the material.
socket head screw.
861. Unusual sound is heard during rough boring a They are used to enlarge the opening of an existing hole
large diameter hole, which one of the following
and hole the fastener.
statements is the cause for this defect?
(a) Boring tool springs its travel 866. Which one of the following types of chips is
(b) Coolant is not applied with force found while turning cast iron ?
(a) Long curly chips (b) Segmental chips
(c) Tool set below centre
(d) No secondary clearance ground on the front (c) I- shaped chips (d) Spiral chips
cutting edge RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 Ans. (b) : Discontinuous chips will be formed or
Ans. (a) : Boring tool spring its travel unusual sound is segmental chip because cast iron is a brittle metal.
heared during rough boring a large diameter hole. • Large feed and depth of cut.
862. A workpiece is chamfered to remove burrs. It • Small rake angle high tool-chip friction.
is observed that the chamfer on a workpiece. • Low cutting speed.
Which one of the following is the cause for this 867. Which one of the following is the reason for
defect. ? torn threads while threaded cutting on lathe?
(a) The angle of chamfering is not correct (a) Blunt tool
(b) The chamfering tool is not set square to the (b) Heavy depth of cut
work axis (c) Insufficient side clearance
(c) The work face is not running true (d) Any one of the above
(d) The overhang of the tool is too much RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
Ans. (d) : Reason for torn thread while thread cutting
Ans. (c) : A workpiece is chamfered to remove burs or on lathe can be due to blunt tool, heavy depth of cut,
sharp edge it observed that the chamfer on a workpiece insufficient side clearance.
or work face is hot running true.
868. The width of tool used to cut 10 mm pitch
863. By which one of the following, a multi-start
square thread is -
thread is cut on a lathe?
(a) 10 mm (b) 7.5 mm
(a) By a chaser
(c) 5 mm (d) 2.5 mm
(b) By a die head
(c) By a single-point tool RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
(d) By a split die Ans. (c) : A square thread is adapted for the
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 transmission of power in either direction.

• The square thread are used in screw jack, lead screw Ans. (d) : Half nut is detachable part of the apron.
and clamping devices. • A half nut is used to engage the lead screw to the
Pitch 10 carriage.
Width = = = 5 mm
2 2 • Half nut a screw nut split lengthwise so that either
869. The included angle of the counter sinking one part may be arranged to ride on a screw or the
portion of a centre drill of type 'B' used for two parts may be arranged to clamp about a screw.
protecting the center hole is 874. Before centre drilling, the job should be ____
(a) 750 (b) 900 (a) oiled (b) faced
0
(c) 100 (d) 1200 (c) tried (d) dressed
Ans. (d): The induced angle of counter sinking is 120o. Ans. (b): Facing the workpiece is almost always
• Counter sinking a holes is cut to a conical hole into necessary before center drilling.
a metal object. • A center drill is used for drilling a hole on the axis
870. Which one of the following factor will not of a shaft to hold it between centers.
influence the selection of the cutting speed ? 875. During tool set on lathe machine the position of
(a) Diameter of the workpiece tool should be _____
(b) Workpiece material (a) below the axis of job (b) on axis line
(c) Tool material (c) upper the axis of job (d) all of the above
(d) Operation to be performed RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Ans. (b) : During tool set on lathe machine the position
Ans. (a) : Diameter of workpiece will not influence the of tool should be on axis line.
selection of the cutting speed while performing
operation on drilling machine. • The tool should be set exactly at the center of the
workpiece for proper cutting.
871. The chip breaker on a lathe tool is essential
when - 876. Fine facing is done by feeding the tool -
(a) turning soft material (a) from centre to the periphery of the job
(b) turning ductile materials and to break the (b) from periphery to the centre of the job
chips (c) both (a) and (b)
(c) turning cast iron (d) none of the above
(d) turning hardened RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 Ans. (c) : Fine facing is done by feeding the tool–
Ans. (b) : Continuous machining like a turn of ductile • From center to the periphery of the job.
metal produce continuous chips, which leads to their • From periphery to the centre of the job.
handling and disposal problem in that case use of chip
• Facing is a finishing process, it mostly used to
breaker become very important.
finish the edge of workpiece.
872. The special gear of 127 teeth or 63 teeth may be
877. Which one of the following in the
used to cut metric threads in lathe having
British standard screw. It is known as - disadvantages of taper turning by compound
rest method?
(a) idler gear (b) change gear
(a) Only steep
(c) translating gear (d) compound gear
(b) Both internal and external taper can be turned
(c) Only hand feed is possible
Ans. (c) :
(d) Easy setting of the compound reset
• An idler gear in a gear train is defined as gear
placed between input and output shaft. It used for
change the direction of rotation of output shaft. Ans. (b) : Only hand feed is possible in compound slide
method. This is the biggest disadvantage of this method
• Compound gear used where large spaced change are
also threads on taper portion can not be produced.
required or to get different output moving at
different speed. 878. When taper turning by using taper turning
873. Which one of the following statements is true attachment is fastened to the -
with respect to the half nut ? (a) bed (b) carriage
(a) It is detachable part of the saddle (c) tail stock (d) cross slide
(b) It is an integral part of the saddle RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(c) It is an integral part of the apron Ans. (a) : When taper turning by using taper turning
(d) It is detachable part of the apron attachment, the taper turning attachment is fastened to
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 the lathe bed.

879. When machining irregularly shaped work Ans. (d) : The following factor govern the selection of
piece held in face plate, counterbalancing is feed when turning a workpiece.
done by clamping weights. This is done- • Tool geometry
(a) before mounting the face plate on the spindle
• Surface finish required
nose
(b) after mounting the face plate on the spindle • Type of coolant required.
nose and revolving the work piece at the 884. Which one of the following shoulders is used on
slowest r.p.m. components to be threaded?
(c) after mounting the face plate on the spindle (a) Spare shoulder (b) Radius shoulder
nose and spindle in neutral position (c) Undercut shoulder (d) Beveled shoulder
(d) after taking the rough cut RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 Ans. (c): Undercut shoulder is used on components to
Ans. (b):When machining irregularly shaped workpiece be threaded.
held in face plate, counter balancing is done by • Undercuts are also used for thread relief, to
clamping weight. This is done after mounting the face eliminate incomplete thread where they terminate
plate on the spindle nose and keeping the spindle in adjacent to a larger feature.
neutral position.
885. Which of the following is required while using
880. Finishing of job can be done by turning, the form tool method of taper turning?
shaping, slotting and planning _____.
(a) The carriage is to be locked
(a) 0.01 mm (b) 0.02 mm
(b) The compound rest is to be locked
(c) 0.1 mm (d) 1.0 mm
(c) The top slide is to be looked
(d) The tail stock is to be locked
Ans. (c) : Finishing of job can be done by turning
shaping, slotting and planning is 0.1 mm. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
• Turning process, a cutting tool removes material Ans. (b) : A taper is defined as a uniform increase or
from the outer diameter of a rotating workpiece. decrease in the diameter of a piecework measured along
• Shaping is used to change the size and shape of its length.
workpice. • Taper turning by swiveling by compound rest.
• Slotting machine is a reciprocating type of machine • The compound rest can easily be swiveled or rotate
tool similar to a shaper on a planer machine. and clamped at any desired angle.
• Planning machine is process removing metal from a 886. When the offset is towards to operator, the
surface. large diameter of the taper will be at -
881. While step turning, it is preferred to turn first- (a) both the ends (b) the centre
(a) small diameter step (c) the head stock side (d) the tailstock side
(b) large diameter step RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
(c) Eithe (a) or (b) Ans. (d) : The oldest and probably most used method of
(d) Neither (a) nor (b) taper turning is the offset tailstock method. The
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 tailstock is made in two piece, the lower piece is fitted
Ans. (c) : Step turning is a turning process in which to the bed, while the upper part can be adjusted laterally
series of step having different diameter is produced with to a given offset by use of adjust screw and lineup
the lathe machine. marks.
882. The difference in measurement between the 887. Which one of the following is used only for
machined and unmachined diameter is equal to finishing and maintaining correct form of
the thread?
(a) depth of cut (b) 1/2×depth of cut (a) tap (b) Threading tool
(c) 2× depth of cut (d) none of the above (c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped toll
Ans. (c) : The difference in measurement between the
Ans. (c) : Threading chaser is used only for finishing
machined and unmachined diameter is equal to 2 ×
and maintaining correct form of a thread.
depth of cut.
• Thread chasers and thread restores are used to form
883. Which among the following factors governs the
selection of feed when turning a workpiece ? or cut screw thread.
(a) Tool geometry 888. By taper turning attachment, taper can be cut
(b) Surface finish is required on any workpiece which held -
(c) Type of coolant required (a) in a chuck (b) between centres
(d) All of the above (c) both(a) and (b) (d) none of the above
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : By using the compound rest method taper Ans. (c) : Better finish by turning can be obtained by
turning attachment method, both internal and external increasing the speed and reducing the feed.
taper can be turned.
894. Which among the following taper turning
• By taper turning attachment taper can be cut on any
workpiece which held in a chuck between centres. methods can not be used in internal taper
turning?
889. For calculation of offset, we should consider-
(a) total length of job (b) diameter of the job (a) Set over method
(c) diameter of the job (d) both(a) and (b) (b) Taper turning attachment
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 (c) Form tool
Ans. (d): Calculation of offset, we should consider – (d) Swiveling the compound rest
1. Total length of job RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
2. Diameter of the job.
Ans. (a): Tail-stock set over method workpiece that can
L×(D − d) be set up between centers can be tapered externally by
Offset =
2 × L1 setting the tailstock of the lathe off center.
890. Which one of the following parts controls the 895. Which one of the following is the correct
length of taper cut by the compound slide position of threading tool to cut V -thread?
method?
(a) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
(a) Tail stock (b) top slide
with tool axis perpendicular to the work piece
(c) cross slide (d) Saddle
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 axis
Ans. (a) : Tail stock parts control the length of taper cut (b) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
by the compound slide method. with tool axis at 600 to the work piece axis
• A compound slide is used to cut angles or taper that (c) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
cannot be cut by swinging the head stock. with toll axis 450 to the work piece axis
891. When the tail stock is offset for taper turning, (d) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
the centre line of the tail stock is - with tool axis at 300 to the work piece axis
(a) inclined with the lathe bed at an angle equal
to the angle of taper required
(b) inclined with the lathe bed at one half of the Ans. (a) : Exactly at center height of the workpiece
angle of taper required with tool axis perpendicular to the workpiece axis is the
(c) inclined with the lathe bead at one half of the correct position of threading tool to cut V-thread.
angle of taper required 896. Threads are cut on a lathe with a single point
(d) either (a) and (b)
tool by-
(a) setting the correct speed
Ans. (c) : When the tail stock is offset for taper turning
the centre line of the tail stock is inclined with the taper (b) setting the cut for the full depth of the thread
lathe beat at one half of the angle of taper required. (c) making a series of cuts in the same cut
892. While drilling on a lathe, the drill is held in the- (d) moving the carriage by means of rack
(a) head stock (b) tail stock RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
(c) compound rest (d) bed
Ans. (c) : Thread are cut on a lathe with a single point
tool by making a series of cuts in the same cut.
Ans. (b) : The tail stock of a lathe can be used for • A thread is a helical shaped groove formed on
drilling, with the aid of a drill chuck attachment. The cylindrical surface of a workpiece.
drill chucks has a morse taper shaft which can be push 897. While performing threading on lathe, the
into the shaft of the tailstock, locking it in position. The carriage is moved by means of-
usual starting point for drilling with a center lathe is to
used a countersink bit. (a) lead screw (b) hand wheel
893. Which among the following statements is (c) feed rod (d) gear train on a rack
suitable to get better finish by turning? RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(a) Increase the speed and feed Ans. (a) : While threading on a lathe, the carriage is
(b) Reduce the speed and feed moved by means of lead screw.
(c) Increase the speed and reduce the feed
• Lead screw used for transform rotary or turning
(d) Increase the feed and reduce the speed
movement into linear movement.
898. Name the type of cutting action shown in Ans. (c) : Loosen the screw opposite to the direction of
figure. movement and tighten the other screw.
902. To get a fine even surface on a workpiece by
facing operation on lathe, it is necessary to
have
(a) low cutting speed, fine feed and heavy depth
of cut
(b) low cutting speed, fine feed and light depth of
(a) Orthogonal cutting (b) Oblique cutting cut
(c) Plain cutting (d) Chamfer cutting (c) high cutting speed, fine feed and light depth
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 of cut
(d) high cutting speed, fine feed and heavy depth
Ans. (b): Oblique cutting is a type of cutting in which of cut
the cutting tool is at an oblique angle in the direction of
tool motion good surface finish.
• Orthogonal cutting, cutting edge is perpendicular to Ans. (c) : Facing is the process of removing metal from
the direction of tool travel. the end of a workpiece to produce a flat surface. Most
often, the workpiece is cylindrical, but using a 4-jaw
• Poor surface finish. chuck you can face rectangular or odd-shaped work to
• Chamfer mill eliminates sharp edges, leaving a from cubes and non cylindrical shapes.
sloped surface on a chamfer instead.
903. Which type of lathe operation is shown in Fig?
• Plain mills are used to shape flat surface.
899. Which range of cutting speed is suitable for
turning mild steel using H.S.S. tool?
(a) 15 - 20 m/min (b) 35 - 50 m/min
(c) 50 - 80 m/min (d) 70 - 100 m/min
Ans. (b) : For machining a mild steel workpiece by a
high-speed steel single point cutting tool, the average
cutting speed is 30 m/min.
900. Which one of the following machine tool
carriage parts is set at an angle while taper (a) Rough turning with tipped tool
turning on centre lathe? (b) Finish turning with tipped tool
(c) Chamfering with tipped tool
(d) Step turning with solid tool
Ans. (a) : Rough turning with tipped tool lathe
operation is aims to machine a piece to within a
predefined thickness a piece to within a predefined
thickness, by removing the maximum amount of
material in the possible time disregarding the accuracy
(a) Cross slide (b) Compound rest and surface finish.
(c) Saddle (d) Apron 904. For plain turning a 60 mm diameter workpiece
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 using HSS tool with recommended cutting
speed of 30 meter/min., the rpm should be
Ans. (d) : Apron machine tool carriage part is set an
(a) 80 rpm (b) 159 rpm
angle while taper turning on centre lathe.
(c) 192 rpm (d) 318 rpm
901. The amount of offset of tailstock for taper
RRB ALP Patna 2014
turning is done by the offset screws provided.
The procedure to be followed is Ans. (b) : Given,
–3
(a) Loosen both screws and push the body to the d = 60 mm = 60 × 10 m
amount of offset V = 30 m/min.
(b) Loosen both the screws and push the base to Cutting speed of plain turning
the amount of offset V = πDN
(c) Loosen the screw opposite to the direction of 30 = π × 60 × 10–3 N
movement and tighten the other screw 30 × 7 × 103
(d) Loosen the screw in the direction of =N
movement and tighten the other screw 22 × 60
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 N = 159 rpm.
905. Choose the correct formula to find the 909. What is the advantage of tailstock spindle
diameter of job (d) in mm, if the cutting speed having left-handed threads?
(v) in m/mm , and resolutions per minute (n) (a) Avoid advancement of barrel when rotated
are give, clockwise
1000 × V π× n (b) Ensure that the barrel advances with
(a) d = (b) d = clockwise movement of hand wheel
π× n 1000 × V
(c) Reduce the tendency for excessive movement
1000 × π 1000 × n of the barrel
(c) d = (d) d =
V×n π× V (d) Avoid jamming of spindle and hand wheel
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
πd × n Ans. (b) : Advantage of tailstock spindle having left
Ans. (a) : Cutting speed, V = handed thread is that it ensure that the barrel advances
1000 with clockwise movement of hand wheel.
1000 × V 910. An irregularly shaped wotkpiece is turned on a
d=
π×n lathe. Which one of the following work holding
906. Which one of the following combination of accessories is used?
movements is used to turn a ball on a centre (a) Three-jaw chuck (b) Two-jaw chuck
lathe with single point tool? (c) Driving plate (d) Faceplate
(a) Carriage and compound slides are used RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
(b) Cross slides and compound slides are used Ans. (d) : A face plate are used to hold work that is too
(c) Carriage and cross slide are used large or of such a shape that it can not be held in a
(d) Compound are cross slide are used chuck or between centers.
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 • Three jaw chuck is used to hold round and
hexagonal work.
Ans. (b) : Combination of cross slide and compound
• Two jaw chuck are used for rectangular shaped part
slides movement is used to turn a ball on a centre lathe as a stationary fixture.
with single point tool.
• Driving plate is circular plate which is used when
907. State the direction of rotation of job and lead turning job in between centers.
screw while cutting left hand thread viewing 911. Which one of the following is used to hold
from tailstock end. (CW = clockwise ; ACW = cylindrical rough casting for turning?
anticlockwise) (a) Three-jaw chuck
(a) Both the job and lead screw rotate ACW (b) Four -jaw chuck
(b) Both the job and lead screw rotates ACW (c) Collect chuck
(c) Job rotates CW and lead screw rotates ACW (d) Magnetic chuck
(d) Job rotates ACW and lead screw rotates CW RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 Ans. (b) : Four-jaw chuck is used to hold cylindrical
Ans. (d) : The direction of rotation of job and lead rough casting for turning.
screw while cutting left hand rule viewing from tail • Magnetic chuck provide, consistent clamping
stock end + job rotate anticlockwise (ACW) and lead pressure that ensures there is no vibration in how
screw clockwise (CW) because lead screw with right tightly or loosely the workpiece held.
hand thread. • A collect chuck used to form a collar around an
908. A faceplate is used for turning object and clamp into the object with tightened
(a) Regular shaped jobs firmly.
(b) Irregular shaped jobs 912. Which one of the following centers is suitable
(c) Flat jobs while cutting taper by set over method?
(d) None of the above (a) Plain centre (b) Half centre
(c) Ball centre (d) Revolving centre
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (b) : Face plate– A face plate is used for turning
Ans. (c) : Ball centre is particularly suitable for taper
irregular shaped jobs.
turning as per definition of the ball center. It has
• It is a circular plate threaded at its center with plain minimum wear and strain.
and T-slots which are machined rapidly.
913. The carriage of a lathe travels along which
• The face plate is used for holding jobs such as thin axis?
and irregularly shaped workpieces that can not be (a) "B" axis (b) "Z" axis
held between the centers and chucks. (c) "Y" axis (d) "X" axis
• The face plate is held at the head stock spindle. RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
Ans. (b) : The carriage hand wheel is used to manually Ans. (d) : After threading a hole by a tap, it was found
position and hand feed the carriage in the longitudinal Z that the crest of thread was not formed completely
axis. because hole size slightly more than the tap drill size.
914. The basic turning lathe is 919. When the cutting edge of the tool is dull, then
(a) Turret lathe (b) Automatic lathe during machining –
(c) Engine lathe (d) Swiss lathe (a) Discontinuous chips are formed
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (b) Continuous chips are formed
Ans. (c): The basic turning lathe is engine lathe. (c) Continuous chips with built-up edges are
A lathe is a machining tool that is used primarily for formed
shaping metal or wood. (d) No chips are formed
• A turret lathe is a type of metal working lathe that's RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
characterized by the use of interchangeable cutting Ans. (c) : Continuous chip with built-up edge. These
tool. type of chips are formed during the machining of
915. The tailstock barrel has an internal taper. ductile material at medium cutting speed.
Which one of t he following standard tapers is Favorable conditions for this are
provided in the barrel bore? • Ductile material.
(a) Metric taper • High friction at the face of the tool.
(b) Morse taper • Lack of coolant and lubricant.
(c) Jarno taper 920. The maximum production of small and slender
(d) Brown and Sharpe taper parts is done by –
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (a) Capstan lathe
Ans. (b) : Morse taper is a standard taper series used in (b) Sliding head stock automatic lathe
the shanks of cutting tool. This taper design provide (c) Watch maker's lathe
comparatively more friction and holds the cutting. (d) Multispindle automatic lathe
• Morse taper is provide in the barrel bore. RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
916. A jib is provided between the top slide and the Ans. (d) : The maximum production of small and
swivel base assembly of the compound slide. Its slender parts is done by multispindle automatic lathe.
purpose is to Multispindle automatic lathe can provide the various
(a) Allowing dismantling the top slide easily types of machine such as boring, turning chamfering,
(b) Eliminate the backlash of the screw and the threading, grooving.
nut in the assembly 921. The larger the diameter of rod to be turned, the
(c) Adjust the slackness developed due to wear speed will be ..............
(d) Permit flow of the lubricant between the (a) Faster (b) Slower
sliding surfaces (c) Same (d) Vary
Ans. (c) : A jib is provided between the top slide and Ans. (b) : Turning is process in which the workpiece is
the swivel base assembly of the compound slide. Its rotated and a cutting tool remove a layer of metal as the
purpose to adjust the slackness developed due to wear. tool move to the left.
917. The compound slide swivel base is set at 45° to • Larger diameter of rod to be turned the speed will
the centre line of lathe. The degree of the be slower because change in diameter is equivalent
reading at the cross slide index will be to 2 × depth of cut of the workpiece in turning.
(a) 135° (b) 90° 922. For machining a cast iron workpiece by a high
(c) 45° (d) 30° speed steel tool, the average cutting speed is –
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (a) 10 m/min (b) 15 m/min
Ans. (c) : The compound slide swivel base is set at 45o (c) 22 m/min (d) 30 m/min
to the centre line of lathe. The degree of the reading at RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
the cross slide index will be 45o. Ans. (c) : For machining a cast iron workpiece by a
918. After threading a hole by a tap, it was found high speed steel tool the average cutting speed is 22
that the crest of thread was not formed m/min and for a mild steel is 30 m/min.
completely. This defect is due to .... 923. In order to achieve a specific surface finish in
(a) Insufficient coolant supply single point turning, the most important factor
(b) Broken the tip of cutting edge of the tap to be controlled is –
(c) Hole size slightly less than the tap drill size (a) Depth of cut (b) Cutting speed
(d) Hole size slightly more than the tap drill size (c) Feed (d) Tool rake angle
Ans. (b): In order to achieve a specific surface finish in 928. The method used for taper turning on a lathe
single point turning, the most important factor to be machine is ..........
controlled is cutting speed other parameter will impact (a) Compound rest method
on the surface finish. (b) Tail stock set over method
924. Slow speed of the spindle is necessary in– (c) Taper turning attachment method
(a) Thread cutting (d) All of these
(b) Turning a work of larger diameter RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
(c) Turning a hard or tough material Ans. (d) : In a lathe machine, taper turning means to
(d) All of these produce a conical surface by the gradual reduction in
diameter from a cylindrical job.
Method of taper turning–
Ans. (d) : Slow speed of the spindle is necessary in–
• Compound rest method
• Thread cutting.
• Tail stock set over method
• Turning a work of danger diameter.
• Taper turning attachment method.
• Turning a hard or tough materials
929. The form tool method of turning taper is
• The cutting speed is proportional to the spindle suitable for .....
speed and diameter at which cutting is being done. (a) lengthy jobs with slow tapers
925. When machining, a hard and brittle metal like (b) any length of work
cast iron, the type of chips produced is ........... (c) very short slow angle
(a) Continuous chips (d) short and slow angle
(b) Discontinuous chips RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(c) Continuous chips with built up edge Ans. (c) : The form tool method are one of the simplest
(d) Fine chips method to create a short taper.
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 930. The formula to calculate the cutting speed is ....
Ans. (b) : Discontinuous or segmental chip are πDN πDN
produced when brittle metal such as cast iron and hard (a) m / min (b) m / min
60 100
bronze are cut or when some ductile metal are cut under πDN πDN
poor cutting conditions. (c) m / min (d) m / min
75 1000
926. The slowest speed in lathe is adopted for the RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
following operation .............
Ans. (d) : Cutting speed is–
(a) Thread cutting (b) Taper turning
πDN
(c) Knurling (d) None of these V= m / min
1000
931. Benefits of the 5S systems are .......
Ans. (a) : Thread cutting on the lathe is a process that
(a) increase the cleanliness
produces a helical ridge of uniform.
(b) increase the productivity
Section on the workpiece
(c) decrease the production rate
• When thread cutting operation perform then cutting
(d) maintain the production rate
speed slow.
• Taper turning is a machining operation is gradual
Ans. (b) : 5S cleanliness help reduce maintenance and
reduction in diameter from one part of a cylindrical
properly maintained machine, tool and equipment mean
workpiece to another part. quality standard will be maintained 5S produce improve
927. The job-supporting device that is bolted to the employee moral and increase productivity.
back end of the carriage and moved along 932. The basic function of cutting fluids is .........
during machining operation is called .......... (a) cleaning and lubrication
(a) Angle plate (b) Steady rest (b) facilitating chip removal and lubrication
(c) Follower rest (d) Compound rest (c) cools the tool and the workpiece
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 (d) cooling and flushing chips away from the
Ans. (c) : Follower rest is consist of a like casting cutting area
having two adjustable jaw to support the workpiece. RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
The rest is bolted to the block end of the carriage, Ans. (d) : Main purpose of cutting fluid are to cool and
during machining, it support the work and moves with lubricate machining region as well as to flush away the
the carriage. chip are produced.

933. The correct formula for the calculation of taper 30 = π××50 ×10−3 × N
ratio ‘K’ is ..........
30
D−d D−d N=
(a) K = (b) K = π× 50 × 10−3
2l l
N = 191 RPM
D−d D−d L
(c) K = (d) K = × 937. Position of the tool bit with reference to the
2 2 l
axis of rotation of the work piece during thread
cutting is:
(a) Perpendicular (b) Inclined
Ans. (b) : (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Position of the tool bit with reference to the
axis of rotation of the workpiece during thread cutting is
both perpendicular and inclined.
Taper ratio K is– 938. Chamfering is an operation of:
D−d (a) Bevelling the extreme end of the surface
K=
l (b) Embossing a diamond shape on the
934. Feed of the tool in turning is expressed in..... workpiece
(a) m/min (b) mm/min (c) Reducing the diameter of the workpiece
(c) mm/rev (d) cm/rev (d) Enlarging a cylindrical hole
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (c) : Feed rate is the velocity at which the cutter is Ans. (a) : Chamfering is the operation of beveling the
fed that is advanced against the workpiece. extreme end of workpiece. Chamfering means the
f process of making sloping edge or corner of a
Feed rate = mm / min workpiece which is symmetric in nature.
RPM × T
939. The tailstock set over required to turn a taper
935. Grade of knurling is shown. Name the grade of
on the entire length L of the workpiece having
knurling marked ‘X’ in Fig.
diameter D and d is:
(D − d) (D − d
(a) (b)
2L L
(D − d)
(c) (d) D – d
2
Ans. (c) : The tail stock set over required to turn a taper
(a) Fine (b) Medium on the entire length L of the workpiece having diameter
(c) Coarse (d) Standard D and d is
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 D−d
Ans. (a) : Grade of knurling– =
2
940. For turning internal tapers, the suitable
method is:
(a) By a form tool
(b) By setting over the tailstock
(c) By a taper turning attachment
(d) By swiveling a compound rest
936. Calculate the “RPM” for plain turning a 50 RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
mm workpiece using HSS tool. Recommended Ans. (c) : Taper turning attachment method– It is
cutting speed is 30 meters/min. used for taper turning or boring without tail stock
(a) 181 (b) 191 offsetting.
(c) 201 (d) 221 In this taper turning method, the job is held in between
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 the center or a chuck.
Ans. (b) : Given, 941. For machining V shaped grooves or similar
d = 50 mm = 50 × 10–3 m special shaped grooves in concave or convex
V = 30 m/min form which one of the following type of tool is
We know that, V = πdN m/min. used:
(a) Form tool (b) Slotting tool Ans. (c) :

(c) RH tool (d) LH tool
Ans. (a) : A form tool is defined as a cutting tool
having one or more cutting edge with well define
profile or counter that is reproduced as the desired from Ball centre is sometimes used for tapering by the set-
on the workpiece surface. over tail stock method. The standard centre cannot sit
942. The feed depends on: squarely in the center hole when the tail stock is set
(a) Finish required (b) Depth of cut over.
(c) Rigidity of machine (d) All of these 947. The sliding surfaces of the lathe bed are-
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 (a) Flame hardened (b) Case hardened
Ans. (d) : The feed depend on– (c) Normalised (d) Tempered
• Finish required RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
• Depth of cut Ans. (a) : The beds are mostly made of close-grained
• Rigidity of machine grey cast iron. Cast iron has a very high damping
capacity. Cast iron can withstand more compressive
• RPM
load and resist vibration.
• Feed per tooth.
• Flame hardening is a heat treatment process where
943. The gradual increase or decrease in diameter oxyfuel gas flames are directly impinged into lathe
of piece of work measured along its length is bed surface area to be hardened which is then
called- subjected to quenching.
(a) Cylinder (b) Taper
948. Knurling is an operation of-
(c) Slant (d) Cone
(a) Taper turning
(b) Finishing
Ans. (b) : A taper may be defined as a uniform gradual
(c) Roughing the surface for hand grip
increase or decrease along the length of the job.
(d) None of these
Taper turning can be measured by from tool method,
tailstock offset method, compound slide method. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
944. By which one of the following, a multi start Ans. (c) : Knurling is a manufacturing process,
thread is cut on a lathe? typically conducted on a lathe, whereby a patter of
(a) By a chaser straight, angled or crossed line is rolled into material.
(b) By a die head 949. Which form of thread enables easy engagement
(c) By a single-point tool of the half nut?
(d) By a split die (a) Square thread (b) Acme thread
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 (c) Buttress thread (d) Saw tooth thread
Ans. (c) : Multi start thread is cut on a lathe by a single RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
point tool. A multi start thread consist of two or more Ans. (b) : Acme thread are used in lathe lead screw.
intertwined thread running parallel to one another. This form of thread enable the easy engagement of the
945. While cutting interal threads on lathe with half nut.
single point tool, the spindle speed should be- • Square thread are used in application where high
(a) Less than that for the plain turning operation power transmission efficiency and high load
(b) More than that for the plain turning operation capacity.
(c) Equal to that for plain turning operation • Buttress thread are most used for resisting force
(d) None of the above extorted in one direction only.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 950. The centre used for tailstock offset method is–
Ans. (a) : While cutting internal thread on lathe with (a) Dead centre
single point on lathe with single point tool, the spindle (b) Half centre
speed should be less than that for the plain turning (c) Revolving centre
operation. (d) Ball centre
946. Which one of the following centers is suitable RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
while cutting taper by set over method? Ans. (d) : Ball centre is sometimes used for tapering by
(a) Plain centre (b) Half centre the set over tail stock method. The standard centres
(c) Ball centre (d) Reveling centre cannot sit squarely in the center hole when the tail stock
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 is set over.
951. Which one of the following standard taper is Ans. (c) : A taper gauge is a measured tool that
self holding type? measured size such as the width of gap and groove, hole
(a) Morse taper diameter and pipe inner diameter.
(b) Brown and sharp taper 956. A carbide tipped tool with blue marking is used
(c) Jaron taper on a lathe. Which one of the following
(d) Metric steep taper materials can be machined with this tool?
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 (a) Brass (b) Steel
Ans. (a) : Sleeves and sockets are made with the same (c) Plastic (d) grey cast iron
taper so that the taper shank of drill when engaged, will RRB ALP Patna 2014
give a good welding action. Due to this reason morse Ans. (b) : Steel material can be machined with this tool.
taper are called self holding taper. • Sintered carbide tipped tool also known as hard
952. In a slotting tool , the cutting pressure acts metal tool or cemented carbide tool are made by a
along the ......... mixture of tungsten carbide micro grains with cobalt
(a) Breadth of the tool at high temperature and pressure.
(b) Height of the tool 957. Threads are cut on a lathe with a single point
(c) Length of the tool tool by
(d) Perpendicular to the width of the tool (a) Setting the correct speed
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (b) Setting one cut for full depth of the thread
(c) Making a series of cuts in the same cut
Ans. (c) : In a slotting tool, the cutting pressure act
along the length of the tool. (d) Moving the carriage by means of rack
• Slotting machine is a reciprocating type of machine
tool similar to a sharper or a planer machine. Ans. (c) : Thread are cut on a lathe with a single point
tool by making a series of cuts in the same cut.
953. Which is the operation of bevelling the edge of
cylinder or a bore to definite length? 958. Brown and Sharpe taper is available in a series
(a) Boring (b) Facing of sizes. The series is
(a) 0 to 17 (b) 1 to 17
(c) Chamfering (d) Plain turning
(c) 0 to 18 (d) 1 to 18
Ans. (c) : Chamfering is the operation of beveling the
extreme end of a workpiece. Ans. (d) : Brown and Sharpe taper is available in a
series of size 1 to 18.
• Chamfering also know as the beveling process.
• The brown and Sharpe taper is used on cutting tool
954. While power feed is engaged during turning including end mills and reamers.
taper using taper turning attachment, it is
959. Which of the following sizes of Brown and
noticed that for short distance parallel turning Sharpe tapers are most commonly used?
takes place due to certain defect. Which one of
(a) 5, 7 and 9 (b) 7, 9 and 11
the following is the cause for this defect?
(c) 9, 11 and 13 (d) 11, 13 and 15
(a) The positioning of the taper turning
attachment is not correct RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
(b) The tool setting is not to the centre height Ans. (b) : Brown and Sharpe like the morse these have
(c) Play between the sliding nuts a series of size, from 1 to 18, with 7, 9 and 11 being the
most common.
(d) Workpiece is not rigidly held
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 960. The rate of taper on diameter on Jarno tapers
is
Ans. (c) : While power feed is engaged during turning (a) 1:10 (b) 1:15
taper turning attachment, it is noticed that for short
(c) 1:20 (d) 1:25
distance parallel turning take place due to play between
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
the slider nut because of its defect.
Ans. (c) : The rate of taper on diameter on jarno taper is
955. A taper on a workpiece is produced using a form
1 : 20.
tool. When the taper is checked with a gauge, it
is observed that the gauge makes contact at the • The jarno taper is used on machine tool such as
larger end of the taper and there is gap towards profiling machines and die sinking machines.
the smaller end. Which one of the following 961. Which one of the following types of tapers is
statements is a cause for this defect? used for drills and reamers?
(a) The larger diameter is more than required (a) Morse taper
(b) The smaller diameter is more than required (b) Jarno taper
(c) The angle of taper is more (c) Brown and Sharpe taper
(d) The length of taper is less (d) Standard taper pin
Ans. (a) : Morse taper is used for drills and reamers. (a) 2.3 mm
• Morse taper identified by measuring the large or the (b) 3.0 mm
small diameter the length or the taper per inch. (c) 4.2 mm
962. What is a built-up edge (BUE) in respect of a (d) 6.6 mm
turning tool? RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
(a) Job material embedded on tool edge Ans. (b) : The depth of cut to be given using a cross
(b) A carbide tip soldered on a tool shank slide after zero setting should be 3 mm.
(c) A method of reconditioning worm out cutting • Chamfering is making a small cut, usually at 45o to
tool edge remove 90o edge.
(d) A tool cutting edge with a crater on it 965. A shaft of 50 mm has to be rough turned to ∅
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 42 mm in one pass. When will you check to
Ans. (a) : The term built up edge mean that the material ensure the set depth of cut is correct?
that you are machining is being pressure welded to the (a) After the tool traveled the full length
cutting tool. (b) After the tool traveled half way
• During machining of stainless steel at low cutting (c) Just after the cut is taken at the tailstock end
speed, workpiece material tends to adhere to the (d) After the tool has traveled a distance more
cutting tool at the tool chip interface, forming build than the angular shoulder
up edge (BUE). RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
963. To turn taper by compound slide method the Ans. (d) : After the tool has traveled at distance more
angle of swivel of the top slide is to be than the angular shoulder.
determined. 966. Which one of the following statements indicates
When the taper is expressed as a ratio the the principle followed in turning taper by
formula to determine the swivel angle (θ) is.... offsetting the tailstock?
taper ratio (a) The work axis is kept out of alignment with
(a) tan θ =
2 the lathe axis and the tool movement is
(b) tan θ = 2 × taper ratio parallel to lathe axis
(b) The work axis is kept in line with the lathe
taper ratio
(c) tan θ = axis and the tool is made to move at an angle
4 to lathe axis
(d) tan θ = 4 × taper ratio (c) The live and dead centres are moved in
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 opposite directions to keep the work axis out
Ans. (a) : Taper is defined as a uniform increasing or of alignment with the lathe axis
decrease in the diameter of a piece of work measured (d) The lathe axis is kept out of alignment with
along its length. the lathe axis and the tool is made to move at
an angle to the lathe axis
Ans. (a) : The work axis is kept out of alignment with
the lathe axis and the tool movement is parallel to lathe
axis.
967. Fig. shows an eccentric step of D2 turned for a
D1 − D 2 length of l2. The eccentricity will be equal to
tan θ =
2L
Taper ratio
tan θ =
2
964. A workpiece shown in figure has to be 450
chamfered using a form tool and by plunge
cutting. The depth of cut to be given using a
cross slide after zero setting should be
(a)
( D1 − D2 ) × l1 (b)
( D1 − D2 ) × l2
l2 l1
(c)
( D1 − D 2 ) (d)
( D1 + D2 )
2 2
Ans. (c) : The eccentricity will be equal to – Ans. (a) : Chips getting clogged which defect
D − D2 workpiece and drill were not clamped firmly enough
= 1 poor chip removal. Cutting speed and feed rate set
2
incorrectly poor quality of drill.
968. To cut 20 mm internal square thread with a
972. A spindle sleeve is to be assembled to the
pitch of 2.5 mm, the core diameter should be
spindle nose to perform specific operations on a
(a) 17.5 mm (b) 18.5 mm
lathe. These sleeves have
(c) 20.0 mm (d) 22.5 mm
(a) External and internal Morse tapers
(b) External Jarno taper and internal Morse taper
Ans. (a) : Given, (c) External Morse taper and internal Jarno taper
Smalled diameter (D) = 20 mm (d) External and internal Jarno taper
Pitch (P) = 2.5 mm RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
Core diameter (DC) = D – P
Ans. (a) : A spindle sleeve is to be assembled to the
= 20 – 2.5 spindle nose to perform specific operation on a lathe.
DC = 17.5 mm These sleeves have external and internal morse.
969. While thread cutting on a lathe by using single- 973. A simple gear train is to be used to cut a thread
point tool, the tool moves in a path called as with a certain pitch. A driver gear with 3 teeth
(a) Epicycloid (b) Cycloid more than that of the calculated value is
(c) Rake (d) Helix mounted due to the non-availability of the
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 required gear from the set. The thread that is
Ans. (d) : The process of cutting thread or the cut will have the pitch
formation of external grooves on a workpiece is known (a) More than that required throughout the length
as threading. (b) Less that that required throughout the length
While thread cutting, the tool moves in a helical path. (c) Equal to that required throughout the length
(d) More for a certain length and then less for the
remaining length
Ans. (a) : More than that required throughout the
length.
974. Power feed is not possible in compound slide
method of taper turning. Which one of the
following defects can be noticeable on the
tapered workpiece due to the above reason?
(a) Chatter
970. To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of
square threads, the width of the internal square (b) Poor surface finish
threading tool should be (c) Taper angle more than set
(a) slightly more than the half pitch (d) Taper angle less than set
(b) slightly less then the half pitch RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
(c) equal to the half pitch Ans. (b): When power feed is not possible in compound
(d) equal to the pitch slide method of taper turning then defect is cause to
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 poor surface finish.
Ans. (a) : To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of 975. Which among the following statements is
square thread, the width of the internal square threading correct?
tool should be slightly more than the half pitch. (a) During turning, after giving one depth of cut,
the diameter is reduced equal to double the
971. A hole is drilled in a lathe by using a ∅ 10 mm
depth
straight shank drill held in a drill chuck. After
a short distance of the drill travel, it rotates (b) Carbide tipped tool can withstand shock load
along with the work. Which one of the (c) When turning bigger diameter job, the rpm is
following is the cause for this defect? proportionally increased
(a) Chips getting clogged (d) When turning smaller diameter job, the rpm is
(b) Centre not aligned proportionally decreased
(c) Spotting at the centre not done RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
(d) Feeding by tailstock hand wheel is too slow Ans. (a) : During turning, after giving one depth of cut,
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 the diameter is reduced equal to double the depth.

976. For setting of tool for threading, it is aligned (c) Thread chasing dial is an additional part of
with the work by using the lathe carriage
(a) try square (b) centre gauge (d) Thread chasing dial stop rotating when the
(c) thread plug gauge (d) template half nut lever is engaged
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
Ans. (b) : For setting of tool for threading, it is aligned Ans. (c) : Thread chasing dial indicates when the split
with the work by using centre gauge. nut should be engaged with the lead screw for the
cutting tool to follow the previously cut groove.
977. Which one of the following statements in
respect of thread cutting is not correct? 981. Which among the following statements in
respect of chasers is correct?
(a) Inserted tool bits are more advantageous
(a) Chaser is a single point cutting tool
while cutting internal threads
(b) Cutting threads by a chaser is slower process
(b) Before cutting internal threads, the hole
than that by a single point tool
should be chamfered
(c) Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish
(c) When internal thread cutting is done in a
(d) The same chaser can be used for cutting any
blind hole, a recess should be provided
pitch of thread irrespective of the type of
(d) When cutting internal threads, the core chaser used
diameter may be equal to the size of external
threads
Ans. (c) : A chaser tap is designed reform the threads as
opposed to a cutting tap, which will cut it way through
Ans. (d) : When cutting internal threads, the core possibly removing too much thread material.
diameter may be equal to the size of external threads. 982. Which one of the following methods is used to
978. Which among the following in respect of thread press the mandrel squarely to the workpiece?
cutting is not correct? (a) By hammering (b) By arbor press
(a) The threads can be cut on a lathe by using (c) By tailstock (d) By vice
simple gear train arrangement only RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
(b) The 127 teeth gear is used as driven gear for Ans. (b) : By arbor press method is used to press the
cutting metric threads on a lathe having lead mandrel squarely to the workpiece.
screw in TPI
983. Which one of the following is the remedial
(c) The 63 teeth gear is used as a driver for measure to prevent the tool cutting edge
cutting British threads on a lathe having chipping off?
metric lead screw (a) Increase the feed rate
(d) The teeth of the driver and driven are based (b) Reduce cutting speed
on the pitch of thread on lead screw (c) Decrease nose radius
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (d) Use negative top rake
Ans. (a) : The lead screw is used for thread cutting. RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
• Lead screw converts rotational motion to linear Ans. (d): Negative rake angle using top rake is a
motion and a torque to a linear force. remedial measure to prevent the tool cutting edge
979. Which one of the following statements in chipping off.
respect of eccentric turning is correct? 984. A tool, which is used to enlarge a previously
(a) In an eccentric shaft, the centres of the drilled hole is known as
individual diameters are displaced (a) Facing tool (b) Turning tool
(b) Eccentric shaft can be turned by holding (c) Form tool (d) Boring tool
(c) Higher speed is chosen for eccentric turning RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(d) It is preferred to give more depth of cut in the Ans. (d) : A tool, which is used to enlarge a previously
beginning while turning an eccentric shaft drilled hole is know as boring tool.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 • A facing tool is a type of lathe machine tool used to
Ans. (a) : In an eccentric shaft, the centres of the cut a flat surface that is perpendicular to a
individual diameter are displayed. workpiece rotational axis.
980. Which one of the following statements in 985. Which one of the following is used only for
respect of thread chasing dial is not correct? finishing and maintaining correct form of
(a) Thread chasing dial is used to catch the thread thread?
when threading on lathe (a) Tap (b) Threading tool
(b) Worm gear of chasing dial engages with the (c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped tool
lead screw while thread chasing RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
Ans. (c) : Threading chaser is used only for finishing Which one of the following gears in the change
and maintaining correct form of thread. gear train is equally divisible by the number of
starts to be cut?
986. More than one diameter is machined on a
(a) Spindle gear fixed on main spindle
shaft. The section turning each diameter is
(b) 1st driver gear of the change gear train
called.....
(c) 1st driven gear of the change gear train
(a) Chamfer (b) Slot (d) Gear on the lead screw
(c) Reaming (d) Shoulder RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 Ans. (b) : The gear I is the driver and gear II is driven
Ans. (d) : When more than one dia meter is machined gear. When driver gear is rotate in a clockwise
on a shaft the joining section of each diameter is called direction, driven gear will rotate in the anti-clockwise
a shoulder or step. direction.
987. Feeding the tool from the centre of the work 991. A British thread chasing dial has 16 teeth on
towards the periphery in a lathe machine is the worm wheel and the lead screw has 4
called...... threads per inch. During one full turn of the
(a) Threading (b) Parting off dial, the carriage will move on the bed to a
distance of.....
(c) Facing (d) Knurling
(a) 1 inch (b) 4 inches
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (c) 8 inches (d) 16 inches
Ans. (c) : Feeding the tool from the centre of the work RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
toward the periphery in lathe machine is called facing. Ans. (b) : Given,
• Facing is an operation of machine the end of a T = 16 teeth
workpiece that is perpendicular to the rotating axis. 4 teeth
• Thread cutting on the lathe is a process that produce Lead screw =
inch
a helical ridge of uniform section on the workpiece.
• During one full turn of the dial, the carriage will
• Knurling is an operation of produced crossed line move on the bed to a distance of
pattern for gripping.
T
• Parting off is mainly performed in bar feed =
machine, often used in mass production. lead screw
988. Prussian blue is used on ..... 16
= = 4 inch.
(a) Rough surface 4
(b) White wash surface 992. The sizes 4 to 12 are applicable to
(c) Machine finished surface (a) Standard taper pin
(d) Rough casting surface (b) Jarno taper
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 (c) Brown and Sharpe taper
(d) Morse taper
Ans. (c):Prussian blue is used on machine finished
surface. RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
Prussian blue, also known as potassium ferric Ans. (c) : The size 4 to 12 are applicable to brown and
sharpe taper.
hexacyano ferrate is used as medication of treat thallium
poisoning or radio active coesium poisoning. • The brown and sharp taper is used on cutting tools
including end mills and reamers.
989. An external 3 start square thread of 12 mm
993. Which one of the following tapers has been
lead is to be cut with a single point tool adopted by International Organization of
The width of the cutting edge of the tool is..... Standardization as ISO 296?
(a) 6 mm + 0.05 (b) 4 mm + 0.05 (a) Brown and Sharpe taper
(c) 3 mm + 0.05 (d) 3 mm + 0.05 (b) Jarno taper
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (c) Standard taper pin
Ans. (b) : Given, (d) Morse taper
Number of start = 3 RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
Lead = 12 mm Ans. (d) : The principal of the morse taper is that of the
Lead 12 cone into cone.
Pitch (p) = = = 4 mm 994. Morse tapers are of self-holding variety, and
n 3
can have three types of ends. Which one of the
Width of the cutting edge of the tool (w) = 4 mm + 0.05 following is not among those three ?
990. One of the methods of cutting multi-start (a) Tang (b) Threaded
threads with a single point tool is by the gear (c) Flat (d) Splined
dividing method. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Ans. (d) : Morse taper and of self holding variety tang, Ans. (a) : A single spindle automatic lathe is a modified
flat and threaded. from of turret lathe.
995. Morse Tapers come in eight sizes - 0 to 7. There 1000. In order to reduce the production time of
is one half-size which is rarely used. Which is components manufactured on capstan lathe it
that half-size ? is a practice to overlap the operations. This
1 1 means that some operations are performed
(a) 2 (b) 3 simultaneously. The overlapping operations is
2 2 achieved by ....
1 1 (a) combined cutting action of the front and rear
(c) 4 (d) 5
2 2 cross slide tool posts.
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 (b) toolings on either the front or rear cross slide
Ans. (c) : Morse taper come in eight size identified by toolpost combined with the toolings on the
whole number between 0 and 7, and one half size turret head.
(c) tooling on the front and rear cross slide
 1
 4 2  very rarely found and not shown in the table. toolpost combined with the toolings on the
  turret head.
996. Which Morse taper is found in drill presses up (d) toolings on two or more turret stations
to 1/2" capacity ? combined.
(a) MT1 (b) MT2 RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
(c) MT3 (d) MT4 Ans. (b) : The overlapping operation is achieved by
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 tooling on either the front or rear cross slide toolpost
Ans. (b) : The MT2 taper is the size most often found in combined with the tooling on turret head.
1 1001. Which one of the following operations is
drill presses up to capacity. performed with a tool holder provided with a
2 bar stop on a capstan lathe?
997. Copying lathes are used to produce identical (a) Chamfering
parts rapidly and are especially suitable for (b) Facing
producing shafts. Which one of the following (c) Centre drilling
operations cannot be done on the workpiece by (d) Providing centre support
the hydraulically controlled tooling? RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(a) External taper (b) Step turning
Ans. (a): Centre drilling operation is performed with a
(c) External threading (d) Spherical turning tool holder provided with a bar stop on a capstan lathe.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 • Chamfering is making a small cut, usually at a 45o
Ans. (c) : In external thread cutting the piece can either angle, to remove a 90o edge.
be held in a chuck or mounted between two centers. 1002. Which one of the following operations cannot
998. Automatic lathes are capable of performing a be done on a capstan lathe?
preset cycle of operations. The number of (a) Under cutting for a length more than the tool
components produced per cycle of operations width
depends upon (b) Knurling
(a) the number of toolings (c) Taper turning in-between centres
(b) the number of spindles on the machine (d) Boring a step
(c) the range of speeds and feeds RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
(d) the design of the cams controlling the slide Ans. (c) : Taper turning attachment method is used for
movements taper turning or boring without tailstock offsetting. In
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 this taper turning method, the job is held in between the
Ans. (d) : The number of compound produced per cycle center of a chuck.
of operation depend upon the design of the cams 1003. Which one of the following is used to cut
controlling the slide movement. internal threads on capstan lathe?
999. Which one of the following operations is NOT (a) Tap
automatic on a single-spindle auto lathe? (b) Die
(a) Bar loading (c) Internal threading tool
(b) Bar feeding (d) Internal chaser
(c) Coolant circulation RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(d) Collet opening and closing Ans. (a) : Tapping is the operation of cutting an internal
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 thread by means of a cutting tool known as a tap.

1004. The worm wheel of a thread chasing dial is Ans. (d) : V grooves of cast iron have to be fine turned
made out of… holding on collar mandrel and machining between
(a) Free cutting steel (b) Aluminium centers.
(c) Bronze (d) High carbon steel 1007. Which one of the following methods of
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 catching the threads takes the longest time
Ans. (c) : The worm wheel of a thread chasing dial is (a) Chasing dial
made out of bronze. (b) Pre-determined travel of the carriage
• Most lathe has a thread chasing dial built into like (c) Marking on work holding device and lead
center lathe or attached to the carriage for this screw
purpose. (d) Reversing the machine
1005. Which one of the following statement is correct RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
with respect to the direction of rotation of the Ans. (c) : Making on work holding device and lead
man spindle and lead screw looking from the screw method of catching the threads takes the longest
tailstock end, when a right hand thread is being time.
cut? 1008. Rake angle is not provided on a form tool
(a) Main spindle and lead screw rotate in used to produce taper on a workpiece. The
clockwise direction reason for this is
(b) Main spindle and lead screw rotate in (a) to reduce grinding time of the tool
anticlockwise rotation. (b) to reduce wastage of tool material
(c) Main spindle rotates in anticlockwise (c) taper angle is not affected by re-sharpening
direction and lead screw rotates in clockwise (d) for the tool to have large wedge angle
direction RRB ALP Patna 2014
(d) Main spindle rotates in clockwise and the lead Ans. (c) : Taper angle is not affected by re-sharpening.
screw rotates in anticlockwise direction.
1009. A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread
roughing tool. Which one of the following is the
Ans. (c) : The lead screw is used for thread cutting. It is correct procedure for aligning the finishing tool
made from good quality alloy steel and is provided with with the thread groove?
acme thread. It is driven from the headstock through (a) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned
feed gearbox and moves the carriage is a longitudinal in the groove by compound slide and cross
direction against the work-piece. slide
1006. ‘V’ grooves of cast iron have to be fine (b) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned
turned in the groove by carriage hand wheel and
cross slide hand wheel
(c) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool
positioned in the groove by compound slide
and cross slide
(d) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool
positioned in the groove by carriage and cross
slide hand wheels
Ans. (c) : A M30 thread is work revolving, half nut
engaged, tool positioned in the groove by compound
slide and cross slide.
Which one of the following work holding 1010. If the lead screw has 6 TPI and there are 4
methods gives the highest concentricity? numbered divisions in the chasing dial, which
(a) Holding between a four jaw chuch and a one of the following will be the teeth worm
revolving centre wheel of chasing dial?
(b) Holding between Jaw concentric chuck and (a) 48 teeth (b) 24 teeth
supporting with a pipe centre (c) 18 teeth (d) 12 teeth
(c) Holding on a split mandrel and machining RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
between centers Ans. (b) : The teeth worm wheel of chasing dial is
(d) Holding on collar mandrel and machining = lead screw TPI × number division
between centers =6×4
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 = 24 teeth.

1011. Power feed is not possible in compound slide 1015. Identity the part of copying lathe 'X' as shown
method of taper turning. Which one of the in figure.
following defects can be noticeable on the
tapered workpiece due to the above reason?
(a) Chatter
(b) Poor surface finish
(c) Taper angle more than set
(d) Taper angle less than set
Ans. (b) : Power feed is not possible in compound slide
method of taper turning because of poor surface finish.
1012. A bronze split bearing as shown in Fig. is to be (a) Copy templates (b) Control lever
finish machined on a centre lathe, from a (c) Compound rest (d) Stylus
bronze casting pot. The splitting of the bush RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
into two halves is done Ans. (a) : Copy templates used in lathe fitting part into
an irregular space or getting an exact fit into a regular
space.
1016. Copying lathe are used to produce ..........
(a) identical flat (b) identical square
(c) identical cylindrical (d) identical strips
(a) before beginning to rough turn and bore the RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
pot Ans. (c) : Copying lathe are used in series and mass
(b) after rough oversize turning the collar and the production of patterned furniture piece, complex casting
pattern, profiled cams, eccentric, templates and
step without boring
matrices.
(c) after rough oversize turning the collar and the
1017. Relieving lathes have capability of cutting ......
step and rough boring
(a) automatic lathe (b) copying lathe
(d) after completely finish turning the collar and
(c) engine lathe (d) centre lathe
step and finish boring
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (d): The centre lathe is used to manufacture
Ans. (c): The splitting of the bush into two halves is cylindrical shapes from a range of material including
done after rough oversize turning the coller and the step steel and plastics.
and rough boring. 1018. Relieving lathes have capability of cutting ......
1013. Which among the following is the cause for (a) only metric
incorrect pitch of thread during thread cutting (b) only inches
with single point tool? (c) only module
(a) Incorrect selection of change gears (d) metric, inches and modules
(b) Lead screw worn out RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
(c) Half nut worn out Ans. (d) : Relieving lathe have capabilities of cutting
(d) Any one of the above metric, inch, and modules.
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 1019. In relieving lathe, the job is rotated with ..........
Ans. (d) : It is an operation that uses a single point tool (a) low speed (b) medium speed
to produce a thread form on a cylinder or cone. (c) high speed (d) very high speed
1014. Which one of the following is the reason for RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
tom threads while thread cutting on lathe? Ans. (a) : The relieving lathe, the job is rotated with
(a) Blunt tool low speed because lathe are also used for the production
of screw threads.
(b) Heavy depth of cut
1020. Single spindle automatic lathe are used for
(c) Insufficient side clearance
simple operations and suitable for ........
(d) Any one of the above (a) single component production
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 (b) batch production
Ans. (d) Thread cutting on the lathe is a process that (c) mass production
produces a helical ridge of uniform section on the (d) rework job
workpiece. RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Ans. (c) : This machine is most suitable for machining Ans. (d) : While facing work, the carriage need to be
medium to large batches of component requiring locked to avoid to from convex in the centre.
accuracy as well as heavy rate of metal removing. • Locking the half nut to the lead screw will prevent
1021. Automatic lathe machines are designed for....... the carriage from moving back away from the
(a) easy operation workpiece during the facing operation.
(b) speed and easy operation 1026. How to apply cutting fluid on the tool point
(c) difficult operation (a) With an oil can
(d) speed and difficult operation (b) With a high pressure jet
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (c) By flooding the workpiece
Ans. (b) : In metal working and wood-working, an (d) With a brush
automatic lathe is a lathe with an automatically RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
controlled cutting process. Ans. (c) : Cutting fluid may be applied by flooding, a
1022. Which attachment is used for external, internal fluid jet, mist spraying etc.
and relieving of cutters? • A cutting fluid is a substance designed specifically
(a) Milling attachment for metal working and machining process that
(b) Grinding attachment serves as both lubricant and coolant during these
(c) Relieving attachment process.
(d) Drilling attachment 1027. The gap bed lathe is used for turning the….
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 (a) lengthy workpiece
Ans. (c) : A relieving or backing off attachment is used (b) large diameter workpiece
for external, internal and end relieving of milling cutters (c) irregular workpiece
and taps. (d) long taper workpiece
1023. The reference surface during marking is RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
provided by…. Ans. (b) : Gap or extension type lathe are similar to
(a) surface gauge toolroom lathe except that gap lathe except that gap
(b) workpiece lathe can be adjust to machine larger diameter and
(c) drawing of the work longer workplace the operator can increase the swing by
(d) marking table surface moving the bed a distance from the head stock, which is
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 usually one or two feet.
Ans. (d): A marking table (marking off table) is used as 1028. The distance through which a screw thread
a reference surface for marking on work-piece. advance axially in one turn is called......
1024. Which on is the correct formula for the spindle (a) Pitch of thread (b) Lead of thread
speed (N) of a given job? (c) Depth of thread (d) Diameter of thread
π × CS 1000 × D RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
(a) N = (b) N =
1000 × D π × CS Ans. (b) : Lead is the distance of a threaded component
π × D × CS 1000 × CS moves along the matching component during one
(c) N = (d) N = complete revolution. For a single start thread the load is
1000 π× D
equal to the pitch.
1029. A fixed steady rest is used to support ......
Ans. (d) : When, (a) The tool rigidly to avoid chatter during
D is mm, cutting speed m/min., N = rpm operation
πDN (b) Long shafts that are being threaded for their
Cutting speed =
1000 full length
1000 × CS (c) Support work pieces during facing large
N= diameter workpieces with short length
π× D
(d) Support long workpieces held in chuck, to
1025. While facing work, the carriage needs to be
perform operation at the overhanging end
locked to avoid to….
(a) move cutting tool towards head stock RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(b) move cutting tool towards tail stock Ans. (d) : Fixed steady rest–
(c) form pip in the centre • A fixed steady rest is fixed to the lathe bed and it is
(d) form convex in the centre stationary. It gives support at one fixed place only.
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 • It consists of a frame containing three adjustable pads.

1030. Name the type of chip breakers shown in 1034. Which rough truing a workpiece with a carbide
figure. tool long curly chips are formed. Which one of
the following is the right way of getting rid of
this kind of chip:-
(a) Stop the power feed at intervals so that the
chip breaks
(b) Change the rake angle
(c) Provide chip breaker on the tool
(a) Clamp type (b) Groove type (d) use a metal hook and pull away the chips
(c) Step type (d) Mechanical type RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (c) : Chip breakers are the notches or groove, in
Ans. (c) : Step type– This type of chip breaker is used the face of a tool parallel to the cutting edge to break the
for carbide tipped tool and before leaving the tool, the continuity of the chip.
chip is prevented from becoming a continuous chips by 1035. Chip breakers are meant to break continuous
swirling or breaking it, for which a small step or self is long chips. Which one of the following types of
something grinded on the face of the tool. chip breakers is found on a throw away insert
Types of chips breakers– with holder:-
(i) Step or self chip breaker (a) Pieced of sheet metal clamped to eh holder in
(ii) Groove and ring chip breaker the path of the coil
(iii) Universal chip breaker (b) A step is ground on the throw away insert
(iv) Separate chip breaker along the cutting edge
1031. Other name for ball turning is...... (c) A small groove ground at eh cutting edge
(a) Form turning (b) Convex turning (d) A carbide bit is screwed ant held on the top
(c) Spherical turning (d) Profile turning face of the bit
Ans. (c) : Other name for ball turning is spherical Ans. (d) : A carbide bit is screwed and held on the top
turning. face of the bit.
• On lathe machine with the help of spherical turning 1036. Which one of the following is used for checking
attachment it can be easily manufacture. the run out of the internal taper of machine
1032. The fingers of a fixed steady rest are set to spindle:-
support a lengthy work piece held in a four - (a) Dial test indicator
jaw chuck. The fingers are adjusted and set (b) Test mandrel and dial test indicator
when the work piece is: (c) Precision height gauge
(a) Trued to the chuck and the work is stationary (d) Test mandrel and precision height gauge
(b) Trued at the tailstock and when the work is RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
running at slow rpm Ans. (b) : Test mandrel and dial test indicator is used
(c) Trued at both ends and work is stationary for checking the run out of internal taper of machine
(d) Trued at both ends when the work is running spindle.
at slow rpm 1037. During machining operation using faceplate,
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 the angle plate is held on the:
Ans. (c) : The fingers are adjust and set when the (a) Faceplate (b) Carriage
workpiece is trued at both ends and work is stationary. (c) Tailstock (d) Bed
1033. Which one off the following statements in RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
respect of eccentric turning is correct? Ans. (a) : During machining operation using face plate,
(a) In an eccentric shaft, the centers of the the angle plate is held on the face plate.
individual diameters are displaced
(b) Eccentric shaft can be turned by holding it in 1038. The surface of the single point cutting tool on
a three-jaw chuck which the chips formed in cutting operation
(c) Higher speed is chosen for eccentric turning slide is called as:
(d) It is preferred to give more depth of cut in the (a) Flank (b) Heel
beginning while turning an eccentric shaft (c) Face (d) Shank
Ans. (a) : Eccentric twining is in an eccentric shaft, the Ans. (c) : The surface on which the chip slide is called
center of the individual diameter are displaced. the face of the tool.

1039. The following is machined dry: (c) More heat is transmitted to both the chip and
(a) Alumiium (b) Cast iron the tool
(c) Titanium (d) All of these (d) More heat is transmitted to both the
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 workpiece and the tool
Ans. (b) : Cast iron is suitable for dry machining RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
because the material conducts heat well and the graphite Ans. (b) : As the cutting speed increases more heat is
in the cast iron act as lubricant. carried away by the chip and less heat is transmitted to
1040. It is required to cut screw threads of 2 mm the tool.
pitch on a lath. The lead screw has pitch of 6 1044. Assume a machining process of taper turning.
mm. if the spindle speed is 60 r.p.m., then the In this process, a large diameter of taper is ‘D’
speed of led screw will be: and it is uniformly decreased to the small
(a) 10 r.p.m. (b) 20 r.p.m. diameter of the taper ‘d’ at the horizontal
(c) 120 r.p.m. (d) 180 r.p.m. length of tapered part of workpiece is ‘L’ what
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 is the correct formula for half of taper angle
(α/2)?
Ans. (b) : Given, d1 = 2 mm
(a) α = sin–1 [(D – d)/2L]
d2 = 6 mm
N1 = 60 rpm (b) α = sin–1 [(D – d)/2L]
We know that (c) α = tan–1 [(D – d)/2L]
πdN (d) α = cot–1 [(D – d)/2L]
v= RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
60
1 Ans. (c) :
d∝ D−d
N tan α =
2L
d1 N 2
=  D−d 
d 2 N1 α = tan −1  
 2L 
2 N2
= 1045. A flat surface can be produced by a lathe
6 60
machine, if the cutting tool moves .............
N2 = 20 rpm
(a) Parallel to the axis of rotation of workpiece
1041. In order to achieve a specific surface finish in (b) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation of
single point turning, the most important factor workpiece
to be controlled is: (c) At an angle of 45º
(a) Depth of cut (b) Cutting speed
(c) Feed (d) Tool rake angle
Ans. (b) : A flat surface can be produced by a lathe
Ans. (b) : In order to achieve a specific surface finish in machine if the cutting tool moves perpendicular to the
single point turning, the most important factor to be axis of rotation of workpiece.
controlled is cutting speed other parameter will impact
1046. The thickness of layer material removed in one
on the surface finish.
pass of workpiece under the cutter is called as :
1042. In lathe, the back gears are used for affecting (a) Single pass cut (b) Depth of cut
......... in spindle speeds, thereby facilitating
(c) Width of cut (d) Face cut
wider range of speeds.
(a) Increase (b) Reduction
(c) Increase or reduction (d) None of these Ans. (b) : In milling process, the thickness of layer,
material removed in one pass of workpiece under the
cutter is called depth of cut.
Ans. (b) : In lathe, the back gear are used for affecting
1047. For knurling operation, the rotation of the
reduction in spindle speed, thereby facilitating wider
spindle speed is ..........
range of speed.
(a) 1/2 of the tuning spindle speed
1043. As the cutting speed increases .........
(b) 1/3 of the turning spindle speed
(a) More heat is transmitted to the work-piece
(c) equal to turnign spindle speed
and less heat is transmitted to the tool
(d) equal to high spindle speed
(b) More heat is carried away by the chip and less
heat is transmitted to the tool
Ans. (b) : For knurling operation, the rotation of the Ans. (b) : For turning small taper on long workpiece,
spindle speed 1/3 of the turning spindle speed. the suitable method by setting over the tail stock.
• Knurling is a manufacturing process typically • Turning process, a cutting tool removes material
conduct on lathe whereby a pattern of straight, angle from the outer diameter of a rotating workpiece.
or crossed lines is rolled into the material.
1054. For a 5° taper over 5 mm length is to be made
1048. The half nut lever is used for ............ on a 100 mm diameter. Which job method
(a) engaging the longitudinal feed on the carriage should be used?
(b) taking up the stack in the cross slide nut
(c) changing from longitudinal to cross - feed
(b) Tailstock offset method
(d) thread cutting
(d) Form tool method
Ans. (d) : The half nut lever used for thread cutting.
• A screw nut split length wise so that either one part
may be arranged to ride on a screw or the two parts Ans. (d) : Form tool method used for a 5o taper over 5
may be arranged to clamp about a screw. mm length is to be made on a 100 mm diameter.
1049. The feed change lever ............ • The form tool method are one of the simplest
(a) changes the directions the lead screw method to create a short taper.
(b) diverts the feed to either the cross slide or the 1055. It is the process of removing very small chips
longitudinal slide from metal surfaces by means of a sharp-edged
(c) change the feed to a high or low range tool. What is this tool called as?
(d) connects or disconnects the carriage hand (a) Scraper (b) Chisel
wheel (c) Hacksaw (d) Reamer
Ans. (b) : The feed change lever diverts the feed to
Ans. (a): Scraper is process of removing very small
either the cross slide or the longitudinal slide.
chips from metal surface by means of a sharp edge tool.
1050. _____ gives best finish.
• Scraping is used to produce a high degree of fit
(a) Lower cutting speed and higher feed
between two flat or two curved surface particularly
(b) Higher cutting speed and higher feed
where the surface can rub together in use.
(c) Higher cutting speed and fine feed
(d) Lower cutting speed and lower feed 1056. The maximum diameter that can be worked on
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 lathe machine without hitting the bed is known
Ans. (c) : Higher cutting speed and fine feed gives best as?
finish. (a) Height of center
1051. Hard and tough materials like cast iron should (b) Length between centers
be turned at_______. (c) Swing diameter above the bed
(a) Slow speed (d) Maximum bore diameter
(b) High speed UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
(c) Any speed Ans. (c) : The maximum diameter that can be worked
(d) Certain specific speed on a lathe machine without hitting the bed is known as
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 swing diameter.
Ans. (a) : Hard and tough material like cast iron should
1057. The mechanism used to transfer drive from
be turned at slow speed.
feed shaft to the cross slide is known as:
1052. Feed rate is shown in_________.
(a) m/sec (b) mm/min (a) Geneva mechanism
(c) cm/mtr (d) All of these (b) Four bar mechanism
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 (c) Apron mechanism
Ans. (b) : The feed rate is shown in mm/min. (d) Slider crank mechanism
1053. For turning small taper on long workpiece, the
suitable method is– Ans. (c) : Apron mechanism for transforming rotary
(a) By a form tool motion of the feed rod and lead screw into feed motion
(b) By setting over the tail stock of the carriage.
(c) By a taper turning attachment 1058. In the given figure, the carriage of a lathe
(d) By a swiveling the compound rest machine is shown. Name of the part marked
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 with 'X' in it
Ans. (c) : Taper is defined as a uniform increase or

decrease in diameter of workpiece measured along its
length.
D−d
tan θ =
2l
1062. The tool used in lathe machine which has right
hand helical teeth on one side and has left hand
(a) Compound slide (b) Cross slide helical teeth on other side is called as :
(c) Tool post (d) Saddle (a) Concave
(b) Straight knurling tool
(c) Diamond
Ans. (a) : In this the part marked with 'X' is known as
(d) Cross knurling tool
compound slide. Compound slide used to turn tapers
and cut angles on a lathe.
Ans. (c) : The tool used in lathe machine which has
1059. Name the lathe machine operation shown in the right hand helical teeth on one side and has left hand
given figure. helical teeth on other is called as Diamond knurling.
1063. Specification of lathe is given-

(a) Checking speed of the live centre
(a) Distanced between the swing and centre
(b) Checking trueness of the live centre
(b) Maximum job height
(c) Checking hardness of the live centre
(c) By length and width
(d) Checking hardness of the tool
(d) Maximum diameter of job
IOCL 2020
Ans. (b) : Checking trueness of the live centre the lathe
machine operation shown in figure.
Ans. (a):The size of a lathe is specified by following
1060. In a lathe machine, if drive is transmitted to
items.
saddle from the feed shaft, then the tool will 1. The swing diameter over bed.
move in:
2. The height of the centers
(a) circular direction
3. The length between centers
(b) longitudinal direction
4. The swing diameter over carriage
(c) angular direction
1064. Jaws become in independent jaw chuck in the
(d) transverse direction
lathe machine are:
(a) 4 (b) 3
Ans. (b) : In a lathe machine, if drive is transmitted to
(c) 2 (d) 5
saddle from the feed shaft, then the tool will move in
longitudinal direction.
Ans. (a) : Independent jaw chuck has four jaw. It is
1061. What is the increase or decrease in the
used in the setting up heavy and irregular shaped
diameter of a cylinder parallel to its length
articles.
called ?
(a) Bent (b) Form tool 1065. The chaser is a tool-
(c) Taper (d) Compound slide (a) For the knurling (b) For the facing
BEML 2022 (c) For the threading (d) For the drilling
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
Ans. (c) : A chaser is a multipoint threading tool having 1071. Spot facing is done to
the same form and pitch of the thread to be chased. (a) Deburr the mouth of the drilled hole
Thread chasing is done at 1/3 to 1/2 of the speed of (b) Make surface flat so that bolt head can take
turning. proper seat on the surface
1066. The process of cutting a long job into a certain (c) Give fine finish to the drilled hole
length is called- (d) Enlarge the existing hole
(a) Chamfering (b) Turning ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
(c) Grooving (d) Parting Ans. (b) : Facing is the operation of machining the ends
NTPC Fitter 2016 of workpiece. It makes surface flat so that bolt head can
take proper seat on the surface.
Ans. (d) : Parting off is the operation of cutting a
workpiece after it is has been machined to the desired
size and shape.
1072. Find out the rpm of a lathe spindle for a 50 mm

bar to cut at 31.4 m/min.
(a) 180 rpm (b) 200 rpm
(c) 220 rpm (d) 31.4 rpm
1067. The operation of production patterns on Ans. (b) : Given-
cylindrical external surface by pressing a tool is d = 50mm
known as V = 31.4m / min
(a) Boring (b) Turning π DN
(c) Knurling (d) Taper turning V= m / min
1000
1000 × V 1000 × 31.4
Ans. (c) : Knurling is the process of embossing shaped N= = = 200rpm
pattern on the workpiece. π ×D 3.14 × 50
The purpose of knurling is to provide an effective 1073. The cutting speed of a tool when turning 10
gripping surface on a workpiece. Press fit work knurling mm diameter rod with 100 rpm is ................
is done to increase the diameter of a shaft. m/minute.
(a) 31.4 (b) 3.14
1068. For taper turning and boring (c) 314 (d) 300
(a) The tool should be set below the centre ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
(b) The tool should be set above the centre
Ans. (b) : Given-
(c) The tool should be set exactly at the centre
d = 10mm
(d) The tool should be set near to the centre
N = 100 rpm
π DN
Ans. (c): The tool should be set exactly at the center for cutting spped (v) = m / min
taper turning and boring. 1000
π × 10 × 100
1069. A concave face in turning is caused due to v= m / min
(a) Improper clamping of tool 1000
(b) Blunt tool v = 3.14 m/min
(c) Carriage is not locked 1074. Which component helps the cutting tool to
(d) Tool is not set to centre make the master piece profile in a copying
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 centre lathe?
(a) Rod (b) Crank
Ans. (a) : A concave face in turning is caused due to
(c) Tracer (d) Link
improper clamping of tool.
BHEL 2020
1070. While facing a job in lathe, a pipe left in the ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
centre is caused due to
Ans. (c) : Tracer component helps the cutting tool to
(a) Improper clamping of tool make the master piece profile in a copying centre lathe.
(b) Blunt tool
1075. Which of the following process squeezes
(c) Carriage is not locked material into peaks and troughs with plastic
(d) Tool is not set to centre deformation?
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 (a) Grooving (b) Knurling
Ans. (d) : While facing a job in lathe, a pipe lift in the (c) Reaming (d) Boring
centre is caused due to tool is not set to centre. ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
Ans. (b) : Knurling process sequences material into 1079. A carbide tipped tool with yellow marking is
peaks and troughs with plastic deformation. used on a lathe. Which one of the following
materials can be best machined with this tool?
(a) Aluminium alloy
(b) Stainless steel
(c) Gray cast iron
(d) Brass
1076. Calculate the turning time required to finish ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
cut a mild steel rod of diameter 40mm for Ans. (b) : Machining of higher strength and hard metals
100mm length in one pass, on a lathe with feed is done with carbide tipped tools.
rate of 0.2mm/ revolution and at a speed of 100 • Stainless steel is best machined using carbide tools as
rpm? per given option.
(a) 2 min (b) 10 min • Zero rake angle are used for machining cast iron and
(c) 5 min (d) 15 min brass, positive rake angle for aluminium alloys.
1080. Taper turning on lathe can be produced by
Ans. (c) : Given– (a) Form tool method
Length of rod = 100 mm (b) compound slide method
Diameter = 40 mm (c) tailstock offset method
Feed = 0.2 mm/revolution (d) all of the above
rpm = 100 rpm
No. of cut = 1 cut
Ans : (d) Taper turning on lathe can be produced by–
Formula–
1. A broad nose form tool
length of cutting piece × No. of cut
time = 2. Setting over the tailstock centre
rpm × feed 3. Swiveling the compound rest
100 ² 1 4. A taper turning attachment
=
100 ² 0.2 1081. Which of the following statement is not true
1 about Knurling operation?
=
0.2 (a) Knurling operation to be done at high speeds
time · 5 minute (b) Knurling operation is a forming operation
(c) Knurling is done on a workpiece for gripping
1077. What is the approximate cutting speed (in
and good appearance
mm/minute) for turning φ 30 mm shaft, if
spindle rotates at 300 rpm? (d) Diamond knurling is one type of knurling
pattern
(a) 28260 (b) 28.26
(c) 9000 (d) 31.41
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 Ans : (b) Purpose of knurling operation.
Ans. (a) : Given– 1. Knurling is the process of embossing a diameter
Speed of spindle = 300 rpm shaped pattern on the surface of a workpiece.
Diameter (D) =30 mm 2. It is to provide an effective gripping surface on a
workpiece to prevent it from slipping.
Shear velocity (V) = ?
V = πDN mm/min 1082. Which of the following operation can be
= 3.14 × 30 × 300 = 28260 mm/min performed on lathe?
1078. In a lathe machine, what will be the cutting (a) spinning (b) drawing
speed for 40 mm diameter and 1000 rpm (c) coining (d) swaging
spindle speed? ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
(a) 250 m/min (b) 100 m/min Ans:(a) Spinning operation can be performed on lathe.
(c) 200 m/min (d) 125 m/min Spinning is the process of forming a thin sheet of metal
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 08-02-2019, Shift-II by revolving the job at high speed. It pressed it against a
Ans : (d) D = 40 mm, N = 1000 rpm, V = ? "former" attached to the headstock spindle.
πDN 1083. The spindle speed to turn a mild steel rod of
V= m/min
1000 diameter 50mm using HSS tool with a cutting
3.14 × 40 × 1000 speed of 30 meter per minute is
V= (a) 190.98 rpm (b) 1909.8 rpm
1000
(c) 530.52 rpm (d) 5305.2 rpm
V = 125.6 ≈ 125m / min
Ans. (a) : Diamerter (d) · 50 mm l × Number of cut

Time (T ) =
Cutting speed (V) · 30 m/min N. f
π dN 400 ×1
V= m/min T=
1000 255 × 0.5
T = 3.137 minutes.
1000 × V
N= rpm 1087. A lathe having a swing over bed of 240 mm
π ×d can accommodate a component of maximum
1000 × 30 × 7 diameter equal to
N= rpm
22 × 50 (a) 60 mm (b) 120 mm
N = 190.9 rpm (c) 240 mm (d) 480 mm
1084. The taper turning method which cannot be ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
used for internal taper turning on a lathe Ans. (c) : The swing diameter over bed. This is the
(a) Compound slide method largest diameter of work.
(b) Taper turning attachment A lathe having swing over bed of 240 mm can
(c) Tail stock offset method accommodate a component of maximum diameter equal
to 240 mm.
1088. An operation on lathe where the diameter is
increased after operation is
Ans. (c) : Tail stock offset method which cannot be (a) Facing (b) Taper turning
used for internal taper turning on a lathe. (c) Reaming (d) Knurling
This method is suitable for turning small taper on long ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
jobs.
Ans. (d) : In some press fit work knurling is done to
1085. The taper ratio is given as 1 : 6. The tangent of increase the diameter of the shaft. This operation is
the compound slide swivel angle is given as performed by special knurling tool. It consists of 1 set
(a) 1/6 (b) 1/18 of hardened steel rollers in a holder. Knurling is done at
(c) 1/12 (d) 1/3 the slowest speed available in a lathe.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 1089. To form small length of taper for mass
Ans. (c): Given, production, the preferable method is
D−d 1 (a) Compound rest method
= (b) Taper turning attachment method
l 6 (c) Form tool
D−d (d) Tail stock offset method
tan α =
2l ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
1 1 Ans. (c) : Form tool method is limited to turn short
tan α = = length of taper only. This is due to reason that the metal
2 × 6 12 is removed by entire cutting edge.
The tangent of compounded slide swivel angle will be 1090. Cutting a sheet into two piece or more ...........
1 known as.
.
12 (a) Notching (b) Lancing
1086. If the cutting speed is 40 meter per minute (c) Grooving (d) Parting
and the tool feed is 0.5mm per revolution. The BDL Technician 2022
time required for one complete cut on a piece Ans : (d) Cutting the sheet into two pieces or more is
of work 400mm long and 50mm diameter is known as shearing parting.
(a) 3.14 minutes (b) 5.41 minutes Grooving–Grooving is the process of reducing the
(c) 1.25 minutes (d) 1.53 minutes diameter of a workpiece over a very narrow surface.
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 1091. Which one of the following is the reason for
ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016 torn threads while thread cutting on lathe?
(a) Blunt tool
Ans. (a) : v = 40 m/min, Number of cut = 1 (b) Heavy depth of cut
f = 0.5 mm/rev (c) Insufficient side clearance
l = 400mm (d) All the above
d = 50 mm ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
π DN Ans. (d) : Precautions of thread cutting–
V= m/min 1. Suitable lubricants and coolants should be used
1000
during cutting. Due to which good finishing of the
1000 × V 1000 × 40 thread is achieved and the life of the tool is also
N= = = 255 rpm
π ×D 3.14 × 50 increased.

2. Blunt tools, heavy cutting depth and insufficient Ans : (c) Boring operation–
lateral clearance should not be uses under thread • Boring is the process of enlarging a hole that has
cutting. already been drilled by means of a single-point cutting
3. It is necessary to keep checking by plug gauge, tool.
micrometer, screw thread, vernier calipers. • The single point cutting tool for boring operation is
1092. Which of the following operation is the frustum the boring cutter.
of cone shaped on a lathe machine? • In boring operation, we take the cut of 1 mm, then we
(a) Facing (b) Grooving will get a hole of 2 mm, i.e. twice the value of cut.
(c) Plain turning (d) Taper turning 1098. Which of the following is used for lathe
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II machine is not used to specify?
(a) Height of lathe
Ans. (d) : By taper turning which work is the shape of
(b) Swing
the frustum of a cone made on a lathe machine. (c) Total length of bed
1093. Which of the following function of lathe (d) Distance between centres.
machine but cannot be done? UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
(a) Taper turning (b) Drilling Ans : (a) A lathe machine is specified by–
(c) Slotting (d) turning (i) Swing
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (ii) Total length of bed
Ans. (c) : Slotting work can not be done on a lathe (iii) Distance between centres.
machine. Lathe operation are drilling, reaming, threading, Note–Lathe machine is not specified by its height.
taper turning etc. slotter machine is reciprocating type of 1099. For heavier depth of cut, the rake angle is:
machine. (a) Negative
1094. Which of the following lathe operations (b) Zero
requires the cutting edge of a tool bit be placed (c) Positive
exactly on the work centre–line : (d) None of the above
(a) Boring (b) Drilling ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
(c) Facing (d) Turning Ans : (a) For heavier depth of cut, the rake angle is
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 negative. It makes cutting tool stronger which wear
large force at heavier depth of cut.
Ans : (c) Facing operation on lathe requires the cutting
1100. Which operation on a lathe is used for making
edge of a tool bit be placed exactly on the work centre
non standard holes:
line. (a) Drilling (b) Reaming
Facing is the operation of machining the ends of a piece (c) Boring (d) None of the above
of work to produce a flat surface square with the axis. ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
1095. What is the material of brazed tip used in the Ans : (c) Boring operation on a lathe is used for making
cutting operation of lathe? non standard holes.
(a) Mild steel Boring is a process of enlarging the already made hole.
(b) High carbon high chromium Reaming is used for making standard holes.
(c) Tool steel 1101. Which of the following is not a function of
(d) Tungsten Carbide cutting fluid :
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017 (a) To cool the tool
Ans : (d) Tungsten carbide is the material of brazed tip (b) To flush away the chips
used in the cutting operation of lathe. (c) To increase the friction between the chip &
1096. What is the function of chasing dial in lathe tool face
(d) To cool the work piece
machine?
(a) Separation (b) Drilling
(c) Thread cutting (d) Chamfering Ans : (c) Function of cutting fluid–
(i) to cool the tool
(ii) to flush away the chips
(iii) to decrease the friction between the chip and tool
Ans : (c) The chasing dial is a special attachment used face.
in modern lathes for accurate "Picking up" of the (iv) to cool the workpiece
thread. This is mounted on the right end of the apron. 1102. An operation of reducing the diameter of a
1097. In lathe machine the process of drilling hole big work piece over a very narrow surface is
already on the workpiece is called? known as:
(a) Expansion (b) Finishing (a) Boring (b) Grooving
(c) Boring (d) Drilling (c) Chamfering (d) Turning
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
Ans : (b) Grooving–It is an operation of reducing the 1107. The feed of cutting tool in a lathe is expressed in
diameter of a workpiece over a very narrow surface. It (a) millimeters per cross sectional area of stock
is performed at end of thread near shoulder. (b) millimeters per revolution
(c) millimeters per length of stock
1103. The width of cutting edge of a parting-off tool (d) none of the above
varies from : ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(a) 3 to 12 mm (b) 8 to 20 mm Ans : (b) Feed of cutting tool in a lathe is expressed in
(c) 10 to 30 mm (d) 12 to 35 mm millimeters per revolution.
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 1108. Difference of two diameter is fixed length of
Ans : (a) The width of cutting edge of a parting-off tool taper job is called taper conicity, it is
varies from 3 to 12 mm. Parting-off method is used to determined by :
cut workpiece in two parts. D−d D−d
(a) (b)
2 l
D−d 2D − d
(c) (d)
2l 2l
Ans : (c) The continuous or uniform increasing or
decreasing in diameter of a cylindrical work piece is
called a taper. Taper is also called taper conicity. It is
1104. As the rake angle of the cutting tool reduces, its D−d
strength will...........? given by .
2l
(a) Increases
1109. In a lathe machine, the cross slide moves :
(b) Reduces (a) Parallel is the axis of rotation
(c) No affect on the strength (b) At an angle to the axis of rotation
(d) None of these (c) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016 (d) None of the above
Ans : (a) As the rake angle of the cutting tool reduces, BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
its strength will increase. Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Ans:(c) The cross slide moves in lathe machine
perpendicular to the axis of rotation. The cross slide is a
compound found on the top of a lathe that allows the
tool bit to slide back and front. It is made of cast iron.
1110. Job for turning of cylindrical rough casting get
caught :
Positive rake angle is used for soft and ductile material (a) Five jaw chuck (b) Four jaw chuck
and negative rake angle is used for hard and brittle (c) Collet chuck (d) Magnetic chuck
material. DRDO Turner.2016
1105. Chamfering is an essential operation after : Ans : (c) Collet chuck is used to hold job for turning
(a) Knurling (b) Rough turning cylindrical rough casting. Collet chuck provide good
(c) Drilling (d) Thread cutting accuracy at high speed crucial for certain jobs. It has
high productivity.
1111. Half center is used on the lathe :
Ans : (d) Chamfering operation is necessarily (a) to support the workpiece
performed at the end of thread cutting. It is beveled at (b) to turn a large workpiece
the edge portion of part. (c) to lubricate workpiece easily
Knurling–It is performed at the surface which make (d) to centre the face of the workpiece.
better grip. RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
1106. A flat surface can be produced by a lathe (IOF Fitter, 2016)
machine, if the cutting tool moves: Ans : (d) Half centre is used on the lathe to center the
(a) Parallel to the axis of rotation of work piece face of the workpiece. Though it is termed at half
(b) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation of work centre, little less than half is relieved at the tip portion.
piece Used while facing the job without disturbing the setting.
(c) at an angle of 45 degrees 1112. Which of the following method is used for
(d) none of the above cutting sleeve taper?
(a) Set over method
Ans : (b) A flat surface can be produced by a lathe (c) Form tools
machine, if the cutting tool moves perpendicular to the (d) Compound rest
axis of rotation of work. Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Ans : (d) For cutting sleeve or steep taper compound 1118. Tumbler gear is a part of center lathe, hence it
rest is used. The compound rest supports the tool post is used as :
and cutting tool in different position. It is designed to be (a) it can change the direction of feed.
swiveled at any desired direction in the horizontal (b) transmits motion from the feed shaft to the
plane, making it suitable for turning angles and enables carriage.
taper to be cut. (c) the direction of rotation of the work may
1113. In step turning it is done first : change.
(a) step of small diameter (d) the spindle speed can be changed.
(b) step of large diameter DRDO Mechanic Diesel 2016
(c) none of the above Ans : (a) Tumbler gear mechanism is used to change
(d) none of the above two the direction of lead screw and feed rod in lathe
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016 machines. By engaging tumbler gear, the carriage can
be moved automatically from tailstock end to
Ans : (a) Step of small diameter is done first in step
headstock.
turning. The workpiece is held between live cantre
1119. Formula for determine tail stock off set :
from smaller diameter to larger diameter.
D−d D−d
1114. Knurling is .......... action. (a) (b)
(a) Cutting l 2l
(b) Threading D − d d −D
(c) ×L (d)
(c) Pressing to insert wrinkles 2l 2l
(d) None of the above NLC Technician 24-09.2022
DRDO Motor Mechanic. 2016 (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (c) Knurling is the process of rolling patterns on Ans : (c) Formula to calculate off set of tail stock–
the knobe of metal products or other working surfaces, D−d
mainly for anti-skid purposes. Off set = ×L
2l
Where, D = Larger diameter of taper
d = Smaller diameter of taper
L = Length of work piece
l = Total length of taper.
1115. The ratio of which of the following standard 1120. Multi start thread is cut on lathe :
taper is 1 in 20? (a) by chaser
(a) Morse taper (b) by die head
(b) Metric taper (c) by single point cutting tool
(c) Brown and sharp taper (d) by split die
(d) Jarno taper Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 Ans : (c) Multi start thread is cut on lathe by single
Ans : (a) A Morse taper is a tapered spindle used on point cutting lathe by single point cutting tool. A multi-
lathes and drill press to mount tooling. start thread consists of two or more intertwined threads
running parallel to one another. These are used for
1116. Jarno taper ratio :
transmitting power and generating movement.
(a) 1 : 10 (b) 1 : 15
(c) 1 : 20 (d) 1 : 25 1121. Thread are cut on the lead screw of lathe
machine :
DRDO Turner.2016
(a) Acme thread (b) Square thread
Ans : (c) Ratio of Jarno taper is 1 : 20. (c) Knuckle thread (d) 'V' thread
1117. Brown and Sharp taper have taper ratio lower Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
than BS1 to BS18 except : Ans : (a) Acme thread are cut on the lead screw of the
(a) 1 in 15 (b) 1 in 18 lathe machine. The included angle of Acme thread is
(c) 1 in 20 (d) 1 in 24 29º.
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 1122. Morse taper is an international accept
Ans : (d) The taper ratio in brown and sharp taper is standard taper. Morse taper are available in
BS1 to BS18 except 10 only in 1 in 24. the following number :
Brown and sharp taper are of two types - Quick Release (a) 0 to 7 (b) 0 to 8
Taper and self holding taper. (c) 1 to 7 (d) 1 to 8
Quick Release Taper is used in spindle of milling Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
machine and its arbor. Self holding taper are 1 to 18 Ans : (a) The Morse taper is an internationally accepted
types which are represented by BS1 to BS18. standard taper. Morse taper are available from 0 to 7.
1123. The taper turning method shown in figure is 1128. Back gear is used for............. operation
named : (a) Reaming (b) Grooving
(c) Forming (d) Thread cutting
(IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (d) Back gear is used for thread cutting operation.
Back gear is used for thread cutting on lathe. It slow
down the RPM of spindle. They also increase power
output at the spindle because of the lower gear ratio.
1129. An undercut shoulder is produced by using
(a) Grooving tool (b) Parting–off tool
(c) Square nose tool (d) None of these
(IOF Fitter 2017)
(a) Tailstock offset method Ans : (b) An undercut shoulder is produced by using
(b) Compound rest method parting-off tool. Parting uses a blade-like cutting tool
(c) Taper turning attachment method plunged directly into the workpiece to cut off the
(d) Form tool method workpiece at a specific length.
DRDO Turner.2016 1130. In case of turning, speed of job is four times
Ans : (a) In the above given figure Tailstock offset greater than
method is being shown. By this a small angle taper can (a) Grooving (b) Knurling
be produced. Only outer surface can be turned. (c) Facing (d) None of these
1124. What type of chips should be obtained during BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
turning of mild steel? (IOF Fitter 2017)
(a) Curved chips (b) Long curly chips Ans : (b) In case of turning, speed of job is four times
(c) I shaped chips (d) Semicircle chips greater than knurling. Knurling is performed to have
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 good grip over the too. These are of three types–
Ans : (b) Long curly chips come out during turning of 1. Straight knurling
mild steel. In the machining process, continuous chips 2. Cross knurling
are formed during the machining ductile material with 3. Diamond knurling
high speed and minimum friction between the tool and
1131. To mill a gear of 83 teeth, ............... indexing
material
method is used
1125. The path along which single point tool moves
(a) Simple (b) compound
while cutting thread is called :
(c) Differential (d) Rapid
(a) Helical (b) Cycloid
(c) Parabola (d) None of these (IOF Fitter 2017)
DRDO Turner.2016 Ans: (c) To mill a gear of 83 teeth, differential indexing
Ans : (a) The path on which the single point tool moves method is used. Indexing is a method used on a dividing
while cutting a thread is called helical. engine for dividing a circle into sub-division.
1126. Taper turning by compound slide method can 1132. Taper turning attachment is used to cut
lead to the following error : (a) External long taper
(a) Chatter (b) External steep taper
(b) Light surface finish (c) Both internal and external tapers
(c) Greater taper angle than set angle (d) Only internal taper
(d) Smaller taper angle than set angle (IOF Fitter 2017)
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 Ans : (c) Taper turning attachment is used to cut both
Ans : (b) Error that can occur due to taper turning by internal and external taper. It consists of a frame that
compound slide method is light surface finish. attaches to the rear end of the lathe and a guide bar that
1127. Chamfering of hole is done by : is pivoted at the center. The guide bar can be swiveled
(a) 600 (b) 800 on either side at a 10º angle and it can be clamped to the
(c) 1200 (d) 900 position by two bolts.
DRDO Turner.2016 1133. After thread cutting, the next operation is
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) (a) Drilling (b) Chamfering
Ans : (c) Chamfering of the hole is done at 120º. (c) Filing (d) Facing
Chamfering is done for safety and prevention of any NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
damage through the sharp edges of any metal body. (IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (b) After thread cutting, the next operation is Ans : (b) Most of the equipment hangs during the
chamfering. Chamfering is provided for making non- turning process due to over heating of the equipment.
uniform surface to be uniform surface by removing 1139. The direction of feed in turning operation is :
burrs.
(a) Right to left (b) Left to right
(c) Up to down (d) In any direction
Ans : (a) The direction of feed (tool motion) in turning
operation is from right to left along the axis of rotation.
1140. In turning, cutting speed is defined by :
(a) Spindle RPM
(b) An diameter of workpiece
(c) On both spindle RPM and diameter of
workpiece
1134. While cutting double start threads of pitch 2 (d) On length of Job
mm in a lathe, the cutting tool will advance by
(RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012)
(a) 2 mm/revolution (b) 1 mm/revolution
(c) 4 mm/revolution (d) None of these Ans : (c) In turning operation, cutting speed (V)
depends on both spindle speed and diameter of job.
(IOF Fitter 2017)
πDN
Ans : (c) While cutting double start threads of pitch 2 Cutting speed ( V ) = m/min.
mm in a lathe, the cutting tool will advance by 4 mm 1000
per revolution. Where, D = Diameter of job (m)
1135. Which tool is used to turn a job with a centre N = RPM (revolution per min)
hole?
1141. An operation on lathe where the diameter is
(a) Mandrel (b) Tail stock
increased after operation is:
(c) Jaw chuck (d) Angle plate
(a) Facing (b) Taper turning
(c) Reaming (d) Boring
Ans : (a) Mandrel is used to turn a job with a center ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
hole.
Ans : (d) Boring–Boring is an operation of enlarging
1136. Mandrill is made of which metal? the already made hold. Diameter is increased after the
(a) Cast Iron (b) Mild steel operation.
(c) Cast steel (d) High carbon steel
1142. The cutting tool of lathe is made of :
(a) Tool Steel
Ans : (d) Mandrel is made of high carbon steel. A (b) Mild Steel
mandrel is a spindle for supporting a workpiece when it (c) High Carbon High Chromium
is being machined. Conical and curved parts can be
(d) High Speed Steel
made by spinning them on a rotating mandrel.
A mandrel is a work holder for turning that fits the inner
diameter of workpieces.
Ans: (d) Lathe cutting tool is made of high speed steel.
1137. Which type of tool should be used for high
HSS consist of carbon steel alloyed with tungsten or
speed turning?
molybdenum, together with percentages of chromium,
(a) High carbon steel (b) Tool steel
vanadium and cobalt. They allow the tools to be used at
(c) Stelite (d) Mild steel
high temperature around 650ºC.
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (c) Stelite tool used for high speed turning. Stelite
is a non-ferrous alloy. It is made by mixing cobalt, 5. Machine and Machine Operation
chromium and tungsten. It can be used at 2 to 3 times
higher speed than high speed steel. 1143. Which is not correct about Broaching
1138. During the process of turning most of process?
equipments hangs : (a) It used a toothed tool
(a) due to high friction in machine (b) Linear and rotary are two main type of
(b) due to overheating of equipment broaching
(c) its result will depend on chatter (c) Tool used is called broach
(d) None of these (d) None of the above
(RRB Banglre ALP, 08.07.2007) NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
Ans. (d) : Broaching process :- • The time taken in return stroke is much less than
• Broaching is a machining process that uses a forward stroke.
• Quick return ratio (Q.R.R)
gradually increasing teeth tool, called broach, to remove
material. Time taken in forward stroke
=
• There are two main types broaching : linear and time taken in return stroke.
rotary. Cutting angle
=
• In linear broaching, which is the more common returning angle
process, the broach is run linearly against a surface of
Fixed centre distance
the work-piece to produced the cut. =
• In rotary broaching the broach is rotated and pressed Crank length
into the work-piece to cut an symmetric shape. A rotary 1146. Solid milling cutters are manufactured from
broach is used in a lathe or screw machine. (a) Carbide (b) Stellite
• In both processes the cut is performed in one pass of (c) HSS (d) Ceramic
the broach, which makes it very efficient. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
• The broach has three cutting zones i.e. roughing teeth, Ans. (c) : Solid milling cutters are manufactured from
semi-finishing teeth and finishing teeth. high speed steel (HSS).
H.S.S. ⇒ 18 – 4 –1
1144. Electrodes of EDM (Electrical Discharge
18% = Tungsten, 4%= Chromium, 1%= Vanadium
Machining)
• Withstand temperature upto = 650ºC
(a) Iron (b) Graphite
• Cutting speed upto = 30-50 m/min.
(c) Steel (d) Silver
• Suitable for high speed and low stiffness machine
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 tool.
Ans. (b) : Electrodes for EDM (Electrical Discharge 1147. In machining metals, chips break due to _____
Machining) is graphite - of work material.
EDM (Electro discharge Machining)- In EDM the metal (a) Toughness (b) Ductility
is removed due to erosion caused by rapidly occurring (c) Elasticity (d) Work hardening
discharge between tool (Electrode ) and work piece. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020
The mechanism of metal removal is melting and Ans. (d) : In machining metals, chips break due to work
evaporation. Heat is generated near the zone having hardening.
temperature range of 8000ºC-12000ºC positive terminal The hot continuous chip becomes hard and brittle at a
erodes out faster. So, workpiece is made anode. distance from its origin due to work hardening and
Tool Material :- In EDM tool also erodes due to spark cooling. Enough a work hardened chip will lead to self-
hence the selection of tool depends on wear ratio, tool breaking.
fabrication, and cost of material. 1148. What is not true about Gang milling?
The most commonly used electrode material are copper (a) Two or more cutters are used to perform
(Cu), Tungsten alloys, cast iron, steel, silver tungsten operation
alloys, graphite. (b) Cutters have the same or different diameter
Dielectric fluid :- Following the main advantages- (c) Each cutter is mounted on arbor of the milling
• It acts as a vehicle to drive away the chips and thus machine
preventing them from sticking to the surface of the tool. (d) None of the above
• It helps in increasing the MRR (Metal removal rate)
by promotion spark. Ans. (d): Gang milling :- It is an operation of
producing many surfaces of workpiece simultaneously
• It is act as coolant medium. by feeding the table against a number of required
Application :- Blind hole, complex cavity, making hole cutters. The following features are involve in gang
in die. milling machine-
• Only good conductors can be machined. (i) Two or more cutters are used to perform operation.
1145. Return stroke of the shaper is called which of (ii) Cutters are same or different diameter.
the following? (iii) Each cutter is mounted on arbor of the milling
machine.
(a) Cutting stroke (b) Idle stroke
(c) Static stroke (d) Dynamic stroke 1149. What is the use of indexing head in milling
machine
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (a) To reduce the speed of machining
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 (b) To improve surface finish
Ans. (b) : Return stroke of the shaper is called a ldler (c) To drill holes on pitch circle diameter
stroke. (d) All of the above
• Metal cutting take place only forward stroke. NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020

Ans. (c) : Use of indexing head in milling machine is to Ans. (b) : In planing process job reciprocates.
drill holes on pitch circle diameter. • As a shaper, a planer is used primarily to produce
Indexing in milling machine :- horizontal, vertical or inclined flat surface by a single
• It is an operation to divide the circumference of a point cutting tool. It is used for machining large and
workpiece into equally spaced divisions. heavy work-pieces.
• This operation is performed on the milling machine by • In planer, the tool is stationary and the work piece on
means of an indexing attachment called an indexing the table travels back and forth (forward) under the tool.
head or dividing head.
1154. Which of the following process can be done on
• It works by converting the work to an angular position a drilling machine?
with respect to the cutter.
(a) Drilling
• Type of indexing - (b) Drilling and hacksawing both
1. Simple Indexing head.
(c) Hacksawing
2. Direct Indexing head.
(d) Filing
3. Universal Indexing head.
1150. The axis of the plate cam blank and the end
mill spindle should always remain
(a) Inclined to each other Ans. (a) : Drilling–It is a process of creating a hole by
(b) Parallel to each other oblique cutting.
(c) Opposite to each other • Drills are made by forging and it is smaller in size so
(d) Vertical and inclined that there is some margin for reaming.
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 • The drill bit is usually a rotary cutting tool.
• The drill bit is pressed against multi point the work-
Ans. (b) : The axis of the plate cam blank and the end
mill spindle should always remain parallel to each piece and rotated at rates from hundreds to thousands of
other. revolutions per minute.
1151. Specification of shaper is determined by 1155. Appropriate tool used for spot facing is
(a) Bed Size (b) Tool head (a) reamer (b) counter sink
(c) Stroke of ram (d) Quick return speed (c) fly cutter (d) lathe tool
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
Ans. (c) : Specification of shaper is determined by Ans. (c) : Appropriate tool is used for spot facing is fly
stroke of ram or stroke length. cutter. Fly cutter are used primarily on a milling
Shaper :-A shaper is a reciprocating type of machine machine for machining large, flat surface area. The fly
tool used for producing small flat surfaces with the help cutter is a single point cutting tool.
of a single point cutting tool reciprocating over the 1156. Which of the following is true regarding
stationary workpiece. The flat surfaces may be planning machine?
horizontal, inclined, or vertical. performs the cutting (a) It has reciprocating tool like shaper
operation during its forward stroke.
(b) It can cut also in reverse stroke
1152. Which of the quick return mechanism is (c) Slots having better surface finish as compare
commonly used in shapers to end mill can be cut by it
(a) Bevel gear mechanism (d) Multiple cutting tool works together in it
(b) Pawl and ratchet mechanism
(c) Worm and worm wheel mechanism
Ans. (d): Planer is a machine tool used to produce plane
(d) Crank and slotted link mechanism
& flat surface by a single point cutting tool
• In a planer tool remains stationary and the work
Ans. (d) : Crank and slotted link (bar) mechanism is
reciprocates.
commonly used in shapers.
• In shaping operation, the speed motion is accomplish 1157. The purpose of rough milling is to:
by moving the cutting tool. (a) Remove small amounts of materials at high
The size of shaper is specified by the maximum length speeds
of stroke. The maximum stroke length of the shaper is (b) To provide rough finish suitable for finishing
900 mm. operation
1153. In which of these process job reciprocates (c) To remove excess material in shortest
(a) Shaping (b) Planing possible time
(c) Slotting (d) All of the above (d) To finish the surface rough
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022

Ans. (c) : The purpose of rough milling is to remove 1161. Which of the following would be the best choice
excess material in shortest possible time. Rough milling to machine a horizontal flat surface on a large
operation is mainly used to remove bulk material and heavy work-piece?
rapidly and roughly shape the work piece to the desired (a) Planing (b) Slotting
form. (c) Milling (d) Shaping
1158. If the ratio of forward to return speed in a ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
shaping operation is 6:4, then what is the ratio Ans. (a) : Planing is used to machine a horizontal flat
of time taken for those motions? surface on a large and heavy work-piece. Planing
(a) 10:15 (b) 6:4 process done on planer machine planer machine are
(c) 4:7 (d) 10:12 used for generating large flat surface. These surface
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 may be horizontal, vertical or inclined . The planer
1 machine handle larger and heavy Job. In planer machine
Ans. (a) : We know that speed α the job is mounted on a table which moves forward and
time
Timeof return stroke backward, tool is held on cross rails which is stationary
Quick return ratio (m) = position.
Timeof cutting stroke
1162. Which of the following milling cutters may be
Speed is cuttin stroke suitable for gear cutting operation?
=
Speed in return stroke (a) Face milling cutter
4 2 5 (b) Form relieved cutter
⇒ = = × = 10 :15 (c) Saw milling cutter
6 3 5
1159. In a mechanical shaper, the length of stroke is (d) T- slot milling cutter
increased by: ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
(a) Increasing the center distance of bull gear and Ans. (b) : Form relieved milling cutter is used for gear
crank pin cutting operation.
(b) Decreasing the center distance of bull gear By form relieved milling cutter, the tool exactly replica
and crank pin of the Job-profile to be made.
(c) Increasing the length of ram. 1163. Quick return mechanism in a planar is
(d) Decreasing the length of slot in the slotted necessary to:
lever. (a) Have a smooth surface
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 (b) Avoid dulling of the tool point
Ans. (a) : In a mechanical shaper, the length of stroke is (c) Reduce operation time
increased by Increasing the center distance of bull gear (d) Increase operation time
and crank pin.
A shaper is a reciprocating type of machine tool used
for producing small flat surfaces with the help of a Ans. (c) : Quick return mechanism in a planar is
single point tool reciprocating over the stationary work necessary to reduce operation time for mass production
piece. In a shaper the tool is held in the tool post of the or quick production, time taken in idle stroke should be
reciprocating ram and performs the cutting operation less than cutting stroke, for that quick return mechanism
during its forward stroke. is applied in planar.
1160. Which of the following operations cannot be 1164. The purpose of chasing dial on lathe is to
done on a slotting machine? achieve–
(a) Keyway slotting (b) Dove tail slotting (a) Picking up the thread accurately at beginning
(c) Gear cutting (d) Thread cutting of each cut
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 (b) Taper turning
Ans. (d) : Thread cutting cannot be done on a slotting (c) Cutting of tapered threads
machine. (d) Cutting of multiple threads
• The slotter or slotting machine is also a reciprocating RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
type of machine tool similar to a shaper or a planer. Ans. (a) : • To cut a thread on a lathe, the lathe spindle
• The chief difference between a shaper and a slotter is and lead screw must be in the same relative position for
the direction of the cutting action. The tool moves each successive cut.
vertically rather than in a horizontal direction • Mostly lathe has a thread chasing dial built into like
• The work is hold stationary and the tool on the ram is center lathe or attached to the carriage for this purpose
moved up and down across the work. the chasing dial indicates when the split nut should be
• It is used to cut slots, splines, key ways for both engaged with the lead screw for the cutting tool to
internal and external job. follow the previously cut groove.

1165. Helical gears can be cut on which type of 1169. The following is machined dry.
milling machine? (a) Aluminium (b) Cast iron
(a) Plain (b) Horizontal (c) Titanium (d) All of these
(c) Universal (d) Drum type RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 Ans. (b) : Cast iron is subjected to dry machining
Ans. (c) : Helical gears can be cut on universal type of because it doesn't require a coolant or lubricant as it
milling machine. contains graphite which itself acts as a lubricant.
• universal milling machine is a versatile piece of • Dry machining requires no cutting fluid thus it is
machine tool that is capable of performing a wide
considered the cleanest manufacturing techniques.
variety of operations, from boring to shaping.
• In dry machining, the machining components, like the
• It is used to process different surfaces of small, low
weight parts, for piece and serial production. workpiece material, cutting tool as well as machining
• Milling of parts and workpiece on the machines is process.
performed using different milling cutter types such as 1170. Which one of the following methods of thread
cylindrical, disc, end and angular milling cutters. cutting is used to cut metric threads on a
1166. Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter is British lathe ?
(a) 45 HRC (b) 52 HRC (a) Using a chasing dial
(c) 62 HRC (d) 75 HRC (b) By reversing the machine
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 (c) By making the predetermined travel
Ans. (c) : Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter (d) Marking reference lines on the headstock as
is 62 HRC. well as on the lead screw
• High speed steel (HSS) is a subset of tool steels RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
commonly used as cutting tool. Ans. (b) : By reversing the machine, thread cutting is
• HSS grades generally display high hardness. used to cut metric threads on a British lathe.
• 60-62 HRC→They stay longer sharp. • Thread cutting on the lathe is a process that produces a
1167. Which part is not present in shaper? helical ridge of uniform section on the workpiece.
(a) Table (b) Tool head • This is performed by taking successive cuts with a
(c) Spindle (d) None of these threading tool bit the same shape as the thread from
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 required.
Ans. (c) : Spindle is not present in shaper machine. 1171. Name the type of knurling pattern illustrated
The main parts of shaper machine are– in the figure
1. Base 2. Column 3. The cross rails 4. Workbench table
5. Ram 6. Tool head.
1168. The process of beveling the end of a hole is
called _____.
(a) Counterboring (b) Countersinking
(c) Spot facing (d) Reaming
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (b) : The process of beveling the end of a hole is
(a) Cross (b) Straight
called counter sinking.
(c) Diamond (d) Convex
Counter boring–Already existing holes in the
components can be further machined by counter boring. RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
• In counter boring operations, the hole is already Ans. (b) : The type of knurling pattern illustrated in the
enlarged with a flat bottom to provide proper seating for figure is straight type.
the bolt head or a nut, which is flushed from the outer • Straight knurling is a manufacturing process, typically
surface. conducted on a lathe, whereby a pattern of straight,
Boring–Boring is an operation to enlarging of an angled or crossed line is rolled into the material.
existing hole, which may have been made by a drill or 1172. In which operation on a work piece on lathe,
may be result of a core in a casting. the spindle speed will be least ?
Counter sinking–It is also similar to counter boring,
(a) Parting off (b) Thread cutting
except that the additional machining done on a hole is
conical to accommodate the counter sink machine screw (c) Finishing (d) Taper turning
head. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
• Again the depth of counter sinking should be large Ans. (b) : Thread cutting–In order to obtain the
enough to accommodate the screw head to fully flush required threads, the set the gear mechanism of the lathe
with the surface. for the threading operation.

• The thread cutting in a lathe is obtained by causing the Ans. (b) : In vertical milling machine the spindle is
lathe carriage to move, positively, a certain distance for perpendicular to the table.
each revolution of the main spindle. • The vertical milling machine is a precision tool used
• The positive movement is obtained by connecting the for shaping and fabrication by the removal of stock
main spindle to the lead screw by gears and then closing typically from metalic work piece.
the nut tightly upon the lead screw, thereby ensuring a • These machines can drill, bore and cut an array of
positive movement of the carriage for each revolution of materials.
lead screw. 1176. The table movement in a Vertical milling
• The proper depth of thread is obtained by repeating machine is:
the depth of thread is each cut. (a) Horizontal (b) Vertical
For each repeated operation, the closing of the split nut (c) Transverse (d) All of these
should coincide with the initial starting point as marked RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
on the threading dial. Ans. (d) : The table movement in a vertical milling
1173. A shaper running with Hydraulic mechanism; machine is horizontal, vertical and transverse.
which one of the following is not correct : • In vertical milling machine, there is multi-point
(a) Greater flexibility of speed cutting tool called milling cutter.
• In this machine has vertical spindle which is
(b) Ability to slip in case of overload.
perpendicular to work piece.
(c) Inability to change speed and feed during
• The table is used to hold the work piece on it and this
operation
can make the longitudinal motion.
(d) All the above
1177. Which one of the following operation is not
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 being performed on vertical milling machine?
Ans. (c) : A shaper running with Hydraulic mechanism (a) Grooving (b) Slotting
have– (c) Drilling (d) Turning
1. Greater flexibility of speed RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
2. Ability to slip in case of overloading. Ans. (d) : Turning operation is not being performed on
3. Ability to change speed and feed during operation. vertical milling machine.
• A mechanism of hydraulic shaper machine work as a • In vertical milling machine is used to performed
motor that drives a hydraulic pump at a constant speed. grooving slotting and drilling operations.
• In a shaper machine, the cutting and return speeds are • It is used to work on vertical surfaces.
practically constant throughout the stroke. • It can machine angular shapes.
1174. The advantage of the broaching is : • It makes gear, keyways etc.
(a) Roughing and finishing cuts are completed in 1178. Generally vertical milling machine is used for
one pass of the tool performing:
(b) Rate of production is high (a) end milling (b) Face milling
(c) High accuracy and High class of finish is (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
possible RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
(d) All the above Ans. (c) : The vertical milling machine is a precision
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 tool used for shaping and fabrication by the removal of
stock typically from metallic workpiece.
Ans. (d) : The advantage of the broaching are–
• Generally vertical milling machine is used for
1. Roughing and finishing cuts are completed in one performing end milling and face milling.
pass of the tool
• In end milling cutters have the cutting teeth on the
2. Rate of production is high both sides.
3. High accuracy and high class of finish is possible • In vertical milling machine, the most common tool is
4. Broaching have very high production rate higher than end mill or a flat bottomed cutter.
milling, planning, boring etc. 1179. Secondary clearance angle of a milling cutter is
5. High dimensional and form accuracy and surface also known as:
finish of the product. (a) Rake angle (b) Clearance angle
1175. In vertical milling machine the spindle is: (c) Relief angle (d) All of these
(a) Parallel to the table RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
(b) Perpendicular to the table Ans. (c) : Secondary clearance angle of a milling cutter
(c) Inclined to the table is also known as relief angle.
(d) All of these Relief angle–The relief angle is the angle between a
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 cutting tool and the workpiece it has just cut.

• Relief angle are for the purpose of helping to eliminate πR = Reference plane
tool breakage and to increase tool life. ro + αo + δ = 90º
Rake angle–The rake angle is the angle between the Rake angle–The rake angle is the angle between the
front or cutting face of the tool and a line perpendicular front or cutting face of the tool and a line perpendicular
to the workpiece. to the workpiece.
Clearance angle–Clearance angle is the angle of 1182. In a shaper:
orientation of tools principal flank surface from the (a) tool is stationary and work reciprocates
cutting velocity vector and measured on some other (b) Work is stationary and tool reciprocates
plane. (c) Tool moves over stationary work
1180. If the face of a milling cutter lies along a radius (d) Tool moves over reciprocating works
of the cutter, it is said to have : RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(a) Zero rake (b) Positive rake Ans. (b) : In a shaper machine is a reciprocating type of
(c) Negative rake (d) All of these machine basically used for producing horizontal,
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 vertical or flat surfaces.
Ans. (a) : If the face of a milling cutter lies along a • In this machine, the single point cutting tool is hold in
radius of the cutter, it is said to have zero rake. ram and the workpiece is fixed in the table.
• In a shaper, workpiece is stationary and tool
reciprocates.
• During the return stroke, no metal is cut.
• The reciprocating motion of the ram is obtained by a
quick return motion mechanism.
1183. In a conventional shaper, the metal is
removed during..........
Positive rake angle– (a) Forward Stroke
• A tool has a positive rake angle when the face of the (b) Return stroke
cutting tool slopes away from the cutting edge at inner (c) Both forward and return stroke
side. (d) Neither forward nor return stroke
Negative rake angle– RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
• A tool has a negative rake angle when the face of the Ans. (a) : In a conventional shaper, the metal is
cutting tool slopes away from the cutting edge at outer removed during forward stroke and there is a no metal
side. removed during return stroke.
• The reciprocating motion of the ram is obtained by
1181. The angle between a line through the surface of
quick return mechanism.
the land and a tangent to the periphery at the
• The main parts of the shaper machine are the base,
cutting edge is known as:
body (pillar, frame, column) cross rail, ram and tool
(a) Relief angle (b) Land
head (tool post, tool slide, clamper box block).
(c) Rake (d) Clearance angle
1184. The function of a shaper is
(a) Machining horizontal surface
Ans. (d) : The angle between a line through the surface (b) Machining vertical surface
of the land and a tangent to the periphery at the cutting (c) Machining angular surface
edge is known as clearance angle.
(d) All of these
Ans. (d) : The function of a shaper is–
• It is used for machining horizontal, vertical and flat
surfaces.
• It is also used for machining angular surfaces.
• In general, the shaper can produce any surface
composed of straight line elements.
• A single point cutting tool is used in machine.
1185. In a shaper, the length of stroke is increased
by ...........
ro = Rake angle
(a) Increasing the centre distance of bull gear and
αo = Clearance angle crack pin
δ = Lip angle (b) Decreasing the centre distance of bull gear
Vc = Cutting velocity and crank pin
(c) Increasing the length of the arm • A quick return mechanism is an apparatus that
(d) Decreasing the length of slot in the slotted converts circular motion into reciprocating motion in
lever presses and shaping machines, which are utilized to
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 shape stock of metal into flat surfaces.
Ans. (a) : The length of stroke is increased by 1189. Clapper box of a shaper is used to .........
increasing the center distance between bull gear and (a) Avoid overhanging of tools
crank pin and is decreased by decreasing the distance (b) Lift the tool in the middle of strokes
between the same. (c) Lift the tool during return strokes
• In shaper machine, metal is removed during forward (d) Lift the tool during cutting stroke
stroke and during return stroke no metal is removed. RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : Clapper box of a shaper is used to lift the
1186. Cutting tool is used on shaper machine is .........
tool during return strokes.
(a) Single point (b) Two pint
• It carries the tool holder.
(c) Three point (d) Multi point • The main function of clapper box is to provide
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 clearance for tool in return stroke.
Ans. (a) : Cutting tool is used on shaper machine is • It prevents the dragging the workpiece while return
single point. stroke and prevent tool wear.
• A single point cutting tool can be used for increasing 1190. The main advantage of using coolant in milling
the size of holes or boring. operation is ………… .
• Multi point cutting tools have two or more cutting (a) Work distortion is minimized
edges and include milling cutters, drills and broaches. (b) Higher cutting speeds are achieved
• Single point cutting tools are used in shaper, planner (c) Tool life is increased
and boring. (d) All of these
• Normally, lathe perform several operations turning, RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
facing with single point cutting tool. Ans. (d) : The main advantage of using coolant in
1187. Slotter machine is specified by ......... milling operation are–
(a) Table diameter • Work distortion is minimized
(b) Maximum stroke of its arm • Higher cutting speeds are achieved
• Tool life is increased
(c) Number of strokes per minute
• Reducing and removing the heat build up in the
(d) All of these cutting zone and workpiece.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 • Its provides lubrication to reduce friction between the
Ans. (d): Slotter machine is specified by the following tool and removal of the chips.
specification– 1191. The diameter of a milling cutter is 70 mm
1. Maximum stroke length of the arm. which rotates at 500 rpm, the cutting speed in
2. The diameter of the table. m/min is ………….. .
3. Amount of cross and longitudinal travel of the table. (a) 110 (b) 55
4. Number of stroke per unit. (c) 220 (d) 30
1188. Quick return mechanism is provided on shaper RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
to reduce the time required for shaper to Ans. (a) : Given d = 70 mm, N = 500 rpm, cutting
reduce the time required for ........... speed = ?
(a) Forward stroke πDN
Cutting speed =
(b) Return stroke 1000
(c) Forward and Return stroke where, D = diameter of a milling cutter
(d) None of these N = cutting speed in m/min.
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 π× 70 × 500
= = 110 m / min
Ans. (b) : Quick return mechanism is provided on 1000
shaper to reduce the time required for shaper to reduce The cutting speed is 110 m/min.
the time required for return stroke. 1192. If feed per tooth of a milling cutter is 4 mm,
• In shaper machine, quick return mechanism is used for No. of teeth are 40 and the cutter rotates at 240
allow less time to be spent in returning the tool to its rpm, then feed per revolution is ………….. .
initial position. (a) 160 mm (b) 320 mm
• It is used in shaper, slotting machines and rotary (c) 420 mm (d) 640 mm
internal combustion engines. RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
Ans. (d) : Given, 1196. Cam milling is performed on ………… .

Feed per tooth (ft) = 4 mm (a) Horizontal milling machine
No. of teeth (z) = 40 (b) Vertical milling machine
N = 240 rpm. (c) Universal milling machine
(d) None of these
Feed = number of teeth × feed per tooth × rpm
Feed = z × ft × N
Ans. (c) : A cam milling is the operation of producing
= 40 × 4 × 240 = 38400 mm/min. cams in a milling machine by the use of universal
38400 dividing head a vertical milling attachment.
Feed per revolution = = 640 mm
60 • The cam milling is performed on universal milling
machine.
1193. In case of helical milling cutters, when viewed
• CAM for milling is one of the most commonly used
from the end, if the flutes move in a clockwise
techniques in the manufacturing world for producing
direction, then it is known as ……….. . parts to extremely precise shape and sizes because it
(a) Left hand helix (b) Right hand helix combines two powerful tools - milling and cam
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these software.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 1197. During down milling the workpiece and the
Ans. (b) : In case of helical milling cutters, when milling cutter move in:
viewed from the end, if the flutes move in a clockwise (a) Opposite direction
direction, then it is known as right hand helix. (b) Same direction
• When viewed from the end, if the flutes rotates in an (c) Both opposite and same direction
anticlockwise direction then it is known as left hand (d) None of these
helix. RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
1194. In order to achieve helical milling, the worm Ans. (b) : In down milling (climb milling), the cutting
tool is fed with the direction of rotation, the workpiece
spindle of the dividing head is geared to …… .
and the milling cutter move in same direction.
(a) Lead screw of the machine table
• Down milling is always the preferred method
(b) The milling cutter wherever the machine tool, fixture and workpiece will
(c) Both (a) and (b) allow.
(d) None of these • In peripheral down milling, the chip thickness will
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 decrease from the start of cut, gradually reaching zero at
the end of cut.
Ans. (a) : In order to achieve helical milling, the worm
spindle of the dividing head is geared to lead screw of
the machine table.
• The dividing head spindle can be connected with the
table feed screw through a gear train to impart a
continuous rotary motion to the workpiece for helical
milling. 1198. Which one of the following are the indexing
1195. In spiral milling, if the index crank is rotated methods?
by 40 revolutions, then lead of the machine is (a) Compound indexing
equal to ………….. . (b) Direct-indexing
(a) 10 times Lead of the table feed screw (c) Differential indexing
(b) 20 times Lead of the table feed screw (d) All of these
(c) 30 times Lead of the table fed screw
Ans. (d): There are following types of indexing
(d) 40 times Lead of the table feed screw
methods–
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 1. Compound indexing
Ans. (d) : In spiral milling, if the index crank is rotated 2. Direct indexing
by 40 revolutions, then lead of the machine is equal to 3. Differential indexing
40 times Lead of the table feed screw. 4. Linear indexing
• The index crank is fitted to the end of the worm shaft. 5. Angular indexing
• The crank carries a spring loaded index pin to engage 6. Simple indexing
the hole in the plate. 1199. Differential indexing will be carried out in:
• The crank is rotated by withdrawing the knob, turning (a) One stage (b) Two stages
the crank around a selected circle of holes and releasing (c) Three stages (d) Four stage
the knob to engage the pin in the required hole. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Ans. (b) : Differential indexing will be carried out in Ans. (a) : The most familiar operations performed on a
two stages. milling machine include forming a regular shapes such
• In differential indexing is used for division that could as squares, hexagons or octagons, cutting of flutes on
not be indexed by simple indexing. In differential drills and reamers of cutting teeth on a gear blank.
indexing the required divisions on the workpiece is • All these need rotation or indexing of workpiece
obtained by combination of two movements– through a certain angle between successive cuts.
1. The index crank movement as in simple indexing. • Indexing is the operation of dividing the periphery of
work into any number of equal parts.
1200. The top and sides of the table of shaper
usually have: • Indexing is accomplished by using a special
attachment known as dividing head or indexing head.
(a) L type slots (b) T type slots
• Dividing heads are of three types–
(c) U type slots (d) I type slots
1. Plain or simple dividing head
2. Universal dividing head
Ans. (b) : The top and sides of the table of shaper 3. Optical dividing head.
usually have T type slots.
1204. Plain or slab milling operation is:
• On a standard shaper the following operations can be
(a) Producing vertical surfaces perpendicular to
performed–
the axis of cutter
1. Machining of vertical, horizontal, angular, curved,
(b) Producing horizontal surfaces parallel to the
irregular, surfaces slot and keyways.
axis of cutter
2. In shaping operations, straight and flat surfaces are
(c) Producing inclined surfaces inclined to the
created. axis of cutter
3. In all the processes single point cutting tools are used. (d) All of above
1201. No. of spindles for Column and Knee type RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
milling machine are: Ans. (b) : Plain or slab milling operation is producing
(a) One (b) Two horizontal surfaces parallel to the axis of cutter.
(c) Three (d) Four • The rotating milling cutter does not give a continuous
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 cut but moves from one end of the workpiece to another
Ans. (a) : The column and knee type milling machines end.
also called variable milling machines, use rotary cutting • Slab mill is used when you have to remove more
tools to remove material from a workpiece. amount to material from the workpiece.
• The cutting tools are held in a vertical orientation and • By using roughing end mills, we obtain a rough
the workpiece is secured in horizontal orientation on the surface finishing.
machine's table. 1205. The type of milling in which many surfaces are
• One spindle is used in column and knee type milling produced simultaneously is known as:
machine. (a) Form milling (b) Side milling
• There are following parts in this machines– (c) Face milling (d) Gang milling
1. Arbor, 2. Spindle, 3. Spacing collars, 4. Bearing RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
bush, 5. Cutter, 6. Draw bolt, 7 Lock nut, 8. key block.
Ans. (d) : Gang milling–Gang milling refers to the use
1202. Position of spindle in vertical milling is: of two or more milling cutters mounted on the same
(a) Vertical (b) Horizontal arbor in a horizontal milling set up.
(c) Inclined (d) All of these
Ans. (a) : Position of spindle in vertical milling is
located vertically, parallel to the column face and
mounted in a sliding head that can be fed up and down
by hand or power.
• A spindle, also known as a cutting head is oriented
vertically on a vertical milling machine.
1203. Function of Dividing or Indexing head is:
(a) To divide the periphery of the workpiece into
desired equal no. of parts
(b) Hold the job in vertical position
(c) Hold the job in horizontal position • All of the cutters may perform the same type of a
(d) All of the above operation, or each cutter may perform a different type of
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 operation.

• Gang milling is used when sufficiently large number • Cross rail is a box like casting that connects two
of working pieces are to be milled. housing. The cross rail can be moved up and down and
• When setting up for gang milling; the spindle rpm clamped to any fixed position.
should be calculated on the basis of peripheral speed of • In a planer, the work which is supported on the table
cutter with largest diameter and feed rate based on the reciprocates over the stationary cutting tool and the feed
cutter with the smallest number of teeth. is provided by the lateral movement of the tool.
1206. In a planer which one moves during • Planer is used for machining large and heavy work
machining: pieces that cannot be accommodated on the table of a
(a) Workpiece shaper.
(b) Planer 1209. For holding small jobs which one of the
(c) Both workpiece and planer following work holding devices is preferred for
a planer:
(d) Neither planer nor the workpiece
(a) Vices (b) V-blocks
(c) Stops (d) Braces
Ans. (a) : In a planer workpiece moves during
machining.
• Planer is a machine tool used for producing accurate Ans. (a) : For holding small jobs vices is used work
holding devices is preferred for a planer.
flat surfaces and cutting slots.
Vices–A vice is an important tool in metal and wood
• It is similar to the shaper machine but in case of size,
working applications. It holds a workpiece and desired
the planer machine is larger.
operations are done on the workpiece.
• The workpiece slots move here from one point to
• Vices are used to hold the tool or a job in a workshop,
another for operation, whereas in the shaper machine
when performing any operation like drilling, taping,
the workpiece slots were in a stationary position.
grinding etc.
• The tool used in this is single point cutting tool.
• While the workpiece moving forward the forward 1210. To accommodate different heights of workpiece
which one of the following is adjusted
stroke complete and while it moving back the return
vertically-
stroke complete. In forward stroke, the material is cut
and in backward no material is cut. (a) Base (b) Ram
(c) Arbor (d) Cross rail
1207. Drive mechanism of a planer includes:
(a) Cam and follower drive
(b) Rope drive Ans. (d):Cross rail–It helps to move the table
clockwise direction by the help of a feed screw.
(c) Direct reversible drive
• A cross-rail allows the table to raised and lowered at a
(d) None of these
required size and workpiece will accommodate.
• This is done by the rotating elevating screw that cause
Ans. (c) : Drive mechanism of a planer includes direct the cross rail to slide up and down on the vertical face
reversible drive. of the column.
• In planner, the table drive mechanism, a quick return • To accommodate different heights of work cross rail is
mechanism is used. adjusted vertically.
• It is used to obtain motion in a backward stroke of a 1211. Which one of the following machine is
planer table and slow motion in a forward stroke. preferred for pre-marked contours?
• Following are the various mechanism used to run the (a) Shaper (b) Lathe
table– (c) Drilling machine (d) Planer
1. Open and cross belt drive RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
2. DC reverse motor
Ans. (d) : Planer machine is preferred for pre-marked
3. Hydraulic drive.
contours.
1208. In a planer, Horizontal feed to the tool is given Planer machine–A planer is a machine tool used to
by: produce plane and flat surface by a single point cutting
(a) Moving the tool head inclined to the cross rail tool.
(b) Moving the tool head perpendicular • Planer machine is used for smoothing wood to an even
(c) Moving the tool head along the cross rail thickness.
(d) All of these • The planer consist of a frame, a bed that can be moved
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 up and down, feed rolls, a feeding mechanism and a
Ans. (c) : In a planer, Horizontal feed to the tool is cylindrical cutting head holding three or more knives
given by moving the tool head along the cross rail. that pare off excess wood.

1212. The feeding of the job in a shaper is done by: Ans. (b) : In a slotting machine, ram moves in the
(a) Movement of the clapper box vertical direction.
(b) V-Block movement • Slotter machine is defined as a machine tool uses for
(c) Ram movement removing unwanted material chips from the workpiece
(d) table movement to makes splines, grooves and more.
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 • The ram (tool attached) moves reciprocating, whereas
in shaper the ram moves horizontally.
Ans. (d) : Shaper machine–In a shaper, the rotary • This is a reciprocating type of machine tool.
movement of the drive is converted into a reciprocating
movement. 1216. V-block in a shaper is used for:
(a) Irregular surfaces
• It is done by the mechanism contained within the
(b) Cylindrical surfaces
column of the machine.
(c) Inclined surfaces
• The feeding of the job in a shaper is done by table
(d) All of these
movement.
• The ram holding the tool makes the reciprocating
movement. Ans. (b) : V-block in a shaper is used for cylindrical
surfaces.
• In a standard shaper, metal is cut in forward stroke,
while return stroke goes idle and no metal is cut during • V-blocks are precision metal working jigs typically
used to hold round metal rods or pipes for performing
this period. To reduce the full machining time it is
drilling or milling operations.
important to reduce the time taken by the return stroke.
• V-block is made of rectangular steel or cast iron block
• The reciprocating movement of the ram and quick with a 90º channel rotated 45º from the sides, forming a
return mechanism of machine is usually obtained by V-shaped channel in the top.
following the four types of shaper machine mechanism– • The V-block is used as a locator and a centralizer.
1. Crank and slotted link mechanism • It is mostly used to fit round or cylindrical objects
2. Whitworth's quick return mechanism tight and rigid for easy marking or cutting.
3. Hydraulic shaper mechanism 1217. In a shaping machine which one of the
4. Automatic table feed mechanism. following members reciprocates:
1213. Which one of the following is not a type of (a) Ram (b) Arbor
slotter used in workshop? (c) Workpiece (d) Belt and pulley
(a) Punch slotter (b) Tool room slotter RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(c) Production slotter (d) Horizontal slotter Ans.(a): In a shaping machine ram members
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 reciprocates.
Ans. (d): Horizontal slotter is not a type of slotter used • In shaper machine, during forward stroke ram is
in workshop. holding the tool is reciprocating over the workpiece to
cut into the required shape.
The following type of slotter used in workshops–
• During return stroke, no metal is cutting.
1. Punch slotter
• In the shaper machine, the rotary motion of the drive
2. Tool room slotter is converted into reciprocating motion of ram holding
3. Production slotter the tool.
4. Precision tool room slotter 1218. The table may be raised or lowered by
5. Key seater slotter. adjusting the following parts in a shaper:
1214. In a shaper feed (S) is the relative movement of (a) Column (b) Base
the work or tool in a direction .......... to the axis (c) Cross rail (d) Ram
of reciprocation of the ram per double stroke. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
(a) Parallel (b) Inclined Ans. (c) : Cross rail–It helps to move the table
(c) Perpendicular (d) None of these crosswise direction by the help of a feed screw.
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 • A cross-rail allows the table to raised and lowered at a
Ans. (c) : In a shaper feed is the relative movement of required size the workpiece will accommodate.
the work or tool in a direction perpendicular to the axis • This is done by the rotating elevating screw that cause
of reciprocation of the ram per double stroke. the cross rail to slide up and down on the vertical face
of column.
• In a shaper, feed is given by table movement.
1219. The mechanisms used in a shaper does not
• The ram holding the tool makes the reciprocating
include:
movement.
(a) Half nut mechanism
1215. In a slotting machine, ram moves in the: (b) Crank and slotted link mechanism
(a) Horizontal direction (b) Vertical direction (c) Hydraulic mechanism
(c) Circular direction (d) Diagonal direction (d) Whitworth mechanism
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
Ans. (a) : The following mechanism used in shaper are– Ans. (b) : Broaching–Broaching is a machining
1. Crank and slotted link mechanism process that uses a toothed tool called a broach, to
2. Automatic table feed mechanism remove material.
3. Whitworth quick return mechanism There are two main types of broaching–
4. Hydraulic shaper mechanism 1. Linear broaching, 2. Rotary broaching.
• Half nut mechanism does not used in shaper machine. • In linear broaching, which is the more common
process the broad is run linearly against a surface of
1220. Bull gear in crank and slotted lever
workpiece to produce the cut.
mechanism rotates with:
• In rotary broaching, which is a process the broach is
(a) Uniform angular acceleration
run in rotation against a surface of workpiece to
(b) Variable angular acceleration produce the cut.
(c) Uniform angular velocity • Broaching is primarily done for mass production.
(d) All of these • It is also used in lathe or attached to a machine
RRB ALP Patna 2014 powered by hydraulic pressure.
Ans. (c) : Bull gear in crank and slotted lever 1224. Gear cutter No. 1 for cutting gears on milling
mechanism rotates with uniform angular velocity. machine is used for:
• With the rotation of bull gear, crank pin will rotate on (a) Racks only (b) 12 to 13 teeth
the crank pin circle and simultaneously move up and (c) 17 to 20 teeth (d) 135 to 150 teeth
down the slot in the slotted link giving it a rocking
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
movement, which is communicated to the ram.
• Thus the rotary motion of the bull gear is converted to Ans. (d) : Gear cutter no. 1 for cutting gears on milling
machine is used for 135 to 150 teeth.
reciprocating motion of the ram.
• In this process, the gear cutting is done by using a
1221. Most commonly used ratio of quick return form cutter on a milling machine.
motion mechanism of a shaper is:
• This cutter moves axially to produce gear teeth at the
(a) 1:3 (b) 2:3 precise length and depth.
(c) 2:5 (d) 3:2 • After cutting a tooth, the cutter is removed to allow
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 the gear blank to rotate the next position.
Ans. (d): In a shaper machine, quick return motion 1225. Select the milling machine most suitable for
mechanism is used. helical gear cutting;
• A quick return mechanism is an apparatus that (a) Plain milling machine
converts circular motion into reciprocating motion in (b) Hand milling machine
shaping machines, which are utilized to shape stocks of (c) Universal milling machine
metal into flat surfaces.
(d) None of these
• This mechanism is mostly used in shaping machines,
slotting machines and in rotary internal combustion
engines. Ans. (c) : Universal milling machine–A universal
• Most commonly used ratio of quick return motion milling machine is a versatile piece of machine tool that
mechanism of a shaper is 3:2. is capable of performing a wide variety of operations
from boring to shaping.
1222. The tool head of a shaper is fitted:
• Its rotary fixture allows the table to rotate at an
(a) On the face of the Ram appropriate angle and its indexing head is useful for
(b) On the back side of the Ram processing spiral surfaces.
(c) On the right hand side f the Ram • It is most suitable for helical gear cutting.
(d) On the left hand side of the Ram 1226. Solid milling cutters are manufactured from-
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (a) Sintered carbide (b) H.S.S.
Ans. (a) : The tool head of a shaper is fitted on the face (c) Ceramic (d) Satellite
of the ram. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
• Its main function is to hold the cutting tool. Ans. (b) : Solid milling cutters are manufactured from
• The tool can be adjusted on it by some of clamps H.S.S. (High Speed Steel) or cemented carbide and
• The tool head is equipped with a cutting tool that can have one or more flutes.
feed the screw handle downwards to allow the cutting • They are the most common tool used in a vertical mill.
tool to perform a cutting motion. • A milling cutter is an essential component of a milling
1223. Broaching is primarily done for: machine.
(a) Better finish (b) Mass production • It's the cutting tool that's responsible for scraping
(c) Cylindrical jobs (d) Hard materials material out of a workpiece.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 • All milling machines have a cutter.
1227. In shaper, cutting speed is always expressed in- Ans. (d) : The process of removing metal by a milling
(a) Revolution/minute cutter, which is rotated in the same direction as the feed
(b) Millimeter/minute of the workpiece is called climb milling or down
(c) Metre/minute milling.
(d) Number of stroke/minute • The cutting force is maximum at the beginning and
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 minimum at the end of the cut.
• In down milling, the cutting force is directed on to the
Ans. (b) : In shaper, cutting speed is always expressed
work table, which allow thinner parts to be machined
in millimeter/minute.
without susceptibility to breakage.
• Cutting speed in a shaper is the average linear speed of
• A better surface finish is obtained.
the tool (m/min) during the cutting stroke.
• It depends on the number of ram strokes per minute 1231. ________is the extension of milling machine
and the stroke length. spindle on which all the various cutters are
mounted.
Cutting speed of shaper is
(a) Socket (b) Sleeve
NL(1 + M)
V= m / min (c) Arbor (d) None of these
1000 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
where, Ans. (c) : Arbor is the extension of milling machine
V = cutting speed of shaper spindle on which all the various cutters are mounted.
N = Number of double stroke per minute Arbor–Arbor is a precise machining tool during the
L = Length of stroke entire cutting process, it bears the important
M = Quick return ratio (3: 2 generally) responsibility of transmitting the rotary motion and
1228. For milling 49 teeth on a gear blank, the index torque of the spindle to the cutting tool.
crank to move- • Its quality requirements are extremely strict.
(a) 10 holes on 49 hole circles of I.P. no. III 1232. In plain milling machine, table can be moved
(b) 20 holes on 49 hole circles of I.P. no.III against a rotating cutter mounted on arbor-
(c) 30 holes on 49 hole circles of I.P. no.III (a) Vertically (b) Longitudinally
(d) 40 holes on 49 hole circles of I.P. no.III (c) Cross-wise (d) All of these
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
Ans. (d) : For milling 49 teeth on a gear blank, the Ans. (c) : In plain milling machine, table can be moved
index crank to move 40 holes on 49 hole circles of I.P. longitudinally by sliding the saddle along with the
no.III. guideways is done by hand feed or power feed.
• The multi point milling cutter is mounted on a rotating
1229. The process of removing metal by a milling
arbor.
cutter, which is rotated against the direction of
• The cutter is rotating at a particular cutting speed.
the feed of the work piece-
• The workpiece is fed slowly fast the cutter.
(a) Face milling (b) UP milling
• The feed to given may be longitudinal, crosswise or
(c) End milling (d) Down milling
vertical according to the requirement.
• When the work is fed the cutting edges of the cutter
Ans. (b) : The process of removing metal by a milling remove the metal from the workpiece. Thus the milling
cutter, which is rotated against the direction of the feed is done by a milling machine.
of the work piece is called up milling.
1233. Which of the following milling machines is
• It is also called as conventional milling. most suitable for production work?
• In which the workpiece is moving towards the cutter, (a) Universal milling machine
opposing the cutter direction of rotation.
(b) Triplex type (Fixed Bed) milling
• The cutting force is minimum during the beginning of
the cut and maximum at the end of the cut. (c) Machine
• In up milling, the cutting action tends to lift the (d) Omniversal milling machine
workpiece and hence a proper fixture is required in this RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
operation. Ans. (b) : Triplex type (Fixed Bed) milling machine is
1230. The process of removing metal by a milling most suitable for production work.
cutter, which is rotated in the same direction as Triplex type milling machine–It is an upgrade version
the feed of the workpiece- of the bed type of milling machine, as the spindle also
(a) Face milling moves in all the three directions and table rotates at
(b) Conventional milling 360º.
(c) Up milling • The movement are controlled hydraulically which is
(d) Climb milling controlled as the computer commended.
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 • It is a fixed bed type milling machine.
1234. Which of the following milling machines is 1237. Milling machine is mainly specified by-
most suitable for versatility of works? (a) Manufacture type and code number
(a) Universal milling machine (b) Diameter of arbor and table size with
(b) Fixed bed type milling machine movements
(c) Omnivesal milling machine (c) Range and number of spindle speeds and
(d) Plain milling machine. table feeds
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 (d) Net weight, floor space and kW of the motor
Ans. (c) : Omniversal milling machine is most suitable RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
for versatility of works. Ans. (c) : Milling machine is mainly specified by range
• Omniversal milling machine is a customized and number of spindle speeds and table feeds.
horizontal milling machine. Specification of milling–
• It consists of two spindles, one of which is in • Length of work table and its width.
horizontal plane, as other is carry through a universal • Max. longitudinal cross and vertical motion.
swivelling head.
• No. of spindle speed and feed.
• Later can set in a vertical point and swivelled up to 45º
• Power of drilling motor.
on equally sides.
• Net weight of machine
1235. Select the machine tool in which the forward
movement of the work-piece in longitudinal, • Standard taper hole and size of spindles.
cross or vertical direction fed against the 1238. Select the milling machine cutter holding
rotating cutter- device-
(a) Lathe (b) Drilling (a) Arbor (b) The spring collet
(c) Broaching (d) Milling (c) Screw on arbor (d) All of these
Ans. (d) : Milling–Milling is the process of machining Ans. (d):In the milling machine cutter holding device
using rotary cutters to remove material by advancing a are–
cutter into a workpiece. 1. Arbor
• The machine tool in which the forward movement of 2. The spring collet
the workpiece in longitudinal, cross or vertical direction 3. Screw on arbor
fed against the rotating cutter is called milling cutter. 4. The adopter
• This may be done by varying direction on one or 5. Sleeves
several axes, cutter head speed and pressure. 6. Cam lock.
• Milling covers a wide variety of different operations
1239. The space between the back of one tooth and
and machines, on scales from small individual parts to
face of the subsequent tooth in a plain milling
large, heavy duty gang milling operations.
cutter is known as-
• It is one of the most commonly used processes for
(a) Race (b) Fillet
machining custom parts to precise tolerances.
(c) Gash (d) None of these
1236. Which milling machine is most suitable in
Tool-Room Operations-
(a) Plain milling machine Ans. (c) : The space between the back of one tooth and
face of the subsequent tooth in a plain milling cutter is
(b) Universal milling machine
known as gash.
(c) Omniversal milling machine
Fillet–A fillet is a sharp edge breaking feature that
(d) Fixed bed type milling machine
specifically adds a radius; either concave or convex, to
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 the interior corner of a part.
Ans. (c) : Omniversal milling machine is most suitable A fillet differs from chamfers and bevels because they
in tool-room operations. don't have a radius.
• This is a modified form of a milling machine. It is 1240. The top table of planer is provided with-
provided with two spindles, one of which is in the
(a) T slot (b) C slot
horizontal plane while the other is carried by a universal
swivelling head. (c) U slot (d) D slot
• It can set in a vertical point and swivelled up in 45º on RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
equally sides. Ans. (a) : A planer machine is very large and massive.
• It is useful for machining helical grooves, reamer and • It is capable of a machining heavy workpiece, which
bevel gears. cannot be fit on a shaper table.
• It is mostly used in tool room work. • The top table of planer is provided with T-slots.

• T slots are provided on the entire length of the table so Ans. (c) : In planer feed is the lateral distance moved by
that the work and work holding devices may be bolted the tool (on the cross- rail) per cutting stroke.
upon it. • Feed in a planer machine is given at the end of the
• The table supports the work and reciprocates the work forward stroke or at the beginning of the backward
and reciprocates along with the ways of the bed. stroke.
• The planer table is a heavy rectangular casting. • The feed is given through the movement of the tool.
1241. In the return stroke of planer, the cutting tool- • There are two types of feeds. Both these feeds can be
(a) Cuts the metal (b) Is idle given by rotating the feed screws by hand or power.
(c) Rotates (d) None of these 1245. Slotter can also be considered as-
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (a) Horizontal shaper (b) Vertical shaper
Ans. (b) : Planer is machine tool used for producing (c) Vertical planer (d) Horizontal planer
accurate flat surfaces and cutting tools. RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
• While the workpiece moving forward the forward Ans. (b) : The slotter or slotting machine is also a
stroke complete and while it moving back the return reciprocating type of machine tool similar to a shaper.
stroke complete. • It may be considered as a vertical shaper.
• In forward stroke, the material is cut and in return • The machine operates in a manner similar to shaper,
stroke, no material is cut. however, the tool moves vertically rather than in a
• In return stroke of planer, the cutting tool is idle. horizontal direction.
• In planer machine, single point cutting tool is used. • It is used for light cuts; it is used to cut perfectly cut
• It is use for heavy workpiece and quick return slots, spline and internal and external keyways.
mechanism is used in planer. • It can produce internal and external gears.
1242. The cutting tool of planer is made of- • Its able to produce internal blind holes.
(a) High speed steel
1246. The difference between planer and shaper is
(b) Tripped carbide tool that in case of planer-
(c) Both (a) and (b) (a) Tool moves over stationary work
(d) None of these (b) Tool moves over reciprocating work
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (c) Both tool and job reciprocate
Ans. (c) : The cutting tool of planer is made of high (d) Tool is stationary and job reciprocates
speed steel and tripped carbide tool. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
• Single point cutting tools is used in turning tools,
lathe, shaping, planning and slotting tools. Ans. (d) : The difference between planer and shaper
is–
• These single piece tools also referred to as monolithic
tools are generally made from high speed steels or Shaper Planer
carbon steels. 1. Cutting stroke is lower 1. Cutting stroke remains
• It is very hard material, have lower toughness and than inactive stroke. slower
break more easily. 2. A shaper machine is 2. Planner machine is
1243. The length of the stroke of planer can be used for small working used for large working.
adjusted by changing the position of- 3. Through machining a 3. Two or extra cutting
(a) T slot (b) V slot single point cutting tool tools be able to use
(c) Limit switches (d) None of these is used through machining.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 4. In this tool 4. In this tool is
Ans. (c) : The length of the stroke of planer can be reciprocates and stationary and job
adjusted by changing the position of limit switches. workpiece is stationary reciprocates
Limit switches–A switch that operates as an automatic 5. Cutting tool move up 5. Cutting tools remains
control to prevent a mechanism or process from going and down in a horizontal stationary
beyond a prescribed limit.
direction
• Limit switches are used to detect the presence or
absence of an object. 6. The stroke length is 6. The stroke length is
• These switches are used to define the limit of travel of small. bigger than the shaper.
an object. 7. The cutting rate 7. Planer is nearly stable
1244. In planer _______is the lateral distance moved through cutting stroke cutting speeds.
by the tool (on the cross- rail) per cutting differs.
stroke. 1247. Arbor of the milling machine is used to hold-
(a) Speed (b) Drift (a) Cutting tool (b) Spindle size
(c) Feed (d) None of these (c) Over arm (d) Mandrel
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
Ans. (a) : Arbor-Arbor of the milling machine is used Ans. (a) : The pattern on work surface caused by the
to hold cutting tool. movement of the cutting tool is called waveness.
• In milling machine, its one end is attached to the Roughness–Surface roughness is called primary texture
column and the other end is supported by an overarm. and is caused by the action of the cutting tool used to
• It holds and drive different type of milling cutters. produce the surface.
• This arbor is used to hold metal slitting saw milling Surface texture–It is a repetitive or random deviations
cutters used for slotting, slitting and sawing operations. from the normal surface which form the pattern of the
• Arbor is multi point cutting tool. surface.
1248. In gang milling- • Surface texture includes roughness, waviness, lays and
(a) Several jobs can be performed in one set-up flaws.
(b) One job is completed on several milling
machines located together 1251. The broaching operation in which the tool
moves over the stationary work is known as
(c) Two or more cutters are mounted on the arbor
and all of them remove the metal ________broaching.
simultaneously. (a) Push (b) Pull
(d) None of these (c) Continuous (d) Surface
Ans. (c) : Gang milling–Gang milling refer to the use Ans. (d): The broaching operation n which the tool
of two or more milling cutters mounted on the same moves over the stationary work is known as surface
arbor in a horizontal milling set up and all of them broaching.
remove the metal simultaneously. • Push broaching–A push broaching tool is shorter to
be able to endure the compressive forces applied as it
goes through the workpiece.
• Continuous broaching–In this, the broach is held
stationary in the broaching machine and workpiece is
moved continuously.
Surface broaching–Surface broaching is a type of
broaching that removes material exclusively from is the
exterior of a workpiece surface broaching is may be pull
or push type.
1252. The process to remove sharp edges and burrs
is called_______
(a) Thread cutting (b) Chamfering
• All of the cutters may perform the same type of a (c) Plain turning (d) Taper turning
operation, or each cutter may perform a different type of
operation. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
• Gang milling is used when sufficiently large number Ans. (b) : Chamfering–The process to remove sharp
of working pieces are to be milled. edges and burr is called chamfering.
1249. In milling machine, cutting of operation is Thread cutting–Thread cutting on a lathe is a process
done with help of ______ that produce a helical right of uniform section on the
(a) Side mill cutter (b) Slab mill workpiece.
(c) Slitting saw (d) T-slot cutter Plain turning–It is used to manufacture long, slim parts
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 from red stock or wire.
Ans. (c) : In milling machine, cutting of operation is • Plain turning or straight turning produces a cylindrical
done with help of slitting saw. surface after machining.
• In milling process removes material by performing Taper turning–Taper turning produces a ramp
many separate, small cuts. transition between the two surfaces with different
• The gear cutting operation is performed in a milling diameter due to the angled motion between the
machine by using a form relieved cutter. workpiece and a cutting tool.
• The cutter may be a cylindrical type or end mill type. 1253. The advantages of down cut milling over up
The cutter profile fits exactly with the tooth space of cut milling is______
the gear.
(a) Can be used for milling cast iron
1250. The pattern on work surface caused by the (b) Feed Drive can gave a backlash
movement of the cutting tool is called–
(a) Waveness (b) Roughness (c) Suitable for milling thin metal plates
(c) Roughness spacing (d) Surface texture (d) Suitable for milling thick metal plates
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002

Ans. (c) : The advantages of down cut milling– • Cutting speeds depend primarily on the kind of
1. The width of the chip starts at maximum and material you are cutting and the kind of cutting tool you
decreases. are used.
• Cutting speed is the speed difference between the
2. The cutting edge meets the workpiece at the top of cutting tool and the surface of the workpiece it is
the cut. operating on.
3. Chips are dropped behind the cutter less re-cutting. 1256. The cutting tool of milling machine is mounted
4. Less wear, with tool life being up to 50% longer. on_______.
5. Improved surface finish because of less recutting. (a) Arbor (b) Tool post
6. It is suitable for less power required. (c) Column (d) Knee
The advantages of up cut milling– RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
1. The width of the chip starts from zero and increases Ans. (a) : The cutting tool of milling machine on arbor.
as the cutting tool moves. Arbor–Arbor is a precise machining tool. During the
2. The cutting edge meets the workpiece at the bottom entire cutting process, it bears the important
of the cut when conventional milling. responsibility of transmitting the rotary motion and
torque of the spindle to the cutting tool.
3. Upward forces tend to lift the workpiece during
• It is multi-point cutting tool.
conventional milling.
1257. In rough milling, heavy depth of cut and feed
4. Conventional milling requires more power than to
depends upon the________
climb milling.
(a) Quantity of material to be removed
5. It is suitable for milling thin metal plates. (b) Rigidity of machine
6. Conventional milling is preferred for rough surfaces. (c) Quality of surface
1254. The main cause of defect for cutting a spur (d) Finish required
gear on milling machine is _______. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(a) Backlash of dividing head Ans. (a) : In rough milling, heavy depth of cut and feed
(b) Backlash of machine lead screw depends upon the quantity of material to be removed.
(c) Backlash of cross feed • In may be expressed as the thickness of the chip of
(d) Backlash of vertical head metal removed by the tool in one cut and cut is
measured in mm.
• The depth of cut depends on the amount of metal to be
Ans. (a) : The main cause of defect for cutting a spur removed, tool material and the power and rigidity of the
gear on milling machine is backlash of dividing head. machine tool.
• Gear defects typically occur in the teeth of a gear 1258. The milling cutters having teeth on the end as
mechanism due to fatigue, spalling or pitting. well as on its periphery are known as:–
• These can be manifested as cracks in gear root or (a) Angle milling cutter (b) Plain milling cutter
removal of metal from the tooth surface. (c) Form milling cutter (d) End milling cutter
• Backlash refers to the angle that the output shaft of a RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
gear head can rotate without the input shaft moving. Ans. (d) : End milling cutter–
• Backlash arises due to tolerance in manufacturing the • The milling cutters having teeth on the end as well as
gear teeth need some play to avoid jamming when they on its periphery are known as end milling cutter.
mesh. Angle milling cutter–
1255. The cutting speed for a milling operation has to • Angle cutters are milling cutters with the cutting face
angled with respect to the axis of rotation. There are
be increased. Which of the following
many types of angle cutters.
adjustment has to be done on the machine? Ex–Included single angle cutters and double angle
(a) Reduce depth of cut cutters.
(b) Working wit down cut Form milling cutters–It is a type of CNC operation
(c) Increase feed which is ideal for shaping irregular contours including
(d) Increase the spindle RPM curves and sometimes straight lines.
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 • All this is done in a single cut using from milling
cutters.
Ans. (d) : The cutting speed for a milling operation has
Plain milling cutter–It has straight or helical teeth cut
to be increased. on the periphery of a disc or a cylindrical surface, may
• Increasing the spindle rpm adjustment has to be done be of the solid inserted blade or tripped type and is
on the machine. profile sharpened but may be form relieved also.
• The depth of cut is adjusted by rotating the cross feed • The plain milling cutter is generally used for milling a
screw of the table. flat surface parallel to the cutter axis.

1259. A slab milling cutter is used to mill a Ans. (a) : In a slotting machine 36 teeth of sprocket are
______workpiece. to be cut, what will be indexing movement in degrees
(a) Long (b) Thin 10.
(c) Thick (d) Small 1263. Slotting machine rotary table helps to
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 generate–
Ans. (c) : A slab milling cutter is used to mill a thick (a) Flat surface (b) Angular surface
workpiece. (c) Contour surface (d) Stepped surface
• A slab milling cutter is used when you have to remove RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
more amount of material from the workpiece.
Ans. (c): In a slotting, the rotary motion of the drive is
• A slab milling operation is performed to finish the top
converted into reciprocating motion of the ram by the
surface of a steel rectangular workpiece.
mechanism housing within the column or the machine.
• It is used to cut large flat surfaces.
• In slotting machine rotary table helps to generate
1260. Indexing head works on the mechanism of____ contour surface.
(a) Two helical gear • A quick return mechanism converts the circular
(b) Two bevel gear motion into reciprocating motion.
(c) Wrom and worm wheel • This mechanism is mostly used in shaping, planning
(d) Rack and pinion and slotting machines.
1264. Which one of the following is not the criteria
Ans. (c) : Indexing head works on the mechanism of for the selection of feed in a shaping machine?
worm and worm wheel.
(a) Type of material to be machined
(b) Type of cutting tool
(c) Type of cut
(d) Type of cutting fluid
Ans. (d) : Type of cutting fluid is not the criteria for the
selection of feed in a shaping machine.
The criteria for the selection of feed in a shaping
machine are–
• To select the type of material to be machined (steel,
brass, tool steel, plastic, wood).
• Its depend the type of cutting tool.
Index mechanism–An indexing mechanism or
intermittent drive is a mechanism that turns a wheel or • It also depends the type of cut.
shaft a small amount then stops for a set amount of • It depends of the material, the cutter is made from
time the turns again repeating this process over and over carbon steel, high speed steel, carbide, ceramics.
as the drive handle is turned. 1265. Which of the following are not uses of
• A worm wheel is rigidly fixed on the spindle while tapers?
and index crank is rigidly mounted on a worm shaft (a) Assist to transmit drive in the assembled parts
such that the rotation of the index crank finally result in
the rotation of the spindle. (b) Used for easy assembly and disassembly of
parts
• Its spindle rotates only around a horizontal axis.
(c) Used for permanent assembly of components
1261. As per I. S., equal milling cutters are specified
(d) Gives self-alignment in the assembled parts
as 56 × 60° NIS6326. The 56 represents;–
(a) Thickness of cutter RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
(b) Bore dia of cutter Ans. (c) : Taper is not used for permanent assembly of
(c) Dia of the cutter components.
(d) Conuter bore dia of cutter There are following uses of tapers–
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 • Tapers assists to transmits drive in the assembled
Ans. (c) : As per I. S., equal milling cutters are parts.
specified as 56 × 60° NIS6326. • It is used for easy assembly and disassembly of parts.
56 = Diameter of the cutter • It gives self-alignment in the assembled parts.
1262. In a slotting machine 36 teeth of sprocket are to • A taper is used for securing cutting tools or tool
be cut, what will be indexing movement in holders in the spindle of a machine tool or power tool.
degrees– 1266. "TPF" means–
(a) 10 (b) 15 (a) Top per foot (b) Teeth per foot
(c) 20 (d) 30 (c) Taper per foot (d) Tooth per foot
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : "TPF" means Taper per foot. • Upward forces tend to lift the workpiece during
• It is also known as Taper per inch (TPI). conventional milling.
• TPF/TPI is calculated by finding the difference in • It is suitable for thin metal plates.
diameter at the opposite ends of the taper and dividing • It is preferred for rough surfaces.
the length. 1271. Which one of the following set divisions cannot
1267. Which type of lathe can accommodate various be milled on the workpiece by direct indexing?
attachments? (a) 24, 12 (b) 8, 6
(a) Speed lathe (b) Engine lathe
(c) 7, 5 (d) 3, 2
(c) Bench lathe (d) Toolroom lathe
Ans. (b) : Engine lathe machine–The engine lathe is Ans. (c) : (7, 5) set divisions cannot be milled on the
one of the most useful and necessary machines in a workpiece by direct indexing.
workshop. (24, 12), (8, 6), (3, 2) set divisions can be milled on the
• The major function of the engine lathe is to change the workpiece by direct indexing.
size, shape or finish of a revolving workpiece with • In direct indexing the workpiece and plate rotate in 1
various cutting tool. to 1 ratio and holes and used directly i.e. a plate with 12
• Engine lathe can accommodate varies attachments in holes can divide the workpiece into 2, 3, 4, 6 or 12
compare to other lathe machines. equal segments.
• Engine lathe performed complicated tasks. • A dividing head incorporates an internal gear ratio
1268. The planning machine bed is also called as...... (usually 40:1, 60:1, 90:1) with the same plates.
(a) Base (b) Column 1272. In a lathe feeding mechanism, the tumbler gear
(c) Cross rail (d) Housing consist of .........
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (a) Two gears (b) Three gears
Ans. (a) : The planning machine bed is also called as (c) Four gears (d) Compound gears
base.
RRB ALP Patna 2014
• The bed of a planer having cross ribs similar to box
like casting. Ans. (b) : In a lathe feeding mechanism, the tumbler
• It is heavy in weight and very large in size also it gear consist of three gears.
supports the column and moving parts of the machine. • There are several feed mechanisms to make the tool
• The bed is made generally longer than the length of carriage and cross slide move automatically and to
the table, almost twice the length. change the direction of their movement.
1269. What is the principle of milling? • Some important mechanisms are as follows–
(a) The job rotates 1. Lead screw is a long thread bar mounted just below
(b) The cutter rotates and parallel to the bed ways. The lead screw is engaged
(c) Cutter moves against rotating job with the carriage during the thread cutting operation to
(d) Work moves against rotating cutter move the carriage to a calculate distance.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 2. Feed rod is placed between the lead screw on the
Ans. (d) : Principle of milling–Milling is a cutting front side of the bed.
operation that removes metal by feeding the work The power is transmitted from the spindle to the feed
against a rotating having a single and multiple cutting rod through tumbler gears and a gear train.
edges. 1273. Which one of planning machines has only one
1270. Which one of the following is an advantage of column?
up cutting milling (a) Pit planning machine
(a) Backlash eliminator is not required (b) Plate planning machine
(b) Downward pressure during milling is high
(c) Hydraulic planning machine
(c) Cutter wear is less
(d) Open side planning machine
(d) Suitable for milling thin plates
Ans. (a) : The advantages of up cut milling– Ans. (d) : Open side planning machine–In open side
• The width of the chip starts from zero and increases as planner machine, the cross rail carries the tool head
the cutting tool finishes slicing. which can move vertically and horizontally and it can
• In up cutting milling backlash eliminator is not slide vertically along the guideways of the housing.
required. • It has only one column.
• The cutting edge meets the workpiece at the bottom of Another tool head is fitted on the housing and it also in
the cut when conventional milling. same directions.

1274. Which one of the following is not the drive used 1278. The crank pin of shaping machine is set closer
on planning machine? to the centre of the Bull gear. How does it affect
(a) V belt drive the ram movement?
(b) Hydraulic drive (a) The RAM does not move
(c) Reversible motor drive (b) It does not affect the RAM movement
(d) Open and cross belt (c) The RAM movement will be longer
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (d) The RAM movement will be shorter
Ans. (a) : V belt drive is not used on planning machine. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
• Hydraulic drive, reversible motor drive and open and Ans. (d): The crank pin of shaping machine is set closer
cross belt drive are used in planner machine.
to the centre of the bull gear, the RAM movement will
• In planner machine feeding and table drive mechanism
be shorter.
are also used.
• The crank pin of the shaping machine is set away to
1275. In a planning machine the feed is given at center of the bull gear, the ram movement will be
the.......
longer.
(a) End of the forward stroke
• A bull gear is used to refer to the larger of two spur
(b) End of the backward stroke
gears that are in engagement in any machine.
(c) During the forward stroke
• The smaller gear is usually referred to as a pinion.
(d) During the backward stoke
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 1279. Which of the following is not the part of
Ans. (a) : In a planning machine the feed is given at the shaper?
end of the forward stroke or at the beginning of the (a) Clapper box (b) Ram
backward stroke. (c) Tool head (d) Arbor
• The feed is given through the movement of the tool. RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
• There are two types of feeds– Ans. (d) : Arbor is not the part of shaper machine.
1. By rotating the feed screws. • The part of shaper machine are following–
2. By hand or power. 1. Base
1276. Which mechanism converts rotary motion to 2. Column
linear motion? 3. Cross rail
(a) Bevel gear mechanism 4. Workbench table
(b) Bell crank mechanism
5. Ram
(c) Crank and slotted mechanism
6. Tool head
(d) Worm and worm wheel mechanism
7. Clapper box
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
• Arbor is a precise machining tool used in milling
Ans. (c) : Crank and slotted quick return mechanism
machine.
converts rotary motion into linear motion.
• It is extensively used in shaping and cutting machine. 1280. What is the angle to be swiveled by the vertical
• It is particularly useful in cutting flat surfaces. head in vertical milling machine?
• The return stoke of the ram is faster than the (a) Up to 15º (b) Up to 30º
advancing stroke. (c) Up to 45º (d) Up to 60º
1277. An angular surface has to be machined in RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
shaping machines. For machining this, the tool Ans. (c) : The angle to be swiveled by the vertical head
is adjusted by......... in vertical milling machine is upto 45º.
(a) Swiveling and fixing at the angles • Vertical lifting platform milling machine is a kind of
(b) Swiveling the clapper box general metal cutting machine tool.
(c) Swiveling the tool head of the machine 1281. How to improve the rigidity of a slotting tool ?
(d) Tilting table itself (a) Increase the length of tool
(b) increase the overhanging of tool
Ans. (c) : An angular surface has to be machined in (c) Reduce the cross section of tool
shaping machines. For machining this, the tool is
(d) Increase the cross section of tool
adjusted by swiveling the tool head of the machine.
• The angular surface can also be machined in a RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
universal shaper or by using a universal vice without Ans. d) : Increase the cross section of tool to improve
swivelling the tool head. the rigidity of a slotting tool.

1282. What is the formula to find machining time in Ans. (c) : The hydraulic shaper uses the oil under high
slotter? pressure. The end of the piston rod is connected to the
nL(1 + m) ram. The high pressure oil first acts on one side of the
(a) Time taken = piston and on the other causing the piston to
1000
reciprocating and the motion is transmitted to the ram.
L(1 – m) • The quick return motion of table is attained in
(b) Time taken =
1000 × V hydraulic system to change the pressure of fluid.
L × B(1 + m) 1286. What mechanism is used to impart rotary
(c) Time taken =
1000 × V × S motion in a rotary table?
(a) Rack and pinion mechanism
L × B(1 + m)
(d) Time taken = (b) Pawl and ratchet mechanism
1000 × S (c) Worm and worm gear mechanism
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (d) Crank and slotted link mechanism
Ans. (c): Machining time in slotter machine is– RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
L × B(1 + m) Ans. (c) : Worm and worm gear mechanism is used to
Time taken =
1000 × V × S impart rotary motion in a rotary table.
Where, L = length of the ram stroke in mm. 1287. What is the disadvantage of broaching?
B = width of the stroke in mm (a) Slow process
m = return stroke time/cutting stroke time (b) Poor finishing
V = Cutting speed (c) Cause of distortion in workpiece
S = slotter feed in mm. (d) Not suitable for heavy stock removal
1283. What is the function of clapper box in a RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
planning machine? Ans. (d) : Disadvantage of broaching–
(a) Resist shock loads • High initial cost for a customized broach.
(b) Give length support to tool while cutting • Design, restoration, sharpening of broach is expensive.
(c) Keeps the tool rigidly in non-cutting stroke • Broaching is useful only for low chip loads or light
(d) To clear the tool from work in non-cutting cuts.
stroke • It is not suitable for heavy stock removal.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 • It is economic only for mass production.
Ans. (d) : The function of clapper box in a planning 1288. What type of shaping tool can work both in
machine are– vertical feeding and horizontal feeding ?
• A hinged part on the tool head of a reciprocating (a) Side tool
machine in a planner that permits the tool to clear the (b) Offset shaping tool
workpiece on the return stroke. (c) Keyway cutting tool
• It carries the tool holder. (d) Cranked roughing tool
• The main function of the clapper box is to provide RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
clearance for tools in return stroke. Ans. (d) : Cranked roughing tool of shaping tool can
• It prevents the cutting edge from dragging the work both in vertical feeding and horizontal feeding.
workpiece while returning stroke and prevents tool • In shaper crank and slotted mechanism is used.
wear.
1289. What is the name of the side-milling cutter
1284. What is the necessity of left hand and right shown below?
hand tool to cut dovetail in planning machine?
(a) For rough and finish cuts
(b) For hard and soft materials
(c) To cut both sides of dovetail
(d) For different cutting tool material
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 (a) Half side milling cutter
Ans. (c) : To cut both sides of dovetail (b) Inter locking side milling cutter
1285. How does the quick return motion of table is (c) Plain side and face milling cutter
attained in hydraulic system? (d) Staggered teeth side milling cutter
(a) Increase the flow of fluid RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(b) Change the power of motor Ans. (c) : The name of the side-milling cutter shown in
(c) Change the pressure on fluid figure is plain side and face milling cutter.
(d) Change in volume of cylinder • It is made of high speed steel.
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 • It is used for milling flat, vertical surfaces.

1290. What is the name of the cutter shown below? Ans. (c) : Column of the milling machine houses all the
driving mechanism for the spindle and the feed.
• The column is the main supporting member mounted
vertically on the base.
• It is box shaped, heavily ribbed inside and houses all
the driving mechanism for the spindle and table feed.
1294. Which machine tool removes the metal from a
(a) T-Slot cutter revolving workpiece with a stationery cutting
(b) Convex milling cutter tool?
(c) Concave milling cutter (a) Lathe (b) Shaper
(d) Corner round milling cutter (c) Milling machine (d) Grinding machine
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
Ans. (b) : The name of the cutter shown in this figure is Ans. (a) : Lathe machine tool removes the metal from a
convex milling cutter. revolving workpiece with a stationery cutting tool.
• It is used extensively in milling surfaces of • Lathe machines are heavy-duty and versatile
components and producing profile and components. machines.
• Convex cutters come with teeth on the peripheral • A lathe machine is used for shapping wood and metal.
surface or with the side or a combination of both. 1295. How the size of a planning machine is
• It is made of high speed steel. specified?
1291. Which type of arbor is used to mount the shell (a) Length of the bed
end mills and similar cutter? (b) Width of the column
(a) Long arbor (c) Height of the column
(b) Stub arbor type A (d) Maximum height and width of the job
(c) Stub arbor type B RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
(d) Stub arbor type C Ans. (d) : Planner sizes are specified by the width of
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 work that can be accommodated usually–
Ans. (b) : Stub arbor type A of arbor is used to mount The size of a planning machine is specified by–
the shell end mills and similar cutter. 1. The maximum length of table travel
• Stub milling arbors act as a tool holder and functions 2. Distance between two housings
as an adopter for mounting a face mill in a machining
3. Number of feeds
center or milling machine.
4. Length of table
• It is used for holding saws or small cutters.
5. Length of bed
• They fit into end mill adopters.
6. Power input
1292. What is the name of the part marked 'X'?
7. Length of stroke.
1296. Which planning machine has two tables on the
bed that can be reciprocated separately or
together?
(a) Edge planning machine
(b) Open side planning machine
(c) Divided table planning machine
(d) Double part controls planning machine
(a) Slot (b) Screw RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
(c) Adapter (d) Arbor key Ans. (c) : Divided planning machine has two tables on
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 the bed that can be reciprocated separately or together.
Ans. (d) : The name of the part marked 'X' is arbor key • This will save idle time when you set the work.
is shown in figure given below. • Divided type planner is mostly suitable for mass
1293. Which part of the milling machine houses all production work that can machine is to be done
the driving mechanism for the spindle and the identically, the work on one of the tables is loaded, the
feed? other part can reciprocated the cutting tool for the
(a) Base (b) Knee finishing process.
(c) Column (d) Gearbox • Heavy and large jobs are clamped together therefore
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 given the reciprocating movement by the tool.

1297. Which part controls the vertical movement of Ans. (a) : The name and shape of tool is dovetail tool.
the cross-rail in a planning machine? • Dovetail cutters are specialized tools for cutting angles
(a) Rack or trapezoidal-shaped grooves into a workpiece.
(b) Feed disc
• It is using for cutting dovetails and fitting or joining
(c) Feed gears
parts.
(d) Two lead screws in the housing
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 1301. What is the angle allowed for the adjustment of
Ans. (d): Two lead screws in the housing controls the swivel base of the planning machine tool head?
vertical movement of the cross-rail in a planning (a) 40° (b) 45°
machine. (c) 60° (d) 90°
• Cross-rail is a rigid cast iron box like casting that RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
connects the two housing. Ans. (c) : Tool heads are mounted on a cross rail by
• It provides additional rigidity to the machine.
saddles, which move crossword to give cross feed.
1298. What type of bolts are used in a planning • The swivel base is mounted on the saddle and
machine for ordinary clamping purpose?
graduated to 60° on each side so that it can be bend the
(a) Stud bolts
angular surfaces to any desired angle for machining by
(b) 'T' head bolts
rotating the feed screw.
(c) Round head bolts
(d) Square head bolts 1302. What is the holding method if the setting time
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 can be reduced while planning?
Ans. (b) : 'T' head bolts are used in a planning machine (a) Angle plates
for ordinary clamping devices. (b) Special fixture
• In planning machine following tools are used. (c) Heavy duty vice
1. Round nose tool (d) Clamps and key bolts
2. Square nose tool RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
3. Dovetail tool
Ans. (b) : Special fixture is the holding method if the
4. T-slot tool
setting time can be reduced while planning.
5. Finishing tool
6. Keyway cutting tool. 1303. What type of devices are used to prevent the
1299. What is the shape of tools used for planning bending of overhanging jobs in planning?
slots? (a) Parallels (b) Step blocks
(a) T-slot tool (b) Dovetail tool (c) Planning jack (d) Plain centres
(c) Round nose tool (d) Square nose tool RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 Ans. (b) : Step blocks type of devices are used to
Ans. (a) : T-slot tool is the shape of tools used for prevent the bending of overhanging jobs in planning.
planning slots.
1304. What is the name of the tool?
• It is used to cut slots, splines keys for both internal and
external jobs such as machining internal and external
jobs.
• Used for work as machining concave, convex and
circular surfaces.
1300. What is the name and shape of tool?
(a)
Parting tool
(b)
Dovetail tool
(c)
Grooving tool
(d)
'T' Slot cutting tool
Ans. (d) : The name of the tool is 'T' Slot cutting tool.
• T slot milling cutter are used to create accurate T-slots
(a) Dovetail tool in the tables and beds of machine tools and similar work
(b) Tee slot tool holding equipment.
(c) Goose neck finishing tool • They cut slots that are sized to accommodate a
(d) Square nose roughing tool for facing specific size of T-slot bolt and they can also be used for
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 creating keyways.
1305. What is the name of the shaping tool? (a) Give cross feed
(b) Give depth of cut
(c) Adjust stroke length
(d) Adjust position of stroke
Ans. (a) : Give cross feed
1308. What are the three factors on which efficiency
of the milling machine depends upon?
(a) Cutting speed, feed, depth of cut
(a) Tipped tool (b) Bit type tool
(b) Cutter material, cutter diameter, cutter holder
(c) Solid type tool (d) Inserted type tool
(c) Diameter of the cutter, shape of the
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 workpiece, grain structure
Ans. (a) : The name of the shaping tool is tipped tool. (d) Type of work material, length of work
• A tipped tool is any cutting tool in which the cutting material, diameter of the work
edge consists of a separate piece of material that is RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
brazed, weld or clamped on the body made of steel
Ans. (a) : The three factors on which efficiency of the
bodies.
milling machine depends– cutting speed, feed, depth of
• It is designed for finished cutting, to give a smooth
cut.
surface on the surface being cut.
Cutting speed–It is the speed of the cutter passing over
1306. Which type of shaper is having crosswise ram the workpiece, such as in turning operation or in milling
movement? operation.
(a) Vertical shaper Feed–Feed can be defined as the distance in inches per
(b) Universal shaper minute that the work moves into the cutter.
(c) Horizontal shaper Depth of cut–The depth of cut will usually varry
(d) Travelling head shaper between 0.1 to 1.0 mm.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 • The total amount of metal removed per pass of the
Ans. (d) : Travelling head shaper–In this type of cutting tool.
shaper, the ram while it reciprocates, also moves cross 1309. What is the minimum depth of cut for finish
wise to give the required feed. cuts in milling?
Type of shaper– (a) 0.4 mm (b) 0.5 mm
A. According to the type of mechanism– (c) 0.6 mm (d) 0.7 mm
1. Crank type RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
2. Geared type Ans. (a) : The minimum depth of cut for finish cuts in
3. Hydraulic type milling is 0.4 mm.
B. According to the type of table– • The maximum depth of cut for finish cuts in milling is
1. Standard shaper 0.6 D.
2. Universal shaper 1310. What is the purpose of idler gears in spiral
C. According to the Ram travel– milling set up?
1. Horizontal type (a) Change the gear ratio
2. Vertical type (b) Change the speed ratio of cutter
3. Travelling type (c) Change the direction of rotation of cutter
D. According to the type of cutting stroke– (d) Change the direction of rotation of spindle
1. Push type RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
2. Draw type Ans. (d) : The purpose of idler gears in spiral milling
1307. What is the purpose of part marked 'X' in set up is change the direction of rotation of spindle.
shaper? • It is used to change the rotational direction of the
output shaft, or to fill a large gap between the input and
output shafts without affecting the speed ratio.
1311. Which type of cutters are used to cut involute
splines?
(a) Slab milling cutter
(b) Hobbing cutter
(c) Side and face milling cutter
(d) End mill cutter
Ans. (d) : The kind of cutter is shown in figure is side

Ans. (b) : Involute splines hubs have a stud tooth depth
for cutting all types of standard and non-standard and face milling cutter.
involute splines where as straight splines hobs are used
• In side and face milling cutting are specially designed
for cutting parallel splines and are manufactured in with cutting teeth on its side as well as its
circumference.
single or multi start design with pressure angle 20º, 30º,
37.5º and 45º. • The teeth on the side allow the side and face milling
1312. What difference can be observed in differential cutter to make unbalanced cuts without deflecting the
indexing with compound indexing? cutter as would happen with a slitting saw or slot cutter.
(a) It can be done without man power 1316. Which one of the following statements is fit in
(b) Index plate can be rotated by means of gears climb milling ?
(c) Indexing can be done without the help of (a) No slipping of teeth due to penetration.
gears (b) Downward vertical cutting force.
(d) Dividing head spindle is connected with table (c) No backslash on the table spindle.
spindle (d) Thick chips developed at the point of
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 penetration.
Ans. (a) : Through compound indexing is a convenient RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
way to get any indexing required, it is fairly Ans. (d) : In climb milling thick chips developed at the
combersome to use in practice. Hence differential point of penetration or at start point.
• Metal is removed by a cutter which is rotated in the
indexing is used for that purpose which is an automatic
way to carry out the compound indexing method. same direction of travel of the workpiece.
1313. The position of gear cutter on the arbor for • The thickness of the chip is maximum at the beginning
of cut and it reduces to minimum when the cut
rack milling is.
terminates.
(a) Nearer to the column
(b) Nearer to the arbor support 1317. A steel workpiece of high tensile strength is to
be machined with a HSS milling cutter. Which
(c) At the middle
angles is best suitable for the cutter.
(d) At any point on the arbor (a) 8° (b) 12°
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 (c) 20° (d) 28°
Ans. (b) : The position of gear cutter on the arbor for RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
rack milling is nearer to the arbor support Ans. (a) : A steel workpiece of high tensile strength is
1314. A mild steel block milled has a poor surface to be machined with a HSS milling cutter. 8º is best
finish. Which one of the following is the causesuitable for the cutter.
for poor surface finish? 1318. Solid HSS cutters and carbide inserted tooth
(a) Slackness in workpiece clamping cutters are commonly used for milling. The
(b) The cutting speed is as recommended permissible cutting speed of an inserted cutter
(c) The milling cutting edges are sharp in relation to that of a HSS cutter is
(d) Soluble oil is used as coolant (a) Twice as much
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (b) Five to ten times greater
Ans. (a) : A mild steel block milled has a poor surface (c) Smaller
finish. Slackness in workpiece clamping is the cause for (d) Same
poor surface finish. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
1315. What kind of cutter is shown in Figure? Ans. (b) : Solid HSS cutters and carbide inserted tooth
cutters are commonly used for milling. The permissible
cutting speed of an inserted cutter in relation to that of a
HSS cutter is five to ten times greater.
1319. Which milling machine if particularly adapted
for milling internal or external profiles ?
(a) Pantograph milling machine
(b) Universal milling machine
(c) planetary milling machine
(a) Double-angle milling cutter (d) Tracer controlled milling machine
(b) Shell end mill cutter RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(c) Slotting cutter Ans. (d) : Tracer controlled milling machine is
(d) Side and face milling cutter particularly adapted for milling internal or external
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 profiles.
• Tracer controlled milling machine are equipped with (a) Convex milling cutter
copying capabilities through tracer control and hence (b) Concave milling cutter
can reproduce or duplicate external or internal (c) Corner rounding milling cutter
geometries in two dimensions. (d) Woodruff key slot cutter
1320. It is required to mill the 11 mm wide long hole RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
in a die block as shown in Fig. on vertical
milling machine. What cutter is suitable for Ans. (c): Corner rounding milling cutter is shown in the
this operation ? figure.
• A corner rounding end mill is typically used to add a
specific radius to a workpiece, or in a finishing
operation to remove a sharp edge or burr.
1323. Which type of milling operation is shown in
Fig. ?
(a) Concave cutter

(b) Slot drill
(c) End mill with indexing insert
(d) Taper shank end mill (a) Plain milling
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 (b) Face milling
Ans. (c) : End milling cutter–Used for machining the (c) Straddle milling
face and sides of metal piece and objects, this cutter has (d) Gang milling
a rotating cutting tool with cylindrical shank with teeth
at the end. It is used more in vertical milling processes.
Ans. (d) : The type of milling operation is shown in
1321. Which type of milling operation is shown in
fig.? figure is gang milling.
Gang milling–The gang milling is the operation of
machining several surfaces of a work piece
simultaneously by feeding the table against a number of
cutters having same or different diameters mounted on
the arbor of the machine.
1324. Two side and face milling cutters were
mounted on a long arbor in a milling machine
(a) Concave surface milling with arbor support. The arbor nut should be
(b) Convex surface milling (a) Tightened after the overarm support is in
(c) Fillet milling place
(d) 'T' milling (b) Tightened before the arbor support is in place
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 (c) Tightened with extra large leverage
Ans. (b) : Convex surface milling operation is shown in (d) Allowed to tighten on its own during spindle
figure. rotation
• Convex milling cutter is used in convex surface
RRB ALP Patna 2014
milling operation.
• Convex milling cutter have been used extensively in Ans. (a) : Two side and face milling cutters were
milling surfaces of components and producing profile mounted on a long arbor in a milling machine with
and components. arbor support. The arbor nut should be tightened after
• It is mostly used in shaping flat and irregular surfaces. the overarm support is in placed.
1322. Which type of milling cutter is shown as 'X' in 1325. While milling through slot in a mild steel plate
Fig. ? with a ∅ 12 mm end mill cutter on vertical
milling machine, the cutter slips and breaks.
What is to be done ?
(a) Reset the spindle to a higher speed
(b) Reduce the cutting speed
(c) Increase the depth speed
(d) Reduce the depth of cut and feed
Ans. (d) : While milling through slot in a mild steel Ans. (b) : Cam filling is carried out by gearing the lead
plate with a ∅ 12 mm end mill cutter on vertical milling screw and the dividing head spindle holding the cam
machine, the cutter slips and breaks. blank. In this figure set up is with the axis of both cutter
• It reduced the depth of cut and feed. and work vertical, the lead of the cam for any chosen
1326. What kind of cutter is shown in Fig. ? gear ratio is maximum, but equal to the forward feed of
the table.
1329. A finish cut is given to improve the surface
finish of a rough milled workpiece. What
adjustments are needed on the cutting
parameters ?
(a) Decrease cutting speed, feed rate and depth of
cut
(a) Double angle milling cutter (b) Increase feed rate, depth of cut and reduce
(b) Angle milling cutter cutting speed
(c) Slotting cutter (c) Increase feed rate, depth of cut and cutting
(d) Side milling cutter speed
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (d) Increase cutting speed, raduce feed rate and
depth of cut
Ans. (b) : The cutter shown in figure is angle milling
cutter.
• Angle milling cutter are milling cutters with the Ans. (d) : A finish cut is given to improve the surface
cutting face angled with respect to the axis of rotation. finish of a rough milled workpiece.
• Angle cutters are used to make serrations and produce There are following adjustments are needed on the
cutting parameters are–
V-notches.
1. Increase cutting speed
1327. A slab milling cutter is used to rough mill a
2. Feed rate is decreased
workpiece by down cut milling without the
3. Also decrease the depth of cut.
backlash eliminator. What care should be
taken in selecting the cutting parameters ? 1330. Vertical milling operation can be performed by
(a) Select comparatively finer feed rate and less mounting vertical milling attachment on
depth of cut (a) Vertical milling machine
(b) Select coarse feed (b) Plain milling machine
(c) Select coarse feed with low depth of cut (c) Bed type milling machine
(d) Select coarse feed with high cutting speed (d) Planer type milling machine
Ans. (a) : A slab milling cutter is used to rough mill a Ans. (d) : Vertical milling operation can be performed
workpiece by down cut milling (down milling) without by mounting vertical milling attachment on planer type
the backlash eliminator. milling machine.
Select comparatively finer feed rate and less depth of • A planer is used to plains the plane, grooves or
cut. forming a surface of workpiece.
1328. Cam milling is carried out by gearing the lead 1331. A milling attachment is mounted on a milling
screw and the dividing head spindle holding the machine. Which one of the following is used to
cam blank. If the set up is as shown in Fig. with transmit spindle motion to the milling
the axis of both cutter and work vertical, the attachment ?
lead of the cam for any chosen gear ratio is (a) Chain and wheel
(b) Belt and pulley
(c) Worm and worm wheel
(d) Couplings
Ans. (d) : A milling attachment is mounted on a milling
machine. Coupling is used to transmit spindle motion to
the milling attachment.
1332. The maximum swiveling of the table of
(a) Minimum, but equal to the size of the cutter universal milling machine is
(b) Maximum, but equal to the forward feed of (a) 30° on either side
the table (b) 30° in one side
(c) Zero (c) 45° on either side
(d) Half of the forward feed of the table (d) 60° in one side
Ans. (c): The maximum swiveling of the table of 1336. Which one of the following is used for holding
universal milling machine is 45° on either side. and mill?
• It has a fourth table movement in addition to the three (a) Collet chuck (b) Draw-in-bar
table movements, longitudinal, transverse and vertical. (c) Boring head (d) Stub arbor
• The table can be moved at an angle to the milling
machine spindle. Ans. (a) : Collet chuck is used for holding and mill.
Collet chuck–Collets are used to hold a tool in a central
1333. Normal clearance angle on tool for machining position as its rotates.
internal surface should be As the tool is inserted into the collet, the device expands
(a) 4° to 6° and provide uniform pressure that holds the tool in
(b) 6° to 10° place.
(c) 8° to 10° plus secondary clearance • It provide a strong clamping force to hold a
(d) None of the above workpiece or tool in place.
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 1337. Which one of the following is used for holding
the cutter holder in the spindle nose of the
Ans. (c) : Normal clearance angle on tool for machining milling machine?
internal surface should be 8° to 10° plus secondary (a) Collet (b) Draw-in-bar
clearance. (c) 'T' bolt (d) Boring bar
1334. Standard tapers are provided on spindle nose RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
and arbor for milling machine. Which one of Ans. (b) : Draw-in-bar is used for holding the cutter
the following is the reason for this ? holder in the spindle nose of the milling machine.
(a) Any arbor having standard taper can be fitted 1338. For milling a work piece which one of the
on any milling machine following properties is most important for
(b) For matching taper while fitting selection of cutting speed?
(c) For easy fitting of arbor in the spindle of (a) Softness of material to be machined
machine (b) Hardness of material to be machined
(c) Toughness of material to be machined
(d) Brittleness of material to be machined
Ans. (a) : Standard tapers are provided on spindle nose Ans. (b) : For milling a work piece following properties
and arbor for milling machine due to. for selection of cutting speed–
• Any arbor having standard taper can be fitted on any • Hardness of material to be machined
milling machine which has standarf taper spindle nose. • The material being machined
• The standard milling machine taper, the brown and • The hardness of the cutting tool material will also
sharp taper with tang. have a great deal to do with the recommended cutting
1335. Which among the following statements is NOT speed.
correct ? • The material should increasingly cutting speed is
carbon.
(a) The column is the main supporting frame of a
milling machine 1339. Plain milling cutters are used for milling
(a) Wide surfaces (b) Narrow surfaces
(b) The table of a milling machine is provided
(c) 'T slots (d) 'V' grooves
with 'V' slots for mounting work piece on it
(c) The saddle of a milling machine moves
Ans. (a) : Plain milling cutters are used for milling flat
horizontally to provide cross feed surface parallel to the cutter axis.
(d) The table of a milling machine moves the • It is used for mill wide surfaces
work piece longitudinally • A plain milling cutter is generally used for milling flat
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 surfaces parallel to cutter axis.
Ans. (b) : The table of a milling machine is provided • A plain side milling cutter has teeth on both sides and
with 'V' slots for mounting work piece on it. It is on the periphery.
incorrect option. 1340. Which among the following statements is
• The milling table provides a base on which to clamp correct ?
the workpiece and hold it rigidly against machining (a) Brazed tipped cutters are costly
forces. (b) Brazed tipped cutters cannot be reconditioned
(c) Brazed tipped cutters are used only for
• The table of a milling machine moves the workpiece
machining high tensile strength steel job
longitudinally.
(d) Brazed tipped cutters are used only for
• The column is the main supporting frame of a milling machining low tensile strength steel job
machine. RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
CLICK HERE 👇👇
JOIN TELEGRAM CHANNEL
https://t.me/ITI_Electrician_Exam
Click Here and Open in Telegram to

Join
for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job
Updates
Ans. (d) : Brazed tipped cutters are used only for 1344. Which among the following is the purpose of
machining low tensile strength steel job. finish milling ?
• Brazed carbide tools are designed to give the (a) To bring the workpiece to the required
performance of solid carbide tools without the increased dimensions.
cost in material. (b) To bring the workpiece to the repaired surface
finish.
• Carbide tips at the cutting edge provide strength and
(c) 'a' and 'b' both
wear resistance giving excellent tool life in a range of
(d) Neither 'a' nor 'b'
materials from steel to aluminium and more exotic
steels.
Ans. (c) : The following purpose of finish milling are–
1341. To obtain good surface, the ideal machining
• To bring the workpiece to the required dimensions.
allowance for finish milling would be
• To bring the workpiece to the repaired surface finish.
(a) 0.1 mm (b) 0.2 mm
• To get a clean finish of the milled hole.
(c) 0.5 mm (d) 0.8 mm • The finish milling is the surface texture of metal after
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 it exits a rolling mill, drawing process.
Ans. (c) : To obtain good surface, the ideal machining 1345. Which among the following statements is
allowance for finish milling would be 0.5 mm. correct ?
• Surface finish is improved as cutting speed is (a) End mill cutters have cutting teeth on its end
increased. only
• This improvement is more on ductile materials. (b) End mill cutters have only straight shank
1342. Which one of the following is not important in (c) End mill cutters having two flutes are known
rough milling operation ? as slot drills
(d) End mill cutters and parallel shank reamers
(a) Quality of surface finish
are the same
(b) Rigidity of machine
(c) Depth of cut
Ans. (c) : End mills are used for making shapes and
(d) Rigidity of workpiece holes in a workpiece during milling, profiling,
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 contouring, slotting, counter boring, drilling and
Ans. (a) : Quality of surface finish is not important in reaming applications.
rough milling operation. • End milling cutters having two flutes are known as
• Rough milling operation are essentially axis tool paths slot drills.
computed against the dimensional surfaces. • They are designed with cutting teeth on the face and
• The roughing operation in machining is primarily used edge of the body and can be used to cut a variety of
materials in several directions.
to remove the bulk material and to approximately shape
to workpiece towards the finished form. 1346. Which among the following statements in
respect to straddle milling is NOT correct ?
1343. Which among the following is NOT correct ?
(a) Cutters are used in pairs to machine two
(a) While using helical milling cutter, only one opposite sides of the job at the same time
tooth is loaded at a time. (b) The cutter used for the operation should be
(b) Helical milling cutter does not produce kept in match pair
chatter (c) Different diameter cutters are used depending
(c) Helical plain milling cutter has an angle of upon the profile of the job
45° to over 60° (d) Size the diameter of cutters is the same, the
(d) Plain milling cutters are also called as slab peripheral speed will be the same.
milling cutters RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 Ans. (c) : Straddle milling cutters are used in pairs to
Ans. (a) : While using milling cutter, only one tooth is machine two opposite sides of the job at the same time.
loaded at a time. This is incorrect option. • The cutter used for the operation should be kept in
matched pair.
• Helical milling cutter does not produce chatter.
• In straddle milling, two side milling cutters are
• Helical milling cutter has an angle of 45º to over 60º. mounted with the desired distance between then so that
• These cutters can achieve for greater depths of cut both sides of a workpiece can be milled.
than non-helical milling tools without sacrificing reach • It is a form of gang milling where only side and face
or the ability to hold tolerance. milling cutters are used.
1347. Which among the following statements is NOT (c) In a 45° single angle cutter, 45° is the angle
correct ? between the axis of the cutter and the slant
(a) Burr on arbor taper causes eccentric running cutting edge
of cutter (d) Dovetail guide ways can be milled by using a
(b) Play in the spindle bearing of a milling shank type single angle cutter
machine gives rough finish to the machined RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
surface Ans. (d) : Dovetail guideways can be milled by using a
(c) 'T' slots are provided on the milling machine shank type single angle cutter.
table for clamping a workpiece or work • Dovetail guideways may also be called Dovetail way
holding devices slides.
(d) Machine vice is used to hold workpiece • It is a linear motion devices that allow motion and
positioning along a linear axis.
directly on the milling machine table
• It main function is to make sure that the cutting tool or
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 machine tool operative element moves along a
Ans. (d) : Machine vices are used to hold work firmly predetermined path.
when using a drilling machine or milling machine. 1351. Which among the following statements is NOT
• They can be clamped or bolted firmly to the bed of the correct ?
machine or for smaller work. (a) A convex milling cutter is used for milling
• It is a mechanical device that is designed to hold concave surfaces
workpieces still during manual or machine operated (b) The profile of form milling cutter changes
movements. after re-sharpening its face
1348. A milling cutter should have three main (c) A corner rounding cutter may have teeth
properties, which one of the following is either on one side or on both sides
correct? (d) Concave milling cutter may have teeth either
(a) Hardness, toughness and resistance to wear on one side or on both sides
(b) Hardness, brittleness and resistance to wear RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
(c) Hardness, softness and resistance to wear Ans. (d) : Concave milling cutter may have teeth either
on the periphery and on one or both sides of the tool.
(d) hardness, flexible and resistance to wear
• These cutters may have straight, spiral or staggered
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 teeth.
Ans. (a) : A milling cutter should have three main • It is used for milling concave surfaces.
properties are– • This cutter is similar to plain cutter except it has teeth
1. Hardness on the side.
2. Toughness 1352. Parallel shank end mill is mounted in the
3. Resistance to bear in cutting tool material spring collet. The inside diameter or collet
4. Low friction should be
5. Favorable cost (a) Less than the diameter of parallel shank
1349. Milling cutters are manufactured generally (b) More than the diameter of parallel shank
from two materials to give them the required (c) Equal to the diameter of parallel
hardness and toughness. Which one of the (d) shank to the size of the cutter
following is used for this purpose? RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(a) Cast iron and plastic Ans. (c) : Parallel shank end mill is mounted in the
(b) High speed steel and carbides spring collet. The inside diameter or collet should be
equal to the diameter of parallel.
(c) Mild steel and stainless steel
(d) Carbon steel and nickel steel 1353. A groove is to be milled in a M.S. workpiece by
using 10 mm diameter end mill cutter rotating
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 at 350 rpm. The cutter speed should be
Ans. (b) : Milling cutters are manufactured generally (a) 10.55 m / min. (b) 11.00 m / min.
from two materials to give them the required hardness (c) 21.10 m / min. (d) 22.00 m / min.
and toughness. RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
• High speed steel and carbides is used for this purpose. Ans. (b) : Given, Diameter (d) = 10 mm = 0.01 m
• They are most common tool used in milling machines. Rotating speed (N) = 350 rpm
1350. Which of the following statements is correct ? πDN
(a) Generally slitting saws are keyed with the Cutting speed (V) =
1000
arbor
22 ×10 × 350
(b) Slitting saws are used with normal speed and V= = 11.00 m / min
feed like other cutters 7 × 1000
1354. A slot is to be milled with a 16 mm slot mill • A fillet is a rounded surface whereas a chamfer is a
cutter. If cutting speed is 20 m / min. the rpm flat surface.
of the machine should be • Fillet distribute the stress over a broader area and
(a) 397.90 (b) 198.90 effectively make parts more durable and capable of
(c) 99.50 (d) 795.77 bearing larger loads.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 1358. Which among the following statements is
Ans. (a) : Given, Milled diameter (d) = 16 mm correct if milling cutter has negative rake
angle?
Cutting speed (V) = 20 m/min.
(a) Cutter forces tend to push the work against
RPM of machine N = ? the work holding device
πDN (b) Reaction forces tend to pull the cutter into the
Cutting speed (V) =
1000 work
22 × 7 × 1000 140000 (c) Reaction forces tend to push the cutter away
20 = = from the work
22 × 16 352
(d) 'a' and 'b' both
N = 397.72 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
1355. Which one of the following is the reason for Ans. (d) : If milling cutter has negative rake angle,
built up edge on the cutting edge of the milling cutter forces tend to push the work against the work
cutter ? holding device and reaction forces tend to pull the cutter
(a) Rake angle is less into the work.
(b) Material of the job is ductile • A negative rake angle occurs when the angle is less
(c) Either 'a' or 'b' than 90º.
(d) Neither 'a' nor 'b' 1359. A milling cutter has helix of 25° which among
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 the following is correct if this cutter is used to
Ans. (c) : Following is the reason for built up edge on perform milling operation ?
the cutting edge of the milling cutter are– (a) It reduces power consumption
1. Rake angle is less (b) It reduces chattering
2. Material of the job is ductile (c) It gives smooth cutting action
3. Their low thermal conductivity leads to heat (d) All of the above
concentration in the cutting zone that results in high RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
localized parameters. Ans. (d) : A milling cutter has helix of 25° if this cutter
4. Built-up edge can be caused from running a tool at is used to perform milling operation–
incorrect cutting parameters. 1. It reduces power consumption
1356. As compared to a finish milling cutter, a rough 2. It reduces chattering
milling cutter of the same diameter will have 3. It gives smooth cutting action.
(a) less number of teeth. 1360. Which among the following is correct if milling
(b) more number of teeth. cutter has helix angle above 60°?
(c) same number of teeth. (a) It is recommended for machining brass and
(d) either 'b' or 'c' soft steel
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 (b) It is recommended for machining cast iron
(c) It is recommended for machining tool steel
Ans. (a) : As compared to a finish milling cutter, a
(d) It is recommended for machining high carbon
rough milling cutter of the same diameter will have less
steel
number of teeth.
• A finishing end mill has one square and the outside
diameter is smooth for creating smooth surface finishes. Ans. (a) : If milling cutter has helix angle above 60°
then it is recommended for machining brass and soft
• A rough mill is refers to products made by simple
steel.
processing or the primary processing of raw materials.
• The helix angle reduces cutting forces and the amount
1357. The round portion of the chip space on milling of heat produced milling by increasing the effective
cutter is called as' shearing action.
(a) Round edge (b) Corner slot 1361. Circular slots and dovetail can be milled by
(c) Fillet (d) Radius using
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (a) Indexing head
Ans. (c) : The round portion of the chip space on (b) Rack milling attachment
milling cutter is called as fillet. (c) Rotary table
• A fillet is manufacturing is the international rounding (d) Slotting attachment
of a sharp edge or corner. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008

Ans. (c) : Circular slots and dovetail can be milled by Ans. (c) : Machining of cylindrical surface operations
using rotary table. cannot be performed on a planer.
• In this case a circular dovetail is probably more • A plane machine is used for machining flat, angular
suitable for using this rotary table. surface on the workpiece.
• Circular T-slot is used for mounting the top slide of • It is used for machining of formed surface and cutting
lathe on the cross-slide. slots and grooves.
1362. Rotary table is used on milling machine to 1366. In which type of planer, large and wide work
achieve piece which projects out of the table cannot be
(a) Longitudinal movement machined?
(b) Cross movement (a) Double housing planer
(c) Combination of longitudinal and cross (b) Pit planer
movements (c) Plate planer
(d) Combination of longitudinal, cross and (d) Open side planer
vertical movements. RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Ans. (a) : Double housing planer machine is one of the
Ans. (c) : Rotary table is used on milling machine to most common type of planer used in most workshops.
achieve combination of longitudinal and cross • It comprises of a long heavy base having an accurately
movements.
machined guideways that allows a table to reciprocates
• A rotary table is a precision work positioning device on it.
used in metal working.
• In a double housing planer, the maximum width of the
• A rotary table is used in lathe machine in chuck to job which can be machined is limited by the distance
hold cylindrical objects.
between the two housings.
1363. While indexing which one of the following is • This type of planer cannot be machined large and wide
used to give exact location of the indexing workpiece which is out of the table.
movement ?
1367. In a planer metal is removed during
(a) Index plate (b) Index crank
(a) Forward stroke
(c) Selector arm (d) Worm shaft
(b) Back ward stroke
(c) 'a' and 'b' both
Ans. (c) : Selector arm is used to give exact location of
(d) Neither 'a' nor 'b'
the indexing movement.
• The selector arm can be used to save time and reduces RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
the possibility of an error in counting the number of Ans. (a) : In a planer metal is removed during forward
holes for each movement of the index pin. stroke and no metal is removed during the return stroke.
1364. In one complete revolution of worm shaft, the • For reducing the machining time, it is necessary to
worm wheel revolves reduce the time taken by the return stroke.
(a) 1/10th of revolution • This is done by the quick return mechanism.
(b) 1/20th of revolution 1368. Which one of the following driving mechanisms
(c) 1/25th of revolution is used to give reciprocating movement to the
(d) 1/40th of revolution table planer with fluid pressure?
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 (a) Open belt drive
Ans. (d) : In one complete revolution of worm shaft, the (b) Cross belt drive
worm wheel revolves 1/40th of revolution. (c) Hydraulic drive
• The worm meshes with the worm wheel. The ratio of (d) Reversible motor drive
two gears is 40:1. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
Therefore, 40 revolutions of the worm are required to Ans. (c) : Hydraulic drive–Hydraulic driving
turn the worm wheel one complete revolution. mechanisms is used to give reciprocating movement to
1365. Which one of the following operations cannot the table planer with fluid pressure.
be performed on a planer? • These drives also include trip dogs along the table to
(a) Machining flat surface adjust the stroke length and change the position of the
(b) Machining angular surface table.
(c) Machining cylindrical surface • This planers are not used for heavy duty work as the
(d) Machining formed surface required hydraulic power is very high and drive is not
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 smooth.

1369. Which among the following statements is NOT 1373. Which one of the following statements in
correct? respect of planer is NOT correct?
(a) Planer is used to produce a number of (a) Planer tool must have grater clearance angle
components at a time mass production (b) The tool head of planer can be used to give
(b) Cross rail can be move up and down on the vertical feed to the tool
housing in the planer (c) Power feed can be given while performing
(c) The table of planer reciprocates under or operation on a planer
between the cutting tool (d) For performing operation on a planer
(d) The purpose of saddle is to support the work hardened and tempered solid tools made of
piece while performing operation on planer tool steel are used
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
Ans. (d) : The saddle is a part to be fixed to ways of Ans. (a) : Planer tool must have be positive (3-15º)
cross rail. On its front surface are ways to which tool depending upon tool work materials.
head is fixed jointly by a vertical feed screw that give
for a vertical movement of tool head. • The planer tool is single point cutting tool is used.
• The saddle is the intermediate component between the • It is made of high speed steel.
table and the knee. The saddle sits on the knee and • In planer machine, the tool head can be used to give
supports the table. vertical feed to the tool.
1370. Quick return mechanism is provided in a • Power feed can be given while performing operation
planer to on a planer.
(a) increase the operation time 1374. Which one of the following work holding
(b) decrease the operation time devices is used on planer for cutting grooves on
(c) give smooth finish the cylindrical job?
(d) run the machine smoothly (a) Angle plate (b) Strap clamp
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 (c) Planing center (d) Planning jack
Ans. (b) : A quick return mechanism is an apparatus to RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
produce a reciprocating motion in which the time taken Ans. (c) : Planing center–Planning center is a work
for travel in return stroke is less than in the forward holding device is used on planer for cutting grooves on
stroke. the cylindrical job.
• In planer, quick return mechanism is provided for Angle plate–Angle plates are used to hold workpieces
decreases the potation time. square to the table during making out operations.
1371. Reciprocating movement of the table in a Strap clamp–A strap clamp is used to lighten a
planer is obtained by webbing strap or band around an assembly, enabling a
(a) Loose and fast pulley secure hold.
(b) Worm and worm wheel It is also known as band clamps.
(c) Rack and gear 1375. Which one of the following bolts is used with
(d) Cam drive the clamp for holding work piece on a planer
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 table?
Ans. (c) : Rack and gear mechanism is used for (a) Carriage bolt (b) 'T' bolt
reciprocating movement of table. (c) Square head bolt (d) Round head bolt
• The reciprocating motion of the ram is obtained by a RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
quick return motion mechanism. Ans. (b) : 'T' bolt–'T' bolt is used with the clamp for
1372. Feed for planning operation is holding work piece on a planer table.
(a) The rate of movement of tool per stroke. Carriage bolt–It is used for fastening wood to metal. It
(b) the width of chip that comes out per stroke. also can be used to fasten two pieces of wood together.
(c) the length of chip that comes out per stroke. Square head bolt–It is commonly used for austhetic
(d) the weight of chip that comes out per stroke. purpose to provide a rustic look in a new structure or to
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 match existing fasteners in a older structure.
Ans. (a): Feed for planning operation is the rate of Round head bolt–Round head bolt is used largely in
movement of tool per stroke. tank construction and in certain parts of locomotives
• Feed in the planer is given at the end of the forward construction.
stroke or at the beginning of the backward stroke. 1376. Which one of the following statements in
• There are two types of feeds– respect of a planer is correct?
1. Down feed (a) Small size work piece can easily be machined
2. Cross feed on planer
• Both these feeds can be given by rotating the feed (b) Planer centres are used for holding work
screws by hand or power. piece in between centers
(c) A blind keyway can easily be machined on 1380. Which one of the following cutters is mounted
planer with its axis parallel to the surface of the
(d) When machining 'T' slot on a planer, the tool workpiece?
can be allowed to get tilted (a) Plain milling cutter
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (b) T-slot cutter
Ans. (b) : Planer centres are used for holding work (c) Shell end milling cutter
piece in between centers. (d) End mill cutter
• Large size workpiece can easily machined on planer. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
• Planer machine is used for machining flat and wide Ans. (a) : A plain milling cutter is mounted with its axis
surfaces. parallel to the surface of the workpiece.
1377. Tool post of a planing machine is mounted on • Plain milling cutter has straight or helical teeth cut on
(a) Apron (b) Cross rail the periphery of a disc or a cylindrical surface.
(c) Clapper box (d) Saddle • It is generally used for milling flat surfaces parallel to
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 the cutter axis.
Ans. (c) : Clapper box–The tool post of a planing 1381. The position of gear cutter on the arbor for
machine is mounted on clapper box. rack milling is.....
• It carries the tool holder. (a) nearer to the column
• The main function of clapper box is to provide (b) nearer to the arbor support
clearance for tool in return stock. (c) at the middle
• It prevents the cutting edge dragging the workpiece (d) at any point on the arbor
while return stroke and prevent tool wear. RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
1378. A Planer gauge shown in Fig. is a device which Ans. (c) : The position of gear cutter on the arbor for
is used for setting the cutting tool rack milling is nearer to the arbor support.
(a) to the required distance from the tool holder 1382. To cut the teeth of worm wheel on milling
(b) to the required distance from the table machine by hobbing, the blank (job) is held
(c) with the correct overhanging between the dividing head and tail stock
centres on the machine table. For cutting
(d) to the required distance from the housing
successive teeth the worm wheel is....
(a) indexed to the successive positions
corresponding to the marking on the blank
(job)
(b) index by differential indexing method
(c) is kept free to allow the hob itself to drive it
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (d) indexed directly after switching off the
Ans. (b) : A Planer gauge is a device which is used for machine at the end of each cut
setting the cutting tool to the required distance from the RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
table. Ans. (c) : To cut the teeth of worm wheel on milling
• Planer gauge is used to accurately set shaper and machine by hobbing, the blank (job) is held between the
planer tool. Also known as shaper gauges. dividing head and tail stock centres on the machine
• The main body of planer gauge is a right triangular table. For cutting successive teeth the worm wheel is
metal frame with a groove running along the longest kept free to allow the hob itself to drive it.
side of the triangle. 1383. Plate cam is manufactured in a vertical milling
• A solid steel slide travel along that groove. machine with the plate held in a ...
1379. In a planning machine the depth or cut is given (a) plain dividing head
by (b) universal dividing head
(a) Adjusting tool slide (c) optical dividing head
(b) Rotating the feed screw of tool holder (d) universal vice
(c) Moving cross slide RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
(d) Lifting the work piece Ans. (b) : Plate cam is manufactured in a vertical
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 milling machine with the plate held in a universal
Ans. (b) : In a planning machine the depth or cut is dividing head.
given by rotating the feed screw of tool holder. • A universal dividing head is also known as dividing
• In this machine, the tool head can be used to give head or a spiral head.
vertical feed to the tool. It is specialized tool that allows a workpiece to be
• Power feed can be given while performing operation circularly indexed that is easily and precisely rotated to
on a planer. present angles or circular divisions.

1384. The axis of the plate cam blank and the end 1388. While milling a profile in a mild steel plate with
mill spindle should always remain a ∅12 mm end mill cutter on vertical milling
(a) Inclined to each other machine, the cutter slips and breaks. How are
(b) Parallel to each other the cutting parameters altered to prevent
(c) Opposite to each other breakage of cutter?
(d) Vertical and inclined (a) Reset the spindle to a higher speed
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 (b) Reduce the cutting speed
(c) Increase depth of cut
Ans. (b) : The axis of the plate cam blank and the end
mill spindle should always remain parallel to each (d) Reduce depth of cut and feed
other. RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
1385. Which one of the characteristics of a milling Ans. (d) : While milling a profile in a mild steel plate
cutter is most suitable for climb milling? with a ∅12 mm end mill cutter on vertical milling
(a) Left hand cutting machine, the cutter slips and breaks. It reduce the depth
of cut and feed are the cutting parameters altered to
(b) Teeth material is carbide
prevent breakage of cutter.
(c) Larger clearance and rake angle
(d) The teeth are straight to the axis of the cutter. 1389. In a shaping machine with mechanical driven
ram the ram speed is not uniform. When is the
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 ram speed maximum?
Ans. (c) : The characteristics of a milling cutter is most (a) At the beginning of the cutting stroke
suitable for climb milling– (b) In the middle of the cutting stroke
• Less recutting of chips, higher quality surface finish. (c) At the middle of the cutting stroke
• Less wear on the cutting tool (tool life is extended) (d) In the middle of the return stroke
more tool deflection encountered but less fixture RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
needed.
Ans. (d) : In a shaping machine with mechanical driven
• Machines and splines need to be more rigid.
ram the ram speed is not uniform. When is the ram
• The larger clearance and rake angle. speed maximum in the middle of the return stroke.
• High rigidity of the machine tool is required in this • The major motions required in the shaper are the
milling operation. reciprocating motion of the cutting tool and the
1386. A mild steel block milled has a poor surface auxiliary motion.
finish. Which one of the following is the cause • With the crank and slotted lever mechanism, the
of poor surface finish? velocity of the ram is zero at the beginning and the end
(a) Slackness in work piece clamping of the stroke and is maximum at the middle of the
(b) The cutting speed is as recommended stroke.
(c) The milling cutting edges are sharp 1390. Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for the
(d) Soluble oil is used as coolant operation
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (a) Boring (b) External threading
Ans. (a) : A mild steel block milled has a poor surface (c) Internal threading (d) All the above
finish. The following cause of poor surface finish are– RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
• Slackness in workpiece clamping Ans. (d) : Inserted HSS tool bits are more useful for the
• High feed operation boring, external threading and internal
• The machine tool has crawled threading.
• The machine tool generated resonance during 1391. Important characteristic(s) of the slotter tool
operation is/are
• The tool tip of the machine tool is not sharp (a) Overall shape
• The processing technology is defective. (b) Various cutting angles
1387. A workpiece is fed longitudinally during (c) Use of cross-sectional area of the tool which
milling on a vertical milling machine having should be as big as possible to ensure tool
error in spindle alignment. Which one of the rigidity
following defects will be noticed on the milled (d) All the above
surface? RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
(a) Concave surface (b) Convex surface Ans. (d) : Important characteristics of the slotter tool
(c) cross circular index (d) Rough surface are–
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 • Overall shape
Ans. (a) : A workpiece is fed longitudinally during • Various cutting angles Use of cross-sectional area of
milling on a vertical milling machine having error in the tool which should be as big as possible to ensure
spindle alignment concave surface defects will be tool rigidity
noticed on the milled surface. • One cutting edge holder for slotting machines.

1392. In some special slotters the ram may be set Ans. (c) : Round nose tool is required for slotting a
about convex surface.
(a) 10° from the vertical plane 1397. Which one of the following statements is
(b) 15° from the vertical plane correct?
(c) 20° from the vertical plane (a) Slotter table can be indexed by using index
(d) 30° from the vertical plane plate
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 (b) Internal hexagon cannot be machined on
Ans. (a) : In some special slotters the ram may be set slotter
about 10° from the vertical plane. (c) In a slotter, the ram position cannot be
1393. Which one of the following statements is not adjusted
correct? (d) When slotting a regular workpiece, it should
(a) When sliding block of slotter moves away be placed exactly at the centre of slotter table
from the centre of driving disc, the length of RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
stroke is decreased
Ans. (a) : Slotter table can be indexed by using index
(b) While checking the stroke length and
position, the ram of slotter is moved by plate.
rotating the fly wheel manually • Internal hexagon can be machined on slotter.
(c) Side clearance angles are changed • In slotter ram position can be adjusted.
automatically if the tool is not set at right • In the slotting machine work item is placed in a
angle to the face of the table vertical position on the bed.
(d) The ram of traveling head slotter travels on 1398. Which one of the following feeds is used for
the horizontal guideways in addition to its slotting a convex surface?
vertical reciprocating movement
(a) Cross feed (b) Longitudinal feed
(c) Vertical feed (d) Rotary feed
Ans. (a) : • When sliding block of slotter moves away
from the centre of driving disc, the length of stroke is
increased and when sliding block of slotter moves Ans. (d) : Rotary feed is used for slotting a convex
towards the centre of driving disc, the length of stroke is surface.
decreased. • Rotary feed is given to a rotary table in slotting
1394. The base of circular table of slotter is machine.
graduated 1399. The quick return motion in a slotter is obtained
(a) 0 to 45° (b) 0 to 90° by
°
(c) 0 to 180 (d) 0 to 360° (a) Whitworth mechanism
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 (b) Crank and slotted link mechanism
Ans. (d): The base of circular table of slotter is (c) Fast and loose pulley mechanism
graduated from 0 to 360°. (d) Cam mechanism
1395. Which one of the following operations cannot RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
be performed on slotter? Ans. (a) : The quick return motion in a slotter is
(a) Keyway slotting obtained by crank and slotted link mechanism.
(b) Square thread cutting
• A quick return mechanism converts the circular
(c) Dovetail slotting
motion into reciprocating motion, allowing the slider to
(d) Gear cutting
move forward and backward.
• Whitworth mechanism is used in shaper and planer
Ans. (b) : Square thread cutting operations cannot be
usually.
performed on slotter machine.
• A slotter machine performed on operations such as 1400. An external hexagon is machined by a slotter.
keyways slotting, dovetail slotting, gear cutting and also After slotting it is found that it has rounded
ued for internal and external surfaces. corners. Which one of the following is the
1396. Which one of the following tools is required for reason for this?
slotting a convex surface? (a) The diameter of the blank is less than that
(a) Cornering tool required
(b) Square tool (b) The flat-to-flat size is incorrect
(c) Round nose tool (c) Either 'a' or 'b'
(d) Keyway cutting tool (d) Neither 'a' nor 'b'
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : An external hexagon is machined by a slotter. 1404. When shaping a work piece on shaper, the
After slotting it is found that it has rounded corners. The length of the stroke should be
reason for this the diameter of the blank is less than that (a) equal to the width of the table
required or the flat to flat size is incorrect. (b) equal the work piece length
1401. Which among the following statements in (c) more than the work piece length
respect of slotter is not correct? (d) less than the work piece length
(a) In a slotter, the feed is given at the beginning RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
of the cutting stroke Ans. (c) : When shaping a work piece on shaper, the
(b) The feed mechanism in the slotter is used to length of the stroke should be more than the work piece
drive the tool length.
(c) For slotting external hexagon, a ring of • The size of shaper is specified by the maximum length
diameter less than the distance flat-to-flat is of stroke because the maximum length of the stroke
required to support the job determines the maximum size (length) of the surface,
(d) In a slotter the feed direction can be reversed which can be machined on shaper.
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 1405. The other name of Whitworth quick return
Ans. (b) : Following statements in respect of slotter is mechanism is
correct– (a) Worm and worm wheel mechanism
• In a slotter, the feed is given at the beginning of the (b) Crank and slotted link mechanism
cutting stroke (c) Bell crank lever mechanism
• For slotting external hexagon, a ring of diameter less (d) None of the above
than the distance flat-to-flat is required to support the RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
job Ans. (b) : The other name of Whitworth quick return
• In a slotter the feed direction can be reversed mechanism is Crank and slotted link mechanism.
• The feed movement of the slotter is same and is given • The Crank and slotted quick return mechanism
at the beginning of the cutting stroke. converts rotary motion into linear motion.
1402. Which one of the slotter tools can cut efficiently 1406. Formula for finding cutting speed of a shaper is
with negative rake angle on hard metals? N × L (1 + K ) N × L (1 − K )
(a) Stellite tool (a) (b)
1000 1000
(b) Cemented carbide tipped tool
N × L (1 + K ) N × L (1 − K )
(c) High carbon steel tool (c) (d)
(d) High speed steel tool 100 100
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 Where,
Ans. (b): The slotter tools can cut efficiently with N = No. of cutting strokes per minute
negative rake angle on hard metals is cemented carbide L = Length of stroke in mm
tipped tool. K = Ratio of return time to cutting time.
• The single point cutting tool is used in slotting RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
machine. Ans. (a) : Cutting speed of a shaper is–
• It is made of high speed steel. N × L (1 + K )
1403. Which one of the following statements is not 1000
correct? N = No. of cutting strokes per minute
(a) The cutting speed of slotter is expressed in L = Length of stroke in mm
metre/min K = Ratio of return time to cutting time.
(b) Feed of slotter is expressed in mm per double
1407. Why is it necessary to maintain an approach
stroke distance between the cutting tool and the work
(c) The tool post of slotter can hold tool as well while working on shaping machine?
as tool bar for holding bit (a) To cool down the cutting working on shaping
(d) The length of slotter stroke is equal to the bit.
thickness of job to be machined (b) To avoid any ridge at the end of the work
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 piece.
Ans. (d) : The length of slotter stroke does not equal to (c) To allow the chips to fall and clear the cutting
the thickness of job to be machined. edge.
• The size of job that can machined will be less than this (d) To enable the clapper box to return to cutting
size by an total equal to the top with bottom clearances position.
of the tool. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Ans. (d) : To enable the clapper box to return to cutting 1412. Which one of the following is NOT the
position it is necessary to maintain an approach distance operation performed by a shaper?
between the cutting tool and the work while working on (a) Cutting square threads
shaping machine. (b) Cutting splines
1408. The reciprocating motion to the ram of a (c) Cutting keyways
mechanical shaper is given by the bull gear. It
(d) Machining concave surfaces
the ram makes one forward and one return
stroke the number of revolutions the gear RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
makes is Ans. (a) : The different conditions which a shaper on
(a) One-fourth (b) One-half perform are as follows–
(c) one (d) two • Machining horizontal and vertical surface
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 • Machining concave and inclined surface
Ans. (c) : The reciprocating motion to the ram of a • Cutting slots, keyways, splines and gears
mechanical shaper is given by the bull gear. It the ram • Machining irregular surface.
makes one forward and one return stroke the number of
revolutions the gear makes is one. 1413. Which one of the following is used align the
shaper vice with the machine table in position
1409. Which one of the following statements is NOT
correct? (a) Try square
(a) For changing the direction of feed, pawl is to (b) Dial test indicator
rotated 180°. (c) Straight edge
(b) When shaping 'T' slot, the function of clapper (d) Vernire caliper
box is not used. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(c) Pawl mechanism of shaper is a unit, which
Ans. (b) : Dial test indicator is used align the shaper
regulated the speed of ram.
vice with the machine table in position.
(d) When cutting 'T' slots in a shaper, clapper
block need not be lifted. • It is also used in industrial applications and
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 mechanical application.
Ans. (c) : Pawl mechanism of shaper is a unit, which • They are measured in vertical or horizontal positions.
regulated the speed of ram. This is incorrect. 1414. Which one of the following statements is
• A pawl is a metal part that rests on the ratchet. As the correct?
ratchet rotates, the pawl drops into each of the steps on (a) The table of shaper can be moved in all three
the ratchet rim, preventing the ratchet from turning in axis
the direction of the pawl. (b) If the overhanging of the tool is less than 20
1410. Which one of the following parts of the shaper mm, rough finish will result
supports the table?
(c) Production of flat surfaces in a shaper is by
(a) Base (b) Ram
generation process
(c) Saddle (d) Clapper box
(d) Parallels are made out of cast iron
Ans. (c) : Saddle is part of the shaper supports the table.
• The shaping machine part is mounted on the ground Ans. (c) : Production of flat surfaces in a shaper is by
vertical guideways of the column. generation process
• It features two parallel guideways on its top • Shaper machine is a reciprocating type of machine
perpendicular to the ram axis. basically used for producing the horizontal vertical or
1411. When shaping a parallel surface, the work flat surfaces.
piece should be properly seated. Which one of 1415. Which one of the following statements is
the following is used for seating the work correct?
piece? (a) The table of standard shaper can be swiveled
(a) 'V' block (b) Angle pate to any angle.
(c) Parallel blocks (d) Round rods (b) Draw cut shaper are commonly used in
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 industries.
Ans. (c) : Parallel blocks–It is a rectangular blocks of (c) For shaping a surface, the length of work
metal, commonly made from tool steel, stainless steel or pieces and stroke length set must be equal.
cast iron. (d) Work pieces, which are difficult to hold on a
• When shaping a parallel surface, the workpiece should standard shaper table can be held and
be properly seated. machined by using a traveling head shaper.
• Parallel blocks are used for seating the workpiece. RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
Ans. (d) : Work pieces, which are difficult to hold on a 1420. Leveling bolts are used for:-
standard shaper table can be held and machined by (a) Supporting the load for machine
using a traveling head shaper. (b) Adjusting the height of machine
• In shaper machine, table is mounted on saddle the (c) Rigidity of the machine
table can be moved crosswise by rotating the cross feed (d) None of these
rod and also for vertical by rotating the elevating screw. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
1416. A hydraulic shaper is driven by Ans. (b) : Leveling bolts are used for adjusting the
(a) Air pressure (b) Steam pressure height of machine.
(c) Liquid pressure (d) Hand pressure • Leveling bolts are fastening parts mounting on the
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 machines or devices that can be used to adjust the
Ans. (c) : A hydraulic shaper is driven by liquid horizontal level or height.
pressure. • These are used for many different devices such as
• In hydraulic shaper uses the oil under high pressure vehicles, machine tools and food machinery.
and the end of the piston rod is connected to the ram. • They are commonly made from iron or stainless steel.
1417. A shaper tool has side and front clearance 1421. Any number of equal divisions can be obtained
(a) Equal to that of lathe tool on milling machine by:
(b) More than that of lathe tool (a) Direct indexing
(c) Less than that of lathe tool (b) Simple indexing
(d) None of the above (c) Compound indexing
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 (d) Differential indexing
Ans. (c) : A shaper tool has side and front clearance is RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
less than that of lathe tool. Ans. (b) : Simple indexing–Any number of equal
• In a shaper tool the amount of size clearance angle is divisions can be obtained on milling machine by simple
only 2 angle is 40 for cast iron and steel. indexing. When it is not possible by simple indexing
• Small clearance angles added strength. then compound indexing method is used.
• A shaper can also use a right hand or left hand tool. • When the number of divisions required is outside the
1418. Which one of the following types of shapers is range of simple indexing and then compound indexing
used to remove metal during its return stroke? is used.
(a) Standard shaper 1422. A broach has:
(b) Universal shaper (a) Roughing teeth
(c) Push type shaper (b) Semi-finishing teeth
(d) Draw type shaper (c) Finishing teeth
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (d) All of these
Ans. (d): Draw type shaper–In this type of shaper, the RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
cutting of metal takes place when the ram moves Ans. (d) : A broach has a series of cutting teeth
towards the column of the machine, i.e. draws the work arranged in a row of rows, graduated in height from the
towards the machine. teeth that cut first to those that cut last.
• The tool is set in a reversed direction to that of a • A broach has roughing teeth, semi-finishing teeth and
standard shaper. finishing teeth.
• In this shapers is used to remove metal during its • Broaches are shaped similar to a saw, except the
return stroke. height of the teeth increases over the length of the tool.
1419. A workpiece is chamfered to remove burrs. It • Moreover the broach contains three distinct sections.
is observed that the chamfer width is not One for roughing, another for semi-finishing and final
uniform throughout the periphery of chamfer one for finishing.
on a workpiece. Which one of the following is
the cause for this defect? 1423. In the 3-2-1 principle of fixture design, 3 refers
(a) The angle chamfering is not correct to the number of .............
(b) The chamfering tool not set square to the (a) Clamps required
work axis (b) Locators on the primary datum face
(c) The work face not running true (c) Degrees of freedom of the workpiece
(d) The overhang of the tool is too much (d) Operations carried out on the primary datum
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 face
Ans. (c) : A workpiece is chamfered to remove burrs. It RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
is observed that the chamfer width is not uniform Ans. (b) : This is the principle to locate the workpiece
throughout theperiphery of chamfer on a workpiece. firmly so that the required operations like drilling,
The work face not running true. reaming etc. can be done.

According to the principle, 3 pins are used in the 1428. The process in which the sharp edges of the job
primary datum, 2 pins are used on the secondary datum are attained is called:
which is perpendicular to 1st and 1 in the tertiary datum (a) Knurling (b) Chamfering
which arrests 9 degrees of freedom (c) Turning (d) Grooving
1424. Which one of the following processing UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
sequences will give the best accuracy as well as
Ans. (b) : Chamfering is the operation of beveling the
surface finish?
extreme end of a workpiece. It is also known as the
(a) Drilling, Reaming, Grinding
beveling process. It enables nut to pass freely on the
(b) Drilling, Boring, Grinding
threaded workpiece, it is usually done after knurling,
(c) Drilling, Reaming, Lapping
thread cutting etc.
(d) Drilling, Reaming, Electroplating
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 • Turning in a lathe is to remove excess material from
the workpiece to produce a cylindrical surface of
Ans. (c) : Drilling, Reaming, Lapping is the processing
required shape and size.
sequences will give the best accuracy as well as surface
finish. 1429. Which of the following is used to finish the
1425. Internal gears can be cut by ....... thread and maintaining its correct form is :
(a) Hobbing (a) Tap (b) Threading tool
(b) Gear shaping with rack cutter (c) Threading chaser (d) Tipped tool
(c) Gear shaping with pinion cutter BEML 2022
(d) Gang milling UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 Ans. (c) : Threading chaser is used to finish the thread
and maintain correct form.
Ans. (a) : Internal gears can be cut by hobbing.
• Hobbing is a machining process for gear cutting; 1430. Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter is:
cutting splines and cutting sprockets on a hobbing (a) 45 HRC (b) 52 HRC
machine. (c) 62 HRC (d) 75 HRC
• The process of generating gas teeth by means of a ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
rotating cutter referred to as a hob. Ans. (c): Approximate hardness of HSS milling cutter
1426. In which of the following machine, the work is 62 HRC.
rotates and the tool is stationary?
1431. Of the following tapers, which is best for quick
(a) Vertical boring machine
releasing of an arbor ?
(b) Horizontal boring machine
(a) 0.625" TPF
(c) precision boring machine
(d) Jig boring machine (b) 0.6" TPF
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 (c) 3.5" TPF
Ans. (a) : In a vertical boring machine the work rotates (d) 2o51'51" included angle
on a horizontal table. The cutting tools are stationary ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
except for feed movements and are mounted on the Ans. (c) : 3.5" TPF is best for quick releasing of an
adjustable height cross soil. These tools are adopted to arbor.
horizontal facing work, vertical turning and boring. 1432. Example of a multi-point cutting tool is :
1427. If a 30 mm diameter job is rotating 350 (a) Milling cutter
revolutions per minute on the lathe machine
(b) Grinding wheel
find the cutting speed of the job:
(a) 32 m/min (b) 33 m/min (c) Both (a) and (b)
(c) 31 m/min (d) 30 m/min (d) Turning tool
Ans. (b) : Given, Ans. (c) : Multipoint cutting tools are a series of single-
D = 30 mm point cutting tools mounted in or integral with a holder
N = 350 r.p.m. or body and operated in such a manner that all the teeth
πDN or cutting edges follow essentially the same parts across
V= the workpiece.
60
Ex. - Milling cutter, Grinding wheel
π × 30 × 350
V= m / min 1433. Which of the following is NOT an example of a
1000 finishing process?
22 × 30 × 350 (a) Grinding (b) Broaching
V= m / min
7 ×1000 (c) Lapping (d) Honing
V = 33m / min ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
NTPC Fitter 2016
Ans. (b) : Broaching–Broaching is not an example of Ans. (c) : Trepanning tool is used for bigger size holes.
finishing process. Trepanning is a technique used for drilling larger hole
Honing–It is a finishing operation in which bonded diameter where machine power is limited as it is not as
grain is used to improve surface. As much as 0.25 mm power consuming as conventional drilling where the
layer of material can be removed. entire hole is converted into chips.
Grinding–It is a machining operation that is used to
remove material from a workpiece via a grinding wheel. 1438. Which of the following is not a thread making
Lapping–It is a machining process in which two process?
surfaces are rubbed together with an abrasive between (a) Milling (b) Rolling
them, by hand movement or using a machine. (c) Tapping (d) Hobbing
1434. The gear ratio of index head is : ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
(a) 50 to 1 Ans. (d) : Hobbing is not a thread making process.
(b) 14 to 1 Hobbing is a gear generating process. It is economical
(c) 40 to 1 process for gear cutting.
(d) None of the above • Spur and screw gears are generally produced by
IOCL 2020 hobbing.
• Milling, Rolling and Tapping are thread cutting
Ans. (c) : The gear ratio of index head is 40 to 1.
process.
• Indexing head is used in milling machine.
• The operation of rotating the job through a required 1439. Which of the following is used to make a key
angle between two successive cut is termed hole in shaft for inserting a woodruff key?
indexing. (a) Drilling (b) Milling
1435. Which among the following machinery (c) Shaping (d) Turning
operation a tool is pushed or pulled through a ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
hole or surface Ans. (b) : Milling is used to drill a key hole in the shaft
(a) Shaping (b) Milling to insert a woodruff key. Milling is used for cutting
(c) Slotting (d) Broaching threads and making key hole on long and heavy
workpieces.
Ans. (d): In broaching, tool is pushed or pulled through
a hole or surface. 1440. Which of the following operation is not
Broaching uses a toothed tool, called a broach, to applicable for making a regular hexagonal nut?
remove material. There are two main types of (a) Milling (b) Facing
broaching- (A) Linear (B) Rotary. (c) Drilling (d) Spot facing
• In linear broaching, the broach run linearly against a ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
surface of the workpiece to produce the cut.
Ans. (d) : Spot facing is not applicable for making a
• Rotary broaching is a precision method for
producing internal polygon forms at an extreme fast regular hexagonal nut.
rate. • In spot facing the surface is squared around the
1436. By using quick return mechanism in shaping surface and at the end of the hole.
machine the cutting stroke moves slow and • Spot facing is generally done on castings and
return stroke fast. What is the ratio between forgings.
cutting stroke and return stroke?
1441. Match the following non-conventional
(a) 2:3 (b) 3:2
(c) 5:3 (d) 3:5 machining processes with the corresponding
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II material removal mechanisms
Ans. (b) : Shaping–It is a process of removing metal Machining Processes Mechanism of
from a surface in horizontal, vertical and inclined material removal
position to produce a flat or plane surface. It uses quick P: Chemical Machining 1. Erosion
return mechanism. Tool reciprocate and feed is given to
Q: Electrochemical 2. Corrosive
workpiece. Cutting stroke moves slow and return stroke
moves fast. The ratio between cutting stroke and return Machining reaction
stroke is 3:2. R: Electric-discharge 3. Ion displacement
1437. Trepanning tool is used for Machining
(a) Small boring S: Ultrasonic Machining 4. Fusion and
(b) Step boring vaporization
(c) Bigger size holes
(d) Blind holes (a) P-2, Q-3, R-4, S-1 (b) P-2, Q-1, R-4, S-3
BHEL 2020 (c) P-2, Q-4, R-3, S-1 (d) P-3, Q-4, R-2, S-1
Ans. (a) : The shaper machine is a reciprocating type of machine

Machining Processes Mechanism of basically used for producing the horizontal, vertical or
material removal flat surfaces. The shaper holds the single point cutting
tool in ram and workpiece is fixed in the table.
Chemical Machining Corrosive reaction
1446. Which type of lathe has operated through cams
Electrochemical machining Ion displacement and cam plate?
Electric-discharge Fusion and vaporization (a) Screw cutting lathe (b) Precession lathe
machining (c) Capstan lathe (d) Crankshaft lathe
Ultrasonic Machining Erosion RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
1442. The smooth surface in wood can be obtained by Ans. (b) : Screw cutting lathe (automatic)–
.................... • It is operated through cams and cam plates.
(a) Cutting by saw • It is used for mass production of screwed parts.
(b) Cutting by Chisel Especially suitable for precision screw work.
(c) Cutting by knife
(d) Planning 1447. Quick return mechanism is used in a :
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (a) Milling machine
Ans. (d) : The smooth surface in wood can be obtained (b) Broaching machine
by planning. (c) Grinding machine
• A plane tool is used to remove material. A plane is (d) Shaping machine
used to flatten, reduce the thickness and impart a SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
smooth surface to a rough piece of timber. Ans. (d) : Quick return mechanism is used in a shaping
1443. Which one of the following is a non- machine. The circular motion is converted to
conventional machining process? reciprocating motion so that the slider moves forward
(a) 5 axis CNC milling and backward. In the forward direction the cutting
(b) Trepanning operation process occurs but there is no cutting in return stroke.
(c) Center-less Grinding operation Cutting stroke is slower than return stroke
(d) EDM operation 1448. Stroke of a shaping machine is 250 mm. It
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 makes 30 double strokes per minute. Overall
Ans. (d): EDM (Electric Discharge Machining) is a average speed of operation is :
non-conventional machining process. (a) 3.75 m/min (b) 5.0 m/min
• Non-conventional machining is a special type of (c) 7.5 m/min (d) 15.0 m/min
machining process in which there is no direct BDL Technician 2022
contact between the tool and the workpiece. SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
• Conventional Machining Process–Turning, Ans. (c) : Given,
Milling, Drilling, Shaping, Grinding etc. Stroke = 250 mm
• Non-Conventional Machining Process–EBM, It makes 30 double stroke per min.
LBM, USM, EDM, ECM, WJM, AJM etc. Total Distance
Overall average speed of operation =
1444. Trepanning is a method used to Time
(a) generate threads 30 × 250
= = 7.5 m/min
(b) seal holes 1000
(c) generate holes 1449. Climb milling is chosen while machining
(d) smoothen weld bead because :
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 (a) The chip thickness increases gradually
Ans : (c) Trepanning is a technique used for drilling (b) It enable the cutter to dig in and start the cut
larger hole diameter where machine power is limited as (c) The specific power consumption in reduced
it is not as power consuming as conventional drilling (d) Better surface finish can be obtained
where the entire hole is converted into chips. SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
1445. In which of the following machine tools, the Ans. (d) : Climb milling is chosen while machining
work item tool and key have only transfer because better surface finishing can be obtained.
motion? • Climb milling or down milling is a process where
(a) Drilling (b) Milling cutting tool rotates in the same direction as the
(c) Shaper (d) Lathe workpiece.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I • The cutting tool's teeth climb into the workpiece
Ans. (c) : In shaper machine tool, the only transfer surface and deposit the chips behind the cutter,
motion of the tool and workpiece occurs. which eliminates the chances of re-cutting.

1450.The operation of milling two sides of a Work Ans : (d) Slotting machine uses quick return
Piece simultaneously is called mechanism. It is much similar to the vertical shaper
(a) Gang milling (b) Climb milling machines as the ram carrying the slotting tool
(c) Square milling (d) Straddle milling reciprocates in a vertical guide-way of the machine.
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 This machine can produce flat and contour surfaces,
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015 slots and internal grooves.
Ans : (d) Straddle milling is the operation of 1455. The purpose of chasing dial on lathe is to
producing a flat vertical surface on both sides of a achieve :
workpiece by using two side milling cutters mounted (a) Taper turning
on the same arbor. (b) Cutting of tapered thread
1451.Feed in milling operation is expressed as : (c) Cutting of multiple thread
(a) mm/tooth (b) m/min (d) Picking up the thread accurately at the
(c) mm (d) mm/r.p.m beginning of each cut
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015 IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Ans : (a) Feed in milling operation is expressed as Ans : (d) The purpose of chasing dial on lathe is to
mm/tooth. achieve picking up the thread accurately at the
Feed rate (mm/min) = Feed (mm/tooth) × Number of beginning of each cut. The chasing dial indicates when
teeth × Spindle speed (RPM) the split nut should be engaged with the lead screw for
the cutting tool to follow the previously cut groove.
1452.On which of the milling machines are helical
gears made? 1456. In the figure shown below which provides a
(a) Vertical milling machine better surface finish.
(b) Horizontal milling machine
(c) Universal milling machine
(d) Drum type milling machine
Ans: (c) Helical gears are made on universal milling
(A) (B)
machine. A milling machine having a table fitted with
(a) A
all motions and a dividing head with change gears to
that it can perform any type of milling operation. The (b) B
machine has sufficient rigidity and power, and has (c) both a A and B
powerful machining capabilities for high-speed and (d) None of these
heavy-duty cutting operation and gear machining. ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
1453. Brown and sharp tapers is generally used in : Ans : (b) Down Milling provides better surface
(a) Lathe finishing. Cutting tool rotates in the same direction as
(b) Milling machine workpiece. The cutting tool's tooth climb on the
(c) Shapers workpiece surface and deposit the chips behind the
(d) Drills cutter, which eliminates the chances of recutting.
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 1457. Turning equipment is a ............
Ans : (b) Brown and sharp tapers is generally used in (a) Single point cutting tool
milling machine. Available in sizes from 4 to 12, has (b) Multi point cutting tool
approximate value of 0.502" per foot (3/4)" TPF. (c) Line cutting tool
Except No. 10 which has a taper of 0.516" per foot. (d) Three point cutting tool
These tapers are used on Brown & Sharper machines, BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
milling cutters, Arbor. UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
1454. Quick return mechanism is used in : Ans : (a) Turning equipment is a single point cutting
(a) Milling machine tool. Turning is a machining process used to make
(b) Broaching machine cylindrical parts, where the cutting tool moves in a
(c) Grinding machine linear motion while the workpiece rotates. It reduces
(d) Slotting machine diameter to a specified dimension and produces a
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 smooth part finish.
1458. Machining of which of the following material Ans : (c) Spot facing is the operation of smoothing and
requires less cutting force: squaring the surface around and at the end of a hole so
(a) Titanium as to provide a smooth seat for a nut or for the head of a
(b) Stainless steel cap screw.
(c) Aluminum
(d) Cast iron
Ans : (c) Machining of aluminium require less cutting
force than titanium, stainless steel, cast iron. Aluminium
is non-ferrous metal which is soft and malleable where
as stainless steel, Titanium are relatively hard and
require more cutting force. Cast iron is brittle.
1459. Fly cutter is used on .......... 1463. Which one of the following is not a part of
(a) Lathe machine shaper?
(a) Clapper Box (b) Ram
(b) Shaper
(c) Tool Head (d) Cross-slide
(c) Milling Machine DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
(d) All of the above machine Ans : (d) A cross slide is a part of the carriage.
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 • The cross slide is a component found on the top of a
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 lathe that allows the tool bit to slide back and forth.
RRB Siliguri ALP 2014 The following are the parts of shaper–
Ans : (c) Fly cutter is used a Lathe machine. It is used (i) Ram (ii) Tool Holder (iii) Lock-Lever (iv) Cross rail
primarily for machining large, flat surface areas. The fly (v) Rocker arm (vi) Crank.
cutter is a single point cutting tool similar to lathe tool 1464. The function of taper turning process is to:
mounted in a special holder. (a) reduce the diameter of a work piece along its
length
1460. In which machining process, large amount of (b) reduce the diameter by removing material
material is removed? about an axis offset from the axis of work
(a) Lapping (b) Milling piece
(c) Honing (d) Buffing (c) remove the material from end surface of a
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016 work piece
Ans : (b) In milling process, large amount of material is (d) all of the above
removed. Milling is the process of machining using ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
rotary cutter to remove material by advancing a cutter Ans : (a) The function of taper turning is to reduce the
into a workpiece. diameter of a workpiece along its length.
Three common methods of taper turning are–
1461. In which of the following quick return (i) The offset tailstock method
mechanism is used? (ii) The compound rest method
(a) Milling Machine (b) Broach Machine (iii) The taper attachment method
(c) Grinding Machine (d) Shaper Machine 1465. Trepanning is the operation of:
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (a) Producing holes in sheet metal.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 (b) producing taper in lathe machine
Ans : (d) Quick return mechanism is used in shaper (c) producing rectangular pockets
machine. It convert circular motion into reciprocating (d) none of the above
motion so that the slider moves forward and backward. ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
In the forward direction cutting process occurs but there Ans : (a) Trepanning is the operation of producing large
is no cutting in return stroke. Cutting stroke is slower holes in sheet metal. A small-diameter hole is drilled in
than return stroke. the center for drilling a large diameter hole. The pilot of
a trepanning tool is fitted into this hole and the length of
1462. Spot facing is the operation of the following? adjustable arm is set to the radius of the hole to be cut.
(a) Cylindrical augmentation of the ends of the 1466. Milling is the process of removing material by:
holes. (a) feeding the tool against the rotating work
(b) Cone shaped enhancements at the ends of the (b) feeding the rotating tool against the
holes. stationary work
(c) Levelling the surface around the holes. (c) where both the material and tool are rotating
(d) Measuring the hole and finishing. (d) abrading the work with abrasives
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
Ans : (b) Milling is the process of removing material by 1471. Dead center has more ........... than live center.
feeding the rotating tool against the stationary work. (a) No friction (b) Equal friction
1467. In Up milling: (c) Less friction (d) More friction
(a) The direction of work movement is opposite (IOF Fitter, 2013)
to direction of rotation of the milling cutter. Ans : (d) More friction is observed in dead centre than
(b) the direction of work movement is same as live centre because it is fixed and live centre rotates
milling cutter rotation. with spindle.
(c) the work is also rotated along with the cutter.
1472. Easy machining of metal by a tool is called :
(a) Metal removed rate
(b) Rate of surface finish
(c) Machinability
Ans : (a) Up milling–
(d) Hardenability
Ans : (c) The ease of machining a metal by a tool is
called machinability.
Material with good machinability has following
properties–
(i) Require less power to cut.
(ii) Can be cut quickly
• In up milling the direction of work movement is (iii) a good surface finish is obtained
opposite to direction of rotation of the milling cutter. (iv) do not cause significant wear on the tool.
The chip thickness increases gradually from zero to Machinability depends on–
maximium during cutting period for each tooth. Cutting (i) Microstructure
force tends to lift off the workpiece. (ii) Grain size
• Here tooth experience graudual loading as contact (iii) Heat Treatment
starts with zero chip load. (iv) Chemical composition
1468. Which of the following is not a milling cutter (v) Hardness
material : (vi) Yield and Tensile strength
(a) High speed steel (HSS)
(b) High carbon steel (HCS) 1473. The thickness of chip is minimum at the
(c) Aluminium beginning and is maximum at the end of cut in
(d) cemented carbide case of................ milling operation.
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 (a) Up (b) Down
Ans : (c) Aluminium is not a milling cutter material. (c) End (d) Face
Milling cutter are made from high speed steel (HSS), NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
High carbon steel (HCS) and cemented carbide. (IOF Fitter 2017)
1469. High surface finish is obtained by : Ans : (a) In up milling, the chip thickness is minimum
(a) Turning (b) Milling at the beginning of the cutting and maximum of the feed
(c) Grinding (d) Lapping of the work section is against the direction of rotation of
ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016 the cutter, it is also called rough or convectional
Ans : (d) High surface finish is obtained lapping. milling. This method is generally used in cylindrical
Lapping is a machining process in which two surfaces milling.
are rubbed together with an abrasive between them, by 1474. In case of end milling the cutter has teeth
hand movement or using a machine. It involves rubbing (a) On the end face
material such as glass itself a surface such as iron or (b) On the periphery
glass itself with an abrasive such as aluminium oxide. (c) Both on the end face and the periphery
1470. The taper is inside the tail stock spindle : (d) On half of the periphery
(a) Morse Taper
(IOF Fitter 2017)
(b) Jerno Taper
(c) Brown and Sharp Taper Ans : (c) In case of end milling, the cutter teeth are at
(d) Metric Taper the end of the face and on both sides of the
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006) circumference. In this, the cutter cuts through both its
Ans : (a) Morse Taper is cut inside the tail stock spindle circumference and the type of teeth made at the end, the
in which dead center is fitted. The ratio of Morse taper teeth of circumference more cutting. While fine cutting
is 1 : 20. is done by the teeth of the end.

1479. To mill the hexagonal headed bolt, the

following milling operation is most suitable.
(a) Form milling
(b) Straddle milling
(c) Face milling
(d) Angular milling
(IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (b) Straddle milling operation is best suited for
milling hexagonal bolts.
1480. In vertical milling m/c, cutter is mounted on
(a) Spindle
(b) Collar
(c) Arbor
(d) None of these
Ans : (a) In a vertical milling machine the cutter is
1475. Down milling operations should only be placed on top of the spindle, in which a simple arbor is
performed on used to the cutter. The motion of the table on this
(a) Rigid machine machine is like that of a simple or universal machine.
(b) Plain milling machine 1481. Which type of milling cutter is required for
(c) Rigid machine with backlash eliminator high speed mill operation?
(d) Hand milling machine (a) Zero rake
(IOF Fitter 2017) (b) Negative rake
Ans : (c) The down milling operation can only be (c) Positive rake
performed on a hardening machine with a rebound or (d) None of these
backlash eliminator in which the job and the milling (IOF Fitter 2017)
cutter run in the same direction. Ans : (b) Negative rake milling cutter are used for high
speed milling cutter.
1476. For tool room work, the following milling
1482. In mass production, for guiding the milling
machine is suitable.
cutter,................. is used.
(a) Plain milling machine (a) Jig
(b) Fixed bed type milling machine (b) Dividing head
(c) Plano–miller (c) Template
(d) Universal milling machine (d) fixture
(IOF Fitter 2017) (IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (d) Universal, helical gear teeth torsional drills Ans : (b) The dividing head is used for mass
and reamers, tools, etc. are made by milling machines, production, this mechanical milling machine, is
which the help of various attachments, the utility of this attached to the separator. The vertex itself is called the
machine increases. dividing head by which a work block can be caught on
its axis and its circumference can be divided into equal
1477. Backlash eliminator should be provided in parts by rotating.
(a) Up milling (b) Down milling
1483. In universal milling machine................number
(c) Face milling (d) Gang milling of table movements can be obtained.
(IOF Fitter 2017) (a) 2 (b) 3
Ans : (b) Backlash eliminator should be given in down (c) 4 (d) 5
milling. In the down milling method, the direction of (IOF Fitter 2017)
the workpiece and the direction of the turns of the cutter Ans : (c) This machine is similar to the horizontal
are the same. In this way the machine remains pressed milling machine in all respect with an additional
on the table under the action. Therefore this method is swiveling movement for the table which rests on a
suitable for machining on thin workpieces. graduated swivel base
1478. Internal key–way can be cut by 1484. In milling machine, which of the following
(a) Shaping machine standard taper is mostly used?
(a) Jarno
(b) Broaching machine (b) Morse
(c) Slotting machine (c) Metric
(d) All of these (d) Brown and Sharpe
(IOF Fitter 2017) (IOF Fitter 2017)
Ans : (d) The inner key passage can be cut by shaper Ans : (d) In milling machines Brown and sharp
machine, broaching machine, slotting machine. standard tapers are generally used.

1485. Hobbing m/c is used for the mass production of 1489. Which of the following is not a machine tool?
(a) Spure gear (b) Thread (a) Shaper
(c) Helical gear (d) None of these (b) drill machine
(IOF Fitter 2017) (c) Fork left tool
Ans : (c) Hobbing machines are used for mass (d) Grinding machine
production of helical gears. The teeth of a helical gear (RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012)
are not parallel to the axle but curved grooves are cut Ans : (c) A forklift is a powered industrial truck used to
making an angle with the spindle, it is used. lift and move materials over short distances.
1486. Universal milling machine is equipped with 1490. Which type of reciprocating machine tool
(a) Quick return arrangement flattens, the surface are made of ............
(b) Indexing arrangement (a) Lathe
(c) Fool–proof arrangement (b) Shaper
(d) None of these (c) Drill
(IOF Fitter 2017) (d) Milling
Ans : (b) Universal milling machine– (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009)
• Universal milling machine has indexing Ans : (b) Shaper is a type of reciprocating machine tool
arrangement. by which flat surfaces are made. This surface can be
• A universal milling machine can be used to mill made flat, vertical or even in any angle. The size of the
planes, bevels and grooves. shaper is taken according to the maximum length that
can be cut by the shaper.
• They are also effective for gear machining and
large scale machining. 1491. In electro discharge machining the cutting tool
is made of ?
(a) to high speed steel
(b) to tool steel
(c) to carbonate tipped
(d) to graphite
Ans : (d) The cutting tool is made of graphite in electro
discharge machining.
1492. Taper turning can be set in lathe machine :
(a) over arrangement
(b) by taper turning attachment
(c) by swaying compound rest
(d) by all of the above
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (d) In lathe machine, taper can be done by turning
over arrangement, taper turning by attachment and
swiveling compound rest.
1487. Which lathe is used for mass production work? 1493. The specification of shaper machine is done :
(a) Bench lathe (a) by the ratio of forward and backward stokes
(b) Turret lathe (b) by horsepower
(c) Capstan lathe (c) depending on stroke length
(d) None of the above (d) by table size
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (RRB Allahabad ALP, 03.08.2008)
Ans : (c) Capstan lathe–Many tools work in this Ans : (c) Shaper machine is specified on the basis of
machine simultaneously, for this a capstan head is fitted stroke length, shaper is a type of reciprocating machine
in it. The setting up of such machines take more time tool by which flat surface are made. This surface can be
but the production takes less time hence these made flat, vertical or even in any angle.
machining are used in mass production. Size–The maximum length that can be cut by the
1488. What will happen if the tool is kept above the shaper, the size of the shaper is taken accordingly.
centre of cutting and job during cutting? 1494. Why relief angle is given in milling cutter?
(a) Tool may break (a) This removes the chip easily.
(b) Turning will be rough (b) Cutting is more than this.
(c) The tool will vibrate (c) There are all true.
(d) All of the above (d) This makes the teeth wear less.
(IOF Fitter, 2012) BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans : (d) In turning, if the tool is placed above the (IOF Fitter, 2013)
center of the cutting and job, the tool may break, the Ans : (a) The chip is easily given due to the relief angle
turning will be rough and the tool will vibrate. in the milling cutter.

Grinding Wheel and Grinding Machine
Where,
1. Classification of Grinding 51 = Code of producer
A = Aluminium oxide abrasive
1. Tap are re-sharpened by grinding 46 = Grain size (medium)
(a) flute (b) thread L = Grade of binder (G=V) means medium grade
(c) diameter (d) relief 13 = Structure (8-14 is of open structure)
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 B = Resinoid bond
Ans. (a) : Similar size of taps are generally 5. Shaping of grinding wheel to make it run
reconditioned by grinding the chamfer portion only concentric with axis is called:
while larger taps may also require flute grinding. Taper (a) Dressing (b) Truing
pipe tap must be sharpened by grinding the flute and (c) Balancing (d) Glazing
spiral pointed taps must be reground the angular portion BEML 2022, NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
of the flute as well on the chamfer. Ans. (b) : Truing–The process of changing the shape of
2. Snagging is a process used to remove the metal grinding wheel as it becomes worn due to breaking
by away of the abrasive and bond is called truing.
(a) filing (b) hacksawing Dressing–The process of improving the cutting action
(c) chiseling (d) grinding of the grinding wheel is called dressing.
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 Glazing–When the cutting edge of a grinding wheel
takes a glass-like appearance due to wear of abrasive
Ans. (d) : Snagging is process used to remove exist grains, then it is called glazing.
metal from casting to be moved to the face of the
6. Dressing of grinding wheel refers to:
grinding wheel.
(a) Restoring of cutting action of wheel
• Grinding is machining process that used to remove
(b) Shaping of the wheel
material from a workpiece via a grinding wheel.
(c) Making wheel concentric with axis
3. Which of the following surface finish (d) Changing the wheel
operations used dust type abrasive? NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
(a) Buffing (b) Lapping
Ans. (a) : Dressing–The process of improving the
(c) Burnishing (d) Honing cutting action of the grinding wheel is called dressing.
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022 Truing–The process of changing the shape of grinding
Ans. (b) : Lapping used to surface finish of extreme wheel as it becomes worn due to breaking away of the
accuracy and smoothness. abrasive and bond is called truing.
• It used fluid suspension of very small abrasive particle 7. Which of the following is not a natural
(duet type) between work and lapping tool. abrasive.
• Buffing are finishing process for smoothing workpiece (a) Quartz (b) Silicon carbide
surface using an abrasive and a work wheel or a leather (c) Corundum (d) Diamond
strop. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
• Burnishing is method of polishing and hardening the Ans. (b) : • Natural abrasive–
surface of a workpiece. 1. Quartz
• Honing is a machining process in which an abrasive 2. Corundum (alumina)
cutting tool is used to produce a very find surface. 3. Diamond
4. In a grinding wheel 51A 46 L 13 B, 13 & B 4. Emery
represent respectively: 5. Garnet
(a) Dense type structure and resinoid bond type • Synthetic abrasive–
(b) Soft type structure and resinoid abrasive 1. Silicon carbide
material 2. Aluminium oxide
(c) Soft type structure and resinoid bond type 3. Cubic boron nitride
(d) Dense type structure and vitrified bond type 8. In an abrasive wheel specification 36A 46 K 5
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 VBE. 46 stands for ................
Ans. (c): In a grinding wheel 51A 46 L 13 B, 13 & B (a) Structure (b) Bond grade
represent respectively soft type structure and resinoid (c) Abrasive type (d) Grain size
bond type. ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
51 A 46 L 13 B 13 B IOCL 2020
Grinding Wheel and Grinding Machine 520 YCT

Ans. (d) : (c) G = Volume of the material required to be

36 A 46 K 5 VBE removed /Volume of the material
Abrasive type → Grain Size → Grade of bond → (d) G= Mass of the wheel/ Mass of the material
structure → Bond type. required
9. Small particles of material being ground
become embedded in the space between the NTPC Fitter 2016
grains of the grinding wheel is called................. Ans. (a) : Grinding ratio (G)- Grinding ratio is defined
(a) Filling (b) Glazing as the ratio of volume of material ground out form the
(c) Loading (d) Grooving surface of work piece to the volume removed from the
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 surface of grinding wheel for same number of basses.
Grinding ratio (G)
Ans. (c) : The state of a grinding wheel when particle of
a work piece material either adhere to the grit or Volumeof materialrequired to be removed
=
become embedded in the space between abrasive grain Volumeof Wheel Wear.
in grinding wheel is called loading. 14. 'Snagging' is a process used to remove material
10. Dressing refers to : by:
(a) Drilling (b) Cutting (a) Filling (b) Hack-sawing
(c) Grinding (d) Welding (c) Chipping (d) Grinding
Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022 ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
Ans. (c) : Dressing refers to grinding. Ans. (d) : Snagging-It is a grinding process in which
Dressing– The dressing is the operation of cleaning and faster removal of material, from surface with little
restoring the sharpness of the wheel face that has consideration on finish. It is used for removing surface
become dull or has lost some of its cutting ability cracks, debarring and removal of runners and riser from
because of loading and glazing. casting.
Truing– Truing refers to the shaping of the wheel so 15. What will happen if the job is fit loosely in the
that it run concentric with the axis. When a new centre while cylindrical grinding ?
grinding wheel is mounted it must be dried before use. (a) Job will not be formed in the round shape
11. What is to be done after dressing the grinding (b) Job will be oversized
wheel to run concentric? (c) Job will come out
(a) Truing (b) Glazing (d) Job will not rotate
(c) Loading (d) Dressing BHEL 2020
Ans. (a) : If the job is fit loosely in the centre while
Ans. (a) : Truing should be done after dressing the cylindrical grinding the job will not be formed in the
grinding wheel to run concentric with the axis. round shape.
• Truing is a type of dressing removing material from Cylindrical grinding operations– This operation
the cutting face so that the wheel's surface runs involves the removal of metal from the grinding wheel
concentric with the grinder's spindle axis. and it has a cylindrical from for the full travel of the
12. Find the surface speed of the grinding wheel if work on the wheel keeping the same diameter
the diameter of the grinding wheel is 350 mm throughout the length.
and RPM of the spindle is 2500 (N)?
(a) 31.4 m/s (b) 45.8 m/s
(c) 30.5 m/s (d) 38.7 m/s
Ans. (b): Given that= diameter of grinding wheel (D)=
350 mm
Speed of spindle (N) = 2500 rpm 16. Identify the grinding wheel test shown in
surface speed of grinding wheel (v) = figure.
πDN
V= m/s
60 ×1000
22 350 2500 275
V= × × m/s = b/s
7 1000 60 6
V=45.8M/s
13. Which of the following is nominally referred to
'Grinding ratio' of a grinding wheel?
(a) G = Volume of material required to be
removed/Volume of wheel wear
(b) G = Volume of wheel wear/Volume of
material required to be removed
(a) Hardness test (b) Cracks on wheel 21. Which one of the following cutting fluids is
(c) Bond test (d) Abrasive test used during grinding of mild steel?
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (a) Mineral oil
Ans. (b) : Above figure shown that cracks on wheel (b) Non systematic cutting oil
type grinding test. (c) Soluble oil
17. The wheel of dense structure is used for_____ (d) Vegetable oil
(a) Rough grinding (b) Super finishing RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
(c) Finishing (d) All of the above Ans. (c) : Soluble oil cutting fluids is used during the
BDL Technician 2022 grinding of mild steel.
Ans. (c) : The wheel of dense structure is sued for • Cutting fluids and compounds are the substances
finishing. used for efficient cutting while cutting operations
takes place.
• The structure is indicating the overage gap between
the two consecutive abrasive particles. 22. It is required to finish grind a is ∅50 mm mild
• As the average gap is large, the number of abrasive steel shaft on a cylindrical grinding machine.
What will be the surface speed if r.p.m. of the
particles presents per unit area will be small hence it
job is 191?
is called the open structure.
(a) 20 meters/min (b) 25 meters/min
• 0-7 = Dense, 8-16 = Open. (c) 30 meters/min (d) 35 meters/min
18. The wheel of fine grain size is used for____ NLC Technician 24-09.2022
(a) Super finishing (b) Finishing Ans. (c) :
(c) Grinding (d) Rough grinding D = 50 mm
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 N = 191 rpm
Ans. (b) : The wheel of fine grain size is used for V=?
finishing.
πDN
• The grain size is indicate the size of abrasive Surface speed, V = meters / min
particles. 1000
• The grain size is selected based on the surface finish 3.14 × 50 ×191
=
required on the work piece. 1000
• For a rough grinding course or medium grain size is = 29.98
selected and for finished grinding fine of very fine ≃ 30 meters/min
grain size will be selected.
23. What is the trouble when grinding wheel fails
• 10-24 = coarse, 30-60 = medium to cut in a grinding machine?
80-180 = fine, 220-600 = very fine. (a) Grinding wheel's is glazed to too soft
19. Which of the following processes is not a part (b) Grinding wheel's is glazed
of grinding ? (c) Grinding wheel's is not securely mounted on
(a) To get highly smooth surface spindle
(b) To finish a very light and small job (d) Too much feed is given
(c) To grind the heat treated job BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
(d) To remove the material in large quantity from Ans. (b): Glazing– When a surface of the wheel
the job develops a smooth and shining appearance, it is said to
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 be glazed. This indicates that the wheel is blunt, i.e. the
Ans. (d): Grinding is used to finish workpiece that must abrasive grains are not sharp.
show high surface quality and high accuracy of shape • Glazing is caused by grinding hard materials on a
and dimension. wheel that has too hard grade of bond.
• To remove the material in large quantity from the 24. The depth of infeed per pass in dressing a
job is not part of grinding. grinding wheel should be not more than
20. The soft material particles get clogged in the (a) 0.25 mm (b) 0.025 mm
grinding wheel while grinding. This is called .... (c) 0.0025 mm (d) 0.00025 mm
(a) Truing (b) Loading NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
(c) Glazing (d) Dressing Ans. (b) : The depth of infeed per pass in dressing a
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 grinding wheel should be not more than 0.025 mm.
Ans. (b) : Loading– The grinding wheel is said to be 25. Dressing and truing of a grinding wheel are
loaded when the metal particles get embedded in the (a) Exactly the same operation
wheel surface blocking the interspaces between cutting (b) Done with the same equipment
grains. (c) Done only for coarse grinding wheels
• Loading is generally caused during the grinding of (d) Only for form grinding wheels
soft and ductile materials. RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
Ans. (b) : Dressing and truing of a grinding wheel are Ans. (d) : Snagging is the process used to remove the
done with the same equipment. metal by grinding.
Dressing– Dressing is the process of sharpening the • Snagging is the process of faster material removal
abrasive elements to the wheel. The process breaks with little consideration on finish. It is used for
down the bond removes dull abrasive grains to expose removing surface cracks, deburring and removal of
new and sharp abrasive particles. runners and risers on castings.
Truning– Truning is the process of aligning the
periphery of the grinding wheel. So that it runs 30. The effect of using a glazed or loaded wheel is
concentric with its axis of rotation. (a) More heat generation
26. A hardened die block (work) has to be ground. (b) Poor surface finish
It is required to retain the same hardens even (c) Excessive cutting pressure between the wheel
after grinding. If the work in overheated in the face and the work surface
grinding process, it may result in work being (d) All the above
rejected or scrapped. Probable reason for BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
rejection is that the work surface is
Ans. (d) : The effect of using a glazed or loaded wheel
(a) Discoloured (b) Softened
is :
(c) Rough (d) Brittle
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 • More heat generation.
Ans. (b) : A hardened die block (work) has to be • Poor surface finish
ground. It is required to retain the same hardens even • Excessive cutting pressure between the wheel face
after grinding. If the work in overheated in the grinding and the work surface.
process, it may result in work being rejected or 31. Which among the following is NOT the cause
scrapped. Probable reason for rejection is that the work for loading of grinding wheel?
surface is softened. (a) Dense structure
27. In the fig. a longitudinal feed in cylindrical (b) Feed to fine
grinding has fraction of the grinding wheel
(c) Wheel speed more than recommended
1
width (W). If the feed is W per revolution of (d) Proper grain size and grade of wheel
3 BEML 2022
the work, the maximum wheel wear is between
Ans. (d) : Proper grain size and grade of wheel is not
the cause of loading of grinding wheel.
Grinding wheel is said to be loaded when the metal
particle get embedded in the wheel surface and inner
space between cutting grains.
32. It is commonly observed that the face of a
grinding wheel becomes shiny and smooth of
(a) AB and CD (b) BC glazed after some use due to one of the
(c) BD (d) AC following reasons. Choose the correct answer.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (a) Grade of wheel is too hard
Ans. (a) : AB and CD (b) Abrasive of wheel is not suitable for the
28. Grinding with a balanced grinding wheel will purpose
make it possible to achieve the required (c) Grain size is too hard
(a) Dimensional accuracy with surface finish (d) Structure of the wheel is too open
(b) Positional tolerance surface finish only IOCL 2020
(c) Positional tolerance RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
(d) Pattern of lay Ans. (a) : It is commonly observed that the face of a
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 grinding wheel becomes shiny and smooth of glazed
Ans. (a) : Grinding with a balanced grinding wheel will after some use due to grade of wheel is too hard.
make it possible to achieve the required dimensional 33. What is the cause of grinding wheel becoming
accuracy with surface finish.
glazed in a grinding machine?
• The grinding process is used to produce a high
(a) Grinding wheel's grade is too soft
surface finish with a close tolerance and for
machining hard materials. (b) Grinding wheel's grade is too large
29. Snagging is a process used to remove the metal (c) Feed and traverse are less
by (d) Grinding wheel's grade is too high and work
(a) Filling (b) Hacksawing speed is low
(c) Chiseling (d) Grinding NTPC Fitter 2016
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
Ans. (d) : Grinding wheel becoming glazed in a (a) Diamond (b) Emery
grinding machine due to grinding wheels grade is too (c) Quartz (d) Silicon carbide
hard a grade of bond. The abrasive particles become NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
dull due to cutting the hard materials. RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
• Glazing of grinding wheel is more predominant in Ans. (a) : Diamond grinding abrasive is suitable
hard wheels with higher speed. abrasive to grinding the glass.
34. Balancing of wheel is done to • Abrasive are different types i.e. natural abrasive,
(a) Make the sides of the wheel parallel synthetic abrasive, bonded abrasives and coated
(b) Make the outside diameter concentric with abrasive.
the bore • Diamond is a type of natural abrasives.
(c) Equalize the weight in every position of the 38. It is commonly observed that the face of a
wheel grinding wheel become shiny and smooth or
(d) None of the above glazed after some use due to one of the
BHEL 2020 following reasons.
Ans. (c) : Balancing of wheel is done to equalize the (a) Grade of wheel is too hard
weight in every position of the wheel. (b) Abrasive of wheel is not suitable for the
purpose
• Wheel balancing is something which is strictly
increased with the wheel and the tyre correlation, it (c) Grain size is too coarse
refers to correcting the balance between the weights (d) Structure of the wheel is too open
of wheel and the tyres. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
35. The cause for glazing of a grinding wheel is Ans. (a) : It is commonly observed that the face of a
(a) Grain size is too fine grinding wheel become shiny and smooth or glazed
after some use due to grade of wheel is too hard.
(b) Wheel is hard
• If grinding wheel is glazed it means grade of
(c) Wheel speed is too fast
wheel is too hard and abrasive particles become
(d) 'A' and 'B' both dull due to cutting the hard materials.
39. Which one of the following is NOT the cause
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 for glazing of wheel?
Ans. (d) : (a) Improper dressing of wheel
• The cause for glazing of a grinding wheel is grain (b) Dirty coolant
size is too fine and wheel is hard. (c) Hard wheel in place of soft wheel
• Glazing of grinding wheel is more predominant in (d) Feed rate is too fine
hard wheels with higher speed. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
36. The figure given below is a spark test of a metal Ans. (a): Improper dressing of wheel is not the cause
having spark less bright starting near grinding for glazing of wheel.
wheel and more feathery with secondary • Glazing of grinding wheel is more predominant in
branching? hard wheel with higher speed.
• Due to glazing the grinding wheel, the wheel
becomes shiny and smooth.
40. For cylindrical grinding of a small diameter
work with fairly large wheel, which among the
What is the name of the metal? following grades of wheel should be used?
(a) Cast iron (b) High speed steel (a) Soft (b) Medium
(c) High carbon steel (d) Aluminium (c) Hard (d) Very soft
BDL Technician 2022 RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 Ans. (c) : Hard grade abrasive wheel would be used for
Ans. (c) : cylindrical grinding of a small diameter work with fairly
large wheel.
• The cylindrical grinder is a type of grinding
machine used to shape the outside of an object. The
cylindrical grinder can work on a variety of shapes,
The figure given above is a spark test of a metal having however the object must have a central axis of
spark less bright starting near grinding wheel and more rotation.
feathery with secondary braches is the grinding of high 41. A grinding wheel marked with 'C' is made with
carbon steel. the abrasive
37. You have to select a grinding wheel with (a) Aluminium oxide (b) Silicon carbide
suitable abrasive to grind glass. What is the (c) Diamond (d) Corundum
type of abrasive you will select? RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (b) : A grinding wheel marked with 'C' is made

with the silicon carbide abrasive.
Grade Abrasive
A – Aluminium oxide
B – Cubic boron nitride
C – Silicon carbide
D – Diamond.
42. What will happen if the job is loosely fitted
between centres in cylindrical grinding?
(a) The job will be out of round
(b) The job will be oversized (a) Grain size (b) Grade
(c) The job will be thrown out (c) Structure (d) Type of abrasive
(d) The job will be not rotate RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 Ans. (d) : Name the code 'A' marked in the given figure
Ans. (a) : If the job is loosely fitted between centres in is type of abrasive.
the cylindrical grinding the job will be out of round. Grinding wheel specification–
Cylindrical grinding– The cylindrical grinder is a type
of grinding machine used to shape the outside of an
object. The cylindrical grinder can work on a variety of
shapes, however the object must have a central axis of
rotation.
43. For grinding carbide materials
(a) Aluminium oxide wheel is used
(b) Silicon carbide wheel is used
(c) Diamond wheel is used 46. The grain size of a grinding wheel is indicated
(d) Corundum wheel is used by numbers, which range of grain size referred
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 to as ‘Very Fine’?
Ans. (c) Diamond wheel is used for grinding carbide (a) 10 – 24 (b) 30 – 60
materials. (c) 80 – 180 (d) 220 – 600
Super abrasive (Diamond)– Synthetic diamond is NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
produced synthetically in a high temperature high RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
pressure process anvil press. Diamond is super abrasive Ans. (d) :
grain with the highest known hardness and a cubic Coarse grain size – 10-24
crystal structure.
Medium grain size – 30-60
• Diamond is used for grinding nonferrous metals, Fine grain size – 80-180
ceramics, stone, glass.
Very fine grain size – 220-600
• Diamond is not useful in grinding steel or ferrous
alloy because carbon or diamond readily dissolves 47. Surface grinding machine is capable to grind
or reacts with iron. ............
(a) Flat surfaces (b) Irregular surfaces
44. Which one of the following materials is used for (c) Curved surfaces (d) All of these
making a grinding wheel?
(a) Silicon carbide (b) Granite
(c) Sand (d) Calcium carbonate
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 Ans. (a) : Surface grinding machine is capable to grind
flat surface.
• Cylindrical grinding machine is used to grind
Ans. (a) : Silicon carbide is used for making a grinding cylindrical surface and is similar to a centre lathe in
wheel. appearance.
Used of material for grinding wheel–
48. The surface of a grinding wheel develops a
• Aluminium oxide smooth and shining appearance is called –
• Ceramic (a) Glazing (b) Loading
• Silicon carbide (c) Dressing (d) Truing
• Zirconia RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
• Super abrasive– diamond Ans. (a) : The surface of a grinding wheel develops a
• Super abrasive– Cubic Boron Nitride (CBN) smooth and shining appearance is called glazing.
• Tungsten carbide. • Glazing of grinding wheel is more predominant in
45. A grinding wheel with standard wheel marking hard wheel with higher speed.
is shown below. Name the code 'A' marked in • Due to glazing the grinding wheel, the wheel
the given figure. becomes shiny and smooth.

49. Which one of following is an artificial 53. The abrasive material used for manufacturing
abrasive? a grinding wheel includes:
(a) Emery (b) Diamond (a) Natural abrasives only
(c) Corundum (d) Silicon carbide (b) Artificial abrasives only
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (c) Neither (a) nor (b)
Ans. (d) : Abrasives are intended for actual cutting (d) Both (a) and (b)
action and hence they are hard substances. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
Types of abrasives– Ans. (d) : Abrasives are intended for actual cutting
1. Natural abrasive action and hence they are hard substances.
2. Artificial abrasive Types of abrasives–
Natural abrasive– Sand, stone, emery, corundum, 1. Natural abrasive
quartz and diamond etc. 2. Artificial abrasive
Artificial abrasive– Aluminium oxide, ceramic, silicon Natural abrasive– Sand, stone, emery, corundum,
quartz and diamond etc.
carbide.
Artificial abrasive– Aluminium oxide, ceramic, silicon
Ziriconia– carbid.
• Super abrasive – diamond Ziriconia–
• Super abrasive – Cubic Boron Nitride (CBN) • Super abrasive – diamond
• Tungsten Carbide. • Super abrasive – Cubic Boron Nitride (CBN)
50. Shaping of grinding wheel to make it run • Tungsten Carbide.
concentric with the axis is called: 54. Grinding fluids are used to ........
(a) Dressing (b) Truing (a) Redue the friction between the wheel face and
(c) Balancing (d) Glazing the job
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 (b) Wash away chips
Ans. (b) : Truing– Truing is the process of aligning the (c) Prevent loading of wheel
periphery of the grinding wheel so that it runs (d) All of these
concentric with its axis of rotation. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
51. Which of the following parameters influence Ans. (d) : Grinding fluids are used to–
the axial feed rate in centreless grinding? • Reduce the friction between the wheel face and job.
(a) Regulating wheel diameter • Wash away chips
(b) Angle between the axes of grinding and • Prevent loading of wheel
regulating wheels • Entrapment of abrasive dust and harmful vapors.
(c) Speed of the regulating wheel 55. Which one of the following is not a precaution
(d) All of these during grinding operation?
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (a) Never operate grinding wheels at speeds in
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 excess of the recommended speed
Ans. (d) : Centerless grinding– (b) Never adjust the workpiece or work mounting
• Centerless grinding is popular as a high speed, low devices when the machine is operating
cast operation. (c) Do not exceed recommended depth of cut for
• The axial movement of the work past the grinding the grinding wheel or machine
wheel is obtained by tilting the regulating wheel at a (d) None of these
slight angle from horizontal. RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
• An angular adjustment of 0 to 8o or 10o is provided Ans. (d) : Precaution for grinding operation–
in the machine for this purpose. 1. Check the speed
52. Coarse abrasive grains will have the grain 2. Check grinding wheel and grinding guard.
number in the range of : 3. Ensure proper assembly of flanges and other parts.
(a) 6 to 24 (b) 30-100 4. Use right wheel dimension.
(c) 120-700 (d) All of these 5. Always test before running.
6. Always wear personal protective equipment.
7. Carry out maintenance at regular intervals of time.
Ans. (a) : Grit/Grain size–
56. The method of centreless grinding used to
• Grit size typically runs from coarse (12-30 grit) produce taper is-
medium (36-70 grit) and fine (80-150), super grit (a) Infeed grinding
run from 160 and higher.
(b) Through feed grinding
Coarse– 12, 14, 16, 20, 24, 30 (c) End feed grinding
Medium– 36, 46, 54, 60, 70 (d) All of these
Fine– 80, 90, 100, 120, 150 RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Ans. (c) : The method of centreless grinding used to 60. Principle of operation of finishing flat surfaces
produce taper is end feed grinding. by surface grinders-
• In centreless grinding, the workpiece is held (a) Grinding by horizontal spindle on
between two grinding wheels, rotating in the same reciprocating table
direction at different speed. (b) Grinding by horizontal spindle on rotary table
• Centreless grinding is popular as a high speed, low (c) Grinding by vertical spindle on reciprocating
cast operation. and rotary table
(d) All of these
57. In centreless grinding process, Workpiece
centre will be:
Ans. (d) : Surface grinders– Surface grinders are used
(a) Below the centres of two wheels
to produce flat, angular and irregular surfaces. In the
(b) Above the centres of two wheels surface grinding process, the grinding wheel revolves
(c) Line joining the two wheels on a spindle, and the workpiece mounted on either a
(d) None of these reciprocating or a rotary table, is brought into contact
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 with the grinding wheel.
Ans. (b) : In centreless grinding process, workpiece 61. Select the grinder mostly used to sharpen and
centre will be above the centres of two wheels. reconditioning various types of cutters, die, jig,
fixture, light surface, cylindrical and internal
surfaces etc-
(a) Surface grinder
(b) Cylindrical grinder
(c) Tool and cutter grinder
(d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Tool and cutter grinder mostly used to
sharpen and reconditioning various types of cutters, die,
58. Grinding of long, Cylindrical shafts is usually jig, fixture, light surface, cylindrical and internal surface
done by: etc.
(a) Infeed grinding 62. The process to create a true and concentric
(b) End feed grinding surface of the grinding wheel with the wheel
(c) Through feed grinding spindle axis is called by-
(d) None of these (a) Clearing (b) Dressing
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (c) Truing (d) Facing
Ans. (c) : Depending upon the method of feeding the RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
work to the grinder, centreless grinding is of three Ans. (c) : The process to create a true and concentric
types– surface of the grinding wheel with the wheel spindle
1. Through feed grinding axis is called by truing.
2. In feed grinding 63. A grinding wheel is specified by 32A46H 8V.
3. End feed grinding. The meaning of A–
Through feed grinding– This process is used for (a) Type of abrasive (b) Grade
grinding long slender shaft or bars. (c) Structure (d) Bond
In feed grinding– It is used for grinding shoulders and RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
formed surface. Ans. (a) :
End feed grinding– It is used to produced taper.
59. For production of finishing of flat and plane
surfaces on a workpiece, the method of
grinding is- 64. The type of grinding performed on dovetail
(a) External cylindrical grinding guideway is–
(b) Internal cylindrical grinding (a) Plane surface grinding
(c) Surface grinding (b) Cylindrical grinding
(d) Universal type tool grinding (c) Angular grinding
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 (d) Tool and cutter grinding
Ans. (c) : Surface grinding– The surface grinding is RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
used in the tool room for the production of accurate flat Ans. (c) : Angular grinding performed on dovetail
surface. guideway.
65. Which one of the following is the indexing Ans. (c) :

method ?
(a) Compound indexing
(b) Direct indexing
(c) Differential indexing
(d) All of these
Ans. (d) : There is a total of 5 indexing head method–
1. Direct indexing
2. Simple indexing Pedestal grinder are used to sharpen high speed steel
3. Angular indexing cutting use on the lathe and milling machines, deburr or
4. Compound indexing used to remove surface imperfection and to work
extremely hard materials.
5. Differential idexing.
69. Which one of the following is the application
66. What is the shape of grinding wheel used in
tool and cutter grinding machine for grinding for 'Alumina' polishing abrasive?
the flutes and cutting face of cutters? (a) Bar composition for abrasive?
(a) Disc type (b) Flaring cup (b) Finishing of precious metals
(c) Straight cup (d) Saucer wheel (c) Used in lump form on wheel for gease
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 removal
Ans. (c) : Saucer wheel–It is a special grinding profile (d) Hard abrasive for cutting or polishing
wheel which is used in tool and cutter grinding machine RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
for grinding the flutes (in twist drills) and cutting face Ans. (d) : Hard abrasive for cutting or polishing.
of cutters (in milling). 70. Which type of polishing wheel is used for
• It is also used in the maintenance of saw blades. colouring and buffing of steel?
67. What is the name of the grinding operation? (a) Bleached filed Calico
(b) Bleached unfilled linen
(c) Swan down (special cotton)
(d) Felt of various grades.
Ans. (b) : Bleached unfilled linear bleached unfilled
(a) Grinding slot linen of polishing is used for colouring and buffing of
(b) Grinding flat surface steel.
(c) Grinding vertical surface 71. The operation done to make the periphery of
(d) Grinding angular surface grinding wheel concentric with its axis to
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 recover its last shape is known as ………..
Ans. (d) : (a) Loading (b) Glazing
(c) Dressing (d) Truing
Ans. (d) : The operation done to make the periphery of
grinding wheel concentric with its axis to recover its
last shape is known as truing.
Grinding– Grinding is an abrasive machining process 72. Removing dull grains in order to make
that uses a grinding wheel as the cutting tool. grinding wheel sharp is known as………….
Grinding is used to finish workpiece that must show (a) Loading (b) Glazing
high surface quality and high accuracy of shape and (c) Dressing (d) Truing
dimension. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
68. What is the name of the grinder? Ans. (c) : Removing dull grains in order to make
grinding wheel sharp is known as dressing.
Dressing– Dressing of the wheel is done to recover the
proper cutting action of the wheel face by removing the
layer of dulled grain or grains clogged with foreign
metal. Dressing removes the loading of the wheel.
73. Friability of grinding wheel is related
to………..
(a) Bench grinder (b) Surface grinder (a) Hardness (b) Fracture
(c) Pedestal grinder (d) Portable grinder (c) Size (d) None of the above
RRB ALP Patna 2014 RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
Ans. (b) : Friability of grinding wheel is related to Ans. (a): If the wheel hole diameter and the grinding
fracture. arbor size are not the same then the wheel is not
Friability– It is the ability to fracture under pressure so compatible with the grinder . So do not install it.
the as the cutting edges become dull, the grain beaks off 78. Which among the following is the natural
and exposes sharp new cutting edges. abrasive?
74. It is necessary to wear eye protection when (a) Corrundum (b) Diamond
operating a grinder………….
(c) Emery (d) All of the above
(a) To protect eyes from sparks
(b) To protect eyes from fly fragments, if the
wheel breaks Ans. (d) : Abrasive are intended for actual cutting
(c) To protect eyes from ultraviolet rays created action and hence they are hard substances.
by hot metal Types of abrasives–
(d) Both (a) and (b) 1. Natural abrasive
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 2. Artificial abrasive
Ans. (d) : Natural abrasive– Sand, stone, emery, corundum,
• To protect eyes from sparks. quartz and diamond etc.
• To protect eyes from fly fragments, it the wheel Artificial abrasive– • Aluminium oxide • Ceramic
breaks. • Silicon • Ziriconia • Super abrasive – Diamond
75. Why should jewellery not be worm when • Super abrasive – Cubic Boron Nitride (CBN)
operating a grinder? • Tungsten carbide.
(a) The sparks will tarnish sliver or gold
(b) It could get caught in th grinder 79. By which unit the roughness value is expressed
for grinding.
(c) The fumes will causes the gems to become
cloudy (a) µ m (b) µ in.
(d) It's considered bad luck in many workplaces (c) µ lbs. (d) µ ft.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
Ans. (b) : It could get caught in the grinder. Ans. (a) : The roughness value is expressed for grinding
Grinder– is µ m.
• Grinding is an abrasive machining process that uses 80. What will be the setting while grinding a tooth
a grinding wheel as the cutting tool. of a cylindrical cutter set on a mandrel ?
• Grinding is used to finish workpiece that must show (a) The cylindrical cutter set on a mandrel will be
high surface quality and high accuracy of shape and in between centers
dimension. (b) The cylindrical cutter set on a mandrel will be
76. Why should a grinding wheel before use be in between chuck and centre
tapped with the non-metallic handle of a (c) The cylindrical cutter set on a mandrel will be
screwdriver? only in chuck
(a) It should not be tapped as it may damage the
wheel (d) The cylindrical cutter set on a mandrel will be
within chuck and steady rest
(b) The wheel gives a ringing noise, you will
know that it is not fit for use RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
(c) It's a part of a test to check the usability of the Ans. (a) : While grinding a tooth of a cylindrical cutter
wheel set on a mandrel will be in between centers.
(d) Tapping a grinding wheel shakes any 81. You have to select a grinding wheel with
impurities out of its pores suitable abrasive to grind glass. What is the
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 type of abrasive you will select?
Ans. (c) : (a) Diamond (b) Emery
• A grinding wheel before use be tapped with the (c) Quartz (d) Silicon carbide
non-metallic handle of a screwdriver its a part of a RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
test to check the usability of the wheel.
Ans. (a) : They are used for grinding extremely hard
77. The wheel hole diameter and the grinder arbor materials such as glass carbide cutting tips, gemstones
size are not the same. What can you do to make or concrete.
the wheel workable?
(a) The wheel is not compatible with the grinder. 82. What will happen if the job is loosely fitted
Do not install it between centres in cylindrical grinding?
(b) Go ahead and install it, even if you have to (a) The job will be out of round
force the wheel onto the spindle (b) The job will be oversized
(c) Screw on the wheel nut extra tight (c) The job will be thrown out
(d) Both (b) and (c) (d) The job will not rotate
Ans. (a): When the job is loosely fitted between centers (a) 0.001 mm to 0.002 mm
in cylinder grinding the job will be out of round i.e. the (b) 0.005 mm to 0.025 mm
job will not be grounded properly in round shape. (c) 0.100 mm to 0.125 mm
83. Which one of the following precautions is (d) 0.150 mm to 0.175 mm
correct for mounting the grinding wheel on the RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
spindle of the grinding machine? Ans. (b) : For regrinding carbide tipped cutters with
(a) the wheel should slide into the spindle or diamond wheel, the depth of cut should be in the range
arbor having clearance of about 0.5 mm of 0.005 mm to 0.025 mm.
(b) make sure that wheel has paper packing on 87. The imaginary diameter which passes through
both sides around the hole the thread is ........
(c) Wheel flanges are most essential in case of (a) Major diameter (b) Minor diameter
small stones (c) Pitch diameter (d) Groove diameter
(d) Grinding wheel should be tightened in axcess RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 Ans. (c) : The imaginary diameter which passes through
Ans. (b) : Make sure that wheel has paper packing on the thread is pitch diameter.
both sides around the hole. Pitch diameter– It is a theoretical diameter between the
To mount the grinding wheel on the spindle of the major and minor diameter of screw threads.
grinding machine, ensure that the paper packing 88. Name the thread in which thread included
precaution are in place around the hole in the wheel. angle is 55º and both crest and root are in
84. What will be the setting of a taper hole more radius form.
than the width of the grinding wheel to be (a) BSW thread (b) BSF thread
ground on the cylindrical grinding machine? (c) BSP thread (d) BIS thread
(a) The job will be in a chuck of work head and RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
wheel head at required angle Ans. (a) : The principal features of the British Standard
(b) The job will be in a chuck of work head and witworth (BSW) thread form are that the angle between
wheel head at required angle the thread flanks is 55 degrees and the thread has radii
(c) The job will be in a chuck of work head and at both the roots and the crests of the thread. The
wheel is not at required angle relevant standard for this thread form is the British
standard BS84-2007.
(d) The job will be in a chuck of work head,
upper table of work head at required angle 89. Identify the form of thread shown in figure.
and wheel head is not at required angle
Ans. (d) : The job will be in a chuck of work head,
upper table of work head at required angle and wheel
head is not at required angle.
85. A H.S.S. drill of ∅30 mm has broken in a (a) Square thread (b) Worm thread
drilling operation. The damaged length from
(c) Buttress thread (d) Knuckle thread
the drill point is about 18 mm as shown in the
graphic.
Figure Ans. (b) : Worm thread– This is similar to acme
thread in shape but the depth of the thread is more than
Before regrinding to form the cutting edges, the
that of acme thread. This thread is cut on the worm shaft
damaged portion should be cut off with...
which engages with the worm wheel.
(a) hot chisel after heating the drill
90. The tool used on lathe for mass production of
(b) hack saw
'V' thread is .....
(c) slitting saw on milling machine. (a) Single point cutting tool
(d) abrasive wheel on grinding machine (b) Thread milling cutter
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 (c) Thread form tool
Ans. (d) : Abrasive wheel on grinding machine. (d) Die-heads and collapsible taps
Grinding– RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
• Grinding is an abrasive machining process that uses Ans. (d) : The tool used on lathe for mass production of
a grinding wheel as the cutting tool. 'V' thread is die-heads and collapsible taps.
• The accuracy in dimensions in grinding is of the 91. A rough turning tool is ground by hand on a
order of 0.000025 mm. pedestal grinder. After grinding it is observed
86. For regrinding carbide tipped cutters with that the ground faces of the tool are concaved.
diamond wheel, the depth of cut should be in Which one of the following statements is the
the range of.... cause for this defect?
(a) Tool rest not set to the required angle the Ans. (c) : The work or surface speed for scoring
wheel grinding is 20 to 30 m./min.
(b) Tool held in one position only against the 97. Glazing is a defect associated with:
wheel (a) Dullness of the abrasive
(c) Surface speed of the grinding wheel is not as (b) Shiny appearance of the wheel
specified (c) Both (a) and (b)
(d) The grinding is carried out on a peripheral (d) None of these
grinding wheel
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (c) : Glazing defect–
Ans. (d) : The grinding is carried out on a peripheral
1. Dullness of the abrasive
grinding wheel.
2. Shiny appearance of the wheel.
92. For balancing one of the item, it is essential to Glazing– When a surface of the wheel develops a
fix the face plate at ......... smooth and shining appearance, it is said to be glazed.
(a) live centre (b) dead centre This indicates that the wheel is blunt, i.e. the abrasive
(c) counter weight (d) angle plate grains are not sharp.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 98. Grinding ratio is defined as ................
Ans. (d) : Angle plate– Angle plate are made of closely (a) Volume of wheel wear/volume of work
grained cast iron or steel. The edges and ends are also material removed
machined square. They have ribs on the unmachined (b) Volume of work material removed/ volume of
part for good rigidity and to prevent distortion. wheel wear
93. In order to detect the cracks in a grinding (c) Cutting Speed / feed
wheel, the test adopted is…. (d) Longitudinal feed/ transverse feed
(a) hardness test (b) X-ray test RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
(c) soap water test (d) ringing test Ans. (b) :
Volume of work material removed
Ans. (d) : In order to detect the cracks in a grinding Grinding ratio =
wheel, the test adopted is ringing test. Volume of wheel wear
94. Standard wheel marking is given below. A 60 The grinding ratio is a measure of grinding production
J8 V, where the letter V represents and reflects the amount of work a wheel can do during
(a) Abrasive (b) Grain its useful file.
(c) Grit (d) Bond 99. The protection guard over the grinding wheel
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 is fixed to protect the ...........
(a) spindle of the pedestal grinder
Ans. (d) : Bond–
(b) grinding wheel
• Bond indicates the bonding material used for the
(c) work pieces
manufacturing of the grinding wheel.
(d) operator
• V-Represents
V – Vitrified, B – Bakelite, S – Silicate, E – Shellac,
R – Rubber. Ans. (d) : The protection guard over the grinding wheel
is fixed to protect the operator.
95. Aluminium oxide grinding wheels are used to
grind material of...... 100. Which bond is used in cut off wheels?
(a) Low tensile strength (a) Rubber (b) Vitrified
(b) Medium tensile strength (c) Resinoid (d) Shellac
(c) High tensile strength RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(d) Carbide tipped tool Ans. (a) : Rubber bond is used in cut off wheel.
RRB ALP Patna 2014 Rubber bond wheel–
Ans. (c) : Aluminium oxide grinding wheel are used to • For making flexible wheels.
grind material of high tensile strength. • Operates at high speeds upto 16000 ft./mm. They
Aluminium oxide– Aluminium oxide is tough and are commonly used for snagging work in foundries
fracture-resistant. It is preferred for grinding of for thin cut off wheel.
materials of higher tensile strengths like steel, high 101. The size of abrasive grain required in grinding
carbon and high-speed steel and tough bronze. wheel depends upon the–
96. The work or surface speed for cylindrical (a) Amount of material to be removed
grinding varies from: (b) Hardness of material being ground
(a) 5 to 10 m/min (b) 10 to 20 m/min (c) Finish desired
(c) 20 to 30 m/min (d) 40 to 60 m/min (d) All of these
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (b) : 106. Dressing of a grinding wheel refers to

• The grade of the wheel is a measure of the ability to (a) Restoring the cutting action of the wheel
retain grit. The hardness of the material to be (b) Shaping of the wheel
ground also affects the choice of the wheel grade or (c) Making the wheel concentric with the axis
hardness.
(d) Changing the wheel
• Hardness is rated from A-Z with 'A' being the ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
weakest bond and 'Z' being strongest.
Ans. (a) : Restoring the cutting action of the wheel. The
102. While grinding one must use dressing is the operation of cleaning and restoring the
(a) dark glass screen (b) mask sharpness of the wheel face that has becomes dull or has
(c) safety goggles (d) sun goggles lost some of its cutting ability because of loading and
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 glazing.
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 In general practice there are five means by which an
Ans. (c) : One must always use safety goggles or face abrasive wheel may be dressed.
shield while working on a grinder. Also, one should Using a suitably mounted set of steel disc or wheels.
never wear loose clothing around this machine while in With on abrasive stick.
operation. With a diamond
103. Grinding wheels become inefficient due to two Using a crush dressing mixture.
main causes, known as............ Truing– truing refers to the shaping of the wheel to
(a) dressing and glazing make it run concentric with the axis.
(b) dressing and truing Truing & dressing are done with the same tools, these
(c) loading and glazing are done not for the same purpose.
(d) truing and polishing
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 107. Which of the following cutting oil is used to
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 prevent 'clog' in fine grinding?
(a) Soluble oil
Ans. (c) : Loading and Glazing–A glazed wheel
occurs when the abrasive grains are dull. The cutting (b) Synthetic soluble oil
surface of the wheel appear shiny, loading occurs when (c) Water
foreign material becomes trapped in the void (spaces) (d) Mineral oil
between te abrasive grit. Dress the wheel when it BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
becomes 'loaded' or 'glazed'. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
When soft material like aluminium, copper, lead Ans. (b) : Synthetic soluble cutting oil which is used to
metal particles get clogged between the abrasive prevent clog in fine grinding.
particles. This condition is called loading.
108. Reconditioning of a grinding wheel is known
The effects of a glazed or loading grinding wheel are
as:
almost the same.
(a) Truing (b) Dressing
104. Which safety device is used to protect the eyes
(c) Glazing (d) Lapping
while grinding–
(a) Hand screen (b) Helmet ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020
(c) Chipping Goggles (d) Chipping Screen Ans. (b) : The dressing is the operation of cleaning and
UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018 restoring the sharpness of the wheel face that has
Ans. (c) : Chipping glasses are used to protect the eye becomes dull or has lost some of its cutting ability
while grinding. Grinding should not be done without because of loading and glazing.
personal protective equipment (PPE) and clothes. Like 109. It is required to finish grind a dia 50 mm
Goggles, Helmet, mask, Gloves, Leather Apron etc. hardened steel shaft on a cylindrical grinding
Because without using (PPE) the spark generated from machine, if the recommended surface speed of
the workpiece and the grinder gets into the eye. the work is 33 metre/min, then r.p.m of the
105. What is the reason for chattering marks on work is?
work piece after grinding : (a) 190 (b) 150
(a) Insufficient coolant (c) 210 (d) 250
(b) Too much friction between work surface and ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
wheel face Ans. (c): Diameter of shaft D = 50 mm
(c) Vibration on wheel spindle Surface speed = 33 m/min
(d) Improper dressing of wheel πDN
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 V= m / min
1000
Ans. (c) : Vibration on wheel spindle. V × 1000
In the grinding process, the chattering phenomenon N=
π× D
occurs by means of vibrations with higher magnitude
33 × 1000
close to the harmonic vibrations of the work piece and = = 210 rpm
of the grinding wheel, which compromise the quality of 22
× 50
the work piece. 7
110. Which of the following sharpness is regained Ans. (b) : The process of rapidly removing metal by
by which dresser of an abrasive wheel– using grinding without attention to the surface finish is
(a) HSS cutter with sharp edge called snagging. Snagging is the grinding of one of the
(b) Pyumis stone dresser surface of forging. Casting or welding workpiece by
(c) diamond dresser hard grinder.
(d) Tool steel dresser
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III 115. Grinding wheel in good condition makes the :
Ans : (c) Method of truing a grinding wheel is using a (a) Flat sound (b) Dull sound
diamond tool as used in the way as for dressing. (c) Ringing sound (d) Disable sound
The most popular method is form truing with a NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
crushing roll-shaped to the desired profile. IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Dressing removes the loading by breaking away the Ans : (c) Grinding wheel in good condition makes the
glazing surface so that sharp abrasive particles are again ringing sound.
presented to wheel.
111. In the grinding wheel, the commonly used 116. The process of improving cutting action of
manufactured abrasive is– grinding wheel is called :
(a) Steel alloy (b) Tin alloy (a) Dressing operation (b) Turning operation
(c) Lead alloy (d) Aluminium oxide (c) Cutting operation (d) Facing operation
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
Ans. (d) : The artificial abrasive commonly used in Ans : (a) The process of improving cutting action of
abrasive wheels is aluminum oxide. Its particles are grinding wheel is called dressing operation.
very hard, powerful, with sharp edges.
117. A 50–M 6–V 18 a characteristics of the
It is produced by heating the oxide mineral with
hydrated aluminium oxide in an electric furnace. following–
This type of abrasive particle is denoted by the later (a) Grinding wheel (b) Abrasive powder
'A'. (c) Auger Jig (d) All of the above
112. A pulley of 150mm diameter mounted on to a
motor shaft runs at 1440 rpm. Determine the Ans : (a) A 50 M 6–V18 is a characteristics of the
diameter of the pulley connected to a grinding grinding wheel. Its denoted the size of the wheel, the
wheel which runs at 2400 rpm. size of the abrasive particles, the size of the particles or
(a) 200 mm (b) 45 mm grade of grit bond and structure etc.
(c) 180 mm (d) 90 mm A – Abrasive particle
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-3-2018 50– Grade of particles
Ans : (d) M – Grade of bond
diameter of first pulley (D1) = 150 mm 6– bond
diameter of second pulley (D2) = ? 18– Suffix
Speed of first pulley (N1) = 1440 rpm 118. The hardness of a wheel is specified by–
Speed of second pulley (N2) = 2400 rpm (a) BHN (b) alphabetical letter
N D (c) LPN (d) Search test
Velocity ratio = 1 = 2
N 2 D1 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014
1440 D 2 Ans : (b) The hardness of grinding wheel is specified
= by latter of the alphabet eg. 200 × 30 × 70 A 46 L 6V
2400 150 means that is the diameter of the wheel is 200 mm and
150 ×1440 the thickness is 30 mm.
D2 = = 90 mm
2400 Aluminium Oxide
113. The operation of sharpening of a grinding Abrasive particles A
wheel is called Grite of particles 46
(a) Truing (b) Aligning Grade of bond L
(c) Dressing (d) Balancing Structure 6
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 Bond Vitrified V
Ans. (c) : The dressing is the operation of clearing and 119. Match the column for standard wheel A 60 J 6 V
restoring the sharpness of the wheel face that has List-I List-II
become dull or has lost some of the cutting ability A. Grade 1. A
because of loading and glazing. It is made by diamond, B. Grain size 2. 60
or Tungsten carbide.
C. Type of abrasion 3. J
114. The process of rapidly removing metal by using D. Number of structure 4. 6
grinding without attention to the surface finish (a) A–3, B–2, C–4, D–1
is called– (b) A–4, B–1, C–3, D–2
(a) filing (b) snagging (c) A–2, B–4, C–1, D–3
(c) chiseling (d) hobbing (d) A–3, B–2, C–1, D–4
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Ans. : (d) (a) Grade – (3) J 124. Silicon carbide wheels are best suited to grind:
(b) Grain size – (2) 60 (a) copper and aluminium
(c) Type of abrasion – (1) A (b) Carbon steels and High speed steels
(d) Number of structure – (4) 6 (c) both a and b
(d) none of these
120. Which of the following abrasive is used for
lapping of non-ferrous metals?
(a) Aluminum oxide (b) Silicon carbide Ans : (a) Silicon carbide wheels are best suited to grind
(c) Diamond (d) Boron carbide copper and aluminium or soft metals. Aluninium oxide
wheel is used for grinding on steel and wrought iron or
hard metal.
125. The aluminium oxide wheels are better suited
Ans : (a) Aluminium oxide abrasive is used for lapping
to grind:
of non-ferrous metals. There are two grades of lapping
(a) High tensile strength steels, carbon steels
powder. (i) Rough, (ii) fine, in this the lapping (b) Low strength copper and aluminium
allowance is taken from 0.005 mm to 0.01. (c) vulcanised rubber
121. Which of the following is a precision grinding (d) none of these
machine type: ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(a) Tool and cutter grinding machine Ans : (a) Aluminium oxide wheel is better and suitable
(b) Hand grinding machine for grinding high speed steel, carbon steel and high
(c) Flexible shaft grinding machine tensile strength materials because according to the rule
(d) Abrasive belt grinding machine of grinding, soft abrasive wheel is used on hard material
DRDO Machinist.2016 and hard abrasive wheel is used on soft metal or
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 material.
Ans : (a) Tool and cutter grinding machine is a 126. Which of the following abrasive is used for
precision grinding machine. lapping tungsten carbide?
According to the accuracy of the work to be done on (a) Silicon carbide (b) Diamond
a grinding machine, they are classified as rough (c) Boron carbide (d) Aluminum Oxide
grinding machine and precision grinding machines. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
The accuracy in dimensions in grinding is of the Ans : (b) Diamond abrasive is used for lapping tungsten
order of 0.000025 mm. carbide and it is a very precious stone.
122. The cutting tool with several thousands of Cubic boron Nitrate (B4C)
cutting edges is : SIC is mainly used for lapping on ceramic, CI and
(a) Lathe cutting tool (b) drill non ferrous metals.
Al2O3 is used for lapping high tensile steel and tough
(c) Grinding wheel (d) milling cutter
bronze.
127. The properties of a good abrasive material are:
Ans : (c) The cutting tool with several thousands
(a) it should have high ductility and plasticity.
cutting edges is grinding wheel. (b) it should have high hardness and toughness
123. The grade A-H of the grinding wheel (c) should have low resistance to fracture
represents: (d) easily malleable
(a) The wheel from which abrasive grains can be HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
easily dislodged ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(b) The wheel from which abrasive grains are Ans : (b) The properties of a good abrasive material are
hard to dislodge that it has property of high hardness and strength.
(c) Refers to the abrasive particle size being big Grinding wheel is a metal cutting material, which is
(d) Refers to the abrasive particle size being very hard and has the power to cut metal smoothly. It is
small called abrasive. It is of two types- (i) Natural abrasive
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 (2) Artificial abrasive
Ans: (a) The grade of the grinder wheel means how 128. Sand stone, corundum and diamond are:
strongly does the bond hold the abrasive particles (a) natural abrasives
together. That is the hardness of the wheel depends on (b) synthetic abrasives
the bond. The bond wheel. Whose wheel holds the (c) are binder material
abrasive particles for a long time is called high grade (d) none of the above
wheel, wheel which dislodged the bond particles ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
quickly, it a called soft grade wheel, it is denoted by the Ans : (a) Sandstone, corundum and diamond are natural
letter A to Z in English. abrasive. Those abrasive which are obtained from
A – H – Soft Grade mines, when are prepared without any chemical charge
I – P – Medium Grade are called natural abrasive. For example, there are sand,
Q – Z – Hard Grade corundum, emery etc.

129. The carborundum wheels are nothing but: Ans : (b) Grinder – There are small abrasive particles
(a) Silicon carbide abrasive wheels in the grinder wheel and these are the cutting particles
(b) Aluminium oxide abrasive wheels through which cutting of a job and sharpening of a tool
(c) Diamond abrasive wheels etc are used.
(d) none of the above 135. What is the difference between an abrasive and
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 a bond in a wheel called?
Ans : (a) The carborundum wheels are silicon carbide (a) Grit (b) Bond
abrasive wheels. It is obtained by chemical combination (c) Grade (d) Structure
of carbon and silicon. Generally made in electric (HAL Fitter, 2015)
furnace. Abrasive are divided into two classes.- Ans : (d) Structure–
(i) Natural The structure is indicating the average gap between
(ii) Artificial the two consecutive abrasive particles.
130. The Grip with which the bond holds the The structure of grinding wheel depends on the
abrasive is known as : hardness of grinding wheel.
(a) Grain size As the average gap is large, the number of abrasive
(b) Structure of the grinding wheel particle. Present per unit area will be small hence it
(c) Grade of the grinding wheel called open structure.
(d) Type of abrasive (i) 0–8 = Dense
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 (ii) 9–16 = Open
Ans : (c) The grip by which bond holds the abrasive is 136. What does the V stand for in the standard
called the grade of the grinding wheel. The hardness of notation WA46K5V17 written on a grinder?
the wheel of the grinding wheel is related by the bond (a) Type of abrasive (b) Structure
strength itself. (c) Type of bond (d) Main size
131. Abrasives are used in: (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001)
(a) Lathe machine (b) Mortising machine Ans : (c) The V in standard grinder terminology
(c) Drilling machine (d) Sander machine WA46K5V17 represents the type of bond.
ISRO Technician-B Carpenter 27-11-2016 A = Aluminium Oxide
Ans : (d) Abrasives are used in sander machine. Sander, 46 = Grain size-Medium
portable power tool used for smoothing, polishing or K = Grade (Medium)
clearing a surface as of wood, plastic or metal. Sander 5 = Structure (Dense)
are also used to roughen surfaces in preparation or V = Bond (Vitrified)
finishing. 137. What type of tool is a grinder?
(a) Dressing (b) Mounting
132. By which method is the grinding of lying flat
(c) Cutting (d) Hand Toll
surface done– (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(a) Cylindrical grinder (b) Surface grinder
(c) Face grinder (d) Center less grinder Ans : (c) A grinder is a type of cutting tool. There are
small abrasive particles in the wheel of the grinder and
the that particles are cut. There are two type of abrasive
Ans : (b) Surface grinding- In this grinding method, particles.
grinding of flat surface is done, in which the work piece (a) Natural Abrasive
is moved back and forth and left and right on the tables (b) Artificial or manufactured Abrasive
and grinding is done. 138. The grinding wheel is made up of which
133. Which grinder is used in the work-sections particles?
which cannot be lifted by hand to the grinding (a) Bond (b) Iron oxide
machine– (c) Abrasive particle (d) Carbon
(a) Bench grinder (b) Portable grinder BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(c) Flexible grinder (d) Center less grinder (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(IOF Fitter, 2015) Ans : (c) Grinding Wheel – The grinding wheel is
Ans:(b) Portable Grinder– Portable grinders are made up of small abrasive particles. Generally abrasive
handheld power tools that are used for grinding, cutting particles are of the following type.
or polishing. These versatile tools can be used for a (a) Silica Carbide
variety of tasks when used with the proper grinder (b) Aluminium Oxide
wheels according to the manufacture's (c) Artificial diamond
recommendations, including, removing paint, rust or 139. What are the characteristics of abrasive
mortar. particles?
134. What is the name of the tool which has small (a) Very hard (b) Ease of dressing
cutting edges? (c) Ease of cutting (d) All of the above
(a) Chisel (b) Grinder (HAL Fitter, 2015)
(c) drill (d) Hexa Ans : (d) The characteristics of abrasive particles are
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 usually very hard, easy of dressing and easy to cut.
140. Which are not natural abrasive? Ans. (b) : Specification of grinding–
(a) Emery (b) Silicon Carbide A 46 K S V – Bond
(c) Corundum (d) Sand
↓ ↓ ↓ ↓
Abrasive grain Grade Structure size
Ans : (b) Natural Abrasive– It is obtained from mines.
Natural abrasive include diamond, emery, solid quartz, Structure–
corundum and sandstone etc. Due to impurity in these 1. Open structure – 8-16 – Rough grinding
abrasives, the use are limited. 2. Dense structure – 0.7 – Finish grinding
141. Which are artificial abrasive? 146. Loading off wheel and glazing of wheel both
(a) Aluminium oxide (b) Silicon carbide defects are
(c) Emery (d) Both (a) and (b) (a) same (b) different
(RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004) (c) equal (d) All of these
Ans : (d) Maximum abrasive wheels are made of HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
artificial abrasive because these are pure. These are
made in electric furnace by which impurities are Ans. (b) : Loading of wheel and glazing of wheel are
removes. different.
• Aluminium oxide and silicon carbide are artificial Loading of grinding wheel–When chips will not find
abrasives. enough space to flow out with grinding wheel then
142. What type of abrasive is corundum? chips will get clogged within interspaces between grain.
(a) Artificial (b) Natural
(c) Casted (d) Above (a) and (b)
(NTPC Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (b) Corundum is a natural abrasive particle.
Corundum is obtained from natural mines. Corundum is
purified by artificial furnaces and used for making Glazing–When a surface of the wheel develops a
grinding wheels. smooth and shining appearance, it is said to be glazed.
143. In grinding wheel, the first symbol is the code- 147. Holding strength of wheel having abrasive
(a) Bond type (b) Abrasive particles by bond is called.
(c) Structure (d) Grain size (a) Grade (b) Structure
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (c) Flux (d) Bond
Ans : (b) Abrasive– It is in the form of small particles. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
There are very hard materials that do cutting work. Ans. (a) : Grade or strength of bond–Holding
Abrasives are used for lapping, honing, super finishing,
strength of wheel having abrasive particles of bond is
and buffing in addition of grinding action.
called grade.
There are two types of abrasive-
(A) Natural abrasive A to H – Soft grade
(B) Artificial or Manufactured abrasive I to P – Medium grade
Q to Z – Hard grade
2. Bonds and Grite 148. The wheel made of aluminium oxide is used to
grind metal having ____ tensile strength.
(a) high (b) medium
144. The fastening of metal chips to the surface of (c) low (d) All
wheel is called BEML 2022
(a) Glazing (b) Brazing
(c) Dressing (d) Loading
Ans. (a) : Aluminium oxide–It is used in grinding
process as an abrasive. It is an artificial abrasive.
Ans. (d) : Loading–The fastening of metal chips to the
• It is prepared by ore bauxite (while crystalline form).
surface of wheel is called loading.
Reason behind loading– • It is used for metal having high tensile length.
• Grinding soft material with dense structure 149. As per Indian standard the grain size 46 come
• If rpm of grinding wheel is low under which group?
• if cutting fluid is not appropriate. (a) coarse (b) medium
145. Dense structure wheel is used for (c) fine (d) very fine
(a) Ordinary (b) Finishing HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
(c) Rough (d) None of these Ans. (b) : As per Indian standard the grain size 46
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 comes under the group medium.

Size of the abrasive grain– Ans. (a) : Abrasive are divided in to two categories
Coarse Medium Fine Very fine 1. Natural–as-emery, and corundum
8 30 70 220 2. Artificial or synthetic–as
10 36 80 240 (i) Silicon carbide or corundum
12 46 900 280 (ii) Aluminium oxide or fused corundum or fused
14 54 100 320 alumina–It also made from bauxite in an electric
16 60 120 400 furnace and red-brown in colour.
20 150 500 154. The specification of a grinding wheel is "50 C
24 180 600 46 H 5 E18". What does the letter 'H' indicate?
150. The symbol conventionally used for resinoid (a) Grade (b) Grain size
bond is (c) Abrasive type (d) Structure
(a) V (b) R ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
(c) B (d) E IOCL 2020
Ans. (a) : The hardness of grinding wheel is specified
Ans. (c) : by a letter to alphabet.
Resinoid bond – B A to H – Soft grade
Verified bond – V I to P – Medium grade
Silicate bond – S Q to Z – Hard grade
Rubber bond – R
155. Which of the following is not true about a flute
Shellac bond – E
less tap?
Metallic bond – M
(a) It does not produce any chips
• Resinoid bond is used for speed where, such wheel are
used in foundries for dressing coating. They are strong (b) It provides a good surface finish
enough to withstand considerable abrasive. (c) Displacement method, is used in this process
151. A grinding wheel is marked : 51 A 46 L 5 V – (d) None of the above
23. Here what does 5 denote? ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
(a) kind of bond (b) structure Ans. (d) : Flute less tap are used for forming of internal
(c) kind of abrasive (d) grain size threads without chip removal. In contrast to
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 conventional tapping where material is cut from the
Ans. (b) : 51 A 46 L 5 V – 23 workpiece, thread forming is a pressure deformation
51 – Manufactures symbol for abrasive process without chip removal for the production of
internal threads.
A – Type of abrasive grit size
46 – Grain size 156. A soft fine grained grinding wheel is used to
L – Grade grind
5 – Structure (a) Hard & Brittle material
V – Type of bond (b) Soft & Ductile material
23 – Manufactures own mark. (c) Hard & Ductile material
152. Which statement is correct about GC 20 A 7 (d) Soft and Brittle material
EP Grinding wheel? ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
(a) Abrasive material used in mixture of A and NTPC Fitter 2016
WA Ans. (a): A soft fine grained grinding wheel is used to
(b) Grade is soft, Grit size is not fine and grind hand and brittle material.
abrasive is green silicon carbide • A hard fine grained grinding wheel is used to grind
(c) Grade is soft, bond type is metal and abrasive soft and ductile material.
is green carbide
157. Which of the following is an artificial abrasive
(d) Grade is hard, Grit size is not fine and
material used in a grinding wheel?
abrasive is black silicon carbide
(a) Corundum (b) Diamonds
(c) Silicon carbide (d) Sandstone
Ans. (b) : For grinding wheels the given designation–
GC 20 A 7 EP
• The given designation denotes that grade is soft, bond Ans. (c) : Following abrasive are used in grinding
type is metal and abrasive is green carbide. wheel.
153. Which of the following is an artificial abrasive? Natural abrasive Artificial abrasive
(a) Aluminium oxide (b) Emery Sand stone, quarts, emery, Silicon carbide
(c) Diamond (d) Corundum corundum, diamond aluminum oxide cubic
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 boron nitride

158. Which bonding material is suitable for Ans. (b) : If a hardened die block (work) is to be
grinding fine edged tools? ground, the hardness is to be retained even after
(a) Silicate bond (b) Shellac bond grinding. If workpiece material is soft then during
(c) Vitrified bond (d) Rubber bond grinding the workpiece becomes wormer and
BHEL 2020 disappeared or sent to the scrap.
163. The glazing of the wheel is done –
Ans. (a) : Silicate bond material is suitable for grinding
(a) To entrap the tiny particles of the metal being
fine edged tools.
ground on the face of the wheel
• This bonding material is used when the heat generated (b) When wheel is not balanced properly
by grinding must be kept to a minimum.
(c) When the abrasive grains come out of the
• Silicate bonding material releases the abrasive grains wheel before getting dull
more readily than other types of bonding agents. (d) When grains remain in the wheel but
• This is the softest bond in grinding wheel. sharpness is lost
159. Corundum abrasive is less harder than _____ RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
(a) silicon carbide (b) aluminium Ans. (d) : Glazing– When the cutting edge of grinding
(c) diamond (d) silver wheel takes glass like appearance i.e. sharpness is lost
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 due to wear of abrasive grains. Then it is classed
glazing.
Ans. (c) : Corundum is too hard and tough material. It
is third hardest mineral, after diamond and moissanite. 164. The name of the labeled part 'X' as shown in
It is commonly used as an abrasive material. the figure is –
Note–Hardness of mineral is checked on Mohs hardness
scale.
160. The reason of glazing in the grinding wheel is
that the –
(a) Grain size is more fine
(a) Work piece (b) Grinding wheel
(b) Wheel is hard
(c) Work rest blade (d) Regulating wheel
(c) Wheel speed is faster RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(d) All of these
Ans. (a) : In the given figure, the part 'X' is workpiece.
BDL Technician 2022
165. The selection of grinding wheel depends on
Ans. (d) : When the cutting edge of a grinding wheel which of the following characteristics ?
takes a glass like appearance due to wear of abrasive (a) Hardness of work piece
grains, then it is called glazing. It takes place when the (b) Metal to be removed
wheel is too hard, grains size is more fine and wheel (c) Desired surface finish
speed is too fast. (d) All of the above
161. It is normally seen that after prolonged usage, RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
because of either one of the following reasons, Ans. (d) : The first thing to consider when selecting a
the face of grinding wheel becomes bright and grinding wheel are–
smooth or glazes. (i) Hardness of workpiece.
Identify the correct reason. (ii) Metal to be removed.
(a) The grade of wheel is harder (iii) Desired surface finish.
(b) The abrasive work of wheel is not up to the 166. The strongest bond of the grinding wheel is
mark depicted –
(c) Grain size is more coarse (a) By 'H' grade (b) By 'A' grade
(d) The structure of wheel is more open (c) By 'Z' grade (d) By 'P' grade
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Ans. (a) : When the grade of the wheel is harder grain Ans. (c) : The bond strength or hardness of grinding
size is more fine and wheel speed is too fast. wheel is specified a letter of alphabets.
162. A hardened die block (work) is to be ground. A – H ⇒ Soft grade
The hardness is to be retained even after I – P ⇒ Medium grade
grinding. If during grinding the work piece Q – Z ⇒ Hard grade.
becomes warmer then the resultant work piece Hence 'Z' grade depicts the strongest bond of the
is disapproved or sent to the scrap. grinding wheel.
The reason of disapproval is that the surface of 167. The number of cutting edges in the grinding
work piece is – wheel is –
(a) Discoloured (b) Soft (a) One (b) Two
(c) Rough (d) Brittle (c) Zero (d) Infinite
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Ans. (d) : There is infinite number of cutting edges in 172. Which of the following is not the reason for
the grinding wheel. Grinding is an abrasive machining loading of the grinding wheel ?
process that uses a grinding wheel as the cutting tool. (a) Intensive structure
The cutting tool having thousands of abrasive gain (b) Wheel speed is more than the recommended
particles of negative rake angle. speed
168. What is symbolized by the symbols V,S,B,R (c) Feed is more
and E ? (d) Grain size of wheel and grade is not
(a) Grade of the grinding wheel appropriate
(b) Bond material
(c) Silicon carbide
(d) Grit size Ans. (d) : Loading– When the metal particles get
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 embedded in the wheel surface blocking the interspaces,
between cutting grains.
Ans. (b) : The symbols V, S, B, R and E shows the
bond type or bond material. The reason for loading–
Symbols Bond (i) Intensive structure
R – Rubber Bond (ii) Wheel speed
S – Silicate bond (iii) More feed
V – Vitrified bond (iv) Grain size of wheel and grade.
B – Resinoid bond 173. Which one is not the substance for polishing
E – Shellac bond wheel ?
M – Metal bond (a) Jute (b) Leather
169. What are the effects of using glaze or load (c) Plastic (d) Canvas
wheel ? RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(a) The finishing of surface is defective Ans. (c) : Polishing is a finishing process. In this,
(b) More heat is generated plastic is not used for making polishing wheel. It is
(c) Excessive shearing pressure between the case made of jute, leather and canvas. Abrasive are stuck on
of wheel and surface of work piece the wheel. Polishing is used to enhance the appearance
(d) All of the above of an item.
174. The balancing of wheel is done –
Ans. (d) : The effects when we are using glaze or load
(a) To make the sides of wheel parallel
wheel–
(i) The finishing of surface is defective. (b) To make it concentric to the outer diameter of
(ii) More heat is generated. the bore
(iii) Excessive shearing pressure between the case of (c) To distribute the weight uniformly on each
wheel and surface of workpiece. position of wheel
170. The open structure of the grinding wheel is (d) None of the above
represented – RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
(a) By numbers 1 – 7 (b) By numbers 8 – 15 Ans. (c) : Balancing of wheel– Due to loading and
(c) By numbers 7 – 16 (d) By numbers 8 – 14 breaking the abrasive grain weight of the grinding
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 wheel is not uniformly distributed. Hence to distribute
Ans. (b) : The structure of grinding wheel can be varied the weight uniformly on each position of wheel
by varying the % of abrasive particles and bonding balancing required. Due to unbalanced wheel vibration
material in the manufacturing of a grinding wheel when and poor surface finish occur.
higher % of abrasives and lower % of bonding material 175. The pores of a grinding wheel are clogged. This
is used at produce dense structure. is known as –
Structure is denoted by the number– (a) Turning (b) Dressing
1 – 8 ⇒ Dense (c) Loading (d) Glazing
9 – 15 ⇒ Open. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
171. If the structure of grinding wheel is more Ans. (c) : When soft materials such as aluminium
porous then, it is called –
copper, lead etc. are ground, the metal particles get
(a) Open structure (b) Intensive structure
clogged in the pores of the wheel. This condition is
(c) Close structure (d) None of the above
called loading.
Ans. (a) : If the structure of grinding wheel is more 176. Giving shape to the grinding wheel for axial
porous i.e. the average gap among the abrasive particles movement is known as –
is large. It is called open structure. (a) Truing (b) Dressing
If the average gap among the abrasive particles is very (c) Loading (d) Glazing
close (small), the structure is called dense structure. RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (a) : Truing– Truing refers to the shaping of the Ans. (d) : Abrasive is the main element of grinding
wheel to make it run concentric with the axis. In this wheel. Grinding is the process of removing metal by the
process change the shape of grinding wheel as it use of grinding wheel. The grinding wheel is made of
becomes worn due to breaking away of the abrasive and abrasive grains which forms the cutting edges in a
bond.
wheel.
177. Which of the following materials is used to
make the resinoid bond ? 183. Dressing and truing of grinding wheel –
(a) Linen (b) Resin (a) Both operation are similar to each other
(c) Flannel (d) Wooden disc (b) Both are done with the same tools and
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 equipments
Ans. (b) : In resinoid bonds resins are used as binders (c) Is only done for coarse grinding wheels
mixed with abrasive grains. This type grinding wheel (d) Is only done for firm grinding wheels
are characterized by having a good cutting performance RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
and cool grinding. It is represented by letter 'B'.
Ans. (b) : Dressing and truing of grinding wheel are
178. Which of the following tools is used for done with the same tools as diamond-pointed tool and
dressing ? equipments. Dressing is the process of improving the
(a) Wheel dresser (b) Linen
cutting action while truing is the process to change the
(c) Cotton cloth (d) Resin
shape of grinding wheel.
Ans. (a) : Wheel dresser is used for dressing of grinding 184. The tool shown in the figure is –
wheel. Dressing is the process of improving the cutting
action of the grinding wheel.
179. The minimum gap between the tool rest and
wheel should be____ mm
(a) 0.5 to 1.0 (b) 1.0 to 1.5
(c) 1.5 to 2.0 (d) 2.0 to 2.5 (a) Knurling tool (b) Diamond dresser
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 (c) Star wheel dresser (d) Boring tool
Ans. (c) : The minimum gap between the tool rest and RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
1
wheel should be inch or (1.5 to 2) mm. Ans. (c): The tool shown in the figure is a star wheel
16 dresser.
180. Truing process is done by _____ 185. Loaded wheel is repaired by a ______
(a) Silicon tool (b) HCS tool
(a) Drill (b) Dresser
(c) Diamond tool (d) HSS tool
(c) Reamer (d) Turning
Ans. (c) : Truing process is done by the diamond
pointed tool. In truing process change the shape of Ans. (b) : Loaded wheel is repaired by a dresser.
grinding wheel as it becomes worn due to breaking Dressing is the process of improving the cutting action
away of the abrasive and bond. of the grinding wheel.
181.Under which group is grain size '46' categorized186. Hard grade wheel is used for grinding ____
according to Indian standard ? metal.
(a) Coarse (b) Fine (a) Hard (b) Soft
(c) Medium (d) Very fine (c) Normal (d) All of the above
Ans. (c) : According to Indian standard, grains size 46
is categorized in medium grain. Ans. (b) : Soft wheels– It is generally used for
applications requiring low material removal rates and
1 grinding of hard materials.
Size of abrasive =
Grain size number Hard wheel– It is typically used to achieve high stock
Grain size range Grain removal rates and for grinding of soft materials.
10-24 Coarse 187. By which unit the roughness value is expressed
30-60 Medium for grinding.
80-180 Fine (a) µ m (b) µ in.
220-600 Very fine. (c) µ lbs. (d) µ ft.
182. What is the main element of grinding wheel ? RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(a) Bond (b) Rubber –6
(c) Linen (d) Abrasive Ans. (a) : Micro meter (10 m or µm) is the unit of
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 roughness in grinding.

188. Grinding fluid are used to 193. Which one the following features, refers to
(a) Reduce the friction between the wheel face vitrified bond wheels?
and the job (a) Used for longer period due to dense structure
(b) Wash away chips (b) Used for longer period due to an elastic
(c) Prevent loading of wheel structure
(d) All of the above (c) Not sensitive to shocks and pressure
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 (d) Suitable for wet and dry grinding
Ans. (d) : The use of fluids in a grinding process is RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
often necessary to cool and lubricate the wheel and Ans. (d) : Vitrified bond– Vitrified bond is comprised
workpiece as well as remove the chips and prevent of finely ground clay, feldspar and fluxed with which
loading of wheel. the abrasive is thoroughly mixed.
189. For cylindrical grinding a small diameter work Vitrified wheels are porous, strong, rigid and
with fairly large wheel, which among the unaffectedly oils, water and temperature. Hence it is
following grades of wheel should be used? suitable for wet and dry grinding.
(a) Soft (b) Medium
194. The standard size of ‘V’ belt from section ‘D’
(c) Hard (d) Very soft nominal top width is ...........
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 (a) 22 mm (b) 32 mm
Ans. (c) : For cylindrical grinding a small diameter (c) 39 mm (d) 17 mm
work with fairly large wheel, hard grades of wheel
should be used.
Ans. (b) : Nominal top width of 'V' belt for different
190. Which one of the following is NOT the cause
sections :
for glazing of wheel?
(a) Improper dressing of wheel A ⇒ 13 mm
(b) Dirty coolant B ⇒ 17 mm
(c) Hard wheel in place of soft wheel C ⇒ 22 mm
(d) Feed rate is too fine D ⇒ 32 mm
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 E ⇒ 38 mm
Ans. (a): Glazing– When a surface of the wheel 195. Name the bond which is used for heavy duty,
develops a smooth and shining appearance, it is said to large diameter wheels where a fine finish is
be glazed. Glazing is caused by the hard wheel in place required.
of soft wheel, dirty coolant and feed rate be too fine. (a) Silicate bond (b) rubber bond
191. As per Indian standards the 'M' grade of (c) vitrified bond (d) shellac bond
grinding wheel comes under the group RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(a) Soft (b) Medium Ans. (d) : Shellac bond is used for heavy duty large
(c) Hard (d) Very hard diameter wheels where a fine finish is required. It is
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 also known as elastic bonded wheels. It is denoted by
Ans. (b) : Grade of a grinding wheel represent the letter 'E'.
hardness of grinding wheel or bond strength with which 196. Organic bonded wheels can withstand ……..
the wheel holds the grain in place.
(a) rough usage (b) tool room usage
It is represented by alphabet A to Z.
(c) smooth usage (d) high capacity
A – Z ⇒ Soft grade
I – P ⇒ Medium grade
Ans. (a) : Organic bonded wheel– It is such type of
Q – Z ⇒ Hard grade. wheel, which is bonded by an organic material such as
Hence M shows medium grade wheel. resin, rubber, shellac or there similar bonding agent. It
192. A grinding wheel is marked : 51 A 46 L 5 V - is used for rough surface finish.
23. Here what does 5 denote? 197. The letter S denotes which of the following type
(a) Kind of bond (b) Structure of wheel?
(c) Kind of abrasive (d) Grain size (a) Silicate bonded (b) Shellac bonded
NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022 (c) Rubber bonded (d) Resinoid bonded
Ans. (b) : In grinding wheel 51 A 46 L 5 V -23, here 5 Ans. (a) : The letter 'S' denotes silicate bonded wheels.
represents the structure of wheel. It is made by mixing abrasive grains with silicate of
The structure is indicating the average gap between the soda or water glass. Silicate wheels are waterproofs. It
two consecutive abrasive particles. is used for grinding edged tools and operations where
1 – 8 ⇒ Dense structure. heat must be held to a minimum with or without the aid
9 – 15 ⇒ Open structure. of a coolant.

198. In marking of grinding wheels, ......... Ans. (c) : Honing– Honing process is mostly used for
compulsory symbols are used. finishing round hole. Honing is primarily used to correct
(a) 7 (b) 8 some out of roundness, taper, tool marks and axial
(c) 6 (d) 5 distortion. So more metal removed than lapping while
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 buffing and polishing are super finishing operations.
Ans. (a) : In marking of grinding wheel 7 compulsory 204. The silicon carbide abrasive is chiefly used for
grinding –
symbols are used.
(a) Cemented carbide (b) Ceramic
(c) Cast iron (d) All of these
Ans. (d) : Silicon carbide– It is less hard than diamond
and less tough than aluminium oxide. It is used for
grinding of material of low tensile strength like
199. Grinding wheels of finer grit have a .......... rate cemented carbide, stone and ceramic, grey cast iron,
of wear than grinding wheels having a coarse copper, brass, bronze, cast iron vulcanized rubber
grit. aluminium etc.
(a) Higher (b) Lower 205. The abrasive used for honing the non-ferrous
(c) Same (d) None of these metal is........
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 (a) Boron carbide (b) Diamond
Ans. (b) : Grinding wheels of finer grit have a lower (c) Silicon carbide (d) Aluminium oxide
rate of wear than grinding wheels having a coarse grit. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
200. The following operation is performed after Ans. (c) : Silicon carbide is used for honing the non-
polishing. ferrous metal.
(a) Buffing (b) Super finishing • Aluminium oxide ⇒ Steel and High tensile strength
(c) Tumbling (d) Burnishing material
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 • Silicon ⇒ Cast iron and non-ferrous meal
• Diamond ⇒ Tungsten, ceramics.
Ans. (a): Buffing operation is done after polishing. It is
a type of super finishing process. It is used to give a 206. Which one of the following is not the bonds in a
much higher, lustrous, reflective finish that can not be Grinding wheel :
obtain by polishing. (a) Vitrified bond (b) Silicate bond
(c) Shellac bond (d) Chemical bond
201. In which of the following processes , highly
polished steel balls are used instead of
abrasive? Ans. (d) : Chemical bond is not the bonds in a grinding
wheel.
(a) Honing (b) Lapping
Bonds in grinding wheel–
(c) Polishing (d) Burnishing
Vitrified bond (V), Silicon bond (S), Shellac bond (E),
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 Rubber bond (R), Metal bond (M).
Ans. (d) : Burnishing– Burnishing is a process that 207. Taps are re-sharpened by grinding ..........
modifies the finish of a surface through highly polished (a) Flutes (b) Threads
steel balls. By hitting steel balls, valleys in the metal (c) Diameter (d) Relief
surface become smooth without removal of metals. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
202. Which of the following is a surface finishing Ans. (a) : Taper pipe taps must be sharpened by
operation ? grinding the flutes. Spiral-pointed taps must be
(a) Drilling (b) Lapping reground in the angular portion of the flute as well as on
(c) Milling (d) Turning the chamfer. Smaller size of taps are generally
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 resharpened by grinding the chamfer.
Ans. (b) : Lapping– It is a surface finishing process. In 208. The tapping hole should be ...........
this process small amounts of material are removed by (a) Larger than the tap size
rubbing the work against a lap charged with a lapping (b) Smaller than the tap size
compound. It is used for refining surface finish and the (c) Equal to the tap size
geometrical accuracy of flat, cylindrical and spherical (d) Equal to the core (minor) diameter of the tap
surface. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
203. Largest amount of material is removed in Ans. (d) : The tapping hole should be smaller than tap
…….. size.
(a) Buffing (b) Lapping Tapping is the operation done for forming internal
(c) Honing (d) Super finishing threads by means of the tool called tap.
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 Tap drill size = Major diameter – Pitch

209. The size of abrasive grain required in a 215. The process in which the cut particles of the
grinding wheel depends upon the: workpiece stick to the open space of the
(a) Amount of the material removed grinding wheel is known as -
(b) Hardness of the material being ground (a) Wheel trimming (b) Wheel sizing
(c) Finish desired (c) Wheel loading (d) All of these
(d) Diameter of the workpiece RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 Ans. (c) : In loading process cut particles of the
Ans. (a) : The size of abrasive grain required in a workpiece stick to the open space of the grinding wheel.
grinding wheel depends upon the hardness of material Due to loading wheel become unbalance and decreases
being ground. Fine grain is used for hard material and cutting rate and surface finish.
course grain is used for soft material. 216. What type of abrasives is used for grinding of
210. Which among the following is the natural tough materials?
abrasive? (a) Silicon carbide
(a) Corundum (b) Diamond (b) Aluminium oxide
(c) Emery (d) All of these (c) Green silicon oxide
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 (d) Brown aluminium oxide
Ans. (d) : Natural abrasive– Emery, diamond, quartz MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
and corundum are natural abrasive. RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
Artificial abrasive– Silicon carbide and aluminium
Ans. (d): Brown aluminium oxide is used for grinding
oxide.
of tough materials.
211. In BIS system, 25 hole deviation are specified
by– 217. What kind of material can you grind with
aluminium oxide grinding wheels?
(a) Small letters
(a) Only aluminium
(b) Small letters with numbers
(c) Small letters with tolerance (b) Any types of metal
(d) Capital letters (c) Any metal with a yellow, gold or amber hue
RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008 (d) Ferrous or iron-based materials, like iron or
steel
Ans. (d) : In BIS system of limits and fits, 25 hole
deviations are specified by using capital letters.
Ans. (d) : Ferrous or iron-based materials like iron or
212. The cutoff wheels are made out of –
steel can be ground with aluminium grinding wheels.
(a) Vitrified bond (b) Silicate bond
(c) Shellac bond (d) Rubber bond 218. A grinding wheel is specified as "A46K5B17".
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 Grain size of the wheel is………..
(a) Coarse (b) Medium
Ans. (d) : Cutoff wheels are made of rubber bond.
Cutoff wheels are used to cut the work into parts. (c) Fine (d) Very fine
213. Maximum angle that can be indexed in a
direct indexing is 10 degree. What is the Ans. (b) : Specification of grinding wheel–
maximum number of division that can be "A46K5B17"
indexed? "46" shows the medium grain size
(a) 12 (b) 24 Size of the abrasive grain–
(c) 36 (d) 48 Coarse Medium Fine Very fine
RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006 8 30 70 220
Ans. (c) : Maximum 36 division that can be indexed in 10 36 80 240
a direct indexing of maximum angle 10 degree. 12 46 90 280
214. The abrasive used for grinding carbides is........ 14 54 100 320
(a) Corundum (b) Silicon carbide 16 60 120 400
(c) Tungsten carbide (d) Aluminium oxide 20 150 500
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 24 180 600
Ans. (b) : 219. What is the cause of a grinding wheel becoming
Abrasive Work material glazed in grinding machine?
Al2O3 Steel, HSS, bronze, Al (a) Grinding wheel’s grade is too soft
SiC Cast iron, hard steel, cemented (b) Grinding wheel’s grade is too large
carbide, stone and ceramic (c) Feed and traverse are less
CBN Tool steel, stainless steel, cobalt, (d) Grinding wheel’s speed is too high and work
nickel, super alloy. speed is low
Diamond Glass, tungsten carbide, ceramics RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
Ans. (d) : Glazing– When a surface of the wheel (a) Tool rest not set to the required angle
develops a smooth and shining appearance, it is said to (b) Tool held in one position only against the
be glazed. Glazing of grinding wheel is more wheel
predominant in hard wheels with higher speeds and (c) Surface speed of the grinding wheel is not as
work speed is low. It is also caused by grinding hard specified
materials on a wheel. (d) The grinding is carried out on a peripheral
220. You have to select a grinding wheel with grinding wheel
suitable abrasive to grind glass. What is the RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
type of abrasive you will select? Ans. (d): A rough turning tool is ground by hand on a
(a) Diamond (b) Emery pedestal grinder. After grinding is observed that the
(c) Quartz (d) Silicon carbide ground faces of the tool are concaved this is due to the
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 grinding is carried out on a peripheral grinding wheel.
Ans. (a) : Diamond abrasive grinding wheel is used for 225. What is the trouble when grinding wheel fails
glass grinding. to cut in a grinding machine?
221. The effect of using glazed or loaded wheel is (a) Grinding wheel's grade is too soft
(a) more heat generation (b) Grinding wheel is glazed
(b) poor surface finish (c) Grinding wheel is not securely mounted on
(c) excessive cutting pressure between the wheel spindle
face and the work surface (d) Too much feed is given
(d) all the above RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 Ans. (b) : When the cutting edge of a grinding wheel
Ans. (d) The effect of using glazed or loaded wheel is– takes a glass-like appearance due to wear of abrasive
(i) Abrasive particles become dull, so poor surface grain i.e. there is the trouble when grinding wheel fails
finish found. to cut in a grinding machine, then it is called glazing.
(ii) More heat generation. 226. Which among the following processes is
(iii) Excessive cutting pressure between the wheel employed for embedding the abrasives on the
face and the work surface. lap ?
222. Which among the following is NOT the cause (a) Lapping (b) Fixing
for loading of grinding wheel? (c) Charging (d) Rubbing
(a) Dense structure RRB ALP Patna 2014
(b) Feed too fine Ans. (c) : Charging is a process by which the abrasive
(c) Wheel speed more than recommended particles are embedded on to comparatively softer than
(d) Proper grain size and grade of wheel the components being lapped. Before starting the
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 lapping of the component, the cast iron plates should be
Ans. (c) : • Proper grain size and grade of wheel is not charged with abrasive particles.
the cause for loading of wheel. 227. Extremely fine finish by honing is ........
Cause for loading of grinding wheel– (a) 8 micro inches (b) 16 micro inches
(i) Dense structure. (c) 32 micro inches (d) 63 micro inches
(ii) Feed too fine. RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
(iii) Wheel speed more than recommended Ans. (a) : Extremely fine finish by honing is 8 micro
(iv) Material is soft. inches.
223. A grinding wheel marked with 'C' is made with Honing is an abrasive machining process used to finish
the abrasive the cylindrical surface of a metal workpiece by rubbing
(a) Aluminium oxide (b) Silicon carbide an abrasive grinding stone or grinding wheel with a
(c) Diamond (d) Corundum controlled path.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 228. The method of producing a surface is surface is
Ans. (b) : A grinding wheel marked with 'C' is made always indicated in the surface finish symbol,
with silicon carbide. indicated in the surface finish symbol, which is
Abrasive type Abrasive shown in the sketch below, Which of the
A – Aluminium oxide specification on surface finish refers to the
method of production:
B – Cubic boron nitride
C – Silicon carbide
D – Diamond
224. A rough turning tool is ground by hand on a
pedestal grinder. After grinding it is observed
that the ground faces of the tool are concaved. (a) Letter ‘‘a” (b) Letter ‘‘b”
Which one of the following statements is the (c) Letter ‘‘c” (d) Letter ‘‘d”
cause for this defect? RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
Ans. (b) : Letter 'b' refers to the method of production. 233. Which among the following is an artificial
abrasive?
(a) Aluminium Oxide (b) Emery
(c) Diamond (d) Corundum
Ans. (a): Aluminium oxide is a artificial abrasive. Its
particles are very tough, powerful and abrasive with
a ⇒ Roughness value (µ), grade symbol n, to n12
sharp edges.
b ⇒ Production method (Treatment or coating). This types of abrasive is denoted by the latter 'A' of
c ⇒ Sampling length (mm) the English alphabet.
d ⇒ Direction of lay 234. Which one of the following bonds is most
e ⇒ Machinery allowance (mm) commonly used on grinding wheels?
229. Which one of the following wheels (with grade, (a) Vitrified (b) Rubber
grit and bond) is suitable for cutter grinding? (c) Shellac (d) Silicate
(a) K60 vitrified (b) k320 vitified ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018
(c) T60 resinoid (d) T320 resinoid Ans. (a) : Vitrified bonded Wheels- Easy to form &
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 compare of clays & ceramic substances.
Ans. (a) : K60 vitrified wheels (with grade, grit and Vitrified wheels are porous, strong, rigid and
bond) is suitable fear cutter grinding. unaffectedly oils, water and temp.
230. Glazing in grinding wheels can be decreased by 235. Which abrasive is used for grinding die steel?
........ (a) Silica
(a) using a harder wheel or by increasing the (b) White aluminium oxide
wheel speed
(c) Brown aluminium oxide
(b) Using a softer wheel or by decreasing the
(d) Green silicon carbide
wheel speed
(c) Using a harder wheel or by decreasing the
wheel speed ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
(d) Using a softer wheel or by increasing the Ans. (b) : White aluminium oxide is used for grinding
wheel speed die steel.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 This is manufactured from mineral bauxite.
Ans. (b) : Glazing in grinding wheels can be decreased Aluminium oxide is tough and less brittle. It is used
by using a softer wheel or by decreasing the wheel for grinding high tensile strength material like steel.
speed. Glazing in a grinding wheel in more predominant 236. In a grinding wheel "Grade" denotes the :
in hard wheels with higher speeds. (a) Grain size (b) Type of abrasive
231. A Fine grained grinding wheel is used to grind– (c) Hardness (d) Structure
(a) Hard and brittle materials ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
(b) Soft and ductile materials Ans. (c) : Grade of Grinding Wheel-
(c) Hard and ductile materials It indicates the hardness of the grinding wheel.
(d) Soft and brittle materials The grade of the grinding wheel is selected based on
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 the mechanical properties of the workpiece material.
Ans. (a) : Fine grained grinding wheel is used to grind The soft wheel is used for grinding of hard
hard and brittle materials. workpiece.
Coarse grained grinding wheel is used to grind soft and Hard wheel is used for grinding of the soft
ductile materials. workpiece.
1 – 8 ⇒ Fine grain A-H = soft, I-P = Medium, Q-Z = Hard
9 – 15 ⇒ Coarse grain. 237. Which of the following is not a natural
232. Which one of the following materials is used for abrasive?
making a grinding wheel? (a) Diamond (b) Carborundum
(a) Silicon Carbide (b) Granite (c) Emery (d) Aluminium oxide
(c) Sand (d) Calcium Carbonate ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 Ans. (d) : Aluminium oxide is not a natural abrasive.
Ans. (a) : Silicon carbide is used for making grinding Particles of aluminium oxide are extremely hard,
wheels. powerful and sharp-edged abrasives. It is found in
Silicon carbide is a substitute for natural coroundum. various colours. Aluminium oxide is produced by
To make this an electric resistance furnance is used in heating bauxite ore with hydrated aluminium oxide in a
which a heat of more than 2400ºC can be generated. electric furnace.
238. An example of a natural abrasive is Ans. (d) : The grinding of carbon materials is done
(a) Silicon Carbide using of diamond wheel.
(b) Tungsten Carbide
(c) Corundum (d) Calcium Carbide
243. A grinding wheel is specified as :
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 W-A-60-M-V-22 :
Ans. (c): Corundum is an example of a natural abrasive. The symbol M represents :
Materials with very hard particles, naturally obtained (a) Grit size (b) Grade
directly from mines. Due to the presence of impurities (c) Structure (d) Bond type
in them, they are less useful Natural abrasives are SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
quartz, corundum, emery, etc. Ans. (b) : W-A-60-M-V-22 :
239. In a grinding wheel specification, grit size is A - Types of abrasive
indicated after 60- Grain size
(a) Abrasive type (b) Grade M- Grade
(c) Bond type V- Types of bond
(d) Wheel structure
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017244. The structure of a grinding wheel are generally
referred to as:
Ans. (a) : In a grinding wheel specification, grit size is (a) Long and short (b) Dense and open
indicated after Abrasive type. (c) Brittle and tough (d) Bright and translucent
eg.- 30A36H5V15 ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
30- Nature of wheel Ans : (b) The distance from one grit to another varies in
A- Types of Abrasive the grinding wheel. This design of the wheel is called its
36- Grain size or grit size structure.
H- Grade of bond These are of the types-
5-Structure of wheel (i) Close- 1 to 8
(ii) Open - 9 to 16
V- Types of binder
245. The open structured wheels are used to grind:
15-Reference (a) hard and brittle material
240. Grinding in steels is done using grinding wheels (b) plastic material
with abrasive as— (c) soft and ductile material
(a) Aluminium oxide (b) Iron oxide (d) Titanium material
(c) Silicon carbide (d) Iron carbide ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017Ans : (c) Open structure– Grinding wheel is used on
soft and ductile material. When the abrasive particles of
Ans. (a) : Grinding in steel is done using grinding
the wheel are for apart, it is considered and open
wheels with abrasive as Aluninium Oxide structure and when they are close together, it is fixed
Particles of aluminium oxide are very hard, powerful
from 1 to 16 numbers.
and sharp edge abrasive. There are two types of structure-
Aluminium oxide is used for grinding carbon steel,(1) Dense- 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8
mild steel, high speed steel etc. (2) Open- 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 14, 16
241. What determines the hardness or softness of an 246. The correct sequence of operations to get a
abrasive wheel? very precise hole is:
(a) Grain size (b) Bond type (a) drilling– honing–reaming
(b) drilling–reaming–honing
(c) Grade of bond (d) Abrasive type (c) honing–drilling–reaming
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 (d) drilling–lapping–honing
Ans. (c) : Hardness or softness of an abrasive wheel is ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
determined by Grade of bond Ans : (b) The current sequence of operations to get very
⇒ Grade of grinding wheel– precise hole is drilling-reaming-honing and then hole is
It indicates the hardness of the grinding wheel. first drilled by drilling, the hole is finished and cleared
by reaming, in last polished by honing.
The grade of the grinding wheel is selected based of
the mechanical properties of the work piece material.247. The structure of a grinding wheel represents:
(a) The relative spacing occupied by the abrasive
A-H = soft, I-P = Medium, Q-Z = Hard and the bond
242. The grinding of carbide materials is done (b) Represents the size of the abrasive particle
using– (c) Represents the bond used for the wheel
(a) Zirconia aluminium oxide wheel (d) None of the above
(b) Cermatic Grain Wheel ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(c) White Aluminium oxide wheel Ans : (a) The structure of a grinding wheel represents
(d) Diamond wheel the relative spacing occupied by the abrasive and the
bond, There are two types of structure-
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (1) Dense (1-8)
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I (3) Open (9-15)
248. The term 'loading' is associated with Ans : (a) The X-Ray test adopted for the detection of
(a) Drill bit (b) Milling cuttercracks in a grinding wheel. Following materials are
(c) Grinding wheel (d) Broach required to make a grinding wheel
DRDO Machinist.2016
1. Abrasive 2. Bond, 3. Grit 4. Structure
254. If the grit size of a grinding wheel is large it
Ans : (c) Grinding wheel is a type of cutting tool. indicates
Which has infinite cutting edges. Grinding wheels are (a) The abrasive grain size is Large
made by mixing abrasive grains and bonds. If the (b) The abrasive grain size is small
grinding wheel is filled with the cut particles of the Job,(c) Has no relation to abrasive grain size
due to which the grinding does not cut, this defect or (d) It indicates the diameter of grinding wheel
condition is called loading. NLC Technician 24-09.2022
249. Coolant used when abrasive is done with a DRDO Machinist.2016
diamond wheel– ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(a) Water
Ans : (b) If the grit size of a grinding wheel is large it
(b) Paraffin
(c) Equal amount of paraffin with water indicates the abrasive grain size is small. The size of
(d) Soluble oil grain of the particles is called grit. Which affects the
grinding capacity of the wheel and the surface or gain
size of the workpiece.
Ans : (c) When grinding with a diamond wheel,
255. The grade of a grinding wheel refers to:
paraffin is mixed with water in equal proportion as a
coolant. Use of the coolant prevents excessive heating (a) The hardness of the abrasive grains
of both the work-piece and the grinding wheel. This (b) The hardness with which the wheel holds the
prevents the wheel from breaking due to overheating. grains in place
250. The...........structured wheels are used for (c) Refers to the type of abrasive material used
grinding brittle materials: (d) None of the above
(a) Dense wheels (b) open wheels ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
(c) any one of the above (d) none of the above
Ans : (b) The grade of a grinding wheel refers to the
hardness with which the wheel holds the grains in place.
Ans : (a) Dense structured wheels are used for grinding
256. Abrasive particles are molded in the grinding
brittle materials. wheel with the help of–
251. The amount of material removed is greater in: (a) by Silica (b) by Ceramic
(a) drilling (b) reaming (c) by bond (d) All the above
(c) honing (d) lapping
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (c) Bond– The bond is used to bind the particles
of the abrasive together using this the abrasive particles
Ans : (a) In drilling operation, most of the material is
are joined together. Sharpening stones and grinding
removed from the work piece by cutting. More metal is
removed as compared to reaming honing and lapping. wheels are made by bond.
In drilling, preliminary hole is made on a work piece.
257. How many types of bonds are there–
The result in less material being removed. (a) V (b) B
252. The grit size of 600 indicates it can be used for: (c) E (d) All of these
(a) Coarse grinding (b) medium grinding (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
(c) fine grinding (d) very fine grinding
Ans : (d) There are mainly five types of bonds-
(1) Vitrified bond- V
Ans : (d) The size of grit of grinding wheels is
expressed in numbers, which range from 10 to 600. (2) Silicate bond- S
The number 10 means the wheel has the largest grit(3) Shellac bond- E
and 600 means the wheel has the smallest grit. (4) Rasinoid bond- B
Course Medium Fine Very Fine(5) Rubber bond - R
258. The grinder made in which bond can give high
10 30 80 220
finishing to the job–
12 36 90 240
14 40 100 280 (a) Rubber bond (b) Shellac bond
16 46 150 320 (c) Vitrified bond (d) Silicate bond
20 54 180 500 VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
24 60 200 600 Ans : (b) Shellac Bond – It's an organic bond used for
253. The test used to detect cracks in a wheel is– grinding wheels that produce. Very smooth finishes on
(a) X-Ray test (b) Wringing test parts such as rolls, camshafts and crankpins.
(c) Soap-water test (d) Hardness test Generally, they are not used on heavy-duty grinding
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 operations.
259. Bond used for making elastic grinding wheel is: Ans : (a) Glazing– When the abrasive grains of the
(a) Vitrified (b) Silicate grinding wheel wear down faster than the bond, the face
(c) Shellac (d) Resinoid of the wheel becomes shiny like glass. This is called
ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016 glazing of the wheel. This can be corrected by dressing.
Ans : (c) Shellac bond–It's an organic bond used for • This phenomena occur on grinding with hard wheel at
grinding wheels that produced very smooth finishes on high speed on hard material.
parts such as rolls, camshaft and crankpins. 265. What should be done when the wheel is loaded
In this, the abrasive particles are heated and mixed and glazed–
with the lather. Then they are pressed in a hydraulic (a) Glazing (b) Loading
machine at a certain pressure, cooled and taken out.
(c) Dressing (d) Mounting
It is denoted by the English latter 'E'.
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
260. The power of bond holding the abrasive
particles used in the wheel called as– Ans : (c) Dressing– When grinding wheels become
(a) grit (b) Bond glazed or loaded, their cutting capacity decreases.
(c) grade (d) Structure Therefore, to restore the cutting ability, the cutting edge
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006) is made using a dressing tool, it is called dressing.
Ans : (c) Grade– It is shows the hardness of the 266. The surface speed of vitrified bond wheel is :
grinding wheel. The grades range from 'A' indicating (a) 1990 RPM (b) 2090 RPM
light or soft bond to 'Z' indicating a firm or hard bond. (c) 1530 RPM (d) 2100 RPM
261. What is meant by grain size– IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
(a) Number of grains in one inch length BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(b) Number of grains in one cm length Ans : (a) The surface speed of the vitrified bond wheel
(c) Number of grains in one meter length is kept very high at 1990 RPM. Feldspar clay and quartz
(d) None of these are used in this type of bond. By mixing abrasive
(IOF Fitter, 2016) material in these, necessary shape is provided with the
Ans : (a) Grain Size– The abrasive grains used in the help of press etc.
grinding wheel are called grit. 267. Grinder used to grind parallel or taper
They are indicated by a number ranging from 10 cylindrical jobs–
(coarse) up to 600 (very fine). (a) Padestal (b) Flexible
Number of grains in one inch length represent grain (c) Cylindrical (d) Centreless
size.
262. What do you understand by A and Z grades in (IOF Fitter, 2013)
a wheel–
Ans : (c) Cylindrical Grinding- In this method,
(a) A grade is the softest grinding on cylindrical and taper surface (job) is done.
(b) Z grade is the toughest The grinding done on the taper is called Taper
(c) Both of the above Grinding.
(d) None of these 268. What are the characteristics of Silicon Carbide
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (a) Hard and brittle (b) Soft and tough
Ans : (c) 'A' and 'Z' grades in a wheel mean that 'A' (c) Very hard (d) None of the above
grade is the softest and 'Z' grade is the hardest. DRDO Machinist.2016
263. Trapping of metal particles on the surface of (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
the wheel called as– Ans : (a) Silicon Carbide– The particles of silicon
(a) Glazing (b) Loading carbide are very hard and brittle, due to which it is used
(c) Dressing (d) Mounting for grinding metals with low tensile strength. The rule
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 of grinding is that the bond of the grinding wheel used
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) for grinding hard metals are kept soft and the bond of
Ans : (d) Loading– When grinding soft materials, fine the grinding wheel used for grinding soft metals is kept
particles of these materials get trapped in the small hard.
holes of the grinding wheel, which is called loading. If 269. Which metals can be grinded in a wheel made
the speed of the grinding wheel is low and the metal is of aluminium oxide?
soft, loading defects arise. (a) High speed steel (b) Carbon steel
264. What is the reason why the abrasive particles (c) Mild steel (d) All of the Above
of the wheel wear out faster than the bond– (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(a) Glazing (b) Loading Ans : (d) High speed steel, carbon steel, mild steel high
(c) Dressing (d) Mounting tensile materials are grinded in a wheel made of
(RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004) aluminium oxide.
for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job Updates
10.
Power Transmission
Ans : (d) Power transmitted through the belt is
1. Types of drive
P = ( T1 − T2 ) V (in watts)
1. _____ is a type of positive clutch. T1 = Tension in the tight side of the belt.
(a) Fender clutch (b) Trapezoidal clutch T2 = Tension in the slack side of the belt.
(c) Dog clutch (d) Coarse clutch V = Velocity of the belt (in m/s)
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Power depends on–
Ans. (c) : Dog clutch is a type of positive clutch that 1. Difference of tensions of tight side and slack side of
couples two rotating shafts of interlocking teeth or dogs the belt.
2. Velocity of the belt.
rather than by friction.
3. Friction between pulley face and belt.
2. Spur gear is used for_______. 4. Contact angle of belt
(a) Non - parallel and intersecting shafts 5. Diameters of pulley
(b) Non - parallel and non - intersecting shafts
5. How much technically capacity chain and
(c) Non planar and non - intersecting shafts sprocket gives?
(d) Parallel and coplanar shafts (a) 50% (b) 70%
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (c) 80% (d) 98%
Ans. (d) : Spur gear is used for parallel and coplanar HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
shafts. Ans. (d) : The technically capacity of chain and
Spur gear– A spur gear is a cylindrical toothed gear sprocket is 98%.
with teeth are parallel to the shaft and is used to transfer Sprocket ratio =
mechanical motion and control speed, power and torque
Number of teeth on the driving sprocket
between shafts.
Number of teeth on the driven sprocket
3. Sprocket is a main element for_______drive.
(a) Gear drive 6. What is a thickness of one layer belt?
(b) Chain Drive (a) 2 mm to 5 mm (b) 1 mm to 3 mm
(c) Pulley system (c) 5 mm to 8 mm (d) 10 mm to 15 mm
(d) Belt drive HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Ans. (c) : Thickness of one layer belt = 5 to 8 mm.
Ans. (b) : Sprocket is a main element for chain drive. 7. Gear drive is a kind of which drive?
Chain drive– The chains are mostly used to transmit (a) Neutral (b) Negative
motion and power from one shaft to another when the (c) Positive (d) All of these
centre distance between their shafts is short. NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
• Chain drive is a positive drive. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
• A chain drive transmits more power as compared to Ans. (c) : Gear drive is used for heavy power
belt drive. transmission. It is a positive drive, gear transmits
4. Power transmitted through the belt depends motion by pure rolling at pitch point but actual partial
on– rolling and sliding both occur.
(a) Products of tensions of tight side and slack
side
(b) Sum of tensions of tight side and slack side
(c) Half of sum of tensions of tight side and
slack side ω2 r1 N 2 T1
(d) Difference of tension of tight side and slack = = =
ω1 r2 N1 T2
side
Power Transmission 549 YCT
8. What is the yield strength of a 12.9 grade bolt 12. Shaft fitted on the gear by key (saddle)
material. (a) Permits the axial movement of gear on shaft
(a) 1200 MPa (b) 900 MPa (b) Permanent joint is between a gear and a shaft
(c) 1080 MPa (d) 300 MPa (c) Meshing thread is used between hub & shaft
BEML 2022
(d) Power transmission between gear & shaft is
done
Ans. (c) : Grade 12.9 Hex bolt are high strength bolt
with 1100 MPa or ≈ 1080 MPa minimum yield strength
and 1220 MPa minimum tensile strength. IOCL 2020
9. In open belt drive, the driver pulley of 100 mm Ans. (d) : Key is used to transmit power between gear
is rotating with 1400 rpm. Find the diameter of and shaft.
driven pulley rotating with 3500 rpm. • It is made of plain carbon steel.
(a) 250 mm (b) 100 mm • It can withstand shear & compressive stress.
(c) 40 mm (d) 140 mm 13. Which belt drive is used for joining belts for
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 industrial purpose?
Ans. (c) : Diameter of driver pulley (d1) = 100 mm (a) Legrelle type belt fastener
Speed of driver pulley (N1) = 1400 rpm (b) Alligator type belt fastener
Speed of driven pulley (N2) = 3500 rpm (c) Crescent plate type belt fastener
Diameter of driven pulley (d2) = ?
(d) Wire type belt fastener
Formula,
N 2 d1
= Ans. (b) : Conveyor type belt is used in industrial
N1 d 2 purpose. It's belt both ends are joined by alligator type
3500 100 belt fastener.
= • Alligator type belt fastener is more popular for both
1400 d 2
ends join of belt.
d2 = 40 mm
• It is a comb type fastener which is used to both end of
10. Which of the following drive provides zero
belt joined with the help of wire in putting middle of
slip?
comb.
(a) Rope drive
(b) Chain drive 14. What is the result of slip of belt in a system?
(c) Friction drive (a) Increased efficiency
(d) Belt drive (b) Reduction in velocity ratio
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 (c) Increase in velocity ratio
Ans. (b) : Chain drive– (d) No effect
• It is mostly used to transmit power & motion from one RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
shaft to another when the centre distance between shafts Ans. (b) : Slip–It is defined as insufficient frictional
are small. grip between pulley (driver/driven) and belt.
• Because of having no slip, perfect velocity ratio is • It is the difference between the linear velocities of
obtained & that's why it is called as positive drive.
pulley and belt.
11. Which of the following is definite loss of
• When slip is occur in the belt then velocity ratio is
crossed belt drive?
decrease and efficiency is also decrease.
(a) It provides comparatively high contact angle
• Velocity ratio of the belt drive–
(b) It produces rotation in opposite direction in
driven pulley NL ds + t
= (1 − S)
(c) Its belt can be made of rubber NS d L + t
(d) Due to this arrangement rubbing occurs at the
Where, NL = speed of larger pulley
point where the belts cross each other
JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021 NS = speed of smaller pulley
Ans. (d) : Cross belt drive is used with shafts arranged t = thickness of the belt
parallel and rotating in opposite direction. Main loss of S = Slip in the belt in percentage
this cross belt drive is due to this arrangement rubbing dS = diameter of the smaller pulley
occurs at the point where the belt crosses each other. dL = diameter of the larger pulley

15. The toughness of hemp and manila causes the • In India, more than 90% of the motorcycles running
ropes to be – on road transmit the power to the rear wheels via a
(a) inflexible 'chain drive'.
(b) have less mechanical properties • Chain drive requires two sprockets, one on the output
(c) both (a) and (b) shaft of the transmission and the other on the wheel, just
(d) none of the above like a cycle.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 • The sprocket size differs, depending upon the engine's
power and torque output.
Ans. (c) : Hemp rope is a natural rope made from hemp
plant. Industrial hemp is a sustainable and eco-friendly 19. In a 'V' belt, the angle between the side is
material. ..........
• Manila ropes is manufactured from manila hemp. (a) 10° (b) 20°
• Hemp and manila ropes are more durable than other (c) 30° (d) 40°
types of rope. NCVT-2016
• Hemp and manila ropes have more toughness because Ans. (d) : The angle between the side of 'V' belt is 40°.
it is made by natural fibre so it have inflexible and less • V-belt is a flexible and efficient power transmission
mechanical properties. device capable of transferring power from one shaft to
16. Which ropes are commonly used in elevators? another.
(a) Wire ropes (b) Cotton ropes • The unique shape of V-belts helps them fit tightly and
(c) Manila ropes (d) None of the above snugly into the grooves of a sheave, giving them
additional surface contact and increased stability.
NTPC Fitter 2016
V-belt failure–
1. Tensile break
Ans. (a) : Steel wire ropes are commonly used in
2. Glazing
elevators.
3. Cracking
• The raw material for steel wire is an alloyed carbon
4. Separation.
steel with carbon content of 0.4 or better 0.6 to 0.8% by
weight. 20. Name the belt drive shown in figure.
• The nominal tensile strength of wire rope has broad
limits.
• Steel wire ropes are also used in crane, lift etc.
17. Which material is used for making wire ropes
to increase their strength?
(a) Tin (b) Wrought iron
(c) Cast iron (d) Both (a) and (b)
Ans. (d) : Tin and wrought iron are used for making
wire ropes to increase their strength. (a) Stepped drive (b) Right angled drive
• Wire ropes are normally made of high strength non- (c) Open belt drive (d) Cross belt drive
alloy carbon steel.
BHEL 2020
• The steel rods from which the wires are drawn on cold NCVT-2016
rolled.
Ans. (c) : Above figure is shown the open belt drive.
• The rods for rope wire have high carbon content of
Open belt drive–It is simple type of belt drive where
0.4-0.95%.
two or more pulleys are connected with a belt wrapped
18. Which drive is used to transmit power in around them.
bikes? • When power is supplied to the driving shaft, it rotates
(a) Belt drive the driving pulley.
(b) Rope drive • The belt moves with it and rotates one or more driven
(c) Both (a) and (b) pulleys.
(d) Chain drive 21. The belt slips due to ..................
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (a) less tension (b) misalignment
Ans. (d) : Chain drive is used to transmit power in (c) pulsating load (d) high starting torque
bikes. NCVT-2016
Ans. (c) : The belt slips due to pulsating load. When Ans. (c) d1 denote the diameter of larger pulley
transmit load is not continuous then slip generated. (driving) in cross belt drive.
• A firm frictional grip between belt and pulley or shaft
is essential. But sometimes it becomes insufficient. This
may cause some forward motion of the belt without
carrying the driven pulley with it, is called slip of the
belt.
• Static friction is always greater than kinetic friction
irrespective of slipping or non-slipping.
• Slipping reduces speed and torque.
• Slippage of the belt is less in the V-type belt with the
respective pulley.
22. The standard size of 'V' belt from section 'D'
nominal top width is ...............
(a) 22 mm (b) 32 mm
(c) 38 mm (d) 17 mm
NCVT-2016
Ans. (b): The standard size of 'V' belt from section 'D'
nominal top width is 32 mm.
Standard V-belt dimensions– Length of belt (in case of open belt drive)–
( d + d2 )
2
Designation Top width Height (mm) π
(ISO) (mm) L= (d1 + d 2 ) + 1 + 2x
2 4x
Z 10 6
where, d2 = diameter of smaller pulley (driver)
A 13 8 x = distance between centers of pulley
B 17 11
26. Why is initial tension given to the belt drives?
C 22 14 (a) To rotate the shaft
D 32 9 (b) To reduce its speed
E 38 23 (c) To avoid slippage
23. Which of the following is a types of belt drive? (d) None of the above
(a) Light drive (b) Medium drive BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) Heavy drive (d) All of the above Ans. (c) : Initial tension is given in belt drives to avoid
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 slippage.
Ans. (d) : Types of belt drives on the basis of belt • Belt slipping is to reduce the velocity ratio of the
speed/loads– system.
1. Light drive (Belt speed up to 10 m/s) • Slipping of the belt is a common phenomenon, thus
2. Medium drive (Belt speed up to 10 m/s to 22 m/s) the belt should never be used where a definite velocity
3. Heavy drive (Belt speed up to 22 m/s) ratio.
24. Which material is used for making balata 27. What is used to transmit power in belt drives?
ropes? (a) Chain (b) Rope
(a) Jute (b) balata gum (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Belts
(c) cotton (d) hemp RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
BDL Technician 2022 Ans. (d) : Belts is used to transmit power in belt drive.
Ans. (b) : Balata ropes are made by material of balata • The amount of power transmission depends upon the
gum. following factors–
• It generally works at a temperature below 40° for 1. Velocity of belts
optimum use. 2. The tension under which the belt is placed on the
25. What does d1 denote in a cross belt drive? pulley.
(a) Diameter of small pulley 3. The arc of contact between the belt and the smaller
(b) Thickness pulley.
(c) Diameter of large pulley T1
(d) None of the above = eµθ
T2
28. Belt drives are used when the ................ 33. Which type of belt has teeth cut on its inner
between two pulleys is large. surface?
(a) distance (b) radius (a) V-belt (b) Circular belt
(c) tension (d) force (c) Synchronous belt (d) Ribbed belt
Ans. (a): Belt drives are used to large distance between Ans. (c): Synchronous belt has teeth cut on its inner
two pulleys.
surface.
• Belt drive is one of the most popular types of power
• It is flexible belt with teeth moulded onto its inner
transmission methods besides gears, chain drives, shaft
couplings and lead screws. surface.
• It is also known as toothed belt, timing belt, cogged
29. Which type of belt drive is used in compressors
and generators? betl, cog belt.
(a) Light drives (b) Heavy drives 34. Materials used for making belts should be –
(c) Medium drives (d) None of the above (a) strong (b) flexible
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 (c) durable (d) all of the above
Ans. (b) : Belt drive is used in heavy drives like as RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
compressors and generators. Ans. (d) : Materials used for making belts should be
• Belt drives are commonly used in a wide variety of strong, flexible and durable.
applications such as in automobiles, conveyor and • Materials used for belts–Leather belts, cotton or fabric
power transmission systems. belts, rubber belts and batala belts.
30. Which of the following belts has rectangular 35. Which fabric belts are more suitable in hot
cross-section? climate?
(a) V-belt (b) Circular belt (a) Leather (b) Cotton or fabric
(c) Flat belt (d) Ribbed belt
(c) Rubber (d) Balata
Ans. (c) : Flat belt has rectangular cross-section.
Ans. (b) : Cotton or fabric are more suitable in hot
• It is used to moderate power transmission.
climate.
• It is used to connect larger distance between two
pulley up to 15 m. • The fabric belts are made by folding and stitching
together multiple layers of cotton canvas.
• Fabric belts are impregnated with some filler in order
to make the belts water. Proof and to prevent damage to
the fibers.
• Cotton belts are cheaper and are suitable for
applications involving damp atmospheres, warm
climates and exposed conditions.
36. Balata belts are ............. and waterproof.
(a) oilproof (b) corrosion resistant
31. What is the efficiency of a flat belt? (c) both (a) and (b) (d) acidproof
(a) 44% (b) About 63% RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(c) 28% (d) About 98% Ans. (d) : Balata belts are acidproof and waterproof.
• It's belt is not affected by animal oils and alkalis but
Ans. (d) : Efficiency of a flat belt is about 98%. affected by mineral oils.
• Flat belt drive is one where in the width of the belt is
larger than the thickness. 37. The important criteria for selection of the type
of belts is –
32. What is the shape of cross-section of circular
(a) type of pulley
belt?
(a) Rectangular (b) Circular (b) amount of power
(c) Triangular (d) Square (c) environmental factors
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (d) none of the above
Ans. (b) : The cross-section of circular belt is circular. RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
• It is also known as endless round, endless drive and O Ans. (c) : The important criteria for selection of the
ring type belts. type of belts is environmental factors.

Selection of belt drive– 40. Generally flat pulley have a crown to run the
1. Speed of the driving and driven shafts. belt centrally. In this figure, pulley driver A is
2. Speed reduction ratio. not crowned. Why ?
3. Power to be transmitted.
4. Center distance between the shafts.
5. Positive drive requirements.
6. Shafts layout.
7. Space available
8. Service conditions.
38. What is the other name for stepped belt drive?
(a) Jockey belt drive
(b) Right angle belt drive
(c) Cone pulley belt drive
(d) Loose pulley belt drive
Ans. (c) : Stepped belt drive is also known as stepped
cone pulley drive. (a) For slipless belt drive
• This type of belt drive uses a driven pulley with (b) For shifting belt drive
multiple diameters. (c) For centrifugal belt drive
• This drive is used when the driven shaft needs to be (d) For friction more belt drive
rotated at different speeds. RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
• Speed of the driven shaft can be increase or decreased
Ans. (b) : Generally flat pulley have a crown to run the
by shifting the belt to a smaller or larger diameter step
belt centrally. In this figure, pulley driver A is not
on the pulley respectively.
crowned because the belt is shifted to another belt drive.
• Applications–Lathes, drilling machines.
41.Due to continuous rubbing of the belt on the
39. The figure below is an open belt drive.
surface of the pulley, belt gets dried up due to
friction and heat generated. This causes the
belt to slip. Which one of the following material
is applied on the inner face of the belt for
reducing belt slip ?
(a) Emery or corundum
(b) Tallow or powdered resin
The equation of velocity ratio in open belt
drive, if there is not slip and creep in the (c) Nylon or Teflon
transmission..... (d) Zinc or chalk powder
(a) N1/D1 = N2/D2 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(b) N1/D1 = D2/N2 Ans. (b) : Tallow or powdered resin is used to inner
(c) N1/N2 = D2/D1 face of the belt for reducing belt slip.
(d) N1/N2 = D1/D2 • This material reduced dryness of belt due to friction
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 and heat generated.
Ans. (c) : • This material is used, to stop the rubbing of the belt on
• Velocity ratio is the ratio of velocities of driven to surface of the pulley.
driver. 42. Which hoisting mobile equipment is used for
N output N driven self loading and shifting them to different
V.R. = = places in a factory?
N input N driver
(a) Jib crane (b) Fork lift
N 2 D1 (c) Chain hoist (d) Gear hoist
V.R. = =
N1 D 2 RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
N D Ans. (b) : The fork lift is a small 4-wheeled vehicle.
or V.R. = 1 = 2 • Gasoline, propane or electric engines provide power to
N 2 D1
it.

• Heavy counter weights are fitted to the rear of the Ans. (b) : Bending of a rope is known as bight.
units. • A bight is a bend in the rope where the line comes
• The front of the machine has two steel lifting arms or back on itself but doesn't cross over itself.
forks. • It is usually taken out of the center of the rope.
• The forks are spaced to balance the load and are • In loop, rope is cross over itself.
adjustable. 46. Which among the following is made by crossing
• It is used for lifting loads and shifting them to the sides of bight ?
different places in a factory. (a) Round turn (b) Whipping
43. If the chain has an even number of pitches (c) Loop (d) Knot
(space between links) the sprockets have an RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
odd number of teeth and vice versa. Why the Ans. (c) : Loop–In contrast with a bight, a loop is a turn
pitches of chain and teeth of sprockets are in the rope where the lines cross over each other.
matches with odd and even number and vice • When tying a bowline, the first step is to make a loop.
versa. • The line crosses over each other and held between the
thumb and second finger.
(a) This prevents different chain pitch contacting

with same tooth in each time
(b) This provides a single chain pitch contacting
47.
A tripod consists of three legs, which are locked
with same teeth in each time
in position at the bottom by
(c) This prevents a single chain pitch contacting (a) Foundation bolts (b) Wire ropes
with same tooth each time
(c) Retaining chains (d) Clamps
(d) This provides same chain pitch contacting
with same tooth each time
Ans. (c) : A tripod consists of three legs, which are
locked in position at the bottom by retaining chains.
Ans. (c) : The pitches of chain and teeth of sprockets
48. Which one of the following cranes is used for
are matches with odd and even number and vice versa
lifting loads and transport to another location?
because this prevents a single chain pitch contacting
(a) Overhead crane
with same tooth each time.
(b) Traveling wall crane
44. Which one of the following groups of
(c) Pillar gib crane
properties enables the manufacture of chain
(d) Gantry crane
hooks from wrought iron ?
(a) Ductility, malleability and hardness
Ans. (a) : Overhead crane is used for lifting loads and
(b) Hardness, toughness and ductility
transport to another location.
(c) Malleability, ductility and toughness
• It is a type of heavy duty machinery that is capable of
(d) Hardness, toughness and brittleness
moving extremely heavy loads and equipment from one
location to another location.
Ans. (c) : Wrought iron has malleability, ductility and
• It is a safe and precise manner using overhead space of
toughness properties, so chain is manufactured bya manufacturing facility.
wrought iron. 49. A differential hoist is made with
45. Bending of a rope is known as (a) One sheave on the upper block and one
(a) Round turn (b) Bight sheave on the lower block
(c) Loop (d) Knot (b) One sheave on the upper block and two
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 sheaves on the lower block
(c) Two sheaves on the upper block and one Ans. (c) : Pulleys are made a slightly convex surface in
sheave on the lower block belt drive. This convex surface is called crown.
(d) Two sheaves only on the lower block • The rim of the pulley of a flat belt drive is slightly
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 crowned to prevent the slipping off the belt from the
Ans. (c) : A differential hoist is made with two sheaves pulley.
on the upper block and one sheave on the lower block. • If a pulley is made up of two equal cones or convex
surface, the belt will tend to climb on the slope and will
run with its center line on the mid-plane of the pulley.
50. Chain slings are used for 53. Which one of the following statements is NOT
true about timing belts?
(a) Light loads (b) Heavy loads
(a) They make too much noise
(c) Medium loads (d) None of the above
(b) They are toothed belts
(c) There is no slippage
Ans. (b) : Chain slings are used for heavy loads and (d) The driving and driven shafts remain
bulky loads on a regular or repetitive basis. synchronized
• Their flexible design provides strength and durability RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
so they can withstand impact, extreme temperature and Ans. (a) : Timing belt–It is a toothed belt.
exposure to chemicals and UV rays.
• The teeth are mounted on to inner surface of belt.
• It is used high temperature applications. • It is used to synchronize the rotation of the crankshaft
• It is used in foundries, steel mills, heavy machine and the camshaft.
shops. • This belt is used for no slippage.
51. Rope slings are used for • This belt is used due to less noise.
(a) Light loads where chain may damage the 54. Which one of the following belt materials can
loads withstand acidic and wet conditions?
(b) Heavy loads (a) Leather (b) Balata
(c) Both of the above (c) Cotton (d) Rubber
(d) None of the above RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 Ans. (b) : Balata material is used to make belt
Ans. (a) : Rope slings are used for light loads where withstand acidic and wet conditions.
chain may damage the loads. • Balata belts work at a temperature below 40º for
• Rope slings should be given a visual inspection before optimum use.
each lift or usage to determine if it is capable of safety • Balata is a vegetable gum, extrude as sap from trees.
making the intended lift. • Balata belts are 20% stronger than rubber belts.
• Inspection of rope slings before used– • Balata belts having great toughness, less elastic than a
1. Broken wires rubber belt and fully acid and water proof.
2. Kinks or distortions of the sling body 55. In a belt drive, the outer surface of the pulley is
made in convex form. Which one of the
3. Reduction in diameter of the rope
following statements is NOT true about this
4. Any damage convex surface?
5. Corrosion. (a) It is called crown
52. In belt drive, pulleys are made a slightly convex (b) It keeps the belt in the centre when it is in
surface (rather than flat). This convex surface movement
is called (c) It causes excessive belt wear
(a) hump (b) peak (d) It prevents the belt from slipping from the
(c) crown (d) spot edge of the pulley
Ans. (c) : Outer surface of the pulley is made in convex • There is no possibility of slipping in this type of
form in a belt drive this convex surface is called crown. clutch.
Crowning on pulley • This clutch is used in stable mesh gear box with or
• To keep the belt in the center when it is in movement. without the synchronized unit.
• To prevent the belt from slipping from edge of the 59. In which of the flowing drives, there is no slip ?
pulley. (a) Open belt drive (b) Crossed belt drive
56. To convert the linear motion of the plunger of a (c) Rope drive (d) Chain drive
dial test indicator to the rotary motion of the RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
pointer, which one of the following mechanism Ans. (d) : Chain drive is positive drive. There is no slip.
is used? • Chain and sprocket mechanism are used to transmit
(a) Quick return mechanism the power by engaging the teeth of the sprocket with
(b) Rack and pinion mechanism gaps in the chain.
(c) Screw thread mechanism • As the distance of transmission is more in the case of
(d) Hydraulic mechanism bicycle motorcycle and chain drives are used for
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 transmission of power.
Ans. (b) : Rack and pinion mechanism–It is used to 60. An open belt drive is used when….
convert the linear motion of the plunger of a dial test (a) Driven shaft is to be started or stopped
indicator to the rotary motion of the pointer. whenever desired without interfering with the
• The flat, toothed component is known as rack and driving shaft
other component is pinion. (b) Shafts are arranged parallel and rotate in the
same directions
• Rack and pinion mechanisms are used in machine
tools, pick and place mechanisms gantry machines. (c) Shafts are arranged at right angles and rotate
in one definite direction
57. In which clutch, the pressure plate is used ?
(d) Shafts are arranged parallel and rotate in the
(a) Multiple plate clutch (b) Dog clutch opposite directions
(c) Over riding clutch (d) Centrifugal clutch RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 Ans. (b) : An open belt drive is used when shafts are
Ans. (a) : Pressure plate is used in the multiple plate arranged parallel and rotate in the same directions.
clutch. • It is a simplest type of belt drive where two or more
• Multiple plate clutch is a detailed version of single pulleys are connected with a belt wrapped around them.
plate clutch, in which quantity of pressure plates and 61. Which of the following statements are false for
friction plates is more. belt drives?
• Multiple plate construction is similar to that of single (i) Belt drive is used in power transmission
plate clutch, but it has two sets of friction plates. (ii) Belt drives can be used at extremely high
• One set of plates move in slots of flywheel and other speeds
set of plates move in slots of pressure plates. (iii) Belt drives have low power transmitting
58. What is the function of Dog clutch? Capacity
(a) It can be engaged progressively when one or (iv) Belt drives need continuous lubrication
both the elements are rotating (a) (i) and (ii) (b) (i), (ii) and (iii)
(b) It can only be engaged when two elements of (c) (ii), (iii) and (iv) (d) (ii) and (iv)
the clutch are stationary RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
(c) When the speed is reduced the clutch opens Ans. (d) : Application of belt drive–
by itself • A belt drive is used for transferring the power.
(d) Contact force is produced by springs • The belt drive is powered by only a single belt.
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 • The belt drive does not require lubricating system.
Ans. (b) : Main function of dog clutch is engaged two • Difficult to repair if damaged.
elements of the clutch which are stationary. • The belt drive is quieter as compared to the chain
• This type of clutch is used to lock two shafts with each drive.
other. 62. Determine power rating of an electric motor if
• When the sleeve spline slides on the shaft then its it runs at 1440 r.p.m and line shaft transmits
inner teeth matches with the teeth of driving shaft and torque of 75 Nm. Assume Reduction ratio =
clutch gets engaged. 1.6:

(a) 10.36 kW (b) 11.3 kW Ans. (a) :

(c) 7.068 kW (d) 9.12 kW
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (c) : Given that–
Input speed (NI) = 1440 rpm
Reduction ratio = 1.6
Output speed (No)
NI 1440
= = = 900 rpm
Reduction ratio 1.6
Torque (T) = 75 Nm
2πN O T
∴ Power (P) =
60
2π × 900 × 75
=
60 ∆ABC:
= 7068.58 watt = 7.068 kw P
 180  BC
63. Power = Torque × ….. sin  = = 2
(a) Velocity (b) RPM  N  AC PD
(c) Force (d) Area 2
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005  180  P
sin  =
Ans. (b) : Power = Torque × angular velocity  N  PD
P = T. ω P
PD =
2πNT  180º 
P= sin  
60  N 
2π where, PD = pitch diameter
If is constant numerical value then,
60 P = Pitch
P=N×T N = No. of teeth on sprocket.
Power = Torque × RPM 66. Lead of the Cam is …………….. .
64. The diameter across to the pitch circle which is (a) Fall of the Cam in one revolution
the circle, followed by the centers of the chain (b) Rise of Cam in one revolution
pins as the sprocket revolves in mesh with the (c) Rise or fall of Cam in one revolution
chain is known as : (d) None of these
(a) Hub diameter (b) Bottom diameter RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Outside diameter Ans. (c) : Rise or fall of Cam in one revolution is called
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 lead of the cam.
Ans. (c) : The diameter across to the pitch circle which • Cam size depends upon base circle.
is the circle, followed by the centers of the chain pins as • The base circle is the smallest circle tangent to the
the sprocket revolves in mesh with the chain is known cam profile and concentric with the cam.
as pitch diameter. • Profile is the surface area of a cam where the follower
• It is the diameter of pitch circle. touches.
D 67. If a cam has a fall of 10 mm in 100º of its angle,
Module (m) = (in mm)
T then lead of the cam is ………….. .
Where, D = pitch diameter = distance between adjacent (a) 10 mm (b) 36 mm
centers of chain pins (c) 45 mm (d) 18 mm
T = No. of teeth on sprocket. RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
65. The relation between the Pitch (P), Pitch Ans. (b) : Fall of cam = 10 mm at 100º angle.
diameter (PD) and no. of teeth on the Sprocket Lead of cam = Rise or fall of cam in one revolution
(N), then the Pitch diameter (PD) is given by: ∵ 100º angle = 10 mm fall of cam
(a) P/sin (180º/N) (b) P/cos (180º/N)
10
(c) P/tan (180º/N) (d) P/cot (N/180º) 1º = mm
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 100

10 Ans. (d) : A cam basically imparts the following

1 rev. or 360º = × 360 = 36 mm motions–
100
1. Rotating motion
Lead of cam = 36 mm
2. Oscillating motion
68. The motion of the follower in a cylindrical cam 3. Reciprocating motion
is ………… . 4. Translational motion.
(a) Reciprocates or oscillates in a direction 72. Involute profile is preferred to cycloidal
perpendicular to the cam axis because:
(b) Reciprocates or oscillates in a direction (a) The profile is easy to cut
parallel to the cam axis (b) Only one curve is required to cut
(c) Both (a) and (b) (c) The rack has straight line profile and hence
can be cut accurately
(d) None of these
Ans. (b) : The motion of the follower in a cylindrical Ans. (b) : Involute profile is preferred to cycloidal
cam is reciprocates or oscillates in a direction parallel to because only one curve is required to cut.
the cam axis. • Involute is a curve generated by point on a tangent
• In a cylindrical cam, a cylinder which has a which rolls on a circle without slipping.
circumferential contour cut in surface, rotates about its 73. Which drill wheel is used for large speed
axis. reduction and torque transmission?
• It is also known as barrel or drum cams. (a) Belt drill
(b) Chain drill
69. The arc distance measured along the pitch
(c) Rack and pinion
circle form its intercept with one flank to its
(d) Worm and worm wheel
intercept with the flank of same tooth is known
as ………. .
Ans. (d) : Worm and worm wheel is used for large
(a) Depth of the gear tooth speed reduction and torque transmission.
(b) Thickness of the gear tooth • It is used in drilling, automatic door system, steering
(c) Pitch circle radius system.
(d) None of these 74. A cam operating roller has the following
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 dimensions, radius of base and nose circle as 15
mm and 10 mm respectively and distance
Ans. (b) : The arc distance measured along the pitch between them is 8 mm. Determine lift made by
circle form its intercept with one flank to its intercept the follower.
with the flank of same tooth is known as thickness of (a) 5 mm (b) 12.5 mm
the gear tooth. (c) 3 mm (d) 17 mm
70. On the basis of shapes, the cam can be: RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
(a) Radial or disc cam (b) Cylindrical cam Ans. (c) : Given that–
(c) Translating cam (d) All of these Base circle radius = 15 mm
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 Nose circle radius = 10 mm
Minimum radius of cam = Base circle radius – Nose
Ans. (d) : Types of cam–According to shape; circle radius
1. Wedge and flat cams = 15 – 10 = 5 mm
2. Radial or disc cams Lift of follower = (Distance between rotation of cam
3. Spiral cams axis and follower) – (Minimum radius of cam)
4. Cylindrical cams = 8 – 5 = 3 mm.
5. Translating cams 75. The size of a cam depends upon ……
6. Conjugate cams (a) Base circle (b) Pitch circle
(c) Prime circle (d) Pitch curve
7. Globoidal cams.
71. A cam basically imparts the following motions: Ans. (a): The size of a cam depends upon base circle.
(a) Rotating (b) Oscillating • Base circle is the smallest circle tangent to the cam
(c) Reciprocating (d) All of these profile drawn from the center of rotation of a radial
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 cam.

76. The angle between the direction of the follower 1 πω

motion and a normal to the pitch curve is Vmax = H
2 β
called ….. 2
(a) Pitch angle (b) Prime angle 1  πω 
a max = H
(c) Base angle (d) Pressure angle 2  β 
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 H = Total follower rise (Stroke)
Ans. (d) : The angle between the direction of the β = Angular rotation of the cam corresponding to the
follower motion and a normal to the pitch curve is total rise of the follower.
called pressure angle. 79. The pressure angle of a cam depends upon
• It represents the steepness of the cam profile. ……
• It varies in magnitude at all instants of the follower (a) Offset between centre lines of cam and
motion. follower
77. The cam follower generally used in automobile (b) Lift of follower
engines is …… (c) Angle of ascent
(a) Knife edge follower (d) All of the above
(b) Flat faced follower RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(c) Spherical faced follower Ans. (d) : The pressure angle of a cam depends upon–
(d) Roller follower • Offset between centre lines of cam and follower
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 • Lift of follower
Ans. (c) : The cam follower generally used in • Angle of ascent
automobile engines is spherical faced follower. • Steepness of the cam profile.
• In a spherical follower, the spherical surface is in 80. Which of the following lathes is operated
contact with the cam. through cams and cam plate?
• In order to minimize the surface stress produced in the (a) Precision lathe
flat follower, a spherical shape having a surface of a (b) Crankshaft lathe
large sphere radius is given to the flat end.
(c) Screw cutting lathe (automatic)
78. For low and moderate speed engines, the cam (d) Duplicating lathe
follower should move with …….
(a) Uniform velocity
Ans. (c) : Screw cutting lathe–It is an automatic lathe.
(b) Simple harmonic motion
• It is operated through cams and cam plates.
(c) Uniform acceleration and retardation
• It is used for mass production of screw parts especially
(d) Cycloidal motion
suitable for precision screw work.
81. In cam drives the follower ……..
Ans. (b) : For low and moderate speed engines, the cam (a) Always perpendicular to the axis of the cam
follower should move with simple harmonic motion.
(b) Always parallel to the axis of the cam
(c) Perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the
cam depending upon the type of cam
(d) At an angle to the axis of the cam
Ans. (c) : Cam and follower–A cam drives the
follower perpendicular or parallel to the axis of the cam
depending upon the type of cam.
• A cam is a rotating machine element which gives
reciprocating or oscillating motion to another element is
known as follower.
• Almost always the cam is driver and follower is
driven.
82. The period during which follower does not
move is called ……
(a) No move period (b) Silent period
(c) Stationary period (d) Dwell period
Ans. (d): In dwell period, the follower does not move or Ans. (d): Figure c, d, e, and f are disc or radial cams in
stationary at the highest or lowest position. which reciprocation or oscillation of the follower is in a
plane at right angles to the axis of the cam.
86. In the figure given under MCQ 13, which are
the cylindrical cams which impart
reciprocation or oscillation to the follower in a
plane parallel to the axis of the cam?
(a) e and g (b) g and h
(c) e, g and h (d) e, f, g and h
(B–D) → Ascent angle Ans. (b) : Figure g and h are cylindrical cams which
(D–E) → Dwell angle impart reciprocation or oscillation to the follower in a
(E–G) → Descent angle plane parallel to the axis of the cam.
83. The lift of a follower depends upon ….. 87. Which one of the following is a positive cam?
(a) Type of follower (b) Type of cam (a) Cylindrical cam
(c) Both type of follower and type of cam (b) Plate cam
(d) Stiffness of the spring above the follower (c) End or crown cam
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (d) Toe and wiper cam
Ans. (c) : The lift of a follower depends upon both type RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
of follower and type of cam. Ans. (a) : Cylindrical cam is a positive cam.
• A cam is a rotating machine element which gives • In this cam the motion of follower is reciprocates or
reciprocating or oscillating motion to another element is oscillates in a direction parallel to the cam axis.
known as follower. • It is also known as barrel or drum cams.
• Atmost always the cam is driver and follower is 88. Which among the following is a non-positive
driven. cam ?
84. The type of cam used for operation of valves of (a) Cylindrical cam
an internal combustion engine is …… (b) Grooved plate cam
(a) Radial cam (b) Cylindrical cam (c) Plate cam
(c) Face cam (d) Eccentric (d) None of the above
Ans. (c) : Plate cam is a non-positive cam.
Ans. (a) : Radial cam is used for operation of valves of
• It is also called radial or disc cam.
an internal combustion engine.
• A cam in which the follower moves radially from the
• It is also called disc cam.
center of rotation of the cam is known as a radial or disc
• A cam in which the follower moves radially from the cam.
center of rotation of the cam is known as radial or disc
89. The main purpose of using worm and worm
cam.
wheel drive in machines and their accessories is to
85. In the different types of cams shown in figure (a) Transmit large torque
given below, which are disc or radial cams in (b) Provide large speed reduction from worm
which reciprocation or oscillation of the shaft to worm wheel
follower is in a plane at right angles to the axis
(c) Transmit higher speeds
of the cam?
(d) provide large speed reduction from worm
wheel to worm shaft
Ans. (b) : Main function of worm and worm wheel in
machines to provide large speed reduction from worm
shaft to worm wheel.
90. In belt and rope drive, length of contact surface
between the belt and pulley is increased
through which of the following?
(a) c and d (b) c and e (a) Driven pulley (b) Jockey pulley
(c) c, d and e (d) c, d, e, and f (c) Drive pulley (d) Fixed pulley
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM

Ans. (b): A jockey pulley, also known as idler pulley is Ans. (b) : V belt is suitable for open belt drive.
used to increase the length of contact surface between the V-belt is mostly used in factories and workshops
belt and pulley or increase the angle of contact in a open where a great amount of power is the to be transmitted
belt drive. It is mounted near the smaller pulley of the from one pulley to another when the two pulleys are
two pulleys and placed on the slack side of the belt. very near to each there.
91. In open belt, the diameter of the large pulley is ( D − d )2
L = 2C + 1.57( D + d ) +
40 cm, that of small pulley is 30 cm and the 4C
centre distance between the both pulley is 500 95. Slip is a term associated with-
cm. What will be the length of open belt? (a) Rope (b) Gears
(a) 1150 cm (b) 1000 cm (c) Chain (d) Belt
(c) 1100 cm (d) 1110 cm UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 Ans. (d) : Slip is associated with belt.
Ans. (d) : d1 = 40 cm, r1 = 20 cm, d2 = 30 cm, r2 = 15 Sometimes the frictional grip between the belts and
cm, x = 500 cm, l = ? pulleys becomes insufficient and may cause some
Length of open belt- forward motion of the driver without carrying the belt
with it. This is called slip of the belt.
(r − r ) 2
l = π(r1 + r2 ) + 2x + 1 2 96. Which of the following is a positive drive
x
(a) V-Belt drive
(20 − 15) 2 (b) Rope drive
l = π(20 + 15) + 2 × 500 +
500 (c) Cross flat belt drive
25 (d) Chain drive
l = π (35) + 1000 +
500 UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
l = 1110cm ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
92. The actual difference between the surface
Ans. (d) : Positive drive- A drive in which slip does
motion of the belt and the pulley is known as? not occur is known as a positive drive. Example- chain
(a) Belt length (b) Slip drive, gear drive, timing belt.
(c) Creep (d) Belt dressing Velocity Ratio of position drive is constant.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 Belt drive, Rope drive are the example of slack drive.
97. What is the purpose of an idler pulley?
DRDO Machinist.2016
(a) Engaging magnetic clutch
Ans. (b) : Slip is the difference between the linear (b) Rotating freely with engine
velocity of pulley and belt. (c) Preventing slack in the belt
Creep- Uneven extensions and contractions of the belt (d) Transmitting power from driver to driven
when it passes from tight side to slack side. There is
RRB ALP RAC 23.01.2019, Shift-I
relative motion between belt and pulley surface, this
phenomenon is called, creep of belt. Ans : (c) Idler pulley is used to increase the initial
tension in the belt from time to time by adjusting the
93. Which type of belt is used when the distance position of adjustable weight or by increasing the
between the shafts is very small? adjustable weight valve which prevents slack in the belt.
(a) Ribbed belt (b) V-shaped belt Idler pulley also increase the angle of contact on
(c) Chain belt (d) flat belt smaller pulley.
98. In belt drive-creep occurs due to-
(a) Thickness of belts
(b) Uneven extension in tight and slack side
Ans. (b) : V-shaped belt is used when the distance
(c) Same size of pulley
between the shafts is very small. This belt can also be
(d) Power fluctuation
used at such places where the arc of contact the belt is
very less. Vibration and noise are less in this belt. RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
The included angle in V-belt is upto 30º-40º. Ans : (b) In belt drive, creep occurs due to Uneven
94. V belt is suitable for ? extension in tight and slack side of the belt.
(a) Quarter twist drive In pulley rotation certain portion of the belt will pass
(b) Open belt drive through the area where it will change from tight side to
(c) Quarter cross belt drive slack side, then the length of that specific portion of the
(d) Cross belt drive belt will expand and contract subsequently and a
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 relative motion will happen between the belt and pulley
(HAL Fitter, 2015) surface. This phenomenon is called creep of the belt.

99. Which pulley increases the wrapping angle of Included angle in V-belt is up to 30º-40º.
the pulley? V-belt is mostly used in factories and workshops
(a) V-pulley (b) timer pulley where a great amount of power is to be transmitted from
(c) Jockey pulley (d) Rope pulley one pulley to another.
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III 104. For single belt, the thickness of pulley rim
Ans : (c) Jockey pulley or idler pulley is used to made of cast iron
increase the wrapping angle of the smaller pulley. (a) (D/300) + 2 mm to (D/200) + 3 mm
100. Two half of split pulley are connected which (b) (D/200) + 8 mm
bolt? (c) (D/200) + 6 mm
(a) Cup headsquare (b) Counter sunk (d) (D/200) + 2 mm
(c) Hexagonal (d) Square DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 Ans. (a) : The thickness of the pulley rim varies from
Ans. (b) : Two half of split pulley are connected by D/300 + 2 mm to D/200 + 3mm for single belt and
counter sunk bolt. D/200 + 6 mm for Double belt.
This pulley can be mounted on the shaft at any place 105. Cross section of a flat belt is –
without changing the assembly of bearing and shaft. (a) Triangular (b) Circular
101. Which of the following belt materials can (c) trapezoidal (d) Rectangular
withstand acidic and wet condition?
(a) Balata (b) Rubber
(c) Leather (d) Cotton Ans. (d) : Flat belt has rectangular cross section. Flat
belt drive is used where only one flat face of the belt
remains in contact with the pulley.
Cross section of V-belt is trapezoidal.
Ans : (a) Balata belts are acid proof and water proof
and it is not affected by animal oils or alkaline. 106. Which of the following is correct?
(a) for the same pulley diameter and the same
Rubber belt- These belts are found suitable for saw
center distance, the length of belt in cross belt
mills, paper mills, where they are exposed to moisture.
drive is less than open belt drive.
Cotton belt- These belt are mostly used in farm
(b) In cross belt drive, driver pulley and driven
machinery, belt conveyor etc.
pulley and driven pulley rotate in the same
102. Which of the following is not used to connect direction
two shafts together to transmit power?
(c) In a flat belt drive, the ratio of tension of the
(a) Ball bearing (b) Bolt belt on the tight side and the tension of the
(c) Coupling (d) Key belt on the slack side is always equal to one.
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I (d) In case belt drive, driver pulley and the driven
Ans : (a) Bearing is a mechanical component used to pulley move in opposite directions
reduce the friction between two rotating or sliding
surfaces.
Ans. (d) : Cross belt drive is used when shaft are
103. Which one of the following is Not Correct in arranged parallel and rotating in the opposite direction.
respect of V-belt drive? A cross belt drive has more belt length than flat belt
(a) It is compact drive.
(b) It can be easily replaced and its maintenance In flat belt drive, the ratio of tight side and slack side
is easy is
(c) It causes less noises and vibration
T1
(d) It is used where distance between driver and = eµθ
driven pulleys is more T2
ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018 107. Torque transmission capacity of single plate
Ans. (d) : V-belt drive- clutch is-
It is used where distance between driver and driver (a) less than multi plate clutch
pulley is very less. (b) its has no relation with multi plate clutch
It causes less noises and vibration. (c) more than multi plate clutch
It is compact and can be easily replaced and its (d) same as multi plate clutch
maintenance is easy. RRB ALP Heat Engine 8-2-2019, Shift-II

Ans : (a) Single plate clutch consists of single clutch 112. Which of the following type of pulley is used in
plate while multi plate clutch consists of more than one group drive?
clutch plate. So torque transmission capacity of single (a) Solid pulley (b) Jockey pulley
plate clutch is less than multi plate clutch. (c) Split pulley (d) Fast and loose pulley
108. A mechanical device that engages and
disengages two rotating shafts is called-
Ans. (d) : Fast and loose pulley is used in group drive.
(a) carburetor (b) strainer
It is used when the driven or machine shaft is to be
(c) brake (d) clutch started or stopped whenever desired without interfering
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 with the driving shaft.
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I 113. Due to slip in belt-velocity ratio of belt drive-
(a) increases (b) becomes to much
Ans : (d) A clutch is a mechanical device that engages (c) decreases (d) remains the same
and disengages the power transmission from the driving RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
shaft to the driven shaft. Ans. (c) : Slip- Slip is the difference between the linear
It is used between the engine and the gear box. velocity pulley and belt. Slip decreases the velocity
109. In positive drive system– ratio.
(a) Slipping is not allowed Velocity ratio- It is ratio between the velocities of the
N d
(b) Slipping is allowed driven (N2) and the drive (N1) velocity ratio 2 = 1
(c) the angular velocities of the two bodies are N 1 d 2
not the same If S is the slip percentage, then

(d) The velocity decreases N d  S 
Velocity Ratio 2 = 1 1 − 
N1 d 2  100 
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I
Ans : (a) In positive drive system, slipping is not 114. Which of the following is not a friction clutch?
allowed. Example Gear drive, chain drive etc. (a) Centrifugal clutch (b) cone clutch
(c) Fluid clutch (d) Disc clutch
110. Belt slackness is due to ...............
(a) Worn shaft (b) Worn sprocket
Ans. (c) : Fluid clutch is not a friction clutch
(c) Worn chain (d) Worn gear
Ans. (a) : Belt slackness is due to worn shaft or by the
wear of belt of the pulley mounted on the shaft.
When belt is running over pulley, the friction creates
grip on pulley which creates tension on one side of belt
which makes the driven pulley to run, this side is called
tight side. The other side does not experience same
tension, that side is called slack side. 115. Spring used in a motor cycle washer is–
111. Creep occurs in belt drives due to (a) Wire spring
(b) Flat spring
(a) power fluctuations
(c) Helical compression spring
(b) thickness of belt (d) Helical torsion spring
(c) equal size of the pulleys UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
(d) uneven extension in tight and slack side Ans. : (c) Helical compression spring is used in a motor
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 cycle washer.
Ans. (d) : In belt drive, creep occurs due to Uneven
extension in tight and slack side.
In pulley rotation certain portion of the belt will pass
through the area where it will change from tight side to
slack side, then the length of that specific portion of the
116. Two parallel shaft can connected by
belt will expand and contract subsequently and a (a) Cross helical gear (b) Straight spur gear
relative motion will happen between the belt and pulley (c) spiral gear (d) bevel gear
surface. This phenomenon is called creep of the belt. UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (b) 120. Which aspect is wrong about Creep?

Position of axis of shaft Gear to be used (a) The total effect of creep is to reduce slightly
Parallel axis Spur gear Helical gear the speed of driven pulley or follower.
Rack gear Internal gear (b) Creep phenomena is observed when belt
Intersecting axis Miter gear passes from slack side to the tight side.
Bevel gear (c) Due to the changes in length while belt is
passing from slack side to the tight side a
Non-intersecting and non Worm and worm gear
relative motion between the belt & pulley
parallel axis Screw gear
surfaces is turned as creep.
117. Which type of gear set is used to convert rotary
(d) Creep phenomena is observed when belt
motion into linear motion and vice versa? passes tight side to slack side.
(a) Bevel gears (b) Hypoid gears UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
(c) Spur gears (d) Rack and pinion
Ans.: (d) When the belt passes from the slack side to
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 the tight side, a certain portion of the belt extends and it
DRDO Machinist.2016 contracts again when the belt passes from the tight side
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am to the slack side. Due to these changes of length, there
Ans : (d) Rack and pinion gear set is used to convert is a relative motion between the belt and the pulley
rotary motion into linear motion and vice versa. surface. This relative motion is termed as creep. The
total effect of creep is to reduce slightly the speed of
driven pulley or follower.
121. Match the following given lists :
List-I List-II
A. Due to low tension 1. Rapid wear down
in belt of belt occurs
B. Due to high initial 2. Slip in the belt
torque appears
C. Due to frequent 3. Belt sequels
fluctuation of the
The flat tooth part is the rack and the gear is pinion. load in the belt
118. Rope best suited as tie ropes for lifting tackle D. For high power 4. V belts
(a) Manila ropes (b) Hemp ropes transmission
(c) Cotton ropes (d) Wire ropes (a) A–2, B–1, C–4, D–3
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 (b) A–2, B–3, C–1, D–4
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (c) A–4, B–1, C–3, D–2
Ans. : (a) Manila rope is used for lifting tackle, lifeboat (d) A–1, B–2, C–4, D–3
falls, cargo handling, lashings and mornings. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Cotton rope is mainly used on yachts, being soft and Ans. : (b)
pliable. (A) Due to low tension in belt– slip in the belt
appears
119. The amount of power transmitted not depend
(B) Due to high initial torque– belt sequels
upon the
(C) Due to frequent fluctuation of the load in the belt
(a) Velocity of the belt.
– Rapid wear down of belt occurs
(b) The tension under which the belt is placed on
(D) For high power transmission – V-belt
the pulley.
122. Friction cone clutch is used in :
(c) The arc of contact between the belt and the
(a) Constant mesh gear box
smaller pulley.
(b) Synchromesh
(d) Length of the belt. (c) In-line sliding gear box
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (d) None of the above
Ans. : (d) Power transmitted by bolt is given as ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016
 1  Ans : (b) The cone clutch is a type of friction clutch
P = T1 1 − µθ  .V
 e  that has cone shaped frictional areas. These types of
from the above equation, power transmission does not clutches are commonly used in synchromesh and
depend on length of the belt. epicyclic gear boxes.

123. In an open belt drive, length of the belt is Ans : (d) Key is used to stop the relative motion
evaluated from the following formula– between a gear and a shaft. Key is used to connect the
(a) L = 2C + 2 (1.57 )( D + d ) +
( D − d)
2
transmission shaft to rotating machine elements like
pulley gear, sprocket or flywheel. Keys provide a
4C
positive means of transmitting torque between shaft and
(b) L = 2C + 2 (1.57 )( D + d ) +
( D + d)
2
hub of the mating element.
4C 128. Which material is widely used in making
chains, hooks and pipes etc?
(c) L = 2C + 1.57 ( D + d ) +
( D − d)
2
(a) wrought iron (b) Malleable cast iron
4C (c) copper (d) cast iron
(d) L = 2C + 1.57 ( D + d ) +
(D + d) 2 UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (a) Wrought iron is widely used in making
4C
chains, hooks and steam pipes etc. Wrought iron is the
purest form of iron it can be easily welded and folded.
Ans. : (c) Length of belt
129. The included angle for the V-belt is usually :
In open belt drive– L = 2C + 1.57 ( D + d ) +
( D − d)
2
(a) 10° - 20° (b) 20° - 30°
4C (c) 30° - 40° (d) 40° - 60°
In cross belt drive– L = 2C +1.57 ( D + d ) +

( D + d )2 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I
4C LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
124. Generally, for rope drive the groove angle of Ans : (c) The nominal included angle of the V-belt shall
pulley is – be 30o-40º.
(a) 750 (b) 150 ⇒ V-belt drives are generally used when the distance
0
(c) 30 (d) 450 between the shafts is too short for flat belt drives.
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 ⇒ V-belt drive is more compact, quiet and shock
Ans : (d) Generally, for rope drive the groove angle of absorbing.
pulley is 45º. Rope drives are used for long distance 130. Gears are used to do the following for rotating
and for large amount of power transmission. of shaft–
The ropes are made from cotton hemp manila, steel, (a) Increase speed
wire etc and mainly employed in the mining and textile (b) Decrease speed
industries. (c) Change direction of rotation
125. In which power transmission slips occur– (d) All of the above
(a) gear (b) chain ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016
(c) Sprocket (d) belt Ans : (d) Gears are mechanism that mesh together teeth
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am and are used to transmit rotary motion from one shaft to
Ans : (d) In belt drive, the slips occur. Gear, chain, another shaft.
sprocket are positive drive. In which slip does not ⇒ Gears are defined by two important items, radius and
occur.
number of teeth.
126. Which one of the following is applied for power
transmission on the major angle of universal 131. To transmit power between shafts in the same
joint? direction:
(a) Slip type coupling (b) Plate coupling (a) Gears cannot be used
(c) Clamp coupling (d) Universal coupling (b) Belt & pulley can be used
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am (c) Chain sprocket can be used
Ans : (d) A universal coupling is used to connect two (d) All of the above are correct statements
shafts whose axes intersects at an angle. The main ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016
application of universal coupling is found in the Ans : (d) When two gears mesh each other, their
transmission from the gear box to the differential or direction is opposite. Belt pulley and chain sprocket can
back axle of automobiles. be used to transmit power between shafts in same
127. Which of the following components of a direction.
machine is used to stop the relative motion
132. Which of the following statements is not
between a gear and a shaft?
(a) Screw related by 'V' belt.
(b) Nut and Bolt (a) It is easy to care of
(c) Coupling (b) It has a strong drive
(d) Key (c) It is used for long distance
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 (d) It has less sound and vibration
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (RRB Mumbai ALP, 0.3.06.2001)
Ans : (c) 'V' Belt is a strong drive. 136. Gantry crane is used–
⇒ It is used when the center distance between the drive (a) inside the building
and the driven pulley is short. (b) outside the building
⇒ Less vibration and noise (c) All three of the above
(d) none of these
⇒ Owing to the wedge action between the belt and the
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
sides of the groove in the pulley, the V-belt is less likely
Ans : (b) Gantry Crane- It is also a traveling crane. It
to slip, hence more power can be transmitted.
is in larger size than overhead. This crane is used
⇒ V-belts easy replacement and maintenance.
outside the building. The track of this crane are made on
133. Chain Hoist is used for the ground.
(a) Move machines from one place to another in
workshop
(b) to push the machines to the floor
(c) both of the above
(d) name of these
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (a) A chain hoist is considered by many to be the
most basic form of lifting tool. They can be used in
different ways, not just to perform vertical lifts but also
can be used to drag or position a heavy load.
⇒ Hoist are used any where lifting and moving a load
is required not restricted to industrial applications,
hoists have a wide range applications including lifting 137. Now a days illegal vehicles packed on the road
carg, construction materials engines and warehouse are picked up-
(a) Traveling crane
stock.
(b) Truck mounted crane
134. Derricks is a type of stationary crane. It is used (c) jib crane
for loading and unloading heavy machines. Gin (d) All of the above
pole derrick is used- VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
(a) Light load (b) Heavy load
Ans : (b) Now a days illegal vehicles packed on the
(c) Both of the above (d) None of these road are picked up truck mounted crane.
Ans : (a) Derricks is a type of stationary crane. Heavy
machines used it for loading unloading loops. Gin pole
derrick is used to prepare the rope for loading and
unloading machines of light load.
135. Jib crane is used for
(a) Vertical lifting of load
(b) Carrying the load horizontally
(c) both of the above
(d) none of these
Ans : (c) Jib cranes are a type of overhead lifting 138. The method of making rope strands is called-
device that are often used in a smaller work area for (a) Byte (b) laying
repetitive and unique lifting tasks. (c) loop (d) crowing
⇒ A jib is an operating arm that extends horizontally (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
from the crane. The role of the jib is to support a Ans : (b) The method of making rope strands is called
movable hoist fixed to either a wall or pillar mounted laying. The force applied to the rope while making it is
on the floor. It is mostly used in industrial premises. called laying.
Type of jib crane- 139. The rope is told to bend–
(1) Free standing jib crane. (a) Bight (b) Wiping
(2) Mast type jib crane. (c) Loop (d) Crowing
(3) Pillar mounted jib crane. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016

Ans : (a) The bending of the rope in a round shape is Ans : (b) While hanging the machine, its center of
called a bight. gravity is kept in mind. Crowbars are used for hanging
and raising machines.
145. The chain hoist shown in the figure is _____.
140. The method of enlarging the ends with a rope

and making a permanent joint is called-
(a) loop (b) Byte
(c) Crowing (d) Wiping
Ans : (c) To enlarge the end of the rope and make a
permanent joint, the method is called crowing and its
stand is kept clean and strong.
141. Connecting one part of a rope to another part (a) Differential chain hoist
of a rope is called- (b) Spur gear hoist
(a) Crowing (b) knot or knot (c) Screw gear hoist
(c) loop (d) Round turn (d) Low angle chain host
(HAL Fitter, 2015) BEML 2022
Ans : (b) The method of connecting one end of rope to (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
the other is called knot. It is used by tying the object by Ans : (a) The chain hoist shown in this question is the
rope. differential chain hoist. It is a also called differential
142. Fork lift is used– pulley. It's upper block has two pulley fitted on the
(a) lifting and dropping the load at different same axis while one in the lower block. In the upper
places block the pulley rotate freely on their axis. The pulleys
(b) pushing machines of the upper block are called long wheels. And the
(c) both of the above pulley of the working block is called the small wheel.
(d) none of these
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (a) Fork-lift trucks are used for short-distance (40
to 70 meters) travel and find indoor applications
normally. So, fork-lift is used for lifting, lowering and
vertical transportation.
143. Crowbar leverage to lift or remove heavy loads
is made of.
(a) hexagonal steel bar (b) cost iron
(c) whit iron (d) All of the above 146. The crane shown in the picture is used-
Ans : (a) Crowbar leverage, which can lift or remove
heavy loads, is made of hexagonal steel bars.
⇒ A crow has a special design, In this the pivot is
between the point of effort and load. In a crow bar the
fulcrum remains farther distance from effort than load. (a) To carry the load in all directions
So, the required effort to lift a load is respectively less. (b) To carry the load in three directions
144. While hanging the machine, its center of (c) all vertically
gravity is kept in mind, it is used for hanging (d) None of these
and raising the machines- IOCL 2020
(a) screw jack
Ans : (b) The crane shown in this question is called
(b) crowbar
(c) crane and chain pulley traveling crane. It is used to move the load in three
(d) all of the above directions. This traveling crane is mounted along the
(RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004) roof or on the top the walls of the building.

147. What will be the effect if the wrapping and V-belts are used to transmit mechanical power
contact area of the belt with the pulley is less- efficiently between different parts of a machine.
(a) less torque will be transmitted They are commonly used on automobile engines to
(b) more torque will be transmitted drive accessories, such as the air conducting
(c) both of the above compressor, power steering pump, alternator and fan.
(d) none of these 152. Gear is a positive drive. It is used for short
(IOF Fitter, 2014) distance, use of bevel gear-
Ans : (a) If the wrapping angle and contact area of the (a) To transmit motion in two parallel shafts
(b) Transmitting rotary motion in length wise
belt with the pulley is less then less torque will be
motion
transmitted. Conversely, if the angle of wrapping is
(c) Transmitting vertical shaft to horizontal shaft
greater, the pulley can transmit more torque.
(d) transmitting two shafts at an angle of 80º
148. Available in a variety of size 'V' belt cross- IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
section (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
(a) 3 (b) 4 Ans : (c) Bevel Gears– These gears are used for
(c) 6 (d) 5 transmission of power between two shafts whose axes
NTPC Fitter 2016 are in the same plane and intersect or vertical shaft to
Ans : (d) 'V' belt cross-section (cross-section of V- horizontal shaft. The teeth of these gear are straight and
belts). It is found in five types of cross-section sizes. (A, spiral.
B, C, D and E). The cross-section of the (Endless Belt Types of Gears-
'V' Belts by friction) is in the shape of a trapezoid. Its (1) Spure Gear
inner structure consists of cord and fabric. (2) Helical Gear
149. Toothed belts have teeth on inside they are (3) Double Helical Gear
used on griders, it is called- (4) Herring bone Gear
(5) Bevel Gear
(a) Round belt (b) Ribbed belt
(6) Worm Gear
(c) Timing belt (d) link belt
(7) Hypoid Gear
BHEL 2020
153. Which one of the following is not an example of
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
a method of transmitting power by friction?
Ans : (c) In toothed or Timing belt the teeth of the (a) Belt Drive (b) Ball bearing
wheel get stuck together. In this belt, teeth are made on (c) Roller Bearing (d) Gear drive
the inner side. Its pulleys also have teeth like gears. The (RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004)
teeth of the belt get stuck in the teeth of the pulley. That Ans : (d) The method of transmitting power by friction
is why its belt does not slip on the pulley. is belt drive, ball bearing and roller bearing.
150. Chain drive is better than belt drive because- Gear drive is not a method of transmitting power by
(a) It is suitable for short distance friction.
(b) It is suitable for long distance Gear drive- These serrated wheels are mounted on the
(c) Lubrication can be given easily in driver and moving shaft by keys in such a way that the
(d) It does not have nominal slip teeth of both the wheels are stuck together. The smaller
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) size gear is called pinion. Gear are made of cast iron,
Ans : (d) Chain drive would have been better than a common steel, bronze, plastic etc.
belt drive, because in this (chain drive) there is no slip. 154. There is a slip fault in the belt drive, its effect
Advantage of chain drive- is–
(a) The machine move slowly
1. Chain drive can bear shocks
(b) The machine move fast
2. Chain drives are compact
(c) The speed ratio of both the pulleys is
3. The power to drive the chain drive has more range.
different
4. This drive does not have slippage. (d) None of the above
151. Use of multiple V-belt- (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(a) multiple speeds (b) A Single motion Ans : (c) There is a slip defect in the belt drive it has
(c) light loads (d) All of above the effect that the speed ratio of both the pulley
(IOF Fitter, 2015) becomes nominally different or one pulley at higher
Ans : (b) According to the work and speed multiple 'V' speed and other (second) pulley will rotate at a slower
belt is used for one speed. speed.

155. Which of the following is not a cause of belt Ans : (d) Flat belt size is specified by width and
slip. thickness of belt cross section. The belt are made of
(a) Belt tension reduction materials such as cotton, rubber, polyester, polyamide
(b) Smoothness on the face of the pulley and other synthetic materials.
(c) Failure of belt fastener Flat belts can specified by its width and thickness.
(d) Misalignment of pulleys V-belts are specified by width at the upper and lower
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) portion, length, thickness and angle made by side
Ans : (d) Misalignment of pulleys is not a cause of belt surfaces.
slip. 159. Nylon and cotton belt are used–
Cause of Belt slip- (a) For light loads
(1) Smoothness of the face of the pulley. (b) in dry environment
(2) Belt tension reduction. (c) for heavy load and high speed
(3) Frictional grip becomes insufficient. (d) for common simple task
(4) Failure of belt fastener. BDL Technician 2022
Difference between Slip and creep- Ans : (c) Nylon and Cotton Belt– A layer of canvas or
Creep is due to the elastic property of the belt whereas, leather is used on top and bottom of it. Nylon belt does
the conventional slip is due to insufficient frictional grip not vibrate or make noise transmission. It is used in
between the belt and pulley. machines running at high speed. Such a grinding and
Effect of the creep as well as slip, is to reduce the spinning machines.
speed ratio and hence power transmission. 160. In cross belt drive, both the shafts are parallel
156. Rope drive is used for power transmission - to each other–
(a) For shorter distances (a) Both the pulleys rotate in same direction
(b) Longer distances (b) Both the pulley rotates in different direction
(c) Lighter loads (c) runs at right angles
(d) Heavier loads (d) none of the above
(RRB Malda ALP, 16.07.2006) NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans : (b) The power transmission process transmits a Ans : (b) Cross Belt Drive– This belt the direction of
motion from one shaft to another with a connection rotation of the driven pulley in operation is opposite to
between them like a belt, chain or gear. the direction of rotation of the driver pulley. In cross
For larger distance power transmission, rope drive is belt drive the contact area of belt and pulley is more,
used. due to which friction is more, so more power can be
For shorter distance power transmission, chain & conducted. There is less chance of slipping of the belt.
gear drive is used. 161. In quarter twist drive–
157. The pulley used for rope drive consist of– (a) Both pulleys rotate in the same direction
(a) 'V' groove (b) Both the pulley rotate in different directions
(b) round groove (c) One rotates horizontally and the other
(c) Half round groove vertical
(d) All of the above (d) All of the above
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) Ans : (c) Right Angle Drive-
Ans : (c) The pulleys used for rope drives have half round
grooves.
Rope drive is widely used where a large amount of
power is to be transmitted, from one pulley to another,
over a considerable distance. Rope drives used a number
of circular section ropes, rather than a single flat or 'V' belt.
158. Flat belt size is given by–
(a) by length
(b) by width
(c) length and thickness
(d) width and thickness
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
In quarter twist drive one rotates horizontally and the 165. Sheaves are .............
other vertical. (a) Toothed belt pulley
Types of belt drive– (b) Grooved rim pulley
(1) Open belt drive (c) Rimless pulley
(2) Crossed Belt
(d) Curved belt
(3) Quarter twist drive
(4) Right Angle drive UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(5) Stepped pulley Drive. Ans. (b) : Sheave– A sheave is a wheel with a groove
(6) Fast and loose pulley Drive in the middle and raised edge.
(7) Compound Drive • It is also known as a sheave pulley and is part of a
Quarter twist Drive- The shafts are at Right angle and system used to raise or lower heavy loads.
rotate in the same definite direction (clock wise and
Anti clockwise). 166. Which of the following is a type of coupling?
The face of the pulley should be wide enough, not (a) All of these (b) Universal coupling
allowing the belt to leave the pulleys. (c) Hook coupling (d) Flange coupling
2. Coupling and Pulleys of Types RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
Ans. (a) :
162. A flange coupling has ____ flanges. Shaft coupling–
(a) 1 (b) 3 1. Rigid coupling
(c) 2 (d) 4 2. Flexible coupling
1. Rigid coupling–
Ans. (c) : A flange coupling has two flanges. (a) Sleeve or muff coupling
Flange coupling– A flange coupling usually applies to
(b) Clamp or split or compression coupling
a coupling having two separate cast iron flanges. The
two flanges are coupled together by mean of bolt and (c) Flange coupling
nuts. 2. Flexible coupling–
163. Shaping the pulley surface is also known as (a) Bushed pin coupling
_____. (b) Universal coupling
(a) Crooking (b) Crawling (c) Oldham coupling.
(c) Crowning (d) Crowing 167. Which is to be used where machine has to
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 switch on or off frequently?
Ans. (c) : Crowning is the process of shaping the pulley (a) Drum pulley
surface, to ensure that flat belts stays in place. (b) Jockey pulley
• Crowning of pulley is done to prevent the belt (c) Loose and fast pulley
running off the pulley. (d) Step pulley
164. Identify the coupling in the figure below. NLC Technician 24-09.2022
Ans. (c) : Loose and fast pulley– Fast and loose pulley
drive is used when the driven or machine shaft is to be
started or stopped whenever desired with interfering
with the driving shaft.
168. To connect and disconnect two shafts
frequently _____ coupling is used.
(a) Universal coupling
(b) Split muff coupling (a) fixed (b) fast
(c) Flange coupling (c) loose (d) All of these
(d) Oldham coupling HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 Ans. (c) : Loose coupling (Flexible coupling) is used to
Ans. (b) : Muff coupling is also called sleeve coupling connect & disconnect two shaft frequency.
or box coupling. It is a type of rigid coupling. It consists 169. Drum pulley has more
of a sleeve or a hollow cylinder, which is fitted over the (a) Crowning of pulley (b) Width of face
end of the input and output of the shaft by means of a (c) Tension of belt (d) All of these
sunk key. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
• It is cheaper than other type of coupling HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
Ans.(b):Drum pulley is power transmission component Ans. (b) : "Run out" and "face out" refers to shaft
used in conveyer & bulk handling applications. alignment.
• It has more width face. • Shaft alignment is the process of aligning two or
170. Fast pulley is a pulley which more shaft with each other to within a tolerated
(a) is fixed to the shaft margin.
(b) runs independently 175. What is the name of the coupling in given
(c) has 'V' shaped grooves figure?
(d) runs fast (a) Slip coupling (b) Plate coupling
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 (c) Clamp coupling (d) Universal coupling
Ans. (a) : Fast pulley is a pulley which is fixed to the HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
shaft. A fast pulley is keyed to loose pulley runs freely.
Ans. (d) : The name of the coupling is universal
171. Which pulley is used where machine has to coupling.
switch on or off frequently? • A universal coupling connecting rigid shafts whose
(a) drum pulley (b) jockey pulley axis are inclined to each other at a small angle.
(c) loose and fast pulley (d) step pulley
• It is commonly used in shafts that transmit rotary
motion.
Ans. (c) : Which a number of machine are operated
176. The coupling used to connect two parallel
from a single power source, each machine is provided
with a fast and loose pulley. With this arrangement any shafts whose axes are at a small distance apart
machine may be started or stopped frequently. Power is is called
transmitted only when the belt is on the fast pulley. (a) Universal Coupling (b) Grid Coupling
Loose pulley does not transmit any power. (c) Oldham Coupling (d) Tyre Coupling
172. An universal coupling is used to connect two ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
shafts HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(a) which are perfectly aligned Ans. (c) : The coupling used to connect two parallel
(b) which are not in exact alignment shafts whose axes are at a small distance apart is called
(c) have lateral misalignment Oldham coupling.
(d) whose axes intersect at a small angle Oldham coupling–Oldham's coupling is an inversion
DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022 of the double slider-crank mechanism, which is used to
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 connect two parallel shafts the distance between whose
Ans. (d) : An universal or Hooke's coupling is used to axes are small and variable.
connect for where axes intersect at a small angle. It 177. Winches are used
consist of two similar forks, one centre block, two pins
(a) whenever loads are to be lifted
and two collars with lock pins. The forks are keyed on
the ends of the two shafts and are then pin jointed to a (b) to pull heavy loads along the ground
centre block having two arms at right angle to each (c) to roll easily over any uneven surface along
other. In this angle between two shafts can be varied the route
even when they are in motion. (d) All of the above
173. A left hand screw advances in which rotation: ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
(a) Clockwise (b) Anticlockwise Ans. (b) : Winches are used to pull heavy loads along
(c) Any direction (d) None of above the ground.
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 178. Which drive has multiple driven pulleys?
Ans. (b) : Right hand helix has the thread that advances (a) Jockey belt drive
in the nut when turned in a clockwise direction. (b) Right angle belt drive
When thread advances in the nut when turned in an (c) Cone pulley belt drive
anticlockwise direction then it is turned as left hand
(d) Compound belt drive
helix thread, it is also called an American thread or
unified thread. BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
174. "Run out" and "Face out" refers to : RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(a) Drilling (b) Shaft Alignment Ans. (d) : Compound belt drive has multiple driven
(c) Boring (d) None of these pulleys.
Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022 Compound belt drive–It is used to transmit power
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 from one shaft to another through a number of pulleys.

179. Which device is used to mount the pulley on 184. Which device(s) is/are used in flange coupling
shaft? to ensure correct alignment of the shafts?
(a) Key (b) Drives (a) Sockets (b) Spigots
(c) Belt (d) Chain drive (c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of the above
Ans. (a) : Key is used to mount the pulley on shaft. Ans. (c) : Sockets and spigots are used in flange
Key–A key is a mechanical element which is inserted coupling to ensure correct alignment of the shafts.
between the shaft and hub or boss of the pulley to Flange coupling–Flange coupling has two separate cast
connect together in order to prevent relatives motion iron flanges. Each flange is mounted on the shaft end
and keyed to it. The two flanges are coupled together
between them.
with the help of bolt and nuts.
180. _____ pin is used to join sprocket in shaft.
185. Which coupling is used when the shafts are
(a) Taper (b) Parallel intersecting?
(c) Slant (d) Round (a) Slip type coupling (b) Universal coupling
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (c) Clamp coupling (d) Plate coupling
Ans. (a) : Taper pin is used to join sprocket in shaft. RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
Chain drives–A chain is a power transmission element Ans. (b) : Universal coupling is used when the shaft are
made as a series of taper pin connection. intersecting.
• The load is transmitted by the driving sprocket on the A universal or Hook's coupling is used to connect two
chain. shafts whose axes intersect at a small angle.
181. In which type of coupling, the hub is keyed to • The main application of universal coupling is found in
the driving shaft? the transmission from the gearbox to the differential or
(a) Slip type coupling (b) Clamp coupling back axle of automobiles.
(c) Flange coupling (d) Plate coupling 186. Which material is used to make pulleys?
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (a) Cast iron (b) Mild steel
Ans. (a) : In slip type coupling, the hub is keyed to the (c) Wood (d) All of the above
driving shaft. RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
• The split/clamp/compressive muff coupling is a rigid Ans. (d) : A pulley is a simple mechanical machine and
coupling. In this coupling, the muff or sleeve is made consists of a wheel and turns readily on an axle.
into two halves parts of cast iron and they are joined • The wheel is usually grooved for a rope or a wire
together by means of mild steel studs or bolts and nuts. cable. The material use for making pulleys are cast iron,
182. What is the other name for clamp coupling? mild steel sometime it make by wood.
(a) Slip type coupling (b) Clamp coupling 187. What is the other name for face of the pulley?
(c) Flange coupling (d) Split muff coupling (a) Bore (b) Rim
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 (c) Arms (d) Hub
Ans. (d) : The other name of clams coupling is the split RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
muff coupling and some time also called compression Ans. (a) : The other name for face of the pulley is bore.
muff coupling. • It is the periphery of the pulley on which the belt runs.
183. Which coupling is used in machines used in • The outer face of bore is made of slightly convex
cloth industry? which is called crowning.
(a) Slip type coupling (b) Clamp coupling • This keep belt at center when pulley is misaligned.
(c) Flange coupling (d) Plate coupling 188. What is the name of holes curved on the hub of
a pulley?
(a) Bore (b) Rim
Ans. (b) : Clamp coupling is used in machines used in (c) Arms (d) Hub
cloth industry.
Ans. (a) : Bore is the name of holes curved on the hub
of a pulley
189. Which part of pulley is used to connect the hub
and the face?
(a) Bore (b) Rim
(c) Arms (d) Hub
Ans. (c) : Arms is the part of pulley which is used to Ans. (d) : Grooved pulley–Grooved pulley have V-
connect the hub and the face. grooves or circular grooves cuts on the rim to carry V-
• It may b straight or curved. belt or ropes.
• It is cross-section may be circular or elliptical. • It is generally made from cast iron.
190. Which part of the pulley is used to fix the • The grooves on the rim is help to increase the
pulley and the shaft together? frictional grip of the belt or rope on the pulley.
(a) Bore (b) Rim 195. Which of the following is a part of the pulley?
(c) Arms (d) Hub (a) Face (b) Bore
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 (c) Arms (d) All of the above
Ans. (d) : Hub is the part of the pulley which is used to RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009
fix the pulley and the shaft together. Ans. (d) : Pulleys are used to transmit power from one
• It is the central hollow cylindrical portion of pulley. shaft to another with the help of belt or rope running
• It is mounted on shaft. over them.
• A keyway is provided to fasten the pulley to the shaft • Pulley are made from cast iron, steel, wrought iron,
with the help of a key. aluminium.
191. Which type of the pulley is made up of a single • The main part of pulley–
piece of cast iron? 1. Rim/bore
(a) Solid pulley (b) Split pulley 2. Arm or rib
(c) Jockey pulley (d) Guide pulley 3. Face.
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 196. Jockey pulley is the one which –
Ans. (a): Solid pulley is made up of a single piece of (a) increases the arc contact over the pulley
cast iron. (b) transmits power to driver pulley
• It is made from single piece of cast iron. (c) run shafts at various speeds
• Solid pulley relatively smaller in size. (d) has steps of various sizes
• This pulley can be mounted on shaft by inserting key RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
from one end. Ans. (a) : Jockey pulley is the one which increases the
192. Which types of pulleys are used in group arc contact over the pulley.
drives? Jockey pulley–Jockey pulley is idler pulley and is used
(a) Solid pulley to increase the angle of contact in open belt drive.
(b) Split pulley • It is mounted near the smaller pulley of the two
(c) Jockey pulley pulleys and is placed on the slack side of the belt.
(d) Fast and loose pulley • It increases angle of contact lead to increased power
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 transmission capacity of drive.
Ans. (d) : Fast and loose pulley are used in group 197. Loose pulley is the one which –
drives. (a) is fitted onto the shaft
Fast and loose pulley–When a number of machines run (b) runs independently
from a main driving shaft, it may require to start or stop (c) has a V-groove
some of the machines intermittently without start or (d) transmits power to the shaft
stop the main driving shaft at every time. RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
193. Which device is used for moving the belt from Ans. (b) : Loose pulley is the one which runs
fast pulley to the loose pulley? independently.
(a) Belt (b) Simple lever 198. Fast pulley is the one which –
(c) Chain (d) Coupling (a) is fitted onto the shaft
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 (b) runs independently
Ans. (b) : Simple lever is used for moving the belt from (c) has a V-groove
fast pulley to the loose pulley. (d) transmits power to the shaft
194. Which type of pulley has grooves cut on its RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
surface? Ans. (d) : Fast pulley is the one which transmits power
(a) Solid pulleys (b) Split pulleys to the shaft.
(c) Jockey pulleys (d) Grooved pulleys • When the belt on the fast pulley, the power is
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 transmitted from driving shaft to the machine shaft.
• When belt shifted from fast pulley to loose pulley, the 203. Traveling wall crane can shift the load in...
loose pulley rotates through belt but machine shaft not (a) One direction (b) Two direction
rotates along with it because loose pulley can freely (c) Three direction (d) Four direction
rotates on shaft.
199. Which of the following pulleys is used to obtain
Ans. (c) : Traveling wall crane can shift the load in
different velocity ratios?
three direction.
(a) Jockey pulley (b) Solid pulley
(c) Split pulley (d) Stepped pulley Traveling wall crane can be used to move components
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 to specific work stationed can be used at assembly
stations for position at the same time.
Ans. (d) : Stepped or cone pulley is used to obtain
different velocity ratios. 204. If the mechanical advantage of a simple
• Stepped pulley is used when the speed of the driven machine is 4, then the
shaft is to be changed very frequently as in case of (a) Output force is 4 time the effort
machine tool such as lathe, drilling machine etc. A (b) Effort is 4 times the output force
stepped pulley is an integral casting having three or (c) Efficiency is 4%
more number of pulleys of different diameter.
(d) Work output is 4 times the input
200. The sleeve or muff coupling is designed as a.....
RRB ALP Patna 2014
(a) dun cylinder (b) solid shaft
Ans. (a) : Simple machine–A simple machine is a
(c) thick cylinder (d) hollow shaft
mechanical device that changes the direction or
NCVT-2016
magnitude of a force.
Ans. (d) : The sleeve or muff coupling is designed as a
• Every big and complicated machines are based on the
hollow shaft.
combination of these simple machine.
• Muff coupling is also called sleeve coupling or box
• Mechanical advantage (M.A.)–It is ratio of output
coupling. It is a type of rigid coupling. It consists of a
force to input force.
sleeve or a hollow cylinder, which is fitted over of the
Output force/load lifted
shaft by mean of a sunk key. M.A. =
• It has a compact construction with small radial Input force/effort applied
dimension. It is cheaper than other type of coupling. Given that, M.A. = 4
201. In a flange coupling, the flanges are coupled Effort = ?
together by means of ............ Output force
4=
(a) studs (b) bolts and nuts Effort
(c) headless taper bolt (d) none of these Output force = 4 × effort.
205. What is NOT an example of a machine ?
NCVT-2016 (a) Pulley (b) Ramp
Ans. (b) : In a flange coupling, the flanges are coupled (c) Bridge (d) Staircase
together by means of bolts and nuts.
• The power is transmitted from driving shaft to the
Ans. (c) : Difference between a machine and a
flange through the key and then one flange to another
structure–
flange through bolts and finally power is transmitted to
the flange to driven haft through the key. • The parts of a machine move relative to one another,
whereas the members of a structure do not move
202. Coupling are used to connect the shafts when
relative to one another.
the shafts are...
• A machine transforms the available energy into same
(a) To be joined permanently
useful work, whereas in a structure no energy is
(b) To be connected and disconnected often
transformed into useful work.
(c) In parallel
• The links of a machine may transmit both power and
(d) To be disconnected often and to compensate a motion. While the members of a structure transmit force
slight misalignment between two shafts only.
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 • Example of machine–Lathe machine, shaper machine,
Ans. (d) : Coupling are used to connect the shafts when planer machine, pulley, ramp etc.
the shafts are to be disconnected often and to • Example of structure–Bridge, roof truss, machine
compensate a slight misalignment between two shafts. frame etc.

206. S.W.L. means 211. Which one of the following statements is NOT
(a) Sate working load true about coupling?
(b) Standard working load (a) it connects two in-line shafts
(c) Side working load (b) It can be rigid or flexible
(d) Stable working load (c) It drives driving and driven shafts at same
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 speed
(d) It can engage and disengage driving and
Ans. (a) : S.W.L. means Sate working load .
driven shafts as a normal operation
• SWL is defined as the maximum safe load that the
lifting equipment can lift, move, suspend and tower
down to the ground without any problem of breaking. Ans. (d) : A good coupling shove have following
properties–
207. Which one of the following is a four-wheeled
1. It connects two in-line shafts
vehicle used for material handling ?
2. It can be rigid or flexible
(a) Single-girder crane
3. It drives driving and driven shafts at same speed.
(b) Traveling wall crane
4. It should have no projecting parts.
(c) Piller gib crane
5. It should hold the shaft in perfect alignment.
(d) Industrial fork-lift
212. It is a long cylindrical coupling bored and
keyed to fit over both shafts. It is called
Ans. (d) : Industrial fork-lift is a four-wheeled vehicle (a) rigid coupling (b) muff coupling
used for material handling.
(c) spider coupling (d) fluid coupling
208. A tripod is a device, which consists of RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
(a) One legs (b) Two legs Ans. (b) : Muff coupling is a long cylindrical coupling
(c) Three legs (d) Four legs bored and keyed to fit over both shafts.
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 • The sleeve or muff coupling is designed on basic of
Ans. (c): A tripod is a device, which consists of three hollow shaft.
legs. 213. Which one of the following types of couplings
• A tripod is a three legged stand that used to support gives a soft start?
camera, telescope etc. (a) Rigid coupling (b) Muff coupling
209. Fast and loose pulley drive configuration is (c) Spider coupling (d) Fluid coupling
used when RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
(a) distance between driving and drive shaft is Ans. (d) : Fluid coupling is used for soft start. Fluid
too large coupling provide a controlled soft start up, helping to
(b) velocity ratio is too large prevent shock load and protect surrounding equipment.
(c) it is required to start or stop driven shaft 214. A coupling which has a yoke on each shaft is
without disturbing driving shaft called
(d) low noise is required (a) universal coupling (b) muff coupling
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 (c) rigid coupling (d) spider coupling
Ans. (c) : Fast and loose pulley drive–A fast and loose RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
pulley drive is used when the driven or machine shaft is Ans. (a) : Universal coupling–
to be started or stopped whenever desired without • A universal or Hook's coupling is used to connect two
interfering with the driving shaft. shafts whose axes intersect at a small angle (upto 40o).
210. An example of use of stepped pulley drive is in • A Hook's coupling is also used for transmission of
(a) lathe (b) milling machine power to different spindles of multiple drilling machine.
(c) shaper (d) planer • It is used as a knee joint in milling machines.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 215. Which type of coupling is used in the propeller
Ans. (a) : Stepped or cone pulley drive–A stepped or shaft of a vehicle?
cone pulley drive is used for changing the speed of the (a) Spider coupling (b) Universal couple
driven shaft while the main or driving shaft runs at (c) Rigid coupling (d) fluid coupling
constant speed. RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
• Stepped or cone pulley is used in lathe machine for Ans. (b) : Universal coupling is used in the propeller
driving the headstock at different speeds. shaft of a vehicle.

• A universal joint is joint or coupling connecting rigid • These keys are notched machine keys which are
rods whose axes are inclined to each other and it is tapered and used for power transmission in keyed shaft
commonly used in shaft that transmit rotary motion. It for holding the gears and pulley tightly on the shaft. The
consists of a pair of hinges located close together, head of the key reduce the effect of hammering and
oriented at 90º to each other connected by a cross shaft. prevent the damage to the shaft.
216. If, in a belt drive, the sense of rotation of both 221. For shaft in parallel and rotating in same
the pulleys is the same, the drive used is direction the belt drive used is_________.
(a) open belt drive (a) Open (b) Cross
(b) cross belt drive (c) Diagonal (d) None of these
(c) open or cross belt drive RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(d) Neither open not belt drive Ans. (a) : Open belt drive is used in shaft for parallel
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 and rotating in same direction.
Ans. (a) : In a belt drive, the sense of rotation of both Application of belt drive–
the pulleys is the same, the drive used is open belt drive. 1. A belt drive is used for transferring the power.
2. The belt drive is used in the mill industry.
217. Which one of the following statements is NOT
3. The belt drive is used in the conveyor.
true about cross belt drive?
4. The belt drive is powered by only a single belt.
(a) Pulleys rotate in opposite directions
(b) Belt angel on both the pulleys is equal 222. The angle of contact (θ) for crossed belt drive is
(c) Belt wear very fast given by ……..
(d) Used for transmission of speed at high power (a) 180 – 2α (b) 180 + 2α
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (c) 180 – α (d) 180 + α
Ans. (d) : Statement is true about cross belt drive– Τhe value of α is given by sin α = (r1 + r2)/x,
Where r1 = Radius of larger pulley, r2 =
1. Pulleys rotate in opposite directions
Radius of smaller pulley, x = Distance
2. Belt angel on both the pulleys is equal
between the centers of the two pulleys.
3. Belt wear very fast.
218. The belt slips, due to ...............
Ans. (b) : The angle of contact (θ) for crossed belt drive
(a) less tension
is given by 180 + 2α.
(b) misalignment
• Cross belt drive is used when two pulleys need to
(c) pulsating load rotate in opposite direction or require a greater wrap
(d) high starting torque angle for power transfer.
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 223. The power transmitted by a belt drive is given
Ans. (c) : The belt slips, due to pulsating load. by –
Belt slip–It is relative motion between belt and pulley (a) (T1 – T2)X V (b) (T1 – T2)X ω
surface. (c) (T1 – T2)/ V (d) (T1 – T2)/ω
219. Which clutch can be engaged progressively Where, T1 = Tension on tight side, T2 =
when one or both the elements are rotating ? Tension on slack side, where V = linear
(a) Single plate clutch (b) Cone clutch velocity, ω = angular velocity.
(c) Centrifugal clutch (d) Dog clutch RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 Ans. (a) : The power transmitted by a belt drive is given
Ans. (b) : Cone clutch can be engaged progressively by (T1 – T2)X V.
when one or both the elements are rotating. • Open belt drive has low velocity ratio and cross belt
• Cone clutch has perpendicular force acting on friction drive has high velocity ratio.
surface is greater than axial force. • Open belt drive is used in short length and cross belt
220. Which type of key is used for coupling a pulley drive is used in long length.
with a shaft? 224. Crowning of a pulley is done to ……
(a) Square key (b) Woodruff key (a) Prevent the slipping of a belt
(c) Gib head key (d) Flat saddle key (b) To increase the tension of a belt
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 (c) To increase the angle of contact
Ans. (c) : Gib head key is used for coupling a pulley (d) None of these
with a shaft. RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
Ans. (a) : Crowning of a pulley is done due to prevent Ans. (c) : Transmission angle is the angle between
the slipping of a belt. output link and coupler.
Crowning of pulley– • If the value of the transmission angle is zero then the
A crowned pulley is a pulley that has a slight hump in mechanism will be lock or jam.
the middle, tapering off ever so slightly towards either • If the transmission angle deviates from the 90º, then
edge. the torque on the output link decreases. So, usually the
225. Identify the feather key in the given figure: value of this angle is kept at more than 45º.
230. Which flat belt drive system has tow pulleys
mounted on driven shaft and one pulley on
driving shaft?
(a) (b)
(a) Multiple belt drive
(b) Cone pulley drive
(c) Fast and loose pulley drive
(c) (d)
(d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Fast and loose pulley drive has tow pulleys
Ans. (c) : Feather key mounted on driven shaft and one pulley on driving
shaft.
231. What is the cross section of V-belt?
(a) Square (b) V-shape
226. The following part of lathe serves as housing (c) Rectangle
for the driving pulleys and back gears :
(d) Trapezium
(c) Bed (d) Carriage
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (d) : The cross section of v-bolt is trapezium.
Ans. (a) : Head stock of part of lathe serves as housing V-belt–
for the driving pulleys and back gears. • They are required precise alignment of shaft and
227. The sleeve or muff coupling is designed as a …. pulleys.
(a) Dun cylinder (b) Solid shaft • It ca not be used in dusty and abrasive atmosphere
(c) Thick cylinder (d) Hollow shaft and requires casing.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 • It can not be used for long centre distance.
Ans. (d): The sleeve or muff coupling is designed as a • The efficiency of 'V' belt drive is comparatively
hollow shaft. lower.
• Muff coupling is a type of rigid coupling, which is • Power transmission capacity is high.
made up of cast iron. • It is velocity ratio is high.
• It is made up of a hollow cylinder with the same inner • High speed reduction is possible.
diameter as the shaft.
• This drive is approximately positive because the slip
228. In a flange coupling, the flanges are coupled is negligible due to wedge action.
together by means of ….
(a) Studs (b) Bolts and nuts 232. A gear wheel has 36 teeth (Z) and 3 mm
module (m). Its pitch diameter (Pd) is.
(c) Headless taper bolt (d) None of these
(a) 12 mm (b) 75 mm
(c) 80 mm (d) 108 mm
Ans. (b) : In a flange coupling, the flanges are coupled
together by means of bolts and nuts. RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
• A coupling is a mechanical element part that connects Ans. (d) : Given, teeth = 36
two shaft together to accurately transmit the power from module (m) = 3 mm
the drive side of the driven side. Pitch diameter = ?
229. Transmission angle is the angle between D
(a) Input link and coupler Module (m) =
T
(b) Input link and fixed link
D
(c) Output link and coupler 3=
36
(d) Output link and fixed link
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 D = 36 × 3 = 108 mm.

233. In the given figure, the name of the clutch plate 236. Which one of the following wide mortises
shown- enables positive transmission of electricity of
angles larger the normal permissible limit?
(a) Slip type coupling
(b) Plate coupling
(c) Clamp coupling
(d) Universal coupling
Ans. (d) : A universal coupling or Hook's coupling is
used to connect two shafts whose axes intersect at a
small angle. The inclination of two shafts may be
(a) Centrifugal Clutch (b) Cone Clutch constant, but in actual paretic, it varies when the motion
(c) Multi-plate clutch (d) Dog Clutch is transmitted from one shaft to another. The main
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM application of the universal or Hook's. Coupling is
found in the transmission from the gear to the
Ans. (a) : Types of Clutches-
differential or back axle of the automobiles.
(1) Friction Cluster Oldham's coupling is used for connecting two parallel
(i) Single plate clutch shafts whose axes are at a small distance (Lateral
(ii) Multi plate clutch misaligned)
(2) Wet and Dry cone clutch 237. Which of the following is a type of coupling ?
(3) Centrifugal clutch (a) All of these (b) Universal coupling
(4) Semi centrifugal clutch (c) Hook coupling (d) Flange coupling
(5) Conical spring clutch or Diaphragm clutch BEML 2022
(6) Positive clutch, Dog clutch, Spline clutch NMRC, 15-09-2019
(7) Hydraulic Clutch Ans. (a) :
The clutch acts as a mechanical linkage between the
engine and transmission and brief disconnects or
separates the engine frame the transmission system.
234. Universal coupling is also known by–
(a) Hub coupling (b) grid coupling
(c) Fluid coupling (d) Hook coupling
Ans.(d):Universal coupling is also know as Hook
coupling.
A Universal joint is a joint or coupling connecting 238. Universal coupling connects two shafts whose
rigid shafts whose ones are inclined to each other. It is axis intersect each other at:
commonly used in shaft that transmit rotary motion. (a) Less than 30º (b) Less than 40º
Universal joint is connecting non-parallel but (c) Less than 90º (d) Less than 60º
interesting shafts upto 40o. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
235. The clutch, which can be engaged or Ans. (a): Coupling is used to join two shaft together.
disengaged only when both the elements of the There are mainly two types of coupling
clutch are stationary, is known as – (i) rigid coupling
(a) Dog clutch (b) Multi plate clutch (ii) Flexible coupling
(c) Plate clutch (d) Cone clutch Universal coupling comes under flexible coupling
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM which is used to join shafts at an angle less than 30º.
Ans. (a) : A dog clutch is a type of clutch that couples Universal coupling is the maximum use is in
two rotating shafts or other rotating components not by automobiles and machines tools.
friction but by interference or clearance fit. The two 239. In crowning process the face of pulley is made-
parts of the clutch are design such that one will push the (a) Plane (b) Zig-zag
other, causing both to rotation of the same speed and (c) Convex (d) Concave
will never slip. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
Ans. (c) : Crowning of pulley- A crowned pulley is a 242. Coupling suitable for high power transmission
pulley that has a slight hump in the middle, tapering off at lower speed–
ever to slightly towards either edge. (a) Universal Coupling (b) Flange coupling
The face of the pulley of a flat belt drive is slightly (c) Split coupling (d) Sleeve coupling
crowned to prevent the slipping off from the pulley. RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
The crowing can be in the form of a conical surface Ans. (b) : Flange coupling is better for high power
or a convex surface. transmission at low speed.
Generally, it is pulley made up of two equal cones or Flange coupling is a driving coupling between
convex surface, the belt will tend to climb on the slope rotating shaft that consists of flanges one of which is
and will run with its center line on the mid-plane of the
fixed at the end of each shaft, the two flanges being
pulley.
bolted together with a ring of bolts to complete the
240. Coupling is used to .................. drive.
(a) Strengthen the shafts
243. The coupling used as a knee joint in milling
(b) Increase the length of shafts machine;
(c) Shorten the length of shafts (a) Flange coupling
(d) None of the above (b) Universal coupling
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 (c) Flange coupling or universal coupling
Ans. (b) : A coupling is a device used to connect two (d) Muff coupling
shaft together at their ends for the purpose of UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
transmitting power and increasing the length of shaft. Ans. : (b) A universal or Hook's coupling is used to
The primary purpose of coupling in to join two pieces connect two shafts whose axes intersect at a small
of rotation equipment while permitting some degree of angle. The main application of the universal or Hook's
misalignment or and movement or both. point (coupling) is found in the transmission from the
A coupling can be rigid or flexible, allowing various gear box to the differential or back axle of the
amount of angular, radial and axial misalignment automobile. It is also used in drilling machine, knee
between the two shaft. joint in milling machines.
241. Coupling is a device which is used to– 244. Connects two shafts together to transfer
(a) join two rotating shafts for power transmission rotational motion from one to the another–
(b) Measure tension (a) ball bearing (b) coupling
(c) Transfer current (c) bolt (d) spur gear
(d) Transfer pressure DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
IOCL 2020 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019 Ans : (b) In coupling two shafts are joined together to
Ans. (a) : Coupling is a device that is used to connect transfer the rotational motion to each other. Coupling
two shaft permanently for power transmission purpose. are used to join two shafts in situations where two
shafts are to be joined for a long period of time. There
Rigid Coupling Flexible Coupling
are mainly two types of coupling (1) Rigid coupling (2)
This type of coupling This type of coupling is
flexible coupling.
requires the perfect used where the shaft are-
245. How to make water flow for using returnless
alignment of the shafts to Laterally misaligned
be joined. valve?
(axes parallel but off set)
(a) two way flow (b) Tri-way flow
Angularly misaligned
(c) one way flow (d) four-way flow
(axes may intersect at an
angle ex. Propeller shaft.
Ans : (c) Non-return valve is a special type of value it is
Most Widely used rigid Axial misalignment.
used to carry the flow of water supply in only one
coupling is- Most widely used
direction. It is also called check valve. These valve are
Box/muff/sleeve flexible coupling
made of cost iron, brass, bronze or plastic.
coupling Oldham coupling
246. To connect two intersecting shafts the joint
Split muff/clamp (Parallel misalignment)
coupling Universal joint (angular used is............
(a) Universal joint (b) Knuckle joint
Cast iron flange misalignment)
(c) Tie-rod joint (d) Ball Joint
coupling
ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016
Ans : (a) A universal joint (also called a universal Step pulleys are vitally used in machinery
coupling or u-joint) is a joint or coupling connecting applications such as drill, presses, lathes and milling
rigid shafts whose axes are inclined to each other. It is machines where different operational speeds can be
commonly used in shafts that transmit rotary motion. produced simply by changing the belt to a different
The universal joint is not a constant-velocity joint. pulley size.
U-joints are also sometimes called by various
eponymous names as follow-
Cordan joint, Hook's joint, spices joint, Hardy Spicer
joint.
247. What is used with step block
(a) bolt (b) clamp and bolt
(c) Screw (d) Clamps
Ans : (b) Clamp and bolt are used with step block.
248. ............ is used to connect two shafts which axes
are not colinear.
252. That is called as fast pulley which
(a) Universal coupling (b) flange coupling (a) Is fitted by the key on the shaft
(c) Rigid coupling (d) Flexible coupling (b) Spins fast
Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017 (c) moves freely
Ans : (d) A flexible coupling exist to transmit power (d) There are different steps
(torque) from one shaft to another, to compensate for BHEL 2020
minor amounts of misalignment, and in certain cases, to (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
provide protective functions such as vibration Ans : (a) Fast pulley is called that which is fitted by the
dampening or acting as a 'fuse' in the case of torque key on the shaft.
overloads. Fast and loss pulley drive- A fast and loose pulley
249. Which is not necessary for a good coupling? drive is used when the driven or machine shaft is to be
(a) Must operate the full torque of the shaft started or stopped whenever desired without interfering
(b) Should provide safety in operation with the driving shaft.
(c) There is no need to protect against overload A pulley that is keyed to the machine shaft is called a
fast pulley and runs at the same speed as that of the
(d) overload should be avoided
machines shafts.
253. Loose pulley called it :
Ans : (c) Good coupling requires protection against (a) fit on the shaft
overload. The coupling drives the entire torque of the (b) on which 'v' groove
shaft. (c) rotates freely
250. For a shaft diameter of 100 mm, the number of (d) transmits power to the shaft
bolts in a flange coupling should be : (IOF Fitter, 2012)
(a) 2 (b) 4 Ans : (c) Loose pulley is called that which rotates
(c) 8 (d) 10 freely on the spindle.
NTPC Fitter 2016 A loose pulley runs freely over the machine shaft and
LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016 is incapable of transmitting any power.
Ans : (b) Flange coupling– A fast pulley is keyed to the machine shaft while the
Number of bolts = 3, for diameter upto 40 mm. loose pulley runs freely. The belt runs over the fast
= 4, for diameter upto 100 mm. pulley to transmit power by the machine and it is shifted
= 6, for diameter upto 180 mm. to the loose pulley when the machine is not required to
transmit power.
251. Different types of speeds are achieved by
254. Joint two shafts in a straight line :
(a) Rigid pulley (b) Step cone pulley
(a) bearing (b) coupling
(c) Jockey pulley (d) Split pulley (c) cantilever (d) Pulley
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (b) Step Cone Pulley– A stepped or cone pulley Ans : (b) The act of coupling makes two shafts rotation
drive is used for changing the speed of the driven shaft (permanently) as a unit while supplying power by
while the main or driving shaft runs at constant speed. connecting them. When shaft length more than 7 meter
This is accomplished by shifting the belt from one part is required for power transmission, the two shafts are
of the steps to the other. joined with the help of couplings.

255. In Plate coupling shafts are connected in pure 259. Where two shafts are not in a straight line and
alignment which class does it belong to : they are to be joined are jointed by
(a) muff coupling (a) Loose coupling (b) Flexible coupling
(b) Rigid flange coupling (c) Fast or rigid coupling (d) All of the above
(c) Compression coupling IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(d) Art coupling (IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) The purpose of a flexible coupling is to
Ans : (b) Rigid coupling– The rigid coupling is used to
transmit torque from one piece of rotating equipment to
connect two shaft which are perfectly aligned.
Types of rigid coupling- another, while accepting at the same time a small
(1) Muff coupling amount of misalignment.
(2) Half less muff coupling 260. What is another name for Jockey pulley
(3) Split muff coupling (a) loose pulley (b) fast pulley
(4) Flange coupling (c) Idler pulley (d) None of the above
(5) Solid Flange coupling (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(6) Compression coupling Ans : (c) Idler pulley are rollers that do not produce any
256. Which is not rigid or fast coupling? mechanical advantage, nor transmit power to a shaft.
(a) muff coupling Idler pulleys are used to lead a chain around a bend or
(b) Rigid flange coupling
to take up slack in a drive chain. There are many types
(c) Compression coupling
of idler pulleys.
(d) Art coupling
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007) 261. Which of the following is a type of clearance
Ans : (d) Art coupling– Art coupling is not fast or fit?
rigid coupling. Under fast or rigid coupling the (a) push fit (b) tight fit
alignment of soft in the coupling is very accurate. (c) force fit (d) slide fit
Types of rigid coupling- Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
(1) Muff coupling Ans : (d) Clearance fit is an air space or clearance
(2) Half less muff coupling which exist between the shaft and holes. Such clearance
(3) Split muff coupling fits give loose joints. The clearance fit has to be joined
(4) Flange coupling with other fits so that the clearance fit have its space.
(5) Solid Flange coupling
Examples of clearance fit- Clearance fit might
(6) Compression coupling
include bolt/shaft holes where an element will slide
257. What class does universal coupling fall into
freely through another feature.
(a) Flexible coupling (b) loose coupling
(c) fast or rigid coupling (d) all of the above 262. Which of following statement is incorrect about
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005) flange coupling?
Ans : (a) Universal coupling fall into flexible coupling. (a) Flange coupling has high torque transmission
The following types of flexible couplings are capacity.
important– (b) Flange coupling is easy to dismantle and
(i) Bushed pin type coupling assemble.
(ii) Oldham coupling. (c) Flange coupling is easy to design and
258. Which of following is loose coupling? manufacture.
(a) Half muff coupling (d) It can tolerate misalignment between the axes
(b) Plate coupling of the two shafts.
(c) Safety or slip type coupling BDL Technician 2022
(d) Flange coupling UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
(IOF Fitter, 2016) Ans : (d) Flange coupling is used to connect the shaft. It
Ans : (c) Safe and slippery type couplings, it is also does not tolerate misalignment. Universal coupling is
called loose coupling. There are two types of jaws in used for connect tolerate misalignment.
this coupling, which help in the rotational motion by 263. Jockey pulley is fitted
getting stuck together. (a) with driver pulley
It has the following part. (b) with driven pulley
(1) Jaws (c) towards the loose belt side of the driver
(2) Spring pulley
(3) Driven shaft (d) towards the tight side of the driven pulley
(4) Guide-pine (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (c) Jockey Pulley– Jockey pulley is fitted Ans : (c) The function of a flexible coupling is to
towards the loose belt side of the driver pulley. transmit torque from the driver to the driven machine
A jockey is an idler pulley and is used to increase the while making allowances for minor shaft misalignment
angle of contact in an open belt drive. It is mounted and shaft and position changes between the two
near the smaller pulley of the two pulleys and placed on machines.
the slack side of the belt. It increase the angle of contact Flexible coupling are utilized to transmit torque
lead to the increased power transmission capacity of the starting with one shaft then on the next when the two
drive. shafts are marginally misaligned.
264. Which chain is used for noiseless operation of Rigid Coupling Flexible Coupling
the machine at high speed low rotational speed Take care of small amount
(a) block chain (b) Gear chain Accurately aligned of unintentional misaligment
(c) Roller chain (d) Silent chain shafts Provide for '' end float'' i.e.
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 axial movement of shaft.
Ans : (d) Silent chain is used to inter connect the Alleviate shock by
machine at high speed for soundless operation. providing transfer of power
265. What is meant by follower through springs or to absorb
(a) moving part (b) gear train some of the vibration in the
(c) feeder (d) idle gear coupling.
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) 268. Universal coupling is used to connect which
Ans : (a) Cam and follower- A cam and follower two shafts
mechanism is a profiled shape move. Cam are used to (a) Which is the simplest type of rigid coupling
convert rotary to linear (reciprocating) motion. As the (b) Which are perfectly aligned
cam rotates, the follower rises and falls in a process (c) Those with lateral misalignment
known as reciprocating motion. (d) Whose axes intersect at some small angle
Followers vertically to the axis of the cam when the UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
cam moves in a reciprocating motion. Ans : (d) A universal coupling is a linkage or joint
266. The center to center distance of the pulley between two shafts, for example, a driving shaft and a
should not be less than…..times the diameter of driven shaft, which permits rotation of the shafts when
the larger pulley– their axes do not coincide. Such couplings are very
(a) 1.5 (b) 2 widely used, for example, machine tools, instruments,
(c) 2.5 (d) 3 control derives and Automobiles.
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 Universal coupling, also called a U-joint, Hooke
joint or carding joint. The Hooke joint is a universal
Ans : (d) Pulleys– A pulley is a circular wheel. There is
mechanism rotary motion between two non-parallel but
a hole in its middle axis in which the shaft fit. These are
intersecting shafts.
different often made of work metals like- wrought iron,
cost iron, wood, steel, etc.
The center to center distance of the pulleys should not
3. Classification of Gear
be less than 3 times the diameter of the larger pulley. 269. Identify incorrect gear terminology–
Parts of pulleys- (a) Interference
(I) Rim or face (b) Drum
(II) Hub (c) Undercutting
(III) Arms (d) Pitch circle
(IV) Bore UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
267. Flexible couplings are used Ans. (b) : Gear terminology–
(a) To take care of overloading
(b) To facilitate repair
(c) To be carefull in low vertical and lateral
combination
(d) Slight vertical, lateral and horizontal
combinations
1. Circular pitch (Pc) – Ans. (a) : The radial difference between pitch circle and
π×D tip circle is equal to module.
Pc = d
T mod ule ( m ) =
N
Where, D = Pitch circle diameter
Where - d = pitch diameter (diameter of the pitch circle)
T = Number of teeth
2. Diameteral pitch (Pa)– N = Number of teeth.
273. Standard value of dedendum is equal to
T
Pa = (a) Addendum
D
(b) 1.157 X Addendum
3. Pitch circle–It is the imaginary circle on which two (c) 2 X Module
mating gear seem to be rolling.
(d) 0.157 X Module
4. Addendum circle–It is also called the outside circle.
5. Dedendum circle–It is also called the root circle.
6. Interference Ans. (b) : dedendum = 1.157× Addendum
7. Undercutting Or dedendum (D) = 1.157 module (m)
• Drum is not related to gear terminology. Dedendum :-The distance between the pitch radius and
the rot radius at the centre of one gear tooth is called the
270. Working depth of two mating gear is
dedendum.
numerically equal to
Addendum :- The distance between the pitch circle and
(a) Sum of addendum of two gears
its tooth tip circle is called the Addendum of the gear.
(b) Difference of addendum of two gears
(c) Difference of dedendum of two gears 274. Driving gear has 20 teeth and it rotates with
100 rpm. Calculate the driven gear speed
(d) Sum of dedendum of two gears
having 40 teeth.
(a) 10 rpm (b) 50 rpm
(c) 200 rpm (d) 100 rpm
Ans. (a) : Working depth of two mating gear is
numerically equal to sum of addendum of two gears.
• Full depth/total depth = addendum + dedendum
It is the total radial depth of the tooth space. Ans. (b) : Given,
Addendum :- It is the radial height of the tooth above T 1 = 20
the pitch circle. Its standard value is one module (m) N 1 = 100 rpm
D T2 = 40
(or) 1A = 1m, where, mod ule ( m ) =
T
271. For a given pair of mating gear, arc of contact
is 6mm and a circular pitch is 4mm. Contact If the peripheral or linear velocity of mating gear is
ratio is equal to constant we can conclude to the following relation.
(a) 3.20 (b) 1.50
ω1 N1 d 2 T2
(c) 4.75 (d) 6.32 = = =
ω2 N 2 d1 T1
N1 T2
Ans. (b): Given in Question- =
Arc of contact = 6 mm N 2 T1
Circular pitch = 4 mm N T 100 × 20
N2 = 1 1 =
Arc of contact T2 40
Contact ratio =
Circular pitch N2 = 50 rpm
6 3
= = = 1.5 275. In a circle the Greek letter π is used to
4 2 represent the ratio of .........
272. The radial difference between pitch circle and (a) Circumference/Diameter
tip circle is equal to (b) Radius/Circumference
(a) Module (b) 2 X Module (c) Diameter/Circumference
(c) 1.157 X Module (d) 0.157 X Module (d) Circumference/Radius
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
Ans. (a): The Greek letter π represent the ratio between 279. Which gear run more silently?
the circumference and diameter of a circle. (a) Spur gear (b) Mitre gear
Circumference of the circle πD (c) Bevel gear (d) Helical gear
= =π
diameter D HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021
Circumference of the circle = πd = 2πr Ans. (d): Helical gear run more silently and smoothly.
276. Which of the following gear is used where a • Helical gear have better teet meshing than spur gears
large speed reduction is required? and have superior quietness.
(a) Worm and worm wheel • They can also transmit higher loads.
(b) Helical bone gear • Helical gear are also suitable for high speed
(c) Hypoid gear application.
(d) Herring bone gear 280. ________ is that machining process by which
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 gear teeth are made on a blank by metal
Ans. (a) : In worm and worm wheel, a very high speed removable.
reduction is possible even up to 1250 : 1. (a) Hobbing (b) Die casting
The worm shaft has spiral teeth cut one the shaft and (c) Hot rolling (d) Powder metallurgy
worm wheel is a special form of gear teeth cut to mesh NLC Technician 24-09.2022
with worm shaft.
• Helical gear are used increasingly often as power
Ans. (a) : Hobbing is a process in which gear is cut by
Transmitting gears.
a generating process by rotating the gear blank and
•Hypoid gears are normally used in right angles drive
cutter called a hob.
associated with the axis of automobiles (like worm and
It is used for making a wide variety of gears like spur
worm wheel).
gear, helical, herring bone, splines & sprocket etc.
•The herring bone gear is double helical gear is used for
transmitting power between parallel shaft. • Hobbing process is not suitable for cutting bevel gear.
277. In a simple spur gear drive, the speed of driver 281. There is no slippage between driver & driven
gear having 24 teeth is 800 rpm. Find the speed components during the power transmission
of driven gear having 60 teeth. through
(a) 320 rpm (b) 12000 rpm (a) Disc clutch
(c) 600 rpm (d) 20 rpm (b) Rope and pulley drive
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 (c) Gear drive
Ans. (a) : Speed of driver gear (N1) = 800 rpm (d) V-bet and pulley
Number of teeth on driver gear (T1) = 24 JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
Number of teeth on driven gear (T2) = 60 Ans. (c) : Gear drive is used to transmit power from
Speed of driven gear (N2) = ? one shaft to another when the shafts are at a small
N1 T2 distance apart.
=
N 2 T1 282. Double helical gear provides ______ to shaft
800 60 (a) High axial thrust (b) No axial thrust
=
N 2 24 (c) Medium axial thrust (d) Low axial thrust
N2 = 320 rpm
Ans. (b) : Double helical gear (Herring bone gear) is
278. Types of gears used in hand drill machine are
_______. equivalent to a pair of helical gear.
(a) Worm gears (b) Helical gears • No axial thrust is present.
(c) Spur gears (d) Bevel gears • It has higher load capacity as compare to single
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 helical gear.
Ans. (d) : Hand drilling machine can be used 283. What is the pitch circle diameter of a gear
anywhere in the workshop. It is used for drilling holes wheel having 36 teeth and 3 mm module?
on workpiece in any position, which is not possible in (a) 12 mm (b) 75 mm
standard drilling machine. (c) 80 mm (d) 108 mm
• The gears used in hand drilling machine are bevel ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022
gears. BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
Ans. (b) : Given that = Teeth (T) =36 286. Which hoisting mobile equipment is used for
Module (m) = 3mm self loading and shifting them to different
Pitch circle diameter (d)=? places in a factory ?
D (a) Jib crane (b) Fork lift
m = = D = MXT (c) Chain hoist (d) Gear hoist
T
D= 3 × 36 = 108 mm. NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
284. Identify the marked 'X' in the following gear RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
terminology? Ans. (b):
• The fork lift is a small 4-wheeled vehicle.
• Gasoline, propane or electric engines provide power
to it.
• Heavy counter weights are fitted to the rear of the
(a) Clearance circle (b) Dedendum circle units.
(c) Pitch circle (d) Addendum circle • The front of the machine has two steel lifting arms
ISRO Technician B (Machinist) 03-11-2022 of forks.
Ans. (b) : Different type of circle of gear • The forks are spaced to balance the load and are
1. Pitch circle- It is an Imaginary circle drawn in such a adjustable.
way that a pure rolling motion on this circle gives the • It is used for lifting loads and shifting them to
motion which is exactly similar to the gear motion. different places in a factory.
2. Addendum circle- Circle drawn from top of the 287. Normally a gear meshes with another gear. But
tooth and concentric to pitch circle is known as a gear can also mesh with a non-rotating
addendum circle.
toothed part, called
3. Dedendum circle- A circle drawn from bottom of the
(a) rack (b) worm
teeth and concentric with circle.
(c) sheave (d) yoke
Ans. (a) : A rack and pinion is a type of linear actuator
that comprises a circular gear the pinion engaging a
linear gear the rack, which operate to translate rotational
motion into linear motion.
Driving the pinion into rotation causes the rack to be
driven linearly.
288. When the situation is such that power has to be
285. Black lash in meshing gears is the.... transmitted at an angle, the gears
(a) Interference between two gears in mesh (a) spur gears (b) helical gears
(b) Clearance between two gears in mesh (c) bevel gears (d) herringbone gears
(c) Friction between two gears in mesh RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
(d) Tightness between two gears in mesh
Ans. (c) :
• Bevel gear are used to connect two shafts whose
Ans. (b) : Black lash in meshing gear is the clearance axes intersect each other.
between two gear in mesh.
• The axes of the shaft of these gear are straight or
• It is the difference between the space width and the
spiral.
tooth thickness along the pitch circle.
• They are used for power transmission on mutually
• Backlash = space width – tooth thickness
intersecting shaft axes.
• Bevel gear are made by frustum of cone. Their
heads are at the intersection of the shaft axes.
289. Herringbone gears resemble two ……. gears
that have been placed side by side.
(a) spur (b) bevel
(c) helical (d) face
Ans. (c) : Herringbone gears resemble two helical gears They engage chains in many different power
that have been placed side by side. transmission and conveyor system.
• The gear on which teeth cut obliquely to the axis of • They are mainly made of cast iron, sintered metal,
the shaft is called helical gear. and carbon steel, inserted sprockets are also
290. The sun and planet gearing used in designed to reduce noise and operation.
differentials is of the type 294. In a pair of gears the amount of clearance
(a) worm and worm wheel between mated gear teeth is called
(b) rack and pinion (a) addendum (b) dedendum
(c) hypoid (c) flank (d) backlash
(d) epicyclic RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 Ans. (d) : In a pair of gears the amount of clearance
Ans. (d): The sun and planet gearing used in between mated gear teeth is called backlash.
differentials is of the type epicylic. Backlash– It is difference between tooth space and
• Planetary gear are also referred to as epicyclic tooth thickness which is generally provided to avoid
gearing consisting of three elements sun gear, planet jamming due to thermal expansion.
gear and ring gear. • Theoretically it should be zero but practically not
possible.
• Sun gear is located at the center that transmits
torque to planet gears orbiting around the sun gear. • This gap means that when a gear train is reversed
the driving gear must be turned a short distance
291. with worm-and-gear sets very high gear ratio
before all the driven gear start to rotate.
can be obtained. It can be as high as
(a) 10 : 1 (b) 50 : 1 295. The radial distance between the pitch diameter
and the outside diameter of a gear is called
(c) 100 : 1 (d) 500 : 1
(a) addendum
(b) dedendum
Ans. (d) : By using worm gearing very high velocity
(c) addendum + dedendum
ratio can be obtained. It can be as high as 500 : 1.
(d) addendum – dedendum
Worm gearing–
• It is special case of a spiral gear in which the larger
wheel usually has a hallow or concave shape. Ans. (a) : The addendum is the height by which a tooth
of a gear projects beyond outside for external, or inside
• The smaller of the two wheels is called the worm
for internal the standard pitch circle or pitch line.
which also has larger spiral angle.
• Also the radial distance between the pitch diameter
• The sliding velocity of a worm gear is higher as
and the outside diameter.
compared to other types of gears.
• In the gear drive, standard addendum = 1 module.
292. ………. gears resemble spiral bevel gears
except that the shaft axes do not intersect.
(a) Hypoid (b) Worm
(c) Epicyclic (d) Face
Ans. (a) : Helical gears resemble spiral bevel gears
except that the shaft axes do not intersect.
• The gear on which teeth cut obliquely to the axis of
the shaft is called helical gear.
• Helical gears can be used to transmit motion even 296. A 24-teeth gear is fixed at stud as driver gear.
on parallel shafts teeth at the angle of helical gears After completion of first start and before
attach more slowly than spur gear teeth. starting of second start, the driver gear should
293. Which of the following are used to run chains? be turned
(a) Splines (b) Sprockets (a) 24 teeth
(c) Couplings (d) Trunions (b) 18 teeth
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 (c) 12 teeth
Ans. (b) : Chain sprockets are teeth like projections (d) 6 teeth
arranged on a wheel rim to engage the links of a chain. RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002

Ans. (c) : 24 teeth gear is fixed at stud and used as a Ans. (c) : Fork lift truck, the forks are attached to a
driver gear, after completion of first start and before column on the truck. Forks can be lifted to the desired
starting of second start, the driver gear should be turned height along with the material on them and the material
12 teeth. can be staked at the proper place.
297. A simple gear train is to be used to cut a thread • Fork lift trucks are used for short distance (40 m +
with a certain pitch. A driver gear with 3 teeth 70 m) travel and find indoor application normally.
more than that of the calculated value is
mounted due to the non-availability of the • So, fork lift is used for lifting, lowering and vertical
required gear from the set. The thread that is transportation.
cut will have the pitch 302. The main purpose of using worm and worm
(a) More than that required throughout the length wheel drives in machines and their accessories
(b) Less than that required throughout the length is to __________.
(c) Equal to that required throughout the length (a) Transmit large torque
(d) More for certain length and then less for the (b) Provide large speed reduction from worm
remaining length shaft to worm wheel
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 (c) Transmit higher speeds
Ans. (b) : Less than that required throughout the length. (d) Provide large speed reduction from worm
298. Where a large speed reduction is desired, wheel to worm shaft
which type of gear is used ? RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(a) Worm and worm wheel
Ans. (b) : The main purpose of using worm and worm
(b) Helical bone gear
wheel drives in machines and their accessories is to
(c) Hypoid gear
provide large speed reduction from worm shaft to worm
(d) Herringbone gear
wheel.
• They are also used as spiral gear, that is worm
Ans. (a) : Worm gear– The worm gears are widely
used for transmitting power at high velocity ratios wheel is used for power transmission between shaft
between non intersecting and nor parallel shaft, but not of non parallel and non cutting axes.
necessarily, at right angle it can give velocity ratio as • They are mainly used to connect shaft axes at 90o
high as 300 : 1 or more. But it has a lower efficiency. (but not necessarily)
299. The accurate spacing of teeth in a gear blank 303.The tooth thickness of rack is measured by
requires the use of ………
(a) dividing head (a) Universal vernier caliper
(b) an index plate (b) Gear tooth vernier caliper
(c) a differential mechanism (c) Flange micrometer
(d) universal table (d) Gear tester
Ans. (a) : In cutting spur gear, equal spacing of teeth on
Ans. (b) : The tooth thickness of rack is measured by
the gear blank can be performed by indexing.
gear tooth vernier caliper.
Indexing head's also known as dividing head and this
Vernier caliper which gives these distance and the
driving head is also known as indexing head.
chordal tooth thickness of gears.
300. Ratio of number of teeth to pitch circle
diameter in rack is known as: 304. When bevel gears connect two shafts whose
(a) Pitch (b) Circular pitch axes intersect at an angle greater than a right
angle and one of the bevel gears has a pitch
(c) Diametric pitch (d) Module
angle 90°, then they are known as ….
(a) Internal bevel gears (b) Angular bevel gears
Ans. (d) : Ratio of number of teeth to pitch circle
(c) Crown bevel gears
diameter in rack is known as module.
(d) Mitre gears
301. Fork lift truck is used for ……..
(a) Lifting and lowering
(b) Vertical transportation Ans. (c) : A crown gear is a gear which has teeth that
(c) Both (a) and (b) project at right angle to the face of the wheel.
(d) None of these • In particular, a crown gear is a type of bevel gear
RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012 where the pitch cone angle is 90 degree.
• Crown gears normally mesh with other bevel gears, 308. Determine torque transmitted on the pinion
or sometimes spur gear, a typical use being a crown shaft if torque transmitted on gear shaft is 20
gear and pinion system which allows a rotary Nm, consider Gear ratio = 4:
motion to be shifted 90 degree. (a) 8 Nm (b) 5 Nm
305. Module of a gear is….. (c) 80 Nm (d) 16 Nm
(a) D/T (b) T/D RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005
(c) 2D/T (d) 2T/D
Ans. (b) : Given,
Tg = 20
Ans. (a) : Module of a gear is D/T.
Gear ratio (i) = 4
• Module is the ratio of the pitch circle diameter (D)
to number of teeth (T). Gear ratio (i) = Tg/Tp
• Diameteral pitch is the ratio number of teeth (T) to 20
4=
the pitch circle diameter (D). Tp
• Circular pitch is the distance measured on the
circumference of pitch circle from a point of one Tp = 5 Nm
tooth to the corresponding point on the next tooth.
• Pitch circle is the imaginary circle on which two 309. Which the following statements is/ are true for
mating gears seem to be rolling and the diameter gear drives?
(D). (a) They can be used for long center distances
306. In a simple gear trains the direction of rotation (b) They are used to transmit power between
of driven gear is opposite to the direction of non-intersecting and parallel shafts
rotation of driving gear only if…. (c) They cannot be used for high reduction ratios
(a) Even number of idler gears are present (d) All of these
(b) Odd number of idler gears are present RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
(c) Any number of idler gears are present
Ans. (b): Gear drive are used to transmit power
(d) None of these
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 between non-intersection and parallel shafts (This is
known as spur gearing).
Ans. (a) : Simple gear train–
Advantage of gear drive–
• In simple gear train each shaft contains only one
gear. • It is positive drive hence velocity remains constant.
• Gears rotate in separate axes. • Provision for changing velocity ratio can be made
• Driver and follower rotate. with the help of gear box.
• In the same direction if the no. of gears is odd. • Its efficiency is very high (η = 98% spur gear).
• In the opposites direction if the no. of gears is even. • It can be used even for low speeds
• It can transmit high torque values
• It is compact in construction.
310. What is meant by gear ratio?
(a) The ratio of pinion speed and gear speed
(b) The ratio of number of teeth on pinion and
number of teeth on gear
307. Why is an idler gear used in gear trains? (c) Both (a) and (b)
(a) To obtain minimum center distance between (d) None of these
driving and driven shaft
(b) To have required direction of rotation
(c) Both (a) and (b) Ans. (c) : Gear ratio–
(d) None of these The ratio of pinion speed and gear speed
RRB ALP Patna 2014 ωp N p Tg
V.R. = = = or by dividing the number of
Ans. (b) : An idler gear is a gear train is defined as the ωg N g Tp
gear placed between the input and output shafts between
the drive gear and the driven gear. teeth on gear.
• It is used to change the rotational direction of the • The gear ratio is the ratio of the number of teeth in
output shaft, or to fill a large gap between the input the gear to the number of teeth in the pinion, the
and output shafts without affecting the speed ratio. pinion being the smaller of the two gears in mesh.

311. Name the part marked ‘X’ shown in figure • The rack and pinion can change rotary into linear
movement and vice versa.
315. The diameter of a Rack in Rack and Pinion

(a) Vertical shaft (b) Worm wheel mechanism is…………. .
(a) Equal to the pinion diameter
(c) Bracket (d) Lead screw
(b) Double the diameter of the pinion
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 (c) Three times the diameter of the pinion
Ans. (b) : Name the part marked (X) worm wheel (d) Infinite
shown in figure. RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
• The work wheel is also called the worm gear. Ans. (d) : The diameter of a rack in rack and pinion
• It usually consists of a worm wheel. mechanism is infinite.
• The teeth are cut in concave form over it. • A rack and pinion are used when converting
• They are used to transmit more power at a lower rotational movement to linear motion or vice versa.
velocity ratio. 316. Steering mechanism of cars is made of ………. .
(a) Cam and follower mechanism
• They are mainly used to connect shaft axes at 90o.
(b) Rack and Pinion mechanism
312. Internal gears can be made by ......... (c) Gear and Pinion mechanism
(a) Hobbing (d) All of these
(b) Shaping with pinion cutter RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
(c) Shaping with rack cutter Ans. (b) : Steering mechanism of cars is made of rack
(d) milling and pinion mechanism.
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 A rack and pinion is commonly found in the wheeled,
Ans. (b): Internal gears are manufactured by shaping steered vehicles.
process with a pinion cutter. • Rack and pinion provides less mechanical
• Hobbing, milling and shaping with rack cutter is advantage the other mechanisms such as
mainly used for external gears. recicylating ball but less backlash and greater feed
313. The lead of a helix or spiral is defined as the back or steering tool.
distance travelled …………. . 317. The main advantage of Worm and Worm
(a) Perpendicular to the axis of rotation wheel is……………… .
(a) Higher Gear ratio
(b) Parallel to the axis of rotation
(b) Lesser heat generation
(c) Inclined to the axis of rotationd
(c) Lower gear ratio
(d) None of these (d) All of these
Ans. (b) : The lead of a helix or spiral is defined as the Ans. (a) :
distance travelled parallel to the axis of rotation. • The worm shaft has spiral teeth cut on the shaft and
314. the teeth of Rack in Rack and Pinion worm wheel is a special form of gear teeth cut to
mechanism are having a shape of …………. . mesh with the worm shaft.
(a) Trapezium (b) Square • These are widely used for speed reduction purpose.
(c) rectangular (d) Circular The advantage of worm and worm wheel is–
RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001 • Higher gear ratio.
Ans. (a) : The teeth of rack in rack and pinion • Lesser heat generation
mechanism are having a shape of trapezium. • Lower gear ratio.

318. In Helical gears the position of the gear tooth 321. The type of gears used in a hand drill are …… .
with respect to the shaft on which it is mounted (a) Spur gears (b) Worm gears
is ………… . (c) Bevel gears (d) Rack and Pinion
(a) Inclined (b) Perpendicular RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
(c) Parallel (d) All of these Ans. (c) : The type of gears used in a hand drill are
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 bevel gears.
Ans. (a) : In helical gear the position of the gear tooth • Bevel gears are used to connect two shafts whose
with respect to the shaft on which it is mounted is axes intersect each other.
inclined. • They are used for power transmission on mutually,
intersecting shaft axes.
• The teeth on helical gears are cut an angle to the
face the gear. • Bevel gears are most often mounted on shafts that
are 90o apart, but can be designed to work at other
angle as well the pitch surface of bevel gear is a
cone known as a pitch come.
322. The parameters considered for the Gear Blank
inspection of Bevel gears include ………… .
(a) Size of the gear blank
(b) Shape of the gear blank
(c) Quality level expected
Advantage–
(d) All of these
• Run more quietly and smoothly than spur gears.
Can run at higher speeds.
Ans. (d) : The parameters considers for the gear blank
• Has a higher load carrying capacity than spur gears
inspection of bevel gears include–
of similar size.
• Size of gear blank
• More efficient.
• Shape of the gear blank
319. The main advantage of helical gear when
• Quality level expected.
compared with Spur gear is ………….. .
323. Which one of the following are measured
(a) Noise is less
during inspection of Bevel gears?
(b) High speed transmission
(a) Crown to back dimension
(c) High power transmission
(b) Face cone position
(d) All of these (c) Face angle
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 (d) All of these
Ans.(d): Difference between the spur and helical gear– RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
• Spur gear there is no helix angle while helical gear Ans. (d) : Following are measured during inspection of
has helix angle. bevel gears–
• Contact between teeth of two meshing gears occurs • Crown to back dimension
suddenly in case of spur gear whereas gradually • Face cone position
occurs in helical gear.
• Face angle.
• For high speed transmission, helical gears.
• Bevel gears can be used to change the direction of
320. Nominal pitch for a helical gear is ……….. . drive in a gear system by 90o.
(a) Equal to the axial pitch 324. In a spur gear width of the tooth measured
(b) Lesser than axial pitch along the pitch circle is a called:
(c) Greater than axial pitch (a) Tooth depth (b) Tooth width
(d) None of these (c) Tooth thickness (d) All of these
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
Ans. (b) : Nominal pitch for a helical gear is lesser than Ans. (c) : In a spur gear width of the tooth measured
axial pitch. along the pitch circle is a called tooth thickness.
• The normal pitch of a helical gear is the pitch of the • Tooth thickness is also called circular thickness
tool used to cut the teeth. formula of tooth thickness (T) = CP/2
• It is measured in a plane perpendicular to the Tooth space– The distance between adjacent tooth
direction of the teeth. measured on the pitch circle.

325. The product of the diametral pitch and circular 329. The circular pitch of a gear is given by
pitch is equal to: ______(Where d= diameter of pitch circle, t =
(a) 1 (b) 1/π number of teeth):
(c) π (d) 2π (a) πd/t (b) πd/2t
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 (c) 2πd/t (d) πd/3t
Ans. (c) : (DP) Diameter pitch = T/D
Ans. (a) : Circular Pitch– It is the distance measured
πD
(C.P) Circular pitch = along the circumference of the pitch circle from a point
T on one tooth the corresponding on the adjacent tooth.
D P × C.P
πD
Pc =
Τ πD T
×
D T Module (m)– It is the ratio of the pitch diameter to the
D P × C.P = π number of teeth.
326. Internal gears and splines used in automobile d
m=
industry are manufactured by: T
(a) Casting (b) Milling Where, d = pitch diameter
(c) Broaching (d) Gear shaping T = number of teeth.
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 Diameter pitch (DP)– It is the number of teeth per unit
Ans. (c) : Internal gears are manufactured by shaping length of the pitch circle diameter.
process with a pinion cutter. 330. The module of a gear is given by
• Hobbing, milling and shaping with rack cutter is _______(Where d = diameter of pitch circle, t =
mainly used for external gears. number of teeth)
• Internal gears and pines used in automobiles (a) d/t (b) d/2t
industry are manufactured by broaching. (c) 2d/t (d) d/3t
• Internal gears and splines used in automobile RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
industry are manufactured by broaching. Ans. (a) : Module– It is the ratio of the pitch diameter
327. Worm gears are used for transmitting power to the number of teeth
between d
(a) Two non-parallel, non-intersecting m=
T
(b) Two parallel, non-intersecting shafts
Where, d = pitch diameter
(c) Both (a) and (b)
T = number of teeth.
(d) None of these
331. Which of the following does not give velocity
ratio of gears?
Ans. (a) : Worm gears are used for transmitting power (a) ω2/ω1 (b) N1/D2
between two non-parallel, non intersecting shaft.
(c) D1/D2 (d) T1/T2
• They are mainly used to connect shaft axes at 90o. RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
• Worm gears are widely used in power transmission
Ans. (b) :
application, in which a compact high reduction and
Speed of driver gear
a relatively low speed drive is required. V.R. =
• It can give velocity ratio as high as 300:1 or more in Speed of driven gear
a single step in a minimum of space, but it has a Speed of pinion
V.R. =
lower efficiency. Speed of gear
328. In general longest rack can be made by using: Velocity ratio of gears = ω1/ω2
(a) Lathe V.R. = D1/D2
(b) Shaper V.R. = T2/T1
(c) Horizontal milling machine
332. The minimum number of teeth on pinion to
(d) Planer avoid interference in rack and pinion is:
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (a) 15 (b) 18
Ans. (c) : In general longest rack can be made by using (c) 21 (d) 24
horizontal milling machine. RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (b) : The minimum number of teeth on pinion to 336. To connect two intersecting shafts we use-
avoid interference in rack and pinion is 18. (a) Spur
System of gear teeth Minimum number of (b) Helical
teeth on the pinion (c) Worm and wheel
o 12 (d) Bevel
1
14 Composite RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
2
Ans. (d) :
1o 32
14 Full depth involute Parallel shaft connecting gears–
2 • Spur gears
20o full depth involute 18 • Helical gears or helical spur gears
o
20 stub involute 14 • Spur rack and pinion.
333. In worm and wheel, the shaft axes are at: Intersection shaft connecting gears–
(a) 90º (b) 45º • Straight bevel gears
(c) 180º (d) 270º • Spiral bevel gears
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 • Mighter gears
Ans. (a) : In worm and wheel, the shaft axes are • Zerol bevel gears.
90o(usually). They are also used as spiral gears, that is Non-parallel and non-intersecting shaft gears (Skew
worm wheel is used for power transmission between shaft gears)–
shafts of non-parallel and non-cutting shaft axes. • Skew bevel gear or hypoid gears
• They are mainly used to connect shaft axes at 90o. • Spiral gears or crossed helical gears
• They are used to transmit more power at a higher • Worm gears.
velocity ratio (as high as 300 : 1). 337. Fastest method of cutting gears is-
(a) Milling
(b) Gear shaping
(c) Gear hobbing
(d) All of these
Ans. (c) : Fastest method of cutting gear is gear
hobbing.
• Gear hobbing is a fast and continuous process so it
is realized as an economical process as compared to
In general the worm is the driver and the worm wheel is
other gear generation processes.
the driven member.
• The method is versatile and can generate spur,
334. In signal started worm, for one rotation, the helical, worm and worm wheels.
wheel will rotate equal to:
338. A gear finishing operation is ______
(a) p/2 (b) p
(a) Hobbing
(c) 2p (d) p/3
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 (b) Shaping
(c) Milling
Ans. (b) : In signal started worm, for one rotation, the
wheel will rotate equal to p. The worm wheel have gear (d) Shaving or burnishing
teeth like spur gear. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
• A worm gear is a screw butted up against what Ans. (d) : A gear finishing operation is shaving or
looks like a standard spur gear with slightly angled burnishing.
and curved teeth. • Gear burnishing is used to remove or reduce the
335. The worm wheel have gear teeth like: burrs along with improving the surface finish. The
(a) Spur gear (b) Helical gear action of burnishing dies on tooth profile allows the
(c) Bevel gear (d) None of these improvement in finish without altering the tooth
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 profile.
Ans. (a):The worm wheel have gear teeth like spur 339. How many driven gears will be there in a
gear. simple gear train?
A worm gear is a screw butted up against what look like (a) 1 (b) 2
a standard spur gear with slightly angled and curve (c) 3 (d) 4
teeth. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
Ans. (a) : Simple gear train– In a simple gear train, 344. How the ratio of the pitch diameter to the
there is only one gear on each shaft. number of teeth of a gear is defined in spur
Compound gear train– In a compound gear train, there gear?
are more than one gear on each shaft. (a) Land (b) Module
Reverted gear train– In a reverted gear train, the axes (c) Addendum (d) Dedendum
of the first gear and the last gear are co-axial. RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
Epicyclic gear train– In an epicylic gear train, the axes Ans. (b) : Module– It is the ratio of the pitch diameter
of the shafts, over which the gears are mounted, may to number of teeth.
move relatively to fixed axis. m = d/T
340. What is the name of driver gear in change gear Diametral Pitch– It is the number of teeth per unit
train on a lathe? length (in mm) of the pitch circle diameter.
(a) Stud gear (b) Idler gear Circular pitch– It is the distance measured along the
(c) Tumbler gear (d) Lead screw gear circumference of the pitch circle from a point on one
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 tooth to the corresponding point on the adjacent tooth.
Ans. (c) : In lathe machine tumbler gear is used to 345. What is the name of the gear?
change the direction of the lead screw feed rod motion
in lathe machines. By engaging tumbler gear, the
carriage can be moved automatically from tailstock end
to head stock end.
341. Which type of attachment is useful for cutting
helical threads, gears?
(a) Rack gear (b) Worm gear
(a) Slotting attachments
(c) Bevel gear (d) Hypoid gear
(b) High speed attachments
(c) Vertical milling attachments
Ans. (d) : Hypoid gears– A hypoid is a type of spiral
(d) Universal spiral attachments
bevel gear whose axis does not intersect with the
axis of the meshing gear. The shape of hypoid gear
Ans. (d) : Universal spiral attachments type of is a revolved hyperboloid, where as the shape of a
attachment is useful for cutting helical threads, gears. spiral bevel gear is normally conical.
342. Which element of gear tooth is measured by Ex.– Hypoid gears are commonly used in truck drive
flange micrometer? differentials.
(a) Addendum (b) Dedendum 346. Which machine is used for machining worm
(c) Circular pitch (d) Chordal thickness wheel?
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 (a) Slotting machine (b) Shaping machine
Ans. (d) : Chordal thickness element of gear tooth is (c) Planing machine (d) Hobbing machine
measured by flange micrometer. RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
Tooth thickness measured along a chord passing
through the points where the pitch circle crosses the Ans. (d) : Worm gear– A worm gear is the most
tooth profile. compact type of gearing system. They are capable of
being placed in very small spaces and still providing
343. Which type of gear may be used for connecting
high ratio speed reduction with proper mounting and
shafts that are at an angle in the same plane or
in different planes? installation, worm gear system operate smoothly and
(a) Spur gear (b) Bevel gear quietly.
(c) Worm gear (d) Helical gear How worm gears are made– The typical method for
manufacturing work gears is hobbig using a hob or
cutting tool, this cutting tool is similar to gear with
Ans. (b) : Bevel gears are used to connect shafts whose which the worm gear will mate. Worms can be turned,
axes lie at an angle to each other, although in most hobbed, milled or ground.
applications the shafts are at right angle.
347. What is the formula for the lead of worm?
• Bevel gears are used to connect two shafts whose
axes intersect each other. π
(a) π mz1 (b)
• Bevel gears are always made in pairs they are used mz1
for power transmission on mutually intersecting (c) d, mz1 (d) ha1 + hf1
shaft axes. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Ans. (a):The formula for the lead of worm lead (l) = 352. To cut 38 teeth on a helical gear having an
πmz1 angle of 45° which cutter number should be
Where, m = module used?
z1 = no. of teeth. (a) Cutter number 1 (b) Cutter number 2
(c) Cutter number 3 (d) Cutter number 4
348. What is the angle between the pitch cone
generator and tip surface of tooth in bevel
gear? Ans. (b) : To cut 38 teeth on a helical gear having on
angle of 45o which cutter number should be used cutter
(a) Root angle
number 2.
(b) Shaft angle
353. Which one of the following is the metric helical
(c) Addendum angle
gear proportion for real module (M)?
(d) Dedendum angle (a) π M (b) N M
Ans. (c) : Dedendum angle– Dedendum angle is the PD NM
(c) (d)
angle between the bottom of the teeth and the pitch cone N M
generator. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
349. Which type of bevel gears are mostly used in Ans. (c) : For the metric helical gear,
automobile drives? PD
Real module =
(a) Hypoid gears (b) Spiral bevel gears N
(c) Angular bevel gears (d) Straight bevel gears 354. Which one of the following is metric helical
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 gear proportion for indexing movement?
Ans. (a) : Hypoid gears of bevel gears are mostly used 10 20
in automobile drivers (in differential gear box). (a) (b)
N N
• Hypoid gears are helical bevel gear used when the
30 40
axes of the two shafts are perpendicular but do not (c) (d)
intersect. N N
• They are commonly used to connect drive shafts to RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
rear axles of automobile, and are often incorrectly 40
called spiral gearing. Ans. (d) :
N
350. Which type of gear is noiseless running as there 355. Which one of the following is English helical
is no hammering action? gear proportion for clearance (c)?
(a) Spur gear (b) Bevel gear 0.157 1.157
(c) Worm gear (d) Helical gear (a) (b)
NDP NDP
2.157 3.157
Ans. (d) : Helical type of gear is noiseless running as (c) (d)
there is no hammering action. NDP NDP
• These gears have better grip on each other than the RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
spur gear. T
Ans. (a) : ∵ NDP =
• Can also be used for changing the axis direction. D
351. Which one of the following is NOT the Clearance = Ded – Ad
advantage of helical gears? = 0.157 m
(a) Smooth operation D
= 0.157 ×
(b) Lesser load carrying capacity T
(c) Greater load carrying capacity 0.157
(d) Noiseless running =
T/D
0.157
Ans. (b) : Advantage of helical gear– Clearance = =
NDP
• Smooth operation.
356. Which one of the following types of bevel gears
• Greater load carrying capacity.
is mainly used in automobile drives?
• Noiseless running. (a) Straight tooth bevel gears
• Run more quietly and smoothly than spur gear. (b) Spiral bevel gears
• More efficient. (c) Hypoid gears
Lesser load carrying capacity is not the advantage of (d) None of the above
helical gears. RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
Ans. (c) : Hypoid gear types of bevel gears is mainly Ans. (b) : D = 168 mm, m = 3.25 mm
used in automobile drives (differential). T=?
• Hypoid gears are a unique category of spiral bevel D
gears that are used to transmit rotational power m=
T
between two shafts at right angles.
• Hypoid gearings are used in power transmission 168
3.25 =
products that are more efficient. T
357. 2.25 m' is given as proportion for straight teeth 168
T=
rack. For which element is this the proportion? 3.25
(a) Addendum (b) Dedendum T = 51
(c) Whole depth (d) Tooth thickness
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 Approximate ≃ 48 teeth.
Ans. (c) : Total depth or whole depth– It is the radial 362. In a spur gear, if outside diameter = 300 mm;
distance between the addendum and dedendum circle of module = 5 mm, the number of teeth will be
a gear. It is equal to the sum of the addendum and (a) 85 teeth (b) 60 teeth
dedendum of a gear. (c) 58 teeth (d) 29 teeth
358. To cut straight teeth rack if module (m) = 3 RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
and number of teeth = 20, the length of rack Ans. (c) : Outside diameter = 300 mm
will be.........
module = 5 mm
(a) 75 mm (b) 135 mm
(c) 94.2 mm (d) 188.4 mm Pitch diameter = outside dia – 2 × addendum
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 or DP = outside dia – 2 × module
DP = 300 – 2 × 5
Ans. (d) :
DP = 290
D
∵ Module (m) = D 290
T No. of teeth = P = = 58.
D m 5
⇒ 3=
20 363. In a spur gear, if pitch diameter = 40 mm;
⇒ D = 60 mm outside diameter = 48 mm, module = 4 mm, the
number of teeth will be
∴ length of rack = πD
= 3.14 × 60 (a) 10 teeth (b) 20 teeth
= 188.4 mm. (c) 30 teeth (d) 40 teeth
359. 'mZ2" is given as proportion of worm wheel. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
For which element is this the proportion? Ans. (a) : Pitch diameter (DP) = 40 mm
(a) Addendum (b) Dedendum module (m) = 4 mm
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Throat diameter D
No. of teeth = P
RRB ALP Patna 2014 m
D 40
Ans. (c) : ∵ Module (m) =
T
(t) =
4
∴ D = mT t = 10 mm.
or D = mZ2 364. In a spur gear, if module = 4 mm, the tooth
Here, D = Pitch diameter. height will be
360. The normal of a helical gear with real module (a) 4.67 mm (b) 5.67 mm
(m) of 6.62 and having an angle of 25° is (c) 6.67 mm (d) 8.67 mm
(a) 6.62 × sin 25° (b) 6.62 × cos 25°
(c) 6.62 × tan 25° (d) 6.62 × cot 25°
Ans. (d) : Module (m) = 4 mm,
Tooth height (h) = addendum + dedendum
Ans. (b) : Normal = m × cos θ = 6.62 × cos 25o.
= 1 × module + 1.157 × module
361. In a spur gear, if pitch diameter = 168 mm;
= 1 m + 1.157 m
module = 3.25 mm, the number of teeth will be
(a) 24 teeth (b) 48 teeth = 4 × 1 + 1.157 × 4
(c) 72 teeth (d) 96 teeth = 4 + 4.628
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 = 8.628 mm

365. Which among the following statements is NOT 368. One complete rotation of the bull gear in a
correct ? shaper gives ram
(a) The gear ratio between worm and worm (a) One forward stroke
wheel in a dividing head is 50 : 1 (b) One return stroke
(b) Worm shaft of the dividing head has single (c) One forward and one return stroke
start worm
(d) No movement
(c) 20 turns of index crank revolve the spindle
through 180°
(d) For rapid indexing the worm and worm wheel Ans. (c) : One complete rotation of the bull gear in a
are to be disengaged shaper gives ram one forward and one return stroke.
RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010 369. Name the part marked 'X' in the figure.
Ans. (a) : The gear ratio between worm and worm
wheel in a dividing head is 50 : 1, this statement is not
correct related to worm gearing. While other statement
is correct.
366. A simple change gear train is used to cut a
certain pitch thread. Due to the non-
availability of the required gear from the set,
driven gear with 3 teeth more than that of the (a) Tumbler gear unit
calculated value is mounted. The thread that is (b) Head stock
cut will have a pitch.
(c) Main spindle
(a) more than that required for the full threaded
length (d) Gear box driving shaft
(b) less than that required for the full threaded RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
length Ans. (b) : Name the part marked X in the figure head
(c) equal to that required for the full threaded stock.
length 370. The compound gear arrangement is shown in
(d) more for certain length and then less for the figure, Identify the gear marked 'X'.
remaining thread length
Ans. (b) : Less than that required for the full threaded
length.
367. In a shaper, rotary motion is converted into
reciprocating motion by means of
(a) Worm and worm wheel
(b) Rack and pinion
(c) Rocker arm and bull gear
(d) Shaft and pulley
RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008 (a) 1st driver (b) 2nd driver
Ans. (c) : In a shaper, rotary motion is converted into (c) 1st driven (d) 2nd driven
reciprocating motion by means of rocker arm and bull RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014
gear. Ans. (b) : The compound gear arrangement is shown in
• Shaper is a reciprocating type of machine tool in figure identify the gear marked X 2nd driver.
which the ram moves the cutting backward and 371. Gears are used in order to achieve .......... drive.
forwards in a straight line.
(a) negative (b) positive
(c) constant (d) zero
Ans. (b) : Gear are used in order to achieve positive
drive.
A drive- in which slip does not occur is known as a
positive drive.

372. What problems may arise due to error in Ans. (a) : Pitch circle is the outline of smooth rollers
cutting the teeth of a gear? or frictional discs in each pair of mating gears.
(a) Low velocity ratio (b) Low efficiency 377. Which of the following has the minimum axial
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) Noisy vibrations thrust?
RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005 (a) Spur gear (b) Herringbone gear
Ans. (d) : Noisy vibrations problems may arise due to (c) Bevel gear (d) Worm gear
error in cutting the teeth of a gear. RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
373. What is the formula used for calculating the Ans. (b) : Herring bone gear has the minimum axial
module of a gear? thrust.
(a) m = T – D (b) m = T × D • Double helical gears were manufactured to solve
D this problem. Double helical gears are also called
(c) m = T + D (d) m =
T hearing bone gears.
Ans. (d) : Module of gear m = D/T
Where, m = module
D = diameter
T = no. of teeth.
374. What is backlash of a gear?
(a) Radial distance between the two points
(b) Top surface of the tooth
(c) Difference between tooth space and tooth
thickness 378. The sum of addendum and dedendum of the
(d) None of the above teeth of gear is called –
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 (a) whole depth (b) working depth
Ans. (c) : Difference between tooth space and tooth (c) tooth depth (d) root
thickness is backlash of a gear. RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
Ans. (a) : The sum of addendum and dedendum of the
teeth of gear is called whole depth.
379. Which device is the driver member of the
clutch?
(a) Driven gear (b) Driver gear
(c) Fly wheel (d) Pressure plate
Ans. (c) : Flywheel device is the driver member of the
clutch.
375. Which of the following gears can have straight • The clutch is used to connect and disconnect
as well as spiral teeth? transmission of power from the engine flywheel to
(a) Helical gear the gearbox drive shaft.
(b) Spur gear • The clutch consists of driven and driving shafts.
(c) Bevel gear • A clutch cover is mounted on the flywheel by a set
(d) Rack and pinion gear of screw.
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 • A pressure plate presses the clutch plate against the
Ans. (c) : Bevel gear can have straight as well as spiral flywheel by the pressure of springs.
teeth. • A pressure plate acts as a driven member of a
• Bevel gears are used to connect two shafts whose clutch.
axes intersect each other. The axes of the shaft of 380. Diametral pitch of a gear is ......... when N no. of
these gears are on the same plane and the teeth of gear teeth and pitch circle diameter
these gears are straight or spiral.
(a) N/D (b) D/N
376. ........... is the outline of smooth rollers or (c) (N+D)/N (d) None of these
frictional discs in each pair of mating gears.
(a) Pitch circle (b) Pitch surface
(c) Pitch point (d) Pitch diameter 1 T
Ans. (d) : Diametral pitch = =
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 module D
381. Material used to manufacture gears Ans. (a) : Bevel gears are used to transmit motion
(a) Cast iron (b) Tool steel between shafts placed at different angles to each other.
(c) High speed steel (d) Mild steel Bevel gears are used in differential drives which can
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 transmit power to two axles spinning at different
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 speeds, such as those on a cornering Automobile, Bevel
Ans. (a) : gears are used as the main mechanism for a hard drill.
Generally gears transmit angular momentum and
Straight bevel gears are the standard for bevel gears.
torque. Power is transmitted from one shaft to another
Differential bevel gears are the components that are
through a gear.
The direction of the driving and driven gears used in used in almost all vehicles and are required as soon as
external gear drive are opposite to each other and in vehicle axle is driven. When driving around corners, the
internal gear drive the driver and driven gear is same. outer wheel has to cover bigger distance than the inner
382. Initial contact of helical gear tooth wheel which also means that the outer wheel has to turn
(a) Plumber Block (b) Point faster than the inner wheel.
(c) surface (d) Line
Ans. (b) : Initial contact of helical gear tooth is point
contact. The teeth on the periphery of these types of
gears are cut at a particular angle i.e. diagonally. In this
types of gear, the cutting contact with another gear is
connected from the beginning of the teeth to end of the
teeth. Due to high power contact, these gears do not 385. In which type of gear the teeth are cut at an
make much noise while running they fall helically their angle to the axis of the gear
life is also longer. (a) warm gear (b) Helical gear
383. Gear set used to convert rotary motion into (c) Spur gear (d) Bevel gear
linear and vice versa BEML 2022
(a) Spur gear (b) bevel gears DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
(c) hypoid gear (d) rack and pinion
Ans. (b) : In a helical gear the teeth are at an angle to
the axis of the gear. Through these, more power is
Ans. (d) : The rack and pining gear set has two main
transferred at higher speed without noise. Helical gear
functions, conversion of the steering wheel is rotational
are of two types-
motion into the linear motion needed for the vehicles
wheels to turn. Reduction of gear, which makes it easier (1) Single helical gear
for the steering wheel to turn the wheels.
Rack and pinions are used for lifting mechanisms
(vertical movement), horizontal movement, positioning,
mechanisms, stoppers and to permit the synchronous
rotation of several shafts in general industrial (2) Double helical gear
machinery. On the other hand, they are also used in
steering systems to change the direction of cars.
Double helical gear also know as herring bone gears.

The most common used for helical gears is in
automotive transmissions.
386. Difference between dedendum and addendum
384. Gears used to transmit motion between shaft of gears known as–
placed at different angles to each other– (a) Flank (b) clearance
(a) Bevel gear (b) Spur gear (c) backlash (d) Module
(c) Rack and pinion (d) Hypoid gears DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
Ans. (b) : The difference between didendum and Ans. (b) : Spur Gear –
addendum of gears is known as clearance. The radial • It is a simple type of gear with teeth parallel to the
distance from the top edge of the gear teeth to the root axis of the gear.
of the matching gear teeth its called a clearance. • This gear is used to transmit power between two
Clearance = Didendum – Addendum parallel shafts.
Clearance is the distance between the outside • These types of gears axe more noisy.
diameter of a gear and the root diameter of its made.
πD
This margin compensates for the thermal expansion that • Circular pitch (Pc) =
occurs during operation, and prevents the top of a gear T
tooth from interfering with the root of its mating gear T – number of teeth, D – pitch circular diameter
tooth. D
If clearance is absent there will be interference • module (m) =
T
If clearance increase, power transmission decrease.
number of teeth (T)
387. Tumbler gears are used for • diametrical pitch =
pitch circle diameter ( D )
(a) Quick return mechanism
(b) gear transmission • Addendum = m
(c) Spindle gear mechanism • Dedendum = 1.157 m
(d) For keeping and breaking contact with fixed 390. In a single helical gear, the helix angle ranges
stud gear from-
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 (a) 15º-20º (b) 10º-15º
Ans. (d) : Tumbler gear mechanism is used to change (c) 20º-35º (d) 35º-50º
the direction of lead screw and feed rod in lathe UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
machine by engaging tumbler gear, the carriage can be Ans. (c) :
moved automatically from tailstock end to headstock.
• Helix angle is the angle between any helix and an
388. Speed ration (mG) of Worm gear is- axial line on its right, circular cylinder or cone.
(Where NG is number of teeth on the gear and • Helix angles are selected to obtain a minimum
NW = is number of threads on the worm) overlap ratio and provide good load shearing.
(a) mG = NG/NW (b) mG = NW/NG
• Helix angles very from 5º to 45º.
(c) mG = NG × NW (d) mG = NG + NW
• The helix angles for single-helical gear lies between
20 to 35º and for double-helical it falls between 30 to
Ans. (b) : Speed ratio- It is the ratio of speed of driving 45º.
gear and driven gear.
• The thrust generated is also a function of the helix
The speed ratio of any pair of gear moving in tandem
angle.
is inversely proportional to the number of teeth.
391. If n = number of per inches in the lead screw
N1 T2 and N = number of threads to be cut in the
Speed Ratio = =
N 2 T1 screw, then which statement is correct for
N1 = Speed of driving gear or worm cutting the thread in lathes:
N2 = Speed of driven gear (a) N/n (b) n/N
T1 = number of teeth on the driving gear (c) n + N (d) N × n
T2 = number of teeth ont the driving gear. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
N1 = NW, N2 = NG then Ans. (a) : For thread cutting on lathe-
N T Spindle pitch
(mG) = G = 2 Change gear Ratio =
N W T1 Pitch of lead screw
Worm gears can achieve ratios of more than 300 : 1 N
or more in a single step in a minimum of space, but it =
n
has a lower efficiency.
392. Gears used for connecting intersecting shafts?
389. Which of the following statement true for the
spur gear: (a) Helical Gear
(a) Module = Pitch diameter × Number of teeth (b) Bevel Gear
(b) Module = Pitch diameter / Number of teeth (c) Spur Gear
(c) Module = Pitch diameter + Number of teeth (d) Rack and pinion
(d) Module = Number of teeth/Pitch diameter IOCL 2020

Ans. (b) : Bevel gears are gears where the axes of the 397. A gear wheel has 36 teeth and 3 mm module, its
two shafts intersect and the tooth-bearing faces of the pitch diameter is
gears themselves are conically shaped. (a) 12 mm (b) 75 mm
• These bevel gears are used to transmit rotational (c) 80 mm (d) 108 mm
motion at right angles (90º).
393. If a gear has 40 teeth with pitch circle diameter
240 mm, the module of the gear is : Ans. (d) : Module (m) · 3 mm.
(a) 3 (b) 4 Diametrical pitch (D) = ?
(c) 5 (d) 6 No. of teeth (T) · 36
D
Ans. (d) : D = 240 mm, T = 40 m=
D 240 T
m= = =6 D
T 40 3=
m=6 36
D = 3 × 36
394. In which type of gear, the teeth are cut parallel
to the axis of rotation? = 108 mm
(a) Helical gear (b) Spur gear 398. A main purpose of using worm and worm
(c) Bevel gear (d) Worm gear wheel drives in machines and their accessories
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III is to?
Ans. (b) : Spur gears– When two parallel and coplanar (a) Transmit large torque
shafts are connected by gears having teeth parallel to
(b) Provide large speed reduction from worm
the axis of the shaft, called spur gears, and the
shaft to worm wheel
arrangement is known as spur gearing.
395. Which gear arrangement used to change the (c) Transmit higher speeds
circular motion of horizontal to vertical (d) Provide large speed reduction from worm
without change in speed ratio? wheel to worm shaft
(a) Two spur gear ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II
(b) Two helical gear Ans. (b) : Worm and worm drives are used in machines
(c) Two bevel gear
and its accessories for the purpose of reducing the speed
(d) Worm and worm gear
of the worm wheel more than the work shaft. It is used
like spiral gears. warms and worm wheels are used to
Ans. (c) : Straight bevel gear system is used to change
transmit more power at a higher velocity ratio.
circular motion of horizontal shaft to the vertical motion
without changing the speed of the shaft. This gear 399. Helical gears are used in ................
mechanism is also used in the Automobiles cars (a) Steam turbines (b) Watch
differential to change the horizontal circular motion of (c) Cycle (d) None of the above
engine shaft to the vertical circular motion of tires. ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015
396. Indexing head mechanism works with? Ans. (a) : Helical gear is used steam turbines.
(a) Rack and pinion • Helical gears have their teeth inclined to the axles of
(b) Worm and worm gear the shaft in the form of a helix.
(c) Two helical gear • Helical gear can take higher loads than similarly sized
(d) Two bevel gear spur gears. The motion of helical gears is smoother
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2016, Shift-II and quieter than the motion of spur gears.
Ans. (b) : Indexing head mechanism works worm and • Helical gears are used increasingly often as power
worm gear. transmitting gears. Since not only can they carry large
An indexing head, also know as a dividing head or loads because of their lower dynamic load but also
spiral head is a specialized too that allows a work piece noise and vibration levels in operation are lower
to be circular indexed easily and precisely rotated to compared with these of spur gears.
present angles or circular divisions.
400. Size of gear is denoted by–
In the indexing head mechanism, work and worm
gear are used. Worm and worm wheel are used for (a) Pitch circle diameter (b) Pressure angle
transmission of power between shafts of non- (c) Diameter of pitch (d) Circular pitch
intersecting axes. They are used to transmit more power RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
at a lower velocity ratio. NTPC Fitter 2016
Ans. (a) : The size of the gear is usually specified by 404. For selecting the gears for single start thread
the pitch circle diameter. It is also called as pitch cutting, the formula used is
diameter. Driver Pitch of leads crew
Circular pitch- It is the distance measured on the (a) =
Driven Pitch to be cut
circumference of the pitch circle from a point of the one
tooth to the corresponding point on the next tooth. Driver Pitch to be cut
(b) =
 πD  Driven Pitch of leads crew
 Pc T 
  (c)
Driven
=
Pitch to be cut
Diametral pitch- It is the ratio of the number of teeth to Driver Pitch of leads crew
the pitch circle diameter in millimeter. (d) None of the above
 T ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
 Pd = D 
  Ans : (a) Formula of gears for single start thread
401. Back lash in gear is : cutting–
(a) Clearance between mating teeth Driver Pitch of Lead Screw
=
(b) Increase in speed Driven Pitch to be cut
(c) Decrease in speed
⇒ In single start thread pitch and lead are same.
(d) Fuel efficiency
⇒ On the screw are made in the form of a helix.
RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
L
Ans. (a) : Back lash, sometimes called lash or play, is Helix angle ( tan θ ) =
πd
clearance between mating components, sometimes
described as the amount of lost motion due to clearance. 405. Bevel gear is used to transmit power between
Ex. - in a pair of gears backlash is the amount of shafts which are
clearance between mated gear teeth. (a) Parallel (b) Co-axial
[Back lash = Space width between two teeth – Tooth (c) At an angle (d) None of the above
thickness] ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
[Back lash = Space width – Tooth thickness] Ans. (c) :
402. If the input gear of a gear train rotates faster • Bevel gears have a conical form and can be used to
than the output gear, then the gear train is transmit rotational power through shafts that are
called : typically at an angle of 90º degree to each other.
• Bevel gears are used in differential drives, which can
(a) speed reducer (b) speed enhancer
transmit power to two axis spinning at different
(c) speed breaker (d) none of the above
speeds, such as those on a cornering automobiles
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 • Bevel gears are used to connect two shafts whose axes
Ans. (a) : If the input gear of a gear train moves faster intersect each other.
than the output gear reduction, then it is called a speed 406. In a final drive gearing system, which of the
reduction gear train. following type of gear is NOT used?
If the input gear of a gear train moves slower than the (a) Spiral bevel (b) Straight bevel
output gear, then this gear train is called a speed up gear (c) Hypoid (d) Spur
train. RRB ALP Mechanic Motor Vehicle 23-1-2019, Shift-III
403. Back gear in a conventional centre lathe is used Ans : (d) Final drive– In a final drive gearing system,
for : spur gar is not used. While spiral bevel gear, straight
(a) Reducing spindle speed bevel gear and hypoid gears are used in a final drive.
(b) Increasing spindle speed 407. Bevel gear is used to transmit power between
(c) Direction changing of spindle shafts which are–
(a) external friction relation to internal friction
(d) Increasing feed
(b) output speed relative to input speed
(c) input speed relative to output speed
Ans. (a) : In a conventional center lathe, the back gear (d) external diameter relative to internal diameter
is used to reduce the speed of the spindle. It is part of RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I
head stock. Ans : (b) A velocity ratio is the ratio of the number of
In this lathe the tumbler gear is used to change the rotations of a driver gear to the number of rotation of
direction of motion of feed rod or lead screw. driven gear.

ω1 N1 T2 The two primary generating processes are hobbing and

Velocity Ratio = = = shaping, hobbing uses a helically fluted cutting tool
ω2 N 2 T1
called a hob.
1
Gear ratio = Hibbing method is the method of making gears by
V.R. generating process. By this gear can be made at high
N1 = Number of rotation of a driver gear production rate. Gears are made also by milling and
N2 = Number of rotation of a driven gear casting.
T1 = Number of teeth of driven
412. Used to transmit power on parallel shafts–
T2 = Number of teeth of driver
(a) Bevel gear (b) Helical gear
408. Which of the following is required between the
(c) Worm wheel (d) Rack & pinion
ring gear and the pinion gear to allow for heat
expansion and lubrication? (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(a) Backlash (b) Shims Ans : (b) Helical Gear – On this type of gear, the teeth
(c) Pits (d) Hole are not made parallel to the axles of the gear, but are
RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I made at a fixed angle. This gar is used to transmit the
motion of high speed and heavy loads on parallel shafts.
Ans. (a) : Back lash is required in gear between the ring
gear and the pinion gear to allow for heat expansion This gear has the disadvantage that when the gear is in
(thermal expansion) and lubrication. motion so due to side pressure the gear tries to come
[Backlash = Space width – tooth thickness] out.
409. A small gear fitted with a cylindrical gear of 413. Material used to produce gear–
infinite pitch circle radius is called– (a) Cast Iron (b) High speed steel
(a) Spur gear drive (c) Tool Steel (d) Mild Steel
(b) Worm and worm wheel DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
(c) Bevel gear Ans : (a) Cost iron is used for making gears. The
(d) rack and pinion carbon content in cost iron ranges from 9 to 4%. It is
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II brittle and breaks when hit. In this some part of carbon
is combined and some part is free, that is in the form of
Ans. (d) : A small gear fitted with a cylindrical gear of
graphite.
infinite pitch circle radius is called a rank and pinion.
414. Process commonly used to harden gear teeth
410. The module of gear is the ratio between–
(a) cold working (b) Quenching
(a) diameter of pitch circle and number of teeth
(c) dispersion hardening (d) induction
(b) number of teeth and diameter of pitch circle
hardening
(c) addendum and dedendum
(d) diameter of addendum and pitch circle
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II Ans : (d) Induction hardening is generally used to
harden the gear tooth. Generally the gear is made of
Ans. (a) : Module of a gear is the ratio between the
cost iron alloy steel. Gear teeth are made by cutting
diameter of the pitch circle and the number of teeth.
teeth on a casting and milling machine.
The module is obtained by dividing the pitch diameter
by the number of teeth. 415. Higher gearing ratio can be achieved
It is the inverse of the diametrical pitch and is (a) Bevel gearing (b) Spur gearing
measured in mm. (c) Worm gearing (d) Helical gearing
D
module (m) = Ans : (c) Worm gear has the highest gearing ratio. For
T
non-parallel and non-intersecting shaft axes, the
411. Which one of the following methods produce distance between the pitches of this gear is used. In
gear by generating process : worm gear movement, there is a worm like a screw. On
(a) Hobbing (b) Casting which one or more cage are . This worm corresponds to
(c) Punching (d) Milling a wheel called a worm gear. It is a used transmit high
BHEL 2020 power at a high velocity ratio.
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 416. What gears are used to transmit power at 900–
Ans : (a) Gear generating involves gear cutting through (a) Bevel Gear (b) Helical Gear
the relative motion of a rotating cutting tool (hobb) and (c) Spur Gear (d) Rank and pinion
the generating, or rotational motion of the work piece. (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Ans: (a) Bevel Gears– Bevel gear are power transition A circular pitch is the distance between the
components primarily used to change the direction of corresponding points of the adjacent teeth measured on
shaft rotation and to decrease speed and increase torque the pitch circle. In other wards, it is the space between
between non-parallel rotating shafts. They are used on the teeth. In order for the gear to mesh properly, the
shafts with intersecting axes and in special case on mashing gear teeth must be of an equal size. That is to
so, the circular pitches must be equal.
shafts whose axes do not intersect.
417. A set consisting of several gears called–
(a) feeder
(b) Gear train
(c) Bevel Gear
(d) Spur Gear
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) A Gear train is a series of gears designed to
achieve a particular overall gear ratio.
A simple gear train has only one gear fixed to each
419. Which gear is used in indexing equipment?
shaft. A gear train consists of a combinations as two or
(a) Helical gear (b) Spur Gear
more gears, mounted on rotating shafts, to transmit
(c) Warm and Warm wheel
torque or power.
(d) Rank and pinion
Types of Gear train-
(RRB Banglre ALP, 08.07.2007)
(a) Simple gear train
Ans : (c) Worm and worm wheel is used in indexing
(b) Compound gear train
mechanism.
(c) Reverted gear train
An indexing, also know as a dividing head or spiral
(d) Epicyclic gear train head is a specialized tool that allows a work piece to the
circular indexed easily.
In the indexing mechanism- warm and warm gear are
used. Warm and warm wheel are used for transmission
of power between shafts of non-intersecting axes. They
are used to transmit more power at a higher velocity
ratio.
420. The height of the teeth above the pitch circle of
the gear is the part of the gear
(a) Module (b) Addendum
(c) Didendum (d) Cardiac pitch
Simple gear train Ans : (b) Addendum – The height of the teeth above
418. Distance between one teeth to another teeth on the pitch circle of the gear is called addendum. Its valve
a pitch circle of the gear– is equal to the one module.
(a) Addendum 421. In which gear drive the axial thrust is reduced–
(b) pitch diameter (a) Spur Gearing (b) Warm Gearing
(c) Diaya pitch (c) Herring bone Gearing(d) Bevel Gearing
(d) Circular pitch (RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008)
(RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012) Ans : (c) A herring bone gear, specific type of
Ans : (d) Circular Pitch– If the distance two adjacent Double helical gear, is a special type of gear that is a
teeth is measured from the pitch circle, then it is called side to side combination to two helical gears of opposite
circular pitch. hands.
Circumference of pitch The double-helical gear, also referred to as the
Circular pitch · herring bone gear is used for transmitting power
number of teeth
between parallel shafts. It was developed to overcome
π× D the disadvantage of the high and thrust that is present
=
N with single-helical gears.

Double helical gears and herring bone gears are the Ans : (b) Module – It is the ratio of the reference
same type of gear, but these with a groove in the center (pitch circle) diameter of the gear divided by the
are called double helical gears, while those without a Number of teeth.
groove where the left and right teeth meet in the center,
 D
 m = T  (mm/teeth)
are called herring bone gears.
 
Module is the unit of size that indicates how big or
small a gear.
426. The sum of addendum and dedendum gears is
called–
(a) absolute depth
422. Harringbone gear are used in- (b) working depth
(a) Heavy load & high speed
(c) depth of teeth
(b) Medium load & high speed
(d) depth of root
(c) Light load & high speed
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
(d) Medium load & low speed
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 Ans : (a) Whole depth/Total depth/Absolute depth-
This is the height of a tooth. It is the radial distance
Ans. (a) : The double helical Gear, also referred to as
between the addendum and the dedendum circles of a
the herring bone gear is used for transmitting power
between parallel shafts used in heavy load with high gear. It is equal to the sum of the addendum and
speed. dedendum.
427. In tumbler gear unit–
(a) One gear
(b) Two gear
(c) Three gear
(d) Four gear
423. Find out the change gear ratio for threads (RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 29.06.2008)
cutting where as thread of pitch to be cut is 2 Ans : (c) Tumbler gear train– The tumbler gear unit
mm and pitch of lead screw is 6 mm. consists of three gears, having the same number of teeth
(a) 1/4 (b) 1/2 and it connects the spindle gear to the fixed gear.
(c) 1/5 (d) 1/3 Tumbler gear unit is also called the reversing gear unit
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 as it is used to change the direction of rotation of feed
Ans. (d) : Given- of the tool for the same direction of rotation of the
Pitch of lead screw = 6 mm spindle. Tumbler gear unit can be engaged and
Thread cutting pitch = 2 mm disengaged with the fixed stud gear by the operation of
thread cutting pitch the hand lever provided in the unit.
Change gear ratio =
pitch of lead screw 428. In which of the following power transmission
system, key and keyway are needed?
2 1
= = (a) Coupling
6 3
(b) Gear drive
424. The depth of the tooth space below the pitch
(c) Belt–Pulley drive
circle of the gear is called–
(a) Addendum (b) Center distance (d) All of these
(c) Crest (d) Dedendum (IOF Fitter 2017)
(RRB Siliguri ALP, 2014) Ans : (d) Power transmission is done by coupling gear
Ans : (d) Dedendum– The distance from the pitch drive and belt-pulley drive. All these systems use key
circle of the gear to the depth of the tooth is called passage with the help of 'key' to avoid the possibility of
dedendum. slipping of shaft and coupling etc.
Dedendum = addendum + clearance A key and the keyway make up a keyed joint to
425. Determined by dividing number of teeth in secure the hub and the shaft to prevent relative
gear pitch diameter– movement between a power transmitting shaft and an
(a) Pitch (b) Module attached component. For example, gear drive, pulley or
(c) Dedendum (d) Addendum sprockets are connected securely using keys to the
(RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010) power transmitting shaft.

429. Which gear teeth are inclined with axis– Ans : (c) Worm and Worm Gears wheel has the highest
(a) spur gear gearing ratio- for non- parallel and non- intersecting
shaft axes.
(b) Bevel gear
Warm and warm wheel can also be used as speed
(c) Helical gear reducers in low to medium speed applications.
(d) Warm gear 433. The term 'module' is related with
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 04.09.2005) (a) Gear (b) Coupling
Ans: (c) Helical Gear– The teeth on these gears are not (c) Pulley (d) None of these
parallel to the shaft but at some angles or diagonally. (IOF Fitter 2017)
These teeth are cut at a helix angle of about 90º to the Ans : ( a ) Module– It is expressed by the length of the
axis of the gar. gear pitch diameter of the tooth.
D
430. In metric system module is given by in a gear– m=
T
1
(a) The axial pitch or module of the two meshing gears
diametical pitch
should be the same. Module is measured in mm.
pitch diameter 434. Translating gear has the following number of
(b)
number of teeth teeth:
(c) both of the above (a) 127 teeth
(b) 20 teeth
(c) 47 teeth
(RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012)
(d) None of these
Ans : (c) Module is defined as the pitch diameter (IOF Fitter 2017)
divided by number of teeth and distance from the pitch
Ans : (a)
circle to the outside circle (addendum) is equal to the
In translating Gear has 127 teeth.
module in spur Gears.
In translating gear used for cutting metric thread has
 D number of teeth 63.
M = T 
  A Transmission utilizing a translating gear and links
 T to provide a high speed ratio in a small efficient
 Diametrical pitch = D  package.
 
Relation between module and diametrical pitch 435. To mill a gear of 89 teeth, .............. indexing
method is to be adopted
[module × diametrical pitch = 1]
(a) Simple
Two mating gears must have the same module.
(b) Compound
431. Rack and pinion is used– (c) Differential
(a) From circular motion to reciprocating motion (d) Rapid
(b) From vertical to horizontal (IOF Fitter 2017)
(c) From two parallel shafts Ans : (c) Differential indexing- This method of
(d) All of the above indexing is used for divisions that could not be indexed
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009) by simple indexing. In differential indexing the require
Ans : (a) Rack and pinion convert rotational motion divisions on the work piece is obtained by a
into linear motion. combination two movements. Differential indexing is
the Automatic method of compound indexing.
A rack and pinion is a type of linear actuator that
Types of Indexing methods.
comprises a circular gear (the pinion) engaging a linear
gear (the rack). (1) Linear Indexing
(2) Differential Indexing
432. Which gear is used to transmit power cross
(3) Angular Indexing
wise across two shaft–
(4) Direct indexing
(a) Rack and pinion (5) Compound indexing.
(b) Bevel Gear Indexing in gear manufacturing- Indexing is an
(c) Worm and worm wheel operation of division a periphery of a cylindrical work
(d) Spur Gear piece into equal number of divisions by the help of
(RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012) index crank and index plate.

436. Tumbler gears are used in Types of coupling-

(a) Shaper (1) Rigid Coupling- It is used to connect two shafts
(b) Milling m/c which are perfectly aligned. These couplings do not
(c) Lathe allow any relative rotation between the two shafts.
(d) Broaching Flexible Coupling- Take care of small amount of
(IOF Fitter 2017) unintentional misalignment. Aluminates shock proving
Ans : (c) In Lathe, tumbler gear mechanism is used transfer of power through springs or to absorb some of
to control motion of tool carriage. the vibration in the coupling.
There are several feed mechanism to make the tool 439. Which pulley is used in place of flat pulley to
carriage and cross slide move Automatically and change avoid slipping–
the direction of their movement. (a) step pulley
Tumbler Gear mechanism is used to change the (b) 'V' groove pulley
direction of lead screw or feed rod in lathe machines. (c) Drum pulley
By Engaging tumbler gear, the carriage can be move (d) Jockey pulley
Automatically from tail stock and to head stock and or (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
moved from head stock and to tail stock end.
Ans : (b) V shape causes the bold to wedge tightly into
437. for mass production of helical gears, the the pulleys increasing friction and allowing higher
following machine is suitable. operating torque.
(a) Gear shaper A V- belt or rope meshing in a v-shaped groove of
(b) Broach the pulley increases greatly the frictional resistance to
(c) Plain milling machine slipping for a given maximum belt tension as compared
(d) Hobbing machine to flat belt.
(IOF Fitter 2017) 440. Tooth thickness is measured –
Ans : (d) Gear are manufactured in mass production by (a) Along base circle
Hobbing machine. (b) Along pitch circle
Gear Hobbing is the process of generating gear teeth (c) Along outer circle
by means of a rotating cutter referred to as a hob. A hob (d) As average profile
resembles a worm gear, it has a number of fluter around
DRDO Machinist.2016
its periphery, parallel to the axis, to form cutting edges.
Advantages of Hobbing-
Ans : (b) Pitch circle– Two teeth touch each other at
(1) Speed- Some gear manufacturing process take a
a point or line to run. The imaginary circle, formed by
long time, goes hobbing is relatively fast.
considering the distance from the centre to this
(2) Precision- Hobbing can be highly precise, resulting
tangent point as the radius is called the pitch circle.
in high qualit gears.
This is how the thickness of the gear Teeth is
(3) Flexibility- There's move than one type of hob and
measured.
move than one type of hobbing machine. There are
Pitch circle is the circle derived from a number of
countless variations that catex to specialized
teeth and a specified diametric or circular pitch.
applications.
441. Bevel gears are used when the axes are–
438. Device used to support and stabilize long
shafts– (a) non intersecting
(a) Gear (b) Bearing (b) non-planer
(c) Clutch (d) Coupling (c) parallel
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009) (d) none of these
Ans : (d) Coupling– A coupling is a device use to (IOF Fitter, 2012)
connect two shafts together at their ends for the purpose Ans : (d) Bevel Gears– It is used for power
of transmitting power. transmission between two shafts whose axes are in the
The primary purpose of couplings is to join two same plane and intersect. The teeth on these gear are
pieces of rotating equipment while permitting some straight and spiral. Non-intersecting, non-coplanar and
degree of misalignment or end movement or both. parallel, all these are not related to Bevel Gear.


Fasteners
Ans. (d) : Cotter joint is used to connect two rods
1. Classification of Fastener subjects to axial tensile or compressive load.
• Cotter is fitted cross to the shaft.
1. _____are used to keep machine components in
accurate alignment. 5. Feather key edge is
(a) Safety pins (b) Dowel pins (a) Flat (b) Round
(c) Electrodes (d) Nuts (c) Rectangle (d) Circular
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
Ans. (b) : Dowel pins are used to keep machine Ans. (b) : Feather key transmits turning moment &
components in accurate alignment. They are also used permits axial movement also.
as locating guides for adjacent machine parts and keep • These keys are tight in shaft & loose in hub.
the two sections of a punch and die in alignment. • Edge of feather key is round.
2. The following is a quick acting clamp 6. Round taper key has taper in ratio of
(a) Hinged clamp (b) Cam operated (a) 1 : 100 (b) 1 : 200
clamp
(c) 1 : 50 (d) 1 : 400
(c) Bridge clamp (d) Edge clamp
Ans. (c) : Round taper key has taper in ratio of 1 : 50.
Ans. (b) : Cam operated clamp is a quick acting clamp.
Cam clamp :- 7. Woodruff key is parallel and ___ disk.
• They are popular as quick action clamps. (a) flat (b) round
• They shift their mating faces. (c) circular (d) rectangular
• There is a risk of cam clamp getting loose due to HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
vibration. Ans. (c) : Woodruff key is parallel and circular disc. It
Bridge clamp :- is semicircular in shape. It can deal with any type of
Bridge clamps are used to secure hoses at connection misalignment, extra depth is provided to these type of
points. A bridge clamp is a type of hydraulic clamp with key in the shaft to provide more power transmission
a rocker arm that clears the workpiece on every cycle. capacity.
3. A head marking of 8.8 on a fastener demands a 8. While making rivet joint, few common defects
tensile strength of will occur like bending of rivet. What is reason
(a) 800 MPa (b) 300 MPa for this defect?
(c) 880 MPa (d) 88 MPa (a) Hole is to large
BDL Technician 2022 (b) Rivet length is to long
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 (c) Burn clog in hole
Ans. (a) : Strength is determined from grade of Bolt (d) Too much force applied while riveting
here grade 8.8 HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
So tensile strength = 8×100= 800× N/mm2 = 800 MPa Ans. (b) : Failure of riveted joints–
•Where 8 after decimal signifies 80% of tensile stress is Bending of rivet or plate–
yield stress.
yield strength = 0.8× tensile strength
= 0.8× 800 = 640 N/mm2 = 640 MPa
• 1 MPa = 106 Pa = 106 N/m2 • Reason of this defect is rivet length is too long.
= 106 N/mm2 × (1000)2 • A suitable factor of safety is used.
6
10 N 9. Which nut basically is a hexagonal nut with an
= 6 = 1N / mm 2
10 mm 2 integral washer
So, 1 MPa = 1 N/mm2 (a) Flanged nut (b) Capstan nut
4. Cotter is fitted ____ the shaft. (c) Ring nut (d) Dome nut
(a) Parallel (b) end of NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) centre (d) cross DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 Ans. (a) : Flanged nut basically is a hexagonal nut with
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 an integral washer.
Fasteners 608 YCT
Flanged nut–The flanged nut is just like hexagonal nut

with a flange or a flat circular disc or washer at the base
of the nut, due to provision of flanged disc, the bearing
surface of the nut increases for which these nuts are
used where the bolts of large diameter are required to
pass through the required hole.
Figure (Q. 17-20)

13. Which given alphabet represents simple
10. While giving torque using a spanner, which nut hexagonal nut?
ensures better grip (a) D (b) B
(a) Square (b) Hexagonal (c) C (d) E
(c) Octagonal (d) Flanged ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022 Ans. (a): Hexagonal nut–It is called for general
fastening purpose in conjunction with a hexagonal
Ans. (a) :
headed bolt.
14. Which given alphabet represents castle nut?
(a) C (b) B
(c) E (d) F
Ans. (b): Castle nut–It is extensively used on jobs
Square nut subjected to sudden shocks & considerable vibrations.
While giving torque using a spanner, square nut ensures 15. Which given alphabet represents wing nut?
better grip. A square nut is a four-sided nut. Compared (a) G (b) B
to standard hexagonal nut, square nut have a greater (c) F (d) C
surface in contact with the part being fastened therefore ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
provided greater resistance while tightening and Ans. (c): Wing nut–It consists of a two large metal
loosening. wings one on each side.
11. From the following, identify the function of a • It can be easily tightened or loosened by hand without
taper square drift. tools.
(a) Removing a drill from the machine spindle 16. Which given alphabet represents self-locking
(b) Fixing chuck on the machine spindle nut?
(c) Drawing a broken stud and screw from the (a) A (b) B
work (c) C (d) D
(d) Drawing a drill location NLC Technician 24-09.2022
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
Ans. (c) : Taper square drift is used for drawing a Ans. (c): Self locking nuts contain some arrangements
broken stud and screw from the work. that provides resistance to becoming loose.
• Drift, taper shank drills are held on machine spindle 17. Hexagonal nuts are preferred over octagonal
with the help of sleeve. Drift is used to removed the nuts because :
drill and socket from the machine spindle. (a) Spanners are more prone to slip
12. Washer is used to _______. (b) Spanners has to turned at relatively small
(a) Cover the hole clearance of the job angle to get a forward grip on the nut
(c) Load on the thread will reduce
(b) improve tool capacity
(d) Spanner will have a better grip on the nut
(c) protect the bolt against clamping force
(d) distribute force over a large area
Ans. (d) : Hexagonal nuts are one of the most common
Ans. (d) : Washer– nuts available and are used with bolts, screws, studs etc.
• It is generally a thin plate with a hole. Hexagonal nuts are preferred over octagonal nuts
• It is used to distribute force over a large area. because it provides better gripping of spanner on nut.
Fasteners 609 YCT

18. Which of the following nut is of cylindrical 24. Which key is used for connecting the pulley
shape and a hole is provided in curved surface with shaft?
of it for turning it by a tommy bar (a) Taper key (b) Woodruff key
(a) Hexagonal nut (b) Capstan nut
(c) Gib head key (d) Flat saddle key
(c) Dome nut (d) Square nut
Ans. (b) : Capstan nut is of cylindrical shape and a Ans. (c) : Gib head key–It is rectangular sunk key with
hole is provided in curved surface of it for turning it by a head at one end known as gib head.
a tommy bar. It is usually provided to facilitate the removal of key.
19. Maximum Tightening Torque of Grade 8.8 MB
fastener is
(a) 5.40 Nm (b) 28.8 Nm
(c) 9.50 Nm (d) 44.0 Nm
Ans. (b) : Maximum tightening torque of grade 8.8 MB
fastener is 28.8 Nm.
20. Which one of the following thread forms is 25. ______ joint is made by key.
mostly found on threaded shaft of lifting (a) Permanent (b) Semi-permanent
equipment for carrying loads?
(c) Temporary (d) None of the above
(a) 'V' thread (b) Square thread
(c) Saw tooth thread (d) Knuckle thread RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (c) : Temporary joint is made by key.
Ans. (c) : Saw tooth thread–The saw tooth thread has • Temporary joint are suitable where a frequent
a thread angle of 3º on one side and 33º on the other separation of assembled components is required.
side. Use in the construction of collet chucks for lathe • Temporary joints are not necessarily leak proof.
and milling machine. 26. Split pin is made from ______ worm.
21. The shape of a woodruff key is- (a) round (b) half round
(a) round with taper (c) taper (d) slant
(b) in the form of a segment of a circle
(c) rectangular
(d) square with taper Ans. (b) : Split pin is made from half round worm.
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 • Split pins need to be strong enough to hold
Ans. (b) : The shape of a woodruff key is in the form of components in place, but flexible through to be bend
a segment of a circle. secure the fastening.
• This key is largely used in machine tool and • Split pin are typically made from aluminium, brass or
automobile construction. stainless steel.
22. For fitting a saddle key- 27. Locking washer is used to lock ______ bolt of
(a) no keyway is cut on the shaft machine.
(b) long keyway is cut on the shaft (a) edge (b) parallel
(c) the key is fitted by means of screws (c) vertical (d) none of the above
(d) the lower portion of the key is machined in a RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
curved form
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 Ans. (a) : Locking washer is used to lock edge of
machine.
Ans. (a) : For fitting a saddle key no keyway is cut on
the shaft. • The locking washer prevents nuts and bolts from
• A flat saddle key is a taper key which fits in a keyway turning, slipping and coming loose because of vibration
in the hub and is flat on the shaft. and torque.
• A hollow saddle key is a taper key which fits in a 28. Hollow pin is made from _____
keyway in the hub and the bottom of the key is shaped (a) iron (b) metal
to fit the curved surface of the shaft. (c) sheet (d) wood
23. A key is subjected to- RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(a) shear stress (b) compressive stress
(c) tensile stress (d) twisting stress Ans. (c) : Hollow pin is made from sheet. Hallow pin
chain pin with through-bore holes for mounting
specifically designed attachments.
Ans. (a) : A key is subjected to shear stress.
• Key is a metallic piece of a wedge inserted between a 29. _____ key is called half round key.
shaft and hub, parallel to the axis of shaft. (a) Feather (b) Taper
• Keys are used as temporary fastenings and are (c) Woodruff (d) Parallel
subjected to considerable crushing and shearing. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
Fasteners 610 YCT
Ans. (c) : Woodruff key is called half round key. 35. Knuckle joint is used for ______
• It can be used on tapered shaft. (a) providing equal speed
• The extra depth of key in the shaft prevents its (b) changing speed
tendency to slip over the shaft. (c) providing equal feed
30. Head key is also called ______ key. (d) changing feed
(a) feather (b) sunk RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(c) woodruff (d) gib head Ans. (b) : Knuckle joint is used to connect two rod
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 whose axes either coincide or intersect and lie in one
plane.
Ans. (d) : Head key is also called gib head key.
• The knuckle joint is used to transmit axial tensile
Gib head key is a rectangular sunk key with a head at force.
one end known as gib head. It is usually provided to
• The construction of this joint permits limited angular
facilitate the removal of key.
movement between rods about the axis of the pin.
31. ______ is used to remove gib head key. 36. The upper portion of a hexagonal nut is
(a) Key drift (b) Spindle chamfered at an angle of-
(c) Vice (d) Clamp (a) 75° (b) 60°
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (c) 45° (d) 30°
Ans. (a) : Key drift is used to remove gib head key. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Gib head keys are specially manufactured machine keys Ans. (d) : The upper portion of a hexagonal nut is
with a protection end that resembles the end of a gib chamfered at an angle of 30°.
and serves as a stop mechanism on a rotating shaft. A hexagonal nut is one of the most popular fasteners,
32. Parts move back-forth on shaft in a ______key. the shape of hexagon so has six sides. They can fasten a
(a) shank (b) feather bolt or screw securely through a threaded hole, the
(c) taper (d) hollow threads tend to be right handed.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 37. The dimension of a nut is expressed in the
Ans. (b) : Parts move back-forth on shaft in a feather terms of-
key. (a) head of the bolt
• A feather key is a parallel key which is fixed either to (b) nominal diameter of the bolt
the shaft or to the hub and which permits relative axial (c) core diameter of the bolt
movement between them. (d) pitch diameter of the bolt
• It is a type of sunk key with uniform width and height. RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
• It is used where the part mounted on the shaft are Ans. (b) : The dimension of a nut is expressed in the
required to slide along the shaft such as clutches or gear terms of nominal diameter of the bolt.
shifting devices. • Nut are used along with bolts in a assembly which
33. A key is a device which is used to- may loose due to vibration.
(a) fasten the machine parts • Different types of nut-locking device are used
(b) start the machine depending on the severity of the condition in which the
fastener is used.
(c) stop the machine
(d) control the machine 38. The woodruff key is in semi-circular shape,
which is-
(a) used on tapered shaft and hub assembly
Ans. (a): A key is a device which is used to fasten the (b) removable from the assembly without
machine parts. removing the hub
• The primary function of the key is to transmit the (c) transmitting more torque than other type of
torque from the shaft to the hub. keys
• The second function of the key is to prevent relative (d) placed between the flat surface of shaft and
rotational motion between the shaft and the joined hub
machined element like gear or pulley. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
34. In fastening system, ______ pin is used as Ans. (a) : The woodruff key is in semi-circular shape,
locking arrangement. which is used on tapered shaft and hub assembly.
(a) split (b) solid Woodruff key is a piece from a cylindrical disc
(c) adjustable (d) none of the above generally of a semi-circle cross-section.
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 • This key is largely used in machine tool and
Ans. (a) : In fastening system, split pin is used as automobile construction.
locking arrangement. 39. Bolts are fitted with clearance hole in an
The split pin drops through a hole in the threaded shaft assembly. The size of the bolt hole is slightly
and rests in a ridge on the surface of the nut. larger than the bolt diameter. Why?
Fasteners 611 YCT
(a) To grip components firmly (a) The pin may break off
(b) To fasten the components (b) While reassembling, it may lead to
(c) To adjust slight misalignment in assembly misalignment between the hole in the bolt and
(d) To lock the components to avoid loosening of nut in the slot and loose its strength
parts (c) Slot cut in the nut reduces the strength of the
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 pin
(d) The pin does not withstand load
Ans. (a) : Grip refers to the unthreaded portion of the
shank. This is the portion of the bolt that should bear
against the inside of the hole. Ans. (a) : The split pin passes through two slots in the
nut and a hole in the bolt so that a positive lock is
40. The type of key used on tapered fittings on obtained unless the pin shears.
shaft is known as-
45. While using the flange nut____ is not required.
(a) sunk key (b) feather key
(a) bolt (b) key
(c) woodruff key (d) hollow saddle key
(c) pin (d) washer
Ans. (c) : The type of key used on tapered fittings on
Ans. (d) : While using the flange nut washer is not
shaft is known as woodruff key. required. Flange nuts are often used in fastening
• A woodruff key is a piece from a cylindrical disc applications involving oversized holes. They have a
having segmental cross-section. protruding rim that covers more surface area. Even if
• It is capable of tilting in recess milled out in the shaft the hole is too big for a traditional nut, it may support
by a cutter having the same curvature as the disc from the use of a flanged nut.
which the key is made. 46. Which of the following nut is used for hand
41. Which screw is used to connect the collar and vice?
shaft in a position? (a) Check nut (b) Wing nut
(a) Hexagonal socket set screw (c) Thumb nut (d) Hexagonal nut
(b) Square head screw RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
(c) Hexagonal head screw Ans. (b): A wing nut is a type of nut with two large
(d) Pan head screw metal "wings" one on each side, so it can be easily
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 tightened and loosened by hand without tools.
Ans. (a) : Hexagonal socket set screw is used to • Wing nut is used to fix the hack saw from and hand
connect the collar and shaft in a position. vice.
42. Which type of washer is used for locking the 47. The nut which can be tightened or loosened
nut by bending the washer against the side of with the pressure of thumb is used in the
hacksaw frame is known as–
the nut?
(a) ring nut (b) thumb nut
(a) Tap washer (b) Spring washer
(c) cap nut (d) wing nut
(c) Locking plate
(d) Locking washer with lug
Ans. (d) : The nut which can be tightened or loosened
with the pressure of thumb is used in the hacksaw frame
Ans. (a) : Tap washers are simple products shaped like is known as wing nut.
discs with a central hole or opening. 48. Which of the following is not a hexagonal nut?
43. Why the woodruff keys are used on small (a) Simmond's nut (b) Swan nut
tapered shafts with assembly? (c) Capstan nut (d) Cap nut
(a) It can bear heavy load RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
(b) It can bear the shear stress Ans. (c) : Capstan nut is not a hexagonal nut.
(c) It is easy to fit and self align with key way to Capstan nut–
the hub • This is in the form of a cylinder with holes drilled in
(d) It is less expensive the curve surface.
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 • These holes can be used to turn the nut by placing a
Ans. (c) : The woodruff key is a semi-circular disc and tommy bar in it.
fits into a circular recess in the shaft machined by a 49. Which of the following does not have a round
woodruff keyway cutter. head?
• It is capable of tilting in a recess milled out in the (a) T-head bolt (b) Eye bolt
shaft by a cutter having the same curvature as the disc (c) Taper bolt (d) None of the above
from which the key is made. RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
44. The split pins are used to lock the nuts. What Ans. (a) : T-head bolt are mainly used with a nut to
will happen, if the same split pint is joint an object with a T shaped slot so that the head of
continuously used in an assembly? the bolt sits flush or below the material surrounding it.
Fasteners 612 YCT
50. Which of the following nuts can be easily (a) Pin (b) Fork
changed? (c) Eye (d) Rod
(a) T-bolt (b) Eye bolt RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
(c) Reg bolt (d) Cotter bolt
Ans. (c) : In knuckle joint, one end of the rods is made
RRB ALP Patna 2014 into an eye and the end of the other rod is formed into a
Ans. (d) : A cotter bolt is a form of threaded hardware fork with an eye in each of the fork legs.
device with an external male thread.
• Bolt closely related to and often confused with screw. 56. Which joint is shown in the following figure?
• Set collers bolts are used for removable bundle heat
exchange, to holding the bundle in place, if only the
channel must be removed.
51. Tap washer is used for–
(a) locking the nut
(b) decreasing the machine vibrations
(c) automatic locking of the nut (a) Welded joint (b) Cotter joint
(d) providing a good support of nut (c) Pin joint (d) Threaded joint
Ans. (a) : Tap washer is used for locking the nut. A tap Ans. (c): A pin joint is a connection between two object
washer is a small rubber disc that sits inside the tap, that allows only relative rotation about a single axis.
close to the seat of the tap.
57. Which process is shown in the following figure?
52. Which of the following materials is used for
making dowel pin?
(a) Aluminium (b) Plastic
(c) Copper (d) Tin
Ans. (a) : Aluminium is used for making dowel pin.
53. What does the part 'A' in the following figure (a) Aligning (b) Threading
denote?
(c) Torquing (d) Sealing
Ans. (c) : Torquing process is shown in the following
figure.
Torquing is the most commonly used way to achieve
(a) Cotter (b) Bold fastener preload with bolted joint. Torquing produces
(c) Nut (d) Nail this load through rotational force on a nut or bolt head.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 58. Which of the labeled parts is known as cotter?
Ans. (a) : • Cotter's joint is used to joint two shaft
which are in rotation.
• Cotter's joint is used when the members are subjected
to axis tensile or compressive loading.
• The cotter joint is also known as a socket and spigot
joing.
54. ______ is one of the functional components of a
sealing.
(a) Cotter (b) Drive
(c) Induction seal (d) Bearing
(a) a (b) b
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
(c) c (d) d
Ans. (b) : Drive is one of the functional components of
a sealing. RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
55. What is the name of the part denoted as 'X' in Ans. (b) : Cotter's joint is used when the members are
the following figure? subjected to axial tensile or compressive loading.
• The cotter joint is also known as a socket and spigot
joint.
• There are three main parts of the cotter joint–
1. Cotter
2. Spigot
3. Socket
Fasteners 613 YCT
59. Which of the following medium connects Ans. (b) : The outer diameter of the plain washer is 2D
different parts of a machine? 1"
(a) Forging (b) Machining + .
(c) Packing (d) Fasteners 8
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 • Washer are used to distribute the clamping pressure
over a large area and prevent surface damage.
Ans. (d) : • Fasteners are the thousands of bolts, nuts,
screws, clips and adhesives that hold a vehicle together. • The also provide an increased bearing surface for bolt
• Must be able to identify and use fasteners properly. heads and nut.
• Each fastener is engineered for a specific application. 66. The thickness of the washer is–
60. Which of the following bolt is most commonly (a) D/8 (b) D/4
used? (c) 2D (d) 4D
(a) Eye bolt (b) Hexagonal bolt RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
(c) Cheese head bolt (d) Hook bolt Ans. (a) : When nominal diameter of bolt is D the
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 thickness of the washer is D/8 and outer diameter is 2D
Ans. (b) : Hexagonal bolt–It is most common for bolt + 3 mm and inner diameter is D + 0.5 mm.
and widely used in machines and the engineering works 67. Gib head key is used for joining the two
to tighten two or more part together. components of any machine. In what
61. In which type of fasteners the grooves are cut proportion does the length of the key varies
on both the sides? with respect to its diameter?
(a) On nut (b) On stud (a) 2 d to 3 d (b) d to 1.5 d
(c) On screw (d) On bolt (c) 0.3 d to 0.7 d (d) 1.8 d to 2.5 d
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
Ans. (b) : • A stud is a round bar threaded at both ends.
Ans. (b) : The length of the gib head key varies from d
Cap screws–The cap screws are similar to tap bolts to 1.5 d.
except that they are of small size and variety of shapes
of head are available. It is a rectangular sunk key with a head at one end
known as gib head. It is usually provided to facilitate
62. Which of the following nuts does not require a the removal of key.
spanner in order to open?
(a) Ring nut (b) Square nut The usual proportions of the gib head key are : width w
= d/4, thickness at the large end t = d/6.
(c) Wing nut (d) Dome nut
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004 68. Name the key as shown in the figure–
Ans. (c) : Wing nut does not require a spanner in order
to open.
• Wing nut is used to fix the hacksaw from and hand
vice.
63. Which type of nut is used in precision
instruments?
(a) Dome nut (b) Cap nut
(c) Ring nut (d) square nut (a) Sunk key (b) woodruff key
(c) Peg key (d) Gib head key
Ans. (c) : Ring nut is used in precision instruments. RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
To take maximum advantage of this, it must be adjusted
correctly in order to minimize friction. Ans. (c) : The key as shown in the figure is peg key.
64. Which nut is helpful in preventing leakages? 69. Name the type of key as shown in the figure–
(a) Cap nut (b) Flange nut
(c) Dome nut (d) Swan nut
Ans. (a) : A cap nut protects bolt threads underneath it,
whilst providing a cleaner, more aesthetically pleasing
appearance and improving safety on some application.
65. The outer diameter of the plain washer is–
1" 1"
(a) D + (b) 2D +
8 8
D D 1" (a) Saddle key (b) Cone key
(c) (d) +
8 8 8 (c) Woodruff key (d) Sunk key
Fasteners 614 YCT
Ans. (c) : Woodruff key–It is a piece from a cylindrical (a) Lewis foundation bolt
disc having a segmental cross-section in front view. The (b) Cotter foundation bolt
woodruff key is an easily adjustable key. (c) Rag foundation bolt
70. Castle nut is used _____. (d) Eye foundation bolt
(a) to open the nut (b) to close the nut RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
(c) to lock the nut (d) as bearing of nut Ans. (c): Rag foundation bolt–This bolt consists of a
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 tapered body, square or rectangular in cross-section the
Ans. (c): Castle nut is used to lock the nut. tapered edges being grooved.
Castle nut– • This bolt can be used in similar lines as that of the
bent bolt.
• It is extensively used on jobs subjected to sudden
shocks and considerable vibrations. 76. Which one of the knots is used for non slipping
• Castle nuts are also available with six slots between eye and easy to unite ?
sizes M12 to M39 and eight slots between sizes M42
and M68.
71. A key that fits into a semi-circular keyway cut (a) (b)
in the shaft is-
(a) gib head key (b) feather key
(c) woodruff key (d) saddle key
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 (c) (d)
Ans. (c) : Woodruff key–A woodruff key is a sunk key
in the form of an almost semicircular disk of uniform RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
thickness. Ans. (a) : Bowling knot–It is useful knot for forming a
Advantage–• It can be used on tapered shaft. loop and it is easy to untie, even after putting it under
• The extra depth of key in the shaft prevents its stress. I will never slip or jam if properly made.
tendency to slip over the shaft. 77. Which one of the following types of knots is
72. For temporary fastening of two parts, bolts used for shortening a rope without cutting ?
and______ are used. (a) Square knot (b) Slip knot
(a) soldering (b) brazing (c) Bowling knot (d) Sheep shank knot
(c) nuts (d) rivets RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 Ans. (d) : Sheep shank knot–A shank is a type of knot
Ans. (c) : When parts of a machine are joined in such a that is used to shorten a rope or take up slack, such as
way that these can be disjointed or joined again easily, the sheep shank. The sheep shank knot is not stable. It
it is called temporary fastening. will fall apart under too much load or too little load.
• In temporary fastening nuts, bolts, screws, lock pin 78. Which one of the following knots is very easy to
and washer are used. untie ?
73. In which of the following, internal threads are (a) Bowling knot (b) Slip knot
cut? (c) Square knot (d) Double hitch knot
(a) Screw (b) Stud RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(c) Bolt (d) Nut Ans. (a) : Bowling knot–It is useful knot for forming a
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 loop and it is easy to untie, even after putting it under
stress. I will never slip or jam if properly made.
Ans. (d) : In nut internal thread are cut.
• A tap is the tool used for threading the inside of a 79. Which type of knot is shown in figure ?
drilled hole.
• A die is the tool used for threading the exterior of a
rod.
74. What are the solidifying agents which are used
(a) Slip knot (b) Double hitch knot
to hold the bolt firmly?
(c) Square knot (d) Bowline knot
(a) Lead and sulphur
HAL Fitter 2015
(b) Lead and phosphorus
(c) Sulphur and iron Ans. (b) : Double hitch knot–This type of knot is used
to secure a line or rope to a fixed object. The first part
(d) Iron and lead of the knot is a round turn, which controls the load and
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 provides friction against the support.
Ans. (a) : Lead and sulphur are the solidifying agents 80. Which among the following is the permanent
which are used to hold the bolt firmly. method of fastening of strands of a rope?
75. Which type of foundation bolt has the shape of (a) Crowning (b) Whipping
a rectangular pyramid with round shank on (c) Round turn (d) Loop
the tapered end? RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
Fasteners 615 YCT
Ans. (a) : Crowing is the permanent method of Keyway is only in hub and power transmit throw
fastening of strands of a rope. friction to the shaft.
Round turn–A piece of rope looped to form a complete
circle with the two ends parallel.
81. Fastening of one part of a rope to another part
of the rope is known as
(a) Loop (b) Bight
(c) Knot (d) Round turn
Hollow saddle key
Ans. (c) : Fastening of one part of a rope to another part 87. The key is a machine component used to.......
of the rope is known as knot. (a) control the speed
Knot–A fastening made by typing together lengths of (b) start the machine
rope or webbing in a prescribed way, that can be used (c) transmit relative velocity
for a variety of purposes. (d) transmit relative motion
82. Leveling bolts are used for. RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
(a) Supporting the load for machine Ans. (d) : A key is a piece of mild steel inserted
(b) Adjusting the height of machine between the shaft and hub or boss of the pulley to
(c) Rigidity of machine connect these motion between them.
(d) None of the above Keys are temporary fastening and are subjected to
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 considerable crushing and shearing stresses.
Ans. (b) : Leveling bolts are used for adjusting the 88. It is a small headless screw having a slot cut for
height of machine. These are used for many different a screwdriver or a socket for a hexagon key
devices such as vehicles, machine tools and food and used to secure a sliding component in a
machinery. determined position. What is it?
83. A screw capable of setting matching parts (a) Set screw (b) Grub screw
through their threaded holes and does not (c) Phillips Screw (d) Button screw
remain projected over this setting is called ____ RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(a) Round head screw (b) Pan Head screw Ans. (b) : Grub screw is a small headless screw having
(c) Crease head screw (d) Lower head screw a slot cut for a screwdriver or a socket for a hexagonal
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 key and used to secure a sliding component in a
Ans. (d) : A screw capable of setting matching parts determined position.
through their threaded holes and does not remain
projected over this setting is called lower head screw.
84. The main advantages of using hexagonal socket
head cap screw is to _____
(a) Operate frequently and easily Grub screw
(b) Dismantle parts easily 89. It is a screw which is used to prevent relative
(c) have a very firm grip motion between two rotating parts, such as the
(d) Avoid the projection of the screw movement of pulley on a shaft. It is called
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 (a) Grub screw (b) Pan screw
Ans. (c) : The main advantages of using hexagonal (c) Set screw (d) Phillips screw
socket head cap screw is to have a very firm grip. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
85. Which bolt is without head? Ans. (c) : Set screw is used to prevent relative motion
(a) Headless bolts (b) Eye bolt between two rotating parts, such as the movement of
(c) Hook bolt Rag bolt (d) Rag bolt pulley on a shaft.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 90. Blotters are provided between wheel surface
Ans. (a) : Headless bolts is without head. Ex–Stud bolt. and flanges. Why they are used?
86. Hollow saddle key is used only to transmit........ (a) To reduce vibration
(a) light duty transmission (b) To protect the wheel from the atmosphere
(b) medium transmission (c) To ensure uniform contact with the flange
(c) high transmission (d) To avoid the direct contact between flange
(d) very high transmission and grinding wheel
Ans. (a) : Hollow saddle key is used only to transmit Ans. (c) : Blotters are compressible washers that are
light duty transmission. One face of this key has a placed between abrasive wheels and flanges to prevent
curvature to match with that of the shaft surface. It has a the flanges from slipping i.e. to ensure uniform contact
taper of 1 in 100 and is driven in through the keyway. with the flange and protect them from wear.
Fasteners 616 YCT

91. To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of 97. Which of the 'key' is given below whose upper
square threads, the width of the internal square part is flat and lower part is semi-circular?
threading tool should be (a) Woodruff key (b) Feather key
(a) slightly more than the half pitch (c) Hollow saddle key (d) Gib head key
(b) slightly less than the half pitch UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(c) equal to the half pitch Ans. (a) : Woodruff key is a piece from a cylindrical
(d) equal to the pitch disc having segment cross-section. It is capable of
RRB ALP Kolkata 2014 filling in a recess milled out in the shaft by a cutter
Ans. (a) : To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of having the same curvature as the disc from which the
square threads, the width of the internal square key is made.
threading tool should be slightly more than the half 98. ................. is a sort of bolt without head. Its
pitch. both ends are threaded but there is a plane
92. A die nut is nothing but portion also between the two threads
(a) a nut forged by using dies (a) Cap screw (b) Set screw
(b) a dies in the shape of a nut (c) Stud (d) None of the above
(c) a nut for tightening the die in the die stock
(d) a die which is used for cutting threads in nuts Ans. (c) : Stud is short of bolt without head. Its both
ends are threaded but there is a plane portion also
between the two threads.
Ans. (b) : Die nut–Die nut looks like the die in the
99. For an M12 × 1.75 bolt with single start thread,
shape of a nut. It is used for chasing or reconditioning
how many threads will be engaged if the bolt is
the damage threads. It is not used for cutting new
threads. It is available in different size and types. inserted through a length of 3.5mm?
(a) 20 (b) 12
93. The separated STUB ends must not necessarily (c) 17 (d) 18
exceed– ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
(a) 20 - 30 mm (b) 40 - 50 mm Ans. (a): Engaged length of bolt–
(c) 10 - 20 mm (d) 30 - 40 mm l=n×P [P = pitch = lead]
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 3.5 = n ×1.75 single start threads
Ans. (b) : The separated stub ends must not exceed 40-
50 mm. 3.5 3500
n= = = 20
94. Which of the following is used to remove 1.75 175
broken studs or screws ? 100. A bolt thread is specified as M12 × 1 - 5g 6g.
(a) Dies (b) Tapping attachment Here
(c) Studs extractor (d) Reamer (a) 5g denotes tolerance class for pitch diameter
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018 and 6g denotes tolerance class for major
Ans. (c) : Studs extractor is used to remove broken diameter
studs or screws. (b) 5g denotes tolerance class for major diameter
95. Which of the following is mounted in order to and 6g denotes tolerance class for pitch
support nut, bolt, screw, etc.? diameter
(a) Coupling (b) None of these (c) Mass of the bolt is in between 5 grams and 6
(c) Washer (d) Key grams
NMRC, 15-09-2019 (d) None of the above
Ans. (c) : Washer is mounted in order to support nut, ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
bolt, screw, etc. Ans. (a) : A bolt thread is specified as "M12 × 1−5g 6g"
When the nut and bolt is used to connect two parts as Where,
temporary joint washer is used to provide bearing M = For metric threads
area and force distributing is uniform. 12 = Major diameter (in mm)
96. Which of the following statement is not correct 1 = Pitch of threads
about key? 5g = Tolerance grade for pitch diameter
(a) To fix the parallel to the shaft 6g = Tolerance grade for major diameter
(b) It is rectangular or semi spherical 101. If size of bolt is M30, it means–
(c) It is permanent fastening (a) Metric thread & diameter 30mm
(d) Where shaft work as tension (b) Metric thread & diameter 30cm
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (c) Metric thread & length 30mm
Ans. (c) : A key is a piece of mild steel inserted (d) Metric thread & pitch 30mm
between the shaft and hub or boss of the pulley to RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
connect to connect these together inorder to prevent
Ans. (a) : Bolt size is 'M30' means–
relative motion between them. It is always inserted
parallel to the shaft. Keys is subjected to considerable M = metric thread
crushing and shearing stresses. 30 = major diameter of threaded bolt in mm.
Fasteners 617 YCT

102. Expressed in terms of the dimensions of the Ans : (b)

nut– • Semi permanent are-Riveting, soldering, brazing etc.
(a) Nominal dia of bolt • Permanent joint - Welding, Interference fit.
(b) Main dia of bolt • Temporary joint - Nut-bolt, screw fastening.
(c) Pitch diameter of bolt 108. Find the temporary joint from the following :
(d) Head of the bolt (a) Welded joint (b) Riveted joint
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I (c) Soldered joint (d) Press fit joint
Ans : (a) Nut size is denoted by Nominal diameter or DRDO Machinist.2016
out side diameter of nut. Nut and bolt makes a IOF Fitter 10-9-2017
temporary fastener, those parties of machines are Ans : (d) Temporary joint–In which joint both the
attached by nut and bolt which has to be opened and member can engaged or disengaged without damage.
closed again and again. Example–Nut-bolt joints, clearance fit, process fit, and
103. Which of the following is not a type of normal screw fastening.
threaded fastener? Semi permanent joint–In which joint one member can
(a) Screw (b) Nail be damage when joint is open.
(c) Nut (d) Bolt Example–Riveted joint, Soldering joint.
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I 109. The Permanent joints in Mild Steel section are
obtained by.............
Ans : (b) Screw, nut and bolt is a type of fastener by (a) Bolts and nuts (b) Welding
which a temporary joint is made. Nail is not a type of (c) Cooling (d) Boiling
fastener. It is made of mild steel ISRO Technician Plumber 27-11-2016
104. If size of the bolt is M16, than 'M' stand for– Ans : (b) Welding is a type of permanent joint which is
(a) millimeter (b) mean diameter used in mild steel sections.
(c) mild steel (d) metric thread Welding–The welding is a process of joining two
RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I similar or dissimilar metals by fusion with or without
Ans : (d) Bolt size is M 16 means– the application of pressure and with or without the used
M = Metric thread type of filler metal, the welding is broadly divided into the
16 = Nominal diameter of bolt thread. following two groups:
105. In which pipe joint molten lead is used? 1. Forge or pressure welding (under pressure without
filler metal)
(a) Flanged joints
2. Fusion or non-pressure welding (with additional
(b) Collar joints filler metal)
(c) Expansion joints
110. Is used to support the head of a rivet to prevent
(d) Socket and spigot joint
damage caused by the riveting process–
UPSSSC Assistant Boring Technician 9-8-2015 (a) Snap (b) Dolly
Ans : (d) In socket and spigot joint molten lead is (c) Drift (d) Rivet set
used. In the socket and spigot cutter joint, one end of DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
the rods is provided with a socket type of end and the Ans : (b) Dolly is used to prevent riveting losses and
other end of the other rod is inserted into a socket. providing support to rivet head, dolly is used to prevent
hole from damaging during riveting.
111. Which of these is not a foundation bolt?
(a) Loop bolt (b) T-headed bolt
(c) Lewis bolt (d) Cheese bolt
Ans. : (d) Cheese bolt is not a type of foundation bolt.
Foundation bolts–
1. Eye bolt
2. T-Headed bolt
3. Lewis bolt
4. Rag bolt
106. Which bolt fit in rectangular slot : 5. L/T foundation bolt
(a) Square bolt (b) Hexagonal bolt 6. Bent foundation bolt
(c) T–bolt (d) Hook bolt 112. Which one is a temporary foundation bolt?
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 (a) Hoop bolt (b) Rag bolt
(c) Curve bolt (d) Lewis bolt
Ans : (a) Square bolt fit in rectangular sloted. Head of UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
square bolt is square, in hexagonal headed bolt head is
Ans. : (d) Lewis bolt is a type of temporary foundation
hexagonal. Hexagonal headed bolt is mostly used. bolt. These bolts can be removed easily, as a tapered
107. Which fastener is semi permanent? key is fitted through the side of the bolts to make it
(a) Welding (b) Riveting rigid, the key is fitted on the straight face of the bolt
(c) Nut–bolt (d) Forging body. Lewis foundation bolts are tapened in width on
IOF Fitter 10-9-2017 one side.
Fasteners 618 YCT

113. Which one is not a type of stud? 118. A locking device extensively used in automobile
(a) Set screw (b) Cap screw industry is a :
(c) Machine screw (d) Bolt (a) castle nut (b) sawn nut
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (c) ring nut (d) jam nut
Ans : (d) Bolt is not a type of stud, stud can be used LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
without nut– Ans : (a) Castle nut–Castle nut is also known as
• Set screw slotted nut. It is extensively used in automobile
• Cap screw industry, therefore it is also known as automobile nut.
• Machine screw In automobile it is used in front and, rear axle etc.
114. A locking device in which to increase friction 119. The most important dimension in the design of
between nut and bolt, a slot is cut half of screw a nut is :
is known as: (a) Pitch diameter (b) Inside diameter
(a) Check nut (b) Jam nut (c) Outside diameter (d) Height
(c) Castle nut (d) Swan nut LMRC Maintainer Fitter 2016
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 Ans : (d) The most important dimension in the design
Ans : (d) Swan nut also called wide nut, a slot is cut of a nut is height.
half way across the nut. A screw is fitted with a Nut–A device used with a bolt or steel to join two or
clearance hole on the top part and matching thread on more parts together temporarily is known as nut.
the top part and matching thread on the lower part of Properties of the hexagonal nut:
the nut. • Width across the flats, W = 1.5 D + 3
Castle nut/slotted nut–It consists of a hexagonal
• Height of the nut, H = 0.9 D to 1 D.
portion with a cylindrical upper part which is slotted
inline with the centre of each face. The split pin • Angle of chamfer θ = 30º to the base of the nut.
passage through two slots in the nut and hole in the bolt • Radius of the chamfer, R = 1.25 D
so that a positive lock is obtained unless the pin shears. 120. In which type of locking, split pin is used–
115. In which type of locking a nut is having raised (a) Grooved nut (b) Lock nut
height and slots on the raised portion? (c) Swan nut (d) Castle nut
(a) Castle nut (b) Lock nut DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
(c) Swan nut (d) Grooved nut Ans : (d) In castle nut a split pin is used for positive
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am locking purpose.
Ans : (a) In castle nut is having raised height and slots The split pin passage through two slots in the nut an a
on the raised portion. hole in the bolt so that a positive lock is obtained unless
Castle nut–It consists of a hexagonal portion with a the pin shears.
cylindrical a upper part which is slotted inline with the
centre of each face, the split pin passage through two
slots in the nut and a hole in the bolts so that a positive
lock is obtained unless the pin shears. It is extensively
used on the jobs subjected to sudden shocks and
considerable vibrations.
116. In which type of locking nut a slot is cut way
across the nut?
(a) grooved nut (b) lock nut
(c) swan nut (d) castle nut 121. Recognized the following nut–
Ans : (c) In swan nut a slot is cut halfway across the
nut.
117. The number of slots in a 25 mm castle nut is :
(a) 4 (b) 5
(c) 6 (d) 8
Ans : (c) The number of slots in a 25 mm castle nut (a) Lock nut (b) Castle nut
is 6. (c) Swan nut (d) Grooved nut
Ans : (a) Lock Nut–It is the most common locking
devices. In this two nuts, one ordinary nut and the other
standard nut known as check nut. The thickness of the
lock nut is about 0.6 of the thickness of ordinary nut,
but the top and bottom surface of the nut are chamfered
at a angle of 30º.
Fasteners 619 YCT
122. Which vice is used for holding rivets, keys? 127. Is done to fit the head of the hexagonal socket
(a) Pipe vice (b) Hand vice head bolt is–
(c) Pin vice (d) Bench vice (a) Counter sink drill (b) Counter bore drill
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016 (c) Twist drill (d) Core drill
Ans : (b) Hand vice–Hand vice is used for griping NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
screws, rivets, keys, small, drills and other similar Ans : (b) Counter boring–It is on operation of
objects which are too small to be conveniently held in enlarging the mouth of a drilled hole to set bolt heads.
the bench vice. The cutting speed for counter boring should be greater
Pin vice–The pin vice is used for the holding small then that of drilling operation.
Counter sinking–It is an operation of making a cone-
diameter jobs.
shaped enlargement of the end of a hole.
Pipe vice–A pipe vice is used for the holding round
section of metal, tubes and pipes. 128. The lower part of this key is made curved
which matches with the shaft, this is called–
123. The chisel used to cut key way is– (a) Hollow saddle key (b) Sunk key
(a) Flat chisel (c) Feather key (d) Flat saddle key
(b) Cross chisel (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 21.10.2001)
(c) Round chisel Ans : (a) The lower part of the key is made curved to
(d) Diamond pointed chisel match with the shaft, is called hollow saddle key.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 Saddle key–Saddle keys may be flat saddle key and
RRB Kolkata ALP 2014 hollow saddle key. A flat saddle key is a taper key
Ans : (b) - Cross cut chisel is used to cut the keyway in which fits in a keyway in the hub and is flat on the
shaft or hub. shaft. A hollow saddle key is a taper key which fits in a
Cross-cut or cap chisels–These are used for cutting keyway in the hub and the bottom of the key is shaped
keyway, grooves and slots. to fit the curved surface of the shaft. The power
Flat chisel–They are used to remove metal from large transmission through the saddle keys by friction action.
flat surface. It is general purpose used chisel. 129. Which of the following is locking device–
Half round nose chisels–They are used for cutting (a) nut and bolt (b) locking plate
curved grooves (oil grooves). (c) bench vice (d) spanner
Diamond pointed chisels–They are used for cutting 'V' Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
grooves and squaring materials at the corners joints. Ans: (b)
Web chisels/Punching chisels–These chisels are used Locking plate – Locking device
for separating metals after chain drilling. nut and bolt – Temporary fastener
124. The equipment used to joint the part of a bench vice – Work holding device
Spanner – Work tightening and loosing device
machine is called–
(a) Fastener (b) Forging 130. The shaft is flattened to fit this key–
(c) Packing (d) Machining (a) Sunk key (b) Flat saddle key
(c) Jib head key (d) Feather key
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans : (a) Fastener is used to joint the parts of machine, Ans : (b) Flat saddle key, is a taper key which fits in a
there are broadly classification of fasteners. It classified keyway in the hub and is flat on the shaft.
them into permanent fastener, semi permanent fastener
131. The standard taper of the pin–
and temporary fastener. Generally, fastener are
(a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 30
considered to form non-permanent joint (temporary (c) 1 : 40 (d) 1 : 50
joint), these fastener (tools) include screw, bolls, nuts (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
etc. Ans : (d) The standard taper of the pin is 1 : 50 in
125. Spring washers are used to prevent metric system, while standard inch-sized taper pin have
(a) Damage to nut a taper on diameter of 1 : 48.
(b) Damage to bolt • The taper of a rectangular & sunk key is 1 in 100 and
(c) Damage to job it is given on the top side only.
(d) Slackness of nut due to vibration • A cotter is a flat wedge shaped piece of rectangular
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 cross-section and its width tapered. The tapered varies
Ans : (d) Spring washers are used to prevent the from 1 in 48 to 1 in 24.
slackness of nut due to vibration. 132. One end of this type of foundation bolt is bend
126. When a nut is tightened by placing a washer in a circular shape, when it is fitted under the
below it, the bolt will be subjected to floor, then a rod is inserted in this hole, which
(a) Tensile stress (b) Compressive stress does allow the bolt to come up after filling this
(c) Shear stress (d) None of these bolt–
ISRO Diesel Mechanic 27-11- 2016 (a) Bent bolt (b) Rag bolt
(c) Eye foundation bolt (d) Hexagonal bolt
Ans : (a) When a nut is tightened by placing a washer
below it the bolt will be subjected to tensile stress. VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
Fasteners 620 YCT
Ans : (c) In Eye foundation bolt on end of this type of (a) Transfer the load in three direction
foundation bolt is bend in a circular shape, when it is (b) Transfer the load in four direction
fitted under the floor, than rod is inserted in this hole, (c) All of the above
which does allow the bolt to come up after filling this (d) None of the above
bolt. (HAL Fitter, 2015)
133. The foundation bolt whose body is zig-zag Ans : (a) Traveling crane operates on the upper part of
(curved) is called– the building wall or on the track hanging from the
(a) Rag bolt ceiling. It is used in transfer the load three direction.
(b) Bent bolt 139. The key is a temporary fastener, it is used–
(c) Hexagonal bolt (a) Joint two shaft
(d) Eye foundation bolt (b) Perpendicular to the shaft axis
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (c) Parallel to the shaft axis
Ans : (a) The foundation bolt whose body is zig-zag (d) Joint two gears
(curved) is called rag bolt. DRDO Machinist. 2016
Ans: (c) The key is a temporary fastener, it is used in
parallel to the shaft axis, while cotter is inserted in
perpendicular to the shaft axis.
Rag bolt • Key is weakest member in the shaft coupling
134. The knot given in the figure is known as..... assembly.
140. When the groove is made only in the hub of the
pulley, then the fitted 'key' is called–
(a) Saddle key (b) Jib key
(a) Ship shank knot (b) Slip knot (c) Feather key (d) Sunk key
(c) Double knot (d) Square knot (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009) Ans : (a) When the groove is made only in the hub of
Ans : (d) Square knot–In square knot two equal the pulley, then the fitted 'key' is called as saddle key.
diameter of ropes are joint together. 141. Turn buckles coupler nut is a temporary
135. The knot given in the figure is known as..... fastener with left and right hand threads cut at
its ends. They are used for–
(a) For locking
(b) For length adjustment of tie rod
(a) Square knot (b) Bovine knot (c) For parts assembly
(c) Ship shank knot (d) Slip knot (d) None of above
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) (RRB Ajmer ALP, 23.05.2004)
Ans : (c) Ship shank knot by using this knot the rope is Ans : (b) Turn buckles coupler nut is a temporary
reduced in length without cut. fastener with left and right hand threads cut at its end,
136. The knot given in the figure is known as..... they are used for adjustment the length of tie rod.
(a) Slip knot (b) Double hitch knot

(c) Bovine knot (d) Ship shank knot
Ans : (a) Slip knot– This knot is used for lifting the 142. Turn buckles and coupler nut are made up of–
light load. (a) Cast iron (b) Forged steel
137. The knot given in the figure is known as..... (c) Alloy steel (d) Mild steel
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (d) Turn buckles and coupler nut are made up of
mild steel.
(a) Square knot (b) Slip knot 143. The slot is cut along the entire length of the
(c) Bovine knot (d) Ship shank knot spring dowel pin, due to which it is compressed
(RRB Guwahati ALP, 22.01.2006) and inserted into the hole. The purpose of this
slot is–
Ans : (c) Bovine knot–This is the simplest form of
(a) to fit in the hole
knot. It is easily open. (b) for compression strength
138. Traveling crane operates on the upper part of (c) for reduce the size
the building wall or on the track hanging from (d) None of above
the ceiling. It is used in– (RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004)
Fasteners 621 YCT
Ans : (b) The slot is cut along the entire length of the 151. Which pin is used where the part has to be
spring dowel pin, due to which it is compressed and repeatedly opened and assembled–
inserted into the hole, the purpose of this slots for (a) groove dowel pin (b) spring dowel pin
compression strength. (c) taper dowel pin (d) all of above three
144. Another name for spring dowel pin is– (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
(a) groove hole pin (b) taper dowel pin Ans : (c) Taper dowel pin is used where the part has to
(c) roll pin (d) sunk key be repeatedly opened and assembled.
(IOF Fitter, 2014)
152. A fastener is used to joint two parts Soldering
Ans : (c) Another name for spring dowel pin is roll pin.
is .............. type of fastener–
145. The split taper dowel pin provides positive (a) temporary fastener (b) Permanent fastener
locking. It is available in the sizes–
(a) Split on whole length (c) Semi permanent (d) None of the above
(b) Split on small end (RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
(c) Split on big end Ans : (c) Soldering is a type of semi permanent fastener
(d) None of above in which base metal do not damage while filler metal is
(RRB Malda ALP, 16.07.2006) damaged if joint is opened.
Ans : (a) The split taper dowel pin provides positive 153. Another name for cup head bolt is–
locking. It is available in the size split on the whole (a) Chease head bolt
length. (b) Cylindrical head bolt
146. Thread taper pin is used in such as part where (c) Circular head bolt
there is vibration in the parts, nut is tightened. (d) None of the above
So that taper pin can not be removed. Its BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
second use is– (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(a) For assembly of parts
(b) For extract of pin in blind hole Ans : (c) Circular head bolt is also known as cup head
(c) For fit in the gear bolt. So do not caught, the under size of the head is
(d) None of the above made square and some snug is made. It is mostly used
(IOF Fitter, 2013) in wooden work.
Ans : (b) For extraction of pin in blind hole. 154. Another name for cylindrical head bolt–
147. The process of joining two parts like riveting is (a) Cup head bolt (b) Circular head bolt
called as– (c) Socket head bolt (d) Chease head bolt
(a) pining (b) pening (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(c) staking (d) soldering Ans : (d) Another name of cylindrical head bolt is
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 10.10.2004) chease head bolt.
Ans : (a) The process of joining two parts like riveting • Circular head bolt is also known as cup head bolt.
is called as pining.
• Cylindrical head or chease head bolt is used when the
148. Dowel pin is a fastener– space for accommodating the bolt head is comparatively
(a) Permanent (b) Temporary
(c) Semi permanent (d) None of above limited.
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016) 155. Which bolt is used where the top surface of
Ans : (b) Dowel Pin is a temporary (or) Non-permanent bolt head is to be kept below the upper surface
fastener. of the part–
149. Dowel pin is not made of which metal– (a) ‘T’ head bolt
(a) Stainless steel (b) Spring steel (b) Counter sunk head bolt
(c) Cast iron (d) Aluminium (c) Chease head bolt
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) (d) Round head bolt
Ans : (c) Dowel is not made of cast iron. Dowel pin is (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
made of ductile material, while cast iron is brittle Ans : (b) Counter sunk head bolt is used where the top
material. surface of bolt head is to be kept below the upper
150. Pull dowel pin is like straight dowel pin, the surface of the part.
only difference is– 156. Hexagonal socket head bolt is called–
(a) It is split (a) Socket head bolt
(b) It is chamfer
(b) Counter sunk head bolt
(c) A centre hole at one end
(d) None of above (c) Cup head bolt
(RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 12.10.2003) (d) Chease head bolt
Ans : (c) Pull dowel pin is like straight dowel pin, the (HAL Fitter, 2015)
only difference is a hole is made at the centre of one Ans: (a) Hexagonal socket head bolt is also called as
end. socket head bolt.
Fasteners 622 YCT

157. Which bolt is used to clamp the workpiece on 163. After forging the machine bolt, it is prepared
the machine table– in accurate size on the machine for its use–
(a) Hexagonal head bolt (a) The hole has less clearance
(b) Cup head bolt (b) The hole has more clearance
(c) 'T' head bolt (c) More accuracy is not necessary
(d) Chease head bolt (d) All of above
BEML 2022 (RRB Patna ALP, 04.02.2007)
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) Ans : (a) After forging the machine bolt, it is prepared
Ans : (c) 'T' head bolt is used to clamp the workpiece in accurate size on the machine for its use the hole has
on the machine table, this form of bolt is just like a 'T' less clearance.
and is used for securing vice, jigs, etc. to tables of 164. Washer is a temporary fastener. By using it–
machine tools in which 'T' slots are cut to accommodate (a) Bolt fits tight
the 'T' head. The neck of this bolt is squared to prevent (b) Nut is tightened
to rotation. (c) Wearing area of nut increases
158. The feature of tap bolt– (d) None of above
(a) It is tap (BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014)
(b) do not need to use of nut in this Ans : (c) Washer is a temporary fastener by using it
(c) there is no head in this wearing area increases.
(d) None of the above Function of a washer–
(IOF Fitter, 2012) • A washer is a thin plate (typically disc shaped) with a
Ans : (b) Feature of tap bolt is do not need to use of nut hole (typically in the middle) that is normally used to
in this. distribute the load of a threaded fastener, such as a
A tap bolt or screw differs from a bolt. It is screwed into screw or nut.
a tapped hole of one of the parts to be fastened without 165. Split pin is used with which nut–
nut. (a) Hexagonal nut (b) Slotted nut
159. A stud is a temporary fastener because of– (c) Flange nut (d) Simmonds nut
(a) threads on whole length (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(b) threads on both ends while in middle parts Ans : (b) Split pin is used with the slotted nut.
remain plain Split nut is a hexagonal nut, whose upper end the slot's
(c) Headed on one side are cut.
(d) None of above 166. Slots are cut on which nut's raised height–
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005) (a) Slotted nut (b) dome nut
Ans : (b) A stud is a temporary fastener because of it (c) Castle nut (d) Simmonds nut
has threads on both the ends while the middle parts (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012)
remain plain. Ans : (c) Castle nut–it is a hexagonal nut with a
160. The nut end of stud is– cylindrical collar at the top, through which the slots are
made diametrically. When the nut is in tight position, a
(a) Long in length
split pin is inserted through the slots and the hole, as in
(b) Short in length
case of slotted nutted nut.
(c) Plain cylindrical
(d) None of above 167. Cutting a slot weakness the nut. In which nut–
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007) (a) swan nut (b) castle nut
(c) slotted nut (d) square nut
Ans : (a) The nut end of stud is long in length, one end
IOCL 2020
of its attached to the machine body and another end (IOF Fitter, 2015)
holds nut.
Ans : (c) In slotted nut cutting a slot weakness the nut.
161. The metal end of stud is– Slotted nut–It is hexagonal nut with slots cut in the
(a) Nut fit on it upper and through opposite faces. A split pin is then
(b) Fit in the workpiece inserted into the slots of the nut and hole.
(c) Long in length
168. Which side of the washer is twisted to prevent
(d) None of above
the nut from turning–
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) (a) spring washer (b) lock washer
Ans : (b) The metal end of stud is fit in the workpiece. (c) tab washer (d) plain washer
162. Black bolts are produced– MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
(a) these are produced on lathe (RRB Kolkata ALP, 2014)
(b) these are produced by forging Ans : (c) Tab washers is twisted to prevent the nut from
(c) these are produced by automatic machine turning.
(d) all of above three Washer–Washer is a flat circular disc of metal having a
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005) hole in the centre for inserting the bolt or the stud. The
Ans : (b) Black bolts are produced by forging process, hole is slightly larger in diameter than the bolt or the
it is widely used in forming of ductile metals. A stud, so that the washer can be slipped easily in
compressive force or impact load is applied. position.
Fasteners 623 YCT
169. The groove which is cut in the shaft/pulley to Ans : (b) The bolt head is generally chamfered at 30º.
trap the 'key' is called– As per options here 45º is correct ans. The bolts are
(a) slot (b) groove used to connect two or more parts temporarily.
(c) key way (d) None of above • The upper corner of the nut (hexagonal and square)
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 19.01.2003) are rounded or chamfered at an angle of 30º or 45º w.r.t
Ans : (c) The groove which is cut in the pulley to trap base of the nut.
the 'key' is called as key-way. The key way is cut by 175. Bolt used to lift electric motors–
cross-cut chisel or capes chisel. (a) 'T' bolt (b) Eye bolt
170. What kind of fastener is 'key way'– (c) Hook bolt (d) Round bolt
(a) Permanent (b) Semi permanent NTPC Fitter 2016
(c) temporary (d) None of above (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(Coal India Fitter, 2013) Ans : (b) Eye bolt–Lifting eye bolts are headless bolts
Ans : (c) Key is a temporary fastener. with eye type hook and externally threaded body, used
• Semi-permanent joint – Rivets, soldering etc. for lifting.
• Permanent joint – Welding and shrinkage fit 176. Which bolt is commonly used in foundation of
171. Hacksaw frame blade is fastened by– machines–
(a) Wing nut (b) Square nut (a) Rag bolt (b) Hook bolt
(c) Hexagonal nut (d) Dome nut (c) Eye bolt (d) Round bolt
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 15.07.2012)
Ans : (a) Hacksaw frame blade is fastened by wing nut. Ans : (a) Rag bolt is commonly used in foundation of
Wing nut–These nuts are designed for operation by machines.
thumb and finger and are frequently used for securing Rag bolt–Rag bolt is used for fixing the heavy
adjustable fitting such as in the wind screen of a motor machines to stone or concrete foundation. It is a tapered
bolt of rectangular section with edges.
car.
177. Main difference between bolt and screw–
(a) threaded on whole length of screw
(b) bolt is tighten with spanner
Wing Nut (c) slotted in head screw
(d) all of above
172. Which device is placed between the machine
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014)
surface and the nut to prevent the nut from
slipping– Ans : (d) Main difference between bolt and screw are–
(a) Bolt (b) Washer 1. threaded on whole length of screw.
2. bolt is tighten with spanner.
(c) Screw (d) Ring nut
3. slotted in head screw.
178. The common 'key' used to stop movement
Ans : (b) Washer is placed between the machine
between two parts–
surface and the nut to prevent the nut from slipping. It is (a) Axial (b) Reciprocating
used for following purposes– (c) Rotation (d) None of above
1. It is placed below the nut to give a smooth seating for BHEL 2020
nut. UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
2. It distributes the force taken by the nut over a large
Ans : (c) Key–A key is a piece of mild steel inserted
surface area. between the shaft and hub or boss of the pulley to
3. It prevents the nut from cutting into the metal and connect these together in order to prevent relative
thus allows the nut to be screwed more tightly. motion between them. It is always inserted parallel to
4. It is generally used where the surface of the machine the shaft. Key are temporary fastening and are subjected
part is rough or uneven for a nut to work. to considerable crushing and shearing stresses.
173. How is the bolt size taken– 179. Which is a standard size of nut–
(a) Diameter (a) 4 mm (b) 8 mm
(b) Length without head (c) 15 mm (d) 22 mm
(c) Length of threaded portion (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
(d) both (a) and (b) Ans : (c) Standard size of nut is 15 mm.
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014) Forms of nuts–
Ans : (d) Bolt size taken by major diameter and length 1. Hexagonal nut
without head. 2. Square nut
174. To what degree is the head of the bolt 3. Flanged nut
chamfered– 4. Cap nut
(a) 900 (b) 450 5. Dome nut
0
(c) 55 (d) 600 6. Cylindrical or capstan nut
(RRB Ahamadabad ALP, 2014) 7. Wing nut
Fasteners 624 YCT

180. In which operation is done on slotting 184. Rivets used to fasten metal segments together–
machine– (a) Permanent joint (b) Temporary joint
(a) To make external spline on long shaft (c) Semi Permanent joint(d) None of these
(b) To make internal groove in hollow Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016
(c) To make wood ruff key way on shaft Ans : (c) Riveting is done by rivets to Permanent joint
(d) To cut key-way for feather key bond together any metal blocks. The rivet is usually
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 made according to the metal to be joined.
Ans : (c) Making wood ruff key-way on shaft is done
on slotting machine. 2. Locking devices
Work done on slotter–
1. Machining flat surface 185. Identify the locking nut in given figure :
2. Machining cylindrical surface
3. Machining curve surface
4. Internal and external gear cutting
5. Key-way slotting
181. With the help of what, the ends of two shafts
are connected–
(a) Cotter joint (b) Coupling
(c) Knuckle joint (d) Rivet joint (a) Build nut (b) Castle nut
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 2014) (c) Shock nut (d) Hair nut
Ans : (b) Coupling–The joining of two or more shafts UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
means of flange, bolts, nuts etc. in order to increases Ans. (b) : There is castle nut in the above given figure.
their length is known as shaft coupling. Castle nut– This is similar to the slotted nut. Slots are
Types of coupling–There are mainly two types of cut on its semi-circular ends. This is called castle nut. A
coupling. split pint is inserted to locking the nut.
A. Rigid coupling–Rigid couplings connect the two 186. Identify the locking nut shown in the figure.
shafts rigidly in axial alignment, these type of couplings
include–
1. Flange couplings
2. Boss or muff coupling
3. Compression coupling
4. Friction grip coupling
B. Flexible coupling–Flexible couplings are used to
connect two shafts which are not in exact alignment,
these types of couplings include–
1. Bush or pin type flexible coupling.
2. Universal coupling/Hook joint coupling
3. Oldham coupling etc.
182. Welding is a type of fastener–
(a) Temporary (b) Semi permanent
(c) Permanent (d) All of above
Ans : (c) Welding joint is a type of permanent fastener.
Welding–The process of joining two or more metal
parts permanently by the application of heat is known as
welding.
Temporary fastening–The process of joining two or (a) Curl nut (b) Bridge nut
more parts of a machine or structure by mean of various (c) Hair nut (d) Sawn nut
devices e.g. nut and bolt is known as temporary UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
fastening. Ans. (d) : Swan nut/wiles nut–
183. Which fasteners are considered permanent– • A slot is cut halfway across the nut.
(a) Welding (b) Forging • A screw is fitted with a clearance hole on the top part
(c) Riveting (d) both (a) and (b) and matching thread on the lower part of the nut.
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 • Swan nut is a hexagonal nut.
Ans : (d) Welding and forging fasteners are considered 187. Identify the washer in figure below.
as permanent fastening.
Fastener–In engg. field, various structures and other
engg. products are joined together either by means of
temporary or permanent fastening.
Fasteners 625 YCT
(a) Split Washer (b) Fender Washer 192. Which fastener is welding?
(c) Lock Washer (d) Toothed Washer (a) temporary (b) semi-permanent
UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022 (c) permanent (d) None of these
Ans. (b) : The washer shown in figure is fender washer. BDL Technician 2022
Fender washers are flat washers with a small hole and HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
comparatively large outside diameter. Ans. (c) : Welding is the permanent fasteners.
• It is used to distribute force over a large surface • Welding coalescence of metal produced by heating to
area, usually thin metal. a suitable temperature with or without the application of
188. Self-locking takes place when pressure and with or without the use of a filler
(a) Coefficient of friction is equal to or greater materials.
than the tangent of the helix angle 193. Which bolt is without head?
(b) Coefficient of friction is lesser than or equal (a) headless bolt (b) eye bolt
to the tangent of the helix angle
(c) hook bolt (d) rag bolt
(c) Coefficient of friction is equal to or greater
than the tangent of the helix angle
(d) None of the mentioned Ans. (a): Headless bolt means without head.
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • Stud bolt are without head.
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 • Headless bolt is used for large marine shaft coupling.
Ans. (c) : Self-locking takes place when coefficient of • Rag bolt used often to structure concrete.
friction is equal to or greater than the tangent of helix • Eye bolt used firmly attach a securing eye to structure
angle. so that ropes or cable may then be tied to it.
• A screw is said to be overhauling screw, it the friction • Hook belt are very commonly used to attach lighter
angle (φ) or coefficient of friction is less than the helix rails to channels.
angle (α). The efficiency of over hauling screw is more 194. The dimension of a nut is expressed in terms
than 50%. of–
• A screw is said to be self locking screw, it is the (a) Head of the bolt
friction angle (φ) or coefficient of friction is more than (b) Core diameter of bolt
helix angle (d). The efficiency of self locking screw is (c) Nominal diameter of bolt
less than 50%. (d) Pitch diameter of bolt
189. Which tool is used to open the circlip lock? NCL Fitter 27-12-2020
(a) Circlip piler Ans. (c) : The dimension of a nut is expressed in term
(b) Long nose plier of nominal diameter of bolt.
(c) Combination plier • For engineering drawing purposes, the dimensions are
(d) Gas plier approximately in terms of the diameter 'd'.
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 • For measuring the distance from the outer thread on
Ans. (a) : Circlip plier–It is used to open the circlip one side to the outer thread on the other side.
lock.
195. The dimension of a nut is expressed in terms
• It is also used for removing & installing retaining of:
rings or fasteners.
(a) 3 degree 15' (b) 3 degree
190. What is the formula for plain washer outer (c) 3 degree 55' (d) 1 degree 29'
diameter?
(a) D + 1/8" (b) 2 D + 1/8"
Ans. (d) : The half included angle of Morse standard
(c) 2 D + 1/4" (d) 1/8" + D
taper is 1 degree 29'.
• Morse tapers may be identified either by measuring
Ans. (b) : When nominal diameter of bolt = D the large, or the small diameter, the length, or the taper
Thickness of washer = 0.12 D per inch.
Outer diameter = 2 D + 1/8"
• Morse taper are found in drill bits, reamers, end mills
Inner diameter = D + 0.5 mm holders, drill chuck, arbors, collects, lathe centers etc.
191. Which is self-lock nut? 196. Identify the spanner, suitable for all sizes of
(a) Slotted nut nuts in a range, which has jaws with plain
(b) Swan nut surfaces that open parallel with the help of a
(c) Wire lock screw.
(d) Simmond's lock nut (a) Ring Spanner (b) Torque wrench
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 (c) Pipe wrench (d) Monkey spanner
Ans. (d) : Simmond's lock nut is a self lock nut. ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
Fasteners 626 YCT
Ans. (d) : The monkey spanner can be used to clamp 201. Which given alphabet represents adjustable
onto pipe and various fasteners such as lug nuts, bolt spanner?
and screw. (a) A (b) B
• Ring spanner used break, loose a tight nut. (c) D (d) E
197. The following, has a nylon or fibre ring insert ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
placed in the upper part of the nut? Ans. (d): Adjustable spanner–is used for those nuts
(a) Sawn nut (b) Wire lock where no other spanner fits well enough for better
(c) Self-locking nut (d) Castle nut operation performance.
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) 202. Which given alphabet represents Hook
Ans. (c) : Self-locking nut has a nylon or fibre ring spanner?
inserted placed in the upper part of nut. (a) C (b) B
• A sawn nut is self-locking nut is a type of nut or (c) D (d) F
threaded insert that is used on sheet metal. ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
• Castle nut help to hold a wheel onto an axle. Ans. (d) : Hook spanner are designed for safe, easy
• Wire lock purpose to prevent the loosening of nut, tightening & loosening of locknuts used to secure and
bolt and other fastener. adjust bearing.
Figure (Q 40-44)
198. Which given alphabet represents single end
spanner? Figure (27-31)
(a) A (b) B 203. Which given alphabet represents wood rough
key?
(c) D (d) E
(a) A (b) B
(c) D (d) F
Ans. (a) : Single end spanner–It is also known as open
end spanner.
• In these type of spanner only one end is open in which Ans. (d) : • It is semicircular in shape.
the nut or bolt head is gripped to loose or light. • These type of key can deal with any type of
misalignment.
199. Which given alphabet represent ring spanner?
• Extra depth of key is provided to ensure more power
(a) G (b) F
capacity.
(c) A (d) C
• It is largely used in machine tool & automobile
construction.
Ans. (d) : Ring spanner–
204. Which given alphabet represents parallel sunk
• Round rings are made on one or both ends. key?
• These rings are made to drip nut & bolts. (a) A (b) E
• These rings are bend down in the opposite direction (c) C (d) D
from each other. ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
200. Which given alphabet represents socket Ans. (a) : Parallel sunk key–These type of keys are
spanner? uniform in width & thickness throughout.
(a) A (b) B • It is used where the pulley, gear or mating parts is
(c) D (d) E required to slide along the shaft.
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 205. Which given alphabet represents hollow saddle
Ans. (c) : Socket spanner–These type of spanner are in key?
form of round socket. At one end square hole in formed (a) A (b) E
while on the other end of socket spanner grooves are (c) B (d) C
provided. ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
Fasteners 627 YCT
Ans. (b) : Hollow saddle key–A taper key which fits in 212. A washer used as the bearing surface for the
a key way in hub and the bottom of the key is shaped to cotter foundation bolt is generally made of–
fit the curved surface of the shaft. (a) cast iron (b) mild steel
• Not suitable for high power transmission capacity. (c) pig iron (d) rubber
206. Which given alphabet represents feather key?
Ans. (a) : A washer used as the bearing surface for the
(a) A (b) B
cotter foundation bolt is generally made of cast iron.
(c) D (d) F
213. Which of the following washers is used to
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 absorb vibrations and do not allow the nut to
Ans. (c) : Feather key is tight in shaft & loose in hub. loosen in a bolt?
• It allows axial relative motion of shaft & hub. (a) Flat washer
207. Which given alphabet represents flat saddle (b) Double coil spring washer
key? (c) Tab washer
(a) A (b) C (d) None of the above
(c) B (d) D MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
Ans. (b) : Flat saddle key–It is a taperless key which Ans. (b) : Double coil spring washer is used to absorb
sits on a flat surface provided on shaft & fits in the vibrations and do not allow the nut to loosen in a bolt.
keyway in the hub. 214. Outer diameter (in mm) of a flat washer in
terms of bolt diameter d is given by–
208. In locking plate, to lock the nut ______ grooves
(a) 2d + 3 (b) d + 3
are cut.
(c) 3d + 2 (d) 2d + 2
(a) two (b) four
(c) six (d) eight
Ans. (a) : When outer diameter (in mm) of a flat washer
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 in terms of bolt diameter d is given 2d+3.
Ans. (c) : In locking plate, to lock the nut six grooves • Washers are used to distribute the clamping pressure
are cut. over a larger area and prevent surface damage.
209. A bolt that is used to create a pivot point is • They also provide an increased bearing surface for
called- bolt heads and nuts.
(a) shoulder bolt (b) J-boot 215. In case of chamfered washer, angle of chamfer
(c) U-bolt (d) hangar bolt is–
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (a) 60° (b) 30°
(c) 45° (d) 15°
Ans. (a) : A bolt that is used to create a pivot point is
called shoulder bolt. RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
U bolt–U bolt have primarily used to support pipe Ans. (b) : In case of chamfered washer, angle of
work, pipe through which fluids and gasses pass. chamfer is 30º.
216. For single coil spring washer, height of washer
210. A bolt that has wooden thread on one end and
in terms of bolt diameter d can be calculated
machine thread on the other end is called- as–
(a) shoulder bolt (b) carriage bolt (a) 2d (b) 0.2d
(c) J-bolt (d) hangar bolt (c) d (d) 1.2d
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
Ans. (d) : A bolt that has wooden thread on one end and Ans. (b) : For single coil spring washer, height of
machine thread on the other end is called hangar bolt. washer in terms of bolt diameter is 0.2d.
211. A nut having raised height and slots on the 217. Spring washer is made of–
raised portion is called- (a) high speed steel (b) stainless steel
(a) Sawn nut (b) Slotted nut (c) spring steel (d) mild steel
(c) Castle nut (d) Pin hole nut NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021 Ans. (c) : Spring washer is made of spring steel.
Ans. (c) : A nut having raised height and slots on the • It is used at the place where vibration shock is more.
raised portion is called castle nut. • The nut does not become loose by using it.
Castle nut–Due to the slot being cut, the strength of the 218. A key that fits into a semicircular keyway cut
slotted nut is reduced. It is resolved in the form of a in the shaft is
castle nut. Some portion of the tap of nut is raised (a) Gib head key (b) Feather key
roundly in which slots are cut. Split pin is also used for (c) Woodruff key (d) Saddle key
locking. RRB ALP Patna 2014
Fasteners 628 YCT

Ans. (c) : A key that fits into a semicircular keyway cut 224. Mechanical seals are used to:
in the shaft is woodruff key. (a) Prevent vibration
Woodruff key–It is a piece from a cylindrical disc (b) Prevent leakage
having segmental cross-section. It is capable of tilting in (c) Reduce friction
a recess milled out in the shaft by a cutter having the (d) Balance the equipment
same curvature as the disc from which the key is made. RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
219. The most common shape of nut is Ans. (b) : Mechanical seals are used to prevent leakage.
(a) Square (b) Hexagonal. • Mechanical seals are devices that are used to provide a
(c) Round (d) Flat seal at the point of entry or exit of a rotating shaft.
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 225. Choose name of the bolt
Ans. (b) : The most common shape of nut is hexagonal
nut.
Types of nut–
• Hexagonal nut • Capstan nut
• Square nut • Round nut
• T nut • Wing nut
• Cough nut • Castle nut
• Cap nut • Swan nut or wills nut
(a) Gib Headed foundation bolt
220. Name the fixed type foundation bolt that is (b) Cotter foundation bolt
usually forged and filled up with lead and (c) Through foundation bolt
cement ?
(d) Eye foundation bolt
(a) Eye bolt (b) Rag bolt
(c) Ordinary bolt (d) Bent type bolt
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 Ans. (d) : It is used with machines so that they can be
moved from one place to another.
Ans. (b) : Rag bolt the fixed type foundation bolt that is Such bolts are fitted with electric motors.
usually forged and filled up with lead and cement.
• These bolts are used most often to attach objects or 226. Which type of nut prevents the rotation of the
structures to concrete, but they can also be used within top nut ?
the repairing of foundations that are candidates for (a) Sawn nut (b) Grooved nut
replacement or repair. (c) Self – locking nut (d) Lock nut
221. Which type of crow bar is easier to handle and RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
the point will fit into a narrow gap? Ans. (d) : Lock nut prevents the rotation of the top nut.
(a) Short crow bar • Nuts are mostly loosened due to the vibrations
(b) Long crow bar generated during the running of machines.
(c) Single ended crow bar • Lock nut is used at such places, some nuts are made of
(d) Double ended crow bar special design and some have additional locking device.
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 As - washers.
Swan nut–The standard nut is cut to half its width, one-
Ans. (a) : Short crow bar is easier to handle and the
third down from the top.
point will fit into a narrow gap.
• A crow bar, also called a wrecking bar, pry bar or 227. Which type of nut will have a nylon or fiber
pinch bar. ring insert placed in the upper part of the nut?
(a) Self locking nut (b) Wire lock
222. Which type of knot is used to join two pieces of
(c) Sawn nut (d) Grooved nut
rope of equal diameters?
(a) Slip knot (b) Bowline knot RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
(c) Square knot (d) Sheep shank knot Ans. (a) : Self locking nut–Self locking or simmonds
lock nut–In this nut a collar remains in the upper part of
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
this nut. A hard rubber fiber or nylon washer with a
Ans. (b): Bowline knot is used to join two pieces of bore smaller than the root diameter of the bolt is
rope of equal diameters. inserted into the groove made in this collar.
Grooved nut–In this type of nut, a collar is made at the • When the nut is tightened on to the bolt the threads of
bottom in which there is a groove. the bolt make threads into the fiber washers.
• It is also called penning nut and ring nut. • So that the nut holds the bolt firmly in place.
223. Rag bolt is a type of : 228. This type of fastener is designed to prevent
(a) Welding bolt (b) Foundation bolt movement between shafts and wheels :
(c) Heavy duty bolt (d) Locking bolt (a) Keys (b) Machine pins
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 (c) Rivets (d) Knuckle
Ans. (b) : Rag bolt is a foundation bolt. RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
Fasteners 629 YCT
Ans. (a) : A key is a piece of mild steel inserted • Where there is a possibility of loosening of the nut due
between the shaft and hub or boss of the pulley to to vibration castle nut is used.
connect these together in order to prevent relation • Some part above the nut is increased in the form of
roundness from which the slots are cut, this does not
motion between them.
reduce the strength of the nut.
• Keys are temporary fastenings.
232. It is a hexagonal nut, with a half-cut across it:
• Type of keys. (a) Swan nut (b) Groove nut
• Sunk key, saddle key, tangent key, round key, splines (c) Lock nut (d) Castle nut
key, woodruff key etc. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
229. To lock the nut bolt assembly, split pin is used Ans. (a) : Swan nut is a hexagonal nut with a half cut
across it.
in– Swan Nut–
(a) Self locking nut • A slot is out halfway across the nut
(b) Swan nut • A screw is fitted with a clearance hole on the top part
(c) Slotted and castle nut and matching thread on the lower part of the nut
(d) Simmonds nut
Ans. (c) : To lock the nut bolt assembly, split pin is
used in slotted and castle nut. In slotted and castle nut a
split pin is inserted into the slots of the nut and hole,
then the legs of the split pin are opened out and bent
around the nut.
Castle nuts are widely used in automobiles and 233. There is a collar on the upper surface of this
locomotive engines. nut, in which there are slots in the middle of
each face:
230. In which locking nut, half slot is cut across the (a) Swan nut (b) Lock nut
nut– (c) Castle nut (d) Groove nut
(a) Slotted nut (b) Swan nut UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
(c) Castle nut (d) Grooved nut Ans. (c): Castle nut–
• It consists of a hexagonal portion with a cylindrical
Ans. (b) : In swan nut, a slot is cut halfway across upper part which is slotter inline with the center of each
the nut. face.
Swan nut–The standard nut is cut of half its width up • The Split pin passes through two slots in the nut and a
to one third down from the top. hole in the bolt so that a positive lock is obtained unless
Castle nut–In this type of nut, a slot is cut in it bythe pin shears.
increasing some part of the roundness above the nut, 234. Bolt used fro installing a machine on the
due to which the strength of the nut is not reduced. ground is called :
• Split pin is used to lock it. (a) Eye bolt (b) Hexagonal bolt
(c) Foundation bolt (d) Square head bolt
231. Identify the type of nut shown in the picture?
Ans. (c) : Foundation to install the machinery
foundation bolts will be specified and supplied by the
manufacturers.
• Some of the foundation bolts become rigid on pouring
concrete and same may be removable and adjustable
bolts.
(a) Slotted nut (b) Castle nut
235. Bolt having a ring shaped head used in heavy
(c) Swan nut (d) Wing nut
electric motors and other machines for
NMRC, 15-09-2019 providing a facility for lifting is called :
UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 09:00AM-12:00PM (a) Counter sunk bolt (b) T bolt
Ans. (b) : (c) Cheese head bolt (d) Eye bolt
Ans. (d) : Bolt having a ring shaped head used in heavy
electric motors and other machines for providing a
facility for lifting is called eye bolt.
• Machinery eye bolts are fully threaded and may have
a collar, making turn suitable for use with angular loads.
Eye bolts without a shoulder should not be used for
Castle nut is shown in the figure. angular loads.
Fasteners 630 YCT

236. Which of the following is used for locking a Ans : (c) Swan Nut (wiles nut)–A slot is cut halfway
nut? across the nut. A screw is fitted with a clearance hole on
(a) Plain washer (b) Machined washer the lower part of the nut.
(c) Tab washer (d) Tapered washer
Ans. (c) : Tab washer is used to lock nut.
• Washer are usually made of sheet metal with a hole
drilled in the center for the ball to pass through.
• According to the work, washer of ferrous and non-
ferrous metals are also made.
237. A broken stud can be removed from assembly
by :
(a) Prick punch method 242. Which one of the following is a work holding
(b) Using square taper punch device that holds, support and locates the work
(c) Both (a) and (b) piece and guides the cutting tool for a specific
(d) Broken stud cannot be removed operation
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 (a) Guide pillar (b) Guide bushes
Ans. (c) : A broken stud can be removed from assembly (c) Fixture (d) Jig
by prick punch method and using square taper punch. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
238. The function of a washer is .......... Ans : (d) A jig is a type of tool used to control the
(a) To fill the axial gap location and/or motion of another too. A jig's primary
(b) To provide cushioning effect
purpose is to provide repeatability, accuracy and
(c) To absorb shock and vibration
interchangeability in the manufacturing or products. A
(d) To provide bearing area
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 device that does both function (holding the workpiece
Ans. (d) : Washers are used to distribute the clamping and guiding a tool) is called a jig.
pressure over a large area and prevent surface damage. 243. Which one of the following is used for holding
They also provide an increased bearing surface for bolt pipes between φ15 mm and φ50 mm?
heads and nuts. (a) Pipe vice
Type of washers– (b) Chain pipe wrench
1. Flat washer (c) Pipe wrench
2. Medium split lock washer (d) Foot print wrench
3. Fender washer HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
4. Internal to lock washer DRDO Machinist.2016
5. External tooth lock washer
239. Tab washer are used for to–
Ans : (c) The adjustable pipe or stillson, wrench is used
(a) Structural assembly
(b) Maintain the bore diameter to hold or turn pipe or circular bars. This wrench has
(c) Dimensional accuracy serrated jaws. One of which is pivoted on the handle to
(d) Lock of the nut create a strong gripping on the workpiece.
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I • Pipe wrench holding pipes between φ15 mm and φ50
Ans : (d) Tab washer is used to lock the nuts. It mm.
protects the components and fasteners to be joined. 244. Which of the following joints is generally used
240. Which nut can be easily operated using thumb for pipes carrying water at minimum pressure
and finger– is used for?
(a) Lock nut (b) Dome nut (a) Union joint (b) Coupler joint
(c) Wing nut (d) Capstan nut (c) Expansion joint (d) Nipple joint
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016
Ans : (c) Wing nut can be easily operated using thumb Ans : (b) Coupler joint is generally used for pipes
and finger.
carrying water at minimum pressure.
• A wing nut or butterfly nut is a type of nut with two
large metal "wings" one on each side. So it can be easily 245. What type of jaws are there in an adjustable
tightened and loosened by hand without tools. wrench?
241. In which of the following locking nuts, grooves (a) movable jaw
are cut to half the thickness of the locking nut? (b) fixed jaw
(a) Slotted nut (b) Grooved nut (c) fixed jaw and moving jaw
(c) Swan nut (d) Castle nut (d) neutral jaw
RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
Fasteners 631 YCT
Ans : (c) Adjustable wrench has two types of fixed jaw

and movable jaw. In this the fixed jaw remains in a
fixed position, while the movable jaw or pulls back on
fourth.
246. The correct diameter of plain washer is kept
is–
(a) 2D ( D = dia of Hole) (b) 2D + 3mm
(c) 1.5 D (d) 1.5 d + 3mm
Ans : (b) The symbol of plain washer is as follows–
Diameter = 2D + 3 mm 249. The outer diameter of the spring washer is kept
1 in–
= 2D + "
8 (a) 2D (b) 1.5D
D = Diameter of bolt (c) 1.8 D (d) 2.5D
T = Thickness of washer BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
1 Ans: (c) Spring washer–
T = 0.125 D = = D
8 Outer diameter = 1.8 d
T = 0.1d
Plain washer
250. Which of the following nuts with splits pin is
247. The thickness of plain washer is kept at– used for locking?
D D (a) Flange nut (b) Castle nut
(a) (Dia of Hole) (b)
2 4 (c) Low nut (d) Square nut
D D Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
(c) (d) Ans : (b) Due to the slot being cut in the castle nut,
8 6 same as slotted nuts, above this some part is increased
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 in roundness in which slots are cut, this does not reduce
D the strength of the nut in this a split pin is used for
Ans : (c) Thickness of plain washer T = in inch. locking.
8
T = Thickness of washer 251. Circlip is a temporary fastener, its another
name is–
D = Diameter (a) Ring (b) Retaining ring
248. The angle of chamfer of chamfered washer is (c) Washer (d) None of the above
kept goes at– (RRB Ranchi ALP, 19.01.2003)
(a) 46 0
(b) 60 0 Ans : (b) Circlip is a temporary fastener which is used
(c) 20 0
(d) 30 0 to the moving parts in the assemble.
• Its other name is retaining rings.
252. To prevent loosening in a bolted joint due to
Ans : (d) The chamfer of chamfered washer is kept at vibration.........washers are used:
30º. (a) Spring washer (b) Standard washer
Chamfer angle = 30º (c) Tapered (d) Thick
1 ISRO Technician -Motor Mechanic 2016
Outside diameter = 2D + " or 2D + 3 mm Ans : (a) Spring washer play an integral role in
8
assemble application to eliminate rattle maintain
1 assembly tension absorb shock loads, and provide
T = 0.125 D = = D
8 controlled reaction for dynamic loads.
Fasteners 632 YCT

253. The 'key' is made of piece of metal. It is fitted Ans : (c) Gib head key–This key is rectangular, its head
between the shaft and the hub– is square, its head is chamfered at 45º. The taper of this
(a) Perpendicular to the axis of the shaft jib head is in the ratio of 1 : 100. The use of this 'key'
(b) Parallel to the axis of the shaft remains outside when its head is fitted. Due to which it
(c) Oblique to the axis of the shaft is easy to remove and re-apply.
(d) All of the above 259. Wood ruff key is 'key' in the shape of a
BEML 2022 segment and it is used to fit the key seat 'key'
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 made on the shaft is used–
Ans : (b) The key is made of a piece of metal. It is (a) To fit shaft and gear
fitted between the shaft and the hub, parallel to the axis (b) Fits perpendicularly with the shaft
of the shaft. Plain taper key this key is rectangular. It is (c) To fit a wheel on a taper shaft
parallel in width and taper in thickness, it is used (d) None of the above
parallel to the axis of the shaft. Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
• This key has a taper ratio of 1 : 100, this is made from
Ans : (c) Woodruff key–A woodruff key is a half-
mild steel metal.
moon key, it is a semi-circular machine shaft which
254. To fit the sunk key– prevents gears, hubs or other components from moving
(a) Key wedges are cut in both shaft and hub independently of a rotating shaft or a spindle.
(b) Key wedges are cut in shaft only • Woodruff key is a semi-circular disc which fits into
(c) Key wedges are cut in hub only
circular recess in a shaft and machined by woodruffs
(d) Key wedges are cut in hub only
keyway cutter.
260. Feather key is–
Ans : (a) Sunk key to fit this type of key, a key slot is
(a) Tapers
required to be made in both the shaft and the hub.
(b) These shaft fit in line with the 'key' axis
255. Key ways to fit the saddle key– (c) It does not have a head
(a) Cut on both shaft and hub (d) Fitted in shaft
(b) Cut on shaft only
(c) Cut at the hub only
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 Ans : (d) Feather key–A feather key is a parallel key
Ans : (c) A saddle key is simply mounted on the shaft which is fixed to the shaft or to the hub and which
and inserted into the keyway which is provided only in permits relative axial movement between them. The
hum. Keyway in the shaft is not required. feather key is a type of sunk key which have uniform
• Saddle keys are used for very light loads. width and height there are numbers of methods to fix
256. Hollow saddle is used for– the key to the shaft or hub.
(a) heavy load (b) medium load 261. Cone key is–
(c) light load (d) all of the above (a) Cone shaped taper
(IOF Fitter, 2016) (b) It is made of truncated cone segments
Ans : (c) Hallow saddle key is used in light load. This (c) Tapers both inside and outside
key is rectangular in shape with a flat top and a hollow (d) All of the above
bottom. When fitted, the flat fitted part is fitted into the IOCL 2020
key way of the hub and the hollow part is fitted onto the (IOF Fitter, 2016)
shaft. Ans : (b) Cone key it is made up twisted cone
• The taper of this key is 1 : 100 of the head segments.
257. Taper is on taper's thickness, ratio of it– Cone key–Any of usually three taper saddle keys fitting
(a) 1 : 100 (b) 1 : 50 all round a shaft to key on it a piece (as a pulley) the
hole in which is too large for the shaft.
(c) 1 : 10 (d) 1 : 1000
262. The tangential 'key' issued in pairs and is
located at an angle of 120o. It is used in–
Ans : (a) Taper key–This key is rectangular. And this (a) Fly wheel rolling mill
key is parallel in width and taper in thickness. (b) Automobile industry
• The taper on this taper key is ratio of 1:100. (c) For light work
258. The Jib head key is a taper key whose head is (d) All of the above
square and chamfered at 45o. The main Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014
advantage of this key is– Ans : (a) Tangential 'key' is used in pairs it is located at
(a) It is easy to make into a taper an angle of 120º, it is used in fly wheel rolling mill.
(b) It is easy to fit
263. The circular taper 'key' has ............ taper–
(c) Its head remains outside when fitted which
makes it easy to remove and fit. (a) 1 : 100 (b) 1 : 50
(d) All of the above (c) 1 : 150 (d) 1 : 200
(IOF Fitter, 2015) UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015
Fasteners 633 YCT
Ans : (a) In circular taper key, taper is 1 : 100. 269. Spring used in cycle carrier–
• This key is particularly useful on tapered fittings of shaft. (a) Helical torsional spring
It is semicircular key used for transmitting light torque. (b) Helical tension spring
(c) Conical disc spring
264. Serrated shaft fit is used in–
(d) Flat spring
(a) Rolling mill
(b) Automobile industry
(c) Wind mill Ans : (a) Helical torsional spring is used in cycle
(d) None of the above carrier. This type of spring is found in closed coil or
open coil. This type of spring is used for bicycle carrier
NTPC Fitter 2016
and pad clips.
270. Which type of spring is used where space is
Ans : (b) Serrated shaft is mostly used for transmission
limited and load is high–
of power in automobiles.
(a) Helical torsional spring
265. The knuckle joint is used in power (b) Conical disc spring
transmission for– (c) Wire spring
(a) rotary machine (d) Leaf spring
(b) Reciprocating motion (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
(c) Reciprocating into rotary motion Ans : (b) This spring is a conical disc spring of uniform
(d) None of the above thickness, which is especially for that place, where there
UPSSSC Tracer (Technical) 2015 is only limited space and heavy load is required.
Ans : (b) Knuckle joint is used in power transmission 271. Which type of spring is used in tensile loading–
for reciprocating motion. (a) Leaf spring
266. Wire spring is used– (b) Wire spring
(a) To keep the lids (covers) in position (c) Helical tension spring
(b) Cycle sheet cover (d) Conical disc spring
(c) Clock BHEL 2020
(d) Automobile vehicle (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 Ans : (c) This type of spring is usually made from the
Ans : (a) Wire spring is used to keep the part type round rod of the spring, that withstand the tension load
covers or lids set in position. applied by a hook or loop, these springs are closed coil
• A wire spring is mechanism made of coiled wire to springs.
store and release energy. • According to the function of this spring, the shape of
267. For heavy shock load .............. spring is used– the end of the helical tension spring is of the following
(a) Helical spring types. Tack Hook, D Hook, V Hook etc.
(b) Flat and leaf spring 272. Which is also called self locking nut–
(c) Compression spring (a) Simmonds nut (b) Wings nut
(d) Helical tension spring (c) Castle nut (d) Lock nut
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 15.07.2012) (RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 29.06.2008)
Ans : (b) Flat and leaf spring are used in heavy shock Ans : (a) Self locking nut is known as simmonds nut.
load. Flat and leaf spring these springs are triangular It this the internal grooves are cut. Contains a ring of
and rectangular in cross-section. These springs are used fiber or nylon that holds, the bolt and acts as a locking
in heavy motor vehicles. This spring has a higher shock device.
absorbing capacity. These springs are generally made 273. Wire lock is used for–
from flat steel strips or rods. (a) Where the nuts are for a part
(b) Where the nuts are close together
268. Spring used in compressive load–
(c) Where the nuts are inconvenient
(a) Helical tension spring
(b) Flat/leaf spring
(c) Wire spring
(d) Helical compression spring Ans : (a) Wire Lock–It is a method of locking a
number of screw and bolts in an assembly. In this
method, the shaft is rotated by inserting steel wire.
Ans : (d) Helical compression spring–
274. Nut locking in chuck nut–
• Helical compression spring is used multiple (a) Under the pressure of bangles
application. It is mainly used for energy storage shock (b) By mutual resistance of plain nut and chuck
absorber or damper, motion transfer etc. nut
• It is observed that the axial force applied on the (c) Split pin
helical spring do not transfer completely at the other (d) Lock washer
end. (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009)
Fasteners 634 YCT
Ans: (b) Lock nut or chuck nut is always used with 279. Spring washers are used under nuts
simple standard nut. The standard nut does not loosen (a) To prevent slackening of nuts due to vibration
when the lock nut or chuck nut is tightened from above. (b) To prevent damage to the work
This chuck nut is also a hexagonal nut with both the top (c) To prevent damage to the bolt
and bottom sides being standard. It thickness is 0.6 D to (d) To prevent damage to the thread
0.8 D (D = Diameter). IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
275. The jib head key is a taper key whose head is ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
square at chamfered at 30o, is the main Ans : (a) Spring washer–Spring washer is used as a
advantage of this key– locking devices for the nut. A single coiled or double
(a) Its easy to make into a taper coiled spring when used under a nut, the elasticity of the
(b) Easy to fit spring keeps the nut tight with bolt, it is made from
(c) It's head remains outside when fitted, which spring steel.
makes it easy to remove and fit. Spring washers are used in the automobiles and in
(d) All of these moving parts where the nut may becomes lose due to
(RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012) vibration.
Ans : (c) Gib head keys or Gib keys are commonly 280. Box spanner is used at where–
used in engines and motors, gear reducers, (a) for multi grip (b) in deep place
transmissions and motor shafts to hold pulleys and (c) in ratchet (d) to prevent slip
gears tightly to the rotating shaft. DRDO Machinist.2016
• Chamfering angle of Gib head key is 30º. (Coal India Fitter, 2013)
• The head of a Gib head key also makes for easier Ans : (b) Box spanner is used in deep places.
removal during disassembly, the key has a 1 : 100 taper 281. Where allen key is used–
to firmly engage the shaft to the hub. (a) for socket head screw
(b) for spherical nut
276. In 'key' standard taper is–
(c) for four face nut
(a) 3 : 50 (b) 1 : 100 (d) None of above
(c) 1 : 50 (d) 1 : 200 (RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009)
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 Ans : (a) Allen Key is used for screw with socket
Ans : (b) In key standard taper is 1 : 100. heads. Allen key is a long bent at right angle (90º) with
Taper key–A taper in key gives a tight fitting of the hexagonal cross-section and it's shape is 'L' type.
two parts to be fastened. It is uniform in width but 282. What is an electrician plier–
tapered in thickness, the taper in the key is nominal and (a) Insulated plier (b) Diagonal plier
varies from 1 in 64 to 1 in 100, but the standard taper is (c) Combination plier (d) Slip joint plier
1 in 100 (1 mm per 100 mm of length) and provided on (RRB Mumai ALP, 16.07.2006)
the upper surface of the key. Ans : (c) Combination Pliers is also known as
277. The standard taper used in cotter is– electrician plier.
(a) 1 : 200 (b) 1 : 250 Type of plier–
(c) 1 : 100 (d) 1 : 50 1. Side cutting plier
Ordnance Factory Fitter Itarsi 8.5.2016 2. Long nose plier
3. Slip joint plier
Ans : (d) The standard taper used in cotter is 1 : 50.
4. Multi-grip plier
Cotter–A cotter is a flat wedge shaped piece of 5. Diagonal plier
rectangular cross-section. It is uniform in thickness but 6. Gas plier
has taper in width throughout its length, the taper may
283. Name of the packing placed between two metal
be on one side or both sides. The usual taper is 1 in 48
surfaces to make the joint airtight, pressure
to 1 in 33. Taper can be increased up to 1 in 08 if a
proof, water proof etc.–
locking device is provided, cotter is always inserted at
(a) Sheet joint (b) Gasket
right angles to the axis of the rods.
(c) Belt (d) Washer
278. Which is more useful washer in simple work BDL Technician 2022
(task)– (IOF Fitter, 2012)
(a) Plain washer (b) Lock washer Ans : (b) Gasket is used between two metal surfaces to
(c) Spring washer (d) None of above make the joint airtight, pressure proof, water proof etc.
Sail Durgapur Steel Plant. 5.9.2014 In most cases, these items are made of rubber and are
Ans : (a) Plain Washer is more useful washer in simple available in a variety of sizes and shapes depending on
work (task). It is simple circular piece of metal out from their purpose.
iron sheet, it has hole in the centre through which a bolt The most common type of gasket is the flat gasket, it
or stud can pass. It is used for general purposes. has a circular cross-section in shape.
Fasteners 635 YCT

Screw and Thread
5. What type of thread lead screw of lathe has?
1. Classification of Thread (a) Square (b) Whitworth
(c) Acme (d) Buttress
1. Lathe lead screw has______screw threads.
(a) ACME (b) Knots Ans. (c) : Lead screw of lathe has acme thread.
(c) Lounge (d) Knuckle • Lead screw has single start thread
• Included angle of acme thread is 29º.
6. An angle of metric center gauge is
Ans. (a) : Lathe bed screw has ACME screw threads.
(a) 55º (b) 60º
• The included angle of ACME thread is 29o. (c) 29º (d) 47½º
• The shape of ACME thread is trapezoidal. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
• The shape of knuckle thread is not trapezoidal, but Ans. (b) : Metric centre gauge is used to check thread
it has a rounded shape. angle and pitch of thread cutting tools.
• In buttress thread, one flank is perpendicular to the Angle of metric centre gauge is 60 degree.
axis of the thread and other flank is at 45o. 7. Triple start thread of pitch is _____ times.
• Square and trapezoidal threads are most commonly (a) Four (b) Five
used threads. (c) Two (d) Three
2. Screw jack has______screw threads BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(a) Buttress (b) Knuckle HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
(c) ACME (d) Square Ans. (d) : Lead = Pitch × Number of start
For single start thread, Lead = Pitch
For double start thread, Lead = 2 × Pitch
For triple start thread, Lead = 3 × Pitch
Ans. (d) : Screw jack has square threads. The depth, 8. Depth of square thread is
root and crest of this thread are equal and pitch is half. (a) 0.5 × P (b) 0.6 × P
• It is used for power transmission. (c) 0.6412 × P (d) 0.6134 × P
• It is used on spindle voice and screw jack. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
3. Which of the following are true for buttress Ans. (a) : Square thread–Due to higher efficiency, this
threads? is widely used for transmission of power in either
(a) Combination of square and trapezoidal direction.
threads • Included angle = 90º
(b) Transmit motion in one direction only • Depth of square thread (d) = 0.5 × P
(c) They are used in vices P = Pitch of thread
(d) All of the mentioned 9. Core diameter of internal threads of M 16 × 2
NCL Tech Machinist 27-12-2020 mm is
(a) 13 mm (b) 13.5 mm
Ans. (d) : Buttress thread :- Combination of square (c) 14 mm (d) 15 mm
and trapezoidal threads. HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
• Transmit motion in one direction only Ans. (c) : Core diameter of internal threads of M 16 × 2
• They are used in vices. mm is 14 mm.
4. Upper side is called ___ on meeting of two sides 10. In British system one meter is equal to
of thread. (a) 36" (b) 37.39"
(a) root (b) crest (c) 39.37" (d) 3"
(c) angle (d) flank HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 Ans. (c) : In British system one meter is equal to
39.37".
Ans. (b) : Terminology of threads–
British system is also know as imperial units.
(i) crest–Upper side is called crest on meeting of two
sides of thread. 11. Most of screw thread used in electrical
equipments based in the name
(ii) Major diameter–It is the largest diameter of an (a) B.S.P. (b) B.S.F.
external or internal screw thread. (c) BA (d) Acme
(iii) Minor diameter–It is smallest diameter. HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
Screw and Thread 636 YCT
Ans. (c) : BA (British association) thread used in small 17. Effective diameter of a thread can be measured
screw of electrical equipment. by using
BSP–British standard pipe (used in pipe and pipe (a) Screw thread micrometer
fitting) (b) Three wire method
BSF–British standard fine thread (used in automobile (c) Selection of best wire method
industry) (d) All of the above
• Acme thread is used in lead screw. ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
12. The depth of B.I.S. metric thread is Ans. (d): Effective diameter is the imaginary diameter
(a) 0.6 × P (b) 0.6403 × P in between major and minor diameter. It also know as
(c) 0.5 × P (d) 0.6134 × P pitch diameter.
HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018 Effective diameter of a thread can be measured by using
Ans. (d) : The depth of B.I.S. metric thread is 0.6134 × screw thread micrometer, three wire method and
Pitch or 0.6134 × P. selection of best wire method.
The angle of B.I.S. metric thread is 60o. 18. The type of preferred thread when pressure
13. Included angle between flanks of Acme thread acts on one flank of the thread is
is: (a) Square thread (b) Acme thread
(a) 60 degree (b) 90 degree (c) Worm thread (d) Buttress thread
(c) 45 degree (d) 29 degree ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
NCL Fitter 27-12-2020 Ans. (d) : In buttress thread, one flank is perpendicular
Ans. (d) : Included angle between flanks of acme thread to the axis of thread.
is 29 degree. • The buttress thread form is designed to handle axial
• Acme threads are used for feed and power thrust applied principally in one direction.
transmission. For example–half nuts have to be applied • The threads are used in power press, carpentry vice.
while cutting in lathe machine.
• Worm thread are used to transfer force and motion
• Acme thread can also used for bear heavy loads like between two perpendicular shaft (90º) from each other.
mechanical jacks etc.
•Acme thread used for lead screw, screw jack.
14. In external thread cutting, the diameter of the
blank shall be generally less by ......... of the • Square thread are primarily used in application where
pitch of the thread. high power transmission efficiency and high load
(a) 1/8 (b) 1/10 capacity.
(c) 1/12 (d) 1/16 19. Angle of Acme thread is
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 (a) 29º (b) 55º
Ans. (b) : In internal thread cutting the diameter of the (c) 60º (d) 47.5º
blank shall be generally less than 1/10 of the pitch of ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021
the thread. Ans. (a) :
15. Improper crest flat, root radius and profile
error during thread forming operations can be
corrected by:
(a) Filing
(b) Further turning operations
(c) Chaser
• Angle of Acme Thread is 29o.
(d) Emerying
• They can be used in heavy load application, including
heavy-duty manufacturing equipment and power
Ans. (c) : Improper crest flat, root radius and profile transmission system.
error during thread forming operation can be corrected
by chaser. 20. Which among following types of threads has
lead and pitch as equal?
16. For mass production of threads on bolts,
(a) Multi start thread (b) Single start thread
process followed is
(a) Thread chasing (b) Collapsible taps (c) Two start thread (d) Three start thread
(c) Thread milling (d) Thread rolling ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 Ans. (b) : For,
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 • A single start thread Lead = Pitch
Ans. (d) : For mass production of threads on bolts, • Double start thread Lead = 2 × Pitch
process followed is thread rolling : Thread rolling is a • Triple start thread Lead = 3 × Pitch
metal forming process that form thread into the mirror
image of a roller die. 21. Angle of acme thread is _______.
• Thread milling is metal working operation used to (a) 55º (b) 60º
create internal and external threads of different size (c) 30º (d) 29º
through the circular movement of a rotating tool. ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018
Ans. (d): Ans. (c) :

Thread Included angle • The depth of B.A. screw thread is the 0.6 P.
British standard whitworth 55º British association thread (B.A. thread)–
thread (BSW) • This thread is in the number of 0 to 23.
British association thread (BA) 47.5º • It is used on screws up to 6 mm.
Acme thread 29º • Mainly tap and die are used at the time of making of
Square thread 90º or 0o this thread.
American national thread 60º • It is used for fine work below 1/4 inch diameter.
Buttress thread 45º 27. Which of the following thread forms is used in
a threaded assembly where the sliding force
22. What is the full form for a thread type of acts in one direction only?
BSW?
(a) Square thread (b) 'V' thread
(a) Bharat Standard Withworth
(c) Saw-tooth thread (d) Knuckle thread
(b) Bharat Standard Worm
(c) British Standard Withworth
(d) British Standard Worm Ans. (c) : Saw-tooth thread forms is used in a threaded
assembly where the sliding force act in one direction
only.
Ans. (c) : Full form of B.S.W. is British Standard
Whitworth thread. 28. The pitch diameter of the external screw
thread is checked by-
• Its included angle is 55º
(a) screw pitch gauge
• It is used in automobiles & adjustment screws. (b) thread ring gauge
23. A screw thread is designated as 1" B.S.P. (c) Screw thread micrometer
thread. In 1" B.S.P. thread, what 1" indicates? (d) vernier caliper
(a) Major dia of the thread
(b) Minor dia of the thread
Ans. (c) : The pitch diameter of the external screw
(c) Pitch dia of the thread
thread is checked by Screw thread micrometer.
(d) Hole dia of the pipe
• There are various measuring instruments used for
checking the thread–
Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022
Gauge Use/Purpose
Ans. (d) : A screw thread is designated as 1" B.S.P.
thread. In 1" B.S.P. thread, 1" indicates hole dia of the 1. Screw thread plug To check the internal
pipe. gauge thread.
24. Threads used in valve spindles is 2. Screw thread ring To check the external
(a) ACME Thread (b) Buttress Thread gauge thread for its accuracy.
(c) Work Thread (d) Knuckle Thread 3. Screw thread To check external thread
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 caliper gauge
Ans. (d) : Thread used in valve spindle is knuckle 29. Which type of threads are suitable for small
thread. precision components and measuring gauges?
Knuckle thread–The shape of the knuckle thread is not (a) British Association threads
trapezoid, but it has a rounded shape, it has limited (b) Whitworth screw threads
applications. It is used for valve spindles, railway (c) Acme threads
carriage coupling, hose connection, etc. (d) Square threads
25. The pitch diameter of a screw thread is the- RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
(a) nominal diameter of the rod Ans. (a) : British Association (BA) threads are suitable
(b) imaginary diameter in between the major and for small precision components and measuring gauges.
minor diameter of the thread British association thread–
(c) minimum diameter of the thread • This thread is in the number of 0 to 23.
(d) maximum diameter of the thread • It is used on screw up to 6 mm.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 • Mainly tap and die are used at the time of making of
Ans. (b) : The pitch diameter of a screw thread is the this thread.
imaginary diameter in between the major and minor • It is used for fine work below 1/4 inch diameter.
diameter of the thread.
30. The angle of V shaped thread is-
• Pitch diameter is also called an effective diameter.
1
26. The depth of B.A. screw thread is the- (a) 29° (b) 47 °
(a) 0.64 P (b) 0.7035 P 2
(c) 0.6 P (d) 0.61 P (c) 50° (d) 60°
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
Ans. (d) : V-thread– Ans. (b) : The included angle of acme threads is 29o.
• The shape of these threads is similar to the English Acme thread is used in lathe lead screws.
letter 'V'.
• The included angle of the V thread is 60o and both
the upper crest and the base are sharp.
• 'V' thread is commonly used in fasteners and
locking devices.
31. The largest diameter of a thread is known as
_______
(a) minor diameter (b) nominal diameter
(c) major diameter (d) pitch diameter 36.
Which type of thread is mostly used for power
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 transmission and are easy to cut ________
Ans. (c) : The largest diameter of a thread is known as (a) modified square (b) square
major diameter.
(c) acme (d) buttress
Major diameter– It is an imaginary largest diameter of
the threads which would touch the crests of external RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
thread. Ans. (b) :
• It is also known as crest diameter. • A square thread is adapted for the transmission of
32. U.N.C means ________ power in either direction.
(a) Unified National Coarse • This thread results in maximum efficiency and
(b) United Nation Course minimum radial or bursting pressure on the nut.
(c) Union Nation Committee
• The square threads are employed in screw jacks,
presses and clamping device.
Ans. (a) : U.N.C. means – Unified Coarse Thread. 37. Multi-point threads are used _______
(a) to reduce the feed of nut or bolt on moving
33. The thread cutting in hole is called___ threads.
(a) external (b) internal fast
(c) vertical (d) horizontal (b) to increase the feed of nut or bolt on moving
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 slow
Ans. (b) : (c) when normal threads do not work properly
• The thread cutting in hole is called internal threads. (d) when putting less load on flank of thread
• Internal thread can be produced by tap. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
• Tap has teeth on its periphery to cut thread in a
Ans. (b) :
predrilled hole. • Multi point threads are used to increase the feed of
• A die cuts an external thread on cylindrical material
nut or bolt on moving slow.
such as a rod.
• Multi start thread consist of two or more interwined
34. Distance covered by multi-point tool in one threads running parallel to owe another.
rotation is-
(a) pitch (b) thread angle 38. Pitch of thread is _________
(c) lead (d) diameter (a) one revolution of nut in two point thread
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 (b) equal to thread per inch
Ans. (c): Distance covered by multi-point tool in one (c) equal to helix angle
rotation is called lead. (d) the distance between centre of a thread of
adjacent thread centre in parallel to axis line
Ans. (d) : Pitch– Pitch of a thread is the distance
measured parallel to the axis from a point on a thread to
the corresponding points on adjacent thread forms in the
same axial plane and on the same side of the axis.
Where, L = Lead, P = Pitch 39. BSF screw threads are generally used for-
35. Included angle of acme threads is _______ (a) Ordinary bolt and nut
o o
(a) 30 (b) 29 (b) Electrical goods
1 (c) Lathe lead screw
(c) 47 o (d) 60o
2 (d) Vice spindle
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (b) : Ans. (a) :

• BSF screw threads are generally used for electrical • A screw thread is formed on a cylindrical surface by
goods. cutting helical grooves.
• British standard fine (BSF) is a screw thread form, • When helical grooves are cut on the outer surface or
as a fine pitch alternative to British standard inner surface of a cylindrical object, have an angle
whitworth (BSW) thread. and also have a uniform increase in each round of
• It is also used in automobile and aeroplane for good the object, then these grooves are called screw
fastening. threads.
40. Which of the following thread forms is mostly 44. The pitch diameter of the external screw
found on threaded shaft of lifting equipment thread is checked by-
for lifting loads?
(a) Screw pitch gauge
(a) V-threads (b) Square threads
(b) Thread ring gauge
(c) Saw tooth threads (d) Knuckle threads
(d) Vernier caliper
Ans. (b) :
• A square thread is adapted for the transmission of
power in either direction. Ans. (c) : The pitch diameter of the external screw
• This thread results in maximum efficiency and thread is checked by screw thread micrometer.
minimum radial or bursting pressure on the nut. • Screw thread micrometer is a high precision
• The square threads are employed in screw jacks, measuring device employed from screw thread
lead screw, presses and clamping device. control.
41. Which of the following thread groups is used • This type of micrometer allows knowing the
for transmitting motion? average diameter of the thread and the core
(a) Square, Modified square, Acme, Buttress diameter of the screw.
threads 45. The figure shown below shows the pattern of-
(b) Whitworth, Acme, Square, Buttress threads
(c) Unified, Acme, Square threads
(d) ISO metric, Modified Square, Acme threads
Ans. (a) :
• Square, modified square, acme and buttress threads
are used for transmitting motion.
• In square thread the flanks are perpendicular to the (a) Right hand thread (b) Left hand thread
axis of the thread, this is used for transmitting (c) Taper thread (d) None of the above
motion or power i.e. fly presses, screw jack, vice RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
handles, cross-slide and compound slide etc. Ans. (b) : Right hand thread– A right handed thread is
42. Screw threads are produced without metal that which gets tightened into the nut when it rotates in
removal by a process called as- the clockwise direction.
(a) Threads cutting (b) Threads chasing
(c) Threads rolling (d) Tapping
Ans. (c) :
• Screw threads are produced without metal removal
by a process called as threads rolling.
• Threads rolling is a metal forging process that forms
threads into the mirror image of a roller die. This Left hand thread– A left hand thread is that which
process is different from metal cutting, grinding and rotates in the anticlockwise direction while tightening.
chasing because it does not remove any metal from
the workpiece.
43. A screw thread is formed on a cylindrical
surface by cutting-
(a) Helical grooves (b) V-grooves
(c) Square grooves (d) Half round grooves
46. The figure shown below the- Ans. (a) :
• BSW thread is shown above the figure.

(a) BSF (b) Knuckle thread
BSW thread–
(c) Worm thread (d) BSP
• BSW thread known as British standard whitworth.
• BSW thread has angle of 55o and Depth = 0.64 ×
Ans. (c) : pitch.
• The figure shown above is worm thread. Radius = 0.1375 × Pitch
• An American screw thread having a section that is a 49. Which type of threads is suitable for small
mean between the V threads and square threads. precision components and measuring gauges?
• Acme thread has include angle of 29o. (a) British association threads
47. The figure shown below shows the- (b) Whitworth screw threads
(c) Acme threads
(d) Square threads
Ans. (a) : British association thread is suitable for small
precision components and measuring gauges.
• Thread range from 0 to 23 numbers. It is uses on
screws 0.9 to 6 mm.
• Following formula is used to find out the pitch of
(a) BSW thread (b) BA thread thread–
(c) Acme thread (d) Buttress thread • The pitch of BA number (2) = (0.9)2 = 0.81 mm
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 • The pitch of BA number (4) = (0.9)4 = 0.66 mm
Ans. (d) : 50. Which type of threads is suitable for lead
• The figure shown above is buttress thread. screws of machine tools?
• The shape of these threads is like a triangle, in (a) British association threads
which one side angle is 90o and the other side angle (b) Whitworth screw threads
is 45o. (c) Acme threads
• Buttress thread is used on the spindle of large vices, (d) Square threads
so that the job can be held firmly in the vice. RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010
Ans. (c) : Acme threads is suitable for lead screws of
machine tool.
• The lead screw is used for thread cutting. It is
provided with acme thread i.e. trapezoidal threads.
• Acme thread has an included angle of 29o they are
used in lathe lead screws.
51. Which one of the following is the reason for
rough and broken threads?
(a) Thread cutting tool is blunt
• Angle = 90o and 45o, Depth = 0.75 × pitch (b) The size of hole or diameter of blank for bolt
48. The figure shown below is a type of- is not correct
(c) The flutes of cutting tool are filled with chips
Ans. (d) : Following is the reason for rough and broken
threads
(A) Thread cutting tool is blunt
(B) The size of hole or diameter of the blank for bolt
(a) BSW thread (b) Acme thread is not correct.
(c) BA thread (d) BSF thread (C) The flutes of cutting tool are filled with chips.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 (D) Insufficient side clearance.
52. The distance between a point on a screw thread 55. Which type of thread is shown in the following
and the corresponding point on the next thread figure?
measured parallel to the axis is called as-
(a) Axis of thread (b) Depth of thread
(c) Pitch of thread (d) Lead of thread
Ans. (c) : Pitch of thread–It is the distance from a
point on one thread to a corresponding point on the
adjacent thread measured parallel to the axis.
Lead– Lead is the distance a threaded component (a) Internal right handed
moves along the matching component during one (b) Internal left handed
complete revolution. (c) External right handed
• For a single start thread, the lead is equal to the pitch. (d) External left handed
53. Which type of thread is shown in the following RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
figure?
Ans. (c) : External right handed thread is shown in the
above figure.
Right hand thread– A right handed thread is that
which gets tightened into the nut when it rotates in the
clockwise direction.
Left hand thread– A left handed thread is that which
(a) Internal right handed rotates in the anticlockwise direction while tightening.
(b) Internal left handed 56. Which type of thread is shown in the following
(c) External right handed figure?
(d) External left handed
Ans. (c) :
• External right handed type of thread is shown in the
figure.
• A right hand thread is one that advances in to a nut
when turned clockwise.
• A left handed thread is one that advances in to a nut (a) Internal right handed
when turned anticlockwise.
(b) Internal left handed
54. Identify acme thread from the following
(c) External right handed
figures.
(d) External left handed
Ans. (d) : External left handed thread is shown in the
above figure.
Right hand thread– A right handed thread is that
which gets tightened into the nut when it rotates in the
clockwise direction.
Ans. (d): Acme thread–
Left hand thread– A left handed thread is that which
• Acme thread is identical thread with respect to
rotates in the anticlockwise direction while tightening.
trapezoidal thread in all respect but thread angle is
o o 57. Identify the crest of screw thread in the
29 instead of 30 .
• It's advantage and disadvantage are same as following figure.
trapezoidal threads.
• Acme thread transfers power in both direction while
buttress in one direction only.
H = 0.686 × P
Root = 0.310 × P RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
Ans. (c) : 61. Acme thread is a modified version of which

thread?
(a) Square (b) Metric
(c) BA (d) Trapezoidal
Ans. (a) : Acme thread is a modified version of square
thread.
• An acme thread is a modified form of square thread.
It may be cut by means of dies and hence it is more
easily manufactured than square thread.
• It is used where a split nut is required and where
58. Identify the type of thread shown in the figure. provision is made to take up wear as in the lead
screw of a lathe.
62. Half nut is engaged easily in which type of
thread?
(a) BA (b) Acme
(c) Square (d) Metric
(a) Acme thread (b) Knuckle thread Ans. (b) : A half nut is engaged easily in the acme
(c) Buttress thread (d) Square thread thread.
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 Acme thread is a modified version of square thread.
Ans. (b) : Knuckle thread– • An acme thread is a modified form of square thread.
• The shape of these threads is like a half diameter. It It may be cut by means of dies and hence it is more
is used where heavy weight is required to be pulled. easily manufactured than square thread.
• It is made up by thread role because thread role is • It is used where a split nut is required and where
stronger than thread tool. provision is made to take up wear as in the lead
screw of a lathe.
59. Identify the type of thread shown in the figure.
63. Which type of thread is used in ratchet power
press and carpentry vice?
(a) Square (b) Acme
(c) BSF (d) Buttress
(a) Acme thread (b) Knuckle thread Ans. (d) :
(c) Buttress thread (d) Square thread • Buttress type of thread is used in ratchet power
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 press and carpentry vice.
Ans. (d) : • In the buttress thread one flank is perpendicular to
the axis of the thread and another flank is at 45o.
• Square thread is shown in the figure.
64. Identify this commonly used screw thread.
• Square thread– In this type of thread, the flank is
perpendicular to the axis of the thread.
• In this type of thread the depth, width, crest and root
are the same.
• These threads are very strong.
• This thread is used in motion and power
transmission like vice handle, cross slide, screw
jack.
60. A thread cut on a stud is– (a) Square (b) Acme
(a) External thread
(c) Metric (d) Knuckle
(b) Internal thread
(c) External and internal thread
Ans. (c) : Metric thread–
• The international standards organization accepted
the unified thread shape as the ISO thread size and
Ans. (a) : created two different series based on the inch
• A thread cut on a stud is external thread. system and the mm system.
• A threaded rod, also known as a stud is a relatively • The Indian standard institute has adopted mm range
long rod that is threaded on both ends, the thread of threads the angle of these thread is 60o.
may extend along the complete length of the rod. • They are used in general bonding purpose as the
• They are designed to be used in tension. crest and root are almost flat.
65. Flank is ______ to the thread axis in square 69. Which one of the following statement in respect
threads. of thread chasing dial is NOT correct?
(a) Perpendicular (b) Slanting (a) Thread chasing dial is used to catch the thread
(c) Horizontal (d) Parallel when threading on lathe
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 (b) Worm gear of chasing dial engages with the
Ans. (a) : Flank is perpendicular to the thread axis in lead screw while thread chasing
square threads. (c) Thread chasing dial is an additional part of
Square thread– In this type of thread, the flank is the lathe carriage
perpendicular to the axis of the thread. (d) Thread chasing dial is an additional when the
• In this type of thread the depth, width, crest and root half nut lever is engaged
are the same. RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
• These threads are very strong. Ans. (a) :
• This thread is used in motion and power • Thread chasing dial is not used to catch the thread
transmission like vice handle, cross slide and screw when threading on lathe.
jack. • The chasing dial indicates when the split nut should
66. What is the shape of acme threads? be engaged with the lead screw for the cutting tool
(a) V-shaped (b) Square to follow the previously cut grooves.
(c) Semicircular (d) Trapezoidal • Most lathe has a thread chasing dial built into like
RRB ALP Patna 2014 centre lathe or attached to the carriage for this
Ans. (d) : Trapezoidal is the shape of acme thread. purpose.
Acme thread– 70. To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of
• An acme thread is a modified form of square thread. square threads, the width of the internal square
It may be cut by means of dies and hence it is more threading tool should be
easily manufactured than square thread. (a) Slightly more than the half pitch
• It is used where a split nut is required and where (b) Slightly less than the half pitch
provision is made to take up wear as in the lead (c) Equal to the half pitch
screw of a lathe. (d) Equal to the pitch
67. Which type of thread is considered strong and RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
frequently used for power transmission? Ans. (a): To enable a nut to fit properly on a bolt of
(a) BSW (b) BSF square threads, the width of the internal square
(c) Acme (d) Buttress threading tool should be slightly more than the half
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 pitch.
Ans. (c) : Acme type of thread is considered strong and 71. What is the most suitable size of rod for M6
frequently used for power transmission. threading?
Acme thread– (a) ∅ 6 mm (b) ∅ 5.9 mm
• An acme thread is a modified form of square thread. (c) ∅ 5.6 mm (d) ∅ 5.2 mm
It may be cut by means of dies and hence it is more
easily manufactured than square thread.
• It is used where a split nut is required and where Ans. (b) : The most suitable size of rod for M6
provision is made to take up wear as in the lead threading is 5.974 mm.
screw of a lathe. Some other size of rod is following as–
68. Root diameter of a thread is another name for M7 – 6.974 mm
(a) Main diameter (b) Major diameter M8 – 7.974 mm
(c) Minor diameter (d) Base diameter M5 × 8 – 4.976 mm
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 72. Different threads have got different depths.
Ans. (c) : Root diameter of thread is another name for Which one of the following has got the highest
minor diameter. depth?
• The minor diameter also known as core or root (a) Square (b) Acme
diameter. (c) Worm (d) Buttress
• Minor diameter is the smallest diameter of an RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
external or internal screw thread. Ans. (c) : Worm has got the highest depth.
Major diameter– 73. While threading on lathe, the carriage is moved
• The diameter of the screw at the crest is called the by means of.
major diameter. (a) Lead screw (b) Hand wheel
• It is the largest diameter of an external or internal (c) Feed rod (d) Gear train on a rack
screw thread. RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
Ans. (a) : 78. The shape of the thread in the 'Not Go' end of a
• While threading on lathe, the carriage is moved by thread snap gauge is.
means of lead screw. (a) Beveled (b) Truncated
• Lead screw is a long threaded shaft used as a master (c) Taper (d) Sharp
screw. RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
• It is brought in to operation during thread cutting to Ans. (b) : The shape of the thread in the 'Not GO' end
move the carriage to a calculated distance. of a thread snap gauge is truncated, which means length
• Mostly lead screws are acme threaded. of Not GO end is shorter than GO end.
74. The depth of Indian Standard (BIS) thread is. 79. Screw threads are produced without metal
removing by a process called as.
(a) 0.6495 P (b) 0.6000 P
(a) Thread cutting (b) Thread chasing
(c) 0.6403 P (d) 0.6134 P
(c) Thread rolling (d) Tapping
Ans. (d) : The depth of India standard (BIS) thread is
Ans. (c) :
0.6134 P.
• The screw threads are produced without metal
• V thread are also called a unified thread, they are removing by a process called as thread rolling.
recommended by the international organization for
• Thread rolling is a mechanical process where
standards, which are adopted by B.I.S.
threads are cold formed when the part is squeezed
75. Threads are cut on a lathe with a single point between two thread dies on a thread rolling
tool by. machine. Thread rolling provides for a stronger
(a) Setting the correct speed thread and no loss of material.
(b) Setting on cut for the full depth of the thread. 80. Which one of the following threads forms on
(c) Making a series of cuts in the same cut. bolts and nuts is meant for general fastening
(d) Moving the carriage by means of rack. purposes ?
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (a) 'V' threads (b) Square threads
Ans. (c) : Threads are cut on a lathe with a single point (c) Knuckle threads (d) Acme threads
tool by making a series of cuts the same cut. RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
76. In a threaded assembly the contact between the Ans. (a) :
male and female threads takes place on the • 'V' threads forms on bolts and nuts is meant for
(a) Pitches (b) Flanks general fastening purposes.
(c) Crests (d) Roots Square thread–
RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004 • In this thread, the flanks are perpendicular to the
Ans. (b) : In a threaded assembly the contact between axis of the thread.
the male and female threads takes place on the flanks. • This is used for transmitting motion or power.
• It is used in fly presses, screw jacks, vice handle
cross-slide and compound slides.
81. Which one of the following screw thread
elements is NOT checked with the thread ring
gauge?
(a) Pitch diameter (b) Pitch
(c) Helix angle (d) Profile
Ans. (a) : Pitch diameter is not checked with the thread
Where, Mn = Minor diameter ring gauge.
MJ = Major diameter Pitch diameter– It is the diameter of an imaginary
F = Flank cylinder that passes through the thread such that the
width of the space is equal to the width of the thread.
α = Flank angle
Pitch– It is the horizontal distance from a point on one
R = Root. thread to the corresponding point on the adjacent thread
77. The shape of the frame of thread snap gauge is measured parallel to the axis.
in the form of 82. The distance through which a screw thread
(a) Round (b) Square advances axially in one turn is called:
(c) 'Y' type (d) "C" type (a) Pitch of thread (b) Lead of thread
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 (c) Depth of thread (d) Diameter of thread
Ans. (d) : The shape of the frame of thread snap gauge RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
is in the form of "C' type. Ans. (b) : Lead of thread–The distance through which
• The adjustable snap gauge also called 'C' type of a screw thread advances axially in one turn is called
snap gauge. lead of thread.
• For a single start thread the lead is equal to the Ans. (c) : Counter boring– Counter boring is an
pitch. operation of enlarging a hole to a given depth, to house
heads of socket heads or cap screws with the help of a
counter bore tool.
87. Which one of the following is used to rectify
damaged or rusted threads?
(a) Die nut (b) Circular split die
(c) Two-piece die (d) Die plate
83. The pitch of 3-start thread is the lead divided MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
by- RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010
(a) 1 (b) 2 Ans. (a) : Die nut is used to rectify damaged or rusted
(c) 3 (d) 4 threads.
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 • It looks like the die in the shape of a nut therefore is it
called die nut.
Ans. (c) : The pitch of 3-start thread is the lead divided
by 3. • Die nuts are not to be used for cutting new threads.
A double start thread will have a lead distance double 88. Which type of thread is used in precision
that of a single start thread of the same pitch. A 3-start instrument?
thread will have a lead distance 3 times longer than a (a) BSW thread (b) BA thread
single start thread of the same pitch, and so on. (c) Acme thread (d) Square thread
84. In a single start thread. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009
(a) Lead and pitch are equal Ans. (b) : BA thread is used in precision instrument.
(b) Lead is double the pitch • It is used in optics and moving coil meters.
(c) Pitch is double the lead • BA thread (British association thread) has thread
(d) Lead is half the pitch 1o
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 angle 47
2
Ans. (a) : In a single start thread, lead and pitch are
equal.
• When a single helix is making a screw, it is called a
single start thread.
• In the case of two start threads one thread is wound
within the other exactly in the middle. This enables
the lead of the helix increased without increasing
the pitch.
Lead = Pitch × Number of starts. 89. Three square scraper is used for scraping ….
85. The root of ISO metric thread is. (a) large diameter holes
(a) Flat (b) Round (b) bearing surfaces
(c) Sharp corner (d) None of the above (c) small diameter holes
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 (d) large flat surfaces
Ans. (b) : The root of ISO metric thread is round. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : Three square scraper is used for scraping
small diameter holes.
• Three square scraper is a triangular section length of
steel, usually in a wooden handle.
• The edges of the triangle are used to smooth edges
and remove burrs of metal.
• It can be used to shave very small amounts of wax
from inside the shank without leaving marks or
scratches.
Where, Vee depth (DV) = 0.866 P 90. Which one of the following thread is used for
Thread depth (Dt) = 0.614 P transmitting motion?
Thread angle = 60o (a) Round thread (b) Trapezoidal thread
86. The process of enlarging the end of an existing (c) Isometric thread (d) B.S.W. thread
hole to accommodate the head of socket screw RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
is called Ans. (b) : Trapezoidal thread is used for transmitting
(a) Spot-facing (b) Boring motion.
(c) Counter-boring (d) Counter-sinking • It forms are screw thread profiles with trapezoidal
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 outlines.

• Acme thread is a form of trapezoidal thread. Ans. (c) : The largest diameter of a screw thread is
• Trapezoidal thread has an thread angle of 30o known as major diameter.
• It is used in lead screw (Power screws). • It is also called nominal diameter.
91. The angle of B.A thread is _____ Mean diameter (Dm)–
(a) 45 degree (b) 29 degree D + Dc
Dm = = D − 0.5P
1 2
(c) 47 degree (d) 60 degree
2 Where, Dc = Core diameter
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 D = Nominal diameter
1 o P = Pitch.
Ans. (c) : Angle of B.A. thread is 47 . 96. The surface connecting crest and root of a
2
thread is termed......
• B.A. thread is used in precision instrument.
(a) Flank (b) Pitch
92. The top surface joining the two sides of the (c) Depth of thread (d) Thread angle
thread is known as _______ RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
(a) Root (b) Depth
Ans. (a) : The surface connecting crest and root of a
(c) Flank (d) None of these
thread is known as flank.
• The included angle between the flanks of adjacent
Ans. (d) : The top surface joining the two sides of the threads is known as thread angle.
thread is known as crest.
93. Most of the screw threads used in electrical 97. Which one of the following thread forms is
equipment are based in the name of ______ mostly for found on threaded shaft of lifting
(a) B. S. P (b) B. S. F equipment for carrying loads?
(c) B.A (d) Acme (a) V thread (b) Square thread
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 (c) Saw tooth thread (d) Knuckle thread
Ans. (c) : B.A. thread (British Association thread) is RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
used in electrical equipment like as a small screws of Ans. (b) : Square thread is found on threaded shaft of
electrical appliances, watch screws, screws of scientific lifting equipment for carrying loads.
apparatus. • The saw tooth thread has a thread angle of 3o on one
side and 33o on the other side.
1o
• It has thread angle 47 . • It is used in the construction of collet chucks for
2 lathe and milling machines.
94. A screw thread is designated as 1" B.S.P.
thread. What does 1" indicate?
(a) Major diameter of threads
(b) Minor diameter of threads
(c) Pitch diameter of threads
(d) Hole diameter of threads
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 98. The width of the tool used to cut 10 mm pitch
Ans. (d) : A screw thread is designated as 1" B.S.P. square thread is -
thread. Where 1" indicates hole diameter of the threads. (a) 10 mm (b) 7.5 mm
• BSW (British Standard Whitworth) thread is used (c) 5 mm (d) 2.5 mm
for general purpose fastening thread. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
• It has thread angle 55o. Ans. (c) : Pitch (P) = 10 mm
95. The largest diameter of a screw thread is P
knows as ...... Width of tool =
(a) minor diameter (b) normal diameter 2
(c) major diameter (d) pitch diameter 10
= = 5 mm.
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 2
99. Which one of the following diameters of the 103. Why square thread is used in screw jack?
workpiece should be turned before cutting (a) Low friction (b) Very strong
external threads? (c) Easy engagement (d) Easy to manufacture
(a) Major diameter (b) Core diameter RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
(c) Pitch diameter (d) Head diameter Ans. (a) : Square thread has low friction and high
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 efficiency, so it is used in screw jack.
Ans. (a) : Major diameter of the workpiece should be • No radial pressure or side thrust on the nut so life of
turned before cutting external threads. nut is more.
• It is a largest diameter of screw thread. It is also • Difficult to manufacture.
called nominal diameter. • Square thread has less thickness at the core diameter
Major diameter = Minor diameter + 2 × depth of thread thus reduces load carrying capacity.
100. In the major diameter D is 40 mm and minor 104. Which type of thread is used in railway
diameter d is 20 mm, then the depth of the coupling?
thread t is- (a) Acme thread (b) Square thread
(a) 10 mm (b) 15 mm (c) Knuckle thread (d) Buttress thread
(c) 5 mm (d) 12 mm RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Ans. (c) : Knuckle thread is used in railway coupling.
Ans. (a) : Major diameter (D) = 40 mm
• Knuckle thread has shape of half diameter, which is
Minor diameter (d) = 20 mm used on pulling of heavy loads.
D−d Examples–
Depth of thread (t) =
2 (i) Coupling of railway wagons.
40 − 20 (ii) Connecting to tractor and trolley.
=
2 • Radius form tool is used to make of knuckle thread.
= 10 mm
101. What is the name of the machine screw?
105. What is the method of thread production?
(a) Countersink head screw

(b) Slotted raised head screw
(c) Cross recessed head screw
(d) Slotted countersink head screw
Ans. (d) : The name of the machine screw in the figure
is slotted countersink head screw.
(a) Thread rolling (b) Thread milling
102. What is the formula for finding depth of square (c) Thread chasing (d) Thread grinding
thread?
1 0.5 Ans. (c) : Above figure shows the method of thread
(a) Depth = (b) Depth =
TPI TPI chasing.
TPI Thread chasing dial–
(c) Depth = TPI (d) Depth =
0.5 • To cut a thread on a lathe, the lathe spindle and lead
RRB ALP Jammu-Kashmir 06.06.2010 screw must be in the same relative position for each
successive cut.
Ans. (b) :
• Most lathe has a thread chasing dial built in the like
Pitch ( P ) centre lathe or attached to the carriage for this
Depth of square thread = = 0.5 P
2 purpose.
1 106. Which diameter is used for specifying a
Pitch = thread?
TPI
(a) Root diameter (b) Pitch diameter
0.5
Depth = (c) Major diameter (d) Minor diameter
TPI RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Where, TPI = No. of thread per inch. Ans. (c): Major diameter or nominal diameter is used
P = Pitch. for specifying a thread.
Thread diameter– Ans. (d) : The part marked 'X' is figure is circular
Major diameter– The major diameter of a thread is the threading tool.
diameter of the imaginary co-axial cylinder that just 111. The round shaped thread mainly used for hose
touches the crest of an external thread or the root of an connections is.......
internal thread. (a) Knuckle thread (b) Worm thread
Minor thread– The minor diameter is the diameter of (c) Buttress thread (d) Acme thread
an imaginary cylinder that just touches the roots of an
external thread and the crest of an internal thread. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (a) : A hose is a flexible hollow tube designed to
carry fluids from one location to another. The round
shaped thread mainly used for hose connection is
knuckle thread. Knuckle threads or round threads are an
unusual highly rounded thread form. These is large
space between rounded crests and roots. It provides a
leak-free connection.
112. If a 'V' thread specification angle is 60º and
thread depth is 0.6134P. Name the type of
thread.
107. What should be the blank size of round bar for
cutting M16 threads with 2 mm pitch with a (a) BSW thread (b) BIS thread
die? (c) BSP thread (d) BSF thread
(a) 15.5 mm (b) 15.8 mm RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
(c) 15.9 mm (d) 16.0 mm Ans. (b) : If a 'V' thread specification angle is 60o and
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 thread depth is 0.6134 P. This type of thread is BIS
Ans. (b) : The blank size of round bar for cutting M16 thread (Indian Standard Thread)
2 mm pitch with a die should be 15.8 mm. Type of 'V' thread are–
108. Which one of the following thread forms is (i) British standard whitworth thread.
provided in the threaded parts where the (ii) British Association thread
pressure acts on one flank of the threads (iii) British standard fine thread
during transmission? (iv) Metric thread
(a) 'V' thread (b) Square thread (v) American National System (ANS thread)
(c) Knuckle thread (d) Buttress thread (vi) Indian Standard Thread
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 Angle = 60o, Depth = 0.6134 P, P = Pitch.
Ans. (d) : Buttress thread is provided in the threaded 113. When the threading tool reaches the end of the
parts where the pressure acts on one flank of the threads thread, the tool is......
during transmission. (a) Withdrawn after the work is stopped
• Buttress thread is used where one side pressure is (b) Left in the thread groove, and the rotation is
required. reversed
109. The part which is used in making external (c) Withdrawn while the work is revolving
thread but it is not forming thread is ...... (d) Simultaneously withdraw the tool and reverse
(a) Solid die or nut (b) Split button dies the spindle
(c) Die stock (d) Adjustable dies RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 Ans. (d): When the threading tool reaches the end of
Ans. (c): The part which is used in marking external the thread, the tool is simultaneously withdrawn and
thread but it is not forming thread is die stock. spindle is reversed.
• Die stocks are designed to hold round and hexagon 114. The formula for cutting metric thread on
dies. British lathe is.....
110. Name the part marked 'X' in figure. DR Lead to be cut in mm × TPL on LS × 5
(a) =
DN 127
DR 127
(b) =
DN Lead to be cut in mm × TPL on LS × 5
DR 127
(c) =
(a) Holder DN TPL to be cut × Lead of LS × 5
(b) Pivot
DR TPL to be cut × Lead of LS × 5
(c) Securing bolt (d) =
(d) Circular threading tool DN 127
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
Ans. (a) : ISO threads, also known as metric thread. 118. Name of thread shown in figure
Angle of these thread is 60o. They are made for general
bonding purposes, as the chest and root are almost flat.
Formula for cutting metric thread on British lathe is
DR Lead to be cut in mm × TPL on LS × 5
=
DN 127
115. The thread which is NOT the part of
(a) BSW thread (b) BSF thread
trapezoidal thread is .......
(c) BSP thread (d) BA thread
(a) Worm thread (b) Acme thread
(c) Buttress thread (d) Square thread
Ans. (d) : The above shown fig. is BA (British
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 Association) thread. BA screw threads are a set of small
Ans. (d) : Trapezoidal thread– Trapezoidal thread screw threads the longest being OBA at 6 mm diameter.
forms are screw thread profile with trapezoidal outlines. Tap and die are mostly used for making this thread.
They are the most common forms used for lead screw. This type of thread is used in watch, electrical goods,
It has an included angle of 30o. screw etc.
Different trapezoidal thread– 119. Name of the operation shown in figure.
(i) Worm thread– a form of trapezoidal thread.
(ii) Acme thread– Similar to trapezoidal thread except
that thread angle is 29o instead of 30o. They are often
used for lead screws.
(iii) Buttress thread– It combines the advantage of (a) Grooving (b) Chasing
square and trapezoidal threads. It is used where a heavy (c) Knurling (d) Forming
axial force acts along the screw axis in one direction RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007
only. Ans. (b) : The above shown operation is chasing.
116. The thread which is modified from buttress Thread chasing is the process of cutting thread on a
thread is ....... lathe with a chasing tool that comprise several single
(a) Vee thread (b) Worm thread point tools banked together in a single tool called
chaser. Chasing is used for the production of threads
(c) Saw-tooth thread (d) Square thread that are two large in diameter for a dia head.
120. In "M" series threads M is followed by
Ans. (c) : Saw tooth thread is modified from buttress number, that stands for .......
thread. The saw tooth thread has a thread angle of 3o on (a) Minor diameter (b) Major diameter
one side and 33o on the other side. The unsymmetrical (c) Pitch diameter (d) Core diameter
thread form makes unsymmetrical loading possible. RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003
Used in the construction of collet chucks for lathe and Ans. (b):The 'M' designation for metric screws indicate the
milling machines. nominal outer diameter of the screw thread, in millimeters.
This is also referred to as the "Major" diameter.
e.g.
ISO metric saw tooth thread

117. Which type of thread is NOT suitable for
power transmission? 121. Name the part of a thread marked "X" in
(a) Vee thread (b) Square thread figure
(c) Knuckle thread (d) Trapezoidal thread
RRB ALP Patna 2014
Ans. (c) : Knuckle thread is not suitable for power
transmission. It is modification of square thread. The
sharp corners of the square thread are rounded to make
the crest and roots semicircular.
Knuckle threads are provided on the coupler of the
railway carriage, glass bottles, electric bulbs etc. (a) Root (b) Crest
V-thread, square thread, trapezoidal thread are suitable (c) Flank (d) Pitch
for power transmission. RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
Ans. (c) : In the above shown figure, the marked part is Ans. (c) : Hand chasers are used for rectifying threads
flank of the of screw thread. cut on steel rods which are distorted.
Crest– The top end of thread. 126. Which among the following statements in
Flank– The side surface of the thread which join the respect of chasers is correct?
root and crest. (a) Chaser is a single point cutting tool
Root– The lowest surface of the groove of the thread. (b) Cutting threads by a chaser is slower process
Pitch– The parallel distance between the corresponding than that by a single point tool
point located on two adjacent thread. It is represented (c) Cutting threads by chaser gives better finish
by letter 'P'. (d) The same chaser can be used for cutting any
122. Which one of the following thread form is pitch of thread irrespective of the type chaser
provided on threaded shafts, whose thread used
pitch is expressed in module ? RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
(a) Worm thread (b) Knuckle thread Ans. (c) : Cutting threads by chaser given better finish.
(c) Saw tooth thread (d) Buttress thread Chaser thread– A multiple point tool used typically as
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 one of a set of four in a die head for cutting a screw
Ans. (a) : The thread pitch of worm thread is expressed thread.
in module. • Cutting threads by chaser is faster process than that by
123. The distance through which a screw thread a single point tool.
advances axially in one turn is called : 127. Taper thread depth is ........
(a) Pitch of thread (b) Lead of thread (a) 0.173 per side (b) 0.273 per side
(c) Depth of thread (d) Diameter of thread (c) 0.373 per side (d) 0.5 per side
Ans. (b) : Lead– The distance through which a screw Ans. (a) : Taper thread depth is 0.173 per side.
thread advances axially in one turn is called lead of
thread. 128. As per ISO standard for carbide inserts, the
letter 'B' represents which shape of inserts?
For single start thread, lead is equal to the pitch. For
multiple start screws the lead is the pitch multiplied by (a) 55º rhombus (b) 80º rhombus
the number of starts. (c) 82º rhombus (d) 85º rhombus
124. One of the measurement techniques during
thread inspection is the three wire method with Ans. (c) : As per ISO standard for carbide inserts, the
an outside micrometer. Which one of the letter 'B' represents 82o rhombus.
following elements of the screw thread is 129. Identify the triple start thread from the given
checked by the above mentioned technique? figure:
(a) Major diameter of an internal thread
(b) Minor diameter of an external thread
(c) Pitch diameter of an internal thread
(d) Pitch diameter of an external thread
Ans. (d):Three wire method with an outside micrometer (a) Figure ′′A” (b) Figure ′′B”
measures pitch diameter of an external thread. (c) Figure ′′C” (d) Figure ′′D”
Pitch diameter (Effective diameter)– The diameter of RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
thread at which the thread thickness is equal to one half
of the pitch. Ans. (c) :
The three wire method– For measuring effective
diameter, three wires are suitably placed between the
thread. The measuring wires are fitted in wire holders
which are supplied in pairs. One holder has provisions
to fix one wire and the other for two wires. Triple start thread– A double start thread will have a
lead distance double that of a single start thread of the
While measuring the screw thread, the holder with the
same pitch and a triple start thread will have a lead
one wire is placed on the spindle of the micrometer and
distance three time longer than a single start thread of
the holder with two wires is fixed on the anvil.
the same pitch.
125. Hand chasers are used for
130. A Tool used to make internal threads is called a
(a) quick production of threads
...........
(b) cutting threads on soft metal directly (a) Drill
(c) rectifying threads cut on steel rods which are
(b) Tap
distorted
(c) Die
(d) rectifying crest and root of threads formed by
single point tool (d) Single point cutting tool
Ans. (b) : (b) The 127 teeth gear is used as driven gear for
• A tool used to make internal threads is called a tap. cutting metric threads on a lathe having lead
screw in TPI
• A tap is a tool used to cut a threaded hole inside a
(c) The 63 teeth gear is used as a driver for
piece of material. There are two types of threads,
cutting British threads on a lathe having
internal female threads and external make threads. metric lead screw
Internal and external threads are combined to fasten
(d) The teeth of the driver and driven are based
pieces of work together.
on the pitch of thread to be cut and the pitch
131. What is used to measure the major diameter of of thread on lead screw
an external thread? RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(a) Bench micrometer (b) Thread micrometer Ans. (a) :
(c) One wire method (d) All of these • The 127 teeth gear is used as driven gear for cutting
RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004 metric threads on a lathe having lead screw in TPI.
Ans. (d) : Some important equipment used to measure • The 63 teeth gear is used as a driver for cutting
the diameter of an external thread– British threads on a lathe having metric lead screw.
• Bench micrometer • The teeth of the driver and driven are based on the
• Thread micrometer pitch of thread to be cut and the pitch of thread on
• One wire method. lead screw
Thread micrometer– When the thread is accurate 135. The depth of Indian Standard (BIS) thread is:
under the thread micrometer method, then the effective (a) 0.6495 P (b) 0.6000 P
diameter of the thread is equal to its pitch diameter. (c) 0.6403 P (d) 0.6134 P
132. The pitch of the thread is ..................... RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
(a) The distance a nut will travel in one Ans. (d) : The depth of Indian Standard (BIS) thread is
revolution on a multi start thread 0.6134 P.
(b) The axial distance between a point on one 136. Which threads have low friction resistance
thread to a corresponding point on the characteristic of the square thread and have
adjacent thread the same strength of V-threads?
(c) The tangent of helix angle multiplied by (a) Square threads (b) Acme threads
number of threads per inch (c) Knuckle threads (d) Buttress threads
(d) Equal to the number of threads per inch RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004 Ans. (d): Buttress threads have low friction resistance
Ans. (b): The pitch of the thread is the axial distance characteristic of the square thread and have the same
between a point on one thread to a corresponding point strength of V-threads.
on the adjacent thread. 137. The angle between the inclination of the thread
133. A M30 thread is rough cut using a thread and an imaginary line drawn perpendicular to
roughing tool. Which one of the following is the the axis is known as–
correct procedure for aligning the finishing tool (a) Pitch angle (b) Helix angle
with the thread groove: (c) Lead angle (d) Thread angle
(a) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
in the groove by compound slide and cross NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
slide Ans. (b) : The angle between the inclination of the
(b) Work stationary, tool adjusted and positioned thread and an imaginary line drawn perpendicular to the
in the groove by carriage had wheel and cross axis known as helix angle.
slide hand wheel Pitch– The thread pitch is the distance between
(c) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool corresponding points an adjacent threads.
positioned in the groove be compound slide 138. Name of the upper surface meeting the two
and cross slide sides of the thread–
(d) Work revolving, half nut engaged, tool (a) Shank (b) Root
positioned in the groove by carriage and cross (c) Flank (d) Crest
slide hand wheel UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 Ans. (d) : The upper surface meeting the two sides of
Ans. (c) : The correct procedure for aligning the the thread is known as crest.
finishing tool with the thread groove– 139. For M 20 × 1.5 threads, the numerical number
Work revolving → half nut engaged → tool positioned 20 represents the _______.
in the groove be compound slide and cross slide (a) major diameter of the thread
134. Which among the following in respect of thread (b) minor diameter of the thread
cutting is NOT correct: (c) pitch
(a) The threads can be cut on a lathe by using (d) pitch diameter of the thread
simple gear train arrangement only UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Ans. (a) : In M 20 × 1.5 threads– 145. In an internal screw thread, the minor
M – Metric thread diameter is the :
20 – Major diameter (a) Diameter of the hole drilled for forming the
hole
1.5 – Pitch
(b) External diameter of the blank on which the
140. Thread used for fly presses and screw jacks– threads are cut
(a) Acme (b) Knuckle (c) Smallest diameter after cutting the full thread
(c) Square (d) Buttress (d) Largest diameter after the threads are cut
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
Ans. (c) : The square thread form is a common screw ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
thread profile, used in high load application such as lead Ans. (a) : In an internal screw thread, the minor
screws and jack screws. It is the lowest friction and diameter is the diameter of the hole drilled for forming
most efficient thread form. the hole.
141. Identify the standard form of pipe thread– • Threads are generally single start, double start and
(a) B.S.F. (b) B.S.P. multi start thread.
(c) B.A. (d) B.S.W. 146. The form of thread in a buttress thread is :
DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018 (a) Inclination of 3o on one side and 30o on the
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am other side
Ans. (b) : The standard form of pipe thread is British (b) Inclination of 1o on one side and 60o on the
Standard Pipe (B.S.P.). It is used for gas and joints of other side
water pipe. (c) Inclination of 5o on one side and 30o on the
• Angle of B.S.P. thread is 55o. other side
• Angle of British association thread is 47.5o. (d) Inclination of 0o on one side and 45o on the
142. What type of thread is preferred when the other side
unsuitable weight is always in one direction? ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
(a) Inch thread (b) Buttress Ans. (d): The form of thread in a buttress thread is
inclined of 0o on one side and 45o on the other side.
(c) Acme (d) I.S.O.
It is used for power transmission in one direction only.
147. A bolt getting tightened when rotated in
clockwise direction is having
Ans. (b): Buttress thread is preferred the unsuitable (a) Left handed thread
weight is always in one direction. Angle of buttress (b) Right handed thread
thread is 45o. (c) Taper thread
143. The distance measured from one point of the (d) None of the above
thread parallel to the axis to the other adjacent ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
point of the thread is called: BPCL Operator (Field) 2016
(a) Effective diameter (b) Major diameter Ans. (b) : A bolt getting tightened when rotated in
(c) Pitch (d) Depth of thread clockwise direction is having right handed thread.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 148. For a single start thread the lead is equal to
Ans. (c) : The distance measured from one point of the (a) 2 times pitch (b) 3 times pitch
thread parallel to the axis to the other adjacent point of (c) Pitch (d) 1/2 of pitch
thread is called as pitch. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 28-06-2016, Shift-I
144. Which screw thread is used for transfer speed Ans. (c) : For a single start thread the lead is equal to
in a lathe machine? pitch.
(a) Buttress (b) Square Pitch– It is the distance from a point on a screw thread
(c) Acme (d) Knuckle to a corresponding point on the next thread measured
parallel to the axis.
1
Ans. (c) : Acme thread is used for transfer speed in Pitch =
lathe machine. number of threads per inch
• The thread angle of acme thread is 29o. 149. ACME threads have angle of threads
(a) 55o (b) 60o
o
(c) 29 (d) 40o
(IOF Fitter, 2015)
Ans. (c) : The angle of acme thread is 29o. It is another
modified form of square thread.
150. In a metric thread, what will be the thickness of Ans. (a) : Catching of thread is associated with thread
the thread at pitch diameter? cutting in lathe.
(a) Half of the pitch (b) Equal to pitch The method used to keep the tool running on same path
(c) Equal to lead (d) None of the three over again is called thread catching.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 156. What is the depth of thread for M10 × 1.5—
Ans. (a) : In a metric thread, half of the pitch will be the (a) 0.92mm (b) 1.5mm
thickness of the thread at pitch diameter. (c) 0.2mm (d) 0.05mm
151. Angle of buttress thread is ................. ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017
(a) 47º (b) 55º Ans. (a) : Given, M10 × 1.5
(c) 45º (d) 29º Major diameter · 10
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 Pitch · 1.5
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) Depth of metric thread (d) = 0.61 P
Ans. (c) : d = 0.61 × 1.5 = 0.915
Types of thread Angle ≈ 0.92 mm
British standard whitworth 55º 157. Among the tools listed below, the ideal tool to
British association threads 47.5º tighten an HSH screw is
Buttress thread 45º (a) Allen key (b) Crowfoot spanner
Acme thread 29º (c) Screw driver (d) Box spanner
152. Which one of the following is used to rectify ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
damaged or rusted threads? Ans. (a) : The ideal tool to tighten an HSH screw is
(a) Die nut (b) Circular split die Allen key.
(c) Two piece die (d) Die plate Allen key– It is simple device. A hex key is a simple
driver for bolts or screw that have heads with internal
ISRO Technician-B Turner 21.02.2015 hexagonal recesses. Hex keys are formed for a single
Ans. (a) : The shape of the die nut is similar to that of a piece of hard steel hexagonal rod having blunts ends.
square or hexagonal nut. 158. For a double-start thread
• This die nut does not require a die handle, but can be (a) Lead is twice the pitch
used by rotating the die with an open spanner or a (b) Pitch is twice the lead
box spanner or a wrench. (c) There are two threads at the start and one
• It can be used to repair damaged or rusted threads is thread thereafter
done for. (d) None of the above
153. Method to measure effective diameter of a ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
thread is by : Ans.(a): For a double start thread, lead is twice the
(a) Screw thread micrometer pitch.
(b) Three wire method L = 2P
(c) Two wire method L → Lead
(d) All of above P → Pitch.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 159. ISO Metric thread has an angle of
Ans. (d) : Method to measure effective diameter of a (a) 29º (b) 60º
thread– (c) 45º (d) 30º
(1) Thread micrometer method NPCIL ST/(Fitter) Rawatbhata 16.10.2022
(2) Two wire method ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
(3) Three wire method. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
154. Thread helix in a turn buckle is ................. Ans. (b) : Angle metric thread is 60o. This thread is
(a) Left hand (b) Right hand symmetrical of 'V' shape.
(c) No threads (d) Both (a) and (b) 160. The joint formed by whom is a temporary
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 joint–
Ans. (d) : The thread helix in turn buckle is clockwise (a) Solder (b) Threaded
and anticlockwise both. (c) Welding (d) Rivet
• Turn buckle is a means of adjusting the tension or
length, ropes, cables, tie rods and other tensioning Ans : (b) Threaded is temporary joint such as bolts and
system. nuts, machine screw, key, cotter pins etc. By temporary
fasteners, the joined parts can be separated easily
155. Catching of thread is associated with— without breaking them.
(a) Thread cutting in lathe 161. The number of threads per inch can be
(b) Thread tapping checked by–
(c) Thread milling (a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Ring gauge
(d) Thread rolling (c) Metric gauge (d) Slip gauge
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
Ans : (a) The number of threads per inch can be Ans : (b) Left hand thread means thread advance as
checked by screw pitch gauge. It is also known as bolt in rotated anticlockwise.
thread gauge. It is used to measure the pitch of a screw • Right hand thread is that which gets tightened into the
thread. nut when it rotates in the clockwise direction.
162. The cutting tool used for cutting external 167. Lead of M8 × 1 bolt which is having 3 multi
threads is– start thread is
(a) Reamer (b) Drill (a) 1 mm (b) 2 mm
(c) Tap (d) Die (c) 3 mm (d) 4 mm
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-I ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
Ans. (d) : The cutting tool used for cutting external Ans: (c) In M8 ×1
threads is die where as cutting for internal thread is tap.
M→ Metric Thread
• In drilling machine holes may be drilled quickly and
at a low cast. 8 → Nominal diameter of thread, (mm)
• A reamer is used to good finish and an accurate 1 → Thread pitch (mm)
dimension of holes. Lead · No. of start × pitch
163. A nut on the double start threaded shaft rotates = 3×1
at one complete revolution (360o) and it moves = 3mm
10 mm distance. Which one of the following is 168. The following is not a method to find effective
correct? thread diameter
(a) Pitch = 10 mm, lead = 20 mm (a) Thread micrometer
(b) Pitch = 2.5 mm, lead = 5 mm (b) Two wire method
(c) Pitch = 10 mm, lead = 15 mm (c) Three wire method
(d) Pitch = 5 mm, lead = 10 mm (d) The V-block method
Ans. (d) : For double start thread– Ans : (d) V-block method is not a method to find out
Longitudinal distance covered by = Lead (L) = 10 mm the effective thread diameter.
L = 2 × Pitch • When the threads are accurate under the thread
L 10 micrometer method, the effective diameter of the
Pitch = = = 5mm thread is equal to its pitch diameter.
2 2
164. Which of the following consists of multi start 169. The pitch of M12 ISO metric coarse thread is
thread : (a) 1.75 mm (b) 1.00 mm
(a) Tailstock shaft of centre lathe (c) 1.50 mm (d) 0.80 mm
(b) Lead screw of centre lathe IOCL 2020
(c) Fly press ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
(d) None of the above ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Ans. (a) :
Ans. (c) : Multi start thread is used in fly press. Size Pitch (in mm)
Lead = no. of start × pitch M8 1.25
165. In a multi-start thread, the pitch can be found M10 1.50
by : M12 1.75
(a) Lead/Number of starts
(b) Lead × Number of starts M14 2.00
(c) Lead + Number of starts 170. In a multi start thread, the lead is equal to
(d) No. of starts/lead (a) Pitch + number of starts
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 (b) Pitch / number of starts
Ans. (a) : Lead = no. of start × Pitch (c) Pitch - number of starts
Pitch = Lead/no. of start (d) Pitch × number of starts
For single start thread, ISRO Technician-B Turner 27.11.2016
Pitch = Lead ISRO Technician-B Turner 2016
166. Left hand thread means Ans. (d) : In a multi start thread the lead is equal to
(a) Thread advances as bolt in rotated clockwise product of pitch and number of starts
(b) Thread advances as bolt in rotated 1
anticlockwise • Pitch =
number of threads per inch
(c) Bolt has to be tightened by left hand only
(d) None of the above (1) For single thread screw
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 Lead = Pitch

(2) For double thread screw 175. The calculated tap drill size for an internal
Lead = 2 × Pitch thread of M12 with 1.75 pitch is :
(3) For triple thread screw = (a) 10.25 mm (b) 10 mm
Lead = 3 × Pitch (c) 13.75 mm (d) 12 mm
171. A thread M12 × 1.25 is to be cut on a M.S. Rod. BHEL 2020
What does 1.25 denote? ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
(a) depth of thread Ans. (a) : In position of coarse thread–
(b) width of thread Tap drill size = Major diameter of tap – Pitch
(c) pitch diameter of thread = 12 – 1.75
(d) pitch of thread = 10.25 mm.
BEML 2022 176. What type of thread is used in screw jacks–
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 04-03-2018 (a) Knuckle (b) Acme
DRDO Machinist.2016 (c) Buttress (d) Square
UPRVUNL TG II FITTER 09-11-2016 RRB ALP Fitter 21-01-2019, Shift-I
Ans: (d) The size of screw threads is designated by Ans : (d) Screw Jack– More load is lifted by applying
letter M followed by diameter and the pitch, less effect. This is a lifting machine. Friction is very less
in square thread.
In M12 × 1.25
177. Which threads are trapezoidal?
M → Metric thread (a) Circular threads (b) Acme threads
12 → Nominal diameter of thread (c) Square threads (d) Buttress threads
1.25 → Pitch. RRB ALP TECH. 8-2-2019 Shift-I
172. For mass production of threads on bolts, Ans : (b) Acme threads are trapezoidal. The threaded
angle is 29o. The depth of thread = 0.5P + 0.25.
process followed is:
(a) Turning (b) Collapsible taps 178. If the value of the lead is twice the value of the
(c) Thread milling (d) Thread rolling pitch then this type of thread is called–
(a) Double start thread (b) Multi start thread
(c) Single start thread (d) Triple start thread
Ans. (d) : Thread rolling is used for making threads in RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II
bolts in multiple producers. In this, threads are made by Ans. (a) : If the valve of the lead is twice the value of
rolling die. the pitch, this type of thread is called double start
• Rolling is a cold forging process that results in plastic thread.
deformation. Lead is the distance moved by a nut or bolt in the axial
• Threads produced by rolling have good strength and direction in one complete revolution.
good surface. 179. The blank diameter used in thread rolling will
173. Purpose of die nut is to : be :
(a) Cutting a new metric thread (a) Equal to minor diameter of the thread
(b) Chasing and conditioning damage thread (b) Equal to pitch diameter of the thread
(c) A little larger than the minor diameter of the
(c) Cutting an external thread
thread
(d) Improve surface finishing of the thread (d) A little larger than the pitch diameter of the
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019 thread
Ans. (b) : The purpose of die nut is chasing and SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
conditioning of the damaged thread. Die nuts are used Ans. (d) : Thread are made in mass production by
to clean old or worn threads. thread rolling process. In this process threads are made
174. The standard pipe fittings are provided with by plastic deformation on metal.
threads conforming to ........... • The diameter of blank in thread rolling is slightly
(a) BA (b) BSW greater than its pitch diameter is kept.
(c) BSP (d) Metric 180. Find out the tap drill size for 1/4 inch B.S.W. Tap :
(a) 6/32 inch (b) 5/32 inch
(c) 3/32 inch (d) 4/32 inch
NTPC Fitter 2016 UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015 Ans : (a) Tap size = 1/4 inch
Ans. (c) : The standard pipe fittings are provided with 7 1
threads conforming to BSP. Formula : Tap drill size = Tap Size × − inch
8 32
BSP thread is used for the connection of gas and water
1 7 1
pipes. So that water or gas does not leak. = × − inch
Angle – 55o 4 8 32
Depth – 0.6403 × Pitch 7 1 6
= − = inch
Radius – 0.1375 × Pitch. 32 32 32
181. A triangular shaped thread in which angle of 186. The diameter of the thread, at which the
one side is 90 degree and of other side is 45 thread thickness equal to half of the pitch is
degree. This thread belongs to– called ..............
(a) Metric thread (b) Buttress thread (a) Major diameter (b) Pitch diameter
(c) Acme thread (d) Knuckle thread (c) Minor diameter (d) Shank diameter
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
Ans : (b) A triangular shaped thread in which angle of Ans: (b) The diameter of the thread, at which the thread
one side is 90o and other side is 45o, this thread belongs thickness equal to half of the pitch is called pitch
to buttress thread. diameter.
182. Purpose of multi start thread–
(a) Stagnation activity (b) Delayed activity
(c) Slow movement (d) Intense activity
Ans : (d) The purpose of multi start thread is fast speed
made because increases the value of lead in multi start
thread.
183. The width of the square thread of the interval
'p' is :
(a) 0.25 p (b) 0.50p
(c) 0.75p (d) 1.5p
DRDO Machinist.2016
Ans : (b) The width of the square thread of the 'p'
interval is 0.50p
Square thread–
Depth = 0.5× Pitch 187. Undercutting is done :
(a) Near the shoulder of stepped cylindrical
Flatness = 0.5× Pitch
surfaces
p (b) At the end of the threaded portion in bolts
Width of pitch = = 0.50p (c) a and b both
2
1
Pitch (p) = ISRO Grinder 27-11-2016
No.of thread per inch Ans : (c) Under-cutting is done at the end of the bolt
threaded portion and near the shoulder of the extreme
cylindrical surfaces.
188. The pitch diameter of the thread is the effective
diameter of the thread and its calculated by–
(a) Major dia – Single depth
(b) Major dia – 2 depth
(c) Minor dia + 2 depth
Square thread (d) Minor dia – depth
184. Used for binding on kabbaloh– (IOF Fitter, 2015)
(a) B.S.W. (b) Acme Ans : (a) The effective diameter (pitch diameter) of the
(c) B.S.P. (d) All of the above thread is the one on which the threads are fastened.
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 The calculation,
Ans : (a) Most of the B.S.W. thread is used in binding Effective diameter = Major dia – Single depth.
on the kabbaloh. 189. The crest and root of the knuckle thread are
Thread angle = 550, Depth = 0.6403 × Pitch semi-circular, whose radius is–
1 1 1
Pitch = (a) × Pitch (b) × Pitch
T.P.I. 2 3
Radius = 0.317 × Pitch 1 1
(c) × Pitch (d) × Pitch
185. Bench-vice has the following thread– 25 4
(a) B.S.W. (b) Acme BDL Technician 2022
(c) Round (d) Buttress thread (RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 11.11.2001)
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 Ans : (d) The crest and root of the knuckle threads are
Ans : (d) Buttress thread is a combined form of V and in hemispherical.
square threads. It is used for power transmission in one 1
Radius of knuckle thread = × Pitch or 0.25P
direction only. It is used in bench vice. 4
190. Which thread is used for power transmission in 196. What is seller thread called?
one direction– (a) B.A. thread
(a) Square (b) Acme (b) Metric thread
(c) Worm (d) Buttress (c) American National thread
(CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016) (d) S.B. thread
Ans: (d) Buttress thread is used for power transmission MP ITI Training Officer 20.12.2022
in one direction only as in carpenter's vices. (NTPC Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (c) Seller thread is also called as American
National thread. The angle of seller thread is 60o.
197. Thread used in the lead screw of a lathe
machine–
(a) Worm thread (b) Buttress thread
(c) Acme thread (d) Square thread
191. Knuckle thread is used– RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
(a) Screw check (RRB Trivandrum ALP, 20.06.2004)
(b) Carpenter vice Ans : (c) Acme thread is used in the lead screw of a
(c) For railway coupling lathe machine. Angle of acme thread is 29o. Width of
(d) Fly press thread at the crest is equal to 0.3707P.
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 198. The depth of which thread, root and crest are
Ans : (c) Knuckle thread is the modified form of the equal–
square threads. (a) Acme (b) B.A.
• It is semicircular at the crest and root. Knuckle (c) Square (d) Buttress
threads are used in railway coupling, bottles etc. (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
192. Buttress thread is not used in which of the Ans : (c) The depth of square thread, root and crest are
following? equal. It is generally used for power transmission on
(a) Micrometer spindle (b) Power press feed mechanism of machine tools, valve spindles, vice
(c) Carpenter vice (d) Ratchet etc.
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 199. Which are the British threads?
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (a) Seller thread
Ans : (a) Buttress thread is not used in micrometer (b) B.S.W., B.S.F., B.S.P., B.A.
spindle. 'V' thread is cut in the spindle of micrometer. (c) Unified thread
• Angle of 'V' thread = 600 (d) None of the above
• Angle of buttress thread = 450 (RRB Malda ALP, 16.07.2006)
193. How the pipe thread is different from other 'V' Ans : (b) B.S.W., B.S.F., B.S.P. and B.A. are British
shaped threads– threads.
(a) The number of thread per inch varies The thread angle of B.S.W, B.S.F. and B.S.P. are 55o.
(b) The pitch is different 200. What are American threads?
(c) Tapers per foot (a) Seller thread
(d) All of the above (b) Unified thread
(RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009) (c) British standard thread
Ans : (c) Pipe thread differs from other 'V' shaped (d) None of these
threads in taper per foot. BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
194. In pipe joints, the following thread is used. (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
(a) BSW (b) BSP Ans : (a) American National thread is also known as
(c) BA (d) None of these seller thread. This angle is 60o. It is mostly used in
(IOF Fitter 2017) fasteners for making adjustment.
Ans : (b) The shape of BSP thread is exactly like that of 201. What are metric threads?
B.S.W. thread. But its pitch is more fine. This type of (a) I.S.I. thread (b) B.A. thread
thread is usually cut on water, steam, gas pipe. Thread (c) Unified thread (d) All of the above
o
angle of BSP thread is 55 . (IOF Fitter, 2014)
195. The feed shaft must be in disengaged condition Ans : (a) I.S.I. threads are recognized by Indian
during Standard Institute (I.S.I.). According to (IS : 1330 -
(a) Facing (b) Thread cutting 1458), these thread are 0.25 mm from 300 mm.
(c) Turning (d) None of these
202. The lower part of the thread where the two
(IOF Fitter 2017)
sides meet is called–
Ans : (b) The feed shaft must be in disengaged (a) Crest (b) Root
condition during thread cutting. (c) Lead (d) Helix angle
• During thread cutting lead screw is used. (RRB Kolkata ALP, 16.07.2006)
• A half nut is used to engage the lead screw to the Ans : (b) Thread root– It is the innermost portion
carriage. which joins the adjacent sides of a thread.
203. Commonly found in spindle of vice, press,

screw jack etc.– 2. Thread Angle and Formula
(a) Indian Standard thread
(b) Square thread
209. Depth of metric thread is
(c) Sharp V-thread
(d) Knuckle thread (a) 0.5 P (b) 0.6 P
(HAL Fitter, 2015) (c) 0.6403 P (d) 0.6134 P
Ans : (b) Usually, the thread in spindle of vice, press, HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
screw jack are square thread. It is useful for HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
transmission of power in both direction under heavy Ans. (d) : ISO metric threads consist of a symmetric V
load operation. shaped thread.
204. Which part of bolt thread is called crest? Depth of metric thread = 0.6134 × P
(a) Lowest portion (b) Upper portion P = Pitch of thread
(c) Middle (d) None of these 210. What is the angle of B.A. thread?
(RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004)
(a) 45º (b) 47½º
Ans : (b) Crest– It is outermost portion which join the
(c) 60º (d) 90º
two of adjacent sides of a thread.
Root– It is innermost portion which joins the adjacent HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019
sides of a thread. Ans. (b) :
205. Instruments used to cut threads in a metal Thread Included angle
hole– B.A. thread 47.5º
(a) Boring tool (b) Drill British standard 55º
(c) Tap (d) Reamer whitworth thread
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 (BSW)
(IOF Fitter, 2016) American national
Ans : (c) A tap cuts a thread on the inside surface of a standard thread 60º
hole. There are three types of taps–
(1) Taper tap (2) Intermediate tap (3) Finishing tap. Square thread 90º
• Taper tap is the first type of tap used while threading Acme thread 29º
by hand. Trapezoidal thread 30º
• Intermediate tap makes the threads of accurate size Buttress thread 45º
but in blind hole. 211. In a thread the top surface joining the two sides
206. Unit of measurement of the T.P.I.– of thread is
(a) Thickness of wire (b) Diameter of nut (a) root (b) angle
(c) Pitch of nut threads (d) Length of bolt (c) crest (d) pitch
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 10.10.2004) HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
Ans : (c) 'T.P.I.' the unit of measurement of pitch of nut Ans. (c) :
thread. A screw pitch gauge is used to measure the pitch In a thread the top surface joining the two side is called
of the nut thread. crest.
207. Screw jack has threads– • In a thread the lower surface joining the two side is
(a) Square thread (b) Buttress thread called root.
(c) Withworth thread (d) None of the above 212. The bottom surface of screw thread where two
BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021 sides meet together is known as
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) (a) lead (b) crest
(IOF Fitter, 2013) (c) root (d) pitch
Ans : (a) Screw jack has square thread. It is used by HPSSC Jr. Technician (Fitter) 30-08-2018
motor mechanics to lift the load. Ans. (c) :
208. In B.A. thread, thread angle is: The bottom surface of screw thread where two sides
(a) 29º (b) 47.5º meet together is know as root.
(c) 55º (d) 60º 213. The property of a metal by which it can be
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 drawn out into wire is
Ans. (b) : (a) Ductility (b) malleability
Forms of threads Angle (c) Brittleness (d) Toughness
B.S.W. 55o DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
B.A. (British Association) 47.5o NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
American National thread 60o Ans. (a) : Ductility–It is the property which permits a
Metric thread 60o material to be drown out longitudinally to reduced
Unified thread 60o section, under the action of tensile force.

Ductile material must posses a high degree of plasticity Ans. (b) :

and strength, ductile material must have low degree of
elasticity, this is useful in wire drawing.
Malleability–It is the property of a material which
permits the material to be extended in all direction
without rupture.
Toughness–It is the property of material which enables
it to absorb energy without fracture.
Brittleness–It is lack of ductility. Brittleness implies Buttress thread is a combined form of V and square
threads. One side of the thread is perpendicular to the
that it can not be drawn out by tension to smaller
axis of the thread and the other inclined at 45º.
section. In brittle material failure take place under load
It is used for power transition in one direction only as in
without significant deformation. breach locks of large guns, jacks, in air plane propeller,
214. In the metric thread system, the theoretical carpenter's vices, etc.
depth of the thread is 216. The included angle between flanks of metric
(a) Twice the pitch (b) Half the pitch thread is:
3 (a) 45º (b) 60º
(c) pitch (d) None of the above (c) 90º (d) 85º
2
Ans. (b) : The included angle between flanks of metric
Ans. (c) : thread is 60º.
217. Thread plug gauges are used to check:
(a) External thread (b) Internal thread
(c) Shaft (d) Hole
Ans. (b) : Thread plug gauges are used to check
tolerance of threaded parts according to a certain
specification.
Theoretical depth (d) of thread and pitch (P) are shown • This gauge is used to check an internally threaded
in fig. product.
consider a thread 218. First tap, second tap, third tap differ in their:
(a) Thread size (b) Tape lead
(c) Thread pitch (d) Type of thread
Ans. (b) : The taps differ in the length of chamfer at the
point, known as the lead.
• The one with the longest lead is referred to as the
taper or the first tap.
• The second or intermediate tap and the third which
has a very short lead, as the bottoming or plug tap.
219. Depth of thread varies from type to type. From
In triangle ADC the following, choose the thread with maximum
CD depth
tan 30º =
AD (a) Square thread (b) Acme thread
1 P/2 (c) Worm thread (d) Buttress thread
= ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm)
3 d
3 Ans. (c) : Worm thread a form of screw thread suitable
d= P for the worm of worm gearing. Worm thread have
2
maximum depth.
215. The angle between the flanks in a buttress • Square thread efficiency more, no radial pressure or
thread system is side thrust on the lathe. Life is more.
(a) 60º (b) 45º • Acme thread angle 29º. Less efficiency, side thrust
(c) 55º (d) 65º present. Transfer power in both direction.
DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022 • Buttress thread transfer power one direction.

220. The lead of a screw thread can be calculated by Minor diameter– For external threads, the minor
the formula diameter is the smallest diameter after cutting the full
(a) 2×pitch thread.
(b) Depth × no of starts Root– This is the bottom surface joining the two sides
(c) Pitch × no of starts of adjacent threads.
(d) Pitch × Depth of thread 225. Top part of grove between two flanks of
ISRO Technician B (Turner) 14-07-2021 thread-
Ans. (c) : For a single start lead screw, pitch and lead (a) crest (b) root
are the same but thread with two or more starts the (c) angle (d) flank
below formula should be used. RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
Lead = pitch × Number of start Ans. (a) : The crest of a surface is the prominent part of
• Screw threads used for fastening. a thread, whether internal or external. The root is the
221. Instrument used for measuring screw threads : bottom of the groove between the two flanking surfaces
(a) Screw pitch gauge (b) Thread gauge of the thread whether internal or external.
(c) Ring thread gauge (d) All of these 226. Included angle between flank is called _____
Cochin Shipyard Fitter 13-06-2022 (a) crest (b) root
Ans. (d) : A thread gauge also known as a screw gauge (c) angle (d) thread angle
or pitch gauge, is used to measure the pitch or lead of a RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
screw thread.
Ans. (d) : The thread angle of a screw is the included
• Thread ring gauges are designed to be used for angle between the thread flanks, measured in a plane
GO/NO GO gauging. Thread ring gauges used for
containing the thread axis. This is a defining factor for
inspecting external screw threads of manufactured
the shape of a screw thread.
parts.
222. The distance through which a screw thread 227. The distance measured between perpendicular
advances axially in one turn is called- to crest and root is called _______
(a) pitch of thread (b) lead of thread (a) thread angle (b) depth
(c) depth of thread (d) diameter of thread (c) flank (d) size
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008
Ans. (b) : Lead is the distance of a threaded component Ans. (b) : Depth of thread– The vertical distance
moves along the matching component during one between a crest and a root or we can define as the
complete revolution. For a single start thread the lead is distance between the crest & the root of a thread
equal to the pitch. measured normal of the axis.
223. The pitch of a 3-start thread is the lead divided Pitch– Pitch of a thread is the distance measured
by- parallel to the axis from a point on a thread to the
(a) 1 (b) 2 corresponding points on adjacent thread forms in the
(c) 3 (d) 4 some axial plane and on the same side of the axis.
RRB ALP Bhopal 06.06.2010 228. The accurate size of hole for internal thread of
Ans. (c) : M 30×2 is ______
Lead = Pitch × Number of starts (a) 27 mm (b) 27.5 mm
(c) 28 mm (d) 30 mm
Lead = 3 × pitch (For three start thread)
Lead
Pitch = Ans. (c) : TDS = TS – 2d
3 TDS = TS – 2 × 0.61 × pitch
• In the case of two start (double start) threads, one = 30 – 2 × 0.61 × 2
thread is wound within the other exactly in the = 30 – 2.44
middle this enables the lead of the helix increased
= 27.56 mm
without increasing the pitch.
224. The surface connected to crest and root of ≃ 28 mm.
thread is called _____ 229. Angle of buttress threads is _______
(a) root (b) crest (a) 130º (b) 45º
(c) angle (d) flank (c) 70º (d) 90º
Ans. (d) : Flank– It is the surface connecting the crest Ans. (b): Angle of buttress threads is 45o.
and the root. In a screw thread, the top surface joining • Thread angle of whitworth thread = 55o
two adjacent sides (flanks) of the thread is called the • Thread angle of acme thread = 29o
crest.
Crest–This is the top surface joining the two sides of a • Thread angle of metric trapezoidal threads = 30o
thread. • Thread angle of knuckle thread round thread = 30o

230. The angle of V-shaped IS threads is - Ans. (c) : A double start thread will have a lead distance
1 double that of a single start thread of the same pitch, a
(a) 29º (b) 47 º triple start thread will have a lead distance three times
2 longer than a single start thread of same pitch.
(c) 50º (d) 60º For double start, lead = 2 times the pitch
RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010 For four start, lead = 4 times the pitch
Ans. (d) : The angle of IS thread (V shaped) is 60o. Lead is the distance the nut travels with one revolution
• Square threads have an angle of 90o between two of the screw.
threads. 234. Thread angle of a frequently used machine
• Square threads are more efficient than V-threads. thread, that is, the BSW thread is-
• Square threads are used in power screws whereas (a) 60º (b) 29º
V-threads are used to provide high frictional power. (c) 45º (d) 55º
231. How many starting threads are there in the RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
multi-start screw thread shown in the figure? Ans. (d) : British standard withworth (BSW) thread
form are that the angle between the thread flanks is 55o
and the threads has radii at both the roots and the crests
of the thread.
• Unified screw threads have a 30o flank angle and
are symmetrical. This is why they are commonly
referred to as 60o threads.
235. Lead in a single start thread is-
1
(a) P (b) P
(a) 1 (b) 2 2
(c) 3 (d) 4 1
(c) P (d) 2P
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 4
Ans. (c) : Three starting threads are there in the multi RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002
screw thread shown in the figure. Ans. (b) : For a single start thread, lead is equal to the
• The distance covered by screw in one revolution is pitch for multiple start screws the lead is the pitch
called lead. multiplied by the numbers of starts.
232. What is the angle of screw thread used in pipe Lead = pitch × number of starts
fittings? For a single start lead screw, pitch and lead are the
some, but for a thread with tow or more starts the above
1o formula should be used.
(a) 55º (b) 47
2 236. Single point metric 'V' threading tools are
(c) 60º (d) 29º checked for its flank angle accuracy by using a
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 (a) thread plug gauge (b) centre gauge
Ans. (a) : BSP (British Standard Pipe thread) used in (c) screw pitch gauge (d) tool angle gauge
pipe and pipe fitting and its angles 55o. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001
Thread Application Ans. (b) : The centre gauge checked for single point
BSW (British standard Used for general purpose metric 'V' threading tools for its flank angle accuracy.
withworth thread) fastening thread • Thread plug gauge are used to check tolerances of
internal threaded (tapped) holes of parts according
BSF (British standard Used in automobile
to your required specification.
fine thread) industries
237. What coolant is used for drilling the aluminium
BA (British Association Used in small screw of
job?
thread) electrical appliances,
(a) Dry air (b) Kerosene
watch screws of
scientific apparatus. (c) Soluble oil (d) Mineral oil
Thread type Included angle
Ans. (b) : Kerosene coolant is used for drilling the
BSP thread 55o aluminium job.
BA thread (British 1o • It helps in cooling the tool as well as the workpiece.
Association) 47 It also reduces the friction between the chip and the
2
tool face by lubricating.
I.S.O. metric thread 60o Material Drilling Turning
233. Lead of a double start thread is– Aluminium Soluble oil kerosene Soluble oil
(a) P/2 (b) P/4 & lard oil
(c) 2P (d) 4P Brass Dry soluble oil Soluble oil
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 mineral oil lard oil
238. The handle of thread plug gauge is made from

ebonite material for.
(a) Reducing the cost
(b) Reducing the weight
(c) Easy manufacturing
(d) Easy handling
Ans. (b) : The handle of thread plug gauge is made
from ebonite material for reducing the weight of the
gauge.
(a) 30o (b) 45o
• There are plug gauge for straight cylindrical holes, o
(c) 60 (d) 75o
tapered, threaded square and splined holes. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
• At one end, it has a plug of minimum limit size the Ans. (b) : The buttress thread form is designed to
GO end and at the other end a plug of maximum handle axial thrust applied principally in one direction.
limit, the 'NO GO' end. The load bearing thread face is perpendicular or at a
o
239. The damaged external treads are rectified by slight slant (usually no greater than 7 ) to the screw
axis. The trailing face is slanted, often at 45o.
....
243. If threads per inch is given by TPI and Pitch is
(a) die nut
given by “P” then the relation between these
(b) half die two is given by:
(c) circular die (a) P = TPI (b) P = 1/TPI
(d) adjustable screw plate die (c) P = 2TPI (d) P = 0.5TPI
Ans. (a) : The die nut is used for chasing or Ans. (b) : If thread per inch is given by TPI and pitch is
given by 'P' then relation–
reconditioning the damaged threads.
• Die nuts are not to be used for cutting new threads. 1
P=
• The die nuts are available for different standards TPI
and sizes of threads. 244. If the Pitch of a square thread is 4 mm, then
depth of the thread is equal to:
240. Which type thread is used for power screws?
(a) 2 mm (b) 4 mm
(a) Metric (b) Knuckle (c) 8 mm (d) 6 mm
(c) Square (d) BSW RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 Ans. (a) : The square thread form is a common screw
Ans. (b) : Knuckle thread is used for power screws. thread profile, used in high load application such as
jackscrews.
• Where they are used as round thread lead screw in
• In square thread–
hoists. As fastening threads in clutch and brake
screws on drains and also in larger valves and gates. Pitch ( P ) 4
Depth of the thread = = = 2 mm.
241. The case of multi-start threads if p is pitch and 2 2
N is No. of starts then the lead of screw thread 245. Shape of the thread obtained by thread cutting
is ............ operation on Lathe is:
(a) p + N (b) p – N (a) Cycloidal (b) Trichoidal
(c) Elliptical (d) Helical
(c) P × N (d) p/N
Ans. (d) : Helical shape of the thread obtained by
Ans. (c) : Lead = Pitch × Numbers of starts thread cutting operation on lathe.
• When a single helix is making a screw, it is called a • Thread cutting on the lathe is a process that
single start thread, the lead and pitch are the same. produces a helical ridge of uniform section on the
• In the case of two start (Double start) threads one workpiece.
thread is wound within the other exactly in the 246. If the major diameter is 24 mm and minor
middle. This enables the lead of the helix increased diameter is 20 mm, depth of the thread is:
without increasing the pitch. (a) 3 mm (b) 4 mm
242. A buttress thread profile is shown. What is the (c) 2 mm (d) 5 mm
angle marked “X” in Figure. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
Ans. (c) : D = 24 mm Ans. (d) : Pitch = 8 mm

d = 20 m In triple start
D−d Lead = 3 × Pitch
Depth of the thread = = 3 × 8 mm
2
= 24 mm
24 − 20
= 251. If the compound slide swivel base is set at 70º to
2 the lathe axis, the degree of the reading at cross
4 slide is.....
= (a) 45º (b) 30º
2
(c) 60º (d) 20º
= 2 mm
247. During thread cutting on lathe, the amount of
Ans. (d) : Cross slide and compound– The cross slide
tool advancement in one revolution of the is a dovetailed slide that moves at a right angle to the
workpiece is equal to: ways. The cross feed advances the cutting tool into the
(a) Pitch (b) Lead work at a right angle to the workpiece by means of a
(c) Two times the lead (d) Minor diameter lead screw and hand wheel. The compound sits on top
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 of the cross slide.
Ans. (b) : 252. The major diameter of a square thread is 40
mm, pitch is 5 mm. What is the minor
• The amount of tool advancement in one revolution diameter?
of the workpiece is equal to lead. (a) 30 mm (b) 32 mm
• Lead is the distance between two corresponding (c) 35 mm (d) 36 mm
points on the some helix. RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
248. When threading a blind hole, the third Ans. (c) : D = 40 mm
(finisher) tap is used......... P = 5 mm
(a) To thread the hole with full threads upto the d=?
bottom D − d Pitch
(b) To start the threads Depth of thread = =
2 2
(c) After the first (rougher) tap 40 − d 5
(d) To form the threads easily = =
2 2
d = 35 mm
Ans. (a) : 253. What is the formula to find "helix angle" in
• When threading a blind hole, the third tap is used to screw thread, (where π = 3.14, d = pitch
thread the hole with full threads upto the bottom. diameter, L = lead)?
• If tapping a blind hole, start with a taper or plug tap, π× d
clean out the hole often going as for as you can then (a) tan θ = π× d × L (b) tan θ =
L
finish with a bottoming tap.
L L× π
249. If the major diameter D is 40 mm and minor (c) tan θ = (d) tan θ =
π× d L
diameter d is 20 mm, then the Depth of the
thread t is: RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(a) 10 mm (b) 15 mm L
Ans. (c) : Helix angle = tan θ =
(c) 5 mm (d) 12 mm πd
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 d = pitch diameter
Ans. (a) : D = 40 mm L = lead
d = 20 mm Helix angle– It is the angle between the tangent to the
D−d thread helix on the pitch cylinder and the axis of the
Depth of the thread = worm.
2
254. The taper ratio of the standard metric self
40 − 20 holding taper is ..............
=
2 (a) 1 : 20 (b) 1 : 25
t = 10 (c) 1 : 30 (d) 1 : 50
250. In a triple start thread if the pitch is 8 mm then RRB ALP Patna 2014
lead is: Ans. (d) : The taper ratio of the standard metric self
holding taper is 1 : 50.
(a) 8 mm (b) 16 mm
(c) 4 mm (d) 24 mm D−d
Taper ratio (K) =
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 L
Where, K = Taper ratio 260. Which among the following statements in

D = Larger diameter of the taper respect of threads /thread cutting is NOT
d = Smaller diameter of the taper correct?
L = Length of the taper. (a) Threading tools are checked for accuracy for
the 60° angle by using a centre gauge
255. When the taper is expressed as a ratio, the
(b) M 10 × 1.25 is a fine pitch thread
formula to determine the compound slide
(c) M 10 is a coarse pitch thread
swivel angle (θ) is ............
(d) Same tool is used for cutting external and
(a) tan θ = 2 × taper ratio
internal threads
(b) tan θ = 4 × taper ratio RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
taper ratio
(c) tan θ = Ans. (d) : Different tool types are required for cutting
2 external and internal threads.
taper ratio Thread cutting– A thread is a helical shaped groove
(d) tan θ =
4 formed on cylindrical surface of workpiece.
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 261. Which one of the following is the correct
Ans. (c) : When the taper is expressed as a ratio, the position of threading tool to cut V thread?
formula to determine the compound slide swivel angle (a) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
taper ratio with tool axis perpendicular to the work piece
(θ) is tan θ = . axis
2
(b) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
256. Which thread has a combined strength of with tool axis at 60° to the work piece axis
square thread and V thread? (c) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
(a) Acme thread with tool axis at 45° to the work piece axis
(b) Knuckle thread (d) Exactly at centre height of the work piece
(c) Buttress thread with too axis at 30° to the work piece axis
(d) British standard Whitworth thread RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 Ans. (a) : Exactly at centre height of the workpiece
Ans. (c) : Buttress thread– In this thread, one flank is with tool axis perpendicular to the workpiece axis is the
perpendicular to the axis of the thread and the other correct position of threading tool to cut V-thread.
flanks is at 45o. These threads are used in the power 262. The perpendicular distance between the crest
press, carpentry vices, gun breeches, ratchets, etc. and root is called–
Acme thread– It has included angle of 29o. These are (a) Angle of thread (b) Depth of thread
used in lathe lead screws. (c) Depth of cut (d) Slope of thread
257. Calculate diameter of best wire for a RRB ALP Secunderabad 29.06.2008
Whitworth tread of M 24×7 mm size :
Ans. (b): The perpendicular distance between the crest
(a) 4.04 mm (b) 7.8 mm and root is called depth of thread.
(c) 3.94 mm (d) 8.08 mm
263. The slope of the thread with horizontal is
known as–
Ans. (c): Dia of best wire = 0.5636 × T (a) A Helix (b) Lead
= 0.5636 × 7 (c) Pitch (d) Helix angle
= 3.9452 mm RRB ALP Siliguri 2014
258. In case of multi-start threads if p is pitch and N Ans. (d) : The slope of the thread with horizontal is
is No. of starts then the lead of screw thread is known as helix angle.
................ .
Lead of thread
(a) p + N (b) P – N Helix angle =
(c) P . N (d) P / N Pitch dia of thread
RRB ALP Ranchi 2014 Note– It is also known as lead angle.
Ans. (c) : In case of multi-start threads if p is pitch and 264. Calculate lead angle of a thread which has
N is No. of starts then the lead of screw thread is P . N. mean diameter of 45 mm and lead of 10mm–
259. A screw thread that transmits power and has (a) 8.5° (b) 4.04°
its face nearly at right angles to the major axis (c) 3.02° (d) 4.02°
is : RRB ALP Trivandrum 20.06.2004
(a) Whitworth (b) Knuckle Ans. (b) : Given that–
(c) Square (d) Round Mean diameter (d) = 45 mm
RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003 Lead (P) = 10 mm
Ans. (c) : A screw thread that transmits power and has P
Lead angle (tan α) =
its face nearly at right angles to the major axis is square. πd
10 × 7 Ans. (b) : The thread angle of a metric thread is 60o.

tan α = • The ISO metric screw thread is the most commonly
22 × 45
used type of general purpose screw thread
 7  worldwide.
α = tan −1  
 99  270. The angle between the flanks in trapezoidal
thread is :
α = 4.04 .o
(a) 30o (b) 60o
o
265. What should be the blank size of round bar for (c) 90 (d) 118o
cutting M16 threads with 2 mm pitch with a ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
die? Ans. (a) : Trapezoidal thread forms have a 30o inclined
(a) 15.5 mm (b) 15.8 mm thread angle. When compared to general purpose
(c) 15.9 mm (d) 16.0 mm thread forms, centralizing threads are manufactured
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 with tighter tolerances and reduced clearance on the
major diameter.
Ans. (b) : Given that–
271. The thread angle for UNF thread is :
Pitch of thread (P) = 2 mm (a) 30o (b) 60o
Metric thread dia = 16 mm (c) 55 o
(d) 29o
Blank size = 16 – 2 dm IOCL 2020
P ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017
= 16 – 2 × × 0.61 Ans. (b) : The thread angle for UNF thread is 60o.There
2
are type of threads like American National screw
= 16 – 2 × 0.61 thread. Association thread, square thread, acme
= 16 – 1.2 thread, buttress thread etc.
≃ 15.8 mm 272. The angle of BSW thread is :
(a) 60o (b) 37o
266. What is the countersink angle for countersink (c) 55o (d) 120o
head screw? ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015
(a) 90º (b) 115º Ans. (c) : The angle of B.S.W. thread is 55o. The angle
(c) 80º (d) 75º of British association is 47.5o.
BEML 2022 Depth of B.S.W. thread = 0.6403 × Pitch.
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 273. Included angle of ISO metric thread is
Ans. (a) : The counter sink angle for counter sink head (a) 47.5º (b) 55º
screw is 90o. (c) 60º (d) 45º
267. The angle between the flanks in an Acme ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
thread is Ans. (c):
(a) 30o (b) 29o
o Type of thread Angle
(c) 60 (d) 51o
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 BSW 55º
Ans. (b): The angle between the flanks in an acme BA 47.5º
thread is 29o. Depth of thread = 0.5 P + 0.25. The width Isometric 60º
of the thread at the crest is equal to 0.3707p. Acme 29º
268. The form of thread in a saw tooth thread is Buttress 45º
(a) Inclination of 1o on one side and 30o on the 274. Flank angle and form of a screw thread can be
other side measured using......
(b) Inclination of 3o on one side and 30o on the (a) Vernier caliper (b) Vee piece
other side (c) Slip gauge and precision rollers
(c) Inclination of 5o on one side and 60o on the (d) Optical projector
other side ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016
(d) Inclination of 3o on one side and 29o on the Ans. (d) : Flank angle and form of screw thread, profile
other side of gear teeth etc. are shown by projecting on the
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019 screen by optical projector.
Ans. (b) : The form of thread in a saw tooth threads is This method is used for measuring small gears like
inclination of 3o on one side and 30o on the other watch.
side. 275. What is blank size for M10 × 1.0 external
269. The thread angle of a metric thread is thread using a die?
(a) 90o (b) 60o (a) 8.5 (b) 9.9
o
(c) 30 (d) 120o (c) 10.0 (d) 10.1
Ans. (b) : 9.9 is the blank size for M10 × 1.0 external Ans. (b) : Pitch, flank and root is related to the thread
threading by using a die. terminology while margin is not related to the thread
276. In a saw tooth thread as per BIS 4696, the terminology.
flank taking the load is inclined at 282. The outer dia of the blank for cutting external
(a) 7º (b) 45º thread of M8 × 1 is approximately
(c) 30º (d) 3º (a) 6.8 mm (b) 7.9 mm
(c) 7.0 mm (d) 8.5 mm
Ans. (d) : According to BIS 4696, in a saw tooth thread ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019
the flank taking the lead is inclined at 3o.
Ans : (b) In M8 ×1
277. For making M10 external threads using thread
rolling, the blank diameter should be— M = Metric thread
(a) Equal to 10 mm 8 = Nominal diameter
(b) Less than 10 mm 1 = Pitch
(c) More than 10 mm Hence, the outer diameter of the blank will be
(d) Blank diameter does not matter approximately 7.9.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 283. The included angle between flanks of a metric
Ans. (b) : The blank diameter should be less than 10 thread is
mm for making M10 external threads using thread (a) 20 degree (b) 45 degree
rolling. (c) 90 degree (d) 60 degree
• The outside threads are cut by thread rolling. By this, ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
threads are cut mostly in bolts and studs etc. Ans. (d) : The included angle between flanks of a
278. In an ISO Metric thread, the depth of an metric thread is 60o.
external thread in terms of pitch P is Metric threads are defined as distance between each in
(a) 0.613P (b) 0.541P millimeters (mm).
(c) 0.144P (d) 0.866P Depth of metric thread = 0.6134P.
ISRO Technician-B Turner 10.12.2017 284. The largest diameter of a screw thread is
Ans. (a) : known as:
In an ISO metric, the depth of external thread = 0.613P (a) Minor diameter (b) Normal diameter
= 0.613 × Pitch (P) (c) Major diameter (d) Pitch diameter
The angle of ISO metric thread is 60o. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-02-2019
279. Meeting surface of the crest and root of a (RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005)
thread is called as– Ans. (c) : The largest diameter of screw thread is
(a) Angle of thread (b) Flank known as major diameter.
(c) Pitch (d) Depth of thread Minor diameter– It is the smallest diameter of screw
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III thread.
(RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004) Pitch diameter– It is the diameter of an imaginary
Ans : (b) Meeting surface of the crest end root of a cylinder passing through the width of the thread at
thread is called as flank. which the threads and the width of the gap are equal.
Crest– It is the outermost portion which joins the two
sides of a thread. 285. Which one of the following screw thread
Root– It is the innermost portion which joins the elements is not checked with the thread ring
adjacent sides of a thread. gauge?
280. The distance between the crest and root of a (a) Pitch diameter (b) Pitch
thread measured normally with respect to the (c) Helix angle (d) Profile
axis is called– ISRO Technician-B Turner 22.04.2018
(a) Pitch diameter (b) Depth of thread Ans. (d) : Profile cannot be checked by thread ring
(c) Thickness of thread (d) Minor diameter
gauge.
Ans : (b) The distance between the crest and root of a The following methods are used to determine the profile
thread measured normally with respect to the axis is thread–
called as depth of thread. (1) Optical method
Major diameter– It is the largest diameter of screw (2) Microscopic method.
thread. It is also known as outer side or crest diameter. 286. In a threaded assembly, the contact between
Minor diameter– It is the smallest diameter of screw the male and female threads takes place on the
thread. it is also known as root or core diameter. ....................
281. Which one among the following is not related (a) Pitches (b) Flanks
to the thread terminology?
(a) Pitch (b) Margin (c) Crests (d) Roots
(c) Flank (d) Root ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019
Ans. (b) : In a threaded assembly, the contact between Ans. (d) : The following method is used for cutting
the male and female threads take place on the flanks. multi start thread–
• The lowest point of the thread is called the roots. (1) Dividing the first driver of change gear train.
• The top most point of the thread is called crest. (2) Moving top slide of compound rest to new.
(3) Using slotted face plate.
287. Lead of the thread is–
292. Which of the following is the distance from a
(a) Liner advancement in one revolution by shaft point one thread to a corresponding point on
(b) Distance between two consecutive threads the adjacent thread measured parallel to the
(c) Thread angle axis?
(d) Distance between crest and root (a) Lead (b) Flank
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 21-2-2020, Shift-I (c) Root (d) Pitch
Ans. (a) : Lead of the thread is the distance moved by a ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-04-2018, Shift-III
nut or bolt in the axial direction in one complete Ans. (d) : The distance from a point one thread to
revolution. correspond point on the adjacent thread measured
For single start thread, the lead is equal to the pitch. parallel the axis is known as pitch.
For multi start thread, 1
Lead = No. of starts × pitch Pitch =
number of threads per inch
288. Lead is equal to twice the pitch–
(a) Triple start thread 293. M 10 × 1.25 represents fine threads. These are
(b) Single start thread used for the purpose of–
(c) Double start thread (a) When force is required in fixing of thread
(d) Quadra start thread (b) To prevent thread from easy opening
(c) When other types of threads are unavailable
(d) When coarse pitch is not available
Ans. (c): In double start, lead is equal to twice the pitch. UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015
Lead = Pitch × No. of starts Ans : (b) M 10 × 1.25 represents fine threads. These are
289. The metric V threads have an angle of : used to prevent thread from easy opening.
(a) 60o (b) 45o 294. What is the intersect angle of pipe thread?
(c) 55o (d) 47.5o (a) 29° (b) 55°
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 (c) 60° (d) 45°
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 20-07-2014 DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
Ans. (a) : Ans : (b) Included angle of pipe thread = 55o.
Thread Angle Thread Angle
1. V-thread 60o Metric thread 60 o
2. BSW-thread 55o Buttress thread 45o

3. Acme thread 29o Square thread 90o
o
4. B.A. thread 47.5 295. B.S.P. threads cut on pipes, these contiguous
5. Square thread 0o or 90o is–
290. The included angle in Acme threads is : 10
(a) 60o (b) 55o (a) 60 0
(b) 47 2
(c) 29o (d) None of these (c) 450 (d) 550
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 BHEL 2020
NTPC Fitter 2016 (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
Ans. (c) : Ans : (d)
Threads Included angle I. Angle of B.S.P. thread = 550
1. V or metric thread — 60º II. Angle of B.S.F. thread = 550
2. Acme thread — 29º III. Angle of B.S.W. thread = 550
IV. Angle of acme thread = 290
3. B.A thread — 47.5º
V. Angle of square thread = 900 or 00
4. BSW thread — 55º 296. What is the depth of square thread?
5. Buttress thread — 45º (a) 0.3 Pitch (P) (b) 0.4 P
291. Which of the following method is used for (c) 0.5 P (d) 1P
cutting multi start thread? (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
(a) Dividing the first driver of change gear train Ans : (c) The depth of square thread is 0.5P and angle
(b) Moving top slide of compound rest to new of thread 0o or 90o.
position 297. What is the angle of buttress thread?
(c) Using slotted face plate (a) 55° (b) 45°
(d) All of the above (c) 90° (d) 47.5°
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 (IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans : (b) The angle of buttress thread is 45o and used In single start threads, the lead is equal to the pitch. In
for power transmission in one direction only. multi start threads lead is equal to number of starts
298. What is the depth of square thread? multiplied by pitch.
Lead = No. of starts × Pitch
P P
(a) (b)
2 3
P P
3. Classification of Screw
(c) (d)
4 5 304. Identify the area marked "A" of the screw as
(MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013) shown in figure.
P
Ans : (a) The depth of square thread is
2
Where, P = Pitch
(a) Threaded shank (b) Threaded tip

(c) Threaded Drive (d) Threaded Crest
299. What is the Angle of B.S.W. and B.S.P. thread? Ans. (a) : The area marked 'A' of the screw as shown in
(a) 550 (b) 47.50 figure is threaded shank.
0
(c) 60 (d) 290 Pitch– The pitch of a screw is simple the distance
(IOF Fitter, 2016) between adjacent threads.
Ans: (a) The angle of B.S.W. and B.S.P. is 55o. B.S.W. 305. Identify the screw in the given figure below.
threads are used on bolts, nuts and screws used for
general purpose fastening.
British association threads is generally used on fine
work as in mechanical instruments, aircrafts
construction etc.
(a) Masonry screw (b) Hex cap screw
300. What is the shape of metric thread? (c) Oval head screw (d) Pan screw
(a) 'V' type 55o angle
o UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
(b) 'V' type 47.5 angle
(c) 'V' type 60o angle Ans. (c) : Oval head screws are a combination of a
(d) None of these countersunk head and a domed head.
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 29.09.2002) Masonry screw– Masonry screws are a shaft tapping
screw that can be used in a variety of base materials that
Ans : (c) The shape of metric thread is 'V' type and
o include concrete, brick, mortar joints.
angle of metric thread 60 .
306. Which of the following is mounted in order to
301. What is the angle of square thread?
0 0 support nut, bolt, screw etc.?
(a) 29 (b) 55
(a) Coupling (b) None of these
(c) 600 (d) 900
(c) Washer (d) Key
o IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans : (d) The angle of square thread is 90 . It is used
for power transmission on feed mechanism of machine
tools, value spindles, vice screw, screw jack. It offers Ans. (c) : Washer is mounted in order to support nut,
less resistance to motion than the 'V' threads. bolt, screw etc.
302. The angle under the pipe thread is– 307. Identify the type of nut shown in the picture.
0 0
(a) 48 (b) 55
(c) 470 (d) 450
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) The angle of pipe thread is 55o. Pipe of
different metal as per requirement. (a) Slotted nut (b) Castle nut
(c) Swam nut (d) Wing nut
303. The distance moved by a nut on one rotation is
equal to :
(a) Pitch (b) Lead Ans. (b): The type of nut shown in the picture is a
(c) Feed (d) Start castle nut.
IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 • Castle nut is a nut with slots cut into one end.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 22-12-2012 • These nuts help to hold a wheel onto an axle.
Ans. (b) : The distance moved by a nut or bolt in the • Castle nut secured with a center pin so they will
axial direction in one complete revolution is known as typically stay in place even when the wheel is moving
lead. and causing vibration.

308. Set screw is to tight with 313. A small headless screw having a slot for a
(a) Plier (b) Allen key screw driver is called
(c) Spanner (d) Wrench (a) grub screw (b) set screw
BDL Technician 2022 (c) stud (d) thumb screw
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019
Ans. (b) : Allen key is a small hand held tool used for Ans. (a) : A small headless screw having a slot for a
tuning bolts & set screws. screw driver is called grub screw.
309. What type of agitators is used for highly
viscous particle?
(a) Propeller agitator
(b) Single blade agitator
(c) Compound agitator
(d) Helical screw Grub screw
HPCL Maintenance and Technician 07-08-2022 A grub screw is generally used to secure an item against
Ans. (a) : Agitation is the process of keeping a mixture another item without use of a nut.
that has been mixed in the proper mixed state required 314. If the lead screw has 6 TPI and there are 4
for the end product. numbered divisions in the chasing dial, which
Type of agitator– one of the following will be the teeth worm
1. Paddle agitators wheel of chasing dial?
2. Anchor agitators (a) 48 teeth (b) 24 teeth
3. Radial propeller agitators (c) 18 teeth (d) 12 teeth
4. Turbine agitators RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
5. Helical agitators. Ans. (b) : If the lead screw has 6 TPI and there are 4
• Helical agitators these have blade with a twisted numbered divisions in the chasing dial, the worm wheel
mechanism, jute like the thread of screw. Helical of chasing dial have 24 teeth.
agitators are most useful for mixing viscous liquids. • Chasing dial is an element of center lathe.
310. In four start thread screw, if lead is 16 mm, • The chasing dial indicates when the split nut should
then pitch is ________. be engaged with the lead screw for the cutting tool
(a) 2 mm (b) 3 mm to follow the previously cut groove.
(c) 4 mm (d) 16 mm 315. Which one of the following elements of an
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 external screw thread cannot be measured
Ans. (c) : For four start thread– directly with precision instruments ?
Lead = 4 × Pitch (a) Width of crest (b) Minor diameter
16 = 4 × pitch (c) Major diameter (d) Pitch diameter
Pitch = 4 mm RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008
311. The head of a thumb screw is ______ in shape. Ans. (d) : Pitch diameter– It is the diameter of an
(a) hexagonal (b) square imaginary cylinder that passes through the thread such
(c) circular (d) triangular that the width of the space is equal to the major
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 diameter minus one depth.
Ans. (c) : The head of a thumb screw is circular in 316. Which one of the following statements is
shape. correct with respect to the spiral fluted taps ?
Advantages of thumb screws– (a) Used to tap oversized hole
1. Easy to hold (b) used to tap holes with slots
2. Remains fixed (c) The tap tends to push the chips ahead of the
3. Helps save time, effort and money tap
4. Durable construction. (d) Threads formed by displacing the work
312. The main purpose of screw pitch gauge is material
(a) To check the minor diameter of screw threads RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007
(b) To check the limits of screw thread Ans.(b): The spiral fluted tap used to tap holes with
(c) To check the distance between adjacent crests slots.
of screw threads • It is commonly used in blind holes and when
(d) To check the major diameter of screw thread threads are required close to the bottom of the hole.
BARC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 317. A left hand screw advances in:
Ans. (c) : The main purpose of screw pitch gauge is (a) Clockwise (b) Anticlockwise
used to check the distance between adjacent crests of (c) Any direction (d) None of these
screw threads. RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004
Ans. (b): Left handed threads– A screw thread is Ans. (c) : Acme threads are suitable for lead screws of
called left hand, if nut screws on a bolt when turned machine tools.
anticlockwise. • Lead screw is used for thread cutting. It is made
• A left hand external thread on a vertical shank from good quality alloy steel and is provided with
always slopes upward to left. acme thread i.e. trapezoidal thread.
318. Adjustable screw plate die is used for _____. 322. The size of the screws are state by–
(a) Chasing or reconditioning (a) Root dia (b) Pitch dia
(b) Easy to assemble inside the collar (c) Major dia (d) Minor dia
(c) Increasing or decreasing depth of cut RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012
(d) Supplying the cutting oil while threading Ans. (c) : The size of the screws are specified by the
RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007 major diameters.
Ans. (c) : Adjustable screw plate die is used for chasing 323. A cutting tool used to finish and enlarge a hole
or reconditioning. is known as
• Round adjustable dies are used to cut right hand (a) Drill (b) Tap
external threads both initial threads and in the repair (c) Die (d) Reamer
and maintenance of rusty or worm threads. RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012
319. The number of threads per inch can be checked Ans. (d) :
with a ............. • A cutting tool used to finish and enlarge a hole is
(a) tool gauge (b) metric rule known as reamer.
(c) ring gauge (d) screw pitch gauge • A reamer is a type of rotary cutting tool used in
RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012 metal working.
Ans. (d) : The number threads per inch can be checked • Precision reamers are design to enlarge the size of a
with a screw pitch gauge. previously formed hole by a small amount but with
• Screw pitch gauge is used to determine the pitch of a high degree of accuracy to leave smooth sides.
a thread. 324. Which one of the following thread forms is
• It is also used to compare the profile of threads. mostly found on threaded shaft of lifting
equipment for carrying loads?
(a) ‘V’ thread (b) Square thread
(c) Saw tooth thread (d) Knuckle thread
Ans. (b) :
• A square thread is adopted for the transmission of
power in either direction.
• The square threads are used in screw jacks, lead
screw, presses and clamping devices.
• A square thread usually cut on a lathe with a single
point tool and it can not be easily compensated for
wear.
320. The power is transmitted by lead screw to the
carriage through ..... 325. Which one of the following thread groups is
only for transmitting motion?
(a) gear system
(a) Square, Modified square, Acme, Buttress
(b) pulley drive
threads
(c) rack and pinion arrangement
(b) Whitworth, Acme, Square, Buttress threads
(d) half nut
(c) Unified, Acme, Square threads
(d) ISO Metric, Modified square Acme threads
Ans. (d) : The power is transmitted by lead screw to the RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012
carriage through half nut.
Ans. (a):
• Lead screw is used for thread cutting.
• Square threads, modified squares, acme, buttress are
• Lead screw is engaged to carriage with the half nut. used for transmitting motion.
321. What type of threads are suitable for lead • A square thread is adopted for the transmission of
screws of machine tools? power in either direction.
(a) British Association threads • The square threads are used in screw jacks, lead
(b) Whitworth Screw thread screw, presses and clamping devices.
(c) Acme threads • A square thread usually cut on a lathe with a single
(d) Square threads point tool and it can not be easily compensated for
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 wear.
326. Which one of the following threads is used on Ans. (b) :

mechanical jack? • A square screw thread is adopted for power
(a) Acme (b) Square transmission in either direction.
(c) Buttress (d) B.S.F. • The square threads are employed in screw jack, lead
RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003 screw, presses and clamping devices.
Ans. (b) : • It is difficult to cut with tap and dies.
• Square threads are used in the screw jacks, lead • It is usually cut on a lathe with a single point tool
screw, presses and clamping devices. and it can not be easily compensated for wear.
• An acme thread is a modification of square threads. 331. The lead screw of a lathe has……threads
• Acme threads used where a split nut is required and (a) Single start (b) Double start
where provision is made to take up wear as in the (c) Multi start (d) All of these
lead screw of a lathe. RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003
327. Advantage of using recirculating ball screw Ans. (a) :
compared to conventional type screw is ........ • The lead screw of a lathe has single start threads.
(a) backlash is reduced • Lead screw thread is a type of acme thread.
(b) low cost • Lead screw is used for thread cutting.
(c) wear of screw is low • Acme thread has an included angle of 29o these are
(d) power required for driving is low used in lath lead screw.
Ans. (a) :
• The advantage of using recirculating ball screw
compared to conventional type screw is less
backlash.
• A ball screw is a mechanical linear actuator that
translates rotational motion to linear motion with
little friction.
328. Why are pitch errors observed in threads? 332. If threads on a bolt are left hand, threads on
(a) Lack of inspection nut will be–
(b) Incorrect ratio of tool work velocity (a) Right hand with same pitch
(c) Interference between mating parts (b) Left hand with same pitch
(d) All of these (c) Right hand with fine pitch
RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002 (d) Left hand with fine pitch
Ans. (b) :
Ans. (b) :
• Pitch errors observed in threads due to the incorrect
ratio of tool work velocity. • If threads on a bolt are left hand, threads on nut will
be left hand with same pitch.
• Periodic pitch error repeats it self along the thread at
regular intervals of time, in this type of error, • A screw thread is called a left hand thread, if nut
successive thread portion are either shorter or larger screws on a bolt when turned anticlockwise.
than the mean. • A screw thread is called right hand thread, if a nut
screws forward on a bolt when turned clockwise.
329. The person responsible for standardizing screw
threads was ........... 333. Multi point cutting tools used to generate
(a) Sir Joseph Whitworth (b) Joseph Portland external threads are called–
(a) Chasers (b) Reamer
(c) Major Carl Winton (d) Lalit Mishra (c) Drill (d) Tap
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
Ans. (a): Ans. (a) : Multi point cutting tools used to generate
• Sir Joseph Whitworth was the first person to create external threads is called as chasers.
a thread standard in around 1841. • Tapping is a machining process for producing
• The demand of thread fasteners increased internal threads.
considerably as industry continued to develop. • A drill is a tool used for making round holes or
However the lack of thread standardization made driving fasteners. It is fitted with a bit, either a drill
fastener interchangeability problematical. or driver chuck.
330. Which of the following screw thread is adopted 334. What is the angle for counter sink head screws
for power transmission in either direction? and debring?
(a) Acme threads (b) Square threads (a) 750 (b) 1200
0
(c) Buttress threads (d) Multiple threads (c) 0 (d) 900
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
Ans. (d) : 90o angle is suitable for countersink head Ans : (c) Screw thread is used to join different parts of
screw and deburing. a machine, structure products temporarily fasteners such
335. In M 16 × 1.5 screw thread, 1.5 represent: as bolts and nuts, machine screw.
(a) Pitch (b) Major diameter The helical grooves cut on the surface of a cylindrical
(c) Effective diameter (d) Minor diameter pipe for fastening parts or power transmission is known
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 as screw thread.
Ans. (a) : The size of screw threads is designated by 341. The pitch diameter of the screw thread is
letter M followed by diameter and the pitch. checked by :
In M16 × 1.5 screw thread. (a) Snap gauge (b) Thread ring gauge
M → metric thread. (c) Screw thread micrometer
(d) Vernier calliper
16 → Nominal diameter.
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
1.5 → Pitch.
Ans : (c) The pitch diameter of the screw thread is
336. A screw is specified by : checked by screw thread micrometer. Least count of
(a) Pitch dia (b) minor dia screw thread micrometer is 0.01 mm or 0.001" (inch).
(c) major dia (d) none of these
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015 342. The minor diameter of screw thread is :
(a) External pitch diameter
Ans. (c) : A screw is specified by major dia.
(b) External diameter depth
Major dia– It is the largest diameter of a screw thread.
(c) External diameter -2 depth
It is also known as crest diameter.
Minor dia– It is the smallest diameter of screw thread. (d) Equal to external diameter
It is also known as root diameter. (IOF Fitter, 2012)
Pitch dia– It is diameter of an imaginary cylinder Ans : (c) The minor diameter of screw thread is equal to
passing through the width of the threads. external diameter minus two times of depth.
337. ................... screw driver has a square blade. 343. The mechanical advantage of a screw jack is
(a) Heavy duty (b) Stumpy determined by :
(c) Phillips 2π 2πl
(a) (b)
(d) Watchmakers screw driver Pitch Pitch
ISRO Technician-B Turner 25.09.2016 Pitch Pitch
Ans. (a) Heavy duty screw driver has a square head. (c) (d)
2π 2πl
A screw driver is a tool, manual or powered, used for (RRB Ranchi ALP, 08.07.2007)
turning screws. Screw driver consists of handle, shank Ans : (b) Mechanical advantage of screw jack (M.A.) =
and point. Heavy duty screw driver are widely used
2πl
across various industries.
Pitch
338. When both the nuts of a double nut are Where, l = Length of lever
tightened in opposite directions to lock nut, the
Pitch = Centre distance of two adjacent threads of screw
nut is known as : jack
(a) Split nut (b) Right hand nut
344. What is self piercing screw?
(c) Left hand nut (d) Check nut (a) Only threads are cut
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-II (b) Make holes only
Ans. (a): When both the nuts of a double nut are (c) Punches holes and also cut threads
tightened in opposite directions to lock the nut, that nut (d) None of the above
is known as split nut. (RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005)
339. What type of thread is used on the lead screw Ans : (c) Self piercing screws are special fasteners that
of the lathe? are designed to pierce light gauge metals and tap their
(a) Square (b) Knuckle own mating threads as they are driven into the material.
(c) BSP (d) Acme They are essentially the same as self tapping screw, but
DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017with extra sharp points that allow to penetrate sheet
metal.
Ans : (d) Acme thread is used on the lead screw of the
lathe. The angle of acme thread is 29o. The depth of the 345. The main features of self piercing screw is :
thread is equal to 0.5P to 0.25. (a) Flutes are cut in them
(b) The head is only one type
340. Screw thread is not used for which of the (c) They are pointed and have double start
following? (d) None of the above
(a) To raise to a height (RRB Patna ALP, 04.02.2007)
(b) For speed change Ans : (c) The main feature of self piercing screw is that
(c) To join the parts permanently they are pointed and have double start. Self tapping
(d) For taking precise measurement like micrometer screws are available in various head sizes. These are
(RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003) either cross recessed or slotted head.
346. The double start thread is cut in the hammer There are four types of Counter Shank Head Screw–
drive screw, it is fitted in the drill hole by (i) Slotted Counter Sink
hitting in with a hammer. In what size are they (ii) Cross Recessed Counter Sink head Screw
available? (iii) Slotted Rest Counter Sink Head Screw
(a) 00 to 14 (b) 1 to 14 (iv) Cross Recessed Rest Counter Sink Head Screw
(c) 2 to 10 (d) 2 to 14
351. Groove screws are like set screws, the only
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
difference is that their diameter and length are
Ans : (a) Hammer drive screw are commonly used for relatively less. It is used–
attaching nameplates, wall signs and other similar (a) To hold two parts together such as a collar
applications. They are multi start threads. Screw size pulley or gear above the shaft
numbers are available from 00 to 14.
(b) In heavy duty work
347. Thumb screws are usually opened or tightened (c) In light duty work
by hand. The shape of their heads is :
(a) Oval (b) Counter sunk
(c) Oval counter sunk (d) Flat
DRDO Machinist.2016 Ans : (a) Groove screws are like set screws, the only
(RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012) difference is that their diameter and length are relatively
less. It is used to hold two parts together such as a collar
Ans : (d) Thumb screws are usually opened or pulley or gear above the shaft.
tightened by hand. The shape of their heads is flat.
Thumb screw are usually made of copper, brass. 352. Which screw is called safety screw?
(a) Shoulder screw (b) Set screw
348. Which of the following is not a heavy duty
(c) Castle screw (d) Stud
screw?
(a) Hexagon head screw (IOF Fitter, 2014)
(b) Square head screw Ans : (b) Set screw is also called as 'safety screw'.
(c) Chease head screw There are different types of set screw. There are five
(d) Hexagon socket head screw types according to the set screw point.
(IOF Fitter, 2012) 353. What is put between the shaft and the pulley to
Ans : (c) Chease head screw is not a heavy duty screw. prevent it from slipping?
Hexagon head cap screw, also called hex bolts or hex (a) Bolt (b) Key
head cap screw, are threaded fasteners with a six-sided (c) Stud (d) Screw
head. VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015
The primary advantage to square-drive screw is they are Ans : (d) Screw is put between the shaft and pulley to
much less prone to "cam out". prevent it from slipping.
Cam out refers to the slipping of the bit in the screw Screws and bolts are usually made of steel.
head. 354. In a single actuator screw thread, the distance
349. Which screw is used to tighten and looser a between one thread peak to adjacent thread
Allen key? peak is called–
(a) Square head screw (a) Root (b) Pitch (interval)
(b) Hexagonal socket head screw (c) Angle (d) None of the above
(c) Counter sink head screw (IOF Fitter, 2015)
(d) Pan head screw Ans : (b) In a single actuator screw thread, the distance
(RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 06.06.2010) between one thread peak to adjacent thread peak is
Ans : (b) Hexagonal socket head screw is used to called as pitch (interval).
tighten and loose a allen key. 355. The lead screw of machine tools is made of :
Allen key bolts, come in many shapes and sizes. (a) Trapezoidal thread (b) Saw tooth thread
Popular types include socket head cap screws, socket (c) Triangular (d) 'V' thread
button screws and socket screws.
350. Light duty screws are used in light assemblies
which of the following is not a light duty Ans : (a) The lead screw of machine tools is made of
screw? trapezoidal thread.
(a) Round head screw (b) Cheese head screw • Feed can be given on the lathe with the help of lead
(c) Pan head screw (d) Counter head screw screw and threads can be cut.
(IOF Fitter, 2013) 356. In a screw thread, the top surface joining two
Ans : (d) Light duty screws are used in light assemblies adjacent sides of thread is called..............
which are as follows– (a) Backlash (b) Flank
(a) Round Head Screw (c) Crest (d) Throat
(b) Pan Head Screw ISRO Technician-B Fitter 20-11-2016
(c) Resed Cheese Head Screw Ans : (c) In screw thread, the top surface joining two
(d) Cheese Head Screw adjacent sides of thread is called as crest.


for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job Updates
13.
Sheet Metal
6. Wiring allowance provided on sheet metal to
1. Classification of Sheet wrap around the wire to a make wired edge is
determined by the following formula, where d
= diameter of the wire and t = thickness of
1. The layer on G.I. sheet is of sheet metal
(a) Aluminium (b) Zinc (a) (2.5 × d) + t (b) (1.5 × d) + t
(c) Manganese (d) Chrome (c) d + t (d) (0.5 × d) + t
NLC Technician 24-09.2022 ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 Ans. (a) : Wiring allowance provided on sheet metal to
Ans. (b) : Layer on G.I. sheet is of zinc. The Full form wrap around the wire to a make wired edge is
of term G.I. is galvanized iron sheet. determined by (2.5 × d) + t.
• The process of coating zinc on layer is called as 7. Which among the following statements is
galvanizing. correct in respect of positioning the sling ?
(a) Keep the sling as far vertical as possible
2. Metal is converted into sheet, property of metal
(b) Check that the load is not rigid enough to
is called____ support its own weight
(a) Malleability (b) Ductility (c) Check that the sling is not bearing on any
(c) Normalizing (d) Hardening sharp edge
HPSSC Fitter 20-10-2019 (d) Place the slings so that the load is unstable
Ans. (a) : Mechanical properties of metals– BRO Vehicle Mechanic 2021
Malleability– It is the property of metal by which they Ans. (c) : Statement that check that the sling is not
can be converted into sheet. Ex.– Gold. bearing on any sharp edge in respect of positioning the
Ductility– It is the property of a material enabling it to sling.
be drawn into wire with the application of a tensile 8. In which method of manual bending of sheet
force. Ex.– Copper wire. metal the folding line is to coincide with edge of
bending tool?
3. Thickness of sheet ______ with increase of (a) Folding bar method
gauge number. (b) Hatchet stake method
(a) increases (b) decreases (c) Hatchet iron and 'C' clamp
(c) remains constant (d) none of the above (d) 'C' clamp and hard wood
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 21-10-2018 NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
Ans. (b) : Gauge number indicates the standard Ans. (b): Hatchet stake–It is generally used for making
thickness of a sheet metal for a specific material. sharp bends, bending edges and forming boxes and pans
• As the gauge number increases, thickness of sheet of sheet metal by hand.
decreases. • The hatchet stake has a sharp straight edge beveled
along one side.
4. According to BIS, All sheet should be fold so
that they will reduce to ____
(a) A4 Size (b) A5 Size
(c) A2 Size (d) A3 Size
Ans. (a) : According to BIS, all sheets should be folded
in such a way that they reduce to a A4 size.
Trimmed size of A4 paper is 210 × 297 mm.
9. The minimum distance from a rivet hole centre
5. The shear used in sheet metal for the inside to the nearest edge of the plate is called
cutting of an intricate work is called (a) Lead (b) Pitch
(a) Scotch shears (b) Hawk billed shears (c) Margin (d) Lag
(c) Rhodes shears (d) Aviation shears NALCO Operator Boiler 2021
ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022 Ans. (c) : Margin/Edge distance–It is the distance
Ans. (b) : The shears used in sheet metal for the inside between the edge of the plate to the center line of the
cutting of an intricate work is called Hawk billed shears. rivets in the nearest row.
Sheet Metal 675 YCT

Pitch– This is distance between two centres of the • It is commonly used in automotive wind and solar
consecutive rivets in a single row. It is denoted by 'P'. industries.
• Black iron sheet is commonly used as a material for
gate and gutter fabrication.
12. Sheet metal work is carried out only on metal
sheets, which are
(a) Forged (b) Cast
(c) Rolled (d) None of the above
Ans. (c) : Sheet metal work is carried out only on metal
Where, p = pitch sheets, which are rolled.
m = margin. • Cold rolled sheets being resistant to corrosion and
10. Which type of notch is shown in Fig.? working easily are commonly used in sheet metal
shops.
13. Which one of the following stakes is used when
shaping and seaming funnels and tapered
articles?
(a) Hatchet stake (b) Half-moon stake
(c) Funnel stake (d) Creasing stake
Ans. (c) : Funnel stake–The funnel stake is used for
(a) Straight notch (b) V-notch planishing tapered work and hand forming of funnels
(c) Square notch (d) Slant notch and similar conical shapes of sheet metal.
Ans. (a) : Straight notch or slit–Straight cuts made in
the edge of the sheet where it is to be bent.
Square notch–It is made when forming a rectangular or
square box.
Slant notch–The notch is cut at an angle of 45º to the
corner of sheet.
Creasing stake– It has two rectangular shaped horns

one of which is plain. The other horn contains a series
of grooving slots of various sizes.
11. Which one of the following sheets is used for • It is used when making small diameter tube with
making highly corrosive acid tanks? thin gauge metal.
(a) Black iron sheets 14. Which among the following stake provides a
(b) Galvanised iron sheets double-ended support?
(c) Stainless steel sheets (a) Hatchet stake (b) Half-moon stake
(d) Lead sheets (c) Creasing stake (d) Horse stake
BPCL Operator (Field) 2016 RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002
Ans. (d) : Lead sheets is used for making highly Ans. (d) : Horse stake–It is double-ended support.
corrosive acid tanks. • At the end of each arm one of which is usually
• G.I. sheets are used in fabricating door and wall cranked downward for clearance purpose. There is a
panels due to its flat surface. square hole for the reception of wide variety of heads.
Sheet Metal 676 YCT

Ans. (a) : A hand groover is used to lock the sheet

metal seams.
• Seams made this way are known as grooved seams.
Ex–Buckets, air ducts, tin cans etc.
19. Mallet is made of
(a) Lead (b) Brass
Half-moon stake– It has a sharp edge in the form of an (c) Hard wood (d) Cast iron
arc of a circle, beveled along one side. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Ans. (c) : Mallet–Mallet is a wooden-headed hammer
of round or rectangular cross-section.
• It is the most used hammer in any sheet metal shop.
• A mallet is used for bending and smoothening the
sheet.
• It is used where light force is required.
• It is used for throwing up flanges on metal discs. • The striking face is made flat to the work.
15. For making various types of hems and seams
20. Copper and brass sheets are
from the sheet metal of thickness less than 0.4
mm, the allowance should be (a) Hard and brittle
(a) Twice the thickness of sheet. (b) Malleable and ductile
(b) Three times the thickness of sheet. (c) Malleable and brittle
(c) Four times the thickness of sheet. (d) Hard and ductile
(d) No allowance RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006 Ans. (b) : Copper and brass sheets are malleable and
Ans. (d) : For making various types of hems and seams ductile.
from the sheet metal of thickness less than 0.4 mm, the Ductility–It is the property of a material enabling it to
allowance should be no allowance. be drawn into wires.
There are different type of seams and hems. Malleability–It is a property of a material enabling it to
Seams Hems be drawn into thin sheets.
1. Lap seam 1. Single hem 21. The type of Brush used to remove coarse rust
2. Grooved seam 2. Double hem in a sheet metal before painting is
3. Single seam 3. Wire edge (a) wooden brush (b) nylon brush
4. Double seam (c) wire brush (d) painting brush
5. Double grooved seam RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
16. Which among the following tools is used for Ans. (c) : Wire brushes are choice for removal of rust
flattening the metal around punched hole? and oxidations, paint, slag, weld splatter and other
(a) Ball peen hammer (b) Riveting hammer unwanted surface contaminates with angle grinder,
bench grinders or drills.
(c) Setting hammer (d) Sledge hammer
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 22. The maximum tilting angle of the band saw
machine is______.
Ans. (a) : Ball peen hammer is used for flattening the
metal around punched hole. (a) 35° (b) 40°
Ball peen hammers are best used for– (c) 45° (d) 50°
• Metal working RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009
• Rounding edges. Ans. (c) : The maximum tilting angle of the band saw
machine is 45°.
17. The thickness of sheet metal is indicated by a
series of numbers, which is called as • A band saw uses a long sharp blade consisting of a
(a) Number size (b) Gauge continuous band to toothed metal rotating on
opposing wheels to cut materials.
(c) Standard size (d) None of the above
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005 • It is used in metal working, wood working and
lumbering.
Ans. (b) : The thickness of sheet metal is indicated by a
series of numbers, which is called as gauge. 23. Shears are used to cut ……..
• Standard wire gauge (SWG) is used to measure the (a) very thinned sheet (b) thick sheet
size of a wire and thickness of sheet. (c) G. I. wire (d) rubber sheets
18. Which one of the following is the purpose for RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
using hand groover in sheet metal work? Ans. (b): Level shears are used to cut thicker sheets that
(a) To lock the grooved seam cannot be cut with hand shears.
(b) To unlock the grooved seam • A snip also called a hand shear is used as a pair of
(c) To strike the sheet scissors to cut thin, soft metals sheets.
(d) To hold the sheet in position • Snips are used to cut sheet metal up to 1.2 mm
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 thickness.
Sheet Metal 677 YCT
24. Striking portion the hammer is called––––– Ans. (d) : The properties of a sheet metal vary
(a) Eye (b) Peen depending on the rolling direction of the sheet is called
(c) Handle (d) Cheek directionality.
RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001 29. Which one is very cheap sheet metal for all
Ans. (b) : Striking portion the hammer is called peen. purposes?
The peen is the other end of the head. It is used for (a) Galvanized iron (b) Black iron
shaping and forming work like riveting and bending. (c) Stainless steel sheet (d) Copper sheet
The peen is of different shapes such as– RRB ALP Ranchi 2014
• Ball peen Ans. (b) : Black iron is very cheap sheet metal for all
• Cross peen purposes.
• Straight peen. • Black iron sheet is commonly used as a material for
gate and gutter fabrication.
25. Which hammer is used for sheet metal work?
• G.I. sheets are used in fabricating door and wall
(a) Ball peen hammer panels due to its flat surface.
(b) Sledge hammer • It is commonly used in automotive wind and solar
(c) Cross peen hammer industries.
(d) Soft hammer (wood) Copper sheet– It is made by rolling copper rods. It is
RRB ALP Patna 2014 used in making domestic items, electrical items.
Ans. (d) : Soft hammer (wood) is used for sheet metal 30. Which one of the following mechanical
work. properties enables a metal to be made into thin
• Mallet is a wooden-headed hammer of the round or sheets?
rectangular cross-section. (a) Toughness (b) Hardness
• It is used where light force is required. (c) Ductility (d) Malleability
• These hammers are generally made of soft metal, such RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
as copper, brass, plastic, wood, nylon etc.. Ans. (d) : Malleability–It is a special case of ductility
26. _____ is used for galvanizing iron sheets so that which permits materials to be rolled or hammered into
thin sheets. A malleable material should be plastic but it
they do not rust.
is not essential to be so strong.
(a) Lead (b) Tin Ductility– It is the property of a material enabling it to
(c) Zinc (d) Silver be drawn into wire with the application of a tensile
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 force. Ex.– Copper wire.
Ans. (c) : Zinc is used for galvanizing iron sheets so 31. The snip used for cutting thin, soft sheet metal
that they do not rust. is called–
Galvanizing– It is the process of applying a protective (a) Handed snip (b) Levers
zinc coating to iron or steel, to prevent rusting. (c) Compass (d) Mallet
• The most common method is hot dip galvanizing in DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 20-04-2018
which steel sections are submerged in a both of molten Ans. (a): The snip used for cutting thin, soft sheet metal
zinc. is called handed snip.
Snip– Its structure and working principle are similar to
27. The type of snip used for trimming cylindrical that scissors. These are made of high carbon steel. Their
or conical work in sheet metal is......... shearing edges are hard and tempered. The overall
(a) lever sheer length of a snip reveals it size.
(b) bent snips 32. Sheet metal work is carried out only on metal
(c) curve cutting machine sheets, which are :
(d) snip (a) forged (b) cast
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (c) rolled (d) extruded
Ans. (b): Bent snips are used for trimming cylindrical
or conical work in sheet metal. Ans. (c) : Sheet metal work is done only on sheets of
metals which can be rolled i.e. that metal has malleable
• Lever shear are used to cut thicker sheets that properties.
cannot be cut with hand shears. 33. A sheet metal worker's anvil is known as
• Curve cutting machine is machine that cut all kinds (a) Stake (b) Hammer
of shapes and creations from materials. (c) Chisel (d) Snips
• Snips are hand tools used to cut sheet metal. ISRO Technician-B Fitter 02-06-2019
• It is also known as shears. Ans. (a) : A sheet metal worker's anvil is known as
stake.
28. The properties of a sheet metal vary depending
Stake– Stake is an anvil of sheet metal on which the
on the rolling direction of the sheet is called…. sheet is placed for bending, seaming or forming using a
(a) Folding (b) Bending hammer or mallet. This is a type of supporting and
(c) Cutting (d) Directionality forging tool. The stake head is also called horn. Stake is
RRB ALP Ranchi 19.01.2003 made of cast iron or cast steel.
Sheet Metal 678 YCT
34. The instrument used for quick checking of (a) G.I. wire (b) Thick sheet
sheet thickness (c) Sheet of rubber (d) Very thick sheet
(a) Feeler gauge RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
(b) Fillet gauge Ans : (b) Shears are used to cut thick sheets. It is the
(c) Drill gauge main tool of sheet metal shop.
(d) Standard wire gauge • One of its blades is fixed and the other blade move
BEML 2022 up and down. The moving blade is knife edge cutter
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 called the upper blade.
Ans. (d) : An instrument suitable for quick • This machine is operated by lever hence it is called
measurement of sheet thickness is a standard wire lever face shears.
gauge. 38. Snips are hand tools used to–
• It is used to measure the diameter and size of drill (a) Drill holes in metals
gauge straight shank twist drill. (b) Marking center of circle
• A feeler gauge is a tool used to measure gap width. (c) Cut sheet metal and other tough webs
It is mostly used in engineering to measure the (d) Measuring temperature in furnace
clearance between two parts. RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
35. If the density of mild steel is 7.8 g/cc, what is Ans. (c) :
the mass perimeter of a mild sheet of width • Snip hand tool is used to cut hard web and sheet
1000 mm and thickness 1 mm? metal.
(a) 7.8 kg (b) 7.8 g • Snips are a type of scissors for cutting iron sheets. It
(c) 78 kg (d) 78 g is used for cutting sheets of thickness up to 1.2 mm.
IOCL 2020
• Snips are made of high carbon steel, hand and
Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 tempered is its cutting blades are grinding at 80o.
Ans. (a) : Density = 7.8 g/cc = 7.8 × 10-3 g/mm3 Snips are divided into two parts on the basis of
l = 1 m = 1000 mm texture–
b = 1000 mm (1) Straight snip (2) Bent snip
t = 1 mm 39. Snips are also known as
V=l×b×t (a) shear
V = 1000 × 1000 × 1 (b) Dual test indicator
m (c) Bevel gauge
ρ= (d) protractor
V
V = 106 mm3 RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
m Ans. (a) : A snip also called a hand shear is used as a
ρ= pair of scissors to cut thin, soft metal sheets.
V
m = ρ × V = 7.8 × 10–6 × 106 kg • Snip are used to cut sheet metal up to 1.2 mm
= 7.8 kg thickness.
36. Which type of snip is suitable to cut curved 40. Which of the following is a common reason for
surfaces? using aluminium sheets?
(a) Straight snip (b) Aviation snip (a) Brightness (b) Lightness
(c) Scissor type snip (d) Bent snip (c) Dullness (d) Darkness
RRB ALP RAC 23.01.2019, Shift-I RRB ALP 23-01-2019, Shift-I
Ans : (d) Bent snip– Bent snip is suitable to cut curved NTPC Fitter 2016
surfaces. It is used for cutting small curves. Ans. (b) : The main reason for using aluminium sheet is
• It is also used for trimming cylindrical or conical because of its lightness.
work in sheet metal.
• Its specific gravity is 2.7 (relatively low) while the
strength is relatively high.
• Due to being light, it is used more in the part of the
aircraft.
• Its melting point is 660.3oC
Straight snip– Straight snip are used for making cuts • Bauxite is its ore.
and large external curves. Straight snips have thin 41. For riveting of aluminium rivet should be made
blades which are only strong on a vertical planes. of ..........
• It is only suitable for straight cuts. (a) Copper (b) Brass
(c) Wrought iron (d) Aluminium
Ans. (d) :A rivet made of aluminium is used for
riveting aluminium sheet. Aluminium is a light and soft
metal of white or gray colour. It's main ore is bauxite.
37. Shears are used to cut .......
Sheet Metal 679 YCT
• The specific gravity of aluminium is 2.7. Aluminium Ans : (a) Resin– It is mainly used in electrical work. it
is used to make automobile engine parts, electrical is used for soldering cooking utensils.
wires, furniture etc. it is a electrical conductor. • It melts between 80oC to 100oC.
42. Galvanized iron sheet is also called– • It is also called Biroza and also used for soldering
(a) Brass sheet (b) Tin sheet copper, brass sheets.
(c) Black iron sheet (d) GI sheet 47. Which of the following is not a form of flux :
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-III (a) Powder (b) Liquid
Ans. (d) : Galvanized iron sheet is known as GI sheet in (c) Lei (d) Gas
the market. Hence it is also called as GI sheet. (RRB Muzaffarpur ALP, 15.02.2009)
43. The most common type of a seam is– Ans : (d) Flux does not occur in the gaseous state. In
(a) Double groove seam welding flux act as a protective shield.
(b) Groove seam Flux is a chemical purify agent, flowing agent or
(c) Lap seam cleaning agent.
(d) Double seam Most commonly, it is used in metal joining and
RRB ALP Mechanic Diesel 23-01-2019, Shift-III metallurgy.
Ans. (c) : The easiest or most common type of joint in Some example of flux– Amonium chloride, zinc
metal sheets is made by a lap seam. chloride, hydrochloric acid, borax.
Lap seam– This is a standard joint. In this, a piece of 48. The zinc chloride flux is used for–
sheet is placed in between another piece in the form of a (a) Aluminium
fold. (b) Iron sheet
• Lap joint is used for joining cylindrical shaped top (c) Copper brass and tin sheet
and bottom to each other. (d) None of the above
Groove seam– This joint is used for joining two thin (Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
sheets to each other. This joint is used in a straight
Ans : (c) Zinc chloride flux is used for copper, brass
or curved surface. It is locked by a hand groover.
Double seam– This joint is similar to single seam, the and tin sheets.
only difference is that in this, the forward edge is • It is used for soldering.
bent upwards. It is the strongest joint. • A highly effective and active acid flux for
Double groove seam– This type of joint is similar to promoting wetting on many metals.
the dovetail joint in carpentry. It is used for roofing • Zinc chloride is corrosive type of flux.
and paneling. 49. The general angle for wire notch is 30o and for
44. In blanking operation the clearance provided coating wire with sheet, the distance it kept–
is: (a) 3½ D (b) 2 D
(a) 50% on punch and 50% on die (c) 3 D (d) 2½ D
(b) On die IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
(c) On punch (IOF Fitter, 2012)
(d) On die or punch depending on designer's Ans : (a) In sheet metal works the edges are cut at an
choice angle of 30o while laying the wire at the edges. This
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019 distance from where the notch starts is 3½ D times
Ans. (c) : Punching or blanking is a process in which diameter of the wire.
the punch removes a portion of material from the 50. Which metal sheet is used for making tank
piece or a strip of sheet metal. used for storing high corrosion acid and metal
• It is the small removed piece is discarded the sheet is soft and heavy?
operation is called punching. (a) Thin sheet (b) Aluminium sheet
• Whereas if the small removed piece is the useful part (c) G.I. sheet (d) Lead sheet
and the rest is scrap. The operation is called blanking. (RRB Bangalore ALP, 25.01.2004)
• The clearance will be provided on the punch in the Ans : (d) Lead sheet– The sheet made of metal is soft
blanking. and heavy, because there is no effect of acid on the
• Punch size = Blank size – 2x clearance. glass. Hence they are used for making tanks of highly
45. The small hole at notch corner is called– corrosive acids. It has properties of malleability and
(a) Drill hole (b) Relief hole softness.
(c) Crank stop hole (d) None of the above 51. It is white colour light sheet, highly resist
BHEL 2020 corrosion and friction and used for refrigerator
(NTPC Fitter, 2014) tray of light fixture window, electrical and
Ans: (c) A small hole is made at the corner of the notch, transport industries–
it is called crack stop hole. (a) Aluminium sheet
46. The melting point of resin is– (b) Lead sheet
(a) 800–1000C (b) 500–700C (c) Tin sheet
(c) 105 –120 C
0 0
(d) 1000–1300C (d) Wrought iron sheet
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 06.02.2005) (HAL Fitter, 2015)
Sheet Metal 680 YCT
Ans : (a) Aluminium sheet is that metal, which is a light 56. The ability of a matter to get deformed into
white coloured sheet. It is more resistant to corrosion and thin sheet is called–
rubbing/abrasion. It is used in refrigerator tray lighting (a) Hardness (b) Elasticity
fixture window, electrical and transport industries. Its (c) Malleability (d) Tensile
melting point is 660oC. It is obtained from bauxite ore. Noida Metro Maintainer Fitter 2017
52. Which metal sheet is used in dairy industry, Ans : (c) The ability of a material to be deformed and
food materials, chemical equipments and molded into thin sheets is called malleability. Due to
kitchen utensil? this property the material can be converted into thin
(a) Lead sheet (b) Stainless sheet sheets by hammer blow or rolling without breaking.
(c) G.I. sheet (d) Copper sheet 57. Key seat rule is used for–
DRDO Machinist.2016 (a) For key wedge marking on shaft or rod
(RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 11.11.2001) (b) For external measurement
Ans : (b) Stainless steel– It is used in daily industry, (c) For measure inside
food materials, chemical equipments and kitchen (d) For measure depth
utensils. NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
• Stainless steel is a corrosion resistant. It is primarily (CRPF Constable Tradesman, 2016)
made of iron and carbon. Ans: (a) The key seat rule is shaped like an angle iron
• It is an alloy of nickel chromium steel. having both beams at 90o spherical and hemispherical
• It is non prone to rusting. jobs which cannot be measured with ordinary rules
53. Which metal sheet is used in gutter expansion because this can be adjusted on those round things
joint that are made by rolling in hot & cold easily.
condition? • It is mostly used for drawing parallel line in length
(a) Stainless steel (b) Lead sheet on a job works of curvilinear shape and for taking
(c) G.I. sheet (d) Copper sheet
measurement of key way on a shaft.
(Sail Bokaro Steel Plant, 2016)
Ans : (c) G.I. sheet metal sheets are formed by rolling 58. Which part of hammer is made soft–
in hot and cold state. It is used for installation of gutter (a) Pin (b) Cheek
expansion joints. (c) Face (d) Eye hole
54. Which hammer is used for making groove in
sheet metal? Ans : (b) The cheek is the middle portion of the
(a) Mallet hammer head. The weight of the hammer is stamped,
(b) Ball peen hammer this portion of the hammer head is left soft.
(c) Cross peen hammer 59. Which hammer is used for sheet metal work?
(d) Clay hammer (a) Ball peen hammer
BDL Technician 2022 (b) Sledge hammer
(IOF Fitter, 2014) (c) Cross peen hammer
Ans : (c) Cross peen hammer– The face of this (d) Straight peen hammer
hammer is flat, whose peen remains in the direction (MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015)
perpendicular to the axis of the handle i.e. in this type of Ans : (a) Ball Peen Hammer– It is used for flattering
hammers cross are made at 10oC. It is mostly used for the metal on all the sides, striking a chisel and
shoulder hammering interval rounding stretching etc. A punch and levelling a sheet joint.
cross peen hammer is also used to made grooves on the 60. For soldering G.I. sheet .......... flux is used–
sheet and bend the sheet. (a) Ammonium chloride (b) Resins
55. In the sheet work the cutting force on the tool (c) Hydrochloride (d) None of these
can be reduced by– (RRB Chandigarh ALP, 14.09.2008)
(a) Grinding the cutting edge sharp Ans : (c) G.I. the sheet is soldered for which
(b) Increasing the hardness of the tool
hydrochloride flux is used.
(c) Increasing the hardness of the die
(d) Providing shear angle of the tool 61. Generally a good type of stake is made of–
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 (a) Cast iron, cast steel
Ans. : (d) In metal sheet work the cutting force on the (b) Pig iron
tool can be reduced by providing a shear angle. (c) High carbon steel
• When the thickness of the rolled metal is less than 6 (d) Wrought iron
mm, it is called sheet metal and above that, it is (RRB Ahmadabad ALP, 17.10.2004)
called plate. Ans : (a) Generally a good type of stake is made of Cast
• Sheet metal possesses a high ratio of surface area to iron, cast steel.
thickness. • Stake is an anvil of sheet metal on which the sheet
• Sheeting metal forming involves cutting the blanks is placed for bending, seaming or forming using a
from the sheet metal then bending or forming the hammer or mallet.
blanks or drawing them into desired shape. • This is a type of supporting and forming and
• This includes shearing, blanking, punching, forming tool.
bending, drawing, embossing, spinning etc. • The stake head is also called horn.
Sheet Metal 681 YCT
62. A stake whose end part is sharp and taper (a) Hatchet stake
which is used to bend metal sheet is– (b) Round bottom stake
(a) Round bottom stake (b) Hatchet stake (c) Beak stake
(c) Planishing stake (d) Half moon stake (d) Half moon stake
(RRB Malda ALP, 16.07.2006) (RRB Ranchi ALP, 21.09.2003)
Ans : (b) Hatchet stake is used for bending the sheet or Ans : (b) Round bottom stake is shown in the above
folding the edges of the sheet. The head (horn) of this figure.
stake is sharp, straight edge and beveled from one side. • The head of this stake is taper cylindrical.
63. In creasing iron groove/slots are made in series • It is used for bending the sheet round.
are used for– • To make the spherical of the sheet metal then round
(a) Taper sleeve making head stake are used.
(b) Making small sized pipes • The bottom of these stake pined in the earth.
(c) Edge folding
(d) For seaming 67. Write the name of stake shown in fig.–
Ans : (b) In creasing iron groove/slots are made in
series are used for making small sized pipes.
Creasing iron– Creasing iron is a type of stake.
• This has two horns. Both horns are rectangular in
shape. One horn is plain while the other horn as a (a) Horse stake
series of grooving slots. These groove are in (b) Hatchet stake
different sizes. (c) Funnel stake
64. A stake which is in the form of sharp case of (d) Creasing iron stake
arc of circle & taper at one side. It is used for (RRB Ajmer ALP, 05.06.2005)
mounting a flange to a metal plate– Ans : (a) Horse stake is shown in the above figure.
(a) Hatchet stake (b) Planishing stake
• In the horse stake both sides are supported.
(c) Half moon stake (d) Fluenal stake
(RRB Ajmer ALP, 10.10.2004) • Square or rectangular holes are made on both head
of horse for cutting the slot in sheet metals.
Ans : (c) Half moon stake is in the form of an arc of
core circle and is slanted. It is used to mount the flange • Mainly horse stake are used for finishing the job.
on the disc of metal horn of stake is half circular type. • Be carefully during use of horse due long arms.
65. Write the name of stake shown in fig.– 68. This punch is used for making hole in thin
sheets, leather, plastic, cork etc. & for gasket
seat–
(a) Solid punch (b) Pin punch
(c) Centre punch (d) Hollow punch
DRDO Machinist.2016
(RRB Mumbai/Bhopal ALP, 05.01.2003)
(a) Beak stake Ans : (d) Hollow punch is used for slitting through thin
(b) Creasing iron stake sheets, leather, cork etc. and for gasket seat that is
(c) Hatchet stake available or varies size.
(d) Half moon stake Hollow punch– A hollow punch is used for making
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) cylindrical holes in non metallic substances.
Ans : (a) Beak stakes uses in the sheet metal shop. • They are available sizes starting with 1 mm and
Where the sheet metal bend in shape of metal funnel or varying from 1.5 to 3 mm.
tapered bed because horn of stake is in the shape of • It has a knurling in the upper part of its body for a
conical. good grip which has a provision for removing waste
• It also called beak iron stake. pieces.
• This stake has two horns, one is taper and other is 69. Hammer is used for stretching metal sheet
rectangular. along striking line in only one direction–
• The sharp taper end is used for making taper objects (a) Cross peen hammer
and the rectangular end for seaming, riveting etc. (b) Ball peen hammer
66. Write the name of stake shown in fig.– (c) Straight peen hammer
(d) Sledge hammer
Ans : (a) Cross peen hammers is used to spread off the
metal by supporting of striking line in only one
direction.
• The axis of peen is at 90o to the handle due to the
cross of its axis, it is called cross peen hammers.
Sheet Metal 682 YCT
70. Which hammer is used to stretch metal sheet • A scratch awl is basically a steel spike with its tip
along striking line at 90o in only one direction? sharpened to a fine point.
(a) Ball been hammer
(b) Cross peen hammer
(c) Sledge hammer
(d) Straight peen hammer
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) Scratch awl
Ans : (d) Straight peen hammer– Straight peen 75. For drawing a big size circle on sheet .......... is
hammer is used to stretch metal sheet along striking used–
line at 90o in only one direction. (a) Spring compass (b) Wing compass
• It is used for flattening the meal perpendicular to the (c) Trammel (d) All of the these
striking line. (IOF Fitter, 2013)
• The peen of this hammer is parallel to the handle. Ans : (c) Trammel– It is used for drawing a big size
71. Mallet is used while making hollow panel– circle on sheet.
(a) Boxing mallet (b) And faked mallet • A trammel is an enlarged form of a divider. It has a
(c) Simple mallet (d) None of the above circular or flat rod which is called a beam or
(RRB Ranchi ALP, 04.09.2005) trammel bar.
Ans : (a) Boxing mallet are used to making hollow • This beam is fitted with two sliding heads. The
panel. Face of this mallet is the shape of edge. heads can be used in many ways by fitting them
with different types of points or parts.
• Mallet is a tool used for importing force on another
• A trammel is used for taking internal and external
object, often made of wood, that is smaller than a measurement or for drawing a circle on job that has
maul or beetle and usually has a relatively large been drilled.
head. 76. Which hammer is used for getting best
72. For stretching or spreading of sheet metal finishing in sheet metal work?
.......... mallet is used– (a) Sludge hammer
(a) Simple mallet (b) Core shape mallet (b) Ball peen hammer
(c) Boxing mallet (d) All of these (c) Raw hide hammer
(IOF Fitter, 2014) (d) Cross peen hammer
Ans : (b) Core shape mallet are used for stretching i.e. Ans : (c) Raw hide hammer– The body of this type of
spread of the sheets. hammers is made of steel and bed side of head strike the
• Face of core shape mallet is semispherical and head raw lather particles.
is bevel shaped. • Raw hide hammer are used to finishing the sheet
73. Mallet is not made of which of the following metal work.
materials?
(a) Raw leather, wood (b) Hard rubber, lead 2. Joint of Sheet Metal
(c) Copper, brass (d) Steel
(RRB Kolkata ALP, 02.11.2008) 77. The radius of the least roundness with which
Ans : (d) Mallet– It is called a shaft hammer which is the sheet can be bend without occurrence of a
used for striking thin sheets. It is made of hard wood, crack in the outside of the bend in sheet metal
hard rubber, copper, brass, lead, nylon etc. However, fabrication :
wood is used commonly for making hammer in sheet (a) Maximum Bend Radius
metal. (b) Average Bend Radius
(c) Least Bend Radius
74. For drawing lines scratch awl is used, its point
(d) None of these
is taper grind at–
(a) 30 to 40o (b) 15 to 20o
(c) 25 to 30 o
(d) 5 to 15o Ans. (c) : Least bend radius– The radius of the least
roundness with which the sheet can be bend without
occurrence of a crack in the outside of the bend in sheet
Ans : (b) Scratch awl is used to draw the line on sheet metal fabrication is called least bend radius.
metal. Point of it is tapered grind at angle of 15o to 20o. During bending outer fiber is under tension and inner
The point of it are hard and tempered. fiber is under compression. A neutral fiber suffer no
Scratch awl– A scratch awl is a woodworking layout such stresses either compression or tension.
and point making tool. It is used to scribe a line to be Note– The smallest radius of any bend in a sheet should
followed by a hand saw or chisel when making be at least equal to the thickness of the sheet is 1 mm,
woodworking joints and other operations. the minimum bend radius should be 1 mm.
Sheet Metal 683 YCT

78. The following are methods of edge stiffening in 81. Identify the soldered lap joint used in sheet
sheet metal plates : metal work to make the joint stronger and leak
(a) Hem and wire edge proof
(b) Built up stiffening
(c) Adhesive bonding (a) Lap (b) Joggled Lap
(d) Pulsation stiffening (c) Abutting Lap (d) Corner Lap
Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022 ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
Ans. (a) : Hem and wire edge are methods of edge Ans. (b) : It is the easiest designed for aligning loads.
stiffening in sheet metal plates. • This type of joint can be made by simply bending
In the hemming process the edge of the sheet is folded the adherents. It also provides a surface to which it
over itself which eliminates the sharp edges and is easy to apply pressure.
prevents damage/wear of the edge. 82. In sheet metal, an operation of closing down
The edges of thin sheet metals can be made safe and the edges of the plates and heads of the rivets to
given additional rigidity by folding the top rim around a form a metal to metal joint is called
thick wire to create a wired edge type if hem. (a) Caulking (b) Plugging
79. What type of development method is used to (c) Sealing (d) None of the above
develop circular cone? ISRO Technician B (Fitter) 03-11-2022
(a) Straight line method Ans. (a) : In sheet metal, operation of closing down the
(b) Radial line method edges of the plates and heads of the rivets to form a
(c) Rectangular method metal to metal joints is called caulking.
(d) Square line method • Caulking is an operation in which the other bevelled
Cochin Shipyard Fitter (Sheet metal) 13-06-2022 edge of the plates are hammered and driven in by a
Ans. (b) : Radial line method is used to develop circular caulking tool.
cone. • The caulking tool is in the form of a blunt edged
Radial line development– It is employed for pyramids chisel.
and single curved surfaces like cones in which the apex • The outer edges of the plates are bevelled.
is taken as centre and the slant edge or generator as • This bevelled edges of the plates are caulked.
radius of its development. 83. Seams are commonly used in-
(a) sheet metal working
(b) furniture making
(c) construction work
(d) riveting
Ans. (a) : Seams are commonly used in sheet metal
80. Type of weld used to join two overlapping working.
plates which are having cut outs • Seams are made to join the edges of the sheet. The
(a) Bread weld (b) Butt weld edge of the sheets to be joined are folded in a special
(c) Plug or Slot Weld (d) Groove weld way and stuck together.
ISRO Technician B (RAC) 03-11-2022 84. Black sheet is made of -
Ans. (c) : (a) mild steel (b) wrought iron
(c) both (a) and (b) (d) none of the above
Ans. (c) : Black sheet is made of mild steel and
wrought iron.
• Black sheet is bluish black in colour.
• This sheet is available in size of 3 m × 1 m, 2.5 m ×
1.2 m, 2.5 × 1 m.
• They are prone in rusting.
Plug or slot weld :- A plug weld, also known as a • Black iron sheet is softened before use and does not
rosette weld is a process that fuses two metals together have a coating.
by making a weld inside small circular holes. This • It is commonly used for making tanks, pipes etc.
typically involves two overlapping sheets or pieces of 85. Cutting angle of a dot punch is -
metal with the holes in the top one the weld fills the (a) 30o (b) 45o
hole in the uppermost material, joining the two work- (c) 60 o
(d) 75o
pieces together. NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
Sheet Metal 684 YCT
Ans. (c): Dot punch–It is made of cast steel. Its body is Ans. (a) : Grooved seam–The two edges of the sheet
hexagonal and point angle is kept 60º. Due to decrease are folded in such a way that they get stuck together.
in angle, the points are made deeper and of less After that the joint is locked by groover.
diameter. It is used to place a witness mark for • Final width of grooved seam = W + 3T
permanent marking or sometimes to mark the center of W = width
a circle. T = thickness.
89. Which of the following sheet metal operations
is used for removing the craters on the surface
of sheet?
(a) Seaming (b) Denting
(c) Drawing (d) Burring
Ans. (b) : Denting is used for removing the craters on
the surface of sheet.
Seaming is used for joining the edges of sheets.
The edges of sheets to be joined are folded in such a
86. Match the following – special way and stuck together.
1. Lead (A) Prevents corrosion Drawing–It is sheet metal operation in which metal is
2. Oiling (B) To check thickness or stretched and formed using tensile force.
diameter of sheet Burring–It is a press working technique to punch a
3. Funnel stake (C) One of the heaviest pilot hole on a workpiece.
metals 90. Which of the following operations is used for
4. Trammel (D) Grooving conical objects removing the signs of mallet on the sheet metal
5. Wire gauge (E) To draw large size arcs surface?
(a) 1(A), 2(C), 3(E), 4(B), 5(D) (a) Drawing (b) Denting
(b) 1(D), 2(B), 3(E), 4(C), 5(A) (c) Planishing (d) Punching
(c) 1(B), 2(D), 3(A), 4(E), 5(C) RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
(d) 1(C), 2(A), 3(D), 4(E), 5(B) Ans. (c) : Planishing is used for removing the signs of
NALCO Operator Boiler 2021 mallet on the sheet metal surface.
Ans. (d) : Drawing is a sheet metal operation in which metal is
Lead - One of the heaviest metals stretched and formed using tensile force.
Oiling - Prevents corrosion Denting is used for removing the craters on the surface
Funnel stake - Grooving conical objects of the sheet.
Trammel - To draw large size arcs Punching–It is a process in which the punch removes a
Wire gauge - To check thickness or diameter of sheet portion of material from a strip of sheet metal.
87. Which type of punch can be used for making 91. A process, which can be used for forming
holes into the sheet metal? shallow dish and bowl forms, is called -
(a) Solid punch (b) Hollow punch (a) hallowing (b) denting
(c) Pin punch (d) All of the above (c) planishing (d) seaming
HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022 RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
Ans. (d) : Solid punch, hollow punch, pin punch, dot Ans. (a) : Hallowing operation is used for forming
punch, center punch, drift punch all these punches are shallow dish and bowl forms.
used for making holes into the sheet metal. Denting is used for removing the craters on the surface
Solid punch is used to make a hole through a sheet or of sheet.
piece of hot iron. Through this, it is impossible to make Planishing is used for removing the signs of mallet on
holes of the same size. the sheet metal surface.
Hollow punch–This punches are hollow from inside Seaming is used for joining the edges of sheets.
and used for making large holes in soft materials. 92. _______ sheet is used for making aeroplane
Pin punch–This punch is used to remove dowel pin or parts due to its light weight.
taper pin stuck in the job. (a) Copper (b) Lead
88. The final width of grooved seam will have a (c) Tin (d) Aluminium
minimum value in terms of width (w), thickness RRB ALP Ajmer 23.05.2004
(T) given by -
(a) W + 3T (b) W + 2T Ans. (d) : Aluminium sheet is used for making
aeroplane parts due to its light weight.
(c) 2W + T (d) 3W + 2T
• Al is light in weight and density.
RRB ALP Ahamadabad 2014 • It is resistant to water and corrosion.
Sheet Metal 685 YCT

93. Which of the following can be used for Ans. (b) : Double hem is shown in figure.
protecting the metallic sheet from corrosion? Double hem–In a job made with thin sheets, the edges
(a) Oiling are given double folding. Due to this the thickness of
(b) Metallic coating the hem becomes more, it becomes thicker, more safer
(c) Chemical passivation and more strong.
(d) All of the above 97. The property of sheet metal due to which the
RRB ALP Allahabad 03.08.2008 sheet can be rolled in one direction is called -
Ans. (d) : Methods of prevent corrosion– (a) folding (b) bending
1. Oiling–When some oil is applied to the surface of an (c) riveting (d) directionality
iron object, the air and moisture cannot come into RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
contact with it, hence corrosion is prevented. Ans. (d) : The property of sheet metal due to which the
2. Metallic coating–Galvanizing, electroplating, sheet can be rolled in one direction is called
anodising and alloying are different methods in which directionality.
metal is coated with non-corrosive metal. 98. A bending tool used in the sheet metal job is
3. Chemical passivation–It enhances the ability of heat shown in the figure below. Identify -
treated surfaces to prevent corrosion.
4. Painting–It prevents corrosion by coating the
surface with paints which protect iron from air and
moisture.
94. Identify the notch which is used in the sheet
metal work.
(a) Hatchet stake

(b) Round bottom stake
(c) Half-moon stake
(d) Funnel stake
(a) Slant notch (b) V-notch
(c) Square notch (d) Slit notch
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 Ans. (b) : Round bottom stake is shown in figure.
Round bottom stake is a straight shaped stake made of
Ans. (c) : Square notch is shown in given figure. cast steel. Its upper part is flat and circular. It is used for
• Square notch are cut at a corners of a square or heavy works.
rectangular box to bend it at 90º. Hatchet stake is suitable to fold the sheet straight.
• Slant notch is used where the single hem is folded at Half moon stake is used to fold the sheets in semi
90º. circular shape.
• V-notch is used for folding the flanges bend at 90º. Funnel stake is used to seam the conical shape jobs
95. G.I. sheet is coated with - from any damage.
(a) copper (b) zinc 99. The stake shown in following figure has two
(c) tin (d) lead horns, one is tapered and the other one is
RRB ALP Bangalore 25.01.2004 rectangular. Identify the stake.
Ans. (b) : Galvanized iron sheets are coated with zinc.
• It is a process of applying a protective zinc coating to
steel and iron in order to prevent it from rusting.
• GI sheets are used as a construction material for
infrastructure building.
96. Which hem is shown is the following figure?
(a) Creasing iron

(b) Hatchet stake
(a) Single hem (b) Double hem (c) Bick iron stake
(c) Wired hem (d) Locked hem (d) Round bottom stake
Sheet Metal 686 YCT
Ans. (b) : Hatchet stake– The head of the this stake is 104. Which stake is used for shaping and seaming of
straight, sharp and bent towards one side. It is used for funnel and tapered objects?
giving sharp bend to the sheets. It is used for bending (a) Hatchet stake (b) Half-moon stake
the corners of sheets and making box and pans by hand. (c) Funnel stake (d) Creasing stake
100. In the sheet metal work ______ is the strongest RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
joint, in which forward edge is bent upwards. Ans. (c) : Funnel stake is used for shaping and
(a) single seam (b) double seam seaming of funnel and tapered objects.
(c) lap seam (d) grooved seam • The shape of this stake is like a funnel. Its one end is
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 semicircular and other end pointed. It is used for
Ans. (b) : In the sheet metal work double seam is the seaming conical shaped objects.
strongest joint, in which forward edge is bent upwards.
105. The thickness of sheet metal is represented by a
Double seam–If the joint made of single seam is made series of numbers. It is called -
vertical, then this joint is called double seam. Bending
the edge more than once makes the joint stronger. (a) number size (b) gauge
(c) standard size (d) none of the above
101. In this stake, both ends are long. One end is
bent in one direction and at both the edges RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
square holes are made. Identify the stake. Ans. (b) : The thickness of sheet metal is represented
by a series of numbers. It is called gauge.
• The larger the gauge number, the thinner the metal is.
• Commonly used steel sheet metal ranges from 30
gauge to about 7 gauge.
106. The bent snip is used for -
(a) removing burr
(a) Bick iron stake (b) Funnel stake (b) making hole on the sheet
(c) Round bottom stake (d) Horse (c) folding the sheet
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 (d) cutting the sheet along the curved lines
Ans. (d) : Horse stake–In this stake, both ends are long RRB ALP Chennai 27.10.2002
one end is bent in one direction and at both the edges Ans. (d) : Bent ship–It is used for cutting the sheet
square holes are made. along the curved lines.
102. What is the purpose of using a hand groover • The cutting blade of a bent snip is made in a
during a sheet metal job? semicircular shape. This type of snip is used for cutting
(a) To lock the grooved seam curves in the sheet.
(b) To unlock the grooved seam • These are used for cutting the sheet in cylindrical or
(c) To strike on the sheet conical shape.
(d) To hold the sheet in position 107. Sheet metal process is only done on metal
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 sheets, which are -
Ans. (a) : Hand groover–After making the seam in the (a) forged (b) casted
sheet, it is necessary to lock properly otherwise the joint (c) rolled (d) none of the above
will become the loose and open. A groover is used to RRB ALP Gorakhpur 08.10.2006
close and lock the seam. Groover is used according to
Ans. (c) : Sheet metal process is only done on metal
the size of the seam.
sheets, which are rolled.
• For closing and locking with the help of a groover, the
seam is first placed on a support and closed with a • Sheet metal work has an important place in many
mallet. engineering and daily needs. Under this work, many
shapes are provided by using thin sheets of metal and
103. Which notch is used from the following, when
various types of engineering household and decorative
the job is made with a 90o bend?
items are manufactured
(a) Square notch (b) ‘V’ notch
(c) Wired notch (d) Slot notch 108. Least bend radius depends upon -
RRB ALP Chandigarh 15.07.2012 (a) thickness and material of the plate
(b) direction of the plate
Ans. (b) : ‘V’ notch–Notch is made by cutting on both
sides at 45º from the building line. It is used for turning (c) on working temperature
flanges bent at 90º. (d) all of the above
Square notch are cut at a corners of a square or RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009
rectangular box to bend it at 90º. Ans. (d) : Least bend radius depends on–
Slot notch is used where single hem is folded at 90º. 1. Thickness and material of the plate.
Wired notch is used to prevent the wired edge from 2. Direction of the plate
overlapping. 3. On the working temperature.
Sheet Metal 687 YCT

109. ––––––––– is used in fitting shop as well as for Ans. (a) : Dolly–It comes under the category of tool
sheet metal work. used in shaping sheet metal.
(a) Cold chisel (b) Hot chisel • It is used to give support to the rivet head.
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) All of the above • Its face has a cavity in which rivet head is fitted, so
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 12.10.2003 that it protects the rivet head.
Ans. (a) : Cold chisel is used in fitting shop as well as 114. Which one of the following is a type of hem as
for sheet metal work. shown in Fig.?
• It is used for cutting metals is cold conditions.
• The edge of cold chisel is hardened and tempered and
has an angle of about 60º.
Hot chisel is used for cutting metal in hot conditions.
• The edge of this chisel is 30º and hardening of the
edge is not necessary. (a) Single hem (b) Double hem
110. The distance from a given point on one thread (c) Wired edge (d) Locked hem
to a corresponding point on the next thread is RRB ALP Kolkata 02.11.2008
called
Ans. (b) : Double hem is shown in figure.
(a) Helix (b) Pitch
• It is made by folding the edges over twice to make it
(c) Lead (d) Travel smooth.
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 14.04.2002 • This is more thick and safe hem which has more
Ans. (b) : Pitch–It is the distance from a given point on strength.
one thread to a corresponding point on the next threads. 115. How will you specify the folding machine?
1 (a) Maximum length and thickness of sheet
Pitch =
T.P.I. (b) Maximum length of the machine
T.P.I. = Thread per inch. (c) Maximum thickness of the sheet
(d) Maximum width of the machine
Lead–The distance covered by a nut in one round is
called lead. RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005
Lead = Pitch × No. of starts. Ans. (a): Folding machine is a machine that can easily
fold long to long and thick to thick sheets. According to
111. Caulking and fullering are the operation done the capacity of the work, different capacity folding
to make riveted joints machine can be used. Sheets can be bent into a variety
(a) Flexible (b) Strong of shapes with this machine.
(c) Rust-proof (d) Leak-proof
116. Beak horn stake has a flat or nearly flat
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 21.10.2001 narrower ...............
Ans. (d) : Caulking and fullering is used to make joint (a) Horn (b) Sheet
leak proof. (c) Arrow (d) None of these
Caulking tool–It is used for closing down the edges of RRB ALP Kolkata 16.07.2006
the plate and heads of the rivets to form a metal to metal
Ans. (a) : Beak horn stake has a flat or nearly flat
joint.
narrower horn. The structure of this stake is similar to
Fullering tool–It is used for pressing the surface of the that of an anvil. It has a conical horn on one side and
edge of the plate. It helps to make fluid tight joints. flat base on another. The conical horn is used for
112. Which one of the following is a type of joining the funnel shaped objects while the flat base is
permanent fastener? used for punching riveting or straightening sheet metal.
(a) Cotter joint (b) Flange coupling 117. Blowhorn stake has two sizes of ..............
(c) Knuckle joint (d) Riveted joint (a) Horn (b) Sheet
RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006 (c) Round (d) None of these
Ans. (d) : Riveted joint is a type of permanent fastener. RRB ALP Kolkata 2014
Rivet– A rivet is a short cylindrical bar with a head Ans. (c) : Blowhorn stake has two sizes of round.
integral to it. • A special support is required to bend the stake sheets
• The rivet are used to make permanent fastening into various shapes. This special support is called a
between the plates. stake. Stakes are of different sizes according to
113. A dolly is the name given to a category of tools function.
used in
(a) Shaping sheet metal
(b) Soldering sheet metal
(c) Piercing sheet metal
(d) Testing sheet metal
Sheet Metal 688 YCT
118. Fig B is of ................ 123. The process by which the edges of the sheets
are made stronger and rigid is.........
(a) beading (b) over lapping parts
(c) edge stiffening (d) braising
(a) Prick Punch RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
(b) Combination Snips Ans. (c) : Edge stiffening–The process by which the
edges of the sheets are made stronger and rigid.
(c) Bulldog Snips
• Hems are used to create folds in sheet metal in order
(d) Compound Lever Shear to stiffer edges and create an edge safe to touch.
124. Identify the type of weld shown in figure
Ans. (b) : Combination snips is shown in figure.
• It is used for continuous, straight and curved cut.
• It is good for precise angles and for starting the cut.
119. In Lap Joint, Plates are kept ____.
(a) At straight angle (b) In butt positions
(c) Overlap position (d) at an angle
Ans. (c): In lap joint, plates are kept in overlap position.
Lap joint– Two members to be connected are (a) Butt weld (b) Fillet weld
overlapped and connected together or plates to be (c) Bead weld (d) Plug weld
fastened are placed one over the other and riveted by RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006
one or more rows of rivets such a joint is called lap Ans. (a) : Butt weld–When two plates are welded
joint. facing each other. In this 3 mm thick welding is done
120. Mention the type of stake joint in which on one side only and 3 to 5 mm thick is done on both
alternate clips are folded in opposite direction? the sides. Welding is done by making one 'V' from 5 to
(a) Zig-zag stake joint (b) Straight stake joint 10 mm thickness and two 'V' on thickness more that 10
(c) Parallel stake joint (d) Inclined stake joint mm.
RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001 125. Which type of pliers can be used for form
curves in light metal strips?
Ans. (a) : Stake joint–It is one of the folded joints and
is used in light weight. It is also called a joint. It is of (a) Flat nose pliers (b) End cutting pliers
two types– (c) Side cutting pliers (d) Round nose pliers
1. Straight stake joint RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003
2. Zigzag stake joint. Ans. (d) : Round nose pliers can be used for form
curves in light metal strips.
Zigzag stake joint–In this joints, clips are inserted in
the slots and alternate clips are folded in opposite • It's nose is circular. It is used for giving a loop
shape to wires and for bending light metal strips in a
direction.
curved shape.
121. Which is most commonly used stake in sheet • They are used in jwellery industry for making round
metal work ? joins or loops in wire.
(a) Bick iron stake (b) Half moon stake
126. Name of the joint shown in fig.–
(c) Funnel stake (d) Round bottom stake
Ans. (a) : Beak iron stake is used in sheet metal work.
Half moon stake is used for making flanges in utensils. (a) Joggled lap (b) Tee-lap
Funnel stake is used for making seam in conical (c) Corner lap (d) Abting lap
objects. UPRVUNL (Fitter) 05.04.2021, 9:00 AM-12:00 PM
Round bottom stake is used for heavy work. Ans. (d) : Abting lap joint is shown in given figure,
there are many types of joint are used.
122. A stamping process that produces a shallow These are following types–
relief design on sheet metal is..........
1. Butt joint 2. Lap joint 3. Tee joints 4. Plug joints
(a) tinning (b) embossing
5. Strip joints 6. Edge joints 7. Corner joints.
(c) forming (d) triangulation
127. A bending machine is used for-
RRB ALP Mumbai 14.06.2009 (a) For cutting metal sheet
Ans. (b) : Embossing is a stamping process that (b) For shaping the metal sheets into cylindrical
produces a shallow relief design on sheet metal. (c) To turn burrs on circular disc
• It is a operation of forming impressions of figures, (d) To make depression in metal
letters or designs on sheet metal. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
Sheet Metal 689 YCT
Ans. (b) : A bending machine is used for shaping of the 133. The minimum value of 'G' shown in joint of
metal sheets into cylindrical shape. figure–
• Bending machine also called a forming machine.
• Purpose of bending machine is to assemble a bend
on a workpiece, a bending is manufactured by using
a bending tool during a linear or rotating move.
128. To connect the lower ends to the body of a
vertical container :
(a) W+2T (b) W+3T
(a) Dovetail seam (b) Grooved seam
(c) Lap seam (d) Single seam (c) W+3.5T (d) W+2.5T
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 (RRB Chennai ALP, 06.06.2010)
Ans. (d) : A single seam joint is used to connect the Ans : (b) A = w + 3T
lower ends to the body of a vertical container. Where, A = Length of allowance for groove seam
• Single seam joints also called pond down joint. W = Single width of folding edge
• Dovetail joints is commonly used to join the sides 3T = Three times of jama sheet
of a drawer to the front. Where, A = It is shown by G in figure.
129. Sheet metals are joined by ............. 134. P is calculated in panned down joint–
(a) Welding (b) Soldering
(c) Cooling (d) Heating
Ans. (b) : Soldering is a process of joining the two or
more metals by using of filler metal (solder) and
heat.
• Filler metals having lower melting point temperature
than the adjoining metals. The soldering temperature (a) 2W+1.5T (b) 2W+T
is below the 450oC. (c) 2W+2T (d) 2W+2.5T
130. Two corners are joint by ............ (in sheet metal (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 11.10.2009)
work) Ans : (c) A = 2W+2T
(a) Grooving (b) Bending Where, A = Length of allowance for single groove
(c) Hemming (d) Seaming seam
RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III 2W = Two times of folding edge's width
Ans : (d) In sheet metal work two corner of metal sheet 2T = Two times of width of jama sheet
are joined by seaming operation. Where, A = It is shown in figure by 'P'.
• Seaming is a self locking process generally seaming 135. 'K' is calculated by ........... in knocked up joint–
process used in production of cylindrical or conical
body metal sheet.
• Seam joint done in internal or external.
131. The operation of cutting a sheet of metal in a
straight line along the length–
(a) Plunging (b) Notching
(c) Slitting (d) Forming
Ans : (c) The operation of cutting a sheet of metal in a (a) 2W+3T (b) 2W+2T
straight line along the length is called slitting. (c) 2W+3.5T (d) 2W+2.5T
• In slitting operation, cutting straight lines along the (IOF Fitter, 2016)
length is sheet. Ans : (a) A = 2w+3T
• No scarp material is produced. Where, A = Length of allowance for double grooves
132. Trimming is the process associate with : seam
(a) Press work (b) Forging 2W = Two time of folding edge
2T = Three times of width of jama sheet
(c) Electro plating (d) Machining
Where, A = It is shown in figure by K
136. Which type of edge is produced to beautify and
Ans : (a) Trimming operation– It is a process of press strengthen a spherical and long object?
work and it is also like as blanking operation. (a) Wired edge (b) Double hem
• Trimming operation is a process to remove the (c) Single hem (d) Triple hem
excess materials on blank or component of corner. DMRC Maintainer Fitter 15-2-2017 8.30 am
Sheet Metal 690 YCT
Ans : (a) Wired edge is produced to beautify and

strengthen spherical and long object. 3. Type of rivet and Rivet joint
• Wire gauge is used to measured the diameter of
wire. 141. Rivet is a type of_______.
137. Single V and single U joints are used for sheet (a) Welding electrode (b) Mechanical fastener
about– (c) Marketing device (d) Holding device
Ans. (b) : Rivet is a type of mechanical fastener. During
installation, the rivet is placed in a punched or drilled
hole and tail is deformed to weld the rivet in plate.
(a) 4W+T (b) 4W+2T
(c) 4W+1.5T (d) 4W+4T
BEML 2022
Ans : (d) A = 4W+4T
Where, A = Length of allowance for double grooves
seam Diameter of rivet (d) = 1.2 × t
4W = Four times of width of folding edges Length of rivet (L) = t + 1.5 × d
4T = Four times of width of jama sheet Where, t → Thickness of rivet
A = It is shown in figure by 'C' d → Diameter of rivet.
138. Single V and single U joints are used for sheet 142. Countersunk is a type of_______
about– (a) Forging method (b) Welded joint
(a) 10-15 mm thickness (b) 5-10 mm thickness (c) Threads (d) Rivet head
(c) 15-20 mm thickness (d) 3-5 mm thickness UPRVUNL TG-2 Fitter 22.12.2022
UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015 Ans. (d) : Countersunk is a type of rivet head.
Ans : (b) In the butt welds, the plate edges do not Different type of rivet head–
require bevelling if the thickness of plate is less than 5
mm. If the plate thickness is 5 mm to 12.5 mm, the
edges should be bevelled to V or U groove and plate
having thickness above 12.5 mm should have a V or U-
groove on both sides.
139. Which type of gear is used to transmit motion
between shafts installed at different angles with Counter sunk Snap head
each other?
(a) Bevel gears (b) Rack and pinion
(c) Spur gears (d) Hypoid gears
Ans : (a) Bevel gears– Bevel gears are used to transmit
the power of two shaft at an angles.
• Bevel gears change the direction of motion. Flat head Pan head
• Bevel gears has inclined straight teeth for power 143. The height of the snap head rivet is
transmission. standardized to
(a) 0.5 × diameter of rivet
140. The process of joining two sheets together is
(b) 0.7 × diameter of rivet
called–
(c) 0.9 × diameter of rivet
(a) Jointing (b) Hem
(d) 1.1 × diameter of rivet
(c) Seam (d) Notching
IOCL 2020 NTPC Fitter 2016
(BHEL Hyderabad Fitter, 2014) Ans. (b) : Snap head rivet is the most commonly used
Ans : (c) Seam is a process of joining of sheet metal. from and it give a very strong joint, height of the snap
• Seam is a type of joint that used in sheet metal head rivet is standardized to 0.7 times the diameter of
works for joining purpose. rivet.
• Hemming is also like a seam joint that is commonly 144. The longitudinal joint in a boiler shell is usually
used to reinforce an edge, hide conned goods, on (a) Butt joint
amusement part cars metal roofing and automotive (b) Lap joint
industry. (c) Butt joint with two cover plates
• In hem works metal sheet edges rolled over on to (d) Butt joint with single cover plates
itself. DSSSB Draughtsman (Mech.) 03-11-2022
Sheet Metal 691 YCT
Ans. (c): The longitudinal joint in a boiler shell is Ans. (a) : The minimum distance between the rivets to
usually butt joint with two cover plates drive the rivets without interference.
The plate of the boiler shell is bent to from the ring and • Rivet interference is defined as the amount the rivet
two edges of the plate are joined by a longitudinal butt expands the role during the forming process.
joint. This longitudinal joint is usually a double-strip
triple-riveted butt joint. • The minimum pitch should not be less than 2.5 times
Diameter of rivets-using urwin's is empirical formula d the nominal diameter of the rivet.
= 6 t (t > 8mm). 149. Which of the following happens in hot riveting
Boilers and pressure vessels are subjected to process?
circumferential and longitudinal tensile stresses. (a) It creates non permanent joint
145. A joint has 10 rivets of 4 mm dia each. Find out (b) Slag is produced which requires the use of
the shear area. flux
(a) 40π (b) 10π (c) Fusion of plate material on joints
(c) 160π (d) 4π (d) It creates leak proof joints
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) JMRC Maintainer (Fitter) 05–02-2021
Ans. (a) : Given, Ans. (d) : Hot riveting is a process that joins two
n = 10 metals permanently at specific points & joints created
d = 4 mm by hot riveting is leak proof.
Shear area of solid rivet • In hot riveting, rivet end is heated external means
d
2
heating temperature lies around 2/3rd of melting point of
A=n×π×   rivet material.
2
2 • Due to such heating, material becomes soft & plastic
4
= π × 10 ×   and thus lower upsetting force is required.
2 150. Identify the type of riveted joint shown in the
A = 40π figure.
146. Identify the false statement about riveting of
two plates together :
(a) Caulking is done on the edges of the plates
(b) Caulking is done on the edges of the plates as
well as that of the rivet heads
(c) Fullering is done on the edges of the plates as
well as that of the rivet heads (a) Lap joint
(d) Fullering is done on the edges of the plates (b) Single strap butt joint
ISRO VSSC (Fitter) 14-07-2021 (4:30-6:30 pm) (c) Double strap butt joint
BHEL 2020 (d) Double riveted lap joint
Ans. (c) : Riveting is a forging process, that may be RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007
used to join parts together by way of a metal part called
a rivet. Ans. (c) : Double strap butt joint is shown in figure.
When riveting of two plate together, caulking is done on Butt joint–A butt joint is that in which the main plates
the edges of the plate as well as that of the rivet heads, are kept in alignment butting each other and cover plate
and fullering is done on edge of the plate. (i.e. strap) is placed on one side or on both sides of main
147. What is the name of tool is used to support the plates.
head rivet? In a single strap butt joints, the edges of main plates
(a) Dolly (b) Drift butt against each other and only one cover plate is
(c) Rivet set (d) Rivet snap placed on one side of main plates and then riveted
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 together.
Ans. (a): Dolly is used to support the head of the rivet In a double strap butt joints, the edges of main plates
which is already formed. butt against each other and two cover plates are placed
• It also use to prevent damage to the shape of the rivet on both sides of main plates and then riveted together.
head.
151. Which of the following reasons is responsible
• It is a type of cauling tool which have a long or short
offset nose. for crushing of metal in the riveted joint?
(a) Thickness of plates is more
148. What is the minimum distance between the
rivets to drive the rivets without interference? (b) Thickness of plates is less
(a) 2 D (b) 2.5 D (c) Diameter of rivet is too large
(c) 3 D (d) 3.5 D (d) Diameter of rivet is too small
HSSC Fitter 09-08-2021 RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
Sheet Metal 692 YCT
Ans. (c) : Crushing failure in riveted joint occurs Ans. (c) : Flat head rivet is used for light works.
when diameter of rivet is too large. • This type of rivet is used in fabrication work of thin
• The crushing of plate or rivet is the phenomenon of sheets, in place where a projection head is incorrect.
becoming an oval shape of rivet which causes the joints
to become loose and failure of the rivet to occur.
152. Which of the following reasons is responsible
for shearing of rivet in a riveted joint?
(a) Diameter of the rivet is too small
(b) Diameter of the rivet is too large
(c) Thickness of plates vary 157. A rivet is specified by the diameter of its-
(d) Pitch of the holes is too small (a) head (b) tail
RRB ALP Patna 2014 (c) shank (d) none of the above
Ans. (a) : Shearing failure occurs in riveted joints when RRB ALP Ranchi 21.09.2003
diameter of rivet is too small. Ans. (c) : • Rivet is specified by the diameter of its
Cause of failure of riveted joint– shank.
• Due to crushing of the plates or rivets • Rivet is a short cylindrical bar with a head integral to
• Due to shearing of rivets it.
• Due to tearing of the plate across a row of rivets • Rivets are used to make permanent fastening between
• Due to tearing of plate at an edge. plates.
153. Which of the following reasons is responsible • Riveting joints are of two types–
for splitting of the metal in the riveted joint? 1. Butt joint
(a) Pitch of the rivets is too large 2. Lap joint
(b) Holes of the rivets are drilled too near from • A rivet is consist of head, body and tail.
the edge of the plate 158. In riveted joints, the pitch of rivet should be
(c) Pitch of the rivets is too small three times of rivet diameter. If the pitch of
(d) Holes of the rivets are drilled to far from the rivet is too small, it will-
edge of the plate (a) lead to gaps
RRB ALP Ranchi 04.09.2005 (b) be difficult for riveting
Ans. (b) : • Splitting of the metal in the riveted joint (c) split the edge of joint
occurs when holes of the rivets are drilled too near from (d) tear the metal along the centre line of the
the edge of the plate. rivets
• To avoid splitting of the edges, the distance from the RRB ALP Secunderabad 06.06.2010
edge of the metal to the center of any rivet should be Ans. (d): In riveted joints, the pitch of rivet should be
atleast twice the diameter of the rivet. three times of rivet diameter. If the pitch of rivet is too
small, it will tear the metal along the centre line of the
154. ___ is used to give proper size to the rivet head. rivets.
(a) Rivet drift (b) Rivet snap
159. Which type of rivet is used for structural
(c) Dolly (d) Flatter applications?
RRB ALP Ranchi 08.07.2007 (a) Pan head (b) Snap head
Ans. (b) : Rivet snap is used to give proper size to the (c) Mushroom head (d) Counter sunk head
rivet head. MP ITI Training Officer 08.11.2016 (Shift-I)
• It is used to provide uniform size and shape on both RRB ALP Secunderabad 11.11.2001
sides of the rivet. Ans. (b) : Snap head rivet is used for structural work.
155. Riveting is ______fastening. Flat head rivet is used for light work.
(a) permanent (b) temporary Pan head rivet is used for heavy fabrication work.
(c) semi-permanent (d) none of the above
Ans. (c) : Rivet is a short cylindrical bar with a head
integral to it. The rivets are used to make permanent
fastening between plates.
• Though there are many types of rivet heads, yet the
snap heads are employed for structural works and Snap head Flat head Pan head
machine riveting. 160. For riveting aluminium sheets, the material of
156. _____ head rivet is used for light works. rivet should be-
(a) Oval (b) Mushroom (a) Aluminium (b) Copper
(c) Flat (d) Fabricated (c) Brass (d) Wrought iron
Sheet Metal 693 YCT
Ans. (a) : • It is customary to use rivets of same metal 164. Which rivet joint is shown in the following
as that of the parts that are being joined together. figure?
• Therefore, for riveting aluminium sheets, the material
of rivet should be aluminium.
• Rivets are generally specified by diameter its shank.
• Rivet is consists of three parts–Head, Body and Shank.
161. The diameter of rivet should be-
(a) 1.2 t (b) 0.2 t (a) Double strap butt joint
(c) t (d) None of the above (b) Single strap butt joint
RRB ALP Siliguri 2014 (c) Double riveted lap joint
Ans. (a) : • Diameter of rivet (d) = 1.2t (d) Single riveted lap joint
t = thickness of plate (except counter sunk) RRB ALP Ahamadabad 17.10.2004
• Length of rivet (l) = t + 1.5d Ans. (d) : Single riveted lap joint is shown in figure.
d = diameter of rivet • A single riveted lap joint is that in which there is a
l = length of plate single rows of rivets.
• A double riveted lap joint is that in which there are
two rows of rivets.
165. Identify the labeled part 'X' in the following
figure.
162. The distance between the centre of rivet hole to

nearest edge of the plate, is called-
(a) Pitch (b) Margin
(c) Diagonal pitch (d) Length
Ans. (b) : Important terms used in rivet joints–
Pitch–It is the distance from centre of one rivet to the
center of the next rivet measured parallel to the seam. (a) Rivet head (b) Dolly
Back pitch–It is the perpendicular distance between the (c) Snap (d) Rivet set
center lines of the successive rows. RRB ALP Ajmer 05.06.2005
Diagonal pitch–It is the distance between the centers of Ans. (c) : Given part 'X' is rivet snap.
the rivets in adjacent rows of zig-zag riveted joints. • Snap is used to give proper size to the rivet head.
Margin–The distance between center of rivet hole to • It is used to provide uniform size and shape on both
the nearest edge of the plate. sides of the rivet.
163. Which rivet joint is shown in the following 166. Identify the labeled part 'X' in the following
figure? figure.
(a) Double strap butt joint

(b) Single strap butt joint
(c) Double riveted lap joint
(d) Single riveted lap joint
(a) Rivet head (b) Dolly
Ans. (c) : Double riveted lap joint is shown in figure.
(c) Snap (d) Rivet set
• A lap joint is that in which one plate overlaps the other
and the two plates are riveted together. RRB ALP Ajmer 10.10.2004
• A single riveted lap joint is that in which there is a Ans. (d) : Given part 'X' is rivet set.
single rows of rivets. • Rivet set is a hollow punch. The stem of the rivet goes
• A double riveted lap joint is that in which there are into its hole. It is used to bring both the sheets very
two rows of rivets. close to each other.
Sheet Metal 694 YCT

167. Identify the rivet head shown in the following Ans. (c) : Snap head rivet is shown in figure.
figure. Snap head rivet is used for structural work.
Flat head rivet is used for light work.
Pan head rivet is used for heavy fabrication work.
171. Identify the tail from parts of the rivet shown
in the following figure.
(a) Flat head (b) Snap head

(c) Pan head (d) Conical head
Ans. (c) : Pan head is shown in figure.
• Pan head rivet is used for heavy fabrication work.
• Flat head rivet is used for light work.
• Snap head rivet is used for structural work.
168. There are different types of fasteners. Identify RRB ALP Bangalore 08.07.2007
the fastening device shown in the following Ans. (c) : The part C is shown in the figure is called
figure. tail.
• Rivet is short cylindrical bar with a head integral to it.
• Rivets are used to make permanent fastening between
plates.
• Rivet is generally specified by diameter of shank.
• Rivet is consist of three parts–Head, Body and tail.
(a) Machine screw (b) Stud

(c) Bolt (d) Rivet
Ans. (d) : Rivet– A rivet consist of a cylindrical shank
with a head at one end. This head is formed on shank by
an upsetting process. In rivet, the closing head is called
point. The cylindrical portion of the rivet is called shank 172. Which rivet joint is shown in the following
or body and lower portion of the shank is known as tail. figure?
169. Which type of rivet joint is used to join the end
of one sheet which is placed on the edge of
another sheet?
(a) Lap joint (b) Butt joint
(c) Knocked up joint (d) Grooved seam joint (a)
Double strap butt joint
RRB ALP Allahabad 09.12.2007 (b)
Single strap butt joint
Ans. (b) : Butt Joint– A butt joint is that in which the (c)
Double riveted lap joint
main plates are kept in alignment butting (i.e. touching) (d)
Single riveted lap joint
each other and a cover plate (i.e. strap) is placed either RRB ALP Bangalore 15.07.2012
on one side or on both sides of the main plates. Ans. (b) : Single strap butt joint is shown in figure.
170. What is the name of rivet head shown in the • In a single strap butt joint, the edges of the main plates
following figure? butt against each other and only one cover plate is
placed on one side of the main plates and then riveted
together.
• In a double strap butt joint, the edges of main plates
but against each other and two cover plates are placed
on both sides of the main plates and then riveted
together.
173. ______ is used to set alignment of the hole.
(a) Mushroom head (b) Flat head (a) Drift (b) Snap
(c) Snap head (d) Counter sunk head (c) Rivet set (d) Dolly
Sheet Metal 695 YCT
Ans. (a) : Drift is used to set alignment of the hole. Ans. (b) : The minimum distance between the two
• It is a cylindrical punch which is available in different rivets should be three times of the diameter of the rivet.
diameters. Pitch–It is the distance from the center of one rivet to
Snap is used to give proper size to the rivet head. the center of next rivet.
Rivet set is used to bring both sheets very close to each 179. The maximum distance between the rivets
other. should not be greater than _____ times of the
Dolly is used to support rivet head during riveting. thickness of the metal.
174. Which of the following tool is used to support (a) 16 (b) 24
the rivet head during riveting? (c) 25 (d) 30
(a) Drift (b) Dolly RRB ALP Chandigarh 25.05.2003
(c) Snap (d) All of the above Ans. (b) : The maximum distance between the rivets
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 14.06.2009 should not be greater than 24 times of the thickness of
the metal.
Ans. (b) : Dolly is used to support rivet head during
riveting. 180. In which riveting method dimpling and counter
Drift is used to set alignment of the hole. sinking method is required to attach two
plates?
Snap is used to give proper size to the rivet head.
(a) Flush riveting (b) Butt joint
175. Which of the riveting tool is used to bring the (c) Lap joint (d) None of the above
plates together after inserting rivet in the hole? RRB ALP Chennai 06.06.2010
(a) Rivet set (b) Dolly
Ans. (a) : Flush riveting– It is a way of connecting two
(c) Snap (d) Drift piece of sheet metal together, using rivets whose heads
RRB ALP Bhubneswar 15.07.2012 do not protrude above the surface of the metal.
Ans. (a) : Rivet set is used to bring the plates together • It is used in aircraft construction to reduce drag,
after inserting rivet in the hole. thus increasing aircraft performance.
• It is a hollow punch. The stem of the rivet goes into its 181. What is the defect, if the rivet tends to bend
hole. and deform?
• It is used to bring both the sheets very close to each (a) Hole is too large
other. (b) Burrs in drilling
176. Minimum distance between two centres of rivet (c) Rivet length is too long
along the same axis is called- (d) Too much force applied while riveting
(a) Pitch (b) Margin (NCVT Feb. 2015)
(c) Diagonal pitch (d) Diameter Ans. (a) : Riveting faults–
RRB ALP Bilaspur 15.07.2012 1. if rivet length is too large, the rivet shank bends, the
Ans. (a) : Pitch–Minimum distance between two closing head is not formed.
centres of rivet along the same axis. 2. If the rivet shank is too long, the superfluous material
Margin– It is the distance between the center of the forms a wreath at head of the closing head.
rivet hole to the nearest edge of the plate. 3. If the rivet shank is too short, the closing head is not
sufficiently formed.
Diagonal pitch–Distance between the centers of the
rivets in adjacent rows of zig zag riveted joint. 182. A gap between two sheets was noticed after
riveting. This defect is caused due to-
177. The shaft and head of tinman's rivets are
(a) A short rivet
deformed with the help of-
(b) Oversized drilled hole
(a) Drill (b) Margin
(c) Improper use of rivet set
(c) Rivet gum (d) Snap (d) A much longer rivet
RRB ALP Chandigarh 14.09.2008 (NCVT Aug. 2015)
Ans. (c): The shaft and head of tinman's rivets are Ans. (c) : A gap between two sheets was noticed after
deformed with the help of rivet gum. riveting. This defect is caused due to improper use of
• Flat head rivets of small sizes are called tinman's rivet. rivet set.
• It is used in light sheet metal work such as • Rivet set is a hollow punch. It is used to bring both the
manufacture of buckets, steel boxes and air conditioning sheets very close to each other.
ducts. 183. Name the rivet for avoiding the projection on
178. The minimum distance between the two rivets the surface of the riveted joint
should be ______ times of the diameter of the (a) Pan head rivet
rivet. (b) Flash head rivet
(a) Two (b) Three (c) Snap head rivet
(c) Four (d) Five (d) Counter sunk head rivet
Sheet Metal 696 YCT
Ans. (d) : Counter sunk head rivet is used for avoiding Ans. (d) : Each plate thickness = 3 mm
the projection on the surface of the riveted joint. No. of plate = 2 then (t) = 6 mm
• Diameter of counter sunk rivet (d) = 1.2 × t. Rivet diameter = 6 mm
• Length of counter sunk rivet (l) = t + 0.6 d. L = t + 1.5 × d
t = thickness of plate. = 6 + 1.5 × 6
184. Which joint should be used for roof L = 15 mm
construction work form the following? 188. If 'd' is the diameter of rivet and 't' the
(a) Lap joint thickness of plate in mm in a riveted joint,
(b) Butt joint Unwin's rule is
(c) Hinge joint (a) d = 2 t (b) d = 4 t
(d) Double grooved seam joint
(c) d = 6 t (d) d = 8 t
Ans. (d) : Double grooved seam joint is used for roof
construction work. Ans. (c) : Unwin's formula is used to determine the size
• It is made by folding the edges over twice to make it of the rivet.
smooth. • It gives relationship between nominal diameter of the
• This is more thick and safe hem which has more rivet and thickness of plate.
strength. d = nominal diameter of rivet
t = thickness of plate (mm)
185. Which one of the following is a temporary
joint? d=6 t
(a) Welded joint (b) Riveted joint 189. The height of the snap head rivet is
(c) Soldered joint (d) Press fit joint standardized to
RRB ALP Gorakhpur 11.10.2009 (a) 0.5 × diameter of rivet
Ans. (d) : Press fit joint is a temporary joint. (b) 0.7 × diameter of rivet
• Temporary joint is beneficial where frequent assembly (c) 0.9 × diameter of rivet
and disassembly are required. (d) 1.1 × diameter of rivet
Examples– Fastness, press fit, cottar joint, knuckle RRB ALP Guwahati 22.01.2006
joint. Ans. (b) : Snap head rivets are used for structural work
186. In riveted joints the pitch of rivet is the and machine riveting.
minimum distance between the rivet should be • Height of snap head rivet = 0.7 × diameter of rivet.
three times of rivet diameter. If the pitch of
rivet is too close it will...
(a) Lead to gaping
(b) Be difficult for riveting
(c) Split the edges of joint
(d) Tear the metal along the centre line of the
rivets.
Ans. (d) : In riveted joints the pitch of rivet is the
190. In a riveted joint the plates are placed end-to-
minimum distance between the rivet should be three end and jointed through cover plates. This joint
times of rivet diameter. If the pitch of rivet is too close is called
it will tear the metal along the centre line of the rivets.
(a) Lap joint (b) Butt joint
187. The length of rivet according to the thickness of (c) Edge joint (d) Corner joint
the plates and diameter of rivet, a formula L =
t + 1.5 D generally used in the shop floor.
Ans. (b) : In a riveted joint the plates are placed end-to-
end and jointed through cover plates. This joint is called
butt joint.
• A lap joint is that in which one plate overlaps the other
and the two plates are riveted together.
191. In a riveted joint pitch is the distance between
two adjacent rivets in the same row, measured
What is the length of snap head rivet, if each parallel to the seam. It is usually equal to
plate thickness is 3 mm and rivet ∅ 6 mm (a) Diameter of the rivet hole
shown in the figure? (b) 2 × diameter of rivet hole
(a) 10.50 mm (b) 12.00 mm (c) 3 × diameter of rivet hole
(c) 13.50 mm (d) 15.00 mm (d) 4 × diameter of rivet hole
Sheet Metal 697 YCT
Ans. (c) : P = pitch of rivet 196. Which one of the following types of hammers is
Pd = diagonal pitch used for forming a rivet head by spreading the
Pb = back pitch shank of the rivet?
• Pitch of rivet = 3 × diameter of hole (a) Ball peen hammer
• Diameter of rivet (d) = 1.2 × thickness of plate (t) (b) Cross peen hammer
• Length of rivet = t + 1.5 d (c) Straight peen hammer
192. In riveted joint the minimum distance from a (d) Soft hammer
rivet hole centre to the nearest edge of the plate RRB ALP Malda 16.07.2006
is called Ans. (a) : Ball peen hammer–This types of hammers is
(a) Back pitch (b) Allowance used for forming a rivet head by spreading the shank of
(c) Tolerance (d) Margin the rivet.
RRB ALP Kolkata 06.02.2005 • The streching part of this hammer is round like a ball
Ans. (d) : Margin–Minimum distance from a rivet hole while the face is flat like other hammer.
centre to the nearest edge of the plate. • These are specially used for riveting.
Pitch–Distance from the center of one rivet to the 197. Which of the following isn’t a main part of
centre of next rivet measured parallel to seam. rivet?
Back pitch–Perpendicular distance between the centre (a) Head (b) Shank
lines of the successive rows. (c) Point (d) Thread
193. Which one of the following is the name of a RRB ALP Mumbai 03.06.2001
special nut as shown in Fig.? Ans. (d) : Rivet is a short cylindrical bar with head
integral to it.
• It is used to make permanent fastening between plates.
• It is specified by diameter of its shank.
• Thread is not a part of rivet. Rivets are consists of
head, shank and tail.
(a) Check nut (b) Castle nut 198. A rivet is specified as a 20 mm rivet. What does
it mean?
(c) Speed nut (d) Grooved nut
(a) Shank dia 20 mm (b) Head dia 20 mm
(c) Both (a) and (b) (d) None of these
Ans. (c) : Speed nut is shown in figure. RRB ALP Mumbai 05.06.2005
• Speed nuts are flat type push on fasteners that are a
strong replacement for lock washers, threaded nut and Ans. (a) : A rivet is specified as a 20 mm rivet. 20 mm
spanner washers. shows shanks diameter of rivet.
• It is selected depending on the required strength.
194. The maximum distance from the edge to the
• It is decided according to the thickness of plate/ sheets
centre of the first rivet should be …..
to be joined.
(a) two times the diameter of the rivet
(b) three times the diameter of the rivet 199. Name the cutting tool fixed in the anvil square
(c) four times the diameter of the rivet hole–––
(d) five times the diameter of the rivet (a) Hot set (b) Hardie hole
(c) Cold set (d) Anvil
Ans. (a) : • The spacing of the rivet holes depends upon
the job. Ans. (b) : Hard Die is fixed in the anvil square hole.
• The maximum distance from the edge to the centre of Part of an anvil–
the first rivet should be two times the diameter of the Hardie hole is used for inserting hardie and stakes.
rivet. Round hole is used for punching holes in the work
• The purpose of this is to prevent the splitting of the Beak is the round tapered end of anvil.
edges. Upsetting block is used for upsetting operations.
195. Name the rivet head used for heavy fabrication 200. The purpose of the rivet set used in riveting is–
work ––
(a) Flat head (b) Pan head (a) To bring the sheets close together
(c) Snap head (d) Mushroom (b) To straighten the sheet before riveting
RRB ALP Kolkata 29.09.2002 (c) To remove the burr between the sheets
Ans. (b) : Pan head rivet is used for heavy fabrication (d) To align the rivet in correct position
work. RRB ALP Mumbai 15.07.2012
Flat head rivet is used for general work. Ans. (a) : Rivet set is a hollow punch. The stem of the
Snap head rivet is used for structural work and rivet goes into its hole. It is used to bring both the sheets
riveting. close to each other.
Sheet Metal 698 YCT
201. Name the rivet for avoiding the projection on (c) Both are correct
the surface of the riveted joint (d) None of these
(a) pan head rivet RRB ALP Patna 11.11.2001
(b) flat head rivet Ans. (c) : The diameter of rivets should be 1 mm less
(c) snap head rivet than the hole diameter and for welding the chessis make
(d) counter sunk head rivet a groove 2 to 3 mm in the crack.
RRB ALP Mumbai 16.07.2006 Rivet is a short cylindrical bar with a head integral to it.
Ans. (d) : Counter sunk head rivet is used for avoiding • It is used to make permanent fastening between the
the projection on the surface of the riveted joint. plates.
Pan head rivet is used for heavy fabrication work. • it is made of soft steel.
Flat head rivet is used for light work. 206. Which of the following is used for making iron
Snap head rivet is used for structural work and for rivets and sheets?
riveting. (a) Cast iron (b) Wrought iron
202. The clearance is taken into consideration while (c) Pig iron (d) Steel
riveting because by pressing application the RRB ALP Patna 2014
diameter of the rivet is increased. If diameter Ans. (b) : Wrought iron is used for making iron rivets
of rivet is 12 to 24 mm, the clearance is and sheets.
(a) 0.5 mm (b) 1.5 mm • Steel, cast iron and pig iron are not used for making
(c) 2.5 mm (d) 3.5 mm iron rivets and sheets.
RRB ALP Mumbai 05.01.2003 207. Which is used to support the upper part of the
Ans. (b) : The clearance is taken into consideration rivet to prevent damage in the annealing
while riveting because by pressing application the process?
diameter of the rivet is increased. If diameter of rivet is (a) Snap (b) Hand rivet
12 to 24 mm, then clearance will be 1.5 mm. (c) Dolly (d) Drift
203. The most commonly used type of rivet head is DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
(a) Snap Head (b) Countersunk Head Ans. (c) : Dolly is used to support hand of rivet and to
(c) Conical Head (d) Flat Head prevent the rivet hand due to failure.
RRB ALP Muzaffarpur 15.02.2009 • Drift is a cylindrical punch which is used to holed in
Ans. (a) : Snap head rivet is most commonly used both sheets and pass in rivet holes.
rivet head. It is used for structural work and for riveting.
Counter sunk head rivet is used for avoiding the
projection on the surface of the riveted joint.
Conical heads are used where riveting is done by hand
hammering.
Flat head rivet is used for light work.
204. When the surface of the plate, in which the
rivet is to be inserted, is required to be free
from projecting head of the rivet, the type of
rivet head used is 208. The distance between adjacent rivet in a row is
(a) Snap head (b) Flat head called–
(c) Conical head (d) Countersunk head (a) Diagonal of rivets (b) Nominal rivets
(c) Pitch of the rivets (d) Zig zag rivets
RRB ALP Patna 04.02.2007 IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021
Ans. (d) : When the surface of the plate, in which the DMRC Maintainer Fitter, 19-04-2018
rivet is to be inserted, is required to be free from Ans. (c) : Pitch of rivets– The pitch of rivet is the
projecting head of the rivet, the type of rivet head used
distance between two consecutive rivets measured
is countersunk head rivet. parallel to the direction of the force in the structural
member, lies on the same rivet line.
• Minimum value of rivet pitch (P) = 2.5 d
209. The material used in rivets is generally...........
(a) Hard (b) Ductile
(c) Tensile (d) Tough
Ans. (b) : The materials is used in rivet works is
205. Which of the following is correct? ductile.
(a) The diameter of rivets should be 1 mm less • Rivets are a semi permanent joints that used in sheet
than the hole diameter metal work.
(b) For welding the chessis make a groove 2 to 3 • Metal, length and type of hand must be specified for
mm in the crack the good rivets.
Sheet Metal 699 YCT
210. In a rivet joint, the distance from the center of Ans. (d) :
one rivet to the center of another rivet is • A rivet is usually specified by its shank diameter.
parallel to the joint, is called: • It is usually made of ductile material. It has three
(a) Margin (b) Diagonal parts as head, tail and shank.
(c) Pitch (d) Back pitch
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 • Rivet joint is a permanent type joint.
Ans. (c) : Pitch– It is a distance from the center of one 215. In a plate diameter of rivet shank for a hole of
rivet to the another rivets that is parallel to the joints. 25 mm will be-
• Minimum value of rivets pitch = 2.5 d. (a) 25 mm (b) 26 mm
211. When two plates are connected to each other (c) 23 mm (d) 27 mm
by placing one plate on top of another plate by UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
two rivets, this joint is: Ans. (c): Usually the diameter of the rivet hole is made
(a) Single riveted lap joint slightly larger than the nominal diameter of the shank of
(b) Double riveted lap joint the rivet. Therefore the diameter of the rivet shank
(c) Double riveted double cover butt joint should be less than 25 mm for a rivet hole of 25 mm.
(d) Double riveted single cover butt joint 216. For sheet metal manufacturing, where the
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 metal is very thin and low strength which rivet
Ans. (b): Double riveted lap joint– is used-
• In the double riveted lap joint two plates are (a) Pan head (b) Countershink head
connected to each other by placing one plate on the (c) Flat head (d) Snap head
top of another plate by two rivets. UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
• In the single riveted lap joint the plate are connected Ans. (c) : Flat head rivet–
to each other by placing upon the each other. • Flat head rivet used to join the very thin metal sheet.
212. Which one of the following is not a type of • It has lower strength compare to other rivet head.
rivet? Pan head rivet– This type of rivet are used where very
(a) Large rivet (b) Boiler rivet
high strength required. They are more powerful, but
(c) Structural rivet (d) Pan head rivet
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 they are very difficult to shape.
Ans. (a) : Large rivet is not a rivet. 217. If d is the diameter of the rivet, then the
• Structural rivet is made of steel and used in high distance from the middle of rivet of the edge of
stress commercial construction application. plate will be :
• Boiler rivet is used in boiler shell. (a) 1.5 d (b) 2.5 d
Pan head rivet– This type of rivet are used where very (c) 3 d (d) 2 d
high strength required. They are more powerful, but UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015
they are very difficult to shape. Ans. (a) :
213. In a rivet joint shearing of rivet to be • Minimum distance of centre of rivet hole from the
generates: plate core is 1.5 d.
(a) Excess pitch of hole • The dia of rivet shank (d) is depends on the
(b) The diameter of the rivet is large
(c) The diameter of the rivet is small than the thickness of metallic plate i.e. d = 6 t
thickness of the plate Where, d = shank dia of rivet in mm.
(d) The hole of rivet is near the corner of the t = thickness of metallic plate in mm.
plate 218. A riveted joint in which two plates are placed
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 above one another in a simple way and riveted.
Ans. (c) : This joint is called–
(1) Rivet is short cylindrical bar with a head integral to (a) Lap joint (b) But joint
it. (c) Corner joint (d) Edge joint
(2) The rivet are used to make permanent fastening UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
between the plates.
(3) Rivet are made of soft metals i.e. coppers, brass, Ans. (a) : Lap joints– Lap joints are inserted on the
aluminium and mild steel. overlapping portion.
214. A rivet is specified by- • In lap rivet joints singles or multiple rows of rivets
(a) Length of tail are used to give strength to the joint.
(b) Overall length of rivet
(c) Thickness of place to be jointed
(d) Shank diameter
BDL Technician 2022
ISRO Plumber 02.06.2019 219. The opposite end of rivet head is called–
RRB ALP 23-1-2019, Shift-II (a) Tail (b) Shank
HAL Fitter, 2015 (c) Backup (d) Rear
UPRVUNL Fitter, 09-05-2015 UPSSSC Tubewell Operator, 02-09-2018
Sheet Metal 700 YCT
Ans. (a) : The opposite end of the head of the rivet is 224. The operation done on riveted joints to
called the tail. The top part of the rivet is called head improve leak tightness
and cylindrical part is called piece shank. (a) Shot peening (b) Fullering
(c) Bucking (d) Hammering
Ans. (b) : Fullering– To achieved the water proof joint
in rivet fullering operation is done.
220. Which of the following tool is used to get a • In the fullering operation 80o to 85o beveled on the
fluid-tight joint in riveting? edge of plate.
(a) Hammering tool (b) Fullering tool Shot peening– Shot peening works by striking a surface
(c) Swaging tool (d) Rivet set with a shot (round metallic, glass or ceramic particle)
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 10-12-2017 with enough force to generate plastic deformation.
Ans. (b) : 225. Rivet is specified on the basis of–
• To achieved the water proof joint in rivet fullering (a) Only head shape
operation is done. (b) Diameter and length of rivets
• In the fullering operation 80 to 85 beveled on the
o o
(c) Only length of rivets
edge of plate.
(d) Only head diameter
221. The minimum distance from the rivet hole RRB ALP Fitter 23-01-2019, Shift-III
centre to the plate edge is :
(a) 1.5d (b) 3d Ans : (b)
(c) 2d (d) 2.5d • Rivet are specified by diameter and length of rivet.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 21-02-2015 • Rivet metallic round rod it has a head at one end
Ans. (a) : and tail at the other end.
• Minimum distance of centre of rivet hole from the • Rivet are made of steel, wrought iron, copper, brass
plate core is 1.5 d. and aluminium.
• The dia of rivet shank (d) is depends on the 226. The ratio of the strength of riveted joint to the
thickness of metallic plate i.e. d = 6 t strength of unriveted solid plate is called–
(a) Accuracy (b) Hardness
Where, d = shank dia of rivet in mm.
(c) Efficiency (d) Strength
t = thickness of metallic plate in mm.
222. Which among the following joints in which end
of sheet is placed over the end of another sheet
and jointed together? Ans : (c)
(a) Butt joint (b) Corner joint • Rivet is a permanent type joint.
(c) Edge joint (d) Lap joint • Used the rivet in fabrication works, ship builders
NFC Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021 bridges, tank and boilers shell etc.
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 23-02-2020 Lowest of Ps , Pt and Pc
Ans. (d) : Lap joints– Lap joints are inserted on the • Efficiency of rivet joint =
Strength of solid plate
overlapping portion.
• In lap rivet joints singles or multiple rows of rivets 227. To make a joint ........ , caulking and fullering
are used to give strength to the joint. processes are performed on riveted joint–
(a) Strong (b) Flexible
(c) Leakageless (d) Soft
Butt joint– The joining of plate with help of corner Ans : (c) Rivet joint are made of waterproof or
plate with end to end corner is known as butt joint. leakageless with the help of caulking and fullering.
228. Specification of rivet is ''30mm'' it indicate–
(a) Shank dia 30mm
(b) Head dia 30mm
(c) Both head and shank dia 30m
223. The ball peen hammer is generally used for (d) Rivet length of 30mm
(a) Wedging (b) Riveting RRB ALP Heat Engine 08-02-2019
(c) Bending (d) Removing nails Ans. (a):
ISRO Technician-B Fitter 25-09-2016 • If the specification of rivet is 30 mm then 30 mm is
Ans. (b) : it's shank diameter.
• Usually ball peen hammers are used in riveting. • A rivet is a round piece of metal, which is mainly
• Ball peen hammers used for marking, chipping and used to join two or more metal plates together.
hitting etc. • Rivets are used for sheet metal or fabrication works
• Riveting is a type of permanent joint. rivets are made of mild steel or wrought iron.
Sheet Metal 701 YCT
229. General formula for the length of the snap- 234. Which of the following joints is of permanent
head rivet is (t-thickness of the joint to be type
riveted and d-diameter of the rivet) (a) Bolted joint (b) Weld joint
(a) t + 0.5 d (b) t + d (c) Knuckle joint (d) Universal joint
(c) t + 1.5 d (d) t + 2 d (RRB Mumbai ALP, 14.06.2009)
ISRO Technician-B Turner 02.06.2019 Ans : (b) Weld joint is a permanent joint but bolt,
Ans : (c) t + 1.5 d is a general formula for the length of knuckle joint and universal joint is a type of temporary
the snap head rivet. joint.
Knuckle joint– Knuckle joint is used to connect two
rods where axes either coincide or intersect and lie in
one plane. it transmit axial tensile force.
235. For riveted joints, the type of joints used are :
(A) Lap joint
(B) Butt joint
(C) Over lapping joint
230. A tool generally used in hand riveting :
(a) A only (b) A and B
(a) Dolly (b) Caulking tool (c) B only (d) None of these
(c) Rivet snap (d) All of the above HAL Apprentice 10.11.2022
(IOF Fitter, 2016)
Ans. (d) General used tools in hand riveting is–
Ans : (b) Rivet joints are two types on the basis of joint
1. Rivet set 2. Dolly 3. Rivet snap 4. Drill 5. Caulking
6. Combined rivet set 7. Hand rivet 8. Pop riveter. of plate manners.
1. Lap joint– In the lap joint the one end of each plate
231. In a riveted joint, distance between two
adjacent rivets centre is called pitch (P). If 'd' is overlap to each other to make a joint is known as lap
the diameter of rivet in mm. then the minimum joint.
pitch for a riveted joint is calculated by :
(a) (d + 20) mm (b) (d + 30) mm
(c) (d + 40) mm (d) (d + 50) mm
SAIL Fitter 17-11-2019
2. Butt joint– In this the ends of the sheet or plate are
Ans. (b) : In a rivet joint the perpendicular distance of
jointed together by placing a separate piece of the
centres of two nearest rivet in a same row is known as
sheet on top of it and this plate is called strap.
pitch. Strap
Minimum pitch = (d + 30) mm
232. Choose the wrong statement from given Plate
statement
(a) Rivet is a temporary fastener
(b) While opening permanent fasteners joint both
joint and job being damaged Rivet
(c) Caulking tool is a chisel 236. To make rivet head spherical, length of rivet is
(d) Bolt is a temporary fastener
kept–
(a) T + d (1.3 to 1.6) (b) T + d (2 to 2.1)
Ans : (c)
(c) T + d (1.7 to 2) (d) T + d (2.5 to 2.8)
• Caulking is done on rivet joint to achieved the water
proof as leakage proof joint.
• Caulking is a sheet metal defect which is avoid by
special type of tools. Ans : (a) Length of rivet for to make the head of rivet is
233. Where is diamond riveting used? flat is [T + d (0.8 + 1.2)]
(a) For structural work 237. To make flat head rivet, length of rivet is kept–
(b) For boiler work (a) T + d (0.5 to 0.6) (b) T + d (0.8 to 1.2)
(c) For both structural and boiler work (c) T + d (1.2 to 1.5) (d) T + d (1.5 to 1.8)
(d) It does not have any specific usage, can be (RRB Gorakhpur ALP, 08.10.2006)
used anywhere Ans : (b) To make flat head rivet, length of rivet is kept
(IOF Fitter, 2012) T + d (0.8 to 1.2).
Ans : (a) 238. Bifurcated rivet is made up of soft metals, it is
• Diamond riveting is used for structural works. used–
• In diamond riveting, starting from the inner row of (a) Heavy work (b) Joining the leather
the joint, the number of rivets decreases to the outer (c) Minor works (d) Fabrication works
row and the weakest joint is in the outer row. (IOF Fitter, 2015)
Sheet Metal 702 YCT
Ans : (b) Bifurcated rivets joints are made of soft metal 243. Which rivet is used for leather work?
to make a joint between plastic, leather, alluminium and (a) Snap head rivets
coppers. (b) Bifurcated head rivets
(c) Mushroom head rivets
(d) Counter sunk head rivets
(IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) Bifurcated head rivets are used in leather
works. A cut mark on body of this type of rivet.
Bifurcated rivet
239. Pin punch locating or locking pin is used to
remove dowel pin rivet from their holes. These
are of sizes–
(a) 1,2,3,4 and 6 mm Bifurcated head rivet
(b) 3,4,5,6 and 8 mm 244. Rivet set is used for–
(c) 4,5,6,8 and 10 mm (a) For make of head
(d) 6,8,10 and 12 mm (b) For remove the rivet from hole
RRCAT Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2019 (c) For support during the make of head
DRDO Machinist. 2016 (d) All of above
VIZAAG Steel Fitter, 2015 (IOF Fitter, 2012)
Ans : (b) The punch, locking pin and dowel pin rivet Ans : (b) The rivet set are used to remove the rivet
are used to remove the other rivets from it's holes. from hole, set the rivet plate properly and remove the
Generally these are made of following size i.e. 3, 4, 5, 6 scrap due to punching.
and 8. 245. Rivet diameter in metric system is given as
240. Rivet is not made of which of the following (When d is in mm)–
metals? (a) D = T (b) D = 6 T
(a) Cast iron (b) Copper (c) 1.9 T (d) 1.2 T
(c) Wrought iron (d) Mild steel (RRB Kolkata ALP, 29.09.2002)
(RRB Mumbai ALP, 16.07.2006) Ans : (b) Diameter of rivet is
Ans : (a) (A) In British system (in inch)–
• Rivets does not made of cast iron.
D = 1.2 T
• Rivets are essential in the construction of buildings,
(B) In Metric system (in mm)–
cookware, jewelry and so much more because they
are cast effective and the preferred way to D=6 T
permanently fasten a variety of materials like wood, Where, D = Diameter of rivet
metal and plastic. T = Thickness of rivet
241. Boiler rivets are used to make boiler. The 246. The length of rivet in snap head riveting is
properties of these rivets are– kept–
(a) It is little in diameter (a) L = T + 1.5 d (b) L = T + 2d
(b) It is made of hard metals (c) L = T + 2.5 d (d) L = T + 3d
(c) It's neck are chamfered at 60o (IOF Fitter, 2013)
(d) It little in length Ans : (a) The formula of to find the length of rivet is
(RRB Bilaspur ALP, 15.07.2012) L = T + 1.5 d
Ans : (b) Boiler rivet used in construction of boilers the Where, L = Length of rivet
characteristic of these rivets that it is made of hard T = Thickness of plate
metals. d = Diameter of rivet
242. The another name of snap head rivet is cup 247. In counter sunk head rivet, length of rivet is
head rivet which is used for? kept–
(a) little works (b) Boiler (a) L = T + 0.5 d (b) L = T + 1d
(c) Structural work (d) Sheet metal work (c) L = T + 0.8d (d) L = T + 0.6d
(RRB Bhubneswar ALP, 15.07.2012) (IOF Fitter, 2014)
Ans : (c) Ans : (d) The length of rivet in counter sunk rivet head
• Snap head rivets also known as cup head rivets and is L = T + 0.6d
used in structural works. 248. The counter sinking of rivet is done for hole–
(a) 750 (b) 120
• Snap head rivet are semicircular in head. 0
(c) 90 (d) 800
• Snap head rivet generally made of same metals in NALCO Jr. Operative Trainee 2021
which its uses. (MAZAGON DOCK Ltd. Fitter, 2013)
Sheet Metal 703 YCT

Ans : (a) The counter sinking of rivet is done for hole 1. Flat chisel 2. Diamond point chisel 3. Cross cut chisel
at 75o of angle. 4. Claw mouth chisel 5. Side cut chisel 6. Round nose
Counter sinking is done to adjust the rivet, screw etc. chisel
249. Countersinking is done for removing burr from Claw mouth type chisel if like the shape of broad mouth
hole– of claw that is why known as claw mouth chisel.
(a) 800 (b) 1200 254. What is the purpose of bend snip?
(c) 60 0
(d) 900 (a) To make circular cuts
(RRB Banglore ALP, 15.07.2012) (b) To punch the metal sheets
(c) To bend the sheet
Ans : (d) The counter sinking of hole to avoid the burr
(d) To polish the sheet
at angle of 90o. In counter sinking the corner of already DMRC Maintainer Fitter 2017
holed in from of cone.
Ans : (a) The purpose of bend ship to make circular
250. A rivet consists of head, Body and cuts.
(a) Neck (b) Body • Snips also known as shears tools.
(c) Tail (d) Pilot • Snips are hand tools used to cut sheet metal and
(IOF Fitter 2017) other tough webs.
Ans : (c) The part of rivet are– • Bend snip also used in cutting small curves.
1. Head 2. Body 3. Tail. These curves are used for trimming of the end of a
Rivet are also made of soft metal. cylinder such as a tin can.
255. Which one of the following is used to align the
holes to be riveted?
(a) Rivet set (b) Snap
(c) Drift (d) Dolly
Ans : (c) Drift are used to align the holes to be riveted.
251. What is used for joining two sheets semi • Drift are made in taper diameter and used for
permanently? aligned the holes to be rivet for purpose of straight
(a) But & bolt (b) Rivet head.
(c) Pin (d) None of the above
DRDO Machinist. 2016
(IOF Fitter, 2013)
Ans : (b) The joining of the two sheets semi permanent
is used the rivets.
• Nut and bolt are type of temporary joints railway
coaches, bridges, boilers, roof trusses and ships.
252. The bottom end of rivet is called–
(a) Voice (b) Tail
256. Which type of rivet shown in symbol :
(c) Pin (d) None of above
(RRB Sikandrabad ALP, 06.06.2010) (a) Site snap head
Ans : (b) Before being installed, a rivet consists of a (b) Counter sink on front side rivet
smooth cylindrical shaft with a head on one end. The (c) Sharp snap head
end opposite the head is called the tail. (d) Open hole rivet
Ans. (b) : Counter sunk type rivet is shown in symbol.
253. Which chisel is used for cutting round hole in

sheets?
(a) Side cut (b) Diamond point
(c) Round nose (d) Claw mouth • Counter sunk rivets are also known as flat rivets and
(MES Fitter Tradesman, 2015) are used in counter sunk holes.
Ans : (d) Claw mouth chisel is used for cutting of • Counter sunk type rivets commonly used on sliding
circular hole in sheet. tracks as they sit flush with the surface which means
Chisel are following types– the head does not product when set in place.
Sheet Metal 704 YCT

CLICK HERE 👇👇
JOIN TELEGRAM CHANNEL
https://t.me/ITI_Electrician_Exam
Click Here and Open in Telegram to

Join
for ALL Papers, Answer Keys & Job
Updates

Fitter Trade Chapter-wise Solved Papers Vol 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fitter Trade Chapter-wise Solved Papers Vol 1

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Fitter Trade Chapter-wise Solved Papers Vol 1

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Shared using Xodo PDF Reader and Editor

Telegram channel par judane ke liye Click kare

Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join @ITI_Electrician_Exam

ITI FITTER TRADE

Technical Subject Fitter/Turner/Welder/Tubewell Mechanic/Machinist Trade

Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join @ITI_Electrician_Exam

Previous Years Exam Papers of TG-2 Other

42. ISRO Technician-B (Fitter) 10.12.2016 80

94. R.R.B. Gorakhpur Asst. Loco Pilot 12.10.2003 100

Trend Analysis of Fitter

Fasteners, 283 Screw and Sheet Metal, 256 Introduction : The

Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 9 YCT

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 12 YCT

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 15 YCT

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 19 YCT

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 21 YCT

Ans. : (a) Ans : (d) Helps in accident control in factory/workshop

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 24 YCT

152. Regulatory sign are ________ in shape.

150. Which one of the following represents Electric

(a) Prohibition sign (b) Mandatory sign

Ans. (b) : 159. Identify the displayed sign.

(a) Warning sign (b) Mandatory sign

(a) emergency door

(a) Labord method

(a) (b) 161. Identify the method of artificial respiration

(c) (d) None of the above

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 27 YCT

169. State the procedure shown in the figure– Ans : (b)

IGCAR Stipendiary Trainee Maintainer 2021

UPRVUNL Technician Grade II Fitter 22-09-2015

175. Which of the following is precise but not Shape – triangular

178. Which class does the symbol shown in the

(a) Mandatory Sign(b) Information Sign

177. One of the symbols show in the figure ..........

Introduction : The Trade & Safety Means 29 YCT

Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join

Measurement and Systems of Units

2. Which of the following is a unit of length? π

1 watt = J/s C F − 32º

Measurement and Systems of Units 31 YCT

19. Which is the base unit of measurement of 1"

Measurement and Systems of Units 32 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 33 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 34 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 35 YCT

Volt • IHP (Indicated horse power) is the actually generated

Ans : (b) Dynamometer is used to measure force during Ans : (b)

86. One carbon credit is equivalent to– Ans : (c)

Ans : (d) Specific gravity of milk is measured by Newton

Measurement and Systems of Units 43 YCT

Code : 137. Relative Humidity is measured by–

Measurement and Systems of Units 45 YCT

149. Mercury is commonly used in the thermometers Temperature Kelvin K

Measurement and Systems of Units 47 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 48 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 50 YCT

Measurement and Systems of Units 51 YCT

Click Here and Open in Telegram to Join